initial commit of ebook 13130HEADmain

6 files changed, 63045 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/old/13130-8.txt b/old/13130-8.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0969d83
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/13130-8.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,20277 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of A General History and Collection of Voyages
+and Travels, Volume X, by Robert Kerr
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: A General History and Collection of Voyages and Travels, Volume X
+       Arranged in systematic order:
+       Forming a complete history of the origin and progress of navigation,
+       discovery, and commerce, by sea and land, from the earliest ages to
+       the present time.
+
+Author: Robert Kerr
+
+Release Date: August 7, 2004 [EBook #13130]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK VOYAGES AND TRAVELS, VOLUME X ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Robert Connal, Graeme Mackreth and PG Distributed
+Proofreaders. This file was produced from images generously made
+available by the Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+A GENERAL HISTORY AND COLLECTION of VOYAGES AND TRAVELS,
+
+ARRANGED IN SYSTEMATIC ORDER:
+
+FORMING A COMPLETE HISTORY OF THE ORIGIN AND PROGRESS OF NAVIGATION,
+DISCOVERY, AND COMMERCE, BY SEA AND LAND, FROM THE EARLIEST AGES TO THE
+PRESENT TIME.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+BY
+
+ROBERT KERR, F.R.S. & F.A.S. EDIN.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+ILLUSTRATED BY MAPS AND CHARTS.
+
+VOL. X.
+
+MDCCCXXIV.
+
+
+
+CONTENTS OF VOL. X.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+PART II. BOOK IV. CONTINUED.
+
+CHAP. I--Early Circumnavigations, or Voyages round the World,
+
+Introduction,
+
+CHAP. I.--Voyage of Ferdinand Magellan round the World, in 1519-1522,
+
+SECT. I. Some Account of Magellan, previous to the Commencement of the
+Voyage,
+
+II. Proceedings of the Voyage from Seville to Patagonia, and wintering
+there,
+
+III. Prosecution of the Voyage, till the Death of Magellan,
+
+IV. Continuation of the Voyage to its Conclusion,
+
+CHAP. II. Voyage by Sir Francis Drake round the World, in 1517-1580,
+
+SECT. I. Introduction, and Preparation for the Voyage,
+
+II. Narrative of the Voyage from England to the Straits of Magellan,
+
+III. Incidents of the Voyage, from the Straits of Magellan to New
+Albion,
+
+IV. Continuation of the Voyage, from New Albion to England.
+
+V. Reception of Sir Francis Drake in England, and some Notices of his
+remaining Actions,
+
+SECT. VI First Supplement to the Voyage of Sir Francis Drake; being an
+Account of Part of the foregoing Navigation, by Nuno da Silva,
+
+VII Second Supplement, being the Voyage of Mr John Winter, after parting
+from Sir Francis Drake,
+
+CHAP. III--Voyage of Sir Thomas Candish round the World, in 1586-1588,
+
+Introduction,
+
+SECT. I. Narrative of the Voyage from England to the Pacific,
+
+II. Transactions on the Western Coast of America,
+
+III. Voyage Home to England,
+
+IV. Second Voyage of Sir Thomas Candish, intended for the South Sea, in
+1591
+
+§ 1. Incidents in the Voyage, till the Separation of the Ships,
+
+§ 2. Disastrous Result of the Voyage to Sir Thomas Candish,
+
+§ 3. Continuation of the Voyage of the Desire, Captain Davis, after
+parting from Sir Thomas Candish,
+
+CHAP. IV. Voyage of Oliver Van Noort round the World, in 1538-1601,
+
+Introduction,
+
+SECT. I. Narrative of the Voyage.
+
+II. Voyage of Sebald de Weert, to the South Sea and Straits of Magellan,
+in 1598,
+
+§ 1. Incidents of the Voyage from Holland to the Straits of Magellan,
+
+§ 2. The Fleet passes through the Straits of Magellan into the South
+Sea, and is forced to return,
+
+§ 3. Incidents daring their second Residence in the Straits of Magellan,
+
+§ 4. Voyage from the Straits to Holland,
+
+CHAP. V--Voyage of George Spilbergen round the World, in 1614-1617,
+
+SECT. I. Narrative of the Voyage, from Holland to the South Sea,
+
+II. Transactions in the South Sea, along the Western Coast of America,
+
+III. Voyage Home from America, by the East Indies and Cape of Good Hope,
+
+CHAP. VI--Voyage round the World, in 1615-1617, by William Cornelison
+Schouten and Jacques Le Maire, going round Cape Horn,
+
+Introduction,
+
+SECT. I. Journal of the Voyage from the Texel to Cape Horn,
+
+II. Continuation of the Voyage, from Cape Horn to the Island of Java,
+
+CHAP. VII--Voyage of the Nassau Fleet round the World, in 1623-1626,
+under the Command of Jaques Le Hermite,
+
+Introduction,
+
+SECT. I. Incidents of the Voyage from Holland to the South Sea,
+
+II. Transactions of the Fleet on the Western Coast of America,
+
+III. Voyage Home from the Western Coast of America,
+
+CHAP. VIII--Voyage round the World, in 1683-1691, by Captain John Cooke,
+accompanied by Captain Cowley, and Captain William Dampier,
+
+Introduction,
+
+SECT. I. Narrative of the Voyage by Captain Cowley, till he quitted the
+Revenge on the Western Coast of America,
+
+II. Continuation of the Narrative of Captain Cowley, from leaving the
+Revenge, to his Return to England,
+
+III. Sequel of the Voyage, as far as Dampier is concerned, after the
+Separation of the Nicholas from the Revenge,
+
+CHAP. IX--Voyage round the World, by William Funnell, in 1703-1706,
+
+Introduction,
+
+SECT. I. Narrative of the Voyage, till the Separation of Funnell from
+Dampier,
+
+II. Sequel of the Voyage of William Funnell, after his Separation from
+Captain Dampier,
+
+III. Brief Account of Stradling, Clipperton, and Dampier, after their
+respective Separations, till their Returns to England,
+
+CHAP. X--Voyage round the World, by Captain Woods Rogers, and Stephen
+Courtney, in 1708-1711,
+
+Introduction,
+
+SECT. I. Narrative of the Voyage, from England to the Island of Juan
+Fernandez,
+
+II. Proceedings of the Expedition on the Western Coast of America,
+
+III. Sequel of the Voyage, from California, by Way of the East Indies,
+to England,
+
+CHAP. XI--Voyage round the World, by Captain John Clipperton, in
+1719-1722,
+
+Introduction,
+
+SECT. I. Narrative of the Voyage, from England to Juan Fernandez,
+
+II. Proceedings of the Success in the South Seas,
+
+III. Voyage of the Success from the Coast of Mexico to China,
+
+IV. Residence of Captain Clipperton at Macao, and Returns from thence to
+England,
+
+CHAP. XII--Voyage round the World, by Captain George Shelvocke, in
+1719-1722,
+
+Introduction,
+
+SECT. I. Narrative of the Voyage from England to the South Sea,
+
+II. Proceedings in the South Sea, till Shipwrecked on the Island of Juan
+Fernandez,
+
+III. Residence on the Island of Juan Fernandez,
+
+IV. Farther Proceedings in the South Sea, after leaving Juan Fernandez,
+
+A GENERAL HISTORY AND COLLECTION OF VOYAGES AND TRAVELS.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+PART II. (CONTINUED.)
+
+BOOK IV.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+CHAPTER I.
+
+EARLY CIRCUMNAVIGATIONS, OR VOYAGES ROUND THE WORLD.
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+
+In this _fourth_ book of the _second_ part of our arrangement, it is
+proposed to give a history of the principal Circumnavigations, or
+Voyages Round the World, previous to the reign of our present venerable
+sovereign. This book, therefore, comprises a period of 226 years, from
+the year 1519, when Magellan sailed from Spain on the first
+circumnavigation of the globe, till the year 1744, when Commodore Anson
+returned to England from a similar expedition. The more recent
+circumnavigations, which have taken place since the year 1760, chiefly
+under the munificent and enlightened patronage of GEORGE III. or in
+imitation of these, and which have largely contributed to extend, and
+almost to render perfect, the geography and hydrography of the
+terraqueous globe, are intended to form a separate division, in a
+subsequent part of our arrangement.
+
+The accurate knowledge which we now possess of the form and dimensions
+of this globe of earth and water which we inhabit, has been entirely
+owing to the superior skill of the moderns in the mathematical sciences,
+as applicable to the practice of navigation, and to the observation and
+calculation of the motions of the heavenly bodies, for the ascertainment
+of latitudes and longitudes. It would require more space than can be
+conveniently devoted on the present occasion, to give any clear view of
+the geographical knowledge possessed by the ancients, together with a
+history of the progress of that science, from the earliest times,
+neither do the nature and objects of the present Collection of Voyages
+and Travels call for any such deduction, of which an excellent epitome
+will be found in the History of Geography, prefixed to Playfair's System
+of Geography.
+
+The ancients laboured under almost absolute incapacities for making
+extensive voyages or discoveries by sea, proceeding from ignorance of
+the form and dimensions of the earth, and other causes. They were but
+indifferently versed in the practical part of astronomy, without which,
+and those instruments which have been invented almost exclusively by the
+moderns, for measuring the paths, distances, and relative positions of
+the heavenly bodies, it is impossible to launch out with any tolerable
+success or safety on the trackless ocean. They were ignorant also of
+that wonderful property of the magnet or loadstone, which, pointing
+invariably towards the north, enables the modern mariner to know his
+precise course, at all times of the day of night, though clouds and
+thick mists may hide the luminaries of heaven from his observation,
+which were the only means of direction known to the ancients.
+
+Various systems and theories appear to have prevailed among the ancients
+respecting the figure and motion of the earth; some justly enough
+supposing it to be a ball or sphere, suspended in infinite space, while
+others conceived it to be a flat surface, floating upon and surrounded
+by an interminable ocean. The just conceptions of some ancient
+philosophers, respecting the spherical figure of the earth, and its
+diurnal motion around its own axis, were superseded by others of a more
+popular nature, and forgotten for many ages. Lactantius and Augustine,
+two fathers of the catholic church, unfortunately adopted the idea of
+the earth being a flat surface, infinitely extending downwards;
+grounding this false notion upon a mistaken interpretation of the holy
+scriptures, or rather seeking assistance from them in support of their
+own unphilosophical conceptions. So strongly had this false opinion
+taken possession of the minds of men, in our European world, even after
+the revival of learning in the west, that Galileo was imprisoned by the
+holy inquisitors at Rome for asserting the sphericity of the earth, and
+the doctrine of _antipodes_, and had to redeem his liberty and life, by
+writing a refutation of that heretical doctrine, which satisfied the
+inquisitors, yet convinced the world of its truth.
+
+Columbus assuredly grounded his grand discovery of America upon the
+knowledge of the earth being a sphere; and had not the new western world
+intervened, his voyage had probably been the first circumnavigation. In
+modern times, an idea has been advanced that Columbus only retraced the
+steps of some former navigator, having seen certain parts of the grand
+division of the world which he discovered, already delineated on a
+globe. It were improper to enter upon a refutation of this idle calumny
+on the present occasion; yet it is easy to conceive, that the possessor
+of that globe, may have rudely added the reported discoveries of
+Columbus, to the more ancient delineations. At all events, Columbus was
+the first person who conceived the bold idea that it was practicable to
+sail round the globe. From the spherical figure of the earth, then
+universally believed by astronomers and cosmographers, in spite of the
+church, he inferred that the ancient hemisphere or continent then known,
+must of necessity be balanced by an equiponderant and opposite
+continent. And, as the Portuguese had discovered an extensive track by
+sailing to the eastwards, he concluded that the opposite or most
+easterly coast of that country might certainly be attained, and by a
+nearer path, by crossing the Atlantic to the westwards. The result of
+this profound conception, by the discovery of America, has been already
+detailed in the _Second_ Book of this collection; and we now proceed in
+this _Fourth_ Book to detail the various steps of other navigators, in
+prosecution of this grand design of surrounding the globe, in which many
+curious and interesting discoveries have been made, and by which
+geographical knowledge and practical navigation have been brought to
+great degrees of perfection.
+
+Before commencing the narrative appropriated for this division of our
+arrangement, it is proper to give the following complete table of all
+the circumnavigators, within the period assigned to the present portion
+of this collection; with the names of the ports from which they sailed,
+and the dates of their respective voyages, and returns.--Ed.
+
+                   |_Sailed from_|                 |_Returned_.
+    1. Ferdinand,  | Seville,         | Aug. 10, 1519.  | Sept. 8, 1522.
+       Magellan,   | in Spain,        |                 |
+    2. Sir Francis | Plymouth Sound,  | Dec. 30, 1577.  | Sept. 16, 1580.
+       Drake,      |                  |                 |
+    3. Sir Thomas  | Plymouth,        | July 25, 1586.  | Sept. 9, 1588.
+       Candish,    |                  |                 |
+    4. Oliver van  | Goeree,          | Sept. 13, 1598. | Aug. 26, 1601.
+       Noord,      |                  |                 |
+    5. George      | Texel,           | Aug. 8, 1614.   | July 1, 1617.
+       Spilbergeny,|                  |                 |
+    6. Shouten and | Texel,           | June 24, 1615.  | July 1, 1617.
+       LeMair,     |                  |                 |
+    7. Nassau      | Goeree,          | April 29, 1623. | Jan. 21, 1626.
+       fleet,      |                  |                 |
+    8. Cowley,[A]  | Achamack, in     | Aug. 23, 1683.  | Oct. 12, 1686.
+                   | Virginia,        |                 |
+    9. William     | Achamack,        | Aug. 28, 1683.  | Sept. 16, 1691.
+       Dampier,[A] |                  |                 |
+   10. Dampier and | the Downs,       | Aug. 9, 1703.   | Aug. 1706.
+       Funnel,     |                  |                 |
+   ll. Wood Rogers,| Bristol,         | June 15, 1708.  | Oct. 1, 1711.
+      and Courtney,|                  |                 |
+   12. John        | Plymouth,        | Feb. 15, 1719.  | June, 1722.
+       Clapperton, |                  |                 |
+   13. George      | Plymouth,        | Feb. 15, 1719.  | Aug. 1, 1722.
+       Shelvocke   |                  |                 |
+   14. Roggewein,  | Texel,           | July 17, 1721.  | July 11, 1723.
+   15. George      | St Helens,       | Sept. 18, 1740. | June 15, 1744.
+       Anson,      |                  |                 |
+
+[Footnote A: These two are conjoined in Chap. VIII. of this book, for
+reasons which will appear there sufficiently obvious.--E.]
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+CHAPTER I.
+
+VOYAGE OF FERDINAND MAGELLAN ROUND THE WORLD, IN 1519--1522.[1]
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Some Account of Magellan, precious to the Commencement of his Voyage._
+
+
+Owing to the discoveries made under the authority of the sovereign of
+Castile, the Portuguese were excessively jealous of the safety of their
+possessions in the East Indies. At length, after various negociations,
+the authority of the pope was interposed, then considered as supreme
+among the princes of Europe who were in communion with the church of
+Rome. By a bull or papal decree, all countries discovered, or to be
+discovered, in the East, were declared to belong to the crown of
+Portugal, and all that were found in the west were to be the property of
+Spain. Yet this measure rather smothered than extinguished the flames of
+contention; as both courts readily listened to any proposals that tended
+to aggrandise the one at the expence of the other. This spirit of
+contention between the courts of Spain and Portugal, gave occasion to
+several men of enterprise, who happened to be dissatisfied by the delays
+or refusal of either of these courts, in countenancing their projects,
+to apply themselves for employment to the other. Among those who took
+this method of advancing their fortunes, was Ferdinand Magalhaens, now
+generally known by the name of Magellan. He was a gentleman of good
+family in Portugal, who had addicted himself from his youth to maritime
+affairs, and had acquired great skill both in the theory and practice of
+navigation. He seemed formed by nature for the achievement of great
+exploits, having all the qualities requisite to compose the character of
+a truly great man. With a courage which no danger could appal, he
+possessed the utmost calmness of temper and sweetness of disposition, by
+which all who conversed with him were engaged to love and esteem his
+character. He was naturally eloquent, both in illustrating and proving
+the reasonableness of his own opinions, and in converting others from
+their erroneous preconceived notions. Above all, he possessed that
+steady and persevering resolution, which not only enabled him to
+vanquish the greatest difficulties, but gave such appearance of success
+to every thing be promised or undertook, as secured the confidence of
+all who were under his command. As these extraordinary qualities would
+have distinguished him in any station of life, so they were remarkably
+useful in the present enterprise, by which he gained immortal
+reputation, although he lost his life before its completion.
+
+[Footnote 1: Harris' Collection, I. 6. The utmost pains have been taken
+to narrate this expedition in the clearest manner, by comparing all the
+different relations of the Spanish and Portuguese writers. We regret
+much, however, the loss of a large history of this voyage, by P. Martyr,
+which was burnt in the sack of Rome, when taken by the Constable de
+Bourbon.--_Harris_.]
+
+Don Ferdinand Magellan had served with much credit in India, under the
+famous Albuquerque, and thought that he merited some recompence for his
+services; but all his applications were treated with coldness and
+contempt by the great, which was intolerable to a person of his spirit.
+He associated, therefore, with men of like fortunes, whose merits had
+been similarly neglected, and particularly with one Ray Falero, a great
+astronomer, whom the Portuguese represented as a conjuror, retiring
+along with him to the Spanish court, where be made propositions for new
+discoveries to Cardinal Ximenes, who was then prime minister of Spain.
+The Portuguese ambassador used all imaginable pains to counteract these
+designs, and solicited the court to deliver up Magellan and his
+companion as deserters, even representing Magellan as a bold talkative
+person, ready to undertake any thing, yet wanting capacity and courage
+for the performance of his projects. He even made secret proposals to
+Magellan, offering him pardon and great rewards to desist from his
+present purpose, and to return to the service of his own sovereign. All
+these arts were unavailing, as the Spanish ministry, now competent
+judges of these matters, were satisfied of the probability of the
+discoveries proposed by Magellan and his coadjutor Falero, who were both
+received into favour, made knights of the order of St Jago, and had
+their own terms granted to them.
+
+The grounds on which this expedition was founded were as follow. The
+opinion advanced by Columbus, of the possibility of reaching the East
+Indies by sailing to the west, was assumed as certainly well founded,
+though he had not been able to accomplish it; and it was asserted, that
+it could not be attended with any insuperable difficulty to sail from
+the South Sea, then recently discovered, to the Molucca Islands. The
+grand desideratum was to find a passage westwards, from the Atlantic
+Ocean into the new-found South Sea, which they expected might be met
+with through the Rio de la Plata, or by some other opening on that
+eastern coast of South America. Should this succeed, Spain might then
+reap the benefit of both the Indies; since, if this discovery were made
+by way of the _west_, it would then fall expressly within the grant of
+the papal bull to Spain.
+
+In consequence of these proposals, it was agreed that Magellan and the
+other adventurers were to be furnished by the crown of Spain with five
+ships, manned by 234 men, with provisions for two years; and that the
+adventurers should reap a twentieth part of the clear profit, the
+government of any islands they might discover to be vested in them and
+their heirs for ever, with the title of Adelantado. The agreed, fleet of
+five ships was accordingly fitted out for the expedition at Seville,
+consisting of the Trinidada, in which Magellan sailed as admiral, and
+having a Portuguese pilot named Stephen Gomez; the Santa Vittoria,
+commanded by Don Luis de Mendoza; the St Antonio, Don Juan de
+Carthagena; the St Jago, Don Juan Serrano; and the Conception, Don
+Gaspar de Quixada. According to some authors, the number of men in these
+five ships amounted to 237, though by most they are said to have been
+250, among whom were thirty Portuguese, upon whom Magellan chiefly
+depended for naval skill; as he likewise did greatly upon Serrano, who
+had left the service of Portugal in like manner with himself, after
+having served for many years in India, and some time in the Moluccas, of
+which islands they were now going in search.
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_Proceedings of the Voyage from Seville to Patagonia, and wintering
+there_.
+
+Great hopes of success were entertained from this voyage, from the known
+experience of the commanders, although its real object was carefully
+concealed by Magellan, who merely gave out to the other adventurers that
+it was intended for the discovery of new countries, by which they
+believed themselves bound to the certain acquisition of gold. They set
+sail from Seville, in high expectations of acquiring riches, on the 10th
+of August, 1519. The 3d October, the fleet arrived between Cape Verd and
+the islands of that name. After being detained by tedious calms on the
+coast of Guinea for seventy days, they at last got to the south of the
+line, and held on their course to the coast of Brazil, of which they
+came in sight in about the latitude of 23° S. They here procured
+abundant refreshments of fruits, sugar-canes, and several kinds of
+animals.
+
+Proceeding about 2 1/2 degrees farther south, they came into a country
+inhabited by a wild sort of people, of prodigious stature, fierce and
+barbarous, and making a strange roaring noise, more like the bellowing
+of bulls, than human speech. Notwithstanding their prodigious bulk,
+these people were so nimble that none of the Spaniards or Portuguese
+were swift enough to overtake them. At this place there was a fine river
+of fresh water, the mouth of which was fully seventeen leagues wide, in
+which there were seven islands, the largest of which they named the
+island of St Mary, where they procured some _jewels_.[2] Proceeding
+along this coast towards the south, they fell in with two islands so
+abounding in seals and penguins, that they might have laden all their
+five ships with them in a short time. The penguins are a black, heavy,
+unwieldy fowl, extremely fat, covered with a sort of down instead of
+feathers, and having a bill like that of a raven; drawing their entire
+subsistence from the sea, as fish is their only food.
+
+[Footnote 2: These jewels may possibly have been a few pearls. The
+indications in the text are too vague to afford even a guess at the
+situation of the river and its seven islands; only it may be mentioned,
+that the most northern part of the coast of Patagonia is in lat. 38° S.
+and that no river answering the description in the test is to be found
+on all that coast--E.]
+
+They next advanced to about the latitude of 49° 30' S. where they were
+forced to remain for five months, owing to the severity of the weather,
+it being now winter in these southern parts. They here passed their time
+very unpleasantly, and for a long time believed the country to be
+uninhabited, but at length a savage came to visit them. He was a brisk
+jolly fellow, very merrily disposed, and came towards them singing and
+dancing. On coming to the shore of the haven in which the ships had
+taken refuge, he stood there for some time, throwing dust upon his head.
+This being observed, some persons were sent ashore to him in a boat, and
+making similar signs of peace; and he came along with them on board,
+without any appearance of fear or hesitation. The size and stature of
+this person was such as in some measure entitled him to be deemed a
+giant, the head of one of the ordinary-sized Spaniards only reaching to
+his waist, and he was proportionally large made. His body was painted
+all over, having a stag's horn delineated on each cheek, and large
+circles round the eyes. The natural colour of his skin was yellow, and
+his hair was white. His apparel consisted of the skin of a beast,
+clumsily sewed together, covering his whole body and limbs from head to
+foot. The beast of which this was the skin, was as strange as the
+wearer, being neither mule, horse, nor camel, but partaking of all
+three, having the ears of a mule, the tail of a horse, and the body
+shaped like a camel. The arms of this savage consisted of a stout bow,
+having for a string the gut or sinew of that strange beast; and the
+arrows were tipped with sharp stones, instead of iron heads.
+
+The admiral made this man be presented with meat and drink, of which he
+readily partook, and seemed to enjoy himself very comfortably, till
+happening to see himself in a mirror which was given him among other
+toys, he was so frightened that he started back and overturned two of
+the men, and did not easily recover his composure. This giant fared so
+well, that several others came to visit the ships, and one of them
+behaved with so much familiarity and good humour, that the Europeans
+were much pleased with him. This person shewed them one of the beasts in
+the skins of which they were cloathed, from which the foregoing
+description must have been taken.[3] Being desirous to make prisoners of
+some of these giants, Magellan gave orders for this purpose to some of
+his crew. Accordingly, while amusing them with toys, they put iron
+shackles on their legs, which at first they conceived had been fine
+ornaments like the rest, and seemed pleased with their jingling sound,
+till they found themselves hampered and betrayed. They then fell a
+bellowing like bulls, and imploring the aid of _Setebos_ in this
+extremity, whom they must therefore have conceived some good and
+compassionate being, as it is not to be conceived they would crave
+relief from an evil spirit. Yet the voyagers reported strange things, of
+horrible forms and appearances frequently seen among these people, such
+as horned demons with long shaggy hair, throwing out fire before and
+behind: But these seem mere dreams or fables.
+
+[Footnote 3: This must have been a Lama, Paca, or Chilihueque, of the
+camel genus, vulgarly called Peruvian sheep.--E.]
+
+Most of the natives of this country were dressed in the skins of beasts,
+similarly to the one who first visited them. Their hair was short, yet
+tied up by a cotton lace or string. They had no fixed dwellings, but
+used certain moveable huts or tents, constructed of skins similar to
+those in which they were cloathed, which they carry with them from place
+to place, as they roam about the country. What flesh they are able to
+procure, they devour quite raw without any kind of cookery, besides
+which their chief article of food is a sweet root, which they name
+_capar._ The voyagers report that these savages were very jealous of
+their women; yet do not mention having seen any. Their practice of
+physic consists in bleeding and vomiting: The former being performed by
+giving a good chop with some edge tool to the part affected; and the
+latter is excited by thrusting an arrow half a yard down the throat of
+the patient. These people, to whom Magellan gave the name of _Patagons_,
+are so strong, that when one only was attempted to be made prisoner of
+by nine Spaniards, he tired them all; and, though they got him down,
+and even bound his hands, he freed himself from his bonds, and got away,
+in spite of every endeavour to detain him. Besides _capar_, the name of
+a root already mentioned, and which likewise they applied to the bread
+or ship's biscuit given them by the Spaniards, the only words reported
+of their language are _ali_ water, _amel_ black, _cheiche_ red,
+_cherecai_ red cloth; and _Setebos_ and _Cheleule_ are the names of two
+beings to whom they pay religious respect, _Setebos_ being the supreme,
+and _Cheleule_ an inferior deity.
+
+The haven in which they remained there five months, was named by
+Magellan, Port St Julian, of which and the surrounding country they took
+solemn possession for the crown of Spain, erecting a cross as a signal
+of sovereignty. But the principal reason of this long stay was in
+consequence of a mutiny which broke out, not only among the common men,
+but was even joined or fomented rather by some of the captains,
+particularly by Don Luis de Mendoza, on whom Magellan had placed great
+reliance. On this occasion Magellan acted with much spirit; for, having
+reduced the mutineers to obedience, he brought their ringleaders to
+trial for plotting against his life; hanged Don Luis de Mendoza and a
+few others of the most culpable; leaving Don Juan de Carthagena and
+others, who were not so deeply implicated, among the Patagons. The
+weather growing fine, and the people being reduced to obedience,
+Magellan set sail from Port St Julian, and pursued his course to the
+latitude of 51° 40' S. where finding a convenient port, with abundance
+of fuel, water, and fish, he remained for two months longer.
+
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_Prosecution of the Voyage, till the Death of Magellan_.
+
+Again resuming the voyage, they proceeded along the eastern shore of
+Patagonia to the latitude of 52° S. when the entrance into the famous
+straits still known under the name of Magellan were discovered, through
+which the squadron continued its voyage, finding these straits about 110
+leagues in length, from east to west, with varying breadths, in some
+places very wide, and in others not more than half a league across; the
+land on both sides being high, rugged, and uneven, and the mountains
+covered with snow. On reaching the western end of these straits, an open
+passage was found into the great South Sea, which sight gave Magellan
+the most unbounded joy, as having discovered that for which he had gone
+in quest, and that he was now able practicably to demonstrate what he
+had advanced, that it was possible to sail to the East Indies by way of
+the West. To the point of land from which he first saw this
+so-long-desired prospect, he gave the name of _Cape Desiderato._ This
+prospect was not, however, so desirable to some of his followers; for
+here one of his ships stole away, and sailed homewards alone.
+
+Magellan entered the great South Sea on the 28th November, 1620, and
+proceeded through that vast expanse, to which he gave the name of the
+Pacific Ocean, for three months and twenty days, without once having
+sight of land. During a considerable part of this period they suffered
+extreme misery from want of provisions, such as have been seldom heard
+of. All their bread and other provisions were consumed, and they were
+reduced to the necessity of subsisting upon dry skins and leather that
+covered some of the rigging of the ships, which they had to steep for
+some days in salt water, to render it soft enough to be chewed. What
+water remained in the ships was become putrid, and so nauseous that
+necessity alone compelled them to use it. Owing to these impure and
+scanty means of subsistence, their numbers daily diminished, and those
+who remained alive became exceedingly weak, low-spirited, and sickly. In
+some, the gums grew quite over their teeth on both sides; so that they
+were unable to chew the tough leathern viands which formed their only
+food, and they were miserably starved to death. Their only comfort under
+this dreadful state of famine was, that the winds blew them steadily and
+gently along, while the sea remained calm and almost unruffled, whence
+it got the name of Pacific, which it has ever since retained.
+
+In all this length of time, they only saw two uninhabited islands, which
+shewed no signs of affording them any relief Sometimes the needle varied
+extremely, and at other times was so irregular in its motions, as to
+require frequent touches of the loadstone to revive its energy. No
+remarkable star was found near the south pole, by which to ascertain the
+southern ordinal point, or to estimate the latitude. Instead of an
+antarctic polar star, two clusters of small stars were observed, having
+a small space between them, in which were two stars of inconsiderable
+size and lustre, which seemed to be at no great distance from the pole,
+by the smallness of the circle they described in their diurnal course.
+When at the distance of 20° from the south pole, they saw a high island
+to which they gave the name of _Cipangue_; and at 15° another equally
+high, which they named _Sinnodit_.[4] They sailed in one gulf; or
+stretch of sea, at least 4000 leagues, and made their longitude, by
+estimation or reckoning, 120° W. from the place of their original
+departure. By this time they drew near the equinoctial line, and having
+got beyond that into 13° N. latitude, they made for the cape called
+_Cottigare_ by old geographers; but missing it in that old account of
+its latitude, they understood afterwards that it is in the latitude of
+12° N.[5]
+
+[Footnote 4: The text is evidently here erroneous, as Magellan entered
+the Pacific Ocean in lat. 47° S. and there is not the smallest reason to
+suspect he had been forced into the latitudes of 70° and 75° S. Instead
+therefore of the south pole, we ought probably to understand the
+equator. As these two islands were uninhabited, the names given them
+must have been imposed by Magellan or his associates. Cipangue is the
+name given to Japan by Marco Polo, and is of course a singular blunder.
+The other is unintelligible, and the voyage is so vaguely expressed, as
+even to defy conjecture.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 5: This cape Cottigare in the South Sea, in lat. 12° or 13° N.
+is utterly unintelligible, unless it refer to the southern part of Guam,
+Guaham, or Goad, one of the Ladronea, which they soon discovered, and
+which is actually in 13° N.--E.]
+
+On the 6th March, 1521, they fell in with a cluster of islands, being
+then in lat. 12° N. and 146° of west longitude from the place of their
+first setting out.[6] These islands were called by Magellan _Islas de
+los Ladrones_, or the islands of robbers, and are called in modern
+geography the Ladrones or Marian islands. They here went on shore to
+refresh themselves, after all the fatigues and privations of their
+tedious voyage through the Pacific Ocean; but the thievish disposition
+of the islanders would not allow them any quiet repose, as they were
+continually stealing things from the ships, while the sick and worn-out
+mariners were endeavouring to refresh themselves on shore. Resolving
+therefore to deliver themselves from the disturbance of these pilferers,
+they marched a small party of armed men into the interior of one of
+these islands, where they burnt some houses, and slew some of the
+natives. But, though this correction awed them a little for the present,
+it did not mend their thievish disposition; for which reason they
+resolved to seek out some other place, where they might enjoy some
+repose in safety.
+
+[Footnote 6: By the reckoning in the text, the longitude of the Ladrone
+islands, which they now discovered, would be 151° 25' W. from
+Greenwich. But their true longitude is 216° 30' W. Their latitude is
+between 13° and 20° 50' N.--E.]
+
+No order or form of government was observed to subsist among these
+natives of the Ladrones, but every one seemed to live according to his
+own humour or inclination. The men were entirely naked, the hair both of
+their heads and beards being black, that on their heads so long as to
+reach down to their waists. Their natural complexion is olive, and they
+anoint themselves all over with cocoa-nut oil. Their teeth seemed
+coloured artificially black or red, and some of them wore a kind of
+bonnet made of palm leaves. The women are better favoured and more
+modest than the men, and all of them wore some decent coverings made of
+palm leaves. Their hair was black, thick, and so very long as nearly to
+trail on the ground. They seemed careful industrious housewives,
+spending their time at home in fabricating mats and nets of palm leaves,
+while the men were occupied abroad in stealing. Their houses are of
+timber, covered with boards and great leaves, and divided within into
+several apartments. Their beds are of mats laid above each other, and
+they use palm leaves by way of sheets. Their only weapons are clubs, and
+long poles headed with bone. Their food consists of cocoa-nuts, bananas,
+figs, sugar-canes, fowls, and flying-fishes. Their canoes are oddly
+contrived and patched up, yet sail with wonderful rapidity, the sails
+being made of broad leaves sewed together. Instead of a rudder they use
+a large board, with a staff or pole at one end, and in sailing, either
+end of their canoes is indifferently used as head or stern. They paint
+their canoes all over, either red, white, or black, as hits their fancy.
+These people are so taken with any thing that is new, that when the
+Spaniards wounded several of them with their arrows, and even pierced
+some quite through, they would pluck out the arrows from their wounds,
+and stare at them till they died. Yet would they still continue to
+follow after the ships, to gaze upon them as they were going away, so
+that at one time they were closely surrounded by at least two hundred
+canoes filled with natives, admiring those wonderful contrivances.
+
+The 10th of March, the Spaniards landed on the island of _Zamul_, about
+30 leagues from the Ladrones.[7] Next day they landed on _Humuna_, an
+island not inhabited, yet well deserving of being so, where they found
+springs of excellent water, with abundance of fruit-trees, gold, and
+white coral. Magellan named this _the island of good signs_. The natives
+from some of the neighbouring islands, a people of much humanity, came
+here to them shortly after, very fair and of friendly dispositions, who
+seemed well pleased at the arrival of the Spaniards among them, and came
+loaded with presents of fish, and wine made from the cocoa-tree,
+promising speedily to bring other provisions. This tree somewhat
+resembles the date palm, and supplies the natives with bread, oil, wine,
+vinegar, and even physic. The wine being drawn from the tree itself, and
+all the rest from the fruit or nut. To procure the wine, they eat off
+part of a branch, and fasten to the remaining part a large reed or
+hollow cane, into which the liquor drops, being like white-wine in
+colour, and of a grateful tartish taste. When a good quantity of this is
+drawn off, it is put into a vessel, and is their cocoa-wine without
+farther preparation.
+
+[Footnote 7: In this voyage the term Ladrones seems confined to the most
+southern islands of this group, as there are no other islands for a very
+considerable distance in any direction. The entire group stretches about
+6° 10' nearly N. and S. or 125 leagues. In modern geography, Guaham and
+Tinian are the largest islands of the group. Urac, Agrigan, Analajam,
+and Saypan, are the names of some others of the Ladrones. The names in
+the text do not occur in modern maps. Thirty leagues from Guaham, the
+southernmost island, would bring them to Tinian.--E.]
+
+The fruit, which is as large as a man's head, has two rinds or coats.
+The outermost is green, and two fingers thick, entirely composed of
+strings and threads, of which they make all the ropes that are used in
+their canoes. Under this there is another rind, or shell rather, of
+considerable thickness, and very hard. This they burn and pulverize, and
+use it in this state as a remedy for several distempers. The kernel
+adheres all round the inside of this shell, being white, and about the
+thickness of a finger, having a pleasant taste, almost like an almond:
+this, when dried, serves the islanders instead of bread. In the inside
+of this kernel there is a considerable hollow space, containing a
+quantity of pure limpid liquor, of a very cordial and refreshing nature,
+which sometimes congeals into a solid, and then lies like an egg within
+the hollow kernel. When they would make oil, they steep the fruit in
+water till it putrifies, and then boil it over the fire to separate the
+oil, the remaining water becoming vinegar, when exposed some time to the
+sun. Lastly, by mixing the kernel with the liquor lodged within its
+cavity, and straining it through a cloth, they make a very good milk.
+The cocoa-nut tree resembles the date palm, except in not being so
+rugged and knotty. They will continue to thrive for an hundred years, or
+more, and two of them will maintain a family of ten persons in wine
+plentifully, if used by turns, each tree being drawn for seven or eight
+days, and then allowed to rest as long.
+
+According to their promise, the islanders returned with a farther supply
+of provisions, and entered into much familiar cordiality with the
+Spaniards. A number of them having been invited on board the admiral's
+ship, a gun was discharged by way of entertaining them, but put them in
+such terror, that they were ready to leap over board, yet were soon
+reconciled by good usage and presents. The name of their island was
+_Zulvan_, of no great compass; yet considerable for its productions.
+They had in their barks various kinds of spices, as cinnamon, cloves,
+nutmegs, ginger, and mace, with several ornaments made of gold, which
+they carried up and down to sell as merchandise. Although without
+apparel, these people were dressed, or ornamented rather, in a more
+costly manner than Europeans; for they had gold earrings in each ear,
+and various jewels fastened by means of gold to their arms; besides
+which, their daggers, knives, and lances were richly ornamented with the
+same metal.[8] Their only cloathing consisted of a kind of apron, of a
+species of cloth made very ingeniously from the rind of a tree. The most
+considerable men among them were distinguished from the common people by
+a piece of silk ornamented with needle-work, wrapped round their heads.
+These islanders were gross, broad; and well set on their limbs, of an
+olive complexion, having their bodies constantly rubbed over with
+cocoa-nut oil.
+
+[Footnote 8: It is highly probable that the valuable spiceries, gold,
+and jewels, of the text, are mere fables, invented by Pigafetta, to
+enhance the value of his voyage, as such productions are now unknown to
+the Ladrone islands.--E.]
+
+Departing from this place on the 21st March, 1521, and steering between
+west and south-west, they passed among the islands named _Cenalo,
+Huinanghan, Hibussan,_ and _Abarian._[9] The 28th, they came to the isle
+of _Buthuan,_ where they were kindly received by the king and prince,
+who gave them considerable quantities of gold and spices; in return for
+which, Magellan presented the king with two cloth vests, giving knives,
+mirrors, and glass beads to the courtiers. Along with the king and his
+nobles, Magellan sent two persons on shore, one of whom was Antonio
+Pigafetta, the historian of the voyage. On landing, the king and his
+attendants all raised their hands to heaven, and then the two
+Christians, who imitated this ceremony, which was afterwards observed in
+drinking. The king's palace was like a great hay-loft, mounted so high
+upon great posts of timber, that they had to go up by means of ladders,
+and was thatched with palm-leaves. Though not Christians, these
+islanders always made the sign of the cross at their meals, at which
+they sat cross-legged like tailors. At night, instead of candles, they
+burnt a certain gum of a tree, wrapped up in palm-leaves. After
+entertaining them in their respective palaces, the king and prince of
+_Buthuan_ dismissed Pigafetta and his companion with noble presents,
+filled with admiration of their guests, whom they believed to be men
+above the rank of common mortals, being especially astonished at
+Pigafetta's writing, and reading what he had written, which was too
+mysterious for their comprehension.
+
+[Footnote 9: Not one of these islands is known to modern geography; and
+the whole of this voyage is related so loosely and unsatisfactorily,
+that it is impossible to trace its course, except at well-known
+places.--E.]
+
+In this island, by sifting the earth of a certain mine, they procured
+great lumps of gold, some as large as walnuts, and some even as big as
+eggs; all the vessels used by the king at table being made of this
+precious metal.[10] The king of this island was a very comely personage,
+of an olive complexion, with long black hair, his body being perfumed
+with the odoriferous oils of storax and benzoin, and painted with
+various colours. He had gold-rings in his ears, and three rings of that
+metal on each of his fingers. His head was wrapped round by a silken
+veil or turban, and his body was cloathed to the knees in a cotton
+wrapper, wrought with silk and gold. He wore at his side a sword or
+dagger, with a haft of gold, and a scabbard of carved wood. This country
+is so rich, that one of the natives offered a crown of massy gold in
+exchange for six strings of glass beads; but Magellan would not allow
+such bargains, lest the Spaniards might appear too greedy of gold.
+
+[Footnote 10: These stories of gold in such wonderful abundance, are
+obvious falsehoods contrived by Pigafetta, either to excite wonderment,
+or to procure the command of an expedition of discovery; a practice we
+have formerly had occasion to notice in the early Spanish conquests and
+settlements in America.--E.]
+
+The natives were active and sprightly, the common men being quite
+naked, except painting their bodies; but the women are cloathed from the
+waist downwards, and both sexes wore gold ear-rings. They all
+continually chewed _areka_, a fruit like a pear, which they cut in
+quarters, rolling it up in a leaf called _betel_, resembling a bay-leaf,
+alleging that they could not live without this practice. The only
+religious rite observed among them, was looking up to heaven, to which
+they raised their joined hands, and calling on their god _Abba_.
+Magellan caused a banner of the cross, with the crown of thorns and the
+nails, to be exposed and publicly reverenced by all his men in the
+king's presence; desiring the king to have it erected on the top of a
+high mountain in the island, as a token that Christians might expect
+good entertainment in that country, and also as a security for the
+nation; since, if they prayed to it devoutly, it would infallibly
+protect them against lightning and tempests, and other evils. This the
+king promised should be done, knowing no better, and glad to be so
+easily defended from thunderbolts.
+
+Leaving this island, and conducted by the king's pilots, the Spaniards
+came to the isles of _Zeilon, Zubut, Messana,_ and _Caleghan_, of which
+_Zubut_ was the best, and enjoyed the best trade. In _Massana_, they
+found dogs, cats, hogs, poultry, goats, rice, ginger, cocoa-nuts,
+millet, panic, barley, figs, oranges, wax, and plenty of gold. This
+island lies in lat. 9° 40' N. and in long. 162° from their first
+meridian.[11] After remaining here eight days, they sailed to the N.W.
+passing the islands of _Zeilon, Bohol, Canghu, Barbai_, and _Caleghan_;
+in which last islands there are bats as large as eagles, which they
+found to eat, when dressed, like poultry. In this island, among various
+other birds, there was one kind resembling our hens, but having small
+horns, which bury their eggs in the sand, where they are hatched by the
+heat of the sun. _Caleghan_ is about twenty miles W. from _Messana_; and
+_Zubut_, to which they now directed their course, fifty leagues W. from
+_Caleghan_. In this part of the voyage they were accompanied by the king
+of _Messana_, whom Magellan had greatly attached to him by many
+services.
+
+[Footnote 11: This is 16° of longitude beyond the Ladrones, which are in
+216° 30' W. and would consequently give the longitude of Zubut as 232°
+30' W. or 107° 30' E. from Greenwich. Yet from what appears afterwards,
+they seem to have been now among the Philippine islands, the most
+easterly of which are in long. 126° E. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+They entered the port of _Zubut_ on the 7th April, and on coming near
+the city all the great guns were fired, which put the inhabitants into
+great consternation. This, however, was soon quieted, by the arrival of
+a messenger at the city from the ships, who assured the king of _Zubut_
+that this was an ordinary piece of respect to his dignity, whom they had
+come to visit on their way to the Moluccas, hearing of his fame from the
+king of _Messana_. The messenger also desired that the Spaniards might
+be furnished with provisions, in exchange for their commodities. The
+king then observed, that it was customary for all ships that came to his
+port to pay tribute, which custom he expected they would comply with as
+well as others. To this the messenger replied, that the Spanish admiral
+was the servant of so powerful a sovereign, that he could make no such
+acknowledgment to any prince whatever. That the admiral was willing to
+be at peace with him, if he thought proper to accept his friendship: but
+if otherwise, he should soon have his fill of war. A certain Moor, who
+happened to be present, told the king that these people were certainly
+the Portuguese, who had conquered Calicut and Malacca, and advised him
+therefore to beware of provoking them to hostilities; whereupon the king
+referred the matter to his council, promising to give an answer next
+day, and in the meantime sent victuals and wine aboard the ships.
+
+The king of Messana, who was a potent prince, went ashore to confer with
+the king of Zubut, who in the end became almost ready to pay tribute
+instead of demanding it; but Magellan only asked liberty to trade, which
+was readily granted. Magellan persuaded the king and his principal
+people to become Christians, which they did after some religious
+conferences, and were all afterwards baptised. This example spread over
+the whole island, so that in eight days the whole inhabitants became
+Christians, except those of one village of idolaters, who absolutely
+refused. The Spaniards therefore burnt this village, and erected a cross
+on its ruins.[12]
+
+[Footnote 12: This incredible story has been considerably abridged on
+the present occasion, and is too absurd to merit any commentary.--E.]
+
+The people of this island deal justly with each other, having the use of
+weights and measures. Their houses are of timber, raised high in the air
+on posts, so that they ascend to them by ladders. They told us of a
+certain sea-fowl in this country, called _Lughan_, about the size of a
+crow, which the whales sometimes swallow alive, in consequence of which
+their hearts are eaten by this bird; and many whales are killed in this
+manner, the bird being afterwards found alive in the carcase of the
+whale. The Spaniards drove a most advantageous trade at this place,
+receiving from the natives ten pesos of gold, of a ducat and a half
+each, in exchange for fourteen pounds of iron; and procured abundance of
+provisions for mere trifles.
+
+Not far from Zabut is the isle of _Mathan_, the inhabitants of which go
+quite naked, except a slight covering in front, all the males wearing
+gold-rings hanging to the preputium. This island was governed by two
+kings, one of whom refused to pay tribute to the king of Spain, on which
+Magellan determined to reduce him by force of arms. The Indian had an
+army of between six and seven thousand men, armed with bows and arrows,
+darts and javelins, which Magellan attacked with sixty men, armed with
+coats of mail and helmets. The battle was for a long time doubtful, when
+at last Magellan advanced too far among the barbarians, by whom he was
+at first wounded by a poisoned arrow, and afterwards thrust into the
+head by a lance; which at once closed the life and actions of this noble
+commander. About eight or nine of the Christians were slain in this
+engagement, besides many wounded. After this disaster the Spaniards
+ineffectually attempted to redeem the body of their unfortunate admiral;
+and the other king, who had embraced the Christian religion without
+understanding its tenets, abandoned it upon this reverse of fortune to
+the Spaniards, and made peace with his rival, engaging to put all the
+Christians to death. With this view, he invited the Spaniards to a
+banquet, when he made them all be cruelly murdered, only reserving Don
+Juan Serrano alive, in order to procure a supply of artillery and
+ammunition for his ransom. With these conditions the Spaniards would
+have willingly complied, but found so much prevarication and treachery
+in the conduct of the natives, and were so intimidated by the miserable
+fate of their companions, that they put to sea, leaving the unfortunate
+Serrano to his miserable fate.
+
+
+SECTION IV.
+
+_Continuation of the Voyage to its Conclusion_.
+
+A little before the death of Magellan, news were received of the
+Moluccas, the great object of this voyage. Leaving Mathan, they sailed
+for the island of _Bohol_, where they burnt the Conception, one of their
+ships, transferring its men, ammunition, and provisions into the other
+two. Directing their course from thence to the S.W. they came to the
+island of _Paviloghon_, inhabited by negroes. From thence they came to a
+large island named _Chippit_, in lat. 8° N. about 50 leagues W. from
+Zabut, and about 170° of longitude from their first departure.[13] This
+island abounds in rice, ginger, goats, hogs, hens, &c. and the Spaniards
+were kindly received by the king, who, in token of peace, marked his
+body, face, and the tip of his tongue, with blood which he drew from his
+left arm; in which ceremony he was imitated by the Spaniards. Sailing
+about 40 leagues from thence between the W. and S.W. or W.S.W. they came
+to a very large island, named _Caghaian_, thinly inhabited. The
+inhabitants were Mahometans, exiles from Borneo, rich in gold, and using
+poisoned arrows; a common practice in most of these islands. Sailing
+W.N.W. from this island 25 leagues, they came to _Puloan_, a fruitful
+island in lat. 9° 20' N. and 179° 20' of longitude W. from their first
+departure.[14] This island yields much the same productions as Chippit,
+together with large figs, battatos, cocoa-nuts, and sugar-canes; and
+they make a kind of wine of rice, which is very intoxicating, yet better
+than palm-wine. The natives go entirely naked, use poisoned arrows, and
+are greatly addicted to cock-fighting.
+
+[Footnote 13: Bohal is one of the Philippine islands, in lat. 10° N. and
+long. 123° 50' E. from Greenwich. Paviloghon and Chippit must
+accordingly refer to some islands of the same group farther west.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 14: Pulcan, Pulowan, or Paragua, the westermost of the
+Philippines, an island of considerable extent, in lat. 10° N. and long.
+119° E. from Greenwich. From the direction of the voyage, the great
+island of Chaghaian of the text, was probably that now called
+Magindano.--E.]
+
+They came next to the great and rich island of Borneo, in lat. 5° 5' N.
+the chief city containing not less than 25,000 houses. The king was a
+Mahometan of great power, keeping a magnificent court; and was always
+attended by a numerous guard. He sent several presents to the Spanish
+captains, and made two elephants be led out with rich silk trappings, to
+bring the Spanish messengers and presents to his palace. He has ten
+secretaries of state, who write every thing concerning his affairs on
+the bark of trees. His household is managed by women, who are the
+daughters of his principal courtiers. This country affords camphor,
+which is the gum of a tree called _Capar_; as also cinnamon, ginger,
+myrabolans, oranges, lemons, sugar, cucumbers, melons, and other
+fruits, with abundance of beasts and birds, and all other products of
+the equinoctial climate. The natives continually chew betel and areka,
+and drink arrack.
+
+Leaving Borneo, they went to the island of _Cimbubon_, in, lat. 8° 7'
+N.[15] where they remained forty days, caulking and repairing their
+ships, and taking in a supply of fresh water. In the woods of this isle
+they found a tree, the leaves of which, when they fall to the ground,
+move from place to place as if alive. They resemble the leaves of the
+mulberry, having certain fibres produced from their sides resembling
+legs, and suddenly spring away when touched. Pigafetta, the author of
+this relation, kept one of these leaf-animals in a dish for eight
+days.[16] This isle produces ostriches, wild hogs, and crocodiles. They
+caught here a fish having a head like a sow, with two horns, its body
+consisting of one entire bone, and having a substance on its back
+resembling a saddle.
+
+[Footnote 15: Perhaps Balambangan, in 8° 20' N.]
+
+[Footnote 16: Harris observes, that this account is quite incredible:
+Yet it is certainly true that an insect of this description exists,
+though not the leaf of a tree, as erroneously supposed by
+Pigafetta.--E.]
+
+From hence they sailed to certain islands named _Salo Taghima_, which
+produce fine pearls, and from whence the king of Borneo once procured
+two large round pearls, nearly as big as eggs. They came next to a
+harbour in the island of _Sarangani_, reported to yield both pearls and
+gold. At this place they pressed two pilots to conduct them to the
+Moluccas; and passing the islands named _Ceana, Canida, Cabiaia, Camuca,
+Cabalu, Chiari, Lipan_, and _Nuza_, they came to a fair isle in lat 3°
+20' N. named _Sangir_.[17] Passing five other islands, they at last
+espied a cluster of five islands, which they were informed by the pilots
+were the Moluccas. This was on the 6th November, 1521, twenty-seven
+months after their departure from Spain. Trying the depth of the sea in
+the neighbourhood of these islands, they found it no less than fifty-one
+fathoms; though the Portuguese report that this sea is too shallow for
+being navigated, and is besides rendered extremely dangerous by numerous
+rocks and shelves, and by continual darkness; doubtless to deter any
+other nation from attempting to go there.
+
+[Footnote 17: Sangir is in lat. 8° 35' N. and long. 125° 25 E. from
+Greenwich. The other islands enumerated in the text do not occur in
+modern maps.--E.]
+
+They came to anchor in the port of _Tiridore_ [Tidore] on the 8th
+November, this being one of the chief of the Molucca islands. Although
+a Mahometan, the king of this island was so fond of the Spaniards, that
+he invited them to come on shore as into their own country, and to use
+the houses as their own, calling them his brethren and children; even
+changing the name of his island from Tidore to Castile. These Molucca
+islands are five in number, _Ternate, Tidore, Mortir, Makian_, and
+_Batchian_. Ternate is the chief of these islands, and its king once
+ruled over them all; but at this time Mortir and Makian were
+commonwealths, but Batchian was a separate monarchy. The clove-tree is
+very tall, and as big about as the body of a man, having large boughs,
+with leaves resembling those of the bay-tree, and the bark is of an
+olive colour. The cloves grow in large clusters at the extremities of
+the boughs; being at first white, but growing red when they come to
+maturity, and grow black when dried. While green, the flavour of the
+wood, bark, and leaves, is almost as strong as that of the cloves. These
+are gathered twice each year, in June and December, and if not taken in
+time, become very hard. Every man has his own particular trees, on which
+they bestow very little care. They have also in this isle a peculiar
+sort of tree, the bark of which, being steeped in water, may be drawn
+out in small fibres as fine as silk; of which the women make themselves
+a sort of aprons, which are their only cloathing.
+
+Near Tidore is the large island of _Gilolo_, which is divided between
+the Mahometans and idolaters. The two Mahometan kings have themselves
+contributed liberally to the population of the island; one of them
+having 600 children, and the other 650. The pagans are more moderate in
+their conduct in this respect than the Mahometans, and are even less
+superstitious; yet it is said that they worship, for the rest of the
+day, whatever they first see every morning. In this island there grows a
+peculiar sort of reed, as big as a man's leg, which is full of limpid
+wholesome water. On the 12th November, a public warehouse was opened by
+the Spaniards in the town of Tidore, for the sale of their merchandise,
+which were exchanged at the following rates. For ten yards of good red
+cloth, they had one bahar of cloves, containing four cantars or quintals
+and six pounds; the cantar being 100 pounds. For fifteen yards of
+inferior cloth, they had one bahar. Likewise a bahar for 35 drinking
+glasses, or for 17 _cathyls_ of quicksilver. The islanders also brought
+all sorts of provisions daily to the ships, together with excellent
+water from certain hot springs in the mountains where the cloves grow.
+They here received a singular present for the king of Spain, being two
+dead birds about the size of turtle-doves, with small legs and heads
+and long bills, having two or three long party-coloured, feathers at
+each side, instead of wings, all the rest of their plumage being of a
+uniform tawny colour. These birds never fly except when favoured by the
+wind. The Mahometans allege that these birds come from Paradise, and
+therefore call them the birds of God.
+
+Besides cloves, the Molucca islands produce ginger, rice, sago, goats,
+sheep, poultry, popinjays, white and red figs, almonds, pomegranates,
+oranges and lemons, and a kind of honey which is produced by a species
+of fly less than ants. Likewise sugar-canes, cocoa-nuts, melons, gourds,
+and a species of fruit, called _camulical_, which is extremely cold. The
+isle of Tidore is in lat. 0° 45' N. and long. 127° 10' E.[18] and about
+9° 30' W. from the Ladrones,[19] in a direction nearly S.W. Formerly the
+natives of these islands were all heathens, the Moors or Mahometans
+having only had footing there for about fifty years before the arrival
+of the Spaniards. Ternate is the most northerly of these islands, and
+Batchian is almost under the line, being the largest of them all.[20]
+
+[Footnote 18: This is the true position, reckoning the longitude from
+Greenwich. In the original the longitude is said to be 170° W. from the
+first meridian of the voyagers, being Seville in Spain, which would give
+174° E. from Greenwich; no great error, considering the imperfect way in
+which the longitude was then reckoned at sea.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 19: This is a gross error, perhaps of the press, as the
+difference of longitude is 16° 30'.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 20: The northern end of Batchian is in lat. 0° 28', and its
+southern extremity in 0° 40', both south.--E.]
+
+Departing from Tidore, the Spaniards were attended by several kings in
+their canoes to the isle of _Mare_,[21] where this royal company took
+leave of them with much apparent regret. In this isle they left one of
+their ships which was leaky, giving orders to have it repaired, for its
+return to Spain. Being now reduced to forty-six Spaniards and thirteen
+Indians, they directed their course from Mare towards the S.W. passing
+the isles named _Chacotian, Lagoma, Sico, Gioghi, Caphi, Sulacho,
+Lumatola, Tenetum, Bura_ [Bouro?] _Arubon_ [perhaps Amboina?] _Budia,
+Celaruri, Benaia, Ambalao, Bandon_ [perhaps Banda?] _Zorobua, Zolot,
+Moceuamor, Galian_, and _Mullua_, besides many others possessed by
+Mahometans, heathens, and canibals. They stopped fifteen days at
+_Mallua_ to repair their ship, being in 8° N. lat. and 169° long.
+according to their reckoning. This island produces much pepper, both
+long and of the ordinary round kind. The tree on which it grows climbs
+like ivy, and its leaf resembles that of the mulberry. The natives are
+canibals; the men wearing their hair and beards; and their only weapons
+are bows and arrows.
+
+[Footnote 21: Marhee Foul, a small isle between Tidore and Motir.--E.]
+
+Leaving _Mallua_ [Moa?] on the 25th January, 1522, they arrived at
+_Tima_ [Timor?] five leagues to the S.S.W. This island is in lat. 10° S.
+and long. 125° E. where they found ginger, white sanders, various kinds
+of fruits, and plenty of gold and provisions of all kinds. The people of
+the Moluccas, Java, and _Lozen_ [Luzon, or the principal island of the
+Philippines], procure their sanders-wood from hence. The natives are
+idolaters, and have the _lues venerea_ among them, which is a common
+distemper in all the islands of this great archipelago.
+
+Leaving Timor on the 11th February, they got into the great sea called
+_Lantchidol_, steering W.S.W. and leaving the coast of a long string of
+islands on the right hand, and taking care not to sail too near the
+shore, lest the Portuguese of Malacca should chance to discover them;
+wherefore they kept on the outside of Java and Sumatra. That they might
+pass the Cape of Good Hope the more securely, they continued their
+course W.S.W. till they got into the latitude of 42° S. though so sore
+pinched by hunger and sickness, that some were for putting in at
+Mosambique for refreshments; but the majority concluded that the
+Portuguese would prove bad physicians for their distempers, and
+determined therefore to continue the voyage homewards. In this course
+they lost twenty-one of their men, and were at length constrained to put
+in at the island of St Jago, one of the Cape Verds, to throw themselves
+on the mercy of the Portuguese. So, venturing ashore, they opened their
+miserable case to the Portuguese, who at first relieved their
+necessities; but the next time they went on shore, detained all who came
+as prisoners.
+
+Those who still remained in the ship, now reduced to thirteen, having no
+mind to join their companions in captivity, made all the haste they
+could away, and being favoured by the winds, they arrived in the harbour
+of San Lucar, near Seville, on the 7th September, 1522. He who commanded
+this vessel, which had the good fortune to return from this remarkable
+voyage, was Juan Sebastian Cano, a native of Guetaria in Biscay, a
+person of much merit and resolution, who was nobly rewarded by the
+emperor Charles V. To perpetuate the memory of this first voyage round
+the world, the emperor gave him for his coat of arms the terrestrial
+globe, with this motto, _Prima me circumdedisti_. The newly-discovered
+straits at the southern extremity of South America, were at first named
+the _Straits of Vittori_, after the ship which returned; but they soon
+lost that name, to assume another which becomes them much better, in
+honour of their discoverer, and have ever since been denominated the
+_Straits of Magellan_.
+
+This most celebrated voyage took up three years and twenty-seven days,
+having commenced on the 10th August, 1519, and concluded on the 7th
+September, 1522. By its success, the skill and penetration of the great
+Columbus, who, only twenty-seven years before, had first asserted the
+possibility of its performance, were fully established. One circumstance
+was discovered in this voyage, which, although reason have taught us to
+explain, could hardly have been expected _a priori_. On the return of
+the Spaniards to their own country, they found they had lost a day in
+their reckoning, owing to the course they had sailed; whereas had they
+gone by the east, and returned by the west, they would have gained a day
+in their course.
+
+Another circumstance, which served to heighten the reputation of
+Magellan, who deserves the sole honour of this voyage, was the
+difficulty experienced by other able commanders, who endeavoured to
+fellow the course he had pointed out. The first who made the attempt
+were two Genoese ships in 1526, but unsuccessfully. In 1528, Cortes, the
+conqueror of Mexico, sent two ships with 400 men, to endeavour to find
+their way through the straits of Magellan to the Moluccas, but without
+effect. Sebastian Cabot tried the same thing, by order of Emanuel king
+of Portugal, but was unable to succeed.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II.
+
+VOYAGE BY SIR FRANCIS DRAKE ROUND THE WORLD, IN 1577-1580.[22]
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Introduction, and Preparation for the Voyage_.
+
+
+In his Annals of the reign of Queen Elizabeth, the learned Cambden
+informs us, that the father of the celebrated Sir Francis Drake was the
+Rev. Edmund Drake, vicar of Upnore on the river Medway, and says he had
+this information from Sir Francis himself. Yet the industrious John
+Stowe says, that he was the eldest of twelve brethren, the sons of
+Edmund Drake, mariner, at Tavistock in Devonshire, and was born in 1540.
+Perhaps both accounts may be true; and Mr Edmund Drake, though a mariner
+originally, may have had a competent share of learning, and may have
+been admitted to orders on the final establishment of the Reformation.
+
+[Footnote 22: Hakluyt, IV. 232. Harris, I. p. 14. Oxford Coll. II. sect.
+xvi. Callender's Voy. I. 288. The original account of this voyage was
+published at London, in 4to, in 1600, and reprinted in 1618.--E.]
+
+This celebrated naval hero received the Christian name of Francis from
+his godfather the earl of Bedford, but does not appear to have derived
+any great patronage from that nobleman. He was sent young to sea, as an
+apprentice to the master of a small bark, who traded with France and
+Zealand; and his master, a bachelor, taking a great affection for him,
+left him his bark at his death. At eighteen years of age, he was purser
+of a ship on a voyage to the Bay of Biscay, and at twenty made a voyage
+to the coast of Guinea. In all these voyages he distinguished himself by
+extraordinary courage, and by a sagacity beyond his years. In 1565, his
+laudable desire of glory induced him to venture his all in a voyage to
+the West Indies, which had no success. In 1567, he served under his
+kinsman Sir John Hawkins in the bay of Mexico, but was again
+unfortunate, returning from the voyage rich in character and fame, but
+with almost ruined circumstances. These disappointments served only to
+increase his desire of bettering his fortunes at the expence of the
+grand enemy of his country, against whom he made two other voyages into
+these parts; the first in 1570 with two ships, the Dragon and Swan and
+the second in 1571, in the Swan alone, chiefly for information, that he
+might qualify himself for undertaking some enterprize of greater
+importance; which he at length carried into execution with great courage
+and perseverance.
+
+His character for bravery and seamanship being now established, he soon
+found a sufficient number of persons willing to adventure a part of
+their fortunes in a privateering voyage which he proposed. He
+accordingly sailed from Plymouth on the 24th May, 1572, in the Pasco, a
+ship only of seventy tons, having for his consort the Swan of 250 tons,
+commanded by his brother John Drake, with seventy-three men and boys,
+and provisions for a year. Such were the mighty preparations he had made
+for attacking the power of Spain in the West Indies, in which he
+considered himself justified, in order to make reprisals for the losses
+he had formerly sustained from the Spaniards. In this voyage he
+surprised and plundered the famous town of Nombre de Dios; and soon
+afterwards had a distant view of the South Sea from the top of a high
+tree, which inflamed him with the desire of conducting an English ship
+thither, which attempt he had perhaps never thought of but for that
+circumstance.
+
+In this expedition he acquired immense riches for his owners, and
+considerable wealth for himself; and being of an honourable and generous
+disposition, he scorned to avail himself of advantages, which most other
+men would have considered as their right. Of this we have the following
+remarkable instance. Having presented a cutlass to a captain or caçique
+of the free Indians inhabiting the isthmus of Darien, the caçique gave
+him in return four large ingots of gold, which he immediately threw into
+the common stock, saying, "My owners gave me that cutlass, and it is
+just they should receive their share of its produce." His return to
+England from this successful expedition was equally fortunate, as he
+sailed in twenty-three days from Cape Florida to the Scilly islands.
+Arriving at Plymouth on Sunday, the 9th August, 1573, during divine
+service, the news of his return was carried to church, on which few
+persons remained with the preacher, all the congregation running out to
+welcome the adventurous Drake, who had been absent fourteen months and
+sixteen days in this voyage.
+
+The wealth he gained in this expedition he generously expended in the
+service of his country, equipping no less than three frigates at his own
+expence, which he commanded in person, and with which he contributed
+materially to the reduction of the rebellion in Ireland, under the
+supreme command of the earl of Essex. After the death of that nobleman,
+he chose Sir Christopher Hatton for his patron, then vice-chamberlain to
+the queen, and afterwards lord high-chancellor of England. By his
+interest, not without great opposition, captain Drake obtained a
+commission from queen Elizabeth for the voyage of which it is now
+proposed to give an account, and which he had long meditated. Being thus
+provided with the royal authority, his friends contributed largely
+towards the intended expedition, while he applied himself with all
+diligence to get every thing in readiness for the important undertaking;
+having in view to attack the powerful monarchy of Spain, in its richest
+yet most vulnerable possessions on the western coasts of America, with
+what would now be considered a trifling squadron of five small barks.
+
+The ships, as they were then called, fitted out for this bold
+enterprize, were, the Pelican, afterwards named the Hind, of 100 tons,
+admiral-ship of the squadron, under his own immediate command as
+captain-general; the Elizabeth, vice-admiral, of 80 tons, commanded by
+Captain John Winter, who was lieutenant-general of the expedition; the
+Marigold, a bark of 30 tons, Captain John Thomas; the Swan, a fly-boat
+of 50 tons, Captain John Chester; and the Christopher, a pinnace of 15
+tons, Captain Thomas Moon. These ships were manned with 164 able-bodied
+men, including officers, and were provided with an ample supply of
+provisions, ammunition and stores, for so long and dangerous a voyage.
+Captain Drake likewise provided the frames of four pinnaces, which were
+stowed on board in pieces, ready to be set up as occasion might require.
+He is also said to have made provision for ornament and delight,
+carrying with him a band of musicians, together with rich furniture and
+much silverplate, all the vessels for his table, and many of those
+belonging to the cook-room, being of that metal. This magnificence is
+stated by his biographers, to have been intended as a display for the
+honour of his country among foreign nations.
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_Narrative of the Voyage from England to the Straits of Magellan_.
+
+All things being duly prepared. Captain Drake sailed with his squadron
+from Plymouth Sound, about five in the afternoon of the 15th November,
+1577, giving out that he was bound for Alexandria in Egypt, which had
+been made the pretended object of the voyage, to prevent the court of
+Spain from taking measures for its obstruction. In consequence of a
+violent storm, in which some of the ships sustained damage, he was
+forced to put into Falmouth haven, whence he returned to Plymouth.
+Having repaired all defects, he once more set sail on the 13th December
+of the same year. Avoiding as much as possible to come near the land too
+early, he fell in with Cape Cantin, on the Barbary coast, on the 25th,
+and came to the island of Mogadore on the 27th. In the channel of one
+mile broad, between that island and the main, he found a convenient
+harbour, where he caused one of his pinnaces to be built.
+
+While thus engaged, some of the inhabitants came to the shore with a
+flag of truce, on which the admiral sent a boat to enquire what they
+wanted. One of his men remained as a pledge with the natives, two of
+whom came off to the ship. These informed the admiral by signs, that
+they would next day supply the ships with good provisions; in return for
+which proffered civility, the admiral rewarded them with shoes, some
+linen, and two javelins, and sent them again on shore. Next day, they
+came again to the shore, according to promise; on which occasion, an
+Englishman, named Fry, leapt on shore among them from the boat,
+considering them as friends; but they perfidiously made him a prisoner,
+threatening to stab him if he made any resistance. They then mounted him
+on horseback, and carried him into the interior; but he was afterwards
+sent back in safety to England.
+
+The pinnace being finished, they sailed from Mogadore on the 30th
+December, and arrived at Cape Blanco on the 17th January, 1578. On the
+voyage from Mogadore to Cape Blanco, they took three _Canters_, or
+Spanish fishing-boats, and three caravels. Here they found a Portuguese
+caravel at anchor, bound to the Cape Verd islands for salt, in which
+there were only two mariners. They took possession of this ship, and
+carried her into the harbour of Cape Blanco, where they remained four
+days, during which time the admiral trained his men on shore, to prepare
+them for land service on occasion. At this place they took such
+necessaries as they wanted from the fishermen, as also one of their
+barks or canters of 40 tons, leaving behind a small bark of their own,
+called the Benedict. Leaving this place on the 22d January, they were
+told by the master of the Portuguese caravel, which they carried along
+with them, that abundance of dried _cabritos_ or goats might be procured
+at Mayo, one of the Cape Verd islands, which were yearly prepared there
+for the ships belonging to the king of Spain.
+
+They arrived at Mayo on the 27th January, but the inhabitants refused to
+trade with them, being expressly forbidden to have any intercourse with
+foreigners, by orders from their sovereign. Next day, however, the
+admiral sent a company of 72 armed men on shore under the command of Mr
+Winter and Mr Doughty, to take a view of the island, and to see if any
+refreshments could be procured. They marched accordingly to the chief
+place of the island; and, after travelling three days through the
+mountains, they arrived there before day-break on the fourth day. The
+inhabitants were all fled, but this part of the island seemed more
+fertile and better cultivated than any of the rest. They rested here
+some time, banqueting on delicious grapes, which they found in
+perfection at that season of the year, though the depth of winter in
+England. Mayo abounds with goats, wild poultry, and salt; this last
+being formed in great quantities among the rocks, by the heat of the
+sun; so that the natives have only the trouble of gathering it into
+heaps, and sell it to their neighbours, from which they derive great
+profit. They found here cocoa-nut trees, which have no branches or
+leaves but at the top of the tree, where the fruit grows in clusters.
+They then marched farther into the island, where they saw great numbers
+of goats, but could not get any. They might have furnished themselves
+with some dried carcasses of old goats, which the natives laid purposely
+in their way; but not caring for the refuse of the island, they returned
+to the ships.
+
+Leaving Mayo on the 31st of January, they sailed past the island of St
+Jago, whence three pieces of cannon were fired at them, but without
+doing any injury. This is a large fine island, inhabited by the
+Portuguese; but the mountains are said to be still occupied by Moors,
+who fled thither to deliver themselves from slavery, and have fortified
+themselves in places of difficult access. Near this island they saw two
+ships under sail, one of which they took, and it turned out a valuable
+prize, being laden with wine. The admiral detained this ship, which he
+committed to the charge of Mr Doughty, and took the Portuguese pilot,
+named Nuno da Silva into his service, sending the rest away in his
+pinnace, giving them some provisions, a butt of wine, and their apparel.
+That same night they came to the island of _Fuego_, or the burning
+island. It is inhabited by Portuguese, having a volcano on its northern
+side, which is continually throwing out smoke and flames; yet seems to
+be reasonably commodious. On the south of Fuego there is a very sweet
+and pleasant island, called by the Portuguese _Ilha Brava_, the brave or
+fine island. This is cloathed with evergreen trees, and has many streams
+of fresh water which run into the sea, and are easily accessible; but it
+has no convenient road for ships, the sea being every where too deep for
+anchorage. It is alledged that the summit of Fuego is not higher in the
+air, than are the roots of Brava low in the sea.
+
+Leaving these islands, and approaching the line, they were sometimes
+becalmed for a long time together, and at other times vexed with
+tempests. At all times, when the weather would permit, they had plenty
+of dolphins, bonitos and flying-fish; several of the last dropping in
+their flight on the decks, unable to rise again, because their finny
+wings wanted moisture. Taking their departure from the Cape de Verd
+islands, they sailed 54 days without seeing land; and at length, on the
+5th April, 1578, got sight of the coast of Brazil, in lat. 33° S. The
+barbarous people on shore, discovering the ships, began to practice
+their accustomed ceremonies to raise a storm for destroying their ships,
+making great fires, and offering sacrifices to the devil.[23] The 7th
+April they had thunder, lightning, and rain, during which storm they
+lost sight of the Christopher, but found her again on the 11th; and the
+place where all the ships met together, which had been dispersed in
+search of her, was named Cape _Joy_, at which place the ships took in a
+supply of fresh water. The country here was pleasant and fertile, with a
+sweet and temperate climate; but the only inhabitants seen were some
+herds of deer, though some footsteps of men, apparently of great
+stature, were noticed on the ground. Having weighed anchor, and sailed a
+little farther along the coast, they came to a small and safe harbour,
+formed between a rock and the main, the rock breaking the force of the
+sea. On this rock they killed some sea-wolves, a species of seals, which
+they found wholesome food, though not pleasant.
+
+[Footnote 23: This idea is uncharitable and absurd, as the navigators
+could not know any thing of the motives of these fires, and much less
+about the alleged sacrifices. The fires might have been friendly
+signals, inviting them on shore.--E.]
+
+Going next to lat. 36° S. they sailed up the Rio Plata, and came into 53
+and 54 fathoms, fresh water, with which they filled their water casks;
+but finding no convenient harbour, went again to sea on the 27th of
+April. Sailing still onwards, they came to a good bay, having several
+islands, one of which was well stocked with seals and the others with
+sea fowl, so that they had no want of provisions, together with plenty
+of water. The admiral being ashore on one of these islands, the natives
+came about him, dancing and skipping in a friendly manner, and willingly
+bartered any thing they had for toys; but they had the strange custom of
+refusing to accept of any thing, unless first thrown down on the ground.
+They were a comely strong-bodied people, swift of foot, and of lively
+dispositions. The Marigold and Christopher were dispatched in search of
+a convenient harbour, and soon returned with news of having found one,
+into which all the ships removed. Here the seals were so numerous, that
+above 200 were killed in about an hour. The natives came boldly about
+them, while working ashore, having their faces painted, their only
+apparel being a covering of skin with the fur on, wrapped about their
+waists, and a kind of wreaths round their heads. Each man had a bow,
+about an ell long, and only two arrows. They even seemed to have some
+notion of military discipline, as they ranged their men in an orderly
+manner; and they gave sufficient proof of their agility, by stealing the
+admiral's hat from his head, which could not be recovered.[24] While in
+this bay, the admiral took every thing out of the fly-boat that could be
+of any use; she was then laid on shore and burnt, and all her iron work
+saved for future use.
+
+[Footnote 24: Harris observes, that these were of the nation named
+Patagons by Magellan. But no notice is taken of their stature being
+above the ordinary height.--E.]
+
+Sailing from this place, the fleet came to anchor in Port St Julian on
+the 20th June, where they saw the gibbet still standing, on which
+Magellan had formerly executed some of his mutinous company. Here also
+Admiral Drake executed one Captain Doughty, the most suspected action of
+his life. Mr Doughty had been guilty of certain actions, tending towards
+contention or mutiny, and was found guilty partly on his own confession,
+and partly by proof, taken in good order and as near as might be
+according to the forms of the law of England. Having received the
+communion from Mr Fletcher, chaplain of the admiral's ship, in which
+Captain Drake participated along with him; and after embracing Drake,
+and taking leave of all the company, Mr Doughty prayed fervently for the
+welfare of the queen and whole realm, then quietly laid his head on the
+block. The general then made a speech to the whole company assembled,
+exhorting them to unity and obedience, sacredly protesting that he had
+great private affection for Mr Doughty, and had been solely actuated in
+condemning him to an ignominious death, by his care for the welfare of
+the voyage, the satisfaction of her majesty, and the honour of his
+country.
+
+Leaving this place on the 17th August, they fell in with the eastern
+entrance of the Straits of Magellan on the 20th of that month. The 21st
+they entered the straits, which they found very intricate, with various
+crooked turnings; owing to which, having often to shift their course,
+the wind was frequently adverse, making their passage troublesome and
+dangerous, especially in sudden blasts of wind; for, although there were
+several good harbours, the sea was too deep for anchorage, except in
+some narrow creeks or inlets, or between rocks. On both sides of the
+straits, there are vast mountains covered with snow, their tops reaching
+in many places to great heights, having often two or three ranges of
+clouds below their summits. The air in the straits was extremely cold,
+with almost continual frost and snow; yet the trees and plants retained
+a constant verdure, growing and flourishing in spite of the severity of
+the climate. At the south and east parts of the straits there are
+various islands, through between which the sea breaks in, as at the main
+entrance. The breadth of the straits in some places was only a league,
+which was the narrowest, but in most places two, and in some three
+leagues across. The 24th August, they came to an island in the straits,
+where they found vast quantities of penguins, a sort of water fowl, as
+large as a goose, but which does not fly, and of which they killed 3000
+in less than a day.
+
+
+
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_Incidents of the Voyage, from the Straits of Magellan to New Albion._
+
+
+The 6th September, they reached the western extremity of the straits,
+and entered into the great South Sea or Pacific Ocean. On the 7th, the
+fleet encountered a storm, by which they were driven one degree to the
+southwards of the straits, and more than 200 leagues in longitude back
+from that entrance.[25] They were driven even so far as the lat. of 57°
+20' S. where they anchored among the islands, finding good fresh water
+and excellent herbs.[26] Not far from thence, they entered another bay,
+where they found naked people, ranging about the islands in canoes, in
+search of provisions, with whom they had some intercourse by way of
+barter. Continuing their course towards the north, they discovered
+three islands on the 3d October, in one of which there was an incredible
+number of birds. On the 8th October, they lost company of the Elizabeth,
+the vice admiral, commanded by Captain Winter. At his return home, they
+found that Mr Winter had been forced to take refuge from the storm in
+the straits, whence he returned to England, though many of us feared he
+and his people had perished.
+
+[Footnote 25: This is a gross error, probably a misprint for 20 leagues
+of longitude, as the quantity in the text would have driven them far to
+the eastwards of the straits, into the Atlantic, which is impossible,
+the whole of Tierra del Fuego being interposed.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 26: This too is erroneous, as Cape Horn, not then known, is
+only in lat. 55° 58' 30' S.]
+
+Having now got back to the western entrance of the straits, they made
+sail for the coast of Chili, which the general maps represented as
+trending N.W. but which they found to the east of N. so that these
+coasts had not been fully discovered, or very inaccurately represented,
+for the space of 12 degrees at least, either for the purpose to deceive,
+or through ignorance. Proceeding northwards along the coast of Chili,
+they came to the island of Mocha, in 38° 30' S. latitude, on the 29th
+November, where they cast anchor. The admiral went here ashore with ten
+men, and found the island inhabited by a people who had fled from the
+extreme cruelty of the Spaniards, leaving their original habitations on
+the continent, to enjoy their lives and liberties in security. These
+people at first behaved civilly to the admiral and his men, bringing
+them potatoes and two fat sheep, promising also to bring them water, and
+they received some presents in return. Next day, however, when two men
+went ashore with barrels for water, the natives suddenly assailed and
+killed them. The reason of this outrage was, that they mistook the
+English for Spaniards, whom they never spare when they fall into their
+hands.
+
+Continuing their course along the coast of Chili, they met an Indian in
+a canoe, who mistook them for Spaniards, and told them of a great
+Spanish ship at St Jago, laden for Peru. Rewarding him for this
+intelligence, the Indian conducted them to where the ship lay at anchor,
+in the port of Valparaiso, in lat. 33° 40' S.[27] All the men on board
+were only eight Spaniards and three negroes, who, supposing the English
+to have been friends, welcomed them with beat of drum, and invited them
+on board to drink Chili wine. The English immediately boarded and took
+possession; when one of the Spaniards leapt overboard, and swam ashore
+to give notice of the coming of the English. On this intelligence, all
+the inhabitants of the town, being only about nine families, escaped
+into the country. The admiral and his men landed, and rifled the town
+and its chapel, from which they took a silver chalice, two cruets, and
+an altar cloth. They found also in the town a considerable store of
+Chili wine, with many boards of cedar wood, all of which they carried on
+board their ships. Then setting all the prisoners on shore, except
+one named John Griego, born in Greece, who was detained as a pilot, the
+admiral directed his course for Lima, the capital of Peru, under the
+guidance of this new pilot.
+
+[Footnote 27: More correctly, 33° 00' 30" S. and long. 71° 38' 30" W.
+from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+Being now at sea, they examined the booty in their prize, in which they
+found 25,000 pezos of pure gold of Baldivia, amounting to above 37,000
+Spanish ducats. Continuing their course for Lima, they put into the
+harbour of Coquimbo, in lat. 29° 54' S. where the admiral sent fourteen
+men on shore for water. This small company being espied by the
+Spaniards, they collected 300 horse and 200 foot, and slew one of the
+Englishmen, the rest getting back to the ship. From thence they went to
+a port named _Taropaca_ in Peru, in lat 20° 15' S. where landing, a
+Spaniard was found asleep on the shore, having eighteen bars of silver
+lying beside him, worth about 4000 Spanish ducats, which they carried
+away, leaving him to his repose. Going again on shore, not far from
+thence, in search of water, they met a Spaniard and an Indian, driving
+eight Peruvian sheep, laden with fine silver, each sheep having two
+leather bags on his back, in each of which were about fifty pounds
+weight. These they carried on board, finding in the whole of these bags
+800 pounds weight of silver. From thence they went to _Arica_, in lat.
+18° 40' S. in which port they plundered three small barks of fifty-seven
+bars of silver, each bar being in shape and size like a brick-bat, and
+weighing about twenty pounds. Not having sufficient strength, they did
+not assault the town, but put again to sea, where they met another small
+bark, laden with linen, part of which was taken out, and the bark
+dismissed.
+
+They came to Calao, the port of Lima, in lat. 12° 10' S. on the 13th
+February, 1579, where they found twelve ships at anchor, with all their
+sails down, without watch or guard, all their masters and merchants
+being on shore. On examining the contents of these ships, they found a
+chest full of dollars, with great store of silks and linen, and carried
+away all the silver, and part of the other goods to their own ships.
+Here the admiral got notice of a very rich ship, called the Cacafuego,
+which had sailed for Paita, in lat. 5° 10' S. Pursuing her thither, they
+learnt, before arriving at Paita, that she had sailed for Panama. In
+continuing the pursuit to Panama, they took another, which paid them
+well for their trouble; as, besides her ropes and other tackle, she
+yielded eighty pounds weight of gold, together with a large golden
+crucifix, richly adorned with emeralds.
+
+Continuing to pursue the Cacafuego, the admiral promised to give his
+gold chain to the first person who descried the chase, which fell to the
+share of Mr John Drake, who first discovered her, one morning about
+three o'clock. They came up with her about six, gave her three shots,
+which struck down her mizen-mast, and then boarded. They found this ship
+fully as rich as she was reported, having thirteen chests full of
+dollars, eighty pounds weight of gold, a good quantity of jewels, and
+twenty-six tons of silver in bars.[28] Among other rich pieces of plate
+found in this ship, there were two very large gilt silver bowls, which
+belonged to her pilot. On seeing these, the admiral said to the pilot,
+that these were fine bowls, and he must needs have one of them; to which
+the pilot yielded, not knowing how to help himself; but, to make this
+appear less like compulsion, he gave the other to the admiral's steward.
+The place where this rich prize was taken was off Cape San Francisco,
+about 150 leagues from Panama, and in lat. 1° N. [00° 45'.] When the
+people of the prize were allowed to depart, the pilot's boy told the
+admiral, that the English ship ought now to be called the _Cacafuego_,
+not theirs, as it had got all their rich loading, and that their
+unfortunate ship ought now to be called the _Cacaplata_, which jest
+excited much mirth.[29]
+
+[Footnote 28: Without calculating on the jewels, for which there are no
+data, the silver and gold of this prize could hardly fall short of
+250,000_l_--worth more than a million, in effective value, of the present
+day.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 29: This forecastle joke turns on the meaning of the words,
+Cacafuego and Cacaplata, meaning Fartfire and Fartsilver.--_Harris_.]
+
+Having ransacked the Cacafuego of every thing worth taking, she was
+allowed to depart; and continuing their course westwards, they next met
+a ship laden with cotton goods, China dishes, and China silks. Taking
+from the Spanish owner a falcon of massy gold, having a large emerald
+set in his breast, and chasing such other wares as he liked, the admiral
+allowed this ship to continue her voyage, only detaining her pilot for
+his own use. This pilot brought them to the harbour of Guatalca, in the
+town adjacent to which, he said, there were only seventeen Spaniards.
+Going there on shore, they marched directly to the town-house, where
+they found a judge sitting, and ready to pass sentence on a parcel of
+negroes, who were accused of plotting to set the town on fire. But the
+arrival of the admiral changed affairs, for he made both the judge and
+the criminals prisoners, and carried them all aboard the ships. He then
+made the judge write to the citizens, to keep at a distance, and make no
+resistance; after which the town was plundered, but the only thing
+valuable was about a bushel of Spanish dollars, or rials of plate. One
+of the people took a rich Spaniard fleeing out of town, who ransomed
+himself by giving up a gold chain and some jewels. At this place the
+admiral set some of his Spanish prisoners ashore, together with the old
+Portuguese pilot he took at the Cape Verd islands, and departed from
+thence for the island of Cano. While there, he captured a Spanish ship
+bound for the Philippine islands, which he lightened of part of her
+merchandise, and allowed her to proceed. At this place the admiral
+landed every thing out of his own ship, and then laid her on shore,
+where she was repaired and graved; after which they laid in a supply of
+wood and water.
+
+Thinking he had in some measure revenged the public injuries of his
+country upon the Spaniards, as well as his own private losses, the
+admiral began to deliberate about returning home; but was in some
+hesitation as to the course he ought to steer. To return by the Straits
+of Magellan, the only passage yet discovered, he concluded would throw
+himself into the hands of the Spaniards, who would probably there waylay
+him with a greatly superior force, having now only one ship left, which
+was by no means strong, though very rich.[30] He therefore, on maturely
+weighing all circumstances, determined to proceed by way of the
+Moluccas, and following the course of the Portuguese, to get home by the
+Cape of Good Hope. Endeavouring to put this design in execution, but
+being becalmed, he found it necessary to steer more northwardly along
+the coast of America, in order to get a wind; in which view he sailed at
+least 600 leagues, which was all the way he was able to make between the
+16th of April and the 3d June.
+
+[Footnote 30: We have no account of the loss of any of the squadron,
+except that the Elizabeth was lost sight of after passing the Straits of
+Magellan. Perhaps the other vessels had been destroyed, to reinforce the
+crew of the Hind, weakened by the diseases incident to long
+voyages.--E.]
+
+On the 5th June, being in lat. 43° N. they found the air excessively
+cold, and the severity of the weather almost intolerable; for which
+reason they returned along the coast to the southward, till in lat. 38°
+N. where they found a very good bay, which they entered with a
+favourable wind.[31] The English had here a good deal of intercourse
+with the natives, whose huts were scattered along the shores of this
+bay. These people brought presents of leathers and net-work to the
+admiral, who entertained them with so much kindness, that they were
+infinitely pleased. Though the country is very cold, the natives
+contrive to erect their houses in a very ingenious manner to defend
+themselves from the severity of the weather. Surrounding them by a deep
+trench, they raise great pieces of timber on its outer edge, which close
+all in a point at the top, like the spire of a steeple. Their fire is in
+the middle of this conical hut, and they sleep on the ground strewed
+with rushes, around the fire. The men go naked, but the women wear a
+kind of petticoat of bull-rushes, dressed in the manner of hemp, which
+is fastened round their waists, and reaches down to their hips; having
+likewise a deer-skin on their shoulders. The good qualities of these
+women make amends for their ordinary dress and figure, as they are very
+dutiful to their husbands.
+
+[Footnote 31: This bay of Sir Francis Drake, on the western coast of
+North America, is nearly in lat 58° N. as stated in the text, and long.
+122° 15' W. from Greenwich. It is now named by the Spaniards, the Bay of
+San Francisco in California, on the southern side of which they have a
+mission of the same name--E.]
+
+Soon after his arrival, the admiral received a present from the natives
+of feathers and bags of tobacco, which was given in much form by a
+numerous concourse of the Indians. These convened on the top of a hill
+or rising ground, whence one of their number harangued the admiral,
+whose tent was pitched at the bottom of the hill. When this speech was
+ended, they all laid down their weapons on the summit of the hill,
+whence they descended and offered their presents, at the same time
+civilly returning those which the admiral had before given them. All
+this time the native women remained on the top of the hill, where they
+seemed as if possessed, tearing their hair, and howling in a most savage
+manner. This is the ordinary music of their sacrifices, something of
+that nature being then solemnizing. While the women above were thus
+serving the devil, the men below were better employed, in listening
+attentively to divine service, then performing in the admiral's tent
+These circumstances, though trivial in themselves, are important in
+ascertaining the first discovery of California by the English.
+
+News of the arrival of the English having spread about the country, two
+ambassadors came to the admiral, to inform him that the king was coming
+to wait upon him, and desired to have a token of peace, and assurance of
+safe conduct. This being given to their satisfaction, the whole train
+began to move towards the admiral, in good order, and with a graceful
+deportment. In front came a very comely person, bearing the sceptre
+before the king, on which hung two crowns, and two chains of great
+length. The crowns were made of net-work, ingeniously interwoven with
+feathers of many colours, and the chains were made of bones. Next to the
+sceptre-bearer came the king, a very comely personage, shewing an air of
+majesty in all. This deportment, surrounded by a guard of tall
+martial-looking men, all clad in skins. Then followed the common people,
+who, to make the finer appearance, had painted their faces, some black,
+and some of other colours. All of them had their arms full of presents,
+even the children not excepted.
+
+The admiral drew up all his men in line of battle, and stood ready to
+receive them within his fortifications. At some distance from him, the
+whole train of natives made a halt, all preserving the most profound
+silence, except the sceptre-bearer, who made a speech of half an hour.
+He then, from an orator, became a dancing-master, and struck up a song,
+being joined in both by the king, lords, and common people, who came all
+singing and dancing up to the fences which the admiral had thrown up.
+The natives then all sat down; and, after some preliminary compliments,
+the king made a solemn offer of his whole kingdom and its dependencies
+to the admiral, desiring him to assume the sovereignty, and professing
+himself his most loyal subject; and, that this might not seem mere empty
+compliment, he took off his illustrious crown of feathers from his own
+head, with the consent and approbation of all his nobles there present,
+and placing it on the head of the admiral, invested him with all the
+other ensigns of royalty, constituting the admiral, as far as in him
+lay, king of the whole country. The admiral, as her majesty's
+representative, accepted of this new-offered dignity in her name and
+behalf; as from this donation, whether made in jest or earnest, it was
+probable that some real advantage might redound hereafter to the English
+nation in these parts. After this ceremony, the common people dispersed
+themselves about the English encampment, expressing their admiration and
+respect for the English in a most violent and even profane manner, even
+offering sacrifices to them, as in the most profound devotion, till they
+were repressed by force, with strong expressions of abhorrence, and
+directed to pay their adorations to the supreme Creator and Preserver of
+all things, whom only they ought to honour with religious worship.[32]
+
+[Footnote 32: The whole of this story, of a king and his nobles, and the
+investiture of Drake in the sovereignty of California, which he named
+New Albion, is so completely absurd as not to merit serious
+observation.--E.]
+
+After this ceremony, the admiral and some of his people penetrated to
+some distance into the interior country, which they found to be
+extremely full of large fat deer, often seeing about a thousand in one
+herd. There were also such immense numbers of rabbits, that the whole
+country seemed one vast warren. These rabbits were of the size of those
+of Barbary, having heads like our own rabbits in England, with feet like
+those of a mole, and long tails like rats. Under the chin on each side,
+they have a bag or pouch in the skin, into which they store up any food
+they get abroad, which they there preserve for future use. Their flesh
+is much valued by the natives, and their skins are made into robes for
+the king and nobles. This country seemed to promise rich veins of gold
+and silver; as wherever they had occasion to dig, they threw up some of
+the ores of these metals.[33] Partly in honour of England, and partly
+owing to the prospect of white cliffs which this country presented from
+the sea, the admiral named this region New Albion. Before his departure,
+he erected a monument, on which was a large plate, engraven with the
+name, picture, and arms of queen Elizabeth, the title of her majesty to
+the sovereignty of the country, the time of its discovery, and Drake's
+own name. In this country the Spaniards had never had the smallest
+footing, neither had they discovered this coast of America, even for
+several degrees to the southwards of New Albion.
+
+[Footnote 33: This surely is a gross falsehood, as even the Spaniards,
+so much experienced in mines of the precious metals, have found none in
+California, though possessing missions among its rude and scanty
+population in every corner, even in this very spot.--E.]
+
+
+
+
+SECTION IV.
+
+
+_Continuation of the Voyage, from New Albion to England._
+
+
+Sailing from this port of New Albion, [now called by the Spaniards the
+Bay of San Francisco,] they had no sight of land till the 13th October,
+1579, when, in the morning of that day, they fell in with certain
+islands in lat. 8° N.[34] They here met many canoes, laden with
+cocoa-nuts and other fruits. These canoes were very artificially
+hollowed, and were smooth and shining, like polished horn. Their prows
+and sterns were all turned circularly inwards; and on each side there
+lay out two pieces of timber, or out-riggers, a yard and a half long,
+more or less, according the size of the canoes. They were of
+considerable height in the gunwales; and their insides were ornamented
+with white shells. The islanders in these canoes had large holes in the
+lower parts of their ears, which reached down a considerable way, by the
+weight of certain ornaments. Their teeth were as black as jet,
+occasioned by chewing a certain herb with a sort of powder, which they
+always carry with them for that purpose.[35]
+
+[Footnote 34: These probably were some of the Caralines, being in the
+direct route from Port Sir Francis Drake to the Moluccas.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 35: Areka nut and betel leaf, with pounded shell-lime.--E.]
+
+The 18th October they came to other islands, some of which appeared to
+be very populous, and continued their course past the islands of
+_Tagulada, Zelon,_ and _Zewarra._ The first of these produces great
+store of cinnamon; and the inhabitants are in friendship with the
+Portuguese. Without making any stop at these islands, the admiral
+continued his course, and fell in with the Moluccas on the 14th
+November. Intending to steer for Tidore, and coasting along the island
+of Motir, which belongs to the king of Ternate, they met the viceroy of
+that king, who came fearlessly on board the admiral's ship. He advised
+the admiral by no means to prosecute his voyage to Tidore, but to sail
+directly for Ternate, as the king, his master, was a great enemy to the
+Portuguese, and would have no intercourse with him, if at all connected
+with Tidore or the Portuguese. Upon this, the admiral resolved on going
+to Tidore, and came to anchor before the town early next morning.
+
+He immediately sent a messenger to the king, with a present of a velvet
+cloak, and to assure him that his only purpose in coming to his island
+was to trade in a friendly manner. By this time the viceroy had been to
+the king, whom he had disposed to entertain a favourable opinion of the
+English, so that the king returned a very civil and obliging answer,
+assuring the admiral that a friendly intercourse with the English was
+highly pleasing to him, his whole kingdom, and all that it contained,
+being at his service; and that he was ready to lay himself and his
+dominions at the feet of the glorious queen of England, and to
+acknowledge her as his sovereign. In token of all this, he sent his
+signet to the admiral, delivering it with much respect to the messenger,
+who was treated with great pomp and ceremony at court.
+
+Having a mind to visit the admiral on board ship, the king sent before
+hand four large canoes, filled with his most dignified attendants, all
+in white dresses, and having large awnings of perfumed mats borne over
+their heads on a frame of canes or bamboos. They were surrounded by
+servants, all in white; outside of whom were ranks of soldiers, and
+beyond them were many rowers in well-contrived galleries, three of these
+on each side all along the canoes, raised one above the other, each
+gallery containing eighty rowers.[36] These canoes were well furnished
+with warlike implements and all kind of weapons, both offensive and
+defensive, and were filled with soldiers well appointed for war. Bowing
+near the ship in great order, they paid their reverence to the admiral,
+saying that their king had sent them to conduct his ship into a safer
+road than that it now occupied.
+
+[Footnote 36: This surely is a great exaggeration, employing 480 rowers
+to each canoe.--E.]
+
+The king himself came soon afterwards, attended upon by six grave and
+ancient persons. He seemed much delighted with English music, and still
+more with English generosity, which the admiral expressed in large
+presents to him and his attendants. The king promised to come aboard
+again next day, and that same night sent off great store of provisions,
+as rice, poultry, sugar, cloves, a sort of fruit called _Frigo_, and
+_Sago_, which is a meal made out of the tops of trees, melting in the
+mouth like sugar, and tasting like sour curds, but when made into cakes
+will keep fit for eating at the end of ten years. The king did not come
+on board next day, according to promise, but sent his brother to excuse
+him, and: to invite the admiral on shore, while he remained as a pledge
+for his safe return. The admiral declined going ashore himself, but sent
+some gentlemen of his retinue along with the king's brother, detaining
+the viceroy till their return.
+
+They were received on shore by another of the king's brothers with
+several nobles, and conducted in great state to the castle, where there
+was a court of at least a thousand persons, the principal of whom were
+sixty grave counsellors, and four Turkish envoys dressed in scarlet
+robes and turbans, who were there to negociate trade between the Turkish
+empire and Ternate. The king came in under a glorious canopy,
+embroidered with gold, and guarded by twelve men armed with lances. He
+was dressed in a loose robe of cloth of gold, having his legs bare, but
+with leather shoes or slippers on his feet. Several circular ornaments
+of gold were braided among his hair, a large chain of gold hung from his
+neck, and his fingers were adorned with rich jewels. A page stood at the
+right-hand side of his chair of state, blowing cool air upon him with a
+fan, two feet long and a foot broad, curiously embroidered, and enriched
+with sapphires. The English gentlemen were kindly received; and, having
+heard their message, he sent one of his counsellors to conduct them back
+to the ships. The king of Ternate is a prince of great power, having
+seventy islands under his authority, besides Ternate, which is the best
+of the Molucca islands. His religion, and that of all his subjects, is
+Mahometism, in obedience to which they keep the new moons and many
+fasts, during which they mortify the flesh all the day, but make up for
+their abstemiousness by feasting in the night.
+
+Having dispatched all his affairs at Ternate, the admiral left the
+place, and sailed to a small island to the southwards of Celebes, where
+he remained twenty-six days. This island is all covered with wood, the
+trees being of large size, tall, straight, and without boughs, except at
+the top, the leaves resembling our English broom. There were here vast
+numbers of shining flies, no bigger than our common flies in England,
+which, skimming at night among the trees and bushes, made them appear as
+if all on fire. The bats in this island were as large as our ordinary
+poultry, and there was a sort of land cray-fish, which burrowed in the
+ground like rabbits, being so large that one of them was a sufficient
+meal for four persons.
+
+Setting sail from thence, and being unable to proceed westwards on
+account of the wind, the course was altered to the southwards, yet with
+much danger, by reason of the shoals which lie thick among these
+islands. Of this they had most dangerous and almost fatal experience on
+the 9th January, 1580, by running upon a rock, on which they stuck fast
+from eight at night till four in the afternoon of next day. In this
+distress, the ship was lightened by landing three tons of cloves, eight
+pieces of ordnance, and some provisions on the rock; soon after which,
+by the wind chopping round, they happily got off.
+
+On the 18th of February, they fell in with the fruitful island of
+_Baratene_,[37] having in the mean time suffered much from cross winds
+and dangerous shoals. They met with a friendly reception from the people
+of this island, who were handsomely proportioned, and just in all their
+dealings. The men wore no cloathing, except a slight covering round
+their middles, but the women were covered from the waist to the feet,
+having likewise many large heavy bracelets of bone, horn, or brass, on
+their arms, the smallest weighing two ounces, and having eight or ten of
+these on at once. This island affords gold, silver, copper, sulphur,
+nutmegs, ginger, long-pepper, lemons, cocoas, frigo, sago, and other
+commodities, and linen was found to be in much request by the natives,
+as of it they make girdles and rolls for wearing on their heads. Among
+the productions of this island, there was a particular sort of fruit,
+resembling barberries in size, form, and husk, very hard, yet of a
+pleasant taste, and becoming soft and easy of digestion when boiled. In
+short, they met with no place in the whole voyage that yielded greater
+abundance of every comfort than this island, excepting Ternate.
+
+[Footnote 37: No circumstance in the text serves to indicate what island
+is here meant, except that it appears to have been to the eastward of
+Java.--E.]
+
+Leaving Baratene, they sailed to Java Major, where also they were
+courteously and honourably entertained. This island was ruled over by
+six kings, who lived in entire peace and amity with each other, and they
+once had four of them on board at one time, and very often two or three
+together.[38]
+
+[Footnote 38: The names of the kings or princes of Java, when Sir
+Francis Drake was there, were Rajah Donaw, R. Rabacapala, R. Bacabatra,
+R. Tymbanton, R. Mawgbange, and R, Patemara.--_Hakluyt_.]
+
+The Javans are a stout and warlike people, well armed with swords,
+targets, and daggers, all of their own manufacture, and are very curious
+and ingenious, both in the fashion of their weapons, and in giving them
+an excellent temper. They wear turbans on their heads, the upper parts
+of their bodies being naked; but, from the waist downwards, they have a
+pintado, or a silken wrapper, trailing on the ground. They manage their
+women quite differently from the Moluccans; for, while these will hardly
+let them be seen by a stranger, the Javans will very civilly offer a
+female bedfellow to a traveller. Besides being thus civil and hospitable
+to strangers, they are good humoured and sociable among themselves; for
+in every village they have a public-house, where the inhabitants meet
+together, each bringing their shares of provisions, and joining the
+whole in one social feast for the keeping up of good fellowship.
+
+The Javans have a peculiar mode of boiling rice. It is put into an
+earthen pot of a conical form, open at the large end, and perforated all
+over with small holes, which is placed within a larger earthen pot full
+of boiling water. The rice swells and fills the holes of the inner pot,
+so that very little water gets in, and by this mode of boiling the rice
+is brought to a firm consistency, and cakes into a sort of bread, of
+which, with butter or oil, sugar, and spices, they make several very
+pleasant dishes. The lues venerea prevails among the inhabitants of this
+island; but, instead of expelling the poison by salivation, they drive
+it out by perspiration, sitting for this purpose in the sun for some
+hours, by which the pores are opened, giving free vent to the noxious
+particles of the disease.
+
+While in Java, the following words in the native language were taken
+notice of, and are recorded by Hukluyt.
+
+   Sabuck,  silk.             Gula,    black sugar.
+   Sagu,    bread.            Tadon,   a woman.
+   Larnike, drink.            Bebeck,  a duck.
+   Paree,   rice in the husk. Aniange, a deer.
+   Braas,   boiled rice.      Popran,  ointment.
+   Calapa,  cocoa nuts.       Coar,    the head.
+   Cricke,  a dagger.         Endam,   rain.
+   Catcha,  a mirror.         Jonge,   a ship.
+   Arbo,    an ox.            Chay,    the sea.
+   Vados,   a goat.           Sapelo,  ten.
+   Gardunge, a plantain.      Dopolo,    twenty.
+   Hiam,     a hen.           Treda      no.
+   Seuit,    linen.           Lau,       understand you?
+   Doduck,   blue cloth.      Bayer,     go!
+   Totoppo,  a cap.           Adadizano, I will fetch it.
+   Cabo,     gold.            Suda,      enough.
+
+Having news of some great ships being at no great distance, and not
+knowing whether they might prove friends or enemies, the admiral set
+sail from Java, sailing directly for the Cape of Good Hope, which was
+the first land he fell in with; neither did he touch at any, till he
+arrived at Sierra Leona on the coast of Guinea. He passed the cape on
+the 18th June, 1580, and by the facility of the navigation round that
+southern promontory of Africa, found how much the Portuguese had imposed
+upon the world by false representations of its horrors and dangers. He
+arrived at Sierra Leona on the 22d July, where were elephants, and
+abundance of oysters fastened on the twigs of trees, hanging down into
+the water, where they grow and multiply. With these, and lemons, with
+which they were abundantly supplied, his people were much refreshed.
+
+After two days stay at that place, taking in a supply of wood and water,
+and procuring refreshments, they sailed from thence on the 24th July.
+Next day, they were in lat. 25° 30' N. under the tropic of Cancer, fifty
+leagues from land. Being completely supplied with all necessaries, they
+continued their voyage, without stopping any where, and arrived at
+Plymouth on Monday the 26th of September, 1580, having been absent two
+years, nine months, and thirteen days. By their reckoning, the day of
+their arrival was only Sunday the 25th, as in going completely round the
+world in the same course with the sun, that luminary had risen once
+seldomer to them than to those who remained stationary, so that they had
+lost a day in their computation.
+
+SECTION V.
+
+_Reception of Sir Francis Drake in England, and same Notices of his
+remaining Actions_.
+
+The fame of his return from this wonderful voyage round the world soon
+spread over England, and all strove to express their sense of the
+worthiness of Captain Drake, by praises and other testimonies of regard.
+Several collections were made of poems, epigrams, and songs, celebrating
+him and his ship in the highest strains. Yet, in the midst of almost
+universal applause, some endeavoured to censure his conduct, and to
+place this great exploit in a wrong light. These persons alleged, that
+his circumnavigation of the globe served only to amuse the minds of the
+vulgar, while the main purpose of the voyage had been plunder, of which
+they pretended he had acquired sufficient to exempt the nation from
+taxes for seven years. They also set forth, as war had not been
+proclaimed against Spain, that it was dangerous to own such an
+adventurer, lest the nation might be made to pay dearly for his prizes:
+For, as the merchants had great effects in Spain, their goods might
+possibly be seized to make good his depredations.
+
+The Spanish ambassador also assailed him with very warm memorials,
+styling him the Master Thief of the Unknown World. The friends and
+patrons of Drake, finding themselves wounded through his sides, took all
+manner of pains to vindicate his conduct, alleging that he had the
+queen's commission and authority to justify him in making reprisals;
+that by so much wealth as he had brought home the nation would be
+enriched; that the Spaniards had already done us much injury; and, if
+the king of Spain were disposed to seize the effects of our merchants,
+the public ought to receive this treasure as an equivalent; which, were
+it returned, would break the spirit of our brave tars, who otherwise
+were more likely to humble the pride of the Spaniards.
+
+In the mean time, matters remained long in suspense, during which Drake
+must have suffered considerable anxiety, lest, after all his toils
+abroad, he might be deemed a pirate at home. The queen long delayed to
+declare her sentiments, perhaps wishing to see what effects her conduct
+might have with the court of Spain, which was probably withheld from
+precipitating hostilities, by the hope of being able to recover this
+great treasure. To keep up this hope, she artfully consented to part
+with some small sums to Mendoza, the Spanish ambassador. At length,
+matters coming to a crisis, she threw off the veil, and giving notice to
+Captain Drake of her intentions, she visited him on the 4th April, 1581,
+on board his ship, then at Deptford, where she was magnificently
+entertained; and, after dinner, she was graciously pleased to confer the
+honour of knighthood on Captain Drake, telling him that his actions did
+him more honour than the title she had conferred. A prodigious crowd
+attended the queen on this occasion, so that the bridge laid from the
+ship to the shore broke down with their weight, and more than 200
+persons fell into the Thames, yet no one was drowned, or even materially
+hurt. After this public approbation from the sovereign, all ranks of
+people redoubled their congratulations, and henceforward the reputation
+of Sir Francis Drake continually increased, so that he became a kind of
+oracle in maritime affairs, both to the nation and the court.--Here,
+strictly speaking, we ought to conclude our account of this illustrious
+navigator; yet it may not be amiss to give a short sketch of his
+succeeding actions.
+
+The war with Spain still continuing, he went out in 1585, general by sea
+and land, of an expedition to the West Indies, where he took the cities
+of St Jago, St Domingo, and Carthagena, and the fort and town of St
+Augustine; returning from this expedition with great glory and
+advantage, the profits amounting to £60,000, after defraying all
+charges, of which £20,000 were divided among the seamen, and £40,000
+came clear to the undertakers or adventurers. In 1587, he had the
+command of another fleet, with which he sailed to the bay of Cadiz, and
+thence to the Tagus, where he destroyed 10,000 tons of shipping, which
+the king of Spain had collected for the purpose of invading England. He
+likewise brought home the St Philip, a very rich prize, said by the
+writers of these times to have been the first carack ever taken and
+brought home to England.
+
+In the glorious year 1588, by commission from the queen, Sir Francis
+Drake was appointed vice-admiral of the fleet of England, then fitted
+out for opposing the _invincible_ Spanish Armada. In this arduous
+service, on which the independence and existence of England depended, he
+performed even more than his former actions gave reason to expect. In
+the very beginning of the fight, he captured two very large ships of
+war, one commanded by the Spanish vice-admiral Oquendas, and the other
+by Don Pedro de Valdez. This latter officer defended his ship with great
+gallantry for a long time; and at length, on surrendering, and
+delivering his sword to Sir Francis, he addressed him to the following
+effect: "That they had all resolved to have died fighting, if they had
+not fallen into his hands, whose valour and fortune were so great, that
+Mars and Neptune seemed to aid him in all his enterprises." To requite
+these Spanish compliments with solid English kindness, Sir Francis
+lodged Don Valdez in his own cabin, and entertained him at his table.
+Drake's crew were recompensed by the plunder of the Spanish ship, in
+which were found 55,000 ducats in gold, which they joyfully shared. Sir
+Francis performed many other signal services on this memorable occasion
+against the Armada, and particularly distinguished himself by advising
+the employment of fire-ships, which some have alleged he then invented.
+
+He was next year admiral of a great fleet, sent to Portugal for the
+purpose of restoring Don Antonio to the throne of that kingdom. This
+expedition, though it did not succeed in its grand object, occasioned
+considerable damage to Spain, on which it retorted the compliment of an
+invasion, and by which it was rendered unable to repeat another attempt
+of the same nature. On the whole, therefore, Sir Francis spoiled no less
+than three Spanish invasions. In 1595, he went upon another conjunct
+expedition against the Spanish West Indies, in which he performed signal
+services; but aiming at still greater, and being unsuccessful, he died
+in the harbour of Porto Bello, on the 28th of January, 1596, as is said,
+of a broken heart, occasioned by his disappointment. His body, being put
+into a leaden coffin, was committed to the deep, under a general
+discharge of all the artillery of the fleet. In his person, though of
+low stature, Sir Francis Drake was well made, with a fresh and fair
+complexion, having large lively eyes, light-brown hair, and an open
+cheerful countenance. He was naturally eloquent, gracefully expressing
+what he clearly conceived. He was thoroughly versant, not only in the
+practical part of his profession, but in all the sciences connected with
+it, being able to discharge all the offices necessary in a ship as
+occasion required, even that of the surgeon. In his conduct as a naval
+commander he was skilful and valiant, just to his owners, kind to his
+seamen, loyal to his sovereign, and merciful to his enemies after
+victory. His many glorious exploits justly entitle him to high fame; and
+he died, at fifty-five, in the ardent pursuit of glory, in the cause of
+his queen and country.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The fame of this Voyage round the World, with the wealth brought home by
+Sir Francis Drake, and the desire of rivalling him in riches and
+reputation, inspired numbers of young men of all ranks with the
+inclination of trying their fortunes at sea. Men of rank and fortune
+fitted out ships at their own expence, manning them with their
+dependants. Others, in lower situations, hazarded their persons as
+subaltern officers in these ships, or in men-of-war belonging to the
+queen. This spirit grew to such a height, that honest John Stowe informs
+us that there were many youths, from eighteen to twenty years of age,
+towards the close of Queen Elizabeth's reign, who were capable of taking
+charge of any ship, and navigating to most parts of the world.
+
+So alarmed were the Spaniards by the courage and conduct of Sir Francis,
+and his maritime skill, that they ordered that no draughts or discourses
+should be published of their discoveries in America, lest they might
+fall into his hands. What most surprised them was, that he should find
+his way so easily through the Straits of Magellan, which they had
+hitherto been unable to perform. They therefore resolved immediately to
+have these straits completely explored and discovered, by means of ships
+fitted out in Peru. For this purpose, Don Pedro Sarmiento, who was
+thought the best seaman in the Spanish service, was sent from Lima, and
+actually passed from the South Sea into the Atlantic, and thence to
+Spain. He there proposed to plant a colony in the straits, and to
+fortify them in such a manner as might prevent all other nations from
+passing through them. This project was so well relished by Philip II
+that a fleet of twenty-three ships was fitted out, with 3,500 men, under
+the command of Don Diego Floris de Valdez; and Sarmiento, with 500
+veterans, was appointed to form a settlement in the straits.
+
+This fleet was extremely unfortunate, insomuch that it was between two
+and three years before Sarmiento arrived with his people in the straits
+of Magellan. On the north side, and near the eastern entrance, he built
+a town and fort, which he named Nombre de Jesus, and in which he left a
+garrison of 150 men. Fifteen leagues farther on, at the narrowest part
+of the straits, and in lat. 53° 18' S.[39] he established his principal
+settlement, which he named _Ciudad del Rey Felippe_, or the City of King
+Philip. This was a regularly fortified square fortress, having four
+bastions; and is said to have been in all respects one of the
+best-contrived settlements ever made by the Spaniards in America. At
+this place Sarmiento left a garrison of 400 men and thirty women, with
+provisions for eight months, and then returned into the Atlantic. These
+transactions took place in the years 1584, 5, and 6. Sarmiento, after
+several fruitless attempts to succour and relieve his colony, was taken
+by an English vessel, and sent prisoner to London.
+
+[Footnote 39: The Narrows of the Hope are eighteen leagues of Castile,
+or about forty-eight English miles from Cape Virgin, the northern cape
+at the eastern mouth of the straits, in lat. 52° 5' S. long. 69° W. from
+Greenwich.--E.]
+
+The Spanish garrison, having consumed all their provisions, died mostly
+of hunger, perhaps aided by the scurvy, in their new city. Twenty-three
+men quitted it, endeavouring to find their way by land to the Spanish
+settlements, but are supposed to have all perished by the way, as they
+were never more heard of. Sarmiento fell into discredit with the king of
+Spain, for deceiving him as to the breadth of the straits, which he
+asserted did not exceed a mile over; whereas the king was certainly
+informed that they were a league broad, and therefore incapable of being
+shut up by any fortifications. However this may be, even supposing the
+report of Sarmiento true, and that his fortress could have commanded the
+straits, even this could have proved of little or no service to Spain,
+as another passage into the South Sea was discovered soon afterwards,
+without the necessity of going near these straits.
+
+
+SECTION VI.
+
+_First Supplement to the Voyage of Sir Francis Drake; being on Account
+of Part of the foregoing Navigation, by Nuno da Silva_.[40]
+
+Nuna da Silva, born in Oporto, a citizen and inhabitant of Guaia, saith,
+that on the 19th January, 1578, while at anchor with his ship in the
+harbour of St Jago, one of the Cape de Verd islands, he was made
+prisoner by the admiral of six English ships, and detained because
+discovered to be a pilot for the coast of Brazil. Setting sail,
+therefore, with the said admiral from Brava, they held their course for
+the land of Brazil, which they descried on the first April, being in the
+latitude of 30° S. whence they held on their course for the Rio Plata,
+where they provided themselves with fresh water.
+
+[Footnote 40: Hakluyt, IV. 246.--This narrative was written by Nuno da
+Silva, the Portuguese pilot who accompanied Sir Francis Drake from the
+Cape Verd islands to Guatalco on the western coast of New Spain, and was
+sent from the city of Mexico to the viceroy of Portuguese India, in
+1579.--E.]
+
+From thence they proceeded to the latitude of 39° S. where they
+anchored. They here left two of their ships behind them, and continued
+on with four only, that which had formerly belonged to Nuno being one of
+these. They next came into a bay, in lat. 49° S. called _Bahia de las
+Ilhas_, or the Bay of Islands, where Magellan is said to have wintered
+with his ships, when he went to discover the straits which now bear his
+name. They entered this bay on the 20th June, and anchored within
+musket-shot of the shore. They here found Indians cloathed in skins,
+their legs downwards from the knees, and their arms below the elbows,
+being naked. These Indians were a subtle, great, and well-formed race,
+strong, and tall in stature, being armed with bows and arrows. Six of
+the English going here on shore to fetch water, four of the Indians came
+into their boat before they landed, to whom the Englishmen gave bread
+and wine; after eating and drinking of which heartily they went on
+shore, and when at some distance, one of them cried to them, and said,
+_Magallanes! este he minha terra_; that is, Magellan, this is my
+country. Being followed by the sailors, they slew two of them with their
+arrows; one of whom was an Englishman, and the other a Hollander; on
+which the others made their escape to the boat, and put off from the
+shore.
+
+Leaving this place on the 17th of August, they came to the mouth of the
+straits on the 21st or 22d, but did not enter them till the 24th, owing
+to the wind being contrary. The entry into the straits is about a league
+in breadth, both sides being naked flat land. Some Indians were seen on
+the north side, making great fires; but none appeared on the south side
+of the straits. This strait is about 110 leagues long, and a league in
+breadth; and for about half-way through, is straight and without
+turnings; from thence, to about eight or ten leagues from the farther
+end, it has some capes and turnings, at one of which there is a great
+cape or head-land, which seems as if it went down to join the southern
+land; and here the passage is less than a league across, after which it
+again runs straight. Although there are thus some crooks and turnings,
+none of them are of any importance, or any dangerous obstacle. The
+western issue of these straits, about eight or ten leagues before coming
+out, begins to grow broader, and is then all high-land on both sides to
+the end; as likewise all the way, after getting eight leagues in from
+the eastern entrance, the shores along these first eight leagues being
+low. In the entry to the straits, we found the stream to run from the
+South Sea to the North Sea, or Atlantic.
+
+After beginning to sail into the straits, with the wind at E.N.E. they
+passed along without let or hindrance either of wind or weather, and
+because the land on both sides was high, and covered with snow, the
+whole navigation being fair and clear of shoals or rocks, they held
+their course the whole way within musket-shot of the north-side, having
+always nine or ten fathoms water on good ground; so that everywhere
+there was anchorage if need were. The hills on both sides were covered
+with trees, which in some places reached to the edge of the sea, where
+there were plains and flat lands. They saw not any large rivers, but
+some small brooks or streams that issued from rifts or clefts of the
+land. In the country beside the great cape and bending of the strait,
+some Indians were seen on the south side, fishing in their skiffs or
+canoes, being similar to those formerly seen on the north side at the
+entrance into the straits; and these were the only natives seen on the
+south side during the whole passage.
+
+Being out of the straits on the eastern side on the 6th of September,
+they held their course N.W. for three days, and on the third day they
+had a storm at N.E. which drove them W.S.W. for ten or twelve days with
+few sails up; after which, the storm increasing, they took in all their
+sails, and drove under bare poles till the 30th September. Having lost
+sight of one of their ships, of about 100 tons, and the wind growing
+more moderate, they hoisted sail, holding their course N.E. for seven
+days, at the end of which they came in sight of certain islands, for
+which they steered, meaning to have anchored among them, but the weather
+would not permit; and the wind coming N.W. they made sail to the W.S.W.
+Next day they lost sight of another ship, in very foul weather; so that
+the admiral was now left alone, as my ship had been left in the bay
+where they remained some time before entering the straits. With this new
+storm of adverse wind, they had to proceed southwards, till they came
+into the latitude of 57° S. where they entered a bay in an island, and
+anchored in twenty fathoms, about a cannon-shot from the shore. After
+remaining here three or four days, the wind changed to the south, and
+they again made sail to the northwards for two days, when a small
+uninhabited island was descried, where they procured many birds and
+seals.
+
+Next day they again proceeded, holding their course N. and N.N.E. and
+came to the island of Mocha, in 38° 30 S. five or six leagues from the
+main, where they anchored in twelve fathoms, a quarter of a league from
+the shore. This island is small and low land, all full of Indians. Here
+the admiral and twelve Englishmen landed, on purpose to seek fresh water
+and provisions, and bought two sheep in exchange of other things from
+the Indians, together with a little maize, and some roots of which the
+Indians make bread; and being now late, went on board ship for the
+night. Next day the admiral again landed with twelve men armed with
+muskets, and sent two men with vessels to fetch water. Some Indians lay
+in ambush at the watering-place, who suddenly fell upon the two
+Englishmen, and made them prisoners; which being perceived by the
+admiral and those with him, they advanced to rescue their companions,
+but were so sore assailed by stones and arrows, that all or most of them
+were hurt, the admiral receiving two wounds from arrows, one in his face
+and the other on his head; so that they were compelled to retreat to
+their boat, without hurting any of the Indians, who were so bold as even
+to carry away four of their oars.
+
+They sailed from hence along the coast to the northwards, with a
+southern wind, for six days, passing the harbour of St Jago, and put
+into another haven, where they took an Indian, who was fishing in a
+canoe, giving him some linen, knives, and other trifles. Not long after
+there came another Indian to the ship, whose name was Felippe, and who
+spoke Spanish. He gave notice to the English admiral of a certain ship
+being in the harbour of St Jago, which they had overpassed six leagues.
+So, taking this Indian as their guide, they went back to St Jago, where
+they took the said ship, in which were 1770 _botijas_, or Spanish pots,
+full of wine, besides other commodities. They then landed, and took a
+quantity of sacks of meal, and whatever else they could find, taking
+also the ornaments and relics from the church. They departed then from
+thence, taking with them the captured ship, with two of her men, running
+along the coast till they came to the latitude of between 30° and 31° S.
+where they had appointed to meet, in case of separation. They here
+anchored right over against a river, whence they filled six butts of
+fresh water, having twelve armed men on land to defend those who filled
+the casks. While busied in this work, they saw a company of armed men
+coming towards them, half Spaniards and half Indians, being about 250
+horse and as many foot, on which they made all haste to get into their
+boat, escaping with the loss of one man.
+
+They set sail again that same night, going about ten leagues farther
+along the coast, where they took in some more fresh water, but were soon
+obliged to quit this place also, by the appearance of some horsemen.
+Proceeding thirty leagues farther along the coast, still to the
+northwards, they went into a bay or haven, in a desert or uninhabited
+place, but seeing some persons daily on the shore, they did not venture
+to land. At this place, the English put together the pieces of a small
+pinnace, which they had brought ready framed with them from England.
+Having launched this pinnace, the English captain went into her with
+fifteen men, accompanied by John the Greek, who was chief boatswain,
+being master of the ship formerly taken in the harbour of St Jago. At
+this time they went to look for the two vessels they had parted from
+formerly in a storm, and also in hopes of being able to procure fresh
+water; but seeing always persons on shore, they durst not land, and
+returned again to the ship without hearing of their other ships. They
+now took all the ordnance out of their ship, and new dressed and rigged
+her; after which, arming the pinnace with a small piece of ordnance,
+they resumed their course to the northwards.
+
+Having sailed thirteen days, they came to an island about the shot of a
+culverin from the main, where four fishermen told them of fresh water on
+the main; but understanding it was but scanty, and somewhat distant from
+the shore, they continued their course. Next day they espied some
+fishers houses on shore, when the English captain landed and took three
+of the fishers, taking away half of the fish that lay packed on the
+shore. The day following they took a bark laden with fish belonging to
+the Spaniards, in which were four Indians, and bound it by a rope to the
+stem of their ships; but the Indians in the night cut her loose, and
+went away. Next day the English captain went ashore to certain houses,
+where he found 3000 pezos of silver, each being equal to a rial of
+eight, or Spanish dollar; getting also seven Indian sheep, some hens,
+and other articles, all of which he brought on board, and resumed his
+voyage. Two days after, going to the harbour of Arica, they found two
+ships, one of which was laden with goods and Spanish wares, out of which
+they only took 200 botijas, or pots of wine, and from the other
+thirty-seven bars of silver, each weighing ten or twelve pounds. They
+meant also to have landed at this place; but seeing some horsemen coming
+towards them, they desisted.
+
+Next morning they burnt the ship which was laden with Spanish wares, and
+took the other along with them, continuing their course, the captain
+sailing along shore in the pinnace, while the ship kept about a league
+farther out to sea, going in search of a ship of which they had
+intelligence. After sailing in this manner about forty-five leagues,
+they found the ship of which they were in search, at anchor in a haven;
+but having intelligence a few hours before, of an English pirate or
+sea-rover, she had landed 800 bars of silver belonging to the king of
+Spain; but the English durst not go on shore to search for it, as many
+Spaniards and Indians stood there as a well-armed guard. They found
+nothing, therefore, in this ship except three pipes of water. Taking
+this ship out to sea about a league, they hoisted all her sails and let
+her drive, doing the like with the ship they took at Arica, and that
+also they had taken at St Jago, continuing their course with their own
+ship and pinnace.
+
+When about seven leagues from Calao de Lima, they spied three ships, one
+of which they boarded, and took three men out of her, and then continued
+their course for Calao, which haven they entered about two or three
+hours after night-fall, sailing in among the middle of seventeen ships
+which lay there at anchor. Being among these ships, they enquired for
+the ship which had the silver on board; but learning that all the silver
+had been carried on shore, they cut the cables of all the ships and the
+masts of the two largest, and so left them. At this time, there arrived
+a ship from Panama, laden with Spanish wares and merchandise, which
+anchored close by the English ship, while the English captain was
+searching among the other ships for the silver. When the ship of Panama
+was anchored, a boat came off from the shore to examine her, but coming
+in the dark to the English ship, was told by one of the Spanish
+prisoners she was the ship of Michael Angelo from Chili; on which one of
+the Spaniards from the boat came up the side, but coming upon one of her
+cannon, he was afraid and they made off, as the ships in these seas
+carry no guns. The Panama ship hearing of this, cut her cables and put
+to sea; which being perceived by the English, who were close by, they
+followed in their pinnace. On getting up with her, the English called
+out for them to surrender, but the Spaniards killed one of their men by
+a musket-shot, on which the pinnace returned. The English ship then set
+sail and overtook the Spanish ship, when the crew took to their boat and
+escaped on shore, leaving their ship to the English, who took her, and
+continued her course to the northwards.
+
+Next day the English saw a boat under sail making towards them, which
+they suspected to be a spy, and soon afterwards perceived two great
+ships coming to meet them, which they supposed had been sent on purpose
+to fight them. On this they cast loose the Panama ship, in which they
+left John the Greek and two men they had taken the night before in Calao
+harbour; and then made all sail, not once setting eye again upon the two
+great ships, which made direct for the Panama ship. The English
+continued their course to the northwards along the coast; and some days
+afterwards met a frigate or small vessel bound for Lima, laden with
+wares and merchandise of the country, whence the English took a lamp
+and fountain of silver. They enquired of the people in this ship if
+they had met a ship, which they understood was laden with silver; on
+which one pilot said he had not seen any such, while another said he had
+met her about three days before. This frigate was taken by the pinnace,
+in which the English captain sailed close by the shore, the English ship
+keeping about a league and a half from land. On receiving this
+information, the English let the frigate go, and continued their course
+to the northwards.
+
+Two days afterwards, they came to the harbour of Payta, where they found
+a ship laden with Spanish wares, which was boarded and taken by the
+pinnace, without resistance, most of the crew escaping on shore. From
+this ship, the English took the pilot, with all the bread and other
+provisions. About two days after, they boarded a ship belonging to
+Panama, from which they only took a negro. Next day, being the 1st
+February, they met another ship of Panama, laden with fish and other
+victuals, having also forty bars of silver and some gold, but I know not
+how much, which they took, sending the passengers in a boat to the land,
+among whom were two friars. Next day, the English captain hanged a man
+of the Panama ship, for secreting two plates of gold, which were found
+about him, after which that ship was turned adrift.
+
+Towards noon of the 1st March, they descried the ship laden with silver,
+being then about four leagues to seawards of them: and, as the English
+ship sailed somewhat heavily, being too much by the head, they hung a
+quantity of botijas, or Spanish earthen pots which had contained oil,
+and now filled with water, over the stern of their ship, to give her a
+better trim and to improve her sailing. The treasure ship, thinking the
+English vessel had been one of those which usually sail upon that coast,
+made towards her, and when near, the English captain hailed her to
+surrender: As the Spanish captain refused, the English fired some
+cannons, by one of which the Spanish ship's mast was shot over board,
+and her master being wounded by an arrow, she presently yielded.
+Thereupon the English took possession of her, and sailed with her
+directly out to sea all that night, and the next day and night. Being
+entirely out of sight of land, they began to search their prize on the
+third day, removing her cargo into their own ship, being 1300 bars or
+wedges of silver, and fourteen chests of rials of eight, besides some
+gold, but how much of that I know not, only that the passengers said
+there was great store. They told me also, that 300 of the silver bars
+belonged to the king, and all the rest to the merchants. That done, they
+allowed the ship to go away with all her men, putting into her the three
+pilots they had hitherto carried with them.
+
+From thence they sailed onwards for Nicaragua, and descried land about
+the 13th March, being an island named Canno, not very high, about two
+leagues from the main land, where they found a small bay, in which they
+anchored in five fathoms close to the shore, remaining there till the
+20th. On that day a bark passed close to the land, which was captured by
+the English pinnace, being laden with sarsaparilla, and botijas or pots
+of butter and honey, with other things. Throwing all the sarsaparilla
+overboard, the English removed all their cannon into this bark, and then
+laid their own ship on shore to new caulk and trim her bottom. This
+being done, and taking in a supply of wood and water, they held their
+course along shore to the westwards, taking the Spanish bark along with
+them. After two days, they removed the men from her, giving them the
+pinnace. Among these were four sailors, bound for Panama, meaning to go
+thence for China, one of whom had many letters and patents, among which
+were letters from the king of Spain to the governor of the Philippines,
+as also the charts which are used in that voyage.
+
+Continuing their course, the English descried, on the 6th of April, a
+ship about two leagues out to sea, which they took early next morning,
+in which was Don Francisco Xarate. Continuing their course, they came to
+the haven of Guatalco on Monday the 13th April, where they remained at
+anchor till the 26th of that month, on which day they sailed to the
+westwards, putting me, Nuno da Silva, on board a ship then in the said
+harbour of Guatalco.
+
+SECTION VII.
+
+_Second Supplement, being the Voyage of Mr John Winter, after parting
+from Sir Francis Drake_.[41]
+
+We passed Cape Deseado into the South Sea on the 6th September, 1578,
+and run to the N.W. about 70 leagues, when the wind turned directly
+against us, with extremely foul weather, as rain, hail, snow, and thick
+fogs, and so continued for more than three weeks, during which time we
+could bear no sail, and were driven into the latitude of 57° S. On the
+15th September, the moon was eclipsed, beginning to be darkened
+immediately after sun-set, about six in the evening, being then the
+vernal equinox in this southern hemisphere. This eclipse happened in
+England on the 16th before one in the morning, which is about six hours
+difference, agreeing to one quarter of the circumference of the globe,
+from the meridian of England to the west.
+
+[Footnote 41: Hakluyt, IV. 253.--This narrative is said to have been
+written by Edward Cliffe, mariner. Only so much of the narrative is
+given here as relates to the voyage of Winter, after parting from Sir
+Francis Drake. One circumstance only may be mentioned, respecting the
+Patagons.--"These men be of no such stature as the Spaniards report,
+being but of the height of Englishmen; for I have seen men in England
+taller than I could see any of them. Peradventure the Spaniards did not
+think that any Englishmen would have come hither so soon, to have
+disproved them in this and divers others of their notorious lies;
+wherefore they presumed more boldly to abuse the world."--Yet even
+recent voyagers have presumed to _abuse the world_, with reporting that
+the Patagons are of gigantic stature.--E.]
+
+The last of September, being a very foul night, we lost the Marigold, a
+bark of about thirty tons, the Pelican, which was our general's ship,
+and our ship the Elizabeth running to the eastwards, to get to the land.
+Of this we got sight on the 7th October, falling into a very dangerous
+bay, full of rocks; and that same night we lost company of Mr Drake.
+Next day, very difficultly escaping from the dangerous rocks among which
+we were embayed, we got again into the Straits of Magellan, where we
+anchored in an open bay for two days, making great fires on the shore,
+that Mr Drake might find us, if he also came into the straits.
+
+We then went into a sound, where we remained about three weeks, naming
+it _The Port of Health_, as most of our men, having been sick with long
+watching, wet, cold, and bad diet, did wonderfully recover their health
+here in a short space, for which praised be God. We found here muscles
+of very great size, some being twenty inches long, yielding very
+pleasant meat, and many of them full of seed pearls. We came out of this
+harbour on the 1st November, abandoning our voyage by compulsion of Mr.
+Winter, sore against the will of the mariners. Mr. Winter alleged that
+he despaired of having winds to carry him to the coast of Peru, and was
+also in fear that Mr. Drake had perished. So we went back again to the
+eastwards through the straits, to St. George's island, where we laid in
+a quantity of a certain kind of fowl, very plentiful in that island, the
+meat of which is not much unlike that of a fat English goose. They have
+no wings, but only short pinions, which serve them in swimming, being of
+a black colour, mixed with white spots on their bellies and round their
+necks. They walk so upright, that they seem afar like little children;
+and when approached they conceal themselves in holes under ground, not
+very deep, of which the island is full. To take them, we used sticks
+having hooks fastened at one end, with which we pulled them out, while
+other men stood by with cudgels to knock them on the head; for they bit
+so cruelly with their hooked bills, that we could not handle them when
+alive.[42]
+
+[Footnote 42: It is almost unnecessary to remark that these were
+penguins.--E.]
+
+Departing from St. George's island, we passed Cape Virgin[43] on the
+11th November, going out of the straits into the southern Atlantic
+ocean, and directed our course to the N.E. till the last day of that
+month, when we arrived at an island in the mouth of the _Rio de la
+Plata_, or River of Silver. On this island there is an incredible number
+of seals, some of which are sixteen feet long, not fearing the approach
+of men. Most of our men were ashore in this island for fifteen days,
+setting up a pinnace; during which time the seals would often come and
+sleep beside our men, rather resisting them than giving place, unless
+when mortal blows forced them to yield. Having finished our pinnace, we
+went to another island, where we watered, and afterwards departed on the
+1st January, 1579. We went to the northwards till the 20th of that
+month, when we came to an island on the coast of Brazil, near a town
+called St Vincent, inhabited by the Portuguese, which is in lat. 24° S.
+Here we lost our pinnace in foul weather, together with her crew of
+eight men. And here also our ship was in great danger, in consequence of
+a strong current, which almost forced her on shore before we were aware,
+so that we had to drop anchor in the open sea, broke our cable and lost
+our anchor, and had to let fell another, in weighing which afterwards
+our men were sore distressed; for, owing to the heaving of the ship with
+the sea, the capstan ran round with so much violence as to throw the men
+from the bars, dashed out the brains of one man, broke the leg of
+another, and severely hurt several more. At length we hove up our
+anchor, and ran to a place called Tanay. where we rode under the lee of
+an island, whence we had a supply of wood and water.
+
+[Footnote 43: Called Cape Victory by Mr Cliffe.--E.]
+
+While at this place, three Portuguese came aboard in a canoe, desiring
+to know who we were and what we wanted. Our captain made answer, that we
+were Englishmen, and had brought commodities with us for their country,
+if they would trade with us, at which they seemed much surprised, as
+they said they had never before heard of any English ship being in that
+country. So they went ashore, taking one of our men with them to speak
+with the governor of the town, while we detained one of the Portuguese
+as a pledge. Soon after there came another canoe on board, in which was
+one Portuguese, all the rest being naked natives of the country. From
+this man we had two small oxen, a young hog, and several fowls, with
+pome-citrons, lemons, oranges, and other fruits, for which our captain
+gave them linen cloth, combs, knives, and other articles of small value.
+In the mean time, the governor of the town sent word that we should have
+nothing, unless the ship was brought into the harbour, to which our
+captain would not consent, lest they might betray us.
+
+Receiving back our man, and returning the Portuguese pledge, we went
+afterwards to the island of St. Sebastian, where we took fish. At this
+place the Portuguese would have betrayed us, had not a Brasilian slave
+informed us by signs, that they were coming in canoes to take us, as it
+actually fell out: For, next morning, they came on in twelve or fourteen
+canoes, some of these having forty men; but being on our guard they
+retired. That same night, two of our men carried away our boat,
+deserting to the Portuguese. Leaving this place, we had sight of Cape St
+Augustine in lat. 8° S. We afterwards had sight of the isle of Fernando
+Noronha, within three degrees of the equator. We crossed the line on the
+13th of April, and got sight of the north star on the 19th of that
+month.
+
+From the 1st to the 5th of May, we sailed about 100 leagues through the
+_Sea of Weeds_, under the tropic of Cancer. Holding our course from
+thence to the N.E. till we were in lat. 47° N. we changed our course on
+the 22nd May to E.N.E. The 29th of May we had soundings in seventy
+fathoms on white ooze, being then in lat. 51° N. The 30th of May we got
+sight of St Ives on the north coast of Cornwall, and arrived on the 2nd
+of June at Ilfracomb, in Devonshire.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III.
+
+VOYAGE OF SIR THOMAS CANDISH ROUND THE WORLD, IN 1586--1588.[44]
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+
+It was the constant policy, during the reign of queen Elizabeth, to
+encourage, as much as possible, the flame of public spirit in private
+individuals, by shewing the utmost readiness on all occasions to honour
+all who performed any remarkable service to their country, though
+sparing of such marks of favour on other occasions. By this wise
+conduct, and by her frequent public discourses on the glory resulting
+from an active life, she excited many of the young nobility, and
+gentlemen of easy fortunes, to hazard their persons and estates in the
+public service, exciting a desire of fame even among the wealthy, and by
+this means uniting the rich, who desired to purchase honour, and the
+indigent, who sought to procure the means of living, in the same
+pursuits. It thus happened in her reign, that such men were of most use
+to their country, as are scarcely of any utility in other reigns; for,
+merit being then the only recommendation at court, those were most
+forward to expose themselves in generous undertakings, who would at any
+other time have thought themselves excused from such dangers and
+fatigues.
+
+[Footnote 44: Hakluyt, IV. 816. Harris, Col. I. 23. Callender, Voy. I.
+424. The earliest account of this voyage, according to the Bibliotheque
+Universelle des Voyages, I. 113, appears to have been published in Dutch
+at Amsterdam, in folio, in 1598. But must assuredly have been a
+translation from the English.--E.]
+
+Thus the earls of Cumberland and Essex, Sir Richard Greenvile, Sir
+Walter Raleigh, Sir Humphrey Gilbert, Sir Robert Dudley, and, many other
+persons of rank and fortune, employed great sums of money, and exposed
+themselves to the greatest dangers, in expeditions against the
+Spaniards, making discoveries in distant parts of the world, and
+planting colonies, which were the glory of those times. Among these, no
+one distinguished himself more than the gentleman whose voyage forms the
+subject of this chapter: whether we consider the expence he incurred,
+the difficulties he encountered, or the success of his enterprise; all
+of which proceeded from that greatness of mind and ardent desire of
+fame, which taught him to despise danger and to encounter fatigue, at an
+age when most men of fortune think the season of youth a sufficient
+excuse for the indulgence of luxury and ease.
+
+Thomas Candish, or Cavendish, of Trimley, in the county of Suffolk,
+Esquire, was a gentleman of an honourable family and large estate, which
+lay in the neighbourhood of Ipswich, then a place of very considerable
+trade. This circumstance gave him an early inclination for the sea,
+which he gratified as soon as he came of age, by selling part of his
+estate, and employing the money in equipping a stout bark of 120 tons,
+called the Tiger, in which he accompanied Sir Richard Greenvile in his
+voyage to Virginia in 1585. In this expedition he underwent many dangers
+and difficulties, without any profit, but returned safe to Falmouth on
+the 6th October of the same year. This want of success did not
+discourage him from undertaking still greater and more hazardous
+expeditions. Having, in his voyage to Virginia, seen a considerable part
+of the Spanish West Indies, and conversed with some persons who had
+sailed with Sir Francis Drake in, his circumnavigation, he became
+desirous of undertaking a similar voyage, as well for repairing the loss
+he had sustained in this first expedition, as to emulate that great and
+fortunate commander, who was now raised to the highest honours in his
+profession.
+
+Returning home, therefore, he immediately applied himself to make such
+preparations as were necessary for the accomplishment of his new design;
+and either sold or mortgaged his estate, to procure a sufficient sum for
+building and equipping two such ships as he deemed requisite for the
+voyage; using such diligence, that his carpenters were at work upon his
+largest ship within a month, and in six months more his little squadron
+was entirely finished, and completely supplied with every necessary for
+the voyage.
+
+The narrative of this voyage is chiefly taken from that given by Harris,
+compared and corrected from that in the collection of Hakluyt, which is
+said to have been written by Mr. Francis Pretty of Eye, in Suffolk, a
+gentleman who sailed, in the expedition. In Hakluyt, this
+circumnavigation is thus styled:--"The admirable and prosperous voyage
+of the worshipful Mr. Thomas Candish of Trimley, in the county of
+Suffolk, Esquire, into the South Sea, and from thence round about the
+circumference of the whole earth, began in the year of our Lord 1586,
+and finished 1588."
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Narrative of the Voyage from England to the Pacific_.
+
+The larger ship of this little squadron was named the Desire, of 140
+tons burden, and the lesser the Content of 60 tons, to which was added a
+bark of 40 tons, called the Hugh Gallant, all supplied at his own
+expence with two years provisions, and manned with 123 officers and men,
+most of them men of experience, and some of whom had served under Sir
+Francis Drake. For their better encouragement, he entered into a fair
+agreement with them, with respect to the proportions in which all prizes
+should be shared among them. He was likewise careful in providing maps,
+sea charts, and draughts, and all such accounts as could be procured of
+voyages already made into those parts which he intended to visit.
+Likewise, by means of his patron, Lord Hansdon, the lord-chamberlain, he
+procured a commission from Queen Elizabeth.
+
+Having thus completed his preparations, he set out from London on the
+10th July, 1586, for Harwich, where he embarked in the Desire, and
+sailed thence for Plymouth, where he arrived on the 18th, and waited
+there for some of his company till the 21st of that month, when he
+hoisted sail on his intended voyage. On the 25th of that month, one Mr.
+Hope died, of a wound received in a duel, during their stay at Plymouth.
+Next day, they fell in with five ships of Biscay, well manned, coming,
+as they supposed, from the great bank of Newfoundland, which attacked
+the Desire; but Mr. Candish gave them so warm a reception, that they
+were glad to sheer off, and continued their course without giving him
+any farther disturbance. As it grew dark, and he feared losing sight of
+his consorts, Mr. Candish did not continue the chase.
+
+They fell in with the island of Fuertaventura, on the 1st August, whence
+they sailed for Rio del Oro and Cape Blanco, and thence along the coast
+of Guinea, with which navigation Mr Brewer, who sailed in the Desire,
+was well acquainted. The men now began to complain much of the scurvy,
+wherefore it was resolved to put them on shore for their recovery on the
+first opportunity. They made Sierra Leona on the 23d of August, and
+reached its southern side on the 25th, where they had five fathoms at
+the lowest ebb; having had for about fourteen leagues, while running
+into this harbour, from eight to sixteen fathoms. At this place they
+destroyed a negro town, because the inhabitants had killed one of their
+men with a poisoned arrow. Some of the men went four miles up the
+harbour in a boat, on the 3d September, where they caught plenty of
+fish; and going on shore, procured some lemons. They saw also some
+buffaloes, on their return to the ship. The 6th they went out of the
+harbour of Sierra Leona, and staid one tide three leagues from the point
+at its mouth, the tide there flowing S.W.
+
+The 7th they departed for one of the islands which lie about ten leagues
+from the point of Sierra Leona, called the Banana isles,[45] and
+anchored that same day off the principal isle, on which they only found
+a few plantains. At the east end of this island they found a town, but
+no inhabitants, and concluded that the negroes sometimes resort thither,
+by seeing the remains of their provisions. There is no fresh water on
+the south side of this island that they could find; but there is in
+three or four places on its north side. The whole island was one entire
+wood, except a few small cleared spots where some huts stood, and these
+were encompassed by plantain-trees, the fruit of which is an excellent
+food. This place is subject to severe thunder-storms, with much rain, in
+September.
+
+[Footnote 45: Harris erroneously names these the islands of Cape Verd,
+which are at a vast distance from Sierra Leona. The Banana isles are in
+lat. 8° N. and long. 12° 30' W. from Greenwich. In Hakluyt these are
+called the isles of Madrabumba, and are said to be ten leagues from the
+point of Sierra Leona.--E.]
+
+Leaving these islands and the African coast on the 10th September, and
+holding their course W.S.W. obliquely across the Atlantic, they fell in
+with a great mountain in Brazil, on the 31st of October, twenty-four
+leagues from Cape _Frio_. This mountain has a high round top, shewing
+from afar like a little town. On the 1st November, they stood in between
+the island of St Sebastian and the main; where they carried their things
+on shore, and erected a forge, and built a pinnace, repairing also every
+thing that was out of order, in which work they were detained till the
+23d of November. Sailing from this place on the 26th, they fell in with
+the coast of South America again in lat. 47° 20' S. whence they
+proceeded along shore till they came to lat. 48° S. finding a steep
+beach all along. On the 27th of November they came to a harbour, into
+which Candish first entered, giving it the name of Port Desire, from
+that of his ship.[46] Near this harbour they found an island or two well
+stocked with seals, and another in which there were vast numbers of grey
+gulls.[47]
+
+[Footnote 46: As laid down in modern maps, the latitude of Port Desire
+is only 47° 15' S.]
+
+[Footnote 47: Probably penguins.--E.]
+
+This haven of Port Desire was found very favourable for careening and
+graving of ships, as the tide there ebbed and flowed considerably. At
+this place the savages wounded two of the Englishmen with their arrows,
+which were made of canes or reeds, tipt with sharpened flints. These
+savage natives of the country round Port Desire were exceedingly wild
+and rude, and as it would seem of a gigantic race, as the measure of one
+of their foot marks was eighteen inches long.[48] This agrees well with
+the assertion of Magellan, though some pains have been taken to
+represent that as fabulous. Magellan called this country Patagonia, and
+its inhabitants Patagons, meaning to signify that they were five cubits,
+or _seven feet and a half high_. Hence, as the Portuguese are not
+commonly very tall, we need not wonder if they styled them giants. If we
+take the usual proportion of the human foot, as between a fifth and a
+sixth part of the height of the whole body, the account given by
+Magellan agrees very exactly with this fact afforded us by Mr Candish;
+and it will be seen in the sequel, that this is not falsified by any of
+our subsequent navigators. When any of these savages die, he is buried
+in a grave constructed of stones near the sea-side, all his darts being
+fastened about his tomb, and his treasure, consisting of shells, laid
+under his head.
+
+[Footnote 48: Without meaning to impugn the received opinion, that the
+Patagons are beyond the ordinary size of man, it may be permitted to
+say, that the evidence, in the text, the only one here adduced, is
+altogether inconclusive; and the subsequent reflections are evidently
+those of Harris, not of Candish.--E.]
+
+They left Port Desire on the 28th December, and anchored near an island
+three leagues to the southward. The 30th they came to a rock, much like
+the Eddystone at Plymouth, about five leagues off the land, in lat 48°
+30' S. and within a mile of it had soundings in eight fathoms, on rocky
+ground. Continuing their course along shore S.S.W. they found vast
+numbers of seals every where on the coast. January 2d, 1587, they fell
+in with a great white cape in lat. 52° S. and had seven fathoms within a
+league of the cape. Next day they came to another cape, in lat. 52° 45'
+S. whence runs a long beach about a league to the southwards, reaching
+to the opening into the Straits of Magellan.[49] January 6th, they
+entered the straits, which they found in some places five or six leagues
+wide, but in others considerably narrower. The 7th, between the mouth of
+the straits and its narrowest part, they took a Spaniard, who had been
+left there with twenty-three others of that nation, being all that
+remained alive of four hundred, who had been landed three years before
+in these straits. This Spaniard shewed them the hull of a small bark,
+supposed to have been left by Sir Francis Drake.
+
+[Footnote 49: The cape at the north side of the eastern entrance into
+the Straits of Magellan, is named Cape Virgin, and is in lat 52° 28' S.
+The great white cape in lat. 52° S. is not so easily ascertained. Cape
+Blanco, on this coast, is in lat. 47° S. which cannot have any reference
+to the white cape of the text.--E.]
+
+The eastern mouth of the straits is in lat. 52° S. From thence to the
+narrowest part is fourteen leagues W. by N. From thence to Penguin
+Island is ten leagues W.S.W. by S. They anchored at Penguin Island on
+the 8th January, where they killed and salted a great store of seals, to
+serve as sea provisions in case of need. Leaving this place on the 9th,
+they sailed S.S.W. The fortress built in these straits by the Spaniards,
+called _Ciudad del Rey Felippe_, had four bulwarks or bastions, in each
+of which was one large cannon, all of which had been buried, and their
+carriages left standing. The English dug them all up, and carried them
+away. Tins city seemed to have been well contrived, especially in its
+situation in regard to wood and water; but miserable was the life this
+forlorn remnant of Spaniards had endured for the last two years, during
+which they had hardly been able to procure any other food than a scanty
+supply of shell-fish, except when they had the good fortune to surprise
+a deer, coming down from the mountains in search of water.
+
+The object of the Spaniards, in erecting this fortress, was to have
+fortified the straits, so as to have excluded all other nations from any
+passage into the South Sea: but, besides the barrenness of the soil, and
+excessive severity of the climate their most implacable enemies, the
+Indians, frequently assailed them, so that they were reduced to the last
+extremity of distress. All the stores they had brought from Spain were
+expended, and none could be procured in the country, which produced
+nothing but deer, and when hunting these for the preservation of their
+lives, they were sure to be fallen upon by the Indians. At length almost
+all the Spaniards died in their houses, and the stench of the putrefying
+carcasses became so intolerable to the few survivors, that they were
+forced to quit the fortress, and to range along the seacoast living upon
+roots, leaves, and sea weeds, or any animals they could occasionally
+fall in with. In this miserable extremity they had determined to attempt
+exploring their way to the Rio Plata, and were already on their way,
+when this Spaniard was taken by the English.
+
+Mr Candish named the haven where the fortress stood _Port Famine_, owing
+to the utter want of all necessaries. It is in lat. 53° S. Leaving this
+place on the 14th, they ran five leagues S.W. to Cape Froward, in the
+southernmost part of the straits, in lat. 54° S. Sailing five leagues W.
+by N. from this cape, they put into a bay, called Muscle Cove, from the
+great quantities of muscles found there. Leaving that place on the 21st,
+and sailing N. by W. ten leagues, they came to a fair bay, which Candish
+named Elizabeth Bay. Leaving that place on the 22d, they found a good
+river two leagues farther on, up which a boat was towed for three miles.
+The country about this river was pleasant and level, but all the other
+land on both sides of the straits was rugged, mountainous, and rocky,
+inhabited by a strong and well-made, but very brutish kind of savages,
+who are said to have eaten many of the Spaniards, and seemed much
+disposed to have feasted also on English flesh; but they failed in their
+attempts to circumvent them. Discovering a plot laid by these savages to
+entrap him and his men, Candish gave them a volley of musquetry, which
+slew several of them, and the rest ran away.
+
+Leaving this river, they sailed two leagues farther, to an inlet named
+St Jerome's channel; whence, proceeding three or four leagues W. they
+came to a cape to the northward, whence the course to the western
+entrance of the straits is N.W. and N.W. by W. for about thirty-four
+leagues; so that the entire length of these straits is ninety leagues.
+This western entrance is in lat. 52° 40' S. nearly under the same
+parallel with the eastern mouth. In consequence of storms and excessive
+rains, they were forced to remain in a harbour near this western mouth
+of the straits till the 23d of February. By the excessive rains, pouring
+down with extreme fury in torrents from the mountains, they were brought
+into extreme danger; and were also much distressed for want of food, as
+the excessive severity of the weather hardly permitted their landing,
+to range the country in search of a supply In their passage through
+these straits, it was observed that there were harbours on both shores,
+at every mile or two, tolerably safe and convenient for small ships.
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_Transactions on the Western Coast of America_.
+
+The weather moderating, they entered into the great South Sea, or
+Pacific Ocean, on the 24th February, 1587, observing on the south side
+of the entrance a very high cape, with an adjoining low point; while, at
+the northern side of the entrance there were four or five islands, six
+leagues from the main land, having much broken and sunken ground among
+and around them. In the night of the 1st March, there arose a great
+storm, in which they lost sight of the Hugh Gallant, being then in lat.
+49° S. and forty-five leagues from the land. This storm lasted three or
+four days, in which time the Hugh sprung a leak, and was tossed about in
+this unknown sea, devoid of all help, being every moment ready to sink.
+By great exertions, however, she was kept afloat; and on the 15th, in
+the morning, she got in between the island of St Mary and the main,
+where she again met the admiral and the Content, which two ships had
+secured themselves during two days of the storm, at the island of Mocha,
+in lat. 38° S'.[50]
+
+[Footnote 50: Mocha is in lat. 38° 20', and the isles of St Mary in 37°,
+both S.]
+
+At this place some of the company went ashore well armed, and were met
+by the Indians, who gave them a warm reception with their bows and
+arrows. These Indians were of the district in Chili called Araucania, a
+country rich in gold, and consequently very tempting to the avaricious
+Spaniards, which accordingly they had repeatedly invaded, but to no
+purpose, as the natives always defended themselves so valiantly, that
+their enemies could never subdue them. On the present occasion,
+mistaking the English for Spaniards, these brave and desperate Araucans
+gave Candish a hostile welcome. After this skirmish, Candish went with
+his ships under the lee of the west side of St Mary's island, where he
+found good anchorage in six fathoms. This island, in lat. 37° S. abounds
+in hogs, poultry, and various kinds of fruit; but the inhabitants are
+held under such absolute slavery by the Spaniards, that they dare not
+kill a hog, or even a hen, for their own use; and although the Spaniards
+have made them converts to Christianity, they use them more like dogs
+than men or Christians.
+
+The admiral went ashore on the 16th March, with seventy or eighty men
+well armed, and was met by two Indian chiefs, who conducted him to a
+chapel, round which were several store-houses, well filled with wheat
+and barley, as clean and fair as any in England. He accordingly provided
+his ships with a sufficient store of grain from this place, and laid in
+besides an ample supply of hogs, hens, potatoes, dried dog-fish, and
+maize or Guinea wheat. The admiral invited the two principal Indians to
+an entertainment on board; and the wine having sharpened their wit, to
+perceive that the admiral and his men were not Spaniards, as they had
+hitherto supposed them, they began to talk very freely about the gold
+mines, saying that the English might procure gold to their full content,
+by going into the country of the Araucans. But not fully understanding
+them, as the information was mostly given by signs, the admiral did not
+prosecute this proposed adventure, but proceeded on his voyage.
+
+Leaving the island of St Mary on the 18th in the morning, they sailed
+all that day N.N.E. ten leagues. The 19th they steered in with the land,
+E.N.E. and anchored under an island in the Bay of Conception, in lat.
+36° 36' S. The 30th they came into the Bay of Quintero, in lat. 32° 45'
+S. and next day a party of fifty or sixty men, well armed, marched seven
+or eight miles into the country. In their march, they saw vast herds of
+wild cattle, with horses, dogs, hares, rabbits, partridges, and other
+birds, with many fine rivers, well stocked with wild fowl. Having
+travelled as far as they conveniently could for the mountains, and
+having rested and refreshed on the banks of a pleasant river, they
+returned in good order to the ships at night, without meeting any
+remarkable adventure; although a party of 200 horse had been abroad all
+that day in search of them, upon information of some Spaniards who had
+seen them the preceding day, but durst not venture to attack them,
+keeping always at a distance on the hills. They had at this time a short
+conference with three Spanish horsemen, through the medium of the poor
+half-starved Spaniard they took on board in the Straits of Magellan;
+but, in spite of his many oaths and protestations never to forsake
+Candish, he took the opportunity to mount on horseback behind one of his
+countrymen, and got off.
+
+Next day, the 1st April, some of the English being on shore filling
+their water-casks, the Spaniards became bolder, and watching an
+opportunity when the sailors were hard at work, poured down with their
+200 horse from the hills, slew some of them, and made a few prisoners.
+But this glorious victory was soon snatched from their hands by the
+arrival of a reinforcement of fifteen English, who rescued the
+prisoners, killed twenty-four of the Spaniards, and drove the rest back
+to the mountains. After this, they continued in the road till the 5th,
+and watered there in spite of the Spaniards. On the 5th they weighed
+anchor, and went to a small island about a league from the bay, which is
+full of penguins and other sea fowl, of which they provided themselves
+with what store they wanted; after which they sailed N. and N. by W. in
+order to prosecute their voyage.
+
+The 15th April they came to _Moro Moreno_, in lat. 23° 30' S. under the
+tropic of Capricorn, where there is an excellent harbour, made by means
+of an island, having an entrance for ships at either end. The admiral
+went ashore here with thirty men, and was met by the Indians, who
+brought them water and wood on their backs. These are a simple sort of
+people, living in a wild and savage manner, in great dread of the
+Spaniards. They brought the admiral and his company to their houses,
+about two miles from the harbour. These were only constructed of a few
+rafters laid across upon forked sticks stuck in the ground, having a few
+boughs laid over them by way of a roof. Their beds were the skins of
+wild beasts laid on the ground; and their food little else than raw
+stinking fish. When any of them dies, he is buried with all his arms and
+goods, as bows and arrows, and even his canoe is laid in the earth along
+with him. Their canoes, if such they may be called, consist of two skin
+bags, like large bladders, blown up with quills at one end, and fastened
+together by the sinews of some wild beast; yet in these they think
+nothing of venturing to sea, loading them even with great quantities of
+fish, part of which they have to give in tribute to the Spaniards, the
+rest being kept to stink for their own eating.
+
+On the 3d May, they came into a bay on which were three small towns,
+Paracca, Chincha, and Pisco, which latter is in lat. 13° 20' S.[51] They
+landed here, and took some provisions, as wine, bread, poultry and figs,
+from the houses, but could not get ashore at the best of these towns,
+owing to the sea running too high. By this time; they had made two
+valuable prizes, laden with sugar, melasses, maiz, cordovan leather,
+_montego de porco_, packs of painted calicoes, Indian coats, marmalade,
+hens, and other articles, which would have yielded £20,000, if there had
+been any opportunity for selling their cargoes. That not being the case,
+they took out as much as could be conveniently stowed in their own
+ships, burning their two prizes with the rest of their contents.
+
+[Footnote 51: Pisco, the principal of these towns, is in lat. 16° 43'
+S.]
+
+The 26th May, they came into the road Payta, in lat. 5° 4' S. the town
+being very neat and clean, and containing about 200 houses. Landing here
+with sixty or seventy men, Candish had a skirmish with the inhabitants,
+whom he beat out of the town, forcing them to take refuge in the hills,
+whence they continued to fire at the English, but would not venture a
+fair battle on the plain ground. Having possessed themselves of the
+town, the English marched after the enemy on the hill, and put them
+completely to the rout, seizing all their baggage, which they brought
+back with them to the town. They here found all sort of household stuff,
+together with warehouses well filled with various kinds of goods, and
+twenty-five pound weight of silver in pieces of eight. After taking away
+what plunder they found convenient, they set fire to the town, which was
+burnt to the ground, and destroyed likewise a bark at anchor in the
+roads; after which they set sail for Puna.
+
+They arrived at Puna, in lat. 3° 10' S. on the 25th of May, when they
+found a ship of 250 tons at anchor in the harbour. After sinking her,
+they went ashore. The lord of this island, styled the Caçique of Puna,
+was an Indian by birth, but having married a Spanish woman, he became a
+Christian, and made all his subjects follow his example. He had a
+sumptuous and well-contrived palace near the shore, with curious gardens
+adjoining, and fair prospects, both to the water and up the country. All
+the inhabitants of this island were kept continually employed in
+fabricating cables, such abundance of which are made here by the Indian
+subjects of this caçique; that most of the ships navigating the South
+Sea are supplied from hence. This island is nearly as large as the isle
+of Wight in England, being about forty English miles from S.W. to N.E.
+and sixteen in the opposite direction. It enjoys a great share in the
+blessings of nature; for, although it has no mines of gold or silver, it
+affords every thing in abundance that is necessary to the comforts of
+life. The pastures are excellent, and are well stored with horses, oxen,
+sheep, and goats, yielding abundance of milk; it has also plenty of
+poultry, turkeys, ducks of a large size, and pigeons. The caçique has
+several orchards, yielding a great variety of fine fruits, as oranges,
+lemons, figs, pomegranates, pumpkins, melons, and many others; with a
+variety of odoriferous plants, as rosemary, thyme, and the like. One of
+these gardens or orchards was planted with the bombast cotton tree,
+which grows in pods, in each of which there are seven or eight seeds.
+
+The 29th of May, Candish went to an island near Puna, into which the
+caçique had conveyed all the valuable furniture of his palace, with
+other things of value. These stores were all discovered, and plundered
+of every thing thought worth carrying on board the ships, and the rest
+destroyed. The church also of Puna, which stood near the palace, was
+burnt down, and its five bells carried to the ships. On the 2d June, the
+English were attacked by 100 Spaniards, who killed or took prisoners
+twelve of their men, losing forty-six of their own in the encounter.
+Candish landed again that same day with seventy English, and had another
+battle with the Spaniards, who were joined by 200 Indians armed with
+bows and arrows. The English were victorious, after which they made
+great havock of the fields and orchards, burnt four ships on the stocks,
+and left the town of 300 houses a heap of rubbish. Besides this
+principal town, there were two others on the island of 200 houses each,
+so that Puna was the best settled island on all this coast.
+
+Setting sail from Puna on the 5th June, they sailed to Rio Dolce, where
+they watered. They passed the equinoctial on the 12th, continuing their
+course northwards all the rest of that month. The 1st July, they had
+sight of New Spain, being four leagues from the land in 10° N. The 9th
+they took a new ship of 120 tons, in which was one Michael Sancius, a
+native of Provence, a very skilful coasting pilot for these seas, whom
+Candish retained as his pilot, and from whom he got the first hint of
+the great ship Anna Maria, which he afterwards took on her voyage from
+the Philippine islands. Taking all the men, and every thing of any value
+from the ship of Sancius, they set her on fire. The 26th they came to
+anchor in the mouth of the river Capalico, and the same night went in
+the pinnace with thirty men to Guatalco, two leagues from that river, in
+15° 70' N. and burnt both the town and custom-house, which was a large
+handsome building, in which there were laid up 600 bags of indigo, and
+400 bags of cacao, every bag of the former being worth forty crowns, and
+each of the latter worth ten. These cacaos serve among the people of
+these parts both as food and money, being somewhat like almonds, yet not
+quite so pleasant, and pass in trade by way of small change, 150 of them
+being equal in value to a rial of plate.
+
+They set sail from Capalico on the 28th, the sea running so high that
+they could not fill their water casks, and came to Guatalco that same
+night. Next day Candish went ashore with thirty men, marching two miles
+into the woods, where he took a _mestizo_ belonging to the custom-house
+of that town, having with him a considerable quantity of goods, both
+which and their master were carried to the ships. The 24th August,
+Candish went with thirty men in the pinnace to the haven of _Puerto de
+Navidad_ in lat. 19° 24' N. where Sancius had informed him there would
+be a prize; but, before their arrival, she had gone twelve leagues
+farther to fish for pearls. They here made prisoner of a mulatto, who
+had been sent to give notice of the English, all along the coast of New
+Gallicia, and got possession of all his letters. They likewise burnt the
+town, and two ships of 200 tons here building, after which they returned
+to the ships.
+
+They came on the 26th into the bay of St Jago, where they watered at a
+good river, which yielded them plenty of fish, and where they found some
+pearls. This bay is in lat. 19° 18' N. Leaving this bay on the 2d
+September, they came next day into the bay of Malacca, a league westward
+from port Navidad, and a good place for ships to ride in. That day,
+Candish went ashore with about thirty men, to an Indian town named
+Acatlan, about two leagues from the road.[52] This town or village
+consisted of twenty or thirty houses and a church, which they
+demolished, and then returned at night to the ships. Leaving this bay on
+the 4th, they came on the 8th to the road of Chacalla, eighteen leagues
+from Cape Corientes. On the 9th, Candish sent a party of forty men,
+guided by Sancius, which, after marching through woods and deserts,
+lighted upon a few families, some of which were Indians, and others
+Spanish and Portuguese, all of whom were brought to the ships. The women
+were ordered to fetch plantains, lemons, oranges, and other fruits, in
+reward for which all their husbands were set free, except a Spaniard
+named Sembrano, and Diego, a Portuguese.
+
+[Footnote 52: Guatlan is the name of a bay on this coast, and which is
+probably corrupted in the text to Acatlan.--E.]
+
+On the 12th they arrived at the island of St Andrew, which is very full
+of wood, and where they found plenty of fowls and seals, together with a
+sort of serpents, or lizards rather, called _Iguanos_, having four feet
+and a long sharp tail, which they found good eating. Leaving this isle,
+they came to the road of Mazatlan on the 24th, lying under the tropic of
+Cancer. The river here is large within, but much obstructed by a bar at
+its mouth. The bay abounds with fish, and there are abundance of good
+fruits up the country. Departing from this bay on the 27th, they came to
+an island, a league north from Mazatlan,[53] where they heeled their
+ships, and rebuilt their pinnace. On this isle, they found fresh water,
+by digging two or three feet into the sand, otherwise they must have
+gone back twenty or thirty leagues for water, being advised by one
+Flores, a Spanish prisoner, to dig in the sands, where no water or sign
+of any could be perceived. Having amply supplied the ships with water,
+they remained at this island till the 9th October, and then sailed from
+Cape San Lucar, the S.W. point of California, in lat. 22° 50' N. which
+they fell in with on the 14th, observing that it much resembled the
+Needles at the Isle of Wight, which had been before noticed by Sir
+Francis Drake. Within this cape, there is a large bay, called by the
+Spaniards _Aguada Segura_,[54] into which falls a fine fresh-water
+river, the banks of which are usually inhabited by many Indians in the
+summer. They went into this bay, where they again watered, and remained
+waiting for the Accapulco ship till the 4th November, the wind
+continuing all that time to hang westerly.
+
+[Footnote 53: In our best modern maps no such island is to be found; but
+about the same distance to the S. is a cluster of small isles.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 54: Probably that now called the bay of St Barnaby, about
+twenty miles E.N.E. from Cape San Lucar.--E.]
+
+The 4th November, putting to sea, the Desire and Content beat to and fro
+to windward off the head land of California; and that very morning one
+of the men in the admiral, going aloft to the topmast, espied a ship
+bearing in from seaward for the cape. Putting every thing in readiness
+for action, Candish gave chase, and coming up with her in the afternoon,
+gave her a broadside and a volley of small arms. This ship was the Santa
+Anna of 700 tons burden, belonging to the king of Spain, and commanded
+by the admiral of the South Sea. Candish instantly boarded, finding the
+Spaniards in a good posture of defence, and was repulsed with the loss
+of two men slain and four or five wounded. He then renewed the action
+with his cannon and musquetry, raking the St Ann, and killing or
+wounding great numbers, as she was full of men. The Spaniards long
+defended themselves manfully; but the ship being sore wounded, so that
+the water poured in a-main, they at last hung out a flag of truce,
+praying for quarter, and offering to surrender. This was immediately
+agreed to by Candish, who ordered them to lower their sails, and to send
+their chief officers to his ship. They accordingly hoisted out their
+boat, in which came the captain, the pilot, and one of the chief
+merchants, who surrendered themselves, and gave an account of the value
+of their ship, in which were 122,000 pezos in gold, with prodigious
+quantities of rich silks, satins, damasks, and divers kinds of
+merchandise, such as musk, and all manner of provisions, almost as
+acceptable to the English as riches, having been long at sea.
+
+The prize thus gloriously obtained, Candish returned to _Aguada_, or
+_Puerto Seguro_, on the 6th November, where he landed all the Spaniards,
+to the number of 150 persons, men and women, giving them plenty of wine
+and victuals, with the sails of their ship and some planks, to build
+huts or tents for them to dwell in. The owners of the prize being thus
+disposed of, the next thing was to share the booty; which ungracious
+work of distribution soon involved Candish in all the troubles of a
+mutiny, every one being eager for gold, yet no one satisfied with his
+share. This disturbance was most violent in the Content; but all was
+soon appeased and compromised by the candid and generous behaviour of
+Candish. The 17th of November, being the coronation day of queen
+Elizabeth, was celebrated by discharges of ordnance, and vollies of
+small shot, and at night by fireworks. Of the prisoners taken in the
+Spanish ship, Candish reserved two Japanese boys, three natives of the
+island of Luzon or Manilla, a Portuguese who had been in China and
+Japan, and a Spanish pilot, who was thoroughly versant in the navigation
+between New Spain and the Philippine islands. Accapulco is the haven
+whence they fit out for the Philippines, and the Ladrones are their
+stated places of refreshment on this voyage.
+
+Having dismissed the Spanish captain with a noble present, and
+sufficient provision for his defence against the Indians, and removed
+everything from the prize which his ships could contain, Candish set the
+Santa Anna on fire on the 19th November, having still 500 tons of her
+goods remaining, and saw her burnt to the water's edge.
+
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_Voyage Home to England_.
+
+This great business, for which they had so long waited, being now
+accomplished, they set sail cheerfully on their return for England. The
+Content staid some short time behind the Desire, which went on before,
+expecting she would soon follow, but she never rejoined company.
+Pursuing the voyage, therefore, in the Desire, Candish directed his
+course for the Ladrones across the Pacific Ocean, these islands being
+nearly 1800 leagues distant from this harbour of _Aguada Segura_ in
+California. This passage took forty-five days, from the 19th November,
+1587, to the 3d January, 1588. On this day, early in the morning, they
+had sight of Guam, one of the Ladrones, in lat. 13° 40' N. and long.
+143° 30' E. Sailing with a gentle gale before the wind, they came within
+two leagues of the island, where they saw sixty or seventy canoes full
+of savages, who brought cocoas, plantains, potatoes, and fresh fish, to
+exchange for some of their commodities. They gave them in return some
+pieces of old iron, which they hung upon small cords and fishing lines,
+and so lowered down to the canoes, getting back, in the same manner,
+what the savages offered in exchange. In the course of this traffic the
+savages crowded so much about the ship, that two of their canoes were
+broken; yet none of the savages were drowned, as they were almost as
+familiar with the water as if they had been fishes. The savages
+continued following the ship, and would not quit her company till
+several shots were fired at them; though 'tis ten to one if any of them
+were killed, as they are so very nimble, throwing themselves immediately
+into the water, and diving beyond the reach of danger on the slightest
+warning.
+
+These islanders were large handsome men, extraordinarily fat, and of a
+tawny colour, mostly having very long hair, some wearing it tied up in
+large knots on the crown of their heads, like certain wooden images at
+the heads of their canoes. Their canoes were very artificially made,
+considering that they use no edge-tools in their construction; and are
+about seven or eight yards in length, by half a yard only in breadth,
+their heads and stems being both alike, and having rafts made of canes
+or reeds on their starboard sides, being also supplied both with masts
+and sails. These latter are made of sedges, and are either square or
+triangular. These canoes have this property, that they will sail almost
+as well against the wind as before it.
+
+On the 19th January, at day-break, Candish fell in with a head-land of
+the Philippine islands, called _Cabo del Espiritu Santo_. The island
+itself [Samar] is of considerable size, consisting of high land in the
+middle, and depressed in its east and west extremities; the latter of
+which runs a great way out to sea. It is in lat. 30° N. being distant
+110 leagues from Guam and about 60 leagues from Manilla, the chief of
+the Philippines.[55] Samar is a woody island, and its inhabitants are
+mostly heathens. Candish spent eleven days in sailing from Guam to this
+place, having had some foul weather, and scarcely carrying any sail for
+two or three nights. Manilla, at this time, was an unwalled town of no
+great strength, yet containing vast riches in gold and valuable
+commodities, and inhabited by six or seven hundred Spaniards. It has a
+constant annual correspondence with Accapulco in New Spain; besides
+which twenty or thirty vessels come thither yearly from China, for
+conducting its trade with the _Sangueloes_: These are Chinese merchants,
+very sharp and sensible men in every thing relating to trade, extremely
+ingenious in all kinds of mechanical contrivances, and the most expert
+embroiderers on silk and satin of any in the world. They will execute
+any form of beast, fowl, or fish, in gold, silver, or silk, having all
+the just proportions and colours in every part, and giving all the life
+and beauty to their work, as if done by the best painter, or even as
+nature has bestowed on the originals. The trade of these men with
+Manilla must be very profitable, as they bring great quantities of gold
+there, and exchange it against silver, weight for weight.[56]
+
+[Footnote 55: The latitude of Cape Espiritu Santo, as given in the test,
+is grossly erroneous, being only 12° 35' N. and its long. 125° 30' E.
+from Greenwich. The difference of longitude from Guam, Guaham, or
+Guaci, the most southerly of the Ladrones, is 17° 45' nearly east, and
+consequently 355 marine leagues. This island is divided from Luzon, or
+Luçonia, the principal island of the Philippines, by the narrow straits
+of San Bernardino; and Cape Espiritu Santo is about 100 leagues, in a
+straight line, from the city of Manilla, which lies to the N.W. Cape
+Espiritu Santo is at the N.W. extremity of the island of Samar.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 56: This surely is an egregious error, as such acute merchants
+as the Chinese are here represented, and actually are, could never be so
+foolish as to give gold for silver, weight for weight. Before the
+present scarcity of bullion, the ordinary European price of exchange,
+was fourteen for one; and perhaps the then price in China might be
+lower, as twelve, eleven, or ten; but equality is quite
+inconceivable.--E.]
+
+The same day on which he fell in with Cape Espiritu Santo, 14th of
+January, 1588, Candish entered in the evening into the straits of San
+Bernardino, between Samar or Cambaia, and the island of Luzon. The 15th
+he fell in with the island of _Capul_, passing a very narrow strait
+between that island and another, in which the current of the tide was
+considerable. In this passage, a ledge of rocks lay off the point of
+Capul, but was passed without danger. Within the point was a fair bay,
+with a good harbour, having anchorage in four fathoms, within a cable's
+length of the shore. Coming to anchor here about ten in the morning, the
+Desire was immediately boarded by a canoe, in which was one of the seven
+chiefs of the island. Passing themselves for Spaniards, the English
+traded with these people for cocoa-nuts and potatoes, giving a yard of
+linen for four cocoa-nuts, and as much for about a quart of potatoes,
+which they found sweet and excellent food, either boiled or roasted.
+
+The caçique or chief who came on board had his skin curiously streaked
+or painted [tatooed], full of strange devices all over his body. Candish
+kept him on board, desiring him to send his servants, who paddled his
+canoe, to bring the other six chiefs to the ship. They came accordingly,
+attended by a great train of the natives, bringing vast quantities of
+hogs and hens, and a full market of cocoa-nuts and potatoes; so that the
+English were occupied the whole day in purchasing, giving eight rials of
+plate for a hog, and one for a hen. At this place, a justly-merited
+punishment was inflicted on a Spanish pilot, taken in the Santa Anna,
+who had plotted to betray them to the Spaniards, and for which he was
+hanged. Candish remained here for nine days, all the time receiving
+ample supplies of fresh victuals, good water, and wood for fuel. The
+islanders are all pagans, who are said to worship the devil, and to
+converse with him. They are of a tawny complexion, and go almost naked;
+the men wearing a small square piece of cloth in front, woven from
+plantain-leaves, and another behind, which is brought up between their
+legs, both being fastened to a girdle round their waists. They are all
+circumcised, and have also a strange custom, hardly practised any where
+else but in Pegu, having a nail of tin in a perforation through the
+glans, which nail is split at one end and rivetted; but which can be
+taken out as they have occasion, and put in again. This is said to have
+been contrived, on the humble petition of the women, to prevent
+perpetrating an unnatural crime, to which they were much addicted.
+
+On the 23d of January, Candish summoned all the caçiques of this island,
+and an hundred more, who had paid him tribute, and then revealed to them
+all, when assembled, that he and his men were Englishmen, and the
+greatest enemies the Spaniards had in the world. At the same time he
+generously restored them, in money, the value of all the tribute they
+had paid to him, in hogs, cocoa-nuts, potatoes, and the like. This
+unexpected generosity astonished the whole assembly, who applauded his
+bounty, and offered to join him with all the forces of their respective
+districts, if he would go to war with the Spaniards. They seemed much
+pleased with finding that Candish and his people were English, and
+thankful for the kindness with which they had been treated. On taking
+leave, they rowed round the ship awhile in their canoes, as if in
+compliment to the English; and Candish caused a gun to be fired at their
+departure.
+
+Setting sail on the 24th, Candish ran along the coast of Luzon, steering
+N.W. between that island and _Masbate_. In the islands thereabout, the
+Spaniards were observed to keep a strict watch, making great fires, and
+discharging their pieces all night, having been much alarmed by the
+arrival of the English. The island of _Panama_ is in many places plain
+and level, affording many large, tall, and straight trees, fit for
+masts, and has several mines of very fine gold, which are possessed by
+the natives. To the south of this is the island of the Negroes, which is
+very large, almost as big as England, and is in lat. 9° N.[57] It
+appeared to consist mostly of low land, and to be very fertile.
+
+[Footnote 57: Negro island reaches from lat. 9° 15' to 11° 45' N. and is
+consequently two and a half degrees from N. to S. about 174 English
+miles, but does not any where exceed thirty miles from E. to W.--E.]
+
+At six in the morning of the 29th of January, they began to pass through
+the straits between Panama and Negro islands, and, after proceeding
+sixteen leagues, they found a fair opening in these straits, trending
+S.W. by S. About this time, being rejoined by their boat, which had been
+sent before them in the morning, Candish sent a Spanish prisoner on
+shore, with a message to his captain, who commanded a ship which lay at
+Panama the night before, desiring him to provide an abundant supply of
+gold against the return of the Desire, as he meant to pay him a visit at
+Manilla, and as that was a long voyage, it merited good entertainment.
+He said farther, that he would have come now, to weigh some of his
+Spanish gold in English scales, if he had possessed a larger boat for
+landing his men on the island.
+
+Proceeding on the voyage, they saw Batochina on the 8th of February, an
+island near Gilolo, in the lat. of 1° N. The 14th of that month they
+fell in with eleven or twelve small flat low islands, almost level with
+the sea, in lat. 3° 10' S. near the Moluccas. March 1st, having passed
+the straits between Java Major and Java Minor, they anchored under the
+S.W. part of Java Major, where they saw some people fishing in a bay
+under the island. The admiral sent a boat to them, in which was a negro
+who could speak the _Moresco_[58] language, which is much used in Java.
+But, being frightened at the approach of the boat, they all got on shore
+and ran away into the woods. One of them, however, came back to the
+shore, on being called to by the negro, and directed where to find fresh
+water; besides which, he undertook to carry a message to the king of
+that part of the island from the admiral, certifying that he had come to
+purchase victuals, or any commodities the country afforded. In
+consequence of this message, nine or ten canoes belonging to the king
+came off, on the 12th March, loaded with all sorts of provisions as deep
+as they could swim; bringing oxen, hogs, hens, geese, eggs, sugar,
+cocoa-nuts, plantains, oranges, lemons, wine, and arrack.
+
+[Footnote 58: Probably the Malay is here meant, and called Moresco or
+Moors, an ordinary term for Mahometans.--E.]
+
+At the same time two Portuguese came off to visit Candish, and to
+enquire about their king, Don Antonio, then residing in England. These
+persons gave him a full account of the manners and customs of the people
+of this island. The king of this part was held in prodigious awe by his
+subjects, over whom he exercised absolute power, insomuch that no man
+was permitted to make a bargain without his leave, on pain of death. He
+had an hundred wives, and his son fifty; who may possibly be happy
+enough while he lives; but when he dies, and his body is burnt, and the
+ashes collected into an urn, the tragedy of his wives begins five days
+afterwards. They are then all conducted to an appointed place, where the
+favourite wife throws a ball from her hand, and where it stops marks the
+place of their deaths. Being come there, and turning their faces to the
+east, they all draw their daggers and stab themselves to the heart;
+after which they smear themselves with their own blood, and thus die.
+
+The men of this island are excellent soldiers, being hardy, valiant, and
+desperate to the last degree, sticking at nothing commanded by their
+king, however dangerous; and, should he even command them to plunge a
+dagger into their own breast, or to leap from a precipice, or into a den
+of wild beasts, they instantly obey: For the displeasure of their
+sovereign is as certain death as the point of a sword, or the fangs of a
+beast of prey. Their complexion is tawny, like the other natives of
+India, and they go entirely naked; but their women are of a fairer hue,
+and are more modestly cloathed than the men.
+
+After this relation of the Portuguese, having satisfied the Javans for
+the provisions they had supplied, and received a promise of good
+entertainment to the English when they might return to their island,
+Candish took leave of them, making a present to their king of three
+large cannon. Next day, being the 16th of March, he made sail for the
+Cape of Good Hope, spending all the rest of that month, all April, and a
+part of May, in traversing the vast ocean between the island of Java and
+the southern extremity of Africa, making many observations on the
+appearances of the stars, the weather, winds, tides, currents,
+soundings, and bearings and positions of lands.
+
+On the 11th of May, land was espied bearing N. and N. by W. and towards
+noon more land was seen bearing W. which was believed to be the Cape of
+Good Hope, being then about forty or fifty leagues from that southern
+promontory of Africa.[59] The wind being scanty, they stood off to the
+southwards till midnight; and, the wind being then fair, stood their
+course directly west. On the 12th and 13th they were becalmed, with a
+thick and hazy atmosphere. The weather cleared upon the 14th, when they
+again saw land, which proved to be Cape _Falso_, forty or fifty leagues
+short, or to the eastwards of the Cape of Good Hope.[60] This Cape
+Falso is easily known, having three hills directly over it, the highest
+in the middle, and only a little distance from each other; the ground
+being much lower by the sea-side. Besides which, the Cape of Good Hope
+bears W. by S. from this cape. They discovered the Cape of Good Hope on
+the 16th of May, observing the head-land to be considerably high, having
+two hummocks at the westerly point, a little off the main, and three
+others a little farther into the sea, yet low-land still between these
+and the sea. By the Portuguese the Cape of Good Hope is said to be 2000
+leagues from Java; but by their reckoning they made it only 1850
+leagues, which took them just nine weeks in the run.
+
+[Footnote 59: Either this is a gross error, or it means that their
+reckoning still made that distance from the Cape, as nothing nearly
+approaching to such a distance can possibly be seen.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 60: Captain Falso is only ten leagues E. from the Cape of Good
+Hope; but perhaps Cape Aguillas may be meant in the text, which is about
+thirty-five leagues E.S.E. from the Cape.--E.]
+
+By break of day on the 8th June, they were within seven or eight leagues
+of St Helena, of which island they had merely a glimpse that day, as,
+having little or no wind, they had to stand off and on all night. Next
+day, having a tolerably good wind, they stood in with the shore, sending
+the boat before, and came to anchor in a good bay, under the N.W. side
+of the island, in twelve fathoms, only two or three cables length from
+the shore. This island lies in the middle of the Atlantic Ocean, almost
+at equal distances from the main land of Africa and that of Brazil, in
+Lat. 15° 43' S. between five and six hundred leagues from the Cape of
+Good Hope.
+
+Candish went here on shore, and entered the church, to which there was a
+fair causeway; having a _frame between two bowls_, and a cross of
+freestone adjoining. Within it was hung with painted cloth, on which
+were represented the Blessed Virgin, the story of the Crucifixion, and
+other holy legends, hung round the altar. The valley in which this
+church stands is extremely pleasant, and so full of fruit-trees and
+excellent plants, that it seemed like a very fair and well-cultivated
+garden, having long rows of lemon, orange, citron, pomegranate, date,
+and fig-trees, delighting the eye with blossoms, green fruit, and ripe,
+all at once. These trees seemed nicely trimmed, and there were many
+delightful walks under the shelter of their boughs, which were
+pleasant, cool, and shady. At some distance there rises a fine clear
+spring, which diffuses itself in many fine rivulets, all through this
+valley, watering all its parts, and refreshing every plant and tree. In
+the whole of this great garden there is hardly any unoccupied space; as,
+where nature may have left any part empty, there art has supplied the
+deficiency, so as to fill the whole space to advantage. This island also
+affords great abundance of partridges and pheasants, both being larger
+than ours in England. There are also turkeys, both black and white, with
+red heads, about as large as those in England, and their eggs much the
+same, only altogether white. There is also plenty of _cabritos_, or wild
+goats, as big as asses, and having manes like horses, and their beards
+reaching down to the ground. These are so numerous, that their herds or
+flocks are sometimes a whole mile in length. It contains also vast herds
+of wild-swine, which keep chiefly in the mountains, as do likewise the
+wild-goats. These swine are very fat, but so excessively wild that they
+are never to be got at by a man, unless when asleep, or rolling
+themselves in the mire.
+
+Having taken in all necessaries that this place produced, Candish set
+sail for England on the 20th of June, standing N.W. by W. It is
+observable, that the wind at St Helena is generally off the shore. On
+Friday, the 23d of August, he steered E. and E. by S. for the
+northernmost of the Azores; and on the 29th, after midnight, he got
+sight of the islands of Flores and Corvo, in lat. 39° 30' N. whence he
+shaped his course N.E. He met a Flemish vessel on the 3d September,
+bound from Lisbon, from which he had the joyful news of the total defeat
+of the Spanish Armada. On the 9th September, after receiving a farewell
+from the wind in a violent storm, which carried away most of his sails,
+Candish arrived at the long-desired haven of Plymouth.
+
+There had not hitherto been any voyage of so much consequence, or
+attended by such uninterrupted success as this: As plainly appears from
+the length of time occupied by that of Magellan, which extended to three
+years and a month; that of Sir Francis Drake extending to upwards of two
+years and ten months; while this voyage by Candish was less than two
+years and two months. We need not wonder, therefore, that a young
+gentleman like Mr Candish, who was entirely devoted to a desire of
+acquiring glory and renown, should contrive some extraordinary manner of
+displaying his good fortune. Some accounts accordingly inform us, that
+he brought his ship into Plymouth harbour under a suit of silken sails,
+which, if true, may be thus explained. We have already mentioned, from
+his own narrative, that he encountered a violent storm, just before his
+arrival, which tore all his sails to pieces. In this distress, he would
+probably use those he had taken in the South Sea, made of what is called
+silk-grass, having a strong gloss and beautiful colour, which might
+easily deceive the eyes of the vulgar, and pass upon them for sails made
+of silk. This much is certain, however, that though he might be vain and
+expensive in such matters, yet all came fairly out of his own pocket;
+and those who had sailed with him, from the prospect of raising their
+fortunes, had not the least reason to complain, as he made a fair and
+full distribution of the prizes, by which he gained universal credit and
+esteem.
+
+To shew his duty and diligence, as well as to discharge respectfully the
+obligations he owed his patron, Lord Hunsdon, the near relation of Queen
+Elizabeth, and then lord-chamberlain, he wrote the following letter to
+him on the very day of his arrival at Plymouth.
+
+_To the Right Honourable the Lord Hunsdon, &c._
+
+_Right Honourable_,
+
+As your favour heretofore hath been most greatly extended towards me, so
+I humbly desire a continuance thereof; and though there be no means in
+me to deserve the same, yet the uttermost of my services shall not be
+wanting, whensoever it shall please your honour to dispose thereof. I am
+humbly to desire your honour to make known unto her majesty the desire I
+have had to do her majesty service in the performance of this voyage;
+and, as it hath pleased God to give her the victory over part of her
+enemies, so I trust, ere long, to see her overthrow them all. For the
+places of their wealth, whereby they have maintained and made their
+wars, are now perfectly discovered; and, if it please her majesty, with
+a small power she may take and spoil them all.
+
+It hath pleased the Almighty to suffer me to circumcompass all the whole
+globe of the world, entering in at the Straits of Magellan, and
+returning by the Cape of Buena Esperança. In which voyage I have either
+discovered, or brought certain intelligence of, all the rich places of
+the world that ever were known or discovered by any Christian. I
+navigated along the coasts of Chili, Peru, and Nueva Espanna, where I
+made great spoils. I burnt and sunk nineteen sail of ships, great and
+small. All the villages and towns that ever I landed at, I burnt and
+spoiled; and, had I not been discovered upon the coast, I had taken a
+great quantity of treasure. The matter of most profit unto me was a
+great ship of the king's, which I took at California, which ship came
+from the Philippines, being one of the richest for merchandize that ever
+passed these seas, as the royal register, accounts, and merchants did
+shew; for it amounted in value to ***** in Mexico to be sold: which
+goods, for that my ships were not able to contain the least part of
+them, I was enforced to set on fire.
+
+From the Cape of California, being the uppermost part of all New Spain,
+I navigated to the Philippine islands, hard upon the coast of China, of
+which country I have brought such intelligence as hath not been heard in
+these parts; the stateliness and riches of which country I fear to make
+report of; lest I should not be credited: for, if I had not known
+sufficiently the incomparable wealth of that country, I should have been
+as incredulous thereof as others will be that have not had the like
+experience.
+
+I sailed along the islands of the Moluccas, where among some of the
+heathen people I was well intreated, and where our people may have trade
+as freely as the Portuguese, if they will themselves. From thence, I
+passed by the Cape of Buena Esperança; and found out, by the way
+homeward, the island of St Helena, where the Portuguese used to refresh
+themselves; and, from that island, God hath suffered me to return into
+England. All which services, together with myself, I humbly prostrate at
+her majesty's feet, desiring the Almighty long to continue her reign
+among us; for at this day she is the most famous and most victorious
+prince that liveth in the world.
+
+Thus, humbly desiring pardon for my tediousness, I leave your lordship
+to the tuition of the Almighty.
+
+   _Your honour's most humble to command,
+   Thomas Candish_.
+
+   Plymouth, this 9th
+   of September, 1588.
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+There are many circumstances in this voyage, besides the wonderful
+facility with which it was accomplished, that deserve to be considered.
+As, for instance, the adventuring to pass a second time into the South
+Sea, after it was not only known that the Spaniards were excessively
+alarmed by the passage of Sir Francis Drake, but also that they had
+received succours from Spain, and had actually fortified themselves
+strongly in the South Sea. Also the nice search made by Candish, and the
+exact description he has given us of the Straits of Magellan, are very
+noble proofs of his skill and industry, and of his desire that posterity
+might reap the fruits of his labours. The attack of the Accapulco ship,
+likewise, considering the small force he had along with him, was a noble
+instance of true English bravery, which was justly rewarded by the queen
+with the honour of knighthood.
+
+His account of the Philippines, and his description of several islands
+in the East Indies, are very clear and curious, and must at that time
+have been very useful; but particularly his map and description of
+China, which gave great lights in those days. We may add to all this,
+the great care he took in the instruction of his seamen, many of whom
+afterwards distinguished themselves by navigating vessels in the same
+stupendous course, and thereby filling all the known world with the fame
+and reputation of English seamen. It is not therefore surprising that we
+find the best judges, both of our own and other nations, bestowing very
+high praise on this worthy gentleman, who, in the whole conduct of his
+voyage, shewed the courage and discretion of a great commander, with all
+the skill and diligence of an able seaman; of both which eminent
+characters he has left the strongest testimonies in his accurate account
+of this circumnavigation.
+
+The wealth brought home by Sir Thomas Candish from this successful
+voyage must have been considerable; an old writer says it was sufficient
+to have purchased _a fair earldom_, a general and vague expression,
+having no determinate meaning. Whatever may have been the amount of the
+sum, which he acquired with so much hazard and so great honour, he
+certainly did not make such prudent use of his good fortune as might
+have been expected; for in the space of three years the best part of it
+was spent, and he determined to lay out the remainder upon a second
+expedition. We need the less wonder at this, if we consider what the
+writers of those days tell us, of his great generosity, and the
+prodigious expence he was at in procuring and maintaining such persons
+as he thought might be useful to him in his future naval expeditions, on
+which subject his mind was continually bent. Such things require the
+revenues of a prince; and as he looked upon this voyage round the world
+as an introduction only to his future undertakings, we may easily
+conceive that, what the world considered extravagance, might appear to
+him mere necessary disbursements, which, instead of lessening, he
+proposed should have laid the foundations of a more extensive fortune.
+All circumstances duly considered, this was neither a rash nor
+improbable supposition; since there were many examples in the glorious
+reign of Queen Elizabeth, of very large fortunes acquired by the same
+method in which he proposed to have increased his estate. Besides, it
+clearly appears, by his will, that he not only did not die in debt, but
+left very considerable effects behind him, notwithstanding his heavy
+expences, and the many misfortunes of his second expedition, of which it
+is proper to subjoin a brief account.--_Harris_.
+
+In the Collection of Hakluyt, vol. IV. p. 341-355, is a long enumeration
+of nautical remarks, of the latitudes, soundings, distances of places,
+bearings of lands, variations of the compass, time spent in sailing
+between the several places enumerated, time of remaining at any of
+these, observations of winds, &c. &c. &c. written by Mr Thomas Fuller of
+Ipswich, who was master of the Desire in this voyage round the world;
+but which are too tedious and uninteresting for insertion.--E.
+
+
+SECTION IV.
+
+_Second Voyage of Sir Thomas Candish, intended for the South Sea, in
+1591_.[61]
+
+Though not a circumnavigation, owing to various misfortunes, it appears
+proper to insert this narrative, giving an account of the unfortunate
+end of the renowned Candish, by way of appendix to his circumnavigation.
+From the happy success of his former voyage, and the superior strength
+with which he undertook the second, in which, after ranging the Spanish
+coast of the South Sea, he proposed to have visited the Philippine
+islands and China, he certainly had every reason to have expected, that
+the profits of this new enterprise would have fully compensated for its
+expences, and have enabled him to spend the remainder of his days in
+honourable ease and affluence.
+
+[Footnote 61: Hakluyt, IV. 361.--This narrative, as we learn from
+Hakluyt, was written by Mr John Lane, or Jane, a person of good
+observation, who was employed in this and many other voyages.--E.]
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The ships fitted out on this occasion, entirely at his own expence, were
+the galleon named the Leicester, in which Sir Thomas Candish embarked
+himself as admiral, or general of the expedition; the Roebuck
+vice-admiral, commanded by Mr Cocke; the Desire rear-admiral, of which
+Mr John Davis was captain;[62] the Dainty, a bark belonging to Mr Adrian
+Gilbert, of which Mr Randolph Cotton had the command; and a pinnace
+named the Black.
+
+[Footnote 62: The author of this narrative informs us that he sailed on
+this voyage along with Mr Davis.--E.]
+
+§ 1. _Incidents in the Voyage, till the Separation of the Ships_.
+
+With this squadron we sailed from Plymouth on the 26th of August, 1591.
+The 29th November, we fell in with the bay of St Salvador on the coast
+of Brazil, twelve leagues to the N. of Cabo Frio, where we were becalmed
+till the 2d December, when we captured a small bark, bound for the Rio
+Plata, laden with sugar, haberdashery wares, and negroes. The master of
+this bark brought us to an isle, called Placencia or _Ilha Grande_,
+thirty Portuguese leagues W. from Cabo Frio, where we arrived on the 5th
+December, and rifled six or seven houses inhabited by Portuguese. The
+11th we departed from this place, and arrived on the 14th at the island
+of St Sebastian; whence Mr Cocke and Mr Davis immediately departed, with
+the Desire and the Black pinnace, on purpose to attack the town of
+Santos.
+
+We anchored at the bar of Santos in the evening of the 15th, and went
+immediately in our boats to the town. Next morning about nine o'clock,
+we reached Santos, and being discovered, we immediately landed, being
+only twenty-four of us, our long-boat being still far astern. By this
+promptitude, we took all the people of the town prisoners in the church,
+being at mass, and detained them there all day. The great object of Sir
+Thomas Candish in assaulting this town was to supply our wants,
+expecting to have got every thing of which we stood in need, when once
+in possession: But such was the negligence of Mr Cocke, who commanded on
+this occasion, that the Indians were allowed to carry every thing out
+of the town in open view, and no one hindered them; and next day, our
+prisoners were all set free, only four poor old men being kept as
+pledges to supply our wants. By this mismanagement, the town of Santos,
+which could easily have supplied a fleet the double of ours with all
+kinds of necessaries, was in three days left to us entirely naked,
+without people, and without provisions. Sir Thomas Candish came up eight
+or ten days afterwards, and remained till the 22d January, 1592,
+endeavouring by treaty to procure what we were once possessed of, but to
+little purpose; and we were then forced to depart, through want of
+provisions, glad to procure a few baskets of cassavi meal, going away
+worse provided than we had come there. We accordingly left Santos on the
+22d January, and burnt the town of St Vincent to the ground.
+
+We set sail on the 24th, shaping our course for the Straits of Magellan.
+On the 7th February we had a violent storm, and on the 8th, our fleet
+was separated by the fury of the tempest. Consulting with the master of
+our ship, our captain concluded to go for Port Desire, in the latitude
+of 48° S. hoping that Sir Thomas would go there likewise, as he had
+found great relief there in his former voyage. Our captain had not been
+able to get directions, what course to take in such a contingency as had
+now occurred, though he had earnestly proposed such a measure. In our
+way, we fortunately fell in with the Roebuck, which had been in extreme
+danger, and had lost her boat. We arrived together at Port Desire on the
+6th March. The Black pinnace came in there also on the 16th; but the
+Dainty came not, having gone back for England, leaving their captain, Mr
+Randolph Cotton, aboard the Roebuck, with nothing but the clothes he
+wore. He now came aboard our ship, being in great habits of friendship
+with Captain Davis.
+
+On the 18th Sir Thomas brought the galleon into the roads, and came
+himself into the harbour in a boat he had got built at sea, for his
+long-boat and light-horseman were both lost during the storm, together
+with a pinnace he had set up at Santos. Being on board our ship, the
+Desire, Sir Thomas informed our captain of all his extremities, and
+complained severely of his company, and particularly of several
+gentlemen in his ship, proposing to go no more on board his own ship,
+but to proceed for the rest of the voyage in the Desire. We were all
+grieved to hear such hard speeches of our good friends; but having
+spoken with the gentlemen in the Leicester, we found them faithful,
+honest, and resolute in their proceedings, although it pleased our
+general to conceive of them otherwise.
+
+The 20th March we departed from Port Desire, Sir Thomas being in the
+Desire with us. The 8th of April we fell in with the Straits of
+Magellan, having sustained many furious storms between Port Desire and
+the straits. The 14th we passed the first straits, and got through the
+second, ten leagues beyond the first, on the 16th. We doubled Cape
+Froward on the 18th, which cape is in 53° 30' S. The 21st we were forced
+by a furious storm to take shelter in a small cove with our ships, four
+leagues beyond the cape, and on the southern shore of the straits, where
+we remained till the 15th of May; in which time we endured much
+distress, by excessive storms, with perpetual snow, and many of our men
+died of cold and famine, not having wherewithal to cover their bodies
+nor to fill their bellies, but living on muscles, sea-weeds, and water,
+with an occasional supply of meal from the ships stores.[63] All the
+sick men in the galleon were most uncharitably put on shore into the
+woods, exposed to the snow, the air, and the cold, which men in health
+could hardly have endured, where they ended their days in the utmost
+misery, Sir Thomas remaining all this time in the Desire.
+
+[Footnote 63: It would appear that this expedition had been very
+improvidently undertaken, with a very inadequate supply of provisions,
+and, as will afterwards appear, of naval stores, trusting perhaps to
+obtain supplies from the enemy, as had been attempted in vain at Santos.
+Either delayed by these views, or from ignorance, the passage through
+the straits was attempted at a very improper season, three months after
+the antarctic mid-summer and during the autumnal equinoctial gales.
+November, December, and January are the summer months, and best fitted
+for these high southern latitudes.--E.]
+
+Seeing these great extremities of cold and snow, and doubting a
+disastrous end to the enterprize, Sir Thomas asked our captain's
+opinion, being a person of great experience in the utmost parts of the
+north, to which he had made three voyages of discovery in the employ of
+the London merchants. Captain Davis said, that he did not expect the
+snow to be of long continuance, for which he gave sufficient reasons
+from his former experience, and hoped therefore that this might not
+greatly prejudice or hinder the completion of the enterprize. Yet Sir
+Thomas called all the company together, telling them that he proposed to
+depart from the straits upon some other voyage, either proceeding for
+the Cape of Good Hope, or back again to Brazil. The company answered,
+that they desired rather to wait God's favour for a wind, if he so
+pleased, and to submit to any hardships, rather than abandon the
+intended voyage, considering that they had been here only for a short
+time, and were now only forty leagues from the South Sea; yet, though
+grieved to return, they were ready to perform whatever he pleased to
+command. So he concluded to leave the straits, and make sail for the
+Cape of Good Hope.
+
+When Sir Thomas Candish returned on board the Desire, from talking with
+the company, Captain Davis requested he would consider the extremity of
+our estate and condition, the slenderness of his provision, and the
+weakness of his men, being in no case for undertaking that new
+enterprise; as, if the other ships were as ill appointed as the Desire,
+it would be impossible to perform his new design, having no more sails
+then were then bent, no victuals, no ground tackle, no cordage save what
+was already in use; and, of seventy-five persons in the Desire, the
+master only had knowledge enough for managing the ship, and there were
+only fourteen sailors besides, all the rest being gentlemen,
+serving-men, or tradesmen. Captain Davis laid these persuasions before
+both the general and Mr Cocke; and in fine, in consequence of a
+petition, delivered in writing by all the chief persons of the whole
+company, the general determined to depart from the Straits of Magellan,
+and to return again for Santos in Brazil.
+
+Accordingly, we set sail on the 15th of May, the general being now on
+board the galleon, his own ship. The 18th we were free of the straits;
+but on passing Cape Froward, we had the misfortune to have our boat sunk
+at our stern in the night, by which she was split and sore injured, and
+lost all her oars. The 20th of May, being athwart Port Desire, the
+general altered his course during the night, as we suppose, by which we
+lost him. In the evening he stood close by the wind to leewards, having
+the wind at N.N.E. and we stood the same course, the wind not altering
+during the night, and next day we could not see him. We were then
+persuaded that the general was gone for Port Desire in quest of relief
+or that he had sustained some mischance at sea, and was gone there to
+seek a remedy. Our captain then called all hands together, the general's
+men among the rest, asking their opinion what was to be done, when every
+one said he thought the general was gone to Port Desire.
+
+Our master, who was the general's man, and careful for his master's
+service, and also a person of good judgment in sea affairs, represented
+to the company how dangerous it was for us to go to Port Desire,
+especially if we should there miss the general; as we had now no boat
+wherewith to land, neither any anchors or cables which he could trust to
+in such rapid streams. Yet as we all concluded that it was most probable
+the general had gone there, we shaped our course for Port Desire, and on
+our way met the Black pinnace by chance, which had also parted company
+from the general, being in a miserable plight. So we both proceeded for
+Port Desire, where we arrived on the 26th of May.
+
+
+§ 2. _Disastrous result of the Voyage to Sir Thomas Candish_.[64]
+
+Various accounts of the disappointments and misfortunes of Sir Thomas
+Candish, in this disastrous voyage, are still preserved, but the most
+copious is contained in his own narrative, addressed to Sir Tristram
+Gorges, whom he constituted sole executor of his will. In this, Sir
+Thomas attributes his miscarriage to the cowardice and defection of one
+of his officers, in the following terms:--"The running away of the
+villain Davis was the death of me, and the decay of the whole action,
+and his treachery in deserting me the ruin of all."
+
+[Footnote 64: This portion of the voyage is taken from the supplement in
+the Collection of Harris, to the circumnavigation of Sir Thomas
+Candish.--E.]
+
+In this letter he complained also of mutinies, and that, by adverse
+winds at S W. and W.S.W. he had been driven 400 leagues from the shore,
+and from the latitude of 50° to that of 40° both S. He says also, that
+he was surprised by winter in the straits, and sore vexed by storms,
+having such frosts and snows in May as he had never before
+witnessed,[65] so that forty of his men died, and seventy more of them
+sickened, in the course of seven or eight days. Davis, as he says,
+deserted him in the Desire, in lat. 47° S. The Roebuck continued along
+with him to lat. 36° S. In consequence of transgressing his directions,
+Captain Barker was slain on land with twenty-five men, and the boat
+lost; and soon afterwards other twenty-five men met with a similar fate.
+Ten others were forsaken at Spiritu Santo, by the cowardice of the
+master of the Roebuck, who stole away, having six months provisions on
+board for 120 men, and only forty-seven men in his ship. Another mutiny
+happened at St Sebastians by the treachery of an Irishman, when Mr
+Knivet and other six persons were left on shore.
+
+[Footnote 65: Sir Thomas Candish seems not to have been aware, that the
+month of May, in these high antarctic or southern latitudes, was
+precisely analogous with November in the high latitudes of the north,
+and therefore utterly unfit for navigation.--E.]
+
+Intending again to have attempted passing through the straits, he was
+tossed up and down in the tempestuous seas of the Southern Atlantic, and
+came even at one time within two leagues of St Helena, but was unable to
+reach that island. In his last letter, he declares that, rather than
+return to England after so many disasters, he would willingly have gone
+ashore in an island placed in lat. 8° in the charts. In this letter, he
+states himself to be then scarcely able to hold a pen; and we learn that
+he soon afterwards died of grief. The Leicester, in which Candish
+sailed, came home, as did the Desire. The Black pinnace was lost; but
+the fates of the Roebuck and the Dainty are no where mentioned.
+
+The miscarriage of this voyage was certainly prejudicial to the rising
+trade and spirit of naval adventure in England. The ruin of Sir Thomas
+Candish threw a damp on such undertakings among the English gentlemen;
+and, on the return of these ships, several able and experienced seamen
+were turned adrift, to gain their livings as they best might. These
+thorough-bred seamen went to other countries; and, as knowledge is a
+portable commodity, they made the best market they could of their
+nautical experience in Holland and elsewhere. Among these was one Mr
+Mellish, who had been a favourite of Sir Thomas Candish, and the
+companion of all his voyages. This person offered his services to the
+East India Company of Holland, then in its infancy; and, his proposals
+being accepted, he was employed as pilot in the circumnavigation of
+Oliver van Noort, which falls next in order to be related.
+
+
+§ 3. _Continuation of the Voyage of the Desire, Captain Davis, after
+parting from Sir Thomas Candish_.
+
+Not finding our general at Port Desire, as we had expected, and being
+very slenderly provided, without sails, boat, oars, nails, cordage, and
+other necessary stores, and very short of victuals, we were reduced to a
+very unpleasant situation, not knowing how to proceed. Leaving
+ourselves, however, to the providence of the Almighty, we entered the
+harbour, and, by the good favour of God, we found a quiet and safe road,
+which we knew not of before. Having moored our ship, by the help of the
+boat belonging to the Black pinnace, we landed on the southern shore of
+the bay, where we found a standing pool, which might contain some ten
+tons of fresh water, by which we were greatly relieved and comforted.
+From this pool we took more than forty tons of water, yet left it as
+full as at first. At our former visit to this harbour, we were at this
+very place and found no water, wherefore we persuaded ourselves that the
+Almighty had sent this pool for our relief. We found here such
+remarkably low ebbs as we had never before seen, by means of which we
+procured muscles in great plenty. Providence also sent such great
+abundance of smelts about our ship, that all the people were able to
+take as many as they could eat, with hooks made of crooked pins. By
+these means we husbanded the ship's provisions, and did not spend any of
+them during our abode at this place.
+
+Considering what was best to be done in our present circumstances, that
+we might find our general, and as it was obvious we could not refit our
+ship for sea in less than a month, our captain and master concluded to
+take the pinnace and go in search of the general, leaving the ship and a
+considerable part of the men till the return of the general, who had
+vowed he would return again to the straits. Hearing of this
+determination, two pestilent fellows, named Charles Parker and Edward
+Smith, secretly represented to the men, that the captain and master
+meant to leave them to be devoured by cannibals, and had no intention to
+come back; on which the whole company secretly agreed to murder the
+captain, master, and all those who were thought their friends, among
+whom I was included. This conspiracy was fortunately known to our
+boatswain, who revealed it to the master, and he to the captain. To
+appease this mutiny the captain found it necessary to desist from his
+intentions, and it was concluded not to depart, but to wait at Port
+Desire for the return of the general. After this the whole company, with
+one consent, made a written testimonial of the circumstances by which we
+had lost company of the general, and the indispensable necessity of
+returning home.
+
+In this testimony or protest, dated Port Desire, 2d June, 1592, it is
+represented, that the shrouds of the ship are all rotten, the ropes all
+so decayed that they could not be trusted; the sails reduced to one
+shift all worn, of which the topsails were utterly unable to abide any
+stress of weather; the ship unprovided with pitch, tar, or nails for
+repairs of any kind, and no means of supplying these wants; the
+provisions reduced to five hogsheads of salt pork, and such quantity of
+meal as admitted only an allowance of three ounces for a man each day,
+and no drink remaining except water. This instrument is signed by John
+Davis and Randolph Cotton, the captains of the Desire and Black pinnace,
+and thirty-eight more, but the name John Jane, or Lane, does not appear
+among them.
+
+After this, they proceeded to refit the ship with all expedition, for
+which purpose they built a smith's forge, making charcoal for its
+supply, and made nails, bolts, and spikes. Others of the crew were
+employed in making ropes from a piece of cable; and others again in all
+the necessary repairs of the ship, sails, and rigging; while those not
+fit for such offices, gathered muscles and caught smelts for the whole
+company. Three leagues from Port Desire there is an island, having four
+small isles about it, on which there are great abundance of seals, and
+where likewise penguins resort in vast numbers at the breeding season.
+To this island it was resolved to dispatch the Black pinnace
+occasionally, to fetch seals for us to eat, when smelts and muscles
+failed, for we could get no muscles at neap-tides, and only when the ebb
+was very low.
+
+In this miserable and forlorn condition we remained till the 6th of
+August, 1592, still keeping watch on the hills to look out for our
+general, suffering extreme anguish and vexation. Our hope of the
+general's return becoming very cold, our captain and master were
+persuaded that he might have gone directly for the straits; wherefore it
+was concluded to go there and wait his coming, as there we could not
+possibly miss seeing him if he came. This being agreed to by the whole
+company, we set sail from Port Desire on the 6th August, and went to
+Penguin island, where we salted twenty hogsheads of seals, which was as
+much as our salt could do. We departed from Penguin island towards night
+of the 7th August, intending for the straits. The 14th we were driven
+among certain islands, never before discovered, fifty leagues or better
+from the shore, east-northerly from the straits.[66] Fortunately the
+wind shifted to the east, or we must have inevitably perished among
+these islands, and we were enabled to shape our course for the straits.
+
+[Footnote 66: These are doubtless the Falkland Islands, or Malouines,
+but to which no name seems to have been affixed on this occasion.--E.]
+
+We fell in with the cape [Virgin] on the 18th of August, in a very thick
+fog, and that same night came to anchor ten leagues within the straits'
+mouth. The 19th we passed the first and second narrows, doubled Cape
+Froward on the 21st, and anchored on the 22d in a cove, or small bay,
+which we named _Savage Cove_, because we here found savages.
+Notwithstanding the excessive coldness of this place, yet do these
+people go entirely naked, living in the woods like satyrs, painted and
+disguised in a strange manner, and fled from us like so many wild deer.
+They were very strong and agile, and threw stones at us, of three or
+four pounds weight, from an incredible distance. We departed from this
+cove on the 24th in the morning, and came that same day into the N.W.
+reach of the straits, which is its last or most western reach. On the
+25th we anchored in a good cove, within fourteen leagues of the South
+Sea, where we proposed to await the return of our general, as the strait
+at this place is only three miles broad, and he could not possibly pass
+unseen.
+
+After we had remained here a fortnight, in the depth of winter, our
+victuals fast consuming, and our salted seals stinking most vilely, our
+men fell sick and died pitifully, through famine and cold, as most of
+them had not clothes sufficient to defend them from the extreme rigour
+of winter. In this heavy distress, our captain and master thought it
+best to depart from the straits into the South Sea, and to proceed for
+the island of Santa Maria in lat. 37° S. on the coast of Chili, which is
+situated in a temperate climate, where we might find relief, and could
+wait for our general, who must necessarily pass by that island. We
+accordingly set sail on the 13th September, and came in sight of the
+South Sea. The 14th we were driven back into the straits, and got into a
+cove three leagues from the South Sea. We again stood out, and being
+eight or ten leagues free of the land, the wind rose furiously at W.N.W.
+and we were again forced to return into the straits, not daring to trust
+to our sails in any stress of weather. We again got into the cove,
+three leagues from the eastern mouth of the straits, where we had such
+violent weather that one of our two remaining cables broke, and we were
+almost in despair of saving our lives. Yet it pleased God to allay the
+fury of the storm, and we unreeved our sheets, tacks, halyards, and
+other ropes, and made fast our ship to the trees on shore, close by the
+rocks. We laboured hard to recover our anchor again, which we could not
+possibly effect, being, as we supposed, entirely covered over in the
+ooze.
+
+We were now reduced to one anchor, which had only one whole fluke; and
+had only one old cable, already spliced in two places, and a piece of
+another old cable. In this extremity of trouble it pleased God that the
+wind came fair on the 1st October, on which we loosed our land fastnings
+with all expedition, weighed our anchor, and towed off into the channel;
+for we had repaired our boat when in Port Desire, and got five oars from
+the Black pinnace. On weighing our anchor we found the cable sore
+broken, holding only by one strand, which was a most merciful
+preservation. We now reeved our ropes and rigged our ship the best we
+could, every man working as if to save our lives in the utmost
+extremity. Our company was now much divided in opinion as to how we
+should proceed for the best; some desiring to return to Port Desire, to
+be there set on shore, and endeavour to travel by land to some of the
+Spanish settlements, while others adhered to the captain and master: But
+at length, by the persuasion of the master, who promised that they would
+find wheat, pork, and roots in abundance at the island of St Mary,
+besides the chance of intercepting some ships on the coasts of Chili and
+Peru, while nothing but a cruel death by famine could be looked for in
+attempting to return by the Atlantic, they were prevailed upon to
+proceed.
+
+So, on the 2d of October, 1592, we again made sail into the South Sea,
+and got free from the land. This night the wind again began to blow very
+strong at west, and increased with such violence that we were in great
+doubt what measures to pursue. We durst not put into the straits for
+lack of ground tackle, neither durst we carry sail, the tempest being
+very furious, and our sails very bad. In this extremity the pinnace bore
+up to us, informing she had received many heavy seas, and that her ropes
+were continually failing, so that they knew not what to do; but, unable
+to afford her any relief; we stood on our course in view of a lee shore,
+continually dreading a ruinous end of us all. The 4th October the storm
+increased to an extreme violence; when the pinnace, being to windward,
+suddenly _struck a hull_, when we thought she had sustained some violent
+shock of a sea, or had sprung a leak, or that her sails had failed,
+because she did not follow us. But we durst not _hull_ in this
+unmerciful storm, sometimes _trying_ under our main-course, sometimes
+with a _haddock_ of our sail; for our ship was very _leeward_, and
+laboured hard in the sea. This night we lost sight of the pinnace, and
+never saw her again.
+
+The 5th October, our foresail split, on which our master brought the
+mizen-sail to the foremast to make the ship work, and we mended our
+foresail with our spritsail. The storm still continued to rage with the
+most extreme fury, with hail, snow, rain, and wind, such and so mighty
+that it could not possibly in nature be worse; the seas running so
+lofty, and with a continual breach, that we many times were in doubt
+whether our ship did sink or swim. The 10th, the weather dark, the storm
+as furious as ever, most of the men having given over labour from
+fatigue and in despair, and being near the lee-shore by the reckoning
+both of the captain and master, we gave ourselves up for lost, past all
+remedy. While in this extremity of distress, the sun suddenly shone out
+clear, by which the captain and master were enabled to ascertain the
+latitude, and thereby knew what course to steer, so as to recover the
+straits. Next day, the 11th October, we saw Cape Deseado, being the
+southern point of the entrance into the straits, for the northern point
+is a dangerous assemblage of rocks, shoals, and islands. The cape was
+now two leagues to leeward, and the master was even in doubt whether we
+might be able to steer clear of it; but there was no remedy, as we must
+either succeed or be irretrievably lost.
+
+Our master, being a man of spirit, made quick dispatch, and steered for
+the straits. Our sails had not been half an hour abroad for this purpose
+when the foot-rope of the fore-sail broke, so nothing held save the
+oilet-holes. The sea continually broke over our poop, and dashed with
+such violence against our sails, that we every moment looked to have
+them torn to pieces, or that the ship would overset. To our utter
+discomfort also, we perceived that she fell still more and more to
+leeward, so that we could not clear the cape. We were now within half a
+mile of the cape, and so near shore that the counter surge of the sea so
+rebounded against the side of our ship, that the horrors of our
+situation were undescribably awful. While in this utmost extremity, the
+wind and the sea raging beyond measure, and momentarily expecting to be
+driven upon the rocks, our master veered away some of the main-sheet:
+Whether owing to this, or by some counter current, or by the wonderful
+interposition of God, our ship quickened her way and shot past the rock,
+where we all thought she must have perished. Between this and the cape
+there was a small bay, so that we were now somewhat farther from the
+shore; but on coming to the cape, we again looked for nothing but
+instant death; yet God, the father of mercy, delivered us, and we
+doubled the cape little more than the length of our ship. When past the
+cape, we took in all our sails, and, being between the high lands, the
+wind _blowing trade_, or steadily in the direction of the straits, we
+spooned before the sea under bare poles, three men being unable to
+manage the helm, and in six hours we were driven twenty-five leagues
+within the straits.
+
+In this time we freed our ship from water, and when we had rested a
+while, our men became unable to move, their sinews being stiff, and
+their flesh as if dead. Many of them were so covered and eaten with
+lice, that there lay clusters of them in their flesh as large as peas,
+yea, some as big as beans. In this state of misery we were constrained
+to put into a cove to refresh our men, where we moored to the trees as
+we had done before, our only anchor being to seaward. We here continued
+till the 20th of October; and being unable to continue longer, through
+the extremity of famine, we again put off into the channel on the 22d,
+the weather being then reasonably calm. Before night the wind blew hard
+at W.N.W. The storm waxed so violent that our men could scarcely stand
+to their labour; and the straits being full of turnings and windings, we
+had to trust entirely to the discretion of the captain and master to
+guide the ship during the darkness of the night, when we could see no
+shore, and the straits were in some places scarcely three miles broad.
+When we first passed these straits, our captain made so excellent a
+draught of them, as I am confident cannot in any sort be made more
+correct. Which draught he and the master so carefully considered, that
+they had every turning, creek, and head-land so perfectly in their
+memory, as enabled them, even in the deepest darkness of the night,
+undoubtingly to convey the ship through that crooked channel.
+
+The 25th October we came to an island in the straits, named Penguine
+Isle, where the boat was sent ashore to seek relief, as it abounded
+with birds, and the weather was calm; so we came to anchor near the
+island, in seven fathoms. While the boat was ashore, where we got
+abundance of penguins, there rose a sudden storm, by which our ship was
+driven over a breach, and our boat sunk at the shore. Captain Cotton and
+the lieutenant, who were both on shore, leapt into the boat, and freed
+it of water, throwing away the birds, and with great difficulty got back
+to the ship. All this time the ship was driving upon the lee-shore; and
+when we got on board, we helped to weigh the anchor and make sail. Thus,
+in a severe storm, we got clear of the straits on the 27th October; and
+on the 30th we got to that Penguin Island which is three leagues from
+Port Desire, where we purposed to seek relief. Immediately on coming to
+this isle, our boat was sent ashore, and returned laden with birds and
+eggs, the men reporting that the penguins were so thick on the isle,
+that even ships might be laden with them, as they could not step without
+treading on these birds; at which news we greatly rejoiced.
+
+Then the captain appointed Charles Parker and Edmund Smith, with twenty
+others, to go on shore, and remain on the island, on purpose to kill and
+dry these penguins: promising to send others when the ship was safe in
+harbour, not only for expedition, but to save the small store of
+victuals that remained in the ship. But Parker and Smith, with the rest
+of their faction, remembering that this was the place where they
+intended formerly to have slain the captain and master, thought it was
+meant here to leave them on shore out of revenge, and refused to land.
+After some altercation, these men were allowed to proceed in the ship,
+and ten others were left in the island. The last day of October we
+entered the harbour of Port Desire. The master, having at our being
+there before taken notice of every creek in the river, ran our ship
+aground in a very convenient place on the sandy ooze, laying our anchor
+out to seawards, and mooring her with the running ropes to stakes on
+shore, in which situation the ship remained till our departure.
+
+The 3d November our boat was sent off for Penguin Island, with wood and
+water, and as many men as she could carry; but, being deep laden, she
+durst not proceed, and returned again the same night. Then Parker,
+Smith, Townsend, Purpet, and five others, desired that they might go by
+land, and that the boat might fetch them from the shore opposite the
+isle, being scarcely a mile across. The captain bid them do as they
+thought best, only advised them to carry weapons, as they might meet
+with savages; so they accordingly carried calivers, swords, and targets,
+departing by land on the 6th November, while the boat went by sea. But
+these nine men were never more heard of. On the 11th, when most of our
+men were at the island, only the captain, master, and five more
+remaining in the ship, there came a great multitude of savages to the
+shore beside the ship, throwing dust into the air, leaping and running
+about like so many beasts, having vizards on their faces like dogs, or
+else their faces actually resembled dogs. We greatly feared they would
+have set the ship on fire, for they would suddenly make fire, at which
+we were greatly astonished. They came to windward of the ship, and set
+the bushes on fire, so that we were enveloped in a very stinking smoke;
+but coming within shot of us, we fired at them, and hitting one on the
+thigh, they all fled instantly away, and we never heard or saw them
+more. Hence we judged that these savages had slain our nine men, who
+were the ringleaders of those who would formerly have murdered our
+captain and master, with the rest of their friends; so that God
+evidently drew just judgment upon them, and we supplicated his divine
+Majesty to be merciful to us.
+
+While we lay in this harbour, our captain and master went one day in the
+boat to see how far the river could be penetrated, that if need enforced
+us, it might be known how far we might proceed by water. They found that
+this river was only navigable by the boat for twenty miles. On their
+return, the boat was sent to Penguin Island, by which we learnt that the
+penguins dried to our entire satisfaction, and were in infinite numbers.
+This penguin is shaped like a bird, having stumps only in place of
+wings, by which it swims under water as swiftly as any fish. They live
+upon smelts, which are found in vast abundance on this coast. In eating,
+these penguins seem neither fish nor flesh. They lay large eggs; and the
+bird is about as large as two ducks. All the time we remained at Port
+Desire, we fared well on penguins and their eggs, young seals, young
+gulls, and other birds of which I know not the names, all of which we
+had in vast abundance. In this place also we found plenty of an herb
+called scurvy-grass, which we eat fried in seal-oil along with eggs,
+which so purified the blood, that it entirely removed all kind of
+swellings, of which many had died, and restored us all to as perfect
+health as when we first left England.
+
+We remained in this harbour till the 22d of December, 1592, in which
+time we had dried 20,000 penguins. In this time also the captain, with
+the master and I, made some salt, by filling some holes in the rocks
+with sea-water, which in six days was changed to salt by evaporation, it
+being now Midsummer in this southern hemisphere. Thus did God feed us in
+the desert, even as with manna from heaven. The 22d December we departed
+from Port Desire for Penguin island, where, with great difficulty, we
+got 14,000 of the dried birds on board, during which we had nearly lost
+our captain; and had not our master been very expert in the set of the
+tides, which ran in many cross directions, we had lost our ship.
+
+We now shaped our course for Brazil, under a regulated allowance of
+provisions, so that our victuals might last six months, in which time we
+hoped we might get back to England, though our sails were very bad. This
+allowance was, two ounces and a half of meal for each man, two days only
+in the week, or five ounces for a week; three days a week, three
+spoonfulls of oil were allowed to each man; two days a week, a pint of
+peas among four men; and every day five dried penguins among four men,
+with six quarts of water each day to four men. With this allowance,
+praised be God, we lived, though weak and feeble.
+
+The 30th January, 1593, we arrived at the isle of Placencia, or Ilha
+Grande, in Brazil, the first place at which we touched when outwards
+bound. The ship laying off at sea, the captain went aland in the boat
+with twenty-four men, being the whole night before he could reach the
+shore. He landed next day at sun-rise, hoping to catch the Portuguese in
+their houses, and by that means to procure a supply of casava meal; but
+on coming to the houses, we found them all burnt to the ground, so that
+we thought no one had remained on the island. The captain then went to
+the gardens, whence he brought a quantity of fruits and roots for the
+company, and returned on board. He then brought the ship into a fine
+creek, where she was moored to the trees on each side, at a place where
+we had plenty of fresh water. Our case being very desperate, we
+presently set to work to trim and repair our water-casks, the coopers
+making new hoops; while others laboured to repair the sails, keeping
+always a guard on shore, and every man having always his weapons ready
+at hand. The 3d February, thirty men well armed went to the gardens,
+three miles from where the ship lay, to dig cassavi-roots, to serve our
+company instead of bread. This was again repeated on the 5th. They
+laboured in quietness all the morning; and about ten o'clock, the heat
+being extreme, they came to a rock near the side of the wood, where they
+boiled cassavi-roots for dinner. After dinner, some went to sleep, and
+others to bathe in the sea, no one keeping watch, not a match lighted,
+nor even a piece charged. While in this unprovided state, and out of
+sight from the ship, there came suddenly upon them a multitude of
+Portuguese and Indians, who slew them all to the number of thirteen, two
+only escaping, one of these very sore hurt, and the other not touched,
+from whom we learnt the circumstances of this sad massacre.
+
+We manned the boat with all speed, and went ashore, if happily we might
+succour our men; but we found them all slain, and laid naked in a row,
+with their faces upwards, and a cross set up beside them. We saw also
+two large pinnaces coming from Rio de Janeiro, full of men, who, as we
+supposed, were intended to take us. We were now much reduced, as of
+seventy-six persons we had on board when we left England, there were now
+only twenty-seven of us remaining, thirty-two having died formerly, and
+thirteen being slain in this place. Between those formerly slain by the
+savages at Port Desire, and those now in the island of Placencia by the
+Portuguese, all those who had conspired to murder our captain and master
+were now cut off, the gunner only excepted. Our casks were so greatly
+decayed, that we could not take in a sufficient supply of water, and
+what we had was exceedingly bad. Having lost several muskets on shore,
+which had belonged to our slain men, with good store of powder and shot,
+we expected to be beaten from our decks by means of our own weapons, by
+the Portuguese on the island, joined by those coming from Janeiro: and
+as we were moored to the trees, for want of cables and anchors, we were
+in dread of having our mooring ropes cut. In this miserable state we
+knew not what measures to pursue. To depart with only eight tons of bad
+water, and in bad casks, were to run the risk of starving at sea, and to
+remain seemed inevitable ruin. These were severe alternatives; but in
+our perplexity we preferred trusting to the hand of God than to the
+mercy of our enemies, and concluded to depart. Wherefore, on the 6th
+February, we unmoored and removed our ship into the channel, putting all
+our ordnance and small arms in readiness in case of an assault, and
+having a small gale of wind, we put to sea in deep distress.
+
+Thus bemoaning our sad estate, and recounting our past misfortunes, we
+came to Cape Frio; being much crossed for three weeks by contrary winds,
+and our water running short, we were reduced to the utmost distress and
+perplexity. Some of the people were desirous of going into Bahia, and
+submitting to the Portuguese, rather than die of thirst; but our captain
+persuaded them against this measure. In this extremity, it pleased God
+to send us such abundant rain, that we were enabled to supply ourselves
+with water. On getting into the hot climate near the line, our dried
+penguins began to corrupt, and there bred in them many loathsome worms,
+an inch in length. These worms increased with astonishing rapidity,
+devouring our victuals so fast that we now seemed doomed to die of
+famine, as before of thirst We were even in danger of being eaten up by
+these worms, which devoured every thing except iron. They so gnawed the
+timbers of our ship, that we feared they would eat holes through her
+sides. We used every possible contrivance to destroy these noisome
+vermin, but they seemed only to increase so much the more, so that at
+last they would eat our flesh, and bite us like mosquitoes when we were
+asleep.
+
+In this woeful plight, after we had passed the equator towards the
+north, our men began to fall sick of a most terrible disease, such as, I
+believe, was never before heard of. It began with a swelling in their
+ankles, which in two days rose up as high as their breasts, so that they
+could not breathe. It then fell into the scrotum, which, with the penis,
+swelled in a most grievous manner, so that they could neither stand,
+walk, nor lie; and many of them became frantic with grief and distress.
+Our captain, with extreme distress of mind, was in so miserable a
+condition, that he wished to die; yet, while scarcely able to speak for
+sorrow, he continued to exhort us all to patience and reliance on God,
+desiring us to accept our chastisement like dutiful and thankful
+children. In this state of misery and wretchedness, several died raving
+mad, and others in a most loathsome state, or in dreadful pain and
+agony. None in the ship remained in perfect health, except the captain
+and one boy; the master also, though oppressed with extreme labour and
+anxiety, bore up with spirit, so that his disease did not overcome him.
+
+At length all our men died except sixteen, five only of whom were able
+to move. These were, the captain, who was in good health, the master
+indifferent, Captain Cotton and myself swollen and short-winded, yet
+better than the other sick men, and the boy in good health. Upon us five
+the whole labour of the ship rested. The captain and master, as happened
+to be necessary, took in and left out the topsails. The master by
+himself attended to the sprit-sail, and all of us the capstan, being
+utterly unable to work sheets and tacks. Our misery and weakness were so
+extreme, that we were utterly unable to take in or set a sail; so that
+our top-sails and sprit-sail were at length torn in pieces by the
+weather. The captain and master had to take their turns at the helm,
+where they were inexpressibly grieved and distressed by the continual
+and sad lamentations of our few remaining sick men.
+
+Thus lost wanderers on the ocean, unable to help ourselves, it pleased
+God, on the 11th of June, 1593, that we arrived at Beerhaven in Ireland,
+and ran the ship there on shore. The Irish helped us to take in our
+sails, and to moor the ship so as to float her off next tide; for which
+slender aid it cost the captain ten pounds, before he could get the ship
+into a state of safety. Thus, without men, sails, victuals, or other
+means, God alone guided us into Ireland. Here the captain left the
+master and three or four more of the company to keep the ship; and
+within five days after our arrival, he and some others got a passage in
+a fishing-boat to Padstow in Cornwall. For the merciful preservation of
+this our small remnant, and our restoration to our country, be all
+honour and glory to God, now and for ever.--_Amen_.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV.
+
+VOYAGE OF OLIVER VAN NOORT ROUND THE WORLD IN 1598--1601.[67]
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+
+The inhabitants of the United Provinces of the Netherlands, after their
+separation from the Spanish monarchy, found themselves extremely at a
+loss for means to supply the expences of the long and vigorous war in
+which they were engaged for the defence of their liberties. This gave
+them the more uneasiness, as their great enemy, Philip II. carried on
+the war against them, more by the length of his purse than the force of
+his arms, and because the riches, of the Spanish monarchy were derived
+from sources of commerce and colonization that were prohibited to them,
+even if they had submitted themselves to the yoke of Spain. The sense,
+therefore, of these difficulties, joined to the vast advantages they
+were likely to reap by overcoming them, induced the government and
+people of Holland to prosecute the advancement of trade in general with
+the greatest vigour, and particularly to establish a commercial
+intercourse with the East and West Indies, the great sources of wealth
+to their tyrannical oppressor and enemy, from whom they had revolted.
+
+[Footnote 67: Harris, I. 31.--Two editions of this voyage were published
+in Dutch, both in folio; one at Rotterdam without date; and the other at
+Amsterdam in 1602. _Bib, Univer. des Voyages_, I. 115.]
+
+Among other inducements to this course of proceeding, they were not a
+little encouraged by the progress made by their neighbours, the English;
+seeing that even private persons, and with a small force, had been able
+to disquiet the Spaniards exceedingly; and had at the same time acquired
+great riches to themselves. Another cause of attempting expeditions like
+the present, was their having failed in their first scheme of finding a
+new passage to the East Indies, than that with which the Spaniards and
+Portuguese were acquainted, which they had often and unsuccessfully
+endeavoured to explore by the north-east, with great hazard and expence.
+Their first voyages to the East Indies proving more fortunate even than
+they themselves had expected, they were tempted to proceed farther, and
+to distress their enemies likewise in the South Sea, which hitherto had
+only been done by the English.
+
+The distressed states of Holland, however, were not hitherto so
+powerful at sea as to attempt acting offensively against the king of
+Spain on that element; but contented themselves with giving power and
+authority to any of their subjects who were inclined to venture upon
+expeditions of this nature, at their own risk and expence, so as at the
+same time to join their own private advantage with the public good, by
+fitting out squadrons for these distant and hazardous voyages. This
+policy, though arising in some measure from necessity, was conducted
+with such wisdom and address, that the king of Spain soon found himself
+more distressed by the armaments of the Dutch merchants, than by all the
+forces of the United States. This is a plain proof; that the surest way
+to render any government powerful, is to interest the people in general
+in its support: For this raises such spirit among them, and is followed
+by such unexpected consequences, as no art or force can withstand.
+
+In the beginning of the year 1598, some eminent merchants in the united
+provinces, among whom were Peter van Bueren, Hugo Gerritz, and John
+Bennick, formed a design of sending some stout ships through the Straits
+of Magellan into the South Sea, to cruise against the Spaniards; to
+which design they were chiefly instigated by the reports of many English
+seamen, who had served in these parts, under Drake, Candish, and
+Hawkins, and other experienced officers. The purpose of the present
+expedition, was to cruise upon the coasts belonging to the Spaniards,
+and to force the enemy of peace to bear the expences of those wars in
+which he obliged other people unwillingly to engage. They also proposed
+by it to gain nautical experience, if it should be found practicable to
+continue the voyage by the Philippines, and so round by the Cape of Good
+Hope, circumnavigating the globe.
+
+As the success of this important enterprise greatly depended upon the
+choice of a _general_, for so in those days the Dutch, and most other
+nations, denominated the commander in chief, whether by sea or land, the
+adventurers took great care to provide themselves with a person of
+established character, both in regard to conduct and courage. The person
+chosen on this occasion was Oliver van Noort, a native of Utrecht, in
+the flower of his age, and who had a strong passion to acquire glory. To
+him they communicated their scheme, which he readily embraced; and their
+terms being speedily adjusted, they proceeded to fit out two stout
+vessels one named the Maurice, and the other the Henry Frederick,
+together with two yachts, railed the Concord and the Hope, the whole
+being manned by 248 persons of all ranks and conditions.
+
+Of this small fleet, Oliver van Noort was appointed admiral, and sailed
+in the Maurice; James Claas van Ulpenda was captain of the Henry
+Frederick, with the title of vice-admiral, Captain Peter van Lint
+commanded the Concord, and John Huidecoope was captain of the Hope.
+These were all men of experience in sea affairs, and capable of
+maintaining their authority on all occasions, and were all interested in
+the success of the voyage, by means of shares in the outfit; a proper
+precaution then, and ever since usual among the Dutch in all such cases,
+to prevent their expeditions from suffering by private views, or want of
+hearty concurrence in their officers: which, among other nations, is
+often the cause of failure, and for which this method is, perhaps, the
+only cure.
+
+All things being in readiness, and crews provided for all the vessels,
+the proprietors presented a petition to the Board of Admiralty of
+Rotterdam, upon which all who were concerned were summoned to compeer:
+and, on the 28th June, 1598, the rules and regulations for the
+government of all concerned in this expedition, having been previously
+drawn up by the company of adventurers, revised by the admiralty and
+approved of by the Stadtholder, Prince Maurice, were publicly read over
+to them, and every man sworn to obey them. These sailing orders are
+called Artykelbreefs by the Dutch, and are never suffered to be put in
+force, till they have received this kind of sanction from the state,
+when they become the law of the voyage, to which all concerned are
+subject, and must undergo the penalties contained in them, for breach of
+any of the articles. This circumstance is worthy of remark and imitation
+by other nations, and is a strong proof of the care paid by that
+republic to the commercial welfare of its citizens.
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Narrative of the Voyage_.
+
+On the 13th of September, 1598, the Maurice and Concord sailed from the
+port of Gocree; and, being joined by the Henry Frederick and Hope, from
+Amsterdam, the whole fleet proceeded for Plymouth, where their English
+pilot, Mr Mellish, who had been the companion of Sir Thomas Candish in
+his navigations, was to take in his apparel and other necessaries. They
+sailed from Plymouth on the 21th September, the wind then blowing a
+fresh gale at N.E. Next morning, being out of the channel, they
+perceived that the boat belonging to the vice-admiral was missing, in
+which were six men, which gave them considerable uneasiness, insomuch
+that they had some intention of returning to Plymouth in search of them.
+They met, however, with an English privateer, which soon made them alter
+their intentions; by assuring them that their men had run away with the
+boat, and could not be recovered, on which they resolved to proceed on
+their voyage. At this time considerable jealousies sprung up, respecting
+the capacity and conduct of the vice-admiral, which were soon increased
+by his losing his other boat and one man, and which could not be
+recovered by all their care. This carelessness occasioned much murmuring
+and discontent among the seamen, which the vice-admiral daily increased
+by his haughty behaviour, and by his contempt for advice, which no man
+needed more than he.
+
+The 4th October, they met a small fleet of English, Dutch, and French
+ships, returning from Barbary, from whom they had accounts of a terrible
+pestilence then raging in that country, which had swept away 250,000
+persons in a very short space of time. The 6th, they came between the
+islands of Teneriff and Grand Canary, and on the 3d November, they came
+in sight of the coast of Guinea. December 4th they were off Cape Palma,
+in lat. 3° 30' N.[68] and on the 10th came in sight of Princes Island,
+in lat. 1° N.[69] Sending their boats ashore to this island, carrying a
+flag of truce, they were met on the shore by a negro, bearing a similar
+flag, from whom they demanded a supply of provisions, which was accorded
+on fair and friendly terms; but, while settling the terms, they were
+suddenly surprised by a party from an ambush, which cut off several of
+them, one of whom was Mr Mellish, their English pilot. The Portuguese
+pursued them to their boats, which they briskly attached, killing the
+admiral's brother, and had nearly captured the whole party. In revenge
+of this outrage, it was determined in a council of war to attack the
+castle; but finding this enterprize too hazardous, they contented
+themselves with burning all the sugar ingenios. After this exploit,
+having provided themselves with fresh water, they set sail on the 17th.
+
+[Footnote 68: Cape Formosa is probably here meant, which is in 4° 18'
+N.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 69: The latitude of Princes Island is 1° 40' N.--E.]
+
+They reached Cape Gonçalves on the 25th, where the wind usually blows
+from the land all night, and from the sea all day. Here they found two
+Dutch ships, which informed them of the loss of Captain Sleerhagen and
+most of his company at Princes Island; as also of the voyage of Peter
+Verhagen, who had entered the river of Congo, and had afterwards buried
+thirty-eight of his company at Cape Gonçalves, whence he had gone some
+time before their arrival to Annobon.
+
+January 1st, 1589, they passed the island of Annobon, in lat. 2° S. [1°
+30' S.] and on the 28th of that month had the sun in their zenith. The
+5th of March they reached Cape St Thomas on the coast of Brazil, in lat.
+22° S. [21° 15']. The 6th they passed Cape Fair, and came that evening
+to Cape Frio, and on the 9th reached Rio de Janeiro. After some loss of
+time, and having several of their men cut off by their grand enemy the
+Portuguese, they went to the island of St Sebastian, in lat. 24° S.
+where the comforts of a good harbour, plenty of fresh water, and an
+abundant supply of wood gave them much satisfaction; but no fruits were
+to be had at that season.
+
+They encountered a heavy storm on the 14th of March, by which the
+vice-admiral and the Hope were separated from the admiral, but they met
+again on the 17th. The scurvy now began to make rapid progress among the
+company; which, together with the approach of the antarctic winter,
+determined them to put in at St Helena. Missing that island, they next
+endeavoured to fall in with the island of Ascension, or some other
+island where they might procure refreshments; but their hard fortune
+brought them to a very barren and desolate island in the lat. of 20° 30'
+S.[70] where they could procure no refreshments, except a few fowls
+called _Malle Mewen,_[71] which they knocked down with clubs.
+
+[Footnote 70: The island of Trinidad is nearly in the indicated
+latitude.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 71: These were probably young unfledged sea-gulls, called in
+provincial English _Malls, Maws_, and _Mews,_ not unlike the Dutch names
+in the text; where perhaps we ought to read Malle _or_ Mewen.--E.]
+
+Soon leaving this inhospitable place, they put to sea again, and on the
+1st of June, while endeavouring to reach Ascension, they got back to the
+coast of Brazil. Not being suffered to land any where on the continent,
+they sailed to the isle of Santa Clara, an island of about a mile round,
+and as much from the continent, in lat. 21° 15' S. This island afforded
+little else beyond herbs, but they found here a sour fruit resembling
+plums, which cured all their sick men in fifteen days. They sailed from
+thence for Port Desire, in lat 47° 40' S. on the 16th June, and reached
+that place on the 20th September, after enduring much bad weather. They
+procured abundance of penguins and fish, at an island three miles south
+from Port Desire; killing to the number of 50,000 penguins, which are
+nearly as large as geese, and procured a vast quantity of their eggs, by
+which their people were greatly refreshed, and the sick restored. Going
+up the river on the 5th October, and landing in the country, they found
+animals resembling stags, together with buffaloes, and ostriches in
+great numbers, and even found some of the nests of these birds, in which
+were as far as nineteen eggs. The 20th, the admiral went ashore to view
+the country, leaving orders with those who were left in charge of the
+boats, not to leave them a moment on any account: But they, having a
+mind also to see the country, ventured upon a short ramble, when they
+fell into an ambush of the savages, who slew three of their number, and
+wounded the fourth. These savages were very tall portly men, painted,
+and armed with short bows, and arrows headed with stone.
+
+Leaving Port Desire on the 29th September, they reached Cape Virgin at
+the entrance into the Straits of Magellan on the 24th November. The land
+here is low and plain, and from the whiteness of the coast somewhat
+resembles the chalk cliffs of England in the channel. In many attempts
+to enter the straits, they were beaten back by tempests of wind,
+accompanied by rain, hail, and snow. They lost their anchors, and broke
+their cables, and sickness, together with contention, which is worse
+than any disease, were added to their other calamities. All these so
+retarded the progress of the voyage, that it was near fifteen months
+after leaving Holland before they could make their way into the straits.
+They observed the land to trend from Cape Virgin to the S.W. and the
+mouth of the straits to be fourteen miles distant from that cape, and
+half a mile wide.[72] On the 25th November, they saw some men on two
+islands near Cape Nassau, who shook their weapons at the Hollanders, as
+in defiance. The Dutch landed, and pursued the savages into a cave,
+which they bravely defended to the last man, and were all slain on the
+spot. Going now into this dark cave, the Dutch found the women and
+children of the slain savages, when the mothers, expecting present death
+to themselves and their infants, covered their little ones with their
+own bodies, as if determined to receive the first stab. But the Dutch
+did them no other injury, except taking away four boys and two girls,
+whom they carried on ship board.
+
+[Footnote 72: These must necessarily be Dutch miles, 15 to the degree,
+each equal to nearly 4.66 English miles. By the mouth of the straits in
+the text, must be understood what is called the Narrows of the
+Hope.--E.]
+
+From one of these boys, after he had learnt the Dutch language, they had
+the following intelligence. The larger of the two islands was named
+_Castemme_ by the natives, and the tribe inhabiting it _Enoo_. The
+smaller island was called _Talche_. Both were frequented by great
+numbers of penguins, the flesh of which served the natives as food, and
+their skins for cloathing. Their only habitations were caves. The
+neighbouring continent abounded in ostriches, which they also used as
+food. The natives of these dreary regions were distinguished into
+tribes, each having their respective residences. The _Kemenetes_ dwelt
+in _Kaesay;_ the _Kennekin_ in _Karamay_; the _Karaiks_ in _Morina_: All
+these are of the ordinary size, but broad-breasted, and painted all
+over; the men tying up their pudenda in a string, and the women covering
+their parts of shame with the skins of a penguin; the men wearing their
+hair long, while that of the women was kept very short; and both sexes
+going naked, except cloaks made of penguin skins, reaching only to the
+waist. There was also a fourth tribe, called _Tirimenen_, dwelling in
+_Coin_, who were of a gigantic stature, being ten or twelve feet
+high,[73] and continually at war with the other tribes.
+
+[Footnote 73: This absurdity might be pardoned in the ignorant savage
+boy, who knew neither numerals nor measures; but in the grave reporters
+it is truly ridiculous, and yet the lie has been renewed almost down to
+the close of the eighteenth century.--E.]
+
+The 28th November, the navigators went over to the continent, or north
+side of the straits, seeing some whales at a distance, and observed a
+pleasant river, about which were some beautiful trees with many parrots.
+Owing to this fine prospect, they called the mouth of this river _Summer
+Bay_. The 29th they made sail for _Port Famine_, where the land trends
+so far to the south, that the main land of Patagonia and the islands of
+Terra del Fuego seemed, when seen afar off, to join together. They found
+here no remains of the late city of King Philip, except a heap of
+stones. The straits are here four miles wide, having hills of vast
+height on both sides, perpetually covered with snow. At Port Famine they
+cut down wood to build a boat, and found the bark of the trees to be hot
+and biting like pepper.[74] Not finding good water at this place, and
+indeed doubting if it were Port Famine, they proceeded onwards, and
+found a good river two miles farther west on the 1st December. Next day
+they doubled Cape Froward, with some danger, on account of bad anchorage
+and contrary winds.
+
+[Footnote 74: The Wintera aromatica, the bark of which is called
+Winter's bark, said to have been first discovered by Captain Winter in
+1567, on the coast of Terra Magellanica. The sailors employed this bark
+as a spice, and found it salutary in the scurvy.--E.]
+
+Passing four miles beyond this cape, they anchored in a large bay, where
+was a plant resembling sneezwort, which they found serviceable in the
+scurvy; also another plant, which rendered those who eat of it
+distracted for a time. They here fell in with two ships belonging to the
+fleet under Verhagen, which had been driven back out of the South Sea,
+one of which was commanded by Sebaldt de Weert, who told them he had
+been five months in the straits, and had only thirty-eight remaining
+out of 110 men, and not being able to bear up against the storms in the
+South Sea, had been forced to put in here, while the rest of the fleet
+under Verhagen held on their course.[75] These ships wished to have
+joined the expedition under Van Noort, but were forced to remain in the
+straits for want of provisions, which the others could not spare. They
+afterwards got back to Holland on the 13th July, 1600.
+
+[Footnote 75: The voyage of Verhagen, or so much of it rather as relates
+to the adventures of Sebaldt de Weert, follows the present voyage of Van
+Noort in the Collection by Harris, vol. I. pp. 37-44; and is, therefore,
+retained in the same situation on the present occasion.--E.]
+
+Van Noort and his ships left this bay on the 2d January, 1600, directing
+their course for Maurice bay, which they found to extend far to the
+eastwards, and to receive several rivers, the mouths of which were
+filled with vast quantities of ice, which seemed never to melt. It was
+now near midsummer of this southern clime, and the ice was so thick that
+they could not find its bottom with a line of ten fathoms. The land here
+seemed a congeries of broken islands, yet appearing like one continued
+mass, owing to the height of the mountains. They were here much
+distressed by hunger and continual rains, and two of their men were
+slain by the savages, while gathering muscles, which formed their chief
+subsistence. After weathering many storms in _Meniste_ bay, and having
+several encounters with the savages, they set sail on the 17th, and were
+driven into Penguin bay, or Goose bay, three miles from Meniste bay, and
+receiving its name from the vast multitude of penguins found there. At
+this place, James Claas van Ulpenda, the vice-admiral, was arraigned
+before a council of war, for various breaches of the articles sworn to
+before proceeding on the voyage. Having a fair trial, and sufficient
+time allowed him for his defence, he was condemned to be turned ashore
+in the straits, with a small supply of provisions, and allowed to shift
+for himself among the wild beasts and more savage inhabitants, which
+sentence was accordingly executed, so that he doubtless soon fell a prey
+either to hunger or the natives, who are implacable enemies to all
+strangers.
+
+They entered another bay on the 1st February, which they called Popish
+bay, probably owing to some cross erected on its shore, and in which
+they were exposed to much danger. On the 27th, they saw at a distance a
+huge mountain of ice in Penguin bay. The 28th they passed Cape Deseado,
+or Desire, into the South Sea, bidding adieu to the many dismal
+prospects of the Straits of Magellan. Their company, originally 248 men,
+was now reduced to 147, but was soon still farther lessened by losing
+company of the Henry Frederick, which never rejoined. Waiting for that
+ship in vain till the 12th March, they sailed to the island of Mocha on
+the coast of Chili, in lat. 38° 22' S. and six miles [twenty English]
+from the continent. This island is remarkable by a high mountain in the
+middle, which is cloven at the top, and whence a water-course descends
+into the vale land at its foot. They here bartered knives and hatchets
+with the natives for sheep, poultry, maize, _bartulas_,[76] and other
+fruits. The town consisted of about fifty straw huts, where the Dutch
+were regaled with a sour kind of drink, called _cici_, made of maiz
+steeped in water, which is the favourite drink of the Chilese at their
+feasts. Polygamy is much practised among these people, who buy as many
+wives as they can afford to maintain; so that a man who has many
+daughters, especially if they be handsome, is accounted rich. If one man
+kill another, he is judged by the relations of the deceased, as they
+have no laws or magistrates among them, so that the murderer may
+sometimes buy off his punishment by giving a drinking-bout of _cici_.
+Their cloathing is manufactured from the wool of a large kind of sheep,
+which animal they also employ to carry burdens. They would not sell any
+of these, but parted freely with another kind, not very different.
+
+[Footnote 76: This probably means battatas or potatoes, a native
+production of Chili.--E.]
+
+From thence they went to the island of St Mary, in lat. 37° S. eighteen
+miles [ninety-five English] from Mocha, where they fell in with a
+Spanish ship carrying lard and meal from Conception to Valdivia in
+Araucania, which they chased and took. The pilot of this ship informed
+them that they would not be able to return to the island of St Mary,
+owing to the south wind, and that two Spanish ships of war were waiting
+for them at Arica. Upon this information they resolved to sail for
+Valparaiso, and by that means quite lost all chance of being rejoined by
+the Henry Frederick, which might otherwise have got up with them.
+Besides, they concluded that the missing ship had failed to find St
+Mary's isle, owing to its being wrong placed in the map of Plancius, in
+lat. 38° S. which error they themselves had fallen into, had they not
+been set right by the observations of Mr Mellish. They were farther
+confirmed in the resolution of not returning to the island of St Mary,
+by hearing of the misfortune which had there befallen Simon de Cordes,
+who was there butchered with twenty-three of his men, after being
+invited on shore in a friendly manner by the Indians, owing to the
+treachery of the Spaniards endeavouring to get possession of his two
+ships, and sending intelligence to Lima and all about the country of the
+arrival of the Dutch in these seas, with a list of their ships, and the
+names of all their commanders. For these reasons they proceeded to
+Valparaiso, where they took two ships and killed some Indians, but all
+the Spaniards escaped on shore. Valparaiso is in lat. 35° 5' S. And
+about eighteen miles inland, [100 English miles] is the town of St Jago,
+abounding in red wine and sheep. They kill these animals merely for the
+sake of their tallow, with which alone they load many vessels. Here they
+received letters from the captain of the Flying Hart, one of the
+squadron under Verhagen, who had been treacherously captured by the
+Spaniards; owing, as he alleged, to the wrong placement of the island of
+St Mary in the map, by which he had been misled.
+
+At Valparaiso they intercepted some letters giving an account of the
+wars in Chili between the Spaniards and the Indians, who it seems were
+in rebellion, had sacked the town of Valdivia, putting vast numbers of
+Spaniards to the sword, and carrying off many captives. They burnt the
+houses and churches, knocking off the heads of the popish images,
+crying, "Down go the gods of the Spaniards." They then crammed the
+mouths of these images with gold, bidding them satisfy themselves with
+that, for the sake of which their votaries had committed so many
+barbarous massacres of their nation. They afterwards laid close siege to
+the city of Imperial, and had almost starved the Spanish garrison into a
+surrender. The valiant Indians who undertook this enterprise were about
+5000, of whom 5000 were cavalry, 100 were armed with muskets, and 70 had
+corslets, all of which were plunder they had taken from the Spaniards.
+They so mortally hate the Spaniards, that they rip up the breasts of all
+they overcome, tearing out their hearts with their teeth, and they
+delight to drink their favourite liquor from a cup made of a Spaniard's
+skull.
+
+These Indians [the Araucans] are for the most part very stout, and
+skilful soldiers, and commit the management of all their military
+affairs to the direction of one supreme general, whose orders are
+implicitly obeyed. Their method of election to this high dignity is very
+singular; for he who carries a certain log of wood on his shoulders the
+longest, and with the smallest appearance of weariness, is saluted
+general by the army. In this trial several carried the log four, five,
+and six hours; but at length one carried it twenty-four hours on end,
+and this person was now general. The whole of Chili, from St Jago to
+Valdivia, is one of the most fertile and most delightful countries in
+the world. It abounds in all kinds of cattle and fruit, has many rich
+gold mines, and its climate is so sweet and salubrious as to exclude the
+use of medicine, being health and life in itself.
+
+They entered the bay of Guasco[77] on the 1st April, where they remained
+till the 7th. The 11th they came into a large bay, named _Moro Gorch_,
+in lat. 18° 30' S. ten miles from which is _Moro Moreno_, from which the
+shore runs to Arica, and all this coast, up to the hill of St Francis,
+is very much subject to south winds, though the adjoining seas have the
+winds variable and uncertain. On the 20th the whole air was darkened by
+an _Arenal_ which is a cloud of dust, and so thick that one cannot see a
+stone's throw. These are raised by the wind from the adjoining shore,
+and are very common in these parts. The 25th they were within view of
+the famous city of Lima in Peru. At this time they learnt the value of
+the treasure of which the Spaniards had deprived them, in the ships they
+took on the coast of Chili. Nicholas Peterson, the captain of one of
+these prizes, acquainted Van Noort that he had been informed by a negro
+of a great quantity of gold having been on board the ship, as he
+believed to the amount of three tons, having helped to carry a great
+part of it on board. On this information the admiral closely examined
+the Spanish pilot, who at first denied all knowledge of any gold; but
+another negro having corroborated the information, with some farther
+circumstances, the pilot at last owned that they had on board fifty-two
+chests, each containing four arobas of gold, and besides these 500 bars
+of the same metal, weighing from eight to ten and twelve pounds each;
+all of which, together with what private stock belonged to any of the
+company, the captain had ordered to be thrown overboard in the night,
+when first chased, amounting in the whole to about 10,200 pounds weight
+of gold; and, from its fineness, worth about two million pieces of
+eight, or Spanish silver dollars. Upon this the admiral ordered the ship
+and all the prisoners to be searched, but there was only found a single
+pound of gold dust, tied up in a rag, in the breeches pocket of the
+Spanish pilot. The prisoners owned that all this gold was brought from
+the island of St Mary, from mines discovered only three years before;
+and that there were not more than three or four Spaniards on that
+island, and about 200 Indians, only armed with bows and arrows.
+
+[Footnote 77: Perhaps Huasco in lat. 28° 27' S. or it may possibly have
+been Guacho, in 25° 50' S.--E.]
+
+The 5th September they came in sight of the Ladrones, and came on the
+16th to Guam, one of these an island of about twenty Dutch miles in
+extent, and yielding fish, cocoa-nuts, bananas, and sugar canes, all of
+which the natives brought to the ships in a great number of canoes.
+Sometimes they met 200 of these canoes at one time, with four or five
+men in each, bawling out _hiero, hiero,_ meaning iron; and often in
+their eagerness they run their canoes against the ships, overturning
+them and losing all their commodities. These islanders were a sly subtle
+people, and honest with good looking after; for otherwise, they would
+sell a basket of cocoa-nut shells covered over with a small quantity of
+rice, as if full of rice. They would also snatch a sword from its
+scabbard, and plunge instantly into the water, where they dived like so
+many ducks; and the women were as roguish as the men, stealing as
+impudently, and diving as expertly to carry off their prizes.
+
+The 17th of September they sailed for the Philippines; and on the 20th
+they met with ice, though then only in the latitude of 3° N.[78] On the
+16th October they came to Bayla bay, in a very fertile land, at which
+place they procured abundance of all kinds of necessaries for their
+ships, by pretending to be Spaniards. The Spaniards, who are lords here,
+make the Indians pay an annual capitation tax, to the value of ten
+single rials for every one above twenty years of age. The natives of
+these islands are mostly naked, having their skins marked with figures
+so deeply impressed, [_tatooed_] that they never wear out. Being
+discovered to be Dutch, but not till they had gained their ends, they
+sailed for the Straits of Manilla, all the coasts near which appeared
+waste, barren, and rocky. Here a sudden squall of wind from the S.E.
+carried away some of their masts and sails, being more furious than any
+they had hitherto experienced during the voyage. The 23d some of the
+people went ashore, where they eat palmitoes and drank water so
+greedily, that they were afterwards seized with the dysentery. The 24th
+they entered the straits, sailing past an island in the middle, and came
+in the evening past the island of Capul, seven miles within the straits,
+near which they found whirlpools, where the sea was of an unfathomable
+depth, so far as they could discover.
+
+[Footnote 78: This surely is an error for 18°, Guam being in lat. 18°
+20' N. yet even here, the fact of meeting ice so far within the tropic
+is sufficiently singular.--E.]
+
+They now crowded sail for Manilla, which is eighty miles from Capul, but
+wanted both a good wind to carry them, and good maps and a skilful pilot
+to direct them to that place. The 7th November they took a junk from
+China, laden with provisions for Manilla. The master of this junk told
+them there were then at Manilla two great ships, that come every year
+from New Spain, and a Dutch ship also which had been brought from
+Malacca. He said also that the town of Manilla was walled round, having
+two forts for protecting the ships, as there was a vast trade to that
+place from China, not less than 400 junks coming every year from
+Chincheo, with silk and other valuable commodities, between Easter and
+December. There were also two ships expected shortly from Japan, laden
+with iron and other metals, and provisions. The 15th they took two
+barks, laden with hens and hogs, being part of the tribute to the
+Spaniards, but became food to the Dutch, who gave them a few bolts of
+linen in return.
+
+They passed the islands of _Bankingle_ and _Mindoro_, right over against
+which is the island of _Lou-bou_. at the distance of two miles, and
+between both is another small island, beside which there is a safe
+passage for ships. The island of Luzon is larger than England and
+Scotland,[79] and has a numerous cluster of small islands round about
+it; yet is more beholden to trade for its riches, than to the goodness
+of its soil. While at anchor, in 15° N. waiting for the ships said to be
+coming from Japan, Van Noort took one of them on the 1st December, being
+a vessel of fifty tons, which had been twenty-five days on her voyage.
+Her form was very strange, her forepart being like a chimney, and her
+furniture corresponding to her shape; as her sails were made of reeds,
+her anchors of wood, and her cables of straw. Her Japanese mariners had
+their heads all close shaven, except one tuft left long behind, which is
+the general custom of that country. The 9th, they took two barks, one
+laden with cocoa wine and arrack, and the other with hens and rice.
+
+[Footnote 79: Luzon is certainly a large island, but by no means such as
+represented in the text.--E.]
+
+The 14th of December they met the two Spanish ships returning from
+Manilla to New Spain, on which a very sharp engagement took place.
+Overpowered by numbers, the Dutch in the ship of Van Noort were reduced
+to the utmost extremity, being at one time boarded by the Spaniards, and
+almost utterly conquered; when Van Noort, seeing all was lost without a
+most resolute exertion, threatened to blow up his ship, unless his men
+fought better and beat off the Spaniards. On this, the Dutch crew fought
+with such desperate resolution, that they cleared their own ship, and
+boarded the Spanish admiral, which at last they sunk outright. In this
+action the Dutch admiral had five men slain, and twenty-six wounded, the
+whole company being now reduced to thirty-five men. But several hundreds
+of the Spaniards perished, partly slain in the fight, and partly drowned
+or knocked in the head after the battle was over. But the Dutch lost
+their pinnace, which was taken by the Spanish vice-admiral; and this was
+not wonderful, considering that she had only twenty-five men to fight
+against five hundred Spaniards and Indians.
+
+After this action, Van Noort made sail for the island of Borneo, the
+chief town of which island is in lat. 5° N. while Manilla, the capital
+of Luçon, is in lat. 15° N. On the way to Borneo, they passed the island
+of _Bolutam_, [Palawan or Paragua,] which is 180 miles in length from
+N.E. to S.W. They came to Borneo on the 26th December, putting into a
+great bay, three miles in compass, where there was good anchorage, and
+abundance of fish in a neighbouring river, and the fishermen always
+ready to barter their fish for linen. Van Noort sent a message to the
+king, desiring leave to trade; but suspecting them to be Spaniards, he
+would come to no terms till his officers had examined them with the
+utmost attention, after which they had trade for pepper with a people
+called _Pattannees_, of Chinese origin. Both these and the native
+Borneans were fond of Chinese cotton cloth, but the linen from Holland
+was a mere drug, and quite unsaleable. In the mean time, the Borneans
+laid a plot to surprise the ship; for which purpose, on the 1st January,
+1601, they came with at least an hundred praws full of men, pretending
+to have brought presents from the king, and would have come on board the
+ship; but the Dutch, suspecting their treachery, commanded them to keep
+at a distance from the ship, or they would be obliged to make them do so
+with their shot, on which the Borneans desisted.
+
+Borneo is the largest of all the islands in the East-Indies; and its
+capital, of the same name, contains about 300 houses, but is built in a
+dirty marshy soil, or rather in the water, so that the inhabitants have
+to go from one house to another in their praws. The inhabitants all go
+constantly armed, from the noble down to the fisherman; and even the
+women are of so martial a disposition, that on receiving an affront,
+they instantly revenge it, either with a dagger or a javelin. This a
+Dutchman had nearly proved to his cost; for having offended one of these
+viragoes, she set upon him with a javelin, and had surely dispatched
+him, if she had not been prevented by main force. They are Mahometans,
+and so very superstitious, that they would rather die than eat of
+swine's flesh, nor will they keep any of these animals about them. The
+better sort have a cotton garment from the waist down, with a turban on
+their heads; but the common people go entirely naked. They continually
+chew betel and areka, which is also a common practice in many other
+parts of India.
+
+On the 4th January, four Borneans came to the ship, intending to have
+cut the cables, that she might drive on shore and become their prey; but
+the Dutch fortunately discovered them, and drove them away with shot,
+when they left their praw behind, which the Dutch took, to serve instead
+of their own boat, which they had lost at the Philippines. Seeing no
+hope of any profitable trade at this place, they now left it, intending
+for Bantam, not much pleased either with the country or the people. The
+day after leaving Borneo, they met a junk from Japan bound for Manilla,
+which informed them of a great Dutch ship being forced by tempests into
+Japan, all her company having died by sickness and famine except
+fourteen. They came first to _Bongo_, in lat. 34° 40' N. [Bungo in about
+lat. 33° N.] whence the emperor of Japan ordered them to remove to
+_Atonza_, in lat. 36° 30' N. [Osaka in lat. 34' 55' N.] They alleged
+that they were allowed to trade, and to build a new ship, with liberty
+to dispose of themselves afterwards as they pleased. From this account,
+it was not doubted that this was the admiral of Verhagen's fleet;[80]
+and dismissing the Japanese vessel, they passed the line a third time,
+and proceeded for Bantam, in no little fear and danger, for want of an
+experienced pilot and good charts.
+
+[Footnote 80: This was the ship in which William Adams sailed as pilot,
+as related on a former occasion, being the Hope, commanded by James
+Mahu, one of five ships from Rotterdam. We have already had occasion to
+meet with two of these in the Straits of Magellan.--E.]
+
+The 16th they took a junk belonging to Jor or Johor, in which they
+procured an experienced and skilful pilot, who came in good time to
+save them from shipwreck, which they had otherwise most probably
+suffered in these dangerous seas, so thick set with shoals and islands
+on every side, with which they were entirely unacquainted; and besides,
+they were now reduced to one anchor, and one solitary cable almost worn
+out. The 28th they came to Jortan in the island of Java, where they had
+news of several Dutch ships being at Bantam. The city of Jortan consists
+of about 1000 houses built of timber, and its king commands over a
+considerable portion of that end of the island, and had lately conquered
+_Balambuan_, a small island S.E. from Jortan. The people in these parts
+are said to be Mahometans; yet, as pagods are still in use, they seem to
+retain some mixture of the old Indian superstitions, or at least some
+remnant of paganism is tolerated among the common people. Their chief
+priest at this time was an old man, said to be an hundred and twenty
+years of age, who had a large household of wives, who fed the old man
+with their milk.
+
+Sailing past Jortan, they saw a large Portuguese ship of 600 tons,
+sticking fast among the shoals. She was bound for Amboina, on purpose to
+have engrossed all the trade of that place; at least such was the report
+of the Portuguese; but Van Noort strongly suspected she had been sent
+out to cruize for the purpose of intercepting him. He was, therefore,
+the less concerned for her misfortune, and the less careful in assisting
+her crew, originally of between six and seven hundred men, many of whom
+were still on board, and in great danger of perishing. The 5th of
+February, they passed the straits between _Balambuan_ and _Bally_,
+leaving Java on the N.E.[81] On the 11th, finding themselves in lat 13°
+S. they directed their course for the Cape of Good Hope. On the 18th,
+having the sun vertical at noon, their latitude was 11° 20' S. and here
+a calm began which lasted eleven days. The 11th March they were in lat.
+24° 45' S. and in 28° 10' S. on the 24th.
+
+[Footnote 81: This is an obvious error, as the Straits of Bally are at
+the _east_ end of Java, which they must consequently have left on the
+N.W. of their course.--E.]
+
+The 19th of April, having been considerably retarded by cross winds and
+calms, they were under the necessity to lessen their allowance of water.
+At night of the 24th they observed light, as of a fire, on land, about
+four miles to the N.W. although they reckoned themselves 200 miles from
+the cape, and were not aware of having approached any other land. The
+25th, being calm weather, they were enabled to mend their sails, and at
+night another fire was observed; and in the morning of the 26th they saw
+land. The 3d May they saw land between the east and north, about six
+miles off, resembling the end of an island, by which they reckoned
+themselves near the cape, and now shaped their course for the island of
+St Helena, where they arrived on the 26th. They here refreshed
+themselves with fish and some flesh, and laid in a supply of wood and
+water; but found goats and fowls hard to be got, and could not procure
+any oranges.
+
+Leaving St Helena on the 30th May, they crossed the line for the fourth
+time on the 14th of June; and on the 16th met a fleet of six Dutch
+ships, under Admiral Heemskirk, bound for India. These had fought with
+thirteen Spanish ships near the island of Sal, and had lost their
+pinnace and vice-admiral; the former having been taken by the Spaniards,
+and the latter having parted company. The 8th July they were in lat. 27°
+N. when they fell in with considerable quantities of the sea-weed called
+_saragossa_. By the 13th they were in lat. 32° 30' N. after which they
+had a calm of fifteen days, the sea being all covered with weeds. The
+22d they had to go upon short allowance of bread, and that too much worm
+eaten. August 1st, being in lat. 40° N. they passed the island of
+Flores, forty-five miles to the westward, by their estimation. They met
+three ships belonging to Embden on the 18th, from whom they procured
+bread and flesh, in exchange for rice and pepper; and from whom they
+learnt that they were so near England, that they might expect to see the
+Lizard next day. About noon of the 26th August, 1601, they arrived in
+safety before the city of Rotterdam, where they were received with the
+utmost joy, on their return from so long and perilous a voyage, which
+had occupied three years, bating eighteen days.
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_Voyage of Sebald de Weert, to the South Sea and Straits of Magellan, in
+1598_.[82]
+
+"Though not a circumnavigation, it seems necessary to give an account of
+this voyage of Sebald de Weert, by way of supplement to that of Oliver
+de Noort; because De Weert was fitted out with the intention of sailing
+by the Straits of Magellan to India, and because it is difficult to find
+so good a description of these famous straits as he has given. De Weert
+was one of the best seamen in Holland, and lived to distinguish himself
+afterwards by many more successful enterprises; and I persuade myself
+the reader will be pleased to see the firmness of an able commander,
+struggling against a long series of misfortunes. This has always been
+esteemed one of the best written, and most curious of all the Dutch
+voyages, and is therefore given at large."[83]--_Harris_.
+
+[Footnote 82: Harris, I. 36.]
+
+[Footnote 83: So far Harris; but on the present occasion several trivial
+and minute circumstances are omitted or abbreviated.--E.]
+
+§ 1. _Incidents of the Voyage from Holland to the Straits of Magellan_.
+
+The fleet fitted out for this expedition consisted of the Hope of 500
+tons, with 130 men, commanded by James Mahu, admiral; the Love or
+Charity of 300 tons, and 110 men, commanded by Simon de Cordes,
+vice-admiral; the Faith of 320 tons, and 100 men, of which Gerard van
+Beuningen was captain; the Fidelity of 220 tons, with 86 men, captain
+Jurian Buckholt; and a yacht of 150 tons and 112 men, called the Merry
+Messenger, captain Sebald de Weert. These five ships were well provided
+with all manner of provisions, cannon, small arms, ammunition, money,
+merchandise, and stores necessary for a long voyage; and the pilot on
+whose knowledge and experience they chiefly depended, was an Englishman
+named William Adams,[84] besides whom there were three other Englishmen
+on board the admiral.
+
+[Footnote 84: Of the adventures of this person in Japan, we have
+formerly had occasion to give an account in vol. VIII. p. 64, of this
+Collection, preceded by a brief abstract of the voyages of Schald de
+Weert.--E.]
+
+The fleet sailed from the road of Goeree in the Maese on the 27th June,
+1598; but, owing to contrary winds, had to remain at anchor in the Downs
+on the coast of England, till the 15th July. The wind being then fair,
+they set sail on that day, and on the 19th were on the coast of Barbary.
+Towards the end of August, they arrived in the harbour of St Jago, one
+of the Cape de Verd islands, where they remained till the 10th
+September, although the climate was very unhealthy, and the pilots,
+particularly Mr Adams, remonstrated against continuing there; by which
+the officers were so much offended, that they resolved never more to
+call the pilots to council, which seems to have been the source of all
+their subsequent misfortunes, and of that restless spirit of mutiny and
+discontent, which possessed the seamen in this fleet.
+
+In the afternoon of the 11th September, they were off the desert island
+of Brava, and the bottom being rocky, so that they could not anchor,
+they stood off and on all night, and coasting along next morning they
+found some fresh water, which was hard to be got, as the ships could not
+come to anchor, on account of a bad bottom. The boats, however, of
+Captains Beuniugen and Buckholt, went ashore with empty casks, which
+they filled and brought on board, though then night and the ships under
+way. Captain de Ween went ashore in a small sandy bay, and looking about
+for fresh water, he saw some Portuguese and negroes coming towards him,
+who told him the French and English ships used to get fresh water near
+that place, but remained always under sail. They said also, that no
+refreshments were to be had at this island, but these might be had in
+the island of Fuego. After the departure of the islanders, de Weert
+discovered four or five ruinous small huts, the door of one being walled
+up, which he found full of maize. On this discovery, he remained there
+with three men, lest the Portuguese might carry off the maize in the
+night, and sent some others in the boat to give notice to the admiral of
+this discovery. Fortunately a small vessel belonging to the bishop of St
+Thomas, taken by the Dutch at Praya, arrived in the bay, to which de
+Weert removed all the maize. He also took two female sea tortoises, in
+which were above 600 eggs, of which they made many good meals. The
+Portuguese and negroes, finding the Dutch busied in carrying away their
+maize, came down the mountain, making a great noise; but de Weert,
+having two fusils, fired at them and made them retire.
+
+On the return of de Weert, he found the admiral very sick, and a council
+assembled in the Hope. He in the first place advised them to remain no
+longer at the Cape Verd islands, and then resigned his command to the
+vice-admiral, de Cordes. On advising with the other captains, and
+learning the quantity of water in each ship, de Cordes gave orders that
+such as had most should give part to the others, and that the allowance
+of provisions and water should be diminished, and as fresh water was not
+to be expected for three or four months, they were directed to gather
+rain-water when that could be had. The greatest part of the men in the
+admiral's ship being sick, two or three of them were removed into each
+of the other ships, in exchange for sound men. The fleet sailed from
+Brava on the 15th September, and on the 22d a signal was made from the
+admiral for the other captains. They found the admiral, James Mahu,
+beyond hope of recovery; and that night he and his supercargo, Daniel
+Restan, both died. He was of a mild and gentle disposition, honest,
+careful, diligent, and very kind to the seamen, and was much lamented by
+the whole fleet. Opening the letters of the directors of the expedition,
+which were directed to be opened in such a case, de Cordes was appointed
+admiral, and Benningen vice-admiral; Sebald de Weert being promoted to
+the command of the Faith, and Dirke Gernitsz China to that of the yacht.
+These alterations did not please the seamen, who were attached to their
+former commanders.
+
+By the 4th October, the scurvy raged much among the seamen, especially
+in the Hope, on which de Cordes ordered a day of prayer to be observed
+in the fleet, to implore the mercy of God and a happy voyage. They were
+then in the lat. of 1° 45' S. At length the scurvy increased so much in
+the Hope, that the admiral had not men enough to work his ship, and it
+was resolved to steer for some island where fresh provisions might be
+procured. They steered accordingly for Annobon, where they hoped to get
+fresh meat and oranges. Towards night, the admiral, who sailed in the
+van, fired a gun as a signal of seeing land, though all the pilots then
+thought the land at the distance of 100 leagues. They accordingly
+approached the land, and anchored on the coast of _Manicongo_, in lat.
+3° S.[85] They here lost company of the small ship belonging to St
+Thomas, in which were eleven sound men, and some thought she had
+deserted, while others thought she had run aground: But they afterwards
+found she had gone to Cape Lope Gonzalves, where the men quitted her,
+going aboard the ship of Baltazar Musheron, which was bound to America.
+
+[Footnote 85: The latitude in the text falls near Point Palmas, on the
+coast of Yumba, in what is called the Kingdom of Congo. Mayumba bay,
+perhaps the Manicongo of the text, is in lat. 4° 30' S.]
+
+After several ineffectual attempts to procure refreshments for their
+men on the coast of Africa and the island of Annobon, they put to sea on
+the 3d January, 1599, from that island, with the intention of sailing
+direct for the Straits of Magellan. The 22d they passed the shelves and
+rocks on the coast of Brazil, called the _Abrolhos_. The 9th March, one
+of the seamen in the vice-admiral's ship was hanged, for repeatedly
+breaking open the cupboard belonging to the cook, and stealing bread.
+About this time, the sick beginning to recover, got such good appetites
+that their allowance was not sufficient. The 12th, being near the Rio
+Plata, the sea appeared as red as blood, and some of the water being
+drawn up was found full of small red worms, that leaped out of it like
+fleas.
+
+§ 2. _The Fleet passes through the Straits of Magellan into the South
+Sea, and is forced to return_.
+
+The 6th of April, the fleet got into the Straits of Magellan, and
+towards evening cast anchor under the smaller of the two Penguin isles,
+fourteen leagues within the mouth of the straits. They here saw vast
+numbers of those birds called _plongeons_ or divers, because they dive
+into the water to catch fish. They killed there ten or fourteen of them
+with sticks, and might have killed as many as would have served the
+whole fleet, but would not lose the opportunity of a fair wind. The 9th
+they proceeded through the straits; and next day the admiral sent fifty
+men on shore, to look for inhabitants or cattle, but after travelling
+three leagues along shore, they found nothing. They arrived in a fine
+bay on the 15th, twenty-one leagues from the mouth of the straits,
+called _Muscle bay_ by the English, because of the great quantities of
+muscles found there, and here they provided themselves abundantly with
+fresh water and wood. The 17th they sailed between two rocky shores, so
+close and so high that they hardly thought to have got through. The
+mountains on both sides were covered with snow. On the 18th, they cast
+anchor in a bay on the north side of the straits, in lat. 54° S. called
+_Great bay_, having good anchorage on fine sand. In this bay there are
+three small islands, the least of which is farthest east.
+
+In these parts, there grow great quantities of trees, resembling bay
+trees, but somewhat higher, the bark of which is very bitter, and has a
+hot taste like pepper.[86] They here found abundance of muscles, some of
+which were a span long, and when boiled, the fish of three of them
+weighed a pound. The wind being contrary, they lay here at anchor till
+the 23d of August,[87] without taking the sails from the yards, to be
+ready to sail on a change of wind. In the mean while they suffered much
+from cold, in so much that they lost above an hundred men, among whom
+was Captain Buckholt, who was succeeded by Baltazar de Cordes. Storms
+were so frequent and violent during this time, that the ships could not
+ride quietly at anchor, and the seamen were forced to be continually at
+work to keep them right. They were also forced to go often on shore, in
+rain, snow, and hail, to get in fresh water, wood, muscles, and such
+other food as they could find, by which they were greatly fatigued. The
+scarcity of victuals was so great, and the climate so severe, that they
+were almost starved with hunger and cold, and their appetites so
+insatiable, that they devoured roots or any thing else they could find,
+raw and uncooked. Most of the seamen had no watch-coats or other warm
+cloathing, to enable them to support the fatigue of watching and their
+daily labour, having made no provision of such things, as they believed
+themselves bound to warm climes. To remedy this evil, the general
+ordered cloth to be distributed among them.
+
+[Footnote 86: In Harris these are erroneously called _Pimento_, but they
+must have been the _Wintera aromatica_. The Pimento, or _Myrtus
+Pimenta_, is a native of the warm regions of America and the West India
+islands, producing Pimento, All-spice, or Jamaica pepper.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 87: This date, here anticipated, refers to the day when they
+afterwards set sail.--E.]
+
+It was found that many of the seamen, when at their meals, were in use
+to sell their victuals to others at high prices, and afterwards
+satisfied their hunger with raw muscles and green herbs, which
+occasioned them to fall into dropsies and other lingering sickness, of
+which several died: For this reason, the captains and other officers
+were ordered to be present at all their meals, to see and oblige them to
+eat their allowances.
+
+The 7th May the vice-admiral was sent, with two boats, to an island
+opposite Great bay, to catch sea-dogs.[88] He found there seven small
+boats or canoes, with savages on board, who were of a reddish colour
+with long hair, and, as well as he could observe, seemed _ten or eleven
+feet high_. On seeing the Dutch boats, the savages went on shore and
+threw many stones at the Dutch, so that they did not venture to land.
+The savages then took courage, and came towards them in their canoes;
+and coming within musket-shot, the vice-admiral made his men give them a
+general discharge, by which four or five of the savages were slain, and
+the rest so frightened that they escaped again on shore. They then
+pulled up some trees, which appeared afar off to be a span thick; but
+the vice-admiral chose to let them alone, and returned to the ships. The
+26th of May, as some seamen were on shore, looking for muscles, roots,
+and herbs, and were dispersed, expecting no danger, a number of savages
+fell upon them suddenly, killed three of them, whom they tore in pieces,
+and wounded two, who were rescued by the admiral. All these savages were
+naked, except one, who had the skin of a sea-dog or seal about his
+shoulders. They were armed with wooden javelins, which they threw with
+great strength and dexterity. The points of these javelins were like
+cramp-irons, tied to the shafts with the guts of sea-dogs, and would run
+so deep into the flesh, that it was almost impossible to get them out.
+
+[Footnote 88: Seals are probably here meant.--E.]
+
+While the fleet lay in this bay, the admiral ordered his long-boat to be
+put upon the stocks, to be enlarged and altered into a pinnace, which
+was named the Postillion, and the command of her was given to the second
+pilot of the Hope. Having no provisions for making broth, Captain de
+Weert landed on the 27th July, in order to catch seals; and while he was
+ashore, so great a storm arose that he was obliged to remain two days
+and two nights, before he could get back to his ship, and caught
+nothing. After enduring great hardships in this _Green bay_,[89] and
+which the Dutch named the Bay of de Cordes, they set sail on the 23d of
+August, having the wind at N.E. but next day the weather became so calm,
+that they were obliged to put into a great bay on the south side of the
+straits. Here, to perpetuate the memory of so dangerous and
+extraordinary a voyage into these straits, to which no nation had
+hitherto sent so many or such large ships, the general instituted a new
+order of knighthood, of which he made his six principal officers
+knights. They bound themselves by oath, never to do or consent to any
+thing contrary to their honour or reputation, whatever might be the
+dangers or extremities to which they were exposed, even death itself;
+nor to do or suffer to be done any thing prejudicial to the interests of
+their country, or of the voyage in which they were now engaged. They
+also solemnly promised, freely to expose their lives against all the
+enemies of their nation, and to use their utmost endeavours to conquer
+those dominions whence the king of Spain procured so much gold and
+silver, by which he was enabled to carry on the war against their
+country. This ceremony was performed ashore on the eastern coast of the
+straits, in as orderly a manner as the place and occasion would permit,
+and the order was named of _The Lion set free_, in allusion to the
+Belgic lion, the cognizance of their country, which they professed to
+use all their endeavours to free from the Spanish yoke. After this
+ceremony, a tablet was erected on the top of a high pillar, on which the
+names of the new-made knights were inscribed, and the bay was named the
+_Bay of Knights_.
+
+[Footnote 89: This seems the same formerly named Great bay.--E.]
+
+Leaving this bay on the 28th of August, they put into another bay a
+league farther on, where they were again becalmed. The admiral at this
+time gave orders to Captain de Weert to go back in his boat to the Bay
+of Knights, to remove the tablet to a more convenient situation. When
+about to double the point of the bay on this errand, de Weert saw eighty
+savages sitting on the shore, having eight or nine canoes beside them;
+and, as soon as the savages saw the boat, they set up a dismal noise,
+inviting the Dutch to land, by means of signs. But, having only a small
+number of men, de Weert turned back towards the ships; on which the
+savages ran across the woods along shore, always hallowing, and making
+signs for the Dutch to land. When the general was informed of this
+adventure, he dispatched three boats well armed on shore, but the
+savages were not to be seen, though they had left their marks behind
+them, having dug up the interred body of a Dutchman, and left his body
+on the ground, barbarously disfigured. On going to the knights tablet,
+the Dutch also found it had been broken by the savages.
+
+Early in the night of the 3d September, they got out from the Straits of
+Magellan into the South Sea, with a fair wind, and continued their
+voyage to the W.N.W. with the wind at N.E. till the 7th, having all that
+time fine weather. This day, however, the sea began to swell and rise so
+high, that the vice-admiral had to lie to and hoist his boat on board,
+which was likewise done by the Fidelity. While de Weert was sailing
+directly in the wake of the admiral, who led the fleet, an accident
+happened on board the yacht, which had the wind of the Fidelity, which
+obliged both the Faith and the Fidelity, the former being de Weert's
+ship, to furl their sails, and lie to for assisting the yacht. The
+admiral continued his course, thinking that the other ships continued to
+follow him, and that the fog prevented them from being seen by the
+watch. The vice-admiral also was obliged to furl his sails shortly
+after, the fog being so thick as to prevent them from seeing each other,
+though very near.
+
+On the 8th the two yachts lost sight of the ships, but these three kept
+company all that day; and next day the whole fleet rejoined to their
+great joy. After joining, Derick Geritz sent the Postillion to the
+admiral, to request the assistance of his carpenters; but they were
+sick, and those from the Faith and Fidelity went on board the yacht.
+This proved afterwards a serious loss to these ships, as they never got
+their carpenters back. The wind shifted all of a sudden, and the sea
+became so rough and stormy that the yacht had to furl her sails, as was
+done by the vice-admiral, who was ahead of the Faith, and by the
+Fidelity. In the ensuing night the yacht and vice-admiral made sail
+again, without advertising the other two ships by signal, so that they
+continued to lie to. When day broke next morning, Captains Baltazar de
+Cordes and Sebalt de Weert, of the Fidelity and Faith, were extremely
+troubled at not seeing any of the other ships. De Weert, who was now the
+senior captain, was also much troubled by the unprovided state of his
+ship, having no master, only two old pilots, and a very small number of
+seamen, mostly sick and weak through the cold and damp weather, though
+they kept a fire burning night and day.
+
+The N.E. wind became so violent on the 16th September, that the two
+ships were every moment in danger of sinking. The gallery of the Faith
+was rent open above an inch, and the sea broke so violently over the
+Fidelity, that her men were almost constantly up to their knees in
+water. She likewise sprung a leak, owing to which they were forced to
+keep her pumps constantly going day and night, yet could hardly keep her
+afloat. At last, after much search, the leak was found and stopt. In
+this deplorable situation these two ships remained for twenty-four
+hours, _spooning_ under bare poles. The seamen also became much
+dissatisfied, though allowed two ounces of dried fish a day to each man,
+with a reasonable quantity of biscuit. But they were much discontented
+with this scanty allowance, having been used in the straits to fill
+themselves with muscles, of which they could not now brook the want, so
+that the captains had much ado to pacify them.
+
+In the night of the 26th September they fell in with the land to the
+north of the straits by mistake, thinking themselves to have been twenty
+leagues from the land; and in the morning the Faith was in great danger,
+as the wind drifted her towards the coast, on which were two rocks,
+which they avoided with the utmost difficulty. The Fidelity, which was a
+considerable way in front, had discovered the rocks in time, and had
+easily given them a wide birth. They were only three leagues from the
+straits when they fell in with the land; and as the westerly wind now
+blew so hard that they were unable to bear up against it, the two
+captains now resolved to regain the straits, and to wait there in some
+safe road or bay for a fair wind, when they did not doubt of rejoining
+the other ships, as it had been agreed to wait at the island of St. Mary
+on the coast of Chili for two months, in case of separation. About
+evening, therefore, of the 27th September, they arrived at the southern
+point of the straits' mouth, and were drifted by the current six or
+seven leagues within the straits, where they anchored in a very good
+road.
+
+§ 3. _Incidents during their second Residence in the Straits of
+Magellan_.
+
+From the 27th to the 30th of September they had tolerably good weather,
+but the wind then began to blow so furiously from the S.W. that they
+were forced to drop three anchors a-piece to keep them from being driven
+on shore. As the summer of these antarctic regions was now approaching,
+they were in hopes of fair weather; yet during two months that they
+remained in the straits, they scarcely had a fair day in which to dry
+their sails. For twenty days that they remained in this bay, to which
+they gave the name of the _Bay of Trouble_, they endured incredible
+hardships, being forced to go on shore daily in search of a few birds,
+which, with muscles and snails found upon the rocks, formed their sorry
+subsistence. Being unable to subsist any longer in that bay, they set
+sail on the 18th October, and found a better bay about a league farther
+within the straits. The 22d they were nearly destroyed by a violent
+storm, but the weather became calm next day. The constant employment of
+the seamen was to go on shore in search of muscles for their sustenance
+at low water, and when the tide was in to fetch wood and fresh water, so
+that they had no time to dry themselves, though they kept up a good fire
+continually. In short, during the whole nine months spent in these
+straits, now and formerly, they scarcely had an opportunity once to dry
+their sails, so frequent were the returns of rain and storms. The men
+also were exposed to wet, cold, and high winds, which kept them
+continually uncomfortable, and always at work. The seamen now began to
+murmur, alleging there would not be enough of biscuit for their return
+to Holland, if they remained here any longer. Having notice of this, de
+Weert went into the bread-room, as if to examine their store; and, on
+coming out, he declared, with a cheerful countenance, there was enough
+of biscuit and other provisions for eight months, though in fact there
+was not more than sufficient for four.
+
+At length, on the 2d December, the wind changed to the N.E. and they
+immediately weighed anchor, but could not get out into the South Sea,
+owing to whirlwinds rising from between the high hills and the bottom of
+the bay. The Faith was driven at one time so near the shore that a
+person might have stepped ashore from her gallery, and had certainly
+been lost if the wind had not abated. Next day, the storm being over,
+the two ships got out of Close bay, as they called it, with the ebb, but
+they never afterwards anchored together, and that day they cast anchor
+at the distance of a league from each other. The 8th of December they
+had a more violent storm than ever, which lasted two days, and during
+which the waves rose sometimes higher than the masts. The storm abating
+on the 10th, de Weert went in his boat, intending to go aboard the
+Fidelity; but on doubling the point which lay between them, was
+overwhelmed with grief to see no ship, nor any signs of shipwreck, so
+that he thought she had foundered. Going next day farther towards a
+gulf, he was rejoiced to see a mast behind a low point, where he found
+the Fidelity, with which ship he had to leave his small boat to assist
+in fishing for her anchors and cables, which she had lost in the late
+storm. He then took his leave, returning to his own ship, little
+dreaming he had taken his last farewell of Captain de Cordes.
+
+The 10th, going ashore in the boat for victuals as usual, and having
+doubled a point, they saw three canoes with savages, who went
+immediately on shore, and scrambled up the mountains like monkeys. The
+Dutch examined the canoes, in which were only a few young divers, some
+wooden grapnels, skins of beasts, and other things of no value. Going on
+shore to see if the savages had left any thing, they found a woman and
+two children, who endeavoured to run away, but was taken and carried on
+board, shewing few signs of fear or concern. She was of a middle size
+and reddish colour, with a big belly, a fierce countenance, and her
+hair close cut as if shaven, whereas the men wear their hair long. She
+had a string of snail-shells about her neck by way of ornament, and a
+seal's skin on her shoulders, tied round her neck with a string of gut.
+The rest of her body was quite naked, and her breasts hung down like the
+udders of a cow. Her mouth was very wide, her legs crooked, and her
+heels very long.
+
+This female savage would not eat any of their boiled or roasted meats,
+so they gave her one of the birds they had found in the canoes. Having
+pluckt off the long feathers, she opened it with a muscle shell, cutting
+in the first place behind the right wing, and then above the stomach.
+After that, drawing out the guts, she laid the liver a short time on the
+fire, and eat it almost raw. She then cleaned the gizzard, which she eat
+quite raw, as she did the body of the bird. Her children eat in the same
+manner, one being a girl of four years of age, and the other a boy, who,
+though only six months old, had most of his teeth, and could walk
+alone.[90] The woman looked grave and serious at her meal, though the
+seamen laughed heartily at her strange figure, and unusual mode of
+feeding. She afterwards sat down on her heels like an ape; and she slept
+all gathered up in a heap, with her infant between her arms, having her
+breast in his mouth. After keeping her two days on board, de Weert set
+her on shore, giving her a gown and cap, with necklace and bracelets of
+glass beads. He gave her also a small mirror, a knife, a nail, an awl,
+and a few other toys of small value, with which she seemed much pleased.
+He cloathed the boy also, and decorated him with glass beads of all
+colours; but carried the girl to Holland, where she died. The mother
+seemed much concerned at parting with her daughter, yet went into the
+boat without resistance or noise. She was carried to the shore, a league
+west from the ship, to a place which she pointed out, where the seamen
+found a fire and some utensils, which made the seamen believe that the
+savages had run away on seeing the boat.
+
+[Footnote 90: They had no means to ascertain his age, and must have
+concluded him only six months old from his small size; but from his
+teeth and walking alone, he was more likely to have been two years old,
+and his diminutive size was probably occasioned by the miseries of the
+climate, and wretchedness of every kind to which these outcasts of
+nature are subjected.--E.]
+
+When the boat returned, a new storm arose, during which the waves often
+overtopped the masts, and tossed the ship so violently that they
+momentarily expected she would have been overset or split in pieces;
+but, by the blessing of God, she got out of this bay, to which they gave
+the name of _Unfortunate Bay_. Next day they cast anchor towards evening
+in the channel of the straits, but finding the anchor had no buoy
+attached, and the weather being too violent to allow of supplying one,
+they had again to weigh, and put before the wind, and at length got into
+the bay of Cordes, fourteen or fifteen leagues farther eastwards, near
+the middle of the straits. In this passage they kept as near as possible
+to the south side of the channel, that they might be seen by the
+Fidelity, and even fired a gun off the mouth of a bay in which they
+supposed she lay, as a signal, to which they imagined that they heard
+another gun in answer from their consort, and continued their course in
+the full belief of being followed by the Fidelity. In this passage the
+strength of the wind drove them so fast, that they had to fasten their
+boat astern with two strong hawsers to preserve her, and to diminish the
+velocity of their course; but the heavy rolling waves broke both
+hawsers, and they lost their boat, by which they were reduced to great
+difficulty, having now no means of getting on shore in search of
+provisions.
+
+Next day, being the 16th December, they saw a boat making towards them
+from the westwards, which occasioned various conjectures; but at length
+turned out to belong to the fleet of Van Noort. This unexpected meeting
+gave great joy to the seamen, and the men in this boat were received
+with much respect by de Weert. They were all in perfect health and
+vigour; and, among other things respecting their voyage, told of having
+caught above 2000 birds at the great Penguin Island. This intelligence
+made the sailors in the Faith extremely anxious to get there, and
+several of them were bold enough to tell Captain de Weert, that it was
+necessary they should go there, where they might as well wait for a fair
+wind as in any other place, and besides, that it was only a league out
+of their way. But de Weert declared he would on no account part company
+from Van Noort. This general came in person next day to visit de Weert;
+and the day following, being the 18th December, the whole fleet joined
+him. The wind changing to S.W. on the 22d, they all set sail; and after
+proceeding two or three hours, de Weert requested the loan of a boat
+from general Van Noort, with three or four men, that he might go before
+to direct Captain de Cordes to get ready to sail with the fleet; but he
+could not find the Fidelity.
+
+The Faith was now grown very foul, and unable consequently to keep up
+with the fleet; for which reason, being off the Bay of Knights, where
+she met the ebb current, she was forced to go in there. The 23d she was
+again opposed by adverse currents in a narrow channel, and unable to
+follow the other ships. The 24th they tried again, but were unable to
+get round a point, behind which the fleet of Van Noort lay at anchor;
+and finding it impossible to double that point with the present wind, de
+Weert resolved to wait till it changed, that he might not fatigue his
+men by persisting in vain attempts. But, although the wind was contrary,
+Van Noort proceeded farther on, in search of a more secure anchorage, by
+which de Weert lost sight of the fleet, though not far off, in
+consequence of an intervening high point of land.
+
+Despairing of being able to rejoin the fleet of Van Noort, and finding
+it impossible to subsist his men without a boat, de Weert ordered the
+pieces of one which were in the hold to be taken out, that they might be
+put together. This was on the 25th December; but having the wind at
+north next day, he attempted to get next day into a small bay, a league
+farther on than the Bay of Knights, in which the boat might be more
+conveniently built: but the violence of the wind forced him back into
+the Bay of Cordes, five leagues farther to the east. Here, on the 26th
+and 27th, they endured so great a storm, that the seamen began to murmur
+again, as having been a whole fortnight without procuring any muscles,
+having nothing to subsist upon in all that time but a scanty allowance
+of biscuit and oil. Seeing their insolence, de Weert called them into
+the cabin, giving them good words, and even desired their advice as to
+what was best to be done in this difficult conjuncture. Some were of
+opinion, that they should proceed to Rio de la Plata in the boat,
+abandoning their ship, and give themselves up to the Spaniards. Others
+were for going to St Helena in quest of provisions. The pilot, John
+Outgetz, was for going to Guinea or the Gold Coast of Africa, where he
+was known, having made five voyages there. None of these opinions
+pleased de Weert, who told them, that he could not come to any
+determination without the consent of Captain de Cordes.
+
+In the mean time, the boat being now ready, de Weert went ashore in her
+on the 1st January, 1600, to get her properly caulked. In the afternoon,
+having doubled the southerly point, two boats were seen, which belonged
+to Van Noort, who had put back to the Bay of Knights in search of the
+Faith. Next day, Van Noort returned back, promising to make search for
+the Fidelity. De Weert also sent his boat, with his ensign and one of
+his pilots, on the same search, and gave them a letter for Van Noort,
+requesting a supply of biscuit sufficient for two months. The boat came
+back on the 5th with the general's answer, saying, That he was not sure
+of having enough of biscuit for his own men, neither knew he how long he
+might be at sea, and therefore could not spare any. This answer
+afflicted de Weert; and having now no hopes of being again rejoined by
+de Cordes, he resolved to proceed for Penguin Island, to lay in a large
+store of these birds, and then to follow the fleet of Van Noort, if the
+wind proved fair. Before sailing, he wrote a letter for de Cordes, which
+he left buried at the foot of a tree, and nailed a board to the tree, on
+which was painted, _Look at the bottom of this tree_.
+
+On the 11th January, 1600, de Weert made sail for Penguin Islands, and
+next day came to anchor under the smaller of these islands, where he
+immediately landed with thirty-eight men in tolerable health, leaving
+the pilots and other seamen on board. Leaving three men to keep the
+boat, the rest fell to killing birds, of which there were a prodigious
+quantity in the island. In the mean time the wind grew nigh and the sea
+very stormy, by which the boat was thrown so high upon the rocks, and so
+filled with water, that the boat-keepers were unable to get her off, or
+to heave out the water, and so much tossed by the surges that they
+expected every minute to have her stove to pieces. In this extremity the
+seamen were almost in despair. Without the boat it was impossible for
+them to return on board. They had no carpenters, no tools, and no wood,
+with which to repair their boat, as there was no wood whatever on the
+island. They were all wet, as they had waded into the water as high as
+their shoulders to draw the boat from the rocks, and they were starving
+with cold. Fortunately, at low water, the boat being aground, they
+recovered an axe and some tools, with a few nails, which revived their
+hopes of being able to get back to the ship. But as it was impossible to
+get the boat drawn ashore before night for repairs, they were obliged to
+pass the night on shore in the open air, where they made a fire of some
+broken planks from the boat, and eat some birds half-roasted, without
+bread, and with so little water that they could not quench their thirst.
+
+As soon as day appeared on the 13th, every one went cheerfully to work,
+in repairing that side of the boat which was most injured, which was
+quite refitted before night. Next day the other side was repaired; and
+having loaded her with 450 penguins, they went aboard on the evening of
+the 14th, having been three days on shore. While they were catching
+penguins on the 12th, they found a savage woman, who had hid herself in
+one of the holes. At the time when Van Noort landed here, there was a
+band of savages on the island, by whom two of his men were slain; in
+revenge of which Van Noort had destroyed them all but this woman, who
+was then wounded, and who now shewed her wounds to the seamen. She was
+tall and well-made; her hair cut quite close to her head, and her face
+painted, having a kind of cloak on her body, made of the skins of beasts
+and birds, neatly sewed together, and reaching down to her knees,
+besides which she had a skin apron; so that the savages on the north
+side of these straits appear to be more modest in their apparel than
+those on the south side. By the dead body of one of these savages, who
+had been slain by Van Noort, it appeared that the men wore their hair
+very long; besides which his head was ornamented with fine feathers, and
+he had others round his body. They use bows and arrows, the arrows being
+very neatly pointed with hard flints. De Weert gave this woman a knife,
+who informed him by signs, that he would find a greater plenty of birds
+in the larger island. They left her where she was, though she requested,
+by signs, to be transported to the continent. They now went to the
+larger island, in order to get a larger supply of birds.
+
+The old penguins weigh from twelve to sixteen pounds, and the young ones
+from eight to twelve. They are black on the back, with white bellies,
+and some have a white ring round their necks, so that they are almost
+half white half black. Their skin is much like that of a seal, and as
+thick as the skin of a wild boar. The bill is as long as that of a
+raven, but not so crooked; the neck short and thick, and the body as
+long as that of a goose, but not so thick. Instead of wings, they have
+only two fins or pinions, covered with feathers, which hang down as they
+walk upright, and by means of which they swim with great strength. They
+have black feet, like those of a goose, and they walk upright, with
+their fins or pinions hanging down like the arms of a man, so that when
+seen at a distance they look like so many pigmies. They seldom come
+ashore except in the breeding season, and then they nestle together,
+three or four in one hole, which they dig in the downs as deep as those
+of rabbits, and the ground is so full of them, that one is liable almost
+at every step to sink into them up to the knees. They feed entirely on
+fish, yet their flesh has not that rank fishy taste which is so common
+in sea-fowl, but is extraordinarily well tasted. _Penguin_, the name of
+this bird, is not derived from the Latin _pinguedo_, fatness, as the
+Dutch author of this voyage would have it, and therefore spells the word
+_pinguin_. Neither is the conjecture of the French editor of this voyage
+better founded, who supposes they were so called by the English from a
+Welsh word signifying _white-head_; and from which it has been argued
+that these savages are descended from a colony of Britons, supposed to
+have settled in America, about the year 1170, under Madoc, prince of
+North Wales. The truth is, the name of penguin was given to these birds
+by the savages.
+
+The ship reached the greater Penguin Island on the 15th January, that
+island being a league from the small one; and here they found such
+abundance of these birds, that many ships might have been amply supplied
+by them instead of one, for they procured above 900 of them in less than
+two hours. Next day, while busy in salting the penguins, a heavy storm
+came on from the N.W. by which the ship was driven out of sight of the
+island, and to so great a distance that de Weert lost hopes of getting
+back to it again; on which he reduced the men to an allowance of four
+ounces of biscuit daily. They got back however on the 17th; but, when
+going to land, a fresh storm came on with such violence, that they
+resolved to weigh anchor and get out of the straits: but the sea was so
+rough that they durst not attempt this, lest the capstan should fly
+round. At last the anchor lost its hold; and to save the ship from being
+cast away, they had to cut the cable and make sail, being in great
+sorrow for the loss of their anchor, as they now had one only remaining.
+
+
+
+§ 4. _Voyage from the Straits to Holland_.
+
+This sad accident constrained de Weert to quit the straits, which he did
+on the 21st January, having a S.W. wind, chopping sometimes round to
+E.N.E. having now spent nine months in those seas, in a dangerous and
+dismal condition. In the afternoon of that day, having got into the main
+sea, they allowed their boat to go adrift, being rendered quite
+unserviceable by the late storms. The 24th in the morning, they found
+three small islands to windward, not marked in any maps, which they
+named the _Sebaldine Islands_. These are in lat. 50° 40' S. sixty
+leagues from the continent,[91] and contained abundance of penguins; but
+they could not catch any, having no boat. On the 1st February, a seaman
+was condemned to be hanged, for having stolen a bottle of wine and a bag
+of rice from the hold; and, when just about to be turned off, he was
+pardoned at the intercession of the crew, on condition that they should
+not again beg the life of any one found guilty of stealing provisions.
+In the evening of the 3d the same person was found drunk, and
+consequently must have again stolen wine, and was convicted of having
+stolen both wine and victuals, for which he was now hanged, and his body
+thrown into the sea.
+
+[Footnote 91: In vol. VIII. p. 68, note 3, these Sebaldines have been
+already noticed as the north-westermost of the Falklands.--E.]
+
+They passed the line on the 15th March; and their wine being now reduced
+to one pipe, that was reserved for the use of the sick, and no more was
+allowed to the crew. The 28th they saw Cape Monte on the coast of
+Guinea, when the captain was much displeased with the pilots, for having
+steered a different course from what he had directed. The seamen also
+were discontented with the captain, who would not land, because he had
+no boat, and only one anchor: but, being satisfied that he had biscuit
+enough for four months, at a quarter of a pound daily to each man, and
+two ounces of rice, he made the ship's head be turned to seawards. In
+the night of the 1st April, they discovered some fire at a distance,
+thinking it were a ship; but when day broke, it was known to have been
+on the shore, towards which they had been insensibly driven by the
+current. By this time their whole stock of penguins was expended, and
+they must have been reduced to a very small allowance of biscuit and
+rice for their whole sustenance, but during five weeks that they
+steered along the coast of Africa, making very little progress in
+consequence of calms, they caught abundance of many kinds of fish, both
+large and small. Being uncertain how long they might remain on the
+coast, and fearing the want of provisions, de Weert ordered a small boat
+to be built by the pilot, who had been bred a ship-carpenter. This boat
+was finished in twelve days; but they had no need of her, for the wind
+became fair on the 24th April, and they made sail in the direction of
+the Açores.
+
+The 3d May was held as a day of thanksgiving and prayer; and on the 21st
+they passed the tropic of Cancer, catching every where such abundance of
+fish, that, besides supplying their immediate wants, they salted and
+dried a considerable store. On getting near the Açores, they found no
+more fish, and had to use those they had dried and salted; and by this
+food many distempers were produced among them, particularly the scurvy.
+The men became as it were parched within, and so thirsty that they could
+not be satisfied with drink; and their bodies were covered all over with
+red spots, like a leprosy. The 7th, the captain was informed that some
+of the men had stolen biscuit; but he durst not punish the guilty, as
+they were the only vigorous and healthy men in the ship, and nothing
+could be done without them.
+
+The ship got into the English Channel on the 6th July, when the captain
+landed at Dover to purchase an anchor and cable; but not being able to
+procure any, he sailed again that night. On the 13th, while off the
+mouth of the Maese, waiting the tide, and having a pilot on board, the
+wind came suddenly contrary, and forced him into the channel of Goeree,
+where a seaman died, being the sixty-ninth who died during the voyage.
+The thirty-six who remained alive gave thanks to God, who had preserved
+them through so many dangers, and had vouchsafed to bring them home.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V.
+
+VOYAGE OF GEORGE SPILBERGEN ROUND THE WORLD, IN 1614--1617.[92]
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Narrative of the Voyage, from Holland to the South Sea_.
+
+
+As the directors of the Dutch East-India Company were still anxious to
+make trial of the route to India by the Straits of Magellan, they
+appointed George Spilberg, or Spilbergen, to make this attempt in 1614,
+as admiral of six ships, the Great Sun, the Full Moon, the Huntsman, and
+a yacht called the Sea-mew, all belonging to Amsterdam, with the Eolus
+of Zealand, and the Morning-star belonging to Rotterdam. Spilbergen was
+a person of established reputation for knowledge and experience, and was
+allowed to chuse most of his officers. The ships were all equipped in
+the best possible manner, and were ready a little after Midsummer; but
+as the admiral was of opinion that they would arrive in the Straits of
+Magellan at an improper season, if they sailed so early, the directors
+thought proper to postpone the commencement of the voyage till the month
+of August.
+
+[Footnote 92: Harris, I. 44. Callender, II. 191.]
+
+The fleet sailed accordingly from the Texel on the 8th of August, 1614,
+with a strong gale at S.E. Without any remarkable accident, except
+several severe storms, they reached the latitude of Madeira on the 3d
+October. Proceeding thence by the Canaries, they lost sight of these
+islands on the 10th, and came in view of Brava and Fogo, two of the Cape
+de Verd islands, on the 23d. Having happily passed the _Abrolhos_,
+dangerous shoals running far out to sea, on the 9th December, they
+discovered the coast of Brazil on the 12th of that month. On the 19th
+they were off the bay of Rio de Janeiro; and on the morning of the 20th
+they anchored in the road of _Ilas Grandes_, between two large fine
+islands covered with trees, in thirteen fathoms water. Next day they
+anchored at another island, about half a league distant, where they
+caught good store of fish, besides many crocodiles or alligators, each
+about the length of a man. They anchored behind another island on the
+23d, where they found two small huts, and a heap of human bones on a
+rock. Here they set up tents on shore for their sick, which were all
+landed that night, under the protection of three distinct guards of
+soldiers, lest they might be attacked by the Portuguese, who were at no
+great distance.
+
+The 28th, the boats were sent for wood and fresh water to a river about
+two leagues from where the ships lay, and about noon next day brought
+off as much as they could carry. They went back for a farther supply,
+and were obliged to remain on shore all night, as their boats got
+aground with the ebb-tide. On getting to the ships on the 29th, they
+reported, that they had heard a confused sound of voices, as of many
+people, in the woods. The 30th, three boats were sent again to the
+watering-place, with nine or ten soldiers to protect the seamen when on
+shore. Shortly after, being out of sight of the fleet, several
+cannon-shot were heard from the Huntsman, which had been stationed to
+command the watering-place, on which the admiral sent three armed boats
+to see what was the matter. On coming to the Huntsman, they were told
+that five canoes, full of well-armed Portuguese and Mestees, had
+attacked the three boats, and slain all their men. The Dutch armed boats
+pursued the canoes, of which they soon came in sight; but on following
+them round a point, saw two stout frigates or armed barks riding at
+anchor, to which the canoes retired for protection, and the boats had to
+return to the admiral with the dismal news of the fate of their
+companions.
+
+A conspiracy was discovered on the 1st January, 1615, of certain persons
+who proposed to have run away with one of the ships, and for which two
+men were executed, several others being put in irons, and distributed
+among the other ships of the fleet. Before leaving this place, orders
+were given, if any ship lost company of the rest, that her commander was
+to set up a conspicuous mark in the haven of de Cordes, or some other
+usual landing place in the straits; and, after waiting a certain fixed
+time, was to proceed for the isle of Mocha on the coast of Chili, as the
+place of rendezvous. Having no fit provisions for the sick, they
+resolved also to remove from the Islas Grandes to the isle of St
+Vincent. Here they were delayed by the Portuguese, who appear to have
+captured some of their men; for, having taken a bark with eighteen
+Portuguese on the 26th January, the Portuguese of St Vincent refused to
+give a smaller number of Hollanders in exchange for these, though also
+offered many fair manuscripts, pictures, plate, and other things
+belonging to the jesuits, which had been taken in the prize.
+
+They departed from St Vincent in the beginning of February, having first
+burnt their prize and some buildings on shore, and furnished themselves
+amply with oranges and pomecitrons. In lat. 52° 6' S. they were
+distressed by a severe storm on the 7th March, which continued several
+days, and separated the ships. On the 21st a mutiny broke out, for which
+several of the most notoriously guilty were capitally punished. They
+entered the straits on the 28th, but were forced out again, by adverse
+winds and currents. They entered again on the 2d of April, and saw a man
+of gigantic stature climbing a high hill on the southern shore of the
+straits, called _Terra del Fuego_, or the land of fire. They went ashore
+on the 7th, when they saw two ostriches, and found a large river of
+fresh water, beside which grew many shrubs producing sweet
+black-berries. Being in lat. 54° S. the mountains were all covered with
+snow, yet they found pleasant woods, in which were many parrots. To one
+inlet or bay they gave the name of _Pepper haven_, because the bark of a
+tree found there had a biting taste like pepper.
+
+On the 16th of April they had some friendly intercourse with a party of
+savages, to whom they gave various trifling articles in exchange for
+pearls. But on the 1st May, some of the people were surprised by the
+natives while on shore, and two of them slain. On the 6th of May they
+got into the South Sea, not without terror, having no anchorage that
+day, and being in much danger from many shoals and islands at the mouth
+of the straits, between the northern and sourthern shore.
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_Transactions in the South Sea, along the Western Coast of America_.
+
+They were welcomed into the great South Sea by a terrible storm, and
+were fearful of being cast away on certain islands a little without the
+straits, which, from their likeness to the islands of Scilly, they named
+the _Sorlings_. On the 21st they had sight of the coast of Chili and the
+isle of Mocha. This island is low and broad on the north, and is full of
+rocks on the south. The 26th endeavours were made to enter into traffic
+with the natives of this island. The chief and his son dined on board
+the admiral, seemingly rejoiced to see such large and well-armed ships
+sent against the Spaniards, and all the native Chilese were delighted to
+see the soldiers mustered and exercised. The Dutch here procured great
+plenty of sheep, in exchange for hatchets and ornaments of coral and
+such like toys, getting two sheep for one hatchet. But the natives
+brought every thing to the boats, and would not suffer any of the Dutch
+to go near their houses, being very jealous of their wives, even more so
+than Spaniards. These sheep resembled camels, having long legs and
+necks, hare lips, hunches on their backs, and are used as beasts of
+draught and burden.
+
+They left Mocha on the 27th of May, and next day came to the coast not
+far from the island of St Mary, where the land was much broken and very
+rocky. The 29th they cast anchor at the island of St Mary, whence a
+Spaniard came on board, having a pledge left for him ashore. This man
+invited the admiral and others to dine on shore; but one of the boats
+observed a body of soldiers marching to the place at which they were to
+have dined; on which appearance of treachery, the Spanish messenger was
+made prisoner. The Dutch landed next day in force, on which the
+Spaniards set their church on fire and fled; having four of their men
+slain, while two of the Dutch were wounded. They here found much
+poultry, and took 500 sheep, with other spoil. Learning at this place of
+three Spanish ships fitted out in April expressly against them, the
+admiral of which carried forty brass guns, and the whole manned by 1000
+Spaniards, Spilbergen resolved to go in search of them at Conception and
+Valparaiso, and afterwards on the coast of Arica. A farther squadron, of
+similar force, was also said to be in preparation at _Calao de Lima_. In
+consequence of this intelligence, the Dutch gunners were ordered to have
+every thing in readiness for battle, rules of military discipline were
+established, and each ship and every person received distinct orders for
+conducting the expected battle, in which it was resolved to conquer or
+die.
+
+Sailing from the island of St Mary on the 1st June, 1615, they passed
+not far from the town of _Aurora_,[93] where the Spaniards kept a
+garrison of 500 men, which were continually disquieted by the
+unconquered natives of Chili. On the 3d they came to the island of
+_Quinquirina_, within which is the town of Conception, inhabited by many
+Indians and about 200 Spaniards. The 12th they entered the safe and
+commodious road of Valparaiso, in which was a Spanish ship, but which
+was set on fire by its own mariners, who escaped on shore. The 13th at
+noon, they were in lat. 32° 15' S.[94] and in the afternoon came into
+the fair and secure harbour of Quintero. Here they took in wood and
+water, and caught abundance of fish. But they found the inhabitants
+every where aware of them, and prepared to receive them, so that nothing
+of any importance could be effected. They came next to _Arica_ in lat.
+12° 40' S.[95] to which place the silver is brought from the mines of
+Potosi, whence it is shipped for Panama. Finding no ships there, they
+proceeded along the coast, and took a small ship on the 16th, in which
+was some treasure, but it was mostly embezzled by the sailors.
+
+[Footnote 93: Arauco, a fortress on the northern frontier of the
+independent country of Araucania, but somewhat inland, not far to the
+N.E. of the island of St Mary.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 94: Quintero is in lat. 32° 44' S.]
+
+[Footnote 95: This is a great error, as Arica is in lat 18° 28' S.]
+
+They soon after had sight of eight ships, which the master of the prize
+said were the royal fleet sent out in search of the Hollanders, contrary
+to the opinion of the council of Peru; but Dou Rodrigo de Mendoza, the
+Spanish admiral, a kinsman to the viceroy, insisted on putting to sea,
+alleging that two even of his ships could take all England, and much
+more those _hens_ of Holland, who must be spent and wasted by so long a
+voyage, and would assuredly yield at first sight. On this, the viceroy
+gave him leave to depart, with orders to bring all the Hollanders in
+chains. Mendoza then swore that he would never return till the
+Hollanders were all taken or slain, and set sail from Calao, the haven
+of Lima, on the 11th July. The flag ship was the Jesu Maria, of
+twenty-four brass guns and 460 men, which was said to have cost the king
+158,000 ducats. The vice-admiral was the Santa Anna, of 300 men,
+commanded by Captain Alvarez de Piger, who had before taken an English
+ship in the South Sea, and this ship cost 150,000 ducats, being the
+handsomest that had ever been seen in Peru. The other ships were the
+Carmelite and St Jago of eight brass cannon and 200 men each; the Rosary
+of four guns and 150 men; the St Francis having seventy musketeers, and
+twenty sailors, but no ordnance; the St Andrew of eighty musketeers,
+twenty-five sailors, and no cannon; and an eighth, the name and strength
+of which is not mentioned.
+
+The adverse fleets drew near on the evening of the 17th July, when the
+Spanish vice-admiral sent a message to his admiral, advising to postpone
+battle till next morning. Mendoza was, however, too impatient to follow
+this advice, and set upon the Great Sun, in which was Admiral
+Spilbergen, about ten that night, when they exchanged broadsides. The St
+Francis being next to the Jesu Maria, attacked the Dutch admiral; but
+being beaten off, fell upon the yacht, and by her was sent to the
+bottom. At this instant, the yacht was attacked by the Spanish admiral,
+and had soon shared the fate of her former antagonist, but was succoured
+by two boats full of men, one from the Dutch admiral, and the other from
+the vice-admiral; on this occasion, the Dutch admiral's boat was
+unfortunately mistaken by the Huntsman, and sent to the bottom by a
+cannon-shot, and all her men drowned except one.
+
+Next morning, five of the Spanish ships sent word to their admiral that
+they meant to do their best to escape: But the Dutch admiral and
+vice-admiral set upon the Spanish admiral and vice-admiral, and an
+obstinate engagement ensued, in which the Eolus, another of the Dutch
+ships, also partook. The two Spanish ships were lashed together, for
+mutual support. At length, all the men forsook the vice-admiral, going
+on board the admiral's ship, in which they afterwards confessed they
+found only fifty men alive. Being reduced to great distress, the Spanish
+seamen several times hung out a white flag, in token of surrender, which
+was as often hauled down by the officers and other gentlemen, who chose
+rather to die than yield.
+
+After some time, being sore pressed by the Hollanders, the men belonging
+to the Spanish vice-admiral returned to their own ship, and renewed the
+fight; on which occasion the Dutch vice-admiral was in imminent danger
+of being taken, as the Spaniards boarded her, but were all repelled or
+slain. Being no longer able to continue the fight, the Spanish admiral
+fled under cover of the night, and escaped the pursuit of Spilbergen;
+but her leaks were so many and great that she went to the bottom, as did
+likewise another of the Spanish ships called the Santa Maria.[96] The
+Dutch vice-admiral and the Eolus bestirred themselves so briskly, that
+the Spanish vice-admiral hung out a white flag, on which the Dutch
+vice-admiral sent two boats to bring the Spanish commander on board, but
+he refused going that night, unless the Dutch vice-admiral came to fetch
+him, or sent a captain to remain in pledge for him. At this time ten or
+twelve of the men belonging to the Eolus remained on board, contrary to
+orders, wishing to have a first hand in the plunder. These men assisted
+the Spaniards in their efforts to prevent the ship from sinking: But all
+their labour being in vain, they shewed many lights, and cried out aloud
+for help, which was too late of being sent, and they went to the bottom.
+Next morning the Dutch sent out four boats, which found thirty Spaniards
+floating on pieces of the wreck, and crying out for mercy; which was
+shewn by the Dutch to some of the chiefs, but the rest were left to the
+mercy of the sea, several of them being even knocked on the head by the
+Dutch, contrary to orders from their officers. Before this ship went
+down her commander expired of his wounds. In this engagement forty
+Dutchmen were wounded and sixteen slain, on board the admiral,
+vice-admiral, and Eolus; and in the rest eighteen were wounded and four
+slain.
+
+[Footnote 96: There is no such name in the list of the Spanish fleet, so
+that we may suppose this to have been the one formerly mentioned without
+a name.--E.]
+
+The Dutch now made sail for Calao de Lima, but were becalmed. The 20th
+they passed by the island [St Lorenzo], and saw fourteen ships in the
+haven, but could not get near for shoals. They went, therefore, to the
+road of Calao in search of the Spanish admiral, but learned afterwards
+at Payta that his ship had sunk. The Spaniards fired upon them from the
+shore, and a ball of thirty-six pounds weight had nearly sunk the
+Huntsman. They saw also on shore a considerable army, commanded by the
+viceroy in person, consisting of eight troops of horse and 4000 foot.
+Going beyond reach of shot from the shore, the Dutch cast anchor off the
+mouth of the haven, where they remained till the 25th of July, expecting
+to capture some Spanish ships, but all that appeared made their escape
+by superior sailing, except one bark laden with salt and eighty jars of
+molasses.
+
+In regard that they were now on an enemy's coast, where they had no
+opportunity of repairing their losses, orders were issued by Spilbergen
+to act with great caution, in case of falling in with the fleet of
+Panama, and especially to take care not to separate from each other,
+which had much endangered them in the late fight. It was also ordered,
+if any Spanish ship should yield, that the Dutch captains and chief
+officers should on no account leave their own ships, but should order
+the enemy to come aboard them in their own boats. They sailed from Calao
+on the 27th of July, and came to the road of _Huarmey_ in lat. 10° S. on
+the 28th. This is a pleasant place, with a large port, near which is a
+lake. The Dutch landed here, but the inhabitants fled, leaving little
+plunder, except poultry, hogs, oranges, and meal, which they brought on
+board. They dismissed some of their Spanish prisoners on the 3d August,
+on which day they passed between the main and the island of _Lobos_, so
+called from being frequented by seals, or sea wolves.[97] The 8th they
+cast anchor near Payta, in about the latitude of 5° S. The 9th they
+landed 300 men, but re-embarked after some skirmishing, as they found
+the city too strongly defended. On this occasion they took a Peruvian
+bark, strangely rigged, having six stout natives on board, who had been
+out fishing for two months, and had a cargo of excellent dried fish,
+which was distributed through the fleet.
+
+[Footnote 97: There are three islands or groups of that name off the
+coast of Peru. The southern Lobos is in lat. 7° S. near fifty miles from
+the nearest land; the middle, or inner Lobos, in lat. 6° 22' S. is only
+about nine miles from the coast of Peru; and the northern Lobos is in
+lat. 5° 8' S. almost close to the shore. It is probably the middle or
+inner Lobos that is meant in the text.--E.]
+
+The 10th of August three of the Dutch ships battered the town of Payta,
+and afterwards sent a party of armed men on shore, who found the
+inhabitants had fled to the mountains with all their valuables. The
+Dutch sent five of the Peruvian captives on shore to endeavour to
+procure fruit, and to learn with more certainty what had become of the
+Spanish admiral. On their return they brought word that the Spanish
+admiral had gone to the bottom, six only of her crew escaping. They
+brought letters also from the lady of Don Gasper Calderon, the
+commandant of Payta, who had fled to the town of St Michael, thirty
+miles from Payta; who, in commiseration of the captives, sent many
+citrons and other provisions to the Dutch ships. Towards the sea the
+town of Payta is strongly fortified, and almost impregnable. It is a
+place of some importance, having two churches, a monastery, and many
+good buildings; and has an excellent harbour, to which many ships resort
+from Panama, whence their cargoes are transmitted by land to Lima, to
+avoid the dangers of the wind and the seas at that place. While at the
+island of Lobos, the Dutch took two birds of enormous size, not unlike
+an eagle in beak, wings, and talons; their necks being covered with down
+resembling wool, and their heads having combs like those of a cock. They
+were two ells in height, and their wings, when displayed, measured three
+ells in breadth.[98]
+
+[Footnote 98: Probably the Condour, or Vultur Gryphus of naturalists,
+which is of vast size, sometimes measuring sixteen feet between the tips
+of the wings when extended.
+
+At this place we have omitted a vague rambling account of the kingdoms
+of Peru and Chili, as in 1616, which could have conveyed no useful
+information, farther than that Don Juan de Mendoza, Marquis des Montes
+Claros, was then viceroy of Peru.--E.]
+
+The Dutch set sail from Payta on the 21st of August, and anchored on the
+23d in the road off the mouth of the Rio Tumbez, in lat. 3° 20' S. They
+here agreed to return to the isle of Coques, in lat. 5° S.[99] that they
+might endeavour to procure refreshments. But they were so distressed by
+storms of wind, with rain and excessive thunder, that they in vain
+endeavoured to get to that island till the 13th September, and in the mean
+time became very sickly. Proceeding therefore towards the north they came
+in sight of New Spain on the 20th September, in lat. 13° 30' N. when the
+weather became again very tempestuous. After much bad weather they came in
+sight of a pleasant land on the 1st October, but were unable to land.
+Beating off and on till the 11th of that month, they then entered the
+harbour of Accapulco, within shot of the castle, and hung out a flag of
+truce. Two Spaniards came on board, with whom they agreed to exchange
+their prisoners for sheep, fruits, and other provisions, which was
+accordingly performed. On the 15th Melchior Hernando, nephew to the
+viceroy of New Spain, came on board, to take a view of the fleet which
+had vanquished that of his king, and was kindly entertained by the
+Dutch admiral. The castle of Accapulco was found to be well fortified,
+and had seventy pieces of brass cannon mounted on its ramparts; and the
+Dutch were here informed that their intended arrival had been known eight
+months before.
+
+[Footnote 99: This is probably the northern Lobos, in lat 5° 8' S.
+formerly mentioned in a note.--E.]
+
+They set sail from Accapulco on the 18th of October, and soon afterwards
+took a bark bound for the pearl fishery, which they manned and took into
+their service as a tender. On the 1st November they anchored before the
+port of _Selagua_, in lat. 19° 8' N. At this place they were informed of
+a river abounding in a variety of excellent fish, and having extensive
+meadows on its banks well stocked with cattle, together with citrons and
+other fruits in great plenty, all of which they much wanted; but the
+company they sent to endeavour to procure these conveniences returned
+empty handed, after a smart engagement with the Spaniards. They sailed
+thence on the 11th November for the port of Nativity, in lat. 20° 40' N.
+where they furnished themselves with necessaries, and from whence they
+set sail on the 20th.
+
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_Voyage Home from America, by the East Indies and Cape of Good Hope_.
+
+The 26th November, 1615, being in lat. 20° 26' N. they determined on
+shaping their course for the Ladrones across the great Pacific Ocean. On
+the 3d December, to their great astonishment, they saw two islands at a
+great distance, and next day a vast rock in lat. 19° N. fifty leagues
+from the continent of America.[100] The 5th they saw another new island,
+having five hills, that at first appeared like so many distinct islands.
+The new year 1616 was ushered in with distempers that proved fatal to
+many of the sailors. On the 3d of January they came in sight of the
+Ladrones, where they landed and procured refreshments. Setting sail from
+thence on the 26th January, they arrived at the Philippine islands on
+the 9th February, but the Indians refused to trade with them, because
+enemies of the Spaniards, though some among them, for that very reason,
+would willingly have transferred all the trade and riches of the country
+to them. In _Capul_, where they arrived on the 11th, the people gave
+them fat hogs and poultry in exchange for mere trifles. Having thus
+procured abundant refreshments, they set sail on the 16th, passing
+through the straits towards the bay of Manilla.
+
+[Footnote 100: The three Marias are nearly in the indicated latitude,
+but are only about thirty leagues from the western coast of N.
+America.--E.]
+
+They anchored in these straits on the 19th, where they saw a curious
+fabric erected on the top of trees, looking at a distance like a palace,
+but they could not imagine what it was. The 24th they passed the high
+and flaming hill of _Albaca_, and came in sight of the other end of the
+straits [of St Bernardino] on the 28th, when they anchored before the
+island, of _Mirabelles_, remarkable for two rocks which tower to a vast
+height in the air. Behind this island is the city of Manilla, and here
+the pilots wait for the ships from China, to pilot them safe to the
+city, as the passage is very dangerous. On the 5th of March they took
+several barks, which were going to collect the tribute paid by the
+adjacent places to the city of Manilla. They had now intelligence of a
+fleet of twelve ships and four gallies, manned by 2000 Spaniards besides
+Indians, Chinese, and Japanese, sent from Manilla to drive the Dutch
+from the Moluccas, and to reduce these islands under the dominion of
+Spain. On this news they discharged all their prisoners, and resolved to
+go in pursuit of the Manilla fleet.
+
+The 11th March they got into a labyrinth of islands, whence they knew
+not how to get out, but their Spanish pilot carried them safe through
+next day. The 14th they anchored all night before the island of _Paney_,
+by reason of the shoals; and on the 18th they sailed close past the
+island of Mindanao. The 19th they came again close to the shore, and
+brought provisions from the islanders at a cheap rate. They reached Cape
+_Cudera_ on the 20th, where the Spaniards usually water on their voyages
+to the Moluccas. Till the 23d, having a perfect calm, they made no
+progress except with the tide; and when between _Mindanao_ and _Tagano_
+they were stopt by an adverse current. The people here professed great
+enmity against the Spaniards, and offered to assist the Dutch with fifty
+of their vessels against that nation. The 27th they passed the island of
+_Sanguin_, and came on the 29th to Ternate, in which island the Dutch
+possessed the town of _Macia_, where they were made most welcome by
+their countrymen. They observed that the straits of _Booton_ was full of
+shoals, without which the water was deep. On the east there is good
+fresh water, and two leagues to the west lies a very rocky shoal. On the
+8th of April, Cornelius de Vicaneze went for Banda, where the soldiers
+were landed, after being long on board ship.
+
+Being detained in the Moluccas and at Bantam in the service of the Dutch
+East India Company till the 14th December, 1616, admiral Spilbergen then
+sailed from Bantam for Holland, in the Amsterdam of 1400 tons, having
+also under his command the Zealand of 1200 tons, leaving the ships with
+which he had hitherto sailed in India. On the 1st January, 1617, the
+Zealand parted company, and on the 24th of that month the Amsterdam
+anchored at the island of Mauritius. They doubled the Cape of Good Hope
+on the 6th March, and arrived at St Helena on 30th of that month, where
+they found the Zealand. Leaving that island on the 6th April, they
+passed the line on the 24th of that month, and arrived safe in Holland
+on the 1st July, 1617, having been absent two years, ten months, and
+twenty-four days; nearly nine months of which time were spent in India,
+without prosecuting the direct purpose of their circumnavigation.
+
+The directors of the Dutch East India company bestowed the highest
+commendations on Spilbergen for his prudence and good conduct in this
+voyage, which contributed both to the advantage of the company, his own
+reputation, and the glory of his country. The Dutch company may be said
+to have dated their grandeur from the day of his return, both in respect
+to reputation, power, and riches; the former resulting from his
+successful circumnavigation of the globe, and the others from their
+conquests in the Moluccas, in which he not only assisted, but likewise
+brought home the first intelligence. On his return to Holland,
+Spilbergen confirmed the report of Magellan respecting a gigantic people
+inhabiting the straits, named _Patagons_. He said that he had gone
+several times on shore, and had examined several graves of the natives,
+and saw several savages at different times in their canoes, all of whom
+were of the ordinary size; or rather under. But one day he observed a
+man on shore, who first climbed one hill and then another, to look at
+the ships, and at last came to the sea-side for that purpose, and this
+man was allowed by all who saw him to be even taller than those spoken
+of by Magellan. This is likewise confirmed by the accounts given to Van
+Noort and De Weert, by a boy they took from the savages; who said there
+were only two tribes of these giants, all the other savages being of the
+ordinary size.[101]
+
+[Footnote 101: Without pretending to give any opinion on this subject,
+it may be remarked, that the account from the savage boy is worthy of
+little credit, as a kind of nursery tale, and given by one who certainly
+could hardly have sufficient language to express himself. The solitary
+giant seen looking at the ships from a distance, may have been of the
+ordinary size, magnified to the eye in looking through a hazy
+atmosphere.--E.]
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI.
+
+VOYAGE ROUND THE WORLD, IN 1615-1617, BY WILLIAM CORNELISON SCHOUTEN AND
+JACQUES LE MAIRE, GOING ROUND CAPE HORN.[102]
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+
+The States General of the United Provinces having granted an exclusive
+privilege to the Dutch East India Company, prohibiting all their
+subjects, except that company, from trading to the eastwards beyond the
+Cape of Good Hope, or westwards through the Straits of Magellan, in any
+of the countries within these limits, whether known or unknown, and
+under very heavy penalties; this prohibition gave great dissatisfaction
+to many rich merchants, who were desirous of fitting out ships and
+making discoveries at their own cost, and thought it hard that their
+government should thus, contrary to the laws of Nature, shut up those
+passages which Providence had left free. Among the number of these
+discontented merchants was one Isaac Le Maire, a rich merchant of
+Amsterdam, then residing at Egmont, who was well acquainted with
+business, and had an earnest desire to employ a portion of the wealth he
+had acquired in trade in acquiring fame as a discoverer. With this view
+he applied to William Cornelison Schouten of Horn, a man in easy
+circumstances, deservedly famous for his great skill in maritime
+affairs, and his extensive knowledge of trade in the Indies, having been
+thrice there in the different characters of supercargo, pilot, and
+master.
+
+[Footnote 102: Harris, I.51. Callender, II. 217.
+
+It is proper to remark, that in this and several of the subsequent
+circumnavigations, considerable freedom has been taken in abbreviating
+numerous trivial circumstances already noticed by former voyagers: But
+whereever the navigators treat on new topics of discovery, or other
+subjects of any importance, the narratives are given at full length. Had
+not this liberty of lopping redundancies been taken, this division of
+our collection must have extended to a very inconvenient length, without
+any corresponding advantage.--E.]
+
+The main question proposed to him by Le Maire was, Whether he thought it
+possible to find a passage into the South Sea, otherwise than by the
+Straits of Magellan; and if so, whether it were not likely that the
+countries to the south of that passage might afford as rich commodities
+as either the East or the West Indies? Schouten was of opinion that such
+a passage might be found, and gave several reasons as to the probable
+riches of these countries.[103] After many conferences, they came to the
+determination of attempting this discovery, under a persuasion that the
+States did not intend, by their exclusive charter to the East India
+Company, to preclude their subjects from discovering countries in the
+south by a new route, different from either of those described in the
+charter.
+
+[Footnote 103: The idea of rich countries is here surely wrong stated,
+as none such could possibly be conceived to the south of the Straits of
+Magellan. The expected rich countries must have been to the westwards of
+these straits, and in the tropical regions far to the north, in the hope
+of not trenching upon the exclusive trade to the East Indies.--E.]
+
+In consequence of this determination, it was agreed that Le Maire
+should advance half of the necessary funds for the expence of the
+proposed voyage, while Schouten and his friends were to advance the
+other moiety. Accordingly Le Maire advanced his part of the funds; and
+Schouten, with the assistance of Peter Clementson, burgomaster of Horn,
+Jan Janson Molenwert, one of the schepens or aldermen of that city, Jan
+Clementson Keis, a senator of that city, and Cornelius Segetson, a
+merchant, produced the rest. These matters being adjusted, in spring
+1615, the company proposed to equip two vessels, a larger and a less, to
+sail from Horn at the proper season. That all parties might be
+satisfied, it was agreed that William Cornelison Schouten, in
+consideration of his age and experience, should command the larger ship,
+with the entire direction of the navigation during the voyage; and that
+Jaques le Maire, the eldest son of Isaac, should be supercargo. Every
+thing was got ready in two months for the prosecution of the enterprise,
+and a sufficient number of men engaged as mariners: but, as secrecy was
+indispensable, they were articled to go wherever the masters and
+supercargoes should require; and, in consideration of such unusual
+conditions, their wages were considerably advanced beyond the ordinary
+terms.
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Journal of the Voyage from the Texel to Cape Horn_.
+
+The larger of the two vessels prepared for this voyage was the Unity, of
+360 tons, carrying nineteen cannon and twelve swivels; having on board
+two pinnaces, one for sailing and another for rowing, a launch for
+landing men, and a small boat, with all other necessaries for so long a
+voyage. Of this vessel William Cornelison Schouten was master and pilot,
+and Jaques le Maire supercargo. The lesser vessel was named the Horn, of
+110 tons, carrying eight cannons and four swivels, of which Jan
+Cornelison Schouten was master, and Aris Clawson supercargo. The crew of
+the Unity consisted of sixty-five men, and that of the Horn of
+twenty-two only. The Unity sailed on the 25th of May for the Texel,
+where the Horn also arrived on the 3d June.
+
+The proper season being now arrived, in their judgment, they sailed from
+the Texel on the 14th of June, and anchored in the Downs on the 17th,
+when William Schouten went ashore at Dover to hire an experienced
+English gunner. This being effected, they again set sail the same
+evening; and meeting a severe storm in the night between the 21st and
+22d, they took shelter under the Isle of Wight. Sailing thence on the
+25th, they arrived at Plymouth on the 27th, where they hired a carpenter
+named Muydenblick. Sailing finally from Plymouth on the 28th June, with
+the wind at N.E. and fair weather, they proceeded on their voyage.
+
+Distinct rules were now established in regard to the allowance of
+provisions at sea, so that the men might have no reason to complain, and
+the officers might be satisfied of having enough for the voyage. The
+rate fixed upon was, a cann of beer for each man daily; four pounds of
+biscuit, with half a pound of butter and half a pound of suet weekly;
+and five large Dutch cheeses for each man, to serve during the whole
+voyage. All this was besides the ordinary allowance of salt meat and
+stock-fish. Due orders were likewise issued for regulating the conduct
+of the men and officers. Particularly on all occasions of landing men in
+a warlike posture, one of the masters was always to command: and in such
+ports as they might touch at for trade, the supercargo was to go on
+shore, and to have the exclusive management of all commercial dealings.
+It was also enjoined, that every officer should be exceedingly strict in
+the execution of his duty, but without subjecting the men to any
+unnecessary hardships, or interfering with each other in their several
+departments. The officers were also warned against holding any
+conversation with the men, in regard to the objects of the voyage, all
+conjectures respecting which were declared fruitless, the secret being
+solely known to the first captain and supercargo. It was also declared,
+that every embezzlement of stores, merchandises, or provisions, should
+be severely punished; and, in case of being reduced upon short
+allowance, any such offence was to be punished with death. The two
+supercargoes were appointed to keep distinct journals of all
+proceedings, for the information of the company of adventurers, that it
+might appear how far every man had done his duty, and in what manner the
+purposes of the voyage had been answered.
+
+On the 11th July they had sight of Madeira, and on the 13th they passed
+through between Teneriff and Grand Canary, with a stiff breeze at N.N.E.
+and a swift current. The 15th they passed the tropic of Cancer; and the
+20th in the morning fell in with the north side of Cape de Verd.
+Procuring here a supply of water, by leave of the Moorish alcaide or
+governor, for which they had to pay _eight states_ of iron, they left
+the cape on the 1st August, and came in sight of the high land of Sierra
+Leona on the 21st of that month, as also of the island of _Madre bomba_,
+which lies off the south point of Sierra Leona, and north from the
+shallows of the island of St Ann. This land of Sierra Leona is the
+highest of all that lie between Cape Verd and the coast of Guinea, and
+is therefore easily known.
+
+On the 30th of August, they cast anchor in eight fathoms water on a fine
+sandy bottom, near the shore, and opposite a village or town of the
+negroes, in the road of Sierra Leona. This village consisted only of
+eight or nine poor thatched huts. The Moorish inhabitants were willing
+to come on board to trade, only demanding a pledge to be left on shore
+for their security, because a French ship had recently carried off two
+of the natives perfidiously. Aris Clawson, the junior merchant or
+supercargo, went accordingly on shore, where he drove a small trade for
+lemons and bananas, in exchange for glass beads. In the mean time some
+of the natives came off to the ships, bringing with them an interpreter
+who spoke many languages. They here very conveniently furnished
+themselves with fresh water, which poured down in great abundance from a
+very high hill, so that they had only to place their casks under the
+waterfall. There were here whole woods of lemon-trees, and lemons were
+so cheap that they might have had a thousand for a few beads, and ten
+thousand for a few common knives; so that they easily procured as many
+as they wished, and each man had 150 for sea store. The 3d September
+they found a vast shoal of fish, resembling a shoemaker's knife.
+
+They left Sierra Leona on the 4th September; and on the 5th October,
+being in lat 4° 27' S. they were astonished by receiving a violent
+stroke on the bottom of one of the ships, though no rock appeared to be
+in the way. While forming conjectures on the occasion of this shock, the
+sea all about the ship began to change colour, appearing as if some
+great fountain of blood had opened into it. This sudden alteration of
+the water seemed not less wonderful than the striking of the ship; but
+the cause of both was not discovered till after their arrival in Port
+Desire, when the ship was laid on shore to clean her bottom, when they
+found a large horn, of a substance resembling ivory, sticking fast in
+the bottom. It was entirely firm and solid, without any internal cavity,
+and had pierced through three very stout planks, grazing one of the ribs
+of the ship, and stuck at least a foot deep in the wood, leaving about
+as much on the outside, up to the place where it broke off.[104]
+
+[Footnote 104: This must have been a Narvai, or Narwhal, the Monodon
+Monoceros, Licorne, or Unicornu Marinum, of naturalists, called likewise
+the Unicorn Fish, or Sea Unicorn.--E.]
+
+On the 25th of October, when no person knew whereabouts they were except
+Schouten, the company was informed that the design of the voyage was to
+endeavour to discover a new southern passage into the South Sea; and the
+people appeared well pleased, expecting to discover some new golden
+country to make amends for all their trouble and danger. The 26th they
+were in lat. 6° 25' S. and continued their course mostly to the south
+all the rest of that month, till they were in lat 10° 30' S. The 1st
+September they had the sun at noon to the north; and in the afternoon
+of the 3d they had sight of the isle of Ascension, in 20° S. otherwise
+called the island of Martin Vaz, where the compass was observed to vary
+12° to the east of north. The 21st, in lat. 38° S. the compass varied
+17° in the same eastern direction. The 6th December, they got sight of
+the mainland of South America, appearing rather flat, and of a white
+colour, and quickly after fell in with the north head-land of Port
+Desire, anchoring that night in ten fathoms water with the ebb-tide,
+within a league and a half of the shore. Next day, resuming their course
+southwards, they came into Port Desire at noon, in lat. 47° 40' S. They
+had very deep water at the entrance, where they did not observe any of
+the cliffs which were described by Van Noort, as left by him to the
+northward on sailing into this haven, all the cliffs they saw being on
+the south side of the entrance, which therefore might be those mentioned
+by Van Noort, and misplaced in his narrative by mistake.
+
+In consequence of this error, they overpassed Port Desire to the south,
+so as to miss the right channel, and came into a crooked channel, where
+they had four and a half fathoms water at full sea, and only fourteen
+feet at low water. By this means the Unity got fast aground by the
+stern, and had infallibly been lost, if a brisk gale had blown from the
+N.E. But as the wind blew west from the land, she got off again without
+damage. Here they found vast quantities of eggs upon the cliffs; and the
+bay afforded them great abundance of muscles, and smelts sixteen inches
+long, for which reason they called it _Smelt Bay_. From this place they
+sent a pinnace to the Penguin Islands, which brought back 150 of these
+birds, and two sea lions.
+
+Leaving Smelt Bay on the 8th December, they made sail for Port Desire, a
+boat going before to sound the depth of the channel, which was twelve
+and thirteen fathoms, so that they sailed in boldly, having a fair wind
+at N.E. After going in little more than a league, the wind began to veer
+about, and they cast anchor in twenty fathoms; but the ground,
+consisting entirely of slippery stones, and the wind now blowing strong
+at N.W. they drifted to the south shore, where both ships had nearly
+been wrecked. The Unity lay with her side to the cliffs, yet still kept
+afloat, and gradually slid down towards the deep water as the tide fell.
+But the Horn stuck fast aground, so that at last her keel was above a
+fathom out of the water, and a man might have walked under it at low
+water. For some time, the N.W. wind blowing hard on one side, kept her
+from falling over; but, that dying away, she at length fell over on her
+bends, when she was given over for lost; but next flood, coming on with
+calm weather, righted her again. Having escaped this imminent danger,
+both ships went farther up the river on the 9th, and came to King's
+Island, which they found full of black sea-mews, and almost entirely
+covered with their eggs; so that a man without moving from one spot
+might reach fifty or sixty nests with his hands, having three or four
+eggs in each. They here accordingly were amply provided with eggs, and
+laid in several thousands of them for sea store.
+
+The 11th the boats were sent down the river in search of fresh water, on
+the south side, but found it all brackish and unpleasant. They saw
+ostriches here, and a sort of beasts like harts, having wonderfully long
+necks, and extremely wild. Upon the high hills, they found great heaps
+of stones, under which some monstrous carcass had been buried, some of
+the bones being ten or eleven feet long, which, if having belonged to
+rational creatures, must have been the bones of giants.[105] They here
+had plenty of good fish and fowls, but no water could be found for some
+days.
+
+[Footnote 105: Giants indeed; for thigh bones of ten or eleven feet
+long, and these are the longest in the human body, would argue men of
+_thirty-one feet high_!--E.]
+
+On the 17th December, the Unity was laid ashore on King's island, in
+order to clean her bottom, and next day the Horn was hauled on shore for
+the same purpose, but providentially at the distance of about 200 yards
+from her consort: For, on the 19th, while burning a fire of dry reeds
+under the Horn, which was necessary for the object in view, the flame
+caught hold of the ship, and they were forced to see her burn without
+being able to do any thing to extinguish the fire, as they were at least
+fifty feet from the water side. They launched the Unity at high water on
+the 20th, and next day carried on board all the iron-work, anchors,
+cannon, and whatever else they had been able to save belonging to the
+Horn.
+
+On the 25th some holes full of fresh water were found, which was white
+and muddy, yet well tasted, and of which a great quantity was carried
+on board, in small casks on the men's shoulders. At this place, they
+found great numbers of sea lions, the young of which are good to eat.
+This creature is nearly as big as a small horse, their heads resembling
+lions, and the males having long manes on their necks of tough coarse
+hair; but the females have no manes, and are only half as large as the
+males. They are a bold and fierce animal, and only to be destroyed by
+musket shot.
+
+January 18th, 1616, they departed from Port Desire: and on the 18th,
+being in lat. 51° S they saw the Sebaldine [or Faulkland] islands, as
+laid down by de Weert. The 20th, being in lat. 53° S. and by estimation
+twenty leagues to the South of the Straits of Magellan, they observed a
+strong current running to the S.W. The 22d the wind was uncertain, and
+shifting, and the water had a white appearance, as if they had been
+within the land; and holding on their course, S. by W. they saw land
+that same day, bearing from them W. and W.S.W. and quickly afterwards
+saw other land to the south. Then attempting, by an E.S.E. course, to
+get beyond the land, they were constrained to take in their topsails, by
+the wind blowing hard at north. In the forenoon of the 24th they saw
+land to starboard, at the distance of a league, stretching out to the
+east and south, having very high hills all covered with snow. They then
+saw other land bearing east from the former, which likewise was high and
+rugged. According to estimation, these two lands lay about eight leagues
+asunder, and they guessed there might be a good passage between them,
+because of a brisk current which ran to the southward in the direction
+of that opening. At noon they made their latitude 54° 46',[106] and
+stood towards the before-mentioned opening, but were delayed by a calm.
+At this place they saw a prodigious multitude of penguins, and such
+numbers of whales that they had to proceed with much caution, being
+afraid they might injure their ship by running against them.
+
+[Footnote 106: They were here obviously approaching the Straits of Le
+Maire, discovered on the present occasion, the northern opening of which
+is in lat. 54° 40' S. the southern in 55° S. and the longitude 65° 15'
+W. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+In the forenoon of the 25th they got close in with the eastern land, and
+upon its north side, which stretched E.S.E. as far as the eye could
+carry. This they named _States Land_, and to that which lay westward of
+the opening they gave the name of _Maurice Land_.[107] The land on both
+sides seemed entirely bare of trees and shrubs, but had abundance of
+good roads and sandy bays, with great store of fish, porpoises,
+penguins and other birds. Having a north wind at their entrance into
+this passage, they directed their course S.S.W. and going at a brisk
+rate, they were at noon in lat. 55° 36' S. and then held a S.W. course
+with a brisk gale. The land on the south side of the passage or Straits
+of _Le Maire_, and west side, to which they gave the name of _Maurice
+Land_, [being the east side of the Terra del Fuego] appeared to run
+W.S.W. and S.W. as far as they could see, and was all a very rugged,
+uneven, and rocky coast. In the evening, having the wind at S.W. they
+steered S. meeting with prodigious large waves, rolling along before the
+wind; and, from the depth of the water to leeward, which appeared by
+very evident signs, they were fully convinced that they had the great
+South Sea open before them, into which they had now almost made their
+way by a new passage of their own discovering.
+
+[Footnote 107: The former of these names is still retained, but not the
+latter; the land on the west of the Straits of Le Maire being Terra del
+Fuego; and the cape at the N.W. of the straits mouths is now called Cape
+St Vincent, while the S.W. point is named Cape St Diego.--E.]
+
+At this place the _sea-mews_ were larger than swans, their wings when
+extended measuring six feet from tip to tip. These often alighted on the
+ship, and were so tame as to allow themselves to be taken by hand,
+without even attempting to escape. The 26th at noon they made their
+latitude 57° S. where they were assailed by a brisk storm at W.S.W. the
+sea running very high, and of a blue colour. They still held their
+course to the southwards, but changed at night to the N.W. in which
+direction they saw very high land. At noon of the 27th they were in 56°
+51' S. the weather being very cold, with hail and rain, and the wind at
+W. and W. by S. The 28th they had great billows rolling from the west,
+and were at noon in 56° 48' S. The 29th having the wind at N.E. they
+steered S.W. and came in sight of two islands W.S.W. of their course,
+beset all round with cliffs. They got to these islands at noon, giving
+the name of _Barnevelt's Islands_, and found their latitude to be 57°
+S.[108] "Being unable to sail _above_ them, they held their course to
+the north; and taking a N.W. course in the evening from Barnevelt's
+islands, they saw land N.W. and N.N.W. from them, being the lofty
+mountainous land covered with snow, which lies to the south of the
+straits of Magellan, [called Terra del Fuego,] and which ends in a sharp
+point, to which they gave the name of _Cape Horn_, which is in lat. 57°
+48' S."[109]
+
+[Footnote 108: Only 56°, so that by some inaccuracy of instruments or
+calculation, the observations of the latitude, in this voyage, seem all
+considerably too high.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 109: The course in the text within inverted commas, from
+Barnevelt's islands to Cape Horn, is evidently erroneously stated. It
+ought to have run thus. "Being unable to pass to the north of these
+islands, they held their course S.W. seeing land on the N.W. and N.N.W.
+of their course, which ended in a sharp point, which they named _Cape
+Horn_."--Cape Horn is in lat. 56° 15' S. and long. 67° 45' W. from
+Greenwich.--E.]
+
+They now held their course westwards, being assisted by a strong current
+in that direction; yet had the wind from the north, and had heavy
+billows meeting them from the west. The 30th, the current and billows as
+before, they were fully assured of having the way open into the South
+Sea, and this day at noon they made their latitude 57° 34' S. The 31st
+sailing west, with the wind at north, their latitude at noon was 58° S.
+But the wind changing to W. and W.S.W. they passed Cape Horn, losing
+sight of land altogether, still meeting huge billows rolling from the
+west with a blue sea, which made them believe they were in the main
+South Sea. February 1st, they had a storm at S.W. and sailed N.W. and
+W.N.W. The 2d, having the wind at W. they sailed southwards, and came
+into the lat. of 57° 58' S. The 3d they made their latitude 59° 25' S.
+with a strong wind at W. but saw no signs of any land to the South.
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_Continuation of the Voyage, from Cape Horn to the Island of Java._
+
+Altering their course to the northwards, they plainly discerned the
+western mouth of the Straits of Magellan, bearing east from them, on the
+12th February; and being now quite sure of their new and happy
+discovery, they returned thanks to the Almighty for their good fortune
+over a cup of wine, which was handed three times round the company. To
+this new-found passage or straits, leading from the Atlantic into the
+Pacific, they gave the name of the _Straits of Le Maire_, though that
+honour ought justly to have been given to _Schouten,_ by whose excellent
+conduct these straits were discovered.
+
+By the 27th of February they were in lat. 40° S. with fair weather,
+continuing their course to the north; but on the 28th, they determined
+to sail for the island of Juan Fernandez, to give some rest and
+refreshment to their sickly and wearied company. That day their latitude
+at noon was 35° 53' S. In the evening they shortened sail, fearing to
+fall in with the land in the night. Next day, being the 1st of March,
+they saw the islands of Juan Fernandez to the N.N.E. and got up to them
+at noon, being in the lat. of 35° 53' S.[110] The smaller of these
+islands is that to the westwards, [Masafuero,] which is very barren and
+rocky. The greater [Juan Fernandez,] to the eastwards, though also very
+high and mountainous, is yet fruitful and well shaded with trees. This
+island affords plenty of hogs and goats; and there is such excellent
+fishing all round, that the Spaniards come hither for that purpose, and
+transport vast quantities of fish from hence to Peru.
+
+[Footnote 110: The latitude of Juan Fernandez is only 33° 42' S. The two
+islands mentioned in the text under this name, are Juan Fernandez and
+Masafuero; the former in long. 77° 80', the latter in 79° 40', both W.
+from Greenwich. Or perhaps, the second island may be the Small Goat's or
+Rabbit Island, off its S.W. end, called _Isola de Cabras_, or _de
+Conejos_.--E.]
+
+The road or haven of Juan Fernandez, [named la Baia, or Cumberland
+Harbour,] is at the east end of the island; but they shaped their course
+to the west end, where they could find no place in which to anchor. The
+boat being sent in search of an anchorage, brought an account of a
+beautiful valley, full of trees and thickets, and refreshed by streams
+of water running down from the hills, with a variety of animals feeding
+in this pleasant spot. The boat brought also great store of fish on
+board, being mostly lobsters and crabs, and reported having seen many
+sea wolves. Finding the island inaccessible, they took a considerable
+quantity of fish, and procured a supply of fresh water, after which they
+determined to pursue their voyage.
+
+The 11th March they passed the tropic of Capricorn to the north, the
+wind in general being E.S.E. and they held their course N.N.W. till the
+15th, when being in lat. 18° S. they changed their course to W. The 3d
+April they were in 15° 12' S. being then much afflicted with the flux,
+and that day they saw a small low island which they got up to at noon.
+Finding no bottom, they could not come to anchor, but sent some men
+ashore in the boat. They found nothing here fit for refreshment, except
+some herbs which tasted like scurvy grass, and saw some dogs which
+could neither bark nor snarl, and for which reason they named it Dog
+Island. It is in lat. 15° 12', and they judged it to be 925 leagues west
+from the coast of Peru.[111] The interior of this island is so low, that
+it seemed mostly overflowed at high water, its outskirt being a sort of
+dike or mound, overgrown with trees, between which the salt water
+penetrates in several places.
+
+[Footnote 111: Dog Island is in lat. 15° 18' S. and long. 137° W. about
+1200 marine leagues west from the coast of Peru under the same parallel.
+By the description in the text it seems one of those which are usually
+termed _lagoon_ islands--E.]
+
+The 14th, sailing W. and W. by N. they saw a large low island in the
+afternoon, reaching a considerable way N.E. and S.W. At sun-set, being
+about a league from this island, a canoe came to meet them, in which
+were some naked Indians of a reddish colour, having long black hair.
+They made signs to the Dutch to go on shore, and spoke to them in a
+language which was not understood; neither did the Indians understand
+them, though spoken to in Spanish, Moluccan, and Javan. Getting near the
+coast, no bottom could be found, though only a musket-shot from land.
+They now sailed S.S.W. along the island, making ten leagues during the
+night, and continued along the shore on the 15th, many naked people
+continually inviting them to land. At length a canoe came off, but the
+natives would not venture into the ship, yet came to the boat, where the
+Dutch gave them beads, knives, and other trifles; but they found them
+thievishly disposed, much like the natives of the Ladrones, and were so
+fond of iron, that they stole the nails from the cabin windows, and the
+bolts from the doors. Their skins were all pictured over with snakes,
+dragons, and such like reptiles, and they were entirely naked, except a
+piece of mat before them. A boat was sent ashore well armed, and
+immediately on landing, about thirty of the natives rushed from a wood,
+armed with clubs, slings, and long staves or spears, and would have
+seized the boat and taken away the arms from the soldiers; but on
+receiving a discharge of musquetry they run off. Not being able to
+anchor here, they called this the _Island without ground_. It is low,
+and mostly composed of white sandy ground, on which are many trees,
+which were supposed to be cocoas and palmitos. It is not broad, but of
+considerable length, being in lat. 15° S. and about 100 leagues from Dog
+Island.[112]
+
+[Footnote 112: Sondre-ground, or Without-ground, is in lat. 15° 12' S.
+and 143° 25' W. long.--E.]
+
+Finding nothing could be done here, they held on their course to the
+west, and on the 16th came to another island, about fifteen leagues
+north from the former. This seemed all drowned land, yet its skirts were
+well clothed with trees. Here also they found no ground, and it yielded
+nothing but a few herbs, with some crabs and other shell-fish, which
+they found good eating. It afforded them also good fresh water, which
+they found in a pit not far from the shore. The pottage or soup, which
+they made of certain herbs gathered here, proved serviceable to those
+who were afflicted with the flux. They called this _Water Island_,[113]
+because it supplied them with fresh water.
+
+[Footnote 113: Water-land is in lat. 15° S. and 146° W. long.--E.]
+
+Sailing from this island westwards, they came on the 18th to another
+island 20 leagues distant from the last, and extending a considerable
+way N.W. and S.E. Dispatching the boat in search of anchorage, a bottom
+was found near a point of land, in 25 and 40 fathoms, about a
+musket-shot from the shore, where also was a gentle stream of fresh
+water. This news induced them to send back the boat with some casks for
+water: But after using much pains to get on shore, and searching in the
+wood to find a spring, they were frightened away by seeing a savage. On
+getting back to their boat, five or six more of the savages came to the
+shore, but on seeing the Dutch put off they soon retired into the woods.
+Although they thus got rid of the savages, they encountered other
+adversaries of a formidable nature; for they were followed from the
+woods by innumerable myriads of black flies, so that they came on board
+absolutely covered with them from head to foot, and the plague of flies
+began to rage in the ship in a most intolerable manner. This persecution
+lasted three or four days, on which account they called this _Fly
+Island_,[114] and by the help of a good breeze of wind, they left it as
+fast as they could.
+
+[Footnote 114: The next island W. or rather S.W. from Water-land, and
+nearly at the distance in the text, is now called Palliser's
+island.--E.]
+
+Continuing their course westwards from the 19th of April to the 9th of
+May, when they were in lat. 15° 20' S. and estimated their distance from
+Peru 1510 leagues to the west, they perceived a bark coming towards
+them, on which they fired a gun or two to make them strike. But those
+who were in her, either not understanding the language of cannon, or
+unwilling to obey, made off as fast as they could; on which the Dutch
+sent their boat with ten musqueteers to intercept them. Some of the
+savages in the bark leapt overboard, and the rest surrendered without
+resistance, on which the Dutch used them kindly, dressing those that
+were wounded, and saving the lives of some who had leapt into the sea.
+Besides the men, there were eight women and several children, being in
+all twenty-three, remaining in the bark. They were a cleanly neat kind
+of people, of a reddish colour, and entirely naked except the parts of
+shame. The men wore their long black curled hair, but that of the women
+was cut short.
+
+The bark was of a singular figure and construction, consisting of two
+canoes fastened together, in the midst of each of which were two planks
+of red wood to keep out the water, and several others went across from
+one canoe to the other, being made fast and close above, and projected
+over a good way on each side. At the end of one of the canoes, on the
+starboard side, there stood a mast, having a fork at its upper end,
+where the yard lay; the sail being of mats, and the ropes of that kind
+of stuff of which fig-frails are made in Spain. Their only furniture
+consisted of a few fishing-hooks, the upper part of which was of stone,
+and the other of bone, tortoise-shell, or mother-of-pearl. They had no
+water on board, instead of which they satisfied themselves with the
+liquor of a few cocoa-nuts; in default of which they drank sea-water,
+which even the children did heartily. The Dutch sent them all again on
+board their vessel, where the women welcomed their husbands with joyful
+embraces, after which they made away to the south-east.[115]
+
+[Footnote 115: This double canoe seems to have belonged to the Society
+islands, and was perhaps bound towards Otaheite, by the course which it
+followed on getting rid of the Dutch.--E.]
+
+The 10th of May, Schouten continued his course W.S.W. and that day saw
+some very high land to larboard, S.E. by S. about eight leagues off. The
+11th they came to a very high island, and about two leagues south from
+this to one much lower; and the same day sailed over a bank where they
+had fourteen fathoms on a stoney bottom, about two leagues from the
+land, and being past this bank could find no bottom. At this time
+another bark, or double canoe like the former, came up to them, having a
+small loose single canoe in her, to put out upon occasion. She sailed so
+fast that few Dutch ships could have outstripped her. She was steered
+behind by two oars, one in each canoe, and when they have a mind to
+tack they use oars forwards. Sending their boat to sound at one of these
+islands, ground was found a cannon-shot from the shore, in twelve,
+fourteen, and fifteen fathoms, but shelvy. The savages in the bark made
+signs as if directing them to the other island, but they anchored at the
+former in twenty-five fathoms on a sandy bottom, a cannon-shot from
+shore.
+
+This island, in lat. 16° 10' S. is one entire mountain, looking like one
+of the Molucca islands, and all covered with cocoa-nut trees, for which
+reason they named it Cocoa island.[116] The other island is much lower
+than this, but longer, and stretches east and west. While at anchor off
+Cocoa island there came three _ships_,[117] and nine or ten canoes about
+them, having three or four men in each. Some of these holding out white
+flags in token of peace, the Dutch did so likewise. The canoes were flat
+before and sharp behind, hewed each out of one piece of a red kind of
+wood, and sailed very swiftly. On coming near the Unity, some of the
+savages leapt into the sea and swam to the ship, having their hands full
+of cocoa-nuts and _ubes-roots,_[118] which they bartered for nails and
+beads, giving four or five cocoa-nuts for a nail or a small string of
+beads, so that the Dutch that day procured 180 cocoa-nuts. This traffic
+brought so many of the natives on board, that the Dutch could hardly
+stir about the ship.
+
+[Footnote 116: Cocas, or Boscawen island, is in 16° 32' S. and long.
+169° 35' W. The other island mentioned in the text, Traitors, or Keppel
+island, is a few leagues S.S.W. from Cocos.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 117: These ships must have been large double canoes.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 118: These _ubes_-roots were perhaps the same that are called
+_eddoes_ by modern navigators among the South Sea islands.--E.]
+
+The boat was now sent to the other island to see for a more convenient
+place in which to anchor; but she was presently beset by a vast number
+of canoes filled with a mad sort of people, armed with clubs, who
+boarded the boat and attacked the Dutchmen. On firing their muskets, the
+savages laughed at them for making so much noise and doing so little
+hurt; but, on the next discharge, one of them being shot through the
+breast, they learnt to pay more respect to the muskets, and to keep
+their due distance for the future. The savages were lusty,
+well-proportioned men, and most expert swimmers, but naked and thievish,
+and very fantastical in the fashion of their hair, some having it
+short, others long, some curled, and others plaited or folded up in
+various forms.
+
+On the 12th the savages came again in their canoes, laden with cocoas,
+bananas, _ubes-roots_, hogs, and fresh water, contending violently who
+should get first on board. Those who were behind, being unable to get
+over the throng of canoes and men before them, leapt into the sea, and
+diving under the canoes, swam to the ship with bunches of cocoas in
+their mouths, and climbed up the side like so many rats, and in such
+swarms that the Dutch had to keep them off with cudgels. The Dutch
+bartered with them that day for so many cocoas, as to produce twelve for
+each of their men, being eighty-five in number. The natives wondered
+much at the size and strength of the Dutch ship; and some of them even
+dived under her bottom, knocking it with stones, as if to try how strong
+it was. The king of these savages sent a black hog on board as a
+present, charging the messenger to take no reward. Shortly after he came
+in person, in a large ship of their fashion, attended by thirty-five
+single canoes; and when at a small distance from the ship, he and all
+his people began to bawl out as loud as they could, being their manner
+of welcoming strangers. The Dutch received him with drums and trumpets,
+which pleased him much; and he and his attendants shewed their sense of
+this honourable reception by bowing and clapping their hands. The king
+gave them a present after his fashion, which they requited with an old
+hatchet, some rusty nails and glass beads, and a piece of linen, with
+all which he seemed much pleased. This king was not distinguished from
+his subjects by any external mark of dignity, but merely by the
+reverence they shewed him, as he was equally naked with all the rest;
+but he could not be prevailed on to come on board the Unity.
+
+At noon on the 13th, the Dutch ship was surrounded by twenty-three large
+double canoes, or ships of their fashion, and forty-five single canoes,
+in all of which there could not be less than seven or eight hundred men.
+At first they pretended to come for the purpose of trade, making signs
+of friendship, and endeavouring to prevail upon the Dutch to remove
+their ship to the other island, where they would be better accommodated.
+Yet, in spite of all these fair pretences, the Dutch suspected that some
+mischief was intended by the savages, who now began to environ the ship
+all around, and then, with a great outcry, made a sudden attack. The
+king's ship was the foremost in the action, and rushed with such
+violence against the Unity, that the heads of the two canoes composing
+it were both dashed to pieces. The rest came on as well as they could,
+throwing repeated showers of great stones on board; but the Dutch,
+having been on their guard, so galled them with musquetry, and with
+three great guns loaded with musket-balls and nails, that all the
+savages were fain to quit their canoes, and seek for safety in the
+water. Being thus put to the rout, they dispersed as quickly as
+possible. These treacherous savages were inhabitants of the lower, or
+more southerly, of the two islands, which therefore the Dutch named
+_Traitor's Island_.
+
+Schouten sailed from Cocoa Island that same day, holding a course to the
+W. and W. by S. and came on the 14th to another island, about thirty
+leagues from Cocoa Island, to which he gave the name of _Hope
+Island_,[119] because expecting there to meet with refreshments. Finding
+no ground for anchorage, the boat was sent to sound along shore, and
+found a stony bottom about a musket-shot from the shore, in some places
+having forty, and in others twenty and thirty fathoms, and then no
+bottom at all next throw of the lead. Some ten or twelve canoes came off
+to the ship, bartering a small quantity of flying fishes for beads, the
+articles being reciprocally exchanged by means of a rope let down from
+the stern of the ship. From this peddling traffic the Indians soon after
+withdrew, and endeavoured to board and carry away the boat which was
+employed in sounding; but met with such a reception from guns, pikes,
+and cutlasses, that after two of them were slain, they were glad to
+hurry away as fast as they could. This island was mostly composed of
+black cliffs, which were green on the top, and seemed well stocked with
+cocoa-trees. There were several houses seen along the sea side; and in
+one place was a large village close beside a strand, or landing-place.
+As there was no convenient anchorage at this place, the ground being
+extremely rough, Schouten proceeded on his voyage to the S.W. meaning to
+pursue the originally intended discovery of a southern continent.
+
+[Footnote 119: Hope Island is in lat. 16° 32' S. and in 177° 25' W.
+longitude.--E.]
+
+The 18th May, being in lat. 16° 5' S. and the west wind becoming very
+unsteady, they began to consult as to the farther prosecution of their
+voyage. Schouten represented that they were now at least 1600 leagues
+westward from the coast of Peru, without having made the expected
+discovery of a southern land, of which there was now no great
+probability of success, having already sailed much farther west than
+they at first intended. He said also, if they persisted in following
+their present course, they would assuredly come to the southern side of
+New Guinea; and if they were unable to find a passage through that
+country, to the west or north, they would inevitably be lost, since it
+would be impossible for them to get back again, by reason of the east
+winds which continually reign in these seas. For these reasons, and
+others which he urged, he proposed, that they should now alter their
+course to the northwards, so as to fall in with the north side of New
+Guinea.[120] This proposal was embraced by all the company, and it was
+immediately determined to change the course to N.N.W. Accordingly,
+holding their course in that new direction, they saw two islands at noon
+of the 19th, about eight leagues from them, N.E. by E. and seeming to be
+a cannon-shot distant from each other.[121] Upon this they steered N.E.
+with fair weather and a scanty wind, meaning to approach this island,
+but could only get within a league of it on the 21st, when they were
+visited by two canoes, the people in which began immediately to threaten
+them with loud cries, and at the same time seemed preparing to dart
+their _assagays_ or spears: but, on a discharge from the ship, they made
+off in haste, leaving two of their companions behind them who were
+slain, and a shirt they had stolen from the ship. Next day other natives
+came to the ship on friendly and peaceable terms, bringing cocoa-nuts,
+ubes-roots, and roasted hogs, which they bartered for knives, beads, and
+nails.
+
+[Footnote 120: It is almost needless to mention, that if Schouten had
+continued his course in the former parallel of between 15° and 16° S. he
+must have fallen in with the group of islands now called the New
+Hebrides, and afterward with the northern part of New South Wales.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 121: This was only one island, in lat. 15° S. and long. 180°
+10' W. which they named Horn Island.--E.]
+
+The natives of this island were all as expert swimmers and divers as
+those in Traitor's Island, and as well versed in cheating and stealing,
+which they never failed to do when an opportunity offered. Their houses
+stood all along the shore, being thatched with leaves, and having each a
+kind of penthouse to shed off the rain. They were mostly ten or twelve
+feet high, and twenty-five feet in compass, their only furniture within
+being a bed of dry leaves, a fishing-rod or two, and a great club, even
+the house of their king being no better provided than the rest. At this
+island the Dutch found good convenience for watering; and on the 26th
+they sent three of their principal people on shore as hostages, or
+pledges, of friendship with the islanders, retaining six of them aboard
+in the same capacity. The Dutch pledges were treated on shore with great
+respect by the king, who presented them with four hogs; and gave strict
+orders that none of his people should give the smallest disturbance to
+the boat while watering. The natives stood in great awe of their king,
+and were very fearful of having any of their crimes made known to him.
+One of them having stolen a cutlass, and complaint being made to one of
+the king's officers, the thief was pursued and soundly drubbed, besides
+being forced to make restitution; on which occasion the officer
+signified, that it was well for the culprit that the king knew not of
+his crime, otherwise his life would certainly have been forfeited.
+
+These islanders were extremely frightened at the report of a gun, which
+would set them all running like so many madmen. Yet on one occasion the
+king desired to hear one of the great guns let off, and being set for
+that purpose under a canopy, with all his courtiers about him, in great
+state, the gun was no sooner fired than he ran off into the woods as
+fast as possible, followed by his attendants, and no persuasions of the
+Dutch could stop them. The 25th and 26th the Dutch went ashore to
+endeavour to procure hogs, but were unable to get any, as the islanders
+had now only a few left, and would only part with cocoas, bananas, and
+ubes-roots; yet the king continued his wonted kindness and respect, and
+he and his lieutenant took the crowns from their own heads, and set them
+on the heads of two of the company. These crowns were composed of the
+white, red, and green feathers of parrots and doves. The doves of this
+island are white on the back, and black every where else except the
+breast; and each of the king's counsellors has one of these birds
+sitting beside him on a stick.
+
+The ship being completely supplied with fresh water on the 28th,
+Schouten and Le Maire went ashore with the trumpets, with which music
+the king was highly gratified. He told them of his wars with the
+inhabitants of the other island, and shewed several caves and thickets
+where they were in use to place ambuscades. It plainly appeared that he
+was fearful of the Dutch having some design of seizing his country, as
+he would fain have engaged them to go to war with the other island, and
+even offered to give them ten hogs and a good quantity of cocoas, if
+they would be gone from his island in two days. Yet he made them a visit
+aboard, praying when he entered the ship, and praying also at every
+cabin he entered. He used always to pray likewise every time the Dutch
+came ashore to visit him. His subjects also shewed great submission to
+the Dutch, kissing their feet, and laying them on their own necks, with
+all the marks of awe and fear they could express.
+
+The 30th of May was a day of great ceremony, in consequence of the king
+of the _other island_[122] coming to visit the king of this. This king
+was accompanied by a train of 300 naked Indians, having bunches of green
+herbs stuck about their waists, of which herb they make their drink. To
+make sure of a welcome, this king brought with him a present of sixteen
+hogs. When the two kings came in sight of each other, they began to bow
+and to mutter certain prayers; on meeting they both fell prostrate on
+the ground, and after several strange gestures, they got up and walked
+to two seats provided for them, where they uttered a few more prayers,
+bowing reverently to each other, and at length sat down under the same
+canopy. After this, by way of doing honour to the stranger king, a
+messenger was sent aboard, requesting to send the drums and trumpets
+ashore, which was done accordingly, and they played a march to the great
+entertainment of the two kings. After this a solemn banquet was
+prepared, for which they began to make ready their liquor, and in the
+following strange and abominable manner. A number of Indians came into
+the presence of the two kings and their attendants, bringing a good
+quantity of _cana_, the herb of which they make their drink, each of
+whom took a large mouthful thereof, and having chewed it a while, put it
+from their mouths into a large wooden trough, and poured water on the
+chewed herb. After stirring it some time, they squeezed out all the
+liquor, which they presented in cups to the two kings.[123] They also
+offered of it to the Dutch, who were ready to vomit at the nastiness of
+its preparation.
+
+[Footnote 122: No _other island_ is to be found in modern maps near Horn
+Island, the nearest being the Feejee Islands, a numerous group, about
+thirty leagues S.S.W. It is therefore probable that Horn Island may have
+consisted of two peninsulas, united by a low narrow neck, appearing to
+Schouten as two distinct islands.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 123: In the Society Islands, as related by modern navigators,
+an intoxicating liquor is prepared nearly in a similar manner, by
+chewing the _ava_, or pepper-root.--E.]
+
+The eating part of this entertainment consisted of ubes-roots roasted,
+and hogs nicely dressed in the following manner: Having ripped open
+their bellies and taken out the entrails, they singed off the hair, and
+put hot stones into their bellies, by which, without farther cleaning or
+dressing, they were made fit for the royal feast.[124] They presented
+two hogs dressed in this manner to the Dutch, with all the form and
+ceremony used to their kings, laying them first on their heads, then
+kneeling with much humility, they left them at their feet. They gave the
+Dutch also eleven living hogs; for which they got in return a present of
+knives, old nails, and glass beads, with which they were well pleased.
+The natives of this island were of a dark yellow colour, so tall, large,
+strong, and well-proportioned, that the tallest of the Dutch could only
+be compared with the smallest among them. Some wore their hair curled,
+frizzled, or tied up in knots, while others had it standing bolt upright
+on their heads, like hog's-bristles, a quarter of an ell high. The king
+and some of his chief men had long locks of hair, hanging down below
+their hips, bound with a few knots. The women were all very ugly
+figures, short and ill-shaped, their breasts hanging down to their
+bellies like empty satchels, and their hair close cropped. Both sexes
+were entirely naked, except a slight covering in front. They seemed
+altogether void of any devotion, and free from care, living on what the
+earth spontaneously produces, without any art, industry, or cultivation.
+They neither sow nor reap, neither buy nor sell, neither do any thing
+for a living, but leave all to nature, and must starve if that fail them
+at any time. They seem also to have as little regard for the dictates of
+decency and modesty, as for those of civil policy and prudence; for they
+will use their women openly in the largest assembly, even in presence of
+their king, whom, in other respects, they so greatly reverence. To this
+island the Dutch gave the name of Horn Island, from the town in Holland
+whence they fitted out; and named the haven in which they anchored
+_Unity Bay_, after their ship. This bay, resembling a natural dock, is
+on the south side of the island, in the latitude of 14° 16' S.[125]
+
+[Footnote 124: Modern voyagers describe this mode of dressing more
+minutely. A pit is dug in the earth, which is lined with heated stones,
+on which the hog is placed, having hot stones in its belly, and is
+covered with other hot stones, when the pit is covered up like a grave.
+After remaining a sufficient time in this situation, the _barbacued hog_
+is said to be nicely dressed.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 125: The latitude and longitude of Horn Island have been given
+in a former note, but its most extreme south point may reach to 15° 16'
+S.--E.]
+
+Leaving Horn Island on the 1st of June, they saw no other land till the
+21st, when they made towards a very low island bearing S.S.W. by W. from
+them, in lat. 4° 47' S. near which were several sands stretching N.W.
+from the land, as also three or four small islands very full of trees.
+Here a canoe came to the Unity, of the same odd fashion with those
+formerly described. The people also were much like those formerly seen,
+only blacker, and armed with bows and arrows, being the first they had
+seen among the Indians of the South Sea. These people told them, by
+signs, that there was more land to the westwards, where their king
+dwelt, and where there were good refreshments to be had. On this
+information, they sailed on the 22d W. and W. by N. in the lat. of 4°
+45' S. and saw that day at least twelve or thirteen islands close
+together, lying W.S.W. from them, and reaching S.E. and N.W. about half
+a league, but they left these to larboard. The 24th, the wind being S.
+they saw three low islands to larboard, S.W. of their course, one of
+them very small, the other two being each two miles long, all very full
+of trees, to which they gave the name of _Green Islands_.[126] The
+shores of these islands were rugged and full of cliffs, presenting no
+place for anchoring, wherefore they proceeded on their voyage.
+
+[Footnote 126: These Green Islands of Schouten are laid down in our best
+modern maps in lat. 4° S. and long. 205° 20' W. The other two groups
+mentioned at this place in the text and without names, seem to have been
+the _Four Islands_ and the _Nine Islands_ of Carteret, to the S.E. of
+Green Islands.--E.]
+
+On the 25th, being St John the Baptist's day, they sailed past another
+island, on which were seven or eight hovels, which they named St John's
+Island. [Lat. 3° 40' S. long. 206° 20' W.] At this time they saw some
+very high land to the S.W. which they thought to be the western point of
+New Guinea.[127] They reached this coast by noon, and sailed along,
+sending their boat in search of an anchorage, but no bottom could then
+be found. Two or three canoes filled with a barbarous people attacked
+the boat with slings, but were soon driven away by the muskets. These
+people were very black, entirely naked, and spoke a quite different
+language from that of the islanders they had seen hitherto. They kept
+fires burning on the coast all night, and some of them came lurking
+about the ship in their canoes; but though the Dutch, on discovering
+them, did every thing they could to conciliate, they would not
+understand any signs made for procuring provisions, but answered all
+with horrible noises and outcries.
+
+[Footnote 127: This land was discovered afterwards to be separate from
+New Guinea, and is now named New Ireland, having another large island
+interposed, called New Britain.--E.]
+
+At night, they anchored in a bay in 40 fathoms on uneven ground. About
+this place the country was high and verdant, and afforded a pleasant
+prospect, being, as they guessed, 1840 leagues west from the coast of
+Peru. In the morning of the 26th, three canoes came to the ship, quite
+full of these barbarians, being well armed after their manner, with
+clubs, wooden swords, and slings. The Dutch treated them kindly, giving
+them several toys to procure their favour; but they were not to be won
+by kindness, neither could they be taught good manners except by the
+language of the great guns: For they presently assaulted the ship with
+all their force, and continued till ten or twelve of them were slain by
+cannon-shot. They then threw themselves into the water, endeavouring to
+escape by swimming and diving; but they were pursued in the water by the
+boat, when several were knocked in the head, and three prisoners taken,
+besides four of their canoes, which were cut up as fuel for the use of
+the ship. Though these savages would not formerly understand any signs,
+they were now more apt, and understood that hogs and bananas were
+demanded in ransom for the prisoners. One wounded man was set at
+liberty, but the Dutch exacted ten hogs for the others. This island
+afforded a sort of birds that are all over bright red. North of it lay
+another island, of which they made no other discovery, except its
+position in regard to this. The Dutch concluded that these people were
+of the _Papuas_ nation, because of their short hair, and because they
+chewed betel mixed with chalk.
+
+In the evening of the 28th, they sailed from hence, and next day held a
+course to the N.W. and N.W. by N. with a shifting wind till noon, and
+then a calm. They had the point of the island in view till evening,
+though they sailed along the coast, which was full of bays and turnings,
+and trended N.W. and N.W. by W. This day they saw other three high
+islands, which lay northwards five or six miles from the greater one,
+being then in the latitude of 3° 20' S. The 30th in the morning, several
+canoes of these black Papuas came off to the ship, and being allowed to
+come aboard, broke certain staves over the Dutch, in sign of peace.
+Their canoes were more artificially made and ornamented than the others,
+and the people seemed more civilized and more modest, as they had the
+pudenda covered, which the others had not. Their hair was rubbed over
+with chalk, their black frizly locks appearing as if powdered. They
+affected to be poor, and came to beg, not bringing any thing to the
+ship, yet the four islands whence they came appeared, to be well stored
+with cocoas.
+
+On the 1st June, the Dutch came to anchor between the coast of New
+Guinea and an island two miles long. They were soon after surrounded by
+twenty-five canoes, full of the same people who had broken staves the
+day before in token of peace, and who came now fully armed in guise of
+war. They were not long of entering on the work they came about. Two of
+them laid hold of two anchors which hung from the bows of the ship, and
+endeavoured with their girdles to tug the ship on shore. The rest lay
+close to the ship's sides, and gave a brisk onset with slings and other
+weapons; but the great guns soon forced them to retire, with twelve or
+thirteen killed, and many more wounded. After this, the Dutch sailed
+peaceably along the coast, with a good gale of wind, continuing their
+course W.N.W. and N.W. by W. The 2d they were in lat. 3° 12' S. and saw
+a low land to larboard, and right before them a low island. Continuing
+W.N.W. with a slight current at E.N.E. they sailed gently along. The 3d
+they saw high land, bearing W. about 14 leagues from the other island,
+and in lat. 2° 41' S. The 4th, while passing these four island, they
+suddenly came in view of twenty-three other islands, some great, some
+small, some high, and others low, most of which they left to starboard,
+and only two or three to larboard. Some of these were a league distant
+from the others, and some only a cannon-shot. Their latitude was in 2°
+30' S. a little more or less.
+
+On the 6th in the morning, the weather being variable and even sometimes
+stormy, they had in the morning a very high hill before them, bearing
+S.W. which they thought to have been _Geeminassi_ in Banda; but, on a
+nearer approach, they discovered three other hills more like it in the
+north, some six or seven leagues distant, which they were convinced were
+that hill of Banda.[128] Behind these hills lay a large tract of land,
+stretching east and west, of very great extent, and very uneven. In the
+morning of the 7th, they sailed towards these mighty hills, some of
+which they found were volcanoes, for which reason they named this
+_Vulcan's Island_. It was well inhabited and fall of cocoa-nut trees,
+but had no convenient place for anchorage. The inhabitants were naked,
+and extremely fearful of the Dutch, and their language so different from
+that of all the neighbouring people, that none of the blacks could
+understand them. More islands appeared to the N. and N.W. but they
+proceeded to a very low island, bearing N.W. by W. which they reached in
+the evening. The water here was observed to be of several colours,
+green, white, and yellow, perhaps occasioned by the mixture of some
+river, as it was far sweeter than ordinary sea water, and was full of
+leaves and boughs of trees, on some of which were birds, and even some
+crabs.
+
+[Footnote 128: They still had the north-western end of Papua or New
+Guinea between them and Banda, from which they were distant at least
+twelve degrees of longitude.--E.]
+
+On the 8th, continuing their course W.N.W. having a high island on the
+starboard, and another somewhat lower to larboard, they anchored in the
+afternoon in 70 fathoms on a good sandy bottom, about a cannon-shot from
+the land, at an island in 3° 40' S. which seemed an unhealthy place,
+yielding nothing of any value except a little ginger. It was inhabited
+by Papuas or blacks, whose ridiculous mode of dress, and their own
+natural deformity, made them appear little short of a kind of monsters.
+Hardly any of them but had something odd and strange, either in the
+bigness or position of their limbs. They had strings of hog's teeth hung
+about their necks; their noses were perforated, in which rings were
+fastened; their hair was frizled, and their faces very ugly. Their
+houses also were extremely singular, being mounted on stakes, eight or
+nine feet above the ground. Before noon of the 9th, they anchored in a
+more convenient bay, in 26 fathoms, on a bottom of sand mixed with clay.
+There were two villages near the shore, whence some canoes brought off
+hogs and cocoas, but the Indians held them at so dear a rate that the
+Dutch would not buy any of them.
+
+Though they had now sailed so long upon this new land, yet were they
+unable to determine with any certainty if it actually were the coast of
+New Guinea, as their charts neither agreed with each other, nor with the
+coast in view. This coast for the most part ran N.W. by W. sometimes
+more westerly, and at other times more northerly. Yet they held on their
+course W.N.W. along the coast, having quiet weather though dull winds,
+but assisted by a stream or current setting along the coast to the
+westwards. Proceeding in this manner, they came into the lat. of 2° 58'
+S. at noon of the 12th. Continuing their course on the 13th and 14th,
+the coast in sight was sometimes high and at other times low. The 15th,
+still pursuing the same course, they reached two low islands about half
+a league from the main, about the latitude of 2° 54' S. where they had
+good anchorage in 45 and 46 fathoms. Seeing the country well stored with
+cocoas, two boats well armed were sent with orders to land and procure
+some cocoa-nuts. But they were forced to retire by the Indians, in spite
+of their muskets, at least sixteen of the Dutch, being wounded by arrows
+and stones thrown from slings.
+
+In the morning of the 16th, they sailed in between the two low islands,
+and anchored in a safe place in nine fathoms. They landed that day on
+the smaller island, where they burnt some huts of the natives, and
+brought away as many cocoa-nuts as gave three to each man of the
+company. The barbarous natives became now more tractable; as on the 17th
+they came to make their peace-offerings of cocoas, bananas, ginger, and
+certain yellow roots [turmeric] used instead of saffron. They even
+trusted the Dutch so far as to come on board, when peace was entirely
+restored, and their hearts won by a few nails and beads. They continued
+bartering on the 18th, for cocoas and bananas, procuring fifty nuts and
+two bunches of bananas for each man of the company, with a smaller
+quantity of cassava and _papade_. These cassavas and papades are East
+India commodities, the former being also to be had particularly good in
+the West Indies, and far preferable to what they got here. The people
+make all their bread of this substance, baking it in large round cakes.
+This smaller island, which is the more easterly, the natives named
+_Mosa_; the other over against it they call _Jusan_, and the farthest
+off _Arimea_, which, is very high, and about five or six leagues from
+the coast of New Guinea.[129] These places had probably been visited
+before by Europeans, as they had among them some Spanish pots and jars.
+They were not nearly so much surprised at the report of the great guns
+as the others had been, neither were they so curious in looking at the
+ship.
+
+[Footnote 129: These names are not to be found in our modern general
+maps, though certainly infinitely better for all the uses of geography
+than the absurd appellations so much in use among voyagers.--E.]
+
+On the 21st at noon, sailing along the land as before N.W. they were in
+lat. 1° 13' S. The current drove them to a cluster of islands, where
+they anchored in thirteen fathoms, and were detained all day of the 22d
+by storms of thunder and rain. Setting sail in the morning of the 23d,
+six large canoes overtook them, bringing dried fish, cocoas, bananas,
+tobacco, and a small sort of fruit resembling plums. Some Indians also
+from another island brought provisions to barter, and some vessels of
+China porcelain. Like other Savages, they were excessively fond of beads
+and iron; but they were remarkably distinguished from the natives in the
+last islands, by their larger size, and more orange-coloured
+complexions. Their arms were bows and arrows, and they wore glass
+earrings of several colours, by which latter circumstance it appeared
+that they had been previously visited by other Europeans, and
+consequently that this was not to be considered as a discovery.
+
+The 24th, steering N.W. and W.N.W. and being in lat. 0° 30' S. they
+sailed along a very pleasant island, which they named Schouten's Island,
+after their master,[130] and called its western point Cape of Good Hope.
+The 25th they passed an extensive tract of uneven land on their larboard
+hand, stretching from E.S.E. to W.N.W. The 26th they saw three other
+islands, the coast stretching N.W. by W. The 27th they were in lat. 0°
+29' S. still seeing much land to the south, some of which were very high
+and some low, which they passed, continuing their course to the north of
+west. The 29th they felt the shock of an earthquake, which shook the
+ship to that degree that the men ran terrified out of their births,
+believing the ship had run a-ground, or had bilged against some rock. On
+heaving the lead they found the sea unfathomable, and their ship clear
+from all danger of rocks or shoals. The 30th they put into a great bay,
+out of which they could find no opening to the west, and resumed
+therefore a northern course. Here the ship trembled again with loud
+claps of thunder, and was almost set on fire by the lightning, had it
+not been prevented by prodigious rain.
+
+[Footnote 130: The centre of Schouten Island is in lat. 0° 30' S. and
+long. 223° W. It is nearly 24 leagues long from E. to W. and about eight
+leagues from N. to S. In some maps this island is named _Mysory_,
+probably the native appellation, and it lies off the mouth of a great
+bay, having within it another island of considerable size, called
+_Jobie_, or Traitor's Island.--E.]
+
+The 31st, continuing a northern course, they passed to the north of the
+equator, and being encompassed almost all round by land, they anchored
+in twelve fathoms on good ground, near a desolate island which lay close
+by the main land. The 1st of August they were in lat. 0° 15' N. The 2d
+and 3d being calm, they were carried by the current W. and W. by N. This
+day at noon their latitude was 0° 35' N. when they saw several whales
+and sea-tortoises, with two islands to the westwards. They now reckoned
+themselves at the western extremity of the land of New Guinea, along
+which they had sailed 280 leagues. Several canoes came off to them in
+the morning of the 5th, bringing Indian beans, rice, tobacco, and two
+beautiful birds of paradise, all white and yellow. These Indians spoke
+the language of Ternate, and some of them could speak a little Spanish
+and Malayan, in which last language Clawson the merchant was well
+skilled. All the people in these canoes were finely clothed from the
+waist downwards, some with loose silken robes, and others with breeches,
+and several had silken turbans on their head, being Mahometans. All of
+them had jet black hair, and wore many gold and silver rings on their
+fingers. They bartered their provisions with the Dutch for beads and
+other toys, but seemed more desirous of having linen. They appeared so
+fearful and suspicious of the Dutch, that they would not tell the name
+of their country, which however was suspected to be one of the three
+eastern points of Gilolo, and that the people were natives of Tidore,
+which was afterwards found to be the case.
+
+In the morning of the 6th they set sail, holding a northern, course,
+intending to go round the north point of Gilolo. The 7th they saw the
+north point of Morty, or Moraty, N.E. of Gilolo. Contending with
+variable winds and adverse currents it was the 19th before they could
+get into the bay of _Soppy_ in Gilolo, where they anchored in ten
+fathoms on sandy ground, about a cannon-shot from shore. Here they
+procured poultry, tortoises, sago, and rice, which was a great relief
+for the company, still consisting of eighty-five men in health and
+vigour. Leaving Soppy on the 25th August they came to the desert island
+of Moro on the 1st September, and, on closer examination, found it
+composed of several islands close together. They saw here a worm, or
+serpent, as thick as a man's leg and of great length. On the 5th they
+anchored off the coast of Gilolo. At this place some of the seamen went
+ashore unarmed to catch fish, when four Ternatese soldiers rushed
+suddenly out of the wood sword-in-hand while the Dutchmen were drawing
+their net, intending to have slain them; but the surgeon called out to
+them _Oran Hollanda_, that is, _Holland men_, on which the soldiers
+instantly stopped, throwing water on their heads in token of peace, and
+approaching in a friendly manner, said they had mistaken the Dutchmen
+for Spaniards. At the request of the seamen they went on board, where,
+being well treated, they promised to bring provisions and refreshment to
+the ship, which they afterwards did.
+
+Sailing thence on the 14th they got sight of Ternate and Tidore on the
+16th, and anchored on the 17th in the evening before Malaya in Ternate,
+in eleven fathoms sandy ground. Here captain Schouten and Jaques Le
+Maire went ashore, and were kindly entertained by the general Laurence
+Real, admiral Stephen Verhagen, and Jasper Janson, governor of Amboina.
+On the 18th they sold two of their pinnaces, with most of what had been
+saved out of the unfortunate Horn, receiving for the same 1350 reals,
+with part of which they purchased two lasts of rice, a ton of vinegar, a
+ton of Spanish wine, and three tons of biscuit. On the 27th they sailed
+for Bantam, and on the 28th of October anchored at Jacatra, now Batavia.
+John Peterson Koen, president for the Dutch East India Company at
+Bantam, arrived there on the 31st of October, and next day sequestered
+the Unity and her cargo, as forfeited to the India company for illegally
+sailing within the boundaries of their charter.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+In consequence of the seizure of the Unity, captain Schouten and Jaques
+Le Maire, with others of their people, embarked at Bantam in the
+Amsterdam and Zealand on the 14th December, 1616, on which they set sail
+for Holland. On the 31st of that month Jaques Le Maire died, chiefly of
+grief and vexation on account of the disastrous end of an enterprise
+which had been so successful till the arrest of the ship and cargo. He
+was, however, exceedingly solicitous about his journal, which he had
+kept with the utmost care during the voyage, and left a recommendation
+that it should be published, that the world might know and judge of the
+usage they had received. The Amsterdam arrived in Zealand on the 1st
+July, 1617, where her consort had arrived the day before. Thus was this
+circumnavigation of the globe completed in two years and eighteen days;
+which, considering the difficulties of the course, and other
+circumstances of the voyage, was a wonderfully short period.[131]
+
+[Footnote 131: In the Collection of Harris this voyage is succeeded by a
+dissertation on the high probability of a southern continent existing,
+and that this supposed continent must be another _Indies_. Both of these
+fancies being now sufficiently overthrown by the investigations of our
+immortal Cook, and other modern navigators, it were useless to encumber
+our pages with such irrelevant reveries.--E.]
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII.
+
+VOYAGE OF THE NASSAU FLEET ROUND THE WORLD, IN 1623-1626, UNDER THE
+COMMAND OF JAQUES LE HERMITE.[132]
+
+[Footnote 132: Harris I. 66. Callend. II. 286.]
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+
+The government of the United Netherlands, considering it proper to
+distress their arch enemy the king of Spain by every means in their
+power, determined upon sending a powerful squadron into the South Sea,
+to capture the ships of his subjects, to plunder the coasts of his
+dominions, and to demolish his fortifications. Accordingly, in autumn
+1622, a final resolution for this purpose was entered into by the States
+General, with the concurrence of their stadtholder, Prince Maurice of
+Orange, who even advanced a considerable sum of money towards it from
+his own funds; and a fleet of no less than eleven ships of war, besides
+smaller vessels, were ordered to be fitted out for the expedition, by
+the several admiralties of the Union and the East India Company. This
+fleet was in condition for putting to sea in spring 1623, when the
+command was intrusted to Jaques Le Hermite, an able and accomplished
+seaman of great experience, who had been long in the service of the East
+India Company, and was now appointed admiral of the fleet; Hugo
+Schapenham being vice-admiral. The ships fitted out on this occasion by
+the admiralty of Amsterdam were,--
+
+1. The Amsterdam of 800 tons, admiral, carrying twenty brass cannon and
+twenty-two iron, with 237 men, commanded by Leenders Jacobson Stolk, as
+captain, Peter Wely being supercargo, Engelbert Schutte commander of the
+soldiers on board, Frederick van Reneygom fiscal or judge-advocate, John
+van Walbeck, engineer, and Justin van Vogelair engineer extraordinary.
+
+2. The Delft of 800 tons, vice-admiral, having twenty brass and twenty
+iron cannon, with 242 men, commanded by captain Cornelius de Witte.
+
+3. The Eagle of 400 tons, captain Meydert Egbertson, of twelve brass and
+sixteen iron cannon, with 144 men.
+
+4. A yacht called the Greyhound, of sixty tons, captain Solomon
+Willelmson, carrying four brass cannons and twenty men.
+
+The admiralty of Zealand fitted out only one ship for this expedition.
+
+5. The Orange of 700 tons, captain Laurence John Quirynen, and carrying
+likewise the rear-admiral, John William Verschoor. Her complement of men
+was 216.[133]
+
+[Footnote 133: Her number of guns is not mentioned, but she could hardly
+have less than thirty-six from her size--E.]
+
+The admiralty of the Maes furnished the following ships:
+
+6. The Holland of 600 tons and 152 men, carrying ten pieces of brass and
+twenty of iron ordnance. In this ship was Cornelius Jacobson, who was
+counsellor to admiral Le Hermite, but the ship was immediately commanded
+by captain Adrian Troll.
+
+7. The Maurice of 360 tons and 169 men, having twelve brass and twenty
+iron cannon, commanded by captain James Adrianson.
+
+8. The Hope of 260 tons and eighty men, with fourteen iron cannon,
+captain Peter Hermanson Slobbe.
+
+The admiralty of North Holland also provided the following ships:
+
+9. The Concord of 600 tons and 170 men, with eighteen brass and fourteen
+iron cannon, captain John Ysbrandtz.
+
+10. The King David of 360 tons and seventy-nine men, with sixteen pieces
+of brass cannon, captain John Thomason.
+
+11. The Griffin of 320 tons, and seventy-eight men, with fourteen iron
+cannon, captain Peter Cornelison Hurdloop.
+
+The whole of this fleet of eleven sail, carrying 294 pieces of cannon,
+had 1637 men, of whom 600 were regular soldiers, divided into five
+companies of 120 men in each. The East India Company contributed largely
+to the expence, but does not appear to have equipped any ships on this
+occasion.
+
+
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Incidents of the Voyage from Holland to the South Sea_.
+
+This armament, usually called the Nassau fleet, was by far the most
+considerable that had hitherto been sent against the Spaniards in the
+new world, and none so powerful has since navigated along the western
+coast of America in an hostile manner. It sailed on the 29th April,
+1622, from Goeree roads, all but the Orange, which joined next day.
+
+On the 7th June, while chasing a Barbary corsair, a Christian slave, who
+happened to be at the helm, ran the corsair on board the Dutch
+vice-admiral, and immediately he and other slaves took the opportunity
+of leaping on board to escape from slavery. The captain of the corsair,
+who happened to be a Dutch renegado, followed them, and demanded
+restitution of his slaves; but the vice-admiral expostulated so strongly
+with him on the folly and infamy of deserting his country and religion,
+that he sent for every thing belonging to him out of the corsair, and
+agreed to go along with the fleet, to the regret of the Turks, who thus
+lost their captain and seventeen good men.
+
+On the 5th July the fleet anchored in the road of St Vincent, which is
+extremely safe and commodious, where they procured refreshments of
+sea-tortoises, fish, goats, and oranges. The islands of St Vincent and
+St Antonio are the most westerly of the Cape Verds, being in from 16°
+30' to 18° N. latitude, and about two leagues from each other. The bay
+of St Vincent, in which they anchored, is in lat. 16° 56' N. and has a
+good firm sandy bottom, with eighteen, twenty, and twenty-five fathoms
+water. The island of St Vincent is rocky, barren, and uncultivated,
+having very little fresh water, though they found a small spring which
+might have served two or three ships. By digging wells they procured
+plenty of water, but somewhat brackish, to which they attributed the
+bloody flux, which soon after began to prevail in the fleet. The goats
+there, of which they caught fifteen or sixteen every day, were very fat
+and excellent eating. The sea-tortoises which they took there were from
+two to three feet long. They come on shore to lay their eggs, which they
+cover with sand, leaving them to be hatched by the heat of the sun.
+Their season of laying eggs is from August to February, remaining all
+the rest of the year in the sea. They caught every night great numbers
+of these animals while ashore to lay their eggs, and the sailors found
+them wholesome and pleasant food, eating more like flesh than fish.
+
+This island is altogether uninhabited, but the people of St Lucia come
+here once a year to catch tortoises, for the sake of an oil they prepare
+from them; and to hunt goats, the skins of which are sent to Portugal,
+and their flesh, after being salted and dried at St Jago, is exported to
+Brazil. There are no fruit-trees in this island, except a few wild figs
+in the interior; besides which, it produces colocinth, or bitter apple
+which is a very strong purge.[134] This island has a very dry climate,
+except during the rainy season, which begins in August and ends in
+February, but is not very regular.
+
+[Footnote 134: Cucumis Colocynthis, a plant of the cucumber family,
+producing a fruit about the size of an orange, the medullary part of
+which, when ripe, dried, and freed from the seeds, is a very light,
+white, spongy substance, composed of membranous leaves, excessively
+bitter, nauseous, and acrid.]
+
+The island of St Antonio is inhabited by about 500 negroes, including
+men, women, and children, who subsist chiefly on goats, and also
+cultivate a small quantity of cotton. On the sea-side they have
+extensive plantations of lemons and oranges, whence they gather great
+quantities every year. These were very readily supplied to the Dutch by
+the negroes in exchange for mercery goods, but they saw neither hogs,
+sheep, nor poultry in the island.
+
+Sailing from St Vincent's on the 25th July, they anchored in the road of
+Sierra Leona on the 11th August. Here on the 15th some of the crew being
+on shore, eat freely of certain nuts resembling nutmegs, which had a
+fine taste, but had scarcely got on board when one of them dropt down
+dead, and before he was thoroughly cold he was all over purple spots.
+The rest recovered by taking proper medicines. Sierra Leona is a
+mountain on the continent of Africa, standing on the south side of the
+mouth of the river Mitomba, which discharges itself into a great bay of
+the sea. The road in which ships usually anchor is in the lat. of 8° 20'
+N. This mountain is very high, and thickly covered with trees, by which
+it may be easily known, as there is no mountain of such height any where
+upon the coast. There grow here a prodigious number of trees, producing
+a small kind of lemons called _limasses_, (limes?) resembling those of
+Spain in shape and taste, and which are very agreeable and wholesome, if
+not eaten to excess. The Dutch fleet arrived here at the season when
+this fruit was in perfection, and having full leave from the natives,
+the people eat them intemperately; by which, and the bad air, the bloody
+flux increased much among them, so that they lost forty men between the
+11th of August and the 5th September. Sierra Leona abounds in
+palm-trees, and has some ananas, or pine-apples, with plenty of wood of
+all sorts, besides having an exceedingly convenient watering-place
+opposite to the anchorage.
+
+They sailed from Sierra Leona on the 4th September, on which day the
+admiral fell sick. On the 29th they were off the island of St Thomas,
+just on the north side of the line, and anchored on the 1st of October
+at Cape Lopo Gonzalves, in lat. 0° 50' S. At this place the surgeon of
+the Maurice was convicted on his own confession of having poisoned seven
+sick men, because they had given him much trouble, for which he was
+beheaded. On the 30th of October they anchored in the road of Annobon,
+where they obtained hogs and fowls, and were allowed to take in water,
+and to gather as many oranges as they thought proper. The east end of
+this island, where are the road and village, is in lat. 1° 30' S. and
+long. 6° E. from Greenwich. The island is about six leagues in circuit,
+consisting of high and tolerably good land, and is inhabited by about
+150 families of negroes, who are governed by two or three Portuguese, to
+whom they are very submissive. If any of them happen to be refractory,
+they are immediately sent away to the island of St Thomas, a punishment
+which they greatly dread. The island abounds in ananas, bananas,
+cocoa-nuts, tamarinds, and sugar-canes; but the principal inducement for
+ships touching here is the great plenty of oranges, of which the Dutch
+gathered upwards of 200,000, besides what the seamen eat while on shore.
+These oranges were of great size and full of juice, some weighing three
+quarters of a pound, and of an excellent taste and flavour, as if
+perfumed. They are to be had ripe all the year round, but there is one
+season in which they are best and fittest for keeping, which was past
+before the Dutch arrived, and the oranges were then mostly over ripe and
+beginning to rot. The island also produces lemons, and has plenty of
+oxen, cows, goats, and hogs, which the negroes bartered for salt. On the
+S.E. part of the island there is a good watering-place, but difficult to
+find, which is commanded by a stone breast-work, whence the negroes
+might greatly annoy any who attempted to water by force. They grow here
+some cotton, which is sent to Portugal. The natives are treacherous, and
+require to be cautiously dealt with.
+
+The fleet left Annobon on the 4th November, and on the 6th January,
+1624, they were in lat. 44° 40' S. where they saw many sea-gulls, and
+much herbage floating on the water, whence they supposed themselves near
+the continent of South America. On the 19th the sea appeared as red as
+blood, proceeding from an infinite quantity of a small species of
+shrimps. On the 28th they lost sight of their bark, in which were
+eighteen men, three of them Portuguese. These people, as they afterwards
+learnt, having in vain endeavoured to rejoin the fleet, determined to
+return to Holland. Being in want of water, they sailed up the Rio de la
+Plata till they came into fresh water, after which they continued their
+voyage, suffering incredible hardships, and the utmost extremity of
+want, till they arrived on the coast of England, where they ran their
+vessel on shore to escape a privateer belonging to Dunkirk, and
+afterward got back to Holland.
+
+The 1st February the fleet came in sight of land, being Cape de
+Pennas.[135] Next day they found themselves at the mouth of the straits.
+This is easily distinguished, as the country on the east, called _Saten
+Land_, is mountainous, but broken and very uneven; while that on the
+west, called _Maurice Land_ by the Dutch, or Terra del Fuego, has
+several small round hills close to the shore. The 6th they had sight of
+Cape Horn; and on the 11th, being in lat. 58° 30' S. they had
+excessively cold weather, which the people were ill able to bear, being
+on short allowance. On the 16th they were in lat. 56° 10' S. Cape Horn
+being then to the east of them, and anchored on the 17th in a large bay,
+which they named _Nassau bay_.[136] Another bay was discovered on the
+18th, in which there was good anchorage, with great convenience for
+wooding and watering, and which they called Schapenham's bay, after the
+name of their vice-admiral.
+
+[Footnote 135: This seems to be what is now called Cape St Vincent, at
+the W. side of the entrance into the Straits of Le Maire.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 136: The centre of Nassau bay is in lat. 55° 30' N. long. 68°
+20' W. This bay is formed between Terra del Fuego on the north, and
+Hermite's island south by east, the south-eastern extreme point of which
+is Cape Horn. This island appears to have been named after admiral Le
+Hermite.--E.]
+
+On the 23d a storm arose with such violence that nineteen men belonging
+to the Eagle were compelled to remain on shore; and next day, when the
+boats were able to go for them, only two of these men were left alive,
+the savages having come upon them in the dark, and knocked seventeen of
+them on the head with their slings and wooden clubs, the poor Dutchmen
+being all unarmed, and not having offered the least injury or insult to
+the savages. Only five of the dead bodies were found on the shore, which
+were strangely mangled, all the rest having been carried away by the
+savages, as it was supposed, to eat them. After this, every boat that
+went ashore carried eight or ten soldiers for their security; but none
+of the savages ever appeared again.
+
+The vice-admiral went on the 25th in the Greyhound to visit the coast.
+On his return he reported to the admiral, that he found the Terra del
+Fuego divided into several islands, and that it was by no means
+necessary to double Cape Horn in order to get into the South Sea, as
+they might pass out from Nassau bay to the west into the open sea,
+leaving Cape Horn on the south. He apprehended also, that there were
+several passages from Nassau bay leading into the Straits of Magellan.
+The greatest part of the _Terra del Fuego_ is mountainous, but
+interspersed with many fine vallies and meadows, and watered by numerous
+streams or rivulets, descending from the hills. Between the islands
+there are many good roads, where large fleets may anchor in safety, and
+where there is every desirable convenience for taking in wood, water,
+and ballast. The winds, which rage here more than in any other country,
+and with inexpressible violence, blow constantly from the west, for
+which reason such ships as are bound westerly ought to avoid this coast
+as much as possible, keeping as far south as they can, where they are
+likely to meet with southerly winds to facilitate their westerly course.
+
+The inhabitants of the Terra del Fuego are as fair as any Europeans, as
+was concluded by seeing a young child; but the grown-up people disguise
+themselves strangely, painting themselves with a red earth after many
+fanciful devices, some having their heads, others their arms, their legs
+and thighs red, and other parts of their bodies white. Many of them have
+one half of their bodies red, from the forehead to the feet, and the
+other side white. They are all strong made and well-proportioned, and
+generally about the same stature with Europeans. Their hair is black,
+which they wear long, thick, and bushy, to make them the more frightful.
+They have good teeth, but very thin, and as sharp as the edge of a
+knife. The men go entirely naked, and the women have only a piece of
+skin about their waists, which is very surprising, considering the
+severity of the climate. Their huts are made of trees, in the form of a
+round tent, having a hole at the top to let out the smoke. Within they
+are sunk two or three feet under the surface of the ground, and the
+earth taken from this hollow is thrown upon the outside. Their
+fishing-tackle is very curious, and is furnished with hooks made of
+stone, nearly of the same shape with ours. They are variously armed,
+some having bows and arrows artificially headed with stone; others long
+javelins or spears, headed with bone; some have great wooden clubs, some
+have slings, and most have stone knives, or daggers, which are very
+sharp. They are never seen without their arms, as they are always at war
+among themselves; and it would appear that the several tribes paint
+differently, that they may distinguish each other; for the people about
+the island of _Torhaltens_, and about _Schapenham bay_, were all painted
+black, while those about _Greyhound bay_ were painted red.
+
+Their canoes are very singular, being formed of bark, fortified both on
+the inside and outside with several pieces of small wood, and then
+covered over by bark, so as to be both tight and strong. These canoes
+are from ten to fourteen, and even sixteen feet long, and two feet
+broad, and will contain seven or eight men, who navigate them as swiftly
+as our boats. In manners, these people resemble beasts more than men,
+for they tear human bodies in pieces, and eat the raw and bloody flesh.
+They have not the smallest spark of religion, neither any appearance of
+polity or civilization, being in all respects utterly brutal, insomuch
+that if they have occasion to make water, they let fly upon whoever is
+nearest them. They have no knowledge of our arms, and would even lay
+their hands on the edges of the Dutchmen's swords; yet are exceedingly
+cunning, faithless, and cruel; shewing every appearance of friendship at
+one time, and instantly afterwards murdering those with whom they have
+been familiar. The Dutch found it impossible to procure any kind of
+refreshments from them, though such surely were among them, for
+quantities of cow-dung were seen; and their bow-strings were made of ox
+sinews: besides, a soldier who went ashore from the Greyhound yacht,
+while she lay at anchor, reported to the vice-admiral, that he had seen
+a large herd of cattle feeding in a meadow.[137]
+
+[Footnote 137: This is not at all likely to have been true. The cattle,
+the dung, and the sinews mentioned in the text, are more likely to have
+been of some species of the seal tribe--E.]
+
+On the 27th of February, 1624, the admiral made a signal for sailing,
+the wind being then N. so that hopes were entertained of getting from
+the bay of Nassau to the west; but a storm came on in the evening at W.
+and blew hard all night. March 3d, they had an observation at noon, when
+they were in lat, 59° 45' S. with the wind at N.W. Hitherto it had been
+the opinion of nautical men, that it was easy to get from the Straits of
+Le Maire to Chili, but hardly possible to pass from Chili by that strait
+into the Atlantic, as they imagined that the south wind blew constantly
+in these seas: but they now found the case quite otherwise, as the
+frequent tempests they encountered from W. and N.W. rendered it beyond
+comparison easier to have passed through the Straits of Le Maire from
+the South Sea than from the Atlantic.
+
+The wind still continuing strong from the west on the 6th, the admiral
+held a council to consider of a proper rendezvous for the fleet, in case
+of separation, or of being forced to winter, if these west winds should
+still continue to oppose their entry into the South Sea. Some proposed
+the Terra del Fuego, and others the Straits of Magellan. But the
+majority were of opinion, that it was best to wait two months for a fair
+wind, and to use their utmost endeavours to get into the South Sea. On
+the 8th they were in 61° S. on the 14th in 58°, and on the 18th, 19th
+and 20th they had a fair wind at S.E. with warm weather, so that they
+were now in hopes of having accomplished their purpose. On the 24th they
+lost sight of the Maurice and David, the fleet being now reduced to
+seven sail; and the same evening they were in lat. 47° S. The 25th,
+having still a fair wind and good weather, they reached 45° S. and were
+then in great hopes of overcoming all difficulties. The 28th they got
+sight of the coast of Chili, bearing E.S.E. and in the evening were
+within a league of the shore, which appeared high and mountainous.
+
+
+
+
+
+SECTION II:
+
+_Transactions of the Fleet on the Western Coast of America_.
+
+The admiral was at this time confined to bed, and wished to have put
+into the port of Chiloe; but his instructions did not allow of this
+measure, requiring the performance of some action of importance against
+the Spaniards in Peru. It was therefore resolved to proceed for the
+island of Juan Fernandez, to make the best preparations in their power
+for attacking the Spanish galleons in the port of Arica, if found there,
+and to gain possession of that place, after which it was proposed to
+extend their conquests by the aid of the Indians. On the 1st April,
+being then in lat. 38° 10' S. the vice-admiral took to his bed, quite
+worn out with fatigue, so that they expected to lose both the admiral
+and him. On the 4th they had sight of Juan Fernandez, in lat. 33° 50' S.
+and next day came to anchor in sixty fathoms in a fine bay. The 6th
+orders were issued to provide all the ships with as many
+cheveaux-de-frize and pallisades as they could. The Griffin joined the
+fleet in the evening, not having been seen since the 2d February. She
+had been in the lat. of 60° S. and had got into the South Sea without
+seeing Cape Horn. The Orange arrived on the 7th, having twice seen the
+southern continent on her passage, once in lat. 50°, and the other time
+in lat. 41° S.[138] The David came in on the 7th, bringing advice of the
+Maurice, both vessels having been five or six days beating about the
+island, but hindered from getting in by contrary winds.
+
+[Footnote 138: No land whatever could be seen in these latitudes in the
+eastern Pacific, so that they must have been deceived by fog, banks, or
+islands of ice.--E.]
+
+The larger and more easterly of the two islands of Juan Fernandez is in
+the latitude of 30° 40' S. five degrees west from the coast of Chili;
+this island being called by the Spaniards _Isla de Tierra_, and the
+smaller or more westerly island _Isla de Fuera_, which is a degree and
+a half farther east.[139]
+
+[Footnote 139: Isola de Tierra, the eastermost of these islands of Juan
+Fernandez, in lat. 33° 42' S. and long. 79° 5' E. is about 15 English
+miles from E. to W. by 5-1/2 miles in its greatest breadth from N. to S.
+Besides this and Isola de Fuera, mentioned in the text, there is still a
+third, or smallest island, a mile and a half south from the S.W. end of
+the Isola de Tierra, called Isola de Cabras or Conejos, Goat or Rabbit
+island, three English miles from N.W. to S.E. and a mile in
+breadth.--E.]
+
+The more easterly and larger island, at which the Nassau fleet anchored,
+is about six leagues in circuit, and is about two leagues and a half
+long, from east to west. The road is on the N.E. part of the island,
+from whence there is a beautiful prospect of valleys covered with
+clover. The ground of this bay is in some places rocky, and in others a
+fine black sand, and it affords good anchorage in thirty to thirty-five
+fathoms. The island produces excellent water, and fish are to be had in
+abundance in the bay, and of various kinds. Many thousand seals and
+sea-lions come daily on shore to bask in the sun, of which the seamen
+killed great numbers, both for food and amusement. Some of the Dutch
+fancied that the flesh of these animals tasted as if twice cooked, while
+others thought, after the grease and tallow were carefully taken out,
+that it was as good as mutton. There were many goats in the island, but
+difficult to be taken, and neither so fat nor so well tasted as those of
+St Vincents. There were plenty of palm-trees in the interior, and three
+large quince-trees near the bay, the fruit of which was very refreshing.
+They found also plenty of timber for all kinds of uses, but none fit for
+masts. Formerly, ten or twelve Indians used to reside here, for the sake
+of fishing and making oil from the seals and sea-lions, but it was now
+quite uninhabited. Three gunners and three soldiers belonging to the
+vice-admiral, were so sick of the voyage, that they asked and obtained
+leave to remain here.
+
+Every thing being in readiness, the fleet departed from _Isla de Tierra_
+on the 13th April. On the 8th May, being near the coast of Peru, they
+took a Spanish bark, in which, besides the captain, there were four
+Spaniards, and six or seven Indians and Negroes. From these, they learnt
+that the Plate fleet had sailed on the 3d of the month from Calao de
+Lima for Panama, consisting of five treasure ships, three rich
+merchantmen, and two men of war. They were also informed that the
+Spanish admiral was still at Calao, his ship being of 800 tons burden,
+and mounting 40 brass cannon; besides which, there were two _pataches_
+of 14 guns each, and forty or fifty unarmed merchant vessels. All these
+vessels were said to have been hauled on shore, and secured by three
+strong batteries and other works, furnished with upwards of fifty pieces
+of cannon, all ready prepared for the reception of the Dutch, of whose
+motions the Spaniards had received early and certain intelligence. The
+viceroy had likewise formed four companies of foot, of eighty men each,
+but the two best companies had gone with the ships to Panama; and,
+having just learnt the approach of the Dutch fleet, the viceroy had
+summoned the whole military force of Peru, so that many thousand men
+must soon be expected at Lima for its defence.
+
+After several consultations, the vice-admiral made an attempt to land at
+Calao with the soldiers on the morning of the 10th May, but finding it
+impossible with any chance of success, was obliged to return to the
+fleet. On the 12th about midnight, three of the Dutch captains, with
+twelve armed boats, each provided with a small cannon and a considerable
+quantity of fire-works, made an attack on the port, while a false attack
+was made at the same time in another part, to draw off the attention of
+the Spaniards. The twelve boats entered the port, and distributed their
+fire-works plentifully among the Spanish merchant ships, by which thirty
+or forty of them were set on fire and consumed, some of them very large.
+In this hardy enterprise, the Dutch had seven men killed, and fifteen
+wounded, mostly in the vice-admiral's boat, which had attempted to board
+one of the _pataches_ and was beaten off. About the dawn of day, nine of
+the flaming ships drifted towards the Dutch fleet, which was therefore
+obliged to weigh and take shelter behind the island of Lima. On the 13th
+this island was taken possession of, and a strong intrenchment thrown up
+for its defence, under cover of which the Dutch laid their shallops on
+shore to careen them.
+
+On the 14th Cornelius Jacobson sailed with a division of the fleet, to
+cruize off La Nasca, Pisco, and other towns to the south of Lima. A rich
+prize was taken on the 23d, coming from Guayaquil; and that same day,
+the rear-admiral was detached with two ships and two companies of
+soldiers to attempt taking Guayaquil, but they found it too strongly
+defended. On the 27th an attempt was made to destroy the Spanish
+admiral's ship in the port of Calao, by means of a fire-ship containing
+2000 pounds of gun-powder, besides fire-works and shells, confined by a
+brick arch six feet thick; but after navigating her very near the
+galleon, a bank was found on the outside of her which they could not
+pass, and they were therefore obliged to retire.
+
+Admiral Jaques Le Hermite, who had been in a declining state of health
+from the time they left Sierra Leona, died on the 2d June, and was
+buried next day in the island of Lima. The Spanish viceroy having
+refused to ransom the prisoners made by the Dutch, and the ships being
+straitened for provisions especially water, twenty-one Spaniards were
+hung up at the mizen yard-arm of the Dutch admiral's ship on the 15th
+June. That same evening, Cornelius Jacobson returned with his
+detachment, having made an ineffectual attempt on Pisco, which he found
+strongly fortified, and defended by 2000 men, besides a body of 200
+horse which scoured the country. In this attempt he had five men killed
+and sixteen wounded, and thirteen deserted to the enemy. At this time
+the scurvy prevailed to a great height in the fleet, so that some of the
+ships had not sufficient men in a sound state to man their boats; but
+one day a Swiss, who was very ill of the scurvy, scrambled up to the top
+of the highest hill in the island of Lima,[140] where he found plenty of
+a kind of herb with which he had been well acquainted in his own
+country, and by eating which he soon recovered his health. This becoming
+public, his example was universally followed, by which the best part of
+the men were saved from death, and in a short time recovered their
+health and spirits. On the 5th August, the vice-admiral was installed as
+admiral, the rear-admiral succeeding him as vice-admiral, and Cornelius
+Jacobson was advanced to be rear-admiral.
+
+[Footnote 140: The island of San Lorenzo, a little to the south of
+Calao, is evidently here meant.--E.]
+
+The new vice-admiral soon after returned from his expedition to the road
+of Puna and Guayaquil, where he had burnt two ships and captured a
+third. He had also taken Guayaquil after considerable loss, and finding
+it untenable, and not having boats to carry away the booty, he had set
+it on fire, burning a great quantity of rich goods in the warehouses,
+after which he reimbarked his men. The Dutch fleet sailed from the
+island of Lima on the 14th of August, and anchored that same evening in
+a bay behind the Piscadores islands, about twenty-three miles north,
+where they watered. Continuing their course on the 16th, they came in
+sight of the island of Santa Clara, or Amortajado, on the 24th,
+intending once more to visit Guayaquil. The fleet anchored on the 25th
+in the road of the island of Puna, whence all the people had fled, both
+Spanish and Indians, so that no intelligence could be procured of the
+strength and dispositions of the enemy. On the 27th, the guns, ballast,
+and stores of all kinds were removed from three of the largest ships,
+which were laid ashore to be careened. On the 28th, news came of the
+second attempt upon Guayaquil having miscarried, through the fault of
+some of the officers, the troops being defeated and obliged to reimbark,
+with the loss of twenty-eight men. On the 1st September, the three
+largest ships being careened, they began to careen the rest.
+
+It was resolved in a council of war not to prosecute the originally
+intended expedition to Chili at this time, but to proceed for Acapulco,
+in order to cruize for the Manilla ship; and afterwards, if the
+condition of the fleet permitted, to return to the coast of Chili.
+Accordingly, having set fire to the town of Puna, they sailed from
+thence on the 12th September, and on the 20th October had sight of the
+coast of New Spain. On the 28th at day-break they were within half a
+league of an island which lies before the port of Acapulco and anchored
+in the evening within sight of the fort, which had been rebuilt the year
+before, on a point running out to sea, in order to protect the Manilla
+ships, which might ride safely at anchor under the cannon of that
+fortress. On the 1st November, a strong detachment of the fleet was sent
+to anchor twenty leagues west from Acapulco, to look out for the
+galleon, the admiral and the Orange remaining before the port, and the
+other ships spread along the coast, that they might be sure of
+intercepting the galleon. On the 29th, water becoming scarce, and no
+appearance of the galleon, it was resolved to proceed with all diligence
+for the East Indies.
+
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_Voyage Home from the Western Coast of America_.
+
+Proceeding therefore across the Great Pacific Ocean, they saw some very
+low land towards the west on the 15th January, 1625, over which the sea
+broke with great violence, and which they conjectured to be the island
+of Galperico.[141] On the 23d the scurvy had made much progress, that
+there were hardly men enough to work the ships. In the evening of the
+25th, they were off the coast of Guam, one of the Ladrones or Mariane
+islands, the inhabitants coming two leagues out to sea to meet them,
+with all sorts of refreshments, which they exchanged for old iron, and
+next morning 150 canoes came off with fruits and garden stuffs. On the
+27th a good watering-place was found, where fifty soldiers were landed
+to protect the seamen. In the beginning of February, the natives brought
+them considerable quantities of rice, giving 70 or 80 pounds weight in
+exchange for an old hatchet. On the 5th, by a general muster, 1260 men
+were found to remain in the fleet, including 32 Spanish and Negro
+prisoners, so that they had lost 409 since leaving Holland.
+
+[Footnote 141: The relation of the voyage is too vague even to
+conjecture what island is here meant, but from the direction of the
+course towards Guam or Guaham it may possibly have been that now called
+Dawson's island, about 600 leagues nearly east from Guam.--E.]
+
+The island of Guam, Guaham, or Guaci, one of the group named by the
+Spaniards _Islas de las Velas, Ladrones_, or _Mariane_ Islands, is in
+lat 13° 40' N.[142] The soil is tolerably fertile producing vast
+quantities of cocoas, and the natives grow rice in several places. The
+Dutch procured here about 2000 fowls, but the natives would not part
+with their cattle for any price. The people of this island are larger
+than other Indians' strong and well-proportioned, and are mostly painted
+red, the men going entirely naked, and the women having a leaf to cover
+their nakedness. Their arms are _assagaies_, or javelins and slings,
+both of which they use with great dexterity. Their canoes are very
+convenient, and go before the wind at a great rate; neither are these
+islanders afraid of putting to sea even in a storm; as, in case of their
+vessels being overset, they turn them up again immediately, and bale out
+the water. They were also very expert in cheating; for when the Dutch
+came to examine the bags of rice they had bought so cheap, they found
+the insides full of stones and dirt; besides which, they stole every
+thing they could lay hold of. Such persons also as land on this island
+ought to be very cautious, as the Dutch had several of their people
+slain here, through their own folly.
+
+[Footnote 142: Lat. 13° 20' N. long. 143° 20' E. from Greenwich.]
+
+Proceeding on the voyage, they saw an island on the 14th of February, in
+the latitude of 10° 30' N. which they took to be the island of
+Saavedra.[143] Next day, about nine in the morning, they saw another
+island, not laid down in the charts, in lat. 9° 45' N.[144] the natives
+of which came out to them in canoes with fruits and other refreshments,
+but as the ships were sailing at a great rate, they were not able to get
+on board. The people seemed much like those of Guam, and the island
+seemed very populous and highly cultivated. It was now resolved to
+continue their course to the island of Gilolo, and thence to Ternate.
+The 2d March, they had sight of the high mountain of [illegible], on the
+coast of Moco, at the west end of the great island of [illegible] or
+_Gilolo_, on the west side of which the Molucca islands are situated.
+They arrived at _Malaya_, the principal place in Ternate, on the 4th in
+the evening. The 5th, or, according to the computation of the
+inhabitants, the 6th, Jacob Le Feare, governor of the Moluccas, came to
+visit the admiral, from _Taluco_, where he then resided. The fleet
+proceeded on the 4th of April to Amboina, and on the 28th sailed for
+Batavia, where they arrived on the 29th of August. Here the fleet was
+separated, part being sent on an expedition against Malacca, and others
+to other places, so that here the voyage of the Nassau fleet may be said
+to end, without having completed the circumnavigation, at least in an
+unbroken series.
+
+[Footnote 143: The island of Saavedra is in 10° 30'N. Not far from this
+is the isle of [illegible] in Lat. 10° 10' N. and Long. [illegible] E.
+from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 144: This probably was the isle of [illegible], mentioned in
+the previous note.--E.]
+
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+After this expedition, there occurs a wide chasm in the history of
+circumnavigations, all that was attempted in this way, for many years
+afterwards, being more the effect of chance than of design.--_Harris_.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII.
+
+VOYAGE ROUND THE WORLD, IN 1683-1691, BY CAPTAIN JOHN COOKE, ACCOMPANIED
+BY CAPTAIN COWLEY, AND CAPTAIN WILLIAM DAMPIER.[145]
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+
+In the Collection of Voyages and Travels by Harris, this voyage is made
+two separate articles, as if two distinct voyages, one under the name of
+Captain Cowley, and the other under that of Dampier; though both are
+avowedly only separate relations of the same voyage, which was commanded
+by Captain Cooke, and ought to have gone under his name. On the present
+occasion both relations are retained, for reasons which will appear
+sufficiently obvious in the sequel; but we have placed both in one
+chapter, because only a single circumnavigation, though somewhat
+branched out by the separation of the original adventures. This chapter
+is divided into three sections: the _first_ of which contains the
+narrative of the principal voyage, so far as related by Captain Cowley;
+along with which the observations of Dampier upon many of the places,
+visited during the voyage, are introduced. The _second_ continues the
+adventures of Cowley on his return from India to Europe, after
+separating from his first companions. The _third_ resumes the relation
+of the voyage, as written by Dampier, and gives a continuation of the
+enterprise, after the separation of Cowley.
+
+[Footnote 145: Dampier's Voyage round the World, and Cowley's do. both
+in a Coll. of Voyages in four vols. 8vo, published at London in 1729.
+Also Harris, I. 77. and Callender, II. 528.]
+
+In the remainder of this introduction, taken from the Collection by
+Harris, an account is given of the origin of this voyage, together with
+a sketch of the previous adventures of Dampier, before engaging in this
+enterprise, in both of which are contained some notices of the lawless,
+yet famous Buccaneers, respecting whom a more detailed account is
+proposed to be inserted in a subsequent division of this work. Dampier
+published an account of this voyage, to be found in a Collection of
+Voyages, in four volumes 8vo, printed at London in 1729, for James and
+John Knapton, and which have been used in preparing the present relation
+of this voyage for the press.--E.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The adventures of the _Buccaneers of America_, however blameable, will
+render these men ever famous by their wonderful exploits. They usually
+fitted out small vessels in some of our colonies of America, and cruised
+in these till they were able to make prize of some larger ships. As
+their designs required the utmost secrecy, they very often took masters
+and pilots on board under false pretences, and did not explain to them
+the true nature of their expeditions till out to sea, when they were
+absolute masters. This was the case with Captain Cowley on the present
+occasion, a very intelligent man and able navigator, who happened to be
+in Virginia in 1683, and was prevailed upon to go as master of a
+privateer, said to be bound for _Petit Goave_, a French port in the
+island of St Domingo, where these people used to take commissions. In
+reality, however, their purpose was to take what prizes they could,
+without the formality of a commission.
+
+It is proper to state, that this voyage, at least in part, is the same
+with the _first_ voyage of Captain Dampier round the world. Before
+proceeding to the incidents of the voyage, we shall give a concise
+account of the grounds on which it was undertaken, and the commanders
+who were engaged in it; and this the rather, that the original journal
+of Captain Cowley, published by Captain Hacke, gives very little
+information on these subjects, probably because Cowley was ashamed of
+having engaged in such an expedition.
+
+Among the Buccaneers who did so much mischief in the Spanish West
+Indies, was one John Cooke, a native of the island of St Christophers, a
+brisk bold man, who so distinguished himself as to be promoted to the
+rank of quarter-master in the ship commanded by Captain Yankey. On
+taking a Spanish prize, which was converted into a privateer, Cooke
+claimed the command of her, according to the custom, of the Buccaneers;
+and being extremely popular, soon engaged a sufficient number of men to
+serve under him. The great majority of the Buccaneers at this time being
+French, and dissatisfied to see an Englishman invested with such a
+command, merely by the choice of the crew, without any commission, they
+plundered the English of their ships, goods, and arms, and turned them
+ashore on the island of _Avache_, on the coast of St Domingo, usually
+called _Ash_ by English seamen. On this occasion, an old Buccaneer,
+named Captain _Tristian_, having more humanity than the rest, carried
+Captain Davis, Captain Cooke, and eight other Englishmen to Petit Goave;
+where, while Captain Tristian and many of his men were ashore, these
+Englishmen made themselves masters of the ship, sending all the French
+in their turn ashore, and sailed to Avache, where, by using Captain
+Tristian's name to the governor, they procured all the rest of their
+countrymen to be sent on board.
+
+Being now sufficiently strong to set up for themselves, they resolved to
+make prize of whatever came in their way, and accordingly took two
+French ships, one laden with wine, and the other of considerable force,
+in which they embarked, carrying her and their prize goods to Virginia,
+where they arrived in April 1683. After selling their wines and other
+goods, they purchased provisions, naval stores, and every thing else
+that might be wanted during a long voyage, and fitted out their prize
+ship as a privateer, naming her the Revenge. According to the narrative
+of Cowley, she carried eight guns and 52 men, while Dampier gives her 18
+guns and 70 men.[146]
+
+[Footnote 146: This difference, at least in regard to the size and force
+of the ship, will be found explained in the sequel, as they took a
+larger ship on the coast of Africa, which they used during the voyage,
+and named the Revenge after their own ship. The additional number of men
+mentioned by Dampier is not accounted for.--E.]
+
+Before proceeding to the narratives of this voyage, it is proper to give
+a concise account of Captain William Dampier, extracted from his own
+works, being an extraordinary character and an eminent navigator, whose
+many discoveries ought to recommend his memory to posterity, as a man of
+infinite industry, and of a most laudable public spirit. Captain William
+Dampier was descended of a very respectable family in the county of
+Somerset, where he was born in 1652. During the life of his father and
+mother, he had such education as was thought requisite to fit him for
+trade; but losing his parents while very young, and being of a roving
+disposition, which strongly incited him to the sea, those who now had
+the care of him resolved to comply with his humour, and bound him about
+1669 to the master of a ship who lived at Weymouth, in Dorsetshire. With
+this master he made a voyage to France that year, and in the next went
+to Newfoundland; but was so pinched by the severity of that climate,
+that on his return he went home to his friends, almost tired of the sea.
+Soon after his return, however, hearing of a ship bound for the East
+Indies from London, he went there in 1670, and entered before the mast
+in the John and Martha, in which he made a voyage to Bantam.
+
+He returned to England in January, 1672, and retired to the house of his
+brother in Somersetshire, where he remained all the ensuing summer. In
+1673, he entered on board the Prince Royal, commanded by the famous Sir
+Edward Spragge, and was in two engagements that summer against the
+Dutch. He afterwards returned to his brother's house, where he met with
+one Colonel Hellier, who had a large estate in Jamaica, and who
+persuaded him to go over to that island, where he was some time employed
+in the management of that gentleman's plantation. Not liking the life of
+a planter, which he continued somewhat more than a year, he engaged
+among the logwood cutters, and embarked from Jamaica for Campeachy, in
+August 1675, but returned to Jamaica in the end of that year. In
+February 1676, he went again to Campeachy, where he acquainted himself
+thoroughly with the business of logwood cutting, in which he proposed to
+advance his fortune; for which purpose he returned to England in 1678.
+While in Campeachy, he became acquainted with some Buccaneers, who gave
+him an inclination for that kind of life, in which he was afterwards
+engaged, but of which in the sequel he became much ashamed.
+
+He returned from England to Jamaica in April 1679, intending to become a
+complete logwood cutter and trader at the bay of Campeachy; but changed
+his mind, and laid out most part of what he was worth in purchasing a
+small estate in Dorsetshire. He then agreed with one Hobby to make a
+trip to the continent, before returning to England. Soon after
+commencing this voyage, coming to anchor in Negril bay at the west end
+of Jamaica, they found there Captains Coxon, Sawkins, Sharpe, and other
+privateers, with whom all Mr Hobby's men entered, leaving only Mr
+Dampier, who also at length consented to go with them. This was about
+the end of 1679, and their first expedition was against Portobello. This
+being accomplished, they resolved to cross the isthmus of Darien, and to
+pursue their predatory courses against the Spaniards in the South Sea.
+On the 5th April, 1680, they landed near _Golden Island_, between three
+and four hundred strong; and carrying with them sufficient provisions,
+and some toys to gratify the Indians, through whose country they had to
+pass, they arrived in nine days march at _Santa Maria_, which they
+easily took, but found neither gold nor provisions, as they expected.
+
+After staying three days at Santa Maria, they embarked in canoes and
+other small craft for the South Sea. They came in sight of Panama on the
+23d April, and in vain attempted to take _Puebla Nova_, where their
+commander Captain Sawkins was slain. They then withdrew to the isles of
+_Quibo_, whence they sailed on the 6th June for the coast of Peru; and
+touching at the islands of _Gorgonia_ and _Plata_, they came in the
+month of October to _Ylo_, which they took. About Christmas of that year
+they arrived at the island of Juan Fernandez, where they deposed Captain
+Sharpe, who had the chief command after the death of Sawkins, and
+elected Captain Watling in his stead. Under his command they made an
+attempt upon Arica, but were repulsed with the loss of twenty-eight men,
+among whom was their new commander Watling. After this they sailed for
+some time without any commander; and, arriving at the island of _Plata_,
+they split into two factions about the choice of a new commander. Before
+proceeding to the election, it was agreed that the majority, together
+with the new commander, should keep the ship, and the minority should
+content themselves with the canoes and other small craft. On the poll,
+Captain Sharpe was restored, and Mr Dampier, who had voted against him,
+prepared, together with his associates, to return over land to the Gulf
+of Mexico.
+
+Accordingly, on the 17th April, 1681, they quitted Captain Sharpe,
+without electing any commander, and resolved to repass the Isthmus of
+Darien, though only forty-seven men. This was one of the boldest
+enterprises ever ventured upon by so small a number of men, yet they
+succeeded without any considerable loss. Landing on the continent on the
+1st of May, they repassed the isthmus in twenty-three days; and on the
+24th embarked in a French privateer, commanded by Captain Tristian, with
+whom they joined a fleet of nine buccaneers, on board of which were
+nearly 600 men. With this great force they were in hopes of doing great
+things against the Spaniards; but, owing to various accidents, and
+especially to disagreement among the commanders, they had very little
+success. Dampier and his companions, who had returned over land from the
+South Sea, made themselves masters of a _tartan_, and, electing Captain
+Wright to the command, they cruised along the Spanish coast with some
+success, and went to the Dutch settlement of Curaçoa, where they
+endeavoured to sell a good quantity of sugar they had taken in a Spanish
+ship. Not being able to effect this purpose, they continued their voyage
+to the Tortugas islands, and thence to the Caraccas, where they captured
+three barks, one laden with hides, another with European commodities,
+and the third with earthenware and brandy.
+
+With these prizes they sailed to the island of _Roca_, where they shared
+them, and then resolved to separate, though only consisting of sixty
+men. Twenty of these, among whom was Dampier, proceeded with their share
+of the goods in one of these barks to Virginia, where they arrived in
+July, 1682. After continuing there some time, a considerable part of
+them made a voyage to Carolina, whence they returned to Virginia. Having
+spent the best part of their wealth, they were now ready to proceed upon
+any plan that might offer for procuring more. Soon after Captain Cooke,
+of whom some account has been already given, came to Virginia with his
+prize, and published his intention of going into the South Sea to cruise
+against the Spaniards. Dampier, who was his old acquaintance, and knew
+him to be an able commander, readily agreed to go with him, and induced
+most of his companions to do the same, which was of much consequence to
+Cooke, as it furnished him with a full third of his crew.
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Narrative of the Voyage by Captain Cowley, till he quitted the Revenge
+on the Western Coast of America_.[147]
+
+They sailed from Achamack in Virginia on the 23d August, 1683, taking
+their departure from Cape Charles in the Revenge of eight guns and
+fifty-two men, John Cooke commander, and bound for the South Sea; but
+Captain Cowley, who had charge of the navigation of the Revenge as
+master, not being then let into the secret object of the enterprise,
+steered a course for Petit Goave in St Domingo, in which he was indulged
+for the first day, but was then told that they were bound in the first
+place for the coast of Guinea. He then steered E.S.E. for the Cape de
+Verd islands, and arrived at _Isola de Sal_, or the Salt island, in the
+month of September. They here found neither fruits nor water, but great
+plenty of fish, and some goats, but the last were very small. At this
+time the island, which is in the latitude of 16° 50' N. and longitude
+23° W. from Greenwich, was very oddly inhabited, and as strangely
+governed. Its whole inhabitants consisted of four men and a boy, and all
+the men were dignified with titles. One, a mulatto, was governor, two
+were captains, and the fourth lieutenant, the boy being their only
+subject, servant, and soldier. They procured here about twenty bushels
+of salt, the only commodity of the island, which they paid for in old
+clothes, and a small quantity of powder and shot; and in return for
+three or four goats, gave the governor a coat, of which he was in great
+want, and an old hat. The salt in which this island abounds, and from
+which it derives its name, is formed naturally by the heat of the sun
+from the sea-water, which is let into great ponds about two English
+miles in extent.
+
+[Footnote 147: The original narrative of this voyage, written by Captain
+Cowley, is contained in the fourth volume of the Collection of Voyages
+published in 1729 by James and John Knapton, usually denominated
+Dampier's Voyages, and has been used on the present occasion.--E]
+
+This island is about nine leagues from N. to S. and about two leagues
+from E. to W. and has abundance of salt ponds, whence it derives its
+name, but produces no trees, and hardly even any grass, some few poor
+goats feeding scantily upon shrubs near the sea. It is frequented by
+wild fowl, especially a reddish bird named _Flamingo_, shaped like a
+heron, but much larger, which lives in ponds and muddy places, building
+their nests of mud in shallow pools of standing waters. Their nests are
+raised like conical hillocks, two feet above the water, having holes on
+the top, in which they lay their eggs, and hatch them while standing on
+their long legs in the water, covering the nest and eggs only with their
+rumps. The young ones do not acquire their true colour, neither can they
+fly till ten or eleven months old, but run very fast. A dozen or more of
+these birds were killed, though very shy, and their flesh was found lean
+and black, though not ill tasted. Their tongues are large, and have near
+the root a piece of fat, which is esteemed a dainty.
+
+From hence they sailed to the island of St Nicholas, twenty-two leagues
+W.S.W. from the island of Salt, and anchored on the S.W. side of the
+island, which is of a triangular form, the longest side measuring thirty
+leagues, and the two others twenty leagues each. They here found the
+governor a white man, having three or four people about him, who were
+decently cloathed, and armed with swords and pistols, but the rest of
+his attendants were in a very pitiful condition. They dug some wells on
+shore, and traded for goats, fruits, and wine, which last was none of
+the best. The country near the coast is very indifferent, but there are
+some fine valleys in the interior, pretty well inhabited, and abounding
+in all the necessaries of life.
+
+The principal town of this island is in a valley, fourteen miles from
+the bay in which the Revenge came to anchor, and contains about 100
+families, the inhabitants being of a swarthy complexion. The country on
+the sea is rocky and barren, but in the interior there are several
+vallies, having plenty of grass, and in which vines are cultivated. The
+wine is of a pale colour, and tastes somewhat like Madeira, but is
+rather thick.
+
+From thence they went to Mayo, another of the Cape de Verd islands,
+forty miles E.S.E. from St Nicholas, and anchored on its north side.
+They wished to have procured some beef and goats at this island, but
+were not permitted to land, because one Captain Bond of Bristol had not
+long before, under the same pretence, carried away some of the principal
+inhabitants. This island is small, and its shores are beset with shoals,
+yet it has a considerable trade in salt and cattle. In May, June, July,
+and August, a species of sea-tortoises lay their eggs here, but are not
+nearly so good as those of the West Indies. The inhabitants cultivate
+some potatoes, plantains, and corn, but live very poorly, like all the
+others in the Cape de Verd islands.
+
+After continuing here five or six days, they resolved to go to the
+island of St Jago, in hopes of meeting some ship in the road, intending
+to cut her cable and run away with her. They accordingly stood for the
+east part of that island, where they saw from the top-mast head, over a
+point of land, a ship at anchor in the road, which seemed fit for their
+purpose: but, by the time they had got near her, her company clapped a
+spring upon her cable, struck her ports, and run out her lower tier of
+guns, on which Cooke bore away as fast as he could. This was a narrow
+escape, as they afterwards learnt that this ship was a Dutch East
+Indiaman of 50 guns and 400 men.
+
+This is by far the best of the Cape de Verd islands, four or five
+leagues west from Mayo; and, though mountainous, is the best peopled,
+having a very good harbour on its east side, much frequented by ships
+bound from Europe for the East Indies and the coast of Guinea, as also
+by Portuguese ships bound to Brazil, which come here to provide
+themselves with beef, pork, goats, fowls, eggs, plantains, and
+cocoa-nuts, in exchange for shirts, drawers, handkerchiefs, hats,
+waistcoats, breeches, and all sorts of linen, which are in great request
+among the natives, who are much addicted to theft. There is here a fort
+on the top of a hill, which commands the harbour. This island has two
+towns of some size, and produces the same sort of wine with St Nicholas.
+
+There are two other islands, Fogo and Brava, both small, and to the west
+of St Jago. Fogo is remarkable, as being an entire burning mountain,
+from the top of which issues a fire which may be seen a great way off at
+sea in the night. This island has a few inhabitants, who live on the
+sea-coast at the foot of the mountain, and subsist on goats, fowls,
+plantains, and cocoa-nuts. The other islands of this group are St
+Antonio, St Lucia, St Vincent, and Bona Vista.
+
+They sailed thence for the coast of Guinea, and, being near Cape Sierra
+Leona, they fell in with a new-built ship of forty guns, well furnished
+with water, all kinds of provisions, and brandy, which they boarded and
+carried away.[148]
+
+[Footnote 148: They appear to have named this ship the Revenge, and to
+have destroyed their original vessel.--E.]
+
+From thence they went to Sherbro river, also on the coast of Guinea,
+where they trimmed all their empty casks and filled them with water, not
+intending to stop any where again for water till their arrival at Juan
+Fernandez in the South Sea. There was at this time an English factory in
+the Sherbro river, having a considerable trade in _Cam-wood_, which is
+used in dying red; but the adventurers do not appear to have had any
+intercourse with their countrymen at this place. They were well
+received, however, by the negro inhabitants of a considerable village
+on the sea-shore, near the mouth of this river, who entertained Cowley
+and his companions with palm-wine, in a large hut in the middle of the
+town, all the rest of the habitations being small low huts. These
+negroes also brought off considerable supplies to the ship, of rice,
+fowls, honey, and sugar canes, which they sold to the buccaneers for
+goods found in the vessel they had seized at Sierra Leona.
+
+Going from thence in the month of December, along the coast of Guinea,
+to the latitude of 12° S. they crossed the Atlantic to the opposite
+coast of Brazil, where they came to soundings on a sandy bottom at
+eighty fathoms deep. Sailing down the coast of Brazil, when in lat. 4°
+S. they observed the sea to be as red as blood, occasioned by a
+prodigious shoal of red shrimps, which lay upon the water in great
+patches for many leagues together. They likewise saw vast numbers of
+seals, and a great many whales. Holding on their course to lat. 47° S.
+they discovered an island not known before, which Cowley named _Pepy's
+Island_,[149] in honour of Samuel Pepys, secretary to the Duke of York
+when Lord High Admiral of England, a great patron of seamen. This island
+has a very good harbour, in which 1000 ships might ride at anchor, and
+is a very commodious place for procuring both wood and water. It
+abounded in sea-fowl, and the shore, being either rocks or sand,
+promised fair for fish.
+
+[Footnote 149: An island in the southern Atlantic, in lat. 46° 34' S.
+called _Isle Grande_, is supposed to be the discovery of Cowley.
+According to Dalrymple, it is in long. 46° 40' W. while the map
+published along with Cook's Voyages places it in long. 35° 40' W. from
+Greenwich.--E.]
+
+In January 1684 they bore away for the Straits of Magellan, and on the
+28th of that month fell in with the _Sebaldine_ or Falkland islands, in
+lat. 51° 25' S. Then steering S.W. by W. to the lat. of 53° S. they made
+the Terra del Fuego. Finding great ripplings near the Straits of Le
+Maire, they resolved to go round the east end of States Land, as had
+been done by Captain Sharp in 1681, who first discovered it to be an
+island, naming it _Albemarle_ island. A prodigious storm came on upon
+the 14th February, which lasted between a fortnight and three weeks, and
+drove them into lat. 63° 30' S. This storm was attended by such torrents
+of rain, that they saved twenty-three barrels of water, besides dressing
+their victuals all that time in rain water.[150] The weather also was so
+excessively cold, that they could bear to drink three quarts of burnt
+brandy a man in twenty-four hours, without being intoxicated.
+
+[Footnote 150: It was discovered by the great navigator Captain Cook,
+who at one time penetrated to lat. 71° 10' S. that the solid ice found
+at sea in high southern latitudes affords perfectly fresh water, when
+the first meltings are thrown away.--E.]
+
+When the storm abated, they steered N.E. being then considerably to the
+west of Cape Horn, and got again into warm weather. In lat. 40° S. they
+fell in with an English ship, the Nicholas of London, of 26 guns,
+commanded by Captain John Eaton, with whom they joined company. They
+sailed together to the island of Juan Fernandez, where they arrived on
+the 23d March, and anchored in a bay at the south end of the island in
+twenty-five fathoms. Captain Watling, who succeeded Captain Sharp, was
+there in 1680, and named it _Queen Catharine's_ island. At his
+departure, he accidentally left a Moskito Indian, who still remained,
+having a gun, a knife, a small flask of powder, and some shot. In this
+desolate condition, he found it equally hard to provide for his
+subsistence, and to conceal himself from the Spaniards, who had notice
+of his being left there, and came several times to take him. He had
+chosen a pleasant valley for his residence, about half a mile from the
+coast, where he had erected a very convenient hut, well lined with
+seal-skins, and had a bed of the same, raised about two feet above the
+ground. By the help of a flint, he had converted his knife into a saw,
+with which he had cut the barrel of his gun to pieces, which he
+fashioned into harpoons, lances, fishing-hooks, and a long knife, by
+heating them in a fire. All this cost him much labour, but enabled him
+to live in sufficient comfort. On seeing the ships at sea, he guessed
+them to be English, and immediately dressed two goats, and a large
+quantity of cabbage, to entertain them on landing. He was also much
+pleased, when they landed on the island, to see two of his old
+acquaintances, Captains Cooke and Dampier, who had belonged to the ship
+by which he was left on the island.
+
+The island of Juan Fernandez is in lat. 34° 15' S. [33° 42'] about 420
+English miles from the coast of Chili. The whole island is a pleasant
+mixture of hills and vallies, the sides of the hills partly covered with
+wood, and partly savannas, or places naturally clear of wood, bearing
+fine grass. Among the woods are what are called cabbage-trees, but not
+so large as in other parts of the world. The goats which feed on the
+west end of the island are much fatter and better than those at the east
+end, though the latter has better and greater plenty of grass, with
+abundance of excellent water in the vallies, while the west end is a dry
+plain, the grass scanty and parched, and has hardly any wood or fresh
+water. Though fertile, this island has no inhabitants, who might live
+here in plenty, as the plain is able to maintain a great number of
+cattle, and the sea affords vast quantities of seals, sea-lions,
+snappers, and rock-fish. The sea-lions are not much unlike seals, but
+much larger, being twelve or fourteen feet long, and as thick as a large
+ox. They have no hair, and are of a dun colour, with large eyes, their
+teeth being three inches long. One of these animals will yield a
+considerable quantity of oil, which is sweet and answers well for
+frying. They feed on fish, yet their flesh is tolerably good. The
+snapper is a fish having a large head, mouth, and gills, the back red,
+the belly ash-coloured, and its general appearance resembling a roach,
+but much larger, its scales being as broad as a shilling. The rock-fish,
+called _baccalao_ by the Spaniards, because resembling the cod, is
+rounder than the former, and of a dark-brown colour, with small scales,
+and is very good food, being found in vast abundance on the coasts of
+Peru and Chili. This island has only two bays fit for anchorage, with a
+rivulet of fresh water in each, and both at the east end, and so
+conveniently situated that they might easily be fortified, and defended
+by a slender force against a powerful army, being inaccessible from the
+west, by reason of the high mountains. Five Englishmen, left by Captain
+Davies, secured themselves here against a great number of Spaniards.
+
+After remaining fourteen days at this island, they left it on the 8th
+April, 1684, steering N.N.E. till off the bay of Arica, whence they
+sailed to Cape Blanco, in hopes of meeting the Spanish Plate fleet from
+Panama; but if they had gone into the bay of Arica, they must have taken
+a Spanish ship which lay there, having 300 tons of silver on board. In
+lat. 10° S. on the 3d May, they were forced to capture a ship laden with
+timber, much against their inclination, lest they should be known
+through her means to be on the coast. They then sailed to the southern
+island of _Lobos_, in lat. 70° S. about forty-three English miles from
+the coast of Peru, where they landed their sick for refreshment, heeled
+their ships, and scraped their bottoms, to render them fitter for
+action.
+
+This island is named _Lobos del Mar_, to distinguish it from another
+which is nearer the continent, and called therefore _Lobos de la Tierra.
+Lobos del Mar_ is properly a double island, each a mile in circuit,
+separated by a small channel which will not admit ships of burden. A
+little way from shore, on the north side, there are several scattered
+rocks in the sea, and at the west end of the eastermost isle is a small
+sandy creek, in which ships are secure from the winds, all the rest of
+the shore being rocky cliffs. The whole of both islands is rocky and
+sandy, having neither wood, water, nor land animals; but it has many
+fowls, such as boobies, and above all penguins, about the size of a
+duck, and with similar feet; but their bills are pointed, their wings
+are mere stumps, which serve them as fins when in the water, and their
+bodies are covered with down instead of feathers. As they feed on fish,
+they are but indifferent eating, but their eggs are very good. Penguins
+are found all over the South Sea, and at the Cape of Good Hope. The road
+for ships is between the before-mentioned rock and the eastmost island.
+
+They were now very eager to make some capture, as their provisions,
+especially water, were very scanty, so that the subsistence of their
+prisoners, as well as themselves, gave them much anxiety. By information
+of their prisoners, they were also convinced that their being in these
+seas was known to the Spaniards, who consequently would keep all their
+richest ships in port. After much consultation, therefore, it was
+resolved to make an attempt on Truxillo, in lat. 8° 4' S. a populous
+city about six miles from the port of _Guanehagno_, though the
+landing-place was of difficult access, as at that place there was a
+strong probability of making a considerable booty. They sailed therefore
+with this design on the 18th May, their whole number of men fit for duty
+being one hundred and eight. Soon after weighing anchor, three ships
+were descried under sail, which they chased and captured, being laden
+with flour from Guanehagno to Panama. In one of them was found a letter
+from the viceroy of Peru to the president of Panama, intimating that
+there were enemies on the coast, and that he had sent these three ships
+to supply their wants. It was also learnt from the prisoners, that the
+Spaniards were erecting a fort near their harbour of Guanehagno, in
+consequence of which the design on Traxillo was abandoned. Besides a
+large loading of flour, the three captured ships had a good quantity of
+fruits and sweetmeats, which made them agreeable prizes to the English,
+who were now very short of provisions; but they had landed no less than
+800,000 dollars, on hearing that there were enemies in these seas.
+
+It was now resolved to carry their prizes to some secure place, where
+the best part of the provisions they had now procured might be laid up
+in safety, for which purpose they steered for the _Gallapagos_ or
+_Enchanted Islands_,[151] which they got sight of on the 31st May, and
+anchored at night on the east side of one of the easternmost of these
+islands, a mile from shore, in sixteen fathoms, on clear white hard
+sand. To this Cowley gave the name of _King Charles's Island_. He
+likewise named more of them, as the Duke of Norfolk's Island immediately
+under the line, Dessington's, Eares, Bindley's, Earl of Abington's, King
+James's, Duke of Albemarles, and others. They afterwards anchored in a
+very good bay being named York Bay. Here they found abundance of
+excellent provisions, particularly guanoes and sea and land tortoises,
+some of the latter weighing two hundred pounds, which is much beyond
+their usual weight. There were also great numbers of birds, especially
+turtle-doves, with plenty of wood and excellent water; but none of
+either of these was in any of the other islands.[152]
+
+[Footnote 151: These islands, so named by the Spaniards from being the
+resort of tortoises, are on both sides of the line, from about the Lat.
+of 2° N. to 1° 50' S,. and from about 88° 40' to 95° 20' both W. from
+Greenwich.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 152: Cowley mentions having found here a [illegible] thing of
+its nature of quantity.--E.]
+
+These Gallapagos are a considerable number of large islands, situated
+under and on both sides of the line, and destitute of inhabitants. The
+Spaniards, who first discovered them, describe them as extending from
+the equator N.W. as high as 5° N. The adventurers in this voyage saw
+fourteen or fifteen, some of which were seven or eight leagues in
+length, and three or four leagues broad, pretty high yet flat. Four or
+five of the most easterly were barren and rocky, without either trees,
+herbs, or grass, except very near the shore. They produced also a sort
+of shrub, called dildo-tree, about the bigness of a man's leg, and ten
+or twelve feet high, without either fruit or leaves, but covered with
+prickles from top to bottom. The only water in these barren isles, was
+in ponds and holes in the rocks. Some of the isles are low and more
+fertile, producing some of the trees that are known in Europe. A few of
+the westermost isles are larger than the rest, being nine or ten leagues
+long, and six or seven broad, producing many trees, especially Mammee
+figs, and they have also some pretty large fresh-water streams, and many
+rivulets. The air is continually refreshed, by the sea-breeze by day and
+the land-winds at night, so that they are not troubled with such
+excessive heats, neither are they so unwholesome as most places so near
+the equator. During the rainy season, in November, December, and
+January, they are infested with violent tempests of thunder and
+lightning; but before and after these months have only refreshing
+showers, and in their summer, which is in May, June, July, and August,
+they are without any rains.
+
+They anchored near several of these islands, and frequently found sea
+tortoises basking in the sun at noon. On a former occasion, Captain
+Davies came to anchor on the west side of these islands, where he and
+his men subsisted on land-tortoises for three months, and saved from
+them sixty jars of oil. He also found several good channels on that
+side, with anchorage between the isles, and several rivulets of fresh
+water, with plenty of trees for fuel. The sea also round these islands
+is well stored with good fish of a large size, and abounds in sharks.
+These islands are better stored with guanoes and land-tortoises than any
+other part of the world. The guanoes are very tame, of extraordinary
+size, and very fat. The land-tortoises are likewise very fat, and so
+numerous that several hundred men might subsist upon them for a
+considerable time. They are as pleasant food as a pullet, and so large
+that some of them weighed 150 and even 200 pounds, being two feet to two
+feet and a half across the belly; whereas in other places they are
+seldom met with above 30 pounds weight. There are several kinds of
+land-tortoises in the West Indies, one of which, called _Hackatee_ by
+the Spaniards, keeps mostly in fresh-water ponds, having long necks,
+small legs, and flat feet, and is usually between ten and fifteen pounds
+weight. A second, and much smaller kind, which they call _Tenopen_,[153]
+is somewhat rounder, but not unlike in other respects, except that their
+back shells are naturally covered with curious carved work. The
+tortoises in the Gallapagos isles resembles the _Hackatee_, having long
+necks and small heads, but are much larger.
+
+[Footnote 153: This word in the text is probably a misprint for
+_Terrapin_, a trivial name for a species of land or fresh-water
+tortoise, found also in the warmer parts of North America--E.]
+
+In these islands there are also some green snakes, and great numbers of
+remarkably tame turtle-doves, very fat, and excellent eating. There are
+large channels between some of these islands, capable of receiving ships
+of moderate burden. On the shoals there grows great abundance of
+sea-weed, called _turtle-grass_, owing to which these channels abound in
+_green turtles_ or sea-tortoises. There are several kinds of turtles or
+sea-tortoises, as the _Trunk, Loggerhead, Hawksbill_, and _Green_
+turtles. The first is larger than the rest, and has a rounder and higher
+back shell, but is neither so wholesome nor so well tasted; and the same
+may be said of the Loggerhead, which feeds on moss from the rocks, and
+has its name from its large head. The Hawksbill, so named from having a
+long small mouth, like the beak of a hawk, is the smallest species, and
+is that which produces the so-much-admired tortoise-shell, of which
+cabinets, boxes, combs, and other things are made in Europe, and of this
+shell each has from three to four pounds, though some have less. The
+flesh of this kind is but indifferent, yet better than that of the
+Loggerheads; though these, which are taken between the _Sambellos_ and
+_Portobello_, make those who eat the flesh purge and vomit excessively,
+and the same is observed of some other fish in the West Indies.
+
+The laying time of the sea-tortoises is about May, June, and July, a
+little sooner or later, and they lay three times each season, eighty or
+ninety eggs each time, which are round and as large as an hen's egg, but
+covered only with a thin white skin, having no shell. When a tortoise
+goes on shore to lay, she is usually an hour before she returns, as she
+always chuses her place above high-water mark, where she makes a large
+hole with her fins in the sand, in which she lays her eggs, and then
+covers them two feet deep with the sand she had raked out. Sometimes
+they go on shore the day before, to take a look of the place, and are
+sure to return to the same spot next day. People take the tortoises on
+this occasion, while on shore in the night, turning them over on their
+backs, above high-water mark, and then return to fetch them off next
+morning; but a large Green tortoise will give work enough to two stout
+men to turn her over. The Green tortoise gets its name from the colour
+of the shell, having a small round head, and weighs from 200 to 300
+pounds. Its flesh is accounted the best of any, but there are none of
+this kind in the South Sea. The sea-tortoises found at the Gallapagos
+being a bastard kind of Green tortoises, having thicker shells than
+those of the West Indies, and their flesh not so good. They are also
+much larger, being frequently two or three feet thick, and their bellies
+five feet broad.
+
+They remained twelve or fourteen days at the Gallapagos, during which
+time Captain Cooke lived on shore in a very poor state of health. They
+also landed 1500 bags of flour, with a large quantity of sweetmeats and
+other provisions, on York Island, which they might have recourse to on
+any emergency. From one of their prisoners, an Indian of _Realejo_, they
+had a flattering account of the riches of that place, which he alleged
+might be easily taken, and for which enterprise he offered to serve them
+as a guide. Setting sail therefore from the Gallapagos on the 12th June,
+they shaped their course in lat 4° 40' N. with the intention of touching
+at the _Island of Cocos_, [in lat. 5° 27' N. and long. 87° 27' W. from
+Greenwich.] This island is seven or eight leagues in circuit, but
+uninhabited, and produces a pleasant herb near the sea coast, called
+_Geamadael_ by the Spaniards. It is so environed with steep rocks as to
+be inaccessible, except on the N.E. where ships may safely ride in a
+small bay.
+
+Missing this island, they continued their course towards the continent
+of America, and reached Cape _Blanco_, or _Trespuntas_, on the coast of
+Mexico, in lat. 9° 56' N. in the beginning of July. This cape gets the
+name of _Blanco_, or the White Cape, from two high steep taper white
+rocks, like high towers, about half a mile distant. The cape itself is
+about the same height with Beachy-head, on the coast of Sussex, being a
+full broad point jutting out to sea, and terminated with steep rocks,
+while both sides have easy descents to the sea from the flat top, which
+is covered with tall trees, and affords a pleasant prospect. On the N.W.
+side of the cape the land runs in to the N.E. for four leagues, making a
+small bay, called _Caldera Bay_, at the entrance to which, at the N.W.
+side of the cape, a rivulet of fresh water discharges itself into the
+sea through very rich low lands abounding in lofty trees. This rich
+wooded vale extends a mile N.E. beyond the rivulet, when a savanna
+begins, running several leagues into the country, here and there
+beautifully interspersed with groves of trees, and covered with
+excellent long grass. Deeper into the bay, the low lands are cloathed
+with mangroves; but farther into the country the land is higher, partly
+covered with woods, and partly consisting of hilly savannas, not so good
+as the former, and here the woods consist of short small trees. From the
+bottom of this bay one may travel to the lake of Nicaragua over hilly
+savannas, a distance of fourteen, or fifteen leagues.[154]
+
+[Footnote 154: The bay of Caldera in the text is evidently the gulf of
+Nicoya, from the bottom of which the lake of Nicaragua is distant about
+fifty English miles due north. The latitude of Cape Blanco in the text,
+9° 56' N. is considerably erroneous, its true latitude being only 9° 27'
+N.]
+
+Captain Cooke had been very ill ever since their departure from Juan
+Fernandez, and died as soon as they came within two or three leagues of
+Cape Blanco, which indeed is a frequent incident at sea, as people who
+have been long ill often die on coming in sight of land. Coming to
+anchor a few hours after a league within the cape, near the mouth of the
+before-mentioned rivulet, in 14 fathoms on clear hard sand, his body was
+immediately carried on shore for interment, under a guard of twelve
+armed men. While the people were digging his grave, they were joined by
+three Spanish Indians, who asked many questions, and were at length
+seized, though one of them afterwards escaped. The other two were
+carried aboard, and confessed that they were sent as spies from Nicoya,
+a small Mulatto town twelve or fourteen leagues from the cape, and
+seated on the banks of a river of the same name,[155] being a convenient
+place for building and refitting ships. The president of Panama had sent
+intelligence to this place of the English being in these seas, in
+consequence of which the inhabitants, who mostly subsist by cultivating
+corn, and by slaughtering great numbers of cattle which feed on their
+extensive savannas, had sent their ox hides to the North Sea by way of
+the lake of Nicaragua, as also a certain red wood, called in Jamaica
+_Blood wood_, or Nicaragua wood, which is used in dying. These
+commodities are exchanged for linen and woollen manufactures, and other
+European goods.
+
+[Footnote 155: There is no river at Niceya, but it is seated on a bay or
+harbour within the gulf of the same name.--E.]
+
+Learning from their prisoners that there was a large cattle pen at no
+great distance, where cows and bulls could be had in abundance, and
+being very desirous of having some fresh beef which had long been very
+rare among them, twenty-four of the English went ashore in two boats,
+under the guidance of one of the Indians, and landed about a league from
+the ships, hauling their boats upon the dry sand. Their guide conducted
+them to the pen, in a large savanna two miles from the boats, where they
+found abundance of bulls and cows feeding. Some of the English were for
+killing three or four immediately, but the rest insisted to wait till
+morning, and then to kill as many as they needed. On this difference of
+opinion, Dampier and eleven more thought proper to return aboard that
+night, expecting to be followed by the rest next day. Hearing nothing of
+them next day at four p.m. ten men were sent in a canoe to look for
+them; when they found their comrades on a small rock half a mile from
+the shore, up to their middles in water, having fled there to escape
+from forty or fifty Spaniards, well armed with guns and lances, who had
+burnt their boat. They had taken shelter on this rock at low water, and
+must have perished in an hour, as it was then flowing tide, if they had
+not been relieved by the canoe, which brought them safe on board.
+
+On the 19th July, Edward Davis, quarter-master of the Revenge, was
+elected captain, in the room of Captain Cooke. They sailed next day from
+Cape Blanco towards Realejo, with a moderate breeze at N. which brought
+them in three days over against that port, in lat. 12° 26' N. This place
+is easily discovered from sea, by means of a high-peaked burning
+mountain about ten miles inland, called by the Spaniards _Volcano vejo_,
+or the old volcano, which is so high that it may be seen twenty leagues
+out at sea, besides which there is no other similar mountain on all that
+coast. To make this harbour, the mountain must bear N.E. and keeping this
+coarse will bring a ship directly into the harbour, the entrance of
+which may be seen at three leagues off. This harbour is inclosed by a
+low isle, a mile in length, a quarter of a mile broad, and a mile and a
+half from the main land. It has a channel or entrance at each end of the
+island, that on the east, being narrow and having a strong tide, is
+seldom used, but that on the west is much larger and more commodious. In
+taking this entry, however, ships must beware of a certain sandy shoal
+on the N.W. point of the isle, and when past this must keep close to the
+isle, as a sand-bank runs half way over from the continental shore. This
+port is able to contain 200 ships.
+
+About two leagues from the port, the town of Realejo stands in a fenny
+country, full of red mangrove trees, between two arms of the sea, the
+westermost of which reaches up to the town, and the eastermost comes
+near it, but no shipping can get so far up.[156] On entering the bay in
+their canoes, they found the country apprized of their approach, and
+fully prepared for their reception, wherefore the enterprise against
+Realejo was laid aside. Pursuant to a consultation between the two
+commanders, Eaton and Davis, they sailed on the 27th July for the gulf
+of Amapalla or Fonseca.
+
+[Footnote 156: The account in the text appears applicable to what is now
+called _El Viejo_, or the old town, nearly 12 miles from the port, but
+modern Realejo stands almost close to the entrance of the bay or
+harbour.--E.]
+
+This is a large gulf or branch of the sea, running eight or ten leagues
+into the country, and nearly of the same breadth. The S.E. extreme point
+is called Cape _Casurina_, or _Casiquina_, in lat. 12° 53' N. and long.
+87° 36' W. and the N.W. point is Cape Candadillo, in lat. 18° 6' N. and
+long. 87° 57' W. Within this bay are several islands, the principal of
+these being named _Mangeru_ and _Amapaila_. Mangera is a high round
+island, two leagues in circuit, inclosed on all sides by rocks, except
+on its N.E. side, where there is a small sandy creek. The soil is black
+and shallow, full of stones, and produces very lofty trees. It has a
+small town or village in the middle inhabited by Indians, and a handsome
+Spanish church. The inhabitants cultivate a small quantity of maize and
+plantains, having also a few cocks and hens, but no beasts except dogs
+and cats. From the creek to the town there is a steep rocky path.
+_Amapalla_ resembles the other isle in soil, but is much larger, and has
+two towns about two miles asunder, one on its northern end, and the
+other on the east. The latter is on a plain on the summit of a hill, and
+has a handsome church. The other town is smaller, but has also a fine
+church. In most of the Indian towns under the Spanish dominion, the
+images of the saints in their churches are represented of the Indian
+complexion, and dressed like Indians; while in the towns inhabited by
+Spaniards, the images have the European complexion and dress. There are
+many other islands in the bay, but uninhabited.
+
+Captain Davis went into the gulf with two canoes to procure some
+prisoners for intelligence, and coming to Mangera, the inhabitants all
+ran away into the woods, so that only the priest and two boys were
+taken. Captain Davis went thence to the isle of Amapalla, where the
+inhabitants were prevented from retiring into the woods by the
+secretary, who was an enemy to the Spaniards, and persuaded them the
+English were friends; but by the misconduct of one of the Buccaneers,
+all the Indians run away, on which Davis made his men fire at them, and
+the secretary was slain. After this the casique of the island was
+reconciled to the English, and afterwards guided them wherever they had
+occasion to go, especially to places on the continent where they could
+procure beef.
+
+A company of English and French Buccaneers landed some time afterwards
+on this island, whence they went over to the continent, and marched by
+land to the _Cape River_, otherwise called _Yare_, or _Vanquez_ river,
+which falls into the gulf of Mexico, near _Cape Gracias a Dios_, on the
+Mosquito shore. On reaching that river near its source, they constructed
+bark canoes, in which they descended the stream into the gulf of Mexico.
+They were not, however, the first discoverers of this passage, as about
+thirty years before, some English went up that same river to near its
+source, from the gulf of Mexico, and marched thence inland to a town
+called New Segovia, near the head of Bluefield's river.
+
+While in this bay of Amapalla, some difference arose between the two
+captains, Davis who had succeeded to Cooke in command of the Revenge,
+and Eaton of the Nicholas, when they resolved to separate: But they
+first deemed it proper to careen their ships, for which this place
+afforded every convenience, and to take in a supply of fresh water. Both
+ships being in condition for sea, Captain Eaton took 400 sacks of flour
+on board his ship, and agreed with Captain Cowley to take the charge of
+the Nicholas as master. From this period therefore, which was in the end
+of September, the voyages of Cowley and Dampier cease to be the same,
+and require to be separately narrated.
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_Continuation of the Narrative of Cowley, from leaving the Revenge, to
+his Return to England_.
+
+On leaving the gulf of Amapalla, the Nicholas steered for Cape
+Francisco, in lat. 0° 50' N. near which they encountered dreadful
+storms, attended by prodigious thunder and lightning. From thence they
+proceeded to the latitude of 7° S. but found the country every where
+alarmed. They went next to Payta, in lat. 4° 55' S. where they took two
+ships at anchor, which they set on fire, because the Spaniards refused
+to ransom them. Leaving the coast, they went to the island of _Gorgona_,
+in lat. 2° 50' N. about four leagues from the main, which the privateers
+usually called _Sharp's Island_. This is about two leagues long by one
+league broad, having a good harbour on its west side, and affording
+plenty of wood and water. It is a common saying in Spanish South
+America, that it rains often in Chili, seldom in Peru, and always at
+Gorgona, where they allege there never was a day fair to an end. Though
+this be not strictly true, it is certain that this island has rain more
+or less at all seasons, on which account, perhaps, it has always
+remained uninhabited. They sailed from Gorgona W.N.W. till in lat. 30°
+N. when they steered W. by N. to lat. 15° N. till they considered
+themselves beyond danger from the rocks of _St Bartholomew_; after which
+they returned into the lat. of 13° N. in which parallel they continued
+their voyage for the East Indies.
+
+They had a regular trade-wind, and a reasonably quick passage across the
+Pacific Ocean, except that their men were mostly ill of the scurvy; and
+on the 14th of March, 1685, being in lat. 13° 2' N. they came in sight
+of the island of Guam. By Captain Cowley's calculation, this run across
+the Pacific Ocean extended to 7646 miles, from the island of Gorgona to
+Guam.[157] They came next day to anchor in a bay on the west side of the
+island, and sent their boat on shore with a flag of truce. The
+inhabitants of a village at that place set fire to their houses, and ran
+away into the interior, on which the boat's crew cut down some cocoa
+trees to gather the fruit, and on going again on board were threatened
+by a party of the natives, who sallied out from some bushes on purpose
+to attack them. A friendly intercourse was however established between
+the English and the natives, and trade took place with them till the
+17th, when the natives attacked the English suddenly, but were beat off
+with heavy loss, while none of the English were hurt.
+
+[Footnote 157: Gorgona is in long. 78° 33' Guam in 216° 40', both W.
+from Greenwich. The difference of longitude is 138° 07', which gives
+9530 statute miles, or 2762 marine leagues, so that the computation in
+the text is considerably too short.--E.]
+
+On the 19th the Spanish governor of the island came to a point of land
+not far from the ship, whence he sent his boat on board with three
+copies of the same letter, in Spanish, French, and Dutch, desiring to
+know who they were, whence they came, and whither they were bound.
+Captain Eaton answered in French, saying that they had been fitted out
+by some gentlemen in France to make discoveries, and were come in quest
+of provisions. In reply the governor invited Captain Eaton on shore, who
+landed with a guard of twenty men doubly armed, and was politely
+received. On the 18th the governor sent ten hogs on board, together with
+a prodigious quantity of potatoes, plantains, oranges, papaws, and red
+pepper, in return for which Captain Eaton sent a diamond ring to the
+governor worth twenty pounds, and gave swords to several Spanish
+gentlemen who came off with the provisions. Next day the governor sent
+to procure some powder, of which he was in want, as the natives were in
+rebellion, and Captain Eaton gave him two barrels, for which to the
+value of 1400 dollars were offered in gold and silver, but Eaton refused
+to accept the money, in consequence of which the governor sent him a
+diamond ring, worth fifty pounds. Every day after this the governor sent
+them some kind of provisions, and about the end of March, when about to
+sail, the governor sent them thirty hogs for sea store, with a large
+supply of rice and potatoes.
+
+On one occasion the Indians attacked a party of the English, who were on
+shore to draw the sein, but were beaten off with much loss; yet they
+afterwards endeavoured to prevail on Captain Eaton to join them in
+driving out the Spaniards, which he positively refused. On the 1st
+April, leaving the bay in which they had hitherto remained, the Nicholas
+anchored before the Spanish fort; and after several civilities on both
+sides, set sail in the afternoon of the 3d April with a fair wind.
+
+This island of Guam is about fourteen leagues long by six broad, and
+contains several very pleasant vallies, interspersed with fine fertile
+meadows, watered by many rivulets from the hills. The soil in these
+vallies is black and very rich, producing plenty of cocoas, potatoes,
+yams, papaws, plantains, _monanoes_, sour-sops, oranges, and lemons,
+together with some honey. The climate is naturally very hot, yet is
+wholesome, as constantly refreshed by the trade-wind. The Indian
+natives are large made, well proportioned, active and vigorous, some
+being seven feet and a half high, and go mostly naked, both men and
+women. They never bury their dead, but lay them in the sun to putrefy.
+Their only arms are slings and lances, the heads of these being made of
+human bones; and on the decease of any one his bones make eight lances,
+four from his legs and thighs, and as many from his arms. These lance
+heads are formed like a scoop, and jagged at the edges like a saw or
+eel-spear; so that a person wounded by them dies, if not cured in seven
+days.
+
+The great annual ship between Manilla and Acapulco touches here for
+refreshments, and the Spaniards said there were sometimes eight ships in
+one year at this place from the East Indies. They said also, that they
+had built a ship here, in 1684, of 160 tons, to trade with Manilla, and
+pretended to have a garrison here of 600 men, most of the Indians being
+in rebellion.
+
+The Nicholas sailed from Guam W. by S. and on computing that they were
+206 leagues from that island, they changed to due W. The 23d, when they
+reckoned themselves 560 leagues west of Guam, they met with a very
+strong current, resembling the race of Portland, and fell in with a
+cluster of islands in lat. 20° 30' N. to the north of Luçonia, [the
+_Bashee Islands_.] They sent their boat ashore on the northermost of
+these islands, in order to get some fish, and to examine the island, on
+which they found vast quantities of nutmegs growing, but saw no people,
+and as night was drawing on they did not venture to go any distance from
+the shore. To this island they gave the name of _Nutmeg Island_, and
+called the bay in which they anchored _English Bay_. They observed many
+rocks, shoals, and foul ground near the shore, and saw a great many
+goats on the island, but brought off very few.
+
+On the 26th of April they were off Cape Bojadore, the N.W. point of
+Luçonia, and came soon after to Cipe _Mindato_, where they met the S.W.
+monsoon, on which they bore away for Canton in China, where they arrived
+in safety and refitted their ship. They had here an opportunity of
+making themselves as rich as they could desire, but would not embrace
+it; as there came into the port thirteen sail of Tartar vessels, laden
+with Chinese plunder, consisting of the richest productions of the East.
+The men, however, would have nothing to do with any thing but gold and
+silver, and Captain Eaton could not prevail upon them to fight for
+silks, as they alleged that would degrade them into pedlars. The Tartars
+therefore quietly pursued their affairs at Canton, unconscious of their
+danger.
+
+Having repaired the ship, Captain Easton sailed for Manilla, intending
+to wait for a Tartar ship of which they had information, bound from that
+port, and half laden with silver. They even got sight of her, and chased
+her a whole day to no purpose, as she was quite clean, and the Nicholas
+was as foul as could well be. They then stood for a small island, to the
+north of Luçonia, to wait for a fair wind to carry them to Bantam.
+Instead of one island, they found several, where they procured
+refreshments.[158] Learning from an Indian that in one of these islands
+there were plenty of beeves, they sent a boat thither with thirty men,
+who took what they wanted by force, though the island was well
+inhabited.
+
+[Footnote 158: The indications in the text are too vague to point out
+the particular islands at which the Nicholas refreshed. Immediately
+north from Luçonia are the Babuvanes Isles, in lat 19° 30', and still
+farther, the Bashee Islands, in 20° 30', both N.]
+
+Leaving these islands about the middle of September, 1685, they were for
+three days in great danger on the banks of _Peragoa_, in lat. 10° N.
+after which they came to a convenient bay in an island not far from the
+northern coast of Borneo, where they set up a tent on shore and landed
+every thing from the ship, fortifying themselves with ten small guns, in
+case of being attacked by the natives, and hauled their ship on shore to
+clean her bottom. At first the natives of the island avoided all
+intercourse with the English; but one day the boat of the Nicholas came
+up with a canoe in which was the queen of the country with her retinue,
+who all leaped into the sea to get away from the English. They took up
+these people with much difficulty, and entertained them with so much
+kindness that they became good friends during two months which they
+continued afterwards at this island. At this time the Spaniards were at
+peace with the sovereign of Borneo, and carried on an advantageous trade
+there from Manilla; of which circumstance Captain Eaton and his people
+got intimation, and passed themselves for Spaniards during their
+residence.
+
+This great island is plentifully stored with provisions of all kinds,
+and many rich commodities, as diamonds, pepper, camphor, &c. and several
+kinds of fine woods, as specklewood and ebony. Cloves also were there to
+be had at a reasonable price, being brought there from the neighbouring
+islands by stealth. The animals of Borneo, as reported by Cowley, are
+elephants, tigers, panthers, leopards, antelopes, and wild swine. The
+king of Borneo being in league with the Spanish governor of the
+Philippines, the English passed themselves here as Spaniards, and were
+amply supplied by the natives during their stay with fish, oranges,
+lemons, mangoes, plantains, and pine-apples.
+
+The Nicholas sailed from this place in December, 1685, proceeding to a
+chain of islands in lat. 4° N. called the _Naturah_ islands,[159] whence
+they went to Timor, where the crew became exceedingly mutinous; on which
+Captain Cowley and others resolved to quit the Nicholas, in order to
+endeavour to get a passage home from Batavia. Accordingly, Cowley and
+one Mr Hill, with eighteen more of the men, purchased a large boat, in
+which they meant to have gone to Batavia, but, owing to contrary winds,
+were obliged to put in at Cheribon, another factory belonging to the
+Dutch in Java, where they found they had lost a day in their reckoning
+during their voyage by the west. They here learnt the death of Charles
+II. and that the Dutch had driven the English from Bantam, which was
+then the second place of trade we possessed in India. The Dutch were
+forming other schemes to the prejudice of our trade, wherefore Cowley,
+with Hill and another of the Englishmen, resolved to make all the haste
+they could to Batavia, to avoid being involved in the subsisting
+disputes. They were kindly received by the governor of Batavia, who
+promised them a passage to Holland.
+
+[Footnote 159: The Natuna Islands, in long. 108° E. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+Cowley and his remaining companions embarked at Batavia in a Dutch ship
+in March, 1686. They arrived in Table bay at the Cape of Good Hope on
+the 1st June, where they landed next day, and of which settlement, as it
+then existed in 1686, Cowley gives the following account:--
+
+"Cape Town does not contain above an hundred houses, which are all built
+low, because exposed to violent gales of wind in the months of December,
+January, and February. The castle is very strong, having about eighty
+large cannon for its defence. There is also a very spacious garden,
+maintained by the Dutch East India Company, planted with all kinds of
+fruit-trees, and many excellent herbs, and laid out in numerous pleasant
+walks. This garden is near a mile in length and a furlong wide, being
+the greatest rarity at the Cape, and far exceeding the public garden at
+Batavia. This country had abundance of very good sheep, but cattle and
+fowls are rather scarce. We walked out of town to a village inhabited by
+the _Hodmandods_, or Hottentots. Their houses are round, having the
+fire-places in the middle, almost like the huts of the wild Irish, and
+the people lay upon the ashes, having nothing under them but
+sheep-skins. The men seemed all to be _Monorchides_, and the whole of
+these people were so nasty that we could hardly endure the stench of
+their bodies and habitations. Their women are singularly conformed,
+having a natural skin apron, and are all so ignorant and brutish that
+they do not hesitate to prostitute themselves publicly for the smallest
+imaginable recompense, of which I was an eye witness. Their apparel is a
+sheep-skin flung over their shoulders, with a leather cap on their
+heads, as full of grease as it can hold. Their legs are wound about,
+from the ankle to the knees, with the guts of beasts well greased.
+
+"These people, called _Hodmandods_ by the Dutch, are born white, but
+they make themselves black by smearing their bodies all over with soot
+and grease, so that by frequent repetition they become as black as
+negroes. Their children, when young, are of a comely form, but their
+noses are like those of the negroes. When they marry, the woman cuts off
+one joint of her finger; and, if her husband die and she remarry again,
+she cuts off another joint, and so on however often she may marry.
+
+"They are a most filthy race, and will feed upon any thing, however
+foul. When the Hollanders kill a beast, these people get the guts, and
+having squeezed out the excrements, without washing or scraping, they
+lay them upon the coals, and eat them before they are well heated
+through. If even a slave of the Hollanders wish to have one of their
+women, he has only to give her husband a piece of tobacco. Yet will they
+beat their wives if unfaithful with one of their own nation, though they
+care not how they act with the men of other nations. They are worshipers
+of the moon, and thousands of them may be seen dancing and singing by
+the sea-side, when they expect to see that luminary; but if it happen
+to be dark weather, so that the moon does not appear, they say their god
+is angry with them. While we were at the Cape, one of the _Hodmandods_
+drank himself dead in the fort, on which the others came and put oil and
+milk into his mouth, but finding he was dead, they began to prepare for
+his burial in the following manner:--Having shaved or scraped his body,
+arms, and legs, with their knives, they dug a great hole, in which they
+placed him on his breech in a sitting posture, heaping stones about him
+to keep him upright. Then came the women, making a most horrible noise
+round the hole which was afterwards filled up with earth."
+
+On the 15th June. 1686, Cowley sailed from the Cape, the homeward-bound
+Dutch fleet consisting of three ships, when at the same time other three
+sailed for Bolivia. On the 22d of June they passed the line, when Cowley
+computed that he had sailed quite round the globe, having formerly
+crossed the line nearly at the same place, when outward-bound from
+Virginia in 1683. On the 4th August they judged themselves to be within
+thirty leagues of the dangerous shoal called the _Abrolhos_, laid down
+in lat. 15° N. in the map: but Cowley was very doubtful if any such
+shoal exist, having never met with any one who had fallen in with it,
+and he was assured by a pilot, who had made sixteen voyages to Brazil,
+that there was no such sand. The 19th September, Cowley saw land which
+he believed to be Shetland. They were off the Maes on the 28th
+September, and on the 30th Cowley landed at Helvoetsluys. He travelled
+by land to Rotterdam, whence he sailed in the Ann for England, and
+arrived safe in London on the 12th October, 1686, after a tedious and
+troublesome voyage of three years and nearly two months.
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_Sequel of the Voyage, so far as Dampier is concerned, after the
+Separation of the Nicholas from the Revenge._[160]
+
+This is usually denominated Captain William Dampier's _first_ Voyage
+round the World, and is given at large by Harris, but on the present
+occasion has been limited, in this section, to the narrative of Dampier
+after the separation of Captain Cowley in the Nicholas; the observations
+of Dampier in the earlier part of the voyage, having been already
+interwoven in the first section of this chapter.
+
+[Footnote 160: Dampier's Voyages, Lond. 1729, vol. I. and II. Harris,
+II. 84.]
+
+This voyage is peculiarly valuable, by its minute and apparently
+accurate account of the harbours and anchorages on the western coast of
+South America, and has, therefore, been given here at considerable
+length, as it may become of singular utility to our trade, in case the
+navigation to the South Sea may be thrown open, which is at present
+within the exclusive privileges of the East India Company, yet entirely
+unused by that chartered body.--E.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Captain Eaton in the Nicholas having separated from the Revenge, left
+the Gulf of Amapalla on the 2d September, 1684, as formerly mentioned,
+which place we also left next day, directing our course for the coast of
+Peru. Tornadoes, with thunder, lightning, and rain, are very frequent on
+these coasts from June to November, mostly from the S.E. of which we had
+our share. The wind afterwards veered to W. and so continued till we
+came in sight of Cape St Francisco, where we met with fair weather and
+the wind at S.
+
+Cape St Francisco, in lat. 0° 50' N. is a high full point of land,
+covered with lofty trees. In passing from the N. a low point may be
+easily mistaken for the cape, but soon after passing this point the cape
+is seen with three distinct points. The land in its neighbourhood is
+high, and the mountains appear black. The 20th September we came to
+anchor in sixteen fathoms near the island of _Plata_, in lat. 1° 15' S.
+This island is about four miles long and a mile and half broad, being of
+some considerable height, and environed with rocky cliffs, except in one
+place at the east end, where the only fresh-water torrent of the isle
+falls down from the rocks into the sea. The top of the island is nearly
+flat, with a sandy soil, which produces three or four kinds of low small
+trees, not known in Europe, and these trees are much overgrown with
+moss. Among these trees the surface is covered with pretty good grass,
+especially in the beginning of the year, but there are no land animals
+to feed upon it, the great number of goats that used to be found here
+formerly being all destroyed. Is has, however, a great number of the
+birds named Boobies and Man-of-war birds. Some say that this island got
+the name _Isola de Plata_ from the Spaniards, from the circumstance of
+Sir Francis Drake having carried to this place their ship the Cacafoga,
+richly laden with silver, which they name _Plata_.
+
+The anchorage is on the east side, about the middle of the island, close
+to the shore, within two cables length of the sandy bay, in eighteen or
+twenty fathoms, fast ooze, and smooth water, the S.E. point of the
+island keeping off the force of the south wind which usually blows here.
+In this sandy bay there is good landing, and indeed it is the only place
+which leads into the island. A small shoal runs out about a quarter of a
+mile from the east point of the island, on which shoal there is a great
+rippling of the sea when the tide flows. The tide here has a strong
+current, setting to the south with the flood, and to the north when it
+ebbs. At this east point also there are three small high rocks, about a
+cable's length from the shore; and three much larger rocks at the N.E.
+point. All round the isle the water is very deep, except at the
+before-mentioned anchorage. Near the shoal there are great numbers of
+small sea-tortoises, or turtle, formerly mentioned as found at the
+Gallapagos. This island of _Plata_ is four or five leagues W.S.W. from
+Cape _San Lorenzo_.
+
+After remaining one day at this isle, we continued our voyage to Cape
+_Santa Helena_, in lat. 2° 8' S. This cape appears high and flat,
+resembling an island, covered on the top with thistles, and surrounded
+by low grounds, but without any trees. As it jets far out to sea, it
+forms a good bay on its north side, a mile within which is a wretched
+Indian village on the shore, called also Santa Helena; but the ground in
+its neighbourhood, though low, is sandy and barren, producing neither
+trees, grass, corn, nor fruit, except excellent water-melons; and the
+inhabitants are forced to fetch their fresh water from the river
+_Calanche_, four leagues distant, at the bottom of the bay. They live
+chiefly on fish, and are supplied with maize from other parts, in
+exchange for _Algatrane_, which is a bituminous substance issuing from
+the earth near this village, about five paces above high-water mark.
+This substance, by means of long boiling, becomes hard like pitch, and
+is employed as such by the Spaniards. To leeward of the point, directly
+opposite the village, there is good anchorage, but on the west side the
+water is very deep. Some of our men were sent under night in canoes to
+take the village, in which they succeeded, and made some prisoners; but
+the natives set fire to a small bark in the road, alleging the positive
+orders of the viceroy.
+
+We returned from thence to the island of Plata, where we anchored on the
+26th September, and sent some of our men that evening to _Manta_, a
+small Indian village on the continent, seven or eight leagues from
+Plata, and two or three leagues east from Cape Lorenzo. Its buildings
+are mean and scattered, but standing on an easy ascent, it has a fine
+prospect towards the sea-side. Having formerly been inhabited by the
+Spaniards, it has a fine church, adorned with carved work; but as the
+ground in the neighbourhood is very dry and sandy, it produces neither
+corn nor roots, and only a few shrubs are to be found. The inhabitants
+are supplied with provisions by sea, this being the first place at which
+ships refresh, when bound from Panama to Lima and other parts of Peru.
+They have an excellent spring of fresh water between the village and the
+sea. Opposite to this village, and a mile and a half from the shore,
+there is a very dangerous rock, being always covered by the sea; but
+about a mile within this rock there is safe anchorage, in six, eight,
+and ten fathoms, on hard clear sand; and a mile west from this, a shoal
+runs a mile out to sea. Behind the town, and directly to the south, a
+good way inland, there is a very high mountain rising up into the
+clouds, like a sugar-loaf; which serves as an excellent sea-mark, there
+being no other like it on all this coast. [161]
+
+[Footnote 161: The great Chimborazo is probably here meant, about 135
+English miles inland from Manta, and almost due east, instead of south,
+as in the test.--E]
+
+Our men landed about day-break, a mile and a half from the village, but
+the inhabitants took the alarm, and got all away, except two old women,
+from whom we learnt that the viceroy, on receiving intelligence of
+enemies having come across the isthmus of Darien into the South Sea, had
+ordered all their ships to be set on fire, all the goats in the isle of
+Plata to be destroyed, and that the inhabitants on the coast should keep
+no more provisions than were necessary for their present use.
+
+We returned to our ship at Plata, where we remained for some time
+unresolved what course to pursue. On the 2d of October, the Cygnet of
+London, Captain Swan, came to anchor in the same road. This was a
+richly-loaded ship, designed for trading on this coast, but being
+disappointed in his hopes of trade, his men had forced Captain Swan to
+take on board a company of buccaneers he fell in with at Nicoya, being
+those we heard of at Manta, who had come by land to the South Sea under
+the command of Captain Peter Harris, nephew to the Captain Harris who
+was slain before Panama. As the Cygnet was unfit for service, by reason
+of her cargo, Captain Swan sold most of his goods on credit, and threw
+the rest overboard, reserving only the fine commodities, and some iron
+for ballast. Captains Davis and Swan now joined company; and Harris was
+placed in command of a small bark. Our bark, which had been sent to
+cruise three days before the arrival of the Cygnet, now returned with a
+prize laden with timber, which they had taken in the Gulf of Guayaquil.
+The commander of this prize informed us, that it was reported at
+Guayaquil, that the viceroy was fitting out ten frigates to chase us
+from these seas. This intelligence made us wish for Captain Eaton, and
+we resolved to send out a small bark towards Lima, to invite him to
+rejoin us. We also fitted up another small bark for a fire-ship, and set
+sail for the island of _Lobos_ on the 20th October.
+
+Being about six leagues off Payta on the 2d of November, we sent 110 men
+in several canoes to attack that place. _Payta_ is a small sea-port town
+belonging to the Spaniards, in lat. 5° 15' S. built on a sandy rock near
+the sea-side, under a high hill. Although not containing more than
+seventy-five or eighty low mean houses, like most of the other buildings
+along the coast of Peru, it has two churches. The walls of these houses
+are chiefly built of a kind of bricks, made of earth and straw, only
+dried in the sun. These bricks are three feet long, two broad, and a
+foot and a half thick. In some places, instead of roofs, they only lay a
+few poles across the tops of the walls, covered with mats, though in
+other places they have regularly-constructed roofs. The cause of this
+mean kind of building is partly from the want of stones and timber, and
+partly because it never rains on this coast, so that they are only
+solicitious to keep out the sun; and these walls, notwithstanding the
+slight nature of their materials, continue good a long time, as they are
+never injured by rain. The timber used by the better sort of people has
+to be brought by sea from other places. The walls of the churches and of
+the best houses are neatly whitened, both within and without, and the
+beams, posts, and doors are all adorned with carved work. Within they
+are ornamented with good pictures, and rich hangings of tapestry or
+painted calico, brought from Spain. The houses of Payta, however, were
+not of this description, though their two churches were large and
+handsome. Close by the sea there was a small fort, armed only with
+muskets, to command the harbour, as also another fort on the top of a
+hill, which commanded both the harbour and lower fort. The inhabitants
+of Payta are obliged to bring their fresh-water from Colon, a town two
+leagues to the N.N.E. where a fresh-water river falls into the sea; and
+have also to procure fowls, hogs, plantains, maize, and other provisions
+from that and other places, owing to the barrenness of the soil in its
+own neighbourhood. The dry and barren tract of this western coast of
+America begins at Cape Blanco in the north, and reaches to Coquimbo in
+30° S. in all of which vast extent of coast I never saw or heard of any
+rain falling, nor of any thing growing whatever either in the mountains
+or vallies, except in such places as are constantly watered, in
+consequence of being on the banks of rivers and streams.
+
+The inhabitants of Colon are much given to fishing, for which purpose
+they venture out to sea in _bark-logs_.[162] These are constructed of
+several round logs of wood, forming a raft, but different according to
+the uses they are intended for, or the customs of those that make them.
+Those meant for fishing consist only of three or five logs of wood about
+eight feet long, the middle one longer than the rest, especially
+forewards, and the others gradually shorter, forming a kind of stem or
+prow to cut the waves. The logs are joined to each other's sides by
+wooden pegs and _withes_, or twisted branches of trees. Such as are
+intended for carrying merchandise are made in the same manner and shape,
+but the raft consists of twenty or thirty great trunks of trees, thirty
+or forty feet long, joined together as before. On these another row of
+shorter trees are laid across, and fastened down by wooden pegs. From,
+this double raft or bottom they raise a raft of ten feet high, by means
+of upright posts, which support two layers of thick trees laid across
+each other, like our piles of wood, but not so close as in the bottom of
+the float; these being formed only at the ends and sides, the inner part
+being left hollow. In this hollow, at the height of four feet from the
+floor of the raft, they lay a deck or floor of small poles close
+together, serving as the floor or deck of another room; and above this,
+at the same height, they lay just such another sparred deck. The lower
+room serves for the hold, in which they stow ballast, and water casks or
+jars. The second room serves for the seamen and what belongs to them.
+Above all the goods are stowed, as high as they deem fit, but seldom
+exceeding the height of ten feet. Some space is left vacant behind for
+the steersman, and before for the kitchen, especially in long voyages,
+for in these strange vessels they will venture to make voyages of five
+or six hundred leagues.
+
+[Footnote 162: I suspect this to be a mistaken translation of
+_barco-longo_, long barks, or rafts rather, as the subsequent
+description indicates.--E]
+
+In navigating these vessels, they use a very large rudder, with one mast
+in the middle of the machine, on which they have a large sail, like our
+west country barges on the river Thames. As these machines can only sail
+before the wind, they are only fit for these seas, where the wind blows
+constantly one way, seldom varying above a point or two in the whole
+voyage from Lima to Panama. If, when near Panama, they happen to meet a
+north-west wind, as sometimes happens, they must drive before it till it
+changes, merely using their best endeavours to avoid the shore, for they
+will never sink at sea. Such vessels carry sixty or seventy tons of
+merchandise, as wine, oil, flour, sugar, Quito cloth, soap, dressed
+goats skins, &c. They are navigated by three or four men only; who, on
+their arrival at Panama, sell both the goods and vessel at that place,
+as they cannot go back again with them against the trade-wind. The
+smaller fishing barks of this construction are much easier managed.
+These go out to sea at night with the land-wind, and return to the shore
+in the day with the sea-breeze; and such small _barco longos_ are used
+in many parts of America, and in some places in the East Indies. On the
+coast of Coromandel they use only one log, or sometimes two, made of
+light wood, managed by one man, without sail or rudder, who steers the
+log with a paddle, sitting with his legs in the water.[163]
+
+[Footnote 163: On the coast of Coromandel these small rafts are named
+_Catamarans_, and are employed for carrying letters or messages between
+the shore and the ships, through the tremendous surf which continually
+breaks on that coast.--E.]
+
+The next town to Payta of any consequence is _Piura_, thirty miles from
+Payta, seated in a valley on a river of the same name, which discharges
+its waters into the bay of _Chirapee_ [or Sechura.] in lat. 5° 32' S.
+This bay is seldom visited by ships of burden, being full of shoals; but
+the harbour of Payta is one of the best on the coast of Peru, being
+sheltered on the S.W. by a point of land, which renders the bay smooth
+and the anchorage safe, in from six to twenty fathoms on clear sand.
+Most ships navigating this coast, whether bound north or south, touch at
+this port for fresh water, which is brought to them from _Colon_ at a
+reasonable rate.
+
+Early in the morning of the 3d November, our men landed about four
+miles south of Payta, where they took some prisoners who were set there
+to watch. Though informed that the governor of Piura had come to the
+defence of Payta with a reinforcement of an hundred men, they
+immediately pushed to the fort on the hill, which they took with little
+resistance, on which the governor and all the inhabitants evacuated
+Payta, but which we found empty of money, goods, and provisions. That
+same evening we brought our ships to anchor near the town, in ten
+fathoms a mile from shore, and remained six days in hopes of getting a
+ransom for the town; but seeing we were not likely to have any, we set
+it on fire, and set sail at night with the land-breeze for the island of
+Lobos. The 14th we came in sight of _Lobos de Tierra_, the inner or
+northern island of Lobos, which is of moderate height, and appears at a
+distance like _Lobos del Mare_, the southern island of the same name, at
+which other island we arrived on the 19th. The evening of the 29th we
+set sail for the bay of Guayaquil, which lies between Cape _Blanco_ in
+lat. 4° 18', and the point of _Chanday_, or _Carnera_, in 2° 18' both S.
+In the bottom of this bay is a small isle, called _Santa Clara_,
+extending E. and W. and having many shoals, which make ships that intend
+for Guayaquil to pass on the south side of this island.
+
+From the isles of Santa Clara to _Punta arena_, the N.W. point of the
+island of Puna, is seven leagues [thirty statute miles] N.N.E. Here
+ships bound for Guayaquil take in pilots, who live in a town in Puna of
+the same name, at its N.E. extremity, seven leagues [twenty-five miles]
+from Punta arena. The island of Puna is low, stretching fourteen leagues
+E. and W. and five leagues from N. to S.[164] It has a strong tide
+running along its shores, which are full of little creeks and harbours.
+The interior of this island consists of good pasture land, intermixed
+with some woodlands, producing various kinds of trees to us unknown.
+Among these are abundance of _Palmitoes_, a tree about the thickness of
+an ordinary ash, and thirty feet high, having a straight trunk without
+branches or leaf, except at the very top, which spreads out into many
+small branches three or four feet long. At the extremity of each of
+these is a single leaf, which at first resembles a fan plaited together,
+and then opens out like a large unfolded fan. The houses in the town of
+Puna are built on posts ten or twelve feet high, and are thatched with
+palmito leaves, the inhabitants having to go up to them by means of
+ladders. The best place for anchorage is directly opposite the town, in
+five fathoms, a cable's length from shore.
+
+[Footnote 164: Puna is nearly forty English miles from N.E. to S.W. and
+about sixteen miles from N.W. to S.E.]
+
+From Puna to Guayaquil is seven leagues, the entrance into the river of
+that name being two miles across, and it afterwards runs up into the
+country with a pretty straight course, the ground on both sides being
+marshy and full of red mangrove trees. About four miles below the town
+of Guayaquil, the river is divided into two channels by a small low
+island, that on the west being broadest, though the other is as deep.
+From the upper end of this island to the town is about a league, and the
+river about the same in breadth, in which a ship of large burden may
+ride safely, especially on the side nearest the town. The town of
+Guayaquil stands close to the river, being partly built on an ascent,
+and partly at the foot of a small hill, having a steep descent to the
+river. It is defended by two forts on the low grounds, and a third on
+the hill, and is one of the best ports belonging to the Spaniards in the
+South Sea. It is under the command of a governor, and is beautified by
+several fine churches and other good buildings. From this place they
+export cocoas, hides, tallow, sarsaparilla, drugs, and a kind of woollen
+cloth called Quito-cloth. The cocoas grow on both sides of the river
+above the town, having a smaller nut than those of Campeachy.[165]
+Sarsaparilla delights in watery places, near the side of the river.
+
+[Footnote 165: The _cacao_, or chocolate-nut is probably here meant, not
+the cocoanut.--E.]
+
+Quito is a populous place in the interior of the country, almost under
+the line, being in lat. 0° 12' S. and long. 78° 22' W. from Greenwich.
+It is inclosed by a ridge of high mountains, abounding in gold, being
+inhabited by a few Spaniards, and by many Indians under the Spanish
+dominion. The rivers or streams which descend from the surrounding
+mountains carry great abundance of gold dust in their course into the
+low grounds, especially after violent rains, and this gold is collected
+out of the sand by washing. Quito is reckoned the richest place for gold
+in all Peru,[166] but it is unwholesome, the inhabitants being subject
+to headaches, fevers, diarrhaes, and dysenteries; but Guayaquil is
+greatly more healthy. At Quito is made a considerable quantity of
+coarse woollen cloth, worn only by the lower class all over the kingdom
+of Peru.
+
+[Footnote 166: Quito was annexed to the empire of Peru, not long before
+the Spanish conquest, but is now in the viceroyalty of New Granada.--E.]
+
+Leaving our ships at Cape Blanco, we went in a bark and several canoes
+to make an attempt on Guayaquil, but were discovered, and returned
+therefore to our ships, in which we sailed for the island of Plata, in
+lat. 1° 15' S. where we arrived on the 16th December. Having provided
+ourselves with water on the opposite coast of the continent, we set sail
+on the 23d with a brisk gale at S.S.W. directing our course for a town
+called _Lovalia_, in the bay of Panama. Next morning we passed in sight
+of Cape _Passado_, in lat. 0° 28' S. being a very high round point,
+divided in the middle, bare towards the sea, but covered on the land
+side with fruit-trees, the land thereabout being hilly and covered with
+wood. Between this and Cape San Francisco there are many small points,
+inclosing as many sandy creeks full of trees of various kinds. Meaning
+to look out for canoes, we were indifferent what river we came to, so we
+endeavoured to make for the river of St Jago, by reason of its nearness
+to the island of _Gallo_, in which there is much gold, and where was
+good anchorage for our ships. We passed Cape St Francisco, whence to the
+north the land along the sea is full of trees of vast height and
+thickness.
+
+Between this cape and the island of Gallo there are several large
+rivers, all of which we passed in our way to that of St Jago, a large
+navigable river in lat. 2° N.[167] About seven leagues before it reaches
+the sea, this river divides into two branches, which inclose an island
+four leagues in circuit. Both branches are very deep, but the S.W.
+channel is the broadest, and the other has sand-banks at its mouth,
+which cannot be passed at low-water. Above the island the river is a
+league broad, having a straight channel and swift current, and is
+navigable three leagues up, but how much farther I know not. It runs
+through a very rich soil, producing all kinds of the tallest trees that
+are usually met with in this country, but especially red and white
+cotton-trees, and cabbage-trees of large size. The _white cotton-tree_
+grows not unlike an oak, but much bigger and taller, having a straight
+trunk, without branches to the top, where it sends out strong branches.
+The bark is very smooth, the leaves of the size of a plum-tree leaf,
+dark green, oval, smooth, and jagged at the ends. These trees are not
+always biggest near the roots, but often swell out to a great size in
+the middle of their trunks. They bear _silk-cotton_, which falls to the
+ground in November and December, but is not so substantial as that of
+the cotton-shrub, being rather like the down of thistles. Hence they do
+not think it worth being gathered in America; but in the East Indies it
+is used for stuffing pillows. The old leaves of this tree fall off in
+April, and are succeeded by fresh leaves in the course of a week. The
+_red cotton-tree_ is somewhat less in size, but in other respects
+resembles the other, except that it produces _no cotton_. The wood is
+hard, though that of both kinds is somewhat spongy. Both are found in
+fat soils, both in the East and West Indies.
+
+[Footnote 167: Nearly in the indicated latitude is the river of Patia,
+in the province of Barbacoas. The river St Jago of modern maps on this
+coast is in lat. 1° 18' N. in the province of Atacames, or
+Esmeraldas.--E.]
+
+The _cabbage-tree_ is the tallest that is found in these woods, some
+exceeding 120 feet in height. It likewise is without boughs or branches
+to the top, where its branches are the thickness of a man's arm, and
+twelve or fourteen feet long. Two feet from the stem come forth many
+small long leaves of an inch broad, so thick and regular on both sides
+that they cover the whole branch. In the midst of these high branches is
+what is called the cabbage, which, when taken out of the outer leaves,
+is a foot in length, and as thick as the small of a man's leg, as white
+as milk, and both sweet and wholesome. Between the cabbages and the
+large branches many small twigs sprout out, two feet long and very close
+together, at the extremities of which grow hard round berries, about the
+size of cherries, which fall once a year on the ground, and are
+excellent food for hogs. The trunk has projecting rings half a foot
+asunder, the bark being thin and brittle, the wood hard and black, and
+the pith white. As the tree dies when deprived of its head, which is the
+cabbage, it is usually cut down before gathering the fruit.
+
+As the coast and country of Lima has continual dry weather, so this
+northern part of Peru is seldom without rain, which is perhaps one
+reason why this part of the coast is so little known. Besides, in going
+from Panama to Lima, they seldom pass along the coast, but sail to the
+west as far as the Cobaya Islands, to meet the west winds, and thence
+stand over for Cape St Francisco. In returning to Panama, they keep
+along the coast, but being deeply laden, their ships are not fit to
+enter the rivers, the banks of which, and the seacoast, are covered with
+trees and bushes, and are therefore convenient for the natives to lie in
+ambush. The Indians have some plantations of maize and plantains, and
+also breed fowls and hogs. On the 27th December, 1684, we entered the
+river of St Jago [_Patia_] with four canoes by the lesser branch, and
+met with no inhabitants till six leagues from its mouth, where we
+observed two small huts thatched with palmito leaves. We saw at the same
+time several Indians, with their families and household goods, paddling
+up the river much faster than we could row, as they kept near the banks.
+On the opposite, or west side, we saw many other huts, about a league
+off but did not venture to cross the river, as the current was very
+rapid. In the two huts on the east side we only found a few plantains,
+some fowls, and one hog, which seemed to be of the European kind, such
+as the Spaniards brought formerly to America, and chiefly to Jamaica,
+Hispaniola, and Cuba, where, being previously marked, they feed in the
+woods all day, and are recalled to their pens at night by the sound of
+conch shells.
+
+We returned next morning to the mouth of the river, intending to proceed
+to the isle of _Gallo_, where we had directed the ships to meet us. This
+small uninhabited island, in lat. 3° N.[168] is situated in a spacious
+bay, three leagues from the river _Tomaco_, and four and a half from an
+Indian village of the same name. It is moderately high, and well stored
+with timber, having a good sandy bay at its N.E. end, near which is a
+fine stream of fresh water; and over against the bay there is good
+anchorage in six or seven fathoms. There is only one channel by which to
+approach this island, in which are four fathoms, and into which it is
+necessary to enter with the flood, and to come out with the ebb. The
+river _Tomaco_ is supposed to have its origin in the rich mountains of
+Quito, and takes its name from that of a village on its banks.[169] The
+country on this river is well peopled by Indians, among whom are a few
+Spaniards, who traffic for gold with the natives. This river is so
+shallow at the mouth, that it can only be entered by barks. The town of
+_Tomaco_ is small, and situated near the mouth of the river, being
+chiefly occupied by the Spaniards, who trade in this neighbourhood. From
+this place to that branch of the river St Jago where we were then at
+anchor is five leagues.
+
+[Footnote 168: The lat. of Gallo is only 1° 57' N. That assigned in the
+text would lead to the isle of Gorgona, in 2° 54' N. but the description
+of our author suits much better with Gallo.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 169: The island and point of Tomaco are placed in modern maps
+at the mouth of the Mira, off which are many islands, in lat. 1° 40'N.]
+
+As the land here is low and full of creeks, we left the river on the
+21st December, and crossed these small bays in our canoes. In our way we
+saw an Indian hut, whence we took the master and all his family, and
+rowing forwards, we came to Tomaco at midnight. We here seized all the
+inhabitants, among whom was one Don Diego de Pinas, a Spanish knight,
+whose ship was at anchor not far off to load with timber, and in which
+we found thirteen jars of good wine, but no other loading. An Indian
+canoe came to us, in which were three natives, who were straight and
+well-limbed, but of low stature, having black hair, long visages, small
+eyes and noses, and dark complexions. Several of our men, who had gone
+seven or eight leagues up the river, returned on the 31st, bringing with
+them several ounces of gold, which they had found in a Spanish house,
+whence the inhabitants had fled.
+
+On the 1st January, 1685, while going in our canoes from Tomaco to
+Gallo, we took a packet of letters in a Spanish boat bound from Panama
+to Lima, by which the president of Panama wrote to hasten the Plate
+fleet from Lima, as the armada from Spain had arrived in Porto Bello.
+This intelligence made us change our intention of proceeding to Lavelia,
+instead of which we now proposed to make for the _Pearl Islands_, not
+far from Panama, past which all ships bound from the south for Panama
+must necessarily pass. We accordingly sailed on the 7th, and next day
+took a vessel of ninety tons, laden with flour; and continuing our
+voyage with a gentle wind at S. we anchored on the 9th at the island of
+_Gorgona_, on its west side, in thirty-eight fathoms clean ground, two
+cables length from shore, in a sandy bay, the land round which is very
+low.
+
+_Gorgona_ is in lat. 2° 54' N. twenty-five leagues from Gallo, and is
+remarkable for two high risings or hills called the Saddles. This island
+is two leagues long by one league broad, and is about four from the
+continent, having another small isle at its west end. It is full of tall
+trees, and is watered by many rivulets, having no animals except
+monkies, rabbits, and snakes. It is very subject to heavy rains, and the
+only observable difference in the seasons here is, that the rains are
+more moderate in summer. The sea around is so deep that there is no
+anchorage except at the west end, where the tide flows eight feet.
+Muscles and periwinkles are here in great plenty, and the monkies open
+the shells at low water. There are also abundance of pearl oysters,
+fixed to loose rocks by their beards, four, five, and six fathoms under
+water. These resemble our oysters, but are somewhat flatter and thinner
+in the shell, their flesh being slimy and not eatable, unless dried
+beforehand and afterwards boiled. Some shells contain twenty or thirty
+seed pearls, and others have one or two pearls of some size, lying at
+the head of the oyster, between the fish and the shell; but the inside
+of the shells have a brighter lustre than even the pearls.
+
+The 13th January we pursued our voyage for _Isla del Rey_, being two men
+of war, two tenders a fire-ship, and a prize vessel. With the trade-wind
+at S. we sailed along the continent, having low land near the sea but
+seeing high mountains up the country. On the 16th we passed Cape
+_Corientes_, in lat. 5° 32' N. being a high point with four small
+hillocks on the top, and at this place found a current setting to the
+north. The 21st we came in sight of Point _Garachina_, in lat. 7° 20'
+N.[170] The land here being high and rocky, and without trees near the
+shore. Within the point there is plenty of oysters and muscles. About
+twelve leagues from this point are the islands called _Islas del Rey_,
+or the Pearl Islands.[171] Between these and the Point of Garachina
+there is a small flat barren island, called _Galleria_, near which we
+came to anchor.
+
+[Footnote 170: Carachina Point is in lat. 8° 10' N.]
+
+[Footnote 171: The Isla del Rey is a considerable island in the bay of
+Panama, and the Archipelago de las Perlas are a multitude of [illegible]
+islets N. by W. from that island.--E.]
+
+The _King's_ or _Pearl_ Islands, are a considerable number of low woody
+isles, seven leagues from the nearest continent, and twelve leagues from
+Panama, stretching fourteen leagues from N.W. by N. to S.E. by S. Though
+named Pearl Islands in the maps, I could never see any pearls about
+them. The northermost of these isles, called _Pachea_ or _Pacheque_,
+which is very small, is eleven or twelve leagues from Panama; the most
+southerly is called St Paul's Island, and the rest, though larger, have
+no names. Some of them are planted with bananas, plantains, and rice by
+negroes belonging to the inhabitants of Panama. The channel between
+these islands and the continent is seven or eight leagues broad, of a
+moderate depth, and has good anchorage all the way. These isles lie very
+close together, yet have channels between them fit for boats.
+
+At one end of _St Paul's_ Island, there is a good careening place, in a
+deep channel inclosed by the land, into which the entrance is on the
+north side, where the tide rises ten feet. We brought our ships in on
+the 25th, being spring tide, and having first cleaned our barks, we sent
+them on the 27th to cruise towards Panama. The fourth day after, they
+brought us in a prize coming from Lavelia, laden with maize or Indian
+corn, salted beef and fowls. _Lavelia_ is a large town on the bank of a
+river which runs into the north side of the bay of Panama, and is seven
+leagues from the sea; and _Nata_ is another town situated in a plain on
+a branch of the same river.[172] These two places supply Panama with
+beef, hogs, fowls, and maize. In the harbour where we careened, we found
+abundance of oysters, muscles, limpits, and clams, which last are a kind
+of oysters, which stick so close to the rocks that they must be opened
+where they grow, by those who would come at their meat. We also found
+here some pigeons and turtle-doves.
+
+[Footnote 172: From the circumstances in the text Lavelia seems to be
+the town now named San Francisco, near the head of the river Salado,
+which runs into the gulf Parita, on the _west_ side of the bay of
+Panama.--E.]
+
+Having well careened our ships by the 14th February, and provided a
+stock of wood and water, we sailed on the 18th, and came to anchor in
+the great channel between the isles and the continent, in fifteen
+fathoms, on soft ooze, and cruised next day towards Panama, about which
+the shore seemed very beautiful, interspersed with a variety of hills
+and many small thickets. About a league from the continent there are
+several small isles, partly ornamented with scattered trees, and the
+_King's Isles_ on the opposite side of the channel give a delightful
+prospect, from their various shapes and situations. The 18th we went
+towards Panama, and anchored directly opposite Old Panama, once a place
+of note, but mostly laid in ashes by Sir Henry Morgan, and not since
+rebuilt. New Panama is about four leagues from the old town, near the
+side of a river, being a very handsome city, on a spacious bay of the
+same name, into which many long navigable rivers discharge their waters,
+some of which have gold in their sands. The country about Panama affords
+a delightful prospect from the sea, having a great diversity of hills,
+vallies, groves, and plains. The houses are mostly of brick, and pretty
+lofty, some being handsomely built, especially that inhabited by the
+president; the churches, monasteries, and other public edifices, making
+the finest appearance of any place I have seen in the Spanish West
+Indies. It is fortified by a high stone wall, mounted by a considerable
+number of guns, which were formerly only on the land side, but have now
+been added to the side next the sea. The city has vast trade, being the
+staple or emporium for all goods to and from Peru and Chili; besides
+that, every three years, when the Spanish _armada_ comes to Porto Bello,
+the _Plate fleet_ comes here with the treasure belonging to the king and
+the merchants, whence it is carried on mules by land to Porto Bello, at
+which time, from the vast concourse of people, everything here is
+enormously dear.
+
+The Spanish armada, which comes every three years to the West Indies,
+arrives first at Carthagena, whence an express is dispatched by land to
+the viceroy at Lima, and two packets are also sent by sea, one for Lima,
+and the other for Mexico, which last I suppose goes by way of _Vera
+Cruz_. That for Lima goes first by land to Panama, and thence by sea to
+Lima. After remaining sixty days at Carthagena, the armada sails to
+Porto Bello, where it only remains thirty days to take in the royal
+treasure brought here from Panama, said to amount to twenty-four
+millions of dollars, besides treasure and goods belonging to the
+merchants. From Porto Bello the armada weighs always on the thirtieth
+day, but the admiral will sometimes stay a week longer at the mouth of
+the river, to oblige the merchants. It then returns to Carthagena, where
+it meets the king's money from that part of the country, as also a large
+Spanish galleon or patache, which, on the first arrival of the armada at
+Carthagena, had been dispatched along the coast to collect the royal
+treasure. The armada, after a set stay at Carthagena, sails for the
+Havannah, where a small squadron called the _flota_ meets it from Vera
+Cruz, bringing the riches of Mexico, and the rich goods brought by the
+annual ship from Manilla. When all the ships are joined, they sail for
+Spain through the gulf of Florida.
+
+Porto Bello is a very unhealthy place, on which account the merchants of
+Lima stay there as short time as possible. Panama is seated in a much
+better air, enjoying the sea-breeze every day from ten or eleven in the
+forenoon till eight or nine at night, when the land-breeze begins, and
+blows till next morning. Besides, on the land side Panama has an open
+champaign country, and is seldom troubled with fogs; neither is the
+rainy season, which continues from May till November, nearly so
+excessive as at Porto Bello, though severe enough in June, July, and
+August, in which season the merchants of Peru, who are accustomed to a
+constant serene air, without rains or fogs, are obliged to cut off their
+hair, to preserve them from fevers during their stay.
+
+The 21st February, near the Perico islands opposite to Panama, we took
+another prize from Lavelia, laden with beeves, hogs, fowls, and salt.
+The 24th we went to the isle of Taboga, six leagues south of Panama.
+This island is three miles long and two broad, being very rocky and
+steep all round, except on the north side, where the shore has an easy
+dope. In the middle of the isle the soil is black and rich, where
+abundance of plantains and bananas are produced, and near the sea there
+are cocoa and _mammee_ trees. These are large and straight in their
+stems, without knots, boughs, or branches, and sixty or seventy feet
+high. At the top there are many small branches set close together,
+bearing round fruit about the size of a large quince, covered with a
+grey rind, which is brittle before the fruit is ripe, but grows yellow
+when the fruit comes to maturity, and is then easily peeled off. The
+ripe fruit is also yellow, resembling a carrot in its flesh, and both
+smells and tastes well, having two rough flat kernels in the middle,
+about the size of large almonds. The S.W. side of this isle is covered
+with trees, affording abundant fuel, and the N. side has a fine stream
+of good water, which falls from the mountains into the sea. Near this
+there was formerly a pretty town with a handsome church, but it has been
+mostly destroyed by the privateers. There is good anchorage opposite
+this town a mile from the shore, in sixteen to eighteen fathoms on soft
+ooze. At the N.N.W. end is a small town called _Tabogilla_, and on the
+N.E. of this another small town or village without a name.
+
+While at anchor near _Tabogilla_, we were in great danger from a
+pretended merchant, who brought a bark to us in the night, under
+pretence of being laden with merchandise to trade with us privately, but
+which was in reality a fire-ship fitted out for our destruction. But on
+her approach, some of our men hailed her to come to anchor, and even
+fired upon her, which so terrified the men that they got into their
+canoes, having first set her on fire, on which we cut our cables and got
+out of her way. This fire-ship was constructed and managed by one Bond,
+who formerly deserted from us to the Spaniards. While busied next
+morning in recovering our anchors, we discovered a whole fleet of canoes
+full of men, passing between Tabogilla and another isle. These proved to
+be French and English buccaneers, lately come from the North Sea across
+the isthmus of Darien, 200 of them being French and 80 English. These
+last were divides between our two ships, under Captains Davis and Swan;
+and the Frenchmen were put into our prize, named the Flower, under the
+command of Captain Gronet, their countryman, in return for which he
+offered commissions to Captains Davis and Swan, from the governor of
+Petite Goave, as it is the custom of the French privateers to carry with
+them blank commissions. Captain Davis accepted one, but Captain Swan had
+one already from the Duke of York.
+
+Learning from these men that Captain Townley was coming across the
+isthmus of Darien with 180 Englishmen, we set sail on the 2d March for
+the gulf of _San Miguel_ to meet Townley. This gulf is on the east side
+of the great Bay of Panama, in lat. 8° 15' N. long. 79° 10' W. thirty
+leagues S.E. from Panama; from whence the passage lies between Isola del
+Rey and the main. In this gulf many rivers discharge their waters. Its
+southern point is Cape _Carachina_, in lat. 8° 6' N. and the northern,
+named Cape _Gardo_, is in lat. 8° 18' N. The most noted rivers which
+discharge themselves into this gulf, are named _Santa Maria, Sambo_, and
+_Congo_. This last rises far within the country, and after being joined
+by many small streams on both sides of its course, falls into the north
+side of the gulf a league from Cape Gardo. It is deep and navigable for
+several leagues into the country, but not broad, and is neglected by the
+Spaniards owing to its nearness to the river of Santa Maria, where they
+have gold mines. _Santa Maria_ is the largest of the rivers in this
+gulf, being navigable for eight or nine leagues, as far as the tide
+flows, above which it divides into several branches fit only for canoes.
+In this river the tide of flood rises eighteen feet. About the year
+1665, the Spaniards built the town of Santa Maria, near six leagues up
+this river,[173] to be near the gold mines. I have been told, that,
+besides the gold usually procured out of the ore and sand, they
+sometimes find lumps wedged between the fissures of rocks as large as
+hens eggs or larger. One of these was got by Mr Harris, who got here 120
+pounds weight of gold, and in his lump there were several crevices full
+of earth and dust.
+
+[Footnote 173: In modern maps the river which seems to agree with this
+description of the Santa Maria, is called _Tlace_, one of the principal
+branches of which is named Chuchunque. The gold mines of Cana and Balsa
+are placed on some of its branches, on which likewise there are several
+towns, as Nisperal, Fichichi, Pungana, Praya, and Balsa.--E.]
+
+The Spaniards employ their slaves to dig these mines in the dry season;
+but when the rivers overflow, as the mines cannot be then worked, the
+Indians wash the gold out of the sands that are forced down from the
+mountains, and which gold they sell to the Spaniards, who gain as much
+in that way as they do by their mines. During the wet season, the
+Spaniards retire with their slaves to Panama. Near the mouth of the
+Santa Maria, the Spaniards have lately built another town, called
+_Scuchadores_,[174] in a more airy situation than Santa Maria. The land
+all about the gulf of San Miguel is low and fertile, and is covered with
+great numbers of large trees.
+
+[Footnote 174: This probably is that named Nisperal in modern geography,
+the appellation in the text being the Spanish name, and the other the
+name given by the Indians.--E.]
+
+While crossing the isthmus, Gronet had seen Captain Townley and his crew
+at the town of Santa Maria, busied in making causes in which to embark
+on the South Sea, the town being at that time abandoned by the
+Spaniards; and on the 3d March, when we were steering for the gulf of
+San Miguel, we met Captain Townley and his crew in two barks which they
+had takes, one laden with brandy, wine, and sugar, and the other with
+flour. As he wanted room for his men, he distributed the jars among our
+ships, in which the Spaniards transport their brandy, wine, and oil.
+These jars hold seven or eight gallons each. Being now at anchor among
+the King's islands, but our water growing scarce, we sailed for Cape
+Carachina, in hopes of providing ourselves with that necessary article,
+and anchored within that cape, in four fathoms on the 22d. We here found
+the tide to rise nine feet, and the flood to set N.N.E. the ebb running
+S.S.W. The natives brought us some refreshments, but as they did not in
+the least understand Spanish, we supposed they had no intercourse with
+the Spaniards.
+
+Finding no water here, we sailed for _Porto Pinas_, about fifty miles to
+the S. by W. in lat. 7° 33' N. which is so named from the vast numbers
+of pine-trees which grow in its neighbourhood. The country here rises by
+a gentle ascent from the sea to a considerable height, and is pretty
+woody near the shore. At the entrance into the harbour there are two
+small rocks, which render the passage narrow, and the harbour within is
+rather small, besides which it is exposed to the S.W. wind. We sent our
+boats into this harbour for water, which they could not procure, owing
+to a heavy sea near the shore; wherefore we again made sail for Cape
+Carachina, where we arrived on the 29th March. On our way we took a
+canoe, in which were four Indians and a Mulatto, and as the last was
+found to have been in the fire-ship sent against us, he was hanged.
+
+On the 11th of April we anchored among the King's isles, where we met
+with Captain Harris, who had come with some men by way of the river of
+Santa Maria. The 19th, 250 men were sent in canoes to the river
+_Cheapo_, to surprise the town of that name. The 21st we followed them
+to the island of _Chepillo_, directly opposite the mouth of the river
+Chepo, or Cheapo, in the bay of Panama, about seven leagues from the
+city of Panama, and one league from the continent. This is a pleasant
+island, about two miles long, and as much in breadth, low on the north
+side, but rising by a gentle ascent to the south. The soil is very good,
+and produces in the low grounds great store of fine fruits, as
+plantains, mammees, sapotas, sapadillos, avogato pears, star-apples, and
+others. Half a mile from shore there is good anchorage, opposite to
+which is a very good spring of fresh-water near the sea.
+
+The _Sapadillo_-tree is altogether like a pear-tree, and the fruit
+resembles a bergamot pear, but somewhat longer. When first gathered it
+is hard and the juice clammy; but after keeping a few days it becomes
+juicy and sweet. It has two or three black kernels, resembling
+pomegranate seeds. The _Avogato_-tree is higher than our pear-trees,
+having a black smooth bark, and oval leaves. The fruit is about the size
+of a large lemon, green at first, but becomes yellow when ripe, having a
+yellowish pulp as soft as butter. After being three or four days
+gathered, the rind comes easily off, and as the fruit is insipid it is
+commonly eaten with sugar and limejuice, being esteemed a great
+provocative by the Spaniards, who have therefore planted them in most of
+their settlements on the Atlantic. It has a stone within as large as a
+horse-plum. The _Sapota_-tree, or _Mammee-sapota_, is neither so large
+nor so tall as the wild mammae at Taboga, nor is the fruit so large or
+so round. The rind is smooth, and the pulp, which is pleasant and
+wholesome, is quite red, with a rough longish stone. There are also here
+some wild _mammee_-trees, which grow very tall and straight, and are fit
+for masts, but the fruit is not esteemed. The tree producing the
+_star-apples_ resembles our quince-tree, but is much larger, and has
+abundance of broad oval leaves. The fruit is as big as a large apple,
+and is reckoned very good, but I never tasted it.
+
+The river _Chepo_, or _Cheapo_, rises in the mountains near the north
+side of the isthmus, being inclosed between a northern and southern
+range, between which it makes its way to the S.W. after which it
+describes nearly a semicircle, and runs gently into the sea about seven
+leagues E. from Panama, in lat. 9° 3' N. long. 79° 51' W. Its mouth is
+very deep, and a quarter of a mile broad, but is so obstructed at the
+entrance by sands as only to be navigable by barks. About six leagues
+from the sea stands the city of _Cheapo_, on the _left_ bunk of the
+river.[175] This place stands in a champaign country, affording a very
+pleasant prospect, as it has various hills in the neighbourhood covered
+with wood, though most of the adjacent lands are pasture-grounds to the
+north of the river, but the country south from the river is covered with
+wood for many miles.
+
+[Footnote 175: In modern maps the town of Chepo is placed on the _right_
+bank of the river, as descending the stream, and only about five miles
+up the river.--E.]
+
+Our men returned from Cheapo on the 24th, having taken that town without
+opposition, but found nothing there worth mention. The 25th we were
+joined by Captain Harris, and arrived at Taboga on the 28th, when,
+finding ourselves nearly a thousand strong, we meditated an attack on
+Panama; but, being informed by our prisoners that the Spaniards there
+had received considerable reinforcements from Porto Bello, that design
+was laid aside. The 25th May we had intelligence from some prisoners
+that the Lima fleet was daily expected, whereupon we anchored in a
+narrow channel, a mile long and not above seven paces wide, formed by
+two or three small islands on the south side of the island of
+_Pacheque_. Our fleet now consisted of ten sail, only two of which were
+ships of war, that commanded by Captain Davis having 36 guns and 156,
+while Captain Swan's carried 16 guns and 140 men. The rest were only
+provided with small arms, and our whole force amounted to 960 men. We
+had also a fire-ship.
+
+Hitherto we had the wind at N.N.E. with fair weather, but on the 28th of
+May the rainy season began. On that day, about 11 a.m. it began to clear
+up, and we discovered the Spanish fleet three leagues W.N.W. from the
+island of Pacheque, standing to the east, we being then at anchor a
+league S.E. from that isle, between it and the continent. We set sail
+about three p.m. bearing down upon the Spaniards right before the wind,
+while they kept close upon a wind to meet us. Night coming on, we only
+exchanged a few shots at that time. As soon as it began to be dark, the
+Spanish admiral shewed a light at his top, as a signal for his fleet to
+anchor. In half an hour this was taken down; but soon after a light
+appeared as before, which went to leewards, which we followed under
+sail, supposing it to be still the admiral; but this was a stratagem of
+the Spaniards to deceive as, being at the top-mast head of one of their
+barks, and effectually succeeded, as we found in the morning they had
+gained the weather-gage of us. They now bore down upon us under full
+sail, so that we were forced to make a running fight all next day,
+almost quite round the bay of Panama, and came at length to anchor over
+against the island of Pacheque. As Captain Townley was hard pressed by
+the Spaniards, he was forced to make a bold run through the
+before-mentioned narrow channel, between Pacheque and the three small
+islands; and Captain Harris was obliged to separate from us during the
+fight. Thus our long-projected design vanished into smoke.
+
+According to the report of some prisoners taken afterwards, the Spanish
+fleet consisted of fourteen sail, besides _periagoes_, or large boats of
+twelve or fourteen oars each, and among these there were eight ships of
+good force, mounting from eight to forty-eight guns, with two
+fire-ships, and computed to contain 3000 men. In the morning of the 30th
+we saw the Spanish fleet at anchor, three leagues from us to leeward,
+and by ten a.m. they were under sail with an easy gale from the S.
+making the best of their way to Panama. In this affair we had but one
+man slain, but never knew the loss sustained by the Spaniards. Captain
+Gronet and his Frenchmen never joined us in this fight, laying the fault
+upon his men, wherefore he was ordered in a consultation to leave us;
+after which we resolved to sail for the islands of Quibo, or Cobaya, in
+quest of Captain Harris.
+
+We sailed on the 1st June, 1685, with the wind at S.S.W. passing between
+Cape Carachina and _Islas del Rey_. The 10th we came in sight of _Moro
+de Puercos_, a high round hill on the coast of Lavelia, in lat. 7° 12'
+N. round which the coast makes a turn northwards to the isles of Quibo.
+On this part of the coast there are many rivers and creeks, but not near
+so large as those on the east side of the bay of Panama. Near the sea
+this western coast of the bay is partly hilly and partly low land, with
+many thick woods, but in the interior there are extensive savannahs or
+fruitful plains, well stored with cattle. Some of the rivers on this
+side produce gold, but not in such abundance as on the other side; and
+there are hardly any Spanish settlements on this side, except along the
+rivers leading to Lavelia and Nata, which are the only places I know of
+between Panama and _Pueblo nova_. From Panama there is good travelling
+all over Mexico, through savannahs or plains; but towards Peru there is
+no passage by land beyond the river Chepo, by reason of thick woods and
+many rivers and mountains.
+
+We arrived at the isle of _Quibo_ on the 15th June, where we found
+Captain Harris. This isle is in lat 7° 26' N. and long. 82° 13' W. It is
+near seven leagues long by four broad, being all low land, except at its
+N.E. end, on which side, and also to the east, there is excellent water.
+It abounds in many kinds of trees, among which are great numbers of deer
+and black monkeys, the flesh of which is reckoned very wholesome; and it
+has some guanas and snakes. A sand-bank runs out half a mile into the
+sea from the S.E. end of this island, and on its east side, a league to
+the north of this, there is a rock a mile from the shore, which is seen
+above water at last quarter of the ebb. In all other places there is
+safe anchorage a quarter of a mile from the shore, in six, eight, ten,
+and twelve fathoms, on clean sand and ooze. The isle of _Quicarra_, to
+the south of Quibo, is pretty large; and to the north of it is a small
+isle named Ranchina, which produces great plenty of certain trees called
+_Palma-Maria_. These are straight, tough, and of good length, and are
+consequently fit for masts, the grain of the wood having a gradual twist
+or spiral direction; but, notwithstanding the name, they have no
+resemblance to palms. To the N.E. of Quibo are the small islands of
+_Canales_ and _Cantarras_, in the channels between which there is good
+anchorage. These islands have plenty of wood and water, and appear at a
+distance as if part of the continent; and as the island of Quibo is the
+most considerable, these isles are generally named collectively the
+Quibo islands.
+
+Having failed in our designs at sea, it was agreed to try our fortune on
+land, and the city of Leon, near the coast of Nicaragua in Mexico, was
+pitched upon, as being nearest us. Being in want of canoes for landing
+our men, we cut down trees to make as many as we had occasion for, and
+in the mean time 150 men were detached to take _Puebla nova_, a town on
+the continent, near the Quibo island,[176] in hopes of getting some
+provisions. They easily took that town, but got nothing there except an
+empty bark, and returned to us on the 26th June. Captain Knight came
+back to us on the 5th July, having been farther to the west, but meeting
+with no prize, he had gone south to the bay of Guayaquil, where he took
+two _barco-longas_, with wine, oil, brandy, sugar, soap, and other
+commodities. Knight learnt from his prisoners that certain merchant
+ships, designed to have accompanied the Spanish fleet to Panama,
+remained behind at Payta, which he might easily have taken if he had
+been provided with a stronger force.
+
+[Footnote 176: The only place in modern geography resembling the name,
+and agreeing with the description in the text, is San Pablo on the S.
+coast of Veragua, in lat. 8° 9' N. and long. 83° W. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+Our canoes being all ready, we sailed from Quibo on the 20th July
+towards Realejo, a port a small way to the N.W. of Leon, being now 640
+men, with eight ships, three tenders, and a fire-ship. Coasting along to
+the N.W. we passed the gulfs of Dulce and Nicoya, and the _Isla del
+Cano_, the land along the coast being low and covered with wood, but
+almost destitute of inhabitants. August 8th, in lat. 11° 20' N. we got
+sight of _Volcano viejo_, or Old Volcano, the sea-mark for Realejo,
+bearing from us N.E. by N. when we made ready to land next day.
+Accordingly, we sent 520 men on the 9th in thirty-one canoes to attack
+the harbour of Realejo. The weather was fair and the wind favourable
+till two p.m. when a tempest arose, attended by thunder and lightning,
+which almost overwhelmed us in the sea. It subsided, however, in half an
+hoar, as did the agitation of the waves; it being observable in these
+hot climates that the waves soon rise and soon fall. It became calm
+about seven p.m. but as we could not get ready to land that night before
+day, being then five leagues from shore, we remained nearly in the same
+place till next evening, that we might not be discovered.
+
+About three next morning another tornado had nearly put an end to us and
+our enterprise, but it did not last long, and we entered the creek, on
+the S.E. side of the harbour, leading to Realejo in the night, but durst
+not proceed further till day-break. We then rowed deeper into the creek,
+which is very narrow, the land on both sides being very marshy and full
+of mangrove trees, through among which it is impossible to pass, and
+beyond these, where the ground is firm, the Spaniards had cast up a
+small entrenchment. We rowed as fast as we could and landed 470 men, the
+remainder, among whom I was, being left to guard the canoes.
+
+The city of Leon stands twenty miles up the country in a sandy plain,
+near a peaked burning mountain, called _El Rico_, or the Volcano of
+Leon, the way to that city from where our people landed being through a
+champaign country covered with long grass. Between the landing place and
+the city were several sugar works, and about midway a beautiful river,
+but fordable. Two miles before coming to the city there was an Indian
+town, whence a pleasant sandy road led to the city. The houses in Leon
+were large and built of stone, but low and roofed with tiles, having
+many gardens among them, with a cathedral and three other churches. It
+stands in an extensive sandy plain or savannah, which absorbs all the
+rain, and being entirely free from wood, it has free access to the
+breezes on all sides. These circumstances render it a healthy and
+pleasant place, but not of much commerce, all the wealth of its
+inhabitants consisting in cattle and sugar works.
+
+Our people began their march for Leon at eight a.m. the van consisting
+of eighty of the briskest men, being led by Captain Townly. He was
+followed by Captain Swan with 100 men, and Captain Davis, assisted by
+Captain Knight, brought up the rear with 170 men.[177] Captain Townley,
+being two miles in advance of the rest, and having repulsed a body of
+seventy horse about four miles short of Leon, pushed forwards with his
+vanguard, and entered the city without farther resistance at three p.m.
+He was then opposed by 500 foot and 200 horse, first in a broad street,
+and afterwards in the great market-place; but the horse soon galloped
+off, and were followed by the foot, leaving the city to the mercy of our
+people. Captain Swan reached the city at four p.m. Davis about five, and
+Knight with the remainder at six. The Spaniards only killed one of our
+men, who was very old and had loitered behind, refusing to accept
+quarter, and took another named Smith. The governor sent word next day,
+offering to ransom the town; on which our officers demanded 30,000
+pieces of eight, or Spanish dollars, together with provisions for 1000
+men for four months, which terms being refused, our people set the city
+on fire on the 14th of August, and rejoined the canoes next morning.
+Smith was exchanged for a gentlewoman, and a gentleman who had been made
+prisoner was released, on promise to deliver 150 oxen for his ransom at
+Realejo, the place we intended next to attack.
+
+[Footnote 177: Only 350 men are here accounted for, though 470 are said
+to have marched on this enterprise, leaving a difference of 120 men:
+perhaps these made a separate corps under Knight, as he seems to have
+fallen considerably in the rear of Davis.--E.]
+
+In the afternoon of the 16th we came to the harbour of Realejo in our
+canoes, our ships having come there to anchor. The creek leading to
+Realejo extends north from the N.W. part of the harbour, being nearly
+two leagues from the island at the mouth of the harbour to the town. The
+first two-thirds of this distance the creek is broad, after which it
+closes into a deep narrow channel, lined on both sides by many
+cocoa-trees. A mile from the entrance the creek winds towards the west,
+and here the Spaniards had thrown up an entrenchment, fronting the
+entrance of the creek, and defended by 100 soldiers and twenty guns,
+having a boom of trees thrown across the creek, so that they might
+easily have beaten off 1000 men, but they wanted courage to defend their
+excellent post; for on our firing two guns they all ran away, leaving us
+at liberty to cut the boom. We then landed and marched to the town of
+Realejo, a fine borough about a mile from thence, seated in a plain on a
+small river. It had three churches and an hospital, but is seated among
+fens and marshes, which send forth a noisome scent, and render it very
+unhealthy. The country round has many sugar works and cattle pens, and
+great quantities of pitch, tar, and cordage are made by the people. It
+also abounds in melons, pine-apples, guavas, and prickly pears.
+
+The shrub which produces the _guava_ has long small boughs, with a white
+smooth bark, and leaves like our hazel. The fruit resembles a pear, with
+a thin rind, and has many hard seeds. It may be safely eaten while
+green, which is not the case with most other fruits in the East or West
+Indies. Before being ripe it is astringent, but is afterwards loosening.
+When ripe it is soft, yellow, and well tasted, and may either be baked
+like pears, or coddled like apples. There are several sorts,
+distinguished by their shape, taste, and colour, some being red and
+others yellow in the pulp. The _prickly-pear_ grows on a shrub about
+five feet high, and is common in many parts of the West Indies, thriving
+best on sandy grounds near the sea. Each branch has two or three round
+fleshy leaves, about the breadth of the hand, somewhat like those of the
+house-leek, edged all round with spines or sharp prickles an inch long.
+At the outer extremity of each leaf the fruit is produced, about the
+size of a large plum, small towards the leaf and thicker at the other
+end, where it opens like a medlar. The fruit, which is also covered by
+small prickles, is green at first, but becomes red as it ripens, having
+a red pulp of the consistence of a thick syrup, with small black seeds,
+pleasant and cooling to the taste. I have often observed, on eating
+twenty or more of these at a time, that the urine becomes as red as
+blood, but without producing any evil consequence.
+
+We found nothing of value in Realejo, except 500 sacks of flour, with
+some pitch, tar, and cordage. We also received here the 150 oxen
+promised by the gentleman who was released at Leon; which, together with
+sugar, and other cattle we procured in the country, were very welcome
+and useful to us. We remained in Realejo from the 17th to the 24th of
+August, when we re-embarked. On the 25th Captains Davis and Swan agreed
+to separate, the former being inclined to return to the coast of Peru,
+and the latter to proceed farther to the north-west; and as I was
+curious to become better acquainted with the north-western parts of
+Mexico, I left Captain Davis and joined Captain Swan. Captain Townley
+joined us with his two barks, but Captains Harris and Knight went along
+with Swan. On the 27th Davis went out of the harbour with his ship, but
+we staid behind for some time, to provide ourselves with wood and water.
+By this time our men began to be much afflicted with fevers, which we
+attributed to the remains of a contagious distemper that lately raged at
+Realejo, as the men belonging to Captain Davis were similarly infected.
+
+We sailed from Realejo on the 3d September, steering to the north-west
+along the coast, having tornadoes from the N.W. accompanied with much
+thunder and lightning, which obliged us to keep out to sea, so that we
+saw no land till the 14th, when we were in lat. 13° 51' N. We then came
+in sight of the volcano of Guatimala. This presents a double peak like
+two sugar-loaves, between which fire and smoke sometimes burst forth,
+especially before bad weather. The city of Guatimala stands near the
+foot of this high mountain, eight leagues from the South Sea, and forty
+or fifty from the gulf of Amatique, at the bottom of the bay of
+Honduras.[178] This city is reputed to be rich, as the country around
+abounds in several commodities peculiar to it, especially four noted
+dyes, indigo, otta or anotto, cochineal, and silvestre.[179] Having in
+vain endeavoured to land on this part of the coast, we proceeded to the
+small isle of _Tangola_. a league from the continent, where we found
+good anchorage, with plenty of wood and water.
+
+[Footnote 178: This description agrees with the situation of St Jago de
+Guatemala, in lat. 14° 25' N. long. 31° 18' W., which is about thirty
+statute miles from the South Sea. The modern city of Guatemala, standing
+nine miles to the S.E., is only about sixteen miles from the sea at the
+head of a bay of the same name.--E]
+
+[Footnote 179: This last is an inferior species of cochineal, gathered
+from the uncultivated opuntia, while the true cochineal is carefully
+attended to in regular plantations. Both are the bodies of certain
+insects gathered by the Indians and dried for preservation, constituting
+the most valuable scarlet dye.--E]
+
+A league from thence is the port of _Guataico_, in lat. 15° 52' N. long.
+36° 20' W. one of the best in Mexico. On the east side of the entrance,
+and about a mile from it, there is a small isle near the shore, and on
+the west side a great hollow rock, open at top, through which the waves
+force a passage with a great noise to a great height even in the calmest
+weather, which affords an excellent mark for seamen. This port runs into
+the land about three miles in a N.W. direction, and is about one mile
+broad. The west side affords the securest anchorage, the other being
+exposed to S.W. winds, which are frequent on this coast. We landed here
+to the number of 140 men, of whom I was one, on the 8th September, and
+marched about fourteen miles to an Indian village, where we found
+nothing but _vanillas_ drying in the sun. The _vanilla_ grows on a small
+vine, or bindwood shrub, which winds about the stems of trees, producing
+a yellow flower, which changes to a pod of four or five inches long,
+about the the size of a tobacco-pipe stem. This is at first green, but
+becomes yellow when ripe, having black seeds. When gathered they are
+laid in the sun, which makes them soft and of a chesnut colour, when
+they are squeezed flat by the Indians. The Spaniards buy this commodity
+at a cheap rate from the Indians, and afterwards preserve it in oil.
+
+The 10th we sent four of our canoes to wait for us at the port of
+_Angelos_, about ten miles W. from Guataico, and on the 12th we sailed
+from Guataico. The 23d we landed 100 men at Angelos, where they got salt
+beef, maize, salt, hogs, and poultry but could bring little on board,
+being at a distance from the shore. Hearing of a stout ship lately
+arrived at Acapulco from Lima, and as Captain Townley was much in need
+of a better ship, it was agreed to endeavour to cut that ship out of the
+harbour. _Acapulco_ is a town and harbour in lat. 16° 50' N. long. 99°
+44' W. on the western coast of New Spain, and belonging to the city of
+Mexico, being the only place of commerce on this coast, and yet there
+are only three ships that come to it annually. Two of these go every
+year between this port and Manilla in Luconia, one of the Philippines,
+and the third goes once a year to and from Lima in Peru. This last comes
+to Acapulco about Christmas, laden with quicksilver, cacao, and dollars,
+and waits the arrival of the Manilla ships, from which she takes in a
+cargo of spices, calicos, muslins, and other goods of India and China,
+and then returns to Lima. This is only a vessel of moderate size; but
+the two Manilla ships are each of about 1000 tons burden.
+
+These Manilla ships arrange their voyages in such a way that one or the
+other is always at Manilla. One of them sails from Acapulco about the
+beginning of April; and after sixty days passage across the Pacific
+Ocean, touches at Guam, one of the Ladrones, to procure refreshments.
+She remains here only three days, and pursues her voyage for Manilla,
+where she arrives in the mouth of June. The other ship, being ready
+laden at Manilla with India commodities, sets sail soon after for
+Acapulco. From Manilla she steers a course to the latitude of 36° or 40°
+N. before she can fall in with a wind to carry her to America, and falls
+in first with the coast of California, and then is sure of a wind to
+carry her down the coast to Acapulco. After making Cape Lucas, the S.
+point of California, she runs over to Cape _Corientes_, in lat. 20° 26'
+N. whence she proceeds along the coast to _Selagua_, where the
+passengers for Mexico are landed, and then continues along the coast to
+Acapulco, where she usually arrives about Christmas.
+
+This port of Acapulco is very safe and convenient, and of sufficient
+capacity to contain some hundred ships without danger. There is a low
+island across the entrance, stretching from E. to W. about a mile and a
+half long by a mile in breadth, having a deep channel at each end,
+through either of which ships may enter or go out, providing they go in
+with the sea-breeze, and out with the land-wind, which regularly blow at
+stated times of the day and night. The channel at the west end of the
+isle is narrow, but so deep as to have no anchorage, and through this
+the Manilla ship comes in; but the Lima ship takes the other channel.
+The harbour runs eight miles into the land to the north, when it closes
+up and becomes narrow, after which it stretches a mile to the west. At
+the entrance of this channel, and on the N.W. side, close to the shore,
+stands the town of Acapulco, near which is a platform or battery with a
+good number of guns; and on the east side of the channel, opposite the
+town, there is a strong castle, having not less than forty pieces of
+large cannon, and the ships usually ride at the bottom of the harbour,
+under the guns of this castle.
+
+Captain Townley went with 140 men in twelve canoes to endeavour to cut
+out the Lima ship; but finding her at anchor within 100 yards of both
+the castle and platform, found it impossible to effect his purpose, so
+that he was obliged to return much dissatisfied. We accordingly sailed
+on the 11th November along the coast to the N.W. between Acapulco and
+Petaplan, where we found every where good anchorage two miles from
+shore, but the surf beat with such violence on the coast that there was
+no safe landing. Near the sea the country was low, and abounding in
+trees, especially spreading palm-trees, some of which were twenty or
+thirty feet high in the stem, but of no great size. This part of the
+country was intermixed with many small hills, mostly barren, but the
+vallies seemed fertile. The hill of Petaplan, or Petatlan, sends out a
+round point into the sea, called Cape _Jequena_, in lat. 17° 27' N.
+which appears from sea like an island, and a little farther west there
+is a knot of round hills, having an intervening bay, in which we
+anchored in eleven fathoms. We here landed 170 men, who marched fourteen
+miles into the country, when they reached a wretched Indian village,
+deserted by the inhabitants, so that we only found one mulatto-woman and
+four young children.
+
+Proceeding on the 18th about two leagues farther to the N.W. we came to
+a pretty good harbour named _Chequetan_, having the convenience of a
+good fresh-wafer river and plenty of wood. On the 19th we landed
+ninety-five men, having the mulatto-woman for their guide, at
+_Estapa_,[180] a league west from Chequetan. The guide now conducted
+them through a pathless wood along a river, and coming to a farm-house
+in a plain, they found a caravan of sixty mules, laden with flour,
+chocolate, cheese, and earthenware, intended for Acapulco, and of which
+this woman had given them intelligence. All this they carried off,
+except the earthenware, and brought aboard in their canoes, together
+with some beeves they killed in the plain. Captain Swan went afterwards
+on shore, and killed other eighteen beeves, without any opposition. We
+found the country woody but fertile, and watered by many rivers and
+rivulets.
+
+[Footnote 180: Istapha is to the eastward of Petatlan, but Chequetan is
+not delineated in modern maps, neither are any rivers noticed for a
+great way either N.W. or S.E. from Petatlan.--E.]
+
+Sailing on the 21st to the N.W. the land appeared full of rugged hills,
+with frightful intervening vallies. On the 25th we passed a high hill
+having several peaks, in lat. 18° 8' N. near which there is a town named
+_Cupan_,[181] but we could not find the way to it. The 26th, 200 men
+were sent to find out the way to _Colima_, said to be a rich place, but
+after rowing twenty leagues along shore they could not find any place
+fit for landing, and saw not the least sign of any inhabitants, so that
+they returned to the ships on the 28th. Soon after we got sight of the
+volcano of Colima, remarkable for its height, six leagues from the sea,
+in lat. 19° 5' N. It shewed two peaks or summits, both of which always
+emit either fire or smoke. The valley at the foot of this mountain is
+said to be fertile and delightful, abounding in cacao, corn, and
+plantains, and is said to be ten or twelve leagues wide towards the sea,
+and to reach far into the country. It is watered by a deep river named
+Colima, but which is so obstructed by a sand-bank at its mouth, as not
+even to allow admission to canoes; but there is no landing on this part
+of the coast, owing to the impetuosity of the surf. The town of Colima
+is the chief place of this part of the country.
+
+[Footnote 181: Probably Texupan, in lat. 18° 17' N. is here meant.--E.]
+
+The 29th, 200 men were sent in canoes to attempt to land, and if
+possible to find a road to the town of _Selagua_, seated, as we were
+told by the Spaniards, at the N.W. end of the vale of Colima, but they
+were unable to land, owing to the violence of the waves. We came in
+sight of the port of _Selagua_ on the 1st December. This is a bay in
+lat. 19° 8' N. parted in the middle by a rocky point, so that it appears
+like two havens, in either of which there is safe anchorage in ten or
+twelve fathoms, though the western harbour is the best, and has besides
+the advantage of a fresh-water rivulet. We saw a considerable number of
+armed Spaniards on the land, to whom we made a visit next morning with
+200 men, but they soon fled. In the pursuit our people found a broad
+road, leading through a wooded and rocky country, which they followed
+for four leagues, but found not the least appearance of any
+inhabitants, and therefore turned back. On their return they took two
+straggling mulattoes, who said the broad road led to the city of
+_Oarrah_,[182] four long days journey into the country, and that these
+men came from that city to protect the Manilla ship, which was expected
+to set her passengers ashore at this place. The Spanish maps place a
+town called Selagua hereabouts, but we could not find any appearance of
+it.
+
+[Footnote 182: Guadalaxara, the latter part of which is pronounced
+_achara_, is probably here meant. It is 160 miles inland from the port
+of Selagua.--E.]
+
+We pursued our voyage on the 6th December towards Cape Corientes, in
+hopes of meeting the Manilla ship. The land on the coast was moderately
+high, sprinkled with many rugged points, and full of wood, having
+several apparently good ports between Selagua and Cape Corientes, but we
+did not touch at any of them. Cape Corientes, of which we came in sight
+on the 11th, in lat. 20° 28' N. is pretty high, being very steep and
+rocky towards the sea, but flat on the top. I found its longitude from
+the Lizard in England, by our reckoning, 121° 41' W.[183] As the Manilla
+ship is obliged to make this point on her voyage to Acapulco, we took up
+a station here with our four ships in such a manner that we judged she
+could hardly escape us; but as we were in want of provisions, fifty or
+sixty men were sent in a bark beyond the cape to endeavour to get some.
+They returned, however, on the 17th, not having been able to double the
+cape, but left forty-six men in four canoes, who intended to attempt to
+get beyond by rowing.
+
+[Footnote 183: It is only in long. 105° 88' W. from Greenwich; that in
+the text, from computation or dead reckoning, being considerably
+erroneous in excess.--E.]
+
+The 18th December we sailed to the isles of _Chametly_, eighteen leagues
+to the east of Cape Corientes. These are five small low and woody
+islands, surrounded with rocks, and lying in form of a half-moon a mile
+from the shore, having safe anchorage in the intermediate space. These
+isles are inhabited by fishers, who are servants to some of the
+inhabitants of _Purification_, a considerable town or city fourteen
+leagues up the country.[184] We anchored at these isles on the 20th, and
+here provided ourselves with wood and water, and caught great abundance
+of rock-fish. Next day sixty of our men were sent under Captain Townley
+to surprise an Indian village, seven or eight leagues to the N.W.
+
+[Footnote 184: Villa de la Purificacion is considerably to the S.E. of
+Cape Corientes, but the isles of Chametly are omitted in modern maps.
+Puerto de Navidad, in lat. 19° 20' N. seems the haven belonging to
+Purificacion.--E.]
+
+On the 24th the four canoes left by Captain Townley's bark returned to
+the ships. They had got beyond the cape by means of rowing to the valley
+of _Valderas_, or _Val d' Iris_, the valley of flags, at the bottom of a
+deep bay, inclosed between Cape Corientes on the S.E. and point
+_Pontique_ on the N.W. In this delightful valley they landed
+thirty-seven men, who advanced three miles into the country, and were
+attacked by 150 Spaniards, horse and foot. Our men retreated into an
+adjoining wood, whence they kept up a heavy fire on the Spaniards,
+killing their leader and fourteen troopers, besides wounding a great
+many, while four of our men were slain and two wounded. Owing to this
+loss the Spaniards took to flight, and our people were enabled to
+re-embark. This valley is about three leagues broad, and is bounded
+towards the inland country by an easy ascent, affording a delightful
+prospect of extensive pastures well stored with cattle, interspersed
+with pleasant groves of guavas, orange-trees, and lime-trees. The sandy
+bay affords a safe landing, and has a fresh-water river, navigable by
+boats, but becomes brackish in the end of the dry season, which is in
+February, March, and April.
+
+We continued cruizing off Cape Corientes till the 1st January, 1686,
+when we sailed for the valley of _Valderas_, proposing to provide
+ourselves with some beef, of which we were in great need. At night we
+anchored in sixty fathoms, a mile from shore. On the 7th we landed 240
+men, fifty of whom were kept together in a body to watch the motions of
+the Spaniards, while the rest were employed in providing cattle. We
+killed and salted as much beef as would serve us for two months, and
+might have procured a great deal more if we had not run out of salt. By
+this time our hopes of meeting the Manilla ship were entirely vanished,
+as we concluded she had got past us to the S.E. while we were employed
+in procuring provisions, which we afterwards learnt had been the case,
+by the information of several prisoners. The loss of this rich prize was
+chiefly owing to Captain Townley, who insisted on taking the Lima ship
+in the harbour of Acapulco, when we ought to have provided ourselves
+with beef and maize, as we might then have done, instead of being now
+forced to procure provisions at the critical time of her coming on the
+coast. We were likewise deceived by the hope of falling in with rich
+towns and mines on this coast, not then knowing that all the wealth of
+this country is in the interior. Seeing that we were now entirely
+disappointed in our hopes, we parted company, Captain Townley going back
+to the S.E. while we in Captain Swan's ship went to the west.
+
+The 7th January we passed point Pontique in lat. 20° 38' N. ten leagues
+from Cape Corientes, being the N.W. point of this bay of the valley of
+Valderas. A league beyond this point to the W. there are two little
+isles called the _Pontiques_, and beyond these to the north the shore is
+rugged for eighteen leagues. The 14th we came to anchor in a channel
+between the continent and a small white rocky isle, in lat. 21° 15'. The
+20th we anchored a league short of the isles of _Chametly_, different
+from those formerly mentioned under the same name, being six small isles
+in lat 28° 11' N. three leagues from the continent.[185] One or two of
+these isles have some sandy creeks, and they produce a certain fruit
+called _penguins_. These are of two sorts, one red and the other yellow.
+The plant producing the latter is as thick in the stem as a man's arm,
+with leaves six inches long and an inch broad, edged with prickles. The
+fruit grows in clusters at the top of the stem, being round and as large
+as an egg, having a thick rind, inclosing a pulp full of black seeds, of
+a delightful taste. The red penguin grows directly out of the ground,
+without any stalk, sometimes sixty or seventy in a cluster, no bigger
+than onions, but the shape of nine-pins, the cluster being surrounded
+with prickly leaves eighteen inches or two feet long.
+
+[Footnote 185: In modern maps these are called the isles of _Mazatlan_,
+and are placed in lat. 28° 15' N. The name given in the text appears
+taken from a town on this coast called Charmela, in lat 22° 50' N. but
+improperly.--E.]
+
+Captain Swan went with 100 men in canoes to the north, to find out the
+river _Culiacan_, supposed to be in lat. 24° N.[186] and said to have a
+fair and rich town of the same name on its banks; but after rowing
+thirty leagues he could not find the river, neither was there any safe
+landing place on the coast. Seven leagues N.N.W. from the Chametla or
+Mazatlan isles, our men landed in a small lake or river, having a narrow
+entrance, called _Rio de Sal_ by the Spaniards, in lat. 23° 30' N.[187]
+They here procured some maize at an adjacent farm; and learnt at another
+landing place of an Indian town five leagues distant, to which they
+marched. Coming near the place we were encountered by a good number of
+Spaniards and Indians, who were soon beat off. On entering the place we
+only found two or three wounded Indians, who told us the town was named
+_Mazatlan_, and that there were two rich gold-mines at the distance of
+five leagues.
+
+[Footnote 186: The mouth of the river of Cullacan is in 24° 45' N. and
+the town of that name is about eighty-five or ninety statute miles up
+the river, supposed to have been an ancient seat of the Mexican nation,
+before their removal to the vale and lake of Mexico.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 187: The Rio Rastla de Panuco, in 23° 45' N. is certainly here
+meant.--E.]
+
+On the 2d February 80 men were landed in the river _Rosario_.[188] We
+came to a pretty little town of the same name, a considerable way up
+that river, where we were assured by some prisoners that the gold-mines
+were not above two leagues from thence; but as we had present occasion
+for provisions, we carried about ninety bushels of maize on board from
+this place, without searching for the mines. As this small supply was
+insufficient for our necessities, we resolved to return to the S.E. to
+the _Rio San Jago_,[189] where we anchored on the 11th. This is one of
+the most considerable rivers on the west coast of New Spain. The country
+having a good appearance, Captain Swan sent seventy men to look for a
+town. After rowing up and down for two days, they landed in a corn
+field, and, while busy in gathering maize, they seized an Indian, who
+told them of a town called _Santa Pecaque_, four leagues farther.
+
+[Footnote 188: The mouth of this river is in lat. 28° N. about fifty
+miles S.E. from Cape Mazatlan, where Dampier seems to have been then at
+anchor among the Mazatlan isles.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 189: So called by Dampier from the town of St Jago on its
+banks. Its proper name is the _Rio Grande_, or river of _Tololotlan_.
+The mouth of this river forms a large bay, in lat 21° 30' N. in which is
+the considerable island of St Blas.--E.]
+
+Returning to the ship with this intelligence, Captain Swan went with 140
+men in eight canoes, and landed five leagues up the river, which was
+there about a pistol shot across with high banks. He marched from thence
+through fertile plains and woods for three or four hours, and on
+approaching St Pecaque the Spaniards evacuated the place, so that we
+entered unopposed. This town is situated in a spacious plain on the side
+of a wood, being neatly built, with a market-place in the middle, but
+not large, and has two churches. There are silver-mines five or six
+leagues from this town, the ore from which is carried on mules to
+Compostella to be refined. _Compostella_, the capital of this part of
+Mexico, is twenty-one leagues from _Pecaque_, being inhabited by seventy
+families of Spaniards, and by five or six hundred mulattoes and Indians.
+Finding great plenty of maize, sugar, salt, and salt fish at this place,
+Captain Swan divided his men into two parts, one of which kept
+possession of the place, while the other half were employed to carry
+these articles to the canoes, which was done turn and turn about, with
+the assistance of some horses. We continued this work for two days; but
+on the 19th Captain Swan learnt from a prisoner that 1000 men had
+marched from St Jago, a rich town three leagues from Pecaque on the
+river, for the purpose of attacking us. On this Captain Swan wanted our
+people to march altogether with what provisions we could carry; but they
+refused to obey him till all the provisions should be carried on board,
+and he was forced to allow half of them to go on with fifty-four loaded
+horses. They had not gone a mile from Pecaque when they were attacked by
+the Spaniards from an ambush, and were all slain on the spot. Captain
+Swan marched to their relief, but came too late, finding the whole party
+slain and stripped naked; yet the Spaniards never once attempted to
+engage him, having certainly paid dear for their victory.
+
+Returning on board with the rest of his men, and what provisions had
+been carried off, Captain Swan resolved to sail for Cape Lucas in
+California, in hopes of trafficking with the Indians there and in the
+_lake_ or gulf of California. We accordingly sailed on the 21st with the
+wind at N.W. and W.N.W. and anchored at the islands of _Santa Maria_, in
+eight fathoms on clean sand. There are three islands, usually called the
+_Three Marias_,[190] stretching fourteen leagues from S.E. to N.W. of
+moderate height, stony, barren, and uninhabited, in lat 21° 30' N.
+[long. 106° 15' W.] from which Cape St Lucas in California is forty
+leagues W.N.W. and Cape Corientes twenty leagues E.S.E. We anchored off
+the east end of the middle island, which we called Prince George's
+island. These islands produce some cedars, and we found near the sea a
+green prickly plant, with leaves like those of the _penguin_ plant, and
+roots like those of the _sempervivum_, but much longer, the Indians of
+California subsisting mostly on these roots. We baked and eat some of
+these roots, which tasted like boiled burdock roots. I had been long
+afflicted with dropsy, and was here buried in the sand for half an hour,
+covered up to the neck, which brought on a profuse sweat, and I believe
+with good effect, for I began to recover soon after. We careened here;
+but as there is no fresh water to be had at this place in the dry
+season, we had to return to the valley of Valderas, but finding the
+river brackish we sailed three leagues nearer Cape Corientes, and
+anchored beside a small round isle four leagues north of that cape, and
+half a mile from the shore, opposite to a rivulet on the continent,
+where we filled our water casks.
+
+[Footnote 190: In reality _four_, the fourth or most northwesterly,
+being named St Juanica.--E.]
+
+Being now sufficiently convinced of our mistaken notion of the riches of
+this coast, founded on an erroneous idea that the commerce of this
+country was carried on by sea, whereas it is entirely conducted by land
+on mules, we now resolved to try our fortune in the East Indies. With
+this view we sailed from Cape Corientes on the 31st March, and next
+noon, being thirty leagues from the cape, clear of the land-winds, we
+had the wind at E.N.E. in which direction it continued till we were
+within forty leagues of Guam. In all this long passage across the
+Pacific, nearly in the lat. of 13° N. we saw neither fish nor fowl
+except once, when by my reckoning we were 5975 miles west from Cape
+Corientes in Mexico, and then we saw a vast number of _boobies_,
+supposed to come from some rocks not far off, which are laid down in
+some hydrographical charts, but we saw them not.
+
+May 20th, at four p.m. being in lat. 12° 55' N. and steering W. we
+discovered, to our great joy, the island of Guam, eight leagues off,
+having now only three-days provisions left. _Guam_ is one of the
+Ladrones, in lat. 13° 15' N. and long. 216° 50' W. consequently its
+meridional distance from Cape Corientes on the coast of Mexico is 111°
+14', or about 7730 English miles. It is twelve leagues long by four
+broad, extending north and south, and is defended by a small fort
+mounted by six guns, and a garrison of thirty men with a Spanish
+governor, for the convenience of the Manilla ships, which touch here for
+refreshments on their voyage from Acapulco to Manilla. The soil is
+tolerably fertile, producing rice, pine-apples, water and musk melons,
+oranges, limes, cocoa-nuts, and bread-fruit. This last grows on a tree
+as big as our apple-trees, with dark green leaves. The fruit is round
+and as large as a good penny-loaf,[191] growing on the boughs like
+apples. When ripe it turns yellow, with a soft and sweet pulp; but the
+natives pull it green, and bake it in an oven till the rind grows black.
+They scrape off the rind, and the inside is soft and white, like the
+crumb of new-baked bread, having neither seed nor stone; but it grows
+harsh if kept twenty-four hours. As this fruit is in season for eight
+months in the year, the natives use no other bread in all that time,
+and they told us there was plenty of it in all the other Ladrone
+islands.
+
+[Footnote 191: This vague description may now safely be changed to the
+size of a three-penny, or even four-penny loaf--E.]
+
+On the 31st May we came to anchor near the middle of the west side of
+this isle, a mile from shore, as there is no anchoring on its east side
+on account of the trade-winds, which force the waves with great violence
+against that side. The natives are of a copper-colour, strong-limbed,
+with long black hair, small eyes, high noses, thick lips, white teeth,
+and stern countenances, yet were very affable to us. They are very
+ingenious in building a certain kind of boats, called _proas_, used all
+over the East Indies. These are about twenty-six or twenty-eight feet
+long, and five or six feet high from the keel, which is made of the
+trunk of a tree like a canoe, sharp at both ends. They manage these
+boats with a paddle instead of a rudder, and use a square sail, and they
+sail with incredible swiftness, twenty or even twenty-four miles in an
+hoar. One side of these boats is quite flat and upright like a wall from
+end to end, but the other side is rounded and full-bellied like other
+vessels. Along this side, parallel with the boat, at the distance of six
+or seven feet, a log of light wood, a foot and a half wide, and sharp at
+both ends, is fastened by means of two bamboos eight or ten feet long,
+projecting from each end of the main boat, and this log prevents the
+boat from oversetting. The English call this an out-lier, or out-rigger,
+and the Dutch _Oytlager_. The air of this island is accounted
+exceedingly healthy, except in the wet season between June and October.
+The Indians inhabit small villages on the west side of this island near
+the shore, and have priests among them to instruct them in the Christian
+religion. By means of a civil letter from Captain Swan to the Spanish
+governor, accompanied by some presents, we obtained a good supply of
+hogs, cocoa-nuts, rice, biscuits, and other refreshments, together with
+fifty pounds of Manilla tobacco.
+
+Learning from one of the friars that the island of _Mindanao_, inhabited
+by Mahometans, abounded in provisions, we set sail from Guam on the 2d
+June with a strong E. wind, and arrived on the 21st at the Isle of St
+John, one of the _Philippines_. These are a range of large islands
+reaching from about the latitude of 5° to about 19° N. and from long.
+120° to 126° 30' E. The principal island of the group is _Luzon_, or
+Luçonia, in which Magellan was slain by a poisoned arrow, and which is
+now entirely subject to the Spaniards. Their capital city of Manilla is
+in this island, being a large town and sea-port, seated at the
+south-west end, opposite to the island of Mindora, and is a place of
+great strength and much trade, especially occasioned by the Acapulco
+ships, which procure here vast quantities of India commodities, brought
+hither by the Chinese and Portuguese, and sometimes also by stealth by
+the English from fort St George or Madras; for the Spaniards allow of no
+regular trade here to the English and Dutch, lest they should discover
+their weakness, and the riches of these islands, which abound in gold.
+To the south of Luzon there are twelve or fourteen large islands,
+besides a great number of small isles, all inhabited by, or subject to,
+the Spaniards. But the two most southerly, Mindanao and St John, are not
+subjected by the Spaniards.
+
+The Island of St John, or _San Juan_, is about the lat. of 9° N. on the
+east side of Mindanao, and about four leagues from that island, being
+about thirty-eight leagues in length from N.N.W. to S.S.E. and about
+twenty-four leagues broad in the middle, having a very rich and fertile
+soil. _Mindanao_, next to Luzon, is the largest of the Philippines,
+being sixty leagues long by forty or fifty leagues broad. Its southern
+end is in lat. 5° 30' N. the N.W. extremity reaching to 9° 40' N. The
+soil is generally fertile, and its stony hills produce many kinds of
+trees, most of which are unknown to Europeans. The vallies are supplied
+with brooks and rivulets, and stored with various sorts of ever-green
+trees, and with rice, water-melons, plantains, bananas, guavas, nutmegs,
+cloves, betel-nuts, _durians, jacks_, or _jackas_, cocoa-nuts, oranges,
+&c.; but, above all, by a species of tree called _libby_ by the natives,
+which produces sago, and grows in groves several miles in length. The
+poorer people feed on sago instead of bread for several months of the
+year. This tree resembles the cabbage-tree, having a strong bark and
+hard wood, the heart of which is full of a white pith, like that of the
+elder. They cut down the tree and split it open, taking out the pith,
+which they stamp or beat well in a mortar, after which, putting it into
+a cloth, and pouring in water, they stir it well, till the water carries
+all the farinaceous substance through the cloth into a trough. After the
+farinaceous matter has settled to the bottom, the water is poured off,
+and the sago is baked into cakes, which they use as bread. The sago,
+which is carried from hence to other parts of the East Indies, is dried
+into small grains, and is used with milk of almonds as a remedy against
+fluxes, being of an astringent quality.
+
+The other fruits of this island, being well known or described by
+various authors, need not be here mentioned. The nutmegs here are very
+large and good, but the natives do not care for propagating them, being
+afraid lest the Dutch, who monopolize the spice islands, should be
+induced to pay them a hostile visit. This island also produces abundance
+of animals, both wild and tame, as horses, cows, buffaloes, goats, wild
+hogs, deer, monkeys, and others; also guanas, lizards, snakes,
+scorpions, and centipeds. These last are not thicker than a goose-quill,
+but five inches long, and they sting fiercer even than scorpions. Of
+tame fowl, they have only ducks and hens; but have plenty of wild birds,
+as pigeons, parrots, parrakeets, turtle-doves, bats as large as our
+kites, and an infinite number and variety of small birds. Their wild
+hogs feed in the woods in prodigious herds, and have thick knobs growing
+over their eyes. There are mountains in the interior of this island,
+which afford considerable quantities of gold. Their chief fish are
+bonitos, snooks, cavallies, breams, and mullets; and they have abundance
+of sea-tortoises; and the island has many harbours, creeks, and rivers.
+
+Considering the situation of this island, so near the Line, its climate
+is by no means excessively hot, especially near the sea, where the
+sea-breeze cools the air by day and the land-breeze at night. The wind
+blows from the east between October and May, and then blows from the
+west till October. The west wind produces the wet season, which is
+heaviest in July and August, and, gradually lessening in September,
+ceases in October, when the east wind brings fair weather, which lasts
+till May. The inhabitants of this island, though all resembling each
+other in colour and stature, and all Mahometans, differ considerably in
+language and government. The mountaineers, or _Hillanoons_, who inhabit
+the interior, and are masters of the gold-mines, are also rich in
+bees-wax, both of which they exchange with the _Mindanayans_ on the
+coast for foreign commodities. The _Sologus_ inhabit the N.W. end of the
+island, and traffic with the inhabitants of Manilla and some other
+adjacent islands, but not with the Mindanayans. The _Alfoores_ were
+formerly under the same government with the Mindanayans, but were
+separated from them by falling to the share of the younger children of
+the sultan of Mindanao, who has of late laid claim to their allegiance.
+
+The Mindanayans, properly so called, are of low stature, with small
+limbs, little heads, straight bodies, small eyes short noses, wide
+mouths, thin red lips, and sound black teeth, having black lank hair,
+and tawny complexions, but rather brighter than other Indians. They are
+ingenious and nimble, much addicted to indolence, obliging to strangers,
+but implacable when once disobliged. They wear turbans on their heads,
+formed of a cloth tied once round, the ends of which hang down, and are
+ornamented with lace or fringe. They also wear breeches, over which
+they have a kind of frocks, but have neither shoes nor stockings. The
+women tie their long black hair in a knot, which hangs down behind,
+being smaller featured than the men, with very small feet. Their
+garments consist of a piece of cloth sewed together at both ends,
+forming a kind of petticoat, with a frock reaching a little below the
+waist. They covet the acquaintance of white men, and are very free with
+them, as far as they have liberty. When any strangers arrive at the city
+of Mindanao, the men come aboard and invite them to their houses, where
+they immediately ask if any of them wish to have a _pagally_, or female
+friend, which they must accept, and return the favour by some small
+present, which is repeated from time to time, in return for which they
+eat, drink, and sleep, in their friend's house.
+
+The capital is named Mindanao, like the island, being on the south-west
+side, two miles from the sea, on the bank of a small river, in lat. 7°
+N. The houses are built on posts, fourteen to twenty feet high,
+consisting only of one floor, but divided in many rooms by partitions.
+The house or palace of the sultan rests on 150 great posts, being much
+higher than any of the others, and had great broad stairs leading up to
+it from the ground. In the hall there were twenty pieces of iron cannon
+upon field carriages, and the general and other great men have also some
+cannon in their houses. The floors are generally well covered with mats,
+and they have no chairs, but usually sit cross-legged. Their ordinary
+food is rice, sago, and some small fish; but the better people use
+buffaloe beef, and fowl, with a great deal of rice, every one using
+their fingers, as they have no spoons. The inhabitants of the city of
+Mindanao speak both the Mindanayan and Malay languages, and their
+prayers are in Arabic, in which also they retain some Turkish words.
+Some of the old people of both sexes can speak Spanish, as the Spaniards
+had formerly several forts in the island, and had assuredly reduced the
+whole if they had not been afraid of an attack from the Chinese at
+Manilla, on which account they withdrew their troops from Mindanao, when
+the father of the present sultan laid hold of the opportunity to gain
+possession of their forts, and to expel them from the island. At present
+they are most in fear of the Dutch, for which reason they have often
+invited the English to make a settlement among them, believing them not
+so ready to encroach as either of the other nations.
+
+The chief trades in this city are goldsmiths, blacksmiths, carpenters,
+and shipwrights, for they build good ships both for war and trade. Their
+chief commodities for export are gold, bees-wax, and tobacco; the two
+first being purchased from the mountaineers, and the last grows in all
+parts of the island in great plenty. They exchange these commodities for
+calicoes, muslins, and China silks. The Mindanao tobacco is reckoned as
+good as that of Manilla, and yet ten or twelve pounds of it may be
+bought for a rial, or the eighth part of a dollar. The natives are
+generally afflicted with a dry itchy scurf all over their bodies, and by
+scratching, the skin peels off in small white flakes, like the scales of
+small fish, leaving broad white spots all over their bodies; but they
+did not seem to make any great account of this disease, which is not
+infectious. They are also troubled with small-pox; but their most common
+diseases are fevers, agues, fluxes, and violent griping pains in their
+bowels. They have many wives, but I could not learn their marriage
+ceremonies.
+
+They are governed by a sultan, who has no great revenue, yet is so
+absolute that he even commands the private purse of every one at his
+pleasure. The reigning sultan was between fifty and sixty years old, and
+had twenty-nine concubines besides his wife or sultana. When he goes
+abroad he is carried in a couch on the shoulders of four men, and is
+attended by a guard of eight or ten men. His brother, named Rajah Laut,
+a shrewd person of good conversation, is both chief minister and
+general, and both speaks and writes Spanish very readily. In war they
+use swords and lances, and every one, from the highest to the lowest,
+constantly wears a _criss_ or dagger, much like a bayonet. They never
+fight any pitched battles, but construct small wooden forts defended by
+guns, whence the adverse parties endeavour to surprise each other in
+small parties, and never give or take quarter.
+
+We came first to anchor on the N.E. side of the island, but learning
+from the natives that the city of Mindanao was on the W. side, we again
+set sail and anchored on the 4th July on the S.W. side of a very deep
+bay in fifteen fathoms, the land within the bay on the E. side being
+very high and woody, but watered by several rivers. On its W. side,
+bordering on the sea, there were large plains covered with long grass,
+on which were vast herds of deer, of which we killed as many as we
+thought fit. We remained here till the 12th, when we again set sail, and
+arrived on the 18th at the entrance of the river of Mindanao, in lat. 7°
+N. and long. 124° 35' E. from Greenwich.[192] We here anchored in
+fifteen fathoms on clean hard sand, two miles from the shore. Soon
+afterwards Rajah Laut came on board, accompanied by one of the sultan's
+sons, and asked in Spanish, Who we were? Being told we were English, he
+asked if we came to settle among them, of which they had formerly some
+promise, and were now in hopes of its being effected, to serve to
+protect them against the Dutch, whom they greatly dreaded. Had we
+properly considered the matter, it might have been much for our
+advantage, Mindanao being conveniently situated between the Spice
+islands and the Philippines, and besides the three islands of
+_Meangis_,[193] only about twenty leagues from hence, abound with spice
+and cloves. We were also well filled for such a settlement, having among
+our company all manner of artificers, as carpenters, bricklayers,
+shoemakers, tailors, and the like, as also abundance of tools, arms,
+cannon, and sufficient ammunition to begin with; and, notwithstanding
+the great distance from England, we might easily have had supplies from
+thence, providing ships set out the latter end of August, proceeding
+round Cape Horn, and so directly across the Pacific for Mindanao, or
+else coasting along the western shore of America as far as was
+necessary, and then stretching across to have the advantage of the
+trade-wind. By this way the voyage might be accomplished in six or seven
+months, which would at least require eight or nine by the Cape of Good
+Hope.
+
+[Footnote 192: In Harris, this longitude is made 23° 12' W. from the
+Lizard by some strange error, being 235° 25' W. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 193: It does not appear what islands these were, unless
+perhaps the Silibabo islands, about half way between Mindanao and the
+northern end of Gilolo, but considerably farther distant than is stated
+in the text.--E.]
+
+Rajah Laut invited Captain Swan ashore, and promised to furnish what
+provisions we wanted, and desired him in the mean time to secure our
+ship within the river, for fear of the approaching westerly monsoon,
+which Captain Swan agreed to after some deliberation. The river being
+narrow, and having not above eleven feet water on the bar in
+spring-tides, we had much ado to get our ship a quarter of a mile above
+its mouth, where we moored head and stern in a hole, so that she lay
+always afloat. The city of Mindanao is a mile in length, but not very
+broad, stretching along the right bank of the river as you go up, though
+there are some houses also on the opposite side. The inhabitants
+frequently came aboard of our ship, and invited our men to their
+houses, where they were kindly entertained after their manner with
+tobacco and betel, and such of them as had money, or other articles of
+value, did not want their _pagalies_, or female friends. Captain Swan
+was entertained daily by Rajah Laut, and those of our men who had no
+money had boiled rice, with scraps of fowl and buffalo beef given them.
+Yet, after all these outward shews of friendship, we soon after began to
+discover that Rajah Laut had sinister intentions. The sheathing on our
+ship's bottom being much eaten by worms, we began in November to remove
+the old sheathing, to see whether the main plank remained sound; on
+seeing which, Rajah Laut shook his head, saying he had never seen a ship
+with two bottoms. Besides, he did not perform his promise of providing
+us with beef, pretending he could not get any; and he borrowed a
+considerable sum in gold from Captain Swan, which he never repaid.
+
+These circumstances at length induced most of our men to think of
+leaving Mindanao, especially those who had not much money; and as our
+ship was new sheathed and tallowed on the 10th December, they began to
+urge our commander to depart in continuation of our voyage. Accordingly,
+Captain Swan appointed the 13th January, 1687, for all our company to be
+on board and ready to sail; but many being unwilling to depart so soon,
+having dispersed about the country at the instigation of Rajah Laut, and
+even Captain Swan not being very ready to come aboard, by reason of some
+insubordination among the men, they deposed him from the command, and
+chose Captain Teat in his room. After this we weighed in the morning of
+the 13th January, and sailed out of the river, having Captain Swan and
+forty-four more of the men on shore, besides sixteen others we had
+buried there.
+
+We coasted along the south side of the island to the west, and passed
+next day in sight of _Chambungo_,[194] another town in this island,
+thirty leagues west from the river of Mindanao, and said to have a good
+harbour. On the 10th February we coasted along the west side of the
+Philippine islands, and while passing Panga,[195] a large island
+inhabited by the Spaniards, we saw many fires, which we supposed were
+intended to give notice of our approach, it being rare to see a ship on
+this coast. The 18th we anchored in ten fathoms at the N.W. end of the
+island of _Mindora_. This is a large island, the middle of which is in
+lat 12° 45' N. its length from N.W. to S.E. being forty leagues. While
+here, a canoe with four Indians came from Manilla, who told as that the
+harbour of Manilla was seldom without twenty or thirty vessels, Chinese,
+Portuguese, and Spaniards, and if we had a mind to trade clandestinely,
+they would deliver letters from us to certain merchants there.
+
+[Footnote 194: Probably Sambuang, at the western extremity of Mindanao,
+in lat. 6° 52' N. long. 122° 20' E. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 195: Pany, or Panai.--E.]
+
+We sailed again on the 21st, and came on the 23d to the S.E. end of
+Luçonia, where we took two Spanish barks from _Pagassanam_,[196] a small
+town on the N.E. part of this island, having goods on board for the
+Acapulco ship. This great island of Luçonia extends in length through
+six degrees of latitude, from 12° 30' to 18° 40' both N. and is
+surrounded by many small isles, especially at its north end, Mindora
+being the chief of these isles, which communicates its name to the
+straits which run between it and the main island of Luçonia. The surface
+of this large island is partly composed of large pasture plains, and
+partly of mountains, the latter of which afford some gold; and the
+plains, or savannahs, are stored with buffaloes, bullocks, horses,
+sheep, goats, and hogs. The inhabitants are Indians, who live in little
+towns, under the Spanish jurisdiction, and are instructed in the Romish
+religion by Spanish priests.
+
+[Footnote 196: Perhaps the gulf on Pangasian is here meant, on the E.
+side of Luzon, in lat. 16° N.]
+
+_Manilla_ is the chief city, or rather the only one, in the island,
+seated at the foot of a ridge of high hills, fronting the harbour, near
+the S.W. point of the island, in lat. 14° 38' N: This city is defended
+by a strong wall, and is composed of well-built spacious houses, covered
+with pan-tiles, the streets being broad and regular, with a large
+market-place in the middle, and has many fair churches and convents. The
+harbour is large; and, besides the two great Acapulco ships, contains
+abundance of small vessels belonging to the place, besides usually
+thirty or forty stout Chinese junks; and the Portuguese also have
+liberty to trade to this place. Many Chinese merchants also reside
+constantly in this city. A league from the city, nearer the sea, there
+is a strong fortress to defend the harbour, where the great ships lie at
+anchor. Most of this account I received from Mr Coppinger, our surgeon,
+who had formerly been thither, sailing from the Coromandel coast.
+
+The time of the year being now too far spent for our purpose, we
+resolved to sail for Pulo Condore, a knot of small islands on the coast
+of Cambodia, and to return in May to lie in wait for the Acapulco ship.
+We accordingly made sail from the island of Luçonia on the 26th of
+February; and coming into the lat. of 14° N. we steered our course W.
+for Pulo Condore,[197] and in our way got sight of the south end of the
+_Pracel_ shoals, being three small isles, or large spots of sand, just
+above water, only a mile from us. We came in sight of Pulo Condore on
+the 13th March, and anchored next day on the north side of that island,
+in ten fathoms, on clean hard sand, two miles from the shore.
+
+[Footnote 197: This course ought rather to have been called W.S.W. as
+Pulo Condore is lat. 8° 40' N.]
+
+Pulo Condore is the chief of a group of isles, and the only one of them
+that is inhabited, in lat. 8° 44' N. long. 106° 5' E. forty leagues S.
+by E. from the mouth of the river of Cambodia, otherwise called the
+_Japanese_ river. Two of these isles are tolerably high and large, and
+the rest very small. The principal isle, off which we anchored, is five
+leagues long from E. to W. and three leagues broad, but in some places
+not a mile. The other large isle is three miles long from N. to S. and
+between these, at the west end of the largest, there is a convenient
+harbour, the entrance being on the north, where the two isles are a mile
+asunder. On the largest isle there grows a tall tree, three or four feet
+diameter, which the inhabitants cut horizontally half through, a foot
+from the ground, after which they cut out the upper part in a slope,
+till it meets the transverse cut, whence a liquor distils into a hollow
+made in the semicircular shelf, or stump, which, after being boiled,
+becomes good tar, and if boiled still more, becomes perfect pitch, both
+of these answering well for marine use. Such a tree produces two quarts
+of this juice daily for a month, after which it dries up, but recovers
+again.
+
+There are mango trees in this island, the fruit of which the
+inhabitants pickle with salt, vinegar, and a little garlic, while green.
+On straight trees of a foot diameter, grapes, both red and white, and of
+a pleasant taste, much like those of Europe, grow in clusters about the
+body of the tree, like the cocoas. This isle also abounds in wild
+nutmeg-trees, which resemble our walnut-trees, and the fruit grows among
+the boughs, in the same manner as walnuts. This fruit resembles the true
+nutmeg, but smaller, and has neither smell nor taste. Besides hogs,
+guanas, and lizards, these islands have various birds, as parrots,
+parakeets, turtle-doves, and wild poultry. The sea affords limpits,
+muscles, and tortoises. These isles have many brooks of fresh water
+running into the sea for ten months of the year; and they are very
+conveniently situated for trade with Japan, China, Manilla, Tonquin,
+Cochin-china, and other places.
+
+The inhabitants are originally from Cochin-china, being of a middle
+stature and well shaped, but of much darker colour than the natives of
+Mindanao, having lank black hair, small black eyes, and small noses, yet
+tolerably high, with small mouths, thin lips, and white teeth. They are
+civil, but very poor, their only employment being to collect tar, and to
+prepare a little oil from tortoises, both of which they export to
+Cochin-china. They offer their women to strangers for a small matter; a
+custom universal in Pegu, Siam, Cochin-China, Cambadia, Tonquin, and
+India, as also on the coast of Guinea. They are pagans, worshipping
+chiefly the elephant and the horse, besides images of birds and fishes,
+but I saw none resembling the human shape.
+
+Having careened our ship, and laid in a supply of fresh water, we sailed
+from Pulo Condore on the 21st of April, steering W. by S. for the bay of
+Siam, and on the 23d came to the isle of _Ubi_, off the S.W. cape of
+Cambadia, forty leagues W. of Condore. This isle is seven or eight
+leagues in circuit, and is higher land than any of the Condore isles. It
+has good water on the north side, where there is also good anchorage,
+but the best anchorage is on the W. side, opposite a small bay. On the
+24th we entered the bay of Siam, which is very deep, and went among the
+islands at the bottom of the bay, in one of which we found a small
+village inhabited by fishermen, but no fish, so we turned back, and did
+not return to the isle of _Ubi_ till the 13th, and were detained there
+by storms till the 21st, when we sailed for Condore, where we anchored
+on the 24th. Here five or six of our men, going on board a Malay
+vessel, were stabbed by the crew. Having provided our ship with wood and
+water, we sailed from Condore on the 4th June, intending to proceed for
+Manilla; but, by contrary winds, were forced to steer for _Pratas_, a
+small low island inclosed with rocks, in lat. 21° N. between Canton and
+Manilla; and the east winds continuing, were obliged to approach the
+coast of China, where we anchored on the 25th June, at the east end of
+the island of St John, on the coast of Quan-tong, or Canton, in China,
+in lat. 22° 30' N.[198] They have here great plenty of rice, with hogs,
+buffaloes, goats, and some oxen. The inhabitants were Chinese, and were
+consequently, at this time, under the dominion of the Tartars.
+
+[Footnote 198: This Island of St John is probably that named Sancianor,
+or Tchang-te-huen, in lat. 21° 33' N. long. 112° 25' E. to the S.W. of
+the bay of Canton. The latitude in the text would lead deep among the
+islands of that bay, which does not appear to have been the case.--E.]
+
+In this island we found a small town in marshy ground, the houses of
+which were small, mean, and ill-furnished, but built on posts, the
+inhabitants principally subsisting by the cultivation of rice. While we
+lay here at anchor, a Chinese junk rode beside us, which was flat both
+at the head and stern, having many little huts, three feet high, on her
+deck, thatched with palmito leaves. Her cabin was large, having an
+altar, on which was a lamp continually burning. The hold was divided
+into several compartments, the bulkheads between which were so tight,
+that if a leak should spring in any of these divisions, the goods in the
+others would receive no damage. Every merchant has his own room, or
+division, in the hold, in which he stows his own goods, sometimes
+lodging along with them. These junks have only two masts, a main and
+fore, the latter having a square-sail and yard, and the former a sail
+that is narrow aloft, like a sloop's main-sail. In fine weather they
+have also a top-sail, which, in foul weather, they lower to the deck,
+yard and all. The main-mast of one of their largest junks is equal in
+size to that of our third-rate men of war, but all of one piece, not
+built.
+
+Fearing the approach of a storm, and wanting sea-room, we weighed on the
+3d June, and stood out to sea; but next day we were assailed by the most
+violent tempest at N.E. I ever saw, which lasted at intervals for three
+days, when the weather became quite serene. We then refitted our ship,
+but our men were so terrified by the last storm, and dreading the
+approach of full moon, that we resolved to steer for the _Pescadores_,
+or _Fisher Isles_, in lat. 23° 40' N. off the western side of
+_Tai-ouan_, or Formosa. This is a numerous group of islands in the
+Straits of Formosa, having a good harbour between the two eastermost;
+and on the west side of the most easterly there is a large town with a
+fort, in which was a garrison of 300 Tartars. The houses in this town
+were low, yet neatly built; and on the other island, on the west side of
+the harbour, there was another small town near the sea, inhabited by
+Chinese. Most of the islands in this group have some Chinese
+inhabitants. We were very civilly treated by the Tartar governor, who
+sent us some presents, and among the rest a heifer, the beef of which
+was excellent; but would not allow us to trade, or even to land on the
+isle.
+
+We sailed thence on the 29th July, passing the S.W. end of Formosa, a
+large island reaching from lat. 22° to 25° 18' both N. and in long. 121°
+E. It was formerly well inhabited by the Chinese, and frequented by the
+English; but the Tartars have since spoiled the harbour, lest the
+Chinese should fortify themselves there. On the 6th August we came to
+anchor on the east side of the northermost of the _Five Islands_, or
+_Bashees_, in fifteen fathoms. These islands are from the latitude of
+20° 26' to 21° 13' both N. and long. 121° 50' E. Contrary to our
+expectations, we found three or four large towns on the island at which
+we anchored. The westmost of these islands, which the Dutch among us
+named _Orange_ isle, is the largest, being seven or eight leagues from
+N. to S. and two from E. to W. There are two other large islands to the
+S. of this; the northern of which we named _Grafton_ isle, which is four
+leagues from N. to S. and a league and a half from E. to W. The other,
+and most southerly, we named _Monmouth_ isle, being three leagues from
+N. to S. and one from E. to W. Two other isles, lying E. and W. between
+Monmouth isle and the S. end of Orange isle, we called _Bashee_ isle,
+from a certain liquor we drank there, and _Goat_ isle.
+
+_Orange_ isle is the largest, but barren, rocky, and uninhabited, and
+has no anchorage on its coasts. _Monmouth_ and _Grafton_ isles are both
+hilly, but well inhabited. _Goat_ isle and _Bashee_ isle are flat, the
+former having a town. The hills in all these isles are rocky; but the
+intermediate vallies are fertile in grass, plantains, bananas,
+pine-apples, pompions, sugar-canes, potatoes, and some cotton, and are
+well supplied with brooks of fresh water. They are also well stored
+with goats and hogs, but have hardly any fowls, either wild or tame. The
+natives are short and thick, with round faces and thick eye-brows, with
+hazel-coloured eyes, rather small, yet larger than those of the Chinese.
+Their noses are short and low; their mouths and lips middle-sized, with
+white teeth; and their hair is thick, black, and lank, which they cut
+short. Their complexion is of a dark copper colour, and they go all
+bare-headed, having for the most part no clothes, except a clout about
+the middle, though some have jackets of plantain leaves, as rough as a
+bear-skin. The women have a short petticoat of coarse calico, reaching a
+little below the knees, and both sexes wear ear-rings of a yellow metal
+dug from their mountains, having the weight and colour of gold, but
+somewhat paler. Whether it be in reality gold or not, I cannot say, but
+it looked of a fine colour at first, which afterwards faded, which made
+us suspect it, and we therefore bought very little. We observed that the
+natives smeared it with a red earth, and then made it red-hot in a quick
+fire, which restored its former colour.
+
+The houses of the natives are small, and hardly five feet high,
+collected into villages on the sides of rocky hills, and built in three
+or four rows, one above the other. These rocky precipices are framed by
+nature into different ledges, or deep steps of stairs as it were, on
+each of which they build a row of houses, ascending from one row to
+another by means of ladders in the middle of each row, and when these
+are removed they are inaccessible. They live mostly by fishing, and are
+very expert in building boats, much like our Deal yawls. They have also
+larger vessels, rowed by twelve or fourteen oars, two men to each bank.
+They never kill any goats themselves, but feed on the guts and skins,
+which last they broil after singing off the hair.[199] They also make a
+dish of locusts, which come at certain seasons to devour their potatoes;
+on which occasions they catch these insects in nets, and broil or bake
+them in earthen pans, when they are tolerable eating. Their ordinary
+drink is water; but they make also a kind of liquor of the juice of
+sugar-canes, boiled up with black-berries, allowed afterwards to ferment
+four or five days in jars. It then settles and becomes clear, when it
+affords a strong and pleasant liquor, which they call _bashee_,
+resembling our English beer both in taste and colour. I can give no
+account of their language, as it has no affinity either to Chinese or
+Malay. Their weapons are lances headed with iron, and they wear a kind
+of armour of buffalo-hide without sleeves, reaching below their knees,
+where it is three feet wide, and as stiff as a board, but close at the
+shoulders.
+
+[Footnote 199: This is rather inexplicable, as we cannot conceive how
+they got the guts and skins without killing the goats.--E.]
+
+I could not perceive that they had any worship, neither saw I any idols
+among them. They seemed to have no government or precedency, except that
+the children were very respectful to their parents. They seem, however,
+to be regulated by some ancient customs, instead of laws, as we saw a
+young lad buried alive, which we supposed was for being guilty of theft.
+The men have each only one wife, and she and her children were very
+obedient to the head of the family. The boys are brought up to fishing
+along with their fathers; and the girls work along with their mothers in
+the plantations in the vallies, where each family plants a piece of
+ground proportional to their numbers. They are a civil quiet people, not
+only among themselves, but in their intercourse with strangers; for all
+the time we were here, though they came frequently aboard, exchanging
+their yellow metal, goats, and fruits, for iron, we never saw them
+differ either among themselves or with our men, though occasions of the
+latter were not wanting. They have no coins, neither any weights or
+scales, but give their pieces of yellow metal by guess. During our stay
+here, we provided ourselves with seventy or eighty fat hogs, and great
+plenty of potatoes, for our intended voyage to Manilla.
+
+On the 25th September, we were forced out to sea by a violent storm,
+which lasted till the 29th, when we made the best of our way back to the
+Bashees, which we reached on the 1st October. This last storm so
+disheartened our men, that they resolved to give up the design of
+cruising before Manilla; and, by the persuasions of Captain Read, who
+now commanded, and Captain Teat, our master, it was determined to sail
+for Cape Comorin, and thence into the Red Sea. As the eastern monsoon
+was at hand, our nearest and best way had been to pass through the
+Straits of Malacca; but Teat persuaded the men to go round by the east
+side of the Philippines, and thence, keeping south of the Spice islands,
+to pass into the Indian ocean by the south of Timor.
+
+We sailed from the Bashees on the 3d October, by the east of the
+Philippines, and on the 15th, being to the south of Luçonia, directed
+our course west for Mindanao. On the 16th we anchored between two small
+isles, in lat. 5° 10' N. four leagues from the island of Mindanao. While
+here, we learnt from a young prince of one of the isles, that Captain
+Swan and some of his men were still at Mindanao, and in great esteem for
+their services against the Alfoores: but I was since informed, that he
+and his surgeon, when going on board a Dutch ship in the road, were
+overset by the natives and drowned, by order of rajah Laut, as we
+supposed, who had seized all his gold.
+
+We sailed on the 2d November for Celebes, and anchored at its N.E. end
+on the 9th. The 30th, while steering between two shoals, in lat. 3° S.
+ten leagues from Celebes, we saw three waterspouts towards evening. A
+waterspout is a piece of a cloud hanging down in a sloping direction,
+sometimes bending like a bow, but never perpendicular. Opposite to its
+extremity the sea begins to foam, and the water is then seen gently
+moving round in a circle, increasing to a rapid whirling motion, rising
+upwards, an hundred paces in circumference at the bottom, but lessening
+gradually upwards to the size of a spout, through which the sea-water
+appears to be conveyed into the cloud, as is manifest by its blackness
+and increase of bulk. After this the cloud, which was before immoveable,
+drives along for half an hour, accompanied by the spout. When the
+sucking is over, and breaks off, all the water which was below the
+spout, or pendulous cloud, falls again into the sea with a terrible
+clashing noise. These spouts are, however, more frightful than
+dangerous.
+
+We had sight of the Isle of Bouton on the 1st December, and anchored
+there on the 5th, where we staid till the 11th, procuring eggs, fowls,
+potatoes, and other provisions from the natives, who are Mahometans, and
+speak the Malay language. Continuing our voyage, we saw the N.W. point
+of Timor on the 28th, and on the 29th stood S. towards New Holland,
+which we fell in with on the 4th January, 1688, in lat. 16° 50' S. _New
+Holland_ is a vast tract of land, but whether island or continent is
+hitherto unknown.[200] We anchored at a point of land, three leagues to
+the east of which is a deep bay. The land was low and sandy, the points
+only excepted, which were rocky, as were some islands in the bay. We
+found here no fresh water, except by digging. There were various trees,
+and among these the tree producing dragon's-blood. We saw no
+fruit-trees, nor so much as the track of any animal, except one footstep
+of a beast, which seemed the size of a large mastiff. There were a few
+land-birds, but none bigger than a black-bird, and scarcely any
+sea-fowl; neither did the sea afford any fish, except tortoises and
+manatees,[201] both of which are in vast plenty.
+
+[Footnote 200: It is now known to be a vast island, stretching from the
+lat. of 11° 40' to 38° 40', both S. and from long. 109° 40' to 154° 50'
+both E. being 1870 miles from N. to S. and 2400 miles from E. to W.]
+
+[Footnote 201: The Lamentin, or Trichechus Manatus australis of
+naturalists.--E.]
+
+The inhabitants are the most miserable wretches in the universe, having
+no houses or coverings but the heavens, and no garments except a piece
+of the bark of a tree tied round the waist. They have no sheep, poultry,
+or fruits, and subsist wretchedly on a few shell-fish, such as cockles,
+muscles, and periwinkles, living without any government or order, and
+cohabit promiscuously like brutes. Their bodies are straight, thin, and
+strong-limbed, having great heads and eye-brows, with round foreheads.
+Their eye-lids are constantly half closed, to keep out flies, which are
+here very numerous and troublesome. They have large bottle noses, thick
+lips, and wide mouth; and both men and women, young and old, wanted the
+two front teeth of the upper jaw. They have no beards, and their hair is
+short and curled like the negroes, their complexion being equally black
+with them. Their weapons are a kind of wooden swords or clubs, and long
+straight poles sharpened at one end. Of their language I can only say
+that they speak much in the throat. We landed several times, and brought
+the natives to some degree of familiarity with us, by giving them some
+old clothes, but could never prevail on them to assist us in carrying
+water or any other thing, as they seemed quite averse from labour.
+
+We sailed hence on the 12th March, and on the 7th April got sight of
+Sumatra, whence we directed our course for the Nicobar islands, which we
+came in sight of on the 4th May, and anchored next day in a small bay at
+the N. end of the island of Nicobar Proper, in lat. 7° 30' N. This
+island produces plenty of cocoa-nuts, and _mallories_, a fruit as large
+as the bread-fruit of Guam, which the natives boil in covered jars.
+
+Mr Hall, Mr Ambrose, and I, being desirous to leave the unruly crew
+among whom we had sailed so long, were set ashore at this island,
+intending to proceed for Acheen. We accordingly left this island on the
+5th May, accompanied by four Malays and a Portuguese, in a Nicobar
+canoe, not much bigger than one of the London wherries used below
+bridge. On the 18th we had a violent storm, when we expected every
+moment to be swallowed up by the waves; but on the 19th, to our great
+joy, we saw _Pulo Way_, near the N.W. end of Sumatra, as was supposed,
+but it turned out to be the golden mountain of Sumatra, and at length
+arrived at Acheen in June. In July I went with Captain Weldon to
+Tonquin, and returned to Acheen in April, 1689. In September of that
+year I went to Malacca, and came back about Christmas, 1690. Soon after
+I went to Fort St George or Madras, where I remained five months, and
+came back to Bencoolen, an English factory on the west coast of Sumatra.
+
+Before relating my return to England, it may be proper to give some
+account of _Jeoly_, the painted prince, who afterwards died at Oxford.
+He was purchased along with his mother at Mindanao by Mr Moody; and when
+Mr Moody and I went together to Bencoolen, he gave me at parting half
+the property of this painted prince and his mother, leaving them to my
+care. They were born in the island of _Meangis_, which abounds in gold,
+cloves, and nutmegs, as he afterwards told me. He was curiously painted,
+down the breast, behind, between the shoulders, and most of all on the
+fore part of his thighs, in the nature of flower-work. By what I could
+understand, this painting was done by pricking the skin, and rubbing in
+the gum of a tree called _damurer_, used instead of pitch in some parts
+of India. He told me, that the natives of his country wore gold
+ear-rings, and golden bracelets about their arms and legs; their food
+being potatoes, fowls, and fish. He told me also, that being one day in
+a canoe with his father and mother, they were taken by some fishers
+belonging to Mindanao, who sold them to the interpreter of Rajah Laut,
+with whom he and his mother lived as slaves for five years, and were
+then sold for fifty dollars to Mr Moody. Some time afterwards, Mr Moody
+gave me the entire property of both, but the mother soon died, and I had
+much ado to save the son. After my arrival in the Thames, being in want
+of money, I first sold part of my property in Prince Jeoly, and by
+degrees all the rest. He was afterwards carried about and shewn for
+money, and at last died of the small-pox at Oxford.
+
+During my stay at Bencoolen I served as gunner of the fort; but when my
+time was expired, I embarked with my painted prince in the Defence,
+Captain Heath, in order to return to England. We sailed on the 25th
+January, 1691, in company with three other ships, and arrived at the
+Cape of Good Hope in the beginning of April. After a stay of six weeks,
+we set sail on the 13th May for St Helena, where we arrived on the 20th
+June. We left this island on the 2d July, and came to anchor in the
+Downs on the 16th September, 1691, after an absence of twelve years and
+a half from my native country.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX.
+
+VOYAGE ROUND THE WORLD, BY WILLIAM FUNNELL, IN 1703-1706.[202]
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+
+This voyage has usually passed under the name of Captain William
+Dampier; but as he proceeded only to the South Seas, and the
+circumnavigation was entirely completed by Mr William Funnell, who
+sailed originally as his mate, it seemed proper to place his name in the
+title of the voyage, instead of that of Captain Dampier, with whom, in
+this voyage, we have much less to do. It is just however to state, that
+it was on the credit of Captain Dampier, and in expectation that he
+would be able to do great things against the Spaniards in the South Sea,
+that this expedition was undertaken. The point aimed at was plunder,
+rather than discovery, yet there was something remarkable done even in
+this way; and the unknown islands met with by Mr Funnell, in his passage
+between the South Sea and India, strongly confirmed the reports of
+former navigators, of large, populous, and well-cultivated countries in
+those parts.[203] The narrative of Funnell also is well digested, and
+may be read with much satisfaction, as giving a fair and agreeable
+account of his adventures.
+
+[Footnote 202: Funnel's narrative in Dampier's Voyages, vol. IV. pp.
+1.--208. Harris, I. 131. Callender, III. 66. and III. 145.]
+
+[Footnote 203: All these fancies are now shewn to be imaginary.--E.]
+
+This expedition was undertaken at the beginning of the Succession war,
+in the reign of Queen Anne; and high expectations were raised from it,
+of performing great exploits against the Spaniards, who had accepted the
+Duke of Anjou as their king. The merchants believed that a very
+profitable expedition might be made into these parts, with a reasonable
+force, where the buccaneers, with small and ill-provided vessels, had
+performed such extraordinary things; and therefore, having obtained the
+best information they could as to the proper manner of accomplishing the
+design, they cheerfully contributed to the expences necessary for the
+purpose. With this view, they at first fitted out two ships of 26 guns
+and 120 men each, which were designed for the South Seas. One of these
+was named the St George, commanded by Captain William Dampier, in which
+Mr William Funnell sailed as chief mate. The other was the Fame,
+commanded by Captain John Pulling. Both ships were amply supplied with
+warlike stores, and well victualled for nine months; and had commissions
+from Prince George, the queen's husband, lord-high-admiral, to proceed
+against the French and Spaniards; and the officers and crews of both
+were hired on the principles of sharing in the expedition, _no purchase
+no pay_.
+
+While they lay in the Downs, some difference arose between the two
+captains, on which Captain Pulling went away with his ship, the Fame,
+intending to cruize among the Canary Islands, and never afterwards
+joined. Before sailing on the originally-proposed expedition, Dampier
+was joined by a small ship, the Cinque-ports galley, Captain Charles
+Pickering, of ninety tons, carrying 16 guns and 63 men, well victualled
+and provided for the voyage. The original plan of the voyage was to go
+first up the Rio Plata, as high as Buenos Ayres, in order to capture two
+or three Spanish galleons, which Dampier alledged were usually there. If
+this part of the expedition succeeded, so as to get to the value of
+about 600,000_l_. it was to be proceeded in no farther; but if his first
+object failed, they were then to cruize on the coast of Peru, to
+intercept the ships which bring gold from Baldivia to Lima. Should this
+again fail of success, they were to attempt some rich towns, as Dampier
+might direct. After this, they were to go to the coast of Mexico, at
+that time of the year when the great galleon usually comes from Manilla
+to Acapulco, which is commonly reported to be worth fourteen millions of
+dollars.
+
+On their arrival at Madeira, learning that the galleons from Buenos
+Ayres had already arrived in safety at Teneriffe, that part of the
+expedition was laid aside. "How well we pursued the latter part of our
+instructions, the subsequent history of our voyage will sufficiently
+declare; in recording which I have used the greatest sincerity,
+narrating every thing exactly in the manner in which it happened, and
+setting down all that appeared worthy of notice, with all truth and
+plainness: so that I flatter myself the whole will be found useful, and
+that the latter part especially will be esteemed new, curious, and
+interesting, as it contains many things not before published or
+known."[204]
+
+[Footnote 204: This introduction is from the pen of Harris; and the last
+paragraph, marked by inverted commas, is given in the words of
+Funnell.--E.]
+
+
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Narrative of the Voyage, till the Separation of Funnell from Dampier._
+
+
+We sailed from the Downs on the 30th April, 1703, and anchored on the
+18th May at Kinsale, in Ireland. We here refitted and victualled our
+ship, and were joined by the Cinque-ports, and left Kinsale on the 11th
+September. We reached Madeira on the 25th, where we did not come to
+anchor, but plied off and on for our boats, which were sent ashore for
+necessaries. By a good observation, I made this island to be in lat 32°
+20' N. and long. by my account, 18° 5' W. from London.[205] October 6th,
+we saw Mayo, one of the Cape de Verd islands, in lat. 15° 12' N. long.
+23° 20' W. off which we plied all night; but the surf ran so high that
+we durst not send our boats ashore for salt. We accordingly bore up next
+day for St Jago, and anchored at noon of the 7th in Prior bay [Port
+Praya] in that island. This is one of the most fruitful of the Cape Verd
+Islands, abounding in hogs, poultry, guinea fowl, monkeys, maiz,
+oranges, lemons, dates, water-melons, plantains, bananas, and other
+fruits, having good water, but troublesome to get at, and wood is very
+dear. The inhabitants of this island were formerly Portuguese, banished
+thither for murders, thefts, and other crimes; but are now mostly all
+black, in consequence of these men having issue by their female slaves,
+which were Guinea negroes. Yet they still retain the vices of their
+progenitors, thieving being more common here than in any place I ever
+visited, insomuch that they will take a man's hat from his head at noon
+day and in the midst of company. In trading with them, it is necessary
+not to let them have your goods before theirs are delivered, or you are
+sure to lose them. We here watered and refreshed ourselves; and here a
+disagreement took place between Captain Dampier and his
+first-lieutenant, who was turned ashore at midnight, with his chest and
+servant. At four next morning, being the 13th October, we sailed from St
+Jago, not fully resolved where next to touch at.
+
+[Footnote 205: Lat. 32° 33' N. long. 17° 5' W. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+On the 22d October we caught four fish; a shark, a dolphin, a
+jelly-fish, and an old-wife. The shark and dolphin are well known, and
+need not be described in this place. The _Jelly-fish_ was about fourteen
+inches long and two inches deep, having sharp teeth, a sparkling eye,
+and long extended mouth. It has a prodigiously high fin on its back, of
+a slimy substance, except that its rays, which are thirty-two in number,
+are firm and stiff. It has also one small fin under the throat, of the
+same slimy substance with the large one on its back. The greater part of
+the body is of a silver colour, with numerous small dark spots and
+circular bands, all the rest of its substance being a green jelly-like
+substance, whence the name. The _Old-wife_ is about two feet long and
+nine inches high in the back, having a small mouth, a large eye, and a
+large broad fin beginning at the hinder part of the head, and reaching
+to the tail. It has also a large broad fin on each side near the gills,
+and a pretty large one under the belly. The body is deep blue, and the
+fins a very light blue, tipt with yellow. The head has many spots, and
+the body is regularly streaked longways.
+
+We passed the equator on the 2d November, about forty-five leagues west
+from the meridian of St Jago. On the 8th, in lat. 10° 20' S. we saw
+three small islands on the coast of Brazil, called the islands of St
+Ann, not above a stone's throw from each other, and very full of wood,
+as is the whole coast of Brazil. These islands are about four miles from
+the main, and are much troubled with southerly winds, which blow in
+gusts, so that ships ought here to lay their best anchor to the south,
+and all little enough sometimes for their safety. They produce nothing
+except wood, and are frequented by vast flocks of sea fowl, called
+boobies by our sailors. The _booby_ is about the size of a duck, some
+entirely white and others grey, having feet like a duck, and subsist
+mostly on flying-fishes, which they catch while in the air. I have made
+many a meal on these birds, but it was for want of other victuals, for
+they taste very fishy, and are apt to make one sick, if not previously
+well salted. They are so silly, when weary of flying, that they will
+light upon your hand, if held out to them.
+
+We anchored at the island of _Le Grand_, in lat, 23° 30' S.[206] on the
+24th of November. This is a very woody island, on which are several good
+springs of water. It is about nine miles in circuit, and three miles
+from the main, the woods being infested with many savage animals, which
+make a most hideous noise in the night. It produces sugar, rum, and
+several kinds of fruits, but all very dear, on account of supplying the
+town of St Paul with necessaries. _St Paul_ is 300 miles inland from Le
+Grand; but by the vast high mountains which are between, it is reckoned
+a distance of sixty days journey. Near St Paul there is said to be a
+gold mine, which is accounted the richest hitherto known. We here
+wooded, watered, and refitted our ships; and our new first-lieutenant,
+falling out with the captain, went ashore, together with eight of our
+men, and left us. Here also Charles Pickering, captain of the
+Cinque-ports, departed this life, and was succeeded in the command by
+his first-lieutenant, Mr Thomas Stradling. At this island there are good
+fish of various sorts, one of which, called the _Silver-fish_, is about
+twenty inches long, and eight deep, from back to belly, having five
+small fins immediately behind the head, and one large fin from the last
+of these to the tail; one middle-sized fin on each side near the gills,
+and a large fin from the middle of the belly to the tail, which last is
+half-moon shaped. The eyes are large, the nostrils wide, and the mouth
+small. It is a thin fish, and full of bones, of a fine transparent
+white, like silver.
+
+[Footnote 206: Isla Grande is only in lat 30° N. and St Paul's, stated
+in the text, as 300 miles distant, is hardly 200, and is at within
+twenty-five miles of the coast farther south.--E.]
+
+Leaving the isle of Le Grand on the 8th December, we passed the islands
+of Sebalt de Weert[207] [_Falklands_] on the 29th. In lat. 57° 50' S. we
+had a terrible storm, in which we lost company of our consort, the
+Cinque-ports, on the 4th January, 1704. When in lat 60° 51' S. on the
+20th, believing we had sufficiently passed Cape Horn, we tacked to the
+N. and got sight of the island of _Mocha_ on the 4th February. This
+island is in lat. 38° 20' S. twenty miles from the coast of Chili, and
+is well inhabited by Indians, who are always at war with the Spaniards,
+and indeed with all white men, because they consider them all as
+Spaniards. It is a high island, four leagues long, having many shoals
+on its west side, which extend a league or more out to sea. It is about
+112 miles to the northward of Baldivia.
+
+[Footnote 207: Called Sibbil de Ward Islands in the narrative of
+Funnell.--E.]
+
+We saw the island of Juan Fernandez on the 7th February, and on the
+10th, while passing the great bay, we saw the Cinque-ports, which had
+arrived three days before. We accordingly anchored in the great bay, in
+thirty-five fathoms. At this island we wooded, watered, and refitted our
+ships, giving them a heel to clean their sides as low as we could, which
+took up much time, and occasioned both companies to be much on shore. In
+this island there are abundance of cabbage-trees, which are excellent,
+though small. The cabbage-tree, which is a species of palm, has a small
+straight stem, often ninety to one hundred feet long, with many knots or
+joints, about four inches asunder, like a bamboo-cane. It has no leaves
+except at the top, in the midst of which the substance called cabbage is
+contained, which, when boiled, is as good as any garden cabbage. The
+branches of this tree we commonly twelve or thirteen feet in length, and
+at about a foot and a half from the tree the leaves begin, which are
+about four feet long and an inch and a half broad, the leaves growing so
+regularly that the whole branch seems one entire leaf. The cabbage, when
+cut out from among the roots of the branches, is usually a foot long and
+six inches diameter, and as white as milk. From the bottom of the
+cabbage there spring out several large bunches of berries, like grapes,
+each bunch being five or six pounds weight. The berries are red, and
+about the size of cherries, each having a large stone in the middle, and
+the pulp tastes like that of haws.
+
+The sea-lion is so called, as I suppose, because he roars somewhat like
+a lion, and his head also has some resemblance to that animal, having
+four large teeth in front, all the rest being short, thick, and stubbed.
+Instead of feet and legs, he has four fins; the two foremost serving
+him, when he goes ashore, to raise the fore part of the body, and he
+then draws the hind part after him. The two hinder fins are of no use on
+land, but only when in the water. This animal is very fat, for which
+reason we killed several of them, from which we made a ton of oil for
+our lamps; and, while at this island, made use of it also for frying our
+fish. They have short light-coloured hair while young, becoming sandy
+when old. Their food is fish, and they prey altogether in the water, but
+come on land to sleep, when five, six, or more of them huddle together
+like swine, and will often lie still three or four days, if not
+molested. They are much afraid of men, and make off as fast as they can
+into the water. If hard pressed, they will turn about, raising their
+bodies on their fore fins, and face you with their mouths wide open, so
+that we used to clap a pistol to their mouth, and fire down their
+throat. Sometimes five or six of us would surround one of these
+monsters, each having a half pike, and so prick him till he died, which
+commonly was the sport of two or three hours.
+
+While we were at this island, a difference took place between Captain
+Stradling and his men, which was at last compromised by Captain Dampier.
+On the 29th February we descried a sail, on which all hands hurried on
+board, and we slipped our cables and stood out to sea. The Frenchman,
+for so he afterwards proved, immediately tacked and stood from us, while
+we followed the chase with all sail, and got up with him about eleven at
+night, but did not deem it convenient to engage till day. During the
+chase our pinnace towed under water, and was cut adrift. Captain
+Stradling's boat also got loose, in which were a man and a dog.
+
+At sun-rise next morning, 1st March, we began to engage the French ship,
+which was of about 400 tons burden, and thirty guns, well manned. We
+fought her very close, broadside to broadside, for seven hours; and then
+a small gale springing up, she sheered off. In this action our consort
+only fired ten or twelve guns at the commencement, when she dropt
+astern, and never again came up during the whole fight, in which we had
+nine men slain and several wounded. We were desirous to have had another
+trial with the Frenchman, knowing it would be of bad consequences to let
+him go, as he would discover our being in these seas to the Spaniards;
+but our captain opposed this, saying, he knew where he could get to the
+value of 500,000_l_. at any time. So we concluded to return to Juan
+Fernandez, to get our anchors, long boats, and several tons of water
+already casked, together with a ton of sea-lion oil, which we had left
+there. Captain Stradling also had left five of his men, who were gone to
+the west part of the island, and knew nothing of our going away after
+the enemy. He had also left all his sails, besides those at the yards,
+and a great many other stores.
+
+We had then the wind at S. directly off Juan Fernandez, so that it was
+difficult to go there; and while beating up we saw two sail, to which
+the Cinque-ports was very near, and they fired several shots at her, but
+she rowed away to us, and reported them to be two French ships of about
+36 guns each; on which the two captains thought it convenient to bear
+away for the coast of Peru, leaving Captain Stradling's five men, with
+his other stores, which he could ill spare, and now we had neither of us
+any boats. We accordingly stood for the coast of Peru on the 6th March,
+and fell in with it on the 11th, in lat. 24° 53' S.[208] The land here
+was very high, having three distinct ranges of hills behind each other,
+that nearest the water the lowest, and the farthest off the highest. We
+coasted along shore to the northward, and passed the port of _Capaipo_
+on the 14th, said to be a very good harbour, fenced from almost all
+winds. The land is here inhabited by Indians, who make good wines; and
+it is said to abound in good meat, corn, and other provisions, and from
+this port they export wine, money, and other goods for Coquimbo. We
+would willingly have gone ashore for refreshments, but could not for
+want of boats.
+
+[Footnote 208: There must be a material error here, as they afterwards,
+in sailing along the coast _to the northwards_, passed Copaipo, which is
+in lat. 27° 13' S. and they consequently must have fallen in with the
+coast of Chili, improperly named Peru in the text, considerably farther
+south.--E.]
+
+Continuing along the coast, which is the highest and most mountainous I
+ever saw, we were surprised, on the 19th of March, to see the waves
+changed to a red colour for seven or eight leagues, though on sounding
+we had no ground at 170 fathoms; but on drawing up some of the water, we
+found the colour owing to a vast quantity of fish-spawn, swimming on the
+surface. We were now in lat. 16° 11' S. having passed the three famous
+ports of Arica, Ylo, and Arequipa. The 22d March we were off the
+harbour of Callao de Lima, when we saw two ships steering for that port,
+to which we gave chase, and soon came up with the sternmost, which
+proved to be the ship we had fought with off the island of Juan
+Fernandez. We were very eager to stop her from going in, to prevent the
+Spaniards from having intelligence of us, and hindering their merchant
+ships from putting to sea, and did not question our taking her, being
+all now in health; whereas on the former occasion, between twenty and
+thirty of our men were very sick and weak. But Captain Dampier was
+averse to attack her; and while the matter was disputing, both ships got
+into the port of Lima, from whence twenty ships such as ours could not
+have forced them out. This proceeding gave great offence to most of the
+crew, and might have proved of bad consequence, had we not taken two
+very considerable prizes a few days afterwards, one of 150 and the other
+of 200 tons. We took out of these every thing that we thought useful,
+and then dismissed them.
+
+The 5th of April, we began to prepare for the great exploit our captain
+meditated, of landing on the coast and plundering some rich city; for
+which purpose our carpenters were ordered to fit up the launches or long
+boats we had taken from our prizes, so as to land our men in safety, and
+to fit two swivels in each launch. On the 11th we took a bark of fifty
+tons, laden with plank and cordage, as if sent on purpose for our
+present service. This was in sight of _Gallo_, under which island we
+anchored next day with our prize, which we kept to use in the intended
+enterprise. The island of _Gallo_ is in lat. 2° 45' N. long. 76° 38' W.
+from London,[209] and about five leagues from the main; being two
+leagues long and one league broad. When approached from the south, it
+shews three hummocks which seem at a distance as three separate islands,
+the land between being very low; but when to the N.W. of the S. end you
+will see a small island, or rock rather, resembling a ship under sail.
+From this island the main land is in sight, being very low near the sea,
+but prodigiously high up the country. We anchored off the N.W. part of
+this island, two cables length from the shore, in thirty-five fathoms on
+hard sand, the N. point bearing N. 1/2 W. and the S. point S.W. The
+watering place goes in with a full gap, over which, on the hill, is a
+plain spot of red earth, bearing N.W. 1/2 N. but there are several other
+good watering places in the island. The best anchorage is on the N.E.
+part at _Legnetta_, where a ship may wood and water quite secure from
+any enemy. The island is very woody, affording large timber, which is
+often shipped hence for Peru. There are here a few wild monkeys, with
+abundance of lizards; among which is one called the _lion-lizard_, about
+the size of a man's arm, one that I measured being three feet eleven
+inches from the head to the end of the tail. It has a kind of large comb
+on its head, standing up like a helmet, as if to defend its head, and
+when attacked it erects this comb, which otherwise lies in a deep groove
+on the head, just fitted for its reception, so that it can hardly be
+seen when down. This animal has very large eyes, and a large mouth, in
+which are a great many small sharp teeth. The skin is rough and of a
+dark colour, full of black, yellow, and bluish spots. It runs very
+swift, yet our dog caught many of them.
+
+[Footnote 209: Lat. 1° 56' N. long. 78° 50' W. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+After remaining here five days, we began to hoist our anchors to set
+sail, when we discovered a ship standing in for the island, which we
+took. She was a small vessel of fifty tons, commanded by a Mestizo, on
+board of which we found a Guernsey man, who had been taken by the
+Spaniards, while cutting logwood in the Bay of Campeachy above two years
+before, and must have continued a prisoner during life if we had not
+released him. On sailing from Gallo, our purpose was to attack the town
+of Santa Maria, not far from this on the continent to the E. expecting
+there to have found a great quantity of gold, brought thither from the
+adjacent mines of the same name. But this design miscarried, whether
+from fear, confusion, or the enemy having early intelligence of our
+motions, which enabled them to cut off many of our men. This, however,
+is certain, that we were quite sick of our fruitless attempts on shore
+by the 1st May, and immediately re-embarked. We were now so short of
+provisions, that five boiled green plantains were allotted for six men;
+but, when almost out both of hope and patience, a vessel came and
+anchored close beside us at midnight, which we took without resistance.
+This proved a most valuable prize, being a ship of 150 tons, laden with
+flour, sugar, brandy, wine, about thirty tons marmalade of quinces, a
+considerable quantity of salt, and several tons of linen and woollen
+cloth; so that we had now a sufficient supply of provisions even for
+four or five years. I was put aboard of this prize on behalf of Captain
+Dampier and his company, and the master of the Cinque-ports, in behalf
+of Captain Stradling and his crew.
+
+We carried our prize into the Bay of Panama, and anchored under the
+island of Tobago on the 14th of May. Here Captains Dampier and Stradling
+disagreed, and the quarrel proceeded to such length, that they could not
+be reconciled, so that at last it was determined to part company, all
+the men being at liberty to go with which captain they pleased, in
+consequence of which five of our men went over to Captain Stradling, and
+five of his men came to us. We were now informed by the prisoners, that
+there were 80,000 dollars on board our prize, which had been taken on
+board at Lima clandestinely, and were concealed at the bottom of the
+hold in the run of the ship. But Captain Dampier would not credit this,
+neither would he wait till we should rummage her to the bottom, lest
+delay might mar his great designs. Having, therefore, taken on board a
+quantity of provisions from the prize, she was dismissed; and we set
+sail in the St George on the 19th May, leaving the Cinque-ports behind,
+intending again to proceed for the coast of Peru.
+
+We took a vessel of 120 tons on the 7th June, bound from Truxillo for
+Panama, and laden with flour, sugar, brandy, and other articles, with
+some bales of flowered silk. In her we found a packet of letters, and
+the first of these we happened to read was from the captain of the ship
+we had fought off Juan Fernandez, and fell in with again going into
+Callao. It was directed to the president of Panama, and stated, "That he
+had fought with two English privateers off Juan Fernandez, the smaller
+having only fired eight or ten guns at him, and then fell astern and did
+not come up again during the fight, as he believed for want of wind;
+while the large ship fought him yard-arm and yard-arm for more than six
+hours, killed a great many of his men, and wounded such numbers, that he
+had landed thirty-two at Lima, each of whom had lost a leg, an arm, or
+an eye, and he had been nearly taken, as at parting they had given
+themselves over for lost, not having a sufficient number of men left to
+defend themselves." By other letters, we learnt that the two French
+ships we afterwards saw near Juan Fernandez had picked up a boat at sea,
+in which were an Englishman and a dog; had been in at the island of Juan
+Fernandez, and had taken up our anchors, cables, and long-boats, with
+all Captain Stradling's stores, as also his five men and our negro who
+were left there. We learnt also, that the Spaniards had fitted out two
+men of war against us, one of thirty-two, and the other thirty-six brass
+guns, all twenty-four pounders, each having 350 sailors and 150
+soldiers, all picked men, and had been cruizing for us in the Bay of
+Guayaquil, between point St Helena and Cape Blanco, from the 7th to the
+12th.
+
+We were forced to go under an easy sail, as our prize sailed very
+heavily, wherefore we went into _Sardinas_ Bay, in lat. 1° 20' N. where
+we anchored with our prize in ten fathoms, about four miles from the
+shore, for the purpose of rummaging her. We durst not go farther in,
+because of many shoals and sand-banks, which were very imperfectly laid
+down in all our charts. The sea-coast is inhabited by Indians, but not
+in any great numbers, and has several small fresh-water rivers. From
+hence, all the way south, till we came to the Bay of _Atacarnes_, in
+lat. 0° 54' N. the sea-side is composed of white cliffs; and there are
+many shoals as far as _Punta de la Galera_, in lat. 0° 48' N. Six
+leagues S.W. of Sardinas Bay is the great river of St Jago, the mouth of
+which is about three quarters of a mile wide, but has no good anchorage
+till well within. This river is seldom used by ships, being out of the
+way, yet the country here produces abundant provisions of all sorts. We
+careened our ship and rummaged our prize in the Bay of Sardinas, and
+watered at one of the fresh-water rivers, which was as white as milk,
+and both smelt and tasted very strong of musk, occasioned by many
+alligators swimming in it. We shot several of these creatures, one of
+which measured thirty feet in length, and was bigger about than a
+bullock.
+
+The alligator is covered over with great scales from head to tail,
+having very large sharp teeth, and very long claws. It is amphibious,
+living both on land and in the water, and when lying on shore is often
+mistaken at a distance for a great tree fallen down. It runs very fast
+on the land, and is of such strength that one of them will take a horse
+or a cow into the water, and there devour it. They will seize on any
+thing, either on land or in the water, and often make great havock among
+cattle near their haunts, which are usually in fresh-water rivers. The
+Indians are not greatly afraid of them, either on land or in the water.
+In the former case, they run in circles, and this unwieldy animal is
+unable to turn his body quickly, so that they easily get away from them.
+The Indians also go into the water to seek them, taking in one hand a
+piece of iron pointed and baited at both ends, with two cross pieces a
+little below the points. Holding this iron by the middle, when the
+alligator rises to bite, which he always does with, the head above
+water, the Indian holds out the iron to him which he snaps at, and it
+fastens in his mouth, keeping his jaws open like a gag. The female lays
+about 100 eggs at a time, as large as goose eggs; but quite spherical,
+and having shells as thick almost as those of an ostrich. The flesh of
+the alligator is not fit to be eaten, being very strong and musky; and
+the very water of the rivers they frequent was so strong of musk that a
+draught of it was like to suffocate us, yet there are no instances of
+its being injurious to health.
+
+Being off the Bay of Guayaquil on the 21st June, we saw a ship, and came
+up with her next day, being one of the Spanish men of war fitted out to
+take us, carrying thirty-two guns. We did all we could to gain the
+weather-gage, but carrying away our fore-top-mast, were obliged to come
+to action from the leeward, so that she kept a good distance from us,
+and we could not use our small arms. Dividing our crew into two equal
+parts, one managed the guns while the other looked on, and when those at
+the guns were weary, the others took their places, alternately
+refreshing those who were not employed, by which means we fired much
+faster than the enemy, making about 560 discharges, while they only made
+110 or 115. We thus fought from noon till half past six, though at such
+distance that our shot would hardly reach him, while his flew over us.
+Growing dusk, both ceased firing, none of our men being either killed or
+wounded, and only two through carelessness had their hands and faces
+scorched. We lay-to all night, expecting in the morning to renew the
+fight; but he had made sail from us in the night.
+
+We now returned to the Bay of Atacames in search of provisions, for
+which purpose we sent our boat ashore with twenty men, who soon
+returned, saying they had found an Indian village of fifty houses, but
+the inhabitants were all fled and had left nothing behind. In the river
+we found a fine bark of about fifty tons, with as much new plank in her
+as would have built another of equal size; and we took another of about
+ten tons, laden with plantains. This we resolved to retain, instead of a
+long-boat. She had two masts and two square-sails, and having fitted her
+for our purpose, we called her the Dragon. The country in the
+neighbourhood of this bay is very pleasant, being well wooded and
+watered. About seven leagues to the N.E. is the Bay of _St Mattheo_, the
+land about it being very high, and there are many shoals about it,
+running two leagues out to sea. For three or four leagues the water is
+only from four fathoms to six, and this bay has white cliffs both to the
+north and south. In the bottom of the bay there are two rivers running
+into the sea, both of which are what the seamen call _alligator water_,
+that is, white and musky as before described. On each side of these
+rivers there are shoals of sand; and near their mouths are fine groves
+of tall spreading green trees, which are the marks by which they may be
+found, as their mouths are narrow, and not discernible at a distance.
+These rivers are seldom frequented by the Spaniards, except for
+refreshments, for which they are well adapted, as all the adjoining
+country abounds with every kind of provisions that this part of the
+world produces. About two leagues up these rivers there are several
+Indian villages, who furnish the Spanish ships which come here with
+cocoa-nuts, plantains, bananas, and other kinds of fruit.
+
+The _cocoa-tree_ is generally from fifty to an hundred feet high, and
+for the most part straight and slender. The leaves are four fathoms, or
+four and a half long, at the very top of the tree, and serve excellently
+for thatching houses. At the bottom of the leaves the cocoa nuts grow in
+clusters of ten, fifteen, or twenty, hanging by a small string which is
+full of joints. Each nut, with its outer rind, is larger than a man's
+head, and within this outer rind is a hard woody shell which will hold
+near a quart of liquid. The nut or kernel lines the inside of this
+shell, and within this kernel is about a pint and half of pure clear
+water, very cool, sweet, and pleasant. The kernel also is very good and
+pleasant; but when old, we scrape it all down, and soak it in about a
+quart of fresh water for three or four hours, which is then strained,
+and has both the colour and taste of milk, and will even throw up a
+thick head not unlike cream. This milk, when boiled with rice, is
+accounted very wholesome and nourishing by the doctors, and was given to
+our sick men. When the nut is very old, the kernel of itself turns to
+oil, which is often used to fry with, but mostly for burning in lamps.
+The outer end of the nuts may be applied to the purposes of flax, and of
+it the natives make a kind of linen, and it is also manufactured into
+ropes and cables, which are sold in most parts of America and the West
+Indies. The shell of this nut makes very pretty drinking cups, and it
+also burns well, making a fierce hot fire. Thus the cocoa-tree affords
+meat, drink, oil, clothing, houses, firing, and rigging for ships.
+
+The _plantain-tree_ is only about thirteen or fourteen feet high and
+four feet round, its leaves being eight or nine feet long and two broad,
+ending in a round point. The fruit grows at the bottom of the leaves, on
+a great stalk, in a pod about eight inches long and the size of a black
+pudding, being of a fine yellow colour, often speckled with red. The
+inside of this is white, but the plantain itself is yellow like butter,
+and as soft as a pear. There sometimes grow fifty or sixty of these pods
+on one stalk, and five or six stalks on one tree. They are an excellent
+fruit, and most parts of the East and West Indies abound with them. The
+_banana_ tree is much the same with the plantain, but the fruit is only
+about six inches long, fifty or sixty of them growing on one stalk, and
+is extraordinarily mellow, sweet, and good.
+
+We left the bay of Atacames on the 31st July, accompanied by our prize
+the Dragon, and passing the Bay of Panama, came to the Bay of Nicoya on
+the 16th August, in lat 9° 30'N. in which we anchored near certain
+islands near the centre of the bay, called Middle Islands, where we
+careened. While here, Mr Clippington, the chief mate, having quarrelled
+with Captain Dampier, drew over twenty-one men to his party, and making
+himself master of the bark, in which was all our ammunition and the best
+part of our provisions, hoisted anchor, and went without the islands,
+whence he sent us word that he would put ashore at an Indian house all
+our powder, shot, and other ammunition, reserving only what was
+necessary for his own use, which he did accordingly, and we sent our
+canoes to fetch it on board.
+
+These islands in the Bay of Nicoya are extremely pleasant and fruitful,
+abounding in all things necessary for life, such as birds of various
+kinds, several sorts of fish, and amphibious animals, particularly
+turtles and guanas. Among the birds is a very beautiful one called the
+_Maccaw_, having feathers of all the colours of the rainbow. It is in
+shape like a large parrot, with a white bill, and black legs and feet.
+The _carrion crow_ is as big as a small turkey, which it perfectly
+resembles in shape and colour; but its flesh smells and tastes so strong
+of muck that it is not eatable. The _pelican_ is almost as big as a
+swan, being mostly white with brown tips to the wings, having a long
+bill with a large cross joining the lower part of the bill, and hanging
+down the throat like a bag or satchel of great size, into which it
+receives oysters, cockles, conchs, and other shell-fish, which it is
+unable to break, and retains them there till they open, when it throws
+them out and picks out the meat. They are good food, but taste a little
+fishy. Their feet are broad, and webbed like ducks, being water fowl,
+yet they commonly roost on rocks or trees, and always sit with their
+heads to the wind, varying their posture as that changes. They are heavy
+birds and fly slowly, and always when sitting rest their long bills
+upon their breasts. The _Guana_ is an amphibious animal, found both on
+land and in the water. It is about three feet long, some more some less,
+and is very ugly, having large sharp scales, black and green, from the
+fore part of the head to the end of the tail. The mouth is furnished
+with numerous large and sharp teeth, and it has four long claws on each
+foot. They commonly breed in holes about the roots of old trees near the
+water. When stewed with some spice, their flesh is very white and eats
+well, making also good broth; but if not extraordinarily well boiled, it
+is very dangerous meat, making men very sick and often occasioning
+fevers.
+
+There are several kinds of _turtles_, or sea tortoises, but we account
+the green turtle the best meat. When they want to lay their eggs, they
+go on shore in some sandy bay, where they make a hole in the sand with
+their fins, two feet and a half deep, in which one turtle will deposit
+from eighty to ninety eggs, which they cover over with the sand, leaving
+them to hatch by the heat of the sun. They lay in this manner two or
+three times every year, and go immediately off to sea, leaving their
+young when hatched to shift for themselves; which, as soon as they get
+out of the eggs and from the sand, retire to the sea. The eggs are round
+and white, as large as those of a duck, being covered with a thin tough
+skin, but no shell. I have seen of the green turtle 200, 350, and even
+400 pounds weight. The lean of this animal looks like beef, but the fat
+is as green as grass, yet is very wholesome food. The _pearl-oyster_ is
+much about the size of our common oyster, but thick and broad, and hangs
+to the rocks by a long string or beard, like that of a muscle. The pearl
+is found in its thickest part, and some have six or seven pearls. The
+Spaniards often make voyages to this gulf of Nicoya and to California in
+quest of pearls, employing Indian divers, who go down in seven or eight
+fathoms, and bring up eight, ten, or twelve oysters at a time, which are
+opened by other men on board. The meat of this oyster is very green and
+fat, and eats tolerably well, boiled or stewed. The _great-oyster_ grows
+to the rocks, not hanging from them by a beard. When opened, one part of
+the meat is of a fine red colour like a cherry, and the rest a fine
+white. I have often eat of this oyster, for want of better victuals; and
+they are so large, that one of them cut in pieces and stewed is a
+sufficient meal for five or six men. The _muscles_ here are so large
+that one will suffice for a meal to two men, and they are tolerably good
+when, stewed with pepper and vinegar.
+
+We sailed from the Gulf of Nicoya on the 23d September, and were in lat.
+13° 7' N. on the 7th October, when we got sight of two high mountains,
+commonly called the Volcanoes of Guatimala. That which is to the north
+of the city is the highest, and affords a fine prospect from the sea;
+and in the year 1534 threw out a torrent of water, which totally
+overwhelmed the old city of St Jago de Guatimala, and occasioned the
+building of a new city at the distance of thirty-five miles S.E. The
+other mountain is really a volcano, which rages terribly in the rainy
+season, from April to November, sometimes throwing out stones as big as
+a house, and with such prodigious eruptions of flame, that one may see
+to read a letter in a dark night at the distance of six miles. This is
+to the south of Guatimala.
+
+The 9th October we took a bark of eighty tons in ballast, but which had
+a small quantity of provisions, which were very acceptable. This bark
+was commanded by a Spaniard named Christian Martin, born in the
+Canaries, but brought up in London, who had formerly been servant to
+Captain Eaton, and came with him to the South Sea in quality of gunner;
+but, falling out with the men, he ran away from them in the island of
+Gorgonia, where he lay concealed for six days till the ship departed. He
+then cut down two trees, which he drew to the water side, and bound
+together with withes, fixed a mast, and made a sail of two shirts which
+he had with him. Then filling a bag with oysters, he put off early in
+the morning from Gorgonia, and got next day in the afternoon into the
+river Bonaventura. He was here ill used by the Spaniards, who sent him
+to Lima, where he was set at liberty. We were now sixty-four men and
+boys, all in good health and spirits, and on the 23d November, captured
+a small bark of sixty tons from California laden with plank, but having
+also several parcels of pearls, that had been fished on that coast.
+December 4th we came into the Bay of Nativity, or _Puerto Nauidad_, in
+lat. 19° 22' N. where we took a new ship of about sixty tons, laden with
+ammunition and military stores for the Acapulco ship, for which we were
+now in search, and for the sight of which our people longed as earnestly
+as if there had been no difference between seeing and taking her;
+neither was it long before they had their wish in one respect, but not
+in the other. We took from our prize what ammunition was left; for, on
+perceiving our design, the ship's company quitted her, having first
+thrown overboard the best part of her cargo, and left the rest scattered
+about in the utmost confusion.
+
+Being off the volcano of Colima on the morning of the 6th December, we
+descried a sail to which we gave chace, and soon came up with her, when
+she proved to be the great Acapulco ship or Manilla galleon, which we
+had so long wished to fall in with. As we were well provided, we gave
+her a great many broadsides before she could get any of her guns cleared
+for action, as she had not suspected us of being an enemy, and was not
+at all prepared for us. Martin, who was still a prisoner on board our
+ship, advised us to lay her aboard immediately, while the Spaniards were
+all in confusion, as we might then easily succeed by boarding; but if we
+gave them time to get out their great guns, they would certainly tear us
+to pieces, and we should lose the opportunity of acquiring a prize worth
+sixteen millions of dollars. Thus it accordingly happened; for the time
+being wasted in disputing, between those of us that were for boarding,
+and those of a different opinion, she got out one tier of guns, and then
+proved too hard for us, so that we could not lie along side of her to do
+her any damage. Our five pound shot, which was the biggest we had,
+signified little against such a ship; but when any of her eighteen and
+twenty-four pound shot struck our ship, which was much decayed, it drove
+in a piece of plank of three or four feet. Being thus greatly damaged,
+and having received a shot between wind and water in our powder room, by
+which two feet of plank were driven in on each side of our stern, orders
+were given to stand off from the enemy.
+
+Our design being thus disappointed, all our men became much
+discontented, and were for going home, seeing we could do no good in
+these parts, either for ourselves or owners; our ship also being ready
+to fall in pieces of herself, and having provisions only for three
+months at short allowance. Captain Dampier requested that we would
+consent to prolong our cruize for six weeks longer; after which he
+promised to permit us to sail for India to some factory, where we might
+all dispose of ourselves as we thought best for our advantage. To this
+we all agreed, and we accordingly cruized along shore to the S.E. in
+sight of land, passing the noted ports of Acapulco,_Puerto de los
+Angelos_, Guatalco, and several others; when we proposed to seek out a
+proper place in which to water our ships and bark, previous to our
+intended voyage to the East Indies; and, after some consideration, the
+Gulf of Amapalla or Fonseca was fixed upon for that purpose.
+
+On the 5th January, 1705, we met with such vast quantities of fish, that
+in half an hour we caught near three score _albicores_, from sixty to
+ninety pounds weight each, besides vast quantities of other fish. The
+_albicore_ is about four or five feet long, weight from 50 to 100 and
+even 150 pounds. It has eleven fins on its back, one pretty large, a
+second of middle size, and nine small yellow fins near the tail; one
+large fin on each side near the gills; and one near the middle of the
+belly. This is a very fleshy fish, having hardly any bones besides the
+back bone, and is extraordinary good eating. It has prodigious strength,
+while in the water, and preys mostly on flying fish, as do dolphins and
+bonetoes. On the 6th of this month, a new revolution took place in our
+affairs, as thirty of our men agreed to remain along with Captain
+Dampier in the South Sea; but with what view or on what terms, we
+others, who were not in the secret, never knew. Our company, who were
+not of Dampier's party, consisted of thirty-three men; and,
+notwithstanding this new arrangement, we all sailed to the Gulf of
+Amapalla, where we anchored on the 26th January.
+
+That same day, all the remaining provisions were equally divided between
+the two companies by the agent for the owners, and we had four pieces of
+cannon, with a proper proportion of small arms and ammunition, assigned
+for us, for our defence during the voyage to India. Our next care was to
+take in water, for which purpose we landed on the island of _Conchagua_;
+and after some search, we found a large bottom behind the hills, in
+which was a large plantain walk, and a large reservoir of rain water,
+which came from the mountains. This was very inconvenient, as we were
+forced to carry all our water over a high hill, which we could hardly
+climb by ourselves; but there was no alternative, and we set to work to
+cut down the bushes in our way, to make a clear path. After this, as the
+hill was very steep on the land side towards the bottom whence we had to
+fetch water, we cut steps in the hill with axes and shovels; and our
+sail-maker made a hose or canvass pipe of ninety fathoms long, which
+carried the water from the top of the hill down to our water cask at its
+foot towards the sea. We then fell to work, each man having a six gallon
+keg, in which the water was carried to the top of the hill, where it was
+emptied into the hose. We were thus employed four days, in which time
+we filled twenty-six tons, which we carried on board. The 31st January,
+we all went to the plantain walk, where we cut down as many plantains as
+we could carry, with which we returned on board our ship, meaning to set
+sail next day.
+
+This evening, two of the men who had agreed to remain with Captain
+Dampier, left him and came over to us, so that our number was now
+thirty-five, viz. thirty-four English, and a little negro boy we had
+taken from the Spaniards. While we were employed in watering our bark,
+the men on board the St George were busied in refitting that ship as
+well as they could; the carpenter stopping up the shot-holes in the
+powder-room with tallow and charcoal, not daring, as he said, to drive a
+nail, for fear of making it worse. The four great guns, which usually
+stood between decks, were put down into the hold, there being sixteen
+besides, which was more than they now had men to manage, as there only
+remained twenty-eight men and boys with Captain Dampier, who were mostly
+landsmen, a very insignificant force indeed with which to make war on a
+whole nation.
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_Sequel of the Voyage of William Funnell, after his Separation from
+Captain Dampier_.
+
+We left the Gulf of Amapalla on the 1st February, 1705, where Captain
+Dampier remained at anchor in the St George, having a fine gale of wind
+at N.E. While in any of the harbours on the coast of Mexico, we were
+seldom allowed any thing except flour, only that we used to go on shore,
+and found on the rocks plenty of concks, oysters, muscles, and other
+shell-fish, on which we made many a hearty meal. Being now bound, as we
+hoped, for a land of plenty, we bore hunger and short commons with great
+patience, of which we had much need, as our allowance was no more than
+half a pound of coarse flour a day to each man, and two ounces of salt
+meat every other day. Our vessel was a small bark of about seventy tons
+with two masts, which we had taken from the Spaniards, which was so
+eaten with worms while in the Gulf of Amapalla, that she already began
+to grow very leaky. To add to our distress, we had no carpenter, neither
+had we a doctor or any medicines, if any of us happened to fall sick,
+and we had no boat to aid us if our vessel should fail. The carpenter,
+doctor, and boat being all left with Captain Dampier. Yet, trusting to
+God's providence, who had already delivered us out of so many dangers,
+we proceeded on our voyage to India; and a bolder attempt was perhaps
+never made by such a handful of men in so frail a bark, and nothing but
+our anxious desire to revisit our native country could have supported us
+under all the difficulties and dangers of this extensive voyage.
+
+The prospect of our difficulties gave us spirit and resolution to
+provide against them; and in a council, which we held on this occasion,
+we determined on the course we were to pursue, and the allowance of
+provisions during the course. We knew the wind we now had was merely a
+land breeze, and that by running 100 leagues out to sea we should fall
+in with the regular trade-wind, which blows always N.E. or E.N.E. our
+first purpose was, therefore, to get into the latitude of 13° N. which
+is that of Guam, and then to bear away before the wind in that parallel.
+This resolution was formed on the 2d February, all which day and most of
+the ensuing night we had fine calm weather, and caught abundance of
+_yellow-tails_, which swam about the vessel. This fish is about four
+feet long, having twenty fins on its back; a middling one behind the
+head, a large one on the middle of the back, and eighteen small ones
+between that and the tail. It has a large fin on each side near the
+gills, and thirteen under the belly, viz. a middling one under the
+gills, a large one near the middle of the belly, which goes in with a
+dent, and eleven small ones between that and the tail, which is yellow
+and half-mooned. This fish has a very great head, with large eyes, and
+is good eating, having no bones except the back-bone. It is all white,
+except the tips of the fins and the tail, which, are yellow. These fish
+were very acceptable to us, as we fed upon them for three days, saving
+our other provisions. On the 3d February, five or six turtles came near
+our bark, two of which we caught, which also served to save our scanty
+store of provisions, which otherwise had not sufficed to keep us from
+starving.
+
+On the evening of the 3d February, having a brisk gale from the land at
+N.E. we took our departure from _Mount St Miguel_ in the Gulf of
+Amapalla, steering S.W. and S.S.W. till we were in the lat. of 10° N.
+when falling in with the tradewind, we set our course W.N.W. we then
+made studding-sails to our main and main-top sails, which we hoisted
+every morning at day-break, and hauling down at sun-set, as it commonly
+blew so fresh in the night that we had usually to furl our top-sail; but
+the wind commonly abated at sun-rise. During our whole voyage we
+steadily adhered to the rule of diet we had laid down, the slenderness
+of which may be judged of by the following particulars.
+
+From the 3d of February to the end of that month, we fed entirely on
+plantains, making two meals a day, and allowing two plantains to each
+man for a meal. We had then recourse to our flour, of which half a pound
+was allowed daily to each man, and two ounces every other day of salt
+beef or pork; but the meat had been so long in salt, that it shrunk one
+half when boiled, wherefore we concluded it was better to eat it raw,
+which we did as long as it lasted. By the beginning of April that began
+to fail, so that we were reduced to flour alone, which was sore spoiled,
+being full of maggots, spiders, and other vermin, so that nothing but
+the extremity of want could have induced us to eat it. It was surprising
+to behold this strange alteration in the flour, which only a few days
+before was white and fine, and was now in a manner all alive, the
+maggots tumbling over each other in prodigious numbers. On strict
+enquiry, these maggots seemed to proceed from the eggs of spiders
+deposited among the flour, out of which the maggots were bred, and then
+fed voraciously on the flour. Words can only faintly describe the
+miseries of our situation, which was somewhat alleviated by work, and
+our spirits were buoyed up by the hopes of accomplishing our long and
+difficult voyage. Some occasional assistance we derived by now and then
+catching a dolphin. At other times we saw many sea fowl, such as
+boobies, noddies, and others, which would come and perch on some part of
+our rigging, and happy was he that could catch one. In this manner we
+spent ten weeks, at the end of which we were in a very melancholy
+condition, and nothing but the hope of seeing land could possibly keep
+us from despair.
+
+The 10th of April, we observed the clouds to gather more than usual in
+the horizon, which is a sure indication of land, as it is common between
+the tropics to be foggy over the land, though perfectly clear at sea;
+wherefore we kept an anxious look-out all this night, and early in the
+morning of the 11th, we saw the island of _Magon_ W. ten leagues
+distant. This is a high woody island, very plain, and green on the top.
+When within a mile of this island, we lay to, and several fishing boats
+came to us, bringing us fish, yams, eggs, potatoes, and other
+provisions, to our great joy. The men in these boats were very tall and
+large-limbed, of tawny complexions, with long black hair reaching to
+their middles, and were all utterly stark naked, not even covering their
+parts of shame. In exchange for what we had of these people we offered
+them money, which they looked at and returned, making signs to give them
+tobacco, which we did, and they seemed much pleased. We also gave them
+some old shirts, which they tore in pieces and wrapped round their
+heads. We would have given each a dram of brandy, but they were afraid
+of it; only one man accepted a glass, which he drank off, but we thought
+he would never have closed his mouth again, he seemed so astonished at
+the heat it left in his mouth and stomach, that I believe he thought
+himself on fire. He lay down and roared like a bull near half an hour,
+when he fell asleep; and we being in haste, put him into his boat,
+making signs to his companions to take care of him.
+
+These islanders seemed a very civil people, yet we did not venture to
+allow too many of them to come on board at once. When they first came
+near us, they tied two sticks together in form of a cross, which they
+held up, as we supposed, to signify to us that they had some knowledge
+of Christianity; whereupon we shewed them a crucifix, we had taken from
+the Spaniards, at the sight of which they all bowed their bodies, and
+came on board. This island of Magon, as I reckoned, is in lat. 15° N.
+and we made its longitude by computation, 120° 9' W. from _St Miguel_,
+or 7029 English miles, allowing 58-1/2 miles to the degree of longitude
+in this parallel.[210]
+
+[Footnote 210: From the sequel, this island of Magon appears almost
+certainly to have been one of the Ladrones, perhaps to the N.E. of Guam,
+now named Rota. Point Candadillo, near San Miguel, the N.W. cape of the
+Gulf of Amapalla, is in long. 87° 58' W. and the Ladrones are in long.
+216° W. from Greenwich, so that the difference, or run across the
+Pacific, is 128° 2', which, at 58-1/2 miles, extend to 7590 miles,
+besides the allowance for difference of latitude.--E.]
+
+On mature deliberation, we resolved to proceed directly from this place
+to New Guinea, without putting in at the island of Guam, which was in
+sight. The weather continued fair, and the wind brisk and favourable,
+till we came into the latitude of 4° N. when we had a calm for seven
+days, during which time we had no means of relieving our hunger, except
+by taking large draughts of water, and then lying down to sleep. On the
+3d May we had a fine gale, which continued till the 5th, and then died
+quite away before we got sight of land; but about ten that night we were
+all sensible of a very odoriferous smell, whence we concluded that we
+were near land, on which we examined our charts, but found none laid
+down. Next morning, however, we saw land at no great distance. This day
+also we caught two bonetoes, which were most welcome, as they made a
+hearty meal to our whole company. This fish is commonly about three feet
+long and two in circumference, having a very sharp head, with a small
+mouth, full eyes, and a semilunar tail. It is very fleshy, and makes
+good broth. About noon we were in sight of three small islands, all low
+land, but very green and pleasant, especially to us, who had been so
+long of seeing any land. We had this day an observation of the sun, by
+which we found our latitude to be 50' N. and as the eastermost of these
+islands was four leagues S.E. of the ship, it must of consequence be in
+lat. 0° 42' N.[211]
+
+[Footnote 211: The only islands in modern maps which agree with the
+slight notice in the text, are Frevilla, or St David's Isle,, nearly in
+lat. 1° N. and long. 135° E. from Greenwich: Yet it is singular that
+Funnell should have passed through the numerous group of the Carolines
+without seeing any of them.--E.]
+
+As we were fearful of entering upon an unknown coast in the dark, we
+stood off all night, which was well for us, as we found ourselves at
+day-break next morning, 7th May, within a ship's length of a great reef
+of rocks, which extended from one island to the other, and thinking to
+have gone between the islands, we had nearly run upon this dangerous
+ledge. Having a small breeze from shore we were fortunately able to
+stand off, and went to the westermost island, because we saw many shoals
+off the others. The rocks we were so near running upon were off the
+northmost isle, which we named the Island of _Deceit_. On getting near
+the westermost island which was the biggest of the three, forty or fifty
+of their flying proas came off, in which there might be 450 men,
+allowing ten to each proa, and we could also see multitudes of people on
+the shore looking at us as we passed. The flying proas kept at a
+distance from us, till we beckoned and made signs for them to come near,
+and at length one came within a ship's length, in which were ten men
+entirely naked, in the midst of whom was a grave old man of a pleasant
+countenance, entirely naked like the rest, except that he had a
+four-cornered cap on his head without a crown. By the respect shewn him
+by all the rest in the boat, we judged this man to be a king or prince.
+On their approach, they sung a song which continued near a quarter of an
+hour, and had a very pretty tune. When this was done, they came almost
+close to our vessel, and then sung another song, which was begun by the
+old man, and followed by all the rest in the boat. At the end of which,
+they put themselves in a posture of prayer, making many bows and cringes
+towards us; and then one of the men in the boat, who had a very sore
+leg, held it up to us, as if desiring us to cure it, whence we supposed
+they had never seen white men before, and deemed us more than mortals.
+
+After some time, we made signs to let them know we wanted victuals and
+drink, when they shook their heads as if by way of denial. Seeing us
+proceeding towards the island, one of the men in the boat blew a horn,
+on which all the other boats made boldly towards us; and thinking they
+meant to board us, we fired a junket over their heads to intimidate
+them, at the noise of which they seemed much surprised and drew back,
+menacing us at a distance with their paddles, and still following.
+Seeing such multitudes on the shore, and finding we could have nothing
+from them but by force, and besides not having anchors and cables on
+which we could depend, or any boat in which to land, we concluded that
+we could do no good here; and on examining our water, which was found
+sufficient for eighteen days, at a quart each man daily, we resolved to
+quit these islands, and trust to Providence for guiding us to some more
+friendly place, where we might supply our wants. So we left these
+islands, naming the westermost the Island of _Disappointment_, because
+we made certain of procuring water here, but could not.
+
+These three islands were all low, flat, and almost even with the water,
+yet full of trees of various sorts, all very green and flourishing; and
+doubtless, if we had possessed a boat, we must have found something
+beneficial to ourselves, perhaps useful to our country, as we might also
+at several other islands which we afterwards passed. The inhabitants of
+most of these islands were a very large and strong-boned race of men,
+having long black lank hair reaching to their middles, and were all
+entirely naked, not so much as covering their parts of shame; and I
+certainly never saw such, a parcel of stout-limbed men together in all
+my life. These islands, therefore, are abundantly peopled, though they
+were utterly averse from any communication with us, perhaps from a
+notion that all whites are Spaniards; and yet it is not quite clear that
+even the Spaniards have ever attempted to form a settlement at any of
+these islands.
+
+We left these islands with a fresh breeze at E. steering S.W. and
+continually met with weeds and grass on our way, which made us believe
+we were not far from land, yet we had no ground with 100 fathoms. Early
+in the morning of the 9th May, we descried the coast of New Guinea, more
+than eighteen or nineteen leagues distant. We now saw the necessity of
+constructing a boat, with a few old boards and such other materials as
+we had, though not quite suitable for the purpose; and though neither
+strong nor handsome, it proved exceeding useful in the sequel. On the
+9th we had very bad weather, the wind shifting to every point of the
+compass. This part of New Guinea appeared very mountainous, black, and
+rocky, without harbour, bay, or road, in which we might anchor in
+safety. The mountains seemed so bleak and barren, and the vallies so
+deep and narrow, that at first we conceived the country to be
+uninhabited; neither did we afterwards see any inhabitants or signs of
+any. That same day we passed two small islands, each about a league in
+length, which were very low, and well clothed with small green trees. At
+the same time we saw part of the great island of Gilolo, at the distance
+of eight leagues, and held our course W.S.W.[212] intending to pass
+through between that island and New Guinea, into the East Indian Sea.
+
+[Footnote 212: The only way of explaining this part of the text, is by
+supposing Funnel may have mistaken the island of Waygoo for a part of
+New Guinea, and even the N.W. point of that island is at least sixty
+leagues from the S.W. leg or peninsula of Gilolo, to which the direction
+of his course certainly points.--E.]
+
+We had very bad weather till the 11th of May, and the night being very
+dark, we missed the common passage, and found ourselves among many
+small islands; and as the wind was at E. we resolved to look out for
+some passage among these islands to the south. After infinite difficulty
+and much danger, we at length made our way through a strait, which we
+named _St John's Straits_, after the name of our bark. At this time we
+were boarded by a large Indian proa, on board of which was a freeman of
+Amboina, whom we acquainted with our great want of victuals, having had
+nothing for a great while to support us except a scanty allowance of
+spoilt flour and water, and so very little of that as hardly sufficed to
+keep us alive. He told us, if we would go to the island of _Manissa_,
+which was then in sight, he would be our pilot, where he had no doubt we
+might have enough of rice for our money to carry us to Batavia. We
+accordingly proceeded for Manissa, passing by the island of _Keylan_,
+which is small and high, but well inhabited, and clothed with many kinds
+of trees. Its chief produce is rice, and a few cloves; and on this
+island there is a Dutch corporal with six soldiers, whose only business
+is to see all the clove trees cut down and destroyed. From thence we
+proceeded to Manissa, where we arrived about midnight, and came to
+anchor in a small bay at the N.W. end of the island, when our Dutch
+pilot sent two men ashore with a letter to the governor, acquainting him
+of our urgent wants.
+
+Early of the 23d May, a Dutch corporal and two soldiers came on board,
+and read to us a general order from the Dutch East-India Company, that
+if any ships, except their own, came there to anchor, they were not to
+be supplied with any thing whatever. We told him that extreme want of
+provisions had constrained us to put in here, and that we should not
+have touched any where before reaching Batavia, if we could possibly
+have subsisted; wherefore we requested he would inform the governor of
+our urgent wants. This he engaged to do, seeing us in a very weak
+condition, and came back about four in the afternoon, saying that we
+could have no provisions here, but might be supplied at Amboina. We were
+forced therefore to leave this unfriendly place, and to attempt going to
+Amboina, if the wind would serve. _Manissa_ is about fifteen miles from
+S.E. to N.W. and about eight in breadth, in lat. 3° 25' S. and about
+twenty miles west from the island of _Bonou_. It is a remarkably high
+island, and pretty well inhabited by Malays, as are all the Molucca
+Islands. It is surrounded by shoals almost on every side, and some of
+these stretch a league and a half from the shore, so that it is very
+dangerous to come near, unless with very good charts, or with an
+experienced pilot. It has several good springs of fresh water, and the
+Dutch have a small fort with six guns on its S.W. side. It is governed
+by a Dutch serjeant, having under him three corporals, a master gunner,
+and twenty European soldiers; and produces vast plenty of rice and
+cloves, both of which are sent to Amboina. The inhabitants are mostly
+fishers, and catch such abundance of fish as not only supplies
+themselves, but enables them also to carry a great deal to Amboina.
+
+We stood to the S.W. having the wind at S.S.E. and blowing fresh, so
+that we sailed under our courses, and were now much out of heart, not
+expecting to reach Amboina, the S E. monsoon being now set in; which was
+right against us. Almost in despair, we continued our course till we
+were over against the island of _Bouro_, and then the wind veering to
+the S.S.W. we stood away S.E. but finding a strong current setting to
+leeward, we rather lost ground, and seeing no likelihood of getting to
+Amboina, we, by general consent, shared among us all that was eatable on
+board, each man's share being six pounds and three quarters of flour,
+and five pounds of bran, every one resolving to use his share as
+sparingly as possible. On the 25th, the wind veered to S.S.E. when we
+tacked to S.W. and soon weathered the island of _Amblow_. This is a
+small island of moderate height, in lat. 4° 5' S. tolerably furnished
+with trees, but not inhabited. On the 26th, we had a fine fresh gale at
+S.E. when we tacked and stood away N.E. for the island of Amboina.
+Continuing the same course all the 27th, we got sight of Amboina early
+in the morning of the 28th, bearing due N. about six leagues distant. We
+now stood directly for the island, and about noon came just off the
+harbour, a joyful sight to us then, though we soon had cause to think it
+the worst thing that had befallen us.
+
+As we entered the harbour of Amboina, we met two Dutch ships coming out,
+laden with cloves and bound for Batavia. The captain of one of these
+came on board our bark, desiring to know whence we came and whither we
+were bound, and required to have a journal of our voyage, promising to
+return it when he again met us at Batavia. We gave him the best answers
+we could to all his questions, and the agent of our owners gave him a
+succinct relation of our voyage, which was of happy consequence to us,
+as to that we afterwards owed our preservation as will appear in the
+sequel. We stood into the harbour that night, and next morning, which,
+according to our account, was Tuesday, but with the Dutch Wednesday, two
+Dutch _orambies_, as they call the vessels used at that place, came on
+board us, each of which was paddled by forty men. In these vessels came
+the fiscal and several Dutch gentlemen, with eighty soldiers, who
+immediately took possession of our bark. They also went below and sealed
+up all our chests, after which the two orambies towed us farther into
+the harbour, so that by noon we were up as high as the town of Amboina,
+where they moored our bark in the ordinary anchorage.
+
+We continued on board till the 31st, two days, not knowing how they
+meant to dispose of us; in which time they would not supply us with any
+victuals, though we offered a crown a pound for beef, pork, or bread. In
+the evening of this day they took us all on shore, lodging us in two
+rooms near the Stadt-house, our bark, with all our money and goods,
+being taken from us, except what we happened to have about our persons,
+and soon after our vessel and goods were sold by auction. We were fed
+with bad meat, which our stomachs could ill digest, being very weak with
+having been so long on short allowance, and if we desired to have better
+we had to buy it with our own money. Several of us had fortunately some
+money about us, and as long as that lasted we purchased provisions from
+our keeper. For a Spanish dollar, which was worth five shillings and a
+penny, he would only give us five Dutch _skellings_, or the value of
+about two and six-pence; and even for this he gave us no more victuals
+than we could have bought for five-pence, if we had been at liberty to
+go into the town; so that, instead of five shillings for the Spanish
+dollar, we in reality had only five-pence. During my leisure, I had many
+opportunities of enquiring into the condition of Amboina, by which I was
+enabled to draw up a pretty large account of the island and its
+inhabitants, which I flatter myself will be acceptable to the public, as
+the Dutch are careful to prevent any accounts of this place from being
+published.
+
+This _island of Amboina_, so famous, or rather infamous, for the
+cruelties and injustice formerly committed there by the Dutch upon the
+English, is twelve leagues long from N. to S. being high and
+mountainous, with intermediate vallies, which are very fertile, but the
+hills are in a great measure barren. The soil of the vallies is black,
+and affords salt-petre. The middle of the island is in lat. 3° 40' S.
+The original inhabitants of the island are Malays, who are of middle
+stature and tawny complexions. The women are brighter than the men, and
+have long black hair, reaching to the calves of their legs. They have
+round faces, with small mouths, noses, and eyes. Their dress is a linen
+or cotton waistcoat, reaching only below their breasts, and a cloth
+round their waists, four yards long and a yard broad, which serves as a
+petticoat, as the Dutch women only are permitted to wear petticoats;
+neither are any of the men allowed to wear hats, except the king or
+rajah. The natives are numerous, yet the Dutch possess the whole
+sea-coast, and have here a strong castle, built of stone, mounted by
+sixty pieces of cannon, besides several small forts in other parts of
+the island. Near the castle is a small town of about 100 houses, of
+stone, brick, or timber, inhabited by the Dutch. None of the houses
+exceed one storey, as the place is subject to earthquakes, which would
+endanger the houses if higher, and even low as they are they often fall.
+While we were there we had a great earthquake for two days, which did
+much mischief as the ground opened in several places, and swallowed up
+several houses with their inhabitants. Several of their people were dug
+out of the ruins, but most of them dead, and many others had their legs
+and arms broken by the fall of the houses. Where we were, the ground
+swelled up like a wave of the sea, but no damage was done.
+
+This island is governed by a council of five, consisting of the
+governor, the senior merchant, or _ober koop-man_, the Malay king, the
+captain of the fort, and the fiscal, which last is the judge. There are
+said to be on the island 350 Dutch soldiers, with 120 or 130 Dutch
+freemen and petty officers, and about as many Chinese, who reside here
+for the benefit of trade, though not allowed to participate in the spice
+trade, which the Dutch reserve entirely to themselves. I thus estimate
+that the Dutch are able to muster in this island about 550 fighting men,
+including themselves and the Chinese; for they can count very little on
+the Malays, who would gladly join any other nation against them. The
+Malay women are said to be very loose, and not ashamed of having
+intercourse with men. They are soon ripe, being often married at nine
+years of age, and are said to have children by ten or eleven. All who
+reside near the coast must live under the Dutch government, which is
+very dissolute and tyrannical, and they are severely punished for even
+small faults, being often reduced to slavery, and condemned to wear an
+iron on their legs for life. Those dwelling near the coast under the
+controul of the Dutch are a kind of Christians; but those in the
+interior, among the hills, are Mahometans, and are always at war with
+the Dutch. When these hill Malays take any prisoners, they never give
+quarter; but, after detaining their prisoners a few days, without meat
+or drink, they are produced in public, and have their breasts ripped
+open, and their hearts taken out, all the Malays present making great
+rejoicings. The heads of these slaughtered prisoners are then embalmed
+with spice, and those who can shew the greatest number of Dutch heads
+are held in highest honour. In retaliation, when the Dutch take any of
+these hill Malays, they load them with irons, and after keeping them
+some days in prison, they cut off their ears and noses, and after being
+kept some time longer in prison, they are publicly racked to death.
+
+When any of the Malays, living under the Dutch government, are found
+guilty of thieving, their ears and noses are cut off, and a great iron
+chain is fastened to their legs, in which condition they are made slaves
+for life. While we were there, about 500 poor wretches were in this
+condition, who were kept constantly employed, in sawing timber, cutting
+stones for building, carrying burdens, or other work. They are let out
+of prison at sunrise, the men being kept in one prison and the women in
+another, and are kept hard at work till noon, when they return to prison
+for an hour, being allowed for dinner a pint of coarse boiled rice for
+each. They return again to work at one o'clock, and return to prison at
+six in the evening, when they have a similar allowance for supper. Soon
+afterwards they are locked up in their lodgings, where they lie on the
+bare boards, having only a piece of wood for a pillow. Sometimes these
+poor wretches make shift to escape, but are used with great severity if
+again caught. One of the female slaves having escaped, and being
+retaken, cut her own throat to avoid the severe punishment awaiting her,
+when she was dragged out by the hair all round the town, and then hung
+on a gibbet by the feet. Such as are in debt, and cannot satisfy their
+creditors, are turned over by their creditors to the Dutch company, who
+send them to work among their slaves, having the same allowance of
+boiled rice with the rest, with two-pence a day towards paying their
+debts; but they seldom get free till carried out dead.
+
+Though the poor natives are thus harshly treated, the Dutch wink at the
+faults of their countrymen, who are seldom punished for any crime,
+unless it be for murder, as in any other case they get off for a small
+sum of money, even for a great fault. The women slaves belonging to the
+free Dutch burgesses have all reasonable indulgence, but are obliged to
+find their own clothes and provisions, and pay an acknowledgement of
+about a sixpence daily, in default of which they are severely used. If
+they bring the daily tribute, they may whore or steal, and have no
+questions asked, provided no complaint is made against them. The chief
+products of this island are cloves, ginger, pepper, rattans, canes, and
+a few nutmegs.
+
+The clove-tree is rather slender, and is from twelve to thirty or even
+forty feet high, having small branches, with tapering leaves about five
+inches long and two broad, which smell strong of cloves, when rubbed
+between the fingers. The cloves grow out at the tips of the branches,
+ten, twelve, or fourteen in a cluster, being white at first, then green,
+and lastly of a dark copper colour, in which state they are ripe and fit
+for gathering. At this period, they spread cloths or sheets on the
+ground round the bottom of the tree to a good distance, and shake the
+tree, when all the ripe cloves fall down. This is repeated every six or
+seven days for four or five times, till all the cloves have ripened and
+are shaken off. The usual time of gathering is October and February,
+those got in October, which is the end of their winter, being called
+_winter cloves_, and are not accounted so strong and good as the others.
+These are commonly preserved in small jars of about a quart each, of
+which great quantities are sent to various parts of the world. Those
+gathered in February are termed summer cloves, being better and stronger
+than the others, as ripening in the best part of the summer; whereas the
+former have not above a month of fair weather, all the rest of their
+winter season, which is our summer, being rainy and cloudy, so that the
+cloves want sun to ripen them. It is a common opinion, but extremely
+erroneous, that cloves, nutmegs, and mace grow all on one tree. One
+clove-tree commonly produces sixty, seventy, or eighty pounds of cloves
+in one season; and every sixth year they are sure to have a double crop.
+
+There are a vast number of clove-trees on this island, which are
+carefully looked after, and a register of them is kept in the books of
+the company, being all numbered once every year, and they are not
+allowed to increase beyond a certain limited number, for fear of
+lessening the price, all beyond being cut down. All these trees belong
+to the Company, or the free burgesses, every burgess having only a fixed
+number; and if any one is found to have more than his allowance, he is
+severely fined, and all his trees forfeited to the company. Besides, the
+burgesses are bound to deliver the whole produce of their trees to the
+company at six-pence the pound. If any freeman or other is convicted of
+having sold or conveyed cloves from the island, to the value of ten
+pounds, his whole property is forfeited to the company, and he becomes a
+slave for life. The inhabitants used formerly to cheat the Dutch in the
+sale of their cloves, in the following manner. They hung up their cloves
+in a large sheet by the four corners, and set a large tub of water
+underneath, which the cloves, being of a very hot and dry nature, drew
+up by degrees, and thus made a large addition to their weight. But the
+Dutch are now too cunning for them, as they always try the cloves, by
+giving them a small filip on the head with the forefinger: if thoroughly
+ripe, and no deceit has been used, the head breaks off like a piece of
+thin brittle glass; but if watered, the clove is tough, and will sooner
+bend than break.
+
+The _nutmeg-tree_ is much like the peach, and there are a few of these
+in this island, but they grow mostly on the island of Banda, whence two
+or three ship-loads are exported yearly. The fruit of this tree consists
+of four parts. The first and outer rind is like that of a green walnut.
+The second, which we call _mace_, is dry and thin. The third is a tough
+thin shell, like that of a chesnut; and the fourth is the _nutmeg_,
+being the kernel included in that shell.
+
+There are said to be some gold-mines in the island of Amboina; and a
+Malay once shewed me some of the ore, which, he said, came from these
+mines: but he said, at the same time, that he would be severely punished
+if the Dutch knew of his having any, as they wish, as much as possible,
+to keep this from the knowledge of all other Europeans.
+
+Once every year the Dutch have to send a large force from Amboina on the
+following business, about the 20th of October. On this occasion the
+governor is attended by about seventy-five _orambies_, or boats of the
+country, some rowed by 100 paddles, some eighty, fifty, or forty paddles
+each, and in each of which there are two Dutch soldiers. I reckon
+therefore in this fleet 150 to 160 Dutch soldiers, and about 5250
+Malays, allowing seventy to each _oramby_ on the average. These
+seventy-five _orambies_ are divided into three squadrons. The
+van-division of twenty _orambies_, is always commanded by a member of
+the council, who carries a yellow flag. The rear-squadron consists also
+of twenty _orambies_, and is commanded by the fiscal, having a red flag.
+The rest form the centre-squadron, and attend the governor, who has a
+serjeant and corporal, with twelve Dutch soldiers, for his body guard,
+and carries a blue flag. The governor is also attended by the Malay king
+and all their princes or chiefs, lest they should rebel in his absence.
+In this order the fleet proceeds to visit and victual the eastern, or
+Banda islands, especially those that produce cloves or nutmegs; and at
+every island it goes to, it is joined by additional boats. This cruize
+generally lasts for six weeks, during which they cut down and destroy
+all the clove and nutmeg-trees they can find, except those which are
+reserved for the use of the company. All or most of these islands would
+produce cloves, but they will not suffer them, having enough at Amboina
+alone to supply all Europe. On all of these islands the Dutch keep a few
+soldiers, three, six, nine, or twelve, according to their size, whose
+only business is to see the trees cut down, or at least to take care
+that they do not increase; as they are very jealous lest the English or
+French should serve them as they did the English at Amboina. During this
+annual expedition, the governor levies tribute from all the petty kings
+and chiefs of these islands, and commonly returns to Amboina at the end
+of six weeks.
+
+The island of Amboina produces beavers, hogs, and deer, besides other
+animals. Among its birds are crocadores, cassawaries, birds of paradise,
+and others. The _crocadore_, or _cockatoo_, is of various sizes, some as
+large as a hen, and others no bigger than a pigeon, being all over
+white, except a crest of feathers on the top of their head, which is
+always either yellow or red. This bunch of feather usually lies flat, in
+a dent, or hollow, on the crown of the head, unless when the bird is
+frightened, when it is erected, and opens like a fan. The flesh and legs
+of this bird are very black, and they smell very sweet. When they fly up
+and down the woods, they cry _crocadore, crocadore_, or _cockatoo,
+cockatoo_, whence their name. The _cassowary_ is as large as a Virginia
+turkey, having a head nearly the same with the turkey, with a long stiff
+bunch of hair on his breast, also like the turkey. His legs are almost
+as thick as a man's wrist, having five great claws on each foot. The
+back is high and round, both it and the pinions being covered with long
+hair instead of feathers. The female of this bird lays an egg so large
+that its shell will hold an English pint of fluid, having a thick shell,
+spotted with green and white, and exactly like China-ware. I never
+tasted the eggs of this bird, but its flesh is good eating, resembling
+that of a turkey, but stronger.
+
+The _birds of paradise_ are about the size of pigeons, and are never
+seen here alive, neither is it known whence they come. I have seen
+several of them at Amboina preserved in spice, in which state they are
+sent as rarities to several parts of the world. These birds are said to
+resort, in February and March, when the nutmegs are ripe, to Banda and
+Amboina, where they feed on the outer rind of the nutmeg, after which
+they fall to the ground, quite stupified, or as it were dead drunk, when
+innumerable ants gather about them, and eat them up. There are here many
+kinds of fish, but the most remarkable is the _sea-porcupine_, which is
+about three feet long, and two and a half feet round, having large eyes,
+two fins on the back, and a large fin on each side, near the gills. Its
+body is all beset with sharp spines, or quills, like a porcupine, whence
+its name is derived.
+
+All round Amboina the bottom is sand, but the water is so deep that
+there is no anchorage near its shores, except to leeward, or on the west
+side, where a ship may anchor in forty fathoms, close to the shore in
+the harbour. This harbour runs so deep into the island as almost to
+divide it into two, which are joined by so narrow a neck of land that
+the Malays often haul their canoes across. On the east side of the entry
+into the harbour there is a small fort of six guns, close to which the
+depth is twenty fathoms. About a league farther up is the usual
+anchorage for ships, close under the guns of the great castle, which has
+been called _Victoria_ ever since the massacre of the English at this
+place. About two miles farther to the N.E. and within the harbour, is
+the place where the English factory formerly stood; and near it is the
+hole into which the English were said to have been thrown after the
+massacre. Few of us who were now here but expected the same fate; and
+some of the inhabitants did not scruple to say that our only protection
+was our journal, which had been sent to Batavia by the Dutch ship we met
+when going into the harbour; as by this it would soon be known all over
+India that a part of Captain Dampier's crew had arrived at Aniboina,
+which would cause us to be enquired after.
+
+A little to the eastward of Amboina there are several other small
+islands, the most noted of which are _Boangbessay_ and _Hinomsa_, only a
+small distance east from Amboina. These two islands are moderately high,
+and not above a third part so large as Amboina. They are both well
+fortified, and produce store of cloves. The chief place for nutmegs is
+the island of _Banda_, which also belongs to the Dutch, being in lat. 4°
+20' S. 28 leagues S.S.E. from Amboina. This island is said to have the
+form of a man's leg and foot, and is well fortified. The governor of
+Amboina is supreme over all the spice islands, even to _Ternate_ and
+_Tidore_, which are also spice islands belonging to the Dutch, and are
+about forty miles to the north of the equator. We were so troubled at
+Amboina by musquitoes, a sort of gnats, that we had every night to put
+ourselves into a bag before we could go to sleep, as otherwise these
+insects bit us so intolerably that we could get no rest. Wherever they
+bit, there commonly rose a red blister, almost as broad as a silver
+penny, which itched so violently that many cannot forbear from
+scratching, so as to cause inflammations that sometimes aid in the loss
+of a limb. During our stay, we were allowed to walk in a paved yard
+about sixty yards square; but were not permitted to go into the town,
+that we might not learn their strength, or make any discoveries
+prejudicial to them.
+
+We remained at Amboina from the 31st of May to the 14th of September,
+1705, when three of their sloops were ready to sail with cloves to
+Batavia, in which twenty-five of our men were sent away to Batavia, ten
+of us being left behind, who they said were to be sent in another
+vessel, almost ready to sail. On the 27th September, a Malay man was
+brought to the Stadt-house to be tried for his life, being accused by
+his own wife of having murdered his slave. The slave had been dead six
+months, when the wife falling out with her husband, she went to the
+fiscal in the heat of her rage and revealed the murder, on which the
+husband was thrown into prison, but it was generally believed that he
+was wrongfully accused by his wife. During his trial the earthquake took
+place, formerly mentioned, which made the court break up, fearful the
+house might fall on their heads. At this time I observed that it is an
+error to suppose that it is always calm during an earthquake; for we had
+a fine fresh gale at S.S.W. both days on which the earthquake happened.
+Next day the court sat about eleven o'clock, continuing the trial; and
+while the wife was in her greatest violence in the accusation of her
+husband, the earth shook again with much violence, which obliged the
+court again to break up.
+
+That same day, the 28th September, I and four more of our men were sent
+off for Batavia in a Chinese sloop, the other five men being promised to
+be sent after us in a short time, but we never heard of them afterwards.
+We sailed westwards till we came to the island of Lancas, in lat. 5° 27'
+S. and by my estimation, 2° 21', or 155 miles W. from Amboina. We then
+steered W. by N. till we made two islands called the _Cabeses_, whence
+we procured some hundred cocoa nuts. The eastermost island, to which we
+sent our boat, is low and uninhabited, but has been planted full of
+cocoa-nut trees by the Dutch, for the use of their vessels going between
+the spice islands and Batavia, as it is a kind of miracle to see any
+other ship in these parts except those belonging to the Dutch. Off this
+island we met our own bark which had brought us from America to Amboina,
+the Dutch having fitted her up with a main-mast and converted her into a
+very good vessel. This island is in lat. 5° 23' S. and nearly W. by N.
+from the island of Lancas, about forty-five miles distant, and has a
+shoal extending about two miles from the shore. To the S.W. of this is
+the other island of _Cabeses_, a pretty high island, on which the Dutch
+always keep a corporal and two soldiers, who go two or three times all
+over the isle to see that no cloves are planted, and if they find any to
+cut them down and burn them, lest any other nation might be able to
+procure that commodity, in which case Amboina would become of little
+value, as cloves are its only valuable product.
+
+We next passed by the S. end of the island of _Bouton_, or _Booton_,
+which is pretty large, and in the lat. of 5° 45' S. We steered W. from
+thence, between the islands _Celebes_ and _Zalayer_ or _Salayr_. The
+S.W. leg or peninsula of Celebes is very high land. Celebes is composed
+of very high land, very well inhabited, being a very large island,
+extending through seven degrees of latitude. On the west side of its
+southern end the Dutch have a factory named Macasser, where they have a
+fortress of about seventy guns, and a garrison of 600 or 700 Dutch
+soldiers. The chief product is rice, with which they supply most of
+their eastern islands from hence. There are said to be gold-mines in
+this island, of which the Dutch are not yet masters, as the inhabitants
+are often at war with them, and have hitherto been able to keep them
+from those parts of the island. Between the south end of Celebes and the
+island of Salayr there are three small low islands, and the best channel
+is through between the island next to Salayr, and another small isle to
+the northward. This is called the _second_ passage, the first, third,
+and fourth of these passages being very dangerous, so that ships
+generally avoid them if possible. I would willingly give an account of
+every island I have occasion to mention, but as that is not in my power,
+I must rest satisfied with what I am able to say consistent with truth.
+
+The island of _Zalayer_, or _Salayr_, is of moderate height, inhabited
+by Malays, and planted all round with cocoa-trees, the natives being
+obliged to send a considerable quantity of nuts and oil to the Dutch at
+Macasser as tribute. We steered from hence W. by N. till we had passed a
+dangerous shoal called the Porill, after which we stood to the S.W. and
+saw in the night a small island just in our way, which we were unable to
+weather, and therefore stood off till daylight, when we were to the S.
+of that isle, when we tacked and stood again S.W. and soon after saw two
+other small isles bearing from N. to N.W. For about two miles of our
+course at this time, the sea was so transparent that we could plainly
+discern the bottom, which was never less than five or more than six
+fathoms, yet appeared only two to the eye. We passed over this shoal
+about a league to the S. of these two small islands, this being the
+narrowest part of the shoal, for it is five or six leagues in breadth
+farther to the south; yet is it every where without danger, as it has
+very uniform soundings, seldom over or under five or six fathoms. To the
+north of these islands, however, it is very dangerous, being all over
+foul rocky ground, and having in some places not more than four or five
+feet water; it is proper, therefore, always to keep to the south of
+these islands, where the passage is perfectly safe. Yet in the Dutch
+charts, these dangers are laid down to the southward, which should have
+been to the northwards, and they lay down the safe shoals to the
+northward, whereas we now went to the southwards, as they always do.
+The captain of our vessel had a chart on board, which shewed these
+things exactly as I have now described, but which I compared with
+several others, also on board, which I found quite different. I asked
+our captain the reason of this, when he told me that all these shoals
+and dangerous places were well known to the Hollanders, but they did not
+wish they should be known by others, but rather that strangers might
+lose their ships among these rocks and shoals, as we certainly had done,
+if we had sailed according to these common charts.
+
+We entered the harbour of Batavia on the 21st October, and sent
+immediately on landing to join the rest of our men, who were still
+detained in custody. We were soon afterwards visited by the first major,
+who desired us to transmit to the general, through him, an account of
+the losses we had sustained by our being taken prisoners at Amboina, and
+we should receive compensation for our effects, loss of time, and
+imprisonment. We each accordingly drew up accounts of our losses, which
+we sent by the major to the governor, who sent us back word that we
+should speedily have our freedom. On the 27th we were sent for to the
+fort, where most of our money was returned; but we could have no
+satisfaction for our goods, imprisonment, and loss of time, the
+governor-general saying that he had given us all that had been sent to
+him as ours by the governor of Amboina, and that we were now at liberty
+to go where we pleased. As our vessel had been taken from us for the use
+of the Dutch Company, we desired he would be pleased to find us some
+ship for our return home, which he promised; with which arrangement we
+were forced to be satisfied, and took lodgings in the city of Batavia,
+till an opportunity might offer for our return to Europe. In the course
+of seven weeks residence here, I made all the observations I could upon
+this place and its inhabitants. I found the city in as good a condition
+as could be wished, and the people seemed to be as prudent and as
+industrious as any I had ever seen: But, as the descriptions already
+published of this place are so exact as to render my observations
+superfluous, I shall content myself with a very short description,
+referring the curious reader to the large accounts that have been
+published by Dutch, French, and English writers, but especially the
+first.
+
+BATAVIA is the chief place belonging to the Hollanders in India, and
+receives all the productions of India, Japan, and China. The Malays are
+the original natives; but besides these and the Dutch, who are the
+masters, it is inhabited by Portuguese, Chinese, Persians, and negroes.
+The town is large and handsome, having seven churches, belonging to the
+Dutch, Portuguese, Malays, and Chinese.[213] The town has many spacious
+houses built in the European manner, and is walled and moated all round,
+the ramparts being well provided with cannon. In the middle of the city
+there is a spacious square, in which is the stadt-house, where all
+public matters are transacted. This city is usually governed by a member
+of the States-General of the United Netherlands, with the title of
+Governor-General of India, all other governors of the possessions
+belonging to the Dutch Company being subordinate to his authority. The
+inhabitants are well pleased in the governor-general being often
+changed, as all prisoners are released at the installation of a new one,
+except those charged with murder. He has twelve counsellors to assist
+him, who are called the _rads_, or lords of India, and are mostly such
+as have formerly been governors in other places, as in Ceylon, Amboina,
+Malacca, &c.
+
+[Footnote 213: This seems to indicate that, of the seven _churches_,
+some belong to the Dutch Calvinists and Portuguese Roman Catholics,
+while others are Mahometan places of worship for the Malays, and idol
+temples, or _pagodas_, frequented by the Chinese.--E]
+
+The city is divided by many canals, over which there are bridges almost
+at the end of every street, together with booms to lay across, that no
+boats may go in or out after sunset. The chief product of the adjoining
+country is pepper, of which the Dutch export great quantities every
+year; and there are also some few diamonds and other precious stones.
+The chief fruits here are plantains, bananas, oranges, lemons,
+mangostans, and rumbostans. The _mangostan_ is about the size of a
+golden rennet, quite round, and resembling a small pomegranate, the
+outer rind being like that of the pomegranate, but of a darker colour,
+but the inside of the rind of a fine red. The fruit lies within the
+rind, commonly in four or five cloves, of a fine white, very soft and
+juicy, within each clove having a small black stone or pip. The pulp is
+very delicious, but the stone is very bitter, and is therefore thrown
+away, after sucking the fruit The _rumbostan_ is about the size of a
+walnut after the green outside peel is off, and is nearly of the shape
+of a walnut, having a thick tough outer rind of a deep red colour, full
+of red knobs, within which is a white jelly-like pulp, and within that
+is a large stone. The pulp is very delicate, and never does any harm,
+however much of it a man may eat, providing he swallow the stones; but
+otherwise they are said to produce fevers.
+
+This island of Java, on the north side of which Batavia is situated,
+extends about ten degrees from east to west, or nearly 700 English
+miles. The weather is here extremely regular, and the inhabitants know
+how to use it to the best advantage. During the eastern monsoon, the
+land-winds are at S.E. Sometimes more southerly; and the sea-winds blow
+from the N.E. fine pleasant gales. This easterly monsoon is accounted
+the good monsoon, being fine clear and fair weather, and begins in
+April, ending in October. The other, or westerly, is called the bad
+monsoon, consisting of blustering rainy weather, accompanied with much
+thunder and lightning, especially in December, January, and February.
+This bad monsoon begins in November and ends in March or the beginning
+of April; during which the land-winds are W.S.W. or S.W. and the
+sea-winds at N.W. and W.N.W.
+
+The anchoring ground all along the north side of Java, from Madura to
+Batavia, is a fine oozy bottom, free from rocks. The principal places on
+this side of the island are Batavia, Bantam, Japara, Samarang, Surabon,
+Taggal, Quale, and Rambang; all of which are possessed by the Dutch.
+These settlements afford abundance of rice, with which the Dutch supply
+all their out-factories near Java, and also produce excellent plank for
+ship-building. The principal place for ship-building is _Rambang_, where
+the free burgesses of Batavia usually go to build their small vessels,
+as sloops and brigs. Ships of five, six, and seven hundred tons, often
+load with timber at Rambang, Quale, Japara, and other places; and each
+ship, after being fully laden, takes a great raft or float of the
+largest timber, which she tows along with her to Batavia. Some of these
+rafts are said to be thirty feet square, and draw twenty feet water.
+There are commonly six ships employed in this timber trade, and they
+usually make four voyages yearly in the good monsoon, for in the bad
+they cannot do any thing. Ail this timber is for the most part landed on
+the island of _Ormrust_, between four and five leagues from Batavia,
+where there are about 200 ship-carpenters, who are constantly in full
+employ, and here the Dutch careen their ships. This island is well
+fortified, being, to use a sea phrase, all round a bed of guns.
+
+We had notice on the 2d December, 1705, that all of us who wished to
+return to England should immediately go on board the homeward-bound
+Dutch East India fleet, which we did accordingly, and sailed next day.
+This fleet consisted of twelve ships, as well provided in all respects
+as any I had ever seen, and we made the voyage in good order. We arrived
+at the Cape of Good Hope on the 3d February, 1706. The Dutch have here a
+strong fortress, and about half a mile from this is a fine town of 150
+houses, with a small church. The country in the neighbourhood is very
+high, and the mountains are mostly barren, producing only a few shrubs;
+but the country is full of lions, tigers, elephants, and other wild
+beasts, which give great disturbance to the settlers, for which reason
+the government gives a reward of fifty-two guilders for killing a lion,
+equal to four pounds six and eight-pence, and twenty-four guilders, or
+forty shillings, for killing a tiger. While we were there, a certain
+Scotsman killed four lions, three tigers, and three wild elephants, for
+all of which he got the rewards. The Dutch make here a great quantity of
+an excellent wine, called Cape wine, which is sold by retail at
+eight-pence a quart.
+
+We sailed from the Cape the 24th of March, excellently provided with
+every thing requisite for the voyage. We were now twenty-four sail,
+having nine English and fifteen Dutch ships. On the 17th April we made
+the island of Ascension, but did not touch there even for turtle,
+although their season of laying, having been so well provided with fresh
+provisions at the Cape that we had no occasion for more. On the 19th
+there happened a great earthquake, when the ship seemed for some time as
+if she run along the ground, on which we heaved the lead on both sides,
+but had no ground at 200 fathoms. The whole fleet felt the shock at the
+same time; so that for about ten minutes every ship was making signals
+and firing guns. On the 14th June we saw four sail of French privateers,
+which were waiting for us; but after looking at us for some time, and
+observing the regular order in which we sailed, they did not think it
+adviseable to make any attempt against us, and bore away. This shewed
+the great advantage of the regular order observed by the Dutch in
+sailing, in which on this occasion they were imitated by the English
+ships in company.
+
+On the 30th June we were in lat. 62° 40' N. the highest north I was ever
+in, and I could not help noticing the great difference in point of cold
+here and in 60° S. There we had continual showers of snow or hail, with
+bitter cold weather; while here the weather was fair, and the cold
+moderate. In the evening of the 3d July we saw the Faro Islands. On the
+5th we met with eight Dutch men of war, which were cruizing on purpose
+to convoy us safe home, accompanied by four victuallers and three of the
+Company's privateers. On the 15th July we all arrived safely in the
+Texel, and got on the 17th to Amsterdam. After this, I and the rest of
+our company went to see several parts of Holland, and we arrived on the
+26th August, 1706, in England, after many dangers by sea and land, being
+only 18 of us out of 183. The news of our misfortunes reached home
+before us, and every body was solicitous to have an account of our
+adventures, especially while under the power of the Dutch at Amboina.
+These importunities led me to believe that a faithful relation of our
+voyage would be acceptable to the public, and I hope some of the
+descriptions, observations, and discoveries contained in this small
+performance may be found useful, and not altogether destitute of
+entertainment.
+
+
+
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_Brief Account of Stradling, Clipperton, and Dampier, after their
+respective Separations, till their Returns to England._
+
+The reader may remember that Captain Dampier, in the St George, left
+_Captain Stradling_ in the Cinque-ports on the 19th of May, 1704, at
+King's Island, in the Bay of Panama. The force under Captain Stradling
+was too insignificant to maintain him long in the South Sea, for which
+reason he went to the island of Juan Fernandez in search of shelter and
+refreshments. They were in so forlorn a condition at this time, that
+Alexander Selkirk[214] chose rather to remain by himself in that island,
+than to run the hazard of returning to the South Sea in the
+Cinque-ports. In this he shewed great judgment, as the Cinque-ports
+actually foundered on the coast of _Barbacora_ (Barbacoas), and only
+Captain Stradling, with six or seven of his men, were saved, and sent
+prisoners to Lima. Captain Stradling was alive there at the time when
+Woods Rogers came into the South Sea, but what became of him afterwards
+is unknown.
+
+[Footnote 214: This person, on whose simple adventures the romance of
+Robinson Crusoe was soon afterwards founded, will be more particularly
+mentioned in a subsequent chapter of this book.--E.]
+
+The next person who left Captain Dampier was his mate, _Mr Clipperton_
+of whom we shall have occasion to say much in a succeeding voyage round
+the world. Clipperton was certainly a man of parts and resolution, and
+probably would not have deserted from Captain Dampier, if he had not
+thought that his commander was resolved to remain in his old crazy ship
+in the South Sea till she foundered. Finding many of the crew of the
+same opinion, he thought proper to leave him at the middle islands, as
+already related, where it was plain to every one that the St George was
+no longer fit for going to sea. Mr Clipperton set sail on the 2d
+September, 1704, having twenty-one men, in a small bark of ten tons,
+with two masts and two square sails, two swivels, two or three barrels
+of powder, and some shot. With this inconsiderable force, he ventured
+into Rio Leon, on the coast of Mexico, where he took two Spanish ships
+riding at anchor. One of these was very old and worm-eaten, which he
+immediately sunk. The other was new, and had goods on board to a
+considerable value, and for her Captain Clipperton demanded a ransom of
+10,000 dollars, by two of his prisoners whom he set on shore. The
+prisoners spoke so handsomely of Clipperton that the governor resolved
+to treat with him, and sent him word that he did not think his offer
+unreasonable, but the owners were entirely ruined, and the town so poor
+that it was impossible to comply with his terms; but if 4000 dollars
+would content him, which was all they could raise, that sum should be
+sent aboard, and the governor would rely on the honour of Captain
+Clipperton for the release of the ship. Clipperton accepted this
+proposal, but as his bark was in want of provisions and water, he sent
+word to the governor, that every kind of provisions and drink were not
+to be considered as within the capitulation. This was readily agreed to,
+the money was sent on board, and as soon as the provisions were got out
+of her, the ship was honourably restored.
+
+Clipperton went thence to the Bay of Salinas, where his little vessel
+was drawn on shore, and cleaned and effectually refitted, after which he
+resolved in this cockle-shell to sail for the East Indies, which he
+actually did, keeping in the latitude of 18° N. and reached the
+Philippine Islands in fifty-four days. While among these islands, a
+Spanish priest came off to his bark in a canoe, and Clipperton detained
+him till furnished with a supply of fresh provisions, and then set him
+at liberty. His next scheme was to sail for the English settlement of
+Pulo Condore, in lat 8° 40' N. off the river of Cambadia, and actually
+came there: But finding that the English had been massacred by their
+Indian soldiers on the 3d March, 1705, for which reason no relief or
+safety could be expected there, he bore away for Macao, a port belonging
+to the Portuguese on the coast of China, where he and his people
+separated, every one shifting for himself as well as they could. Some
+went to Benjar,[215] in order to enter into the service of the English
+East India Company, while others went to Goa to serve the Portuguese,
+and some even entered into the service of the Great Mogul, being so bare
+after so long a voyage, that any means of providing for themselves were
+desirable. Clipperton returned to England in 1706, and afterwards made
+another voyage round the world in the Success, of which an account will
+be found in its proper place.
+
+[Footnote 215: This is perhaps an error for Bombay; yet it may have been
+Benjarmassin, on the southern coast of Borneo.--E.]
+
+It is not easy to conceive a worse situation than that in which Captain
+Dampier was left at the close of the year 1704, when Mr Funnell and his
+people separated from him, being only able to retain twenty-eight of his
+men, and even these were prevailed upon to stay, by representing that it
+was easy to surprise some Spanish village, and that the fewer they were,
+each would have the greater share in the plunder. After some
+consultation, they resolved to attack Puna, a hamlet or village of
+thirty houses and a small church, the inhabitants of which are well to
+pass, and are under the command of a lieutenant. Dampier landed here in
+a dark night, and, surprizing the inhabitants in their beds, got
+possession of the place with very little trouble.
+
+After plundering this town, they repaired to the island of _Lobos de la
+Mar_, and took a small Spanish bark by the way, well furnished with
+provisions. They now resolved to quit their own ship, and to endeavour
+to sail for the East Indies in this small bark; and accordingly left the
+St George at anchor under the island of Lobos, after taking every thing
+valuable out of her. They then sailed across the Pacific Ocean to the
+East Indies, and arrived at the Dutch settlements, where their bark was
+seized, and they were turned adrift to shift for themselves as they best
+might. Dampier returned naked to his owners, with a melancholy relation
+of his unfortunate expedition, occasioned chiefly by his own strange
+temper, being so self-sufficient and overbearing that few or none of his
+officers could bear with him; and when once disputation gets in among
+those who have the command, success is not to be expected. Even in this
+distress, he was received as an eminent man, notwithstanding his
+faillings, and was introduced to Queen Anne, having the honour to kiss
+her hand, and to give her majesty some account of the dangers he had
+undergone. The merchants were so sensible of his want of conduct, that
+they resolved never to trust him any more with a command; and this, with
+the poverty resulting from his late unlucky voyage, obliged him to make
+the tour of the world once more as pilot to the Duke, commanded by
+Captain Woods Rogers, the relation of which voyage forms the subject of
+next Section.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X.
+
+VOYAGE ROUND THE WORLD BY CAPTAIN WOODS ROGERS, AND STEPHEN COURTNEY, IN
+1708-1711.[216]
+
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+It has been universally allowed by all competent judges, that there
+never was a voyage of this nature so excellently adjusted or so well
+provided in all respects, as the present, or in which the accidents that
+usually happen in privateers were so effectually guarded against; owing
+to the abilities of the gentlemen at Bristol, who both charged
+themselves with the expence of fitting out this expedition, and took
+care of every thing relating to its being properly fitted out. Their
+first care was in the choice of proper officers, in which they were very
+fortunate. Captain Woods Rogers, who had the chief command, being a
+bold, active, and indefatigable officer, not too ready to give up his
+opinion to others, and not apt to be flattered by other people giving up
+theirs to him. He had been a great sufferer by the French; but his most
+singular qualities, and which chiefly recommended him to the command of
+this expedition, were a peculiar felicity in maintaining authority over
+his seamen, and a wonderful readiness in devising expedients under the
+most difficult circumstances.
+
+[Footnote 216: A Cruizing Voyage round the World, &c. by Captain Woods
+Rogers, 8vo. London, 1712. Voyage to the South Sea, and round the World,
+&c. by Captain Edward Cooke, 2 vol. 8vo. London, 1712. Harris, I. 150.
+Callender, III. 231.]
+
+Captain Stephen Courtney, the second in command, was a gentleman of
+birth, fortune, and amiable character, who had contributed considerably
+to the expence of the voyage, and went in the expedition that he might
+see how it was conducted, and either be able to prevent miscarriages, or
+at least to make a faithful report of its incidents. Captain Thomas
+Dover, the third in command, was a proprietor also. He was bred a
+physician, and afterwards made a noise in the world by recommending the
+use of crude mercury. He was a man of rough temper, and could not easily
+agree with those about him, yet his morose disposition hindered him from
+making any party to support him in his ill humours. Captain Cooke,
+fourth in command, was second to Captain Courtney. The pilot in the
+larger ship was Captain William Dampier, who was now to proceed for the
+fourth time into the South Sea, where his name and exploits were well
+known and terrible to the Spaniards. The adventurers were also extremely
+careful in the choice of inferior officers, and even as far as possible
+in procuring the best private men that could be found.
+
+In the next place, the proprietors established rules for the proper
+conduct of the voyage, which were digested in the following articles of
+instruction, and signed by a committee of proprietors at Bristol, on the
+14th July, 1708.
+
+"For the better government and regulating the affairs of the present
+voyage of the ships Duke and Duchess, we do hereby appoint and
+constitute Captain Woods Rogers, Captain Thomas Dover, Captain William
+Dampier, Mr Charlton Vanbrugh, Messrs Green, Fry, Charles Pope,
+Glendall, Bullet, and Wasse, all of these officers on board the Duke,
+to be the council on board that ship: We also appoint Captain Stephen
+Courtney, Captain Edward Cooke, Messrs William Stratton, Bathe, John
+Rogers, White, and the master, officers on board the Duchess, to be
+council on board that ship, in case of the ships being separated from
+each other. But, when in company, the whole officers of both ships above
+named, are conjunctly to come on board either ship at the summons of
+Captains Rogers, Dover, and Courtney, or any two of them, and to be the
+council referred to in our general orders, to determine all matters and
+things that may arise or be necessary for the general good daring the
+whole voyage. In case of the death, sickness, or desertion of any of the
+above officers in either ship, the rest who are of the council of that
+ship shall convene on board their own ship, and chose another fit person
+into that office and council."
+
+"We farther require and direct, that all attempts, attacks, and designs
+upon the enemy, either by sea or land, shall be first consulted and
+debated, either in the particular council if separated, or in the
+general council if together; and as the majority shall conclude how and
+when to act or do, it shall be indispensably and cheerfully put in
+execution, and without unnecessary delay. In case of any discontents,
+differences, or misbehaviours among the officers and men, which may tend
+to the disturbance of good order and government on board, either the men
+or persons may appeal to the captain to have a hearing by a council, or
+the captain shall call a council to have the matter heard and decided,
+and may prefer or displace any man according to desert. All decisions
+and judgments of the council shall be finally determined by the majority
+of voices; and in case of an equality, Captain Dover is to have a double
+voice as president, and we do accordingly order and appoint him
+president of the council. All matters transacted in this council shall
+be registered in a book by the clerk appointed for that purpose."
+
+It was agreed between the owners and those employed in this voyage, that
+all prizes were to be divided after the following rule. Two-third parts
+of the clear profits were to belong to the owners, and one-third to the
+officers, seamen, and landsmen, which last was to be distributed
+according to the following proportions.
+
+     _If wholly on Shares_.          _If part on Shares, and
+                                           part on Wages_.[217]
+   A captain, _Shares_  24
+   Second captain,           20  _Wages_.        _Shares_
+   First lieutenant,         16     £3                     8
+   Second lieutenant,        10      2 10                  5
+   Third lieutenant,          8      2                     4
+   Master,                   10      2 10                  5
+   First mate,                6      2                     3
+   Second mate,               4      1 15                  2-1/2
+   Surgeon,                  10      2 10                  5
+   Surgeon's mate,            6      1 10                  3
+   Owner's agent,            10      2 10                  5
+   Pilot,                     8      2 10                  4
+   Carpenter,                 6      2                     3
+   Carpenter's mate,          4      1 10                  2
+   Boatswain,                 6      2                     3
+   Boatswain's mate,          4      1 10                  2
+   Gunner,                    6      2                     3
+   Gunner's mate,             3-1/2  1 10                  1-3/4
+   Cooper,                    5      1 10                  2-1/2
+   Cooper's mate,             3-1/2  1  5                  1-3/4
+   Midshipman,                4      1 10                  2
+                             _Shares_. _Wages_. _Shares_.
+
+   Quarter-master,            3      1 10                 1-1/2
+   Sailors,                   2-1/2  1 8                  1-3/4
+   Land-men,                  1-1/2    14                 0-3/4
+
+
+[Footnote 217: The wages were probably monthly, though not so
+explained.--E.]
+
+"We have two relations of this voyage, one by Captain Rogers, and the
+other by Captain Cooke, both in the form of journals. On the present
+occasion I shall chiefly follow that written by Captain Woods Rogers,
+taking occasionally explanatory circumstances and descriptions from
+Captain Cooke: But as they agree pretty well in their relations, I do
+not think it necessary to break the thread of the discourse, but shall
+proceed as near as may be in the words of Captain Rogers."--_Harris_.
+
+Besides using as the ground-work of the present chapter, the narrative
+drawn up by Harris from the publications of Captain Woods Rogers and
+Edward Cooke, we have carefully employed both of these original works on
+the present occasion; yet have not deemed it at all necessary or
+adviseable to retain the minute and tedious nautical remarks, and have
+chiefly attended to such interesting circumstances as had not been
+sufficiently illustrated in the preceding chapters of this book.--E.
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Narrative of the Voyage, from England to the Island of Juan Fernandez_.
+
+Our force on this voyage consisted of the Duke of 300 tons, carrying
+thirty guns and 170 men, Captain Woods Rogers commander, with Captain
+Thomas Dover as second captain, and three lieutenants; and the Duchess
+of 270 tons, with twenty-six guns and 150 men, commanded by Captain
+Stephen Courtney, having Captain Edward Cooke as second captain, and
+three lieutenants. Both ships had commission from George Prince of
+Denmark, husband to Queen Anne, and Lord High Admiral of England, to
+cruize on the coasts of Peru and Mexico in the South Sea, against the
+French and Spaniards, and to act jointly and separately.
+
+On the 15th June, 1708, we went down to King-road, to fit our ships for
+sea and the better to keep our men on board, where we continued till the
+1st August, when we weighed anchor and towed down about five miles below
+the Holmes. We made sail at one next morning, and got into Cork harbour
+on the 5th August, where we remained till the 27th adjusting all things,
+taking on board additional men provided there for us, and discharging
+some we had brought from Bristol, who were found unfit for the voyage.
+Our complement of men in both ships was now 333, of which above a third
+were foreigners from most nations, several of her majesty's subjects we
+had on board being tinkers, tailors, haymakers, pedlars, fiddlers, and
+the like, with one negro and ten boys; yet we hoped to be well manned
+with this motley crew, when they had got their sea-legs and had learnt
+the use of arms. We had double the number of officers usual in
+privateers, which was meant to prevent mutinies, so usual in long
+voyages, and to secure a succession in case of deaths. Our holds were
+so full of provisions, that our cables, and a great deal of our bread
+and some water casks were between decks, and having 183 men in the Duke,
+and 151 in the Duchess, we were obliged to send our sheet, cable, and
+other new store cordage on shore at Cork, to make room for our men and
+provisions, yet were so much crowded and lumbered that we could not have
+engaged an enemy, without throwing much provisions and stores overboard.
+
+Having agreed upon signals between our two ships, and appointed places
+of rendezvous in case of separation, and how long to wait at each for
+one another, we took sailing orders from the Hastings man of war on the
+1st September, the better to keep company of her and a fleet bound to
+the southward and westward. We sailed that day, and the next we and our
+consort stood out from the fleet to chase a sail we saw to windward,
+when we had the satisfaction to find that our ship sailed as well as any
+in the fleet, not excepting the man of war, so that we hoped we should
+find our heels, although so deeply laden. We found the chase to be a
+small vessel coming from Baltimore to join the fleet. On the 4th,
+Captain Paul of the Hastings proposed to Captain Courtney and me, after
+he left the fleet, which would be soon, to cruise in company a few days
+off Cape Finister, and obligingly supplied us with some scrubbers, iron
+scrapers for the ships bottoms, a speaking-trumpet, and some other
+things of which we were in want, and would not accept any thing in
+return, as our voyage was to be so long, saying he hoped our owners
+would restore the same articles for his ship on his return. That
+evening, calling our crews on deck, we informed them whither we were
+bound, and the objects of our expedition; that if any disputes or
+mutinies had arisen, we might have sent home the refractory in the man
+of war. Only one poor fellow was dissatisfied, who was to have been
+tithing-man that year, and feared his wife might have to pay forty
+shillings for his default; but seeing all around him pleased with the
+hope of plunder, he too became easy, and drank as heartily as any one to
+the success of the voyage.
+
+We gave chase to a ship on the 10th September, about six in the morning,
+which we came up with about three in the afternoon, when she shewed
+Swedish colours. On examining the master, we found he had come round
+Scotland and Ireland, and suspected he had contraband of war, as some of
+the men, whom we found drunk, told us they had gunpowder and cables on
+board; wherefore we resolved to examine her strictly, putting twelve of
+our men on board, and taking the Swedish master and twelve of his men
+aboard our ships. Next morning, having examined the men and searched the
+ship, we found it difficult to prove her a legal prize, and, not willing
+to lose time in carrying her into a port for farther examination, we let
+her go without embezzlement. She was a frigate-built ship, of about 270
+tons, and twenty-two guns, belonging to Stadt, near Hamburgh. The crew
+of the Duke mutinied, headed by our boatswain and other three inferior
+officers, alleging the Swede was a good prize, and had much contraband
+goods on board, though we could find none: but being supported by my
+officers, well armed, I at length pacified the men, after putting ten of
+the mutineers in irons, and soundly whipping a sailor who had excited
+the rest. This mutiny would not have been easily got the better of, but
+for the number of our officers, whom we now found very useful in
+bringing our crews under good discipline, a very difficult matter in
+privateers, and without which it is utterly impossible to succeed in
+distant and important enterprises. We sent home Giles Cash, our
+boatswain, in irons, on board the Crown galley, with letters to our
+owners, justifying our severity; and next morning I discharged our
+prisoners from their irons, on their humble submission, and solemn
+promise of dutiful behaviour in future.
+
+On the 18th, between Fuertaventura and Grand Canary, we chased and took
+a small Spanish ship, bound from Teneriff to Fuertaventura, having
+several men and women passengers, and laden with a variety of goods.
+Next day we bore away for Oratavia Roads, where, after much discussion,
+we sold the vessel for 450 dollars, retaining all her goods. The 30th
+September we put into the harbour of St Vincent, one of the Cape de Verd
+islands, coming to anchor in ten fathoms within the rock. Seeing several
+men on shore, though the island is not inhabited, Captain Cook went in
+the pinnace, well armed, to see who they were, and found them some
+Portuguese from St Antonio, come to catch turtles or sea-tortoises, who
+told him we could have wood and water at this island, which is in lat.
+16° 55' N. long. 24° 50' W. from Greenwich. It has great plenty of
+Guinea fowl, with some hogs and goats; and we caught abundance of fish
+in the road. In the woods there are great numbers of spiders as large as
+walnuts, and their webs are very troublesome to get through, being very
+numerous, and as strong as ordinary threads.
+
+While here, new disturbances arose among the men, in relation to the
+effects taken in the late prize; as we had here an opportunity of
+purchasing various things, and every one wished to have the means of
+purchasing. To put an end to all these heart-burnings, and to fix the
+people in a resolution of doing their duty, we determined to settle this
+affair by framing such articles as might inspire the seamen with courage
+and constancy, and make them as willing to obey as the officers to
+command, without giving our owners any cause of complaint. It cost us
+some trouble to adjust these articles, but they effectually answered our
+purpose, and all our people readily agreed to abide by them.
+
+After staying two days here, in which we heeled our ships, and got wood
+and water on board, our boat returned with limes and tobacco; but our
+linguist, who had been sent ashore to procure refreshments, did not make
+his appearance. Soon after there came a boat from that part of the
+island where the governor resides, on board of which was the
+deputy-governor, a negro, who brought limes, tobacco, oranges, fowls,
+potatoes, hogs, bananas, musk-melons, watermelons, and brandy, all of
+which we bought of him, paying in prize goods we had taken out of the
+bark at the Canaries, and at a cheap rate; for they are a poor people,
+and are ready to truck for any thing they want at any price, in such
+payments as they can make. Being ready to sail, we called a council to
+consider what was to be done in respect to the absence of our linguist,
+who had promised the deputy-governor to wait for him at the water-side,
+but had broke his word; and therefore, as his absence seemed to be
+entirely his own fault, it was unanimously resolved that we ought to
+leave him behind, rather than our two ships should wait for one man,
+who had disobeyed orders. We were the more inclined to this, that others
+might learn, by this example, to comply with their instructions when
+sent ashore, and might come aboard again without delay, after completing
+their business, and not flatter themselves that fair words and fine
+excuses were to atone for breach of duty, to humour the fancies of
+individuals, at the expence of delaying the voyage. This was certainly
+but an indifferent place for our linguist to be left in; but he knew the
+people and the language, and might easily get a passage home. We
+persisted therefore in our resolution, and gave orders for sailing as
+soon as possible, that we might not lose the proper season, and be
+obliged to double Cape Horn at a wrong time of the year.
+
+Captain Dampier and others in our ships, who had formerly put in at St
+Jago, another of the Cape Verd islands, said that this island of St
+Vincent, though not so much frequented, is preferable to St Jago for
+outward-bound ships, as its road is much better, has better land, and is
+more convenient for wood and water. The island is mountainous and
+barren, its plainest part being over against the sandy bay where we
+anchored. The wood growing upon it is short, and only fit for fuel. We
+watered at a little stream that flows from a spring down the hill, and
+is good fresh-water, the others in that neighbourhood being brackish. It
+was formerly inhabited and had a governor, but is now only frequented by
+the inhabitants of the other islands in the season for catching turtle,
+these islanders being mostly negroes and mulattoes, and very poor. The
+stock of wild goats on this island has been mostly destroyed by the
+inhabitants of St Nicholas and St Antonio. The heat at this place was so
+excessive to us, newly from Europe, that several of our men became sick,
+and were blooded. There are a few wild asses; and some of our officers
+wounded one, after a long chase, yet he held out, and tired them.
+
+These islands are named from Cape Verd, on the coast of Africa, whence
+they lie about 170 leagues to the west.[218] They are ten in number, of
+which St Jago, St Nicholas, Bonavista, St Antonio, Brava, Mayo, and
+Fuego are inhabited. _St Jago_ is much the largest and best, and is the
+seat of the chief governor. Besides sugar and tobacco, this island
+produces a small quantity of indigo, which, with goat-skins and some
+other articles, are sent to Lisbon. The capital is named likewise St
+Jago, and is the see of a bishop. There is another town, named _Ribera
+grande_, said to consist of 500 houses, which has a good harbour. The
+air of this island is rather unwholesome, and the soil is very unequal,
+the vallies producing some corn and wine. The goats are fat and good
+eating, the females usually producing three or four kids at a birth,
+once in four months. _St Nicholas_ is the best peopled next after St
+Jago. _Mayo_ has a great deal of salt, formed by the heat of the sun in
+pits, or ponds, into which the sea-water is let from time to time, and
+might furnish many thousand tons yearly, if there were vent for it. The
+fine _Marroquin_ leather is made from the goat-skins brought from these
+islands.
+
+[Footnote 218: The difference of longitude between the cape and islands
+is seven degrees W. or 140 marine leagues.--E.]
+
+We sailed from St Vincent on the 8th October; and in our passage to the
+coast of Brazil some new disputes arose among the men. After various
+consultations, it was determined that one Page, second mate of the
+Duchess, should be removed into the Duke, whence Mr Ballet was to remove
+into the Duchess. Captain Cooke was sent to execute this order, which
+Page refused to obey, but was brought away by force. Being accused of
+mutiny, he requested leave to go to the head before entering on his
+defence, which was permitted, when he jumped overboard, meaning to swim
+to the Duchess, while both captains were absent; but he was brought back
+and punished, which ended this dissension. The 18th November we anchored
+before Isla Grande, on the coast of Brazil, in eleven fathoms. While
+here new quarrels arose, and matters had like to have come to a great
+height in the Duchess, when Captain Courtney put eight of the
+ringleaders in irons, which frightened the rest, and probably prevented
+an attempt to run away with the ship. On the 23d two men deserted from
+the Duchess, but were so frightened in the night by tigers, as they
+supposed, though only monkeys and baboons, that they took refuge in the
+sea, and hallooed with all their might till they were fetched on board:
+yet, on the 25th, two Irish landmen stole away into the woods; but both
+were taken next day, and put in irons.
+
+This island is remarkably high land, having a small cliff and a tip
+standing up on one side, in the middle of the highest land, easily seen
+in clear weather; and there is a small island without _Isla Grande_ to
+the southward, rising in three little hummocks, the nearest hummock to
+the great island being the smallest. There is also a singularly round
+white rock on the larboard side, nearest Isla Grande, at the entrance
+between it and the main going in. On the starboard-side of this entrance
+there are several islands, and even the main land has much the
+appearance of islands till well in. The best way is, when you have
+opened the coves on the starboard-side going in, which are inhabited, to
+get a pilot to carry you to the watering-cove on Isla Grande; otherwise
+send a boat to the watering-cove, which lies round the inner and western
+point of the island, and is near a league in the passage between small
+islands, but room enough and bold. It is the second cove, under the
+first high mount, round behind the first-seen point, after getting in
+between, the two islands. This is the cove at which we watered; and we
+sounded all the passage going in, having seldom less than ten fathoms.
+There are other two very good coves, but we had not time to sound them.
+The town is N.E. from this cove, about three leagues distant.
+
+_Isla Grande_ is about nine leagues long, consisting of high land, as in
+the main, and all near the water is thickly covered with wood. The
+island abounds with monkeys and other wild beasts, and has plenty of
+good timber for various uses as well as fuel, with excellent water; and
+oranges, lemons, and guavas grow wild in the woods. From the town we
+procured rum, sugar, and tobacco, and the last is sold very dear, though
+not good for smoking, being too strong. We got also fowls and hogs, but
+the latter were scarce and dear; likewise maize, or Indian corn,
+bananas, plantains, guavas, lemons, oranges, and pine-apples are in
+great plenty; but they have no bread except _cassada_, which they call
+_faranada pan_, or bread of wood. Beef and mutton were cheap, but no
+great quantity to be had. We had fine pleasant weather most of the time
+we were here, but hot like an oven, as the sun was quite vertical. The
+winds we did not much observe, as they were little and variable, but
+commonly between the N. and E.
+
+I had Neuhoff's account of Brazil on board, and from all the enquiry and
+observation I could make, I found his description of the country, with
+its animals and productions, to be just. I particularly enquired
+respecting the monster called the _liboya_, or roebuck-serpent, thinking
+it fabulous; but the Portuguese governor assured me that they are
+sometimes found thirty feet long, and as big round as a barrel, being
+able to swallow a roebuck at one morsel, whence it has its name; and he
+told me that one of these enormous serpents had been killed near the
+town, a short time before our arrival. The principal products of Brazil
+are red wood, bearing the name of the country; sugar, gold, tobacco,
+snuff, whale oil, and various kinds of drugs; and the Portuguese build
+their best ships in this country. Brazil has now become very populous,
+and the people take great delight in arms, especially about the gold
+mines, to which people of all kinds resort in great numbers, especially
+negroes and mulattoes. Only four years ago [in 1704] these people
+endeavoured to make themselves independent, but have now submitted. Some
+men of repute told me that the gold mines increase fast in
+productiveness, and that the gold is got much easier in them than in any
+other country.
+
+The indigenous Brazilian women are very fruitful, and have easy labours,
+on which occasion they retire into the woods, and bring forth alone, and
+return home after washing themselves and their child; the husbands lying
+a-bed for the first twenty-four hours, being treated as if they had
+endured the pains of child-birth. The _Tapoyers_, who inhabit the inland
+country to the west, are the most barbarous of the natives, being taller
+and stronger than any of the other tribes, and indeed than most
+Europeans. They wear, by way of ornament, little sticks thrust through
+their cheeks and underlips, and are said to be cannibals, using poisoned
+arrows and darts. They live chiefly by hunting and fishing, shifting
+their habitations according to the seasons. Their kings, or chiefs, are
+distinguished by a particular manner of shaving their crowns, and by
+wearing their nails very long. Their priests are sorcerers, making the
+people believe that the devils appear to them in the form of certain
+insects, and they perform their diabolical worship in the night, when
+the women make dismal howlings, in which consists their principal
+devotion. They allow polygamy, yet punish adultery with death. When the
+young women are marriageable, but not courted, their mothers carry them
+to the chiefs, who deflower them, and this is deemed a great honour.
+Some of these people were considerably civilized by the Dutch, while
+they possessed a part of Brazil, and did them good service under the
+conduct of their native chiefs.
+
+Leaving Isla Grande on the 30th November, we continued our voyage far to
+the south, where we endured great cold, owing to which, a third part of
+both ships companies fell sick while passing round Cape Horn, for which
+reason we bore away for the island of Juan Fernandez, which we had some
+difficulty to find, owing to its being laid down differently in all the
+charts. Even Captain Dampier was much at a loss, though he had been
+there so often, and had as it were a map of the island in his head,
+which exactly agreed with it when we came there. This ought to induce
+sea-officers to prefer their own proper business to amusement, since,
+with all this knowledge, we were forced to make the main land of Chili,
+in order to find this island, and did not strike it at the last without
+considerable difficulty.
+
+We arrived at the island of _Juan Fernandez_ on the 1st February 1709,
+and having a good observation the day before, when we found our lat. 34°
+10' S.[219] In the afternoon we hoisted out our pinnace, in which
+Captain Dover set off to go on shore, though not less than four leagues
+from the ship. As it grew dark, we observed a light on shore, which some
+were of opinion was from our boat, but it was evidently too large for
+that, and we hung up a light to direct our boat, firing our quarter-deck
+gun, and showing lights in our mizen and fore shrouds, that our boat
+might find us, as we had fallen to leeward of the island. Our boat came
+aboard again about two in the morning, having turned back on seeing the
+light ashore when within a league, and we were glad they had got off so
+well, as it now began to blow. We were all convinced that the light
+which we had seen was from the shore, and therefore prepared our ships
+for an engagement, supposing it might proceed from some French ships at
+anchor, which we must either fight or want water. All this stir and
+apprehension, as we afterwards found, arose from one poor man, who
+passed in our imaginations for a Spanish garrison, a body of Frenchmen,
+or a crew of pirates, and it is incredible what strange notions some of
+our people entertained about this light; yet it served to show their
+tempers and spirits, and enabled us to guess how our men would behave,
+in case there really were enemies on the island.
+
+[Footnote 219: Juan Fernandez is in lat 33° 40' S. long. 79° W. Massa
+Faera, in the same latitude, is in long. 80° 50' W. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+While under these apprehensions, we stood to the back of the island in
+order to fall in with the southerly wind, till we were past the island.
+We then stood back for it again, and ran close aboard the land that
+begins to form its N.E. side. The flaws came heavy off the land, and we
+were forced to reef our top-sails when we opened the middle bay, where
+we expected to have found our enemy, but saw all clear, and no ships
+either there or in the other bay near the N.E. end. These are the only
+bays in which ships can ride that come here for refreshments, the middle
+one being the best. We now conjectured that there had been ships here,
+but that they had gone away on seeing us. About noon of the 2d February,
+we sent our yawl on shore, in which was Captain Dover, Mr Fry, and six
+men, all armed; and in the mean time we and the Duchess kept turning in,
+and such heavy squalls came off the land that we had to let fly our
+top-sail sheets, keeping all hands to stand by our sails, lest the winds
+should blow them away. These flaws proceed from the land, which is very
+high in the middle of the island; but when they passed by, we had little
+or no wind. As our yawl did not return, we sent the pinnace well armed,
+to see what had occasioned the yawl to stay, being afraid there might be
+a Spanish garrison on the island, who might have seized her and our men.
+
+Even the pinnace delays returning, on which we put up a signal for her
+to come back, when she soon came off with abundance of cray-fish,
+bringing also a man cloathed in goat-skins, who seemed wilder than the
+original owners of his apparel. His name was _Alexander Selkirk_, a
+Scotsman, who had been left here by Captain Stradling in the
+Cinque-ports, and had lived alone on the island for four years and four
+months. Captain Dampier told me he had been master of the Cinque-ports,
+and was the best man in that vessel; so I immediately agreed with him to
+serve as a mate in the Duke. During his stay, he had seen several ships
+pass by, but only two came to anchor at the island, which he found to be
+Spaniards, and therefore retired from them, on which they fired at him,
+but he escaped into the woods. Had they been French, he would have
+surrendered to them; but chose rather to run the risk of dying alone on
+the island than fall into the hands of the Spaniards, as he suspected
+they would either put him to death, or make him a slave in their mines.
+The Spaniards had landed before he knew what they were, and came so near
+him that he had much ado to escape; for they not only shot at him, but
+pursued him into the woods, where he climbed up a tree, at the foot of
+which some of them made water, and killed several goats just by, yet
+went away without discovering him.
+
+He told us that he was born in Largo, in the county of Fife in Scotland,
+and was bred a sailor from his youth. The reason of his being left here
+was a difference with Captain Stradling; which, together with the ship
+being leaky, made him at first rather willing to stay here than to
+continue in the ship; and when at last he was inclined to have gone, the
+captain would not receive him. He had been at the island before to wood
+and water, when two of the men were left upon it for six months, the
+ship being chased away by two French South-Sea ships; but the
+Cinque-ports returned and took them off, at which time he was left. He
+had with him his clothes and bedding, with a firelock and some powder
+and bullets, some tobacco, a knife, a kettle, a bible, with some other
+books, and his mathematical instruments. He diverted himself and
+provided for his sustenance as well as he could; but had much ado to
+bear up against melancholy for the first eight months, and was sore
+distressed at being left alone in such a desolate place. He built
+himself two huts of pimento trees, thatched with long grass, and lined
+with goat-skins, killing goats as he needed them with his gun, so long
+as his powder lasted, which was only about a pound at first. When that
+was all spent, he procured fire by rubbing two sticks of pimento wood
+together. He slept in his larger hut, and cooked his victuals in the
+smaller, which was at some distance, and employed himself in reading,
+praying, and singing psalms, so that he said he was a better Christian
+during his solitude than he had ever been before, or than, as he was
+afraid, he should ever be again.
+
+At first he never ate but when constrained by hunger, partly from grief;
+and partly for want of bread and salt. Neither did he then go to bed
+till he could watch no longer, the pimento wood serving him both for
+fire and candle, as it burned very clear, and refreshed him by its
+fragrant smell. He might have had fish enough, but would not eat them
+for want of salt, as they occasioned a looseness; except cray-fish,
+which are as large as our lobsters, and are very good. These he
+sometimes boiled, and at other times broiled, as he did his goat's
+flesh, of which he made good broth, for they are not so rank as our
+goats. Having kept an account, he said he had killed 500 goats while on
+the island, besides having caught as many more, which he marked on the
+ear and let them go. When his powder failed, he run down the goats by
+speed of foot; for his mode of living, with continual exercise of
+walking and running, cleared him of all gross humours, so that he could
+run with wonderful swiftness through the woods, and up the hills and
+rocks, as we experienced in catching goats for us. We had a bull-dog,
+which we sent along with several of our nimblest runners to help him in
+catching goats, but he outstript our dog and men, caught the goats, and
+brought them to us on his back. On one occasion, his agility in pursuing
+a goat had nearly cost him his life: as, while pursuing it with great
+eagerness, he caught hold of it on the brink of a precipice, of which,
+he was not aware, being concealed by bushes, so that he fell with the
+goat down the precipice to a great depth, and was so bruised and stunned
+by the fall, that he lay senseless, as he supposed, for twenty-four
+hours, and when he recovered his senses found the goat dead under him.
+He was then scarcely able to crawl to his hut, about a mile distant, and
+could not stir out again for ten days.
+
+He came at length to relish his meat well enough without bread and salt.
+In the proper season he had plenty of good turnips, which had been sowed
+there by Captain Dampier's men, and had now spread over several acres of
+ground. He had also abundance of cabbage, from the cabbage-palms, and
+seasoned his food with the fruit of the pimento, which is the same with
+Jamaica pepper, and has a fine flavour. He found also a species of black
+pepper, called _malageta_, which was good for expelling wind and curing
+gripes. He soon wore out all his shoes and other clothes, by running in
+the woods; and, being forced to shift without, his feet became so hard
+that he ran about every where without inconvenience, and it was some
+time after he came to us before he could wear shoes, as his feet swelled
+when he first began again to wear them. After he had got the better of
+his melancholy, he sometimes amused himself with carving his name on the
+trees, together with the date of his being left there, and the time of
+his solitary residence. At first he was much pestered with cats and
+rats, which had bred there in great numbers from some of each species
+which had got on shore from ships that had wooded and watered at the
+island. The rats gnawed his feet and clothes when he was asleep, which
+obliged him to cherish the cats, by feeding them with goats flesh, so
+that many of them became so tame that they used to lie beside him in
+hundreds, and soon delivered him from the rats. He also tamed some kids,
+and for his diversion would at times sing and dance with them and his
+cats: So that, by the favour of Providence and the vigour of his youth,
+for he was now only thirty years of age, he came at length to conquer
+all the inconveniences of his solitude, and to be quite easy in his
+mind.
+
+When his clothes were worn out, he made himself a coat and a cap of goat
+skins, which he stitched together with thongs of the same, cut out with
+his knife, using a nail by way of a needle or awl. When his knife was
+worn out, he made others as well as he could of some old hoops that had
+been left on the shore, which he beat out thin between two stones, and
+grinded to an edge on a smooth stone. Having some linen cloth, he sewed
+himself some shirts by means of a nail for a needle, stitching them with
+worsted, which he pulled out on purpose from his old stockings, and he
+had the last of his shirts on when we found him. At his first coming on
+board, he had so much forgotten his language, for want of use, that we
+could scarcely understand him, as he seemed to speak his words only by
+halves. We offered him a dram, which he refused, not having drank any
+thing but water all the time he had been on the island, and it was some
+time before he could relish our provisions. He could give us no farther
+account of the productions of the island than has been already, except
+that there were some very good black plums, but hard to come at, as the
+trees which bear them grow on high mountains and steep rocks. There are
+many pimento trees, some of them being sixty feet high and two yards
+round; and we saw cotton trees still higher, and near four fathoms round
+the stems. The climate is excellent, and the trees and grass are quite
+verdant the whole year. The winter lasts no longer than June and July,
+and is not then severe, there being then only slight frosts and a little
+hail, but sometimes very great rains. The heat of summer is equally
+moderate, and there is not much thunder or tempestuous weather. He saw
+no venomous, or savage creature on the island, nor any other beasts
+besides goats, bred there from a few brought by Juan Fernandez, a
+Spaniard, who settled there with a few families, till the continent of
+Chili began to submit to the Spaniards when they removed to that country
+as more profitable. This island, however, might maintain a good many
+people, and is capable of being made so strong that they could not be
+easily dislodged.
+
+We got our smith's forge ashore on the 3d February, and set our coopers
+to work to repair our water casks. They made a little tent also for me
+on shore, to enjoy the benefit of the land air. The two ships also set
+up tents for their sick, so that we had presently a kind of small town,
+in which all who were able were busily employed. A few men supplied us
+with excellent fish, in such abundance that they could take as many in a
+few hours as would serve 200 men for a meal. There were some sea-fowl in
+the bay, as large as geese, but they eat fishy. The governor, for so we
+called Mr Selkirk, never failed to procure us two or three goats every
+day for our sick men, by which, with the help of cabbages and other
+vegetables, and the wholesome air, our men soon recovered from the
+scurvy, and we found this island exceedingly agreeable, the weather
+being neither too hot nor too cold. We spent our time till the 10th in
+refitting our ships, taking wood on board, and laying in a stock of
+water, that which we brought from England, St Vincents, and Isla Grande,
+being spoilt by the badness of our casks. We also boiled up and refined
+eighty gallons of oil of sea-lions, which we used in lamps to save
+candles, and might have prepared several tons, if we had been provided
+with vessels. The sailors sometimes used this oil to fry their fish, for
+want of butter, and found it sufficiently agreeable. The men who worked
+ashore in repairing our rigging, eat the young seals, which they
+preferred to our ship's provisions, alleging that it was as good as
+English lamb. We made all the haste we could to get every thing on
+board, as we learnt at the Canaries that five stout French privateers
+were coming in company into the South Sea.
+
+This island of Juan Fernandez is about fifteen English miles in length
+from E. to W. and five miles where broadest, but averaging little more
+than two miles in breadth, and is mostly composed of high rugged land. I
+know of nothing in its neighbourhood which may endanger a ship, except
+what is distinctly visible. We anchored in the great bay, [La Baia or
+Cumberland harbour] on the N.E. side, about a mile from the bottom of
+the bay, our best bower being dropt in forty fathoms, and the stream
+anchor carried in with the shore, where it was laid in about thirty
+fathoms. We here had plenty of several sorts of fish, as silver-fish,
+snappers, bonitoes, cavallos, pollocks, old wives, and cray-fish of
+great size. The wind blows here generally off the shore, sometimes in
+heavy squalls, but for the most part calm, and where we were moored the
+water was very smooth, owing to the winding of the shore. Mr Selkirk
+told us it had never blown towards the land above four hours, all the
+time he had been there. It is all hills and vallies, and would doubtless
+produce most plants usual in such climates, if manured and cultivated,
+as the soil promises well in most parts, and already grows turnips and
+some other roots, which I suppose were formerly sowed. It has plenty of
+wood and water, and abundance of wild goats.
+
+There are such numbers of great sea-lions and other seals of various
+sorts, all having excellent furs, in every bay, that we could hardly
+walk about along shore for them, as they lay about in flocks like sheep,
+their young ones bleating for their dams like so many lambs. Some of
+these sea-lions are as big in the body as an English ox, and they roar
+like lions. They are covered with short hair of a light colour, which is
+still lighter on the young ones. I suppose they live partly on fish and
+partly on grass, for they come on shore by means of their fore paws,
+dragging their hind parts after them, and bask themselves in the sun in
+great numbers. They cut near a foot deep of fat, and we killed a good
+many of them for the sake of their oil, which is of good quality, but
+they are difficult to kill. Both sea-lions and seals were so numerous on
+the shore, that we had to drive them away before we could land, and they
+were so numerous as is hardly credible, making a most prodigious noise.
+
+There are but few birds. One sort, called _pardelas_ by the Spaniards,
+burrow in the ground like rabbits, and are said to be good eating. There
+are also _humming-birds_, not much larger than bumble bees, their bills
+no thicker than a pin, their legs proportional to their bodies, and
+their minute feathers of most beautiful colours. These are seldom taken
+or seen but in the evenings, when they fly about, and they flew
+sometimes at night into our fire. There is here a sort of cabbage tree,
+of the nature of a palm, producing small cabbages, but very sweet. The
+tree is slender and straight, with circular knobs on the stem fourteen
+inches above each other, and having no leaves except at the top. The
+branches are about twelve feet long, and at about a foot and a half from
+the body of the tree begin to shoot out leaves, which are four feet long
+and an inch broad, and so regularly placed that the whole branch seems
+one entire leaf. The cabbage, which grows out from the bottom of the
+branches, is about a foot long and very white; and at the bottom of this
+there grow clusters of berries, weighing five or six pounds, like
+bunches of grapes, as red as cherries and larger than our black-heart
+cherries, each having a large stone in the middle, and the pulp eats
+like our haws. These cabbage trees abound about three miles into the
+woods, the trunk being often eighty or ninety feet high, and is always
+cut down to get the cabbages, which are good eating; but most of them
+grow on the tops of the nearest mountains to the great bay.
+
+We found here some Guinea pepper, and some silk cotton trees, besides
+several others with the names of which I am not acquainted. Pimento is
+the best timber, and the most plentiful at this side of the island, but
+it is very apt to split till it is a little dried. We cut the longest
+and cleanest to split for fire wood. In the nearest plain, we found
+abundance of turnip greens, and water-cresses in the brooks, which
+greatly refreshed our men, and quickly cured them of the scurvy. Mr
+Selkirk said the turnips formed good roots in our summer months, which
+are winter at this island; but this being autumn, they were all run up
+to seed, so that we had no benefit of them excepting their green leaves
+and shoots. The soil is a loose black earth, and the rocks are very
+rotten, so that it is dangerous to climb the hills for cabbages without
+great care. There are also many holes dug into the ground by a sort of
+birds called _puffins_, which give way in walking, and endanger the
+breaking or wrenching a limb. Mr Selkirk said he had seen snow and ice
+here in July, the depth of the southern winter; but in September,
+October, and November, the spring months, the climate is very pleasant,
+and there are then abundance of excellent herbs, as purslein, parsley,
+and sithes. We found also an herb, not unlike _feverfew_, which proved
+very useful to our surgeons for fomentations. It has a most grateful
+smell like balm, but stronger and more cordial, and grew in plenty near
+the shore. We gathered many large bundles of it, which were dried in the
+shade, and sent aboard for after-use, besides strewing the tents with it
+fresh gathered every morning, which tended much to the recovery of our
+sick, of whom, though numerous when we came here, only two died
+belonging to the Duchess. We found the nights very cold, and the days
+not near so warm as might have been expected in so low a latitude. It
+hardly ever rains, instead of which there fall very heavy dews in the
+night, which serve the purposes of rain, and the air is almost
+perpetually serene.
+
+The 13th February we held a consultation, in which we framed several
+regulations for preserving secrecy, discipline, and strict honesty in
+both vessels: and on the 17th we determined that two men from the Duke
+should serve in the Duchess, and two of her men in the Duke, to see that
+justice was reciprocally done by each ship's company to the other. The
+28th we tried both pinnaces in the water under sail, having a gun fixed
+in each, and every thing else requisite to render them very useful small
+privateers.
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_Proceedings of the Expedition on the Western Coast of America_.
+
+In the evening of the 13th March[220] we saw a sail, and the Duchess
+being nearest soon took her. She was a small bark of sixteen tons from
+Payta, bound to Cheripe for flour, having a small sum of money on board
+to make the purchase, being commanded by a _Mestizo_, or one begotten
+between a Spaniard and an Indian, having a crew of eight men, one a
+Spaniard, another a negro, and all the rest Indians. On asking for news,
+we were told, that all the French ships, being seven in number, had left
+the South Sea six months before, and no more were to come there; adding,
+that the Spaniards had such an aversion to them, that they had killed
+many Frenchmen at Callao, the port of Lima, and quarrelled with them so
+frequently that none of them were suffered to come ashore there for some
+time before they sailed.
+
+[Footnote 220: It is quite obvious that they had now left Juan
+Fernandez, but this circumstance and its date are omitted by
+Harris.--E.]
+
+After putting some men aboard the prize, we haled close upon a wind for
+the isle of _Lobos_, and had we not been informed by our prisoners, had
+endangered our ships by running too far within that isle, as there are
+shoals between the island and the main, having a passage for boats only
+in that direction to get into the road which is to leeward of these
+islands in a sound between them. This sound is a mile long and half a
+mile wide, and has from ten to twelve fathoms on good ground. The only
+entrance for ships is to leeward of the islands. We went in with a small
+weather tide, but I could never observe it to flow above three feet
+while we were there. On the eastermost island there is a round hummock,
+behind which is a small cove, very smooth, deep, and convenient enough
+for careening a ship; we here hauled up and fitted our prize, which we
+named the _Beginning_. The highest part of the island of Lobos, as seen
+from the road, did not seem much higher than the top-mast head of a
+large ship. The soil is a hungry white clayish earth, mixed with sand
+and rocks; and there is no fresh water, nor any green thing to be seen
+on either of the islands. They are frequented by many vultures or
+carrion crows, and looked so like turkeys that one of our officers was
+rejoiced at the sight, expecting to fare sumptuously, and would not wait
+till the boat could put him ashore, but leapt into the water with his
+gun, and let fly at a parcel of them; but, when he came to take up his
+game, it stunk most abominably, and made us merry at his expence. The
+other birds here are pelicans, penguins, boobies, gulls, and one
+resembling teal, which nestle in holes under ground. Our men got great
+numbers of these birds, which they said were good meat after being
+skinned.
+
+We found abundance of bulrushes and empty jars, which the Spanish
+fishers had left on shore; for all over this western coast of America,
+they use earthen jars instead of casks, for containing oil, wine, and
+all other liquids. There are here abundance of sea-lions and seals, the
+latter being much larger than those we saw at Juan Fernandez, but their
+fur not so fine. Our people killed several of these, on purpose to eat
+their livers; but a Spaniard on board died suddenly after eating them,
+and I forbade their use, and we learnt also from our prisoners that the
+old seals are very unwholesome. The wind commonly blows here fresh from
+the south, veering to the east, and coming over the land to where we
+lay, brought with it a most noisome smell from the seals on shore, which
+gave me a violent headach, and offended every one else extremely. We
+found nothing so offensive at Juan Fernandez.
+
+Our prisoners told as, that the widow of the late viceroy of Peru was
+soon expected to embark in a Spanish man of war of thirty-six guns for
+Acapulco, with her family and riches; on which voyage she would either
+stop at Payta for refreshments, or pass in sight of that place, as is
+customary. They said also that about eight months before, a ship had
+passed Payta for Acapulco, loaded with flour and liquors, and having
+200,000 dollars on board. Also, that they had left signior Morel at
+Payta, in a ship laden with dry goods, who was expected to sail shortly
+for Lima; and that a stout French-built ship richly laden, and having a
+bishop on board, was shortly expected at Payta. This is the common place
+for refreshments, and is frequented by most ships from Lima or other
+parts to windward, on their way to Panama or other ports on the western
+coast of Mexico. On this information, we determined to spend as much
+time as possible cruising off Payta, so as not to discover that we were
+in these seas lest we should thereby hinder our other designs.
+
+In pursuance of this plan, we took a galleon on the 1st April, of 500
+tons burden, commanded by two brothers, Joseph and Juan Morel, laden
+with dry goods and negroes; and next day we took another prize. We now
+determined to make an attack on the town of _Guayaquil_; and on the 11th
+April, in a grand consultation, this enterprize was fully resolved upon,
+and a paper of instructions was drawn up for the guidance of the
+officers who were to command, so that each might be taught and kept to
+his duty. This enterprize was to be conducted by the three captains,
+Rogers, Courtney, and Dover. Captain Dover was to command the van
+division, consisting of seventy marines; Rogers the centre company, of
+seventy-one men, mostly officers and sailors; and Courtney the
+rear-guard, of seventy-three men; while Captain Dampier, with a reserve
+of twenty-two men, was to bring up some pieces of cannon, to be employed
+if necessary. Our force therefore on this occasion consisted of 238
+men.[221] Captain Cooke was to remain in the Duchess with forty-two men,
+and Captain Fry in the Duke with forty, our entire force being 320 men,
+while we had about 266 prisoners in both ships, including Indians and
+Negroes.
+
+[Footnote 221: The enumeration in the text gives only 236 men.--E.]
+
+Every thing being arranged, we bore in for Cape _Blanco_ on the 13th, of
+which we had sight about noon, bearing E.S.E. ten leagues off. On the
+15th in the morning we saw a ship near the shore, and having little
+wind, the Duke's boat, commanded by Captain Fry, and that of the Duchess
+by Captain Cooke, rowed directly for her, going off in such haste that
+neither of them had the swivel guns commonly used in the boats, neither
+had they their full complement of men, and only ten muskets and four
+pistols, with not much powder and shot, and no water. They rowed very
+hard for six leagues to get up with the ship, and on Mr Fry getting
+near, she hoisted Spanish colours. We could plainly see that she was
+French-built, and therefore concluded that it must be the ship we had
+long looked for, which was to carry the bishop. Our ships being almost
+out of sight, and the chase near the coast, making the best of her way
+to run ashore in a sandy bay, we resolved to lay her on board, one of
+our boats on each bow, I[222] being then on her weather quarter, and
+Captain Fry on her lee. It was our intention to pretend that we were
+friends, till we should get out of the way of her stern-chase guns; but
+the Duke's men, conceiving the Spaniards were going to give us a
+volley, poured in their shot. We then laid in our oars, and fell to with
+our small arms. We kept up a constant fire for a long time, which was
+returned by the Spaniards, who killed two of Captain Fry's men, and
+wounded one of his and two of mine. One of the dead men was John Rogers,
+our second lieutenant, and brother to Captain Woods Rogers, who had
+behaved himself gallantly. Finding the enterprize too difficult, Captain
+Fry drew off his boat, as I did soon after. Captain Fry then put some of
+his men aboard my boat, giving us some powder and shot, and taking in
+our wounded men, on which he stood away towards our ships, while I
+resolved to keep the chase if possible from running on shore, and rather
+than fail to clap her on board. Seeing our design, the enemy edged off
+to sea, and we after them. Our ships came up apace, while we kept close
+to the Spaniard, sometimes firing at him. At length the Duchess got up
+and fired a shot or two, on which she struck, and we immediately
+boarded. The men begged for quarter, and we promised them all civility.
+This ship was of 270 tons, commanded by Don Joseph Arizabella, and had
+come from Panama bound for Lima, where she was to have been fitted out
+as a man of war, the captain having his commission on board for that
+purpose. She had seventy negroes on board, with many passengers. The
+loading was bale goods, with some things belonging to the bishop, and a
+considerable quantity of pearls; but the bishop had been landed at Point
+St Helena, whence he was to go by land to Guayaquil. Many of the
+passengers were considerable merchants at Lima, and the briskest
+Spaniards I ever saw. After the capture of this ship, Captain Cooke
+remained on board, sending her captain and the rest of the prisoners to
+the Duke and Duchess.
+
+[Footnote 222: This particular action is related by Harris in the words
+of Captain Cooke, who commanded the boat from the Duchess.--E.]
+
+We now proceeded on our intended expedition against Guayaquil, sending
+the _Beginning_ ahead to _Punta arena_, or Sandy Point, on the island of
+Puna, to see if there was any force to oppose us; but she only found a
+Spanish bark, quite empty, riding close under the point. She had been
+sent to load salt, but her men had abandoned her on seeing us approach.
+At five in the afternoon, our whole force intended for the attack upon
+Guayaquil, being embarked in boats, rowed for that place; and at eleven
+at night we could see a light in the town, on which we rowed as easy as
+we could and in silence, for fear of being discovered; till we were
+within a mile of the place. We then heard a sentinel call to another,
+and after conversing for some time, bid him bring fire. Perceiving we
+were now discovered, we rowed to the other side of the river, opposite
+the town, whence we saw a fire lighted up at the place where the
+centinels had talked, and soon after we could see lights all over the
+town and at the water side, heard them ring the alarm bell, fire several
+vollies, and saw a fire lighted on the hill where the beacon was kept,
+all on purpose to give notice to the town and neighbourhood that we were
+come into the river.
+
+Our boats were now moored with grapplings, and so hot a dispute took
+place among some of our officers, that they were heard on shore; but as
+the Spaniards did not understand what they said, an English prisoner was
+brought to the shore to interpret what they heard. By the time he came,
+the dispute was over; but this Englishman afterwards joined us, and gave
+us this account. We held a council in the stern sheets of one of our
+boats, to consider whether we should land immediately or wait till
+day-light; and, as the barks were not come up, in which were the
+artillery and half of our men, and as we did not know the ground
+sufficiently to act in the dark, it was agreed to wait till day, by
+which time it was hoped the barks would join. We accordingly fell down
+the river a short way, to meet our barks, hearing several musket shots
+by the way. On the 23d April at day-break, we saw one of our barks at
+anchor within a mile of the town, close under the shore, and the other
+coming up the river with the tide of flood. We then rowed up to our
+bark, which had fired the shots we heard in the night at some fishermen
+passing by, whom they took.
+
+All our force being now joined, we proceeded up the river, and sent a
+flag of truce on shore, accompanied by Don Joseph Arizabella, the
+governor of Puna, and another prisoner; and then towed up our barks over
+against the town, where we came to an anchor. When Captain Arizabella
+came with our flag of truce before the corregidor or mayor of
+Guayaquill, he enquired our numbers, which the captain magnified, on
+which the corregidore said we were boys, not men. To this the captain
+answered, he would find them men, and brave ones too, for they had
+fought him gallantly in their open boats, although he had slain the
+brother of their commander and others; and therefore advised him to
+agree for the ransom of the town, as even if he had 3000 men he would be
+unable to withstand the English. To this the corregidore replied, _My
+horse is ready_.
+
+After bringing our barks to anchor, we went up the river after some
+vessels, six of which we secured and brought to anchor beside our barks.
+We also took possession of two new ships of about 400 tons burden each.
+Soon after this, the governor came on board one of the prizes, to treat
+for the ransom of the town and ships, but could not then agree, but
+promised to meet the captains again at seven in the evening, but did not
+keep his sword. This evening our boats took some canoes having silver on
+board. On the 24th in the morning, the governor came off again to treat,
+but no agreement could be made; and at four in the afternoon we landed
+all our men in good order, when the Spaniards only fired one volley and
+then fled. Our men pursued them to where their cannon were placed, which
+they soon gained possession of, only one gunner, an Irishman, remaining
+by them till he was wounded in four places, of which he soon afterwards
+died. We marched through both towns in a compact body, driving the enemy
+before us, and then placed three guards in the three churches, setting
+fire to five or six houses which stood near to a wood into which the
+Spaniards had fled, that they might not have the cover of these houses
+to annoy our guard, which stood within pistol shot. All night they kept
+firing at our sentinels from the woods, yet without doing us any harm.
+Several parties also of horse and foot came out of the wood, as if to
+attack us, but made no attempt. In the mean time, the pinnace belonging
+to the Duchess, in which was Lieutenant Connely and twenty-two men, went
+up the river, landed at every house near its banks, and brought away all
+the plate and other articles of value they could find. In this service,
+they had some skirmishing with the enemy, in which one of our men was
+wounded.
+
+On the 25th the enemy appeared numerous in the woods, whence they
+sometimes came out and skirmished with our guards, in which one of our
+men was wounded. We spent the afternoon in sending off provisions from
+the town to our ships, and in disposing all things in readiness in case
+of being attacked in the night, as the enemy appeared numerous about
+the outskirts. For this reason, all the captains concentrated our whole
+force at the main guard, where we had our cannon in readiness.
+Messengers arrived with a flag of truce in the morning of the 26th, to
+treat for ransoming the town, but could not agree; but in the afternoon
+it was at length agreed to pay 30,000 dollars for its ransom, giving
+three hostages, and we were to remain at Puna till they had time to
+raise the sum, as the inhabitants had carried away their money, and
+being so dispersed that it was impossible to collect the money while we
+were there, even the inhabitants of the adjacent country having carried
+off their valuable effects into the interior.
+
+In the morning of the 27th, the hostages for the ransom were sent on
+board one of our barks, together with a boatload of brandy; and, as
+agreed upon with the Spaniards, we took down our union jack, hoisted a
+flag of truce, and fired a signal gun, that the Spaniards might come
+freely into the town, and that no hostilities should take place on
+either side during the time we had agreed to wait for the money. The
+purpose of admitting the Spanish inhabitants was to prevent the Indians
+and Negroes from robbing; and I am apt to believe they had already
+robbed as much as we had plundered, for we had taken many of them loaded
+with goods, while going our rounds, which they confessed to have stolen;
+and we were afterwards informed, that the inhabitants, in their hurry,
+had given much plate and money to Negroes to carry out of town, which
+they could never hear of afterwards.
+
+The 29th in the morning we took a small Spanish bark, coming from
+Cheripe to Guayaquil, on board of which were 330 bags of meal, and 140
+arobas or hundred-weights of sugar, with some onions, quinces, and
+pomegranates. This, with the six barks and two great ships ransomed with
+the town of Guayaquil, made 14 prizes taken in the South Sea. The
+plunder taken in Guayaquil, exclusive of the ransom, was very
+considerable. We found 230 bags of flour, beans, peas, and rice; 15 jars
+of oil, besides 160 jars of other liquor; some cordage, iron ware, and
+nails; about four half jars of powder; about a ton of pitch and tar; 150
+bales of dry goods; a few packs of indigo, cacao, and arnotto; about a
+ton of loaf-sugar; a considerable parcel of clothes and other
+necessaries, and to the value of about £1200 in plate, ear-rings, and
+other trinkets; besides four pieces of cannon, and about 200 useless
+muskets. We left abundance of goods in the town, besides liquors of all
+sorts, and a variety of naval stores, and several warehouses full of
+cacao. We left also several ships on the stocks, and two new ships still
+unrigged, of above 400 tons each, which cost upwards of 80,000 crowns;
+and we also restored four barks, leaving two others to bring down the
+ransom. Thus it appears that the Spaniards had a good bargain; but the
+agreed ransom, though small, was far better for us than to burn what we
+could not carry away. The hostages informed us, that during our treaty
+80,000 dollars belonging to the king had been sent out of the town,
+besides plate, jewels, and other things of the greatest value. Hence it
+is certain, if we had landed at the first, giving them no time at all,
+that we had been much greater gainers, and might have made 200,000
+dollars, in ready money, plate, and jewels. Yet Guayaquil had not been
+so poor for forty years as now, there having been a great fire about a
+year and half before we took it, in which the best part of the town was
+burnt down, and had occasioned great expence for its rebuilding.
+
+As it was, we thought ourselves well off, and great care was taken that
+all concerned in the expedition should be satisfied, by which our people
+were much gratified, and afterwards shewed great alacrity in executing
+our other enterprizes. This is of the utmost consequence with
+privateers; for, if the men have the smallest jealousy of being ill
+treated in this respect, disputes arise which do infinitely more
+mischief than the value of what can be got by such sinister practices.
+Among all the men who landed in this enterprize, the only man who drank
+a cup too much was one John Gabriel, a Dutchman, who served in the
+company commanded by Captain Rogers. When we were evacuating the town,
+he was missing, and was supposed to be either taken or slain. But he had
+found some excellent brandy in the house where he was quartered, of
+which he drank so liberally that he fell fast asleep on the floor, and
+was in that condition when we evacuated the town. The master of the
+house returned soon after, and found the Dutchman stretched out at full
+length, and so dead asleep that he could hardly distinguish whether he
+were living. Calling in some of his neighbours, and securing the
+Dutchman's weapons, they set him on his feet, and with some difficulty
+brought him to his senses, when he was not a little alarmed at finding
+himself in such company. At length the Spaniard restored his arms, and
+desired him to make all the haste he could after his comrades, who were
+not yet embarked.
+
+On the 2d May, which was the day appointed for payment of the ransom, no
+boat appeared, and we began to be uneasy for our money; but at length
+the boat arrived, and brought us 22,000 dollars. We received the money,
+and sent back a message that we proposed to sail from Puna next morning,
+and should carry away the hostages, if the rest of the money were not
+then sent. We staid however till the 6th, when Captain Courtney was
+anxious to depart, lest we should be attacked by the French and Spanish
+ships from Lima. I endeavoured in vain to convince him that we were in
+no danger, as they could not by this time have received notice at Lima,
+and have fitted out a force sufficient to attack us. We sailed however,
+and came to anchor in the afternoon a few leagues from Point Arena. Next
+morning, when we were preparing to sail, Mr Morel, a gentleman from Puna
+related to our prisoners, and another gentleman from Guayaquil, brought
+us 3500 dollars, in farther payment of our ransom. This put us into such
+good humour, that we discharged all our prisoners except the Morels, the
+three hostages, and three or four more. The gentleman from Guayaquil had
+a gold chain and some other things of value, for which we sold him our
+bark, the _Beginning_, having no farther use for her. We also gave
+Captain Arizabella three negro women, and another to Mr Morel, and
+returned their wearing apparel to most of our prisoners who were now
+liberated, so that we parted good friends.
+
+_Guayaquil_ is divided into two parts, called the old and new towns,
+which together contain about 500 houses, and are joined by a long wooden
+bridge for foot passengers, near half a mile long. It is situated in low
+boggy ground, so dirty in winter that it is difficult to go from house
+to house. There is but one regular street along the river side, leading
+to the bridge, and from it along the old town. Besides this, there is a
+handsome parade or square in front of the church of St Jago, but that
+church is in ruins. Besides this, there are three other churches, St
+Augustin, St Francis, and St Dominic; before which last is another
+parade, and a half-moon battery fitted for mounting six guns, but there
+were none while we were there. There is also a chapel, and there had
+been a church dedicated to St Ignatius, belonging to the jesuits, but it
+was burnt down in the great fire. These were all decently adorned with
+altars, carved work, and pictures, and that dedicated to St Augustin had
+an organ, but all their plate had been carried away by the priests and
+students, who fled into the woods. Some of the houses were of brick,
+particularly about the parades, and the rest of timber or split bamboos,
+and some of them were decently furnished. Some of the inhabitants had
+calashes, but I know not what use they could be of, all the
+neighbourhood being so boggy that there was not road for them.
+
+The boggy ground about Guayaquil was full of the largest toads I ever
+saw, some being as big as an English two-penny loaf. The town was said
+to contain 2000 inhabitants of all sorts, including Indians, Negroes,
+and Mulattoes. An Englishman who joined us here, told us that, in the
+preceding December, on occasion of a public rejoicing for the birth of
+the prince of the Asturias, which lasted for three weeks, they had
+mustered 1100 foot and 500 horse, all armed, which came from the
+surrounding country, besides a much greater number unarmed, the greater
+part of whom must have been Indians. Guayaquil is well situated for
+trade and ship-building, being fourteen leagues from Point Arena and
+seven from Puna, up a large river, into which fall several smaller ones,
+and on which there are many villages and farms. The water of this river
+is fresh for four leagues below the city, and all along its banks grow
+great quantities of mangroves and _sarsaparillas_, and on account of
+this last the water is thought salutary against the lues. But during
+floods, when it brings down many poisonous plants from the mountains,
+among which is the _manchinilla_ apple, it is not reckoned wholesome.
+All birds that eat of this apple are sure to die, and we saw hundreds of
+them dead, floating on the water.
+
+The seasons here are very improperly denominated summer and winter. The
+winter is reckoned from the beginning of December to the end of May, in
+all which season it is sultry, hot, wet, and unhealthy. From the end of
+May to the beginning of December, which they call summer, the weather is
+serene, dry, and healthy, and not so violently hot as in what they
+denominate winter. The cacao is ripe and mostly gathered between June
+and August. Of the other fruits of this country, some are ripe and
+others green during the whole course of the year. Guayaquil is the chief
+city of a province of that name in the kingdom of Peru, governed by a
+president with five or six orders of judges, forming a royal
+_audiencia_, or chief court of judicature, and accountable only to the
+viceroy in military affairs,[223] and every province has a government of
+the same nature. The governors are appointed, or more properly purchase
+their offices, at the court of Old Spain, and are for life or good
+behaviour. If any one die or misbehave, the viceroy may name another
+during his time, which ought only to be for five years; but he sometimes
+gets those of his own placing confirmed by an order from Spain, by which
+means he derives a considerable portion of his unknown profits. The late
+viceroy of Peru continued in office fourteen years, several intended
+successors having died on the way. Scarcely does the king of Spain live
+in greater splendour than the viceroy does at Lima, where the chief
+courts of judicature are held, to which appeals are brought from all the
+courts and provinces of this extensive kingdom. I was told on good
+authority that the last viceroy, who died about four years ago, left at
+least eight millions of dollars to his widow and family, besides vast
+sums given in charity during his life, and building many churches,
+friaries, and nunneries. He left a better character than any viceroy had
+done for an age past.
+
+[Footnote 223: This province is now in the kingdom or viceroyalty of New
+Granada, and audiencia of Quito.--E.]
+
+The province of Guayaquil abounds in excellent timber of several kinds,
+so that it is the chief place in all Peru for building and repairing
+ships, of which there are seldom less than seven or eight on the stocks
+here at one time. Its chief commodity is cacao, with which it supplies
+most parts on the South Sea, and we were told it never exported less
+than 30,000 _carguas_ yearly, and sometimes double that quantity, a
+_cargua_ being eighty-one pounds weight, which only costs here two
+dollars and a half. They have also a considerable trade in salt and
+salt-fish, from Cape St Helena, which is mostly sent to Quito and other
+places of the inland country. It exports also a vast quantity of timber
+to Truxilo, Chana, Lima, and other places, where it is scarce. They
+export also from hence rice and cotton, with some dried or jerked beef.
+This province has no mines of gold or silver, but abounds in all sorts
+of cattle, which are very cheap, especially on the island of Puna, where
+we amply supplied ourselves. Their only grain is maiz, so that all their
+wheat flour is brought from Truxilo, Cherisse, and other places to
+windward, or to the south, as the wind blows here always from the south.
+They procure several kinds of woollen cloth, among which, are very
+strong and good bags, from Quito. Their wines, brandy, olives, oil, and
+sugar, come from Piscola, Nasca, and other places to windward. All kinds
+of European goods are brought from Panama, being brought there overland
+from Portobello on the Gulf of Mexico; and the trade of this port is so
+considerable as to employ forty sail every year, besides coasters. A
+market is also held daily on bark logs, or boats, every day, on the
+river before the town, containing every thing afforded by the interior
+country in great plenty.
+
+The other towns in the province are governed by lieutenants, or
+deputies, appointed by the corregidore. Above half of these towns border
+on the same river or its branches, so that their inhabitants can all
+come to the capital in two tides, though some are many leagues distant.
+_Porto Vaco_ was formerly the capital. In the whole province, the
+Spaniards reckon 10,000 inhabitants, but I believe there are many more,
+including all the mixed races between Spaniards, Indians, and negroes,
+which they divide and subdivide into eleven denominations. Few of the
+prisoners who fell into our hands were healthy or sound, and nearly half
+of the native Spaniards applied to our doctors for remedies against the
+French disease, which is so common here that it is reckoned no scandal.
+
+On the 11th May, with a strong gale at S.S.W. we bore away for the
+Gallepagos islands, being in a very sad condition; for we had upwards of
+twenty men ill in the Duke, and near fifty in the Duchess, seized with a
+malignant fever, contracted, as I suppose, at Guayaquil, where a
+contagious disease had reigned a month or five weeks before we took it;
+which swept away ten or twelve persons every day, so that all the
+churches were filled, being their usual burying places, and they had to
+dig a great deep hole close by the great church, where I kept guard, and
+this hole was almost filled with putrefying bodies: and our lying so
+long in that church, surrounded by such noisome scents, was enough to
+infect us all. In twenty-four hours more we had fifty men down and the
+Duchess upwards of seventy, and in the next twenty-four hours, ten more
+fell sick in each ship. We discovered land on the 17th, and on the 18th,
+at day-break, we were within four leagues of two large islands almost
+joining each other, having passed that we first saw during the night. We
+sent repeatedly ashore here in search of water, but could find none,
+though the people went three or four miles up into the country, and
+they reported that the island was nothing but loose rocks like cinders,
+very rotten and heavy, and the earth so parched that it broke into holes
+under their feet. This made me suppose there had been a volcano here;
+and though there is much shrubby ground, with some green herbs, there
+was not the smallest signs of water, neither was it possible for any to
+be contained on such a surface. In short, we found these islands
+completely to disappoint our expectations, and by no means to agree with
+the descriptions of former voyagers. We had also the misfortune to lose
+company of one of our barks, in which was Mr Hately, with five of our
+men, two Spanish prisoners, and three negroes.[224]
+
+[Footnote 224: Mr Hately, being unable to rejoin his companions, was
+forced to land at Cape Passado in lat. 0° 25' S. on the coast of
+Guayaquil, where he and his people were barbarously used by a mixed race
+between the Indians and negroes; but were rescued by a priest, and sent
+to Lima, where he was kindly treated.--E.]
+
+In a consultation on the 26th May, we resolved to proceed for the island
+of Plata in quest of water, and then to come immediately off the coast
+again, having information of two French ships, one of sixty and the
+other of forty-six guns, together with a Spanish man of war, that would
+soon be sent in search of us. It was also our intention to refit our
+ships there, and not to go near the main, our ships being out of order,
+and our men very weak and sickly, several of them having already died.
+We accordingly sailed on the 27th, and in another conversation on the
+30th, it was agreed to go first to _Gorgono_, to see if there were any
+English ships there; and afterwards to sail for _Maugla_, Malaga, or
+_Madulinar_,[225] where there are some Indians at enmity with the
+Spaniards, who, as the pilots informed us, come seldom there, and were
+not likely to procure any intelligence of us from thence. They told us
+also, if we could induce the Indians to trade with us, we might have
+hogs, fowls, plantains, bananas, and other refreshments.
+
+[Footnote 225: The island of Gorgona is on the coast of New Granada, in
+lat. 2° 54' N. and long. 78° 35' W.]
+
+While on our course towards Gorgona, the Duchess took the _San Thoma de
+Villa nova_ of ninety tons, having about forty people on board,
+including eleven negro slaves, and but little European goods, except
+some cloth and iron. Next day we made the island of _Gorgona_,[226] and
+on the 8th of June our boats brought in another prize, a small bark of
+fifteen tons belonging to a creek on the main. She was bound to
+Guayaquil, having ten Spaniards and Indians on board, and some negroes,
+but had very little cargo, except a small quantity of gold dust and a
+large gold chain, together of about 500_l_. value, which were secured
+aboard the Duchess. In a consultation, held on the 19th June, proceeding
+upon information procured from our prisoners, it was resolved to proceed
+to Malaga, at which there was an anchorage, where we proposed to leave
+our ships, and to row up the river for the rich gold mines of Barbacore,
+[_Barbaceas_][227] called also the mines of St Pean, from a village of
+that name about two tides up the river. At that place we proposed to
+seize canoes, as fitter than our boats for going up against the stream,
+in which, at this season of the year, according to the information of an
+old Spanish pilot, there are such strong freshes, that he did not expect
+we should reach the mines in less than twelve days. But having
+discoursed with several of the prisoners, we found the island of Malaga
+an unsafe place for our ships, and besides, they represented the river
+as so narrow, that the Indians would be able to assail us with poisoned
+arrows, and the Spaniards might easily cut off our retreat, by felling
+trees across from bank to bank. On this information, we held another
+consultation, in which it was agreed to desist from this enterprize, and
+we came accordingly back to Gorgona, in so very weak a condition that we
+could hardly have defended ourselves, if attacked.
+
+[Footnote 226: It is somewhat difficult to ascertain what island is here
+meant. There are some islands at the mouth of the _Rio de Mira_, in lat.
+1° 38' N. on one of which is _Punta de Mangles_, or Cape Mangles,
+resembling one of the names in the text; but from the context, the
+island for which they were next bound appears to have been that now
+called _Del Gallo_, in lat. 1° 55' N. not above ten miles south from the
+river they proposed to enter.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 227: Barbacoas is one of the provinces of New Granada, having
+a town of the same name in the _Rio Telemli_, which joins the _Rio
+Patia.--E.]
+
+We arrived at Gorgona on the 13th June, where we anchored in forty
+fathoms, and resolved to careen our two ships in succession, beginning
+with the Duchess. Our sick men were removed into the galleon, and the
+sick officers to the French-built ship. We landed tents for the
+cooper's and armourer's crews, and cleared a place for tents to
+accommodate the sick on shore. All this was performed with so much
+diligence, that by the 28th both ships were careened, caulked, rigged,
+and restored fit for sea. On the 29th, we set up tents ashore for the
+sick, who were already much recovered, though the Spaniards had
+represented this island as unhealthy; yet by walking about on shore they
+soon gathered strength enough to return to their duty. We here fitted
+out the French-built ship, with twenty guns, putting Captain Cooke into
+her, with a crew taken from the other two ships, resolving to carry her
+home with us, and to employ her as a third cruizer while in these seas;
+and this great work employed us from the 29th June to the 9th July,
+calling her the _Marquis_. She had thirty-five men from the Duke and
+twenty-six from the Duchess, making a crew of sixty-one British, to
+which were added twenty negroes.
+
+Our next care was to get rid of our prisoners, who were a great burden
+to us, and we resolved therefore to set them on shore, after trying
+every possible method to engage them in a scheme for trading with us.
+For this purpose I proposed going to Panama, to remain six days near
+that place, till they should bring the money we could agree for, as the
+price of our prize goods; and to this the two Morels and Don Antonio
+agreed, provided we would take 60,000 dollars for the whole. I then
+proposed to give them up the galleon and all the goods and negroes, if
+they would give us 120,000 dollars for the whole. They told us that
+trading in these seas with strangers, especially the English and Dutch,
+was so rigidly prohibited, that they would have to give more than the
+original cost in bribes, to procure licence to deal with us, and could
+not therefore assure us of payment, unless we agreed to take a low
+price. Finding it therefore not worth while to waste time, and knowing
+we should run much risk in treating with them, we at length resolved to
+set them all ashore, hoping the Morels and Don Antonio would get money
+for us, to prevent us from burning the ships we could not conveniently
+carry away. At parting, I made them sensible that we had treated them
+like generous enemies, and said we would sell them good bargains for
+what money they might be able to bring us in ten days, after which we
+should burn or carry away all that was not then disposed of. We
+accordingly landed seventy-two prisoners on the 10th July. On the 16th
+the Morels came off with what money they had been able to procure, and
+bought some of our goods, behaving with much honour, and putting great
+confidence in us. On the 18th, a negro belonging to the Duchess was
+bitten by a small brown speckled snake, and died in twelve hours. There
+are many snakes in this island of Gorgona, and I saw one above three
+yards long, and as thick as my leg. The same morning the Mr Morels went
+off a second time in our bark for money; and this day one of the same
+kind of snakes that killed our negro was found on the forecastle of the
+Duke, having crawled up the cable, as we supposed, as they were often
+seen in the water.
+
+On the 2d of August we were like to have had a mutiny, for the steward
+informed me that he understood many of the men had entered into a secret
+agreement, and he had heard some ringleaders boasting that sixty men had
+already signed the paper, but knew not the nature of their design. I
+immediately convened the officers in the cabin, where we armed
+ourselves, and soon secured four of the principal mutineers, putting the
+fellow who wrote the paper in irons. By this time all the people were on
+deck, and we had got their paper from those we had in custody; the
+purport of it being to refuse accepting the intended distribution of
+plunder, and not to move from this place, till they had what they termed
+justice done them. Not knowing how far this mutiny might have been
+concerted with the people of the other ships, we agreed to discharge
+those in confinement, on asking pardon, and faithfully promising never
+to be guilty of the like again.
+
+We sailed from Gorgona on the 11th August, and as our ships were now
+rather thinly manned, I engaged thirty-two of our negro prisoners to
+join our company, placing Michael Kendall, a free Jamaica negro, who had
+deserted to us from the Spaniards, as their leader, and charging him to
+exercise them in the use of arms. At the same time I supplied them with
+clothes, desiring them to consider themselves now as Englishmen, and no
+longer slaves to the Spaniards. After this we stood over to the bay of
+_Jecames_, [Atacames,] where the Indians are free; and with much ado
+entered into trade with them, by the help of a priest. We sent them
+three large wooden saints to adorn their church, which they took as a
+great present; and I sent a feathered cap to the wife of the chief which
+was well accepted. We here sold some of our prize goods to good account,
+so that we had provisions very cheap. We sailed from hence on the 1st
+September, intending for the Gallapagos, and on the 8th we made one of
+these islands.
+
+Next day we came to anchor in about thirty fathoms; and in the evening
+our boats brought us off a lading of excellent turtle, having sent our
+yawl and several men ashore previously to turn over these creatures in
+the night; but to no purpose, as we afterwards found they only came
+ashore in the day. The island off which we lay was high, rocky, and
+barren, with some low land next the sea, but now water was to be found,
+like those we had seen formerly. On the 12th the Duchess, which lay at
+anchor a good distance from us, had got about 150 land and
+sea-tortoises, but not generally so large as ours; while we had 120
+turtles, but no land-tortoises as yet. The Marquis had the worst luck.
+On the 13th, I sent our pinnace to the place where the Duchess got
+land-tortoises, which returned at night with thirty-seven, and some salt
+they had found in a pond; and our yawl brought us twenty sea-turtles, so
+that we were now well provided. Some of the largest land-tortoises
+weighed 100 pounds; and the largest sea-turtles were upwards of 400
+pounds weight. The land-tortoises laid eggs on our deck; and our men
+brought many of them from the land, pure white, and as large as a
+goose's egg, with a strong thick shell, exactly round.
+
+These are the ugliest creatures that can well be imagined, the
+back-shell being not unlike the top of an old hackney-coach, as black as
+jet, and covered with a rough shrivelled skin. The neck and legs are
+long, and as big as a man's wrist, and they have club-feet as large as a
+fist, shaped much like those of an elephant, having five knobs, or thick
+nails, on each fore-foot, and only four on the hind-feet. The head is
+small, with a visage like that of a snake; and when first surprised they
+shrink up their head, neck, and legs under their shell. Some of our men
+affirmed that they saw some of these about four feet high, and of vast
+size; and that two men mounted on the back of one of these, whom it
+easily carried at its usual slow pace, not appearing to regard their
+weight. They supposed this one could not weigh less than 700 pounds. The
+Spaniards say that there are no others in these seas, except at the
+Gallapagos, but they are common in Brazil.
+
+The 15th, being under sail with a fine breeze, we agreed to lay to till
+midnight. The 16th, seeing many islands and rocks to the westwards, we
+agreed to bear away, not caring to encumber ourselves among them during
+the night; but by six in the evening, from the mast-head, we could see
+so many low rocks, almost joining from island to island, that we seemed
+land-locked for more than three parts of the compass, and no way open
+except the S.W. whence we came. We resolved therefore to return that
+way, making short trips all night, and continually sounding, for fear of
+shoals, having from forty to sixty fathoms. The 18th and 19th we saw
+several more islands, one of them very large, which we supposed to be
+near the equator. At noon of the 19th we had an observation, making our
+latitude 2° 2' N. We saw in all at least fifty islands, some of which we
+searched, and others we viewed from a distance, but none had the least
+appearance of fresh water.[228] Signior Morel told me that a Spanish
+man-of-war had been to an island in lat. 1° 20' or 30' S. 140 Spanish
+leagues west from the island of _Plata_, and to which they gave the name
+of _Santa Maria del Aguada_, a pleasant island with a good road, full of
+wood, and having plenty of water, with turtle and sea-tortoises in
+abundance. This I believe to have been the same island in which Davis
+the buccaneer recruited; and all the light he has left by which to find
+it again, is, that it is to the west of the islands he was at with the
+other buccaneers, which must be those we were twice at. We had no
+occasion to look out for this island on the present trip, though I
+believe it might easily have been found without farther directions. In
+these islands there are many kinds of sea-fowl, and some land-birds,
+particularly hawks and turtle-doves, both so very tame that we often
+knocked them down with sticks. I saw no kind of beasts, but there are
+guanas in abundance, and land-tortoises almost on every island, besides
+vast numbers of turtles or sea-tortoises. It is very strange how the
+land-tortoises have got here, as there are none on the main, and they
+could not have come of themselves. Some of these islands are the haunts
+of seals, but not in such numbers as at Juan Fernandez, neither is their
+fur so good. A very large one made at me three several times, and if I
+had not happened to have a pike-staff headed with iron, he might have
+killed me. I was on the level sand when he came open-mouthed at me from
+the water, as fierce and quick as an angry dog let loose. All the three
+times he made at me, I struck the pike into his breast, which at last
+forced him to retire into the water, snarling with an ugly noise, and
+shewing his long teeth. This animal was as big as a large bear.
+
+[Footnote 228: In Cowley's voyage, formerly given, one of these
+islands, which he calls the Duke of York's Island, is said to have
+abundance of wood and water, but none to be had in any of the rest.
+Perhaps the Duke of York's Island of Cowley, and Santa Maria del Aguada
+of Morel, may be the same.--E.]
+
+On the 1st October we made the main-land of Mexico, which Captain
+Dampier immediately recognized as near the place where he had attacked
+the lesser Manilla ship in the St George. Our men began again to fall
+sick, and two of them dropped down on the deck in a kind of scorbutic
+appoplexy, but recovered on being let blood. The 2d we made _Cape
+Corientes_, on the coast of Mexico, in lat. 20° 25' N. which we knew by
+our charts. Captain Dampier had been here, but it was a long time ago,
+and he did not seem to remember much of the matter; yet when he came to
+land at different places, he very readily recollected them. Our purpose
+now was to look for the islands called _Tres Marias_, to procure some
+refreshments, but found this somewhat difficult, being very uncertain as
+to their true situation. In the afternoon of the 4th, Cape Corientes
+bore E.N.E. about ten leagues, and next morning, being fine clear
+weather, we discovered two islands at the distance of about fourteen
+leagues, one bearing N. by W. and the other N. by E. At noon we had an
+observation, and found our latitude 20° 45' N.
+
+The sight of these islands was very satisfactory, for though our men had
+their fill of land and sea-turtle, which kept them from the scurvy, they
+were but weak, as that is but a faint food, except they had enough of
+bread or flour to eat with it; whereas they only had a pound and a
+quarter of bread or flour to five men per day, on purpose to husband our
+stock till we came to live entirely on salt-meat, when we should be
+under the necessity to allow more. On the 6th I sent a pinnace to the
+eastern island, to look if there were any good road, or convenience for
+wooding and watering; but the officer reported that the island had foul
+ground for near half a mile from the shore, with bad anchorage and worse
+landing; and though there was abundance of wood, no water was to be had.
+This was bad news for us, as our water began to grow scarce. We now bore
+up for the middle island, which Captain Dampier believed he had been at
+when he sailed with Captain Swan, and on which occasion they found
+water. On the 8th our boat returned from the middle island, they and the
+boat of the Duchess having landed at several places on the S.E. side of
+the island, where was plenty of good water. They saw no signs of any
+people having been there lately, but found a human skull on the ground.
+This was supposed to have belonged to one of two Indian chiefs, who were
+left there by Captain Swan, about twenty-three years before, as Dampier
+told us: for victuals being scarce with these buccaneers, they would not
+carry the poor Indians any farther, after they had served their turns,
+but left them to starve on this desolate island. The Marquis and bark
+having separated from us, we kept a light up all night, and made a fire
+on the island, that they might see where to find us at anchor; but not
+seeing them next morning at day-break, I proposed to have gone in search
+of them; but Captain Courtney and the rest made light of the matter,
+believing they might soon come in without assistance, which they
+afterwards did.
+
+The supply of cattle, hogs, and plantains we procured at Atacames lasted
+us to the Gallapagos, and we had fed on turtle ever since till the last
+two days, which was a great refreshment to our men, and husbanded our
+stock of European provisions. On the 9th, I sent an officer to view the
+other side of the island, who told me, on his return, it was much better
+than where we were, having several sandy bays, on which he had seen the
+tracks of turtle. On this intelligence I sent the boat back in the
+evening; and it came back next morning with a full load of turtle,
+leaving another load ready turned; and, what was of much more
+consequence, they found good water; whereas that we had gotten hitherto
+purged the men excessively. As we wooded, watered, and furnished
+ourselves with fresh provisions here, and as these islands are little
+known, some account of them may be acceptable.
+
+The _Tres Marias_, or Three Marias, off the western coast of
+Guadalaxara, in the kingdom of Mexico, are in a range stretching from
+S.E. to N.W. of about forty-five English miles in length. The largest
+island is the N.W. which appeared a high double land, and above five
+leagues in length: the middle island about three leagues; and the
+south-eastermost hardly two leagues. There also are high lands, full of
+trees; and near the least island there are two or three small broken
+white islets, one of which was so like a ship under sail, that we gave
+the signal for a chase. The S.E. end of the island is in lat. 21° 10' N.
+long. 105° 56' W. and the N.W. point of the N. island is in lat. 21° 40'
+N. long. 106° 26' W. the distance from each being about two marine
+leagues. These islands have abundance of parrots of different sorts,
+with pigeons and other land-birds, of which we killed great numbers.
+There were also many excellent hares, but much smaller than ours. We saw
+likewise abundance of guanas, and some racoons, which barked and snarled
+at us like dogs, but were easily beaten off with sticks. The water is
+more worthy of remark than any other thing we saw here, as we only found
+two good springs, which ran in large streams; the others being bitter
+and disagreeable, proceeding, as I suppose, from being impregnated by
+shrubs or roots growing in the water, or from some mineral.
+
+The turtle we found here are of a different sort from any I had ever
+seen, though very good. Though it is ordinarily believed that there are
+only three sorts of sea-turtles, yet we have seen six or seven sorts at
+different times, and our people have eaten of them all, except the very
+large _whooping_ or _loggerhead_ kind, which are found in great plenty
+in Brazil, some of them above 500 pounds weight. We did not eat of
+these, because at that time our provisions were plentiful. At the
+Gallapagos, both males and females were observed to come on shore only
+in the day time, quite different from what I had heard of them at other
+places; whereas all we caught here were by turning them over in the
+night, when the females come on shore to lay their eggs and bury them in
+the dry sand. One of these whom we caught had 800 eggs in her belly, 150
+of which were skinned over and ready for being extruded at once. Some
+authors alledge that these eggs are six weeks in hatching, which I can
+hardly credit, as the sun makes the sand in which they are deposited
+excessively hot, and they are only covered by a very thin film or skin,
+instead of a shell. In order to ascertain this point, I made some of our
+men ashore watch one carefully, and mark the place and time of laying
+her eggs. In less than twelve hours they found the eggs addled, and in
+about twelve hours more they had young ones completely formed and alive.
+Had we remained some time longer, I might have thoroughly satisfied
+myself and others, respecting the quick production of tortoises; for I
+am apt to credit the report of several of our men, who asserted that
+having found eggs in the sand, and looked for them three days afterwards
+in the same place, they then found nothing but films; which shews that
+the young ones are hatched in that time. They assured me also that they
+had seen the young brood run out of the sand every day, making directly
+in great numbers for the sea.
+
+There were few fish about the shores of this island, these being of the
+ordinary sorts usually met with in these seas; but the abundance of
+turtle at this time amply made up for this defect. The chief officers
+fed here deliciously, being scarcely ever without hares, turtle-doves,
+pigeons, and parrots of various colours and sizes, many of which had
+white or red heads, with tufts of feathers on their crowns. We found
+good anchorage at this middle island, and gradual soundings from
+twenty-four to four fathoms close by the shore; and between this and the
+least or southern island the depth was about the same as where we were,
+having no shoal between but what was visible, as a rock lay off the S.W.
+point and a shoal off the N.E. point of the same, with another at a
+great distance from that point of the least island, but neither were
+above half a mile from the shore.
+
+Sailing from these islands, we saw land on the 1st November, which
+proved to be the point of California, or that headland called Cape St
+Ducas. It was now necessary to put in execution the rules we had
+formerly laid down for cruizing, as also to settle our regulations about
+plunder. Accordingly, my station was to be the outermost in the Duke,
+the Duchess in the middle, and the Marquis nearest the shore; the
+nearest ship to be at the least six leagues, and nine at the most from
+shore, and the bark to ply between ship and ship, carrying advice. By
+this means we could spread out fifteen leagues, and might see any thing
+that passed in the day within twenty leagues of the shore; and to
+prevent any ships passing in the night, we were to ply to windward all
+day, and to drive to leeward all night. On the 5th November, the Duchess
+went nearest shore, and the Marquis took the middle station. We were
+much encouraged by considering that in this very place, and about the
+same time of the year, Sir Thomas Candish took the Manilla ship.
+
+On the 16th we sent our bark to look for fresh water on the main, and
+next morning she returned to us, reporting that they had seen wild
+Indians, who paddled to them on bark-logs. These Indians were fearful of
+coming near our people at first, but were soon prevailed upon to accept
+a knife or two and some baize, for which they gave in return two
+bladders of water, two live foxes, and a deer skin. Till now, we thought
+that the Spaniards had missionaries among these people, but finding them
+quite naked, with no appearance of any European commodities, nor a
+single word of the Spanish language, we concluded that they were quite
+savage, and we dispatched the bark and a boat a second time, in hopes of
+procuring some refreshments, with some trifles to distribute among the
+natives. On the 19th our men returned, having become very familiar with
+the Californians, who were the poorest wretches that could be imagined,
+and had no manner of refreshments whatever to afford us. They brought
+off some Indian knives made of sharks teeth, and a few other
+curiosities, which I preserved to shew what shifts may be made. It was
+now the 9th of December, near a month after the time when the Manilla
+ships generally fall in with this coast, and we were much embarrassed by
+the impossibility of procuring any intelligence respecting them. On
+examining our provisions, we found only bread on board for seventy days,
+even at our present short allowance, and it would require not less than
+fifty days for our run across the Pacific to Guam, one of the Ladrones;
+wherefore we resolved to continue our cruize here no longer than other
+eight days. Being in want of water also, it was agreed upon that the
+Marquis should go first into a harbour for that necessary article, while
+the Duke and Duchess continued on the look-out, and then these other
+ships to do the same in succession.
+
+On the 21st December, while bearing up for the port in which was the
+Marquis, the man at the mast-head, about nine in the morning, gave
+notice that he saw a sail besides the Duchess and bark, seeming about
+seven leagues from us. We immediately hoisted our ensign, and bore for
+the strange sail, as did the Duchess; and as it fell calm, I sent the
+pinnace to endeavour to make out what she was. All the rest of the day
+we had very little wind, so that we made hardly any way, and as our boat
+did not return we remained in much anxiety, not knowing whether the ship
+in sight were our consort the Marquis, or the Manilla ship. In this
+uncertainty, I sent Mr Fry in our yawl to the Duchess, to endeavour to
+learn what this ship was, and as soon as the yawl was gone I hoisted
+French colours and fired a gun, which the stranger answered, and in some
+measure cleared our doubts. Mr Fry soon returned, bringing the joyful
+news that the ship in sight really was the Manilla galleon for which we
+had waited so long, and of which we were now almost in despair of
+meeting. This revived our courage, and every one actively prepared for
+the engagement; all our melancholy reflections on the shortness of our
+provisions for the run to Guam being now dispelled, and nothing now
+occupied our thoughts but of our being masters of the mighty treasure
+supposed to be on board this ship, while every moment seemed an hour
+till we could get up with her. We gave orders for the two pinnaces to
+keep with her all night, shewing false fires from time to time, that we
+might know whereabout they and the chase were; and it was agreed, if
+the Duke and Duchess could get up with her together, that we should
+board her at once. Before night we had made a clear ship, and had every
+thing in readiness for action at day-light; and all night long we kept a
+sharp look-out for the boats false fires, which we frequently saw and
+answered.
+
+At day-break of the 22d December, 1709, we saw the chase about a league
+from us on our weather bow, the Duchess being a-head of her to leeward
+about half a league. About six a.m. our boat came aboard, having kept
+very near the chase all night without receiving any damage, and told us
+that the Duchess passed the chase in the night, at which time the chase
+fired two shots at her, which were not returned. Having no wind, we got
+out eight sweeps, with which we rowed for near an hour, when there
+sprung up a small breeze. I ordered a large kettle of chocolate to be
+prepared for the ship's company, having no spirituous liquor to give
+them, and then went to prayers; but were disturbed before these were
+finished, by the enemy firing at us. To deter as from attempting to
+board, they had barrels hung at their yard arms, which resembled barrels
+of powder. About eight a.m. we began to engage by ourselves, for the
+Duchess being still at leeward, had not been able to get up, as there
+was very little wind. At first the enemy fired at us with their
+stern-chase guns, which we returned with those on our bows, till at
+length we got close on board each other, when we gave her several
+broadsides, plying our small arms very briskly; which last the enemy
+returned as thick for a time, but did not fire their great guns half so
+fast as we. After some time, we shot a little a-head, laying the enemy
+athwart hawse close aboard, and plied her so warmly that she soon
+lowered her colours two-thirds down. By this time the Duchess had got
+up, and fired about five guns with a volley of small arms; but as the
+enemy had submitted she made no return.
+
+We now sent our pinnace on board the prize, and brought away the captain
+and other officers; from whom we learnt that a larger ship had come from
+Manilla along with them, having forty-six brass guns and as many
+swivels, but they had parted company with her about three months before,
+and supposed she had got to Acapulco by this time, as she sailed better
+than this ship. Our prize had the following high-sounding name _Nostra
+Senoria de la Incarnacion Disenganio_, commanded by the Chevalier Jean
+Pichberty, a Frenchman. She had twenty guns and twenty pattereroes, with
+193 men, of whom nine were killed, ten wounded, and several sore
+scorched with gun-powder. We engaged her three glasses, in which time
+only I and another were wounded. I was shot through the left cheek, the
+bullet carrying away great part of my upper jaw and several of my teeth,
+part of which dropt on the deck, where I fell. The other was William
+Powell, an Irish landman, who was slightly wounded in the buttock. After
+my wound, I was forced to write my orders, both to prevent the loss of
+blood, and because speaking gave me great pain. We received little
+damage in our rigging during the engagement, except that a shot disabled
+our mizen-mast. On the 23d, after we had put our ship to rights, we
+stood in for the harbour where the Marquis was, distant about four
+leagues to the N.E. sending our surgeons on board the prize to dress her
+wounded men. We same to anchor in the harbour about four p.m. where we
+received the compliments of all on board the Marquis on our sudden and
+almost unlooked-for success, which gave us all much satisfaction. We
+found that ship in good condition and ready to sail, and all on board
+her in high spirits, eager for action. At eight the same evening we held
+a consultation on two important points: _first_, what we should do with
+our hostages; and, _secondly_, how we should act in regard to the other
+Manilla ship, which we still thought there was a strong probability of
+our taking, if we could remain here a little longer. As the hostages
+from Guayaquil, and the Chevalier Pichberty, brother to the famous
+Monsieur du Cass, appeared to be men of strict honour, we thought it was
+best to make the best terms we possibly could with them, and then set
+them at liberty. We had more difficulty in settling the other point in
+discussion, as to the mode of attacking the other Manilla ship. I was
+desirous of going out along with the Marquis on that service; but as
+some reflections had been cast on the Duchess for not engaging our late
+prize so soon as it was thought she might have done, Captain Courtney
+was absolutely bent on going out with his own ship and the Marquis, and
+having a majority in the committee, my proposal was overruled, and we in
+the Duke were reluctantly constrained to remain in harbour. It was
+agreed, however, that we should put ten of our best hands on board the
+Duchess, the better to enable her to engage the great Manilla ship, if
+she were fallen in with; and she and the Marquis sailed on
+Christmas-day. As soon as they were gone, we put part of the goods from
+our bark into the prize, in order to send away our prisoners in the
+bark; and as there were still due 4000 dollars of the Guayaquil ransom,
+we agreed to sell them the bark and her remaining cargo for 2000
+dollars, taking the Chevalier de Pichberty's bill for 6000 dollars,
+payable in London, which he readily gave us, together with an
+acknowledgment under his hand that we had given him a good bargain. This
+matter being settled, we had only to look to our own safety while our
+consorts were out on their cruize for the Manilla ship. We posted two
+centinels on a hill, whence they had a clear view of the sea, with
+instructions to give us notice by a signal whenever they saw three ships
+in the offing, that we might have time to secure our prisoners, and to
+get out to the assistance of our consorts, as we expected they might
+have hot work, this other Manilla ship being much stronger and better
+manned than the one we had taken, and better provided in all respects.
+
+On the afternoon of the 26th, our sentries made the appointed signal of
+seeing three ships; on which we immediately put all our prisoners into
+the bark, from which we removed her sails, and took away all our men,
+except two lieutenants and twenty-two men, whom we left to look after
+our prize and the prisoners. As the prisoners, though 170 in number,
+were secured in the bark, without sails, arms, rudder, or boat, and
+moored near a mile distant from our prize, there were more than
+sufficient for guarding them and giving them provisions and drink during
+our absence. This being arranged, we immediately weighed and stood to
+sea, in order to assist our consorts in attacking the great ship.
+Captain Dover thought proper to go on board the prize, instead of one of
+our lieutenants, whom he sent to me. I was still in a very weak
+condition, my head and throat being very much swelled, so that I spoke
+with great pain, and not loud enough to be heard at any distance;
+insomuch that all the chief officers and our surgeons wished me to
+remain in the prize, but I would not consent. We got under sail about
+seven p.m. and saw lights several times in the night, which we supposed
+to be false fires in the boats of our consorts. In the morning of the
+27th at day-break, we saw three sail to windward, but so far distant
+that it was nine o'clock before we could make out which were our
+consorts and which the chase. At this time we could see the Duchess and
+the chase near together, and the Marquis standing to them with all the
+sail she could carry. We also made all the sail we could, but being
+three or four leagues to leeward, and having a very scant wind, we made
+little way. At noon they bore S.E. from us, being still three leagues
+right to windward. In the afternoon we observed the Marquis get up with
+the chase, and engage her pretty briskly; but soon fell to leeward out
+of cannon shot, where she lay a considerable time, which made us
+conclude that she was somehow disabled.
+
+I sent away my pinnace well manned, with orders to dog the chase all
+night, making signals with false fires that she might not escape us; but
+before our boat could get up to them, the Marquis made sail again
+towards the chase, and went to it again briskly for more than four
+glasses. At this time we saw the Duchess steer ahead to windward, clear
+of the enemy, as I supposed to stop her leaks or repair her rigging.
+Meanwhile the Marquis kept the enemy in play, till the Duchess again
+bore down, when each fired a broadside or two, and left off because it
+grew dark. They then bore south of us in the Duke, which was right to
+windward, distant about two leagues; and about midnight our boat came to
+us, having made false fires, which we answered. Our people had been on
+board both the Duchess and Marquis, the former of which had her foremast
+much disabled, the ring of an anchor shot away, one man killed and
+several wounded, having also received several shots in her upper works
+and one in her powder-room, but all stopt. The Duchess had engaged the
+enemy by herself the night before, which was what we took to be false
+fires, being too distant to hear the guns. At that time they could
+perceive the enemy to be in great disorder, her guns not being all
+mounted, and neither her nettings nor close quarters in order; so that,
+if it had been my good fortune in the Duke to have gone with the
+Duchess, we all believed we might then have carried this great ship by
+boarding; or, if the Duchess had taken most of the men out of the
+Marquis, which did not sail well enough to come up to her assistance in
+time, she alone might have taken her by boarding at once, before the
+Spaniards had experienced our strength, and become afterwards so well
+provided as encouraged them to be driving, giving us every opportunity
+to board them if we pleased.
+
+Captain Cooke sent me word that he had nearly fired away all his powder
+and shot, but had escaped well in masts, rigging, and men; wherefore I
+sent him three barrels of powder and a proportion of shot; and I also
+sent Lieutenant Fry to consult with our consorts how we might best
+engage the enemy next morning. All this day and the ensuing night the
+chase made signals to us in the Duke, thinking us her consort, which we
+had already taken; and after dark she edged down towards us, otherwise I
+should not have been up with her next day, having very little wind and
+that against us. In the morning of the 28th, as soon as it was day, the
+wind veered at once, on which we put our ship about, and the chase fired
+first upon the Duchess, which was nearest her in consequence of the
+change of wind. The Duchess returned the fire briskly; and we in the
+Duke stood as near as we possibly could, firing our guns as we could
+bring them to bear upon the enemy. At this time the Duchess was athwart
+her hawse, firing very fast, and such of her shot as missed the enemy
+flew over us and between our masts, so that we ran the risk of receiving
+more harm from the Duchess than the enemy, if we had lain on her quarter
+and across her stern, which was my intention. We therefore took our
+station close along side, board and board, where we kept plying her with
+round shot only, using neither barshot nor grape, as her sides were too
+thick for these, and no men appeared in sight.
+
+She lay driving, as we did also close aboard of her, the enemy keeping
+to their close quarters, so that we never fired our small arms unless
+when we saw a man appear, or a port open, and then we fired as quick as
+possible. We continued thus for four glasses, about which time we
+received a shot in our main-mast which much disabled it. Soon after
+this, the Duchess and we, still both firing, came back close under the
+enemy, and had like to have fallen on board of her, so that we could
+make little use of our guns. We then fell astern in our birth alongside,
+and at this time the enemy threw a fire-ball into the Duke from one of
+her tops, which blew up a chest of loaded arms and cartouch-boxes on our
+quarter-deck, and several cartridges in our steerage, by which Mr
+Vanburgh, the agent of our owners, and a Dutchman, were very much burnt;
+and it might have done us much more damage if it had not been soon
+extinguished. After getting clear, the Duchess stood in for the shore,
+where she lay braced to, mending her rigging. The Marquis fired several
+shots, but to little purpose, as her guns were small. We continued close
+aboard for some time after the Duchess drew off; till at last we
+received a second shot in our main-mast, not far from the other, which
+rent it miserably; insomuch that the mast settled towards the wound, and
+threatened to come by the board. Our rigging also being much shattered,
+we sheered off and brought to, making a signal to our consorts for a
+consultation; and in the interim got ordinary fishes up to support our
+main-mast as well as we could.
+
+Captains Courtney and Cooke, with other officers, came aboard the Duke,
+in obedience to the signal, when we took the condition of our three
+ships into consideration. Their masts and rigging were much damaged, and
+we had no means of procuring any repairs. If we again engaged the enemy,
+we could not propose to do any more than we had done already, which
+evidently had not done her much harm, as we could perceive that few of
+our shots penetrated her sides to any purpose, and our small arms
+availed still less, as not one of their men were to be seen above board.
+Our main-mast was so badly wounded that the least additional injury
+would bring it down, and the fore-mast of the Duchess was in as bad a
+state. The fall of these masts might bring down others, and we should
+then lie perfect butts for the enemy to batter at, and his heavy guns
+might easily sink us. If we should attempt to carry her by boarding, we
+must necessarily run the risk of losing many of our men, with little
+prospect of success, as they had above treble our number to oppose us,
+not having now in all our three ships above 120 men fit for boarding,
+and these weak, as we had been long short of provisions. If, therefore,
+we attempted to board and were beaten off, leaving any of our men
+behind, the enemy would learn our strength, or weakness rather, and
+might go to the harbour and retake our prize, in spite of every thing we
+could do to hinder. Our ammunition also was now very short, and we had
+only, enough to engage for a few glasses longer. All these circumstances
+being duly considered, together with the difficulty of procuring masts,
+and the time and provisions we must spend before we could get them
+fitted we resolved to desist from any farther attempt upon the enemy,
+since our battering her signified little, and we had not sufficient
+strength to carry her by boarding. We determined therefore to keep her
+company till night, and then to lose her, after which to make the best
+of our way to the harbour where we had left our prize, to secure her.
+
+We had engaged this ship first and last about seven glasses, during
+which we in the Duke had eleven men wounded, three of whom were scorched
+with gun-powder. I was again unfortunately wounded by a splinter in my
+left foot, just before the arms chest was blown up on the quarter-deck;
+and so severely that I had to lie on my back in great pain, being unable
+to stand. Part of my heel-bone was struck out, and all the foot just
+under the ankle cut above half through, my wound bleeding very much
+before it could be stopped and dressed, by which I was much weakened. In
+the Duchess above twenty men were killed and wounded, one of the slain
+and three of the wounded belonging to my ship, which had been lent when
+I was left in the harbour. The Marquis had none killed or wounded, but
+two of her men were scorched by gun-powder. The enemy was the
+_Vigoniae_, a brave and lofty new ship, admiral of Manilla, and this her
+first voyage. She was calculated to carry 60 guns, and had above 40
+mounted, with as many pattereroes, all brass, and, as we were informed,
+had a complement of 450 men, of whom 150 were Europeans, besides
+passengers. We were told also that several of her crew had formerly been
+pirates, who had all their wealth on board, and were resolved to defend
+it to the last extremity. The gunner was said to be a very expert man,
+and had provided extraordinarily for defence, which enabled them to make
+a desperate resistance; and they had filled all her sides between the
+guns with bales of soft goods, to secure the men.
+
+During the whole action she kept the Spanish flag flying at her
+mast-head. We could observe that we had shattered her sails and rigging
+very much, and had slain two men in her tops, besides bringing down her
+mizen-yard; but this was all the visible damage we had done them, though
+we certainly placed 500 round shot in her hull, which were six-pounders.
+These large ships are built at Manilla of excellent timber, which does
+not splinter, and their sides are much thicker and stronger than those
+of the ships built in Europe. Thus ended our attempt on the biggest
+Manilla ship, which I have heard related in so many ways at home, that I
+have thought it necessary to give a very particular account of the
+action, as I find it set down in my journal. Generally speaking, the
+ships from Manilla are much richer than the prize we had taken; for she
+had waited a long time for the Chinese junks to bring silks, which not
+arriving, she came away with her cargo made out by means of abundance of
+coarse goods. Several of the prisoners assured me that a Manilla ship
+was commonly worth ten millions of dollars; so that, if it had not been
+for the accidental non-arrival of the junks from China that season, we
+had gotten an extraordinarily rich prize. After my return to Europe, I
+met a sailor in Holland who had been in the large ship when we engaged
+her, and who communicated to me a reason why we could not have taken her
+at all events. Her gunner kept constantly in the powder-room, and
+declared that he had taken the sacrament to blow up the ship if we had
+boarded her, which accordingly made the men exceedingly resolute in her
+defence. I the more readily gave credit to what this man told me, as he
+gave a regular and circumstantial account of the engagement, conformable
+to what I have given from my journal.
+
+It is hardly to be doubted that we might have set this great ship on
+fire, by converting one of our ships into a fireship for that purpose:
+But this was objected to by all our officers, because we had goods of
+value on board all our ships. The enemy on this occasion was the better
+provided for us, having heard at Manilla, through our British
+settlements in India, that two small ships had been fitted out at
+Bristol for an expedition into the South Sea, and of which Captain
+Dampier was pilot. On this account it was that they had so many
+Europeans on board the great ship, most of whom had all their wealth
+along with them, for which they would fight to the utmost; and it having
+been agreed to pay no freight on the gun-decks, they had filled up all
+the spaces between the guns with bales of goods, to secure the men. The
+two ships were to have joined at Cape Lucas, expecting to meet us off
+Cape Corientes or Navidad.
+
+We returned again into our port on the coast of California on the 1st
+January, 1710, and being resolved to make as quick dispatch as possible
+for our passage to the East Indies, we immediately parted with our
+prisoners, giving them the bark with a sufficiency of water and
+provisions to carry them to Acapulco. We then occupied ourselves to the
+7th in refitting and laying in a stock of wood and water; and had much
+satisfaction in finding as much bread in our prize as might serve for
+our long run to Guam, with the aid of the scanty remains of our old
+stock. After a long disputatious negotiation, it was settled that Mr Fry
+and Mr Stratton were to take charge of our prize, which we named the
+Bachelor, though under Captain Dover, but they were not to be
+contradicted by him in the business, as his business was to see that
+nothing was done in her contrary to the interest of our owners and ships
+companies, he being in the nature of agent, only with the title of chief
+captain. At the same time, we put on board of this ship 35 men from the
+Duke, 25 from the Duchess, and 13 from the Marquis, making in all 73
+men, which, with 36 Manilla Indians, called _Las-Cars_, and some other
+prisoners we still had remaining, made up her complement to 115 men.
+
+SECTION III
+
+_Sequel of the Voyage, from California, by Way of the East Indies, to
+England_.
+
+
+WE weighed anchor on the 10th January, 1710, from Porta Leguro, on the
+coast of California, but were becalmed under the shore till the
+afternoon of the 12th, when a breeze sprang up which soon carried us out
+of sight of land. Being very slenderly provided, we were forced to allow
+only a pound and a half of flour, and one small piece of beef, to five
+men in a mess, together with three pints of water a man, for twenty-four
+hours, to serve both as drink and for dressing their victuals. We also
+lowered ten of our guns into the hold, to ease our ship. On the 16th the
+Bachelor made a signal that she could spare us some additional bread,
+having discovered a considerable store of bread and sweet-meats, though
+very little flesh meat. Accordingly, we in the Duke had a thousand
+weight of bread for our share, the Duchess had as much, and the Marquis
+five hundred weight; and in return we sent them two casks of flour, one
+of English beef; and one of pork, as they had only left forty-five days
+provisions of flesh. We now agreed to proceed in a W.S.W. course till we
+reached the latitude of 13° N. and to keep in that parallel till we
+should make the island of Guam, being informed by our Spanish pilot that
+the parallel of 14° was dangerous, by reason of certain islands and
+shoals, on which a Spanish ship had been lost some time ago.
+
+On the 11th March we had sight both of _Guam_ and _Serpana,_ the former
+bearing W.S.W. five leagues off, and the latter N.N.W. seven leagues.
+The Spaniards say there is a great shoal between these islands, but
+nearest to Serpana. While running along the shore of Guam there came
+several flying proas to look at us, but run past with great swiftness,
+and none of the people would venture on board. The necessity of our
+stopping at this island for a supply of provisions was very great, our
+sea store being almost exhausted, and what remained being in a very
+ordinary condition, especially our bread and flour, of which we had not
+enough for fourteen days, even at the shortest allowance. In order to
+procure provisions readily, we endeavoured to get some of the natives on
+board from the proas, that we might detain them as hostages, in case of
+having to send any of our men to the governor. While turning into the
+harbour under Spanish colours, one of the proas came under our stern, in
+which were two Spaniards, who came on board in consequence of being
+assured that we were friends. Soon after we sent a respectful letter to
+the governor, to which we next day received a civil answer, and a
+generous offer of any thing we needed that the island could supply.
+Several of our officers went ashore to wait upon the governor on the
+16th, and were well received and elegantly entertained; making the
+governor a present of two negro boys dressed in rich liveries, twenty
+yards of scarlet cloth, and six pieces of cambric, with which he seemed
+to be much pleased, and promised in return to give us every assistance
+in his power.
+
+Next day, accordingly, we had a large supply of provisions, our share in
+the Duke being about sixty hogs, ninety-nine fowls, twenty-four baskets
+of maize, fourteen bags of rice, forty-two baskets of yams, and 800
+cocoa-nuts. We afterwards got some bullocks, fourteen to each ship,
+being small lean cattle, yet gladly accepted, to which were afterwards
+added two cows and two calves to each ship; and we made a handsome
+present to the deputy governor, who was very active in getting our
+provisions collected. Leaving Guam, we proposed to go for some way
+directly west, to clear some islands that were in the way, and then to
+steer for the S.E. part of Min-danao, and from thence the nearest way to
+Ternate. In the afternoon of the 14th April we made land, which bore
+from us W.N.W. ten leagues, and which we supposed to be the N.E. part of
+Celebes. This day we saw three water-spouts, one of which had like to
+have fallen on board the Marquis, but the Duchess broke it before it
+reached her by firing two guns. On the 18th May, we passed through
+between the high land of New Guinea and the island of Gilolo, and on the
+20th we made another high island which we took to be Ceram, yet,
+notwithstanding the skill and experience of Captain Dampier, we were at
+a loss to know whether it were Ceram or Bouro. On the 24th, at noon, we
+made our latitude 4° 30' S. and estimated our longitude at 237° 29' W.
+from London, and being in the latitude of the southern part of
+Bouro,[229] we imputed our not seeing it to the currents setting us to
+the westwards. We designed to have touched at Amboina for refreshments,
+but the S.E. monsoon was already set in, and we were out of hope of
+being able to reach that place. In a consultation on the 25th, we
+resolved not to spend time in searching for Bouro, and also to desist
+from attempting to go to Amboina, and to make the best of our way for
+the Straits of Bouton, where we hoped to get sufficient provisions to
+carry us to Batavia. We got into a fine large bay in Bouton, where we
+sent our pinnace on shore, which brought off some cocoa nuts, reporting
+there were plenty to be had, and that the Malay inhabitants seemed
+friendly.
+
+[Footnote 229: The south part of Bouro is only in lat. 3° 50' S. and
+about 283° W. from Greenwich, or London.--E.]
+
+Up this bay we saw several houses and boats, and many of the Malay
+natives walking about on the beach. We here sent our boats for
+provisions and pilots while the ships turned up the bay nearer to the
+town. On sounding frequently we could find no ground, but the natives
+told us of a bank opposite the town on which we might anchor. In the
+meantime abundance of people came off to us, bringing wheat, cocoa-nuts,
+yams, potatoes, papaws, hens, and several other kinds of birds, to truck
+for cloths, knives, scissars, and toys. These people were to appearance
+very civil, being Mahometans of middle stature and dark tawny
+complexions, but their women somewhat clearer than the men. The men that
+came off were all naked, except a cloth round their middles, but some of
+the better sort had a sort of loose waistcoat, and a piece of linen
+rolled round their heads, with a cap of palm leaves to keep off the
+scorching rays of the sun. Along the shore we saw several weirs for
+catching fish. In turning up, the prize lost ground considerably, as the
+current was strong against us, wherefore the Duchess fired a gun in the
+evening to recall us and the Marquis, and which we ran out and drove all
+night. The names of these two islands forming this bay are _Cambava_ and
+_Waushut_, being in lat. 5° 13' S. and long 238° W. from London.[230]
+Being much in want of water and provisions, we made another effort to
+get back to this bay; and on the 30th, a proa came to us from the king
+of Bouton, having a noble on board without either shoes or stockings,
+and a pilot to carry us up to the town. He brought each commander a
+piece of striped Bouton cloth, a bottle of arrack, some baskets of rice,
+and other articles, as presents from the king; yet the first thing he
+said on coming aboard, was to ask us how we durst venture to come here
+to anchor, without first having leave from the great king of Bouton?
+
+[Footnote 230: Cambaya, a considerable island to the W. of Bouton, is in
+lat. 5° 20' S. and long. 237° 40' W. from Greenwich, nearly in the
+situation pointed out in the text.--E.]
+
+This proa brought us letters from our officers that had been sent to
+wait upon the king, and to endeavour to procure provisions, which stated
+that they had been well received, and that the town in which the king
+resided was large and fortified, and had several great guns. We sent
+back a present to the king by his messenger, and five guns were fired by
+each of our ships at his departure, with which he seemed well pleased.
+We wooded and watered at the island of _Sampo,_ and several proas came
+off to us with fowls, maize, pompions, papaws, lemons, Guinea corn, and
+other articles, which they trucked for knives, scissars, old clothes,
+and the like. The people were civil, but sold every thing very dear; and
+as our officers staid longer at the town than was intended, we began to
+suspect they were detained, as the Mahometans are very treacherous. We
+heard from them, however, every day; and on the 5th Mr Connely came
+down, and told us there were four lasts of rice coming down from the
+king, for which it had been agreed to pay 600 dollars, and that Mr
+Vanburgh had been detained in security of payment. The rice came next
+morning, and was distributed equally among our four ships, some great
+men coming along with it to receive the money. At this time also we in
+our turn detained a Portuguese who came from the king, till our boat
+should be allowed to return; and after this, provisions became more
+plentiful and cheaper.
+
+The town of _Bouton_ is built on the acclivity of a hill, and on the top
+of the hill is a fort surrounded by an old stone wall, on which some
+guns and pattereroes are placed. The king and a considerable number of
+people dwell in this fort, in which a market is held every day for the
+sale of provisions. The king has five wives, besides several concubines,
+being attended by four men carrying great canes with silver heads, who
+are called _pury bassas,_ and who seem to manage all his affairs. His
+majesty goes always bare-footed and bare-legged, being for the most part
+clad like a Dutch skipper, with a sort of green gauze covering strewed
+with spangles over his long black hair; but when he appears in state, he
+wears a long calico gown over his jacket, and sits on a chair covered
+with red cloth. He is always attended by a sergeant and six men armed
+with match-locks; besides three others, one of whom wears a head-piece
+and carries a large drawn scymitar, another has a shield, and a third a
+large fan. Four slaves sit at his feet, one holding his betel box,
+another a lighted match, the third his box of tobacco for smoking, and
+the fourth a spitting bason. The petty kings and other great men sit on
+his left hand and before him, every one attended by a slave, and they
+chew betel or tobacco in his presence, sitting cross-legged, and when
+they speak to him they lift their hands joined to their foreheads.
+
+The town of Bouton is very populous, and beside it runs a fine river,
+said to come from ten miles up the country. The tide ebbs and flows a
+considerable way up this river, which has a bar at its mouth, so that
+boats cannot go in or come out at low water. At least 1500 boats belong
+to this river, fifty of which are war proas, armed with pattereroes, and
+carrying forty or fifty men each. Fifty islands are said to be tributary
+to this king, who sends his proas once a year to gather their stated
+tribute, which consists in slaves, every island giving him ten
+inhabitants out of every hundred. There is one mosque, in Boutan, which
+is supplied with priests from Mocha, the people being Mahometans. They
+are great admirers of music, their houses are built on posts, and their
+current money is Dutch coins and Spanish dollars. On the 7th our pinnace
+returned with Mr Vanburgh and all our people, having parted from his
+majesty on friendly terms, but could not procure a pilot. We resolved,
+however, not to stay any longer, but to trust to Providence for our
+future preservation: wherefore we began to unmoor our ships, and
+dismissed our Portuguese linguist.
+
+Next day, the 8th June, we made three islands to the north of
+_Salayer._ On the 10th our pinnace came up with a small vessel, the
+people on board of which said they were bound for the Dutch factory of
+Macasser on the S.W. coast of Celebes. The pinnace brought away the
+master of this vessel, who engaged to pilot us through the Straits of
+Salayer and all the way to Batavia, if we would keep it secret from the
+Dutch, and he sent his vessel to lie in the narrowest part of the
+passage between the islands, till such time as our ships came up. On the
+14th we passed the island of Madura, and on the 17th we made the high
+land of Cheribon, which bore S.W. from us. This morning we saw a great
+ship right ahead, to which I sent our pinnace for news. She was a ship
+of Batavia of 600 tons and fifty guns, plying to some of the Dutch
+factories for timber. Her people told us that we were still thirty Dutch
+leagues from Batavia, but there was no danger by the way, and they even
+supplied us with a large chart, which proved of great use to us. Towards
+noon we made the land, which was very low, but had regular soundings, by
+which we knew how to sail in the night by means of the lead; in the
+afternoon we saw the ships in the road of Batavia, being between thirty
+and forty sail great and small; and at six in the evening we came to
+anchor, in between six and seven fathoms, in the long-desired port of
+Batavia, in lat 6° 10' S. and long. 252° 51' W. from London.[231] We had
+here to alter our account of time, having lost almost a day in going
+round the world so far in a western course.
+
+[Footnote 231: The latitude in the text is sufficiently accurate, but
+the longitude is about a degree short. It ought to have been 253° 54' W.
+from Greenwich--E.]
+
+After coming in sight of Batavia, and more especially after some sloops
+or small vessels had been aboard of us, I found that I was quite a
+stranger to the dispositions and humours of our people, though I had
+sailed so long with them. A few days before they were perpetually
+quarrelling, and a disputed lump of sugar was quite sufficient to have
+occasioned a dispute. But now, there was-nothing but hugging and shaking
+of hands, blessing their good stars, and questioning if such a paradise
+existed on earth; and all because they had arrack for eight-pence a
+gallon, and sugar for a penny a pound. Yet next minute they were all by
+the ears, disputing about who should put the ingredients together; for
+the weather was so hot, and the ingredients so excessively cheap, that
+a little labour was now a matter of great importance among them.
+
+Soon after our arrival at Batavia we proceeded to refit our ships,
+beginning with the Marquis; but on coming down to her bends, we found
+both these and the stern and stern-port so rotten and worm-eaten, that
+on a survey of carpenters she was found incapable of being rendered fit
+for proceeding round the Cape of Good Hope, on which we had to hire a
+vessel to take in her loading. We then applied ourselves to refit the
+other ships, which we did at the island of Horn, not being allowed to do
+so at _Onrust_, where the Dutch clean and careen all their ships. We
+hove down the Duke and Duchess and Bachelor, the sheathing of which
+ships were very much worm-eaten in several places. In heaving down, the
+Duchess sprung her fore-mast, which we replaced by a new one. When the
+ships were refitted, we returned to Batavia road, where we rigged three
+of them, and sold the Marquis, after taking out all her goods and
+stores, and distributing her officers and men into the others. During
+our stay at Batavia, the weather was exceedingly hot, and many of our
+officers and men fell sick, among whom I was one, the prevalent disease
+being the flux, of which the master of the Duke and gunner of the
+Duchess died, and several of our men. A young man belonging to the
+Duchess, having ventured into the sea to swim, had both his legs snapped
+off by a shark, and while endeavouring to take him on board, the shark
+bit off the lower part of his belly. We were allowed free access to the
+town and markets, yet found it difficult to procure salt-meat, so that
+we had to kill bullocks for ourselves, and pickled the flesh, taking out
+all the bones. Arrack, rice, and fowls were very cheap, and we bought
+beef for two _stivers_, or two-pence a pound.
+
+There are various descriptions of this famous city, yet, as what I have
+to say may serve to exhibit a state of things as they were when we were
+there, I flatter myself that the following succinct account may neither
+be found useless nor disagreeable. The city of Batavia is situated on
+the N.W. side of the famous island of Java, in lat. 5° 50' S.[232]
+During the whole year the east and west monsoons, or trade-winds, blow
+along shore; besides which it is refreshed by the ordinary land and sea
+breezes, which greatly cool the air, otherwise it would be intolerably
+hot. The summer begins here in May, and continues till the end of
+October, or beginning of November, during all which period there is a
+constant breeze from the east, with a clear serene sky. The winter
+commences in the end of October, or beginning of November, with
+excessive rains, which sometimes continue for three or four days without
+intermission. In December the west-wind blows with such violence as to
+stop all navigation on the coast of Java. In February the weather is
+changeable, with frequent sudden thunder-gusts. They begin to sow in
+March; June is the pleasantest month; and in September they gather in
+their rice, and cut the sugar-canes. In October they have abundance of
+fruits and flowers, together with plants and herbs in great variety.
+Around the city there is an extensive fenny plain, which has been
+greatly improved and cultivated by the Dutch; but to the east it still
+remains encumbered by woods and marshes. The city of Batavia is of a
+square form, surrounded by a strong wall, on which are twenty-two
+bastions, and has a river running through it into the sea. About the
+year 1700 there was a great earthquake in Java, which overturned some
+part of the mountains in the interior of the island, by which the course
+of the river was altered; and since then the canals in Batavia and the
+neighbourhood have not been nearly so commodious as formerly, nor has
+the entrance of the river been so deep; and for want of a strong current
+to keep it open, the Dutch have been obliged to employ a great machine
+to preserve the navigation of the mouth of the river, so as to admit
+small vessels into the canals which pervade the city. Batavia lies in a
+bay in which there are seventeen or eighteen islands, which so
+effectually protect it from the sea, that though large, the road is very
+safe. The banks of the canals are raced on both sides with stone quays,
+as far as the boom, which is shut up every night, and guarded by
+soldiers. All the streets are in straight lines, most of them being,
+above thirty feet broad on both sides, besides the canals, and they are
+all paved with bricks next the houses. All the streets are well-built
+and fully inhabited, fifteen of them having canals for small vessels,
+communicating with the main river, and shut up by booms, at which they
+pay certain tolls for admission; and these canals are crossed by
+fifty-six bridges, mostly of stone. There are numerous country-seats
+around the city, most of them neat and well contrived, with handsome
+fruit and flower gardens, ornamented with fountains and statues; and
+vast quantities of cocoa-nut trees planted in numerous groves, every
+where afford delightful shade. Batavia has many fine buildings,
+particularly the Cross-church, which is handsomely built of stone, and
+very neatly fitted up within. There are two or three other churches for
+the Dutch presbyterians, and two for the Portuguese catholics, who are a
+mixed race, besides one church for the Malay protestants. In the centre
+of the city is the town-house, handsomely built of brick in form of a
+square, and two stories high. In this all the courts are held, and all
+matters respecting the civil government of the city are determined.
+There are also hospitals, speir-houses, and rasp-houses, as in
+Amsterdam, with many other public buildings, not inferior to those of
+most European cities.
+
+[Footnote 232: The latitude of Batavia is 6° 15' S. and its longitude
+106° 7' E. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+The Chinese are very numerous, and carry on the greatest trade here,
+farming most of the excise and customs, being allowed to live according
+to their own laws, and to exercise their idolatrous worship. They have a
+chief of their own nation, who manages their affairs with the company,
+by which they are allowed great privileges, having even a representative
+in the council, who has a vote when any of their nation is tried for his
+life. These high privileges are only allowed to such of the Chinese as
+are domicilled here, all others being only permitted to remain six
+months in the city, or on the island of Java. The Chinese have also a
+large hospital for their sick and aged, and manage its funds so well,
+that a destitute person of that nation is never to be seen on the
+streets.
+
+The Dutch women have here much greater privileges than in Holland, or
+any where else; as on even slight occasions they can procure divorces
+from their husbands, sharing the estate between them. A lawyer at this
+place told me, that he has known, out of fifty-eight causes depending at
+one time before the council-chamber, fifty-two of them for divorces.
+Great numbers of native criminals are chained in pairs, and kept to hard
+labour under a guard, in cleaning the canals and ditches of the city, or
+in other public works. The castle of Batavia is quadrangular, having
+four bastions connected by curtains, all faced with white stone, and
+provided with watch-houses. Here the Dutch governor-general of India,
+and most of the members of the council of the Indies reside, the
+governor's palace being large, and well-built of brick. In this palace
+is the council-chamber, with the secretary's office, and chamber of
+accounts. The garrison usually consists of 1000 men; but the soldiers
+are generally but poorly appointed, except the governor's guards, who
+have large privileges, and make a fine appearance.
+
+The governor-general lives in as great splendour as if he were a king,
+being attended by a troop of horse-guards, and a company of halberdeers,
+in uniforms of yellow sattin, richly adorned with silver-lace and
+fringes, which attend his coach when he appears abroad. His lady also is
+attended by guards and a splendid retinue. The governor is chosen only
+for three years, from the twenty-four counsellors, called the _Radts_ of
+India, twelve of whom must always reside in Batavia. Their soldiers are
+well trained, and a company is always on duty at each of the gates of
+the city and citadel; and there are between seven and eight thousand
+disciplined Europeans in and about the city, who can be assembled in
+readiness for action on a short warning.
+
+Besides Europeans and Chinese, there are many Malays in Batavia, and
+other strangers from almost every country in, India. The Javanese, or
+ancient natives, are very numerous, and are said to be a proud barbarous
+people. They are of dark complexions, with flat faces, thin, short,
+black hair, large eyebrows, and prominent cheeks. The men are
+strong-limbed, but the women small. The men wear a calico wrapper, three
+or four times folded round their bodies; and the women are clothed from
+their arm-pits to their knees. They usually have two or three wives,
+besides concubines; and the Dutch say that they are much addicted to
+lying and stealing. The Javans who inhabit the coast are mostly
+Mahometans; but those living in the interior are still pagans. The women
+are not so tawny as the men, and many of them are handsome; but they are
+generally amorous, and unfaithful to their husbands, and are apt to deal
+in poisoning, which they manage with much art.
+
+Batavia is very populous, but not above a sixth part of the inhabitants
+are Dutch. The Chinese here are very numerous; and the Dutch acknowledge
+that they are more industrious and acute traders than themselves. They
+are much, encouraged, because of the great trade carried on by them, and
+the great rents they pay for their shops, besides large taxes, and from
+sixteen to thirty per cent. interest for money, which they frequently
+borrow from the Dutch. I was told, that there were about 80,000 Chinese
+in and about Batavia, who pay a capitation-tax of a dollar each per
+month for liberty to wear their hair, which is not permitted in their
+own country ever since the Tartar conquest. There generally come here
+every year from China, fourteen or sixteen large flat-bottomed junks, of
+from three to five hundred tons burden. The merchants come along with
+their goods, which are lodged in different partitions in the vessels, as
+in separate warehouses, for each of which they pay a certain price, and
+not for the weight or measure of the cargo, as with us, so that each
+merchant fills up his own division as they please. They come here with
+the easterly monsoon, usually arriving in November or December, and go
+away again for China in the beginning of June. By means of these junks
+the Dutch have all kinds of Chinese commodities brought to them, and at
+a cheaper rate than they could bring them in their own vessels.
+
+Batavia is the metropolis of the Dutch trade and settlements in India,
+and is well situated for the spice trade, which they have entirely in
+their own hands. There are seldom less than twenty sail of Dutch ships
+at Batavia, carrying from thirty to fifty and sixty guns each. Abraham
+van Ribeck was governor-general when we were there. His predecessor, as
+I was informed, had war with the natives of the island, who had like to
+have ruined the settlement; but, by sowing divisions among the native
+princes, he at length procured peace upon advantageous conditions. This
+is one of the pleasantest cities I ever saw, being more populous than
+Bristol, but not so large. They have schools for teaching all necessary
+education, even for Latin and Greek, and have a printing-house. There
+are many pleasant villas, or country seats, about the city; and the
+adjacent country abounds in rice, sugar-plantations, gardens, and
+orchards, with corn and sugar-mills, and mills for making gunpowder.
+They have also begun to plant coffee, which thrives well, so that they
+will shortly be able to load a ship or two; but I was told it is not so
+good as what comes from Arabia.
+
+We sailed from Batavia on the 11th October, 1710, and on the 19th came
+to anchor in a bay about a league W. from Java head, and remained till
+the 28th, laying in wood and water. The 15th December we made the land
+of southern Africa, in lat 34° 2' S. And on the 18th we anchored in
+Table Bay in six fathoms, about a mile from shore. We remained here
+till the 5th April, waiting to go home with the Dutch fleet, and on that
+day fell down to Penguin Island, whence we sailed on the 5th for Europe.
+On the 14th July we spoke a Dane bound for Ireland, who informed us that
+a Dutch fleet of ten sail was cruizing for us off Shetland, which
+squadron we joined next day. On the 28d we got sight of the coast of
+Holland, and about eight p. m. came all safe to anchor in the Texel, in
+six fathoms, about two miles off shore. In the afternoon of the 24th I
+went up to Amsterdam, where I found letters from our owners, directing
+us how to act as to our passage from thence home. On the 30th we got
+some provisions from Amsterdam. On the 22d August we weighed from the
+Texel, but the wind being contrary, had to return next morning. We
+weighed again on the 30th, and on the 1st October came to anchor in the
+Downs, and on the 14th of that month got safe to _Eriff_, where we ended
+our long and fatiguing voyage.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+It appears, by incidental information in Harris, I. 198, That the outfit
+of this voyage did not exceed £14,000 or £15,000, and that its gross
+profits amounted to £170,000, half of which belonged to the owners; so
+that they had £85,000 to divide, or a clear profit of £466 13s. 4d. _per
+centum,_ besides the value of the ships and stores.--E.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI.
+
+VOYAGE ROUND THE WORLD, BY CAPTAIN JOHN CLIPPERTON, IN 1719-1722.[233]
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+
+About the beginning of 1718, some English merchants resolved to fit out
+two ships for a cruizing voyage to the South Sea, in hopes of having
+equal success with the expedition under Woods Rogers, and provided two
+fine ships, the Speedwell and Success, every way fit for the purpose.
+But as the war which was expected between Great Britain and Spain did
+not take place so soon as was expected, they applied for commissions
+from the Emperor Charles VI. who was then at war with Philip V. King of
+Spain. Captain George Shelvocke, who had served as a lieutenant in the
+royal navy, was accordingly sent with the Speedwell to Ostend, there to
+wait for the imperial commissions, and to receive certain Flemish
+officers and seamen, together with as much wine and brandy as might
+serve both ships during their long voyage, being cheaper there than in
+England. This was in November 1718, and both to shew respect to the
+imperial court, and to have the appearance of a German expedition, the
+names of the ships were changed to the Prince Eugene and the Staremberg.
+
+[Footnote 233: Harris, I. 184.]
+
+Having taken on board six Flemish officers and ninety men, Captain
+Shelvocke sailed from Ostend for the Downs, where the other ship had
+waited for him some time. War having begun between Great Britain and
+Spain, and finding that the Flemings and Englishmen did not agree, the
+owners laid aside all thoughts of using the imperial commission, and to
+send back all their Flemish officers and men to Flanders, with an
+allowance of two months wages, and procured a commission from George I.
+restoring the original names of their ships. The Speedwell carried
+twenty-four guns and 106 men, and the Success thirty-six guns and 180
+men; the former commanded by Captain George Shelvocke, who was to have
+had the chief command in the expedition, and the other by Captain John
+Clipperton, who had formerly sailed with Dampier as mate, and of whose
+adventures after his separation from Dampier, an account has been
+already given.
+
+In consequence of some change of circumstances, perhaps owing to some
+improper conduct when in Flanders, the proprietors now took the chief
+command from Shelvocke, and conferred it upon Clipperton, a man of a
+blunt, rough, and free-speaking disposition, but of a strict regard to
+his duty and rigid honesty. Though somewhat passionate, he was soon
+appeased, and ever ready to repair any injury he had done when heated
+with anger, and had much justice and humanity in his nature. Under
+Captain Shelvocke in the Speedwell, Simon Hately was appointed second
+captain; he who had formerly lost company with Woods Rogers among the
+Gallapagos islands, and had remained a considerable time prisoner among
+the Spaniards.
+
+The instructions for this voyage from the owners were, that they were to
+proceed in the first place for Plymouth, whence they were to sail with
+the first fair wind for Cape Horn or the Straits of Magellan, as was
+found most convenient for their passage into the South Sea. They were
+then to cruize on the coasts of Chili, Peru, and Mexico, and to
+endeavour, if possible, to meet and capture the Manilla ship. To prevent
+all disputes and disorders, they were enjoined to be careful above all
+things not to separate from each other, and to undertake nothing of
+importance without holding a council of officers, stating the question
+to be debated in writing, and drawing up the resolution in writing, with
+the reasons on which they were grounded, which were to be signed by all
+the officers. All these precautions proved in a great measure useless,
+as the expedition wore an unfortunate aspect from the very beginning.
+The ships were forced to remain three months at Plymouth, waiting for a
+wind; in which time every thing fell into confusion, and factions were
+formed, in which the crews of both ships were involved, from the
+captains down to the cabin boys. Captain Shelvocke highly resented the
+affront offered him in being deprived of the chief command; and Captain
+Clipperton, knowing the other's resentment, and being a boisterous man
+of strong passions which he could not conceal, there was nothing but
+debates and disputes. Every post carried complaints to the proprietors,
+and brought down instructions, reproofs, and exhortations to concord. It
+had been fortunate for the proprietors, if they had removed one or both
+of the commanders; but every one had too much concern to retain his
+friend in post, so that private views proved the cause of public
+ruin.--_Harris_.
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Narrative of the Voyage, from England to Juan Fernandez_.
+
+Having at length a fair wind, the two ships sailed in company from
+Plymouth on the 13th February, 1719. It singularly happened that the
+Speedwell had still on board the whole stock of wine, brandy, and other
+liquors, designed for the supply of both ships. On the 19th at night,
+there arose a violent storm, and on the 20th the storm abated about two
+in the afternoon, when Captain Clipperton in the Success made sail,
+steering S. by E. while Captain Shelvocke in the Speedwell bore away
+N.W. So that they never again saw each other, till they afterwards met
+by mere accident in the South Sea.
+
+Being now at sea without his consort, and very indifferently provided,
+Captain Clipperton found himself under the necessity of using a
+discretionary power of dispensing in some respect from his instructions;
+but which freedom he rarely exercised, and then with the utmost caution.
+In all essential points he carefully complied with the instructions,
+constantly consulting with his officers, and doing his utmost to
+prosecute his voyage with effect. The first place of rendezvous
+appointed in case of separation was the Canaries, for which he sailed
+with such expedition that he arrived there on the 6th of March. Having
+taken in refreshments there, for which he had much occasion, as all his
+liquors were in the Speedwell, Clipperton cruized on that station for
+ten days, as directed by his instructions, but not meeting his consort,
+he resolved to proceed to the next place appointed for that purpose, the
+Cape de Verd islands.
+
+The Canary Islands, or _Islands of Dogs_, so named by the Spaniards when
+discovered by them in 1402, because they found here a great number of
+these animals, were known to the ancients by the name of the Fortunate
+Islands, because of their fertility and the excellent temperature of
+their air. They are seven in number, Lancerota, Fuerteventura, Grand
+Canary, Teneriffe, Geomero, Hiero or Ferro, and Palma. _Grand Canary_ is
+far distant from the others, and contains 9000 inhabitants, being the
+seat of the bishop, the inquisition, and the royal council which governs
+all the seven islands. In Teneriffe is the famous mountain called
+_Terraira,_ or the Peak of Teneriff, supposed to be the highest in the
+world, and which may be distinctly seen at the distance of sixty
+leagues. There is no reaching the top of this mountain except in July
+and August, because covered at all other times with snow, which is never
+to be seen at other places of that island, nor in the other six, at any
+season of the year. It requires three days journey to reach the summit
+of the peak, whence all the Canary islands may be seen, though some of
+them are sixty leagues distant. _Hiero_ or _Ferro_ is one of the largest
+islands in this group, but is very barren, and so dry that no fresh
+water is to be found in it, except in some few places by the sea, very
+troublesome and even dangerous to get it from. "But, to remedy this
+inconvenience, Providence as supplied a most extraordinary substitute,
+as there grows almost in every place a sort of tree of considerable
+size, incomparably thick of branches and leaves, the latter being long
+and narrow, always green and lively. This tree is always covered by a
+little cloud hanging over it, which wets the leaves as if by a perpetual
+dew, so that fine clear water continually trickles down from them into
+little pails set below to catch it as it falls, and which is in such
+abundant quantity as amply to supply the inhabitants and their
+cattle."[234]
+
+[Footnote 234: This strange story seems entirely fabulous.--E.]
+
+These islands are generally fertile, and abound with all kinds of
+provisions, as cattle, grain, honey, wax, sugar, cheese, and skins. The
+wine of this country is strong and well-flavoured, and is exported to
+most parts of the world; and the Spanish ships bound for America usually
+stop at these islands to lay in a stock of provisions. About 100 leagues
+to the west of these islands, mariners are said to have frequently seen
+an island named _St Baranura,_ which they allege is all over green and
+very pleasant, full of trees, and abounding in provisions, as also that
+it is inhabited by Christians; but no person can tell what sect or
+denomination they are of, nor what language they speak. The Spanish
+inhabitants of the Canaries have often attempted to go there, but could
+never find the way; whence some believe that it is only an illusion or
+enchanted island, seen only at certain times. Others allege a better
+reason, saying that it is small and almost always concealed by clouds,
+and that ships are prevented from coming near it by the strength of the
+currents. It is certain however, that there is such an island, and at
+the distance from the Canaries already mentioned.[235]
+
+[Footnote 235: This island of St Baranora, or St Brandon, is merely
+imaginary.--E.]
+
+Leaving Gomera on the 15th March, Clipperton came in sight of St
+Vincent, one of the Cape de Verd islands, in the evening of the 21st,
+and came to anchor in the bay next morning. He here found a French ship,
+and the Diamond belonging to Bristol, taking in a cargo of asses for
+Jamaica. Continuing here for ten days, in hopes of meeting the
+Speedwell, but in vain, the crew of the Success became much
+disheartened, so that Clipperton had much difficulty in persuading them
+to persist in the enterprize. The _Cape de Verd islands,_ called _Salt
+islands_ by the Dutch, derive their name from Cape de Verd on the coast
+of Africa. The sea which surrounds them is covered by a green herb,
+called _Sergalso_ or cresses by the Portuguese, resembling
+water-cresses, and so thickly that hardly can the water be seen, neither
+can ships make their way through it but with a stiff gale. This herb
+produces berries, resembling white gooseberries, but entirely tasteless.
+No one knows how this herb grows, as there is no ground or land about
+the place where it is found floating on the water, neither can it be
+supposed to come from the bottom, as the sea is very deep, and is in
+many places quite unfathomable. This sea-weed begins to be seen in the
+lat. of 34° N. where it is so thick that it seems as if islands, but is
+not to be met with in any other part of the ocean.
+
+The _Cape de Verd islands_, when first discovered by the Portuguese in
+1572, were all desert and uninhabited, but they now inhabit several of
+them. They are ten in number, St Jago, St Lucia, St Vincent, St Antonio,
+St Nicolas, Ilha Blanca, Ilha de Sal, Ilha de Maio, Ilha de Fogo, and
+Bonavista. They now afford plenty of rice, flour, Tartarian wheat,
+oranges, lemons, citrons, bananas, ananas or pine-apples, ignames,
+batatas, melons, cucumbers, pompions, garden and wild figs, and several
+other sorts of fruits. They have vineyards also, which produce ripe
+grapes twice a year; and have abundance of cattle, both great and small,
+but especially goats. The capital city is St Jago, in the island of that
+name, in which resides the governor who commands over all these islands
+under the King of Portugal. It is also the residence of an archbishop,
+whose see extends over all these islands, and over all the conquests of
+the Portuguese on this side of the Cape of Good Hope. These islands
+afford good convenience for ships on long voyages procuring a supply of
+fresh water. On the east side of Maio there is a little river, and as
+the island is uninhabited, there is nobody to hinder one from taking it:
+There is also water to be had on St Antonio, where also good
+refreshments may be had, of oranges, lemons, and other fruits; and the
+Portuguese on this island are so few in number, that they cannot prevent
+one from taking what they please.
+
+May the 29th having an observation, Clipperton found his latitude to be
+52° 15' S. being then off Cape _Virgin Mary_, the northern point at the
+eastern entrance into the straits of Magellan, distant from _Fuego_, one
+of the Cape de Verd islands, 1580 leagues, the meridional distance being
+36° 4' W.[236] Next day they entered the straits. Proceeding onwards to
+Queen Elizabeth's island, the pinnace was sent off to a fresh-water
+river on the main, which was found frozen up. They saw large flocks of
+geese and ducks at this place, but they were very shy. By some accident
+the surgeon's mate was left ashore at this place by the boat, and when
+brought on board next morning he was almost dead with the cold. They
+remained some time at Queen Elizabeth's island, which is dry and mostly
+barren, yet they found plenty of sallad herbs, which were of infinite
+service, the crew being much afflicted by the scurvy. The principal herb
+was _smallage_ of extraordinary size, which they eat raw, or boiled in
+their broth, and of which they brought away a considerable quantity of
+juice in bottles. On the 14th June, the empty water casks were sent
+ashore to be filled, and the carpenters went to look out for a proper
+piece of timber for a mizen-mast. They found abundance of wild fowl and
+shell fish on shore, which were most welcome to all the company, as they
+found their appetites to increase, while the necessity compelled the
+enforcement of short allowance. They anchored on the 22d in a fine bay,
+which they named _No-bottom Bay_, because of its great depth of water.
+The trees here are lofty, and so loaded with snow as to be a most
+astonishing sight. On the 29th there came to them a canoe in which were
+two men, a woman, and a boy. These were of middle stature, with dark
+complexions, broad, round faces, and low features, with low foreheads,
+lank short black hair, and no clothing except a piece of skin to cover
+their middles. The most extraordinary circumstance about them, was a
+fine streak round their wrists of an azure colour. They seem to be very
+jealous of their women, as they would on no account permit the woman who
+was along with them to come on board. Clipperton ordered them bread and
+cheese, and a dram of brandy, which last they refused to take, but they
+eat the bread and cheese voraciously. They had a fire in the middle of
+their canoe, which was made of the bark of trees sewed together, and
+they brought with them some wild geese and ducks, which they exchanged
+for knives. They had bows and arrows, together with some fishing tackle,
+and went away after two hours stay, making signs that they would return.
+
+
+[Footnote 236: The meridional distance between these two stations is 49°
+25' W. Mayo being in long. 28° 15', and Cape Virgin Mary in long. 72°
+40' both W. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+Next day the pinnace went ashore, and returned in the evening with the
+Indian canoe filled with large muscles, which our people bought from the
+Indians, for knives, bread, and other trifles. In the beginning of July
+the weather was very moderate. Clipperton found the savages in these
+straits by no means so mischievous as they are usually represented, of
+which they had two remarkable instances: As, on one occasion, one of the
+crew was on shore two nights and a day, and was well used by the
+natives; and, on another occasion, one of the natives being left
+accidentally all night in the ship, the natives came for him next day
+without fear; so that, if well treated, they do not seem to be
+treacherous. In another canoe which came to the ship there were several
+women, each having a necklace of five or six rows of small shining
+shells, very nicely strung, resembling mother-of-pearl. All this time
+the crew was very sickly, scarcely a day passing in which one or more
+did not die, which was generally attributed to the want of something
+comfortable to drink in this rigorous climate, all the liquors intended
+for the voyage having been left in the Speedwell. The weather was
+sometimes fair and moderate for two or three days together, but was
+continually varying, and perhaps for two or three days following they
+had continual snow, rain, and sleet, with frequent great flows of wind
+that were intolerably sharp and piercing. William Pridham, the
+master-gunner, died on the 7th July, and was buried ashore next day,
+having a strong, plank with an inscription driven into the ground at the
+head of his grave.
+
+On the 20th July, Captain Mitchell and Lieutenant Davidson went in the
+pinnace, furnished with all necessaries, in order to make a discovery of
+a passage on the southern side of the straits, through which a French
+tartan is said to have gone into the South Sea in May, 1713, and to
+examine if there were any anchorage beyond Cape _Quad_. The pinnace
+returned on the 29th, having found the passage, but so narrow that it
+was deemed too hazardous. Their provisions falling short, they were
+forced to return before they had satisfied themselves sufficiently; yet
+they found several good bays for anchoring in, to the N.W. of Cape
+_Quad_. They got a seal from some Indians, which they broiled and eat,
+and said that it was as good as venison. On the 1st of August, Captain
+Mitchell and three other officers went a second time to examine to look
+for the new passage. But, after the strictest examination, they could
+not find that it led into the South Sea, but only into an icy bay, and
+at all events was too narrow for their ship. On the return of Captain
+Mitchell, it was resolved to prosecute their way through the straits,
+which they did with much difficulty, getting into the South Sea on the
+18th of August, but in so weak and sickly a condition as to be utterly
+incapable of attempting any enterprize for some time, having been long
+on short allowance of only one piece of beef or pork to a mess of six
+men. In pursuance, therefore, of his instructions, Captain Clipperton
+bore away for the island of Juan Fernandez, the third and last appointed
+place of rendezvous with the Speedwell.
+
+The Success accordingly anchored at Juan Fernandez on the 7th September,
+and search was made for any testimony of the Speedwell having been
+there, but to no purpose. Captain Clipperton resolved, in compliance
+with his instructions, to remain here, or cruizing in the neighbourhood,
+for a month; and also had an inscription cut on a conspicuous tree
+fronting the landing-place, to the following purport: "_Captain John----
+W. Magee, 1719_." This William Magee was surgeon of the Success, and
+well known to Captain Shelvocke and all his company; and Clipperton
+omitted his own name in the inscription, because he had been formerly in
+the South Sea, and had been long a prisoner among the Spaniards, for
+which reason he did not wish to give them notice of his return into this
+sea. The sick were all landed on the 8th, and every convenience afforded
+by the island made use of to promote their recovery. The weather was
+very changeable all the time of the Success continuing here, with much
+rain, and some hard gales of wind. They took, however, a considerable
+number of goats, which not only served them for present subsistence, but
+enabled them to increase their sea store, as they had an opportunity of
+salting a good many; for some French ships, that had been at the island,
+had left a considerable quantity of salt ready made. They likewise
+cleaned the ship's bottom, and took on board a supply of wood and water.
+It was now evident that the Success would have to act singly in these
+seas, as Clipperton was fully of opinion that the Speedwell was lost, or
+at least gave out so among the company, to prevent them from continually
+cursing Shelvocke for running away with their liquors, which some of the
+sick men did with their dying breaths.
+
+The beauty and fertility of this island, compared with the dangers and
+difficulties unavoidable in the South Sea, tempted four of the men to
+remain in the island, and they actually ran away into the mountains. As
+it was very inconvenient to lose so many good hands, Captain Clipperton
+took measures for recovering them, but ineffectually. At last, a
+fortnight after their desertion, and only the day before the ship was to
+leave the island, two of them were caught by the goat-hunters and
+brought aboard. They confessed that they had been hard put to it for the
+first five days, being forced to subsist entirely on the cabbage-trees,
+which are here in great plenty; but having accidentally found some fire,
+left by the goat-hunters, it served them in good stead, as it enabled
+them to cook their victuals. That same evening they brought on board
+all the goats-flesh they had salted, together with four casks of
+seal-oil, and every thing else they had on shore. A cross was set up on
+shore, at the foot of which a bottle was buried, containing a letter for
+Captain Shelvocke, appointing another place of rendezvous, with certain
+signals by which to know each other if they happened to meet at sea.
+
+SECTION II.
+
+
+_Proceedings of the Success in the South Seas_.
+
+
+Clipperton left Juan Fernandez on the 7th October, leaving two men
+behind, as successors to Governor Selkirk, but of whose adventures we
+have no mention. He now steered his course to the northwards, till in
+the parallel of Lima, where he proposed to commence operations, though
+in a very indifferent condition, having lost thirty men since passing
+the equator. On the 25th, being in the latitude of Lima, they captured a
+snow of forty tons, laden with sand and rubbish for manure, on board of
+which were seven Indians and two negroes, their master having been left
+sick on shore. The only thing she contained worth taking were two jars
+full of eggs, two jars of treacle, and two dollars. Next day they
+captured a ship of 150 tons, laden with timber from Guayaquil, in which
+were two friars, sixteen Indians, and four Negroes. On the 30th they
+took a ship of 400 tons, bound from Panama to Lima, which had been taken
+by Captain Rogers at Guayaquil ten years before. She had many passengers
+on board, and a loading of considerable value. Another prize was taken
+on the 2d of November, being a vessel of seventy tons, on board of which
+was the Countess of _Laguna_ and several other passengers, with a great
+sum of money, and 400 jars of wine and brandy, which was very
+acceptable. Captain Clipperton desired the countess to inform him,
+whether she thought proper to remain in the prize, or to accept of such
+accommodations as he was able to give her in the Success. She chose to
+continue in the prize, on which he sent an officer of marines with a
+guard, to prevent her from being molested, and with strict orders not to
+allow any person to enter her cabin, except her own domestics. He also
+sent part of the wine and brandy on board the other prizes, for the use
+of his seamen who had charge of them.
+
+Although Captain Clipperton had now so many prizes, that above a third
+of his company was detached to take charge of them, he was still as
+eager to take more as if he had commanded a squadron of men of war,
+instead of a single privateer weakly manned. On the 12th November, a
+London-built pink of about 200 tons was discovered at some distance,
+bound from Panama to Lima with a cargo of woad, of very little value to
+Clipperton, yet he added this to the number of his prizes. The master of
+this vessel, being a shrewd fellow, soon saw the error Clipperton had
+fallen into, and resolved to turn it to his advantage. Guessing by the
+number of prizes already attending the English ship, that he could not
+spare many men to take possession of his ship, and having above a dozen
+passengers, he directed them to hide themselves in the hold, along with
+a Frenchman who served as boatswain, with orders to seize as many of the
+English as went down below, assuring them that he with the ship's
+company would be able to manage the rest. When this ship struck,
+Clipperton sent Lieutenant Sergeantson with eight men to take possession
+of her; who, on coming on board, ordered all he saw on deck into the
+great cabin, at the door of which he placed a sentinel. Thinking every
+thing was now secure, he ordered the topsails to be hoisted, in order to
+stand down towards the Success; after which, the men went down into the
+hold, to see what loading was in the ship. On this the concealed
+passengers sallied out, knocked most of them down, and the boatswain
+came behind Mr Sergeantson, whom he knocked down likewise, and then
+bound all the Englishmen in the hold. In the mean time, the crew in the
+great cabin, Spaniards, Indians, and Negroes, secured the sentinel.
+Having thus recovered possession of the ship, the Spanish captain
+resolved on getting ashore at all events, in which design he ran his
+ship among the rocks, where he with his crew and prisoners were all in
+considerable danger. He then ordered all the English prisoners to be
+unbound, and all got safe on shore, after which Lieutenant Sergeantson
+and his men were all sent prisoners to Lima.
+
+The viceroy was so much pleased with this hardy action of the Spanish
+shipmaster, that he ordered a new vessel to be built for him at
+Guayaquil, ordering all the traders in Peru to be taxed for defraying
+the expence, as a reward for the service rendered on this occasion to
+the public, and an encouragement for others to behave in like manner. On
+the arrival of the prisoners at Lima, they were all strictly examined,
+when one of them gave a full account of every thing he knew,
+particularly of the two men who remained on the island of Juan
+Fernandez, and of the letter left in a bottle for the Speedwell, the
+consort of the Success. On this information, a small vessel was fitted
+out and sent to Juan Fernandez, with orders to fetch away the two men
+and the bottle containing the signals, which was accordingly done.
+
+Perceiving on the 20th November, that the last-taken, prize had been
+recovered by her crew, as on making the signal to tack, she was seen to
+make all possible sail towards the land, Captain Clipperton immediately
+suspected what had happened; and finding it impossible to get up with
+her, he began to consider what was best for him to do, to prevent the
+bad effects which might reasonably be expected from her crew getting on
+shore and communicating the alarm. Wherefore, he very prudently
+determined to set all his Spanish prisoners at liberty, as well to save
+provisions, which he could not very well spare, as that their good usage
+from him might be speedily known, in hopes of the same being returned to
+those of his men who had fallen into the hands of the Spaniards.
+
+On the 24th we took another prize of about 200 tons, laden with timber
+from Panama to Lima, having on board forty negroes and thirty Spaniards,
+most of the last being passengers. On the 27th he came to anchor with
+all his prizes at the island of Plata, where he began seriously to
+reflect how best to turn the expedition to the profit of the owners, as
+well as of himself and crew. He knew well that all the coast was now
+alarmed, and that two men-of-war were fitting out on purpose to take
+him, one of fifty and the other of thirty guns. He had no expectations
+of the ships and goods he had taken being ransomed in that pan of the
+world, and believed they would prove of little value if brought home;
+and reflecting on what had formerly been proposed by Captain Woods
+Rogers on a similar occasion, of sending a cargo of such prize goods to
+Brazil, he resolved to try that experiment. Accordingly, he fitted out
+the bark in which he had taken the Countess de Laguna, armed her with
+eight guns, and gave her a crew of thirteen Englishmen and ten negroes,
+with what provisions and stores he could spare, calling her the
+_Chickly_. Into this vessel he put a cargo of European commodities,
+valued at upwards of ten thousand pounds, and on the 27th November,
+1719, he sailed for Brazil under the command of Captain Mitchell. As
+soon as she was gone, he gave up his other prizes to the Spaniards,
+taking out of them whatever he thought worth keeping, and detaining one
+of the Spanish masters to serve him as pilot, with all the negroes;
+after which he sailed from La Plata to resume his cruize on his former
+station.
+
+The 12th December he took a vessel bound from Cherisse for Panama with
+provisions, which employed the launch and pinnace of the Success a whole
+day in bringing on board the flour and other provisions out of the
+prize. Having got as much flour out of her as they could well stow away
+in the Success, Clipperton ordered the main-mast of the prize to be cut
+away, lest she should overset, and then dismissed her. From the people
+of this prize, they learnt that Lieutenant Sergeantson and his men had
+been carried prisoners to Lima. On the 27th they anchored in _Guanchaco_
+bay, where they found two ships at anchor, which had been abandoned by
+their crews, and every thing taken out of them, except some bread and a
+few jars of water. These ships were set on fire. It was now resolved to
+bear away for the Gallapagos islands for refreshments, and accordingly
+anchored in York road, on the north side of the Duke of York's island,
+on the 9th January, 1720, immediately under the equinoctial line. They
+here found good water, scrubbed and cleaned their ship's bottom, and
+after ten days proceeded to the northwards, in order to cruize on the
+coast of Mexico. The circumstance of finding good water at this place,
+sufficiently justifies Captain Cowley from the aspersions thrown upon
+him by later writers, who allege that he gave a fanciful and untrue
+account of these islands, as they had not been able to find water or
+anchorage at such of them as they tried.
+
+Having returned to the American coast, they fell in with a ship on the
+21st of January, which they took after a long chase. This proved to be
+the Prince Eugene, on board of which was the Marquis of _Villa Roche_
+and all his family, bound from Panama, where he had been president, to
+Lima. This was the very ship in which Captain Clipperton had been
+circumvented and taken in his last voyage in these seas,[237] when he
+had been very indifferently used by the marquis, who was now at his
+mercy, and whom he used, notwithstanding, with all civility. On the 8th
+March, a priest who was on board the prize, and the boatswain of that
+ship, desired leave to go on shore at the island of _Velas_,[238] which
+was granted on condition that they would induce the inhabitants to bring
+some bullocks to the shore, to exchange them for such goods as they
+might think proper to accept in payment. This they promised, and on the
+16th they returned with four bullocks, together with some fowls and
+fruit as a present to the marquis, but said their alcalde, or governor,
+would on no account permit them to trade with the English. They also
+learnt that Captain Mitchell had been ashore at this place, and had shot
+some of their cattle, but on 200 men appearing under arms, had been
+forced to retire. This story seemed the more probable, as these people
+had some linen and other articles of clothing belonging to Captain
+Mitchell's men. Next day some letters from the marquis were intercepted,
+which were by no means conformable to the strict honour to which the
+Spanish nobility usually pretend, as they were meant to stir up the
+inhabitants of Velas to surprise the men belonging to Captain
+Clipperton, and to seize his boat when it went ashore for water. Upon
+this Captain Clipperton confined the marquis for some days; yet allowed
+him and his lady to go ashore on the 20th, leaving their only child as
+an hostage; and soon after the prize was restored to her captain.
+
+[Footnote 237: The circumstance here alluded to no where appears in the
+narratives of any of the former circumnavigations.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 238: Perhaps Velas point is here meant, in lat. 10° 9' N. on
+the coast of that province of Mexico called _Corta Rica_.--E.]
+
+On the 14th April, the marquis and his lady came on board, accompanied
+by the alcalde, and an agreement being made for their ransom, the lady
+and child were sent ashore, and the marquis remained as sole hostage. In
+the whole of this transaction, Clipperton seems to have been outwitted
+by the marquis, who lately broke his word, and by this the crew of the
+Success were provoked to murmur against their captain for trusting him.
+On the 20th of April, the Success anchored in the Gulf of Amapala, or
+Fouseca, in lat. 13° N. and not being able to water there, repaired to
+the _Island of Tigers_,[239] where they procured water with great ease.
+They went to the island of Gorgona, in lat. 2° 53' N. for the same
+purpose, on the 4th June. On the 24th of that month they took a prize
+which had once been in their hands before, now laden with timber and
+cocoa-nuts; and on the 11th August, anchored with their prize at the
+island of _Lobor de la Mar_, in lat. 6° 95' S. where they set up tents
+on shore, scrubbed and cleaned their ship's bottom, and took whatever
+seemed of any value out of the prize.
+
+[Footnote 239: Perhaps the Isla del Cana, in lat. 8° 46' N. is here
+meant, or it may have been one of the islands in the Gulf of
+Amapala.--E.]
+
+While here, a plot was entered into by the crew, for seizing the captain
+and officers, whom they proposed to leave on the island of Lobos, and
+then to run away with the ship; but this was happily discovered on the
+6th September, the two principal ringleaders severely punished, and the
+rest pardoned. On the 17th, they took a fishing-boat with a considerable
+quantity of well-cured and salt fish. On the 1st November they went into
+the Bay of Conception, on the coast of Chili, in lat. 36° 35' S. in
+chace of a vessel which outsailed them and escaped; whence they bore
+away for Coquimbo, in lat. 29° 50' S. and took a ship laden with sugar,
+tobacco, and cloth, on their passage between these two places. On the
+6th in the afternoon, on opening the harbour of Coquimbo, they saw three
+men-of-war at anchor with their topsails loose, which immediately
+slipped their cables and stood after them. The Success hauled close upon
+a wind, as the prize did likewise, on which the best sailing Spanish
+man-of-war gave chase to the prize, which she soon came up with and
+took. The two other ships crowded all sail after the Success, till
+afternoon, when the biggest carried away her mizen-mast, on which she
+fired a gun and stood in for the shore, which favoured the escape of the
+Success.
+
+In the re-captured prize, they lost their third lieutenant, Mr James
+Milne, with twelve men. The captain of the Spanish man-of-war which took
+him, was the famous Don Blas de Lesso, who was governor of Carthagena
+when that place was attacked by Admiral Vernon. At first Don Blas
+treated Mr Milne very roughly, being enraged at having missed taking the
+English privateer, and had only retaken a Spanish prize, and in the
+first transport of his passion struck Mr Milne over the head with the
+flat of his sword. But on coming to himself he sent for Mr Milne, and
+generously asked his pardon, and finding he had been stripped by the
+soldiers, ordered him a new suit of clothes, and kept him some time in
+his own ship. He afterwards procured his liberty at Lima, paid his
+passage to Panama, giving him a jar of wine and another of brandy for
+his sea-store, and put 200 dollars in his pocket to carry him to
+England. This unlucky accident of losing the prize revived the
+ill-humour among the crew of the Success, who did not indeed enter into
+any new plot, but became much dejected.
+
+On the 16th they gave chase to another ship, which, after exchanging a
+few shots, bore away and left them. This was a fortunate escape, as she
+was a ship of force commanded by one Fitzgerald, which had been fitted
+out on purpose to take Captain Shelvocke; but knowing this not to be the
+ship he was in search of, and doubting her strength, had no great
+stomach to engage. These repeated disappointments, as they broke the
+spirit of the crew, had a very bad effect on Captain Clipperton, who now
+began to take to drinking, which grew at last to such a pitch that he
+was hardly ever quite sober; owing to which unhappy propensity he
+committed many errors in his future proceedings.
+
+It was now determined to proceed to the northward in search of plunder,
+as also to procure a supply of provisions, especially flour, having
+expended all their stock of that article, and being now reduced to three
+pounds of Indian corn for a mess of six men per day. Having but
+indifferent fortune, and being in sight of point _Helena_ in lat. 2° 10'
+S. they resolved to bear away for the Gallapagos islands, on the 27th
+November, having in the first place set ashore the prisoners belonging
+to the vessel in which Mr Milne was taken. In their passage to these
+islands, they suspected an error in their log-line, which was found
+three fathoms too short, making an error in their computation on this
+run of about fifty-two miles. On the 4th of December they lost their
+purser, Mr Fairman, and the same day found themselves near the
+Gallapagos, being in lat. 0° 36' N. with a strong current running to the
+S.W. against which they had to contend. On the 6th the pinnace was sent
+to look out for an anchorage at one of the islands, but returned without
+finding any, having seen many tortoises on shore. Upon this the pinnace
+and yawl were sent out to bring off some of these animals, and returned
+with sufficient fish to serve the whole company for a day, but had been
+unable to land for turtle, in consequence of a prodigious surf on the
+shore. This island was a mere rock in lat. 0° 9' N. and the ground all
+about it was foul, with soundings from fifty to eighty fathoms. Leaving
+this island, they proceeded to another in the S.W. but could find no
+anchorage. Being unwilling to lose more time, they made the best of
+their way for the island of _Cocos_,[240] where they hoped to procure
+fish, fowls, and cocoa-nuts. On the 7th they saw several islands in the
+N.E. through which they passed, and got clear of them all by the
+9th,[241] but as the people daily fell sick, they grew very apprehensive
+of the dangerous situation they might incur in case of missing the
+island of which they were now in search. On the 17th they had the
+satisfaction of seeing the long-wished for island in the N.W. at the
+distance of nine leagues; and on the 18th, after coming to anchor, all
+of them went on shore that could be spared from the necessary duty of
+the ship, in order to build a hut for the reception of the sick, who
+were then carried on shore and comfortably lodged. They here had plenty
+of fish, fowls, eggs, and cocoa-nuts, with other refreshments. The
+captain here opened the last hogshead of brandy for the use of the
+company, giving every man a dram daily as long as it lasted; and on
+new-year's-day 1721, he allowed a gallon of strong beer to every mess.
+By means of abundant nourishing food and much ease, the crew began to
+recover their health and spirits, and were soon able to take on board
+wood and water, though with considerable difficulty, as a very heavy
+swell set in from the northwards at the full and change of the moon, so
+that they had to wait till after the spring-tides were over, before they
+were able to get any thing off.
+
+[Footnote 240: The island of Cocos, nearly north from the Gallapagos, is
+in lat. 5° 20' N. and long. 87° 53' W. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 241: These were probably some of the most northerly of the
+Gallapagos.--E.]
+
+On the 17th January, 1721, Captain Clipperton made the necessary
+dispositions for sailing, but it was three days before he could get his
+people on board, and then no less than eleven of them were missing,
+three Englishmen and eight negroes. It is not easy to conceive what
+could have induced the former to hazard themselves at this island, so
+far removed from the continent, and so little likely to be frequented by
+ships, and whence they had so very small a chance of ever getting off.
+It must be attributed to their dread of the dangers and fatigues to
+which they had been continually exposed, and to their living almost
+continually on short allowance, whereas they were here sure of plenty of
+provisions, with no other fatigue but the trouble of procuring and
+dressing them. Perhaps they might have received some assurance from the
+marquis, of having a ship sent for them when he obtained his liberty,
+which was at least a hazardous contingency; and there is great reason
+to doubt was never performed.
+
+Leaving the island of Cocos on the 20th, they arrived on the coast of
+Mexico on the 25th, when they met with an extraordinary adventure.
+Discovering a sail about seven in the evening, they gave chase and sent
+their pinnace to board, which came up with the chase about eleven. On
+the return of the pinnace, her people reported that this was a Spanish
+ship named the Jesu Maria, but now in possession of Captain Shelvocke,
+who had now only forty of his men remaining, all the rest being dead or
+dispersed. He said that he had lost the Speedwell at the island of Juan
+Fernandez, where he staid five months, and built a bark out of the wreck
+of the Speedwell. Putting to sea in this bark, he had coasted along
+Chili and Peru, meeting several ships, but could not take any, till at
+length he captured the Jesu Maria at Pisco near Lima. Shelvocke's people
+differed much in their stories, but it appeared that there was no
+regular command among them; and, as used to be the practice in the
+buccaneers, they had chosen a quarter-master, every thing being carried
+by a majority of votes, being all equal, and snared every thing among
+themselves, contrary to the articles of agreement with their owners.
+
+On the 27th, Mr Clipperton sent for the purser of the Jesu Maria, who
+gave but a dark account of their proceedings, only that he was not
+allowed to take any account of the treasure for the owners. Captain
+Shelvocke afterwards came on board the Success, accompanied by Mr Dod,
+his lieutenant of marines, who proposed to remain in the Success, having
+been very ill used by the other crew for his attachment to the interest
+of the owners, at least so he said, and was credited by Captain
+Clipperton and his officers. Next day, Shelvocke sent on board the
+Success six chests of pitch and _dammer_, two barrels of tar, and six
+slabs of copper; and Captain Clipperton gave him _twenty-four_ quarter
+deck guns,[242] some round shot, a compass, and a few other necessaries.
+Shelvocke's people laid out a great deal of money with the crew of the
+Success, in the purchase of clothes, shoes, hats, and other necessaries;
+and there remained with them two of Shelvocke's officers, Mr Hendric the
+purser, and Mr Dod the lieutenant of marines.
+
+[Footnote 242: This must be a gross error, as the Success originally
+carried only _twenty-four_ guns; and accordingly, in the subsequent
+account of the circumnavigation of Shelvocke, only two quarter-deck guns
+are mentioned.--E.]
+
+Still keeping to the northward on the coast of Mexico, the Success
+afterwards saw the Jesu Maria several times; and at length, in the
+beginning of March, it was resolved to propose a conjunct attempt on the
+Manilla ship on her way to Acapulco. Accordingly on the 13th March, in a
+general consultation by the officers of both ships, it was agreed to
+make the attempt jointly, both ships boarding her at once, as the only
+chance of taking her. On the 15th, in another consultation, Captain
+Clipperton and his officers agreed to certain articles, which were sent
+to Captain Shelvocke, proposing, if he and his crew would refund all the
+money they had shared among themselves, contrary to the articles agreed
+upon with the owners, and put the whole into a joint stock, thus all
+their faults should be forgiven, both companies uniting, and should then
+proceed together to cruise for the Acapulco ship. This proposal was very
+indifferently received by Shelvocke and his men, who did not care to
+part with what they possessed, and declined to give any answer to this
+proposal. Perceiving, therefore, that nothing good was to be expected
+from their quondam consort, considering also that the usual time of the
+Manilla ship arriving at Acapulco was already elapsed, that most of
+their remaining men were weak and sickly, and that they were only
+victualled for five months at their present short allowance, Captain
+Clipperton and his men thought it was now proper for them to proceed for
+the East Indies without loss of time, in order to preserve what little
+they had got for their owners and themselves. It was therefore resolved
+upon to put this plan into immediate execution, without any farther
+consultation with Shelvocke, and to leave the coast of America directly.
+They were now to the S.S.E. of Port Marquis, in lat. 16°50'N. and
+accordingly on the 18th March shaped their course for crossing the
+Pacific ocean towards the Ladrone islands.
+
+The Manilla ships usually leave the Philippine islands about the
+beginning of July, and arrive at the Ladrones about the beginning of
+September, whence they proceed for Acapulco, where they are expected to
+arrive about the middle of January. They generally remain at Acapulco,
+till towards the latter end of April, and then sail for Manilla. This,
+though the general rule, is liable to some alterations, according as the
+trade-winds set in earlier or later. From this account, it is plain
+that the ship they had now proposed to wait for must have been the
+galleon on her passage from Acapulco for Manilla, which always has a
+prodigious quantity of silver on board.
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_Voyage of the Success from the Coast of Mexico to China._
+
+The Success performed the voyage from the coast of Mexico to the
+Ladrones in fifty-three days, arriving in sight of the island of Serpana
+on the 10th May, 1721. This island is in lat. 13°42'N. though usually
+laid down in the Spanish maps in 14°.[243] In this passage they lost six
+of their men, and the rest were reduced to so weak and low a state, that
+the sight of this island gave them great joy. They determined however to
+proceed to Guam, as best known to Europeans, and where they were most
+likely to procure provisions; but in their present weakly condition it
+might have been better to have gone to Serpana, where the Spaniards have
+not so great a force as at Guam. They anchored in the road at this
+island on the 13th May, and sent their pinnace ashore with a flag of
+truce to obtain provisions. But the people informed them that, without
+leave of the governor, they could not trade with them. Application was
+therefore made to the governor for this purpose, which was favourably
+received for the present; and Mr Godfrey, the owners agent, who had been
+sent up to the governor at Umatta, returned on the 16th to the Success
+in one of the country proas, with a message from the governor,
+intimating, that they should be furnished with provisions, if they
+behaved civilly and paid honestly. The launch arrived soon after,
+bringing on board some cattle, bread, sugar, brandy, fruit, and
+vegetables; and on the 17th the governor sent a handsome present of
+palm-wine, sugar, and brandy, with a large quantity of chocolate.
+
+[Footnote 243: Serpana is probably some small island close to Guam, not
+inserted in general maps. The centre of Guam is in 13°30'N.]
+
+The _Island of Guam_, in lat. 13°30'N. long 145°30'E. from Greenwich, is
+nearly ten leagues long from N. to S. and five leagues from E. to W. It
+has several villages, the most remarkable being Amatta, Atry, Agana,
+Anigua, Asa, Hugatee, and Rigues. The natives are formerly said to have
+amounted to 150,000 souls, but at this time did not exceed a tenth of
+the number, of which a few hundreds remained independent in the
+mountains, in spite of every effort to reduce them under the Spanish
+dominion. The natives are strong, active, vigorous, and war-like, but
+are represented as cruel, vindictive, and treacherous, though perhaps
+the Spaniards have exaggerated their bad qualities, to extenuate their
+own tyranny and oppression. The Spanish garrison at this island at this
+time consisted of 300, relieved from time to time from Manilla, and the
+King of Spain is said to have allowed 30,000 dollars yearly for the
+maintenance of this port, the only use of which is to give refreshments
+to the annual ship which goes between Manilla and Acapulco.
+
+Having agreed with the governor of Guam for the ransom of the Marquis de
+Villa Roche, that nobleman went ashore on the 18th May, accompanied by
+the agent, the first lieutenant, and the doctor; and the Success gave
+him a salute of five guns at parting. For six days after, the launch was
+continually employed in bringing wood, water, and provisions on board,
+during which time the governor requested to be supplied with some arms
+and ammunition in exchange, and accordingly Captain Clipperton sent him
+twelve fuzees, three jars of gunpowder, sixty rounds of shot, four pair
+of pistols, and several cutlasses, swords, and daggers. On the 25th a
+letter was sent on board, demanding the jewels belonging to the marquis,
+some consecrated plate, and two negroes, who were Christians; as also
+requiring to have a certificate signed by the captain and officers of
+the Success, that peace had been proclaimed between Britain and Spain;
+besides which, this letter intimated that Mr Godfrey and Mr Pritty were
+detained till all these demands were complied with. In reply, Captain
+Clipperton sent a letter, containing a certificate, that he had been
+informed by the Solidad, the last prize taken on the coast of Chili,
+that peace had been concluded between Britain and Spain; but threatning,
+if the agreed ransom for the marquis, and the two gentlemen now
+detained, were not sent off in twenty-four hours, that he would demolish
+all the houses on shore, burn the ship in the harbour, and do all the
+mischief he could at the Philippine Islands.
+
+Soon after, a letter was received from the governor, saying that he
+would pay for the consecrated plate, and desiring to have more powder
+and shot; to which Clipperton made answer that he could not spare any
+more. The yawl went ashore on the 28th for more provisions; but the
+people were told that no more could be had, unless they sent more powder
+and shot. Upon this Clipperton weighed anchor, and stood in for the
+harbour, sending the pinnace a-head to sound. The people on shore had
+raised a battery during the sham treaty about the ransom of the marquis,
+from which they fired on the pinnace. The pinnace now returned to
+Clipperton, and reported that the only channel they could find lay
+within pistol-shot of the shore; yet at six in the afternoon Clipperton
+persisted to carry the Success into the harbour, making directly for the
+ship that lay there at anchor. The _Spaniards_ carried her into
+shoal-water,[244] where she was exposed to two fires, one from the new
+battery on land, almost directly over head, and the other from the ship.
+At nine she got foul of the rocks, when they had to cut away two of
+their anchors, endeavouring to get her off, all the while the enemy
+plying them warmly with shot and stones from the new battery on the
+hill, so that they suffered severely in the hull and rigging of the
+ship. They also had three men wounded, besides losing the first
+lieutenant, Mr Davidson, an honest man and a good officer. Thus the
+Success had to remain in a miserable situation, exposed during the whole
+night to the continual fire of the enemy; and the surface of the water
+being as smooth as a mill-pond, the ship was easily seen in the night,
+while her unfortunate crew had no other mark to fire at but the flashes
+of the enemy's guns.
+
+[Footnote 244: This unexplained circumstance probably meant, that the
+Success had at this time _Spanish_ pilots, who betrayed her.--E.]
+
+In this dangerous emergency, Captain Clipperton being overcome with
+liquor, and quite unable to command, the officers came to the resolution
+of running clear from the enemy as soon as they could get the ship
+afloat, and signed a paper to indemnify Mr Cook if he would assume the
+command. By four in the afternoon of the 29th they got the ship afloat,
+and cut away their small bower anchor, but ran aground again in ten
+minutes. At nine they carried out the kedge-anchor, but the hawser broke
+in heaving. They now carried out another hawser, having a lower-deck gun
+fixed to it, as they had now lost all their anchors, and were still
+aground. At two in the morning of the 30th the enemy repeatedly called
+upon them to surrender, or they might expect no quarter. At five they
+carried out the main-top-mast shrowd hawser, with another gun, still
+plying the enemy with their great guns and small-arms, though they were
+able to do little harm; while the enemy never missed them, especially
+directing their shot at the boats of the Success, whenever they saw them
+in motion. At eleven in the forenoon of the 30th they carried out the
+remains of their best bower-cable, with two lower-deck guns, which they
+dropped right a-head in five fathoms water. They now cleared the hold,
+ready to start their water to lighten the ship; got their upper and
+lower-deck guns forwards, to bring her by the head as she hung abaft on
+the rocks, and kept two guns constantly firing from the stern-ports at
+the enemy's battery, but could not get them to bear. During the last
+twenty-four hours they had fortunately only one man wounded; but the
+ship was wretchedly injured between wind and water, and her rigging torn
+to pieces.
+
+At six in the afternoon of the 30th the ship floated, when they cut away
+their yawl, having been sunk by a shot. They hove taught their cable,
+and then cut it away, together with the two hawsers, and sent the
+pinnace a-head to tow the ship off. Just as the ship got afloat, the
+enemy fired with great briskness from their new battery, their shot
+raking through the Success between wind and water, killed one of her
+men, and wounded two others.
+
+The Success had now remained fifty hours as a fair mark for the enemy to
+fire at, during which they lost both their bower-anchors and cables,
+with the stern and kedge-anchors, four hawsers, four lower-deck guns,
+nineteen barrels of powder, two men killed and six wounded; and had they
+not now got off, it was believed they must have been sunk before
+morning. At ten in the forenoon of the 31st they hove to, and began to
+splice their rigging, not a rope of which had escaped the shot of the
+enemy. The masts and yards were all sore wounded; and the carpenters had
+to work during the whole night, stopping-the shot-holes in the hull.
+They stowed away most of their guns in the hold, barred up the ports,
+hoisted in the launch and pinnace, and at noon steered away west under
+an easy sail, hoping to save their passage before the western monsoon
+set in; the carpenters being fully occupied in fishing the masts and
+yards, and the rest of the crew in mending the rigging. At six in the
+evening of the 31st May, 1721, the body of the island of Guam bore E.
+seven leagues distant, and they then took their departure; being in 15°
+20' N. designing now for China.
+
+The conduct of Captain Clipperton at Guam was certainly exceedingly
+erroneous. He ought on no account to have permitted the marquis to go on
+shore till he had received the money for his ransom, and all the
+provisions of which he stood in need. The marquis had before behaved
+very ill to him, and had no title to any favour; and if he had kept the
+marquis, the governor of Guam would not have had any opportunity of
+putting his schemes in execution. Clipperton committed also an egregious
+error in pretending to attack the town, and the ship in the harbour.
+Though drunkenness is rather an aggravation than an excuse for
+misconduct, yet it is to be considered that Clipperton was a mere
+sailor, who had not the benefit of a liberal education, and that he fell
+into this sad vice from disappointment and despair. On all occasions he
+had shewn a humane and even generous disposition, with the most
+inflexible honesty, and a constant regard to the interest of his owners.
+He is therefore much to be pitied, for having fled to the bottle under a
+load of misfortunes too heavy for him to bear.
+
+The voyage upon which they had now to enter was very dangerous, the run
+from Manilla to China being estimated at 400 leagues; besides that the
+distance they had now to sail was much greater. They had only received a
+very moderate addition to their former scanty stock of provisions; and
+their vessel had been so roughly handled in the late unfortunate affair,
+that they were very apprehensive she would not last out the voyage. On
+careful examination, she was found to be in a very shattered condition,
+having scarcely a whole timber in her upper works, and one of her
+_fashion pieces_ being shot through, which is a principal support of the
+after-part of the ship, they were obliged to strap her, to keep her
+together. As it blew pretty fresh, they durst not carry sail, and for
+nearly a week together had to scud almost under bare poles, through
+variable winds, bad weather, and a rough sea. This was a melancholy
+situation for the people, in seas with which they were little
+acquainted, and sailing by charts on which they could not depend. Yet
+they found the accounts and charts of Dampier much superior to those
+laid down by persons of much greater figure, so that without these they
+had hardly been able to have extricated themselves from their
+difficulties. The 24th June they were in sight of the _Bashee_ Islands,
+in lat. 20° 45' N. long. 121° 40' E. On the 31st they saw the
+_island-shoals_ of _Pralas_, in lat. 21° N. long. 116° 20' E. The 1st
+July they fell in with other islands, not laid down in any of their
+charts, which perplexed them sadly, not being able to form any certain
+judgment of their true course. They anchored under one of these islands
+in thirteen fathoms, and sent away one of their boats to endeavour to
+procure intelligence how Macao bore from them, that being the port to
+which they were bound. The pinnace returned on the 2d July, bringing a
+boat in which were three Chinese sailors, or fishermen, whom they could
+not understand, and all they could learn from them was, that Canton bore
+from them to the S.W.
+
+On the 3d July, finding they had got too far to leeward of Macao, and
+being unable to procure a pilot, they resolved to sail for _Amoy_, as
+the only course that was left them, and accordingly arrived before that
+port in the evening of the 5th; but being afraid to enter it in the
+night, they plied off and on till daybreak of the 6th. They here noticed
+great numbers of snakes in the sea, brought down by the rivers that
+empty themselves upon that coast. The entrance into the port of _Amoy_
+is sufficiently conspicuous, in consequence of a high mountain, on the
+top of which is a tower, or pagoda, which may be seen at the distance of
+twenty leagues out to sea, and has a small island immediately before the
+mouth of the bay. The river _Change-neu_[245] discharges itself here
+into the sea, forming a spacious bay about eight leagues in circuit,
+where ships may ride at anchor in great safety, the only difficulty
+being in getting into port, which they happily accomplished in the
+evening of the 6th July, being well pleased to find themselves once more
+in a place where they might hope to procure refreshments, and be able to
+repair their ship; or if that were impracticable, whence they might
+procure a passage home. Clipperton was as much rejoiced as the rest;
+for, having had his full share of afflictions and misfortunes at sea, he
+was happy in the prospect of securing a small sum of money for his own
+use, and sending home what belonged to the owners, if the ship were
+really past repairing, as his people reported.
+
+[Footnote 245: No name resembling _Amoy_ is to be found on the coast of
+China in any of our best maps, and the text gives no distinct indication
+of its situation. The river _Changeneu_ of the text, perhaps refers to
+_Tchang-tcheou_, a city in the province of Fokien, having a large bay in
+lat. 24° 30' N. long. 118° 15' E. and _Amoy_ may have been some
+corruption of the port of discharge at the mouth of the river which
+passes Tchang-tcheou.--E.]
+
+They had no sooner anchored in the port than ten custom-house officers
+were placed on board. At Amoy, as in most other ports in China, the
+customs are under the direction of a single mandarin, called the Hoppo,
+or Hoppou. The Chinese are justly reputed the craftiest people in the
+world; and it is their invariable maxim to appoint the cunningest man
+they can find to the office of hoppo. It may be added, that the people
+of Amoy are reputed to be less nice in the principles of honour and
+honesty even than any others in China. The first thing demanded by these
+custom-house officers was, what the ship was, and what was her business
+at this port. Clipperton made answer, that the ship belonged to the King
+of Great Britain, and had put in there from stress of weather, in order
+to obtain a supply of provisions and other necessaries. The officers now
+demanded an exact account of the number of men and guns, the nature and
+amount of the cargo, and the time they intended to stay, all of which
+they set down in writing, and then departed.
+
+Next morning the men mutinied, and insisted that Clipperton should pay
+them their prize-money immediately, as the Success was in no condition
+to proceed to sea. The man who made this demand was one John Dennison;
+and when Mr Taylor interposed in behalf of the captain, one Edward
+Boreman told him he had better desist, unless he had a mind to have a
+brace of bullets through his head. There was now an end of all
+regularity on board, the authority of the captain being completely
+overthrown. The country people supplied the ship with abundance of rice,
+with some cattle and fowls, together with wood and water, for which they
+were paid. On the 12th the officers went ashore to wait upon the hoppo,
+who had a fine palace. He treated them with great civility, giving them
+leave to anchor in the harbour, and to remain there till the adverse
+monsoon was over; but for this he demanded 1700 dollars as port-charges,
+equal to near £400 sterling, and soon afterward received that sum in
+ready money.
+
+It may be remembered that Mr Mitchell went out from. England as second
+captain under Clipperton. On his going to Brazil, he was succeeded by Mr
+Davidson, who was slain in the unfortunate affair at Guam; to whom Mr
+Cook succeeded as second captain. He now demanded to receive thirty
+shares of the prize-money in that capacity, in which he was supported by
+the men, whom he courted by a continual compliance with all their
+humours. Captain Clipperton and the rest of the officers, seeing the
+turn matters were likely to take, were very desirous that some allowance
+should be reserved for the officers who were absent, and had been taken
+prisoners, and for Mr Hendrie and Mr Dod, who had joined them from the
+Speedwell: but all their endeavours were fruitless, as the men would not
+listen to any such allowances. While these disputes were going on, the
+men went ashore as they pleased, without asking leave; and when the
+captain endeavoured to correct this licence, the whole company stood
+out, and would not submit to controul. After this every thing fell into
+confusion, and the men refused to work till they should receive their
+prize-money. They even applied to the chief mandarin of the place,
+styled _Hyhuug_ by the Chinese, to interpose his authority for obliging
+their captain to comply with their demands. This magistrate then
+summoned Captain Clipperton to appear before him, and demanded to know
+the reason why he refused to give the men satisfaction; on which the
+captain produced the articles, which contained expressly that they were
+not to receive their prize-money till their return to London. But
+Captain Cook, as he was now styled, gave quite a different account of
+this matter to the mandarin; on which a guard of soldiers was sent
+aboard the Success, with a peremptory order to Captain Clipperton
+immediately to settle the shares, and to pay them to the men, with which
+he was forced to comply.
+
+This distribution was accordingly made on the 16th September, pursuant
+to the order of the chief mandarin; and as no allowance was reserved for
+those who had been made prisoners, or for the representatives of those
+who had died, or the two gentlemen who formerly served in the Speedwell,
+the prize-money stood thus:
+
+   The share of money and silver plate, dollars     280
+   The share of gold,                               100
+   The share of jewels,                              39
+                                                   -----
+   Total share of a foremast-man,                   419
+
+Which, at 4s. 8d. the dollar, amounted to £97:15:4 sterling. According
+to this distribution: The share of the captain amounted to £1466, 10s.
+The second captain had £733, 5s. The captain of marines, the lieutenants
+of the ship, and the surgeon, had each £488:16:8. Although Captain Cook
+and his associates were thus able to carry their point, yet Captain
+Clipperton prevailed on the mandarin to set apart one half of the cargo
+for the benefit of the owners; which amounted, in money, silver, gold,
+and jewels, to between six and seven thousand pounds. This was
+afterwards shipped at Macao in a Portuguese ship, called the Queen of
+Angels, commanded by Don Francisco de la Vero. This ship was
+unfortunately burnt at Rio de Janeiro, on the coast of Brazil, on the
+6th June, 1722; so that the owners, after deducting salvage, only
+received £1800.
+
+The people and mandarins at Amoy have so conducted themselves for a long
+time, that, even among their own countrymen, this port has the
+appellation of _Hiamuin booz_, or Amoy the roguish. The fishermen on the
+coast, when they meet any European ship that seems intended for that
+port, pronounce these words with a very significant air; but, for want
+of understanding the language, or perhaps from confidence in their own
+prudence, this warning is seldom attended to. The custom of this port is
+to disarm every ship that enters it, sending two frigates or armed
+vessels, called _chan-pans_, full of men, to ride close by the vessel,
+to ensure the execution of all orders from the _hoppo_ and chief
+mandarin. Besides the enormous imposition under the name of port
+charges, already mentioned, they have other strange methods of getting
+money. Thus, though the small craft of the country are at liberty to
+carry all sorts of provisions on board for sale, yet every one of these
+must in the first place go to one of the _chan-pans_, and pay there a
+tax or consideration for leave to go to the strange vessel. By this
+means, though provisions are here very plentiful, and ought therefore to
+be cheap, the price is enhanced at least a third. The mandarins have
+also a practice of sending presents of wine, provisions, and expensive
+curiosities, to the captain and other officers; of all which, when the
+ship is ready to sail, they send an exact memorial with the prices
+charged, the last article being so much for the clerk drawing up the
+account; and all this must be discharged in money or commodities, before
+their arms and ammunition are returned.
+
+During a stay of ten weeks at this port, they sufficiently experienced
+all the artifices of this covetous and fraudulent people, from whom
+Captain Clipperton had no way to defend himself, and was therefore
+obliged to submit to all their demands. Towards the end of September,
+the season and their inclinations concurred to deliver them from this
+place; for by this time, even the common men began to be weary of the
+people, who shewed themselves finished cheats in every thing. On the
+25th September, their arms and ammunition were restored, and that same
+day the Success weighed from the harbour, going out into the road or
+gulf, in order to proceed for Macao, to have the ship surveyed, as the
+men insisted she was not in a condition for the voyage home. Captain
+Clipperton affirmed the contrary, well knowing that the men insisted on
+this point merely to justify their own conduct, and to avoid being
+punished in England for their misbehaviour in China.
+
+They weighed anchor from the Bay of Amoy, in the province of
+_Tonkin_,[246] on the 30th September, and anchored in the road of
+_Macao_ on the 4th October. This place had been an hundred and fifty
+years in the hands of the Portuguese, and had formerly been one of the
+most considerable places of trade in all China, but has now fallen much
+into decay. The way in which the Portuguese became possessed of this
+place gives a good specimen of Chinese generosity. In prosecuting their
+trade with China from India and Malacca, being often overtaken by
+storms, many of their ships had been cast away for want of a harbour,
+among the islands about Macao, on which they requested to have some
+place of safety allowed them in which to winter. The Chinese accordingly
+gave them this rocky island, then inhabited by robbers, whom they
+expelled. At first they were only allowed to build thatched cottages;
+but, by bribing the mandarins, they were permitted in the sequel to
+erect stone houses, and even to build forts. One of these, called _the
+Fort of the Bar_, is at the mouth of the harbour, and terminates at a
+rock called _Appenka_, where there is a hermitage of the order of St
+Augustine. There is another fort on the top of a hill, called the Fort
+of the Mountain; also another high fort, called _Nuestra Senhora de
+Guia_. The city of Macao stands on a peninsula, having a strong wall
+built across the isthmus, with a gate in the middle, through which the
+Chinese pass out and in at pleasure, but it is death for a Portuguese to
+pass that way.
+
+[Footnote 246: This surely is an error for Fo-kien. Amoy has been before
+stated in the text as N.E. from Macao, whereas the _kingdom_ of Tonquin
+is S.W. from that port.--E.]
+
+Some travellers have reported that the Portuguese were sovereigns of
+Macao, as of other places in India: But they never were, and the Chinese
+are too wise a people to suffer any thing of the kind. Macao certainly
+is as fine a city, and even finer, than could be expected, considering
+its untoward situation: It is also regularly and strongly fortified,
+having upwards of 200 pieces of brass cannon upon its walls. Yet, with
+all these, it can only defend itself against strangers. The Chinese ever
+were, and ever will be, masters of Macao, and that without firing a gun
+or striking a blow. They have only to shut up that gate and place a
+guard there, and Macao is undone; and this they have actually done
+frequently. Without receiving provisions from the adjacent country, the
+inhabitants of this city cannot subsist for a day; and besides, it is so
+surrounded by populous islands, and the Chinese are here so completely
+masters of the sea, that the Portuguese at Macao might be completely
+starved on the slightest difference with the Chinese. The Portuguese
+have indeed the government over their own people within the walls of
+this city; yet Macao is strictly and properly a Chinese city: For there
+is a Chinese governor resident on the spot, together with a hoppo or
+commissioner of the customs; and these Chinese mandarins, with all their
+officers and servants, are maintained at the expence of the city, which
+has also to bear the charges of the Portuguese government.[247]
+
+[Footnote 247: The East India Company found all this to be true a few
+years ago, when its Indian government thought to have taken Macao from
+the Portuguese. Had this account of the matter been read and understood,
+they would not have unnecessarily incurred a vast expence, and suffered
+no small disgrace at Canton.--E.]
+
+In spite of all this, the Portuguese inhabitants were formerly very
+rich, owing to the great trade they carried on with Japan, which is now
+in a great measure lost. Yet, being so near Canton, and allowed to
+frequent the two annual fairs at that place, and to make trading voyages
+at other times, they still find a way to subsist, and that is all, as
+the prodigious presents they have to make on all occasions to the
+Chinese mandarins, consume the far greater part of their profits. Each
+of their vessels, on going up to Canton, has in the first place to pay
+£100 sterling for leave to trade. They are next obliged to make a
+considerable present, for permission to have their goods brought on
+board by the Chinese, to whom they must not only pay ready money for all
+they buy, but have sometimes to advance the price beforehand for a year.
+After all this, they have to make another present for leave to depart,
+at least double the amount of what they formerly paid for liberty to
+trade; and they have to pay heavy duties to the emperor for every thing
+they buy or sell, besides their enormous presents to his ministers.
+
+
+
+
+SECTION IV.
+
+_Residence of Captain Clipperton at Macao, and Returns from thence to
+England._
+
+
+On entering the port of Macao in the Success, Captain Clipperton saluted
+the fortress, which compliment was returned. He then went on shore,
+where he prevailed on the captain of a Portuguese ship of war, formerly
+mentioned, to carry the property belonging to his owners to Brazil. At
+this place, the crew of the Success found themselves considerably at a
+loss, as the Portuguese commander declared himself entirely in favour of
+Captain Clipperton. Captain Cook, therefore, and another of the officers
+of the Success, went up to Canton, to consult with Mr Winder, supercargo
+of an English East Indiaman, and son to one of the principal owners, as
+to what should be done with, the Success. On their return, the ship was
+surveyed, condemned, and sold for 4000 dollars, which was much less than
+her worth. This was, however, no fault in Captain Clipperton, who, to
+shew that he still adhered to his former opinion, that the ship was fit
+to proceed to England, agreed with the persons who purchased her for a
+passage to Batavia, a convincing proof that he did not believe her in
+any danger of foundering at sea.
+
+The ship being sold, the crew naturally considered themselves at liberty
+to shift for themselves, and to use their best endeavours each to save
+what little remained to him, after their unfortunate expedition. All
+were satisfied that Captain Mitchell, with his crew and cargo, had
+either gone to the bottom or fallen into the hands of the Spaniards, so
+that they had no hopes of any farther dividend from that quarter; yet it
+was some consolation that they were so near the English factory at
+Canton, and as six dollars were required for a passage to that place in
+one of the Chinese boats, twenty of them agreed to go there immediately,
+in hopes of getting a passage from thence to England. Mr Taylor, one of
+the mates of the Success, was of the number: But before the boat set
+sail, he had some presentiment of danger, and chose rather to lose his
+money, by waiting for another opportunity. He had reason to be satisfied
+with himself for this conduct; as he soon learnt that the boat tad been
+taken by a pirate, and the people stript of all their property. After a
+short stay at Macao, Mr Taylor had an opportunity of going up to Canton
+in an armed boat along with a mandarin, for which he and the rest of the
+crew belonging to the Success, who went along with him, paid twenty
+dollars each. In their passage up, they had satisfactory proof that in
+some cases there may be frugality in expence, as they saw a pirate take
+a boat in sight of that in which was the mandarin. This plainly shewed
+that the government winks at these things, perhaps deeming it good
+policy to raise thereby a considerable revenue, partly by presents from
+the pirates, and partly by sums paid by merchants and passengers for
+protection. From this, and many other circumstances which might be
+adduced, the boasted wisdom of the Chinese is nothing more than the
+science of dexterously hiding their robberies from the inspection of the
+law: In which, perhaps, they are as much exceeded by some northern
+nations as in the use of the compass, of which they pretend to be the
+original inventors, and perhaps with justice; but both in the management
+of the compass, and in this political trade of pirating, they are
+equally clumsy.
+
+Mr Taylor and his company arrived at the English factory in Canton on
+the 4th November, where they were well received, and promised all
+assistance for getting home. There were at this time ships ready to
+sail, first for several ports in India and then for Europe. The captains
+of these vessels, on being solicited by the gentlemen of the factory to
+take Captain Clipperton's men on board, agreed to carry them for five
+pounds a man, which they all accordingly paid, esteeming it a very great
+favour. Mr Taylor and two or three more embarked in the Maurice, Captain
+Peacock, then riding at Wanapo, [Wampoa,] about three leagues below
+Canton, the place where European ships lie; and the rest of the company
+were distributed among the other ships. They sailed on the 9th, in
+company with the Macclesfield, an English East-Indiaman, and the
+House-of-Austria, belonging to Ostend. Mr Taylor arrived safely at
+Batavia in the month of December; sailed thence by the Cape and St
+Helena, and arrived in London in May 1722. The rest of the company
+returned also, some sooner and some later.
+
+As for Captain Mitchell, who was sent to Brazil with a small crew, he
+was never more heard of, having probably been destroyed at the island
+of Velas, where he went ashore to procure fresh provisions. This has
+generally been considered as the greatest blemish in the management of
+Captain Clipperton, but I confess without just cause, in my opinion; as
+the great stress laid on that measure by Captain Rogers, might very well
+have induced Captain Clipperton to try what might be done in this way,
+especially as his owners had very strongly recommended the account of
+Captain Rogers to be his rule and guide. I also think the proposal in
+itself was very reasonable, and such as an officer who had the good of
+the expedition at heart had good grounds for trying. It was well known
+that the prize goods could produce little or nothing in the South Sea,
+as the Spanish governors demanded such exorbitant sums for liberty to
+trade, that no advantage could be derived from such a commerce, either
+in buying or selling. He knew also that it was to little purpose
+carrying these goods to Europe; and it was certainly much preferable to
+send them to a place where they might sell to advantage, and where the
+produce might be so invested as to procure a considerable profit on the
+voyage from Brazil to London. The vessel in which Captain Mitchell
+sailed was very fit for the purpose, and every way well provided; and
+having a crew of thirteen English and ten negroes, was quite sufficient
+for the navigation.
+
+Captain Clipperton sailed from Macao to Batavia, in his own ship the
+Success, after she was sold; and got a passage to Europe in a Dutch
+ship. He arrived at Galway in Ireland, where he left his family, in
+June, 1722; being then in a very bad state of health, partly occasioned
+by his great fatigues, but chiefly through the concern he was under for
+the loss sustained by his owners in this unfortunate enterprize. It may
+be objected, that he ought to have returned from Holland to England, to
+give his owners the best account in his power respecting the events of
+the voyage. But, as he sent home their moiety of the profits in the
+Portugueze ship, which, had it not been destroyed by the way, had nearly
+covered the expence of fitting out the Success, taking in the money she
+sold for; and if we consider the reduced state of his health when he
+went to Galway, where he did not live above a week, he may well be
+excused for this step.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII.
+
+VOYAGE ROUND THE WORLD BY CAPTAIN GEORGE SHELVOCKE, IN 1719-1722.[248]
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+
+In the introduction to the former voyage, a sufficient account has been
+given of the motives on which the expedition was founded, and the
+original plan of acting under an imperial commission; together with
+motives for changing this plan, and the reason of advancing Captain
+Clipperton to the chief command. In the new scheme of the voyage,
+Captain Shelvocke retained the command of the Speedwell, carrying
+twenty-four guns and 106 men, Mr Simon Hately being his second captain,
+an officer who has a good character given of him in the account of the
+former voyage by Captain Rogers. The marines were under the command of
+Captain William Betagh. Captain Shelvocke has himself written an account
+of the expedition, and another was published by Captain Betagh, so that
+the following narrative is composed from both. Shelvocke's narrative is,
+strictly speaking, an apology for his own conduct, yet contains
+abundance of curious particulars, written in an entertaining style, and
+with an agreeable spirit; while the other is written with much acrimony,
+and contains heavy charges against Captain Shelvocke, yet contains many
+curious circumstances.--_Harris_.
+
+[Footnote 248: Harris, I. 198. Callender, III. 502.]
+
+This is one of the best written voyages we have hitherto met with, yet
+extends rather to considerable length, considering its relative
+importance. On the present occasion, therefore, it has been endeavoured
+to lop off as many of its redundances as could be conveniently done
+without injury, yet leaving every circumstance of any interest or
+importance. The principal omission, or abbreviation rather, on the
+present occasion, is the leaving out several controversial matters,
+inserted by Harris from the account of this voyage by Betagh; which
+might have sufficient interest among contemporaries, a few years after
+the unfortunate issue of this misconducted enterprise, but are now of no
+importance, near a century later.--Ed.
+
+
+
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Narrative of the Voyage from England to the South Sea._
+
+
+Sailing from Plymouth on the 13th February, 1719, in company with the
+Success, we kept company no longer than to the 19th, when, between nine
+and ten at night, we had a violent storm at S.W. which increased so,
+that by eleven we were under bare poles. At midnight a sea struck us on
+our quarter, which stove in one of our dead lights on the quarter and
+another on our stern, by which we shipped a vast quantity of water
+before we could get them again fastened up, and we were a considerable
+time under great apprehension of foundering. On the 20th we could not
+see the Success; and this storm so terrified the greatest part of the
+crew, that seventy of them were resolved to bear away for England,
+alleging that the ship was so very crank she would never be able to
+carry us to the South Sea. But by the resolution of the officers they
+were brought back to their duty.
+
+As the Canaries were the first place of rendezvous, we continued our
+course for these islands, where we arrived on the 17th March, and
+cruised there the time appointed by our instructions.[249] We next
+sailed for the Cape de Verde Islands, and arrived at Maio on the 14th
+April.[250] A little before arriving here, Turner Stevens[251] the
+gunner very gravely proposed to me and the rest of the officers to
+cruize in the Red Sea; as there could be no harm in robbing the
+Mahometans, whereas the Spaniards were good Christians, and it was a sin
+to injure them. I ordered him immediately into confinement, after which
+he became outrageous, threatening to blow up the ship. Wherefore I
+discharged him at his own request, and left also here on shore my chief
+mate, who had challenged and fought with Mr Brooks, my first lieutenant.
+
+[Footnote 249: Clipperton arrived there on the 5th, and sailed thence on
+the 15th of March.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 250: Clipperton came to St Vincent on the 24th March, and
+cruized in that neighbourhood for ten days, so that he must have sailed
+about the 31st, at least a fortnight before the arrival of
+Shelvocke.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 251: Called Charles Turner by Betagh.--E.]
+
+On the 18th, we went to _Port Praya_, in the island of St Jago, but
+finding nothing here but fair promises, I resolved to proceed to the
+island of St Catharine on the coast of Brazil, in lat. 20° 30' S.[252]
+in hopes of obtaining every thing necessary for our passage into the
+South Sea, as, according to the account of it by Frezier, it abounds in
+all the necessaries of life, such especially as are requisite in long
+voyages. We sailed therefore from Port Praya on the 20th of April, and
+had a very bad passage, as we were twenty-one days before we could pass
+the equinoctial. White between the two tradewinds, we had usually slight
+breezes, varying all round the compass, and sometimes heavy squalls of
+wind, with thunder, lightning, and rain. In short, the most variable
+weather that can be conceived, insomuch that we were fifty-five days
+between St Jago and St Catharines. On the 4th June we made Cape Frio,
+bearing W. seven leagues off our lat. by observation, 23° 41' S.[253] On
+the 5th we met and spoke a ship, to which I sent Captain Hately to
+enquire the news on the coast, and gave him money to buy tobacco, as the
+Success had our stock on board. She was a Portuguese from Rio de Janeiro
+bound to Pernambuco, and had no tobacco; but Hately had laid out my
+money in unnecessary trifles, alleging they would sell for double the
+money at the next port.
+
+[Footnote 252: This island is in 27° 10' S.]
+
+[Footnote 253: Cape Frio is in 22° 33' S.]
+
+[Captain Betagh gives a very different account of this matter, asserting
+that Shelvocke hoisted imperial colours and made the Portuguese ship
+bring to, on which Hately went aboard with a boat's crew well armed, and
+put the Portuguese captain in such a fright, that he not only sent all
+sorts of refreshments on board the Speedwell, but a dozen pieces of silk
+flowered with gold and silver, worth about three pounds a yard, several
+dozens of China plates and basons, a Japan cabinet, and three hundred
+moidores in gold; ninety-six of which were afterwards found on Hately,
+when made prisoner by the Spaniards, when he had nearly been put to
+death for piracy on their account.][254]
+
+[Footnote 254: It is almost unnecessary to point out, that this
+paragraph is an addition by Harris to the narrative of Shelvocke,
+extracted from the journal of Betagh.--E.]
+
+We anchored at the island of St Catharine on the 23d June, where the
+carpenter went ashore with a gang to fell trees, and saw them into
+planks. The captain and inhabitants of the island came off to us daily
+with fresh provisions, which saved our sea-stores while we lay here. I
+also bought twenty-one beeves, 200 salted drom-fish of large size, and
+150 bushels of cassado meal, called by the Portuguese _farina de fao_.
+This is about as fine as our oatmeal, and from it a very hearty food is
+prepared with little trouble. I also bought 160 bushels of _calavances_,
+partly for money at a dollar the bushel, and partly in exchange for
+salt, measure for measure; and likewise provided a quantity of tobacco
+for the crew.
+
+The account given of this island by Frezier is very exact, only that he
+takes no notice of an island between the island of _Gall_ and the
+continent of Brazil, nor of a reef of rocks. To arrive at the proper
+anchoring place at this island of St Catharine, it is necessary to
+proceed in the channel between that island and the continent till within
+or near two small nameless islands, over against the northernmost of
+which is the watering place on the island of St Catharine, near the
+entrance of a salt-water creek, opposite to which you may safely anchor
+in six or seven fathoms on fine grey sand. The isle of St Catharine is
+about eight leagues and a half long, but no where exceeds two leagues
+broad; and at one place the channel between it and the continent is only
+a quarter of a mile broad. The island is covered all over with
+impassable woods, except where cleared for the plantations. Even the
+smallest island about it is covered in like manner with a great variety
+of trees, between which the ground is entirely covered with thorns and
+brambles, which hinder all access; and the main land of Brazil may be
+justly termed a vast continued wilderness. Sassafras, so much valued in
+Europe, is so common here that we laid in a good quantity for fuel. It
+has great abundance of oranges, both China and Seville, lemons, citrons,
+limes, bananas, cabbage-palms, melons of all sorts, and potatoes. It has
+also very large and good sugar-canes, of which they make little use for
+want of utensils, so that the little sugar, molasses and rum they have
+is very dear. They have very little game, though the woods are full of
+parrots, which are good eating. These birds always fly in pairs, though
+often several hundreds in a flock. Maccaos, cockatoes, plovers, and a
+variety of other birds of curious colours and various shapes, are to be
+seen in abundance; particularly one somewhat larger than a thrush,
+having a spur on the joint of each wing. Flamingoes are often seen here
+in great numbers, of a fine scarlet colour, and appear very beautiful
+while flying. This bird is about the size of a heron, and not unlike it
+in shape.
+
+The fishery is here abundant, as fish of several excellent sorts are in
+great plenty, and there is the best convenience almost everywhere for
+hauling the seine. All the creeks and bays are well stocked with
+mullets, large rays, grantors, cavallies, and drum-fish, so named from
+the noise they make when followed into shallow water, and there taken.
+Some of them weigh twenty or thirty pounds each, their scales being as
+large as crown pieces. The Portuguese call them _moroes_. The salt-water
+creek formerly mentioned may be gone up three or four miles, to be near
+the watering-place; and every rock or stone, even the roots of the
+mangrove trees, afford a delicious small green oyster. Likewise on the
+rocks at the sea-side there are _sea-eggs_, which resemble _dock-burrs_,
+but usually three or four times as large, of a sea-green or purple
+colour. In the inside they are divided into partitions, like oranges,
+each cell containing a yellow substance, which is eaten raw, and
+exceeds, in my opinion, all the shell-fish I ever tasted. They have
+prawns of extraordinary size, and we sometimes caught the _sea-horse_ in
+our nets. On the savannahs of Areziliba, on the continent opposite the
+southern end of St Catharine, they have great numbers of black cattle,
+some of which we had from thence at a very reasonable price.
+
+The Portuguese on this island are a parcel of banditti, who have taken
+refuge here from the more strictly governed parts of Brazil. Emanuel
+Mansa, who was captain of the island in the time of Frezier, was still
+their chief. They enjoy the blessings of a fertile country and wholesome
+air, and stand in need of nothing from other countries except clothing.
+They have fire-arms sufficient for their use, and have often need of
+them, being greatly infected with tigers; for which reason every house
+has many dogs to destroy these ravenous animals, which yet often make
+great havock. I have been told that a tiger has killed eight or ten dogs
+in a night: But when any make their appearance in the day, they seldom
+escape, as the inhabitants are fond of the diversion of hunting them.
+These animals are so numerous, that it is quite common to see the prints
+of their paws on the sandy beach. We could not see any of the fine
+dwelling-houses mentioned by Frezier; neither have they any place that
+can be called a town, nor any kind of fortification, except the woods,
+which are a secure retreat from any enemy that may attack them. I cannot
+say much about the Indians of those parts, as I never saw above two or
+three of them.
+
+On the 2d July we saw a large ship at anchor, under Parrots Island,
+about five miles from where we lay. After securing the watering-place,
+and what we had there ashore, I sent the launch, well manned and armed,
+under a lieutenant, to see what she was. The launch returned about noon,
+reporting that she was the _Ruby_, formerly an English man-of-war, but
+now one of the squadron under Martinet, and commanded by Mons. La
+Jonqniere. She was in, the Spanish service, but most of her officers and
+crew were French, to the number of about 420. Yet they had no intention
+to molest us, having quitted the South Sea on report of a rupture
+between France and Spain. M. La Jonquiere was a man of strict honour,
+and sent me intimation of his good intentions, with an invitation to
+dinner, which I accepted, and was well entertained. About this time I
+heard that Hately had plundered the Portuguese ship, formerly mentioned,
+of 100 moidores, and had distributed part of the money among the boat's
+crew, to engage them to secrecy. I examined into this as strictly as
+possible, intending, if found guilty, to have delivered him up to the
+captain of St Catharine's, but I could not get sufficient proof. This
+man also committed so many vile actions in the island of St Catharine,
+that oar people were often in the utmost danger, from the resentment of
+the Portuguese; which bad conduct I could neither prevent nor punish, as
+he had become a great favourite with my mutinous crew.
+
+M. La Jonquiere, with several of his officers and passengers, came on
+board the Speedwell to dine with me, on the 6th July. While they were on
+board, Hudson my boatswain raised a mutiny, which was easily quelled by
+the assistance of the French gentlemen: But the boatswain was sent home
+in the French ship. On the 15th July, we saw a large ship bearing in
+for the harbour; but on discovering us, she turned out again. This
+circumstance alarmed M. La Jonquiere, suspecting she might be our
+consort, so that he put to sea next morning. The large ship appeared
+again on the 25th under French colours, being the Solomon of St Malo of
+forty guns and 160 men, commanded by M. Dumain Girard, bound for Peru
+and Chili.
+
+At this time great heart-burnings arose in my crew: for, having heard
+that the people on board the Duke and Duchess had been indifferently
+treated in regard to their prize-money when they got home, they resolved
+to secure themselves in time. With this view, and by the advice of
+Matthew Stewart, chief-mate, they drew up a paper of articles respecting
+plunder, and sent me a letter insisting on these articles being made the
+rule of our voyage; to which at last I was obliged to agree, rather than
+suffer them to proceed in a piratical manner.
+
+On the 3d August the St Francisco Zavier came into the harbour, a
+Portuguese man of war of forty guns and 300 men, bound from Lisbon for
+Macao in China, commanded by Mons. Riviere, a Frenchman. We departed
+from the island of St Catharine on the 9th August. Its northern point
+being in lat. 27° 20' S. and long. 50° W. from the Lizard.[255] I kept
+the lead constantly sounding all along the coast of Patagonia, and had
+regular soundings. From the lat. of 40° to 30° 38' both S. we frequently
+saw great shoals of seals and penguins, which were always attended by
+flocks of pintadoes, birds about the size of pigeons. The French call
+these birds _damiers_, as their black and white feathers on their back
+and wings are disposed like the squares of a draught-board. These were
+also attended by albatrosses, the largest of all sea-fowl, some of them
+extending their wings twelve or thirteen feet from tip to tip. While
+passing the mouth of the Rio. Plata, the sea was covered with prodigious
+quantities of large seaweed, which often greatly incommoded us and
+deadened our way. On getting farther south we were freed from this
+inconvenience; after which we saw abundance of things floating on the
+surface of the sea, like white snakes. We took some of these up, but
+could not perceive them to have any appearance of life, neither had they
+the shape of any kind of animal, being only a long cylinder of a white
+jelly-like substance, perhaps the spawn of some large fish.
+
+[Footnote 255: Only 27° S. and 48° 30' W. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+As we advanced to the southward, the appetites of our people increased
+with the cold, which occasioned disputes in the ship. Even at my own
+table, Captain Betagh of the marines insisted on a larger allowance in
+such coarse terms, that I confined him till he wrote me a submissive
+letter, on which I restored him. But this squabble constrained me to
+allow an extraordinary meal to the people daily, either of flour or
+calavances; which reduced our stock of provisions, and consumed our
+wood and water, proving afterwards of great inconvenience. Whales,
+grampuses, and other fish of monstrous size, are in such vast numbers on
+the coast of Patagonia, that they were often offensive to us, coming so
+close to us that it seemed impossible to avoid striking them on every
+scud of a sea, and almost stifling us with the stench of their breaths,
+when they blew close to windward. Being ignorant of the Greenland
+fishery, I cannot pretend to say whether that trade might not be carried
+on here; but this I may venture to affirm, that the navigation here is
+safer, and I am apt to believe it has a greater chance of being
+successful.[256]
+
+[Footnote 256: This southern whale-fishery is now carried on to a
+considerable extent.--E.]
+
+On the 19th September, about midnight, perceiving the water all at once
+to be discoloured, we sounded, and had 25 fathoms, on which we stood out
+from the land, but did not deepen our water in five leagues. This bank
+must lie very near the entrance into the Straits of Magellan. On this
+bank we saw great numbers of blubbers, appearing like the tops of
+umbrellas, curiously streaked with all sorts of colours, being an
+entirely different species from any I had ever seen before. We now
+steered for the Straits of _Le Maire_, and met with very foggy weather
+on approaching the coast of _Terra del Fuego_. The fog cleared up on the
+23d September, when we had sight of stupendous mountains on that
+southern land, entirely covered with snow. The nearest point of land was
+at least eight leagues from us, in the S.W. but before we could
+ascertain our situation the mist returned. At four next morning,
+proceeding under easy sail to the S.E. it proved very clear at
+day-break, and I found we had fallen in with the land about five leagues
+N.W. from the straits of Le Maire. We had now a full, but melancholy
+prospect of the most desolate country that can well be conceived,
+appearing a congeries of chains of mountains in succession, one behind
+the other, perpetually cloathed in snow.
+
+Hitherto we had not been sensible of any current, either favourable or
+adverse, after getting to the south of the Rio Plata. But this afternoon
+we were hurried with incredible rapidity into the straits of Le Maire;
+and when we had gained about the middle of the passage, the tide
+slackened. On sounding we had twenty-seven fathoms on a rocky bottom. We
+had a dear view of _Staten-land_, which yields a most uncomfortable
+prospect of a surprising height, quite covered with snow to the very
+wash of the sea, so that it seems more like a white cloud than firm
+land. These straits seemed to answer well to the map of Frezier; being
+about seven leagues through and six wide, and extend almost due north
+and south. Now the return tide rushed upon us with a violence equal to
+that which brought us in, and it was astonishing with what rapidity we
+were driven again to the north, though we had a fresh gale at N.W. so
+that we seemed to advance six knots by the log; whence I judged this
+tide ran not less than ten knots. In short, we were carried quite out of
+the straits to the north in about an hour. Upon this shift of tide there
+arose such a short sea, and so lofty at the same time, that we
+alternately dipped our bowsprit and poop-lanterns into the water; our
+ship all the while labouring most violently, and refusing to answer the
+helm. The tide shifted again at midnight, and we shot through the
+straits, steering S. with a brisk gale at N.W. without seeing the land
+distinctly on either side: And, in the morning, had a good offing to the
+southward.
+
+We found it very cold before we got thus far; but now we began to feel
+the utmost extremity of coldness. The bleak western winds had of
+themselves been sufficiently piercing; but these were always accompanied
+by snow or sleet, which beat continually on our sails and rigging, cased
+all our masts, yards, and ropes with ice, and rendered our sails almost
+useless. We had been so much accustomed to most severe storms, that we
+thought the weather tolerable when we could carry a reefed main-sail; as
+we were often for two or three days together lying-to under bare poles,
+exposed to the shocks of prodigious waves, more mountainous than any I
+had ever seen. We now sensibly felt the benefit of our awning, without
+which we could scarcely have lived. The wind continued to rage without
+intermission from the westward, by which we were driven to the latitude
+of 61° 30' S. and had such continued misty weather, that we were under
+perpetual apprehension of running foul of ice islands: But, thank God,
+we escaped that danger, though under frequent alarms from fog banks and
+other false appearances. Though the days were long, we could seldom get
+sight of the sun, so that we had only one observation for the variation
+in all this passage, which was in lat. 60° 37' S. 5° W. of the straits
+of Le Maire, when we found it 22° 6' E. On the 1st October, as we were
+furling the main-sail, one William Camell, cried out that his hands and
+fingers were so benumbed that he could not hold himself: And, before
+those near could assist him, he fell down and was drowned. On the 22d
+October, our fore-top-mast was carried away, and we rigged another next
+day. Having contrary winds from the time we passed the straits of Le
+Maire, with the most uncomfortable weather, we made our way very slowly
+to the west and northwards, the hopes of getting soon into a wanner and
+better climate supporting us under our many miseries.
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_Proceedings in the South Sea, till Ship-wrecked on the Island of Juan
+Fernandez._
+
+At length, on the 14th November at noon, our spirits were cheared by
+seeing the coast of Chili; yet here we found ourselves under very great
+difficulties. Our tedious passage and extraordinary consumption of
+provisions, had so reduced our wood and water, and even our food, that
+it was necessary to repair to some place where our wants might be
+supplied; but it was difficult to resolve where that might be done. We
+first tried Narborough island, but finding the road unsafe, sailed for
+the mouth of St Domingo river on the continent, where we had
+twenty-eight fathoms, shoaling as we advanced from eighteen to less than
+five as fast as a man could heave the lead. Finding this place too
+hazardous, we stood out to sea, and were blown farther north than we
+designed. Being greatly at a loss where to procure wood and water, one
+Joseph de la Fontaine, a Frenchman, proposed going to the island of
+Chiloe, assuring us that the towns of _Chaiao_ and _Calibuco_, the
+former on the island and the latter on the continent, were rich places,
+where we could not fail of procuring whatever we wanted. Cliacao was, he
+said, the usual residence of the governor, and at Calibuco was a wealthy
+college of Jesuits, having considerable magazines, always well stocked
+with provisions of all kinds. This person at the same time insinuated
+among the people, that our expedition would probably turn out
+unfortunate, if we passed this place, as Captain Clipperton must by this
+time have alarmed the coast, in consequence of which there would be an
+embargo on all ships trading to leeward.
+
+My chief inducement for making an attempt on Chiloe was to procure such
+additional supply of provisions, as might enable us, in case the coast
+were already alarmed, to retire to some unfrequented island, to remain
+till the Spaniards should suppose we had abandoned the South Sea; after
+which we could resume our cruize, when they were under no apprehensions
+of being molested. Accordingly, on the 30th November, we entered the
+channel which divides the island of Chiloe from the main land of Chili,
+and stood in for the harbour of Chacao under French colours, intending
+to have attacked the towns of Chacao and Calibuco by surprise. Our
+pilot, however, seemed as much a stranger to the navigation here as I
+was, and as the wind began to blow fresh with thick weather, I came to
+anchor in thirteen fathoms, at ten in the morning, between the point of
+_Carelampo_ and the small island of Pedro Nunez. Soon after coming to
+anchor, the tide made outwards with prodigious rapidity, and the wind
+increased greatly, between which the sea became very boisterous, all the
+channel in which we lay appearing one continued breach or surf. Our ship
+consequently made a vast strain on her cable, which parted at two in the
+afternoon, and we could have no hopes to recover our anchor, as the buoy
+had been staved and sunk about an hour before we were thus set adrift. I
+did not think it adviseable to risk another anchor, and therefore
+immediately crossed over for the island of Chiloe, in a boisterous gale
+with thick rainy weather, surrounded on all hands with seeming shoals,
+and in a manner bewildered in an unknown navigation. When within a mile
+of Chiloe, we ranged along shore to the southward,[257] in hope of
+discovering the town of Chacao. We passed two commodious bays, which had
+no appearance of any town, and came to a point of land marked by a high
+pyramidal rock. After getting round this point, we found ourselves
+entirely out of the tideway, and quite sheltered from all other
+inconveniences, and came therefore to anchor opposite a cross on the
+north side of the harbour, having just sufficient day-light to enable us
+to get into this place of shelter.
+
+[Footnote 257: The direction was more probably to the eastward--E.]
+
+Next morning, I sent the second lieutenant, in the pinnace well manned
+and armed, to look out for the two towns; and sent at the same time Mr
+Hately in the launch, to endeavour to find a watering-place. He soon
+returned, accompanied by an Indian, who had shewn him a very convenient
+place where we could at once procure both wood and water, even under the
+command of our guns from the ship, and free from all danger of being
+surprised. I accordingly sent back the launch with casks to be filled,
+and several people to cut wood, all well armed, together with an
+officer of marines and ten men to keep guard. The Indians gave us hopes
+of a sufficient supply of provisions; but came in the evening to our
+people who were on shore, to acquaint them that the natives were
+forbidden to bring any thing to us. As the pinnace had not yet returned,
+this information gave me much concern, fearing that the enemy had taken
+her, and had by that means learnt what we were. On the 3d December,
+about seven in the evening, a Spanish officer came to us, in a boat
+rowed by eight Indians, being sent by the governor of Chiloe to enquire
+what we were. Meaning to pass upon him for a French captain well known
+in these seas, I ordered none of my people to appear on deck but such as
+could speak French or Spanish, and hoisted French colours. When the
+officer came on board, I told him my ship was the St Rose,
+homeward-bound, that my name was _Janis le Breton_, and that I entreated
+the governor to spare me what provisions he could conveniently afford,
+that being my only business on the coast. The officer heard me with much
+civility, seeming to give implicit credit to all I said; even staid on
+board all night, and went away next morning, to all appearance well
+satisfied.
+
+On the 5th in the morning, two boats came towards us full of armed men;
+but, after taking a view of us, went to a small island in the mouth of
+the harbour. On the 6th we saw a white flag hoisted on shore, to which I
+sent my launch completely manned and armed, but they found no person
+near the flag, to the shaft of which a letter was fastened, and a dozen
+hams lying close by. The letter was from _Don Nicholas Salvo_, governor
+of Chiloe, intimating strong doubts of our ship being the St Rose,
+complaining of the behaviour of the people in our pinnace, and desiring
+me to leave the coast. I returned an answer in as proper terms as I
+could devise, and next morning had another letter, couched in the utmost
+civility, but absolutely refusing me any refreshments, and demanding the
+restitution of the Indians said to have been made prisoners by our
+pinnace. In fact I knew less of our pinnace than he did, and believed
+that he actually had the people in his hands of whom he now complained.
+
+Despairing of ever seeing my people, and still ignorant where Chacao was
+situated, having no chart of the island on which I could depend, I
+determined to change my style of writing to the governor, and try what
+could be done by threatening to use force. I therefore wrote, that I
+was determined to have provisions by fair means or foul. Next day I sent
+my first lieutenant, Mr Brooks, with twenty-nine men well armed in the
+launch, ordering him to bring off all the provisions he could find.
+Shortly after, a boat came with a message from the governor, offering to
+treat with me, if I would send an officer to Chacao: But I answered,
+that I would treat no where but on board, and that he was now too late,
+as I had already sent eighty men on shore to take all they could find.
+
+In the evening the launch returned, accompanied by a large piragua, and
+both were completely laden with sheep, hogs, fowls, barley, and green
+peas and beans. Soon afterwards, the pinnace arrived with all her crew,
+but so terrified that I did not expect them to be again fit for service
+for one while. The officer told me, that he had been forced to fight his
+way through several canoes, filled with armed Indians, from whom he got
+clear with the utmost difficulty, and had been under the necessity of
+making his passage quite round the island, a course of not less than
+seventy leagues.[258] This proceeded only from excess of terror, as they
+only met one boat with unarmed Indians and a Spanish sergeant, who came
+off to them without the least shew of violence, as some of them
+afterwards confessed, but with this addition, that there were great
+numbers of people on shore, who they were apprehensive would come off to
+them. The only excuse the officer could allege was, that the tide had
+hurried him away, and he forgot in his fright that he had a grappling in
+the boat, with which he might have anchored till the tide turned.
+
+[Footnote 258: The circuit of the island of Chiloe by sea, could hardly
+be less than 350 English miles; an arduous navigation in an open boat
+upon an utterly unknown coast.--E.]
+
+By this strange mismanagement, I missed a favourable opportunity of
+seizing the town of Chacao, which I might easily have done if I had
+appeared before it within forty-eight hours after our arrival, when the
+governor was totally unprovided for resistance. But now, having a whole
+week allowed for mustering the force of the island, he had collected
+near a thousand armed Spaniards, as I learnt from the Indian prisoners
+in the pinnace. I therefore laid aside all thoughts of going to the
+towns, in the hopes of furnishing ourselves from the Indian farms and
+plantations, in which I kept one of our boats constantly employed. By
+the 16th, our decks were full of live cattle, together with poultry and
+hams in abundance, and such quantities of wheat, barley, potatoes, and
+maize, that I was quite satisfied. On a moderate computation, we had
+added four months provisions to the stock we brought from England, so
+that I was well pleased with the effects of our stay at Chiloe, and
+prepared to depart. I might certainly have done much more for my own
+credit and the profit of my owners, had if not been for the
+mismanagement of the officer in the pinnace.
+
+_Chiloe_ is the first of the Spanish possessions on the coast of Chili,
+reckoning from the south; and, though it produces neither gold nor
+silver, is a fine island, and is considered as of great consequence;
+insomuch that the Spaniards would be under great apprehensions when
+strange ships enter its ports, did they not confide in the number of its
+inhabitants, which is extraordinary for this part of the world. The body
+of this island is in lat. 42° 4' S. being about thirty leagues in length
+from N. to S. and not above six or seven leagues from E. to W.[259] It
+is watered by several rivers, and produces many kinds of useful trees,
+yielding an agreeable prospect, by the great number of Indian farms and
+plantations dispersed at small distances from each other, on rising
+grounds among the woods. Within this great island there is an
+archipelago or cluster of smaller islands, the number of which is not
+well known; yet the smallest of these is said to be well inhabited, and
+to abound in cattle. Among these islands there are very uncertain and
+violent currents, which are by no means safe. I would recommend all
+strangers to go in at the north end of the great island, giving the
+northern point of the island a good birth, and then to keep the island
+side of the channel on board, running along shore to the southward
+(eastward). Passing two bays, which seem commodious, you come to a
+point, almost contiguous to which is a high rock, somewhat like a
+pyramid; and passing between that rock and a small high island near it,
+you run directly into a harbour resembling the mouth of a river, which
+forms a safe anchorage. In going in, take care not to come nearer shore
+than having the depth of five fathoms, as the nearer to the small island
+the less water; wherefore keep the lead going, and be bold with the
+shore towards the north side of the harbour, which has the greatest
+depth, while the south side is shoaly.[260]
+
+[Footnote 259: Chiloe reaches from lat. 41° 50' to 43° 50', both S. and
+from long. 73° 18' to 74° 24', both W. extending 135 English miles in
+extreme length, by 35 in medium breadth. See vol. V. p. 592, for an
+account of the Archipelago of Chiloe.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 260: Shelvocke seems here to describe the harbour leading to
+the town or village of San Carlos.--E.]
+
+My pilot carried me the contrary way to that here directed, advising me
+to keep near the main land of Chili, which I did till I got to
+_Carelampo_ Point, having several small islands to the southward of my
+course, which proved unfortunate for me by the loss of my anchor. The
+soil of Chiloe is very fertile, producing all sorts of European fruits
+and grains, and has fine pasture lands, in which great numbers of cattle
+are grazed, particularly sheep. The air is wholesome and temperate; yet
+I suspect the winter may be rigorous, being bounded on the west by an
+immense ocean, without any land to screen it from the cold moist vapours
+brought thither by the tempestuous westerly winds, which generally reign
+in these latitudes, and which must render it uncomfortable in the winter
+months, as the parallels of latitude to the south of the equator are
+much colder than those in the same degrees to the northwards.
+
+In this island they have abundance of very handsome middle-sized horses,
+which the natives are said to manage with great dexterity. They have
+also an animal, called _guanaco_ or _carneso de tierra_, that is, sheep
+of the country, which very much resembles a camel, but not nearly so
+large. They have long necks, and I have seen one of them between five
+and six feet high. Their wool or soft hair is very fine. They smell very
+rank, and move with a very slow majestic pace, which hardly any violence
+can make them quicken; yet they are of great service at the mines in
+Peru, where they are employed in carrying the ore and other things.
+Their flesh is very coarse, as we experienced, having salted some of
+them for our future use. Besides these, the inhabitants have European
+sheep and great numbers of hogs, but not many black cattle. The island
+has plenty of fowls, both wild and tame. Among the former is a small
+species of goose, found on the banks of the rivers, which are
+beautifully white, and of an excellent taste. The tame poultry are of
+the same kinds with our own.
+
+The natives are almost in all respects the same with those on the
+continent of Chili, of moderate stature, with deep olive complexions,
+and coarse shaggy black hair, some of them having by no means
+disagreeable features. They seem naturally of fierce and warlike
+dispositions; but the oppressions of the Spaniards, and the artifices of
+the jesuits, who are the missionaries in these parts, have curbed and
+broken their spirits. Frezier says, that the Indians on the continent,
+to the southward of this island, are called _Chonos_, who go quite
+naked; and that there is a race of men of extraordinary size in the
+inland parts of the country, called _Cacahues_,[261] who are in amity
+with the _Chonos_, and sometimes accompany them to the Spanish
+settlements in Chiloe. Frezier says, that he has been credibly informed
+by eye-witnesses, that some of these were about nine or ten feet high. I
+had sight of two of these Indians, who came from the southward of St
+Domingo river, one of whom was a cacique, who did not seem to me to
+differ in their persons from the ordinary natives of Chiloe. They were
+decently clothed in _ponchos, monteras_, and _poulains_. The _poncho_ is
+a sort of square carpet, having a slit or hole cut in the middle, wide
+enough to slip over the head, so that it hangs down over the shoulders,
+half before and half behind, under which they generally wear a short
+doublet. On their heads they have a _montera_, or cap nearly like those
+of our postillions, and their legs are covered by the _poulains_, a kind
+of knit buskins, or hose without feet. In short, their appearance has
+little or none of the savage. Their habitations are firmly built of
+planks, but have no chimneys, so that they are very black and sooty
+within.
+
+[Footnote 261: See an account of the native tribes, inhabiting the
+southern extremity of South America, vol. V. p. 401.]
+
+They inclose some of their land for cultivation, by means of rails or
+paling; and although they have plenty of every thing necessary to a
+comfortable subsistence, they have no bread, from wanting mills in which
+to grind and prepare their wheat They use a miserable substitute, making
+a kind of cakes of sea-weeds, which from use is much esteemed by them,
+and was not even disliked by some of our men. Besides this, they prepare
+their maize in several manners to answer the purpose of bread, and they
+use potatoes and other roots with the same intention. They prepare a
+liquor called _chicha_ from their Indian corn, in imitation of their
+neighbours on the continent of Chili; but the Spaniards endeavor to curb
+their propensity to the use of this liquor, as their drinking bouts have
+often occasioned seditions and revolts. Such of the natives as have no
+European weapons, use pikes, darts, and other arms of the country. Among
+these is a running noose on a long leathern thong, called a _lays_,
+which they use with surprising dexterity for catching cattle, horses, or
+other animals, even when at full career. From all that I could see of
+the natives of Chiloe, or hear respecting the Chilese, they seem to
+resemble each other in all things, which is not wonderful, considering
+the near neighbourhood of this island to the continent of Chili. They
+use small drums, the heads of which are made of goats skins with the
+hair on, and give a very dull sound.
+
+The natives of Chiloe carry on a small woollen manufacture, consisting
+of _ponchoes_ and other articles of clothing, formerly mentioned. They
+also export considerable quantities of cedar, both in plank, and wrought
+up into boxes, chests, desks, and the like, with which they supply all
+Chili and Peru. They have no European trade; but the Spaniard who came
+to me from the governor expressed his astonishment that no trading ships
+ever put in there, saying they had plenty of money among them, with a
+safe port, free from the danger of going to the northward among the
+Spanish ships of war; as a great deal of business might be done here,
+before intelligence could be sent as far as Lima, and the ships could be
+fitted out and sent so great a way to wind-ward. It is observed of the
+Chilese, that, differing from all other nations ever heard of, they have
+no notion of a Supreme Being, and consequently have no kind of worship;
+and they are such enemies to civil society that they never live together
+in towns and villages, so that their country seems thinly inhabited,
+though very populous, the whole nation being dispersed in farms at a
+good distance, every family having its own plantation, and raising its
+own necessaries.
+
+Though thus scattered, they are not wholly independent, each tribe being
+subject to a chief, called a cacique, whose dwelling is conveniently
+situated among them, for the more speedy summoning them together on
+affairs of importance. This is done by the sound of a sort of horn, on
+hearing which all his vassals repair to him without delay. The chief
+commands them in war, and has an absolute power of dispensing justice
+among his subjects, who all consider themselves as his relations, he
+being as it were the head of his family, and his authority hereditary.
+In all these respects the inhabitants of Chiloe resemble their
+neighbours on the continent, excepting that their caciques are stript
+in a great measure of their power and influence, by the tyranny of the
+Spaniards, who keep them under the most servile slavery, while the
+missionaries blind them by a superstitious and imperfect conversion to
+Christianity, of which not one of these natives know any thing more than
+merely that they were baptized; all their devotion consisting of mere
+idolatry of the cross, or the images of saints; for the Spanish clergy
+use no manner of pains to enlighten their minds, but probably think it
+better, by keeping them in ignorance, to make them more contented under
+the rigorous government of the Spaniards. Under this delusion, the
+caciques have changed their lawful prerogatives for the vain ostentation
+of being allowed to wear a silver-headed cane, which places them on a
+footing outwardly with a Spanish captain. Yet have they sometimes
+rebelled against their proud oppressors, deeming death preferable to
+slavery, as may be seen in the account of Frezier's voyage.
+
+The vessels used in Chiloe are peculiarly constructed, as, for want of
+nails and other articles of iron, the planks of which their boats are
+constructed are sewed together very ingeniously with oziers. These boats
+are all constructed of three pieces only, the keel or bottom being one
+piece, and the sides two others; and they are rowed with oars, in the
+same manner as with us, more or fewer according to their size.
+
+Having nothing farther to detain us in Chiloe, I determined upon
+proceeding to the island of Juan Fernandez, as directed in my
+instructions; but my men took it into their heads that great things
+might be done by a short trip to the Bay of Conception, to which also
+they were induced by the Frenchman who persuaded us to come to Chiloe.
+He pretended that there were always five or six ships in the road of
+Conception, besides others daily coming in or going out, and that these
+had often both ways considerable sums of money or silver, with other
+valuable things, on board; and, though large ships, they were of little
+or no force, neither were there any fortifications at that place to
+protect them; so that we could not meet any opposition in taking them,
+even if there were twenty sail. He said their, cargoes consisted chiefly
+of corn, wine, brandy, flour, and jerked beef; and that the ships bound
+for Conception always brought money to purchase their cargoes; besides
+that considerable booty might be made for rich trading passengers, who
+carry on a considerable trade over land between Conception and Buenos
+Ayres. He also alleged, that we could not fail of having any ships we
+might take ransomed; and that we should certainly make our fortunes, if
+we could only reach Conception before they had notice of our being in
+these seas. This man therefore advised my people to endeavour to prevail
+on me to make the best of my way to Conception, before the governor of
+Chiloe could send our deserter thither; after which all the coast would
+be alarmed, and we should have no opportunity of meeting with any thing
+till the Spaniards had imagined we were gone from the South Sea.
+
+In similar cases, all are fond of delivering their sentiments; and, as
+it is impossible to keep a ship's company in so much awe in so remote a
+part as in short voyages, my men did not fail to speak their minds
+somewhat insolently. One William Morphew, who had been in these seas
+several years, took upon him to tell me, that it did not signify much if
+we arrived two or three days sooner or later at Juan Fernandez. He said
+also, that I was a stranger here, but the Frenchman and he were well
+acquainted with these seas, and every body hoped I would be advised to
+go to Conception; hoping I would not put a mere punctilious adherence to
+orders in balance against so fair a prospect, or almost certainty of
+success, if we arrived there in time. In short, they all assured me that
+they had the interest of the proprietors in view, as much as their own,
+and that they would perish sooner than injure them in any respect. They
+said at the same time, if I had not success in my proceedings nobody
+could be blamed but myself, and entreated me not to let slip this
+opportunity, in which they would stand by me with all fidelity.
+
+On our way to Conception, we made the islands of Mocha and St Mary on
+the 23d December, and arrived that same evening in the Bay of
+Conception, but could not be certain whether there were any ships in the
+road. I immediately gave orders to man and arm our boats and sent them
+up that same night, in order to surprise any ships that might be there;
+and with strict orders, if they found them too strong, to endeavour to
+prevent them from sending any thing on shore till I were able to work
+the ship up to them. This I endeavoured to do all night, but to very
+little purpose; for at day-light next morning I could not discern any
+thing above us. Captain Hately returned about noon of the 24th,
+informing me that he had taken a ship of about 150 tons, lately arrived
+from Baldivia, and having only a few cedar plants on board, with no
+person in her but the boatswain, an old negro, and two Indian boys. He
+had left her in the charge of Mr Brooks, my first lieutenant, with
+orders to bring her down the first opportunity; and had taken, while on
+his return, a small vessel, of about twenty-five tons, near the island
+_Quiri-quinie_, which lies in the harbour or bay of Conception, where
+this small vessel had been taking in pears, cherries, and other fruits,
+to sell at Conception. Immediately after taking this small vessel, I
+could perceive with my glass another small boat come in between the
+islands of _Quiri-quinie_ and _Talgaguana_, passing within pistol-shot
+of my pinnace, and yet Captain Hately did not engage her. For this his
+only excuse, after he came on board, was, that he did not mind her;
+though our boat's crew said she was full of men.
+
+On the 26th about noon, Mr Brooks brought down the prize, and anchored
+about half a mile short of us. The boatswain of this prize had not been
+two hours in the Speed-well, till he told us of a vessel, laden with
+wine, brandy, and other valuable things, riding at anchor in the Bay of
+Herradura, about two leagues to the north of us, and bound for Chiloe.
+On receiving this information, I ordered Mr Randal, my second
+lieutenant, with twenty five men, to go in the Mercury, which name we
+gave to the captured flour bark, and, accompanied by the Spanish
+boatswain of the other prize, to go in search of the vessel in the Bay
+of Herradura, with positive orders not to land or to make any other
+hazardous attempt. But they returned next evening with the following
+melancholy story.
+
+On getting into the bay, they found the vessel hauled dry ashore, when
+Randal ordered his people to land and bring away what they could find in
+her, while he and three or four more kept the bark afloat. The people
+found the bark empty, but seeing a small house hard by, they suspected
+her cargo might be lodged there, and the inferior officer along with
+them ordered them to examine that house. The poor fellows went
+accordingly, without any officer at their head, and without any regard
+to order, every one endeavouring to be foremost. Their career was soon
+stopped, as they had hardly got beyond the top of the bank when they
+discovered the enemy coming furiously towards them. Some of the seamen
+were of opinion they might have retreated at this time in safety, if
+they had not been astonished at the strange manner in which they were
+attacked, by a number of horses galloping up to them without riders,
+which caused them for some time to stand amazed, not knowing what way to
+proceed; but on a little reflection they bestirred themselves to make
+the best of their way to the Mercury, in which they all succeeded except
+five, who were made prisoners. Fortunately for them, the Mercury had by
+some accident got aground, or they must all have been cut off, as the
+Spaniards thought fit to retire on getting within musket-shot of the
+Mercury. They now got the bark afloat, but as the water was still very
+low, and they were obliged in going out of the bay to keep very near to
+a point of land, the Spaniards galled them from that point, under the
+shelter of the wood. They soon passed this point, having a fair wind,
+all lying close in the bottom of the bark, so that on this occasion only
+one man was wounded, who was shot through the thigh. The Spaniards came
+down upon them in this affair after the following singular manner. They
+were preceded by twenty or more horses abreast, two deep, and linked
+together, behind which extraordinary van-guard came the enemy on
+horseback, lying on the necks of their horses, and driving the others
+before them, never seen to sit up on their saddles, except to fire their
+muskets, or when there was no danger. When they got near our people,
+they threw their _lays_ or running nooses to catch them, and accordingly
+ensnared James Daniel, one of my foremast-men, who was a good way into
+the water, and whom they dragged out again at the rate of ten knots. The
+Spaniards in Chili are universally dexterous in the use of this running
+noose, for I have seen a Spaniard bring a man up by the foot as he ran
+along the deck, and they are sure of any thing they fling at, at the
+distance of several fathoms.
+
+These misfortunes and disappointments made my crew extremely uneasy, and
+might have had bad consequences, if we had not been agreeably surprised
+by seeing a large ship coming round the northern point of the island of
+_Quiri-quinie_.[262] It was at this time almost dark, so that her people
+could not perceive what we were, and stood on therefore without fear, so
+that she came towards us, and was taken without resistance. This ship
+proved to be the St Fermin, of about 300 tons, last from _Cadaco_,[263]
+having only a small cargo, consisting of sugar, molasses, rice, coarse
+French linen, some woollen cloth and bays of Quito, a small quantity of
+chocolate, and about five or six thousand dollars in money and wrought
+plate. I sent Mr Hendric, the owners agent, to inspect her cargo, and to
+order every thing of value out of her into the Speedwell, and the ship's
+company sent their agent likewise. They returned in the afternoon,
+bringing all the bales, boxes, chests, portmanteaus, and other packages,
+with a large quantity of sugar, molasses, and chocolate, and about
+seventy hundred weight of good rusk, with all her other stores and
+eatables. Don Francisco Larragan, the captain of this ship, begged to be
+allowed to ransom her, which I willingly consented to, and allowed him
+to go in his own launch to Conception to raise the money, accompanied by
+a merchant, one of the prisoners.
+
+[Footnote 262: A small island in the entrance of the Bay of
+Conception.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 263: Callao, or the port of Lima, is perhaps here meant.--E.]
+
+In the mean time we were very busy in searching the prize, lest any
+thing might have been concealed; and every one who came at any time from
+the St Fermin was strictly searched by some of our people appointed for
+the purpose, that they might not appropriate any thing of value. Our
+carpenter also was employed in making a slight spar-deck over the
+Mercury, as she might be of great use while cruizing along the coast. On
+the 30th December a boat came off to us with a flag of truce from the
+governor of Conception, and an officer, who acquainted us that two of
+our people, taken in the late skirmish, were still alive, but very much
+wounded. He brought also a present of seven jars of very good wine, and
+a letter from Don Gabriel Cano, the governor, in which he demanded to
+see my commission, as also that I should send ashore Joseph de la
+Fontaine, who had been servant to one of the mates belonging to Captain
+La Jonquiere, and some other things that I thought unreasonable,
+engaging to enter into a treaty, if I would comply with these
+requisitions. At length a formal treaty was begun, in which I demanded
+16,000 dollars for the ransom of the St Fermin alone, while they offered
+only 12,000 for both the ships and the bark. Finding all his Spanish
+_puncto_ tended only to entrap us, I set fire to the Solidad, one of our
+prizes; and, giving them time to comply with my proposals it they would,
+I set the St Fermin also on fire.
+
+We sailed from the bay of Conception on the 7th January, 1720, intending
+for Juan Fernandez; and on the 8th we observed the sea to be entirely of
+a red colour, occasioned, as the Spaniards say, by the spawn of the
+_camarones_, or pracous. On the 9th, the plunder taken in the St Fermin
+was sold by the ship's agent at the mart, and brought extravagant
+prices. The account being taken, and the shares calculated, the people
+insisted for an immediate distribution, which was made accordingly, and
+each foremast-man had after the rate of ten dollars a share, in money
+and goods. On the 11th we saw the island of Juan Fernandez; and at noon
+it bore from us five leagues W.S.W. the meridional distance from
+Conception being 275 miles[264] W. From that day to the 15th, I stood
+off and on, waiting for my boats which were employed in fishing. In this
+time I sent the Mercury ashore to stop her leaks, while the boats caught
+so many fish, that we salted the fill of five puncheons. I could find no
+marks of Captain Clipperton having been here for a long time; but at
+length some of my men saw accidentally the words _Magee_ and Captain
+John cut upon a tree. Magee was the name of Clipperton's surgeon, but no
+directions were left, as agreed upon in his instructions to me, so that
+it was evident he never meant I should keep him company, or ever join
+him again.
+
+[Footnote 264: The difference of longitude between Conception and Juan
+Fernandez is six degrees of longitude W. and, consequently, 360 minutes
+or marine miles.--E.]
+
+Being by this certified of the arrival of Clipperton in the South Sea, I
+directly made the best of my way from Juan Fernandez, being in a pretty
+good condition as to provisions, by the additional stock of fish caught
+here, all our casks being filled. On the 21st, while sailing along there
+with the design of looking into _Copiapo_, I put Mr Dodd, second
+lieutenant of marines, into the Mercury, with a reinforcement of eight
+men, and sent her next evening to cruize close in with the land, while I
+kept with the Speedwell in the offing, to prevent being discovered from
+the land. On this occasion I took care to give the officer commanding
+the Mercury a copy of my commission, with all necessary instructions how
+to proceed, appointing the _Moro_, or head-land of Copiapo, to be our
+place of meeting. The business of the Mercury was to look into the port
+of Copiapo, called _Caldera_,[265] near which there are some gold-mines,
+and from whence considerable quantities of gold are exported in small
+vessels; and our bark had the advantage of being of that country build,
+so that she could not excite suspicion. Next day I hove in sight of the
+head-land of Copiapo, and lay to the southward, that I might not be seen
+from that port, which is to the northward of the _Moro de Copiapo_.
+While here, opposite a small island which lies athwart the mouth of
+Copiapo river, I sent the pinnace to fish between that isle and the
+main, and soon after saw a vessel crowding all sail towards us. She at
+first seemed too large for the Mercury, yet turned out to be her; when
+the officer told me he had looked into the port, but could see no
+shipping; but he had looked into a wrong place, and having made him
+sensible of his error, I sent him again to the right place, which was
+about six leagues farther north.
+
+[Footnote 265: The port of Caldera, or English harbour, is about twelve
+or fifteen miles to the N. of Copiapo river, having a considerable
+interposed promontory.--E.]
+
+Next morning our pinnace returned, bringing only a few penguins which
+she had taken on the island in the bay of Copiapo. The Mercury had
+looked into Caldera, but saw nothing; and instead of making use of the
+land-wind to come off to me, had kept along shore in the bottom of the
+bay till the land-wind came in so strong that she was nearly lost on the
+lee-shore. On the 27th, I sent Mr Brooks, my first lieutenant, and Mr
+Rainor, first lieutenant of marines, to relieve Mr Randal and Mr Dodd in
+the Mercury, which I had fitted with a gang of oars, and, upon trial,
+she was found to make way at the rate of three knots, which might render
+her extremely useful in a calm. The 5th February, I dispatched Mr Brooks
+ahead in the Mercury, to see if there were any ships in the harbour of
+Arica, in lat. 18° 26' S. and next day, at one p.m. having ranged along
+shore, by the breakers of _Pisagua, Camarones_, and _Victor_, I got
+sight of the head-land of Arica, with a ship at anchor on its northern
+side, and saw the Mercury standing out of the bay, by which I judged the
+ship was too warm for her, and therefore made all haste to get up to her
+with the Speedwell. On coming up, we found that the ship was already
+taken, and the Mercury only accidentally adrift. This prize was called
+the Rosario, of 100 tons, laden with cormorants dung, which they use for
+manuring the land which produces the cod-pepper, or _Capsicum_, from the
+cultivation of which they make a vast profit in the vale of Arica. The
+only white face in this ship was the pilot, whom I sent ashore to see if
+the owner would ransom his ship, the cargo being worth gold to them, but
+entirely useless to us. Next morning I received a letter from Miguel
+Diaz Gonzale, the owner of the ship, insisting pitifully on his poverty
+and distress, having a large family to provide for, and promising to
+meet me at Hilo or Quaco, to treat for a ransom.
+
+We soon after took a small bark of ten tons, laden with _guana_, or
+cormorants dung, and having also some dried fish, which lay within a
+mile of Arica. By this time all the adjacent country was up in arms, and
+great numbers had come down to the coast, well mounted and armed, and
+seemingly well disciplined. To try their courage, I ordered the Mercury
+and launch to draw near the shore, as if we had really intended to land,
+though the landing-place here is altogether impracticable for European
+boats; and I also cannonaded the town briskly. Our balls made no
+execution, yet ploughed up the sand in front of the Spanish horse,
+throwing it all over them: But neither this, nor the approach of my
+small craft, made any impression, for they stood firm, and at least
+shewed the countenance of as good troops as could be wished. This much
+disappointed me, as it shewed my men that the Spaniards were far from
+being cowards, as they had been represented. As soon as it was dark,
+Gonzales came off to me, and I agreed to let him have back his ship and
+six negroes on receiving 1500 dollars, reserving right to take any thing
+out of her that might be useful to us; and at ten next night he brought
+me the agreed sum, being the weight of 1300 dollars in ingots of virgin
+silver, called _pinnas_ by the Spaniards, and the rest in coined
+dollars. He also made great enquiry for English commodities, for which
+he offered high prices, complaining that the French only supplied them
+with paltry goods and mere trifles, for which they carried off vast
+sums. He added, that he supposed the English merchants were all asleep,
+or too rich, as they did not come near them: And, although their ports
+were not so open as in other parts of the world, they yet know how to
+manage matters tolerably well; and that their governors, being generally
+Europeans, who seldom remained above three years in the country, used
+any means to improve their time, and could easily be gained so as to act
+very obligingly. He said much more as to the blindness of the English,
+in suffering the French pedlars to carry on, uninterruptedly, the most
+considerable branch of traffic in the world. Before leaving me, he
+desired me to carry his ship two or three leagues out to sea, and then
+to turn her adrift, on purpose to deceive the governor and the king's
+officers; and, if I would meet him at _Hilo_ (_Ilo_,) about twenty-five
+leagues to the north-westwards, he would purchase from me any coarse
+goods I had to dispose of, which might be done there with all imaginable
+secrecy. At this time also, the master of the small bark came off in a
+_balsa_. This is an odd sort of an embarkation, consisting of two large
+seal skins, separately blown up, like bladders, and made fast to pieces
+of wood. On this he brought off two jars of brandy and forty dollars;
+which, considering his mean appearance, was as much as I could expect.
+One part of his cargo was valuable, being a considerable quantity of
+excellent dried fish.
+
+The port of _Arica_, formerly so famous for the great quantities of
+silver shipped from thence, is now much diminished in its riches, and
+appears mostly a heap of ruins, except the church of St Mark, and two or
+three more, which still look tolerably well. What helps to give it a
+very desolate appearance is, that the houses near the sea are only
+covered with mats. Being situated on the sea-shore, in an open
+roadstead, it has no fortifications of any kind to defend or command the
+anchorage, the Spaniards thinking it sufficiently secured by the heavy
+surf, and the rocky bottom near the shore, which threaten inevitable
+destruction to any European boats, or other embarkation, except what is
+expressly contrived for the purpose, being the _balsas_ already
+mentioned. To obstruct the landing of an enemy, the Spaniards had
+formerly a fort and entrenchments, flanking the storecreeks; but being
+built of unburnt bricks, it is now fallen to ruins. In 1680, when
+Dampier was here, being repulsed before the town, the English landed at
+the creek of _Chacota,_ to the south of the head-land, whence they
+marched over the mountain _(Gordo)_ to plunder Arica. Earthquakes also,
+which are frequent here, have at last ruined the town, and Arica is now
+no more than a little village of about 150 families, most of them
+negroes, mulattoes, and Indians, with very few whites. On the 26th
+November, 1605,[266] the sea, violently agitated by an earthquake,
+suddenly overflowed, and broke down the greatest part of the town, and
+the ruins of its streets are to be seen at this day. What remains of
+Arica is not now liable to such an accident, being situated on a little
+rising ground at the foot of the head-land. Most of the houses are only
+constructed of a sort of fascines, made of flags or sedges, bound
+together, called _totora_, set up on end, crossed by canes and leather
+thongs; or are made of canes set on end, having the intervals filled
+with earth. The use of unburnt bricks is reserved for churches and the
+stateliest houses; and as no rain ever falls here, they are only covered
+with mats, so that the houses seem all in ruins when seen from the sea.
+The parish church, dedicated to St Mark, is handsome enough. There are
+also three religious houses, one a monastery of seven or eight
+_mercenarians_, a second is an hospital of the brothers of _St John of
+God_, and the third a monastery of Franciscans, who formerly had a house
+a short way from town, in the pleasantest part of the vale, near the
+sea.
+
+[Footnote 266: Perhaps this date ought to have been 1705.--E.]
+
+The vale of Arica is about a league wide next the sea, all barren ground
+except where the old town stood, which is divided into small fields of
+clover, some small plantations of sugar-canes, with olive-trees and
+cotton-trees intermixed, and several intervening marshes, full of the
+sedges of which they build their houses. Growing narrower about a league
+eastward at the village of _St Michael de Sapa_, they begin to cultivate
+the _agi_, or Guinea pepper, which culture extends over all the rest of
+the vale, in which there are several detached farms exclusively devoted
+to its culture. In that part of the vale, which is very narrow, and
+about six leagues long, they raise yearly to the value of above 80,000
+crowns. The Spaniards of Peru are so much addicted to this spice, that
+they dress no meat without it, although so hot and biting that no one
+can endure it, unless accustomed to its use; and, as it cannot grow in
+the _Puna_, or mountainous country, many merchants come down every year,
+who carry away all the Guinea pepper that grows in the districts of
+_Arica, Sama, Taena, Locumba_, and others, ten leagues around, from all
+of which it is reckoned they export yearly to the value of 600,000
+dollars, though sold cheap. It is hard to credit that such vast
+quantities should go from hence, as the country is so parched up, except
+the vales, that nothing green is to be seen. This wonderful fertility is
+produced by the dung of fowls, which is brought from _Iquique_, and
+which fertilizes the soil in a wonderful manner, making it produce four
+or five hundred for one of all sorts of grain, as wheat, maize, and so
+forth, but particularly of this _agi_, or Guinea pepper, when rightly
+managed. When the plants are sufficiently grown in the seed-bed to be
+fit for transplanting, they are set out in winding lines like the letter
+S, that the furrows for conveying the water may distribute it equally to
+the roots of the plants. They then lay about the root of each plant of
+Guinea pepper as much _guana_, or bird's dung formerly mentioned, as
+will lie in the hollow of the hand. When in blossom, they add a little
+more; and, lastly, when the pods are completely formed, they add a good
+handful more to each plant, always taking care to supply them with
+water, as it never rains in this country; otherwise, the salts contained
+in the manure, not being dissolved, would burn the plants, as has been
+found by experience. It is also for this reason that this manure is laid
+on at different times, as already explained, the necessity of which has
+been found by long use, and by the superior value of the crops thus
+produced.
+
+For the carriage of this _guana_, or fowl's dung, the people at Arica
+generally use that sort of little camels which the Indians of Bern call
+_Llamas_, the Chilese, _Chilihneque_, and the Spaniards, _Carneros de la
+tierra_, or native sheep. The heads of these animals are small in
+proportion to their bodies, and are somewhat in shape between the head
+of a horse and that of a sheep, the upper lips being cleft like that of
+a hare, through which they can spit to the distance of ten paces against
+any one who offends them, and if the spittle happens to fall on the face
+of a person, it causes a red itchy spot. Their necks are long, and
+concavely bent downwards, like that of a camel, which animal they
+greatly resemble, except in having no hunch on their backs, and in being
+much smaller. Their ordinary height is from four feet to four and a
+half; and their ordinary burden does not exceed an hundred-weight. They
+walk, holding up their heads with wonderful gravity, and at so regular a
+pace as no beating can quicken. At night it is impossible to make them
+move with their loads, for they lie down till these are taken off, and
+then go to graze. Their ordinary food is a sort of grass called _yeho_,
+somewhat like a small rush, but finer, and has a sharp point, with which
+all the mountains are covered exclusively. They eat little, and never
+drink, so that they are very easily maintained. They have cloven feet
+like sheep, and are used at the mines to carry ore to the mills; and, as
+soon as loaded, they set off without any guide to the place where they
+are usually unloaded. They have a sort of spur above the foot, which
+renders them sure-footed among the rocks, as it serves as a kind of hook
+to hold by. Their hair, or wool rather, is long, white, grey, and
+russet, in spots, and fine, but much inferior to that of the Vicunna,
+and has a strong and disagreeable scent.
+
+The _Vicunna_ is shaped much like the Llama, but much smaller and
+lighter, their wool being extraordinarily fine and much valued. These
+animals are often hunted after the following manner: Many Indians gather
+together, and drive them into some narrow pass, across which they have
+previously extended cords about four feet from the ground, having bits
+of wool or cloth hanging to them at small distances. This so frightens
+them that they dare not pass, and gather together in a string, when the
+Indians kill them with stones tied to the ends of leather thongs. Should
+any _quanacos_ happen to be among the flock, these leap over the cords,
+and are followed by all the _vicunnas_. These _quanacos_ are larger and
+more corpulent, and are also called _viscachas_. There is yet another
+animal of this kind, called _alpagnes_, having wool of extraordinary
+fineness, but their legs are shorter, and their snouts contracted in
+such a manner as to give them some resemblance to the human countenance.
+The Indians make several uses of these creatures, some of which carry
+burdens of about an hundred-weight. Their wool serves to make stuffs,
+cords, and sacks. Their bones are used for the construction of weavers
+utensils; and their dung is employed as fuel for dressing meat, and
+warming their huts.
+
+Before the last war, a small fleet called the _armadilla_ used to resort
+yearly to Arica, partly composed of kings ships, and partly those of
+private persons. By this fleet, European commodities were brought from
+Panama, together with quicksilver for the mines of _La Paz, Oruro La
+Plata,_ or _Chuguizaca, Potosi_, and _Lipes_; and in return carried to
+Lima the king's fifth of the silver drawn from the mines. Since the
+galleons have ceased going to Porto-Bello, and the French have carried
+on the trade of supplying the coast of the South Sea with European
+commodities, Arica has been the most considerable mart of all this
+coast, and to which the merchants of the five above-mentioned rich,
+towns resort. It is true that the port of _Cobija_ is nearer _Lipes_ and
+_Potosi_; but being situated in a barren and desert country, where
+nothing can be procured for the subsistence of man or beast, the
+merchants chuse rather to go to Arica, though more distant, as they are
+sure to find at that place every thing they need. Besides, they find no
+great difficulty in bringing there their silver privately in a mass, and
+compounding with the corregidores or chief magistrates to avoid paying
+the royal fifth.
+
+On leaving Arica, we sailed for the road of Ilo, about 75 miles to the
+N.W. where we arrived that same afternoon, and saw a large ship with
+three small ones at anchor. The great ship immediately hoisted French
+colours, being the _Wise Solomon_ of 40 guns, commanded by Mons.
+Dumain, who was resolved to protect the vessels that were beside him,
+and to oppose my coming into the road. As it grew dark before I could
+get into the road, I sent my third lieutenant, Mr La Porte, a Frenchman,
+to inform Mr Dumain who we were: But my officer no sooner got on board
+than he was tumbled out again, the Frenchman calling him a renegado; and
+Mr Dumain sent me word he would sink me if I offered to anchor there. La
+Porte also told me, that to his knowledge the French ships often
+accepted Spanish commissions, when there were English cruizers on this
+coast, having great privileges in trade allowed them for this service;
+and he could plainly see that the French ship was double manned, by
+means of inhabitants from the town, who were partly French; and, as he
+supposed, would come to attack me as soon as the wind was off shore.
+While thus talking, the French ship fired several guns at us, as if to
+shew that they were ready, and meant shortly to be with us. At first,
+this bravado heated me not a little, and I had some design of turning
+the Mercury into a fire-ship, by the help of which I might have roasted
+this insolent Frenchman: But, having reflected on the situation of
+affairs at home, and fearing my attacking him might be deemed
+unjustifiable, notwithstanding his unwarranted conduct, I thought it
+best to stand out of the harbour.
+
+On the 12th February, the moiety of the money taken at Arica was divided
+among the company according to their shares. On the 22d we found
+ourselves in the heights of _Calao,_ the port of Lima; on which I furled
+all my sails, resolving to get away in the night; knowing, if we were
+discovered from thence, that we should certainly be pursued by some
+Spanish men of war, as there are always some in that port. On the 26th,
+the officers in the Mercury desired to be relieved, and I spoke to
+Captain Hately, whose turn it was to take the command of that bark. This
+gentleman had been long a prisoner among the Spaniards in this country,
+which he was well acquainted with, having travelled between Payta and
+Lima by land, on which occasion he had observed several rich towns,
+which made him conceive we might do something to purpose, by cruizing
+along the coast, as far as the island of Lobos, in lat. 7° S. I approved
+of this, as it was probable we might meet some of the Panama ships,
+which always keep well in with the land, in order to have the benefit of
+the land-breezes. As the company of the Mercury seemed delighted with
+this project, I augmented their complement, giving them a month's
+provisions on board. I also lent Captain Hately my pinnace, mounted his
+bark with two of our quarter-deck guns, and gave him a copy of my
+commission, although it was very likely we should have frequent sight of
+the Mercury, between our present intended separation, and our intended
+rendezvous at the island of Lobos, not above sixty leagues from where we
+then were.
+
+When every thing was ready for their departure, Captain Betagh, whose
+turn it was to relieve the marine officer in the Mercury, being
+unwilling to go, went among our people with a terrified countenance,
+saying, that he and those with him in the Mercury were going to be
+sacrificed. Hearing this, I addressed my ship's company, telling them I
+could not conceive what this pestilent fellow meant by making such an
+uproar. I appealed to them all, if it had not been customary to relieve
+the officers in this manner, ever since we had this vessel in company,
+and asked them if ever they knew me select any man for going upon an
+enterprise, and had not, on the contrary, left it always to their own
+choice to go on any particular service out of the ship. I then desired
+to know who among them were of Betagh's opinion? Upon this, they all
+declared with one voice, that they had never entertained any such
+opinion; but, on the contrary, that I should always find them obedient
+to my commands. In the next place, I ordered the Mercury along side, and
+acquainted her crew with the speech Betagh had made in the Speedwell,
+and desired to know if any of them were apprehensive of being sold or
+sacrificed. At this they all set up a loud huzza, and requested they
+might go on the intended cruize in the Mercury. Accordingly Hately and
+Betagh went on board that bark, and put off from us, giving us three
+cheers, and stood right in for the land.
+
+It may be proper to take some notice of the proceedings of the Mercury
+after she left me, as I have been informed from some of themselves and
+some prisoners. The very next day they took a small bark laden with
+rice, chocolate, wheat, flour, and the like; and the day following,
+another. On the 4th day, they took a ship of near 200 tons, in which
+were 150,000 dollars. Flushed with this success, Betagh prevailed upon
+Hately, and most of the people in the Mercury, not to rejoin me, saying,
+they had now enough to appear like gentlemen as long as they lived, but
+it would be a mere nothing when the owner's part was taken out, and the
+rest divided into 500 shares. He therefore thought, since fortune had
+been so kind to them, they ought to make the best of their way to India,
+as they had sufficient provisions and all other requisites for the
+voyage, and Captain. Hately was well able to conduct them to some port
+in the East Indies. This plan was accordingly resolved on, and they fell
+to leeward of the place of rendezvous. But, weighing with himself the
+prodigious extent of the run, and its many hazards, and well knowing the
+treatment he might expect in India, if his treachery were discovered,
+Captain Hately became irresolute, and could not determine what was best
+to be done, so that he kept hovering on the coast. In the mean time,
+some of his crew went away in his boat to surrender themselves to the
+enemy, rather than be concerned in such a piratical undertaking. Betagh
+and his accomplices still kept Hately warm with liquor, and at length
+brought him to the resolution of leaving the South Sea. But they had no
+sooner clapped their helm a-weather for this purpose than they saw a
+sail standing towards them, which proved to be a Spanish man of war,
+which caught them, and spoilt their India voyage. The English prisoners
+were very indifferently used; but Betagh, being a Roman Catholic, and of
+a nation which the Spaniards are very fond of,[267] was treated with
+much respect, and was even made an officer.
+
+[Footnote 267: He seems to have been a Fleming, taken on board at
+Ostend, when the voyage was originally intended to have proceeded under
+an imperial commission.--E.]
+
+In the morning of the 29th February, we saw a vessel at anchor in the
+road of _Guanchaeo_, and anchored alongside of her at eleven a.m. She
+was called the Carmasita, of about 100 tons, having only two Indian men
+and a boy on board, and her only loading was a small quantity of timber
+from Guayaquil. From these prisoners, I was informed of a rich ship
+being in the cove of Payta, having put in there to repair some damage
+she had sustained in a gale of wind. On this information I put
+immediately to sea, but in purchasing our anchor, the cable parted, and
+we lost our anchor. Our prize being new and likely to sail well, I took
+her with us, naming her the St David, designing to have made her a
+complete fire-ship as soon as we should be rejoined by the Mercury, in
+which there were materials for that purpose. Next day we looked into
+Cheripe, whence we chased a small vessel, which ran on shore to avoid
+us. Next morning, being near Lobos, our appointed rendezvous with the
+Mercury, I sent ashore my second lieutenant, Mr Randal, with two letters
+in separate bottles, directing Captain Hately to follow me to Payta, to
+which port I now made the best of my way, and arrived before it on the
+18th of March, and sent Mr Randal to look into the cove, to bring me an
+account of what ships were there, that I might know what to think of the
+information we had received from our prisoners.
+
+On the 21st, I steered directly in for the cove of Payta, which I
+entered under French colours about four in the afternoon. We found only
+a small ship there, of which Mr Brooks took possession in the launch.
+About seven p.m. we came to anchor within three quarters of a mile of
+the town. The town seemed to be moderately large and populous, and there
+might probably be some land-forces for its defence, being the rendezvous
+of the ships which trade between Panama and Caloa; yet, as the taking of
+this place was treated in our instructions as a matter of importance, I
+consulted with my officers as to the best manner of making the attempt.
+Leaving the charge of the ship with the master, Mr Coldsea, and a few
+hands, to look after the negroes we had on board, and with orders to
+bring the ship nearer to the town, for the more expeditiously embarking
+any plunder we might make; I landed with forty-six men, well armed,
+about two in the morning of the 22d, and marched directly up to the
+great church without the slightest opposition, for we found the town
+entirely deserted by the inhabitants.
+
+At day-light, we observed large bodies of men on the hills, on both
+sides of the town, which we expected would have come down to attack us;
+but, on marching up towards them, they retired before us. Hitherto we
+had taken no prisoners, except an old Indian and a boy, who told us that
+Captain Clipperton had been here some time before, and had set some
+prisoners ashore, who assured them he meant not to do them any injury;
+but that the inhabitants, not thinking fit to trust him, had removed all
+their valuable effects into the mountains, among which were 400,000
+dollars belonging to the king, which had been a fine prize for
+Clipperton, who certainly would have found no greater difficulty in
+taking this town than I did.
+
+I was constrained suddenly to halt, in consequence of hearing a gun
+fired from the ship, soon after which word was brought me that she was
+ashore. I hurried off as fast as I could, carrying with us the
+union-flag, which I had planted in the church-yard; and, as we were
+re-embarking, the enemy came running down the hill, hallooing after us.
+When I got on board, I found the ship entirely afloat, but within her
+own breadth of the rocks; and, as the water was quite smooth, we soon
+warped her off again. We then returned to the town, whence the Spaniards
+retired as peaceably as before. The remainder of the day was employed in
+shipping off what plunder we could find, which consisted of hogs, brown
+and white _calavances_, beans, Indian corn, wheat, flour, sugar, and as
+many _cocoa nuts_[268] as we were able to stow away, together with pans
+and other conveniences for preparing it, so that we were now amply
+provided with excellent breakfast meat for the rest of our voyage, and
+were, besides, full of other provisions.
+
+[Footnote 268: Cacao, chocolate-nuts, are almost certainly here
+meant.--E.]
+
+At eight in the morning of the 23d, a messenger came in to know what
+ransom I would take for the town and the ship, for which I demanded
+10,000 dollars in twenty-four hours. At eight next morning, I had a
+letter from the governor, signifying, that as I wrote in French, neither
+he nor any one about him could understand its contents; but if I would
+write in Latin or Spanish, I might depend on a satisfactory answer. In
+the afternoon, I sent for one of our quarter-deck guns on shore, which
+was mounted at our guard, and was fired at sun-set, midnight, and break
+of day. The messenger returned in the morning of the 24th, accompanied
+by the master of the ship we had taken, and on hearing of their arrival,
+I went on shore to know what they had to propose. I understood from them
+that the governor was determined not to ransom the town, and did not
+care what become of it, provided the churches were not burnt. Though I
+never had any intention to destroy any place devoted to divine worship,
+I answered that I should have no regard to the churches, or anything
+else, when I set the town on fire; and I told the master of the vessel,
+he might expect to see her in flames immediately, if not ransomed
+without delay. This seemed to make a great impression, and he promised
+to return in three hours with the money. I then caused every thing to
+be taken out of the town that could be of any use to us, after which I
+ordered the town to be set on fire in several places; and, as the houses
+were old and dry, it instantly became a bonfire.
+
+In the midst of this conflagration, the people in the Speedwell made
+many signals for me to come on board, and kept continually firing
+towards the mouths of the harbour. As I could only guess the meaning of
+all this, I went on board as soon as possible in a canoe, having only
+three men along with me. Before I could reach the ship, I could
+distinctly see a large ship, with a Spanish flag at her
+fore-topmast-head, and her fore-topsail a-back. At this sight, two of my
+three men were ready to faint, and if it had not been for my boatswain,
+I doubt if I should have got on board; and if the Spanish admiral had
+acted with vigour, he might have taken the ship long enough before I got
+to her. It is bare justice to Mr Coldsea to say, that he fired so
+smartly on the Spaniard as to induce him to act with great precaution,
+which had been quite unnecessary if he had known our weakness. His
+caution, however, gave me the opportunity of getting on board: and, in
+the mean time, my officers were so unwilling to leave our guard-gun
+ashore, that they spent a great while in getting it into the boat, so
+that I was afraid the enemy would attack us before our people could get
+on board. The Spaniard was, however, in no hurry, thinking, no doubt,
+that we could not well escape him, yet was within pistol-shot of us
+before the last of our men got on board, being about fifty in all. We
+now cut our cable, but our ship fell round the wrong way, so that I had
+just room enough to fall clear of the enemy. Being now close together,
+the formidable appearance of the enemy struck an universal damp on the
+spirits of my people; some of whom, in coming off from the shore, were
+for jumping into the water and swimming on shore, which a few actually
+did.
+
+The enemy was a fine European-built ship, of 50 guns, and the
+disproportion was so great between us, that there seemed no hopes of
+escaping, as we were under his lee. I endeavoured to get into shoal
+water, but he becalmed me with his sails, and confined us for the best
+part of an hour, during which he handled us very roughly with his
+cannon, making very little use of his small-arms, never allowing us a
+moment's ease, but as soon as his broadside was ready, he gave his ship
+the starboard helm, bringing as many of his guns to bear as possible,
+and at the same time kept me from the wind. We returned his fire as
+briskly as we could; but, in our precipitate retreat from the town, most
+of our small arms were wetted, so that it was long before they were of
+any use. During this action, there was a strange contusion on shore,
+where the people had flocked down from the hills to extinguish the fire
+in Payta, in which some of them were busily employed, while others stood
+on the shore, spectators of our engagement. I was long in despair of
+getting away from the Spaniard, expecting nothing less than to be torn
+in pieces by his superior fire, unless we could have an opportunity of
+trying our heels with him while our masts remained standing. I expected
+every minute that he would board us, and hearing a hallooing among them,
+and seeing their forecastle full of men, I concluded that they had come
+to this resolution; but soon saw that it proceeded from our ensign being
+shot down, on which I made another be displayed in the mizen-shrouds, on
+sight of which they lay snug as before, keeping close upon our quarter.
+Intending at length to do our business at once, they clapped their helm
+hard a-starboard, in order to bring their whole broadside to bear, but
+their fire had little effect, and it muzzled themselves, which gave us
+an opportunity to get away from them.
+
+This certainly was a lucky escape, after an engagement of three glasses
+with an enemy so much our superior; for he had 56 guns and 450 men,
+while we had only 20 guns mounted and only 73 men, of whom 11 were
+negroes and two Indians. He had farther the vast advantage over us of
+being in perfect readiness, while we were in the utmost confusion; and
+in the middle of the engagement, a third of my people, instead of
+fighting, were hard at work in preparing for an obstinate resistance;
+particularly the carpenter and his crew, who were busy in making
+port-holes for stern-chase guns, which, as it happened, we made no use
+of. Yet were we not unhurt, as the loss of my boat and anchor were
+irreparable, and may be said to have been the cause of that scene of
+trouble which fell upon us soon after; as we had now only one anchor
+remaining, that lost at Payta being the third, and we had not now a boat
+of any kind. I have since learnt that some of our shots in the
+engagement were well directed, and that we killed and wounded several of
+the enemy.
+
+Having thus got away from the _Peregrine_, I slipped off in the evening
+with much ado from the Brilliant, her consort, on board of which Betagh
+now was, and even desired to be the first to board me. I was now in a
+very uncomfortable situation, not having the smallest hope of meeting
+with the Success; and I had learned at Payta, that the Spaniards had
+laid on an embargo for six months, so that we had nothing to expect in
+the way of prizes; and, having seen our prize taken, we had reason to
+expect that all our designs were discovered by the enemy. Having now
+only one anchor and no boat, it is not to be wondered that I gave up all
+idea of making an attempt on Guayaquil, which I at first proposed,
+having intelligence that there were several ships of considerable value
+in that river, in consequence of the embargo, which might have done me
+some service, if I had been better provided. In this situation, it was
+resolved, in a committee of my officers, to return to the southwards, or
+to windward, as the Spaniards must necessarily continue their trade with
+Chili, in spite of their embargo; after which we proposed to water at
+Juan Fernandez, and then to cruize on the coast of Conception,
+Valparaiso, and Coquimbo, for the coasting traders, among whom we might
+supply ourselves with anchors, cables, and boats, and a vessel to fit
+out as a fire-ship. I also proposed, before leaving the coast of Chili,
+to make an attempt on La Serena or Coquimbo. After all this, I proposed
+to proceed for the coast of Mexico, and thence to the _Tres Marias_ and
+California, as the most likely means of meeting with the Success;
+besides which, the former of these places might be commodious for
+salting turtle, to serve as sea stores, and the latter for laying in a
+stock of wood and water; after which we might lie in the track of the
+Manilla ship. But if we could not succeed in that attempt, we might then
+satisfy ourselves with cruizing for the Peruvian ships, which bring
+silver to Acapulco for purchasing the Indian and Chinese commodities.
+
+My plan being approved, we proceeded to windward, having secured our
+masts and bent a new set of sails on the 26th, after which we stood to
+the southward, expecting to make our passage in about five weeks. The
+carpenters were now set to work to build a new boat that we might have
+the means of watering our ship. On the 31st, while working the pumps,
+the water not only came in in greater quantity than usual, but was as
+black as ink, which made me suspect some water had got at our powder;
+and on going into the powder-room, I found the water rushing in like a
+little sluice, which had already spoiled the greatest part of our
+powder, only six barrels remaining uninjured, which I immediately had
+stowed away in the bread-room. It pleased God that we now had fair
+weather, as otherwise we might have had much difficulty to keep our ship
+afloat. We found the leak on the larboard side, under the lower cheek of
+the head, where a shot had lodged and afterwards dropt out, leaving room
+for a stream of water. We accordingly brought down our ship by the
+stern, and secured the leak effectually. At this time we had an abundant
+stock of provisions. Each man had a quart of chocolate and three ounces
+of rusk for breakfast; and had fresh meat or fresh fish every day for
+dinner, having plenty of the latter about the ship, so that we could
+almost always make our choice between dolphin and albicore.
+
+On the 6th May we made the westermost of the islands of Juan Fernandez,
+otherwise called _Mas a Fuero_, distant twelve leagues N.E. by N. and
+the day after, our carpenters had completed our new boat, which could
+carry three hogsheads. On the 12th we saw the great island of Juan
+Fernandez, bearing E. 1/2 S. being in latitude, by observation, 33° 40'
+S. a joyful sight at the time, though so unfortunate to us in the
+sequel. We plied off and on till the 21st, but could not get as much
+water on board daily in that time as supplied our daily expenditure,
+owing to the smallness of our boat, which made it necessary for us to
+anchor in the roads till that purpose was accomplished, in order for
+which I prepared to raft twenty tons of casks on shore. We worked in and
+anchored in forty fathoms, carrying a warp on shore, which we fastened
+to the rocks, of three hawsers and a half in length, which both steadied
+the ship, and enabled us to haul our cask-raft ashore and aboard. By
+this means we were ready to go to sea again next morning, having filled
+all our water casks; but had no opportunity of so doing for four days,
+during which we continued to anchor in the same manner.
+
+On the 25th May, a hard gale came upon us from seaward, bringing with it
+a great tumbling swell, by which at length our cable parted. This was a
+dismal accident, as we had no means whatever by which to avoid the
+prospect of immediate destruction. But Providence interposed in our
+behalf: For had we struck only a cable's length to the east or west of
+where we did, we must all have inevitably perished. When our ill-fated
+ship touched the rock, we had all to hold fast by some part of the ship
+or rigging, otherwise the violence of her shock in striking must have
+tossed us all into the sea. Our three masts went all away together by
+the board. In short, words are wanting to express the wretched condition
+in which we now were, or our astonishment at our unexpected and
+unfortunate shipwreck.
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_Residence on the Island of Juan Fernandez._
+
+
+Having all got on shore in the evening, my officers gathered around me
+to bear me company, and to devise measures for procuring necessaries out
+of the wreck; and having lighted a fire, wrapped themselves up in what
+they could get, and slept very soundly, notwithstanding the coldness of
+the weather, and our hopeless situation. I would have set the people to
+work that very night, in endeavouring to save what we could from the
+wreck, but they were so dispersed that we could not gather them
+together, and all opportunity was lost of saving any thing, except some
+of our fire-arms. But while the people were employed in building tents,
+and making other preparations for their residence on the island, the
+wreck was entirely destroyed, and every thing in her was lost, except
+one cask of beef and one of _farina de pao_, which were washed on shore.
+Thus all our provisions were gone, and every thing else that might have
+been useful. I had saved 1100 dollars belonging to the owners, which
+happened to be in my chest in the great cabin, all the rest of their
+treasure being in the bottom of the bread-room for security, which
+consequently could not be come at.
+
+I now took some pains to find out a convenient place in which to set up
+my tent, and at length found a commodious spot of ground not half a mile
+from the sea, having a fine stream of water on each side, with trees
+close at hand for firing, and building our huts. The people settled
+around me as well as they could, and as the cold season was coming on,
+some thatched their huts, while others covered theirs with the skins of
+seals and sea-lions. Others again satisfied themselves with water-butts,
+in which they slept under cover of trees. Having thus secured ourselves
+from the weather, we used to pass our time in the evenings around a
+great fire before my tent, where my officers usually assembled,
+employing themselves in roasting cray-fish in the embers; sometimes
+bewailing our unhappy fate, and sinking into despondency; and at other
+times feeding ourselves with hopes that something might yet be done to
+set us again afloat. On this subject I first consulted with the
+carpenter, who answered, that he could not make bricks without straw,
+and then walked from me in a surly humour. From him I went to the
+armourer, and asked what he could do for us in his way that might
+contribute to build a small vessel. To this he answered, that he hoped
+he could do all the iron work, as he had fortunately saved his bellows
+from the wreck, with four or five _spadoes_ or Spanish swords, which
+would afford him steel, and there could be no want of iron along shore;
+besides, that we should doubtless find many useful things when we came
+to work in good earnest. He desired therefore, that I would get some
+charcoal made for him, while he set up his forge.
+
+Upon this encouragement, I called all hands together, and explained to
+them the great probability there was of our being able to build a vessel
+sufficient to transport us from this island; but that it would be a
+laborious task, and must require their united best endeavours. To this
+they all consented, and promised to work with great diligence, begging
+me to give them directions how to proceed. I then ordered the men who
+had axes on shore, before the wreck, to cut wood for making charcoal,
+while the rest went down to the wreck to get the boltsprit ashore, of
+which I proposed to make the keel of our intended vessel; and I
+prevailed on the carpenter to go with me, to fix upon the properest
+place for building. The people found a great many useful materials about
+the wreck; and among the rest the topmast, which had been washed on
+shore, and was of the greatest importance.
+
+We laid the blocks for building upon on the 8th June, and had the
+boltsprit ready at hand to lay down as the keel; when the carpenter
+turned short round upon me, and swore an oath that he would not strike
+another stroke on the work, for he would be slave to nobody, and thought
+himself now on a footing with myself. I was at first angry, but came at
+length to an agreement with him, to give him a four-pistole piece as
+soon as the stern and stern-posts were up, and 100 dollars when the bark
+was finished, and the money to be committed to the keeping of any one he
+chose to name. This being settled, he went to work upon the keel, which
+was to be thirty feet long; the breadth of our bark, by the beam,
+sixteen feet, and her hold seven feet deep. In two months we made a
+tolerable shew, owing in a great measure to the ingenuity of Poppleston,
+our armourer, who never lost a minute in working with his hands, or
+contriving in his head. He made us a small double-headed maul, hammers,
+chisels, and a sort of gimblets or wimbles, which performed very well.
+He even made a bullet-mould, and an instrument to bore cartouch-boxes,
+which he made from the trucks of our gun-carriages, covering them with
+seal-skins, and contrived to make them not only convenient, but neat. He
+contrived to execute any iron-work wanted by the carpenter, and even
+finished a large serviceable boat, of which we stood much in need.
+
+In the beginning of this great work the people behaved themselves very
+well, half of them working regularly one day, and the other half the
+next, seeming every day to grow easier under our misfortunes. They
+treated me with as much respect as I could wish, and even in a body
+thanked me for the prospect of their deliverance; while I never failed
+to encourage them by telling them stories of the great things that had
+been accomplished by the united efforts of men in similar distresses. I
+always pressed them to stick close to the work, that we might get our
+bark ready in time; and told them that we fortunately had three of the
+best ports in Chili within 120 leagues of us. This inspired them with
+life and vigour, and they often declared that they would exert their
+utmost endeavours to finish her with all expedition. At last, however,
+we became a prey to faction, so that it was a miracle we ever got off
+from this place. For, after completing the most laborious part of the
+work, they entirely neglected it; and many of my officers, deserting my
+society, herded with the meanest of the ship's company. I was now
+convinced in a suspicion I had long entertained, that some black design
+was in embryo; for when I met any of my officers, and asked what they
+were about, and the reason of their acting so contrary to their duty, by
+diverting the people from their work, some used even to tell me they
+knew not whether they would leave the island or not, when my bundle of
+sticks was ready; that they cared not how matters went, for they could
+shift for themselves as well as the rest. When I spoke with the common
+men, some were surly, and others said they would be slaves no longer,
+but would do as the rest did. In the midst of these confusions, I
+ordered my son to secure my commission in some dry place among the woods
+or rocks, remembering how Captain Dampier had been served in these
+seas.
+
+At length, I one afternoon missed all the people, except Mr Adamson the
+surgeon, Mr Hendric the agent, my son, and Mr Dodd, lieutenant of
+marines, which last feigned lunacy, for some reason best known to
+himself. I learnt at night that they had been all day assembled at the
+great tree, in deep consultation, and had framed a new set of
+regulations and articles, by which the owners in England were excluded
+from any share in what we might take for the future, divested me of all
+authority as captain, and regulated themselves according to the _Jamaica
+discipline_.[269] Even the chief officers, among the rest, had concurred
+in electing one Morphew to be their champion and speaker, who addressed
+the assembly to the following purport: "That they were now their own
+masters, and servants to none: and as Mr Shelvocke, their former
+captain, took upon him still to command, he ought to be informed, that
+whoever was now to be their commander, must be so through their own
+courtesy. However, that Mr Shelvocke might have the first offer of the
+command, if the majority thought fit, but not otherwise. That Mr
+Shelvocke carried himself too lofty and arbitrarily for the command of a
+privateer, and ought to have continued in men-of-war, where the people
+were obliged to bear all hardships quietly, whether right or wrong."
+
+[Footnote 269: This expression is not explained, but seems to have been,
+according to the model of the Buccaneers, all prizes to be divided among
+the captors.--E.]
+
+Some persons present, who had a regard for me, represented, "That they
+had never seen or known me treat any one unjustly or severely; and that
+however strict I might be, they had no one else to depend upon, and that
+they ought all to consider how many difficulties I had already brought
+them through. That, although they were not now in the hands of our
+enemies, no one could tell how soon others might come upon them: and, if
+they ever looked to get back to England, there was no other way but by
+going round the world, for which there was no one capable of undertaking
+the charge except Captain Shelvocke. They ought also to consider his
+commission, and the respect due to him on that account; besides the
+protection that would afford them, should they happen to fall into the
+hands of the Spaniards."
+
+This remonstrance had some effect on the common men, but they were
+diverted from the thoughts of returning to obedience by no less a
+person than my first lieutenant, Mr Brooks, who had made Morphew his
+confidant even on board ship: for having served before the mast before
+he was made my lieutenant, he had contracted a liking for forecastle
+conversation. They were also supported and encouraged by Mr Randal, my
+second lieutenant, who was brother-in-law to Brooks, and by others. The
+first remarkable outrage committed by this gang of levellers was to Mr
+La Porte, my third lieutenant, whom Morphew knocked down on the beach,
+while Brooks stood by and witnessed this brutality. This affair came
+soon after to be fully explained; for the men framed a new set of
+articles, putting themselves upon the Jamaica discipline, and declaring,
+as I had been their captain, I might be so still; and that they were
+willing to allow me six shares, as a mark of their regard, though I
+ought only to have four, according to the Jamaica articles. Most of the
+officers were reduced, according to the same plan: for instance, Mr La
+Porte, Mr Dodu, and Mr Hendrie were declared midshipmen; and as the
+superior officers consented to this scheme, it could not be prevented
+from being carried into execution. Mr Coldsea the master was the only
+person who preserved a kind of neutrality, neither promoting nor
+opposing their designs. In this distressed emergency, I thought it
+lawful, and even necessary, to submit to their demands, and therefore
+signed their articles, in conjunction with the rest of my officers.
+
+I now thought to have got them to work on our bark; but, instead of
+listening to me, they demanded what little money I had saved belonging
+to the owners, with which I was obliged to comply, being 750 dollars in
+virgin silver, a silver dish weighing 75 ounces, and 250 dollars in
+coin. Even after this I was treated worse than ever, having only the
+refuse of the fish allowed me, after they had chosen the best, being
+glad, after a hard day's work, to dine upon seal; while Morphew and his
+associates feasted on the best fish the sea afforded. They next took the
+arms out of my custody, of which hitherto I had taken great care;
+because, having only one flint to each musket, and very little
+ammunition, I foresaw that we would be undone if this were wasted. I
+represented all this to them, yet they squandered away the small
+remainder of powder and bullets in killing cats, or any thing else they
+could get to fire at.--This is a concise history of our transactions in
+the island of Juan Fernandez, from the 24th May to the 15th August,
+during which no person could suffer more than I did, or have a more
+uncomfortable prospect.
+
+On the 15th of August we were put into great confusion by the sight of a
+large ship, on which, before she crossed the bay, I ordered all the
+fires to be put out, and the negroes and Indians to be confined, lest
+the ship might be becalmed under the land, and any of them should
+attempt to swim off to her, as I conceived she might possibly be a
+man-of-war come to seek us, having received advice of our shipwreck; yet
+I knew, if she discovered what we were about, we should soon have the
+whole force of the kingdom of Chili upon us. Our apprehensions were soon
+over, as the ship bore away large, and kept at too great a distance to
+see any thing of us. On this occasion I got most of our people under
+arms, and was glad to see them in some measure obedient to command;
+telling them that I was pleased to see their arms in such good order, I
+was impertinently answered, that this was for their own sakes. Before
+they dispersed, I represented to them the necessity of using their best
+endeavour to get our bark afloat, instead of caballing against their
+captain, which, in the end, might be very prejudicial to them all; as,
+if discovered by the Spaniards, we might expect to be all made slaves in
+the mines. I told them we still had a great deal of work to do, and had
+never above ten of the most considerate to labour, and seldom above six
+or seven; while they knew I was always one of the number, to shew a good
+example. But the more I tried to reclaim them, the more obstinately they
+ran into confusion, interrupting every thing that tended to do them
+service.
+
+Next day they divided among themselves on a new scheme, being no less
+than to burn our bark, and to build two large shallops, or pinnaces, in
+lieu of her. Morphew and his friend Brooks were the favourers of this
+new design, aiming doubtless at a separation by this means: but as this
+must be determined by a majority, they assembled to debate this matter
+in front of my tent, carrying on their deliberations with much clamour
+on both sides. In order to put them off this ruinous plan, I represented
+to them the impracticability of building the boats, as our tools and
+other materials were already worn out and expended. The workmen, and a
+considerable majority of the rest, sided with me: but at night the
+carpenter sent me word, if I did not pay him the money agreed upon at
+first, I should never see his face again; wherefore, although his terms
+had not been implemented, I was obliged to raise the money for him. The
+most provoking part of this proposal about the boats was, that the
+fellows who chiefly promoted it were those who had never done an hour's
+work since we were cast away. Not gaining this point, they openly
+declared I should not be their captain, and that none but Brooks should
+command them, which was probably what that young man aspired to from the
+commencement of the mutiny; and had undoubtedly succeeded, had it not
+been for the people in the boatswain's tent, who still refused their
+consent to my being left on the island, though fond of thinking
+themselves their own masters, and of refusing to submit to regular
+command.
+
+To complete our confusion, there arose a third party, who resolved to
+have nothing to do with the rest, proposing to remain on the island.
+There were twelve of these, who separated from the rest, and never made
+their appearance except at night, when they used to come about the tents
+to steal powder, lead, and axes, and any thing else they could lay their
+hands, on. But in a little time I found means to manage them, and took
+from them all their arms, ammunition, axes, and other plunder, and
+threatened to have them treated as enemies, if they came within
+musket-shot of our tents. These divisions so weakened the whole body,
+that they began to listen to me, so that I got most of them into a
+working humour. Even Brooks came to me with a feigned submission,
+desiring to eat with me again, yet in the main did not lessen his esteem
+for Morphew. His dissimulation, however, proved of infinite service in
+contributing to the finishing of our bark, which required the united
+efforts of all our heads and hands. For, when we came to plank the
+bottom, we had very vexatious difficulties to encounter, as our only
+plank consisted in pieces from the deck of our wreck, which was so dry
+and stubborn that fire and water had hardly any effect in making it
+pliable, as it rent, split, and flew in pieces like glass; so that I now
+began to fear that all our labour was in vain, and we must quietly wait
+to be taken off by some Spanish ship, and be led quietly to prison after
+all our troubles.
+
+By constant labour, and using a variety of contrivances, we at length
+finished our bark, but in such a manner that I may safely assert, a
+similar bottom never before swam on the sea. Our boat also was launched
+on the 9th September; and our bark being now in a fair way of being
+completed, it remained to consider what provisions we could get to
+support us during our voyage, all our stock being one cask of beef, five
+or six bushels of _farina de poa_, or cassada flour, and four or five
+live hogs. I made several experiments to preserve both fish and seal,
+but found that this could not be done without salt. At length we fell
+upon a contrivance for curing conger eels, by splitting them, taking out
+their backbones, dipping them in sea-water, and then drying them in a
+great smoke; but as no other fish could be cured in a similar manner,
+our fishers were directed to catch as many congers as they could. At
+this time several of our people who had not hitherto done any work,
+began to repent of their folly, as they grew weary of living on this
+island, and now offered their services to go a-fishing, making some idle
+excuses for being so long idle, asking my pardon, and promising not to
+lose a moment in future. The new boat was sent to try her fortune, and
+returned at night with a great parcel of various kinds of fish, among
+which were about 200 congers, which was a good beginning, and which were
+divided among the tents to be cured. Our boat was carefully hauled on
+shore every night, and strictly guarded, to prevent any of our people
+from stealing her, and making their escape. By her means also, Mr
+Brooks, our only diver, tried what could be recovered from that part of
+the wreck which had not been drifted on shore; but could only weigh one
+small gun, and two pieces of a large church candlestick, belonging to
+our owners.
+
+Our boat was daily employed in fishing, for which purpose the armourer
+supplied hooks; and our men made abundance of lines of twisted ribbons,
+a great quantity of which had been driven on shore. Others of the men
+were employed in making twine stuff for rigging, patching up old canvass
+for sails, and a variety of other necessary contrivances to enable us to
+put to sea; and our cooper put our casks in order; and at length we set
+up our masts, which were tolerably well rigged, and our bark made a
+decent figure. My spirits were however much damped, by the extreme
+difficulty of caulking her tight, as her seams were bad, our tools
+wretched, and our artists very indifferent. When this was done, so as we
+could, our bark was put into the water to try her fitness, on which
+there was an outcry of, A sieve! a sieve! Every one now seemed
+melancholy and dispirited, insomuch that I was afraid they would use no
+farther means; but in a little time, by incessant labour, we brought her
+into a tolerable condition. Having repaired the ship's pumps, and fitted
+them to the bark, the people exclaimed that this was only a poor
+dependence; but I exhorted them to have patience, and continue their
+assistance in doing every thing that could be thought of for her
+security. The cooper also made a set of buckets, one for every man, to
+serve to bale her, in case of necessity. Next spring-tide, which was on
+the 5th October, 1720, we put her again into the water, naming her the
+_Recovery_, when she answered tolerably well, when we resolved to run
+the hazard of going to sea in her, and made all possible dispatch in
+getting our things on board. Yet, after all, a dozen of our people chose
+to remain on shore, together with as many negroes and Indians.
+
+Our sea-stock, besides the small quantity of beef and cassada flour
+formerly mentioned, consisted of 2300 eels cured in smoke, weighing one
+with another about a pound each, together with about sixty gallons of
+seal-oil, in which to fry them. On our first landing, as the weather was
+then too coarse for fishing, we had to live on seals, the entrails of
+which are tolerable food; but the constant and prodigious slaughter we
+made among them, frightened them from our side of the island. Some of
+the people eat cats, which I could not bring myself to, and declared
+they were sweet nourishing food. When the weather allowed us to fish, we
+were delivered from these hardships; but some of our mischievous crew
+set the boat a-drift, so that she was lost: after which we contrived
+wicker boats, covered with sea-lions skins, which did well enough near
+shore, but we durst not venture in them out into the bay, and
+consequently were worse provided with fish than we might otherwise have
+been. We fried our fish in seal-oil, and eat it without bread or salt,
+or any other relish, except some wild sorrel. Our habitations were very
+wretched, being only covered by boughs of trees, with the skins of seals
+and sea-lions, which were often torn off in the night, by sudden flaws
+of wind from the mountains.
+
+The island of Juan Fernandez is in lat 33° 40' S. and long. 79° W. being
+at the distance of about 150 marine leagues, or 7° 30' from the coast
+of Chili. It is about fifteen English miles long from E. to W. and five
+miles at the broadest, from N to S. entirely composed of mountains and
+valleys, so that there is no walking a quarter of a mile on a flat. The
+anchoring place is on the north side of the island, and is distinguished
+by a little mountain, with a high peak on each side. It is not safe to
+anchor in less than forty fathoms, and even there, ships are very much
+exposed to sharp gales from the north, which blow frequently. There
+cannot well be a more unpleasant place to anchor in, as the bay is
+surrounded by high mountains, and is subject to alternate dead calms and
+sudden stormy gusts of wind. This island enjoys a fine wholesome air,
+insomuch that out of seventy of us, who remained here five months and
+eleven days, not one among us had an hour's sickness, though we fed upon
+such foul diet, without bread or salt; so that we had no complaints
+among us, except an incessant craving appetite, and the want of our
+former strength and vigour. As for myself, from being corpulent, and
+almost crippled by the gout, I lost much of my flesh, but became one of
+the strongest and most active men on the island, walking much about,
+working hard, and never in the least afflicted with that distemper. The
+soil is fertile, and abounds with many large and beautiful trees, most
+of them aromatic. The names of such as we knew were the _Pimento_, which
+bears a leaf like a myrtle, but somewhat larger, with a blue blossom,
+the trunks being short and thick, and the heads bushy and round, as if
+trained by art. There is another tree, much larger, which I think
+resembles that which produces the jesuit bark. There are plains on the
+tops of some of the mountains, on which are groves of the _Indian
+laurel_, mentioned by Frezier in his description of Chili. These have a
+straight slender body, from which sprout small irregular branches all
+the way from the root to the top, bearing leaves like the laurel, but
+smaller. _Palm-trees_ are found in most parts of the island, growing in
+smooth joints, like canes, some thirty and some forty feet high. Their
+heads resemble the cocoa-nut tree, except that their leaves are of a
+paler green, and bear large bunches of red berries, bigger than sloes,
+which taste like haws, and have stones as large as those of
+heart-cherries. That which we call the _palm-cabbage_ is the very
+substance of the head of the tree; which being cut off and divested of
+its great spreading leaves, and all that is hard and tough, consists of
+a white and tender young shoot or head, having its leaves and berries
+perfectly formed, and ready to replace the old one. When in search of
+these, we were forced to cut down a lofty tree for each individual
+cabbage.
+
+One good property of the woods which cover this island is, that they are
+every where of easy access, as there is no undergrowth, except in some
+of the deepest valleys, where the fern grows exceedingly high, and of
+which there are very large trees, with trunks of considerable
+solidity.[270] Some of the English who had been formerly here, had sowed
+turnips, which have spread much, as have also two or three plantations
+of small pompions; but my men never had patience to let any of these
+come to maturity. We found also plenty of water-cresses and wild sorrel.
+Some of the hills are remarkable for a fine red earth, which I take to
+be the same with that of which the inhabitants of Chili make their
+earthenware, which is almost as beautiful as the red porcelain of China.
+The northern part of the island is well watered by a great many streams
+which flow down the narrow valleys; and we found the water to keep well
+at sea, and to be as good as any in the world. Down the western peak,
+contiguous to the Table Mountain, there fall two cascades from a
+perpendicular height of not less than 500 feet. These are close
+together, and about 12 feet broad. What with the rapid descent of these
+streams, and the numerous palm-trees growing close beside them, adorned
+with vast clusters of red berries, the prospect is really beautiful. We
+should have had no want of goats, could we have conveniently followed
+them in the mountains. The Spaniards, before they settled in Chili, left
+a breed of goats here, and have since endeavoured to destroy them, by
+leaving a breed of dogs, but without effect. Cats are also very
+numerous, exactly resembling our household cats in size and colour; and
+those of our men who eat of them, assured me they found more substantial
+relief from one meal of their flesh, than from four or five of seal or
+fish; and, to their great satisfaction, we had a small bitch, which,
+could catch almost any number they wanted in an hour. There are not many
+sorts of birds; but the sea on the coast abounds with a greater variety
+of fish than almost any place I was ever in.
+
+[Footnote 270: These must have been some species of palm, having
+palmatad leaves resembling ferns.--E.]
+
+Seals and sea-lions also abound; called _lobos de la mar_ by the
+Spaniards, from their resemblance to wolves. They have a fine iron-grey
+fur, and when full grown are as big as a large mastiff. They are
+naturally surly, and snarl at the approach of any one. Instead of tails,
+they have two fins behind, with which they make shift to get on much
+faster than the sea-lions, which are large unwieldy creatures, and
+prodigiously full of oil.
+
+
+
+
+SECTION IV.
+
+_Farther Proceedings in the South Sea, after leaving Juan Fernandez._
+
+
+We departed from Juan Fernandez on the evening of the 6th October,
+having nothing to subsist upon except the smoked congers, one of which
+was allowed to each man for twenty-four hours; together with one cask of
+beef, four live hogs, which had fed all the time we were ashore on the
+putrid carcases of seals, and three or four bushels of cassada meal. We
+were upwards of forty men, crowded together, and lying on the bundles of
+eels, with no means of keeping ourselves clean, so that all our senses
+were offended as greatly as possible. The only way we had of procuring
+water, was by sucking it from the cask with a gun-barrel, used
+promiscuously by every one. The little unsavoury morsels we daily eat,
+created incessant quarrels, every one contending for the frying-pan; and
+our only convenience for a fire, was a tub half filled with earth, which
+made cooking so tedious, that we had the continual noise of frying from
+morning to night. I proposed that we should stand for the Bay of
+Conception, as being the nearest to us; and we were hard put to it every
+day, while the sea-breeze continued; for, not having above sixteen
+inches free board, and our bark tumbling prodigiously, the water ran
+over us perpetually; and having only a grating deck, and no tarpaulin to
+cover it but the top-sail of our bark, our pomps were barely sufficient
+to keep us free.
+
+At four in the morning of the 10th, we fell in with a large ship, and I
+could see by moon-light that she was Europe-built. Our case being
+desperate, we stood towards her, and being rigged after the fashion of
+the South Seas, they did not regard us till day-light. Not being then
+quite up with her, they suspected us by the brownness of our canvas,
+wore ship, hauled close upon the wind, fired a gun, and crowded sail
+away from us, leaving us at a great rate. It fell calm two hours after,
+when we had recourse to our oars, and neared her with tolerable speed.
+In the mean time, we overhauled our arms, which we found in bad
+condition, a third of them wanting flints, and we had only three
+cutlasses, so that we were by no means prepared for boarding, which yet
+was the only means we had of taking the ship. We had only one small
+cannon, which we could not mount, and were therefore obliged to fire it
+as it lay along the deck; and we had only two round shot, a few
+chain-bolts, the clapper of the Speedwell's bell, and some bags of
+stones. We came up with her in four hours; but I now saw that she had
+guns and pattereroes, with a considerable number of men, whose arms
+glittered in the sun. The enemy defied us to board them, and at the same
+time gave us a volley of great and small shot, which killed our gunner,
+and almost brought our foremast by the board. This unexpected reception
+staggered many of my people, who before seemed most forward, so that
+they lay on their oars for some time, though I urged them to keep their
+way. Recovering again, we rowed quite up to them, and continued to
+engage till all our small shot was expended, which obliged us to fall
+astern to make some slugs, and in this manner we made three attacks
+without success. All night we were busied in making slugs, and provided
+a large quantity before morning, when we came to the determined
+resolution either to carry her by boarding, or to submit to her. At
+day-break, I accordingly ordered twenty men in our yawl to lay her
+athwart hawse, while I proposed to board her from the bark; but, just as
+we were on the point of making the attempt, a gale sprung up, and she
+went away from us. We learnt afterwards that she was the _Margaretta_,
+having formerly been a privateer from St Malo, mounting forty guns. In
+the several skirmishes, we had none killed, except Gilbert Henderson our
+gunner. Three were wounded, Mr Brooks being shot through the thigh, Mr
+Coldsea in the groin, and one of the crew in the small of the back. Mr
+Coldsea lingered in a miserable condition for nine or ten months, but at
+length recovered.
+
+We were now in a worse condition than ever, and the sea being too rough
+for our uncomfortable vessel, I proposed to stand to the north to get
+into fairer weather, but to take Coquimbo in our way, to try what might
+be done there. This was agreed to; but the very morning in which we
+expected to have got into Coquimbo, a hard gale of wind sprung up, which
+lasted four days, during which we every hour expected to founder, being
+obliged to scud under bare poles, with our yawl in tow, and having only
+a very short rope for her. This storm so frightened many of our people,
+that they resolved to go ashore at the first place they could find. At
+length, calling to mind the account given by Frezier of the island of
+_Iquique_, I mentioned the surprisal of that place, being but a small
+lieutenancy, where we might probably get some wholesome provisions, and
+a better vessel. This was approved, and the sun again shining, so that
+we lay dry, we acquired fresh vigour, and directed our course for that
+island. Next evening we saw the island, which seemed merely a high white
+rock, at the foot of the high land of _Carapucho_. Our boat set off for
+the island about sun-set, and had like to have been lost among the
+breakers. At length they heard the barking of dogs, and saw the light of
+some candles; but, aware of the danger of landing in the dark, they made
+fast their boat to a float of weeds for want of a grapnel, and waited
+till day-light. They then rowed in between the rocks, and were
+ignorantly welcomed on shore by some Indians. Going to the house of the
+lieutenant, they broke open the door, and rummaged it and the village,
+finding a booty more valuable to us in our present situation than gold
+or silver. This consisted of 60 bushels of wheat flour, 120 of
+calavanses and corn, some jerked beef, mutton, and pork, a thousand
+weight of well-cured fish, four or five days eating of soft bread, and
+five or six jars of Peruvian wine and brandy, besides a good number of
+fowls and some rusk. They had also the good fortune to find a boat to
+bring off their plunder, which otherwise had been of little use to us,
+as our own boat was fully laden with men.
+
+In the mean time, we in the bark were carried away by the current to the
+northward, out of sight of the island; and as they had not loaded their
+boats till the height of the day, they had a laborious task to row off,
+being very heavily laden. We were under melancholy apprehensions,
+fearing that our people might have remained on shore and deserted us;
+but towards evening we perceived two boats coming fast towards us, as
+heavily laden as they could be with safety. Words cannot express our joy
+when they came aboard. The scene was now changed from famine to plenty.
+The loaves of soft bread were distributed, and the jars of wine
+broached: But I took care they should drink of it moderately, allowing
+each man no more than half a pint a-day. After living a day or two on
+wholesome food, we wondered how our stomachs could receive and digest
+the rank nauseous congers fried in train-oil, and could hardly believe
+we had lived on nothing else for a month past. I was assured by my
+second lieutenant, who commanded the boat on this occasion, that the
+Indians seemed rather pleased at our plundering the Spaniards; so
+natural is it for bad masters to find enemies in their servants.
+
+The _island of Iquique_ is in the lat. of 19° 50' S.[271] about a mile
+from the main land, and only about a mile and a half in circuit, the
+channel between it and the coast of Peru being full of rocks. It is of
+moderate height, and the surface consists mostly of cormorant's dung,
+which is so very white that places covered with it appear at a distance
+like chalk cliffs. Its smell is very offensive, yet it produces
+considerable gain, as several ships load here with it every year for
+Arica, where it is used as manure for growing capsicums. The only
+inhabitants of this island are negro slaves, who gather this dung into
+large heaps near the shore, ready for boats to take it off. The village
+where the lieutenant resides, and which our people plundered, is on the
+main land close by the sea, and consists of about sixty scattered
+ill-built houses, or huts rather, and a small church. There is not the
+smallest verdure to be seen about it, neither does its neighbourhood
+afford even the smallest necessary of life, not even water, which the
+inhabitants have to bring in boats from the _Quebrada_, or breach of
+_Pisagua_, ten leagues to the northward; wherefore, being so miserable a
+place, the advantage derived from the _guana_ or cormorant's dung seems
+the only inducement for its being inhabited. To be at some distance from
+the excessively offensive stench of the dung, they have built their
+wretched habitations on the main, in a most hideous situation, and still
+even too near the guana, the vapours from which are even there very bad,
+yet not quite so suffocating as on the island. The sea here affords
+abundance of excellent fish, some kinds of which I had never before
+seen; one of them resembling a large silver eel, but much thicker in
+proportion. The inhabitants of this desolate and forbidding place cure
+these fish in a very cleanly manner, and export large quantities of
+them by the vessels which come for the guana.
+
+[Footnote 271: There is no island on the coast of Peru in that latitude.
+Iquique is a town on the main land, about thirty miles from the sea. The
+islands called _los Patillos_, or the Claws, are near the coast, in lat.
+20° 45' S. and probably one of these may have got the name of _Iquique_,
+as being under the jurisdiction of that town. The mountain Carapacha of
+the text, is probably the hills of Tarapaca of our maps.--E.]
+
+We were informed by two Indian prisoners, that the lieutenant of Iquique
+had a boat at Pisagua for water, of which we began to be in need, for
+which reason I sent Mr Randal in search of her. He failed in this
+object, but brought off a few bladders full of water, and three or four
+_balsas_, very artificially sewed and filled with wind, which are used
+for landing on this dangerous coast. On these the rower sits across,
+using a double paddle; and as the wind escapes from the skin bags, he
+has a contrivance for supplying the deficiency. These are the chief
+embarkations used by the fishermen, and are found very serviceable for
+landing on this coast, which has hardly a smooth beach from one end of
+it to the other. We intended to have looked into the port of Arica, but
+heard there was a ship there of force, on which we continued our course
+to the northwards to La Nasca. Off that port we met a large ship about
+two hours before day, and though we rowed very hard, it was ten o'clock
+before we got up with her. After a brisk dispute of six or seven hours,
+we were obliged to leave her, in consequence of the sea-breeze coming in
+very strong. She was called the Francisco Palacio, of 700 tons, 8 guns,
+and 10 patereroes, with a great number of men, and well provided with
+small arms; but was so deeply laden that, in rolling, the water ran over
+her deck and out at her scuppers; indeed she had more the appearance of
+an ill-contrived floating castle, than of a ship, according to the
+present fashion of Europe. Thus we had the misfortune, on this forlorn
+voyage, to meet with the two best equipped and armed private ships at
+that time in the South Sea. In this action we had not above twenty
+fire-arms that were of any use, owing to the improvidence of our people
+at Juan Fernandez; yet were they so impatient of this disappointment,
+that some of them were for immediately surrendering to the enemy. To
+prevent this, I ordered four men whom I thought I could trust to take
+the charge of our two boats; but two of these went away with the best
+boat, and my first lieutenant and Morphew plotted to have gone away with
+the other, but were hindered by blowing weather, and so weak was my
+authority that I was forced to dissemble.
+
+Next day we stood into the road of Pisco, where we saw a very fine ship,
+and resolved immediately to board her; and to our great satisfaction,
+the captain and his people met us with their hats off, beseeching us to
+give them quarter. This was a good ship, of about 200 tons, called the
+Jesu Maria, almost laden with pitch, tar, copper, and plank, but nothing
+else. The captain offered 16,000 dollars for her ransom, but I could not
+comply, as the Recovery was disabled in her masts in boarding, and also
+we had now a vessel in which we could at least enjoy cleanliness, which
+we had been entire strangers to ever since our departure from Juan
+Fernandez; wherefore we made all dispatch in getting every thing out of
+the bark. The Spanish captain of the Jesu Maria informed me, that the
+Margaretta had arrived some time before at Calao, where she had given a
+full account of her rencounter with us; her captain and three men having
+been killed in the action, and a priest with several others wounded. She
+was now ready to put to sea again to cruize for us, with the addition of
+ten guns and fifty men. A frigate of twenty-eight guns, called the
+Flying-fish, was already out with the same intention; and advice had
+been sent respecting us along the coast, both to the north and south,
+with orders to equip what strength there was to catch us. All night, the
+people of Pisco were on the alert, continually firing guns, to give us
+an earnest of what we were to expect if we attempted to land, but we had
+no such intention.
+
+Having cleared our bark next morning, we gave her to the Spanish captain
+of the Jesu Maria; and as soon as the breeze sprung up, we weighed and
+stood to sea. While going out, we met our own boat with the two men who
+had deserted us, and who now edged down upon us, imagining we had been
+Spaniards. The two fellows were almost dead, having neither eat nor
+drank for three days, and had just been ashore on a small island near
+the harbour of Pisco, to kill some seals that they might drink their
+blood. Their only excuse for leaving us was, that they had fallen
+asleep, during which the breeze had wafted our bark away from them. We
+had only a transient view of Pisco, which seemed pleasantly situated
+among orchards and vineyards. We proceeded along the coast very
+cautiously, knowing that we were almost in the mouths of our enemies,
+and that the least act of indiscretion might throw us into their hands.
+We ventured, however, to look into the roads of Guanchaco, Malabriga,
+and Cheripe, where we saw no shipping, after which we passed through
+between the island of _Lobos de Tierra_ and the continent.
+
+Being near the _Saddle_ of Payta on the 25th November, I thought of
+surprising that place in the night, though our force was much diminished
+since our last attack; but as it grew calm while we were endeavouring to
+get into the harbour, we thought it better to delay till morning, as our
+vessel being Spanish would deceive the inhabitants, and prevent them
+from suspecting us. In the morning, being observed from the shore making
+many short trips to gain ground to windward, the Spaniards sent off a
+large boat full of men to assist in bringing in our ship, and to enquire
+the news. Seeing them making towards us, I ordered none of our men to
+appear but such as had dark complexions and wore Spanish dresses,
+standing ready to answer such questions as they might ask in hailing,
+and to give them a rope when they clapped us on board. Some of our men
+also were concealed under our gunwales, with their muskets ready to
+point into the boat, to command them to make her fast, and this
+stratagem succeeded. I examined the prisoners as to the condition of the
+town, which they assured me was then extremely poor, having neither
+money nor provisions, and shewed me a small bark on shore, lately sent
+in by Captain Clipperton with some of his prisoners, on the arrival of
+which every thing of value had been removed into the country. Yet we
+held on our way with Spanish colours flying, and came to the anchorage.
+
+As soon as we were anchored, I sent Mr Brooks to attack the town with
+twenty-four men, only those who rowed appearing, and the rest with their
+arms lying in the bottom of the boats; so that when they landed, they
+even found the children playing on the beach. These took the alarm
+immediately, and ran away on seeing our armed men. In an instant the
+whole place was in confusion, and happy were they who could escape, the
+town being left destitute, and they were too nimble to be overtaken. Our
+party ransacked Payta, but found it as poor as our prisoners reported;
+so that they only found a few bales of coarse cloth, about five
+hundred-weight of dried dog-fish, two or three pedlars packs, and an
+inconsiderable quantity of bread and sweetmeats. We had better fortune
+while at anchor, as we took a vessel in which were about fifty jars of
+Peruvian wine and brandy; her master having come by stealth from Calao,
+where orders had been given, that none but ships of force should venture
+to sea. My people in the town were in no haste to re-embark, and when it
+grew dark, some of the Spaniards began to assemble, and learning that
+there were only eighteen English in the town, came down the hills with
+great boldness. At first our people took refuge in the largest church,
+meaning to have defended themselves there; but at length they marched
+out, formed in a line, and kept beating their drum; and one of them
+having fired a musket, the Spaniards hastily retreated, and our men
+embarked without any more alarm.
+
+From Payta we directed our course for the island of Gorgona, in the bay
+of Panama, and in our passage to that place built a tank or wooden
+cistern in our vessel, sufficient to contain ten tons of water. In our
+way we made the island of Plata, Cape St Francisco, Gorgonella, or
+Little Gorgona, and on the 2d of December arrived at the island of
+Gorgona. We had here the advantage of being able to fill our watercasks
+in the boat, the water running in small streams from the rocks into the
+sea, and we cut our wood for fuel close to high-water mark; so that in
+less than forty-eight hours we completed our business, and hurried away
+for fear of those vessels which we understood had been sent in search of
+us. Having got out of the track of the enemy's ships, we consulted as to
+the properest manner of proceeding, when the majority were for going
+directly for India. Upon this we changed the name of our vessel, from
+the Jesu Maria to the Happy-Return, and used our best endeavours to get
+off from the coast of America. The winds and currents were however
+contrary, and some of our people who were adverse to this plan did some
+secret damage to our tank, so that the greatest part of our water leaked
+out. Owing to this, and our provisions being much exhausted by long
+delays from contrary winds or dead calms, we were incapable of
+attempting so long a run: Wherefore, on purpose to procure what we
+wanted, I proposed making a descent on Realejo, on the coast of Mexico,
+in 11° 50' [12° 28' N.] In our way thither, we fell in with Cape Burica,
+in 8° 20' [_exactly_ 8° N.] and then, on second thoughts, I judged it
+might be safer to make an attempt on the island of Quibo, in lat. 7°
+30' N. where, according to the account given by Captain Rogers. I
+guessed there were inhabitants, who lived plentifully on the produce of
+their island.
+
+On the 31st January, 1721, we entered the channel between the islands of
+_Quibo_ and _Quivetta_, in lat. 7° 18' N. in twenty fathoms water, and
+anchored opposite a sandy bay, which promised to afford convenience for
+wooding and watering. Sending our boat to view the bay, my people
+reported that there was a good close harbour a little to the south, but
+no signs of inhabitants, except three or four huts by the shore, which
+they supposed had formerly been used by pearl-fishers, as there were
+great quantities of mother-of-pearl-shells scattered about these huts.
+On attentive consideration, I resolved not to shut up our vessel in a
+close harbour, for fear of bad consequences, and remained therefore at
+anchor in the open channel. At day-break next morning, we saw two large
+boats under Spanish colours, rowing in for Quivetta, which gave me some
+apprehensions they had some intelligence of us, and intended an attack.
+The mulattoes on the coast of Mexico are remarkable for their courage,
+and have sometimes done very bold actions, even in such paltry vessels
+as these we now saw: These, however, steered into a small cove on the
+island of Quivetta, which satisfied us they had no intentions to attack
+us. I now sent Mr Brooks in our yawl to attack them, when he found them
+all ashore, and brought away their piraguas with two prisoners, a negro
+and a mulatto, the rest taking refuge in the woods. We took all their
+provisions, consisting of a small quantity of pork, with plantains, some
+green, some ripe, and some dried. Of this last there was a considerable
+quantity, which, on being pounded, made a pleasant-tasted flour,
+indifferently white, and supplied us with bread for a month. The mulatto
+mortified us greatly by telling us that a vessel laden with provisions
+had passed near us in the night, but promised to bring us to a place
+where we might supply ourselves without hazard, provided we were not
+above two or three days about it, wherefore we made all possible
+dispatch in getting in our wood and water.
+
+We weighed from this place on the 16th January, steering for _Mariato_,
+being the westernmost point of the gulf of St Martin. In going out from
+the channel of Quibo, we were in imminent danger of being forced by the
+current upon two rocks at a small distance from each other, off the
+northern point of Quivetta; but having cleared them, we steered through
+_Canal bueno_, or the good channel, so called from its safety, being
+free from rocks or shoals. Over against the south entrance of these
+straits, at the distance of a league from point Mariato, is the island
+of Cebaco, in my opinion about ten leagues in circumference. I ran along
+the south end of that island, and in the evening of the 19th got safe in
+between it and point Mariato, and anchored in six fathoms, over against
+a green field, being the only clear spot thereabout. Our pilot advised
+us to land about three hours before day, when we should be in good time
+for the plantations. Accordingly, I went at two in the morning in our
+own boat, the two lieutenants being in the two piraguas, and left my son
+with a few hands to take care of the ship. Our pilot carried us a little
+way up the river of St Martin, and out of that through several branches
+or narrow creeks, among groves of trees, so close that we had not room
+to row. Not approving of this navigation, I kept a watchful eye on our
+guide, suspecting he had no good design in his head. We landed just at
+day-break, in a fine plain, or savannah; and, after a march of three
+miles, came to two farm-houses, whence the inhabitants made their
+escape, except the wife and children belonging to one of them. We had
+the satisfaction of seeing that this place answered the description
+given by our guide, being surrounded by numerous flocks of black cattle,
+with plenty of hogs, and fowls of several sorts, together with some
+dried beef; plantains, and maize; and, in the mean time, we had a
+breakfast of hot cakes and milk.
+
+When it was broad day, I saw our ship close by us, on which I asked our
+guide, why he had brought us so far about? when he said there was a
+river between us and the shore, and he was not sure if it were fordable.
+I therefore sent some to try, who found it only knee deep, on which, to
+avoid carrying our plunder so far by land, I ordered our boats to leave
+the river of St Martin, and to row to the beach over against the ship.
+We had not been long at the farmhouse till the master of the family came
+to us, bringing several horses with him, and offering to serve us as far
+as he could. This offer we kindly accepted, and we employed him to carry
+every thing we thought fit to our boats. He then went among his black
+cattle, and brought us as many as we thought we could cure, as we had
+but little salt, and could not afford water to keep them alive at sea,
+so that we killed them as soon as they came on board. We preserved them
+by cutting their flesh into long slips, about the thickness of one's
+finger, and then sprinkled them with a small quantity of salt, not using
+more than four or five pounds to the hundred-weight. After lying two or
+three hours in the salt, we hung it up to dry in the sun for two or
+three days, which perfectly cured it, much better than could have been
+done by any quantity of the best salt.
+
+Having thus procured all we proposed at this place, we departed from
+thence nest morning, having our decks full of fowls and hogs, among the
+latter of which was one having its navel on its back.[272] The Spaniards
+say that this animal, although but small even at its full growth, is a
+terrible creature to meet wild in the woods. Returning through the
+_Canal bueno_, we stopt at Quibo to complete our water; and on leaving
+that island, gave the largest piragua to our two prisoners, to enable
+those who were on the island of Quivetta to return home. The wine and
+brandy we had lately taken had the effect of dividing my ship's company
+into two parties, those who were formerly so firmly united being now
+inveterate enemies; insomuch, that in one night the ringleaders of both
+have solicited me to espouse their cause, assuring me that the other
+party had a design on my life, and urging me to murder those who were of
+the opposite faction. It is wonderful how this evil was diverted, as I
+could use no other means than calm advice on both sides, and it was
+utterly out of my power to hinder them from getting drunk as often as
+they pleased; in which condition they often fell all to skirmishing with
+each other, and I had more than once my clothes almost torn off my back
+in endeavouring to part them. It was happy this trade of drinking did
+not last long, as, while the liquor lasted, I found it was unsafe to lay
+my head on my pillow, which almost wearied me out of my life. Their free
+access to the liquor shortened the term of this miserable folly, by soon
+expending the baneful cause. The necessities of hunger obliged them to
+act jointly and vigorously at Mariato; but they soon relapsed again, and
+were as distracted as ever so long as the liquor lasted. My land as well
+as sea-officers were now obliged to learn to steer, and to take their
+turns at the helm with the seamen, such being the pass to which they had
+brought themselves by sinking my authority, that they had lost their
+own, and were even in a worse condition than I; as the crew had, for
+their own sakes, to have recourse to me on all emergencies, obeying me
+punctually while these lasted, and abusing me plentifully when these
+were over.
+
+[Footnote 272: The Pecary, Tajacu, or Mexican hog, the Sus Tajapin of
+naturalists, is here meant, which is an indigenous animal of the warmer
+parts of America, and is found in one of the West India islands. It has
+no tail, and is particularly distinguished by an open glandular orifice
+on the hinder part of the back, which discharges a fetid unctuous
+liquid; and which orifice has been vulgarly mistaken for the navel.--E.]
+
+On the 25th January, we discovered a sail in the morning, about two
+leagues to leeward, to which we gave chase for some time; but seeing she
+was Europe-built, and fearing she might be a man of war belonging to the
+enemy, I hauled on a wind, and in half an hour it fell dead calm. We
+soon after saw a boat rowing towards us, which proved the pinnace of our
+consort the Success, commanded by her first lieutenant, Mr Davison. This
+was a most unexpected meeting to us both, Mr Davison being surprised to
+find me in such a condition, and I no less so to find the Success in
+these seas. I gave him an account of our misfortunes, and of all that
+had befallen us during the long interval of our separation, and he
+related all the remarkable incidents that had befallen them. A breeze of
+wind springing up, I bore down upon the Success, and went aboard of her;
+when I gave Captain Clipperton, and Mr Godfrey, our agent-general, the
+whole history of my voyage, expecting to have been treated by them as
+belonging to the same interest, but found them unwilling to have any
+thing to do with me, now that my ship was lost. I trusted, however, that
+Captain Clipperton would let me have such necessaries as he could spare,
+on which he said, I should know more of his mind next day. Among other
+discourses, he told me that he was just come from the island of _Cocos_,
+his people very sickly, and on short allowance. I then offered my
+service to pilot him to Mariato, which was not above thirty leagues
+distant, where he might have refreshed his company, and supplied his
+wants; but he was resolved to make the best of his way for the _Tres
+Marias_, where he said there was plenty of turtle to be had, and so I
+left him for the night.
+
+Next morning, as I was going again on board the Success with some of my
+officers, Captain Clipperton spread all his canvass, and crowded away
+from us. On this I returned to my ship, fired several guns, and made
+signals of distress, which were not regarded by him, till his officers
+exclaimed against his barbarity, and at last he brought to. When I had
+again got up with him, I sent Mr Brooks to know the reason of his
+abrupt departure, and to request the supply of several necessaries,
+which I was willing to pay for. On these terms, he spared me two of his
+quarter-deck guns, sixty round shot, some musket-balls and flints, a
+Spanish chart of the coast of Mexico, with part of China and India, a
+half-hour glass and half-minute glass, a compass, and about three
+hundred-weight of salt: But all my arguments could not prevail with him
+to let me have any thing out of his medicine-chest for Mr Coldsea, who
+was still very ill of his wound. For what we now had from the Success,
+we returned some bales of coarse broad-cloth, as much pitch and tar as
+he would have, and some pigs of copper: I gave him also a large
+silver-ladle for a dozen _spadoen_, or Spanish swords. This being
+concluded, I offered my services, assuring him I had a pretty good ship,
+and that our cargo was of some value: To this he answered, if my cargo
+were gold, he had no business with me, and I must take care of myself.
+Mr Hendric, our agent, Mr Rainer, and Mr Dodd, our lieutenant of
+marines, weary of the hard work imposed upon them, desired my leave to
+go on board the Success, which I consented to, and Captain Clipperton
+left us to shift for ourselves, being now near the island of Cano.
+
+I was now for returning southwards, to try our fortunes in the bay of
+Panama, but the majority opposed me through fear, insisting to go to the
+Tres Marias, to salt turtle at these islands, and then to stretch over
+for India. We accordingly directed our coarse that way, but as the wind
+near the land continued in the west, and the coast of Mexico trended
+nearly N.W. by W. we crept so slowly to windward, that we began to be
+very short of provisions before we got the length of Realijo, on which
+our design of landing there was renewed; but this intention was soon
+frustrated, as we were blown past that place by a _tequante peque_, for
+so the Spaniards on this coast call a violent gale at N.E. As we
+continued our voyage along shore, we again fell in with the Success,
+then in quest of _Sonsonate_, expecting there to receive the ransom of
+the Marquis of _Villa Roche_ who had been some time a prisoner on board.
+We ranged close under her stern, and asked how Captain Clipperton and
+the rest of the gentlemen did, but received no answer, and the Success
+steered one way, while we went another. After this, calms, contrary
+winds, and unaccountable currents, so delayed our proceedings, that were
+reduced to a very short allowance, which we were forced to diminish
+daily, and had been reduced to very great distress, had we not from time
+to time found turtle floating on the surface of the sea, for which we
+kept a good look-out, being able to discover them even at great
+distances, by the sea-birds perching on their backs. On sight of these,
+we were forced often to forego taking advantage of the wind; and,
+besides often losing some of our way in pursuit of them, they had still
+a worse effect, as dressing them occasioned a great consumption of our
+water.
+
+Being now threatened with almost certain perdition if means were not
+fallen upon to avoid a state of absolute famine, I proposed that we
+should attempt to plunder some small town as we coasted along shore. At
+this time _Guotalco_ was the nearest port; but, as we were standing in
+for it, we saw a sail a considerable way to leeward, which we considered
+more proper for us to endeavour to capture than to venture on shore, for
+which purpose we bore down upon her, which proved to be the Success.
+When sufficiently near, I made the private signal formerly concerted
+between us, but Captain Clipperton hauled his wind, and did not lie by a
+moment for us to get up with him. We were now so for to leeward of
+Guatalco, that it was in vain to beat up for that port, especially on an
+uncertainty. We were now reduced to a small daily allowance of
+calavances, which not being sufficient to keep us alive, we had recourse
+to the remainder of our smoked congers which had been neglected for some
+months, and had been soaking and rotting in the bilge-water, so that
+they were now as disgusting food as could be. Under these calamitous
+circumstances, we again met the Success near port _Angels_, in lat. 15°
+50' N. long. 96° 25' W. Having exchanged signals, we stood so near each
+other that a biscuit might have been chucked aboard, yet did not
+exchange a word, as Clipperton had ordered his officers and ship's
+company to take no notice of us: Yet was Captain Clipperton so sensible
+of the difficulties and hazards we had to encounter in our design of
+going for India, that he said the child just born would be grey-haired
+before we should arrive there. We were now in a most miserable
+situation, wandering upon an inhospitable coast in want of every thing,
+and all the land we had seen was so wild and open to the sea, that it
+would have been impossible for us to have landed any where, and nothing
+could have urged us to make the attempt but the extreme want we were now
+in.
+
+On the 12th March, being off the port of Acapulco towards evening, we
+saw a ship between us and the shore, which turned out to be the Success,
+when Clipperton not only answered my private signal, but also that for
+speaking with me. After his late inhumane behaviour, I would hardly have
+trusted him, had we not been so near Acapulco, where I thought he meant
+to cruize for the Manilla ships, and now wished to have our assistance,
+wherefore I bore down alongside. He now sent his second lieutenant,
+Captain Cooke, with a very obliging letter to me, stating that he was
+cruizing for the homeward-bound Manilla ships, and desired me to assist
+him in the enterprise, with which view he desired me to come on board
+next morning, to consult on the best plan of attacking her, and proposed
+an union of the two companies. I was well pleased at this offer, and
+returned an answer that I should be with him early. I then read his
+letter to my people, who all expressed their readiness to join in the
+enterprise; but, as Clipperton had used us so unhandsomely, they desired
+me to have some security for their shares, signed by Clipperton, Godfrey
+the agent, and the rest of the officers in the Success.
+
+I went aboard the Success next morning, accompanied by Brooks and
+Randal, my lieutenants, and was received with much apparent civility,
+all animosities being forgotten, and we seemed now in the most perfect
+harmony. I first told Captain Clipperton and Mr Godfrey of the paper
+expected by my officers and men, entitling them to such shares as were
+allowed by the original articles, to which they readily consented, and
+drew up an instrument fully answerable to what my people desired. We
+then proceeded to our consultation, when it was agreed that I should
+send most of my people on board the Success as soon as the Manilla ship
+appeared, leaving only a boat's crew with me to bring me away in case I
+should have an opportunity to use my vessel as a fire-ship, or smoker,
+in case she should prove too hard for the Success. We also determined to
+board her at once, as otherwise we should have much the worst of the
+contest, owing to her superior weight of metal, and her better ability
+to bear a cannonade. Clipperton assured me he was certain of the time
+this ship was to sail from Acapulco, being always within a day or two
+after Passion-week, of which time a fortnight was yet to come. Before
+returning to my own ship, I informed Captain Clipperton of our scarcity
+of water, when he told me he had eighty tons, and would spare me as much
+as I wanted, or any thing else his ship afforded. I had now the
+pleasure of enjoying my command as fully as ever, and my whole remaining
+crew, from the highest to the lowest, expressed their satisfaction at
+our present prospects. Morphew, the ringleader of all our disorders,
+fearing my resentment might fall heavily on him, contrived to insinuate
+himself into the favour of the captain and officers of the Success, by a
+submissive deportment, and presents, and, in the end, left me on the
+14th March, being received on board that ship. On the 15th, Mr Rainer
+came on board my ship, to visit his old ship-mates, and staid all night.
+I constantly reminded Clipperton of our want of water, and he as often
+promised to supply us with a large quantity at once.
+
+We thus continued to cruize in good order, and with great hopes, till
+the 27th March, when I had to suffer the most prodigious piece of
+treachery that could be imagined. We used to cruize off and on, at a
+convenient distance from the shore, so as not to be discovered from the
+land, yet so that it was impossible for any ship to leave the port of
+Acapulco without being seen by us. As my ship did not sail so well as
+the Success, Clipperton used to shorten sail, particularly at night, and
+shewed us lights on all necessary occasions. Towards evening of that
+day, he stretched about two leagues a-head of us, and I could not see
+that he lowered even a topgallant-sail for us to come up with him. I
+kept standing after him however, till almost a-shore on the breakers,
+when I had to tack and stand out to sea. Next morning no ship was to be
+seen, which reduced us to the most terrible apprehensions, considering
+our sad situation for want of water, and our vast distance from any
+place where we could expect to procure any, as we had now no other
+choice but either to beat up 220 leagues to the _Tres Marias_, or to
+bear away for the gulf of Amapala, at a much greater distance. I was
+afterwards informed, by some of Clipperton's officers, whom I met with
+in China, that he had done this cruel action absolutely against the
+repeated remonstrances of his officers, who abhorred such an act of
+barbarity. I also learnt afterwards, by some Spaniards from Manilla,
+that the Acapulco ship sailed about a week after we desisted from
+cruizing for her. This ship was the _Santo Christo_, carrying upwards of
+forty brass guns, and was exceedingly rich.
+
+In the sad situation we were now reduced to, every thing was to be
+hazarded, and any experiment tried that promised the smallest chance of
+success. We continued our course therefore, under terrible
+inconveniences, distressed for water and provisions, and weak in point
+of number; yet so far from being united by our common danger, that our
+people could not be restrained within the bounds of common civility. The
+winds and weather being favourable, we found ourselves before the port
+of _Sansonate_ [273] on the 30th March, about sun-set, when we
+discovered a ship of good size at anchor in the harbour. Being a fine
+moonlight evening, I sent my first lieutenant in the yawl, with some of
+our best hands, to see what she was. Soon afterwards we heard some guns
+fired, and on the return of the lieutenant, he reported that she was a
+stout ship, having at least one tier of guns. Little regarding her
+apparent strength, or our own weakness, as we thought our necessities
+made us a match for her, we continued plying in all night, and prepared
+to engage her. At sun-rise the land-breeze blew so fresh from the shore,
+that we worked in but slowly; and in the mean time we received all their
+fire on every board we made, but without returning a single shot. Their
+boat also was employed in bringing off soldiers from the shore, to
+reinforce their ship; and they hung up a jar of about ten gallons of
+powder, with a match, at each main and fore-yard-arm, and at the
+bowsprit end, to let fall on our deck, in case we boarded them, which
+contrivance, if it had taken effect, would have made an end of both
+ships, and all that were in them. Seeing them so desperate in their
+preparations, I could not but expect a warm reception; but as our case
+would not admit of delay, at ever so hazardous a rate, we were not to be
+dismayed. About eleven in the forenoon the sea-breeze set in, and, to
+make our small force as available as might be, I ordered all our three
+guns to be placed on that side from which we were likely to engage. As
+the sea-breeze freshened we ran fast towards them, during which our
+small arms were effectually employed to break their powder-jars before
+we should board them, which we did without delay, and they submitted
+after exchanging a few shots.
+
+[Footnote 273: The port of Aeazualte, at the mouth of the river
+Samsonate, in the province of that name.--E.]
+
+This ship was named the _Sacra Familia_, of 300 tons, six guns, and
+seventy men, having a great many small arms, shot, and hand-granades.
+She had arrived some time before from Calao, with wine and brandy; but
+had now nothing on board except fifty jars of gunpowder, a small
+quantity of rusk, and some jerked beef; so that she was hardly worth the
+risk and trouble of capture. But as she had the character of sailing
+better, and was much better fitted than our ship, I resolved to exchange
+ships, and we all went aboard the prize, which had been fitted out in
+warlike manner, and commissioned, for the express purpose of taking us,
+if we chanced to fall in her way. To do justice to my people, our small
+arms were handled with much dexterity on this occasion; but, having been
+chiefly directed at the powder-jars, the only person killed on board the
+prize was the boatswain, and one person slightly wounded; while on our
+side no damage was sustained. A merchant, made prisoner at this time,
+seemed inclined to purchase the _Jesu Maria_, which we had quitted; and
+hearing her cargo consisted of pitch, tar, and copper, he consented to
+my demands, and went ashore to raise the sum agreed upon. We had so few
+provisions, that we could not afford to keep any prisoners, and
+therefore dismissed all the whites, Indians, and others, except some
+negroes, whom we detained to assist in working the ship: and, that we
+might lose as little time as possible, we set immediately to work,
+overhauling our sails and rigging, that we might get our new ship ready
+for sea.
+
+While thus employed, I received a letter from the governor of the place,
+which none of us could understand; but learnt by the messenger, that it
+intimated some account of a truce concluded between the crowns of
+Britain and Spain, and that the governor requested me to stay five days,
+that he might satisfy me by shewing me the articles of accommodation. I
+thought this odd, telling the Spanish gentleman I had not met with a
+friendly or peaceable reception; asking him why they had thus armed
+themselves in so desperate a manner, and why the governor had not rather
+sent me a flag of truce in the morning before we engaged, giving me this
+intimation? Saying also, if this story were true, we ought to have found
+the alleged intelligence on board the prize, as she came from Lima,
+whence they pretended the news came. It was likewise extraordinary, that
+none of the officers in the prize should know any thing of the matter:
+yet I had so great a regard for even the name of peace, that I would
+wait fifteen days, if the governor would supply us with provisions and
+water, otherwise I would not consent to stay twenty-four hours. I sent
+also a short answer to the governor, excusing our imperfect knowledge of
+the Spanish language. In this letter I stated if peace were actually
+concluded between our sovereigns, that I was ready to act as he desired,
+on due proof; and hoped, as we were now friends, that he would allow us
+to have refreshments from his port. On receipt of this, the governor
+expressed great satisfaction, and seemed to make no difficulty in
+complying with my request. Our boats went therefore ashore every
+morning, under a flag of truce, and we received for the first four days
+eight small jars of water daily. On the fifth day they reduced us to
+five jars, and during the whole time only one small cow was sent us.
+
+On this occasion a boat came off full of men, among whom were two
+priests, who brought with them a paper in Spanish, which they called the
+articles of peace; but so wretchedly written and blotted, that we should
+have been puzzled to read it, had it even been in English. I therefore
+desired the priests to translate it into Latin, which they promised to
+do, and took the paper with them. They also told me, that the governor
+meant to send for some Englishmen who lived at Guatimala, if I would
+continue three days longer in the road; to which I answered, that he
+might take his own time. Two days after, on our boat going ashore as
+usual, the governor ordered her and her crew to be seized. I was all day
+in suspence, not imagining the governor would make such a breach of the
+law of nations; but in the evening two of the boat's crew came off in an
+old leaky canoe, bringing a letter from the governor, and another from
+Mr Brooks, my first lieutenant, who was one of the prisoners. The
+governor required me to deliver up the _Sacra Familia_, and that we
+should all surrender, otherwise he would declare us pirates; and Mr
+Brooks told me he believed the governor meant to bully me. The governor
+proposed two ways for conveying us from the Spanish dominions, one of
+which was by Vera Cruz overland, and the other by sea to Lima. But I
+liked neither of these, not chusing a journey of 1300 miles at least
+through a country inhabited by a barbarous people, nor yet a voyage to
+Lima under their guidance. My two men told me, that Frederick Mackenzie
+had let the governor into the secret of our necessities, and of my
+design of procuring water at the island of Tigers, in the gulf of
+Amapala, which he said he would take care to prevent, and believed he
+now had us safe enough, knowing our only boat remaining was a small
+canoe. My two men who brought these letters offering their service, and
+a third volunteering to accompany them, to bale out the water from their
+wretched canoe, I sent a letter in French to the governor, offering, if
+I could be assured of a safe conduct for ourselves and effects to
+Panama, and thence by way of Portobello to one of the British colonies,
+we would enter into a farther treaty, which he might signify, if he
+meant to comply, by firing two guns, and by sending off my people with
+the usual supply; otherwise necessity would compel us to sail that
+night. Receiving no reply whatever, I weighed before day next morning,
+and made sail, leaving the Jesu Maria behind, a much more valuable ship
+than the one I took away.
+
+On going to sea, we reduced ourselves to a pint of-water in the
+twenty-four hours, and directed our course for the gulf of Amapala,
+about thirty-five leagues S.S.E. [274] meaning to water there on the
+island of Tigers. The loss of my officer and boat's crew sensibly
+diminished the number of white faces among us, and so lessened our
+strength, that we should never have been able to manage this great ship,
+with her heavy cotton sails, but for our negro prisoners, who proved to
+be very good sailors. The loss of our boat was a great inconvenience to
+us; but as I meant only to provide water enough to serve us to Panama,
+where we were determined to surrender ourselves, if it were really
+peace, I thought we might contrive to get such a quantity of water as
+might suffice, in two or three days, by means of our canoe. The winds
+being favourable, we reached the gulf in ten days, but we could find no
+water, after an anxious and hazardous search. Surrounded on all sides
+with the most discouraging difficulties, we weighed anchor again on the
+13th of April, when I brought our people to a resolution not to
+surrender on any account, let the consequence be what it might. We had
+not now forty gallons of water in the ship, and no other liquids, when
+we came to an allowance of half a pint each for twenty-four hours, even
+this being too large, considering we could get none nearer than the
+island of Quibo, which was about 160 leagues from the gulf of Amapala,
+and we were forty-three in number, including our negroes.
+
+[Footnote 274: About forty-two marine leagues E.S.E.]
+
+We accordingly steered for Quibo, having very uncertain winds and
+variable weather, and were thirteen days on this short allowance. No one
+who has not experienced it can conceive our sufferings in this sultry
+climate, by the perpetual extremity of thirst, which would not permit us
+to eat an ounce of victuals in a day. We even drank our urine, which
+moistened our mouths indeed, but excited our thirst the more. Some even
+drank large draughts of sea-water, which had like to have killed them.
+[275] On the 25th April we came to the island of _Cano_, in lat. 8° 47'
+N. which, by the verdure, promised to yield us water, if our canoe could
+get on shore. In this hope we came to anchor off the north-west side of
+this island, when it was as much as we could do to hand our sails, stop
+our cable, and execute the other necessary labours, so greatly were we
+reduced. We imagined we could see a run of water, yet dreaded the
+dangerous surf which broke all round those parts of the island we could
+see. Mr Randal was sent with some jars, to try what could be done; and
+as he did not appear again when very late at night, I became
+apprehensive he was either lost, or, not finding water on the island,
+had gone in search of it to the continent. At length he came back, with
+his jars filled, and any one may guess our unspeakable joy on being thus
+opportunely delivered from the jaws of death. He did not bring above
+sixty or seventy gallons, and I was at great pains to restrain my men
+from using it immoderately, allowing only a quart to be distributed
+immediately to each man. What made me the more strict on this occasion
+was, that Mr Randal assured me we should hardly get any more, the
+breakers were so very dangerous. That very night we chanced to have a
+shower of rain, on which we used every expedient for catching it, in
+sheets, blankets, and sails. During our long thirst we had continually
+wished for rainy weather, and had often good reason to expect it, by
+seeing many louring black clouds, which seemed every minute ready to
+discharge their burdens, yet never did before to any purpose. Next day I
+sent our boatswain to make another essay; but after going round the
+whole island, and wasting the entire day in search of a smooth beach, he
+could not see a single spot where he might venture on shore. Thinking we
+had a sufficient stock to carry us to Quibo, we weighed next day; and
+while ranging near the island, we saw a smooth beach, on which I sent
+our canoe again, which brought back nine jars full of water.
+
+[Footnote 275: It may not be improper to state, that in such extremity
+for want of water, great relief has been experienced by remaining
+immersed for some time in the sea; the lymphatics of the skin absorbing
+water to supply and relieve the system very materially.--E.]
+
+We now pursued our course to the S.E. and arrived in a few days at
+Quibo, anchoring at the same place where we had been formerly. We
+pursued our business of wooding and watering at this island with
+tolerable chearfulness, yet without any great hurry; chiefly because we
+were now within eighty leagues of Panama, and it was requisite for us to
+deliberate very seriously on our scheme of surrendering to the
+Spaniards. We considered Panama as well calculated for treating on this
+subject, not being any way strong towards the sea; and as we had a good
+ship, we thought it no difficult matter to settle the terms of our
+surrender, before giving ourselves into their hands. We also reckoned on
+some assistance from the factors of the South Sea company, resident
+there, who, in case a peace were actually concluded in Europe, might
+intercede for us, and procure us a passage for Europe. Yet as there was
+something extremely disagreeable in the idea of a surrender, especially
+to such enemies as the Spaniards, we were in no great hurry,
+particularly as we were here somewhat at our ease, enjoying many
+conveniences to which we had long been strangers. The free use we made
+of the excellent fruits growing on this island brought the flux among
+us, which weakened us very much, and interrupted our work for some days,
+yet in the main did us little hurt, or rather tended to preserve us from
+the scurvy. We deliberated and consulted as to our future conduct; but
+our views were so discordant, and our minds so distracted, that we could
+come to no resolution, except that of continuing here, in hopes of
+something happening to our advantage.
+
+The island of _Quibo_ or _Coibo_ is almost in the same parallel with
+Panama, [276] being about twenty-four English miles from N. to S. and
+twelve from E. to W. It is of moderate height, covered all over with
+inaccessible woods, always green; and, though never inhabited, abounds
+with papaws and limes, and some other fruits I never saw before, which
+are nearly as good, though wholly neglected, as those that are most
+carefully attended to in other islands in similar latitudes, whence it
+may be inferred that the soil is fertile; and, if ever inhabited and
+cleared, it promises to be as productive as the best of our West-India
+islands. The pearl-fishers, not being able to follow their occupation
+during the _vandevals_, or black stormy months, from the beginning of
+June to the end of November, have a few scattered huts in several parts
+of this island and of _Quivetta_, used by the divers during their
+season, in which they sleep and open their oysters, so that the sandy
+beach is covered with fine mother-of-pearl shells. In wading only to the
+middle, we could reach large pearl oysters with our hands, which at
+first pleased us much; but we found them as tough as leather, and quite
+unpalatable. Having no seyne, I can say little about other kinds of
+fish. We occasionally observed a large kind of flat fish, which often
+sprung a great way out of the water, which are said to be very
+destructive to the divers; for, when these return to the surface, unless
+they take great care, these fish wrap themselves round the divers, and
+hold them fast till drowned. To guard against this, the divers always
+carry a sharp-pointed knife, and on seeing any of these fish above them,
+present the point over their heads, and stick it into the fish's belly.
+They are also subject to great danger from alligators, which swarm in
+this part of the sea; and some of us fancied we saw one swimming below
+the surface near Mariato Point, only a few leagues from hence. This
+island has a great variety of birds, also great numbers of black monkeys
+and guanoes, which last mostly frequent the streams of fresh water. Some
+of these guanoes are of extraordinary size, being of a grey colour with
+black streaks, those about the head being brown. Quibo is a most
+convenient place for procuring wood and water, as the wood grows in
+abundance within twenty yards of the sea, and there are several streams
+of fresh water crossing the beach.
+
+[Footnote 276: This is a material error. Panama is in lat. 9° N. long.
+80° 21' W. while the centre of Quibo is in lat. 7° 28' N. and long. 82°
+17' W. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+Having got clear of this place, and nothing thought of but our speedy
+return to Europe by surrendering at Panama, we met with strong adverse
+currents, together with calms and contrary winds, by which we were
+detained for several days under the mountains of _Guanachu_. [277] On
+the 15th. May, a small bark bore down upon us, mistaking us for
+Spaniards. She was called the Holy Sacrament, and came last from
+Cheriqui, laden with dried beef, pork; and live hogs. Her master was
+much surprised at first, but soon recovered on being told we were bound
+for Panama, and readily offered to pilot us thither, as he was bound for
+that port; and begged us to take his bark in tow, as he could not fetch
+the land, and his hogs were almost dead for want of water, while his
+vessel was ready to sink, being so leaky that his people were no longer
+able to stand to the pumps. I took her in tow, sending some of my people
+to assist in pumping the bark, and even spared some water and maize for
+supplying the hogs. The master came on board of my ship, but had heard
+no news of any peace or truce between Britain and Spain.
+
+[Footnote 277: Perhaps the Sierra de Canataqua are here meant, which
+pervade the country between Montijo Bay and the Bay of Panama, ending in
+Point Mariato, of which they seem to have been detained.--E.]
+
+It may seem strange that this opportunity of supplying ourselves with
+provisions made no change in our plans; but every one of us was so worn
+out by a continual want of all necessaries, and so disheartened by a
+perpetual succession of misfortunes, that we were tired of the sea, and
+willing to embrace any opportunity of getting ashore, almost at any
+rate. I was rejoiced at this bark having fallen into our hands; because,
+if we found the story of the governor of Sansonate false, we might be
+thoroughly enabled to go to India, with this help. To ascertain this, I
+meant to anchor a great way short of Panama, keeping possession of the
+bark, in case the president might not agree to safe and honourable
+terms, when we still had it in our power to redress ourselves, by
+keeping out of his hands. All this while, however, we had not determined
+who should be the bearer of the flag of truce; for my people, after so
+much treachery among them, feared that the messenger might only make
+terms for himself with the governor, and not return again: Wherefore, my
+son was chosen as the fittest person for the purpose, as being sure of
+his return, for my sake.
+
+On the 17th another bark came down upon us, but after coming pretty
+near, sheared off; on which I sent Mr Randal in our canoe, to inform
+them of our design, but they hoisted Spanish colours on his approach,
+and fired at him. Next morning we looked into the bay, where we found
+this bark at anchor, but she renewed her fire on our approach. On this,
+at his own request, I sent the master of the Holy Sacrament in a canoe,
+with four negroes and a flag of truce, to inform the people in the other
+bark of our intentions. A gale of wind interrupted this plan, and forced
+the canoe on shore, I dare say without danger to their lives, as they
+seemed to land of choice. On the 19th we saw a sail ahead of us
+standing along shore, on which we let go the bark we had in tow, in
+which were four of our own people and five Spaniards, spreading all the
+sail we could, so that by night we were at a considerable distance from
+the bark. I was for lying-to all night, for the bark to come up, but the
+majority insisted we should crowd sail all night, so that by day-break
+of the 20th we were within less than gun-shot of the chase. I
+immediately hoisted our colours, fired a gun to leeward, and sent a man
+to wave a white flag on our poop, in token of truce: But they
+continually fired at us, having their decks full of men, who kept
+hallooing and abusing us with the grossest epithets. Still I made no
+return, till I came close on their quarter, and then sent one of their
+countrymen to our boltsprit-end, to inform them we were bound for
+Panama, and wished to treat with them peaceably: But the only reply they
+made was by continuing their fire, calling us _borachos_ and _peros
+Ingleses_, drunkards and English dogs; so that at length I thought it
+full time to begin with them. I therefore met them with the helm, and
+soon convinced them of their error, giving them so warm a reception that
+they soon sheered-off. We just missed catching hold of them, and as it
+fell calm, we continued to engage her for two or three hours at the
+distance of musket-shot. A breeze at length sprung up, when we neared
+them, and their courage subsided in proportion as we approached. Their
+captain still encouraged them to fight, bravely exposing himself in an
+open manner, till he was at length shot through the body, and dropt down
+dead; on which they immediately called out for quarter, and thus ended
+the dispute.
+
+We now commanded them to hoist out their launch; but they answered, that
+their tackle and rigging were so shattered that they could not possibly
+comply; wherefore I sent Mr Randall and two or three more in our canoe,
+who found all her people most submissively asking mercy. Mr Randall sent
+the most considerable of the prisoners on board my ship, who informed me
+their vessel was _La Conception de Receva_, belonging to Calao, but last
+from Guanchaco, of 200 tons burden, laden with flour, loaves of sugar,
+boxes of marmalade, and jars of preserved peaches, grapes, limes, and
+such like. She mounted six guns, and carried above seventy men, being
+one of the ships that had been fitted out and commissioned purposely to
+take us; so that she was the second of these armed merchantmen we had
+taken. In this engagement, the Spanish captain and one negro were
+killed, and one or two slightly wounded; but their masts, sails, and
+rigging were much shattered. On our part, the gunner only was slightly
+wounded, and a small piece was carried out of the side of our main-mast.
+We had now above eighty prisoners of all sorts, and not exceeding
+twenty-six of ourselves. When the Spanish gentlemen came off board, they
+would not give me time to ask the reason of not hearkening to our
+peaceable offers; but immediately laid the whole blame on their dead
+captain, Don Joseph Desorio, who vowed he would listen to no terms but
+his own, and was resolved to take us by force. There were several
+persons of note among our prisoners, particularly Don Baltazzar de
+Abarca, Conde de la Rosa, an European nobleman, who had been governor of
+Pisco on the coast of Peru, and was now on his return for Spain; also a
+Captain Morell, who had been formerly taken by Captain Rogers; and
+several others. We treated them all with the utmost civility, at which
+they wondered; because, from prejudice against our cruizers, and
+conviction of their own harsh behaviour towards their prisoners, they
+expected to have been dealt with very roughly.
+
+In the situation where we now lay, we were in the track of all the ships
+bound for Panama, not above thirty miles from that place, our numbers
+being very few, and even part of our crew sick. For these reasons we
+were as expeditious as possible in examining the contents of our new
+prize, and removing them into our own ship; and, though the far greater
+part of the work was done by our prisoners, it took us full two days.
+Owing to this, and to faint winds and calms, we did not rejoin our bark
+till the 22d. As we bore down towards her, and came pretty near, we were
+astonished to see her broach to and fall off again, though all her sails
+were set; and, what amazed us still more, we could not see any person on
+her deck. I sent the boat on board, and the officer immediately called
+out to me, that there was not a man on board, but that all her decks and
+quarters were covered with blood. By this melancholy appearance, it
+seemed evident that the Spaniards had overpowered and murdered my four
+men who were sent to assist them, doubtless taking the opportunity of my
+men being asleep: Yet it is probable the murderers lost their own lives;
+for, being four leagues from land, and having no boat, they probably
+jumped into the sea on the re-appearance of our ship, thinking to swim
+to land, and met the death they so justly merited.
+
+This tragical affair spoiled the satisfaction we had enjoyed for two
+days past, on account of our prize, and raised an universal melancholy
+among us. On seeing this sudden change, our prisoners became much
+alarmed, looking at each other, as if fearful we might revenge on them
+the fate of our unhappy companions: And, on my side, I became alarmed
+lest their dreadful apprehensions might stir them up to some desperate
+attempt, they being eighty in number, while we were not at this time
+above seventeen on board, and when altogether only twenty-five that
+could stand on our legs. I was therefore compelled to appear somewhat
+stern, in ordering all our prisoners into the stern gallery, except the
+nobleman and a few of the chiefs, while we kept a strict guard in the
+great cabin. The Spanish gentlemen lamented the murder of our men, and
+their own hard fate, in having been in some measure witnesses, and let
+fall some expressions, by which I perceived they were afraid I meant to
+shew some severities to their people on this occasion. Having a good
+interpreter between us, I assured them I was not of any such revengeful
+disposition, and besides, that the laws of my country would restrain me,
+if I were, as I acted by my king's commission, whose orders strictly
+forbid all acts of inhumanity or oppression towards our prisoners; on
+which assurance they might rest satisfied of their safety. In reply to
+this, they begged me to think myself secure, as to themselves and
+countrymen, now my prisoners, declaring on their honour that they would
+make no attempt against us, and that they could never make a sufficient
+return for the generous treatment I had given them. Notwithstanding this
+declaration, I took measures to secure our numerous prisoners of the
+meaner sort; for which purpose, after taking out of the Holy Sacrament
+all her jerked beef that remained fit for use, I placed them in that
+vessel, under the command of Espina, former commander of the Conception
+after the death of Desorio.
+
+Next day, being as willing to get rid of them, as they were to get back
+their own ship, I took every thing out of the Conception that could be
+of use to us, sufficient for twelve months provisions of bread, flour,
+sugar, and sweetmeats,[278] both for ourselves and the Success, which we
+expected to meet with at the Tres Marias. I took also away her launch
+and negroes, the latter to assist us in working our ship, not having
+sufficient strength to manage her in the long run before us of 175
+degrees. I then delivered up the Conception to Espina and the rest,
+after being three days in our possession: which was not only an act of
+generosity to our prisoners, but an act of prudence with regard to
+ourselves. The next great point to be managed, was to get our people to
+consent to sail so far north as California, previous to our intended
+voyage to the East Indies, for which we were not in so good a condition
+as we could wish, though much better than before, and even than we had
+any reason to have expected, every thing considered. We had a good ship,
+with fifteen guns and sufficient ammunition, together with a reasonable
+quantity of provisions; but we still wanted to complete our wood and
+water for so long a voyage, the procuring of which was necessarily our
+first care. The ship's company were for going to Quibo for this purpose,
+as nearest us, but that place was attended by two important
+inconveniences. The first was the danger of the road, as the stormy
+season was coming on, and we were but indifferently provided with ground
+tackle, which must expose us to many dangers. The second was, that Quibo
+was but at a small distance from Panama, and we had reason to fear the
+Spaniards might send a ship of war from thence in search of us; as we
+had now no hopes that peace had taken place, and had consequently laid
+aside all thoughts of surrendering. On these considerations, we plied up
+to the island of Cano, where we soon did our business, having a good
+boat.
+
+[Footnote 278: Betagh charges Shelvocke on this occasion, with the
+concealment of a considerable treasure, taken in the Conception, of
+which some account will be given at the conclusion of the voyage.--E.]
+
+On our passage to that island, the sweetmeats of all kinds were divided
+among our messes; and one day a man complained that he had got a box of
+marmalade into which his knife could not penetrate, and desired
+therefore to have it changed. On opening it, I found it to contain a
+cake of virgin silver, moulded on purpose to fill the box, weighing 200
+dollars; and on examining the rest, we found five more of the same kind.
+These cakes of silver, being very porous, were nearly of the some weight
+with so much marmalade, and were evidently contrived for the purpose of
+defrauding the king of Spain of his fifths, which he exacts from all
+silver procured in the mines of Peru. We doubtless left many such cakes
+behind in the Conception, so that this contrivance served them both to
+wrong their king, and to deceive their enemies. A similarly vexatious
+affair occurred in a prize taken by the Success, in which there was a
+considerable quantity of _pinos_, or masses of virgin silver, in the
+form of bricks, artfully plaistered over with clay, and dried in the
+sun. As the Spaniards in Peru never burn their bricks, Clipperton and
+his people took these for real bricks, and threw a great number of them
+overboard as so much rubbish, and did not discover the deception until
+four or five only remained. Every thing taken in the Conception, was
+divided according to the articles settled at Juan Fernandez, which gave
+me only six shares, instead of sixty; and the people refused to allow me
+an hundred pounds, which I had laid out of my own money, for necessary
+supplies at the island of St Catharines.
+
+I now found myself under many difficulties as to the course we were to
+pursue, because the company knew well enough that there was no necessity
+of going farther than the lat. of 13° N. for going to the East Indies. I
+had therefore to represent the advantage of cleaning and repairing our
+ship at Porto Segnro, in California, and I had much difficulty to
+persuade them. I at last brought them to my purpose, when we sailed from
+Cano northwards. Having inconstant gales and bad weather, we went
+between seventy and eighty leagues out to sea, in hopes of meeting more
+settled weather. When at sixty leagues from the land, the winds still
+continued variable, but at between seventy and eighty, they settled at
+E.N.E. and N.E. at which distance we continued till in lat. 20° N. not
+being sensible of any currents in all that distance, and being also
+entirely out of the way of the frightful ripplings and overfalls of
+water which we used frequently to meet with nearer the land. These used
+often to alarm us when becalmed in deep water, hearing a noise as of the
+fall of water in passing through a bridge, a considerable time before it
+came up to us, and which afterwards passed us at a very great rate. All
+the effect this had on the ship, was to make her answer the helm wildly,
+if we had any wind; and when we happened to meet any of these moving
+waters very near the shore, we could not perceive that we either gained
+or lost ground, though we sometimes continued in them for a quarter of
+an hour. I have seen these overfalls to come both from the eastward and
+the westward. By getting well out to sea, we not only got clear of these
+inconveniences, but also were out of the way of the _vandevals_, or
+black season, which had already begun on the coast; for at Cano, and in
+going there, we felt very hard gusts, with black rolling water, frequent
+and violent thunder and lightning, and heavy showers of rain.
+
+In this passage we were continually accompanied by vast shoals of fish,
+as dolphins, bonitas, albicores, and angel-fish. These last are shaped
+like salmon, and have scales like them, but have tails like dolphins,
+and nearly resemble them when, in the water, appearing in all the
+beautiful colours displayed by the dolphin. Besides, they are the best
+for eating of any fish that swim near the surface. We were continually
+pestered with flocks of the birds called boobies, and their intolerably
+stinking dung proved an indescribable nuisance, in spite of all the
+pains that could be taken to clean our decks, yards, and tops. We
+reached the islands of _Tres Marias_ in the beginning of August, but
+could see no signs of Captain Clipperton having been there. We were also
+disappointed in our expectation of procuring water; as, after the
+strictest search we could make in all the three islands, nothing like a
+spring could be found, though former writers mention their having found
+water in abundance. After spending three days in our ineffectual search
+for water in these islands, I thought it best to stand over for the main
+land of California, as well for procuring what was wanting to our ship,
+as in hopes of meeting once more with the Success.
+
+
+END OF VOLUME TENTH.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of A General History and Collection of
+Voyages and Travels, Volume X, by Robert Kerr
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK VOYAGES AND TRAVELS, VOLUME X ***
+
+***** This file should be named 13130-8.txt or 13130-8.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/1/3/1/3/13130/
+
+Produced by Robert Connal, Graeme Mackreth and PG Distributed
+Proofreaders. This file was produced from images generously made
+available by the Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions.
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
diff --git a/old/13130-8.zip b/old/13130-8.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d1621de
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/13130-8.zip
diff --git a/old/13130-h.zip b/old/13130-h.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..81f7c95
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/13130-h.zip
diff --git a/old/13130-h/13130-h.htm b/old/13130-h/13130-h.htm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..929628c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/13130-h/13130-h.htm
@@ -0,0 +1,22491 @@
+<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
+<html>
+<head>
+<title>Voyages and Travels Volume 10</title>
+<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content=
+"text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
+<style type="text/css">
+<!--
+body {background: #ffffcc; margin:10%; text-align:justify}
+h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6 {color:green; text-align:center}
+blockquote {font-size: .9em}
+p.poem {text-align:center}
+p.external {font-weight: bold}
+-->
+</style>
+</head>
+<body>
+<pre>
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of A General History and Collection of Voyages
+and Travels, Volume X, by Robert Kerr
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+Title: A General History and Collection of Voyages and Travels, Volume X
+       Arranged in systematic order:
+       Forming a complete history of the origin and progress of navigation,
+       discovery, and commerce, by sea and land, from the earliest ages to
+       the present time.
+
+Author: Robert Kerr
+
+Release Date: August 7, 2004 [EBook #13130]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK VOYAGES AND TRAVELS, VOLUME X ***
+
+Produced by Robert Connal, Graeme Mackreth and PG Distributed
+Proofreaders. This file was produced from images generously made
+available by the Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions.
+
+</pre>
+
+<h2>A</h2>
+
+<h2>GENERAL</h2>
+
+<h2>HISTORY AND COLLECTION</h2>
+
+<h2>OF</h2>
+
+<h1>VOYAGES AND TRAVELS,</h1>
+
+<h2>ARRANGED IN SYSTEMATIC ORDER:</h2>
+
+<h2>FORMING A COMPLETE HISTORY OF THE ORIGIN AND PROGRESS</h2>
+
+<h2>OF NAVIGATION, DISCOVERY, AND COMMERCE,</h2>
+
+<h2>BY SEA AND LAND,</h2>
+
+<h2>FROM THE EARLIEST AGES TO THE PRESENT TIME.</h2>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<h2>BY</h2>
+
+<h2>ROBERT KERR, F.R.S. &amp; F.A.S. EDIN.</h2>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<h2>ILLUSTRATED BY MAPS AND CHARTS.</h2>
+
+<h2>VOL. X.</h2>
+
+<h3>WILLIAM BLACKWOOD, EDINBURGH:</h3>
+
+<h3>AND T. CADELL, LONDON.</h3>
+
+<h3>MDCCCXXIV.</h3>
+
+<hr align="center" width="50%">
+<h2>CONTENTS OF VOLUME X.</h2>
+
+<p><a href="#part2"><b>PART II.--(Continued.)</b></a></p>
+
+<p><a href="#book2-4"><b>BOOK IV.</b></a></p>
+
+<p>Early Circumnavigations, or Voyages round the World</p>
+
+<p>Introduction.</p>
+
+<p><a href="#chapter4-1"><b><i>CHAPTER I.</i></b></a></p>
+
+<p>Voyage of Ferdinand Magellan round the World, in
+1519-1522,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION I. Some Account of Magellan, previous to the
+Commencement of the Voyage,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION II. Proceedings of the Voyage from Seville to
+Patagonia, and wintering there,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION III. Prosecution of the Voyage, till the Death of
+Magellan,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION IV. Continuation of the Voyage to its Conclusion,</p>
+
+<p><a href="#chapter4-2"><b><i>CHAPTER II.</i></b></a></p>
+
+<p>Voyage by Sir Francis Drake round the World, in 1517-1580,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION I. Introduction, and Preparation for the Voyage,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION I. Narrative of the Voyage from England to the Straits
+of Magellan,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION III. Incidents of the Voyage, from the Straits of
+Magellan to New Albion,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION IV. Continuation of the Voyage, from New Albion to
+England.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION V. Reception of Sir Francis Drake in England, and some
+Notices of his remaining Actions,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION VI First Supplement to the Voyage of Sir Francis
+Drake; being an Account of Part of the foregoing Navigation, by
+Nuno da Silva,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION VII Second Supplement, being the Voyage of Mr John
+Winter, after parting from Sir Francis Drake,</p>
+
+<p><a href="#chapter4-3"><b><i>CHAPTER III.</i></b></a></p>
+
+<p>Voyage of Sir Thomas Candish round the World, in
+1586-1588,</p>
+
+<p>Introduction,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION I. Narrative of the Voyage from England to the
+Pacific,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION II. Transactions on the Western Coast of America,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION III. Voyage Home to England,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION IV. Second Voyage of Sir Thomas Candish, intended for
+the South Sea, in 1591</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 1. Incidents in the Voyage, till the Separation of the
+Ships,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 2. Disastrous Result of the Voyage to Sir Thomas
+Candish,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 3. Continuation of the Voyage of the Desire, Captain
+Davis, after parting from Sir Thomas Candish,</p>
+
+<p><a href="#chapter4-4"><b><i>CHAPTER IV.</i></b></a></p>
+
+<p>Voyage of Oliver Van Noort round the World, in 1538-1601,</p>
+
+<p>Introduction,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION I. Narrative of the Voyage.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION II. Voyage of Sebald de Weert, to the South Sea and
+Straits of Magellan, in 1598,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 1. Incidents of the Voyage from Holland to the Straits
+of Magellan,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 2. The Fleet passes through the Straits of Magellan
+into the South Sea, and is forced to return,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 3. Incidents daring their second Residence in the
+Straits of Magellan,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 4. Voyage from the Straits to Holland,</p>
+
+<p><a href="#chapter4-5"><b><i>CHAPTER V.</i></b></a></p>
+
+<p>Voyage of George Spilbergen round the World, in 1614-1617,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION I. Narrative of the Voyage, from Holland to the South
+Sea,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION II. Transactions in the South Sea, along the Western
+Coast of America,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION III. Voyage Home from America, by the East Indies and
+Cape of Good Hope,</p>
+
+<p><a href="#chapter4-6"><b><i>CHAPTER VI.</i></b></a></p>
+
+<p>Voyage round the World, in 1615-1617, by William Cornelison
+Schouten and Jacques Le Maire, going round Cape Horn,</p>
+
+<p>Introduction,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION I. Journal of the Voyage from the Texel to Cape
+Horn,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION II. Continuation of the Voyage, from Cape Horn to the
+Island of Java,</p>
+
+<p><a href="#chapter4-7"><b><i>CHAPTER VII.</i></b></a></p>
+
+<p>Voyage of the Nassau Fleet round the World, in 1623-1626,
+under the Command of Jaques Le Hermite,</p>
+
+<p>Introduction,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION I. Incidents of the Voyage from Holland to the South
+Sea,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION II. Transactions of the Fleet on the Western Coast of
+America,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION III. Voyage Home from the Western Coast of
+America,</p>
+
+<p><a href="#chapter4-8"><b><i>CHAPTER VIII.</i></b></a></p>
+
+<p>Voyage round the World, in 1683-1691, by Captain John Cooke,
+accompanied by Captain Cowley, and Captain William Dampier,</p>
+
+<p>Introduction,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION I. Narrative of the Voyage by Captain Cowley, till he
+quitted the Revenge on the Western Coast of America,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION II. Continuation of the Narrative of Captain Cowley,
+from leaving the Revenge, to his Return to England,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION III. Sequel of the Voyage, as far as Dampier is
+concerned, after the Separation of the Nicholas from the
+Revenge,</p>
+
+<p><a href="#chapter4-9"><b><i>CHAPTER IX.</i></b></a></p>
+
+<p>Voyage round the World, by William Funnell, in 1703-1706,</p>
+
+<p>Introduction,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION I. Narrative of the Voyage, till the Separation of
+Funnell from Dampier,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION II. Sequel of the Voyage of William Funnell, after his
+Separation from Captain Dampier,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION III. Brief Account of Stradling, Clipperton, and
+Dampier, after their respective Separations, till their Returns
+to England,</p>
+
+<p><a href="#chapter4-10"><b><i>CHAPTER X.</i></b></a></p>
+
+<p>Voyage round the World, by Captain Woods Rogers, and Stephen
+Courtney, in 1708-1711,</p>
+
+<p>Introduction,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION I. Narrative of the Voyage, from England to the Island
+of Juan Fernandez,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION II. Proceedings of the Expedition on the Western Coast
+of America,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION III. Sequel of the Voyage, from California, by Way of
+the East Indies, to England.</p>
+
+<p><a href="#chapter4-11"><b><i>CHAPTER XI.</i></b></a></p>
+
+<p>Voyage round the World, by Captain John Clipperton, in
+1719-1722,</p>
+
+<p>Introduction,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION I. Narrative of the Voyage, from England to Juan
+Fernandez,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION II. Proceedings of the Success in the South Seas,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION III. Voyage of the Success from the Coast of Mexico to
+China,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION IV. Residence of Captain Clipperton at Macao, and
+Returns from thence to England,</p>
+
+<p><a href="#chapter4-12"><b><i>CHAPTER XII.</i></b></a></p>
+
+<p>Voyage round the World, by Captain George Shelvocke, in
+1719-1722,</p>
+
+<p>Introduction,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION I. Narrative of the Voyage from England to the South
+Sea,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION II. Proceedings in the South Sea, till Shipwrecked on
+the Island of Juan Fernandez,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION III. Residence on the Island of Juan Fernandez,</p>
+
+<p>SECTION IV. Farther Proceedings in the South Sea, after
+leaving Juan Fernandez.</p>
+
+<h2>A GENERAL HISTORY AND COLLECTION OF VOYAGES AND TRAVELS.</h2>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<h2><a name="part2" id="part2">PART II.--Continued</a></h2>
+
+<h2><a name="book2-4" id="book2-4">BOOK IV.</a></h2>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<h2><a name="chapter4-1" id="chapter4-1">CHAPTER I.</a></h2>
+
+<p>EARLY CIRCUMNAVIGATIONS, OR VOYAGES ROUND THE WORLD.</p>
+
+<p>INTRODUCTION.</p>
+
+<p>In this <i>fourth</i> book of the <i>second</i> part of our
+arrangement, it is proposed to give a history of the principal
+Circumnavigations, or Voyages Round the World, previous to the
+reign of our present venerable sovereign. This book, therefore,
+comprises a period of 226 years, from the year 1519, when
+Magellan sailed from Spain on the first circumnavigation of the
+globe, till the year 1744, when Commodore Anson returned to
+England from a similar expedition. The more recent
+circumnavigations, which have taken place since the year 1760,
+chiefly under the munificent and enlightened patronage of GEORGE
+III. or in imitation of these, and which have largely contributed
+to extend, and almost to render perfect, the geography and
+hydrography of the terraqueous globe, are intended to form a
+separate division, in a subsequent part of our arrangement.</p>
+
+<p>The accurate knowledge which we now possess of the form and
+dimensions of this globe of earth and water which we inhabit, has
+been entirely owing to the superior skill of the moderns in the
+mathematical sciences, as applicable to the practice of
+navigation, and to the observation and calculation of the motions
+of the heavenly bodies, for the ascertainment of latitudes and
+longitudes. It would require more space than can be conveniently
+devoted on the present occasion, to give any clear view of the
+geographical knowledge possessed by the ancients, together with a
+history of the progress of that science, from the earliest times,
+neither do the nature and objects of the present Collection of
+Voyages and Travels call for any such deduction, of which an
+excellent epitome will be found in the History of Geography,
+prefixed to Playfair's System of Geography.</p>
+
+<p>The ancients laboured under almost absolute incapacities for
+making extensive voyages or discoveries by sea, proceeding from
+ignorance of the form and dimensions of the earth, and other
+causes. They were but indifferently versed in the practical part
+of astronomy, without which, and those instruments which have
+been invented almost exclusively by the moderns, for measuring
+the paths, distances, and relative positions of the heavenly
+bodies, it is impossible to launch out with any tolerable success
+or safety on the trackless ocean. They were ignorant also of that
+wonderful property of the magnet or loadstone, which, pointing
+invariably towards the north, enables the modern mariner to know
+his precise course, at all times of the day of night, though
+clouds and thick mists may hide the luminaries of heaven from his
+observation, which were the only means of direction known to the
+ancients.</p>
+
+<p>Various systems and theories appear to have prevailed among
+the ancients respecting the figure and motion of the earth; some
+justly enough supposing it to be a ball or sphere, suspended in
+infinite space, while others conceived it to be a flat surface,
+floating upon and surrounded by an interminable ocean. The just
+conceptions of some ancient philosophers, respecting the
+spherical figure of the earth, and its diurnal motion around its
+own axis, were superseded by others of a more popular nature, and
+forgotten for many ages. Lactantius and Augustine, two fathers of
+the catholic church, unfortunately adopted the idea of the earth
+being a flat surface, infinitely extending downwards; grounding
+this false notion upon a mistaken interpretation of the holy
+scriptures, or rather seeking assistance from them in support of
+their own unphilosophical conceptions. So strongly had this false
+opinion taken possession of the minds of men, in our European
+world, even after the revival of learning in the west, that
+Galileo was imprisoned by the holy inquisitors at Rome for
+asserting the sphericity of the earth, and the doctrine of
+<i>antipodes</i>, and had to redeem his liberty and life, by
+writing a refutation of that heretical doctrine, which satisfied
+the inquisitors, yet convinced the world of its truth.</p>
+
+<p>Columbus assuredly grounded his grand discovery of America
+upon the knowledge of the earth being a sphere; and had not the
+new western world intervened, his voyage had probably been the
+first circumnavigation. In modern times, an idea has been
+advanced that Columbus only retraced the steps of some former
+navigator, having seen certain parts of the grand division of the
+world which he discovered, already delineated on a globe. It were
+improper to enter upon a refutation of this idle calumny on the
+present occasion; yet it is easy to conceive, that the possessor
+of that globe, may have rudely added the reported discoveries of
+Columbus, to the more ancient delineations. At all events,
+Columbus was the first person who conceived the bold idea that it
+was practicable to sail round the globe. From the spherical
+figure of the earth, then universally believed by astronomers and
+cosmographers, in spite of the church, he inferred that the
+ancient hemisphere or continent then known, must of necessity be
+balanced by an equiponderant and opposite continent. And, as the
+Portuguese had discovered an extensive track by sailing to the
+eastwards, he concluded that the opposite or most easterly coast
+of that country might certainly be attained, and by a nearer
+path, by crossing the Atlantic to the westwards. The result of
+this profound conception, by the discovery of America, has been
+already detailed in the <i>Second</i> Book of this collection;
+and we now proceed in this <i>Fourth</i> Book to detail the
+various steps of other navigators, in prosecution of this grand
+design of surrounding the globe, in which many curious and
+interesting discoveries have been made, and by which geographical
+knowledge and practical navigation have been brought to great
+degrees of perfection.</p>
+
+<p>Before commencing the narrative appropriated for this division
+of our arrangement, it is proper to give the following complete
+table of all the circumnavigators, within the period assigned to
+the present portion of this collection; with the names of the
+ports from which they sailed, and the dates of their respective
+voyages, and returns.--Ed.</p>
+
+<pre>
+                   |Sailed from       |                 |Returned.
+    1. Ferdinand,  | Seville,         | Aug. 10, 1519.  | Sept. 8, 1522.
+       Magellan,   | in Spain,        |                 |
+    2. Sir Francis | Plymouth Sound,  | Dec. 30, 1577.  | Sept. 16, 1580.
+       Drake,      |                  |                 |
+    3. Sir Thomas  | Plymouth,        | July 25, 1586.  | Sept. 9, 1588.
+       Candish,    |                  |                 |
+    4. Oliver van  | Goeree,          | Sept. 13, 1598. | Aug. 26, 1601.
+       Noord,      |                  |                 |
+    5. George      | Texel,           | Aug. 8, 1614.   | July 1, 1617.
+       Spilbergeny,|                  |                 |
+    6. Shouten and | Texel,           | June 24, 1615.  | July 1, 1617.
+       LeMair,     |                  |                 |
+    7. Nassau      | Goeree,          | April 29, 1623. | Jan. 21, 1626.
+       fleet,      |                  |                 |
+    8. Cowley,[A]  | Achamack, in     | Aug. 23, 1683.  | Oct. 12, 1686.
+                   | Virginia,        |                 |
+    9. William     | Achamack,        | Aug. 28, 1683.  | Sept. 16, 1691.
+       Dampier,[A] |                  |                 |
+   10. Dampier and | the Downs,       | Aug. 9, 1703.   | Aug. 1706.
+       Funnel,     |                  |                 |
+   ll. Wood Rogers,| Bristol,         | June 15, 1708.  | Oct. 1, 1711.
+      and Courtney,|                  |                 |
+   12. John        | Plymouth,        | Feb. 15, 1719.  | June, 1722.
+       Clapperton, |                  |                 |
+   13. George      | Plymouth,        | Feb. 15, 1719.  | Aug. 1, 1722.
+       Shelvocke   |                  |                 |
+   14. Roggewein,  | Texel,           | July 17, 1721.  | July 11, 1723.
+   15. George      | St Helens,       | Sept. 18, 1740. | June 15, 1744.
+       Anson,      |                  |                 |
+</pre>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote A: These two are conjoined in Chap. VIII.
+of this book, for reasons which will appear there sufficiently
+obvious.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<hr align="center" width="50%">
+<p>VOYAGE OF FERDINAND MAGELLAN ROUND THE WORLD, IN
+1519--1522.[1]</p>
+
+<p>SECTION I.</p>
+
+<p><i>Some Account of Magellan, precious to the Commencement of
+his Voyage.</i></p>
+
+<p>Owing to the discoveries made under the authority of the
+sovereign of Castile, the Portuguese were excessively jealous of
+the safety of their possessions in the East Indies. At length,
+after various negociations, the authority of the pope was
+interposed, then considered as supreme among the princes of
+Europe who were in communion with the church of Rome. By a bull
+or papal decree, all countries discovered, or to be discovered,
+in the East, were declared to belong to the crown of Portugal,
+and all that were found in the west were to be the property of
+Spain. Yet this measure rather smothered than extinguished the
+flames of contention; as both courts readily listened to any
+proposals that tended to aggrandise the one at the expence of the
+other. This spirit of contention between the courts of Spain and
+Portugal, gave occasion to several men of enterprise, who
+happened to be dissatisfied by the delays or refusal of either of
+these courts, in countenancing their projects, to apply
+themselves for employment to the other. Among those who took this
+method of advancing their fortunes, was Ferdinand Magalhaens, now
+generally known by the name of Magellan. He was a gentleman of
+good family in Portugal, who had addicted himself from his youth
+to maritime affairs, and had acquired great skill both in the
+theory and practice of navigation. He seemed formed by nature for
+the achievement of great exploits, having all the qualities
+requisite to compose the character of a truly great man. With a
+courage which no danger could appal, he possessed the utmost
+calmness of temper and sweetness of disposition, by which all who
+conversed with him were engaged to love and esteem his character.
+He was naturally eloquent, both in illustrating and proving the
+reasonableness of his own opinions, and in converting others from
+their erroneous preconceived notions. Above all, he possessed
+that steady and persevering resolution, which not only enabled
+him to vanquish the greatest difficulties, but gave such
+appearance of success to every thing be promised or undertook, as
+secured the confidence of all who were under his command. As
+these extraordinary qualities would have distinguished him in any
+station of life, so they were remarkably useful in the present
+enterprise, by which he gained immortal reputation, although he
+lost his life before its completion.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 1: Harris' Collection, I. 6. The utmost
+pains have been taken to narrate this expedition in the clearest
+manner, by comparing all the different relations of the Spanish
+and Portuguese writers. We regret much, however, the loss of a
+large history of this voyage, by P. Martyr, which was burnt in
+the sack of Rome, when taken by the Constable de
+Bourbon.--<i>Harris</i>.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Don Ferdinand Magellan had served with much credit in India,
+under the famous Albuquerque, and thought that he merited some
+recompence for his services; but all his applications were
+treated with coldness and contempt by the great, which was
+intolerable to a person of his spirit. He associated, therefore,
+with men of like fortunes, whose merits had been similarly
+neglected, and particularly with one Ray Falero, a great
+astronomer, whom the Portuguese represented as a conjuror,
+retiring along with him to the Spanish court, where be made
+propositions for new discoveries to Cardinal Ximenes, who was
+then prime minister of Spain. The Portuguese ambassador used all
+imaginable pains to counteract these designs, and solicited the
+court to deliver up Magellan and his companion as deserters, even
+representing Magellan as a bold talkative person, ready to
+undertake any thing, yet wanting capacity and courage for the
+performance of his projects. He even made secret proposals to
+Magellan, offering him pardon and great rewards to desist from
+his present purpose, and to return to the service of his own
+sovereign. All these arts were unavailing, as the Spanish
+ministry, now competent judges of these matters, were satisfied
+of the probability of the discoveries proposed by Magellan and
+his coadjutor Falero, who were both received into favour, made
+knights of the order of St Jago, and had their own terms granted
+to them.</p>
+
+<p>The grounds on which this expedition was founded were as
+follow. The opinion advanced by Columbus, of the possibility of
+reaching the East Indies by sailing to the west, was assumed as
+certainly well founded, though he had not been able to accomplish
+it; and it was asserted, that it could not be attended with any
+insuperable difficulty to sail from the South Sea, then recently
+discovered, to the Molucca Islands. The grand desideratum was to
+find a passage westwards, from the Atlantic Ocean into the
+new-found South Sea, which they expected might be met with
+through the Rio de la Plata, or by some other opening on that
+eastern coast of South America. Should this succeed, Spain might
+then reap the benefit of both the Indies; since, if this
+discovery were made by way of the <i>west</i>, it would then fall
+expressly within the grant of the papal bull to Spain.</p>
+
+<p>In consequence of these proposals, it was agreed that Magellan
+and the other adventurers were to be furnished by the crown of
+Spain with five ships, manned by 234 men, with provisions for two
+years; and that the adventurers should reap a twentieth part of
+the clear profit, the government of any islands they might
+discover to be vested in them and their heirs for ever, with the
+title of Adelantado. The agreed, fleet of five ships was
+accordingly fitted out for the expedition at Seville, consisting
+of the Trinidada, in which Magellan sailed as admiral, and having
+a Portuguese pilot named Stephen Gomez; the Santa Vittoria,
+commanded by Don Luis de Mendoza; the St Antonio, Don Juan de
+Carthagena; the St Jago, Don Juan Serrano; and the Conception,
+Don Gaspar de Quixada. According to some authors, the number of
+men in these five ships amounted to 237, though by most they are
+said to have been 250, among whom were thirty Portuguese, upon
+whom Magellan chiefly depended for naval skill; as he likewise
+did greatly upon Serrano, who had left the service of Portugal in
+like manner with himself, after having served for many years in
+India, and some time in the Moluccas, of which islands they were
+now going in search.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION II.</p>
+
+<p><i>Proceedings of the Voyage from Seville to Patagonia, and
+wintering there</i>.</p>
+
+<p>Great hopes of success were entertained from this voyage, from
+the known experience of the commanders, although its real object
+was carefully concealed by Magellan, who merely gave out to the
+other adventurers that it was intended for the discovery of new
+countries, by which they believed themselves bound to the certain
+acquisition of gold. They set sail from Seville, in high
+expectations of acquiring riches, on the 10th of August, 1519.
+The 3d October, the fleet arrived between Cape Verd and the
+islands of that name. After being detained by tedious calms on
+the coast of Guinea for seventy days, they at last got to the
+south of the line, and held on their course to the coast of
+Brazil, of which they came in sight in about the latitude of
+23&deg; S. They here procured abundant refreshments of fruits,
+sugar-canes, and several kinds of animals.</p>
+
+<p>Proceeding about 2 1/2 degrees farther south, they came into a
+country inhabited by a wild sort of people, of prodigious
+stature, fierce and barbarous, and making a strange roaring
+noise, more like the bellowing of bulls, than human speech.
+Notwithstanding their prodigious bulk, these people were so
+nimble that none of the Spaniards or Portuguese were swift enough
+to overtake them. At this place there was a fine river of fresh
+water, the mouth of which was fully seventeen leagues wide, in
+which there were seven islands, the largest of which they named
+the island of St Mary, where they procured some <i>jewels</i>.[2]
+Proceeding along this coast towards the south, they fell in with
+two islands so abounding in seals and penguins, that they might
+have laden all their five ships with them in a short time. The
+penguins are a black, heavy, unwieldy fowl, extremely fat,
+covered with a sort of down instead of feathers, and having a
+bill like that of a raven; drawing their entire subsistence from
+the sea, as fish is their only food.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 2: These jewels may possibly have been a
+few pearls. The indications in the text are too vague to afford
+even a guess at the situation of the river and its seven islands;
+only it may be mentioned, that the most northern part of the
+coast of Patagonia is in lat. 38&deg; S. and that no river
+answering the description in the test is to be found on all that
+coast--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>They next advanced to about the latitude of 49&deg; 30' S.
+where they were forced to remain for five months, owing to the
+severity of the weather, it being now winter in these southern
+parts. They here passed their time very unpleasantly, and for a
+long time believed the country to be uninhabited, but at length a
+savage came to visit them. He was a brisk jolly fellow, very
+merrily disposed, and came towards them singing and dancing. On
+coming to the shore of the haven in which the ships had taken
+refuge, he stood there for some time, throwing dust upon his
+head. This being observed, some persons were sent ashore to him
+in a boat, and making similar signs of peace; and he came along
+with them on board, without any appearance of fear or hesitation.
+The size and stature of this person was such as in some measure
+entitled him to be deemed a giant, the head of one of the
+ordinary-sized Spaniards only reaching to his waist, and he was
+proportionally large made. His body was painted all over, having
+a stag's horn delineated on each cheek, and large circles round
+the eyes. The natural colour of his skin was yellow, and his hair
+was white. His apparel consisted of the skin of a beast, clumsily
+sewed together, covering his whole body and limbs from head to
+foot. The beast of which this was the skin, was as strange as the
+wearer, being neither mule, horse, nor camel, but partaking of
+all three, having the ears of a mule, the tail of a horse, and
+the body shaped like a camel. The arms of this savage consisted
+of a stout bow, having for a string the gut or sinew of that
+strange beast; and the arrows were tipped with sharp stones,
+instead of iron heads.</p>
+
+<p>The admiral made this man be presented with meat and drink, of
+which he readily partook, and seemed to enjoy himself very
+comfortably, till happening to see himself in a mirror which was
+given him among other toys, he was so frightened that he started
+back and overturned two of the men, and did not easily recover
+his composure. This giant fared so well, that several others came
+to visit the ships, and one of them behaved with so much
+familiarity and good humour, that the Europeans were much pleased
+with him. This person shewed them one of the beasts in the skins
+of which they were cloathed, from which the foregoing description
+must have been taken.[3] Being desirous to make prisoners of some
+of these giants, Magellan gave orders for this purpose to some of
+his crew. Accordingly, while amusing them with toys, they put
+iron shackles on their legs, which at first they conceived had
+been fine ornaments like the rest, and seemed pleased with their
+jingling sound, till they found themselves hampered and betrayed.
+They then fell a bellowing like bulls, and imploring the aid of
+<i>Setebos</i> in this extremity, whom they must therefore have
+conceived some good and compassionate being, as it is not to be
+conceived they would crave relief from an evil spirit. Yet the
+voyagers reported strange things, of horrible forms and
+appearances frequently seen among these people, such as horned
+demons with long shaggy hair, throwing out fire before and
+behind: But these seem mere dreams or fables.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 3: This must have been a Lama, Paca, or
+Chilihueque, of the camel genus, vulgarly called Peruvian
+sheep.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Most of the natives of this country were dressed in the skins
+of beasts, similarly to the one who first visited them. Their
+hair was short, yet tied up by a cotton lace or string. They had
+no fixed dwellings, but used certain moveable huts or tents,
+constructed of skins similar to those in which they were
+cloathed, which they carry with them from place to place, as they
+roam about the country. What flesh they are able to procure, they
+devour quite raw without any kind of cookery, besides which their
+chief article of food is a sweet root, which they name
+<i>capar.</i> The voyagers report that these savages were very
+jealous of their women; yet do not mention having seen any. Their
+practice of physic consists in bleeding and vomiting: The former
+being performed by giving a good chop with some edge tool to the
+part affected; and the latter is excited by thrusting an arrow
+half a yard down the throat of the patient. These people, to whom
+Magellan gave the name of <i>Patagons</i>, are so strong, that
+when one only was attempted to be made prisoner of by nine
+Spaniards, he tired them all; and, though they got him down, and
+even bound his hands, he freed himself from his bonds, and got
+away, in spite of every endeavour to detain him. Besides
+<i>capar</i>, the name of a root already mentioned, and which
+likewise they applied to the bread or ship's biscuit given them
+by the Spaniards, the only words reported of their language are
+<i>ali</i> water, <i>amel</i> black, <i>cheiche</i> red,
+<i>cherecai</i> red cloth; and <i>Setebos</i> and <i>Cheleule</i>
+are the names of two beings to whom they pay religious respect,
+<i>Setebos</i> being the supreme, and <i>Cheleule</i> an inferior
+deity.</p>
+
+<p>The haven in which they remained there five months, was named
+by Magellan, Port St Julian, of which and the surrounding country
+they took solemn possession for the crown of Spain, erecting a
+cross as a signal of sovereignty. But the principal reason of
+this long stay was in consequence of a mutiny which broke out,
+not only among the common men, but was even joined or fomented
+rather by some of the captains, particularly by Don Luis de
+Mendoza, on whom Magellan had placed great reliance. On this
+occasion Magellan acted with much spirit; for, having reduced the
+mutineers to obedience, he brought their ringleaders to trial for
+plotting against his life; hanged Don Luis de Mendoza and a few
+others of the most culpable; leaving Don Juan de Carthagena and
+others, who were not so deeply implicated, among the Patagons.
+The weather growing fine, and the people being reduced to
+obedience, Magellan set sail from Port St Julian, and pursued his
+course to the latitude of 51&deg; 40' S. where finding a
+convenient port, with abundance of fuel, water, and fish, he
+remained for two months longer.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION III.</p>
+
+<p><i>Prosecution of the Voyage, till the Death of
+Magellan</i>.</p>
+
+<p>Again resuming the voyage, they proceeded along the eastern
+shore of Patagonia to the latitude of 52&deg; S. when the
+entrance into the famous straits still known under the name of
+Magellan were discovered, through which the squadron continued
+its voyage, finding these straits about 110 leagues in length,
+from east to west, with varying breadths, in some places very
+wide, and in others not more than half a league across; the land
+on both sides being high, rugged, and uneven, and the mountains
+covered with snow. On reaching the western end of these straits,
+an open passage was found into the great South Sea, which sight
+gave Magellan the most unbounded joy, as having discovered that
+for which he had gone in quest, and that he was now able
+practicably to demonstrate what he had advanced, that it was
+possible to sail to the East Indies by way of the West. To the
+point of land from which he first saw this so-long-desired
+prospect, he gave the name of <i>Cape Desiderato.</i> This
+prospect was not, however, so desirable to some of his followers;
+for here one of his ships stole away, and sailed homewards
+alone.</p>
+
+<p>Magellan entered the great South Sea on the 28th November,
+1620, and proceeded through that vast expanse, to which he gave
+the name of the Pacific Ocean, for three months and twenty days,
+without once having sight of land. During a considerable part of
+this period they suffered extreme misery from want of provisions,
+such as have been seldom heard of. All their bread and other
+provisions were consumed, and they were reduced to the necessity
+of subsisting upon dry skins and leather that covered some of the
+rigging of the ships, which they had to steep for some days in
+salt water, to render it soft enough to be chewed. What water
+remained in the ships was become putrid, and so nauseous that
+necessity alone compelled them to use it. Owing to these impure
+and scanty means of subsistence, their numbers daily diminished,
+and those who remained alive became exceedingly weak,
+low-spirited, and sickly. In some, the gums grew quite over their
+teeth on both sides; so that they were unable to chew the tough
+leathern viands which formed their only food, and they were
+miserably starved to death. Their only comfort under this
+dreadful state of famine was, that the winds blew them steadily
+and gently along, while the sea remained calm and almost
+unruffled, whence it got the name of Pacific, which it has ever
+since retained.</p>
+
+<p>In all this length of time, they only saw two uninhabited
+islands, which shewed no signs of affording them any relief
+Sometimes the needle varied extremely, and at other times was so
+irregular in its motions, as to require frequent touches of the
+loadstone to revive its energy. No remarkable star was found near
+the south pole, by which to ascertain the southern ordinal point,
+or to estimate the latitude. Instead of an antarctic polar star,
+two clusters of small stars were observed, having a small space
+between them, in which were two stars of inconsiderable size and
+lustre, which seemed to be at no great distance from the pole, by
+the smallness of the circle they described in their diurnal
+course. When at the distance of 20&deg; from the south pole, they
+saw a high island to which they gave the name of <i>Cipangue</i>;
+and at 15&deg; another equally high, which they named
+<i>Sinnodit</i>.[4] They sailed in one gulf; or stretch of sea,
+at least 4000 leagues, and made their longitude, by estimation or
+reckoning, 120&deg; W. from the place of their original
+departure. By this time they drew near the equinoctial line, and
+having got beyond that into 13&deg; N. latitude, they made for
+the cape called <i>Cottigare</i> by old geographers; but missing
+it in that old account of its latitude, they understood
+afterwards that it is in the latitude of 12&deg; N.[5]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 4: The text is evidently here erroneous, as
+Magellan entered the Pacific Ocean in lat. 47&deg; S. and there
+is not the smallest reason to suspect he had been forced into the
+latitudes of 70&deg; and 75&deg; S. Instead therefore of the
+south pole, we ought probably to understand the equator. As these
+two islands were uninhabited, the names given them must have been
+imposed by Magellan or his associates. Cipangue is the name given
+to Japan by Marco Polo, and is of course a singular blunder. The
+other is unintelligible, and the voyage is so vaguely expressed,
+as even to defy conjecture.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 5: This cape Cottigare in the South Sea, in
+lat. 12&deg; or 13&deg; N. is utterly unintelligible, unless it
+refer to the southern part of Guam, Guaham, or Goad, one of the
+Ladronea, which they soon discovered, and which is actually in
+13&deg; N.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the 6th March, 1521, they fell in with a cluster of
+islands, being then in lat. 12&deg; N. and 146&deg; of west
+longitude from the place of their first setting out.[6] These
+islands were called by Magellan <i>Islas de los Ladrones</i>, or
+the islands of robbers, and are called in modern geography the
+Ladrones or Marian islands. They here went on shore to refresh
+themselves, after all the fatigues and privations of their
+tedious voyage through the Pacific Ocean; but the thievish
+disposition of the islanders would not allow them any quiet
+repose, as they were continually stealing things from the ships,
+while the sick and worn-out mariners were endeavouring to refresh
+themselves on shore. Resolving therefore to deliver themselves
+from the disturbance of these pilferers, they marched a small
+party of armed men into the interior of one of these islands,
+where they burnt some houses, and slew some of the natives. But,
+though this correction awed them a little for the present, it did
+not mend their thievish disposition; for which reason they
+resolved to seek out some other place, where they might enjoy
+some repose in safety.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 6: By the reckoning in the text, the
+longitude of the Ladrone islands, which they now discovered,
+would be 151&deg; 25' W. from Greenwich. But their true longitude
+is 216&deg; 30' W. Their latitude is between 13&deg; and 20&deg;
+50' N.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>No order or form of government was observed to subsist among
+these natives of the Ladrones, but every one seemed to live
+according to his own humour or inclination. The men were entirely
+naked, the hair both of their heads and beards being black, that
+on their heads so long as to reach down to their waists. Their
+natural complexion is olive, and they anoint themselves all over
+with cocoa-nut oil. Their teeth seemed coloured artificially
+black or red, and some of them wore a kind of bonnet made of palm
+leaves. The women are better favoured and more modest than the
+men, and all of them wore some decent coverings made of palm
+leaves. Their hair was black, thick, and so very long as nearly
+to trail on the ground. They seemed careful industrious
+housewives, spending their time at home in fabricating mats and
+nets of palm leaves, while the men were occupied abroad in
+stealing. Their houses are of timber, covered with boards and
+great leaves, and divided within into several apartments. Their
+beds are of mats laid above each other, and they use palm leaves
+by way of sheets. Their only weapons are clubs, and long poles
+headed with bone. Their food consists of cocoa-nuts, bananas,
+figs, sugar-canes, fowls, and flying-fishes. Their canoes are
+oddly contrived and patched up, yet sail with wonderful rapidity,
+the sails being made of broad leaves sewed together. Instead of a
+rudder they use a large board, with a staff or pole at one end,
+and in sailing, either end of their canoes is indifferently used
+as head or stern. They paint their canoes all over, either red,
+white, or black, as hits their fancy. These people are so taken
+with any thing that is new, that when the Spaniards wounded
+several of them with their arrows, and even pierced some quite
+through, they would pluck out the arrows from their wounds, and
+stare at them till they died. Yet would they still continue to
+follow after the ships, to gaze upon them as they were going
+away, so that at one time they were closely surrounded by at
+least two hundred canoes filled with natives, admiring those
+wonderful contrivances.</p>
+
+<p>The 10th of March, the Spaniards landed on the island of
+<i>Zamul</i>, about 30 leagues from the Ladrones.[7] Next day
+they landed on <i>Humuna</i>, an island not inhabited, yet well
+deserving of being so, where they found springs of excellent
+water, with abundance of fruit-trees, gold, and white coral.
+Magellan named this <i>the island of good signs</i>. The natives
+from some of the neighbouring islands, a people of much humanity,
+came here to them shortly after, very fair and of friendly
+dispositions, who seemed well pleased at the arrival of the
+Spaniards among them, and came loaded with presents of fish, and
+wine made from the cocoa-tree, promising speedily to bring other
+provisions. This tree somewhat resembles the date palm, and
+supplies the natives with bread, oil, wine, vinegar, and even
+physic. The wine being drawn from the tree itself, and all the
+rest from the fruit or nut. To procure the wine, they eat off
+part of a branch, and fasten to the remaining part a large reed
+or hollow cane, into which the liquor drops, being like
+white-wine in colour, and of a grateful tartish taste. When a
+good quantity of this is drawn off, it is put into a vessel, and
+is their cocoa-wine without farther preparation.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 7: In this voyage the term Ladrones seems
+confined to the most southern islands of this group, as there are
+no other islands for a very considerable distance in any
+direction. The entire group stretches about 6&deg; 10' nearly N.
+and S. or 125 leagues. In modern geography, Guaham and Tinian are
+the largest islands of the group. Urac, Agrigan, Analajam, and
+Saypan, are the names of some others of the Ladrones. The names
+in the text do not occur in modern maps. Thirty leagues from
+Guaham, the southernmost island, would bring them to
+Tinian.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The fruit, which is as large as a man's head, has two rinds or
+coats. The outermost is green, and two fingers thick, entirely
+composed of strings and threads, of which they make all the ropes
+that are used in their canoes. Under this there is another rind,
+or shell rather, of considerable thickness, and very hard. This
+they burn and pulverize, and use it in this state as a remedy for
+several distempers. The kernel adheres all round the inside of
+this shell, being white, and about the thickness of a finger,
+having a pleasant taste, almost like an almond: this, when dried,
+serves the islanders instead of bread. In the inside of this
+kernel there is a considerable hollow space, containing a
+quantity of pure limpid liquor, of a very cordial and refreshing
+nature, which sometimes congeals into a solid, and then lies like
+an egg within the hollow kernel. When they would make oil, they
+steep the fruit in water till it putrifies, and then boil it over
+the fire to separate the oil, the remaining water becoming
+vinegar, when exposed some time to the sun. Lastly, by mixing the
+kernel with the liquor lodged within its cavity, and straining it
+through a cloth, they make a very good milk. The cocoa-nut tree
+resembles the date palm, except in not being so rugged and
+knotty. They will continue to thrive for an hundred years, or
+more, and two of them will maintain a family of ten persons in
+wine plentifully, if used by turns, each tree being drawn for
+seven or eight days, and then allowed to rest as long.</p>
+
+<p>According to their promise, the islanders returned with a
+farther supply of provisions, and entered into much familiar
+cordiality with the Spaniards. A number of them having been
+invited on board the admiral's ship, a gun was discharged by way
+of entertaining them, but put them in such terror, that they were
+ready to leap over board, yet were soon reconciled by good usage
+and presents. The name of their island was <i>Zulvan</i>, of no
+great compass; yet considerable for its productions. They had in
+their barks various kinds of spices, as cinnamon, cloves,
+nutmegs, ginger, and mace, with several ornaments made of gold,
+which they carried up and down to sell as merchandise. Although
+without apparel, these people were dressed, or ornamented rather,
+in a more costly manner than Europeans; for they had gold
+earrings in each ear, and various jewels fastened by means of
+gold to their arms; besides which, their daggers, knives, and
+lances were richly ornamented with the same metal.[8] Their only
+cloathing consisted of a kind of apron, of a species of cloth
+made very ingeniously from the rind of a tree. The most
+considerable men among them were distinguished from the common
+people by a piece of silk ornamented with needle-work, wrapped
+round their heads. These islanders were gross, broad; and well
+set on their limbs, of an olive complexion, having their bodies
+constantly rubbed over with cocoa-nut oil.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 8: It is highly probable that the valuable
+spiceries, gold, and jewels, of the text, are mere fables,
+invented by Pigafetta, to enhance the value of his voyage, as
+such productions are now unknown to the Ladrone
+islands.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Departing from this place on the 21st March, 1521, and
+steering between west and south-west, they passed among the
+islands named <i>Cenalo, Huinanghan, Hibussan,</i> and
+<i>Abarian.</i>[9] The 28th, they came to the isle of
+<i>Buthuan,</i> where they were kindly received by the king and
+prince, who gave them considerable quantities of gold and spices;
+in return for which, Magellan presented the king with two cloth
+vests, giving knives, mirrors, and glass beads to the courtiers.
+Along with the king and his nobles, Magellan sent two persons on
+shore, one of whom was Antonio Pigafetta, the historian of the
+voyage. On landing, the king and his attendants all raised their
+hands to heaven, and then the two Christians, who imitated this
+ceremony, which was afterwards observed in drinking. The king's
+palace was like a great hay-loft, mounted so high upon great
+posts of timber, that they had to go up by means of ladders, and
+was thatched with palm-leaves. Though not Christians, these
+islanders always made the sign of the cross at their meals, at
+which they sat cross-legged like tailors. At night, instead of
+candles, they burnt a certain gum of a tree, wrapped up in
+palm-leaves. After entertaining them in their respective palaces,
+the king and prince of <i>Buthuan</i> dismissed Pigafetta and his
+companion with noble presents, filled with admiration of their
+guests, whom they believed to be men above the rank of common
+mortals, being especially astonished at Pigafetta's writing, and
+reading what he had written, which was too mysterious for their
+comprehension.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 9: Not one of these islands is known to
+modern geography; and the whole of this voyage is related so
+loosely and unsatisfactorily, that it is impossible to trace its
+course, except at well-known places.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In this island, by sifting the earth of a certain mine, they
+procured great lumps of gold, some as large as walnuts, and some
+even as big as eggs; all the vessels used by the king at table
+being made of this precious metal.[10] The king of this island
+was a very comely personage, of an olive complexion, with long
+black hair, his body being perfumed with the odoriferous oils of
+storax and benzoin, and painted with various colours. He had
+gold-rings in his ears, and three rings of that metal on each of
+his fingers. His head was wrapped round by a silken veil or
+turban, and his body was cloathed to the knees in a cotton
+wrapper, wrought with silk and gold. He wore at his side a sword
+or dagger, with a haft of gold, and a scabbard of carved wood.
+This country is so rich, that one of the natives offered a crown
+of massy gold in exchange for six strings of glass beads; but
+Magellan would not allow such bargains, lest the Spaniards might
+appear too greedy of gold.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 10: These stories of gold in such wonderful
+abundance, are obvious falsehoods contrived by Pigafetta, either
+to excite wonderment, or to procure the command of an expedition
+of discovery; a practice we have formerly had occasion to notice
+in the early Spanish conquests and settlements in
+America.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The natives were active and sprightly, the common men being
+quite naked, except painting their bodies; but the women are
+cloathed from the waist downwards, and both sexes wore gold
+ear-rings. They all continually chewed <i>areka</i>, a fruit like
+a pear, which they cut in quarters, rolling it up in a leaf
+called <i>betel</i>, resembling a bay-leaf, alleging that they
+could not live without this practice. The only religious rite
+observed among them, was looking up to heaven, to which they
+raised their joined hands, and calling on their god <i>Abba</i>.
+Magellan caused a banner of the cross, with the crown of thorns
+and the nails, to be exposed and publicly reverenced by all his
+men in the king's presence; desiring the king to have it erected
+on the top of a high mountain in the island, as a token that
+Christians might expect good entertainment in that country, and
+also as a security for the nation; since, if they prayed to it
+devoutly, it would infallibly protect them against lightning and
+tempests, and other evils. This the king promised should be done,
+knowing no better, and glad to be so easily defended from
+thunderbolts.</p>
+
+<p>Leaving this island, and conducted by the king's pilots, the
+Spaniards came to the isles of <i>Zeilon, Zubut, Messana,</i> and
+<i>Caleghan</i>, of which <i>Zubut</i> was the best, and enjoyed
+the best trade. In <i>Massana</i>, they found dogs, cats, hogs,
+poultry, goats, rice, ginger, cocoa-nuts, millet, panic, barley,
+figs, oranges, wax, and plenty of gold. This island lies in lat.
+9&deg; 40' N. and in long. 162&deg; from their first
+meridian.[11] After remaining here eight days, they sailed to the
+N.W. passing the islands of <i>Zeilon, Bohol, Canghu, Barbai</i>,
+and <i>Caleghan</i>; in which last islands there are bats as
+large as eagles, which they found to eat, when dressed, like
+poultry. In this island, among various other birds, there was one
+kind resembling our hens, but having small horns, which bury
+their eggs in the sand, where they are hatched by the heat of the
+sun. <i>Caleghan</i> is about twenty miles W. from
+<i>Messana</i>; and <i>Zubut</i>, to which they now directed
+their course, fifty leagues W. from <i>Caleghan</i>. In this part
+of the voyage they were accompanied by the king of
+<i>Messana</i>, whom Magellan had greatly attached to him by many
+services.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 11: This is 16&deg; of longitude beyond the
+Ladrones, which are in 216&deg; 30' W. and would consequently
+give the longitude of Zubut as 232&deg; 30' W. or 107&deg; 30' E.
+from Greenwich. Yet from what appears afterwards, they seem to
+have been now among the Philippine islands, the most easterly of
+which are in long. 126&deg; E. from Greenwich.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>They entered the port of <i>Zubut</i> on the 7th April, and on
+coming near the city all the great guns were fired, which put the
+inhabitants into great consternation. This, however, was soon
+quieted, by the arrival of a messenger at the city from the
+ships, who assured the king of <i>Zubut</i> that this was an
+ordinary piece of respect to his dignity, whom they had come to
+visit on their way to the Moluccas, hearing of his fame from the
+king of <i>Messana</i>. The messenger also desired that the
+Spaniards might be furnished with provisions, in exchange for
+their commodities. The king then observed, that it was customary
+for all ships that came to his port to pay tribute, which custom
+he expected they would comply with as well as others. To this the
+messenger replied, that the Spanish admiral was the servant of so
+powerful a sovereign, that he could make no such acknowledgment
+to any prince whatever. That the admiral was willing to be at
+peace with him, if he thought proper to accept his friendship:
+but if otherwise, he should soon have his fill of war. A certain
+Moor, who happened to be present, told the king that these people
+were certainly the Portuguese, who had conquered Calicut and
+Malacca, and advised him therefore to beware of provoking them to
+hostilities; whereupon the king referred the matter to his
+council, promising to give an answer next day, and in the
+meantime sent victuals and wine aboard the ships.</p>
+
+<p>The king of Messana, who was a potent prince, went ashore to
+confer with the king of Zubut, who in the end became almost ready
+to pay tribute instead of demanding it; but Magellan only asked
+liberty to trade, which was readily granted. Magellan persuaded
+the king and his principal people to become Christians, which
+they did after some religious conferences, and were all
+afterwards baptised. This example spread over the whole island,
+so that in eight days the whole inhabitants became Christians,
+except those of one village of idolaters, who absolutely refused.
+The Spaniards therefore burnt this village, and erected a cross
+on its ruins.[12]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 12: This incredible story has been
+considerably abridged on the present occasion, and is too absurd
+to merit any commentary.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The people of this island deal justly with each other, having
+the use of weights and measures. Their houses are of timber,
+raised high in the air on posts, so that they ascend to them by
+ladders. They told us of a certain sea-fowl in this country,
+called <i>Lughan</i>, about the size of a crow, which the whales
+sometimes swallow alive, in consequence of which their hearts are
+eaten by this bird; and many whales are killed in this manner,
+the bird being afterwards found alive in the carcase of the
+whale. The Spaniards drove a most advantageous trade at this
+place, receiving from the natives ten pesos of gold, of a ducat
+and a half each, in exchange for fourteen pounds of iron; and
+procured abundance of provisions for mere trifles.</p>
+
+<p>Not far from Zabut is the isle of <i>Mathan</i>, the
+inhabitants of which go quite naked, except a slight covering in
+front, all the males wearing gold-rings hanging to the preputium.
+This island was governed by two kings, one of whom refused to pay
+tribute to the king of Spain, on which Magellan determined to
+reduce him by force of arms. The Indian had an army of between
+six and seven thousand men, armed with bows and arrows, darts and
+javelins, which Magellan attacked with sixty men, armed with
+coats of mail and helmets. The battle was for a long time
+doubtful, when at last Magellan advanced too far among the
+barbarians, by whom he was at first wounded by a poisoned arrow,
+and afterwards thrust into the head by a lance; which at once
+closed the life and actions of this noble commander. About eight
+or nine of the Christians were slain in this engagement, besides
+many wounded. After this disaster the Spaniards ineffectually
+attempted to redeem the body of their unfortunate admiral; and
+the other king, who had embraced the Christian religion without
+understanding its tenets, abandoned it upon this reverse of
+fortune to the Spaniards, and made peace with his rival, engaging
+to put all the Christians to death. With this view, he invited
+the Spaniards to a banquet, when he made them all be cruelly
+murdered, only reserving Don Juan Serrano alive, in order to
+procure a supply of artillery and ammunition for his ransom. With
+these conditions the Spaniards would have willingly complied, but
+found so much prevarication and treachery in the conduct of the
+natives, and were so intimidated by the miserable fate of their
+companions, that they put to sea, leaving the unfortunate Serrano
+to his miserable fate.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION IV.</p>
+
+<p><i>Continuation of the Voyage to its Conclusion</i>.</p>
+
+<p>A little before the death of Magellan, news were received of
+the Moluccas, the great object of this voyage. Leaving Mathan,
+they sailed for the island of <i>Bohol</i>, where they burnt the
+Conception, one of their ships, transferring its men, ammunition,
+and provisions into the other two. Directing their course from
+thence to the S.W. they came to the island of <i>Paviloghon</i>,
+inhabited by negroes. From thence they came to a large island
+named <i>Chippit</i>, in lat. 8&deg; N. about 50 leagues W. from
+Zabut, and about 170&deg; of longitude from their first
+departure.[13] This island abounds in rice, ginger, goats, hogs,
+hens, &amp;c. and the Spaniards were kindly received by the king,
+who, in token of peace, marked his body, face, and the tip of his
+tongue, with blood which he drew from his left arm; in which
+ceremony he was imitated by the Spaniards. Sailing about 40
+leagues from thence between the W. and S.W. or W.S.W. they came
+to a very large island, named <i>Caghaian</i>, thinly inhabited.
+The inhabitants were Mahometans, exiles from Borneo, rich in
+gold, and using poisoned arrows; a common practice in most of
+these islands. Sailing W.N.W. from this island 25 leagues, they
+came to <i>Puloan</i>, a fruitful island in lat. 9&deg; 20' N.
+and 179&deg; 20' of longitude W. from their first departure.[14]
+This island yields much the same productions as Chippit, together
+with large figs, battatos, cocoa-nuts, and sugar-canes; and they
+make a kind of wine of rice, which is very intoxicating, yet
+better than palm-wine. The natives go entirely naked, use
+poisoned arrows, and are greatly addicted to cock-fighting.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 13: Bohal is one of the Philippine islands,
+in lat. 10&deg; N. and long. 123&deg; 50' E. from Greenwich.
+Paviloghon and Chippit must accordingly refer to some islands of
+the same group farther west.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 14: Pulcan, Pulowan, or Paragua, the
+westermost of the Philippines, an island of considerable extent,
+in lat. 10&deg; N. and long. 119&deg; E. from Greenwich. From the
+direction of the voyage, the great island of Chaghaian of the
+text, was probably that now called Magindano.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>They came next to the great and rich island of Borneo, in lat.
+5&deg; 5' N. the chief city containing not less than 25,000
+houses. The king was a Mahometan of great power, keeping a
+magnificent court; and was always attended by a numerous guard.
+He sent several presents to the Spanish captains, and made two
+elephants be led out with rich silk trappings, to bring the
+Spanish messengers and presents to his palace. He has ten
+secretaries of state, who write every thing concerning his
+affairs on the bark of trees. His household is managed by women,
+who are the daughters of his principal courtiers. This country
+affords camphor, which is the gum of a tree called <i>Capar</i>;
+as also cinnamon, ginger, myrabolans, oranges, lemons, sugar,
+cucumbers, melons, and other fruits, with abundance of beasts and
+birds, and all other products of the equinoctial climate. The
+natives continually chew betel and areka, and drink arrack.</p>
+
+<p>Leaving Borneo, they went to the island of <i>Cimbubon</i>,
+in, lat. 8&deg; 7' N.[15] where they remained forty days,
+caulking and repairing their ships, and taking in a supply of
+fresh water. In the woods of this isle they found a tree, the
+leaves of which, when they fall to the ground, move from place to
+place as if alive. They resemble the leaves of the mulberry,
+having certain fibres produced from their sides resembling legs,
+and suddenly spring away when touched. Pigafetta, the author of
+this relation, kept one of these leaf-animals in a dish for eight
+days.[16] This isle produces ostriches, wild hogs, and
+crocodiles. They caught here a fish having a head like a sow,
+with two horns, its body consisting of one entire bone, and
+having a substance on its back resembling a saddle.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 15: Perhaps Balambangan, in 8&deg; 20'
+N.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 16: Harris observes, that this account is
+quite incredible: Yet it is certainly true that an insect of this
+description exists, though not the leaf of a tree, as erroneously
+supposed by Pigafetta.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>From hence they sailed to certain islands named <i>Salo
+Taghima</i>, which produce fine pearls, and from whence the king
+of Borneo once procured two large round pearls, nearly as big as
+eggs. They came next to a harbour in the island of
+<i>Sarangani</i>, reported to yield both pearls and gold. At this
+place they pressed two pilots to conduct them to the Moluccas;
+and passing the islands named <i>Ceana, Canida, Cabiaia, Camuca,
+Cabalu, Chiari, Lipan</i>, and <i>Nuza</i>, they came to a fair
+isle in lat 3&deg; 20' N. named <i>Sangir</i>.[17] Passing five
+other islands, they at last espied a cluster of five islands,
+which they were informed by the pilots were the Moluccas. This
+was on the 6th November, 1521, twenty-seven months after their
+departure from Spain. Trying the depth of the sea in the
+neighbourhood of these islands, they found it no less than
+fifty-one fathoms; though the Portuguese report that this sea is
+too shallow for being navigated, and is besides rendered
+extremely dangerous by numerous rocks and shelves, and by
+continual darkness; doubtless to deter any other nation from
+attempting to go there.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 17: Sangir is in lat. 8&deg; 35' N. and
+long. 125&deg; 25 E. from Greenwich. The other islands enumerated
+in the text do not occur in modern maps.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>They came to anchor in the port of <i>Tiridore</i> [Tidore] on
+the 8th November, this being one of the chief of the Molucca
+islands. Although a Mahometan, the king of this island was so
+fond of the Spaniards, that he invited them to come on shore as
+into their own country, and to use the houses as their own,
+calling them his brethren and children; even changing the name of
+his island from Tidore to Castile. These Molucca islands are five
+in number, <i>Ternate, Tidore, Mortir, Makian</i>, and
+<i>Batchian</i>. Ternate is the chief of these islands, and its
+king once ruled over them all; but at this time Mortir and Makian
+were commonwealths, but Batchian was a separate monarchy. The
+clove-tree is very tall, and as big about as the body of a man,
+having large boughs, with leaves resembling those of the
+bay-tree, and the bark is of an olive colour. The cloves grow in
+large clusters at the extremities of the boughs; being at first
+white, but growing red when they come to maturity, and grow black
+when dried. While green, the flavour of the wood, bark, and
+leaves, is almost as strong as that of the cloves. These are
+gathered twice each year, in June and December, and if not taken
+in time, become very hard. Every man has his own particular
+trees, on which they bestow very little care. They have also in
+this isle a peculiar sort of tree, the bark of which, being
+steeped in water, may be drawn out in small fibres as fine as
+silk; of which the women make themselves a sort of aprons, which
+are their only cloathing.</p>
+
+<p>Near Tidore is the large island of <i>Gilolo</i>, which is
+divided between the Mahometans and idolaters. The two Mahometan
+kings have themselves contributed liberally to the population of
+the island; one of them having 600 children, and the other 650.
+The pagans are more moderate in their conduct in this respect
+than the Mahometans, and are even less superstitious; yet it is
+said that they worship, for the rest of the day, whatever they
+first see every morning. In this island there grows a peculiar
+sort of reed, as big as a man's leg, which is full of limpid
+wholesome water. On the 12th November, a public warehouse was
+opened by the Spaniards in the town of Tidore, for the sale of
+their merchandise, which were exchanged at the following rates.
+For ten yards of good red cloth, they had one bahar of cloves,
+containing four cantars or quintals and six pounds; the cantar
+being 100 pounds. For fifteen yards of inferior cloth, they had
+one bahar. Likewise a bahar for 35 drinking glasses, or for 17
+<i>cathyls</i> of quicksilver. The islanders also brought all
+sorts of provisions daily to the ships, together with excellent
+water from certain hot springs in the mountains where the cloves
+grow. They here received a singular present for the king of
+Spain, being two dead birds about the size of turtle-doves, with
+small legs and heads and long bills, having two or three long
+party-coloured, feathers at each side, instead of wings, all the
+rest of their plumage being of a uniform tawny colour. These
+birds never fly except when favoured by the wind. The Mahometans
+allege that these birds come from Paradise, and therefore call
+them the birds of God.</p>
+
+<p>Besides cloves, the Molucca islands produce ginger, rice,
+sago, goats, sheep, poultry, popinjays, white and red figs,
+almonds, pomegranates, oranges and lemons, and a kind of honey
+which is produced by a species of fly less than ants. Likewise
+sugar-canes, cocoa-nuts, melons, gourds, and a species of fruit,
+called <i>camulical</i>, which is extremely cold. The isle of
+Tidore is in lat. 0&deg; 45' N. and long. 127&deg; 10' E.[18] and
+about 9&deg; 30' W. from the Ladrones,[19] in a direction nearly
+S.W. Formerly the natives of these islands were all heathens, the
+Moors or Mahometans having only had footing there for about fifty
+years before the arrival of the Spaniards. Ternate is the most
+northerly of these islands, and Batchian is almost under the
+line, being the largest of them all.[20]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 18: This is the true position, reckoning
+the longitude from Greenwich. In the original the longitude is
+said to be 170&deg; W. from the first meridian of the voyagers,
+being Seville in Spain, which would give 174&deg; E. from
+Greenwich; no great error, considering the imperfect way in which
+the longitude was then reckoned at sea.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 19: This is a gross error, perhaps of the
+press, as the difference of longitude is 16&deg;
+30'.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 20: The northern end of Batchian is in lat.
+0&deg; 28', and its southern extremity in 0&deg; 40', both
+south.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Departing from Tidore, the Spaniards were attended by several
+kings in their canoes to the isle of <i>Mare</i>,[21] where this
+royal company took leave of them with much apparent regret. In
+this isle they left one of their ships which was leaky, giving
+orders to have it repaired, for its return to Spain. Being now
+reduced to forty-six Spaniards and thirteen Indians, they
+directed their course from Mare towards the S.W. passing the
+isles named <i>Chacotian, Lagoma, Sico, Gioghi, Caphi, Sulacho,
+Lumatola, Tenetum, Bura</i> [Bouro?] <i>Arubon</i> [perhaps
+Amboina?] <i>Budia, Celaruri, Benaia, Ambalao, Bandon</i>
+[perhaps Banda?] <i>Zorobua, Zolot, Moceuamor, Galian</i>, and
+<i>Mullua</i>, besides many others possessed by Mahometans,
+heathens, and canibals. They stopped fifteen days at
+<i>Mallua</i> to repair their ship, being in 8&deg; N. lat. and
+169&deg; long. according to their reckoning. This island produces
+much pepper, both long and of the ordinary round kind. The tree
+on which it grows climbs like ivy, and its leaf resembles that of
+the mulberry. The natives are canibals; the men wearing their
+hair and beards; and their only weapons are bows and arrows.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 21: Marhee Foul, a small isle between
+Tidore and Motir.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Leaving <i>Mallua</i> [Moa?] on the 25th January, 1522, they
+arrived at <i>Tima</i> [Timor?] five leagues to the S.S.W. This
+island is in lat. 10&deg; S. and long. 125&deg; E. where they
+found ginger, white sanders, various kinds of fruits, and plenty
+of gold and provisions of all kinds. The people of the Moluccas,
+Java, and <i>Lozen</i> [Luzon, or the principal island of the
+Philippines], procure their sanders-wood from hence. The natives
+are idolaters, and have the <i>lues venerea</i> among them, which
+is a common distemper in all the islands of this great
+archipelago.</p>
+
+<p>Leaving Timor on the 11th February, they got into the great
+sea called <i>Lantchidol</i>, steering W.S.W. and leaving the
+coast of a long string of islands on the right hand, and taking
+care not to sail too near the shore, lest the Portuguese of
+Malacca should chance to discover them; wherefore they kept on
+the outside of Java and Sumatra. That they might pass the Cape of
+Good Hope the more securely, they continued their course W.S.W.
+till they got into the latitude of 42&deg; S. though so sore
+pinched by hunger and sickness, that some were for putting in at
+Mosambique for refreshments; but the majority concluded that the
+Portuguese would prove bad physicians for their distempers, and
+determined therefore to continue the voyage homewards. In this
+course they lost twenty-one of their men, and were at length
+constrained to put in at the island of St Jago, one of the Cape
+Verds, to throw themselves on the mercy of the Portuguese. So,
+venturing ashore, they opened their miserable case to the
+Portuguese, who at first relieved their necessities; but the next
+time they went on shore, detained all who came as prisoners.</p>
+
+<p>Those who still remained in the ship, now reduced to thirteen,
+having no mind to join their companions in captivity, made all
+the haste they could away, and being favoured by the winds, they
+arrived in the harbour of San Lucar, near Seville, on the 7th
+September, 1522. He who commanded this vessel, which had the good
+fortune to return from this remarkable voyage, was Juan Sebastian
+Cano, a native of Guetaria in Biscay, a person of much merit and
+resolution, who was nobly rewarded by the emperor Charles V. To
+perpetuate the memory of this first voyage round the world, the
+emperor gave him for his coat of arms the terrestrial globe, with
+this motto, <i>Prima me circumdedisti</i>. The newly-discovered
+straits at the southern extremity of South America, were at first
+named the <i>Straits of Vittori</i>, after the ship which
+returned; but they soon lost that name, to assume another which
+becomes them much better, in honour of their discoverer, and have
+ever since been denominated the <i>Straits of Magellan</i>.</p>
+
+<p>This most celebrated voyage took up three years and
+twenty-seven days, having commenced on the 10th August, 1519, and
+concluded on the 7th September, 1522. By its success, the skill
+and penetration of the great Columbus, who, only twenty-seven
+years before, had first asserted the possibility of its
+performance, were fully established. One circumstance was
+discovered in this voyage, which, although reason have taught us
+to explain, could hardly have been expected <i>a priori</i>. On
+the return of the Spaniards to their own country, they found they
+had lost a day in their reckoning, owing to the course they had
+sailed; whereas had they gone by the east, and returned by the
+west, they would have gained a day in their course.</p>
+
+<p>Another circumstance, which served to heighten the reputation
+of Magellan, who deserves the sole honour of this voyage, was the
+difficulty experienced by other able commanders, who endeavoured
+to fellow the course he had pointed out. The first who made the
+attempt were two Genoese ships in 1526, but unsuccessfully. In
+1528, Cortes, the conqueror of Mexico, sent two ships with 400
+men, to endeavour to find their way through the straits of
+Magellan to the Moluccas, but without effect. Sebastian Cabot
+tried the same thing, by order of Emanuel king of Portugal, but
+was unable to succeed.</p>
+
+<h2><a name="chapter4-2" id="chapter4-2">CHAPTER II.</a></h2>
+
+<p>VOYAGE BY SIR FRANCIS DRAKE ROUND THE WORLD, IN
+1577-1580.[22]</p>
+
+<hr align="center" width="50%">
+<p>SECTION I.</p>
+
+<p><i>Introduction, and Preparation for the Voyage</i>.</p>
+
+<p>In his Annals of the reign of Queen Elizabeth, the learned
+Cambden informs us, that the father of the celebrated Sir Francis
+Drake was the Rev. Edmund Drake, vicar of Upnore on the river
+Medway, and says he had this information from Sir Francis
+himself. Yet the industrious John Stowe says, that he was the
+eldest of twelve brethren, the sons of Edmund Drake, mariner, at
+Tavistock in Devonshire, and was born in 1540. Perhaps both
+accounts may be true; and Mr Edmund Drake, though a mariner
+originally, may have had a competent share of learning, and may
+have been admitted to orders on the final establishment of the
+Reformation.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 22: Hakluyt, IV. 232. Harris, I. p. 14.
+Oxford Coll. II. sect. xvi. Callender's Voy. I. 288. The original
+account of this voyage was published at London, in 4to, in 1600,
+and reprinted in 1618.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>This celebrated naval hero received the Christian name of
+Francis from his godfather the earl of Bedford, but does not
+appear to have derived any great patronage from that nobleman. He
+was sent young to sea, as an apprentice to the master of a small
+bark, who traded with France and Zealand; and his master, a
+bachelor, taking a great affection for him, left him his bark at
+his death. At eighteen years of age, he was purser of a ship on a
+voyage to the Bay of Biscay, and at twenty made a voyage to the
+coast of Guinea. In all these voyages he distinguished himself by
+extraordinary courage, and by a sagacity beyond his years. In
+1565, his laudable desire of glory induced him to venture his all
+in a voyage to the West Indies, which had no success. In 1567, he
+served under his kinsman Sir John Hawkins in the bay of Mexico,
+but was again unfortunate, returning from the voyage rich in
+character and fame, but with almost ruined circumstances. These
+disappointments served only to increase his desire of bettering
+his fortunes at the expence of the grand enemy of his country,
+against whom he made two other voyages into these parts; the
+first in 1570 with two ships, the Dragon and Swan and the second
+in 1571, in the Swan alone, chiefly for information, that he
+might qualify himself for undertaking some enterprize of greater
+importance; which he at length carried into execution with great
+courage and perseverance.</p>
+
+<p>His character for bravery and seamanship being now
+established, he soon found a sufficient number of persons willing
+to adventure a part of their fortunes in a privateering voyage
+which he proposed. He accordingly sailed from Plymouth on the
+24th May, 1572, in the Pasco, a ship only of seventy tons, having
+for his consort the Swan of 250 tons, commanded by his brother
+John Drake, with seventy-three men and boys, and provisions for a
+year. Such were the mighty preparations he had made for attacking
+the power of Spain in the West Indies, in which he considered
+himself justified, in order to make reprisals for the losses he
+had formerly sustained from the Spaniards. In this voyage he
+surprised and plundered the famous town of Nombre de Dios; and
+soon afterwards had a distant view of the South Sea from the top
+of a high tree, which inflamed him with the desire of conducting
+an English ship thither, which attempt he had perhaps never
+thought of but for that circumstance.</p>
+
+<p>In this expedition he acquired immense riches for his owners,
+and considerable wealth for himself; and being of an honourable
+and generous disposition, he scorned to avail himself of
+advantages, which most other men would have considered as their
+right. Of this we have the following remarkable instance. Having
+presented a cutlass to a captain or ca&ccedil;ique of the free
+Indians inhabiting the isthmus of Darien, the ca&ccedil;ique gave
+him in return four large ingots of gold, which he immediately
+threw into the common stock, saying, "My owners gave me that
+cutlass, and it is just they should receive their share of its
+produce." His return to England from this successful expedition
+was equally fortunate, as he sailed in twenty-three days from
+Cape Florida to the Scilly islands. Arriving at Plymouth on
+Sunday, the 9th August, 1573, during divine service, the news of
+his return was carried to church, on which few persons remained
+with the preacher, all the congregation running out to welcome
+the adventurous Drake, who had been absent fourteen months and
+sixteen days in this voyage.</p>
+
+<p>The wealth he gained in this expedition he generously expended
+in the service of his country, equipping no less than three
+frigates at his own expence, which he commanded in person, and
+with which he contributed materially to the reduction of the
+rebellion in Ireland, under the supreme command of the earl of
+Essex. After the death of that nobleman, he chose Sir Christopher
+Hatton for his patron, then vice-chamberlain to the queen, and
+afterwards lord high-chancellor of England. By his interest, not
+without great opposition, captain Drake obtained a commission
+from queen Elizabeth for the voyage of which it is now proposed
+to give an account, and which he had long meditated. Being thus
+provided with the royal authority, his friends contributed
+largely towards the intended expedition, while he applied himself
+with all diligence to get every thing in readiness for the
+important undertaking; having in view to attack the powerful
+monarchy of Spain, in its richest yet most vulnerable possessions
+on the western coasts of America, with what would now be
+considered a trifling squadron of five small barks.</p>
+
+<p>The ships, as they were then called, fitted out for this bold
+enterprize, were, the Pelican, afterwards named the Hind, of 100
+tons, admiral-ship of the squadron, under his own immediate
+command as captain-general; the Elizabeth, vice-admiral, of 80
+tons, commanded by Captain John Winter, who was
+lieutenant-general of the expedition; the Marigold, a bark of 30
+tons, Captain John Thomas; the Swan, a fly-boat of 50 tons,
+Captain John Chester; and the Christopher, a pinnace of 15 tons,
+Captain Thomas Moon. These ships were manned with 164 able-bodied
+men, including officers, and were provided with an ample supply
+of provisions, ammunition and stores, for so long and dangerous a
+voyage. Captain Drake likewise provided the frames of four
+pinnaces, which were stowed on board in pieces, ready to be set
+up as occasion might require. He is also said to have made
+provision for ornament and delight, carrying with him a band of
+musicians, together with rich furniture and much silverplate, all
+the vessels for his table, and many of those belonging to the
+cook-room, being of that metal. This magnificence is stated by
+his biographers, to have been intended as a display for the
+honour of his country among foreign nations.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION II.</p>
+
+<p><i>Narrative of the Voyage from England to the Straits of
+Magellan</i>.</p>
+
+<p>All things being duly prepared. Captain Drake sailed with his
+squadron from Plymouth Sound, about five in the afternoon of the
+15th November, 1577, giving out that he was bound for Alexandria
+in Egypt, which had been made the pretended object of the voyage,
+to prevent the court of Spain from taking measures for its
+obstruction. In consequence of a violent storm, in which some of
+the ships sustained damage, he was forced to put into Falmouth
+haven, whence he returned to Plymouth. Having repaired all
+defects, he once more set sail on the 13th December of the same
+year. Avoiding as much as possible to come near the land too
+early, he fell in with Cape Cantin, on the Barbary coast, on the
+25th, and came to the island of Mogadore on the 27th. In the
+channel of one mile broad, between that island and the main, he
+found a convenient harbour, where he caused one of his pinnaces
+to be built.</p>
+
+<p>While thus engaged, some of the inhabitants came to the shore
+with a flag of truce, on which the admiral sent a boat to enquire
+what they wanted. One of his men remained as a pledge with the
+natives, two of whom came off to the ship. These informed the
+admiral by signs, that they would next day supply the ships with
+good provisions; in return for which proffered civility, the
+admiral rewarded them with shoes, some linen, and two javelins,
+and sent them again on shore. Next day, they came again to the
+shore, according to promise; on which occasion, an Englishman,
+named Fry, leapt on shore among them from the boat, considering
+them as friends; but they perfidiously made him a prisoner,
+threatening to stab him if he made any resistance. They then
+mounted him on horseback, and carried him into the interior; but
+he was afterwards sent back in safety to England.</p>
+
+<p>The pinnace being finished, they sailed from Mogadore on the
+30th December, and arrived at Cape Blanco on the 17th January,
+1578. On the voyage from Mogadore to Cape Blanco, they took three
+<i>Canters</i>, or Spanish fishing-boats, and three caravels.
+Here they found a Portuguese caravel at anchor, bound to the Cape
+Verd islands for salt, in which there were only two mariners.
+They took possession of this ship, and carried her into the
+harbour of Cape Blanco, where they remained four days, during
+which time the admiral trained his men on shore, to prepare them
+for land service on occasion. At this place they took such
+necessaries as they wanted from the fishermen, as also one of
+their barks or canters of 40 tons, leaving behind a small bark of
+their own, called the Benedict. Leaving this place on the 22d
+January, they were told by the master of the Portuguese caravel,
+which they carried along with them, that abundance of dried
+<i>cabritos</i> or goats might be procured at Mayo, one of the
+Cape Verd islands, which were yearly prepared there for the ships
+belonging to the king of Spain.</p>
+
+<p>They arrived at Mayo on the 27th January, but the inhabitants
+refused to trade with them, being expressly forbidden to have any
+intercourse with foreigners, by orders from their sovereign. Next
+day, however, the admiral sent a company of 72 armed men on shore
+under the command of Mr Winter and Mr Doughty, to take a view of
+the island, and to see if any refreshments could be procured.
+They marched accordingly to the chief place of the island; and,
+after travelling three days through the mountains, they arrived
+there before day-break on the fourth day. The inhabitants were
+all fled, but this part of the island seemed more fertile and
+better cultivated than any of the rest. They rested here some
+time, banqueting on delicious grapes, which they found in
+perfection at that season of the year, though the depth of winter
+in England. Mayo abounds with goats, wild poultry, and salt; this
+last being formed in great quantities among the rocks, by the
+heat of the sun; so that the natives have only the trouble of
+gathering it into heaps, and sell it to their neighbours, from
+which they derive great profit. They found here cocoa-nut trees,
+which have no branches or leaves but at the top of the tree,
+where the fruit grows in clusters. They then marched farther into
+the island, where they saw great numbers of goats, but could not
+get any. They might have furnished themselves with some dried
+carcasses of old goats, which the natives laid purposely in their
+way; but not caring for the refuse of the island, they returned
+to the ships.</p>
+
+<p>Leaving Mayo on the 31st of January, they sailed past the
+island of St Jago, whence three pieces of cannon were fired at
+them, but without doing any injury. This is a large fine island,
+inhabited by the Portuguese; but the mountains are said to be
+still occupied by Moors, who fled thither to deliver themselves
+from slavery, and have fortified themselves in places of
+difficult access. Near this island they saw two ships under sail,
+one of which they took, and it turned out a valuable prize, being
+laden with wine. The admiral detained this ship, which he
+committed to the charge of Mr Doughty, and took the Portuguese
+pilot, named Nuno da Silva into his service, sending the rest
+away in his pinnace, giving them some provisions, a butt of wine,
+and their apparel. That same night they came to the island of
+<i>Fuego</i>, or the burning island. It is inhabited by
+Portuguese, having a volcano on its northern side, which is
+continually throwing out smoke and flames; yet seems to be
+reasonably commodious. On the south of Fuego there is a very
+sweet and pleasant island, called by the Portuguese <i>Ilha
+Brava</i>, the brave or fine island. This is cloathed with
+evergreen trees, and has many streams of fresh water which run
+into the sea, and are easily accessible; but it has no convenient
+road for ships, the sea being every where too deep for anchorage.
+It is alledged that the summit of Fuego is not higher in the air,
+than are the roots of Brava low in the sea.</p>
+
+<p>Leaving these islands, and approaching the line, they were
+sometimes becalmed for a long time together, and at other times
+vexed with tempests. At all times, when the weather would permit,
+they had plenty of dolphins, bonitos and flying-fish; several of
+the last dropping in their flight on the decks, unable to rise
+again, because their finny wings wanted moisture. Taking their
+departure from the Cape de Verd islands, they sailed 54 days
+without seeing land; and at length, on the 5th April, 1578, got
+sight of the coast of Brazil, in lat. 33&deg; S. The barbarous
+people on shore, discovering the ships, began to practice their
+accustomed ceremonies to raise a storm for destroying their
+ships, making great fires, and offering sacrifices to the
+devil.[23] The 7th April they had thunder, lightning, and rain,
+during which storm they lost sight of the Christopher, but found
+her again on the 11th; and the place where all the ships met
+together, which had been dispersed in search of her, was named
+Cape <i>Joy</i>, at which place the ships took in a supply of
+fresh water. The country here was pleasant and fertile, with a
+sweet and temperate climate; but the only inhabitants seen were
+some herds of deer, though some footsteps of men, apparently of
+great stature, were noticed on the ground. Having weighed anchor,
+and sailed a little farther along the coast, they came to a small
+and safe harbour, formed between a rock and the main, the rock
+breaking the force of the sea. On this rock they killed some
+sea-wolves, a species of seals, which they found wholesome food,
+though not pleasant.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 23: This idea is uncharitable and absurd,
+as the navigators could not know any thing of the motives of
+these fires, and much less about the alleged sacrifices. The
+fires might have been friendly signals, inviting them on
+shore.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Going next to lat. 36&deg; S. they sailed up the Rio Plata,
+and came into 53 and 54 fathoms, fresh water, with which they
+filled their water casks; but finding no convenient harbour, went
+again to sea on the 27th of April. Sailing still onwards, they
+came to a good bay, having several islands, one of which was well
+stocked with seals and the others with sea fowl, so that they had
+no want of provisions, together with plenty of water. The admiral
+being ashore on one of these islands, the natives came about him,
+dancing and skipping in a friendly manner, and willingly bartered
+any thing they had for toys; but they had the strange custom of
+refusing to accept of any thing, unless first thrown down on the
+ground. They were a comely strong-bodied people, swift of foot,
+and of lively dispositions. The Marigold and Christopher were
+dispatched in search of a convenient harbour, and soon returned
+with news of having found one, into which all the ships removed.
+Here the seals were so numerous, that above 200 were killed in
+about an hour. The natives came boldly about them, while working
+ashore, having their faces painted, their only apparel being a
+covering of skin with the fur on, wrapped about their waists, and
+a kind of wreaths round their heads. Each man had a bow, about an
+ell long, and only two arrows. They even seemed to have some
+notion of military discipline, as they ranged their men in an
+orderly manner; and they gave sufficient proof of their agility,
+by stealing the admiral's hat from his head, which could not be
+recovered.[24] While in this bay, the admiral took every thing
+out of the fly-boat that could be of any use; she was then laid
+on shore and burnt, and all her iron work saved for future
+use.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 24: Harris observes, that these were of the
+nation named Patagons by Magellan. But no notice is taken of
+their stature being above the ordinary height.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Sailing from this place, the fleet came to anchor in Port St
+Julian on the 20th June, where they saw the gibbet still
+standing, on which Magellan had formerly executed some of his
+mutinous company. Here also Admiral Drake executed one Captain
+Doughty, the most suspected action of his life. Mr Doughty had
+been guilty of certain actions, tending towards contention or
+mutiny, and was found guilty partly on his own confession, and
+partly by proof, taken in good order and as near as might be
+according to the forms of the law of England. Having received the
+communion from Mr Fletcher, chaplain of the admiral's ship, in
+which Captain Drake participated along with him; and after
+embracing Drake, and taking leave of all the company, Mr Doughty
+prayed fervently for the welfare of the queen and whole realm,
+then quietly laid his head on the block. The general then made a
+speech to the whole company assembled, exhorting them to unity
+and obedience, sacredly protesting that he had great private
+affection for Mr Doughty, and had been solely actuated in
+condemning him to an ignominious death, by his care for the
+welfare of the voyage, the satisfaction of her majesty, and the
+honour of his country.</p>
+
+<p>Leaving this place on the 17th August, they fell in with the
+eastern entrance of the Straits of Magellan on the 20th of that
+month. The 21st they entered the straits, which they found very
+intricate, with various crooked turnings; owing to which, having
+often to shift their course, the wind was frequently adverse,
+making their passage troublesome and dangerous, especially in
+sudden blasts of wind; for, although there were several good
+harbours, the sea was too deep for anchorage, except in some
+narrow creeks or inlets, or between rocks. On both sides of the
+straits, there are vast mountains covered with snow, their tops
+reaching in many places to great heights, having often two or
+three ranges of clouds below their summits. The air in the
+straits was extremely cold, with almost continual frost and snow;
+yet the trees and plants retained a constant verdure, growing and
+flourishing in spite of the severity of the climate. At the south
+and east parts of the straits there are various islands, through
+between which the sea breaks in, as at the main entrance. The
+breadth of the straits in some places was only a league, which
+was the narrowest, but in most places two, and in some three
+leagues across. The 24th August, they came to an island in the
+straits, where they found vast quantities of penguins, a sort of
+water fowl, as large as a goose, but which does not fly, and of
+which they killed 3000 in less than a day.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION III.</p>
+
+<p><i>Incidents of the Voyage, from the Straits of Magellan to
+New Albion.</i></p>
+
+<p>The 6th September, they reached the western extremity of the
+straits, and entered into the great South Sea or Pacific Ocean.
+On the 7th, the fleet encountered a storm, by which they were
+driven one degree to the southwards of the straits, and more than
+200 leagues in longitude back from that entrance.[25] They were
+driven even so far as the lat. of 57&deg; 20' S. where they
+anchored among the islands, finding good fresh water and
+excellent herbs.[26] Not far from thence, they entered another
+bay, where they found naked people, ranging about the islands in
+canoes, in search of provisions, with whom they had some
+intercourse by way of barter. Continuing their course towards the
+north, they discovered three islands on the 3d October, in one of
+which there was an incredible number of birds. On the 8th
+October, they lost company of the Elizabeth, the vice admiral,
+commanded by Captain Winter. At his return home, they found that
+Mr Winter had been forced to take refuge from the storm in the
+straits, whence he returned to England, though many of us feared
+he and his people had perished.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 25: This is a gross error, probably a
+misprint for 20 leagues of longitude, as the quantity in the text
+would have driven them far to the eastwards of the straits, into
+the Atlantic, which is impossible, the whole of Tierra del Fuego
+being interposed.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 26: This too is erroneous, as Cape Horn,
+not then known, is only in lat. 55&deg; 58' 30' S.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Having now got back to the western entrance of the straits,
+they made sail for the coast of Chili, which the general maps
+represented as trending N.W. but which they found to the east of
+N. so that these coasts had not been fully discovered, or very
+inaccurately represented, for the space of 12 degrees at least,
+either for the purpose to deceive, or through ignorance.
+Proceeding northwards along the coast of Chili, they came to the
+island of Mocha, in 38&deg; 30' S. latitude, on the 29th
+November, where they cast anchor. The admiral went here ashore
+with ten men, and found the island inhabited by a people who had
+fled from the extreme cruelty of the Spaniards, leaving their
+original habitations on the continent, to enjoy their lives and
+liberties in security. These people at first behaved civilly to
+the admiral and his men, bringing them potatoes and two fat
+sheep, promising also to bring them water, and they received some
+presents in return. Next day, however, when two men went ashore
+with barrels for water, the natives suddenly assailed and killed
+them. The reason of this outrage was, that they mistook the
+English for Spaniards, whom they never spare when they fall into
+their hands.</p>
+
+<p>Continuing their course along the coast of Chili, they met an
+Indian in a canoe, who mistook them for Spaniards, and told them
+of a great Spanish ship at St Jago, laden for Peru. Rewarding him
+for this intelligence, the Indian conducted them to where the
+ship lay at anchor, in the port of Valparaiso, in lat. 33&deg;
+40' S.[27] All the men on board were only eight Spaniards and
+three negroes, who, supposing the English to have been friends,
+welcomed them with beat of drum, and invited them on board to
+drink Chili wine. The English immediately boarded and took
+possession; when one of the Spaniards leapt overboard, and swam
+ashore to give notice of the coming of the English. On this
+intelligence, all the inhabitants of the town, being only about
+nine families, escaped into the country. The admiral and his men
+landed, and rifled the town and its chapel, from which they took
+a silver chalice, two cruets, and an altar cloth. They found also
+in the town a considerable store of Chili wine, with many boards
+of cedar wood, all of which they carried on board their ships.
+Then setting all the prisoners on shore, except one named John
+Griego, born in Greece, who was detained as a pilot, the admiral
+directed his course for Lima, the capital of Peru, under the
+guidance of this new pilot.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 27: More correctly, 33&deg; 00' 30" S. and
+long. 71&deg; 38' 30" W. from Greenwich.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Being now at sea, they examined the booty in their prize, in
+which they found 25,000 pezos of pure gold of Baldivia, amounting
+to above 37,000 Spanish ducats. Continuing their course for Lima,
+they put into the harbour of Coquimbo, in lat. 29&deg; 54' S.
+where the admiral sent fourteen men on shore for water. This
+small company being espied by the Spaniards, they collected 300
+horse and 200 foot, and slew one of the Englishmen, the rest
+getting back to the ship. From thence they went to a port named
+<i>Taropaca</i> in Peru, in lat 20&deg; 15' S. where landing, a
+Spaniard was found asleep on the shore, having eighteen bars of
+silver lying beside him, worth about 4000 Spanish ducats, which
+they carried away, leaving him to his repose. Going again on
+shore, not far from thence, in search of water, they met a
+Spaniard and an Indian, driving eight Peruvian sheep, laden with
+fine silver, each sheep having two leather bags on his back, in
+each of which were about fifty pounds weight. These they carried
+on board, finding in the whole of these bags 800 pounds weight of
+silver. From thence they went to <i>Arica</i>, in lat. 18&deg;
+40' S. in which port they plundered three small barks of
+fifty-seven bars of silver, each bar being in shape and size like
+a brick-bat, and weighing about twenty pounds. Not having
+sufficient strength, they did not assault the town, but put again
+to sea, where they met another small bark, laden with linen, part
+of which was taken out, and the bark dismissed.</p>
+
+<p>They came to Calao, the port of Lima, in lat. 12&deg; 10' S.
+on the 13th February, 1579, where they found twelve ships at
+anchor, with all their sails down, without watch or guard, all
+their masters and merchants being on shore. On examining the
+contents of these ships, they found a chest full of dollars, with
+great store of silks and linen, and carried away all the silver,
+and part of the other goods to their own ships. Here the admiral
+got notice of a very rich ship, called the Cacafuego, which had
+sailed for Paita, in lat. 5&deg; 10' S. Pursuing her thither,
+they learnt, before arriving at Paita, that she had sailed for
+Panama. In continuing the pursuit to Panama, they took another,
+which paid them well for their trouble; as, besides her ropes and
+other tackle, she yielded eighty pounds weight of gold, together
+with a large golden crucifix, richly adorned with emeralds.</p>
+
+<p>Continuing to pursue the Cacafuego, the admiral promised to
+give his gold chain to the first person who descried the chase,
+which fell to the share of Mr John Drake, who first discovered
+her, one morning about three o'clock. They came up with her about
+six, gave her three shots, which struck down her mizen-mast, and
+then boarded. They found this ship fully as rich as she was
+reported, having thirteen chests full of dollars, eighty pounds
+weight of gold, a good quantity of jewels, and twenty-six tons of
+silver in bars.[28] Among other rich pieces of plate found in
+this ship, there were two very large gilt silver bowls, which
+belonged to her pilot. On seeing these, the admiral said to the
+pilot, that these were fine bowls, and he must needs have one of
+them; to which the pilot yielded, not knowing how to help
+himself; but, to make this appear less like compulsion, he gave
+the other to the admiral's steward. The place where this rich
+prize was taken was off Cape San Francisco, about 150 leagues
+from Panama, and in lat. 1&deg; N. [00&deg; 45'.] When the people
+of the prize were allowed to depart, the pilot's boy told the
+admiral, that the English ship ought now to be called the
+<i>Cacafuego</i>, not theirs, as it had got all their rich
+loading, and that their unfortunate ship ought now to be called
+the <i>Cacaplata</i>, which jest excited much mirth.[29]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 28: Without calculating on the jewels, for
+which there are no data, the silver and gold of this prize could
+hardly fall short of 250,000<i>l</i>--worth more than a million,
+in effective value, of the present day.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 29: This forecastle joke turns on the
+meaning of the words, Cacafuego and Cacaplata, meaning Fartfire
+and Fartsilver.--<i>Harris</i>.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Having ransacked the Cacafuego of every thing worth taking,
+she was allowed to depart; and continuing their course westwards,
+they next met a ship laden with cotton goods, China dishes, and
+China silks. Taking from the Spanish owner a falcon of massy
+gold, having a large emerald set in his breast, and chasing such
+other wares as he liked, the admiral allowed this ship to
+continue her voyage, only detaining her pilot for his own use.
+This pilot brought them to the harbour of Guatalca, in the town
+adjacent to which, he said, there were only seventeen Spaniards.
+Going there on shore, they marched directly to the town-house,
+where they found a judge sitting, and ready to pass sentence on a
+parcel of negroes, who were accused of plotting to set the town
+on fire. But the arrival of the admiral changed affairs, for he
+made both the judge and the criminals prisoners, and carried them
+all aboard the ships. He then made the judge write to the
+citizens, to keep at a distance, and make no resistance; after
+which the town was plundered, but the only thing valuable was
+about a bushel of Spanish dollars, or rials of plate. One of the
+people took a rich Spaniard fleeing out of town, who ransomed
+himself by giving up a gold chain and some jewels. At this place
+the admiral set some of his Spanish prisoners ashore, together
+with the old Portuguese pilot he took at the Cape Verd islands,
+and departed from thence for the island of Cano. While there, he
+captured a Spanish ship bound for the Philippine islands, which
+he lightened of part of her merchandise, and allowed her to
+proceed. At this place the admiral landed every thing out of his
+own ship, and then laid her on shore, where she was repaired and
+graved; after which they laid in a supply of wood and water.</p>
+
+<p>Thinking he had in some measure revenged the public injuries
+of his country upon the Spaniards, as well as his own private
+losses, the admiral began to deliberate about returning home; but
+was in some hesitation as to the course he ought to steer. To
+return by the Straits of Magellan, the only passage yet
+discovered, he concluded would throw himself into the hands of
+the Spaniards, who would probably there waylay him with a greatly
+superior force, having now only one ship left, which was by no
+means strong, though very rich.[30] He therefore, on maturely
+weighing all circumstances, determined to proceed by way of the
+Moluccas, and following the course of the Portuguese, to get home
+by the Cape of Good Hope. Endeavouring to put this design in
+execution, but being becalmed, he found it necessary to steer
+more northwardly along the coast of America, in order to get a
+wind; in which view he sailed at least 600 leagues, which was all
+the way he was able to make between the 16th of April and the 3d
+June.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 30: We have no account of the loss of any
+of the squadron, except that the Elizabeth was lost sight of
+after passing the Straits of Magellan. Perhaps the other vessels
+had been destroyed, to reinforce the crew of the Hind, weakened
+by the diseases incident to long voyages.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the 5th June, being in lat. 43&deg; N. they found the air
+excessively cold, and the severity of the weather almost
+intolerable; for which reason they returned along the coast to
+the southward, till in lat. 38&deg; N. where they found a very
+good bay, which they entered with a favourable wind.[31] The
+English had here a good deal of intercourse with the natives,
+whose huts were scattered along the shores of this bay. These
+people brought presents of leathers and net-work to the admiral,
+who entertained them with so much kindness, that they were
+infinitely pleased. Though the country is very cold, the natives
+contrive to erect their houses in a very ingenious manner to
+defend themselves from the severity of the weather. Surrounding
+them by a deep trench, they raise great pieces of timber on its
+outer edge, which close all in a point at the top, like the spire
+of a steeple. Their fire is in the middle of this conical hut,
+and they sleep on the ground strewed with rushes, around the
+fire. The men go naked, but the women wear a kind of petticoat of
+bull-rushes, dressed in the manner of hemp, which is fastened
+round their waists, and reaches down to their hips; having
+likewise a deer-skin on their shoulders. The good qualities of
+these women make amends for their ordinary dress and figure, as
+they are very dutiful to their husbands.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 31: This bay of Sir Francis Drake, on the
+western coast of North America, is nearly in lat 58&deg; N. as
+stated in the text, and long. 122&deg; 15' W. from Greenwich. It
+is now named by the Spaniards, the Bay of San Francisco in
+California, on the southern side of which they have a mission of
+the same name--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Soon after his arrival, the admiral received a present from
+the natives of feathers and bags of tobacco, which was given in
+much form by a numerous concourse of the Indians. These convened
+on the top of a hill or rising ground, whence one of their number
+harangued the admiral, whose tent was pitched at the bottom of
+the hill. When this speech was ended, they all laid down their
+weapons on the summit of the hill, whence they descended and
+offered their presents, at the same time civilly returning those
+which the admiral had before given them. All this time the native
+women remained on the top of the hill, where they seemed as if
+possessed, tearing their hair, and howling in a most savage
+manner. This is the ordinary music of their sacrifices, something
+of that nature being then solemnizing. While the women above were
+thus serving the devil, the men below were better employed, in
+listening attentively to divine service, then performing in the
+admiral's tent These circumstances, though trivial in themselves,
+are important in ascertaining the first discovery of California
+by the English.</p>
+
+<p>News of the arrival of the English having spread about the
+country, two ambassadors came to the admiral, to inform him that
+the king was coming to wait upon him, and desired to have a token
+of peace, and assurance of safe conduct. This being given to
+their satisfaction, the whole train began to move towards the
+admiral, in good order, and with a graceful deportment. In front
+came a very comely person, bearing the sceptre before the king,
+on which hung two crowns, and two chains of great length. The
+crowns were made of net-work, ingeniously interwoven with
+feathers of many colours, and the chains were made of bones. Next
+to the sceptre-bearer came the king, a very comely personage,
+shewing an air of majesty in all. This deportment, surrounded by
+a guard of tall martial-looking men, all clad in skins. Then
+followed the common people, who, to make the finer appearance,
+had painted their faces, some black, and some of other colours.
+All of them had their arms full of presents, even the children
+not excepted.</p>
+
+<p>The admiral drew up all his men in line of battle, and stood
+ready to receive them within his fortifications. At some distance
+from him, the whole train of natives made a halt, all preserving
+the most profound silence, except the sceptre-bearer, who made a
+speech of half an hour. He then, from an orator, became a
+dancing-master, and struck up a song, being joined in both by the
+king, lords, and common people, who came all singing and dancing
+up to the fences which the admiral had thrown up. The natives
+then all sat down; and, after some preliminary compliments, the
+king made a solemn offer of his whole kingdom and its
+dependencies to the admiral, desiring him to assume the
+sovereignty, and professing himself his most loyal subject; and,
+that this might not seem mere empty compliment, he took off his
+illustrious crown of feathers from his own head, with the consent
+and approbation of all his nobles there present, and placing it
+on the head of the admiral, invested him with all the other
+ensigns of royalty, constituting the admiral, as far as in him
+lay, king of the whole country. The admiral, as her majesty's
+representative, accepted of this new-offered dignity in her name
+and behalf; as from this donation, whether made in jest or
+earnest, it was probable that some real advantage might redound
+hereafter to the English nation in these parts. After this
+ceremony, the common people dispersed themselves about the
+English encampment, expressing their admiration and respect for
+the English in a most violent and even profane manner, even
+offering sacrifices to them, as in the most profound devotion,
+till they were repressed by force, with strong expressions of
+abhorrence, and directed to pay their adorations to the supreme
+Creator and Preserver of all things, whom only they ought to
+honour with religious worship.[32]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 32: The whole of this story, of a king and
+his nobles, and the investiture of Drake in the sovereignty of
+California, which he named New Albion, is so completely absurd as
+not to merit serious observation.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>After this ceremony, the admiral and some of his people
+penetrated to some distance into the interior country, which they
+found to be extremely full of large fat deer, often seeing about
+a thousand in one herd. There were also such immense numbers of
+rabbits, that the whole country seemed one vast warren. These
+rabbits were of the size of those of Barbary, having heads like
+our own rabbits in England, with feet like those of a mole, and
+long tails like rats. Under the chin on each side, they have a
+bag or pouch in the skin, into which they store up any food they
+get abroad, which they there preserve for future use. Their flesh
+is much valued by the natives, and their skins are made into
+robes for the king and nobles. This country seemed to promise
+rich veins of gold and silver; as wherever they had occasion to
+dig, they threw up some of the ores of these metals.[33] Partly
+in honour of England, and partly owing to the prospect of white
+cliffs which this country presented from the sea, the admiral
+named this region New Albion. Before his departure, he erected a
+monument, on which was a large plate, engraven with the name,
+picture, and arms of queen Elizabeth, the title of her majesty to
+the sovereignty of the country, the time of its discovery, and
+Drake's own name. In this country the Spaniards had never had the
+smallest footing, neither had they discovered this coast of
+America, even for several degrees to the southwards of New
+Albion.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 33: This surely is a gross falsehood, as
+even the Spaniards, so much experienced in mines of the precious
+metals, have found none in California, though possessing missions
+among its rude and scanty population in every corner, even in
+this very spot.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>SECTION IV.</p>
+
+<p><i>Continuation of the Voyage, from New Albion to
+England.</i></p>
+
+<p>Sailing from this port of New Albion, [now called by the
+Spaniards the Bay of San Francisco,] they had no sight of land
+till the 13th October, 1579, when, in the morning of that day,
+they fell in with certain islands in lat. 8&deg; N.[34] They here
+met many canoes, laden with cocoa-nuts and other fruits. These
+canoes were very artificially hollowed, and were smooth and
+shining, like polished horn. Their prows and sterns were all
+turned circularly inwards; and on each side there lay out two
+pieces of timber, or out-riggers, a yard and a half long, more or
+less, according the size of the canoes. They were of considerable
+height in the gunwales; and their insides were ornamented with
+white shells. The islanders in these canoes had large holes in
+the lower parts of their ears, which reached down a considerable
+way, by the weight of certain ornaments. Their teeth were as
+black as jet, occasioned by chewing a certain herb with a sort of
+powder, which they always carry with them for that
+purpose.[35]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 34: These probably were some of the
+Caralines, being in the direct route from Port Sir Francis Drake
+to the Moluccas.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 35: Areka nut and betel leaf, with pounded
+shell-lime.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 18th October they came to other islands, some of which
+appeared to be very populous, and continued their course past the
+islands of <i>Tagulada, Zelon,</i> and <i>Zewarra.</i> The first
+of these produces great store of cinnamon; and the inhabitants
+are in friendship with the Portuguese. Without making any stop at
+these islands, the admiral continued his course, and fell in with
+the Moluccas on the 14th November. Intending to steer for Tidore,
+and coasting along the island of Motir, which belongs to the king
+of Ternate, they met the viceroy of that king, who came
+fearlessly on board the admiral's ship. He advised the admiral by
+no means to prosecute his voyage to Tidore, but to sail directly
+for Ternate, as the king, his master, was a great enemy to the
+Portuguese, and would have no intercourse with him, if at all
+connected with Tidore or the Portuguese. Upon this, the admiral
+resolved on going to Tidore, and came to anchor before the town
+early next morning.</p>
+
+<p>He immediately sent a messenger to the king, with a present of
+a velvet cloak, and to assure him that his only purpose in coming
+to his island was to trade in a friendly manner. By this time the
+viceroy had been to the king, whom he had disposed to entertain a
+favourable opinion of the English, so that the king returned a
+very civil and obliging answer, assuring the admiral that a
+friendly intercourse with the English was highly pleasing to him,
+his whole kingdom, and all that it contained, being at his
+service; and that he was ready to lay himself and his dominions
+at the feet of the glorious queen of England, and to acknowledge
+her as his sovereign. In token of all this, he sent his signet to
+the admiral, delivering it with much respect to the messenger,
+who was treated with great pomp and ceremony at court.</p>
+
+<p>Having a mind to visit the admiral on board ship, the king
+sent before hand four large canoes, filled with his most
+dignified attendants, all in white dresses, and having large
+awnings of perfumed mats borne over their heads on a frame of
+canes or bamboos. They were surrounded by servants, all in white;
+outside of whom were ranks of soldiers, and beyond them were many
+rowers in well-contrived galleries, three of these on each side
+all along the canoes, raised one above the other, each gallery
+containing eighty rowers.[36] These canoes were well furnished
+with warlike implements and all kind of weapons, both offensive
+and defensive, and were filled with soldiers well appointed for
+war. Bowing near the ship in great order, they paid their
+reverence to the admiral, saying that their king had sent them to
+conduct his ship into a safer road than that it now occupied.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 36: This surely is a great exaggeration,
+employing 480 rowers to each canoe.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The king himself came soon afterwards, attended upon by six
+grave and ancient persons. He seemed much delighted with English
+music, and still more with English generosity, which the admiral
+expressed in large presents to him and his attendants. The king
+promised to come aboard again next day, and that same night sent
+off great store of provisions, as rice, poultry, sugar, cloves, a
+sort of fruit called <i>Frigo</i>, and <i>Sago</i>, which is a
+meal made out of the tops of trees, melting in the mouth like
+sugar, and tasting like sour curds, but when made into cakes will
+keep fit for eating at the end of ten years. The king did not
+come on board next day, according to promise, but sent his
+brother to excuse him, and: to invite the admiral on shore, while
+he remained as a pledge for his safe return. The admiral declined
+going ashore himself, but sent some gentlemen of his retinue
+along with the king's brother, detaining the viceroy till their
+return.</p>
+
+<p>They were received on shore by another of the king's brothers
+with several nobles, and conducted in great state to the castle,
+where there was a court of at least a thousand persons, the
+principal of whom were sixty grave counsellors, and four Turkish
+envoys dressed in scarlet robes and turbans, who were there to
+negociate trade between the Turkish empire and Ternate. The king
+came in under a glorious canopy, embroidered with gold, and
+guarded by twelve men armed with lances. He was dressed in a
+loose robe of cloth of gold, having his legs bare, but with
+leather shoes or slippers on his feet. Several circular ornaments
+of gold were braided among his hair, a large chain of gold hung
+from his neck, and his fingers were adorned with rich jewels. A
+page stood at the right-hand side of his chair of state, blowing
+cool air upon him with a fan, two feet long and a foot broad,
+curiously embroidered, and enriched with sapphires. The English
+gentlemen were kindly received; and, having heard their message,
+he sent one of his counsellors to conduct them back to the ships.
+The king of Ternate is a prince of great power, having seventy
+islands under his authority, besides Ternate, which is the best
+of the Molucca islands. His religion, and that of all his
+subjects, is Mahometism, in obedience to which they keep the new
+moons and many fasts, during which they mortify the flesh all the
+day, but make up for their abstemiousness by feasting in the
+night.</p>
+
+<p>Having dispatched all his affairs at Ternate, the admiral left
+the place, and sailed to a small island to the southwards of
+Celebes, where he remained twenty-six days. This island is all
+covered with wood, the trees being of large size, tall, straight,
+and without boughs, except at the top, the leaves resembling our
+English broom. There were here vast numbers of shining flies, no
+bigger than our common flies in England, which, skimming at night
+among the trees and bushes, made them appear as if all on fire.
+The bats in this island were as large as our ordinary poultry,
+and there was a sort of land cray-fish, which burrowed in the
+ground like rabbits, being so large that one of them was a
+sufficient meal for four persons.</p>
+
+<p>Setting sail from thence, and being unable to proceed
+westwards on account of the wind, the course was altered to the
+southwards, yet with much danger, by reason of the shoals which
+lie thick among these islands. Of this they had most dangerous
+and almost fatal experience on the 9th January, 1580, by running
+upon a rock, on which they stuck fast from eight at night till
+four in the afternoon of next day. In this distress, the ship was
+lightened by landing three tons of cloves, eight pieces of
+ordnance, and some provisions on the rock; soon after which, by
+the wind chopping round, they happily got off.</p>
+
+<p>On the 18th of February, they fell in with the fruitful island
+of <i>Baratene</i>,[37] having in the mean time suffered much
+from cross winds and dangerous shoals. They met with a friendly
+reception from the people of this island, who were handsomely
+proportioned, and just in all their dealings. The men wore no
+cloathing, except a slight covering round their middles, but the
+women were covered from the waist to the feet, having likewise
+many large heavy bracelets of bone, horn, or brass, on their
+arms, the smallest weighing two ounces, and having eight or ten
+of these on at once. This island affords gold, silver, copper,
+sulphur, nutmegs, ginger, long-pepper, lemons, cocoas, frigo,
+sago, and other commodities, and linen was found to be in much
+request by the natives, as of it they make girdles and rolls for
+wearing on their heads. Among the productions of this island,
+there was a particular sort of fruit, resembling barberries in
+size, form, and husk, very hard, yet of a pleasant taste, and
+becoming soft and easy of digestion when boiled. In short, they
+met with no place in the whole voyage that yielded greater
+abundance of every comfort than this island, excepting
+Ternate.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 37: No circumstance in the text serves to
+indicate what island is here meant, except that it appears to
+have been to the eastward of Java.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Leaving Baratene, they sailed to Java Major, where also they
+were courteously and honourably entertained. This island was
+ruled over by six kings, who lived in entire peace and amity with
+each other, and they once had four of them on board at one time,
+and very often two or three together.[38]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 38: The names of the kings or princes of
+Java, when Sir Francis Drake was there, were Rajah Donaw, R.
+Rabacapala, R. Bacabatra, R. Tymbanton, R. Mawgbange, and R,
+Patemara.--<i>Hakluyt</i>.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The Javans are a stout and warlike people, well armed with
+swords, targets, and daggers, all of their own manufacture, and
+are very curious and ingenious, both in the fashion of their
+weapons, and in giving them an excellent temper. They wear
+turbans on their heads, the upper parts of their bodies being
+naked; but, from the waist downwards, they have a pintado, or a
+silken wrapper, trailing on the ground. They manage their women
+quite differently from the Moluccans; for, while these will
+hardly let them be seen by a stranger, the Javans will very
+civilly offer a female bedfellow to a traveller. Besides being
+thus civil and hospitable to strangers, they are good humoured
+and sociable among themselves; for in every village they have a
+public-house, where the inhabitants meet together, each bringing
+their shares of provisions, and joining the whole in one social
+feast for the keeping up of good fellowship.</p>
+
+<p>The Javans have a peculiar mode of boiling rice. It is put
+into an earthen pot of a conical form, open at the large end, and
+perforated all over with small holes, which is placed within a
+larger earthen pot full of boiling water. The rice swells and
+fills the holes of the inner pot, so that very little water gets
+in, and by this mode of boiling the rice is brought to a firm
+consistency, and cakes into a sort of bread, of which, with
+butter or oil, sugar, and spices, they make several very pleasant
+dishes. The lues venerea prevails among the inhabitants of this
+island; but, instead of expelling the poison by salivation, they
+drive it out by perspiration, sitting for this purpose in the sun
+for some hours, by which the pores are opened, giving free vent
+to the noxious particles of the disease.</p>
+
+<p>While in Java, the following words in the native language were
+taken notice of, and are recorded by Hukluyt.</p>
+
+<pre>
+   Sabuck,   silk.             Gula,      black sugar.
+   Sagu,     bread.            Tadon,     a woman.
+   Larnike,  drink.            Bebeck,    a duck.
+   Paree,    rice in the husk. Aniange,   a deer.
+   Braas,    boiled rice.      Popran,    ointment.
+   Calapa,   cocoa nuts.       Coar,      the head.
+   Cricke,   a dagger.         Endam,     rain.
+   Catcha,   a mirror.         Jonge,     a ship.
+   Arbo,     an ox.            Chay,      the sea.
+   Vados,    a goat.           Sapelo,    ten.
+   Gardunge, a plantain.       Dopolo,    twenty.
+   Hiam,     a hen.            Treda      no.
+   Seuit,    linen.            Lau,       understand you?
+   Doduck,   blue cloth.       Bayer,     go!
+   Totoppo,  a cap.            Adadizano, I will fetch it.
+   Cabo,     gold.             Suda,      enough.
+</pre>
+
+<p>Having news of some great ships being at no great distance,
+and not knowing whether they might prove friends or enemies, the
+admiral set sail from Java, sailing directly for the Cape of Good
+Hope, which was the first land he fell in with; neither did he
+touch at any, till he arrived at Sierra Leona on the coast of
+Guinea. He passed the cape on the 18th June, 1580, and by the
+facility of the navigation round that southern promontory of
+Africa, found how much the Portuguese had imposed upon the world
+by false representations of its horrors and dangers. He arrived
+at Sierra Leona on the 22d July, where were elephants, and
+abundance of oysters fastened on the twigs of trees, hanging down
+into the water, where they grow and multiply. With these, and
+lemons, with which they were abundantly supplied, his people were
+much refreshed.</p>
+
+<p>After two days stay at that place, taking in a supply of wood
+and water, and procuring refreshments, they sailed from thence on
+the 24th July. Next day, they were in lat. 25&deg; 30' N. under
+the tropic of Cancer, fifty leagues from land. Being completely
+supplied with all necessaries, they continued their voyage,
+without stopping any where, and arrived at Plymouth on Monday the
+26th of September, 1580, having been absent two years, nine
+months, and thirteen days. By their reckoning, the day of their
+arrival was only Sunday the 25th, as in going completely round
+the world in the same course with the sun, that luminary had
+risen once seldomer to them than to those who remained
+stationary, so that they had lost a day in their computation.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION V.</p>
+
+<p><i>Reception of Sir Francis Drake in England, and same Notices
+of his remaining Actions</i>.</p>
+
+<p>The fame of his return from this wonderful voyage round the
+world soon spread over England, and all strove to express their
+sense of the worthiness of Captain Drake, by praises and other
+testimonies of regard. Several collections were made of poems,
+epigrams, and songs, celebrating him and his ship in the highest
+strains. Yet, in the midst of almost universal applause, some
+endeavoured to censure his conduct, and to place this great
+exploit in a wrong light. These persons alleged, that his
+circumnavigation of the globe served only to amuse the minds of
+the vulgar, while the main purpose of the voyage had been
+plunder, of which they pretended he had acquired sufficient to
+exempt the nation from taxes for seven years. They also set
+forth, as war had not been proclaimed against Spain, that it was
+dangerous to own such an adventurer, lest the nation might be
+made to pay dearly for his prizes: For, as the merchants had
+great effects in Spain, their goods might possibly be seized to
+make good his depredations.</p>
+
+<p>The Spanish ambassador also assailed him with very warm
+memorials, styling him the Master Thief of the Unknown World. The
+friends and patrons of Drake, finding themselves wounded through
+his sides, took all manner of pains to vindicate his conduct,
+alleging that he had the queen's commission and authority to
+justify him in making reprisals; that by so much wealth as he had
+brought home the nation would be enriched; that the Spaniards had
+already done us much injury; and, if the king of Spain were
+disposed to seize the effects of our merchants, the public ought
+to receive this treasure as an equivalent; which, were it
+returned, would break the spirit of our brave tars, who otherwise
+were more likely to humble the pride of the Spaniards.</p>
+
+<p>In the mean time, matters remained long in suspense, during
+which Drake must have suffered considerable anxiety, lest, after
+all his toils abroad, he might be deemed a pirate at home. The
+queen long delayed to declare her sentiments, perhaps wishing to
+see what effects her conduct might have with the court of Spain,
+which was probably withheld from precipitating hostilities, by
+the hope of being able to recover this great treasure. To keep up
+this hope, she artfully consented to part with some small sums to
+Mendoza, the Spanish ambassador. At length, matters coming to a
+crisis, she threw off the veil, and giving notice to Captain
+Drake of her intentions, she visited him on the 4th April, 1581,
+on board his ship, then at Deptford, where she was magnificently
+entertained; and, after dinner, she was graciously pleased to
+confer the honour of knighthood on Captain Drake, telling him
+that his actions did him more honour than the title she had
+conferred. A prodigious crowd attended the queen on this
+occasion, so that the bridge laid from the ship to the shore
+broke down with their weight, and more than 200 persons fell into
+the Thames, yet no one was drowned, or even materially hurt.
+After this public approbation from the sovereign, all ranks of
+people redoubled their congratulations, and henceforward the
+reputation of Sir Francis Drake continually increased, so that he
+became a kind of oracle in maritime affairs, both to the nation
+and the court.--Here, strictly speaking, we ought to conclude our
+account of this illustrious navigator; yet it may not be amiss to
+give a short sketch of his succeeding actions.</p>
+
+<p>The war with Spain still continuing, he went out in 1585,
+general by sea and land, of an expedition to the West Indies,
+where he took the cities of St Jago, St Domingo, and Carthagena,
+and the fort and town of St Augustine; returning from this
+expedition with great glory and advantage, the profits amounting
+to &pound;60,000, after defraying all charges, of which
+&pound;20,000 were divided among the seamen, and &pound;40,000
+came clear to the undertakers or adventurers. In 1587, he had the
+command of another fleet, with which he sailed to the bay of
+Cadiz, and thence to the Tagus, where he destroyed 10,000 tons of
+shipping, which the king of Spain had collected for the purpose
+of invading England. He likewise brought home the St Philip, a
+very rich prize, said by the writers of these times to have been
+the first carack ever taken and brought home to England.</p>
+
+<p>In the glorious year 1588, by commission from the queen, Sir
+Francis Drake was appointed vice-admiral of the fleet of England,
+then fitted out for opposing the <i>invincible</i> Spanish
+Armada. In this arduous service, on which the independence and
+existence of England depended, he performed even more than his
+former actions gave reason to expect. In the very beginning of
+the fight, he captured two very large ships of war, one commanded
+by the Spanish vice-admiral Oquendas, and the other by Don Pedro
+de Valdez. This latter officer defended his ship with great
+gallantry for a long time; and at length, on surrendering, and
+delivering his sword to Sir Francis, he addressed him to the
+following effect: "That they had all resolved to have died
+fighting, if they had not fallen into his hands, whose valour and
+fortune were so great, that Mars and Neptune seemed to aid him in
+all his enterprises." To requite these Spanish compliments with
+solid English kindness, Sir Francis lodged Don Valdez in his own
+cabin, and entertained him at his table. Drake's crew were
+recompensed by the plunder of the Spanish ship, in which were
+found 55,000 ducats in gold, which they joyfully shared. Sir
+Francis performed many other signal services on this memorable
+occasion against the Armada, and particularly distinguished
+himself by advising the employment of fire-ships, which some have
+alleged he then invented.</p>
+
+<p>He was next year admiral of a great fleet, sent to Portugal
+for the purpose of restoring Don Antonio to the throne of that
+kingdom. This expedition, though it did not succeed in its grand
+object, occasioned considerable damage to Spain, on which it
+retorted the compliment of an invasion, and by which it was
+rendered unable to repeat another attempt of the same nature. On
+the whole, therefore, Sir Francis spoiled no less than three
+Spanish invasions. In 1595, he went upon another conjunct
+expedition against the Spanish West Indies, in which he performed
+signal services; but aiming at still greater, and being
+unsuccessful, he died in the harbour of Porto Bello, on the 28th
+of January, 1596, as is said, of a broken heart, occasioned by
+his disappointment. His body, being put into a leaden coffin, was
+committed to the deep, under a general discharge of all the
+artillery of the fleet. In his person, though of low stature, Sir
+Francis Drake was well made, with a fresh and fair complexion,
+having large lively eyes, light-brown hair, and an open cheerful
+countenance. He was naturally eloquent, gracefully expressing
+what he clearly conceived. He was thoroughly versant, not only in
+the practical part of his profession, but in all the sciences
+connected with it, being able to discharge all the offices
+necessary in a ship as occasion required, even that of the
+surgeon. In his conduct as a naval commander he was skilful and
+valiant, just to his owners, kind to his seamen, loyal to his
+sovereign, and merciful to his enemies after victory. His many
+glorious exploits justly entitle him to high fame; and he died,
+at fifty-five, in the ardent pursuit of glory, in the cause of
+his queen and country.</p>
+
+<hr align="center" width="50%">
+<p>The fame of this Voyage round the World, with the wealth
+brought home by Sir Francis Drake, and the desire of rivalling
+him in riches and reputation, inspired numbers of young men of
+all ranks with the inclination of trying their fortunes at sea.
+Men of rank and fortune fitted out ships at their own expence,
+manning them with their dependants. Others, in lower situations,
+hazarded their persons as subaltern officers in these ships, or
+in men-of-war belonging to the queen. This spirit grew to such a
+height, that honest John Stowe informs us that there were many
+youths, from eighteen to twenty years of age, towards the close
+of Queen Elizabeth's reign, who were capable of taking charge of
+any ship, and navigating to most parts of the world.</p>
+
+<p>So alarmed were the Spaniards by the courage and conduct of
+Sir Francis, and his maritime skill, that they ordered that no
+draughts or discourses should be published of their discoveries
+in America, lest they might fall into his hands. What most
+surprised them was, that he should find his way so easily through
+the Straits of Magellan, which they had hitherto been unable to
+perform. They therefore resolved immediately to have these
+straits completely explored and discovered, by means of ships
+fitted out in Peru. For this purpose, Don Pedro Sarmiento, who
+was thought the best seaman in the Spanish service, was sent from
+Lima, and actually passed from the South Sea into the Atlantic,
+and thence to Spain. He there proposed to plant a colony in the
+straits, and to fortify them in such a manner as might prevent
+all other nations from passing through them. This project was so
+well relished by Philip II that a fleet of twenty-three ships was
+fitted out, with 3,500 men, under the command of Don Diego Floris
+de Valdez; and Sarmiento, with 500 veterans, was appointed to
+form a settlement in the straits.</p>
+
+<p>This fleet was extremely unfortunate, insomuch that it was
+between two and three years before Sarmiento arrived with his
+people in the straits of Magellan. On the north side, and near
+the eastern entrance, he built a town and fort, which he named
+Nombre de Jesus, and in which he left a garrison of 150 men.
+Fifteen leagues farther on, at the narrowest part of the straits,
+and in lat. 53&deg; 18' S.[39] he established his principal
+settlement, which he named <i>Ciudad del Rey Felippe</i>, or the
+City of King Philip. This was a regularly fortified square
+fortress, having four bastions; and is said to have been in all
+respects one of the best-contrived settlements ever made by the
+Spaniards in America. At this place Sarmiento left a garrison of
+400 men and thirty women, with provisions for eight months, and
+then returned into the Atlantic. These transactions took place in
+the years 1584, 5, and 6. Sarmiento, after several fruitless
+attempts to succour and relieve his colony, was taken by an
+English vessel, and sent prisoner to London.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 39: The Narrows of the Hope are eighteen
+leagues of Castile, or about forty-eight English miles from Cape
+Virgin, the northern cape at the eastern mouth of the straits, in
+lat. 52&deg; 5' S. long. 69&deg; W. from
+Greenwich.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The Spanish garrison, having consumed all their provisions,
+died mostly of hunger, perhaps aided by the scurvy, in their new
+city. Twenty-three men quitted it, endeavouring to find their way
+by land to the Spanish settlements, but are supposed to have all
+perished by the way, as they were never more heard of. Sarmiento
+fell into discredit with the king of Spain, for deceiving him as
+to the breadth of the straits, which he asserted did not exceed a
+mile over; whereas the king was certainly informed that they were
+a league broad, and therefore incapable of being shut up by any
+fortifications. However this may be, even supposing the report of
+Sarmiento true, and that his fortress could have commanded the
+straits, even this could have proved of little or no service to
+Spain, as another passage into the South Sea was discovered soon
+afterwards, without the necessity of going near these
+straits.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION VI.</p>
+
+<p><i>First Supplement to the Voyage of Sir Francis Drake; being
+on Account of Part of the foregoing Navigation, by Nuno da
+Silva</i>.[40]</p>
+
+<p>Nuna da Silva, born in Oporto, a citizen and inhabitant of
+Guaia, saith, that on the 19th January, 1578, while at anchor
+with his ship in the harbour of St Jago, one of the Cape de Verd
+islands, he was made prisoner by the admiral of six English
+ships, and detained because discovered to be a pilot for the
+coast of Brazil. Setting sail, therefore, with the said admiral
+from Brava, they held their course for the land of Brazil, which
+they descried on the first April, being in the latitude of
+30&deg; S. whence they held on their course for the Rio Plata,
+where they provided themselves with fresh water.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 40: Hakluyt, IV. 246.--This narrative was
+written by Nuno da Silva, the Portuguese pilot who accompanied
+Sir Francis Drake from the Cape Verd islands to Guatalco on the
+western coast of New Spain, and was sent from the city of Mexico
+to the viceroy of Portuguese India, in 1579.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>From thence they proceeded to the latitude of 39&deg; S. where
+they anchored. They here left two of their ships behind them, and
+continued on with four only, that which had formerly belonged to
+Nuno being one of these. They next came into a bay, in lat.
+49&deg; S. called <i>Bahia de las Ilhas</i>, or the Bay of
+Islands, where Magellan is said to have wintered with his ships,
+when he went to discover the straits which now bear his name.
+They entered this bay on the 20th June, and anchored within
+musket-shot of the shore. They here found Indians cloathed in
+skins, their legs downwards from the knees, and their arms below
+the elbows, being naked. These Indians were a subtle, great, and
+well-formed race, strong, and tall in stature, being armed with
+bows and arrows. Six of the English going here on shore to fetch
+water, four of the Indians came into their boat before they
+landed, to whom the Englishmen gave bread and wine; after eating
+and drinking of which heartily they went on shore, and when at
+some distance, one of them cried to them, and said,
+<i>Magallanes! este he minha terra</i>; that is, Magellan, this
+is my country. Being followed by the sailors, they slew two of
+them with their arrows; one of whom was an Englishman, and the
+other a Hollander; on which the others made their escape to the
+boat, and put off from the shore.</p>
+
+<p>Leaving this place on the 17th of August, they came to the
+mouth of the straits on the 21st or 22d, but did not enter them
+till the 24th, owing to the wind being contrary. The entry into
+the straits is about a league in breadth, both sides being naked
+flat land. Some Indians were seen on the north side, making great
+fires; but none appeared on the south side of the straits. This
+strait is about 110 leagues long, and a league in breadth; and
+for about half-way through, is straight and without turnings;
+from thence, to about eight or ten leagues from the farther end,
+it has some capes and turnings, at one of which there is a great
+cape or head-land, which seems as if it went down to join the
+southern land; and here the passage is less than a league across,
+after which it again runs straight. Although there are thus some
+crooks and turnings, none of them are of any importance, or any
+dangerous obstacle. The western issue of these straits, about
+eight or ten leagues before coming out, begins to grow broader,
+and is then all high-land on both sides to the end; as likewise
+all the way, after getting eight leagues in from the eastern
+entrance, the shores along these first eight leagues being low.
+In the entry to the straits, we found the stream to run from the
+South Sea to the North Sea, or Atlantic.</p>
+
+<p>After beginning to sail into the straits, with the wind at
+E.N.E. they passed along without let or hindrance either of wind
+or weather, and because the land on both sides was high, and
+covered with snow, the whole navigation being fair and clear of
+shoals or rocks, they held their course the whole way within
+musket-shot of the north-side, having always nine or ten fathoms
+water on good ground; so that everywhere there was anchorage if
+need were. The hills on both sides were covered with trees, which
+in some places reached to the edge of the sea, where there were
+plains and flat lands. They saw not any large rivers, but some
+small brooks or streams that issued from rifts or clefts of the
+land. In the country beside the great cape and bending of the
+strait, some Indians were seen on the south side, fishing in
+their skiffs or canoes, being similar to those formerly seen on
+the north side at the entrance into the straits; and these were
+the only natives seen on the south side during the whole
+passage.</p>
+
+<p>Being out of the straits on the eastern side on the 6th of
+September, they held their course N.W. for three days, and on the
+third day they had a storm at N.E. which drove them W.S.W. for
+ten or twelve days with few sails up; after which, the storm
+increasing, they took in all their sails, and drove under bare
+poles till the 30th September. Having lost sight of one of their
+ships, of about 100 tons, and the wind growing more moderate,
+they hoisted sail, holding their course N.E. for seven days, at
+the end of which they came in sight of certain islands, for which
+they steered, meaning to have anchored among them, but the
+weather would not permit; and the wind coming N.W. they made sail
+to the W.S.W. Next day they lost sight of another ship, in very
+foul weather; so that the admiral was now left alone, as my ship
+had been left in the bay where they remained some time before
+entering the straits. With this new storm of adverse wind, they
+had to proceed southwards, till they came into the latitude of
+57&deg; S. where they entered a bay in an island, and anchored in
+twenty fathoms, about a cannon-shot from the shore. After
+remaining here three or four days, the wind changed to the south,
+and they again made sail to the northwards for two days, when a
+small uninhabited island was descried, where they procured many
+birds and seals.</p>
+
+<p>Next day they again proceeded, holding their course N. and
+N.N.E. and came to the island of Mocha, in 38&deg; 30 S. five or
+six leagues from the main, where they anchored in twelve fathoms,
+a quarter of a league from the shore. This island is small and
+low land, all full of Indians. Here the admiral and twelve
+Englishmen landed, on purpose to seek fresh water and provisions,
+and bought two sheep in exchange of other things from the
+Indians, together with a little maize, and some roots of which
+the Indians make bread; and being now late, went on board ship
+for the night. Next day the admiral again landed with twelve men
+armed with muskets, and sent two men with vessels to fetch water.
+Some Indians lay in ambush at the watering-place, who suddenly
+fell upon the two Englishmen, and made them prisoners; which
+being perceived by the admiral and those with him, they advanced
+to rescue their companions, but were so sore assailed by stones
+and arrows, that all or most of them were hurt, the admiral
+receiving two wounds from arrows, one in his face and the other
+on his head; so that they were compelled to retreat to their
+boat, without hurting any of the Indians, who were so bold as
+even to carry away four of their oars.</p>
+
+<p>They sailed from hence along the coast to the northwards, with
+a southern wind, for six days, passing the harbour of St Jago,
+and put into another haven, where they took an Indian, who was
+fishing in a canoe, giving him some linen, knives, and other
+trifles. Not long after there came another Indian to the ship,
+whose name was Felippe, and who spoke Spanish. He gave notice to
+the English admiral of a certain ship being in the harbour of St
+Jago, which they had overpassed six leagues. So, taking this
+Indian as their guide, they went back to St Jago, where they took
+the said ship, in which were 1770 <i>botijas</i>, or Spanish
+pots, full of wine, besides other commodities. They then landed,
+and took a quantity of sacks of meal, and whatever else they
+could find, taking also the ornaments and relics from the church.
+They departed then from thence, taking with them the captured
+ship, with two of her men, running along the coast till they came
+to the latitude of between 30&deg; and 31&deg; S. where they had
+appointed to meet, in case of separation. They here anchored
+right over against a river, whence they filled six butts of fresh
+water, having twelve armed men on land to defend those who filled
+the casks. While busied in this work, they saw a company of armed
+men coming towards them, half Spaniards and half Indians, being
+about 250 horse and as many foot, on which they made all haste to
+get into their boat, escaping with the loss of one man.</p>
+
+<p>They set sail again that same night, going about ten leagues
+farther along the coast, where they took in some more fresh
+water, but were soon obliged to quit this place also, by the
+appearance of some horsemen. Proceeding thirty leagues farther
+along the coast, still to the northwards, they went into a bay or
+haven, in a desert or uninhabited place, but seeing some persons
+daily on the shore, they did not venture to land. At this place,
+the English put together the pieces of a small pinnace, which
+they had brought ready framed with them from England. Having
+launched this pinnace, the English captain went into her with
+fifteen men, accompanied by John the Greek, who was chief
+boatswain, being master of the ship formerly taken in the harbour
+of St Jago. At this time they went to look for the two vessels
+they had parted from formerly in a storm, and also in hopes of
+being able to procure fresh water; but seeing always persons on
+shore, they durst not land, and returned again to the ship
+without hearing of their other ships. They now took all the
+ordnance out of their ship, and new dressed and rigged her; after
+which, arming the pinnace with a small piece of ordnance, they
+resumed their course to the northwards.</p>
+
+<p>Having sailed thirteen days, they came to an island about the
+shot of a culverin from the main, where four fishermen told them
+of fresh water on the main; but understanding it was but scanty,
+and somewhat distant from the shore, they continued their course.
+Next day they espied some fishers houses on shore, when the
+English captain landed and took three of the fishers, taking away
+half of the fish that lay packed on the shore. The day following
+they took a bark laden with fish belonging to the Spaniards, in
+which were four Indians, and bound it by a rope to the stem of
+their ships; but the Indians in the night cut her loose, and went
+away. Next day the English captain went ashore to certain houses,
+where he found 3000 pezos of silver, each being equal to a rial
+of eight, or Spanish dollar; getting also seven Indian sheep,
+some hens, and other articles, all of which he brought on board,
+and resumed his voyage. Two days after, going to the harbour of
+Arica, they found two ships, one of which was laden with goods
+and Spanish wares, out of which they only took 200 botijas, or
+pots of wine, and from the other thirty-seven bars of silver,
+each weighing ten or twelve pounds. They meant also to have
+landed at this place; but seeing some horsemen coming towards
+them, they desisted.</p>
+
+<p>Next morning they burnt the ship which was laden with Spanish
+wares, and took the other along with them, continuing their
+course, the captain sailing along shore in the pinnace, while the
+ship kept about a league farther out to sea, going in search of a
+ship of which they had intelligence. After sailing in this manner
+about forty-five leagues, they found the ship of which they were
+in search, at anchor in a haven; but having intelligence a few
+hours before, of an English pirate or sea-rover, she had landed
+800 bars of silver belonging to the king of Spain; but the
+English durst not go on shore to search for it, as many Spaniards
+and Indians stood there as a well-armed guard. They found
+nothing, therefore, in this ship except three pipes of water.
+Taking this ship out to sea about a league, they hoisted all her
+sails and let her drive, doing the like with the ship they took
+at Arica, and that also they had taken at St Jago, continuing
+their course with their own ship and pinnace.</p>
+
+<p>When about seven leagues from Calao de Lima, they spied three
+ships, one of which they boarded, and took three men out of her,
+and then continued their course for Calao, which haven they
+entered about two or three hours after night-fall, sailing in
+among the middle of seventeen ships which lay there at anchor.
+Being among these ships, they enquired for the ship which had the
+silver on board; but learning that all the silver had been
+carried on shore, they cut the cables of all the ships and the
+masts of the two largest, and so left them. At this time, there
+arrived a ship from Panama, laden with Spanish wares and
+merchandise, which anchored close by the English ship, while the
+English captain was searching among the other ships for the
+silver. When the ship of Panama was anchored, a boat came off
+from the shore to examine her, but coming in the dark to the
+English ship, was told by one of the Spanish prisoners she was
+the ship of Michael Angelo from Chili; on which one of the
+Spaniards from the boat came up the side, but coming upon one of
+her cannon, he was afraid and they made off, as the ships in
+these seas carry no guns. The Panama ship hearing of this, cut
+her cables and put to sea; which being perceived by the English,
+who were close by, they followed in their pinnace. On getting up
+with her, the English called out for them to surrender, but the
+Spaniards killed one of their men by a musket-shot, on which the
+pinnace returned. The English ship then set sail and overtook the
+Spanish ship, when the crew took to their boat and escaped on
+shore, leaving their ship to the English, who took her, and
+continued her course to the northwards.</p>
+
+<p>Next day the English saw a boat under sail making towards
+them, which they suspected to be a spy, and soon afterwards
+perceived two great ships coming to meet them, which they
+supposed had been sent on purpose to fight them. On this they
+cast loose the Panama ship, in which they left John the Greek and
+two men they had taken the night before in Calao harbour; and
+then made all sail, not once setting eye again upon the two great
+ships, which made direct for the Panama ship. The English
+continued their course to the northwards along the coast; and
+some days afterwards met a frigate or small vessel bound for
+Lima, laden with wares and merchandise of the country, whence the
+English took a lamp and fountain of silver. They enquired of the
+people in this ship if they had met a ship, which they understood
+was laden with silver; on which one pilot said he had not seen
+any such, while another said he had met her about three days
+before. This frigate was taken by the pinnace, in which the
+English captain sailed close by the shore, the English ship
+keeping about a league and a half from land. On receiving this
+information, the English let the frigate go, and continued their
+course to the northwards.</p>
+
+<p>Two days afterwards, they came to the harbour of Payta, where
+they found a ship laden with Spanish wares, which was boarded and
+taken by the pinnace, without resistance, most of the crew
+escaping on shore. From this ship, the English took the pilot,
+with all the bread and other provisions. About two days after,
+they boarded a ship belonging to Panama, from which they only
+took a negro. Next day, being the 1st February, they met another
+ship of Panama, laden with fish and other victuals, having also
+forty bars of silver and some gold, but I know not how much,
+which they took, sending the passengers in a boat to the land,
+among whom were two friars. Next day, the English captain hanged
+a man of the Panama ship, for secreting two plates of gold, which
+were found about him, after which that ship was turned
+adrift.</p>
+
+<p>Towards noon of the 1st March, they descried the ship laden
+with silver, being then about four leagues to seawards of them:
+and, as the English ship sailed somewhat heavily, being too much
+by the head, they hung a quantity of botijas, or Spanish earthen
+pots which had contained oil, and now filled with water, over the
+stern of their ship, to give her a better trim and to improve her
+sailing. The treasure ship, thinking the English vessel had been
+one of those which usually sail upon that coast, made towards
+her, and when near, the English captain hailed her to surrender:
+As the Spanish captain refused, the English fired some cannons,
+by one of which the Spanish ship's mast was shot over board, and
+her master being wounded by an arrow, she presently yielded.
+Thereupon the English took possession of her, and sailed with her
+directly out to sea all that night, and the next day and night.
+Being entirely out of sight of land, they began to search their
+prize on the third day, removing her cargo into their own ship,
+being 1300 bars or wedges of silver, and fourteen chests of rials
+of eight, besides some gold, but how much of that I know not,
+only that the passengers said there was great store. They told me
+also, that 300 of the silver bars belonged to the king, and all
+the rest to the merchants. That done, they allowed the ship to go
+away with all her men, putting into her the three pilots they had
+hitherto carried with them.</p>
+
+<p>From thence they sailed onwards for Nicaragua, and descried
+land about the 13th March, being an island named Canno, not very
+high, about two leagues from the main land, where they found a
+small bay, in which they anchored in five fathoms close to the
+shore, remaining there till the 20th. On that day a bark passed
+close to the land, which was captured by the English pinnace,
+being laden with sarsaparilla, and botijas or pots of butter and
+honey, with other things. Throwing all the sarsaparilla
+overboard, the English removed all their cannon into this bark,
+and then laid their own ship on shore to new caulk and trim her
+bottom. This being done, and taking in a supply of wood and
+water, they held their course along shore to the westwards,
+taking the Spanish bark along with them. After two days, they
+removed the men from her, giving them the pinnace. Among these
+were four sailors, bound for Panama, meaning to go thence for
+China, one of whom had many letters and patents, among which were
+letters from the king of Spain to the governor of the
+Philippines, as also the charts which are used in that
+voyage.</p>
+
+<p>Continuing their course, the English descried, on the 6th of
+April, a ship about two leagues out to sea, which they took early
+next morning, in which was Don Francisco Xarate. Continuing their
+course, they came to the haven of Guatalco on Monday the 13th
+April, where they remained at anchor till the 26th of that month,
+on which day they sailed to the westwards, putting me, Nuno da
+Silva, on board a ship then in the said harbour of Guatalco.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION VII.</p>
+
+<p><i>Second Supplement, being the Voyage of Mr John Winter,
+after parting from Sir Francis Drake</i>.[41]</p>
+
+<p>We passed Cape Deseado into the South Sea on the 6th
+September, 1578, and run to the N.W. about 70 leagues, when the
+wind turned directly against us, with extremely foul weather, as
+rain, hail, snow, and thick fogs, and so continued for more than
+three weeks, during which time we could bear no sail, and were
+driven into the latitude of 57&deg; S. On the 15th September, the
+moon was eclipsed, beginning to be darkened immediately after
+sun-set, about six in the evening, being then the vernal equinox
+in this southern hemisphere. This eclipse happened in England on
+the 16th before one in the morning, which is about six hours
+difference, agreeing to one quarter of the circumference of the
+globe, from the meridian of England to the west.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 41: Hakluyt, IV. 253.--This narrative is
+said to have been written by Edward Cliffe, mariner. Only so much
+of the narrative is given here as relates to the voyage of
+Winter, after parting from Sir Francis Drake. One circumstance
+only may be mentioned, respecting the Patagons.--"These men be of
+no such stature as the Spaniards report, being but of the height
+of Englishmen; for I have seen men in England taller than I could
+see any of them. Peradventure the Spaniards did not think that
+any Englishmen would have come hither so soon, to have disproved
+them in this and divers others of their notorious lies; wherefore
+they presumed more boldly to abuse the world."--Yet even recent
+voyagers have presumed to <i>abuse the world</i>, with reporting
+that the Patagons are of gigantic stature.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The last of September, being a very foul night, we lost the
+Marigold, a bark of about thirty tons, the Pelican, which was our
+general's ship, and our ship the Elizabeth running to the
+eastwards, to get to the land. Of this we got sight on the 7th
+October, falling into a very dangerous bay, full of rocks; and
+that same night we lost company of Mr Drake. Next day, very
+difficultly escaping from the dangerous rocks among which we were
+embayed, we got again into the Straits of Magellan, where we
+anchored in an open bay for two days, making great fires on the
+shore, that Mr Drake might find us, if he also came into the
+straits.</p>
+
+<p>We then went into a sound, where we remained about three
+weeks, naming it <i>The Port of Health</i>, as most of our men,
+having been sick with long watching, wet, cold, and bad diet, did
+wonderfully recover their health here in a short space, for which
+praised be God. We found here muscles of very great size, some
+being twenty inches long, yielding very pleasant meat, and many
+of them full of seed pearls. We came out of this harbour on the
+1st November, abandoning our voyage by compulsion of Mr. Winter,
+sore against the will of the mariners. Mr. Winter alleged that he
+despaired of having winds to carry him to the coast of Peru, and
+was also in fear that Mr. Drake had perished. So we went back
+again to the eastwards through the straits, to St. George's
+island, where we laid in a quantity of a certain kind of fowl,
+very plentiful in that island, the meat of which is not much
+unlike that of a fat English goose. They have no wings, but only
+short pinions, which serve them in swimming, being of a black
+colour, mixed with white spots on their bellies and round their
+necks. They walk so upright, that they seem afar like little
+children; and when approached they conceal themselves in holes
+under ground, not very deep, of which the island is full. To take
+them, we used sticks having hooks fastened at one end, with which
+we pulled them out, while other men stood by with cudgels to
+knock them on the head; for they bit so cruelly with their hooked
+bills, that we could not handle them when alive.[42]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 42: It is almost unnecessary to remark that
+these were penguins.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Departing from St. George's island, we passed Cape Virgin[43]
+on the 11th November, going out of the straits into the southern
+Atlantic ocean, and directed our course to the N.E. till the last
+day of that month, when we arrived at an island in the mouth of
+the <i>Rio de la Plata</i>, or River of Silver. On this island
+there is an incredible number of seals, some of which are sixteen
+feet long, not fearing the approach of men. Most of our men were
+ashore in this island for fifteen days, setting up a pinnace;
+during which time the seals would often come and sleep beside our
+men, rather resisting them than giving place, unless when mortal
+blows forced them to yield. Having finished our pinnace, we went
+to another island, where we watered, and afterwards departed on
+the 1st January, 1579. We went to the northwards till the 20th of
+that month, when we came to an island on the coast of Brazil,
+near a town called St Vincent, inhabited by the Portuguese, which
+is in lat. 24&deg; S. Here we lost our pinnace in foul weather,
+together with her crew of eight men. And here also our ship was
+in great danger, in consequence of a strong current, which almost
+forced her on shore before we were aware, so that we had to drop
+anchor in the open sea, broke our cable and lost our anchor, and
+had to let fell another, in weighing which afterwards our men
+were sore distressed; for, owing to the heaving of the ship with
+the sea, the capstan ran round with so much violence as to throw
+the men from the bars, dashed out the brains of one man, broke
+the leg of another, and severely hurt several more. At length we
+hove up our anchor, and ran to a place called Tanay. where we
+rode under the lee of an island, whence we had a supply of wood
+and water.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 43: Called Cape Victory by Mr
+Cliffe.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>While at this place, three Portuguese came aboard in a canoe,
+desiring to know who we were and what we wanted. Our captain made
+answer, that we were Englishmen, and had brought commodities with
+us for their country, if they would trade with us, at which they
+seemed much surprised, as they said they had never before heard
+of any English ship being in that country. So they went ashore,
+taking one of our men with them to speak with the governor of the
+town, while we detained one of the Portuguese as a pledge. Soon
+after there came another canoe on board, in which was one
+Portuguese, all the rest being naked natives of the country. From
+this man we had two small oxen, a young hog, and several fowls,
+with pome-citrons, lemons, oranges, and other fruits, for which
+our captain gave them linen cloth, combs, knives, and other
+articles of small value. In the mean time, the governor of the
+town sent word that we should have nothing, unless the ship was
+brought into the harbour, to which our captain would not consent,
+lest they might betray us.</p>
+
+<p>Receiving back our man, and returning the Portuguese pledge,
+we went afterwards to the island of St. Sebastian, where we took
+fish. At this place the Portuguese would have betrayed us, had
+not a Brasilian slave informed us by signs, that they were coming
+in canoes to take us, as it actually fell out: For, next morning,
+they came on in twelve or fourteen canoes, some of these having
+forty men; but being on our guard they retired. That same night,
+two of our men carried away our boat, deserting to the
+Portuguese. Leaving this place, we had sight of Cape St Augustine
+in lat. 8&deg; S. We afterwards had sight of the isle of Fernando
+Noronha, within three degrees of the equator. We crossed the line
+on the 13th of April, and got sight of the north star on the 19th
+of that month.</p>
+
+<p>From the 1st to the 5th of May, we sailed about 100 leagues
+through the <i>Sea of Weeds</i>, under the tropic of Cancer.
+Holding our course from thence to the N.E. till we were in lat.
+47&deg; N. we changed our course on the 22nd May to E.N.E. The
+29th of May we had soundings in seventy fathoms on white ooze,
+being then in lat. 51&deg; N. The 30th of May we got sight of St
+Ives on the north coast of Cornwall, and arrived on the 2nd of
+June at Ilfracomb, in Devonshire.</p>
+
+<h2><a name="chapter4-3" id="chapter4-3">CHAPTER III.</a></h2>
+
+<p>VOYAGE OF SIR THOMAS CANDISH ROUND THE WORLD, IN
+1586--1588.[44]</p>
+
+<p>INTRODUCTION.</p>
+
+<p>It was the constant policy, during the reign of queen
+Elizabeth, to encourage, as much as possible, the flame of public
+spirit in private individuals, by shewing the utmost readiness on
+all occasions to honour all who performed any remarkable service
+to their country, though sparing of such marks of favour on other
+occasions. By this wise conduct, and by her frequent public
+discourses on the glory resulting from an active life, she
+excited many of the young nobility, and gentlemen of easy
+fortunes, to hazard their persons and estates in the public
+service, exciting a desire of fame even among the wealthy, and by
+this means uniting the rich, who desired to purchase honour, and
+the indigent, who sought to procure the means of living, in the
+same pursuits. It thus happened in her reign, that such men were
+of most use to their country, as are scarcely of any utility in
+other reigns; for, merit being then the only recommendation at
+court, those were most forward to expose themselves in generous
+undertakings, who would at any other time have thought themselves
+excused from such dangers and fatigues.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 44: Hakluyt, IV. 816. Harris, Col. I. 23.
+Callender, Voy. I. 424. The earliest account of this voyage,
+according to the Bibliotheque Universelle des Voyages, I. 113,
+appears to have been published in Dutch at Amsterdam, in folio,
+in 1598. But must assuredly have been a translation from the
+English.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Thus the earls of Cumberland and Essex, Sir Richard Greenvile,
+Sir Walter Raleigh, Sir Humphrey Gilbert, Sir Robert Dudley, and,
+many other persons of rank and fortune, employed great sums of
+money, and exposed themselves to the greatest dangers, in
+expeditions against the Spaniards, making discoveries in distant
+parts of the world, and planting colonies, which were the glory
+of those times. Among these, no one distinguished himself more
+than the gentleman whose voyage forms the subject of this
+chapter: whether we consider the expence he incurred, the
+difficulties he encountered, or the success of his enterprise;
+all of which proceeded from that greatness of mind and ardent
+desire of fame, which taught him to despise danger and to
+encounter fatigue, at an age when most men of fortune think the
+season of youth a sufficient excuse for the indulgence of luxury
+and ease.</p>
+
+<p>Thomas Candish, or Cavendish, of Trimley, in the county of
+Suffolk, Esquire, was a gentleman of an honourable family and
+large estate, which lay in the neighbourhood of Ipswich, then a
+place of very considerable trade. This circumstance gave him an
+early inclination for the sea, which he gratified as soon as he
+came of age, by selling part of his estate, and employing the
+money in equipping a stout bark of 120 tons, called the Tiger, in
+which he accompanied Sir Richard Greenvile in his voyage to
+Virginia in 1585. In this expedition he underwent many dangers
+and difficulties, without any profit, but returned safe to
+Falmouth on the 6th October of the same year. This want of
+success did not discourage him from undertaking still greater and
+more hazardous expeditions. Having, in his voyage to Virginia,
+seen a considerable part of the Spanish West Indies, and
+conversed with some persons who had sailed with Sir Francis Drake
+in, his circumnavigation, he became desirous of undertaking a
+similar voyage, as well for repairing the loss he had sustained
+in this first expedition, as to emulate that great and fortunate
+commander, who was now raised to the highest honours in his
+profession.</p>
+
+<p>Returning home, therefore, he immediately applied himself to
+make such preparations as were necessary for the accomplishment
+of his new design; and either sold or mortgaged his estate, to
+procure a sufficient sum for building and equipping two such
+ships as he deemed requisite for the voyage; using such
+diligence, that his carpenters were at work upon his largest ship
+within a month, and in six months more his little squadron was
+entirely finished, and completely supplied with every necessary
+for the voyage.</p>
+
+<p>The narrative of this voyage is chiefly taken from that given
+by Harris, compared and corrected from that in the collection of
+Hakluyt, which is said to have been written by Mr. Francis Pretty
+of Eye, in Suffolk, a gentleman who sailed, in the expedition. In
+Hakluyt, this circumnavigation is thus styled:--"The admirable
+and prosperous voyage of the worshipful Mr. Thomas Candish of
+Trimley, in the county of Suffolk, Esquire, into the South Sea,
+and from thence round about the circumference of the whole earth,
+began in the year of our Lord 1586, and finished 1588."</p>
+
+<p>SECTION I.</p>
+
+<p><i>Narrative of the Voyage from England to the
+Pacific</i>.</p>
+
+<p>The larger ship of this little squadron was named the Desire,
+of 140 tons burden, and the lesser the Content of 60 tons, to
+which was added a bark of 40 tons, called the Hugh Gallant, all
+supplied at his own expence with two years provisions, and manned
+with 123 officers and men, most of them men of experience, and
+some of whom had served under Sir Francis Drake. For their better
+encouragement, he entered into a fair agreement with them, with
+respect to the proportions in which all prizes should be shared
+among them. He was likewise careful in providing maps, sea
+charts, and draughts, and all such accounts as could be procured
+of voyages already made into those parts which he intended to
+visit. Likewise, by means of his patron, Lord Hansdon, the
+lord-chamberlain, he procured a commission from Queen
+Elizabeth.</p>
+
+<p>Having thus completed his preparations, he set out from London
+on the 10th July, 1586, for Harwich, where he embarked in the
+Desire, and sailed thence for Plymouth, where he arrived on the
+18th, and waited there for some of his company till the 21st of
+that month, when he hoisted sail on his intended voyage. On the
+25th of that month, one Mr. Hope died, of a wound received in a
+duel, during their stay at Plymouth. Next day, they fell in with
+five ships of Biscay, well manned, coming, as they supposed, from
+the great bank of Newfoundland, which attacked the Desire; but
+Mr. Candish gave them so warm a reception, that they were glad to
+sheer off, and continued their course without giving him any
+farther disturbance. As it grew dark, and he feared losing sight
+of his consorts, Mr. Candish did not continue the chase.</p>
+
+<p>They fell in with the island of Fuertaventura, on the 1st
+August, whence they sailed for Rio del Oro and Cape Blanco, and
+thence along the coast of Guinea, with which navigation Mr
+Brewer, who sailed in the Desire, was well acquainted. The men
+now began to complain much of the scurvy, wherefore it was
+resolved to put them on shore for their recovery on the first
+opportunity. They made Sierra Leona on the 23d of August, and
+reached its southern side on the 25th, where they had five
+fathoms at the lowest ebb; having had for about fourteen leagues,
+while running into this harbour, from eight to sixteen fathoms.
+At this place they destroyed a negro town, because the
+inhabitants had killed one of their men with a poisoned arrow.
+Some of the men went four miles up the harbour in a boat, on the
+3d September, where they caught plenty of fish; and going on
+shore, procured some lemons. They saw also some buffaloes, on
+their return to the ship. The 6th they went out of the harbour of
+Sierra Leona, and staid one tide three leagues from the point at
+its mouth, the tide there flowing S.W.</p>
+
+<p>The 7th they departed for one of the islands which lie about
+ten leagues from the point of Sierra Leona, called the Banana
+isles,[45] and anchored that same day off the principal isle, on
+which they only found a few plantains. At the east end of this
+island they found a town, but no inhabitants, and concluded that
+the negroes sometimes resort thither, by seeing the remains of
+their provisions. There is no fresh water on the south side of
+this island that they could find; but there is in three or four
+places on its north side. The whole island was one entire wood,
+except a few small cleared spots where some huts stood, and these
+were encompassed by plantain-trees, the fruit of which is an
+excellent food. This place is subject to severe thunder-storms,
+with much rain, in September.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 45: Harris erroneously names these the
+islands of Cape Verd, which are at a vast distance from Sierra
+Leona. The Banana isles are in lat. 8&deg; N. and long. 12&deg;
+30' W. from Greenwich. In Hakluyt these are called the isles of
+Madrabumba, and are said to be ten leagues from the point of
+Sierra Leona.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Leaving these islands and the African coast on the 10th
+September, and holding their course W.S.W. obliquely across the
+Atlantic, they fell in with a great mountain in Brazil, on the
+31st of October, twenty-four leagues from Cape <i>Frio</i>. This
+mountain has a high round top, shewing from afar like a little
+town. On the 1st November, they stood in between the island of St
+Sebastian and the main; where they carried their things on shore,
+and erected a forge, and built a pinnace, repairing also every
+thing that was out of order, in which work they were detained
+till the 23d of November. Sailing from this place on the 26th,
+they fell in with the coast of South America again in lat.
+47&deg; 20' S. whence they proceeded along shore till they came
+to lat. 48&deg; S. finding a steep beach all along. On the 27th
+of November they came to a harbour, into which Candish first
+entered, giving it the name of Port Desire, from that of his
+ship.[46] Near this harbour they found an island or two well
+stocked with seals, and another in which there were vast numbers
+of grey gulls.[47]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 46: As laid down in modern maps, the
+latitude of Port Desire is only 47&deg; 15' S.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 47: Probably penguins.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>This haven of Port Desire was found very favourable for
+careening and graving of ships, as the tide there ebbed and
+flowed considerably. At this place the savages wounded two of the
+Englishmen with their arrows, which were made of canes or reeds,
+tipt with sharpened flints. These savage natives of the country
+round Port Desire were exceedingly wild and rude, and as it would
+seem of a gigantic race, as the measure of one of their foot
+marks was eighteen inches long.[48] This agrees well with the
+assertion of Magellan, though some pains have been taken to
+represent that as fabulous. Magellan called this country
+Patagonia, and its inhabitants Patagons, meaning to signify that
+they were five cubits, or <i>seven feet and a half high</i>.
+Hence, as the Portuguese are not commonly very tall, we need not
+wonder if they styled them giants. If we take the usual
+proportion of the human foot, as between a fifth and a sixth part
+of the height of the whole body, the account given by Magellan
+agrees very exactly with this fact afforded us by Mr Candish; and
+it will be seen in the sequel, that this is not falsified by any
+of our subsequent navigators. When any of these savages die, he
+is buried in a grave constructed of stones near the sea-side, all
+his darts being fastened about his tomb, and his treasure,
+consisting of shells, laid under his head.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 48: Without meaning to impugn the received
+opinion, that the Patagons are beyond the ordinary size of man,
+it may be permitted to say, that the evidence, in the text, the
+only one here adduced, is altogether inconclusive; and the
+subsequent reflections are evidently those of Harris, not of
+Candish.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>They left Port Desire on the 28th December, and anchored near
+an island three leagues to the southward. The 30th they came to a
+rock, much like the Eddystone at Plymouth, about five leagues off
+the land, in lat 48&deg; 30' S. and within a mile of it had
+soundings in eight fathoms, on rocky ground. Continuing their
+course along shore S.S.W. they found vast numbers of seals every
+where on the coast. January 2d, 1587, they fell in with a great
+white cape in lat. 52&deg; S. and had seven fathoms within a
+league of the cape. Next day they came to another cape, in lat.
+52&deg; 45' S. whence runs a long beach about a league to the
+southwards, reaching to the opening into the Straits of
+Magellan.[49] January 6th, they entered the straits, which they
+found in some places five or six leagues wide, but in others
+considerably narrower. The 7th, between the mouth of the straits
+and its narrowest part, they took a Spaniard, who had been left
+there with twenty-three others of that nation, being all that
+remained alive of four hundred, who had been landed three years
+before in these straits. This Spaniard shewed them the hull of a
+small bark, supposed to have been left by Sir Francis Drake.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 49: The cape at the north side of the
+eastern entrance into the Straits of Magellan, is named Cape
+Virgin, and is in lat 52&deg; 28' S. The great white cape in lat.
+52&deg; S. is not so easily ascertained. Cape Blanco, on this
+coast, is in lat. 47&deg; S. which cannot have any reference to
+the white cape of the text.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The eastern mouth of the straits is in lat. 52&deg; S. From
+thence to the narrowest part is fourteen leagues W. by N. From
+thence to Penguin Island is ten leagues W.S.W. by S. They
+anchored at Penguin Island on the 8th January, where they killed
+and salted a great store of seals, to serve as sea provisions in
+case of need. Leaving this place on the 9th, they sailed S.S.W.
+The fortress built in these straits by the Spaniards, called
+<i>Ciudad del Rey Felippe</i>, had four bulwarks or bastions, in
+each of which was one large cannon, all of which had been buried,
+and their carriages left standing. The English dug them all up,
+and carried them away. Tins city seemed to have been well
+contrived, especially in its situation in regard to wood and
+water; but miserable was the life this forlorn remnant of
+Spaniards had endured for the last two years, during which they
+had hardly been able to procure any other food than a scanty
+supply of shell-fish, except when they had the good fortune to
+surprise a deer, coming down from the mountains in search of
+water.</p>
+
+<p>The object of the Spaniards, in erecting this fortress, was to
+have fortified the straits, so as to have excluded all other
+nations from any passage into the South Sea: but, besides the
+barrenness of the soil, and excessive severity of the climate
+their most implacable enemies, the Indians, frequently assailed
+them, so that they were reduced to the last extremity of
+distress. All the stores they had brought from Spain were
+expended, and none could be procured in the country, which
+produced nothing but deer, and when hunting these for the
+preservation of their lives, they were sure to be fallen upon by
+the Indians. At length almost all the Spaniards died in their
+houses, and the stench of the putrefying carcasses became so
+intolerable to the few survivors, that they were forced to quit
+the fortress, and to range along the seacoast living upon roots,
+leaves, and sea weeds, or any animals they could occasionally
+fall in with. In this miserable extremity they had determined to
+attempt exploring their way to the Rio Plata, and were already on
+their way, when this Spaniard was taken by the English.</p>
+
+<p>Mr Candish named the haven where the fortress stood <i>Port
+Famine</i>, owing to the utter want of all necessaries. It is in
+lat. 53&deg; S. Leaving this place on the 14th, they ran five
+leagues S.W. to Cape Froward, in the southernmost part of the
+straits, in lat. 54&deg; S. Sailing five leagues W. by N. from
+this cape, they put into a bay, called Muscle Cove, from the
+great quantities of muscles found there. Leaving that place on
+the 21st, and sailing N. by W. ten leagues, they came to a fair
+bay, which Candish named Elizabeth Bay. Leaving that place on the
+22d, they found a good river two leagues farther on, up which a
+boat was towed for three miles. The country about this river was
+pleasant and level, but all the other land on both sides of the
+straits was rugged, mountainous, and rocky, inhabited by a strong
+and well-made, but very brutish kind of savages, who are said to
+have eaten many of the Spaniards, and seemed much disposed to
+have feasted also on English flesh; but they failed in their
+attempts to circumvent them. Discovering a plot laid by these
+savages to entrap him and his men, Candish gave them a volley of
+musquetry, which slew several of them, and the rest ran away.</p>
+
+<p>Leaving this river, they sailed two leagues farther, to an
+inlet named St Jerome's channel; whence, proceeding three or four
+leagues W. they came to a cape to the northward, whence the
+course to the western entrance of the straits is N.W. and N.W. by
+W. for about thirty-four leagues; so that the entire length of
+these straits is ninety leagues. This western entrance is in lat.
+52&deg; 40' S. nearly under the same parallel with the eastern
+mouth. In consequence of storms and excessive rains, they were
+forced to remain in a harbour near this western mouth of the
+straits till the 23d of February. By the excessive rains, pouring
+down with extreme fury in torrents from the mountains, they were
+brought into extreme danger; and were also much distressed for
+want of food, as the excessive severity of the weather hardly
+permitted their landing, to range the country in search of a
+supply In their passage through these straits, it was observed
+that there were harbours on both shores, at every mile or two,
+tolerably safe and convenient for small ships.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION II.</p>
+
+<p><i>Transactions on the Western Coast of America</i>.</p>
+
+<p>The weather moderating, they entered into the great South Sea,
+or Pacific Ocean, on the 24th February, 1587, observing on the
+south side of the entrance a very high cape, with an adjoining
+low point; while, at the northern side of the entrance there were
+four or five islands, six leagues from the main land, having much
+broken and sunken ground among and around them. In the night of
+the 1st March, there arose a great storm, in which they lost
+sight of the Hugh Gallant, being then in lat. 49&deg; S. and
+forty-five leagues from the land. This storm lasted three or four
+days, in which time the Hugh sprung a leak, and was tossed about
+in this unknown sea, devoid of all help, being every moment ready
+to sink. By great exertions, however, she was kept afloat; and on
+the 15th, in the morning, she got in between the island of St
+Mary and the main, where she again met the admiral and the
+Content, which two ships had secured themselves during two days
+of the storm, at the island of Mocha, in lat. 38&deg; S'.[50]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 50: Mocha is in lat. 38&deg; 20', and the
+isles of St Mary in 37&deg;, both S.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>At this place some of the company went ashore well armed, and
+were met by the Indians, who gave them a warm reception with
+their bows and arrows. These Indians were of the district in
+Chili called Araucania, a country rich in gold, and consequently
+very tempting to the avaricious Spaniards, which accordingly they
+had repeatedly invaded, but to no purpose, as the natives always
+defended themselves so valiantly, that their enemies could never
+subdue them. On the present occasion, mistaking the English for
+Spaniards, these brave and desperate Araucans gave Candish a
+hostile welcome. After this skirmish, Candish went with his ships
+under the lee of the west side of St Mary's island, where he
+found good anchorage in six fathoms. This island, in lat. 37&deg;
+S. abounds in hogs, poultry, and various kinds of fruit; but the
+inhabitants are held under such absolute slavery by the
+Spaniards, that they dare not kill a hog, or even a hen, for
+their own use; and although the Spaniards have made them converts
+to Christianity, they use them more like dogs than men or
+Christians.</p>
+
+<p>The admiral went ashore on the 16th March, with seventy or
+eighty men well armed, and was met by two Indian chiefs, who
+conducted him to a chapel, round which were several store-houses,
+well filled with wheat and barley, as clean and fair as any in
+England. He accordingly provided his ships with a sufficient
+store of grain from this place, and laid in besides an ample
+supply of hogs, hens, potatoes, dried dog-fish, and maize or
+Guinea wheat. The admiral invited the two principal Indians to an
+entertainment on board; and the wine having sharpened their wit,
+to perceive that the admiral and his men were not Spaniards, as
+they had hitherto supposed them, they began to talk very freely
+about the gold mines, saying that the English might procure gold
+to their full content, by going into the country of the Araucans.
+But not fully understanding them, as the information was mostly
+given by signs, the admiral did not prosecute this proposed
+adventure, but proceeded on his voyage.</p>
+
+<p>Leaving the island of St Mary on the 18th in the morning, they
+sailed all that day N.N.E. ten leagues. The 19th they steered in
+with the land, E.N.E. and anchored under an island in the Bay of
+Conception, in lat. 36&deg; 36' S. The 30th they came into the
+Bay of Quintero, in lat. 32&deg; 45' S. and next day a party of
+fifty or sixty men, well armed, marched seven or eight miles into
+the country. In their march, they saw vast herds of wild cattle,
+with horses, dogs, hares, rabbits, partridges, and other birds,
+with many fine rivers, well stocked with wild fowl. Having
+travelled as far as they conveniently could for the mountains,
+and having rested and refreshed on the banks of a pleasant river,
+they returned in good order to the ships at night, without
+meeting any remarkable adventure; although a party of 200 horse
+had been abroad all that day in search of them, upon information
+of some Spaniards who had seen them the preceding day, but durst
+not venture to attack them, keeping always at a distance on the
+hills. They had at this time a short conference with three
+Spanish horsemen, through the medium of the poor half-starved
+Spaniard they took on board in the Straits of Magellan; but, in
+spite of his many oaths and protestations never to forsake
+Candish, he took the opportunity to mount on horseback behind one
+of his countrymen, and got off.</p>
+
+<p>Next day, the 1st April, some of the English being on shore
+filling their water-casks, the Spaniards became bolder, and
+watching an opportunity when the sailors were hard at work,
+poured down with their 200 horse from the hills, slew some of
+them, and made a few prisoners. But this glorious victory was
+soon snatched from their hands by the arrival of a reinforcement
+of fifteen English, who rescued the prisoners, killed twenty-four
+of the Spaniards, and drove the rest back to the mountains. After
+this, they continued in the road till the 5th, and watered there
+in spite of the Spaniards. On the 5th they weighed anchor, and
+went to a small island about a league from the bay, which is full
+of penguins and other sea fowl, of which they provided themselves
+with what store they wanted; after which they sailed N. and N. by
+W. in order to prosecute their voyage.</p>
+
+<p>The 15th April they came to <i>Moro Moreno</i>, in lat.
+23&deg; 30' S. under the tropic of Capricorn, where there is an
+excellent harbour, made by means of an island, having an entrance
+for ships at either end. The admiral went ashore here with thirty
+men, and was met by the Indians, who brought them water and wood
+on their backs. These are a simple sort of people, living in a
+wild and savage manner, in great dread of the Spaniards. They
+brought the admiral and his company to their houses, about two
+miles from the harbour. These were only constructed of a few
+rafters laid across upon forked sticks stuck in the ground,
+having a few boughs laid over them by way of a roof. Their beds
+were the skins of wild beasts laid on the ground; and their food
+little else than raw stinking fish. When any of them dies, he is
+buried with all his arms and goods, as bows and arrows, and even
+his canoe is laid in the earth along with him. Their canoes, if
+such they may be called, consist of two skin bags, like large
+bladders, blown up with quills at one end, and fastened together
+by the sinews of some wild beast; yet in these they think nothing
+of venturing to sea, loading them even with great quantities of
+fish, part of which they have to give in tribute to the
+Spaniards, the rest being kept to stink for their own eating.</p>
+
+<p>On the 3d May, they came into a bay on which were three small
+towns, Paracca, Chincha, and Pisco, which latter is in lat.
+13&deg; 20' S.[51] They landed here, and took some provisions, as
+wine, bread, poultry and figs, from the houses, but could not get
+ashore at the best of these towns, owing to the sea running too
+high. By this time; they had made two valuable prizes, laden with
+sugar, melasses, maiz, cordovan leather, <i>montego de porco</i>,
+packs of painted calicoes, Indian coats, marmalade, hens, and
+other articles, which would have yielded &pound;20,000, if there
+had been any opportunity for selling their cargoes. That not
+being the case, they took out as much as could be conveniently
+stowed in their own ships, burning their two prizes with the rest
+of their contents.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 51: Pisco, the principal of these towns, is
+in lat. 16&deg; 43'S.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 26th May, they came into the road Payta, in lat. 5&deg; 4'
+S. the town being very neat and clean, and containing about 200
+houses. Landing here with sixty or seventy men, Candish had a
+skirmish with the inhabitants, whom he beat out of the town,
+forcing them to take refuge in the hills, whence they continued
+to fire at the English, but would not venture a fair battle on
+the plain ground. Having possessed themselves of the town, the
+English marched after the enemy on the hill, and put them
+completely to the rout, seizing all their baggage, which they
+brought back with them to the town. They here found all sort of
+household stuff, together with warehouses well filled with
+various kinds of goods, and twenty-five pound weight of silver in
+pieces of eight. After taking away what plunder they found
+convenient, they set fire to the town, which was burnt to the
+ground, and destroyed likewise a bark at anchor in the roads;
+after which they set sail for Puna.</p>
+
+<p>They arrived at Puna, in lat. 3&deg; 10' S. on the 25th of
+May, when they found a ship of 250 tons at anchor in the harbour.
+After sinking her, they went ashore. The lord of this island,
+styled the Ca&ccedil;ique of Puna, was an Indian by birth, but
+having married a Spanish woman, he became a Christian, and made
+all his subjects follow his example. He had a sumptuous and
+well-contrived palace near the shore, with curious gardens
+adjoining, and fair prospects, both to the water and up the
+country. All the inhabitants of this island were kept continually
+employed in fabricating cables, such abundance of which are made
+here by the Indian subjects of this ca&ccedil;ique; that most of
+the ships navigating the South Sea are supplied from hence. This
+island is nearly as large as the isle of Wight in England, being
+about forty English miles from S.W. to N.E. and sixteen in the
+opposite direction. It enjoys a great share in the blessings of
+nature; for, although it has no mines of gold or silver, it
+affords every thing in abundance that is necessary to the
+comforts of life. The pastures are excellent, and are well stored
+with horses, oxen, sheep, and goats, yielding abundance of milk;
+it has also plenty of poultry, turkeys, ducks of a large size,
+and pigeons. The ca&ccedil;ique has several orchards, yielding a
+great variety of fine fruits, as oranges, lemons, figs,
+pomegranates, pumpkins, melons, and many others; with a variety
+of odoriferous plants, as rosemary, thyme, and the like. One of
+these gardens or orchards was planted with the bombast cotton
+tree, which grows in pods, in each of which there are seven or
+eight seeds.</p>
+
+<p>The 29th of May, Candish went to an island near Puna, into
+which the ca&ccedil;ique had conveyed all the valuable furniture
+of his palace, with other things of value. These stores were all
+discovered, and plundered of every thing thought worth carrying
+on board the ships, and the rest destroyed. The church also of
+Puna, which stood near the palace, was burnt down, and its five
+bells carried to the ships. On the 2d June, the English were
+attacked by 100 Spaniards, who killed or took prisoners twelve of
+their men, losing forty-six of their own in the encounter.
+Candish landed again that same day with seventy English, and had
+another battle with the Spaniards, who were joined by 200 Indians
+armed with bows and arrows. The English were victorious, after
+which they made great havock of the fields and orchards, burnt
+four ships on the stocks, and left the town of 300 houses a heap
+of rubbish. Besides this principal town, there were two others on
+the island of 200 houses each, so that Puna was the best settled
+island on all this coast.</p>
+
+<p>Setting sail from Puna on the 5th June, they sailed to Rio
+Dolce, where they watered. They passed the equinoctial on the
+12th, continuing their course northwards all the rest of that
+month. The 1st July, they had sight of New Spain, being four
+leagues from the land in 10&deg; N. The 9th they took a new ship
+of 120 tons, in which was one Michael Sancius, a native of
+Provence, a very skilful coasting pilot for these seas, whom
+Candish retained as his pilot, and from whom he got the first
+hint of the great ship Anna Maria, which he afterwards took on
+her voyage from the Philippine islands. Taking all the men, and
+every thing of any value from the ship of Sancius, they set her
+on fire. The 26th they came to anchor in the mouth of the river
+Capalico, and the same night went in the pinnace with thirty men
+to Guatalco, two leagues from that river, in 15&deg; 70' N. and
+burnt both the town and custom-house, which was a large handsome
+building, in which there were laid up 600 bags of indigo, and 400
+bags of cacao, every bag of the former being worth forty crowns,
+and each of the latter worth ten. These cacaos serve among the
+people of these parts both as food and money, being somewhat like
+almonds, yet not quite so pleasant, and pass in trade by way of
+small change, 150 of them being equal in value to a rial of
+plate.</p>
+
+<p>They set sail from Capalico on the 28th, the sea running so
+high that they could not fill their water casks, and came to
+Guatalco that same night. Next day Candish went ashore with
+thirty men, marching two miles into the woods, where he took a
+<i>mestizo</i> belonging to the custom-house of that town, having
+with him a considerable quantity of goods, both which and their
+master were carried to the ships. The 24th August, Candish went
+with thirty men in the pinnace to the haven of <i>Puerto de
+Navidad</i> in lat. 19&deg; 24' N. where Sancius had informed him
+there would be a prize; but, before their arrival, she had gone
+twelve leagues farther to fish for pearls. They here made
+prisoner of a mulatto, who had been sent to give notice of the
+English, all along the coast of New Gallicia, and got possession
+of all his letters. They likewise burnt the town, and two ships
+of 200 tons here building, after which they returned to the
+ships.</p>
+
+<p>They came on the 26th into the bay of St Jago, where they
+watered at a good river, which yielded them plenty of fish, and
+where they found some pearls. This bay is in lat. 19&deg; 18' N.
+Leaving this bay on the 2d September, they came next day into the
+bay of Malacca, a league westward from port Navidad, and a good
+place for ships to ride in. That day, Candish went ashore with
+about thirty men, to an Indian town named Acatlan, about two
+leagues from the road.[52] This town or village consisted of
+twenty or thirty houses and a church, which they demolished, and
+then returned at night to the ships. Leaving this bay on the 4th,
+they came on the 8th to the road of Chacalla, eighteen leagues
+from Cape Corientes. On the 9th, Candish sent a party of forty
+men, guided by Sancius, which, after marching through woods and
+deserts, lighted upon a few families, some of which were Indians,
+and others Spanish and Portuguese, all of whom were brought to
+the ships. The women were ordered to fetch plantains, lemons,
+oranges, and other fruits, in reward for which all their husbands
+were set free, except a Spaniard named Sembrano, and Diego, a
+Portuguese.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 52: Guatlan is the name of a bay on this
+coast, and which is probably corrupted in the text to
+Acatlan.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the 12th they arrived at the island of St Andrew, which is
+very full of wood, and where they found plenty of fowls and
+seals, together with a sort of serpents, or lizards rather,
+called <i>Iguanos</i>, having four feet and a long sharp tail,
+which they found good eating. Leaving this isle, they came to the
+road of Mazatlan on the 24th, lying under the tropic of Cancer.
+The river here is large within, but much obstructed by a bar at
+its mouth. The bay abounds with fish, and there are abundance of
+good fruits up the country. Departing from this bay on the 27th,
+they came to an island, a league north from Mazatlan,[53] where
+they heeled their ships, and rebuilt their pinnace. On this isle,
+they found fresh water, by digging two or three feet into the
+sand, otherwise they must have gone back twenty or thirty leagues
+for water, being advised by one Flores, a Spanish prisoner, to
+dig in the sands, where no water or sign of any could be
+perceived. Having amply supplied the ships with water, they
+remained at this island till the 9th October, and then sailed
+from Cape San Lucar, the S.W. point of California, in lat.
+22&deg; 50' N. which they fell in with on the 14th, observing
+that it much resembled the Needles at the Isle of Wight, which
+had been before noticed by Sir Francis Drake. Within this cape,
+there is a large bay, called by the Spaniards <i>Aguada
+Segura</i>,[54] into which falls a fine fresh-water river, the
+banks of which are usually inhabited by many Indians in the
+summer. They went into this bay, where they again watered, and
+remained waiting for the Accapulco ship till the 4th November,
+the wind continuing all that time to hang westerly.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 53: In our best modern maps no such island
+is to be found; but about the same distance to the S. is a
+cluster of small isles.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 54: Probably that now called the bay of St
+Barnaby, about twenty miles E.N.E. from Cape San
+Lucar.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 4th November, putting to sea, the Desire and Content beat
+to and fro to windward off the head land of California; and that
+very morning one of the men in the admiral, going aloft to the
+topmast, espied a ship bearing in from seaward for the cape.
+Putting every thing in readiness for action, Candish gave chase,
+and coming up with her in the afternoon, gave her a broadside and
+a volley of small arms. This ship was the Santa Anna of 700 tons
+burden, belonging to the king of Spain, and commanded by the
+admiral of the South Sea. Candish instantly boarded, finding the
+Spaniards in a good posture of defence, and was repulsed with the
+loss of two men slain and four or five wounded. He then renewed
+the action with his cannon and musquetry, raking the St Ann, and
+killing or wounding great numbers, as she was full of men. The
+Spaniards long defended themselves manfully; but the ship being
+sore wounded, so that the water poured in a-main, they at last
+hung out a flag of truce, praying for quarter, and offering to
+surrender. This was immediately agreed to by Candish, who ordered
+them to lower their sails, and to send their chief officers to
+his ship. They accordingly hoisted out their boat, in which came
+the captain, the pilot, and one of the chief merchants, who
+surrendered themselves, and gave an account of the value of their
+ship, in which were 122,000 pezos in gold, with prodigious
+quantities of rich silks, satins, damasks, and divers kinds of
+merchandise, such as musk, and all manner of provisions, almost
+as acceptable to the English as riches, having been long at
+sea.</p>
+
+<p>The prize thus gloriously obtained, Candish returned to
+<i>Aguada</i>, or <i>Puerto Seguro</i>, on the 6th November,
+where he landed all the Spaniards, to the number of 150 persons,
+men and women, giving them plenty of wine and victuals, with the
+sails of their ship and some planks, to build huts or tents for
+them to dwell in. The owners of the prize being thus disposed of,
+the next thing was to share the booty; which ungracious work of
+distribution soon involved Candish in all the troubles of a
+mutiny, every one being eager for gold, yet no one satisfied with
+his share. This disturbance was most violent in the Content; but
+all was soon appeased and compromised by the candid and generous
+behaviour of Candish. The 17th of November, being the coronation
+day of queen Elizabeth, was celebrated by discharges of ordnance,
+and vollies of small shot, and at night by fireworks. Of the
+prisoners taken in the Spanish ship, Candish reserved two
+Japanese boys, three natives of the island of Luzon or Manilla, a
+Portuguese who had been in China and Japan, and a Spanish pilot,
+who was thoroughly versant in the navigation between New Spain
+and the Philippine islands. Accapulco is the haven whence they
+fit out for the Philippines, and the Ladrones are their stated
+places of refreshment on this voyage.</p>
+
+<p>Having dismissed the Spanish captain with a noble present, and
+sufficient provision for his defence against the Indians, and
+removed everything from the prize which his ships could contain,
+Candish set the Santa Anna on fire on the 19th November, having
+still 500 tons of her goods remaining, and saw her burnt to the
+water's edge.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION III.</p>
+
+<p><i>Voyage Home to England</i>.</p>
+
+<p>This great business, for which they had so long waited, being
+now accomplished, they set sail cheerfully on their return for
+England. The Content staid some short time behind the Desire,
+which went on before, expecting she would soon follow, but she
+never rejoined company. Pursuing the voyage, therefore, in the
+Desire, Candish directed his course for the Ladrones across the
+Pacific Ocean, these islands being nearly 1800 leagues distant
+from this harbour of <i>Aguada Segura</i> in California. This
+passage took forty-five days, from the 19th November, 1587, to
+the 3d January, 1588. On this day, early in the morning, they had
+sight of Guam, one of the Ladrones, in lat. 13&deg; 40' N. and
+long. 143&deg; 30' E. Sailing with a gentle gale before the wind,
+they came within two leagues of the island, where they saw sixty
+or seventy canoes full of savages, who brought cocoas, plantains,
+potatoes, and fresh fish, to exchange for some of their
+commodities. They gave them in return some pieces of old iron,
+which they hung upon small cords and fishing lines, and so
+lowered down to the canoes, getting back, in the same manner,
+what the savages offered in exchange. In the course of this
+traffic the savages crowded so much about the ship, that two of
+their canoes were broken; yet none of the savages were drowned,
+as they were almost as familiar with the water as if they had
+been fishes. The savages continued following the ship, and would
+not quit her company till several shots were fired at them;
+though 'tis ten to one if any of them were killed, as they are so
+very nimble, throwing themselves immediately into the water, and
+diving beyond the reach of danger on the slightest warning.</p>
+
+<p>These islanders were large handsome men, extraordinarily fat,
+and of a tawny colour, mostly having very long hair, some wearing
+it tied up in large knots on the crown of their heads, like
+certain wooden images at the heads of their canoes. Their canoes
+were very artificially made, considering that they use no
+edge-tools in their construction; and are about seven or eight
+yards in length, by half a yard only in breadth, their heads and
+stems being both alike, and having rafts made of canes or reeds
+on their starboard sides, being also supplied both with masts and
+sails. These latter are made of sedges, and are either square or
+triangular. These canoes have this property, that they will sail
+almost as well against the wind as before it.</p>
+
+<p>On the 19th January, at day-break, Candish fell in with a
+head-land of the Philippine islands, called <i>Cabo del Espiritu
+Santo</i>. The island itself [Samar] is of considerable size,
+consisting of high land in the middle, and depressed in its east
+and west extremities; the latter of which runs a great way out to
+sea. It is in lat. 30&deg; N. being distant 110 leagues from Guam
+and about 60 leagues from Manilla, the chief of the
+Philippines.[55] Samar is a woody island, and its inhabitants are
+mostly heathens. Candish spent eleven days in sailing from Guam
+to this place, having had some foul weather, and scarcely
+carrying any sail for two or three nights. Manilla, at this time,
+was an unwalled town of no great strength, yet containing vast
+riches in gold and valuable commodities, and inhabited by six or
+seven hundred Spaniards. It has a constant annual correspondence
+with Accapulco in New Spain; besides which twenty or thirty
+vessels come thither yearly from China, for conducting its trade
+with the <i>Sangueloes</i>: These are Chinese merchants, very
+sharp and sensible men in every thing relating to trade,
+extremely ingenious in all kinds of mechanical contrivances, and
+the most expert embroiderers on silk and satin of any in the
+world. They will execute any form of beast, fowl, or fish, in
+gold, silver, or silk, having all the just proportions and
+colours in every part, and giving all the life and beauty to
+their work, as if done by the best painter, or even as nature has
+bestowed on the originals. The trade of these men with Manilla
+must be very profitable, as they bring great quantities of gold
+there, and exchange it against silver, weight for weight.[56]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 55: The latitude of Cape Espiritu Santo, as
+given in the test, is grossly erroneous, being only 12&deg; 35'
+N. and its long. 125&deg; 30' E. from Greenwich. The difference
+of longitude from Guam, Guaham, or Guaci, the most southerly of
+the Ladrones, is 17&deg; 45' nearly east, and consequently 355
+marine leagues. This island is divided from Luzon, or
+Lu&ccedil;onia, the principal island of the Philippines, by the
+narrow straits of San Bernardino; and Cape Espiritu Santo is
+about 100 leagues, in a straight line, from the city of Manilla,
+which lies to the N.W. Cape Espiritu Santo is at the N.W.
+extremity of the island of Samar.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 56: This surely is an egregious error, as
+such acute merchants as the Chinese are here represented, and
+actually are, could never be so foolish as to give gold for
+silver, weight for weight. Before the present scarcity of
+bullion, the ordinary European price of exchange, was fourteen
+for one; and perhaps the then price in China might be lower, as
+twelve, eleven, or ten; but equality is quite
+inconceivable.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The same day on which he fell in with Cape Espiritu Santo,
+14th of January, 1588, Candish entered in the evening into the
+straits of San Bernardino, between Samar or Cambaia, and the
+island of Luzon. The 15th he fell in with the island of
+<i>Capul</i>, passing a very narrow strait between that island
+and another, in which the current of the tide was considerable.
+In this passage, a ledge of rocks lay off the point of Capul, but
+was passed without danger. Within the point was a fair bay, with
+a good harbour, having anchorage in four fathoms, within a
+cable's length of the shore. Coming to anchor here about ten in
+the morning, the Desire was immediately boarded by a canoe, in
+which was one of the seven chiefs of the island. Passing
+themselves for Spaniards, the English traded with these people
+for cocoa-nuts and potatoes, giving a yard of linen for four
+cocoa-nuts, and as much for about a quart of potatoes, which they
+found sweet and excellent food, either boiled or roasted.</p>
+
+<p>The ca&ccedil;ique or chief who came on board had his skin
+curiously streaked or painted [tatooed], full of strange devices
+all over his body. Candish kept him on board, desiring him to
+send his servants, who paddled his canoe, to bring the other six
+chiefs to the ship. They came accordingly, attended by a great
+train of the natives, bringing vast quantities of hogs and hens,
+and a full market of cocoa-nuts and potatoes; so that the English
+were occupied the whole day in purchasing, giving eight rials of
+plate for a hog, and one for a hen. At this place, a
+justly-merited punishment was inflicted on a Spanish pilot, taken
+in the Santa Anna, who had plotted to betray them to the
+Spaniards, and for which he was hanged. Candish remained here for
+nine days, all the time receiving ample supplies of fresh
+victuals, good water, and wood for fuel. The islanders are all
+pagans, who are said to worship the devil, and to converse with
+him. They are of a tawny complexion, and go almost naked; the men
+wearing a small square piece of cloth in front, woven from
+plantain-leaves, and another behind, which is brought up between
+their legs, both being fastened to a girdle round their waists.
+They are all circumcised, and have also a strange custom, hardly
+practised any where else but in Pegu, having a nail of tin in a
+perforation through the glans, which nail is split at one end and
+rivetted; but which can be taken out as they have occasion, and
+put in again. This is said to have been contrived, on the humble
+petition of the women, to prevent perpetrating an unnatural
+crime, to which they were much addicted.</p>
+
+<p>On the 23d of January, Candish summoned all the
+ca&ccedil;iques of this island, and an hundred more, who had paid
+him tribute, and then revealed to them all, when assembled, that
+he and his men were Englishmen, and the greatest enemies the
+Spaniards had in the world. At the same time he generously
+restored them, in money, the value of all the tribute they had
+paid to him, in hogs, cocoa-nuts, potatoes, and the like. This
+unexpected generosity astonished the whole assembly, who
+applauded his bounty, and offered to join him with all the forces
+of their respective districts, if he would go to war with the
+Spaniards. They seemed much pleased with finding that Candish and
+his people were English, and thankful for the kindness with which
+they had been treated. On taking leave, they rowed round the ship
+awhile in their canoes, as if in compliment to the English; and
+Candish caused a gun to be fired at their departure.</p>
+
+<p>Setting sail on the 24th, Candish ran along the coast of
+Luzon, steering N.W. between that island and <i>Masbate</i>. In
+the islands thereabout, the Spaniards were observed to keep a
+strict watch, making great fires, and discharging their pieces
+all night, having been much alarmed by the arrival of the
+English. The island of <i>Panama</i> is in many places plain and
+level, affording many large, tall, and straight trees, fit for
+masts, and has several mines of very fine gold, which are
+possessed by the natives. To the south of this is the island of
+the Negroes, which is very large, almost as big as England, and
+is in lat. 9&deg; N.[57] It appeared to consist mostly of low
+land, and to be very fertile.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 57: Negro island reaches from lat. 9&deg;
+15' to 11&deg; 45' N. and is consequently two and a half degrees
+from N. to S. about 174 English miles, but does not any where
+exceed thirty miles from E. to W.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>At six in the morning of the 29th of January, they began to
+pass through the straits between Panama and Negro islands, and,
+after proceeding sixteen leagues, they found a fair opening in
+these straits, trending S.W. by S. About this time, being
+rejoined by their boat, which had been sent before them in the
+morning, Candish sent a Spanish prisoner on shore, with a message
+to his captain, who commanded a ship which lay at Panama the
+night before, desiring him to provide an abundant supply of gold
+against the return of the Desire, as he meant to pay him a visit
+at Manilla, and as that was a long voyage, it merited good
+entertainment. He said farther, that he would have come now, to
+weigh some of his Spanish gold in English scales, if he had
+possessed a larger boat for landing his men on the island.</p>
+
+<p>Proceeding on the voyage, they saw Batochina on the 8th of
+February, an island near Gilolo, in the lat. of 1&deg; N. The
+14th of that month they fell in with eleven or twelve small flat
+low islands, almost level with the sea, in lat. 3&deg; 10' S.
+near the Moluccas. March 1st, having passed the straits between
+Java Major and Java Minor, they anchored under the S.W. part of
+Java Major, where they saw some people fishing in a bay under the
+island. The admiral sent a boat to them, in which was a negro who
+could speak the <i>Moresco</i>[58] language, which is much used
+in Java. But, being frightened at the approach of the boat, they
+all got on shore and ran away into the woods. One of them,
+however, came back to the shore, on being called to by the negro,
+and directed where to find fresh water; besides which, he
+undertook to carry a message to the king of that part of the
+island from the admiral, certifying that he had come to purchase
+victuals, or any commodities the country afforded. In consequence
+of this message, nine or ten canoes belonging to the king came
+off, on the 12th March, loaded with all sorts of provisions as
+deep as they could swim; bringing oxen, hogs, hens, geese, eggs,
+sugar, cocoa-nuts, plantains, oranges, lemons, wine, and
+arrack.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 58: Probably the Malay is here meant, and
+called Moresco or Moors, an ordinary term for
+Mahometans.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>At the same time two Portuguese came off to visit Candish, and
+to enquire about their king, Don Antonio, then residing in
+England. These persons gave him a full account of the manners and
+customs of the people of this island. The king of this part was
+held in prodigious awe by his subjects, over whom he exercised
+absolute power, insomuch that no man was permitted to make a
+bargain without his leave, on pain of death. He had an hundred
+wives, and his son fifty; who may possibly be happy enough while
+he lives; but when he dies, and his body is burnt, and the ashes
+collected into an urn, the tragedy of his wives begins five days
+afterwards. They are then all conducted to an appointed place,
+where the favourite wife throws a ball from her hand, and where
+it stops marks the place of their deaths. Being come there, and
+turning their faces to the east, they all draw their daggers and
+stab themselves to the heart; after which they smear themselves
+with their own blood, and thus die.</p>
+
+<p>The men of this island are excellent soldiers, being hardy,
+valiant, and desperate to the last degree, sticking at nothing
+commanded by their king, however dangerous; and, should he even
+command them to plunge a dagger into their own breast, or to leap
+from a precipice, or into a den of wild beasts, they instantly
+obey: For the displeasure of their sovereign is as certain death
+as the point of a sword, or the fangs of a beast of prey. Their
+complexion is tawny, like the other natives of India, and they go
+entirely naked; but their women are of a fairer hue, and are more
+modestly cloathed than the men.</p>
+
+<p>After this relation of the Portuguese, having satisfied the
+Javans for the provisions they had supplied, and received a
+promise of good entertainment to the English when they might
+return to their island, Candish took leave of them, making a
+present to their king of three large cannon. Next day, being the
+16th of March, he made sail for the Cape of Good Hope, spending
+all the rest of that month, all April, and a part of May, in
+traversing the vast ocean between the island of Java and the
+southern extremity of Africa, making many observations on the
+appearances of the stars, the weather, winds, tides, currents,
+soundings, and bearings and positions of lands.</p>
+
+<p>On the 11th of May, land was espied bearing N. and N. by W.
+and towards noon more land was seen bearing W. which was believed
+to be the Cape of Good Hope, being then about forty or fifty
+leagues from that southern promontory of Africa.[59] The wind
+being scanty, they stood off to the southwards till midnight;
+and, the wind being then fair, stood their course directly west.
+On the 12th and 13th they were becalmed, with a thick and hazy
+atmosphere. The weather cleared upon the 14th, when they again
+saw land, which proved to be Cape <i>Falso</i>, forty or fifty
+leagues short, or to the eastwards of the Cape of Good Hope.[60]
+This Cape Falso is easily known, having three hills directly over
+it, the highest in the middle, and only a little distance from
+each other; the ground being much lower by the sea-side. Besides
+which, the Cape of Good Hope bears W. by S. from this cape. They
+discovered the Cape of Good Hope on the 16th of May, observing
+the head-land to be considerably high, having two hummocks at the
+westerly point, a little off the main, and three others a little
+farther into the sea, yet low-land still between these and the
+sea. By the Portuguese the Cape of Good Hope is said to be 2000
+leagues from Java; but by their reckoning they made it only 1850
+leagues, which took them just nine weeks in the run.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 59: Either this is a gross error, or it
+means that their reckoning still made that distance from the
+Cape, as nothing nearly approaching to such a distance can
+possibly be seen.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 60: Captain Falso is only ten leagues E.
+from the Cape of Good Hope; but perhaps Cape Aguillas may be
+meant in the text, which is about thirty-five leagues E.S.E. from
+the Cape.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>By break of day on the 8th June, they were within seven or
+eight leagues of St Helena, of which island they had merely a
+glimpse that day, as, having little or no wind, they had to stand
+off and on all night. Next day, having a tolerably good wind,
+they stood in with the shore, sending the boat before, and came
+to anchor in a good bay, under the N.W. side of the island, in
+twelve fathoms, only two or three cables length from the shore.
+This island lies in the middle of the Atlantic Ocean, almost at
+equal distances from the main land of Africa and that of Brazil,
+in Lat. 15&deg; 43' S. between five and six hundred leagues from
+the Cape of Good Hope.</p>
+
+<p>Candish went here on shore, and entered the church, to which
+there was a fair causeway; having a <i>frame between two
+bowls</i>, and a cross of freestone adjoining. Within it was hung
+with painted cloth, on which were represented the Blessed Virgin,
+the story of the Crucifixion, and other holy legends, hung round
+the altar. The valley in which this church stands is extremely
+pleasant, and so full of fruit-trees and excellent plants, that
+it seemed like a very fair and well-cultivated garden, having
+long rows of lemon, orange, citron, pomegranate, date, and
+fig-trees, delighting the eye with blossoms, green fruit, and
+ripe, all at once. These trees seemed nicely trimmed, and there
+were many delightful walks under the shelter of their boughs,
+which were pleasant, cool, and shady. At some distance there
+rises a fine clear spring, which diffuses itself in many fine
+rivulets, all through this valley, watering all its parts, and
+refreshing every plant and tree. In the whole of this great
+garden there is hardly any unoccupied space; as, where nature may
+have left any part empty, there art has supplied the deficiency,
+so as to fill the whole space to advantage. This island also
+affords great abundance of partridges and pheasants, both being
+larger than ours in England. There are also turkeys, both black
+and white, with red heads, about as large as those in England,
+and their eggs much the same, only altogether white. There is
+also plenty of <i>cabritos</i>, or wild goats, as big as asses,
+and having manes like horses, and their beards reaching down to
+the ground. These are so numerous, that their herds or flocks are
+sometimes a whole mile in length. It contains also vast herds of
+wild-swine, which keep chiefly in the mountains, as do likewise
+the wild-goats. These swine are very fat, but so excessively wild
+that they are never to be got at by a man, unless when asleep, or
+rolling themselves in the mire.</p>
+
+<p>Having taken in all necessaries that this place produced,
+Candish set sail for England on the 20th of June, standing N.W.
+by W. It is observable, that the wind at St Helena is generally
+off the shore. On Friday, the 23d of August, he steered E. and E.
+by S. for the northernmost of the Azores; and on the 29th, after
+midnight, he got sight of the islands of Flores and Corvo, in
+lat. 39&deg; 30' N. whence he shaped his course N.E. He met a
+Flemish vessel on the 3d September, bound from Lisbon, from which
+he had the joyful news of the total defeat of the Spanish Armada.
+On the 9th September, after receiving a farewell from the wind in
+a violent storm, which carried away most of his sails, Candish
+arrived at the long-desired haven of Plymouth.</p>
+
+<p>There had not hitherto been any voyage of so much consequence,
+or attended by such uninterrupted success as this: As plainly
+appears from the length of time occupied by that of Magellan,
+which extended to three years and a month; that of Sir Francis
+Drake extending to upwards of two years and ten months; while
+this voyage by Candish was less than two years and two months. We
+need not wonder, therefore, that a young gentleman like Mr
+Candish, who was entirely devoted to a desire of acquiring glory
+and renown, should contrive some extraordinary manner of
+displaying his good fortune. Some accounts accordingly inform us,
+that he brought his ship into Plymouth harbour under a suit of
+silken sails, which, if true, may be thus explained. We have
+already mentioned, from his own narrative, that he encountered a
+violent storm, just before his arrival, which tore all his sails
+to pieces. In this distress, he would probably use those he had
+taken in the South Sea, made of what is called silk-grass, having
+a strong gloss and beautiful colour, which might easily deceive
+the eyes of the vulgar, and pass upon them for sails made of
+silk. This much is certain, however, that though he might be vain
+and expensive in such matters, yet all came fairly out of his own
+pocket; and those who had sailed with him, from the prospect of
+raising their fortunes, had not the least reason to complain, as
+he made a fair and full distribution of the prizes, by which he
+gained universal credit and esteem.</p>
+
+<p>To shew his duty and diligence, as well as to discharge
+respectfully the obligations he owed his patron, Lord Hunsdon,
+the near relation of Queen Elizabeth, and then lord-chamberlain,
+he wrote the following letter to him on the very day of his
+arrival at Plymouth.</p>
+
+<p><i>To the Right Honourable the Lord Hunsdon, &amp;c.</i></p>
+
+<p><i>Right Honourable</i>,</p>
+
+<p>As your favour heretofore hath been most greatly extended
+towards me, so I humbly desire a continuance thereof; and though
+there be no means in me to deserve the same, yet the uttermost of
+my services shall not be wanting, whensoever it shall please your
+honour to dispose thereof. I am humbly to desire your honour to
+make known unto her majesty the desire I have had to do her
+majesty service in the performance of this voyage; and, as it
+hath pleased God to give her the victory over part of her
+enemies, so I trust, ere long, to see her overthrow them all. For
+the places of their wealth, whereby they have maintained and made
+their wars, are now perfectly discovered; and, if it please her
+majesty, with a small power she may take and spoil them all.</p>
+
+<p>It hath pleased the Almighty to suffer me to circumcompass all
+the whole globe of the world, entering in at the Straits of
+Magellan, and returning by the Cape of Buena Esperan&ccedil;a. In
+which voyage I have either discovered, or brought certain
+intelligence of, all the rich places of the world that ever were
+known or discovered by any Christian. I navigated along the
+coasts of Chili, Peru, and Nueva Espanna, where I made great
+spoils. I burnt and sunk nineteen sail of ships, great and small.
+All the villages and towns that ever I landed at, I burnt and
+spoiled; and, had I not been discovered upon the coast, I had
+taken a great quantity of treasure. The matter of most profit
+unto me was a great ship of the king's, which I took at
+California, which ship came from the Philippines, being one of
+the richest for merchandize that ever passed these seas, as the
+royal register, accounts, and merchants did shew; for it amounted
+in value to ***** in Mexico to be sold: which goods, for that my
+ships were not able to contain the least part of them, I was
+enforced to set on fire.</p>
+
+<p>From the Cape of California, being the uppermost part of all
+New Spain, I navigated to the Philippine islands, hard upon the
+coast of China, of which country I have brought such intelligence
+as hath not been heard in these parts; the stateliness and riches
+of which country I fear to make report of; lest I should not be
+credited: for, if I had not known sufficiently the incomparable
+wealth of that country, I should have been as incredulous thereof
+as others will be that have not had the like experience.</p>
+
+<p>I sailed along the islands of the Moluccas, where among some
+of the heathen people I was well intreated, and where our people
+may have trade as freely as the Portuguese, if they will
+themselves. From thence, I passed by the Cape of Buena
+Esperan&ccedil;a; and found out, by the way homeward, the island
+of St Helena, where the Portuguese used to refresh themselves;
+and, from that island, God hath suffered me to return into
+England. All which services, together with myself, I humbly
+prostrate at her majesty's feet, desiring the Almighty long to
+continue her reign among us; for at this day she is the most
+famous and most victorious prince that liveth in the world.</p>
+
+<p>Thus, humbly desiring pardon for my tediousness, I leave your
+lordship to the tuition of the Almighty.</p>
+
+<p><i>Your honour's most humble to command,<br>
+ Thomas Candish</i>.</p>
+
+<p>Plymouth, this 9th<br>
+ of September, 1588.</p>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<p>There are many circumstances in this voyage, besides the
+wonderful facility with which it was accomplished, that deserve
+to be considered. As, for instance, the adventuring to pass a
+second time into the South Sea, after it was not only known that
+the Spaniards were excessively alarmed by the passage of Sir
+Francis Drake, but also that they had received succours from
+Spain, and had actually fortified themselves strongly in the
+South Sea. Also the nice search made by Candish, and the exact
+description he has given us of the Straits of Magellan, are very
+noble proofs of his skill and industry, and of his desire that
+posterity might reap the fruits of his labours. The attack of the
+Accapulco ship, likewise, considering the small force he had
+along with him, was a noble instance of true English bravery,
+which was justly rewarded by the queen with the honour of
+knighthood.</p>
+
+<p>His account of the Philippines, and his description of several
+islands in the East Indies, are very clear and curious, and must
+at that time have been very useful; but particularly his map and
+description of China, which gave great lights in those days. We
+may add to all this, the great care he took in the instruction of
+his seamen, many of whom afterwards distinguished themselves by
+navigating vessels in the same stupendous course, and thereby
+filling all the known world with the fame and reputation of
+English seamen. It is not therefore surprising that we find the
+best judges, both of our own and other nations, bestowing very
+high praise on this worthy gentleman, who, in the whole conduct
+of his voyage, shewed the courage and discretion of a great
+commander, with all the skill and diligence of an able seaman; of
+both which eminent characters he has left the strongest
+testimonies in his accurate account of this circumnavigation.</p>
+
+<p>The wealth brought home by Sir Thomas Candish from this
+successful voyage must have been considerable; an old writer says
+it was sufficient to have purchased <i>a fair earldom</i>, a
+general and vague expression, having no determinate meaning.
+Whatever may have been the amount of the sum, which he acquired
+with so much hazard and so great honour, he certainly did not
+make such prudent use of his good fortune as might have been
+expected; for in the space of three years the best part of it was
+spent, and he determined to lay out the remainder upon a second
+expedition. We need the less wonder at this, if we consider what
+the writers of those days tell us, of his great generosity, and
+the prodigious expence he was at in procuring and maintaining
+such persons as he thought might be useful to him in his future
+naval expeditions, on which subject his mind was continually
+bent. Such things require the revenues of a prince; and as he
+looked upon this voyage round the world as an introduction only
+to his future undertakings, we may easily conceive that, what the
+world considered extravagance, might appear to him mere necessary
+disbursements, which, instead of lessening, he proposed should
+have laid the foundations of a more extensive fortune. All
+circumstances duly considered, this was neither a rash nor
+improbable supposition; since there were many examples in the
+glorious reign of Queen Elizabeth, of very large fortunes
+acquired by the same method in which he proposed to have
+increased his estate. Besides, it clearly appears, by his will,
+that he not only did not die in debt, but left very considerable
+effects behind him, notwithstanding his heavy expences, and the
+many misfortunes of his second expedition, of which it is proper
+to subjoin a brief account.--<i>Harris</i>.</p>
+
+<p>In the Collection of Hakluyt, vol. IV. p. 341-355, is a long
+enumeration of nautical remarks, of the latitudes, soundings,
+distances of places, bearings of lands, variations of the
+compass, time spent in sailing between the several places
+enumerated, time of remaining at any of these, observations of
+winds, &amp;c. &amp;c. &amp;c. written by Mr Thomas Fuller of
+Ipswich, who was master of the Desire in this voyage round the
+world; but which are too tedious and uninteresting for
+insertion.--E.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION IV.</p>
+
+<p><i>Second Voyage of Sir Thomas Candish, intended for the South
+Sea, in 1591</i>.[61]</p>
+
+<p>Though not a circumnavigation, owing to various misfortunes,
+it appears proper to insert this narrative, giving an account of
+the unfortunate end of the renowned Candish, by way of appendix
+to his circumnavigation. From the happy success of his former
+voyage, and the superior strength with which he undertook the
+second, in which, after ranging the Spanish coast of the South
+Sea, he proposed to have visited the Philippine islands and
+China, he certainly had every reason to have expected, that the
+profits of this new enterprise would have fully compensated for
+its expences, and have enabled him to spend the remainder of his
+days in honourable ease and affluence.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 61: Hakluyt, IV. 361.--This narrative, as
+we learn from Hakluyt, was written by Mr John Lane, or Jane, a
+person of good observation, who was employed in this and many
+other voyages.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<hr align="center" width="50%">
+<p>The ships fitted out on this occasion, entirely at his own
+expence, were the galleon named the Leicester, in which Sir
+Thomas Candish embarked himself as admiral, or general of the
+expedition; the Roebuck vice-admiral, commanded by Mr Cocke; the
+Desire rear-admiral, of which Mr John Davis was captain;[62] the
+Dainty, a bark belonging to Mr Adrian Gilbert, of which Mr
+Randolph Cotton had the command; and a pinnace named the
+Black.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 62: The author of this narrative informs us
+that he sailed on this voyage along with Mr
+Davis.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>SECTION 1. <i>Incidents in the Voyage, till the Separation of
+the Ships</i>.</p>
+
+<p>With this squadron we sailed from Plymouth on the 26th of
+August, 1591. The 29th November, we fell in with the bay of St
+Salvador on the coast of Brazil, twelve leagues to the N. of Cabo
+Frio, where we were becalmed till the 2d December, when we
+captured a small bark, bound for the Rio Plata, laden with sugar,
+haberdashery wares, and negroes. The master of this bark brought
+us to an isle, called Placencia or <i>Ilha Grande</i>, thirty
+Portuguese leagues W. from Cabo Frio, where we arrived on the 5th
+December, and rifled six or seven houses inhabited by Portuguese.
+The 11th we departed from this place, and arrived on the 14th at
+the island of St Sebastian; whence Mr Cocke and Mr Davis
+immediately departed, with the Desire and the Black pinnace, on
+purpose to attack the town of Santos.</p>
+
+<p>We anchored at the bar of Santos in the evening of the 15th,
+and went immediately in our boats to the town. Next morning about
+nine o'clock, we reached Santos, and being discovered, we
+immediately landed, being only twenty-four of us, our long-boat
+being still far astern. By this promptitude, we took all the
+people of the town prisoners in the church, being at mass, and
+detained them there all day. The great object of Sir Thomas
+Candish in assaulting this town was to supply our wants,
+expecting to have got every thing of which we stood in need, when
+once in possession: But such was the negligence of Mr Cocke, who
+commanded on this occasion, that the Indians were allowed to
+carry every thing out of the town in open view, and no one
+hindered them; and next day, our prisoners were all set free,
+only four poor old men being kept as pledges to supply our wants.
+By this mismanagement, the town of Santos, which could easily
+have supplied a fleet the double of ours with all kinds of
+necessaries, was in three days left to us entirely naked, without
+people, and without provisions. Sir Thomas Candish came up eight
+or ten days afterwards, and remained till the 22d January, 1592,
+endeavouring by treaty to procure what we were once possessed of,
+but to little purpose; and we were then forced to depart, through
+want of provisions, glad to procure a few baskets of cassavi
+meal, going away worse provided than we had come there. We
+accordingly left Santos on the 22d January, and burnt the town of
+St Vincent to the ground.</p>
+
+<p>We set sail on the 24th, shaping our course for the Straits of
+Magellan. On the 7th February we had a violent storm, and on the
+8th, our fleet was separated by the fury of the tempest.
+Consulting with the master of our ship, our captain concluded to
+go for Port Desire, in the latitude of 48&deg; S. hoping that Sir
+Thomas would go there likewise, as he had found great relief
+there in his former voyage. Our captain had not been able to get
+directions, what course to take in such a contingency as had now
+occurred, though he had earnestly proposed such a measure. In our
+way, we fortunately fell in with the Roebuck, which had been in
+extreme danger, and had lost her boat. We arrived together at
+Port Desire on the 6th March. The Black pinnace came in there
+also on the 16th; but the Dainty came not, having gone back for
+England, leaving their captain, Mr Randolph Cotton, aboard the
+Roebuck, with nothing but the clothes he wore. He now came aboard
+our ship, being in great habits of friendship with Captain
+Davis.</p>
+
+<p>On the 18th Sir Thomas brought the galleon into the roads, and
+came himself into the harbour in a boat he had got built at sea,
+for his long-boat and light-horseman were both lost during the
+storm, together with a pinnace he had set up at Santos. Being on
+board our ship, the Desire, Sir Thomas informed our captain of
+all his extremities, and complained severely of his company, and
+particularly of several gentlemen in his ship, proposing to go no
+more on board his own ship, but to proceed for the rest of the
+voyage in the Desire. We were all grieved to hear such hard
+speeches of our good friends; but having spoken with the
+gentlemen in the Leicester, we found them faithful, honest, and
+resolute in their proceedings, although it pleased our general to
+conceive of them otherwise.</p>
+
+<p>The 20th March we departed from Port Desire, Sir Thomas being
+in the Desire with us. The 8th of April we fell in with the
+Straits of Magellan, having sustained many furious storms between
+Port Desire and the straits. The 14th we passed the first
+straits, and got through the second, ten leagues beyond the
+first, on the 16th. We doubled Cape Froward on the 18th, which
+cape is in 53&deg; 30' S. The 21st we were forced by a furious
+storm to take shelter in a small cove with our ships, four
+leagues beyond the cape, and on the southern shore of the
+straits, where we remained till the 15th of May; in which time we
+endured much distress, by excessive storms, with perpetual snow,
+and many of our men died of cold and famine, not having
+wherewithal to cover their bodies nor to fill their bellies, but
+living on muscles, sea-weeds, and water, with an occasional
+supply of meal from the ships stores.[63] All the sick men in the
+galleon were most uncharitably put on shore into the woods,
+exposed to the snow, the air, and the cold, which men in health
+could hardly have endured, where they ended their days in the
+utmost misery, Sir Thomas remaining all this time in the
+Desire.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 63: It would appear that this expedition
+had been very improvidently undertaken, with a very inadequate
+supply of provisions, and, as will afterwards appear, of naval
+stores, trusting perhaps to obtain supplies from the enemy, as
+had been attempted in vain at Santos. Either delayed by these
+views, or from ignorance, the passage through the straits was
+attempted at a very improper season, three months after the
+antarctic mid-summer and during the autumnal equinoctial gales.
+November, December, and January are the summer months, and best
+fitted for these high southern latitudes.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Seeing these great extremities of cold and snow, and doubting
+a disastrous end to the enterprize, Sir Thomas asked our
+captain's opinion, being a person of great experience in the
+utmost parts of the north, to which he had made three voyages of
+discovery in the employ of the London merchants. Captain Davis
+said, that he did not expect the snow to be of long continuance,
+for which he gave sufficient reasons from his former experience,
+and hoped therefore that this might not greatly prejudice or
+hinder the completion of the enterprize. Yet Sir Thomas called
+all the company together, telling them that he proposed to depart
+from the straits upon some other voyage, either proceeding for
+the Cape of Good Hope, or back again to Brazil. The company
+answered, that they desired rather to wait God's favour for a
+wind, if he so pleased, and to submit to any hardships, rather
+than abandon the intended voyage, considering that they had been
+here only for a short time, and were now only forty leagues from
+the South Sea; yet, though grieved to return, they were ready to
+perform whatever he pleased to command. So he concluded to leave
+the straits, and make sail for the Cape of Good Hope.</p>
+
+<p>When Sir Thomas Candish returned on board the Desire, from
+talking with the company, Captain Davis requested he would
+consider the extremity of our estate and condition, the
+slenderness of his provision, and the weakness of his men, being
+in no case for undertaking that new enterprise; as, if the other
+ships were as ill appointed as the Desire, it would be impossible
+to perform his new design, having no more sails then were then
+bent, no victuals, no ground tackle, no cordage save what was
+already in use; and, of seventy-five persons in the Desire, the
+master only had knowledge enough for managing the ship, and there
+were only fourteen sailors besides, all the rest being gentlemen,
+serving-men, or tradesmen. Captain Davis laid these persuasions
+before both the general and Mr Cocke; and in fine, in consequence
+of a petition, delivered in writing by all the chief persons of
+the whole company, the general determined to depart from the
+Straits of Magellan, and to return again for Santos in
+Brazil.</p>
+
+<p>Accordingly, we set sail on the 15th of May, the general being
+now on board the galleon, his own ship. The 18th we were free of
+the straits; but on passing Cape Froward, we had the misfortune
+to have our boat sunk at our stern in the night, by which she was
+split and sore injured, and lost all her oars. The 20th of May,
+being athwart Port Desire, the general altered his course during
+the night, as we suppose, by which we lost him. In the evening he
+stood close by the wind to leewards, having the wind at N.N.E.
+and we stood the same course, the wind not altering during the
+night, and next day we could not see him. We were then persuaded
+that the general was gone for Port Desire in quest of relief or
+that he had sustained some mischance at sea, and was gone there
+to seek a remedy. Our captain then called all hands together, the
+general's men among the rest, asking their opinion what was to be
+done, when every one said he thought the general was gone to Port
+Desire.</p>
+
+<p>Our master, who was the general's man, and careful for his
+master's service, and also a person of good judgment in sea
+affairs, represented to the company how dangerous it was for us
+to go to Port Desire, especially if we should there miss the
+general; as we had now no boat wherewith to land, neither any
+anchors or cables which he could trust to in such rapid streams.
+Yet as we all concluded that it was most probable the general had
+gone there, we shaped our course for Port Desire, and on our way
+met the Black pinnace by chance, which had also parted company
+from the general, being in a miserable plight. So we both
+proceeded for Port Desire, where we arrived on the 26th of
+May.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 2. <i>Disastrous result of the Voyage to Sir Thomas
+Candish</i>.[64]</p>
+
+<p>Various accounts of the disappointments and misfortunes of Sir
+Thomas Candish, in this disastrous voyage, are still preserved,
+but the most copious is contained in his own narrative, addressed
+to Sir Tristram Gorges, whom he constituted sole executor of his
+will. In this, Sir Thomas attributes his miscarriage to the
+cowardice and defection of one of his officers, in the following
+terms:--"The running away of the villain Davis was the death of
+me, and the decay of the whole action, and his treachery in
+deserting me the ruin of all."</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 64: This portion of the voyage is taken
+from the supplement in the Collection of Harris, to the
+circumnavigation of Sir Thomas Candish.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In this letter he complained also of mutinies, and that, by
+adverse winds at S W. and W.S.W. he had been driven 400 leagues
+from the shore, and from the latitude of 50&deg; to that of
+40&deg; both S. He says also, that he was surprised by winter in
+the straits, and sore vexed by storms, having such frosts and
+snows in May as he had never before witnessed,[65] so that forty
+of his men died, and seventy more of them sickened, in the course
+of seven or eight days. Davis, as he says, deserted him in the
+Desire, in lat. 47&deg; S. The Roebuck continued along with him
+to lat. 36&deg; S. In consequence of transgressing his
+directions, Captain Barker was slain on land with twenty-five
+men, and the boat lost; and soon afterwards other twenty-five men
+met with a similar fate. Ten others were forsaken at Spiritu
+Santo, by the cowardice of the master of the Roebuck, who stole
+away, having six months provisions on board for 120 men, and only
+forty-seven men in his ship. Another mutiny happened at St
+Sebastians by the treachery of an Irishman, when Mr Knivet and
+other six persons were left on shore.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 65: Sir Thomas Candish seems not to have
+been aware, that the month of May, in these high antarctic or
+southern latitudes, was precisely analogous with November in the
+high latitudes of the north, and therefore utterly unfit for
+navigation.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Intending again to have attempted passing through the straits,
+he was tossed up and down in the tempestuous seas of the Southern
+Atlantic, and came even at one time within two leagues of St
+Helena, but was unable to reach that island. In his last letter,
+he declares that, rather than return to England after so many
+disasters, he would willingly have gone ashore in an island
+placed in lat. 8&deg; in the charts. In this letter, he states
+himself to be then scarcely able to hold a pen; and we learn that
+he soon afterwards died of grief. The Leicester, in which Candish
+sailed, came home, as did the Desire. The Black pinnace was lost;
+but the fates of the Roebuck and the Dainty are no where
+mentioned.</p>
+
+<p>The miscarriage of this voyage was certainly prejudicial to
+the rising trade and spirit of naval adventure in England. The
+ruin of Sir Thomas Candish threw a damp on such undertakings
+among the English gentlemen; and, on the return of these ships,
+several able and experienced seamen were turned adrift, to gain
+their livings as they best might. These thorough-bred seamen went
+to other countries; and, as knowledge is a portable commodity,
+they made the best market they could of their nautical experience
+in Holland and elsewhere. Among these was one Mr Mellish, who had
+been a favourite of Sir Thomas Candish, and the companion of all
+his voyages. This person offered his services to the East India
+Company of Holland, then in its infancy; and, his proposals being
+accepted, he was employed as pilot in the circumnavigation of
+Oliver van Noort, which falls next in order to be related.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 3. <i>Continuation of the Voyage of the Desire,
+Captain Davis, after parting from Sir Thomas Candish</i>.</p>
+
+<p>Not finding our general at Port Desire, as we had expected,
+and being very slenderly provided, without sails, boat, oars,
+nails, cordage, and other necessary stores, and very short of
+victuals, we were reduced to a very unpleasant situation, not
+knowing how to proceed. Leaving ourselves, however, to the
+providence of the Almighty, we entered the harbour, and, by the
+good favour of God, we found a quiet and safe road, which we knew
+not of before. Having moored our ship, by the help of the boat
+belonging to the Black pinnace, we landed on the southern shore
+of the bay, where we found a standing pool, which might contain
+some ten tons of fresh water, by which we were greatly relieved
+and comforted. From this pool we took more than forty tons of
+water, yet left it as full as at first. At our former visit to
+this harbour, we were at this very place and found no water,
+wherefore we persuaded ourselves that the Almighty had sent this
+pool for our relief. We found here such remarkably low ebbs as we
+had never before seen, by means of which we procured muscles in
+great plenty. Providence also sent such great abundance of smelts
+about our ship, that all the people were able to take as many as
+they could eat, with hooks made of crooked pins. By these means
+we husbanded the ship's provisions, and did not spend any of them
+during our abode at this place.</p>
+
+<p>Considering what was best to be done in our present
+circumstances, that we might find our general, and as it was
+obvious we could not refit our ship for sea in less than a month,
+our captain and master concluded to take the pinnace and go in
+search of the general, leaving the ship and a considerable part
+of the men till the return of the general, who had vowed he would
+return again to the straits. Hearing of this determination, two
+pestilent fellows, named Charles Parker and Edward Smith,
+secretly represented to the men, that the captain and master
+meant to leave them to be devoured by cannibals, and had no
+intention to come back; on which the whole company secretly
+agreed to murder the captain, master, and all those who were
+thought their friends, among whom I was included. This conspiracy
+was fortunately known to our boatswain, who revealed it to the
+master, and he to the captain. To appease this mutiny the captain
+found it necessary to desist from his intentions, and it was
+concluded not to depart, but to wait at Port Desire for the
+return of the general. After this the whole company, with one
+consent, made a written testimonial of the circumstances by which
+we had lost company of the general, and the indispensable
+necessity of returning home.</p>
+
+<p>In this testimony or protest, dated Port Desire, 2d June,
+1592, it is represented, that the shrouds of the ship are all
+rotten, the ropes all so decayed that they could not be trusted;
+the sails reduced to one shift all worn, of which the topsails
+were utterly unable to abide any stress of weather; the ship
+unprovided with pitch, tar, or nails for repairs of any kind, and
+no means of supplying these wants; the provisions reduced to five
+hogsheads of salt pork, and such quantity of meal as admitted
+only an allowance of three ounces for a man each day, and no
+drink remaining except water. This instrument is signed by John
+Davis and Randolph Cotton, the captains of the Desire and Black
+pinnace, and thirty-eight more, but the name John Jane, or Lane,
+does not appear among them.</p>
+
+<p>After this, they proceeded to refit the ship with all
+expedition, for which purpose they built a smith's forge, making
+charcoal for its supply, and made nails, bolts, and spikes.
+Others of the crew were employed in making ropes from a piece of
+cable; and others again in all the necessary repairs of the ship,
+sails, and rigging; while those not fit for such offices,
+gathered muscles and caught smelts for the whole company. Three
+leagues from Port Desire there is an island, having four small
+isles about it, on which there are great abundance of seals, and
+where likewise penguins resort in vast numbers at the breeding
+season. To this island it was resolved to dispatch the Black
+pinnace occasionally, to fetch seals for us to eat, when smelts
+and muscles failed, for we could get no muscles at neap-tides,
+and only when the ebb was very low.</p>
+
+<p>In this miserable and forlorn condition we remained till the
+6th of August, 1592, still keeping watch on the hills to look out
+for our general, suffering extreme anguish and vexation. Our hope
+of the general's return becoming very cold, our captain and
+master were persuaded that he might have gone directly for the
+straits; wherefore it was concluded to go there and wait his
+coming, as there we could not possibly miss seeing him if he
+came. This being agreed to by the whole company, we set sail from
+Port Desire on the 6th August, and went to Penguin island, where
+we salted twenty hogsheads of seals, which was as much as our
+salt could do. We departed from Penguin island towards night of
+the 7th August, intending for the straits. The 14th we were
+driven among certain islands, never before discovered, fifty
+leagues or better from the shore, east-northerly from the
+straits.[66] Fortunately the wind shifted to the east, or we must
+have inevitably perished among these islands, and we were enabled
+to shape our course for the straits.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 66: These are doubtless the Falkland
+Islands, or Malouines, but to which no name seems to have been
+affixed on this occasion.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>We fell in with the cape [Virgin] on the 18th of August, in a
+very thick fog, and that same night came to anchor ten leagues
+within the straits' mouth. The 19th we passed the first and
+second narrows, doubled Cape Froward on the 21st, and anchored on
+the 22d in a cove, or small bay, which we named <i>Savage
+Cove</i>, because we here found savages. Notwithstanding the
+excessive coldness of this place, yet do these people go entirely
+naked, living in the woods like satyrs, painted and disguised in
+a strange manner, and fled from us like so many wild deer. They
+were very strong and agile, and threw stones at us, of three or
+four pounds weight, from an incredible distance. We departed from
+this cove on the 24th in the morning, and came that same day into
+the N.W. reach of the straits, which is its last or most western
+reach. On the 25th we anchored in a good cove, within fourteen
+leagues of the South Sea, where we proposed to await the return
+of our general, as the strait at this place is only three miles
+broad, and he could not possibly pass unseen.</p>
+
+<p>After we had remained here a fortnight, in the depth of
+winter, our victuals fast consuming, and our salted seals
+stinking most vilely, our men fell sick and died pitifully,
+through famine and cold, as most of them had not clothes
+sufficient to defend them from the extreme rigour of winter. In
+this heavy distress, our captain and master thought it best to
+depart from the straits into the South Sea, and to proceed for
+the island of Santa Maria in lat. 37&deg; S. on the coast of
+Chili, which is situated in a temperate climate, where we might
+find relief, and could wait for our general, who must necessarily
+pass by that island. We accordingly set sail on the 13th
+September, and came in sight of the South Sea. The 14th we were
+driven back into the straits, and got into a cove three leagues
+from the South Sea. We again stood out, and being eight or ten
+leagues free of the land, the wind rose furiously at W.N.W. and
+we were again forced to return into the straits, not daring to
+trust to our sails in any stress of weather. We again got into
+the cove, three leagues from the eastern mouth of the straits,
+where we had such violent weather that one of our two remaining
+cables broke, and we were almost in despair of saving our lives.
+Yet it pleased God to allay the fury of the storm, and we
+unreeved our sheets, tacks, halyards, and other ropes, and made
+fast our ship to the trees on shore, close by the rocks. We
+laboured hard to recover our anchor again, which we could not
+possibly effect, being, as we supposed, entirely covered over in
+the ooze.</p>
+
+<p>We were now reduced to one anchor, which had only one whole
+fluke; and had only one old cable, already spliced in two places,
+and a piece of another old cable. In this extremity of trouble it
+pleased God that the wind came fair on the 1st October, on which
+we loosed our land fastnings with all expedition, weighed our
+anchor, and towed off into the channel; for we had repaired our
+boat when in Port Desire, and got five oars from the Black
+pinnace. On weighing our anchor we found the cable sore broken,
+holding only by one strand, which was a most merciful
+preservation. We now reeved our ropes and rigged our ship the
+best we could, every man working as if to save our lives in the
+utmost extremity. Our company was now much divided in opinion as
+to how we should proceed for the best; some desiring to return to
+Port Desire, to be there set on shore, and endeavour to travel by
+land to some of the Spanish settlements, while others adhered to
+the captain and master: But at length, by the persuasion of the
+master, who promised that they would find wheat, pork, and roots
+in abundance at the island of St Mary, besides the chance of
+intercepting some ships on the coasts of Chili and Peru, while
+nothing but a cruel death by famine could be looked for in
+attempting to return by the Atlantic, they were prevailed upon to
+proceed.</p>
+
+<p>So, on the 2d of October, 1592, we again made sail into the
+South Sea, and got free from the land. This night the wind again
+began to blow very strong at west, and increased with such
+violence that we were in great doubt what measures to pursue. We
+durst not put into the straits for lack of ground tackle, neither
+durst we carry sail, the tempest being very furious, and our
+sails very bad. In this extremity the pinnace bore up to us,
+informing she had received many heavy seas, and that her ropes
+were continually failing, so that they knew not what to do; but,
+unable to afford her any relief; we stood on our course in view
+of a lee shore, continually dreading a ruinous end of us all. The
+4th October the storm increased to an extreme violence; when the
+pinnace, being to windward, suddenly <i>struck a hull</i>, when
+we thought she had sustained some violent shock of a sea, or had
+sprung a leak, or that her sails had failed, because she did not
+follow us. But we durst not <i>hull</i> in this unmerciful storm,
+sometimes <i>trying</i> under our main-course, sometimes with a
+<i>haddock</i> of our sail; for our ship was very <i>leeward</i>,
+and laboured hard in the sea. This night we lost sight of the
+pinnace, and never saw her again.</p>
+
+<p>The 5th October, our foresail split, on which our master
+brought the mizen-sail to the foremast to make the ship work, and
+we mended our foresail with our spritsail. The storm still
+continued to rage with the most extreme fury, with hail, snow,
+rain, and wind, such and so mighty that it could not possibly in
+nature be worse; the seas running so lofty, and with a continual
+breach, that we many times were in doubt whether our ship did
+sink or swim. The 10th, the weather dark, the storm as furious as
+ever, most of the men having given over labour from fatigue and
+in despair, and being near the lee-shore by the reckoning both of
+the captain and master, we gave ourselves up for lost, past all
+remedy. While in this extremity of distress, the sun suddenly
+shone out clear, by which the captain and master were enabled to
+ascertain the latitude, and thereby knew what course to steer, so
+as to recover the straits. Next day, the 11th October, we saw
+Cape Deseado, being the southern point of the entrance into the
+straits, for the northern point is a dangerous assemblage of
+rocks, shoals, and islands. The cape was now two leagues to
+leeward, and the master was even in doubt whether we might be
+able to steer clear of it; but there was no remedy, as we must
+either succeed or be irretrievably lost.</p>
+
+<p>Our master, being a man of spirit, made quick dispatch, and
+steered for the straits. Our sails had not been half an hour
+abroad for this purpose when the foot-rope of the fore-sail
+broke, so nothing held save the oilet-holes. The sea continually
+broke over our poop, and dashed with such violence against our
+sails, that we every moment looked to have them torn to pieces,
+or that the ship would overset. To our utter discomfort also, we
+perceived that she fell still more and more to leeward, so that
+we could not clear the cape. We were now within half a mile of
+the cape, and so near shore that the counter surge of the sea so
+rebounded against the side of our ship, that the horrors of our
+situation were undescribably awful. While in this utmost
+extremity, the wind and the sea raging beyond measure, and
+momentarily expecting to be driven upon the rocks, our master
+veered away some of the main-sheet: Whether owing to this, or by
+some counter current, or by the wonderful interposition of God,
+our ship quickened her way and shot past the rock, where we all
+thought she must have perished. Between this and the cape there
+was a small bay, so that we were now somewhat farther from the
+shore; but on coming to the cape, we again looked for nothing but
+instant death; yet God, the father of mercy, delivered us, and we
+doubled the cape little more than the length of our ship. When
+past the cape, we took in all our sails, and, being between the
+high lands, the wind <i>blowing trade</i>, or steadily in the
+direction of the straits, we spooned before the sea under bare
+poles, three men being unable to manage the helm, and in six
+hours we were driven twenty-five leagues within the straits.</p>
+
+<p>In this time we freed our ship from water, and when we had
+rested a while, our men became unable to move, their sinews being
+stiff, and their flesh as if dead. Many of them were so covered
+and eaten with lice, that there lay clusters of them in their
+flesh as large as peas, yea, some as big as beans. In this state
+of misery we were constrained to put into a cove to refresh our
+men, where we moored to the trees as we had done before, our only
+anchor being to seaward. We here continued till the 20th of
+October; and being unable to continue longer, through the
+extremity of famine, we again put off into the channel on the
+22d, the weather being then reasonably calm. Before night the
+wind blew hard at W.N.W. The storm waxed so violent that our men
+could scarcely stand to their labour; and the straits being full
+of turnings and windings, we had to trust entirely to the
+discretion of the captain and master to guide the ship during the
+darkness of the night, when we could see no shore, and the
+straits were in some places scarcely three miles broad. When we
+first passed these straits, our captain made so excellent a
+draught of them, as I am confident cannot in any sort be made
+more correct. Which draught he and the master so carefully
+considered, that they had every turning, creek, and head-land so
+perfectly in their memory, as enabled them, even in the deepest
+darkness of the night, undoubtingly to convey the ship through
+that crooked channel.</p>
+
+<p>The 25th October we came to an island in the straits, named
+Penguine Isle, where the boat was sent ashore to seek relief, as
+it abounded with birds, and the weather was calm; so we came to
+anchor near the island, in seven fathoms. While the boat was
+ashore, where we got abundance of penguins, there rose a sudden
+storm, by which our ship was driven over a breach, and our boat
+sunk at the shore. Captain Cotton and the lieutenant, who were
+both on shore, leapt into the boat, and freed it of water,
+throwing away the birds, and with great difficulty got back to
+the ship. All this time the ship was driving upon the lee-shore;
+and when we got on board, we helped to weigh the anchor and make
+sail. Thus, in a severe storm, we got clear of the straits on the
+27th October; and on the 30th we got to that Penguin Island which
+is three leagues from Port Desire, where we purposed to seek
+relief. Immediately on coming to this isle, our boat was sent
+ashore, and returned laden with birds and eggs, the men reporting
+that the penguins were so thick on the isle, that even ships
+might be laden with them, as they could not step without treading
+on these birds; at which news we greatly rejoiced.</p>
+
+<p>Then the captain appointed Charles Parker and Edmund Smith,
+with twenty others, to go on shore, and remain on the island, on
+purpose to kill and dry these penguins: promising to send others
+when the ship was safe in harbour, not only for expedition, but
+to save the small store of victuals that remained in the ship.
+But Parker and Smith, with the rest of their faction, remembering
+that this was the place where they intended formerly to have
+slain the captain and master, thought it was meant here to leave
+them on shore out of revenge, and refused to land. After some
+altercation, these men were allowed to proceed in the ship, and
+ten others were left in the island. The last day of October we
+entered the harbour of Port Desire. The master, having at our
+being there before taken notice of every creek in the river, ran
+our ship aground in a very convenient place on the sandy ooze,
+laying our anchor out to seawards, and mooring her with the
+running ropes to stakes on shore, in which situation the ship
+remained till our departure.</p>
+
+<p>The 3d November our boat was sent off for Penguin Island, with
+wood and water, and as many men as she could carry; but, being
+deep laden, she durst not proceed, and returned again the same
+night. Then Parker, Smith, Townsend, Purpet, and five others,
+desired that they might go by land, and that the boat might fetch
+them from the shore opposite the isle, being scarcely a mile
+across. The captain bid them do as they thought best, only
+advised them to carry weapons, as they might meet with savages;
+so they accordingly carried calivers, swords, and targets,
+departing by land on the 6th November, while the boat went by
+sea. But these nine men were never more heard of. On the 11th,
+when most of our men were at the island, only the captain,
+master, and five more remaining in the ship, there came a great
+multitude of savages to the shore beside the ship, throwing dust
+into the air, leaping and running about like so many beasts,
+having vizards on their faces like dogs, or else their faces
+actually resembled dogs. We greatly feared they would have set
+the ship on fire, for they would suddenly make fire, at which we
+were greatly astonished. They came to windward of the ship, and
+set the bushes on fire, so that we were enveloped in a very
+stinking smoke; but coming within shot of us, we fired at them,
+and hitting one on the thigh, they all fled instantly away, and
+we never heard or saw them more. Hence we judged that these
+savages had slain our nine men, who were the ringleaders of those
+who would formerly have murdered our captain and master, with the
+rest of their friends; so that God evidently drew just judgment
+upon them, and we supplicated his divine Majesty to be merciful
+to us.</p>
+
+<p>While we lay in this harbour, our captain and master went one
+day in the boat to see how far the river could be penetrated,
+that if need enforced us, it might be known how far we might
+proceed by water. They found that this river was only navigable
+by the boat for twenty miles. On their return, the boat was sent
+to Penguin Island, by which we learnt that the penguins dried to
+our entire satisfaction, and were in infinite numbers. This
+penguin is shaped like a bird, having stumps only in place of
+wings, by which it swims under water as swiftly as any fish. They
+live upon smelts, which are found in vast abundance on this
+coast. In eating, these penguins seem neither fish nor flesh.
+They lay large eggs; and the bird is about as large as two ducks.
+All the time we remained at Port Desire, we fared well on
+penguins and their eggs, young seals, young gulls, and other
+birds of which I know not the names, all of which we had in vast
+abundance. In this place also we found plenty of an herb called
+scurvy-grass, which we eat fried in seal-oil along with eggs,
+which so purified the blood, that it entirely removed all kind of
+swellings, of which many had died, and restored us all to as
+perfect health as when we first left England.</p>
+
+<p>We remained in this harbour till the 22d of December, 1592, in
+which time we had dried 20,000 penguins. In this time also the
+captain, with the master and I, made some salt, by filling some
+holes in the rocks with sea-water, which in six days was changed
+to salt by evaporation, it being now Midsummer in this southern
+hemisphere. Thus did God feed us in the desert, even as with
+manna from heaven. The 22d December we departed from Port Desire
+for Penguin island, where, with great difficulty, we got 14,000
+of the dried birds on board, during which we had nearly lost our
+captain; and had not our master been very expert in the set of
+the tides, which ran in many cross directions, we had lost our
+ship.</p>
+
+<p>We now shaped our course for Brazil, under a regulated
+allowance of provisions, so that our victuals might last six
+months, in which time we hoped we might get back to England,
+though our sails were very bad. This allowance was, two ounces
+and a half of meal for each man, two days only in the week, or
+five ounces for a week; three days a week, three spoonfulls of
+oil were allowed to each man; two days a week, a pint of peas
+among four men; and every day five dried penguins among four men,
+with six quarts of water each day to four men. With this
+allowance, praised be God, we lived, though weak and feeble.</p>
+
+<p>The 30th January, 1593, we arrived at the isle of Placencia,
+or Ilha Grande, in Brazil, the first place at which we touched
+when outwards bound. The ship laying off at sea, the captain went
+aland in the boat with twenty-four men, being the whole night
+before he could reach the shore. He landed next day at sun-rise,
+hoping to catch the Portuguese in their houses, and by that means
+to procure a supply of casava meal; but on coming to the houses,
+we found them all burnt to the ground, so that we thought no one
+had remained on the island. The captain then went to the gardens,
+whence he brought a quantity of fruits and roots for the company,
+and returned on board. He then brought the ship into a fine
+creek, where she was moored to the trees on each side, at a place
+where we had plenty of fresh water. Our case being very
+desperate, we presently set to work to trim and repair our
+water-casks, the coopers making new hoops; while others laboured
+to repair the sails, keeping always a guard on shore, and every
+man having always his weapons ready at hand. The 3d February,
+thirty men well armed went to the gardens, three miles from where
+the ship lay, to dig cassavi-roots, to serve our company instead
+of bread. This was again repeated on the 5th. They laboured in
+quietness all the morning; and about ten o'clock, the heat being
+extreme, they came to a rock near the side of the wood, where
+they boiled cassavi-roots for dinner. After dinner, some went to
+sleep, and others to bathe in the sea, no one keeping watch, not
+a match lighted, nor even a piece charged. While in this
+unprovided state, and out of sight from the ship, there came
+suddenly upon them a multitude of Portuguese and Indians, who
+slew them all to the number of thirteen, two only escaping, one
+of these very sore hurt, and the other not touched, from whom we
+learnt the circumstances of this sad massacre.</p>
+
+<p>We manned the boat with all speed, and went ashore, if happily
+we might succour our men; but we found them all slain, and laid
+naked in a row, with their faces upwards, and a cross set up
+beside them. We saw also two large pinnaces coming from Rio de
+Janeiro, full of men, who, as we supposed, were intended to take
+us. We were now much reduced, as of seventy-six persons we had on
+board when we left England, there were now only twenty-seven of
+us remaining, thirty-two having died formerly, and thirteen being
+slain in this place. Between those formerly slain by the savages
+at Port Desire, and those now in the island of Placencia by the
+Portuguese, all those who had conspired to murder our captain and
+master were now cut off, the gunner only excepted. Our casks were
+so greatly decayed, that we could not take in a sufficient supply
+of water, and what we had was exceedingly bad. Having lost
+several muskets on shore, which had belonged to our slain men,
+with good store of powder and shot, we expected to be beaten from
+our decks by means of our own weapons, by the Portuguese on the
+island, joined by those coming from Janeiro: and as we were
+moored to the trees, for want of cables and anchors, we were in
+dread of having our mooring ropes cut. In this miserable state we
+knew not what measures to pursue. To depart with only eight tons
+of bad water, and in bad casks, were to run the risk of starving
+at sea, and to remain seemed inevitable ruin. These were severe
+alternatives; but in our perplexity we preferred trusting to the
+hand of God than to the mercy of our enemies, and concluded to
+depart. Wherefore, on the 6th February, we unmoored and removed
+our ship into the channel, putting all our ordnance and small
+arms in readiness in case of an assault, and having a small gale
+of wind, we put to sea in deep distress.</p>
+
+<p>Thus bemoaning our sad estate, and recounting our past
+misfortunes, we came to Cape Frio; being much crossed for three
+weeks by contrary winds, and our water running short, we were
+reduced to the utmost distress and perplexity. Some of the people
+were desirous of going into Bahia, and submitting to the
+Portuguese, rather than die of thirst; but our captain persuaded
+them against this measure. In this extremity, it pleased God to
+send us such abundant rain, that we were enabled to supply
+ourselves with water. On getting into the hot climate near the
+line, our dried penguins began to corrupt, and there bred in them
+many loathsome worms, an inch in length. These worms increased
+with astonishing rapidity, devouring our victuals so fast that we
+now seemed doomed to die of famine, as before of thirst We were
+even in danger of being eaten up by these worms, which devoured
+every thing except iron. They so gnawed the timbers of our ship,
+that we feared they would eat holes through her sides. We used
+every possible contrivance to destroy these noisome vermin, but
+they seemed only to increase so much the more, so that at last
+they would eat our flesh, and bite us like mosquitoes when we
+were asleep.</p>
+
+<p>In this woeful plight, after we had passed the equator towards
+the north, our men began to fall sick of a most terrible disease,
+such as, I believe, was never before heard of. It began with a
+swelling in their ankles, which in two days rose up as high as
+their breasts, so that they could not breathe. It then fell into
+the scrotum, which, with the penis, swelled in a most grievous
+manner, so that they could neither stand, walk, nor lie; and many
+of them became frantic with grief and distress. Our captain, with
+extreme distress of mind, was in so miserable a condition, that
+he wished to die; yet, while scarcely able to speak for sorrow,
+he continued to exhort us all to patience and reliance on God,
+desiring us to accept our chastisement like dutiful and thankful
+children. In this state of misery and wretchedness, several died
+raving mad, and others in a most loathsome state, or in dreadful
+pain and agony. None in the ship remained in perfect health,
+except the captain and one boy; the master also, though oppressed
+with extreme labour and anxiety, bore up with spirit, so that his
+disease did not overcome him.</p>
+
+<p>At length all our men died except sixteen, five only of whom
+were able to move. These were, the captain, who was in good
+health, the master indifferent, Captain Cotton and myself swollen
+and short-winded, yet better than the other sick men, and the boy
+in good health. Upon us five the whole labour of the ship rested.
+The captain and master, as happened to be necessary, took in and
+left out the topsails. The master by himself attended to the
+sprit-sail, and all of us the capstan, being utterly unable to
+work sheets and tacks. Our misery and weakness were so extreme,
+that we were utterly unable to take in or set a sail; so that our
+top-sails and sprit-sail were at length torn in pieces by the
+weather. The captain and master had to take their turns at the
+helm, where they were inexpressibly grieved and distressed by the
+continual and sad lamentations of our few remaining sick men.</p>
+
+<p>Thus lost wanderers on the ocean, unable to help ourselves, it
+pleased God, on the 11th of June, 1593, that we arrived at
+Beerhaven in Ireland, and ran the ship there on shore. The Irish
+helped us to take in our sails, and to moor the ship so as to
+float her off next tide; for which slender aid it cost the
+captain ten pounds, before he could get the ship into a state of
+safety. Thus, without men, sails, victuals, or other means, God
+alone guided us into Ireland. Here the captain left the master
+and three or four more of the company to keep the ship; and
+within five days after our arrival, he and some others got a
+passage in a fishing-boat to Padstow in Cornwall. For the
+merciful preservation of this our small remnant, and our
+restoration to our country, be all honour and glory to God, now
+and for ever.--<i>Amen</i>.</p>
+
+<h2><a name="chapter4-4" id="chapter4-4">CHAPTER IV.</a></h2>
+
+<p>VOYAGE OF OLIVER VAN NOORT ROUND THE WORLD IN
+1598--1601.[67]</p>
+
+<hr align="center" width="50%">
+<p>INTRODUCTION.</p>
+
+<p>The inhabitants of the United Provinces of the Netherlands,
+after their separation from the Spanish monarchy, found
+themselves extremely at a loss for means to supply the expences
+of the long and vigorous war in which they were engaged for the
+defence of their liberties. This gave them the more uneasiness,
+as their great enemy, Philip II. carried on the war against them,
+more by the length of his purse than the force of his arms, and
+because the riches, of the Spanish monarchy were derived from
+sources of commerce and colonization that were prohibited to
+them, even if they had submitted themselves to the yoke of Spain.
+The sense, therefore, of these difficulties, joined to the vast
+advantages they were likely to reap by overcoming them, induced
+the government and people of Holland to prosecute the advancement
+of trade in general with the greatest vigour, and particularly to
+establish a commercial intercourse with the East and West Indies,
+the great sources of wealth to their tyrannical oppressor and
+enemy, from whom they had revolted.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 67: Harris, I. 31.--Two editions of this
+voyage were published in Dutch, both in folio; one at Rotterdam
+without date; and the other at Amsterdam in 1602. <i>Bib, Univer.
+des Voyages</i>, I. 115.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Among other inducements to this course of proceeding, they
+were not a little encouraged by the progress made by their
+neighbours, the English; seeing that even private persons, and
+with a small force, had been able to disquiet the Spaniards
+exceedingly; and had at the same time acquired great riches to
+themselves. Another cause of attempting expeditions like the
+present, was their having failed in their first scheme of finding
+a new passage to the East Indies, than that with which the
+Spaniards and Portuguese were acquainted, which they had often
+and unsuccessfully endeavoured to explore by the north-east, with
+great hazard and expence. Their first voyages to the East Indies
+proving more fortunate even than they themselves had expected,
+they were tempted to proceed farther, and to distress their
+enemies likewise in the South Sea, which hitherto had only been
+done by the English.</p>
+
+<p>The distressed states of Holland, however, were not hitherto
+so powerful at sea as to attempt acting offensively against the
+king of Spain on that element; but contented themselves with
+giving power and authority to any of their subjects who were
+inclined to venture upon expeditions of this nature, at their own
+risk and expence, so as at the same time to join their own
+private advantage with the public good, by fitting out squadrons
+for these distant and hazardous voyages. This policy, though
+arising in some measure from necessity, was conducted with such
+wisdom and address, that the king of Spain soon found himself
+more distressed by the armaments of the Dutch merchants, than by
+all the forces of the United States. This is a plain proof; that
+the surest way to render any government powerful, is to interest
+the people in general in its support: For this raises such spirit
+among them, and is followed by such unexpected consequences, as
+no art or force can withstand.</p>
+
+<p>In the beginning of the year 1598, some eminent merchants in
+the united provinces, among whom were Peter van Bueren, Hugo
+Gerritz, and John Bennick, formed a design of sending some stout
+ships through the Straits of Magellan into the South Sea, to
+cruise against the Spaniards; to which design they were chiefly
+instigated by the reports of many English seamen, who had served
+in these parts, under Drake, Candish, and Hawkins, and other
+experienced officers. The purpose of the present expedition, was
+to cruise upon the coasts belonging to the Spaniards, and to
+force the enemy of peace to bear the expences of those wars in
+which he obliged other people unwillingly to engage. They also
+proposed by it to gain nautical experience, if it should be found
+practicable to continue the voyage by the Philippines, and so
+round by the Cape of Good Hope, circumnavigating the globe.</p>
+
+<p>As the success of this important enterprise greatly depended
+upon the choice of a <i>general</i>, for so in those days the
+Dutch, and most other nations, denominated the commander in
+chief, whether by sea or land, the adventurers took great care to
+provide themselves with a person of established character, both
+in regard to conduct and courage. The person chosen on this
+occasion was Oliver van Noort, a native of Utrecht, in the flower
+of his age, and who had a strong passion to acquire glory. To him
+they communicated their scheme, which he readily embraced; and
+their terms being speedily adjusted, they proceeded to fit out
+two stout vessels one named the Maurice, and the other the Henry
+Frederick, together with two yachts, railed the Concord and the
+Hope, the whole being manned by 248 persons of all ranks and
+conditions.</p>
+
+<p>Of this small fleet, Oliver van Noort was appointed admiral,
+and sailed in the Maurice; James Claas van Ulpenda was captain of
+the Henry Frederick, with the title of vice-admiral, Captain
+Peter van Lint commanded the Concord, and John Huidecoope was
+captain of the Hope. These were all men of experience in sea
+affairs, and capable of maintaining their authority on all
+occasions, and were all interested in the success of the voyage,
+by means of shares in the outfit; a proper precaution then, and
+ever since usual among the Dutch in all such cases, to prevent
+their expeditions from suffering by private views, or want of
+hearty concurrence in their officers: which, among other nations,
+is often the cause of failure, and for which this method is,
+perhaps, the only cure.</p>
+
+<p>All things being in readiness, and crews provided for all the
+vessels, the proprietors presented a petition to the Board of
+Admiralty of Rotterdam, upon which all who were concerned were
+summoned to compeer: and, on the 28th June, 1598, the rules and
+regulations for the government of all concerned in this
+expedition, having been previously drawn up by the company of
+adventurers, revised by the admiralty and approved of by the
+Stadtholder, Prince Maurice, were publicly read over to them, and
+every man sworn to obey them. These sailing orders are called
+Artykelbreefs by the Dutch, and are never suffered to be put in
+force, till they have received this kind of sanction from the
+state, when they become the law of the voyage, to which all
+concerned are subject, and must undergo the penalties contained
+in them, for breach of any of the articles. This circumstance is
+worthy of remark and imitation by other nations, and is a strong
+proof of the care paid by that republic to the commercial welfare
+of its citizens.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION I.</p>
+
+<p><i>Narrative of the Voyage</i>.</p>
+
+<p>On the 13th of September, 1598, the Maurice and Concord sailed
+from the port of Gocree; and, being joined by the Henry Frederick
+and Hope, from Amsterdam, the whole fleet proceeded for Plymouth,
+where their English pilot, Mr Mellish, who had been the companion
+of Sir Thomas Candish in his navigations, was to take in his
+apparel and other necessaries. They sailed from Plymouth on the
+21th September, the wind then blowing a fresh gale at N.E. Next
+morning, being out of the channel, they perceived that the boat
+belonging to the vice-admiral was missing, in which were six men,
+which gave them considerable uneasiness, insomuch that they had
+some intention of returning to Plymouth in search of them. They
+met, however, with an English privateer, which soon made them
+alter their intentions; by assuring them that their men had run
+away with the boat, and could not be recovered, on which they
+resolved to proceed on their voyage. At this time considerable
+jealousies sprung up, respecting the capacity and conduct of the
+vice-admiral, which were soon increased by his losing his other
+boat and one man, and which could not be recovered by all their
+care. This carelessness occasioned much murmuring and discontent
+among the seamen, which the vice-admiral daily increased by his
+haughty behaviour, and by his contempt for advice, which no man
+needed more than he.</p>
+
+<p>The 4th October, they met a small fleet of English, Dutch, and
+French ships, returning from Barbary, from whom they had accounts
+of a terrible pestilence then raging in that country, which had
+swept away 250,000 persons in a very short space of time. The
+6th, they came between the islands of Teneriff and Grand Canary,
+and on the 3d November, they came in sight of the coast of
+Guinea. December 4th they were off Cape Palma, in lat. 3&deg; 30'
+N.[68] and on the 10th came in sight of Princes Island, in lat.
+1&deg; N.[69] Sending their boats ashore to this island, carrying
+a flag of truce, they were met on the shore by a negro, bearing a
+similar flag, from whom they demanded a supply of provisions,
+which was accorded on fair and friendly terms; but, while
+settling the terms, they were suddenly surprised by a party from
+an ambush, which cut off several of them, one of whom was Mr
+Mellish, their English pilot. The Portuguese pursued them to
+their boats, which they briskly attached, killing the admiral's
+brother, and had nearly captured the whole party. In revenge of
+this outrage, it was determined in a council of war to attack the
+castle; but finding this enterprize too hazardous, they contented
+themselves with burning all the sugar ingenios. After this
+exploit, having provided themselves with fresh water, they set
+sail on the 17th.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 68: Cape Formosa is probably here meant,
+which is in 4&deg; 18' N.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 69: The latitude of Princes Island is
+1&deg; 40' N.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>They reached Cape Gon&ccedil;alves on the 25th, where the wind
+usually blows from the land all night, and from the sea all day.
+Here they found two Dutch ships, which informed them of the loss
+of Captain Sleerhagen and most of his company at Princes Island;
+as also of the voyage of Peter Verhagen, who had entered the
+river of Congo, and had afterwards buried thirty-eight of his
+company at Cape Gon&ccedil;alves, whence he had gone some time
+before their arrival to Annobon.</p>
+
+<p>January 1st, 1589, they passed the island of Annobon, in lat.
+2&deg; S. [1&deg; 30' S.] and on the 28th of that month had the
+sun in their zenith. The 5th of March they reached Cape St Thomas
+on the coast of Brazil, in lat. 22&deg; S. [21&deg; 15']. The 6th
+they passed Cape Fair, and came that evening to Cape Frio, and on
+the 9th reached Rio de Janeiro. After some loss of time, and
+having several of their men cut off by their grand enemy the
+Portuguese, they went to the island of St Sebastian, in lat.
+24&deg; S. where the comforts of a good harbour, plenty of fresh
+water, and an abundant supply of wood gave them much
+satisfaction; but no fruits were to be had at that season.</p>
+
+<p>They encountered a heavy storm on the 14th of March, by which
+the vice-admiral and the Hope were separated from the admiral,
+but they met again on the 17th. The scurvy now began to make
+rapid progress among the company; which, together with the
+approach of the antarctic winter, determined them to put in at St
+Helena. Missing that island, they next endeavoured to fall in
+with the island of Ascension, or some other island where they
+might procure refreshments; but their hard fortune brought them
+to a very barren and desolate island in the lat. of 20&deg; 30'
+S.[70] where they could procure no refreshments, except a few
+fowls called <i>Malle Mewen,</i>[71] which they knocked down with
+clubs.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 70: The island of Trinidad is nearly in the
+indicated latitude.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 71: These were probably young unfledged
+sea-gulls, called in provincial English <i>Malls, Maws</i>, and
+<i>Mews,</i> not unlike the Dutch names in the text; where
+perhaps we ought to read Malle <i>or</i> Mewen.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Soon leaving this inhospitable place, they put to sea again,
+and on the 1st of June, while endeavouring to reach Ascension,
+they got back to the coast of Brazil. Not being suffered to land
+any where on the continent, they sailed to the isle of Santa
+Clara, an island of about a mile round, and as much from the
+continent, in lat. 21&deg; 15' S. This island afforded little
+else beyond herbs, but they found here a sour fruit resembling
+plums, which cured all their sick men in fifteen days. They
+sailed from thence for Port Desire, in lat 47&deg; 40' S. on the
+16th June, and reached that place on the 20th September, after
+enduring much bad weather. They procured abundance of penguins
+and fish, at an island three miles south from Port Desire;
+killing to the number of 50,000 penguins, which are nearly as
+large as geese, and procured a vast quantity of their eggs, by
+which their people were greatly refreshed, and the sick restored.
+Going up the river on the 5th October, and landing in the
+country, they found animals resembling stags, together with
+buffaloes, and ostriches in great numbers, and even found some of
+the nests of these birds, in which were as far as nineteen eggs.
+The 20th, the admiral went ashore to view the country, leaving
+orders with those who were left in charge of the boats, not to
+leave them a moment on any account: But they, having a mind also
+to see the country, ventured upon a short ramble, when they fell
+into an ambush of the savages, who slew three of their number,
+and wounded the fourth. These savages were very tall portly men,
+painted, and armed with short bows, and arrows headed with
+stone.</p>
+
+<p>Leaving Port Desire on the 29th September, they reached Cape
+Virgin at the entrance into the Straits of Magellan on the 24th
+November. The land here is low and plain, and from the whiteness
+of the coast somewhat resembles the chalk cliffs of England in
+the channel. In many attempts to enter the straits, they were
+beaten back by tempests of wind, accompanied by rain, hail, and
+snow. They lost their anchors, and broke their cables, and
+sickness, together with contention, which is worse than any
+disease, were added to their other calamities. All these so
+retarded the progress of the voyage, that it was near fifteen
+months after leaving Holland before they could make their way
+into the straits. They observed the land to trend from Cape
+Virgin to the S.W. and the mouth of the straits to be fourteen
+miles distant from that cape, and half a mile wide.[72] On the
+25th November, they saw some men on two islands near Cape Nassau,
+who shook their weapons at the Hollanders, as in defiance. The
+Dutch landed, and pursued the savages into a cave, which they
+bravely defended to the last man, and were all slain on the spot.
+Going now into this dark cave, the Dutch found the women and
+children of the slain savages, when the mothers, expecting
+present death to themselves and their infants, covered their
+little ones with their own bodies, as if determined to receive
+the first stab. But the Dutch did them no other injury, except
+taking away four boys and two girls, whom they carried on ship
+board.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 72: These must necessarily be Dutch miles,
+15 to the degree, each equal to nearly 4.66 English miles. By the
+mouth of the straits in the text, must be understood what is
+called the Narrows of the Hope.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>From one of these boys, after he had learnt the Dutch
+language, they had the following intelligence. The larger of the
+two islands was named <i>Castemme</i> by the natives, and the
+tribe inhabiting it <i>Enoo</i>. The smaller island was called
+<i>Talche</i>. Both were frequented by great numbers of penguins,
+the flesh of which served the natives as food, and their skins
+for cloathing. Their only habitations were caves. The
+neighbouring continent abounded in ostriches, which they also
+used as food. The natives of these dreary regions were
+distinguished into tribes, each having their respective
+residences. The <i>Kemenetes</i> dwelt in <i>Kaesay;</i> the
+<i>Kennekin</i> in <i>Karamay</i>; the <i>Karaiks</i> in
+<i>Morina</i>: All these are of the ordinary size, but
+broad-breasted, and painted all over; the men tying up their
+pudenda in a string, and the women covering their parts of shame
+with the skins of a penguin; the men wearing their hair long,
+while that of the women was kept very short; and both sexes going
+naked, except cloaks made of penguin skins, reaching only to the
+waist. There was also a fourth tribe, called <i>Tirimenen</i>,
+dwelling in <i>Coin</i>, who were of a gigantic stature, being
+ten or twelve feet high,[73] and continually at war with the
+other tribes.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 73: This absurdity might be pardoned in the
+ignorant savage boy, who knew neither numerals nor measures; but
+in the grave reporters it is truly ridiculous, and yet the lie
+has been renewed almost down to the close of the eighteenth
+century.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 28th November, the navigators went over to the continent,
+or north side of the straits, seeing some whales at a distance,
+and observed a pleasant river, about which were some beautiful
+trees with many parrots. Owing to this fine prospect, they called
+the mouth of this river <i>Summer Bay</i>. The 29th they made
+sail for <i>Port Famine</i>, where the land trends so far to the
+south, that the main land of Patagonia and the islands of Terra
+del Fuego seemed, when seen afar off, to join together. They
+found here no remains of the late city of King Philip, except a
+heap of stones. The straits are here four miles wide, having
+hills of vast height on both sides, perpetually covered with
+snow. At Port Famine they cut down wood to build a boat, and
+found the bark of the trees to be hot and biting like pepper.[74]
+Not finding good water at this place, and indeed doubting if it
+were Port Famine, they proceeded onwards, and found a good river
+two miles farther west on the 1st December. Next day they doubled
+Cape Froward, with some danger, on account of bad anchorage and
+contrary winds.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 74: The Wintera aromatica, the bark of
+which is called Winter's bark, said to have been first discovered
+by Captain Winter in 1567, on the coast of Terra Magellanica. The
+sailors employed this bark as a spice, and found it salutary in
+the scurvy.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Passing four miles beyond this cape, they anchored in a large
+bay, where was a plant resembling sneezwort, which they found
+serviceable in the scurvy; also another plant, which rendered
+those who eat of it distracted for a time. They here fell in with
+two ships belonging to the fleet under Verhagen, which had been
+driven back out of the South Sea, one of which was commanded by
+Sebaldt de Weert, who told them he had been five months in the
+straits, and had only thirty-eight remaining out of 110 men, and
+not being able to bear up against the storms in the South Sea,
+had been forced to put in here, while the rest of the fleet under
+Verhagen held on their course.[75] These ships wished to have
+joined the expedition under Van Noort, but were forced to remain
+in the straits for want of provisions, which the others could not
+spare. They afterwards got back to Holland on the 13th July,
+1600.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 75: The voyage of Verhagen, or so much of
+it rather as relates to the adventures of Sebaldt de Weert,
+follows the present voyage of Van Noort in the Collection by
+Harris, vol. I. pp. 37-44; and is, therefore, retained in the
+same situation on the present occasion.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Van Noort and his ships left this bay on the 2d January, 1600,
+directing their course for Maurice bay, which they found to
+extend far to the eastwards, and to receive several rivers, the
+mouths of which were filled with vast quantities of ice, which
+seemed never to melt. It was now near midsummer of this southern
+clime, and the ice was so thick that they could not find its
+bottom with a line of ten fathoms. The land here seemed a
+congeries of broken islands, yet appearing like one continued
+mass, owing to the height of the mountains. They were here much
+distressed by hunger and continual rains, and two of their men
+were slain by the savages, while gathering muscles, which formed
+their chief subsistence. After weathering many storms in
+<i>Meniste</i> bay, and having several encounters with the
+savages, they set sail on the 17th, and were driven into Penguin
+bay, or Goose bay, three miles from Meniste bay, and receiving
+its name from the vast multitude of penguins found there. At this
+place, James Claas van Ulpenda, the vice-admiral, was arraigned
+before a council of war, for various breaches of the articles
+sworn to before proceeding on the voyage. Having a fair trial,
+and sufficient time allowed him for his defence, he was condemned
+to be turned ashore in the straits, with a small supply of
+provisions, and allowed to shift for himself among the wild
+beasts and more savage inhabitants, which sentence was
+accordingly executed, so that he doubtless soon fell a prey
+either to hunger or the natives, who are implacable enemies to
+all strangers.</p>
+
+<p>They entered another bay on the 1st February, which they
+called Popish bay, probably owing to some cross erected on its
+shore, and in which they were exposed to much danger. On the
+27th, they saw at a distance a huge mountain of ice in Penguin
+bay. The 28th they passed Cape Deseado, or Desire, into the South
+Sea, bidding adieu to the many dismal prospects of the Straits of
+Magellan. Their company, originally 248 men, was now reduced to
+147, but was soon still farther lessened by losing company of the
+Henry Frederick, which never rejoined. Waiting for that ship in
+vain till the 12th March, they sailed to the island of Mocha on
+the coast of Chili, in lat. 38&deg; 22' S. and six miles [twenty
+English] from the continent. This island is remarkable by a high
+mountain in the middle, which is cloven at the top, and whence a
+water-course descends into the vale land at its foot. They here
+bartered knives and hatchets with the natives for sheep, poultry,
+maize, <i>bartulas</i>,[76] and other fruits. The town consisted
+of about fifty straw huts, where the Dutch were regaled with a
+sour kind of drink, called <i>cici</i>, made of maiz steeped in
+water, which is the favourite drink of the Chilese at their
+feasts. Polygamy is much practised among these people, who buy as
+many wives as they can afford to maintain; so that a man who has
+many daughters, especially if they be handsome, is accounted
+rich. If one man kill another, he is judged by the relations of
+the deceased, as they have no laws or magistrates among them, so
+that the murderer may sometimes buy off his punishment by giving
+a drinking-bout of <i>cici</i>. Their cloathing is manufactured
+from the wool of a large kind of sheep, which animal they also
+employ to carry burdens. They would not sell any of these, but
+parted freely with another kind, not very different.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 76: This probably means battatas or
+potatoes, a native production of Chili.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>From thence they went to the island of St Mary, in lat.
+37&deg; S. eighteen miles [ninety-five English] from Mocha, where
+they fell in with a Spanish ship carrying lard and meal from
+Conception to Valdivia in Araucania, which they chased and took.
+The pilot of this ship informed them that they would not be able
+to return to the island of St Mary, owing to the south wind, and
+that two Spanish ships of war were waiting for them at Arica.
+Upon this information they resolved to sail for Valparaiso, and
+by that means quite lost all chance of being rejoined by the
+Henry Frederick, which might otherwise have got up with them.
+Besides, they concluded that the missing ship had failed to find
+St Mary's isle, owing to its being wrong placed in the map of
+Plancius, in lat. 38&deg; S. which error they themselves had
+fallen into, had they not been set right by the observations of
+Mr Mellish. They were farther confirmed in the resolution of not
+returning to the island of St Mary, by hearing of the misfortune
+which had there befallen Simon de Cordes, who was there butchered
+with twenty-three of his men, after being invited on shore in a
+friendly manner by the Indians, owing to the treachery of the
+Spaniards endeavouring to get possession of his two ships, and
+sending intelligence to Lima and all about the country of the
+arrival of the Dutch in these seas, with a list of their ships,
+and the names of all their commanders. For these reasons they
+proceeded to Valparaiso, where they took two ships and killed
+some Indians, but all the Spaniards escaped on shore. Valparaiso
+is in lat. 35&deg; 5' S. And about eighteen miles inland, [100
+English miles] is the town of St Jago, abounding in red wine and
+sheep. They kill these animals merely for the sake of their
+tallow, with which alone they load many vessels. Here they
+received letters from the captain of the Flying Hart, one of the
+squadron under Verhagen, who had been treacherously captured by
+the Spaniards; owing, as he alleged, to the wrong placement of
+the island of St Mary in the map, by which he had been
+misled.</p>
+
+<p>At Valparaiso they intercepted some letters giving an account
+of the wars in Chili between the Spaniards and the Indians, who
+it seems were in rebellion, had sacked the town of Valdivia,
+putting vast numbers of Spaniards to the sword, and carrying off
+many captives. They burnt the houses and churches, knocking off
+the heads of the popish images, crying, "Down go the gods of the
+Spaniards." They then crammed the mouths of these images with
+gold, bidding them satisfy themselves with that, for the sake of
+which their votaries had committed so many barbarous massacres of
+their nation. They afterwards laid close siege to the city of
+Imperial, and had almost starved the Spanish garrison into a
+surrender. The valiant Indians who undertook this enterprise were
+about 5000, of whom 5000 were cavalry, 100 were armed with
+muskets, and 70 had corslets, all of which were plunder they had
+taken from the Spaniards. They so mortally hate the Spaniards,
+that they rip up the breasts of all they overcome, tearing out
+their hearts with their teeth, and they delight to drink their
+favourite liquor from a cup made of a Spaniard's skull.</p>
+
+<p>These Indians [the Araucans] are for the most part very stout,
+and skilful soldiers, and commit the management of all their
+military affairs to the direction of one supreme general, whose
+orders are implicitly obeyed. Their method of election to this
+high dignity is very singular; for he who carries a certain log
+of wood on his shoulders the longest, and with the smallest
+appearance of weariness, is saluted general by the army. In this
+trial several carried the log four, five, and six hours; but at
+length one carried it twenty-four hours on end, and this person
+was now general. The whole of Chili, from St Jago to Valdivia, is
+one of the most fertile and most delightful countries in the
+world. It abounds in all kinds of cattle and fruit, has many rich
+gold mines, and its climate is so sweet and salubrious as to
+exclude the use of medicine, being health and life in itself.</p>
+
+<p>They entered the bay of Guasco[77] on the 1st April, where
+they remained till the 7th. The 11th they came into a large bay,
+named <i>Moro Gorch</i>, in lat. 18&deg; 30' S. ten miles from
+which is <i>Moro Moreno</i>, from which the shore runs to Arica,
+and all this coast, up to the hill of St Francis, is very much
+subject to south winds, though the adjoining seas have the winds
+variable and uncertain. On the 20th the whole air was darkened by
+an <i>Arenal</i> which is a cloud of dust, and so thick that one
+cannot see a stone's throw. These are raised by the wind from the
+adjoining shore, and are very common in these parts. The 25th
+they were within view of the famous city of Lima in Peru. At this
+time they learnt the value of the treasure of which the Spaniards
+had deprived them, in the ships they took on the coast of Chili.
+Nicholas Peterson, the captain of one of these prizes, acquainted
+Van Noort that he had been informed by a negro of a great
+quantity of gold having been on board the ship, as he believed to
+the amount of three tons, having helped to carry a great part of
+it on board. On this information the admiral closely examined the
+Spanish pilot, who at first denied all knowledge of any gold; but
+another negro having corroborated the information, with some
+farther circumstances, the pilot at last owned that they had on
+board fifty-two chests, each containing four arobas of gold, and
+besides these 500 bars of the same metal, weighing from eight to
+ten and twelve pounds each; all of which, together with what
+private stock belonged to any of the company, the captain had
+ordered to be thrown overboard in the night, when first chased,
+amounting in the whole to about 10,200 pounds weight of gold;
+and, from its fineness, worth about two million pieces of eight,
+or Spanish silver dollars. Upon this the admiral ordered the ship
+and all the prisoners to be searched, but there was only found a
+single pound of gold dust, tied up in a rag, in the breeches
+pocket of the Spanish pilot. The prisoners owned that all this
+gold was brought from the island of St Mary, from mines
+discovered only three years before; and that there were not more
+than three or four Spaniards on that island, and about 200
+Indians, only armed with bows and arrows.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 77: Perhaps Huasco in lat. 28&deg; 27' S.
+or it may possibly have been Guacho, in 25&deg; 50'
+S.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 5th September they came in sight of the Ladrones, and came
+on the 16th to Guam, one of these an island of about twenty Dutch
+miles in extent, and yielding fish, cocoa-nuts, bananas, and
+sugar canes, all of which the natives brought to the ships in a
+great number of canoes. Sometimes they met 200 of these canoes at
+one time, with four or five men in each, bawling out <i>hiero,
+hiero,</i> meaning iron; and often in their eagerness they run
+their canoes against the ships, overturning them and losing all
+their commodities. These islanders were a sly subtle people, and
+honest with good looking after; for otherwise, they would sell a
+basket of cocoa-nut shells covered over with a small quantity of
+rice, as if full of rice. They would also snatch a sword from its
+scabbard, and plunge instantly into the water, where they dived
+like so many ducks; and the women were as roguish as the men,
+stealing as impudently, and diving as expertly to carry off their
+prizes.</p>
+
+<p>The 17th of September they sailed for the Philippines; and on
+the 20th they met with ice, though then only in the latitude of
+3&deg; N.[78] On the 16th October they came to Bayla bay, in a
+very fertile land, at which place they procured abundance of all
+kinds of necessaries for their ships, by pretending to be
+Spaniards. The Spaniards, who are lords here, make the Indians
+pay an annual capitation tax, to the value of ten single rials
+for every one above twenty years of age. The natives of these
+islands are mostly naked, having their skins marked with figures
+so deeply impressed, [<i>tatooed</i>] that they never wear out.
+Being discovered to be Dutch, but not till they had gained their
+ends, they sailed for the Straits of Manilla, all the coasts near
+which appeared waste, barren, and rocky. Here a sudden squall of
+wind from the S.E. carried away some of their masts and sails,
+being more furious than any they had hitherto experienced during
+the voyage. The 23d some of the people went ashore, where they
+eat palmitoes and drank water so greedily, that they were
+afterwards seized with the dysentery. The 24th they entered the
+straits, sailing past an island in the middle, and came in the
+evening past the island of Capul, seven miles within the straits,
+near which they found whirlpools, where the sea was of an
+unfathomable depth, so far as they could discover.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 78: This surely is an error for 18&deg;,
+Guam being in lat. 18&deg; 20' N. yet even here, the fact of
+meeting ice so far within the tropic is sufficiently
+singular.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>They now crowded sail for Manilla, which is eighty miles from
+Capul, but wanted both a good wind to carry them, and good maps
+and a skilful pilot to direct them to that place. The 7th
+November they took a junk from China, laden with provisions for
+Manilla. The master of this junk told them there were then at
+Manilla two great ships, that come every year from New Spain, and
+a Dutch ship also which had been brought from Malacca. He said
+also that the town of Manilla was walled round, having two forts
+for protecting the ships, as there was a vast trade to that place
+from China, not less than 400 junks coming every year from
+Chincheo, with silk and other valuable commodities, between
+Easter and December. There were also two ships expected shortly
+from Japan, laden with iron and other metals, and provisions. The
+15th they took two barks, laden with hens and hogs, being part of
+the tribute to the Spaniards, but became food to the Dutch, who
+gave them a few bolts of linen in return.</p>
+
+<p>They passed the islands of <i>Bankingle</i> and
+<i>Mindoro</i>, right over against which is the island of
+<i>Lou-bou</i>. at the distance of two miles, and between both is
+another small island, beside which there is a safe passage for
+ships. The island of Luzon is larger than England and
+Scotland,[79] and has a numerous cluster of small islands round
+about it; yet is more beholden to trade for its riches, than to
+the goodness of its soil. While at anchor, in 15&deg; N. waiting
+for the ships said to be coming from Japan, Van Noort took one of
+them on the 1st December, being a vessel of fifty tons, which had
+been twenty-five days on her voyage. Her form was very strange,
+her forepart being like a chimney, and her furniture
+corresponding to her shape; as her sails were made of reeds, her
+anchors of wood, and her cables of straw. Her Japanese mariners
+had their heads all close shaven, except one tuft left long
+behind, which is the general custom of that country. The 9th,
+they took two barks, one laden with cocoa wine and arrack, and
+the other with hens and rice.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 79: Luzon is certainly a large island, but
+by no means such as represented in the text.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 14th of December they met the two Spanish ships returning
+from Manilla to New Spain, on which a very sharp engagement took
+place. Overpowered by numbers, the Dutch in the ship of Van Noort
+were reduced to the utmost extremity, being at one time boarded
+by the Spaniards, and almost utterly conquered; when Van Noort,
+seeing all was lost without a most resolute exertion, threatened
+to blow up his ship, unless his men fought better and beat off
+the Spaniards. On this, the Dutch crew fought with such desperate
+resolution, that they cleared their own ship, and boarded the
+Spanish admiral, which at last they sunk outright. In this action
+the Dutch admiral had five men slain, and twenty-six wounded, the
+whole company being now reduced to thirty-five men. But several
+hundreds of the Spaniards perished, partly slain in the fight,
+and partly drowned or knocked in the head after the battle was
+over. But the Dutch lost their pinnace, which was taken by the
+Spanish vice-admiral; and this was not wonderful, considering
+that she had only twenty-five men to fight against five hundred
+Spaniards and Indians.</p>
+
+<p>After this action, Van Noort made sail for the island of
+Borneo, the chief town of which island is in lat. 5&deg; N. while
+Manilla, the capital of Lu&ccedil;on, is in lat. 15&deg; N. On
+the way to Borneo, they passed the island of <i>Bolutam</i>,
+[Palawan or Paragua,] which is 180 miles in length from N.E. to
+S.W. They came to Borneo on the 26th December, putting into a
+great bay, three miles in compass, where there was good
+anchorage, and abundance of fish in a neighbouring river, and the
+fishermen always ready to barter their fish for linen. Van Noort
+sent a message to the king, desiring leave to trade; but
+suspecting them to be Spaniards, he would come to no terms till
+his officers had examined them with the utmost attention, after
+which they had trade for pepper with a people called
+<i>Pattannees</i>, of Chinese origin. Both these and the native
+Borneans were fond of Chinese cotton cloth, but the linen from
+Holland was a mere drug, and quite unsaleable. In the mean time,
+the Borneans laid a plot to surprise the ship; for which purpose,
+on the 1st January, 1601, they came with at least an hundred
+praws full of men, pretending to have brought presents from the
+king, and would have come on board the ship; but the Dutch,
+suspecting their treachery, commanded them to keep at a distance
+from the ship, or they would be obliged to make them do so with
+their shot, on which the Borneans desisted.</p>
+
+<p>Borneo is the largest of all the islands in the East-Indies;
+and its capital, of the same name, contains about 300 houses, but
+is built in a dirty marshy soil, or rather in the water, so that
+the inhabitants have to go from one house to another in their
+praws. The inhabitants all go constantly armed, from the noble
+down to the fisherman; and even the women are of so martial a
+disposition, that on receiving an affront, they instantly revenge
+it, either with a dagger or a javelin. This a Dutchman had nearly
+proved to his cost; for having offended one of these viragoes,
+she set upon him with a javelin, and had surely dispatched him,
+if she had not been prevented by main force. They are Mahometans,
+and so very superstitious, that they would rather die than eat of
+swine's flesh, nor will they keep any of these animals about
+them. The better sort have a cotton garment from the waist down,
+with a turban on their heads; but the common people go entirely
+naked. They continually chew betel and areka, which is also a
+common practice in many other parts of India.</p>
+
+<p>On the 4th January, four Borneans came to the ship, intending
+to have cut the cables, that she might drive on shore and become
+their prey; but the Dutch fortunately discovered them, and drove
+them away with shot, when they left their praw behind, which the
+Dutch took, to serve instead of their own boat, which they had
+lost at the Philippines. Seeing no hope of any profitable trade
+at this place, they now left it, intending for Bantam, not much
+pleased either with the country or the people. The day after
+leaving Borneo, they met a junk from Japan bound for Manilla,
+which informed them of a great Dutch ship being forced by
+tempests into Japan, all her company having died by sickness and
+famine except fourteen. They came first to <i>Bongo</i>, in lat.
+34&deg; 40' N. [Bungo in about lat. 33&deg; N.] whence the
+emperor of Japan ordered them to remove to <i>Atonza</i>, in lat.
+36&deg; 30' N. [Osaka in lat. 34' 55' N.] They alleged that they
+were allowed to trade, and to build a new ship, with liberty to
+dispose of themselves afterwards as they pleased. From this
+account, it was not doubted that this was the admiral of
+Verhagen's fleet;[80] and dismissing the Japanese vessel, they
+passed the line a third time, and proceeded for Bantam, in no
+little fear and danger, for want of an experienced pilot and good
+charts.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 80: This was the ship in which William
+Adams sailed as pilot, as related on a former occasion, being the
+Hope, commanded by James Mahu, one of five ships from Rotterdam.
+We have already had occasion to meet with two of these in the
+Straits of Magellan.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 16th they took a junk belonging to Jor or Johor, in which
+they procured an experienced and skilful pilot, who came in good
+time to save them from shipwreck, which they had otherwise most
+probably suffered in these dangerous seas, so thick set with
+shoals and islands on every side, with which they were entirely
+unacquainted; and besides, they were now reduced to one anchor,
+and one solitary cable almost worn out. The 28th they came to
+Jortan in the island of Java, where they had news of several
+Dutch ships being at Bantam. The city of Jortan consists of about
+1000 houses built of timber, and its king commands over a
+considerable portion of that end of the island, and had lately
+conquered <i>Balambuan</i>, a small island S.E. from Jortan. The
+people in these parts are said to be Mahometans; yet, as pagods
+are still in use, they seem to retain some mixture of the old
+Indian superstitions, or at least some remnant of paganism is
+tolerated among the common people. Their chief priest at this
+time was an old man, said to be an hundred and twenty years of
+age, who had a large household of wives, who fed the old man with
+their milk.</p>
+
+<p>Sailing past Jortan, they saw a large Portuguese ship of 600
+tons, sticking fast among the shoals. She was bound for Amboina,
+on purpose to have engrossed all the trade of that place; at
+least such was the report of the Portuguese; but Van Noort
+strongly suspected she had been sent out to cruize for the
+purpose of intercepting him. He was, therefore, the less
+concerned for her misfortune, and the less careful in assisting
+her crew, originally of between six and seven hundred men, many
+of whom were still on board, and in great danger of perishing.
+The 5th of February, they passed the straits between
+<i>Balambuan</i> and <i>Bally</i>, leaving Java on the N.E.[81]
+On the 11th, finding themselves in lat 13&deg; S. they directed
+their course for the Cape of Good Hope. On the 18th, having the
+sun vertical at noon, their latitude was 11&deg; 20' S. and here
+a calm began which lasted eleven days. The 11th March they were
+in lat. 24&deg; 45' S. and in 28&deg; 10' S. on the 24th.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 81: This is an obvious error, as the
+Straits of Bally are at the <i>east</i> end of Java, which they
+must consequently have left on the N.W. of their
+course.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 19th of April, having been considerably retarded by cross
+winds and calms, they were under the necessity to lessen their
+allowance of water. At night of the 24th they observed light, as
+of a fire, on land, about four miles to the N.W. although they
+reckoned themselves 200 miles from the cape, and were not aware
+of having approached any other land. The 25th, being calm
+weather, they were enabled to mend their sails, and at night
+another fire was observed; and in the morning of the 26th they
+saw land. The 3d May they saw land between the east and north,
+about six miles off, resembling the end of an island, by which
+they reckoned themselves near the cape, and now shaped their
+course for the island of St Helena, where they arrived on the
+26th. They here refreshed themselves with fish and some flesh,
+and laid in a supply of wood and water; but found goats and fowls
+hard to be got, and could not procure any oranges.</p>
+
+<p>Leaving St Helena on the 30th May, they crossed the line for
+the fourth time on the 14th of June; and on the 16th met a fleet
+of six Dutch ships, under Admiral Heemskirk, bound for India.
+These had fought with thirteen Spanish ships near the island of
+Sal, and had lost their pinnace and vice-admiral; the former
+having been taken by the Spaniards, and the latter having parted
+company. The 8th July they were in lat. 27&deg; N. when they fell
+in with considerable quantities of the sea-weed called
+<i>saragossa</i>. By the 13th they were in lat. 32&deg; 30' N.
+after which they had a calm of fifteen days, the sea being all
+covered with weeds. The 22d they had to go upon short allowance
+of bread, and that too much worm eaten. August 1st, being in lat.
+40&deg; N. they passed the island of Flores, forty-five miles to
+the westward, by their estimation. They met three ships belonging
+to Embden on the 18th, from whom they procured bread and flesh,
+in exchange for rice and pepper; and from whom they learnt that
+they were so near England, that they might expect to see the
+Lizard next day. About noon of the 26th August, 1601, they
+arrived in safety before the city of Rotterdam, where they were
+received with the utmost joy, on their return from so long and
+perilous a voyage, which had occupied three years, bating
+eighteen days.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION II.</p>
+
+<p><i>Voyage of Sebald de Weert, to the South Sea and Straits of
+Magellan, in 1598</i>.[82]</p>
+
+<p>"Though not a circumnavigation, it seems necessary to give an
+account of this voyage of Sebald de Weert, by way of supplement
+to that of Oliver de Noort; because De Weert was fitted out with
+the intention of sailing by the Straits of Magellan to India, and
+because it is difficult to find so good a description of these
+famous straits as he has given. De Weert was one of the best
+seamen in Holland, and lived to distinguish himself afterwards by
+many more successful enterprises; and I persuade myself the
+reader will be pleased to see the firmness of an able commander,
+struggling against a long series of misfortunes. This has always
+been esteemed one of the best written, and most curious of all
+the Dutch voyages, and is therefore given at
+large."[83]--<i>Harris</i>.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 82: Harris, I. 36.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 83: So far Harris; but on the present
+occasion several trivial and minute circumstances are omitted or
+abbreviated.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>SECTION 1. <i>Incidents of the Voyage from Holland to the
+Straits of Magellan</i>.</p>
+
+<p>The fleet fitted out for this expedition consisted of the Hope
+of 500 tons, with 130 men, commanded by James Mahu, admiral; the
+Love or Charity of 300 tons, and 110 men, commanded by Simon de
+Cordes, vice-admiral; the Faith of 320 tons, and 100 men, of
+which Gerard van Beuningen was captain; the Fidelity of 220 tons,
+with 86 men, captain Jurian Buckholt; and a yacht of 150 tons and
+112 men, called the Merry Messenger, captain Sebald de Weert.
+These five ships were well provided with all manner of
+provisions, cannon, small arms, ammunition, money, merchandise,
+and stores necessary for a long voyage; and the pilot on whose
+knowledge and experience they chiefly depended, was an Englishman
+named William Adams,[84] besides whom there were three other
+Englishmen on board the admiral.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 84: Of the adventures of this person in
+Japan, we have formerly had occasion to give an account in vol.
+VIII. p. 64, of this Collection, preceded by a brief abstract of
+the voyages of Schald de Weert.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The fleet sailed from the road of Goeree in the Maese on the
+27th June, 1598; but, owing to contrary winds, had to remain at
+anchor in the Downs on the coast of England, till the 15th July.
+The wind being then fair, they set sail on that day, and on the
+19th were on the coast of Barbary. Towards the end of August,
+they arrived in the harbour of St Jago, one of the Cape de Verd
+islands, where they remained till the 10th September, although
+the climate was very unhealthy, and the pilots, particularly Mr
+Adams, remonstrated against continuing there; by which the
+officers were so much offended, that they resolved never more to
+call the pilots to council, which seems to have been the source
+of all their subsequent misfortunes, and of that restless spirit
+of mutiny and discontent, which possessed the seamen in this
+fleet.</p>
+
+<p>In the afternoon of the 11th September, they were off the
+desert island of Brava, and the bottom being rocky, so that they
+could not anchor, they stood off and on all night, and coasting
+along next morning they found some fresh water, which was hard to
+be got, as the ships could not come to anchor, on account of a
+bad bottom. The boats, however, of Captains Beuniugen and
+Buckholt, went ashore with empty casks, which they filled and
+brought on board, though then night and the ships under way.
+Captain de Ween went ashore in a small sandy bay, and looking
+about for fresh water, he saw some Portuguese and negroes coming
+towards him, who told him the French and English ships used to
+get fresh water near that place, but remained always under sail.
+They said also, that no refreshments were to be had at this
+island, but these might be had in the island of Fuego. After the
+departure of the islanders, de Weert discovered four or five
+ruinous small huts, the door of one being walled up, which he
+found full of maize. On this discovery, he remained there with
+three men, lest the Portuguese might carry off the maize in the
+night, and sent some others in the boat to give notice to the
+admiral of this discovery. Fortunately a small vessel belonging
+to the bishop of St Thomas, taken by the Dutch at Praya, arrived
+in the bay, to which de Weert removed all the maize. He also took
+two female sea tortoises, in which were above 600 eggs, of which
+they made many good meals. The Portuguese and negroes, finding
+the Dutch busied in carrying away their maize, came down the
+mountain, making a great noise; but de Weert, having two fusils,
+fired at them and made them retire.</p>
+
+<p>On the return of de Weert, he found the admiral very sick, and
+a council assembled in the Hope. He in the first place advised
+them to remain no longer at the Cape Verd islands, and then
+resigned his command to the vice-admiral, de Cordes. On advising
+with the other captains, and learning the quantity of water in
+each ship, de Cordes gave orders that such as had most should
+give part to the others, and that the allowance of provisions and
+water should be diminished, and as fresh water was not to be
+expected for three or four months, they were directed to gather
+rain-water when that could be had. The greatest part of the men
+in the admiral's ship being sick, two or three of them were
+removed into each of the other ships, in exchange for sound men.
+The fleet sailed from Brava on the 15th September, and on the 22d
+a signal was made from the admiral for the other captains. They
+found the admiral, James Mahu, beyond hope of recovery; and that
+night he and his supercargo, Daniel Restan, both died. He was of
+a mild and gentle disposition, honest, careful, diligent, and
+very kind to the seamen, and was much lamented by the whole
+fleet. Opening the letters of the directors of the expedition,
+which were directed to be opened in such a case, de Cordes was
+appointed admiral, and Benningen vice-admiral; Sebald de Weert
+being promoted to the command of the Faith, and Dirke Gernitsz
+China to that of the yacht. These alterations did not please the
+seamen, who were attached to their former commanders.</p>
+
+<p>By the 4th October, the scurvy raged much among the seamen,
+especially in the Hope, on which de Cordes ordered a day of
+prayer to be observed in the fleet, to implore the mercy of God
+and a happy voyage. They were then in the lat. of 1&deg; 45' S.
+At length the scurvy increased so much in the Hope, that the
+admiral had not men enough to work his ship, and it was resolved
+to steer for some island where fresh provisions might be
+procured. They steered accordingly for Annobon, where they hoped
+to get fresh meat and oranges. Towards night, the admiral, who
+sailed in the van, fired a gun as a signal of seeing land, though
+all the pilots then thought the land at the distance of 100
+leagues. They accordingly approached the land, and anchored on
+the coast of <i>Manicongo</i>, in lat. 3&deg; S.[85] They here
+lost company of the small ship belonging to St Thomas, in which
+were eleven sound men, and some thought she had deserted, while
+others thought she had run aground: But they afterwards found she
+had gone to Cape Lope Gonzalves, where the men quitted her, going
+aboard the ship of Baltazar Musheron, which was bound to
+America.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 85: The latitude in the text falls near
+Point Palmas, on the coast of Yumba, in what is called the
+Kingdom of Congo. Mayumba bay, perhaps the Manicongo of the text,
+is in lat. 4&deg; 30' S.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>After several ineffectual attempts to procure refreshments for
+their men on the coast of Africa and the island of Annobon, they
+put to sea on the 3d January, 1599, from that island, with the
+intention of sailing direct for the Straits of Magellan. The 22d
+they passed the shelves and rocks on the coast of Brazil, called
+the <i>Abrolhos</i>. The 9th March, one of the seamen in the
+vice-admiral's ship was hanged, for repeatedly breaking open the
+cupboard belonging to the cook, and stealing bread. About this
+time, the sick beginning to recover, got such good appetites that
+their allowance was not sufficient. The 12th, being near the Rio
+Plata, the sea appeared as red as blood, and some of the water
+being drawn up was found full of small red worms, that leaped out
+of it like fleas.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 2. <i>The Fleet passes through the Straits of Magellan
+into the South Sea, and is forced to return</i>.</p>
+
+<p>The 6th of April, the fleet got into the Straits of Magellan,
+and towards evening cast anchor under the smaller of the two
+Penguin isles, fourteen leagues within the mouth of the straits.
+They here saw vast numbers of those birds called <i>plongeons</i>
+or divers, because they dive into the water to catch fish. They
+killed there ten or fourteen of them with sticks, and might have
+killed as many as would have served the whole fleet, but would
+not lose the opportunity of a fair wind. The 9th they proceeded
+through the straits; and next day the admiral sent fifty men on
+shore, to look for inhabitants or cattle, but after travelling
+three leagues along shore, they found nothing. They arrived in a
+fine bay on the 15th, twenty-one leagues from the mouth of the
+straits, called <i>Muscle bay</i> by the English, because of the
+great quantities of muscles found there, and here they provided
+themselves abundantly with fresh water and wood. The 17th they
+sailed between two rocky shores, so close and so high that they
+hardly thought to have got through. The mountains on both sides
+were covered with snow. On the 18th, they cast anchor in a bay on
+the north side of the straits, in lat. 54&deg; S. called <i>Great
+bay</i>, having good anchorage on fine sand. In this bay there
+are three small islands, the least of which is farthest east.</p>
+
+<p>In these parts, there grow great quantities of trees,
+resembling bay trees, but somewhat higher, the bark of which is
+very bitter, and has a hot taste like pepper.[86] They here found
+abundance of muscles, some of which were a span long, and when
+boiled, the fish of three of them weighed a pound. The wind being
+contrary, they lay here at anchor till the 23d of August,[87]
+without taking the sails from the yards, to be ready to sail on a
+change of wind. In the mean while they suffered much from cold,
+in so much that they lost above an hundred men, among whom was
+Captain Buckholt, who was succeeded by Baltazar de Cordes. Storms
+were so frequent and violent during this time, that the ships
+could not ride quietly at anchor, and the seamen were forced to
+be continually at work to keep them right. They were also forced
+to go often on shore, in rain, snow, and hail, to get in fresh
+water, wood, muscles, and such other food as they could find, by
+which they were greatly fatigued. The scarcity of victuals was so
+great, and the climate so severe, that they were almost starved
+with hunger and cold, and their appetites so insatiable, that
+they devoured roots or any thing else they could find, raw and
+uncooked. Most of the seamen had no watch-coats or other warm
+cloathing, to enable them to support the fatigue of watching and
+their daily labour, having made no provision of such things, as
+they believed themselves bound to warm climes. To remedy this
+evil, the general ordered cloth to be distributed among them.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 86: In Harris these are erroneously called
+<i>Pimento</i>, but they must have been the <i>Wintera
+aromatica</i>. The Pimento, or <i>Myrtus Pimenta</i>, is a native
+of the warm regions of America and the West India islands,
+producing Pimento, All-spice, or Jamaica
+pepper.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 87: This date, here anticipated, refers to
+the day when they afterwards set sail.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>It was found that many of the seamen, when at their meals,
+were in use to sell their victuals to others at high prices, and
+afterwards satisfied their hunger with raw muscles and green
+herbs, which occasioned them to fall into dropsies and other
+lingering sickness, of which several died: For this reason, the
+captains and other officers were ordered to be present at all
+their meals, to see and oblige them to eat their allowances.</p>
+
+<p>The 7th May the vice-admiral was sent, with two boats, to an
+island opposite Great bay, to catch sea-dogs.[88] He found there
+seven small boats or canoes, with savages on board, who were of a
+reddish colour with long hair, and, as well as he could observe,
+seemed <i>ten or eleven feet high</i>. On seeing the Dutch boats,
+the savages went on shore and threw many stones at the Dutch, so
+that they did not venture to land. The savages then took courage,
+and came towards them in their canoes; and coming within
+musket-shot, the vice-admiral made his men give them a general
+discharge, by which four or five of the savages were slain, and
+the rest so frightened that they escaped again on shore. They
+then pulled up some trees, which appeared afar off to be a span
+thick; but the vice-admiral chose to let them alone, and returned
+to the ships. The 26th of May, as some seamen were on shore,
+looking for muscles, roots, and herbs, and were dispersed,
+expecting no danger, a number of savages fell upon them suddenly,
+killed three of them, whom they tore in pieces, and wounded two,
+who were rescued by the admiral. All these savages were naked,
+except one, who had the skin of a sea-dog or seal about his
+shoulders. They were armed with wooden javelins, which they threw
+with great strength and dexterity. The points of these javelins
+were like cramp-irons, tied to the shafts with the guts of
+sea-dogs, and would run so deep into the flesh, that it was
+almost impossible to get them out.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 88: Seals are probably here
+meant.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>While the fleet lay in this bay, the admiral ordered his
+long-boat to be put upon the stocks, to be enlarged and altered
+into a pinnace, which was named the Postillion, and the command
+of her was given to the second pilot of the Hope. Having no
+provisions for making broth, Captain de Weert landed on the 27th
+July, in order to catch seals; and while he was ashore, so great
+a storm arose that he was obliged to remain two days and two
+nights, before he could get back to his ship, and caught nothing.
+After enduring great hardships in this <i>Green bay</i>,[89] and
+which the Dutch named the Bay of de Cordes, they set sail on the
+23d of August, having the wind at N.E. but next day the weather
+became so calm, that they were obliged to put into a great bay on
+the south side of the straits. Here, to perpetuate the memory of
+so dangerous and extraordinary a voyage into these straits, to
+which no nation had hitherto sent so many or such large ships,
+the general instituted a new order of knighthood, of which he
+made his six principal officers knights. They bound themselves by
+oath, never to do or consent to any thing contrary to their
+honour or reputation, whatever might be the dangers or
+extremities to which they were exposed, even death itself; nor to
+do or suffer to be done any thing prejudicial to the interests of
+their country, or of the voyage in which they were now engaged.
+They also solemnly promised, freely to expose their lives against
+all the enemies of their nation, and to use their utmost
+endeavours to conquer those dominions whence the king of Spain
+procured so much gold and silver, by which he was enabled to
+carry on the war against their country. This ceremony was
+performed ashore on the eastern coast of the straits, in as
+orderly a manner as the place and occasion would permit, and the
+order was named of <i>The Lion set free</i>, in allusion to the
+Belgic lion, the cognizance of their country, which they
+professed to use all their endeavours to free from the Spanish
+yoke. After this ceremony, a tablet was erected on the top of a
+high pillar, on which the names of the new-made knights were
+inscribed, and the bay was named the <i>Bay of Knights</i>.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 89: This seems the same formerly named
+Great bay.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Leaving this bay on the 28th of August, they put into another
+bay a league farther on, where they were again becalmed. The
+admiral at this time gave orders to Captain de Weert to go back
+in his boat to the Bay of Knights, to remove the tablet to a more
+convenient situation. When about to double the point of the bay
+on this errand, de Weert saw eighty savages sitting on the shore,
+having eight or nine canoes beside them; and, as soon as the
+savages saw the boat, they set up a dismal noise, inviting the
+Dutch to land, by means of signs. But, having only a small number
+of men, de Weert turned back towards the ships; on which the
+savages ran across the woods along shore, always hallowing, and
+making signs for the Dutch to land. When the general was informed
+of this adventure, he dispatched three boats well armed on shore,
+but the savages were not to be seen, though they had left their
+marks behind them, having dug up the interred body of a Dutchman,
+and left his body on the ground, barbarously disfigured. On going
+to the knights tablet, the Dutch also found it had been broken by
+the savages.</p>
+
+<p>Early in the night of the 3d September, they got out from the
+Straits of Magellan into the South Sea, with a fair wind, and
+continued their voyage to the W.N.W. with the wind at N.E. till
+the 7th, having all that time fine weather. This day, however,
+the sea began to swell and rise so high, that the vice-admiral
+had to lie to and hoist his boat on board, which was likewise
+done by the Fidelity. While de Weert was sailing directly in the
+wake of the admiral, who led the fleet, an accident happened on
+board the yacht, which had the wind of the Fidelity, which
+obliged both the Faith and the Fidelity, the former being de
+Weert's ship, to furl their sails, and lie to for assisting the
+yacht. The admiral continued his course, thinking that the other
+ships continued to follow him, and that the fog prevented them
+from being seen by the watch. The vice-admiral also was obliged
+to furl his sails shortly after, the fog being so thick as to
+prevent them from seeing each other, though very near.</p>
+
+<p>On the 8th the two yachts lost sight of the ships, but these
+three kept company all that day; and next day the whole fleet
+rejoined to their great joy. After joining, Derick Geritz sent
+the Postillion to the admiral, to request the assistance of his
+carpenters; but they were sick, and those from the Faith and
+Fidelity went on board the yacht. This proved afterwards a
+serious loss to these ships, as they never got their carpenters
+back. The wind shifted all of a sudden, and the sea became so
+rough and stormy that the yacht had to furl her sails, as was
+done by the vice-admiral, who was ahead of the Faith, and by the
+Fidelity. In the ensuing night the yacht and vice-admiral made
+sail again, without advertising the other two ships by signal, so
+that they continued to lie to. When day broke next morning,
+Captains Baltazar de Cordes and Sebalt de Weert, of the Fidelity
+and Faith, were extremely troubled at not seeing any of the other
+ships. De Weert, who was now the senior captain, was also much
+troubled by the unprovided state of his ship, having no master,
+only two old pilots, and a very small number of seamen, mostly
+sick and weak through the cold and damp weather, though they kept
+a fire burning night and day.</p>
+
+<p>The N.E. wind became so violent on the 16th September, that
+the two ships were every moment in danger of sinking. The gallery
+of the Faith was rent open above an inch, and the sea broke so
+violently over the Fidelity, that her men were almost constantly
+up to their knees in water. She likewise sprung a leak, owing to
+which they were forced to keep her pumps constantly going day and
+night, yet could hardly keep her afloat. At last, after much
+search, the leak was found and stopt. In this deplorable
+situation these two ships remained for twenty-four hours,
+<i>spooning</i> under bare poles. The seamen also became much
+dissatisfied, though allowed two ounces of dried fish a day to
+each man, with a reasonable quantity of biscuit. But they were
+much discontented with this scanty allowance, having been used in
+the straits to fill themselves with muscles, of which they could
+not now brook the want, so that the captains had much ado to
+pacify them.</p>
+
+<p>In the night of the 26th September they fell in with the land
+to the north of the straits by mistake, thinking themselves to
+have been twenty leagues from the land; and in the morning the
+Faith was in great danger, as the wind drifted her towards the
+coast, on which were two rocks, which they avoided with the
+utmost difficulty. The Fidelity, which was a considerable way in
+front, had discovered the rocks in time, and had easily given
+them a wide birth. They were only three leagues from the straits
+when they fell in with the land; and as the westerly wind now
+blew so hard that they were unable to bear up against it, the two
+captains now resolved to regain the straits, and to wait there in
+some safe road or bay for a fair wind, when they did not doubt of
+rejoining the other ships, as it had been agreed to wait at the
+island of St. Mary on the coast of Chili for two months, in case
+of separation. About evening, therefore, of the 27th September,
+they arrived at the southern point of the straits' mouth, and
+were drifted by the current six or seven leagues within the
+straits, where they anchored in a very good road.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 3. <i>Incidents during their second Residence in the
+Straits of Magellan</i>.</p>
+
+<p>From the 27th to the 30th of September they had tolerably good
+weather, but the wind then began to blow so furiously from the
+S.W. that they were forced to drop three anchors a-piece to keep
+them from being driven on shore. As the summer of these antarctic
+regions was now approaching, they were in hopes of fair weather;
+yet during two months that they remained in the straits, they
+scarcely had a fair day in which to dry their sails. For twenty
+days that they remained in this bay, to which they gave the name
+of the <i>Bay of Trouble</i>, they endured incredible hardships,
+being forced to go on shore daily in search of a few birds,
+which, with muscles and snails found upon the rocks, formed their
+sorry subsistence. Being unable to subsist any longer in that
+bay, they set sail on the 18th October, and found a better bay
+about a league farther within the straits. The 22d they were
+nearly destroyed by a violent storm, but the weather became calm
+next day. The constant employment of the seamen was to go on
+shore in search of muscles for their sustenance at low water, and
+when the tide was in to fetch wood and fresh water, so that they
+had no time to dry themselves, though they kept up a good fire
+continually. In short, during the whole nine months spent in
+these straits, now and formerly, they scarcely had an opportunity
+once to dry their sails, so frequent were the returns of rain and
+storms. The men also were exposed to wet, cold, and high winds,
+which kept them continually uncomfortable, and always at work.
+The seamen now began to murmur, alleging there would not be
+enough of biscuit for their return to Holland, if they remained
+here any longer. Having notice of this, de Weert went into the
+bread-room, as if to examine their store; and, on coming out, he
+declared, with a cheerful countenance, there was enough of
+biscuit and other provisions for eight months, though in fact
+there was not more than sufficient for four.</p>
+
+<p>At length, on the 2d December, the wind changed to the N.E.
+and they immediately weighed anchor, but could not get out into
+the South Sea, owing to whirlwinds rising from between the high
+hills and the bottom of the bay. The Faith was driven at one time
+so near the shore that a person might have stepped ashore from
+her gallery, and had certainly been lost if the wind had not
+abated. Next day, the storm being over, the two ships got out of
+Close bay, as they called it, with the ebb, but they never
+afterwards anchored together, and that day they cast anchor at
+the distance of a league from each other. The 8th of December
+they had a more violent storm than ever, which lasted two days,
+and during which the waves rose sometimes higher than the masts.
+The storm abating on the 10th, de Weert went in his boat,
+intending to go aboard the Fidelity; but on doubling the point
+which lay between them, was overwhelmed with grief to see no
+ship, nor any signs of shipwreck, so that he thought she had
+foundered. Going next day farther towards a gulf, he was rejoiced
+to see a mast behind a low point, where he found the Fidelity,
+with which ship he had to leave his small boat to assist in
+fishing for her anchors and cables, which she had lost in the
+late storm. He then took his leave, returning to his own ship,
+little dreaming he had taken his last farewell of Captain de
+Cordes.</p>
+
+<p>The 10th, going ashore in the boat for victuals as usual, and
+having doubled a point, they saw three canoes with savages, who
+went immediately on shore, and scrambled up the mountains like
+monkeys. The Dutch examined the canoes, in which were only a few
+young divers, some wooden grapnels, skins of beasts, and other
+things of no value. Going on shore to see if the savages had left
+any thing, they found a woman and two children, who endeavoured
+to run away, but was taken and carried on board, shewing few
+signs of fear or concern. She was of a middle size and reddish
+colour, with a big belly, a fierce countenance, and her hair
+close cut as if shaven, whereas the men wear their hair long. She
+had a string of snail-shells about her neck by way of ornament,
+and a seal's skin on her shoulders, tied round her neck with a
+string of gut. The rest of her body was quite naked, and her
+breasts hung down like the udders of a cow. Her mouth was very
+wide, her legs crooked, and her heels very long.</p>
+
+<p>This female savage would not eat any of their boiled or
+roasted meats, so they gave her one of the birds they had found
+in the canoes. Having pluckt off the long feathers, she opened it
+with a muscle shell, cutting in the first place behind the right
+wing, and then above the stomach. After that, drawing out the
+guts, she laid the liver a short time on the fire, and eat it
+almost raw. She then cleaned the gizzard, which she eat quite
+raw, as she did the body of the bird. Her children eat in the
+same manner, one being a girl of four years of age, and the other
+a boy, who, though only six months old, had most of his teeth,
+and could walk alone.[90] The woman looked grave and serious at
+her meal, though the seamen laughed heartily at her strange
+figure, and unusual mode of feeding. She afterwards sat down on
+her heels like an ape; and she slept all gathered up in a heap,
+with her infant between her arms, having her breast in his mouth.
+After keeping her two days on board, de Weert set her on shore,
+giving her a gown and cap, with necklace and bracelets of glass
+beads. He gave her also a small mirror, a knife, a nail, an awl,
+and a few other toys of small value, with which she seemed much
+pleased. He cloathed the boy also, and decorated him with glass
+beads of all colours; but carried the girl to Holland, where she
+died. The mother seemed much concerned at parting with her
+daughter, yet went into the boat without resistance or noise. She
+was carried to the shore, a league west from the ship, to a place
+which she pointed out, where the seamen found a fire and some
+utensils, which made the seamen believe that the savages had run
+away on seeing the boat.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 90: They had no means to ascertain his age,
+and must have concluded him only six months old from his small
+size; but from his teeth and walking alone, he was more likely to
+have been two years old, and his diminutive size was probably
+occasioned by the miseries of the climate, and wretchedness of
+every kind to which these outcasts of nature are
+subjected.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>When the boat returned, a new storm arose, during which the
+waves often overtopped the masts, and tossed the ship so
+violently that they momentarily expected she would have been
+overset or split in pieces; but, by the blessing of God, she got
+out of this bay, to which they gave the name of <i>Unfortunate
+Bay</i>. Next day they cast anchor towards evening in the channel
+of the straits, but finding the anchor had no buoy attached, and
+the weather being too violent to allow of supplying one, they had
+again to weigh, and put before the wind, and at length got into
+the bay of Cordes, fourteen or fifteen leagues farther eastwards,
+near the middle of the straits. In this passage they kept as near
+as possible to the south side of the channel, that they might be
+seen by the Fidelity, and even fired a gun off the mouth of a bay
+in which they supposed she lay, as a signal, to which they
+imagined that they heard another gun in answer from their
+consort, and continued their course in the full belief of being
+followed by the Fidelity. In this passage the strength of the
+wind drove them so fast, that they had to fasten their boat
+astern with two strong hawsers to preserve her, and to diminish
+the velocity of their course; but the heavy rolling waves broke
+both hawsers, and they lost their boat, by which they were
+reduced to great difficulty, having now no means of getting on
+shore in search of provisions.</p>
+
+<p>Next day, being the 16th December, they saw a boat making
+towards them from the westwards, which occasioned various
+conjectures; but at length turned out to belong to the fleet of
+Van Noort. This unexpected meeting gave great joy to the seamen,
+and the men in this boat were received with much respect by de
+Weert. They were all in perfect health and vigour; and, among
+other things respecting their voyage, told of having caught above
+2000 birds at the great Penguin Island. This intelligence made
+the sailors in the Faith extremely anxious to get there, and
+several of them were bold enough to tell Captain de Weert, that
+it was necessary they should go there, where they might as well
+wait for a fair wind as in any other place, and besides, that it
+was only a league out of their way. But de Weert declared he
+would on no account part company from Van Noort. This general
+came in person next day to visit de Weert; and the day following,
+being the 18th December, the whole fleet joined him. The wind
+changing to S.W. on the 22d, they all set sail; and after
+proceeding two or three hours, de Weert requested the loan of a
+boat from general Van Noort, with three or four men, that he
+might go before to direct Captain de Cordes to get ready to sail
+with the fleet; but he could not find the Fidelity.</p>
+
+<p>The Faith was now grown very foul, and unable consequently to
+keep up with the fleet; for which reason, being off the Bay of
+Knights, where she met the ebb current, she was forced to go in
+there. The 23d she was again opposed by adverse currents in a
+narrow channel, and unable to follow the other ships. The 24th
+they tried again, but were unable to get round a point, behind
+which the fleet of Van Noort lay at anchor; and finding it
+impossible to double that point with the present wind, de Weert
+resolved to wait till it changed, that he might not fatigue his
+men by persisting in vain attempts. But, although the wind was
+contrary, Van Noort proceeded farther on, in search of a more
+secure anchorage, by which de Weert lost sight of the fleet,
+though not far off, in consequence of an intervening high point
+of land.</p>
+
+<p>Despairing of being able to rejoin the fleet of Van Noort, and
+finding it impossible to subsist his men without a boat, de Weert
+ordered the pieces of one which were in the hold to be taken out,
+that they might be put together. This was on the 25th December;
+but having the wind at north next day, he attempted to get next
+day into a small bay, a league farther on than the Bay of
+Knights, in which the boat might be more conveniently built: but
+the violence of the wind forced him back into the Bay of Cordes,
+five leagues farther to the east. Here, on the 26th and 27th,
+they endured so great a storm, that the seamen began to murmur
+again, as having been a whole fortnight without procuring any
+muscles, having nothing to subsist upon in all that time but a
+scanty allowance of biscuit and oil. Seeing their insolence, de
+Weert called them into the cabin, giving them good words, and
+even desired their advice as to what was best to be done in this
+difficult conjuncture. Some were of opinion, that they should
+proceed to Rio de la Plata in the boat, abandoning their ship,
+and give themselves up to the Spaniards. Others were for going to
+St Helena in quest of provisions. The pilot, John Outgetz, was
+for going to Guinea or the Gold Coast of Africa, where he was
+known, having made five voyages there. None of these opinions
+pleased de Weert, who told them, that he could not come to any
+determination without the consent of Captain de Cordes.</p>
+
+<p>In the mean time, the boat being now ready, de Weert went
+ashore in her on the 1st January, 1600, to get her properly
+caulked. In the afternoon, having doubled the southerly point,
+two boats were seen, which belonged to Van Noort, who had put
+back to the Bay of Knights in search of the Faith. Next day, Van
+Noort returned back, promising to make search for the Fidelity.
+De Weert also sent his boat, with his ensign and one of his
+pilots, on the same search, and gave them a letter for Van Noort,
+requesting a supply of biscuit sufficient for two months. The
+boat came back on the 5th with the general's answer, saying, That
+he was not sure of having enough of biscuit for his own men,
+neither knew he how long he might be at sea, and therefore could
+not spare any. This answer afflicted de Weert; and having now no
+hopes of being again rejoined by de Cordes, he resolved to
+proceed for Penguin Island, to lay in a large store of these
+birds, and then to follow the fleet of Van Noort, if the wind
+proved fair. Before sailing, he wrote a letter for de Cordes,
+which he left buried at the foot of a tree, and nailed a board to
+the tree, on which was painted, <i>Look at the bottom of this
+tree</i>.</p>
+
+<p>On the 11th January, 1600, de Weert made sail for Penguin
+Islands, and next day came to anchor under the smaller of these
+islands, where he immediately landed with thirty-eight men in
+tolerable health, leaving the pilots and other seamen on board.
+Leaving three men to keep the boat, the rest fell to killing
+birds, of which there were a prodigious quantity in the island.
+In the mean time the wind grew nigh and the sea very stormy, by
+which the boat was thrown so high upon the rocks, and so filled
+with water, that the boat-keepers were unable to get her off, or
+to heave out the water, and so much tossed by the surges that
+they expected every minute to have her stove to pieces. In this
+extremity the seamen were almost in despair. Without the boat it
+was impossible for them to return on board. They had no
+carpenters, no tools, and no wood, with which to repair their
+boat, as there was no wood whatever on the island. They were all
+wet, as they had waded into the water as high as their shoulders
+to draw the boat from the rocks, and they were starving with
+cold. Fortunately, at low water, the boat being aground, they
+recovered an axe and some tools, with a few nails, which revived
+their hopes of being able to get back to the ship. But as it was
+impossible to get the boat drawn ashore before night for repairs,
+they were obliged to pass the night on shore in the open air,
+where they made a fire of some broken planks from the boat, and
+eat some birds half-roasted, without bread, and with so little
+water that they could not quench their thirst.</p>
+
+<p>As soon as day appeared on the 13th, every one went cheerfully
+to work, in repairing that side of the boat which was most
+injured, which was quite refitted before night. Next day the
+other side was repaired; and having loaded her with 450 penguins,
+they went aboard on the evening of the 14th, having been three
+days on shore. While they were catching penguins on the 12th,
+they found a savage woman, who had hid herself in one of the
+holes. At the time when Van Noort landed here, there was a band
+of savages on the island, by whom two of his men were slain; in
+revenge of which Van Noort had destroyed them all but this woman,
+who was then wounded, and who now shewed her wounds to the
+seamen. She was tall and well-made; her hair cut quite close to
+her head, and her face painted, having a kind of cloak on her
+body, made of the skins of beasts and birds, neatly sewed
+together, and reaching down to her knees, besides which she had a
+skin apron; so that the savages on the north side of these
+straits appear to be more modest in their apparel than those on
+the south side. By the dead body of one of these savages, who had
+been slain by Van Noort, it appeared that the men wore their hair
+very long; besides which his head was ornamented with fine
+feathers, and he had others round his body. They use bows and
+arrows, the arrows being very neatly pointed with hard flints. De
+Weert gave this woman a knife, who informed him by signs, that he
+would find a greater plenty of birds in the larger island. They
+left her where she was, though she requested, by signs, to be
+transported to the continent. They now went to the larger island,
+in order to get a larger supply of birds.</p>
+
+<p>The old penguins weigh from twelve to sixteen pounds, and the
+young ones from eight to twelve. They are black on the back, with
+white bellies, and some have a white ring round their necks, so
+that they are almost half white half black. Their skin is much
+like that of a seal, and as thick as the skin of a wild boar. The
+bill is as long as that of a raven, but not so crooked; the neck
+short and thick, and the body as long as that of a goose, but not
+so thick. Instead of wings, they have only two fins or pinions,
+covered with feathers, which hang down as they walk upright, and
+by means of which they swim with great strength. They have black
+feet, like those of a goose, and they walk upright, with their
+fins or pinions hanging down like the arms of a man, so that when
+seen at a distance they look like so many pigmies. They seldom
+come ashore except in the breeding season, and then they nestle
+together, three or four in one hole, which they dig in the downs
+as deep as those of rabbits, and the ground is so full of them,
+that one is liable almost at every step to sink into them up to
+the knees. They feed entirely on fish, yet their flesh has not
+that rank fishy taste which is so common in sea-fowl, but is
+extraordinarily well tasted. <i>Penguin</i>, the name of this
+bird, is not derived from the Latin <i>pinguedo</i>, fatness, as
+the Dutch author of this voyage would have it, and therefore
+spells the word <i>pinguin</i>. Neither is the conjecture of the
+French editor of this voyage better founded, who supposes they
+were so called by the English from a Welsh word signifying
+<i>white-head</i>; and from which it has been argued that these
+savages are descended from a colony of Britons, supposed to have
+settled in America, about the year 1170, under Madoc, prince of
+North Wales. The truth is, the name of penguin was given to these
+birds by the savages.</p>
+
+<p>The ship reached the greater Penguin Island on the 15th
+January, that island being a league from the small one; and here
+they found such abundance of these birds, that many ships might
+have been amply supplied by them instead of one, for they
+procured above 900 of them in less than two hours. Next day,
+while busy in salting the penguins, a heavy storm came on from
+the N.W. by which the ship was driven out of sight of the island,
+and to so great a distance that de Weert lost hopes of getting
+back to it again; on which he reduced the men to an allowance of
+four ounces of biscuit daily. They got back however on the 17th;
+but, when going to land, a fresh storm came on with such
+violence, that they resolved to weigh anchor and get out of the
+straits: but the sea was so rough that they durst not attempt
+this, lest the capstan should fly round. At last the anchor lost
+its hold; and to save the ship from being cast away, they had to
+cut the cable and make sail, being in great sorrow for the loss
+of their anchor, as they now had one only remaining.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 4. <i>Voyage from the Straits to Holland</i>.</p>
+
+<p>This sad accident constrained de Weert to quit the straits,
+which he did on the 21st January, having a S.W. wind, chopping
+sometimes round to E.N.E. having now spent nine months in those
+seas, in a dangerous and dismal condition. In the afternoon of
+that day, having got into the main sea, they allowed their boat
+to go adrift, being rendered quite unserviceable by the late
+storms. The 24th in the morning, they found three small islands
+to windward, not marked in any maps, which they named the
+<i>Sebaldine Islands</i>. These are in lat. 50&deg; 40' S. sixty
+leagues from the continent,[91] and contained abundance of
+penguins; but they could not catch any, having no boat. On the
+1st February, a seaman was condemned to be hanged, for having
+stolen a bottle of wine and a bag of rice from the hold; and,
+when just about to be turned off, he was pardoned at the
+intercession of the crew, on condition that they should not again
+beg the life of any one found guilty of stealing provisions. In
+the evening of the 3d the same person was found drunk, and
+consequently must have again stolen wine, and was convicted of
+having stolen both wine and victuals, for which he was now
+hanged, and his body thrown into the sea.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 91: In vol. VIII. p. 68, note 3, these
+Sebaldines have been already noticed as the north-westermost of
+the Falklands.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>They passed the line on the 15th March; and their wine being
+now reduced to one pipe, that was reserved for the use of the
+sick, and no more was allowed to the crew. The 28th they saw Cape
+Monte on the coast of Guinea, when the captain was much
+displeased with the pilots, for having steered a different course
+from what he had directed. The seamen also were discontented with
+the captain, who would not land, because he had no boat, and only
+one anchor: but, being satisfied that he had biscuit enough for
+four months, at a quarter of a pound daily to each man, and two
+ounces of rice, he made the ship's head be turned to seawards. In
+the night of the 1st April, they discovered some fire at a
+distance, thinking it were a ship; but when day broke, it was
+known to have been on the shore, towards which they had been
+insensibly driven by the current. By this time their whole stock
+of penguins was expended, and they must have been reduced to a
+very small allowance of biscuit and rice for their whole
+sustenance, but during five weeks that they steered along the
+coast of Africa, making very little progress in consequence of
+calms, they caught abundance of many kinds of fish, both large
+and small. Being uncertain how long they might remain on the
+coast, and fearing the want of provisions, de Weert ordered a
+small boat to be built by the pilot, who had been bred a
+ship-carpenter. This boat was finished in twelve days; but they
+had no need of her, for the wind became fair on the 24th April,
+and they made sail in the direction of the A&ccedil;ores.</p>
+
+<p>The 3d May was held as a day of thanksgiving and prayer; and
+on the 21st they passed the tropic of Cancer, catching every
+where such abundance of fish, that, besides supplying their
+immediate wants, they salted and dried a considerable store. On
+getting near the A&ccedil;ores, they found no more fish, and had
+to use those they had dried and salted; and by this food many
+distempers were produced among them, particularly the scurvy. The
+men became as it were parched within, and so thirsty that they
+could not be satisfied with drink; and their bodies were covered
+all over with red spots, like a leprosy. The 7th, the captain was
+informed that some of the men had stolen biscuit; but he durst
+not punish the guilty, as they were the only vigorous and healthy
+men in the ship, and nothing could be done without them.</p>
+
+<p>The ship got into the English Channel on the 6th July, when
+the captain landed at Dover to purchase an anchor and cable; but
+not being able to procure any, he sailed again that night. On the
+13th, while off the mouth of the Maese, waiting the tide, and
+having a pilot on board, the wind came suddenly contrary, and
+forced him into the channel of Goeree, where a seaman died, being
+the sixty-ninth who died during the voyage. The thirty-six who
+remained alive gave thanks to God, who had preserved them through
+so many dangers, and had vouchsafed to bring them home.</p>
+
+<h2><a name="chapter4-5" id="chapter4-5">CHAPTER V.</a></h2>
+
+<p>VOYAGE OF GEORGE SPILBERGEN ROUND THE WORLD, IN
+1614--1617.[92]</p>
+
+<p>SECTION I.</p>
+
+<p><i>Narrative of the Voyage, from Holland to the South
+Sea</i>.</p>
+
+<p>As the directors of the Dutch East-India Company were still
+anxious to make trial of the route to India by the Straits of
+Magellan, they appointed George Spilberg, or Spilbergen, to make
+this attempt in 1614, as admiral of six ships, the Great Sun, the
+Full Moon, the Huntsman, and a yacht called the Sea-mew, all
+belonging to Amsterdam, with the Eolus of Zealand, and the
+Morning-star belonging to Rotterdam. Spilbergen was a person of
+established reputation for knowledge and experience, and was
+allowed to chuse most of his officers. The ships were all
+equipped in the best possible manner, and were ready a little
+after Midsummer; but as the admiral was of opinion that they
+would arrive in the Straits of Magellan at an improper season, if
+they sailed so early, the directors thought proper to postpone
+the commencement of the voyage till the month of August.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 92: Harris, I. 44. Callender, II.
+191.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The fleet sailed accordingly from the Texel on the 8th of
+August, 1614, with a strong gale at S.E. Without any remarkable
+accident, except several severe storms, they reached the latitude
+of Madeira on the 3d October. Proceeding thence by the Canaries,
+they lost sight of these islands on the 10th, and came in view of
+Brava and Fogo, two of the Cape de Verd islands, on the 23d.
+Having happily passed the <i>Abrolhos</i>, dangerous shoals
+running far out to sea, on the 9th December, they discovered the
+coast of Brazil on the 12th of that month. On the 19th they were
+off the bay of Rio de Janeiro; and on the morning of the 20th
+they anchored in the road of <i>Ilas Grandes</i>, between two
+large fine islands covered with trees, in thirteen fathoms water.
+Next day they anchored at another island, about half a league
+distant, where they caught good store of fish, besides many
+crocodiles or alligators, each about the length of a man. They
+anchored behind another island on the 23d, where they found two
+small huts, and a heap of human bones on a rock. Here they set up
+tents on shore for their sick, which were all landed that night,
+under the protection of three distinct guards of soldiers, lest
+they might be attacked by the Portuguese, who were at no great
+distance.</p>
+
+<p>The 28th, the boats were sent for wood and fresh water to a
+river about two leagues from where the ships lay, and about noon
+next day brought off as much as they could carry. They went back
+for a farther supply, and were obliged to remain on shore all
+night, as their boats got aground with the ebb-tide. On getting
+to the ships on the 29th, they reported, that they had heard a
+confused sound of voices, as of many people, in the woods. The
+30th, three boats were sent again to the watering-place, with
+nine or ten soldiers to protect the seamen when on shore. Shortly
+after, being out of sight of the fleet, several cannon-shot were
+heard from the Huntsman, which had been stationed to command the
+watering-place, on which the admiral sent three armed boats to
+see what was the matter. On coming to the Huntsman, they were
+told that five canoes, full of well-armed Portuguese and Mestees,
+had attacked the three boats, and slain all their men. The Dutch
+armed boats pursued the canoes, of which they soon came in sight;
+but on following them round a point, saw two stout frigates or
+armed barks riding at anchor, to which the canoes retired for
+protection, and the boats had to return to the admiral with the
+dismal news of the fate of their companions.</p>
+
+<p>A conspiracy was discovered on the 1st January, 1615, of
+certain persons who proposed to have run away with one of the
+ships, and for which two men were executed, several others being
+put in irons, and distributed among the other ships of the fleet.
+Before leaving this place, orders were given, if any ship lost
+company of the rest, that her commander was to set up a
+conspicuous mark in the haven of de Cordes, or some other usual
+landing place in the straits; and, after waiting a certain fixed
+time, was to proceed for the isle of Mocha on the coast of Chili,
+as the place of rendezvous. Having no fit provisions for the
+sick, they resolved also to remove from the Islas Grandes to the
+isle of St Vincent. Here they were delayed by the Portuguese, who
+appear to have captured some of their men; for, having taken a
+bark with eighteen Portuguese on the 26th January, the Portuguese
+of St Vincent refused to give a smaller number of Hollanders in
+exchange for these, though also offered many fair manuscripts,
+pictures, plate, and other things belonging to the jesuits, which
+had been taken in the prize.</p>
+
+<p>They departed from St Vincent in the beginning of February,
+having first burnt their prize and some buildings on shore, and
+furnished themselves amply with oranges and pomecitrons. In lat.
+52&deg; 6' S. they were distressed by a severe storm on the 7th
+March, which continued several days, and separated the ships. On
+the 21st a mutiny broke out, for which several of the most
+notoriously guilty were capitally punished. They entered the
+straits on the 28th, but were forced out again, by adverse winds
+and currents. They entered again on the 2d of April, and saw a
+man of gigantic stature climbing a high hill on the southern
+shore of the straits, called <i>Terra del Fuego</i>, or the land
+of fire. They went ashore on the 7th, when they saw two
+ostriches, and found a large river of fresh water, beside which
+grew many shrubs producing sweet black-berries. Being in lat.
+54&deg; S. the mountains were all covered with snow, yet they
+found pleasant woods, in which were many parrots. To one inlet or
+bay they gave the name of <i>Pepper haven</i>, because the bark
+of a tree found there had a biting taste like pepper.</p>
+
+<p>On the 16th of April they had some friendly intercourse with a
+party of savages, to whom they gave various trifling articles in
+exchange for pearls. But on the 1st May, some of the people were
+surprised by the natives while on shore, and two of them slain.
+On the 6th of May they got into the South Sea, not without
+terror, having no anchorage that day, and being in much danger
+from many shoals and islands at the mouth of the straits, between
+the northern and sourthern shore.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION II.</p>
+
+<p><i>Transactions in the South Sea, along the Western Coast of
+America</i>.</p>
+
+<p>They were welcomed into the great South Sea by a terrible
+storm, and were fearful of being cast away on certain islands a
+little without the straits, which, from their likeness to the
+islands of Scilly, they named the <i>Sorlings</i>. On the 21st
+they had sight of the coast of Chili and the isle of Mocha. This
+island is low and broad on the north, and is full of rocks on the
+south. The 26th endeavours were made to enter into traffic with
+the natives of this island. The chief and his son dined on board
+the admiral, seemingly rejoiced to see such large and well-armed
+ships sent against the Spaniards, and all the native Chilese were
+delighted to see the soldiers mustered and exercised. The Dutch
+here procured great plenty of sheep, in exchange for hatchets and
+ornaments of coral and such like toys, getting two sheep for one
+hatchet. But the natives brought every thing to the boats, and
+would not suffer any of the Dutch to go near their houses, being
+very jealous of their wives, even more so than Spaniards. These
+sheep resembled camels, having long legs and necks, hare lips,
+hunches on their backs, and are used as beasts of draught and
+burden.</p>
+
+<p>They left Mocha on the 27th of May, and next day came to the
+coast not far from the island of St Mary, where the land was much
+broken and very rocky. The 29th they cast anchor at the island of
+St Mary, whence a Spaniard came on board, having a pledge left
+for him ashore. This man invited the admiral and others to dine
+on shore; but one of the boats observed a body of soldiers
+marching to the place at which they were to have dined; on which
+appearance of treachery, the Spanish messenger was made prisoner.
+The Dutch landed next day in force, on which the Spaniards set
+their church on fire and fled; having four of their men slain,
+while two of the Dutch were wounded. They here found much
+poultry, and took 500 sheep, with other spoil. Learning at this
+place of three Spanish ships fitted out in April expressly
+against them, the admiral of which carried forty brass guns, and
+the whole manned by 1000 Spaniards, Spilbergen resolved to go in
+search of them at Conception and Valparaiso, and afterwards on
+the coast of Arica. A farther squadron, of similar force, was
+also said to be in preparation at <i>Calao de Lima</i>. In
+consequence of this intelligence, the Dutch gunners were ordered
+to have every thing in readiness for battle, rules of military
+discipline were established, and each ship and every person
+received distinct orders for conducting the expected battle, in
+which it was resolved to conquer or die.</p>
+
+<p>Sailing from the island of St Mary on the 1st June, 1615, they
+passed not far from the town of <i>Aurora</i>,[93] where the
+Spaniards kept a garrison of 500 men, which were continually
+disquieted by the unconquered natives of Chili. On the 3d they
+came to the island of <i>Quinquirina</i>, within which is the
+town of Conception, inhabited by many Indians and about 200
+Spaniards. The 12th they entered the safe and commodious road of
+Valparaiso, in which was a Spanish ship, but which was set on
+fire by its own mariners, who escaped on shore. The 13th at noon,
+they were in lat. 32&deg; 15' S.[94] and in the afternoon came
+into the fair and secure harbour of Quintero. Here they took in
+wood and water, and caught abundance of fish. But they found the
+inhabitants every where aware of them, and prepared to receive
+them, so that nothing of any importance could be effected. They
+came next to <i>Arica</i> in lat. 12&deg; 40' S.[95] to which
+place the silver is brought from the mines of Potosi, whence it
+is shipped for Panama. Finding no ships there, they proceeded
+along the coast, and took a small ship on the 16th, in which was
+some treasure, but it was mostly embezzled by the sailors.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 93: Arauco, a fortress on the northern
+frontier of the independent country of Araucania, but somewhat
+inland, not far to the N.E. of the island of St
+Mary.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 94: Quintero is in lat. 32&deg; 44'
+S.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 95: This is a great error, as Arica is in
+lat 18&deg; 28' S.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>They soon after had sight of eight ships, which the master of
+the prize said were the royal fleet sent out in search of the
+Hollanders, contrary to the opinion of the council of Peru; but
+Dou Rodrigo de Mendoza, the Spanish admiral, a kinsman to the
+viceroy, insisted on putting to sea, alleging that two even of
+his ships could take all England, and much more those <i>hens</i>
+of Holland, who must be spent and wasted by so long a voyage, and
+would assuredly yield at first sight. On this, the viceroy gave
+him leave to depart, with orders to bring all the Hollanders in
+chains. Mendoza then swore that he would never return till the
+Hollanders were all taken or slain, and set sail from Calao, the
+haven of Lima, on the 11th July. The flag ship was the Jesu
+Maria, of twenty-four brass guns and 460 men, which was said to
+have cost the king 158,000 ducats. The vice-admiral was the Santa
+Anna, of 300 men, commanded by Captain Alvarez de Piger, who had
+before taken an English ship in the South Sea, and this ship cost
+150,000 ducats, being the handsomest that had ever been seen in
+Peru. The other ships were the Carmelite and St Jago of eight
+brass cannon and 200 men each; the Rosary of four guns and 150
+men; the St Francis having seventy musketeers, and twenty
+sailors, but no ordnance; the St Andrew of eighty musketeers,
+twenty-five sailors, and no cannon; and an eighth, the name and
+strength of which is not mentioned.</p>
+
+<p>The adverse fleets drew near on the evening of the 17th July,
+when the Spanish vice-admiral sent a message to his admiral,
+advising to postpone battle till next morning. Mendoza was,
+however, too impatient to follow this advice, and set upon the
+Great Sun, in which was Admiral Spilbergen, about ten that night,
+when they exchanged broadsides. The St Francis being next to the
+Jesu Maria, attacked the Dutch admiral; but being beaten off,
+fell upon the yacht, and by her was sent to the bottom. At this
+instant, the yacht was attacked by the Spanish admiral, and had
+soon shared the fate of her former antagonist, but was succoured
+by two boats full of men, one from the Dutch admiral, and the
+other from the vice-admiral; on this occasion, the Dutch
+admiral's boat was unfortunately mistaken by the Huntsman, and
+sent to the bottom by a cannon-shot, and all her men drowned
+except one.</p>
+
+<p>Next morning, five of the Spanish ships sent word to their
+admiral that they meant to do their best to escape: But the Dutch
+admiral and vice-admiral set upon the Spanish admiral and
+vice-admiral, and an obstinate engagement ensued, in which the
+Eolus, another of the Dutch ships, also partook. The two Spanish
+ships were lashed together, for mutual support. At length, all
+the men forsook the vice-admiral, going on board the admiral's
+ship, in which they afterwards confessed they found only fifty
+men alive. Being reduced to great distress, the Spanish seamen
+several times hung out a white flag, in token of surrender, which
+was as often hauled down by the officers and other gentlemen, who
+chose rather to die than yield.</p>
+
+<p>After some time, being sore pressed by the Hollanders, the men
+belonging to the Spanish vice-admiral returned to their own ship,
+and renewed the fight; on which occasion the Dutch vice-admiral
+was in imminent danger of being taken, as the Spaniards boarded
+her, but were all repelled or slain. Being no longer able to
+continue the fight, the Spanish admiral fled under cover of the
+night, and escaped the pursuit of Spilbergen; but her leaks were
+so many and great that she went to the bottom, as did likewise
+another of the Spanish ships called the Santa Maria.[96] The
+Dutch vice-admiral and the Eolus bestirred themselves so briskly,
+that the Spanish vice-admiral hung out a white flag, on which the
+Dutch vice-admiral sent two boats to bring the Spanish commander
+on board, but he refused going that night, unless the Dutch
+vice-admiral came to fetch him, or sent a captain to remain in
+pledge for him. At this time ten or twelve of the men belonging
+to the Eolus remained on board, contrary to orders, wishing to
+have a first hand in the plunder. These men assisted the
+Spaniards in their efforts to prevent the ship from sinking: But
+all their labour being in vain, they shewed many lights, and
+cried out aloud for help, which was too late of being sent, and
+they went to the bottom. Next morning the Dutch sent out four
+boats, which found thirty Spaniards floating on pieces of the
+wreck, and crying out for mercy; which was shewn by the Dutch to
+some of the chiefs, but the rest were left to the mercy of the
+sea, several of them being even knocked on the head by the Dutch,
+contrary to orders from their officers. Before this ship went
+down her commander expired of his wounds. In this engagement
+forty Dutchmen were wounded and sixteen slain, on board the
+admiral, vice-admiral, and Eolus; and in the rest eighteen were
+wounded and four slain.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 96: There is no such name in the list of
+the Spanish fleet, so that we may suppose this to have been the
+one formerly mentioned without a name.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The Dutch now made sail for Calao de Lima, but were becalmed.
+The 20th they passed by the island [St Lorenzo], and saw fourteen
+ships in the haven, but could not get near for shoals. They went,
+therefore, to the road of Calao in search of the Spanish admiral,
+but learned afterwards at Payta that his ship had sunk. The
+Spaniards fired upon them from the shore, and a ball of
+thirty-six pounds weight had nearly sunk the Huntsman. They saw
+also on shore a considerable army, commanded by the viceroy in
+person, consisting of eight troops of horse and 4000 foot. Going
+beyond reach of shot from the shore, the Dutch cast anchor off
+the mouth of the haven, where they remained till the 25th of
+July, expecting to capture some Spanish ships, but all that
+appeared made their escape by superior sailing, except one bark
+laden with salt and eighty jars of molasses.</p>
+
+<p>In regard that they were now on an enemy's coast, where they
+had no opportunity of repairing their losses, orders were issued
+by Spilbergen to act with great caution, in case of falling in
+with the fleet of Panama, and especially to take care not to
+separate from each other, which had much endangered them in the
+late fight. It was also ordered, if any Spanish ship should
+yield, that the Dutch captains and chief officers should on no
+account leave their own ships, but should order the enemy to come
+aboard them in their own boats. They sailed from Calao on the
+27th of July, and came to the road of <i>Huarmey</i> in lat.
+10&deg; S. on the 28th. This is a pleasant place, with a large
+port, near which is a lake. The Dutch landed here, but the
+inhabitants fled, leaving little plunder, except poultry, hogs,
+oranges, and meal, which they brought on board. They dismissed
+some of their Spanish prisoners on the 3d August, on which day
+they passed between the main and the island of <i>Lobos</i>, so
+called from being frequented by seals, or sea wolves.[97] The 8th
+they cast anchor near Payta, in about the latitude of 5&deg; S.
+The 9th they landed 300 men, but re-embarked after some
+skirmishing, as they found the city too strongly defended. On
+this occasion they took a Peruvian bark, strangely rigged, having
+six stout natives on board, who had been out fishing for two
+months, and had a cargo of excellent dried fish, which was
+distributed through the fleet.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 97: There are three islands or groups of
+that name off the coast of Peru. The southern Lobos is in lat.
+7&deg; S. near fifty miles from the nearest land; the middle, or
+inner Lobos, in lat. 6&deg; 22' S. is only about nine miles from
+the coast of Peru; and the northern Lobos is in lat. 5&deg; 8' S.
+almost close to the shore. It is probably the middle or inner
+Lobos that is meant in the text.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 10th of August three of the Dutch ships battered the town
+of Payta, and afterwards sent a party of armed men on shore, who
+found the inhabitants had fled to the mountains with all their
+valuables. The Dutch sent five of the Peruvian captives on shore
+to endeavour to procure fruit, and to learn with more certainty
+what had become of the Spanish admiral. On their return they
+brought word that the Spanish admiral had gone to the bottom, six
+only of her crew escaping. They brought letters also from the
+lady of Don Gasper Calderon, the commandant of Payta, who had
+fled to the town of St Michael, thirty miles from Payta; who, in
+commiseration of the captives, sent many citrons and other
+provisions to the Dutch ships. Towards the sea the town of Payta
+is strongly fortified, and almost impregnable. It is a place of
+some importance, having two churches, a monastery, and many good
+buildings; and has an excellent harbour, to which many ships
+resort from Panama, whence their cargoes are transmitted by land
+to Lima, to avoid the dangers of the wind and the seas at that
+place. While at the island of Lobos, the Dutch took two birds of
+enormous size, not unlike an eagle in beak, wings, and talons;
+their necks being covered with down resembling wool, and their
+heads having combs like those of a cock. They were two ells in
+height, and their wings, when displayed, measured three ells in
+breadth.[98]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 98: Probably the Condour, or Vultur Gryphus
+of naturalists, which is of vast size, sometimes measuring
+sixteen feet between the tips of the wings when extended. 
+
+<p>At this place we have omitted a vague rambling account of the
+kingdoms of Peru and Chili, as in 1616, which could have conveyed
+no useful information, farther than that Don Juan de Mendoza,
+Marquis des Montes Claros, was then viceroy of Peru.--E.]</p>
+</blockquote>
+
+<p>The Dutch set sail from Payta on the 21st of August, and
+anchored on the 23d in the road off the mouth of the Rio Tumbez,
+in lat. 3&deg; 20' S. They here agreed to return to the isle of
+Coques, in lat. 5&deg; S.[99] that they might endeavour to
+procure refreshments. But they were so distressed by storms of
+wind, with rain and excessive thunder, that they in vain
+endeavoured to get to that island till the 13th September, and in
+the mean time became very sickly. Proceeding therefore towards
+the north they came in sight of New Spain on the 20th September,
+in lat. 13&deg; 30' N. when the weather became again very
+tempestuous. After much bad weather they came in sight of a
+pleasant land on the 1st October, but were unable to land.
+Beating off and on till the 11th of that month, they then entered
+the harbour of Accapulco, within shot of the castle, and hung out
+a flag of truce. Two Spaniards came on board, with whom they
+agreed to exchange their prisoners for sheep, fruits, and other
+provisions, which was accordingly performed. On the 15th Melchior
+Hernando, nephew to the viceroy of New Spain, came on board, to
+take a view of the fleet which had vanquished that of his king,
+and was kindly entertained by the Dutch admiral. The castle of
+Accapulco was found to be well fortified, and had seventy pieces
+of brass cannon mounted on its ramparts; and the Dutch were here
+informed that their intended arrival had been known eight months
+before.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 99: This is probably the northern Lobos, in
+lat 5&deg; 8' S. formerly mentioned in a note.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>They set sail from Accapulco on the 18th of October, and soon
+afterwards took a bark bound for the pearl fishery, which they
+manned and took into their service as a tender. On the 1st
+November they anchored before the port of <i>Selagua</i>, in lat.
+19&deg; 8' N. At this place they were informed of a river
+abounding in a variety of excellent fish, and having extensive
+meadows on its banks well stocked with cattle, together with
+citrons and other fruits in great plenty, all of which they much
+wanted; but the company they sent to endeavour to procure these
+conveniences returned empty handed, after a smart engagement with
+the Spaniards. They sailed thence on the 11th November for the
+port of Nativity, in lat. 20&deg; 40' N. where they furnished
+themselves with necessaries, and from whence they set sail on the
+20th.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION III.</p>
+
+<p><i>Voyage Home from America, by the East Indies and Cape of
+Good Hope</i>.</p>
+
+<p>The 26th November, 1615, being in lat. 20&deg; 26' N. they
+determined on shaping their course for the Ladrones across the
+great Pacific Ocean. On the 3d December, to their great
+astonishment, they saw two islands at a great distance, and next
+day a vast rock in lat. 19&deg; N. fifty leagues from the
+continent of America.[100] The 5th they saw another new island,
+having five hills, that at first appeared like so many distinct
+islands. The new year 1616 was ushered in with distempers that
+proved fatal to many of the sailors. On the 3d of January they
+came in sight of the Ladrones, where they landed and procured
+refreshments. Setting sail from thence on the 26th January, they
+arrived at the Philippine islands on the 9th February, but the
+Indians refused to trade with them, because enemies of the
+Spaniards, though some among them, for that very reason, would
+willingly have transferred all the trade and riches of the
+country to them. In <i>Capul</i>, where they arrived on the 11th,
+the people gave them fat hogs and poultry in exchange for mere
+trifles. Having thus procured abundant refreshments, they set
+sail on the 16th, passing through the straits towards the bay of
+Manilla.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 100: The three Marias are nearly in the
+indicated latitude, but are only about thirty leagues from the
+western coast of N. America.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>They anchored in these straits on the 19th, where they saw a
+curious fabric erected on the top of trees, looking at a distance
+like a palace, but they could not imagine what it was. The 24th
+they passed the high and flaming hill of <i>Albaca</i>, and came
+in sight of the other end of the straits [of St Bernardino] on
+the 28th, when they anchored before the island, of
+<i>Mirabelles</i>, remarkable for two rocks which tower to a vast
+height in the air. Behind this island is the city of Manilla, and
+here the pilots wait for the ships from China, to pilot them safe
+to the city, as the passage is very dangerous. On the 5th of
+March they took several barks, which were going to collect the
+tribute paid by the adjacent places to the city of Manilla. They
+had now intelligence of a fleet of twelve ships and four gallies,
+manned by 2000 Spaniards besides Indians, Chinese, and Japanese,
+sent from Manilla to drive the Dutch from the Moluccas, and to
+reduce these islands under the dominion of Spain. On this news
+they discharged all their prisoners, and resolved to go in
+pursuit of the Manilla fleet.</p>
+
+<p>The 11th March they got into a labyrinth of islands, whence
+they knew not how to get out, but their Spanish pilot carried
+them safe through next day. The 14th they anchored all night
+before the island of <i>Paney</i>, by reason of the shoals; and
+on the 18th they sailed close past the island of Mindanao. The
+19th they came again close to the shore, and brought provisions
+from the islanders at a cheap rate. They reached Cape
+<i>Cudera</i> on the 20th, where the Spaniards usually water on
+their voyages to the Moluccas. Till the 23d, having a perfect
+calm, they made no progress except with the tide; and when
+between <i>Mindanao</i> and <i>Tagano</i> they were stopt by an
+adverse current. The people here professed great enmity against
+the Spaniards, and offered to assist the Dutch with fifty of
+their vessels against that nation. The 27th they passed the
+island of <i>Sanguin</i>, and came on the 29th to Ternate, in
+which island the Dutch possessed the town of <i>Macia</i>, where
+they were made most welcome by their countrymen. They observed
+that the straits of <i>Booton</i> was full of shoals, without
+which the water was deep. On the east there is good fresh water,
+and two leagues to the west lies a very rocky shoal. On the 8th
+of April, Cornelius de Vicaneze went for Banda, where the
+soldiers were landed, after being long on board ship.</p>
+
+<p>Being detained in the Moluccas and at Bantam in the service of
+the Dutch East India Company till the 14th December, 1616,
+admiral Spilbergen then sailed from Bantam for Holland, in the
+Amsterdam of 1400 tons, having also under his command the Zealand
+of 1200 tons, leaving the ships with which he had hitherto sailed
+in India. On the 1st January, 1617, the Zealand parted company,
+and on the 24th of that month the Amsterdam anchored at the
+island of Mauritius. They doubled the Cape of Good Hope on the
+6th March, and arrived at St Helena on 30th of that month, where
+they found the Zealand. Leaving that island on the 6th April,
+they passed the line on the 24th of that month, and arrived safe
+in Holland on the 1st July, 1617, having been absent two years,
+ten months, and twenty-four days; nearly nine months of which
+time were spent in India, without prosecuting the direct purpose
+of their circumnavigation.</p>
+
+<p>The directors of the Dutch East India company bestowed the
+highest commendations on Spilbergen for his prudence and good
+conduct in this voyage, which contributed both to the advantage
+of the company, his own reputation, and the glory of his country.
+The Dutch company may be said to have dated their grandeur from
+the day of his return, both in respect to reputation, power, and
+riches; the former resulting from his successful circumnavigation
+of the globe, and the others from their conquests in the
+Moluccas, in which he not only assisted, but likewise brought
+home the first intelligence. On his return to Holland, Spilbergen
+confirmed the report of Magellan respecting a gigantic people
+inhabiting the straits, named <i>Patagons</i>. He said that he
+had gone several times on shore, and had examined several graves
+of the natives, and saw several savages at different times in
+their canoes, all of whom were of the ordinary size; or rather
+under. But one day he observed a man on shore, who first climbed
+one hill and then another, to look at the ships, and at last came
+to the sea-side for that purpose, and this man was allowed by all
+who saw him to be even taller than those spoken of by Magellan.
+This is likewise confirmed by the accounts given to Van Noort and
+De Weert, by a boy they took from the savages; who said there
+were only two tribes of these giants, all the other savages being
+of the ordinary size.[101]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 101: Without pretending to give any opinion
+on this subject, it may be remarked, that the account from the
+savage boy is worthy of little credit, as a kind of nursery tale,
+and given by one who certainly could hardly have sufficient
+language to express himself. The solitary giant seen looking at
+the ships from a distance, may have been of the ordinary size,
+magnified to the eye in looking through a hazy
+atmosphere.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<h2><a name="chapter4-6" id="chapter4-6">CHAPTER VI.</a></h2>
+
+<p>VOYAGE ROUND THE WORLD, IN 1615-1617, BY WILLIAM CORNELISON
+SCHOUTEN AND JACQUES LE MAIRE, GOING ROUND CAPE HORN.[102]</p>
+
+<p>INTRODUCTION.</p>
+
+<p>The States General of the United Provinces having granted an
+exclusive privilege to the Dutch East India Company, prohibiting
+all their subjects, except that company, from trading to the
+eastwards beyond the Cape of Good Hope, or westwards through the
+Straits of Magellan, in any of the countries within these limits,
+whether known or unknown, and under very heavy penalties; this
+prohibition gave great dissatisfaction to many rich merchants,
+who were desirous of fitting out ships and making discoveries at
+their own cost, and thought it hard that their government should
+thus, contrary to the laws of Nature, shut up those passages
+which Providence had left free. Among the number of these
+discontented merchants was one Isaac Le Maire, a rich merchant of
+Amsterdam, then residing at Egmont, who was well acquainted with
+business, and had an earnest desire to employ a portion of the
+wealth he had acquired in trade in acquiring fame as a
+discoverer. With this view he applied to William Cornelison
+Schouten of Horn, a man in easy circumstances, deservedly famous
+for his great skill in maritime affairs, and his extensive
+knowledge of trade in the Indies, having been thrice there in the
+different characters of supercargo, pilot, and master.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 102: Harris, I.51. Callender, II. 217. 
+
+<p>It is proper to remark, that in this and several of the
+subsequent circumnavigations, considerable freedom has been taken
+in abbreviating numerous trivial circumstances already noticed by
+former voyagers: But whereever the navigators treat on new topics
+of discovery, or other subjects of any importance, the narratives
+are given at full length. Had not this liberty of lopping
+redundancies been taken, this division of our collection must
+have extended to a very inconvenient length, without any
+corresponding advantage.--E.]</p>
+</blockquote>
+
+<p>The main question proposed to him by Le Maire was, Whether he
+thought it possible to find a passage into the South Sea,
+otherwise than by the Straits of Magellan; and if so, whether it
+were not likely that the countries to the south of that passage
+might afford as rich commodities as either the East or the West
+Indies? Schouten was of opinion that such a passage might be
+found, and gave several reasons as to the probable riches of
+these countries.[103] After many conferences, they came to the
+determination of attempting this discovery, under a persuasion
+that the States did not intend, by their exclusive charter to the
+East India Company, to preclude their subjects from discovering
+countries in the south by a new route, different from either of
+those described in the charter.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 103: The idea of rich countries is here
+surely wrong stated, as none such could possibly be conceived to
+the south of the Straits of Magellan. The expected rich countries
+must have been to the westwards of these straits, and in the
+tropical regions far to the north, in the hope of not trenching
+upon the exclusive trade to the East Indies.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In consequence of this determination, it was agreed that Le
+Maire should advance half of the necessary funds for the expence
+of the proposed voyage, while Schouten and his friends were to
+advance the other moiety. Accordingly Le Maire advanced his part
+of the funds; and Schouten, with the assistance of Peter
+Clementson, burgomaster of Horn, Jan Janson Molenwert, one of the
+schepens or aldermen of that city, Jan Clementson Keis, a senator
+of that city, and Cornelius Segetson, a merchant, produced the
+rest. These matters being adjusted, in spring 1615, the company
+proposed to equip two vessels, a larger and a less, to sail from
+Horn at the proper season. That all parties might be satisfied,
+it was agreed that William Cornelison Schouten, in consideration
+of his age and experience, should command the larger ship, with
+the entire direction of the navigation during the voyage; and
+that Jaques le Maire, the eldest son of Isaac, should be
+supercargo. Every thing was got ready in two months for the
+prosecution of the enterprise, and a sufficient number of men
+engaged as mariners: but, as secrecy was indispensable, they were
+articled to go wherever the masters and supercargoes should
+require; and, in consideration of such unusual conditions, their
+wages were considerably advanced beyond the ordinary terms.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION I.</p>
+
+<p><i>Journal of the Voyage from the Texel to Cape Horn</i>.</p>
+
+<p>The larger of the two vessels prepared for this voyage was the
+Unity, of 360 tons, carrying nineteen cannon and twelve swivels;
+having on board two pinnaces, one for sailing and another for
+rowing, a launch for landing men, and a small boat, with all
+other necessaries for so long a voyage. Of this vessel William
+Cornelison Schouten was master and pilot, and Jaques le Maire
+supercargo. The lesser vessel was named the Horn, of 110 tons,
+carrying eight cannons and four swivels, of which Jan Cornelison
+Schouten was master, and Aris Clawson supercargo. The crew of the
+Unity consisted of sixty-five men, and that of the Horn of
+twenty-two only. The Unity sailed on the 25th of May for the
+Texel, where the Horn also arrived on the 3d June.</p>
+
+<p>The proper season being now arrived, in their judgment, they
+sailed from the Texel on the 14th of June, and anchored in the
+Downs on the 17th, when William Schouten went ashore at Dover to
+hire an experienced English gunner. This being effected, they
+again set sail the same evening; and meeting a severe storm in
+the night between the 21st and 22d, they took shelter under the
+Isle of Wight. Sailing thence on the 25th, they arrived at
+Plymouth on the 27th, where they hired a carpenter named
+Muydenblick. Sailing finally from Plymouth on the 28th June, with
+the wind at N.E. and fair weather, they proceeded on their
+voyage.</p>
+
+<p>Distinct rules were now established in regard to the allowance
+of provisions at sea, so that the men might have no reason to
+complain, and the officers might be satisfied of having enough
+for the voyage. The rate fixed upon was, a cann of beer for each
+man daily; four pounds of biscuit, with half a pound of butter
+and half a pound of suet weekly; and five large Dutch cheeses for
+each man, to serve during the whole voyage. All this was besides
+the ordinary allowance of salt meat and stock-fish. Due orders
+were likewise issued for regulating the conduct of the men and
+officers. Particularly on all occasions of landing men in a
+warlike posture, one of the masters was always to command: and in
+such ports as they might touch at for trade, the supercargo was
+to go on shore, and to have the exclusive management of all
+commercial dealings. It was also enjoined, that every officer
+should be exceedingly strict in the execution of his duty, but
+without subjecting the men to any unnecessary hardships, or
+interfering with each other in their several departments. The
+officers were also warned against holding any conversation with
+the men, in regard to the objects of the voyage, all conjectures
+respecting which were declared fruitless, the secret being solely
+known to the first captain and supercargo. It was also declared,
+that every embezzlement of stores, merchandises, or provisions,
+should be severely punished; and, in case of being reduced upon
+short allowance, any such offence was to be punished with death.
+The two supercargoes were appointed to keep distinct journals of
+all proceedings, for the information of the company of
+adventurers, that it might appear how far every man had done his
+duty, and in what manner the purposes of the voyage had been
+answered.</p>
+
+<p>On the 11th July they had sight of Madeira, and on the 13th
+they passed through between Teneriff and Grand Canary, with a
+stiff breeze at N.N.E. and a swift current. The 15th they passed
+the tropic of Cancer; and the 20th in the morning fell in with
+the north side of Cape de Verd. Procuring here a supply of water,
+by leave of the Moorish alcaide or governor, for which they had
+to pay <i>eight states</i> of iron, they left the cape on the 1st
+August, and came in sight of the high land of Sierra Leona on the
+21st of that month, as also of the island of <i>Madre bomba</i>,
+which lies off the south point of Sierra Leona, and north from
+the shallows of the island of St Ann. This land of Sierra Leona
+is the highest of all that lie between Cape Verd and the coast of
+Guinea, and is therefore easily known.</p>
+
+<p>On the 30th of August, they cast anchor in eight fathoms water
+on a fine sandy bottom, near the shore, and opposite a village or
+town of the negroes, in the road of Sierra Leona. This village
+consisted only of eight or nine poor thatched huts. The Moorish
+inhabitants were willing to come on board to trade, only
+demanding a pledge to be left on shore for their security,
+because a French ship had recently carried off two of the natives
+perfidiously. Aris Clawson, the junior merchant or supercargo,
+went accordingly on shore, where he drove a small trade for
+lemons and bananas, in exchange for glass beads. In the mean time
+some of the natives came off to the ships, bringing with them an
+interpreter who spoke many languages. They here very conveniently
+furnished themselves with fresh water, which poured down in great
+abundance from a very high hill, so that they had only to place
+their casks under the waterfall. There were here whole woods of
+lemon-trees, and lemons were so cheap that they might have had a
+thousand for a few beads, and ten thousand for a few common
+knives; so that they easily procured as many as they wished, and
+each man had 150 for sea store. The 3d September they found a
+vast shoal of fish, resembling a shoemaker's knife.</p>
+
+<p>They left Sierra Leona on the 4th September; and on the 5th
+October, being in lat 4&deg; 27' S. they were astonished by
+receiving a violent stroke on the bottom of one of the ships,
+though no rock appeared to be in the way. While forming
+conjectures on the occasion of this shock, the sea all about the
+ship began to change colour, appearing as if some great fountain
+of blood had opened into it. This sudden alteration of the water
+seemed not less wonderful than the striking of the ship; but the
+cause of both was not discovered till after their arrival in Port
+Desire, when the ship was laid on shore to clean her bottom, when
+they found a large horn, of a substance resembling ivory,
+sticking fast in the bottom. It was entirely firm and solid,
+without any internal cavity, and had pierced through three very
+stout planks, grazing one of the ribs of the ship, and stuck at
+least a foot deep in the wood, leaving about as much on the
+outside, up to the place where it broke off.[104]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 104: This must have been a Narvai, or
+Narwhal, the Monodon Monoceros, Licorne, or Unicornu Marinum, of
+naturalists, called likewise the Unicorn Fish, or Sea
+Unicorn.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the 25th of October, when no person knew whereabouts they
+were except Schouten, the company was informed that the design of
+the voyage was to endeavour to discover a new southern passage
+into the South Sea; and the people appeared well pleased,
+expecting to discover some new golden country to make amends for
+all their trouble and danger. The 26th they were in lat. 6&deg;
+25' S. and continued their course mostly to the south all the
+rest of that month, till they were in lat 10&deg; 30' S. The 1st
+September they had the sun at noon to the north; and in the
+afternoon of the 3d they had sight of the isle of Ascension, in
+20&deg; S. otherwise called the island of Martin Vaz, where the
+compass was observed to vary 12&deg; to the east of north. The
+21st, in lat. 38&deg; S. the compass varied 17&deg; in the same
+eastern direction. The 6th December, they got sight of the
+mainland of South America, appearing rather flat, and of a white
+colour, and quickly after fell in with the north head-land of
+Port Desire, anchoring that night in ten fathoms water with the
+ebb-tide, within a league and a half of the shore. Next day,
+resuming their course southwards, they came into Port Desire at
+noon, in lat. 47&deg; 40' S. They had very deep water at the
+entrance, where they did not observe any of the cliffs which were
+described by Van Noort, as left by him to the northward on
+sailing into this haven, all the cliffs they saw being on the
+south side of the entrance, which therefore might be those
+mentioned by Van Noort, and misplaced in his narrative by
+mistake.</p>
+
+<p>In consequence of this error, they overpassed Port Desire to
+the south, so as to miss the right channel, and came into a
+crooked channel, where they had four and a half fathoms water at
+full sea, and only fourteen feet at low water. By this means the
+Unity got fast aground by the stern, and had infallibly been
+lost, if a brisk gale had blown from the N.E. But as the wind
+blew west from the land, she got off again without damage. Here
+they found vast quantities of eggs upon the cliffs; and the bay
+afforded them great abundance of muscles, and smelts sixteen
+inches long, for which reason they called it <i>Smelt Bay</i>.
+From this place they sent a pinnace to the Penguin Islands, which
+brought back 150 of these birds, and two sea lions.</p>
+
+<p>Leaving Smelt Bay on the 8th December, they made sail for Port
+Desire, a boat going before to sound the depth of the channel,
+which was twelve and thirteen fathoms, so that they sailed in
+boldly, having a fair wind at N.E. After going in little more
+than a league, the wind began to veer about, and they cast anchor
+in twenty fathoms; but the ground, consisting entirely of
+slippery stones, and the wind now blowing strong at N.W. they
+drifted to the south shore, where both ships had nearly been
+wrecked. The Unity lay with her side to the cliffs, yet still
+kept afloat, and gradually slid down towards the deep water as
+the tide fell. But the Horn stuck fast aground, so that at last
+her keel was above a fathom out of the water, and a man might
+have walked under it at low water. For some time, the N.W. wind
+blowing hard on one side, kept her from falling over; but, that
+dying away, she at length fell over on her bends, when she was
+given over for lost; but next flood, coming on with calm weather,
+righted her again. Having escaped this imminent danger, both
+ships went farther up the river on the 9th, and came to King's
+Island, which they found full of black sea-mews, and almost
+entirely covered with their eggs; so that a man without moving
+from one spot might reach fifty or sixty nests with his hands,
+having three or four eggs in each. They here accordingly were
+amply provided with eggs, and laid in several thousands of them
+for sea store.</p>
+
+<p>The 11th the boats were sent down the river in search of fresh
+water, on the south side, but found it all brackish and
+unpleasant. They saw ostriches here, and a sort of beasts like
+harts, having wonderfully long necks, and extremely wild. Upon
+the high hills, they found great heaps of stones, under which
+some monstrous carcass had been buried, some of the bones being
+ten or eleven feet long, which, if having belonged to rational
+creatures, must have been the bones of giants.[105] They here had
+plenty of good fish and fowls, but no water could be found for
+some days.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 105: Giants indeed; for thigh bones of ten
+or eleven feet long, and these are the longest in the human body,
+would argue men of <i>thirty-one feet high</i>!--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the 17th December, the Unity was laid ashore on King's
+island, in order to clean her bottom, and next day the Horn was
+hauled on shore for the same purpose, but providentially at the
+distance of about 200 yards from her consort: For, on the 19th,
+while burning a fire of dry reeds under the Horn, which was
+necessary for the object in view, the flame caught hold of the
+ship, and they were forced to see her burn without being able to
+do any thing to extinguish the fire, as they were at least fifty
+feet from the water side. They launched the Unity at high water
+on the 20th, and next day carried on board all the iron-work,
+anchors, cannon, and whatever else they had been able to save
+belonging to the Horn.</p>
+
+<p>On the 25th some holes full of fresh water were found, which
+was white and muddy, yet well tasted, and of which a great
+quantity was carried on board, in small casks on the men's
+shoulders. At this place, they found great numbers of sea lions,
+the young of which are good to eat. This creature is nearly as
+big as a small horse, their heads resembling lions, and the males
+having long manes on their necks of tough coarse hair; but the
+females have no manes, and are only half as large as the males.
+They are a bold and fierce animal, and only to be destroyed by
+musket shot.</p>
+
+<p>January 18th, 1616, they departed from Port Desire: and on the
+18th, being in lat. 51&deg; S they saw the Sebaldine [or
+Faulkland] islands, as laid down by de Weert. The 20th, being in
+lat. 53&deg; S. and by estimation twenty leagues to the South of
+the Straits of Magellan, they observed a strong current running
+to the S.W. The 22d the wind was uncertain, and shifting, and the
+water had a white appearance, as if they had been within the
+land; and holding on their course, S. by W. they saw land that
+same day, bearing from them W. and W.S.W. and quickly afterwards
+saw other land to the south. Then attempting, by an E.S.E.
+course, to get beyond the land, they were constrained to take in
+their topsails, by the wind blowing hard at north. In the
+forenoon of the 24th they saw land to starboard, at the distance
+of a league, stretching out to the east and south, having very
+high hills all covered with snow. They then saw other land
+bearing east from the former, which likewise was high and rugged.
+According to estimation, these two lands lay about eight leagues
+asunder, and they guessed there might be a good passage between
+them, because of a brisk current which ran to the southward in
+the direction of that opening. At noon they made their latitude
+54&deg; 46',[106] and stood towards the before-mentioned opening,
+but were delayed by a calm. At this place they saw a prodigious
+multitude of penguins, and such numbers of whales that they had
+to proceed with much caution, being afraid they might injure
+their ship by running against them.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 106: They were here obviously approaching
+the Straits of Le Maire, discovered on the present occasion, the
+northern opening of which is in lat. 54&deg; 40' S. the southern
+in 55&deg; S. and the longitude 65&deg; 15' W. from
+Greenwich.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In the forenoon of the 25th they got close in with the eastern
+land, and upon its north side, which stretched E.S.E. as far as
+the eye could carry. This they named <i>States Land</i>, and to
+that which lay westward of the opening they gave the name of
+<i>Maurice Land</i>.[107] The land on both sides seemed entirely
+bare of trees and shrubs, but had abundance of good roads and
+sandy bays, with great store of fish, porpoises, penguins and
+other birds. Having a north wind at their entrance into this
+passage, they directed their course S.S.W. and going at a brisk
+rate, they were at noon in lat. 55&deg; 36' S. and then held a
+S.W. course with a brisk gale. The land on the south side of the
+passage or Straits of <i>Le Maire</i>, and west side, to which
+they gave the name of <i>Maurice Land</i>, [being the east side
+of the Terra del Fuego] appeared to run W.S.W. and S.W. as far as
+they could see, and was all a very rugged, uneven, and rocky
+coast. In the evening, having the wind at S.W. they steered S.
+meeting with prodigious large waves, rolling along before the
+wind; and, from the depth of the water to leeward, which appeared
+by very evident signs, they were fully convinced that they had
+the great South Sea open before them, into which they had now
+almost made their way by a new passage of their own
+discovering.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 107: The former of these names is still
+retained, but not the latter; the land on the west of the Straits
+of Le Maire being Terra del Fuego; and the cape at the N.W. of
+the straits mouths is now called Cape St Vincent, while the S.W.
+point is named Cape St Diego.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>At this place the <i>sea-mews</i> were larger than swans,
+their wings when extended measuring six feet from tip to tip.
+These often alighted on the ship, and were so tame as to allow
+themselves to be taken by hand, without even attempting to
+escape. The 26th at noon they made their latitude 57&deg; S.
+where they were assailed by a brisk storm at W.S.W. the sea
+running very high, and of a blue colour. They still held their
+course to the southwards, but changed at night to the N.W. in
+which direction they saw very high land. At noon of the 27th they
+were in 56&deg; 51' S. the weather being very cold, with hail and
+rain, and the wind at W. and W. by S. The 28th they had great
+billows rolling from the west, and were at noon in 56&deg; 48' S.
+The 29th having the wind at N.E. they steered S.W. and came in
+sight of two islands W.S.W. of their course, beset all round with
+cliffs. They got to these islands at noon, giving the name of
+<i>Barnevelt's Islands</i>, and found their latitude to be
+57&deg; S.[108] "Being unable to sail <i>above</i> them, they
+held their course to the north; and taking a N.W. course in the
+evening from Barnevelt's islands, they saw land N.W. and N.N.W.
+from them, being the lofty mountainous land covered with snow,
+which lies to the south of the straits of Magellan, [called Terra
+del Fuego,] and which ends in a sharp point, to which they gave
+the name of <i>Cape Horn</i>, which is in lat. 57&deg; 48'
+S."[109]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 108: Only 56&deg;, so that by some
+inaccuracy of instruments or calculation, the observations of the
+latitude, in this voyage, seem all considerably too
+high.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 109: The course in the text within inverted
+commas, from Barnevelt's islands to Cape Horn, is evidently
+erroneously stated. It ought to have run thus. "Being unable to
+pass to the north of these islands, they held their course S.W.
+seeing land on the N.W. and N.N.W. of their course, which ended
+in a sharp point, which they named <i>Cape Horn</i>."--Cape Horn
+is in lat. 56&deg; 15' S. and long. 67&deg; 45' W. from
+Greenwich.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>They now held their course westwards, being assisted by a
+strong current in that direction; yet had the wind from the
+north, and had heavy billows meeting them from the west. The
+30th, the current and billows as before, they were fully assured
+of having the way open into the South Sea, and this day at noon
+they made their latitude 57&deg; 34' S. The 31st sailing west,
+with the wind at north, their latitude at noon was 58&deg; S. But
+the wind changing to W. and W.S.W. they passed Cape Horn, losing
+sight of land altogether, still meeting huge billows rolling from
+the west with a blue sea, which made them believe they were in
+the main South Sea. February 1st, they had a storm at S.W. and
+sailed N.W. and W.N.W. The 2d, having the wind at W. they sailed
+southwards, and came into the lat. of 57&deg; 58' S. The 3d they
+made their latitude 59&deg; 25' S. with a strong wind at W. but
+saw no signs of any land to the South.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION II.</p>
+
+<p><i>Continuation of the Voyage, from Cape Horn to the Island of
+Java.</i></p>
+
+<p>Altering their course to the northwards, they plainly
+discerned the western mouth of the Straits of Magellan, bearing
+east from them, on the 12th February; and being now quite sure of
+their new and happy discovery, they returned thanks to the
+Almighty for their good fortune over a cup of wine, which was
+handed three times round the company. To this new-found passage
+or straits, leading from the Atlantic into the Pacific, they gave
+the name of the <i>Straits of Le Maire</i>, though that honour
+ought justly to have been given to <i>Schouten,</i> by whose
+excellent conduct these straits were discovered.</p>
+
+<p>By the 27th of February they were in lat. 40&deg; S. with fair
+weather, continuing their course to the north; but on the 28th,
+they determined to sail for the island of Juan Fernandez, to give
+some rest and refreshment to their sickly and wearied company.
+That day their latitude at noon was 35&deg; 53' S. In the evening
+they shortened sail, fearing to fall in with the land in the
+night. Next day, being the 1st of March, they saw the islands of
+Juan Fernandez to the N.N.E. and got up to them at noon, being in
+the lat. of 35&deg; 53' S.[110] The smaller of these islands is
+that to the westwards, [Masafuero,] which is very barren and
+rocky. The greater [Juan Fernandez,] to the eastwards, though
+also very high and mountainous, is yet fruitful and well shaded
+with trees. This island affords plenty of hogs and goats; and
+there is such excellent fishing all round, that the Spaniards
+come hither for that purpose, and transport vast quantities of
+fish from hence to Peru.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 110: The latitude of Juan Fernandez is only
+33&deg; 42' S. The two islands mentioned in the text under this
+name, are Juan Fernandez and Masafuero; the former in long.
+77&deg; 80', the latter in 79&deg; 40', both W. from Greenwich.
+Or perhaps, the second island may be the Small Goat's or Rabbit
+Island, off its S.W. end, called <i>Isola de Cabras</i>, or <i>de
+Conejos</i>.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The road or haven of Juan Fernandez, [named la Baia, or
+Cumberland Harbour,] is at the east end of the island; but they
+shaped their course to the west end, where they could find no
+place in which to anchor. The boat being sent in search of an
+anchorage, brought an account of a beautiful valley, full of
+trees and thickets, and refreshed by streams of water running
+down from the hills, with a variety of animals feeding in this
+pleasant spot. The boat brought also great store of fish on
+board, being mostly lobsters and crabs, and reported having seen
+many sea wolves. Finding the island inaccessible, they took a
+considerable quantity of fish, and procured a supply of fresh
+water, after which they determined to pursue their voyage.</p>
+
+<p>The 11th March they passed the tropic of Capricorn to the
+north, the wind in general being E.S.E. and they held their
+course N.N.W. till the 15th, when being in lat. 18&deg; S. they
+changed their course to W. The 3d April they were in 15&deg; 12'
+S. being then much afflicted with the flux, and that day they saw
+a small low island which they got up to at noon. Finding no
+bottom, they could not come to anchor, but sent some men ashore
+in the boat. They found nothing here fit for refreshment, except
+some herbs which tasted like scurvy grass, and saw some dogs
+which could neither bark nor snarl, and for which reason they
+named it Dog Island. It is in lat. 15&deg; 12', and they judged
+it to be 925 leagues west from the coast of Peru.[111] The
+interior of this island is so low, that it seemed mostly
+overflowed at high water, its outskirt being a sort of dike or
+mound, overgrown with trees, between which the salt water
+penetrates in several places.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 111: Dog Island is in lat. 15&deg; 18' S.
+and long. 137&deg; W. about 1200 marine leagues west from the
+coast of Peru under the same parallel. By the description in the
+text it seems one of those which are usually termed <i>lagoon</i>
+islands--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 14th, sailing W. and W. by N. they saw a large low island
+in the afternoon, reaching a considerable way N.E. and S.W. At
+sun-set, being about a league from this island, a canoe came to
+meet them, in which were some naked Indians of a reddish colour,
+having long black hair. They made signs to the Dutch to go on
+shore, and spoke to them in a language which was not understood;
+neither did the Indians understand them, though spoken to in
+Spanish, Moluccan, and Javan. Getting near the coast, no bottom
+could be found, though only a musket-shot from land. They now
+sailed S.S.W. along the island, making ten leagues during the
+night, and continued along the shore on the 15th, many naked
+people continually inviting them to land. At length a canoe came
+off, but the natives would not venture into the ship, yet came to
+the boat, where the Dutch gave them beads, knives, and other
+trifles; but they found them thievishly disposed, much like the
+natives of the Ladrones, and were so fond of iron, that they
+stole the nails from the cabin windows, and the bolts from the
+doors. Their skins were all pictured over with snakes, dragons,
+and such like reptiles, and they were entirely naked, except a
+piece of mat before them. A boat was sent ashore well armed, and
+immediately on landing, about thirty of the natives rushed from a
+wood, armed with clubs, slings, and long staves or spears, and
+would have seized the boat and taken away the arms from the
+soldiers; but on receiving a discharge of musquetry they run off.
+Not being able to anchor here, they called this the <i>Island
+without ground</i>. It is low, and mostly composed of white sandy
+ground, on which are many trees, which were supposed to be cocoas
+and palmitos. It is not broad, but of considerable length, being
+in lat. 15&deg; S. and about 100 leagues from Dog
+Island.[112]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 112: Sondre-ground, or Without-ground, is
+in lat. 15&deg; 12' S. and 143&deg; 25' W.
+long.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Finding nothing could be done here, they held on their course
+to the west, and on the 16th came to another island, about
+fifteen leagues north from the former. This seemed all drowned
+land, yet its skirts were well clothed with trees. Here also they
+found no ground, and it yielded nothing but a few herbs, with
+some crabs and other shell-fish, which they found good eating. It
+afforded them also good fresh water, which they found in a pit
+not far from the shore. The pottage or soup, which they made of
+certain herbs gathered here, proved serviceable to those who were
+afflicted with the flux. They called this <i>Water
+Island</i>,[113] because it supplied them with fresh water.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 113: Water-land is in lat. 15&deg; S. and
+146&deg; W. long.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Sailing from this island westwards, they came on the 18th to
+another island 20 leagues distant from the last, and extending a
+considerable way N.W. and S.E. Dispatching the boat in search of
+anchorage, a bottom was found near a point of land, in 25 and 40
+fathoms, about a musket-shot from the shore, where also was a
+gentle stream of fresh water. This news induced them to send back
+the boat with some casks for water: But after using much pains to
+get on shore, and searching in the wood to find a spring, they
+were frightened away by seeing a savage. On getting back to their
+boat, five or six more of the savages came to the shore, but on
+seeing the Dutch put off they soon retired into the woods.
+Although they thus got rid of the savages, they encountered other
+adversaries of a formidable nature; for they were followed from
+the woods by innumerable myriads of black flies, so that they
+came on board absolutely covered with them from head to foot, and
+the plague of flies began to rage in the ship in a most
+intolerable manner. This persecution lasted three or four days,
+on which account they called this <i>Fly Island</i>,[114] and by
+the help of a good breeze of wind, they left it as fast as they
+could.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 114: The next island W. or rather S.W. from
+Water-land, and nearly at the distance in the text, is now called
+Palliser's island.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Continuing their course westwards from the 19th of April to
+the 9th of May, when they were in lat. 15&deg; 20' S. and
+estimated their distance from Peru 1510 leagues to the west, they
+perceived a bark coming towards them, on which they fired a gun
+or two to make them strike. But those who were in her, either not
+understanding the language of cannon, or unwilling to obey, made
+off as fast as they could; on which the Dutch sent their boat
+with ten musqueteers to intercept them. Some of the savages in
+the bark leapt overboard, and the rest surrendered without
+resistance, on which the Dutch used them kindly, dressing those
+that were wounded, and saving the lives of some who had leapt
+into the sea. Besides the men, there were eight women and several
+children, being in all twenty-three, remaining in the bark. They
+were a cleanly neat kind of people, of a reddish colour, and
+entirely naked except the parts of shame. The men wore their long
+black curled hair, but that of the women was cut short.</p>
+
+<p>The bark was of a singular figure and construction, consisting
+of two canoes fastened together, in the midst of each of which
+were two planks of red wood to keep out the water, and several
+others went across from one canoe to the other, being made fast
+and close above, and projected over a good way on each side. At
+the end of one of the canoes, on the starboard side, there stood
+a mast, having a fork at its upper end, where the yard lay; the
+sail being of mats, and the ropes of that kind of stuff of which
+fig-frails are made in Spain. Their only furniture consisted of a
+few fishing-hooks, the upper part of which was of stone, and the
+other of bone, tortoise-shell, or mother-of-pearl. They had no
+water on board, instead of which they satisfied themselves with
+the liquor of a few cocoa-nuts; in default of which they drank
+sea-water, which even the children did heartily. The Dutch sent
+them all again on board their vessel, where the women welcomed
+their husbands with joyful embraces, after which they made away
+to the south-east.[115]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 115: This double canoe seems to have
+belonged to the Society islands, and was perhaps bound towards
+Otaheite, by the course which it followed on getting rid of the
+Dutch.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 10th of May, Schouten continued his course W.S.W. and that
+day saw some very high land to larboard, S.E. by S. about eight
+leagues off. The 11th they came to a very high island, and about
+two leagues south from this to one much lower; and the same day
+sailed over a bank where they had fourteen fathoms on a stoney
+bottom, about two leagues from the land, and being past this bank
+could find no bottom. At this time another bark, or double canoe
+like the former, came up to them, having a small loose single
+canoe in her, to put out upon occasion. She sailed so fast that
+few Dutch ships could have outstripped her. She was steered
+behind by two oars, one in each canoe, and when they have a mind
+to tack they use oars forwards. Sending their boat to sound at
+one of these islands, ground was found a cannon-shot from the
+shore, in twelve, fourteen, and fifteen fathoms, but shelvy. The
+savages in the bark made signs as if directing them to the other
+island, but they anchored at the former in twenty-five fathoms on
+a sandy bottom, a cannon-shot from shore.</p>
+
+<p>This island, in lat. 16&deg; 10' S. is one entire mountain,
+looking like one of the Molucca islands, and all covered with
+cocoa-nut trees, for which reason they named it Cocoa
+island.[116] The other island is much lower than this, but
+longer, and stretches east and west. While at anchor off Cocoa
+island there came three <i>ships</i>,[117] and nine or ten canoes
+about them, having three or four men in each. Some of these
+holding out white flags in token of peace, the Dutch did so
+likewise. The canoes were flat before and sharp behind, hewed
+each out of one piece of a red kind of wood, and sailed very
+swiftly. On coming near the Unity, some of the savages leapt into
+the sea and swam to the ship, having their hands full of
+cocoa-nuts and <i>ubes-roots,</i>[118] which they bartered for
+nails and beads, giving four or five cocoa-nuts for a nail or a
+small string of beads, so that the Dutch that day procured 180
+cocoa-nuts. This traffic brought so many of the natives on board,
+that the Dutch could hardly stir about the ship.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 116: Cocas, or Boscawen island, is in
+16&deg; 32' S. and long. 169&deg; 35' W. The other island
+mentioned in the text, Traitors, or Keppel island, is a few
+leagues S.S.W. from Cocos.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 117: These ships must have been large
+double canoes.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 118: These <i>ubes</i>-roots were perhaps
+the same that are called <i>eddoes</i> by modern navigators among
+the South Sea islands.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The boat was now sent to the other island to see for a more
+convenient place in which to anchor; but she was presently beset
+by a vast number of canoes filled with a mad sort of people,
+armed with clubs, who boarded the boat and attacked the Dutchmen.
+On firing their muskets, the savages laughed at them for making
+so much noise and doing so little hurt; but, on the next
+discharge, one of them being shot through the breast, they learnt
+to pay more respect to the muskets, and to keep their due
+distance for the future. The savages were lusty,
+well-proportioned men, and most expert swimmers, but naked and
+thievish, and very fantastical in the fashion of their hair, some
+having it short, others long, some curled, and others plaited or
+folded up in various forms.</p>
+
+<p>On the 12th the savages came again in their canoes, laden with
+cocoas, bananas, <i>ubes-roots</i>, hogs, and fresh water,
+contending violently who should get first on board. Those who
+were behind, being unable to get over the throng of canoes and
+men before them, leapt into the sea, and diving under the canoes,
+swam to the ship with bunches of cocoas in their mouths, and
+climbed up the side like so many rats, and in such swarms that
+the Dutch had to keep them off with cudgels. The Dutch bartered
+with them that day for so many cocoas, as to produce twelve for
+each of their men, being eighty-five in number. The natives
+wondered much at the size and strength of the Dutch ship; and
+some of them even dived under her bottom, knocking it with
+stones, as if to try how strong it was. The king of these savages
+sent a black hog on board as a present, charging the messenger to
+take no reward. Shortly after he came in person, in a large ship
+of their fashion, attended by thirty-five single canoes; and when
+at a small distance from the ship, he and all his people began to
+bawl out as loud as they could, being their manner of welcoming
+strangers. The Dutch received him with drums and trumpets, which
+pleased him much; and he and his attendants shewed their sense of
+this honourable reception by bowing and clapping their hands. The
+king gave them a present after his fashion, which they requited
+with an old hatchet, some rusty nails and glass beads, and a
+piece of linen, with all which he seemed much pleased. This king
+was not distinguished from his subjects by any external mark of
+dignity, but merely by the reverence they shewed him, as he was
+equally naked with all the rest; but he could not be prevailed on
+to come on board the Unity.</p>
+
+<p>At noon on the 13th, the Dutch ship was surrounded by
+twenty-three large double canoes, or ships of their fashion, and
+forty-five single canoes, in all of which there could not be less
+than seven or eight hundred men. At first they pretended to come
+for the purpose of trade, making signs of friendship, and
+endeavouring to prevail upon the Dutch to remove their ship to
+the other island, where they would be better accommodated. Yet,
+in spite of all these fair pretences, the Dutch suspected that
+some mischief was intended by the savages, who now began to
+environ the ship all around, and then, with a great outcry, made
+a sudden attack. The king's ship was the foremost in the action,
+and rushed with such violence against the Unity, that the heads
+of the two canoes composing it were both dashed to pieces. The
+rest came on as well as they could, throwing repeated showers of
+great stones on board; but the Dutch, having been on their guard,
+so galled them with musquetry, and with three great guns loaded
+with musket-balls and nails, that all the savages were fain to
+quit their canoes, and seek for safety in the water. Being thus
+put to the rout, they dispersed as quickly as possible. These
+treacherous savages were inhabitants of the lower, or more
+southerly, of the two islands, which therefore the Dutch named
+<i>Traitor's Island</i>.</p>
+
+<p>Schouten sailed from Cocoa Island that same day, holding a
+course to the W. and W. by S. and came on the 14th to another
+island, about thirty leagues from Cocoa Island, to which he gave
+the name of <i>Hope Island</i>,[119] because expecting there to
+meet with refreshments. Finding no ground for anchorage, the boat
+was sent to sound along shore, and found a stony bottom about a
+musket-shot from the shore, in some places having forty, and in
+others twenty and thirty fathoms, and then no bottom at all next
+throw of the lead. Some ten or twelve canoes came off to the
+ship, bartering a small quantity of flying fishes for beads, the
+articles being reciprocally exchanged by means of a rope let down
+from the stern of the ship. From this peddling traffic the
+Indians soon after withdrew, and endeavoured to board and carry
+away the boat which was employed in sounding; but met with such a
+reception from guns, pikes, and cutlasses, that after two of them
+were slain, they were glad to hurry away as fast as they could.
+This island was mostly composed of black cliffs, which were green
+on the top, and seemed well stocked with cocoa-trees. There were
+several houses seen along the sea side; and in one place was a
+large village close beside a strand, or landing-place. As there
+was no convenient anchorage at this place, the ground being
+extremely rough, Schouten proceeded on his voyage to the S.W.
+meaning to pursue the originally intended discovery of a southern
+continent.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 119: Hope Island is in lat. 16&deg; 32' S.
+and in 177&deg; 25' W. longitude.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 18th May, being in lat. 16&deg; 5' S. and the west wind
+becoming very unsteady, they began to consult as to the farther
+prosecution of their voyage. Schouten represented that they were
+now at least 1600 leagues westward from the coast of Peru,
+without having made the expected discovery of a southern land, of
+which there was now no great probability of success, having
+already sailed much farther west than they at first intended. He
+said also, if they persisted in following their present course,
+they would assuredly come to the southern side of New Guinea; and
+if they were unable to find a passage through that country, to
+the west or north, they would inevitably be lost, since it would
+be impossible for them to get back again, by reason of the east
+winds which continually reign in these seas. For these reasons,
+and others which he urged, he proposed, that they should now
+alter their course to the northwards, so as to fall in with the
+north side of New Guinea.[120] This proposal was embraced by all
+the company, and it was immediately determined to change the
+course to N.N.W. Accordingly, holding their course in that new
+direction, they saw two islands at noon of the 19th, about eight
+leagues from them, N.E. by E. and seeming to be a cannon-shot
+distant from each other.[121] Upon this they steered N.E. with
+fair weather and a scanty wind, meaning to approach this island,
+but could only get within a league of it on the 21st, when they
+were visited by two canoes, the people in which began immediately
+to threaten them with loud cries, and at the same time seemed
+preparing to dart their <i>assagays</i> or spears: but, on a
+discharge from the ship, they made off in haste, leaving two of
+their companions behind them who were slain, and a shirt they had
+stolen from the ship. Next day other natives came to the ship on
+friendly and peaceable terms, bringing cocoa-nuts, ubes-roots,
+and roasted hogs, which they bartered for knives, beads, and
+nails.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 120: It is almost needless to mention, that
+if Schouten had continued his course in the former parallel of
+between 15&deg; and 16&deg; S. he must have fallen in with the
+group of islands now called the New Hebrides, and afterward with
+the northern part of New South Wales.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 121: This was only one island, in lat.
+15&deg; S. and long. 180&deg; 10' W. which they named Horn
+Island.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The natives of this island were all as expert swimmers and
+divers as those in Traitor's Island, and as well versed in
+cheating and stealing, which they never failed to do when an
+opportunity offered. Their houses stood all along the shore,
+being thatched with leaves, and having each a kind of penthouse
+to shed off the rain. They were mostly ten or twelve feet high,
+and twenty-five feet in compass, their only furniture within
+being a bed of dry leaves, a fishing-rod or two, and a great
+club, even the house of their king being no better provided than
+the rest. At this island the Dutch found good convenience for
+watering; and on the 26th they sent three of their principal
+people on shore as hostages, or pledges, of friendship with the
+islanders, retaining six of them aboard in the same capacity. The
+Dutch pledges were treated on shore with great respect by the
+king, who presented them with four hogs; and gave strict orders
+that none of his people should give the smallest disturbance to
+the boat while watering. The natives stood in great awe of their
+king, and were very fearful of having any of their crimes made
+known to him. One of them having stolen a cutlass, and complaint
+being made to one of the king's officers, the thief was pursued
+and soundly drubbed, besides being forced to make restitution; on
+which occasion the officer signified, that it was well for the
+culprit that the king knew not of his crime, otherwise his life
+would certainly have been forfeited.</p>
+
+<p>These islanders were extremely frightened at the report of a
+gun, which would set them all running like so many madmen. Yet on
+one occasion the king desired to hear one of the great guns let
+off, and being set for that purpose under a canopy, with all his
+courtiers about him, in great state, the gun was no sooner fired
+than he ran off into the woods as fast as possible, followed by
+his attendants, and no persuasions of the Dutch could stop them.
+The 25th and 26th the Dutch went ashore to endeavour to procure
+hogs, but were unable to get any, as the islanders had now only a
+few left, and would only part with cocoas, bananas, and
+ubes-roots; yet the king continued his wonted kindness and
+respect, and he and his lieutenant took the crowns from their own
+heads, and set them on the heads of two of the company. These
+crowns were composed of the white, red, and green feathers of
+parrots and doves. The doves of this island are white on the
+back, and black every where else except the breast; and each of
+the king's counsellors has one of these birds sitting beside him
+on a stick.</p>
+
+<p>The ship being completely supplied with fresh water on the
+28th, Schouten and Le Maire went ashore with the trumpets, with
+which music the king was highly gratified. He told them of his
+wars with the inhabitants of the other island, and shewed several
+caves and thickets where they were in use to place ambuscades. It
+plainly appeared that he was fearful of the Dutch having some
+design of seizing his country, as he would fain have engaged them
+to go to war with the other island, and even offered to give them
+ten hogs and a good quantity of cocoas, if they would be gone
+from his island in two days. Yet he made them a visit aboard,
+praying when he entered the ship, and praying also at every cabin
+he entered. He used always to pray likewise every time the Dutch
+came ashore to visit him. His subjects also shewed great
+submission to the Dutch, kissing their feet, and laying them on
+their own necks, with all the marks of awe and fear they could
+express.</p>
+
+<p>The 30th of May was a day of great ceremony, in consequence of
+the king of the <i>other island</i>[122] coming to visit the king
+of this. This king was accompanied by a train of 300 naked
+Indians, having bunches of green herbs stuck about their waists,
+of which herb they make their drink. To make sure of a welcome,
+this king brought with him a present of sixteen hogs. When the
+two kings came in sight of each other, they began to bow and to
+mutter certain prayers; on meeting they both fell prostrate on
+the ground, and after several strange gestures, they got up and
+walked to two seats provided for them, where they uttered a few
+more prayers, bowing reverently to each other, and at length sat
+down under the same canopy. After this, by way of doing honour to
+the stranger king, a messenger was sent aboard, requesting to
+send the drums and trumpets ashore, which was done accordingly,
+and they played a march to the great entertainment of the two
+kings. After this a solemn banquet was prepared, for which they
+began to make ready their liquor, and in the following strange
+and abominable manner. A number of Indians came into the presence
+of the two kings and their attendants, bringing a good quantity
+of <i>cana</i>, the herb of which they make their drink, each of
+whom took a large mouthful thereof, and having chewed it a while,
+put it from their mouths into a large wooden trough, and poured
+water on the chewed herb. After stirring it some time, they
+squeezed out all the liquor, which they presented in cups to the
+two kings.[123] They also offered of it to the Dutch, who were
+ready to vomit at the nastiness of its preparation.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 122: No <i>other island</i> is to be found
+in modern maps near Horn Island, the nearest being the Feejee
+Islands, a numerous group, about thirty leagues S.S.W. It is
+therefore probable that Horn Island may have consisted of two
+peninsulas, united by a low narrow neck, appearing to Schouten as
+two distinct islands.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 123: In the Society Islands, as related by
+modern navigators, an intoxicating liquor is prepared nearly in a
+similar manner, by chewing the <i>ava</i>, or
+pepper-root.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The eating part of this entertainment consisted of ubes-roots
+roasted, and hogs nicely dressed in the following manner: Having
+ripped open their bellies and taken out the entrails, they singed
+off the hair, and put hot stones into their bellies, by which,
+without farther cleaning or dressing, they were made fit for the
+royal feast.[124] They presented two hogs dressed in this manner
+to the Dutch, with all the form and ceremony used to their kings,
+laying them first on their heads, then kneeling with much
+humility, they left them at their feet. They gave the Dutch also
+eleven living hogs; for which they got in return a present of
+knives, old nails, and glass beads, with which they were well
+pleased. The natives of this island were of a dark yellow colour,
+so tall, large, strong, and well-proportioned, that the tallest
+of the Dutch could only be compared with the smallest among them.
+Some wore their hair curled, frizzled, or tied up in knots, while
+others had it standing bolt upright on their heads, like
+hog's-bristles, a quarter of an ell high. The king and some of
+his chief men had long locks of hair, hanging down below their
+hips, bound with a few knots. The women were all very ugly
+figures, short and ill-shaped, their breasts hanging down to
+their bellies like empty satchels, and their hair close cropped.
+Both sexes were entirely naked, except a slight covering in
+front. They seemed altogether void of any devotion, and free from
+care, living on what the earth spontaneously produces, without
+any art, industry, or cultivation. They neither sow nor reap,
+neither buy nor sell, neither do any thing for a living, but
+leave all to nature, and must starve if that fail them at any
+time. They seem also to have as little regard for the dictates of
+decency and modesty, as for those of civil policy and prudence;
+for they will use their women openly in the largest assembly,
+even in presence of their king, whom, in other respects, they so
+greatly reverence. To this island the Dutch gave the name of Horn
+Island, from the town in Holland whence they fitted out; and
+named the haven in which they anchored <i>Unity Bay</i>, after
+their ship. This bay, resembling a natural dock, is on the south
+side of the island, in the latitude of 14&deg; 16' S.[125]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 124: Modern voyagers describe this mode of
+dressing more minutely. A pit is dug in the earth, which is lined
+with heated stones, on which the hog is placed, having hot stones
+in its belly, and is covered with other hot stones, when the pit
+is covered up like a grave. After remaining a sufficient time in
+this situation, the <i>barbacued hog</i> is said to be nicely
+dressed.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 125: The latitude and longitude of Horn
+Island have been given in a former note, but its most extreme
+south point may reach to 15&deg; 16' S.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Leaving Horn Island on the 1st of June, they saw no other land
+till the 21st, when they made towards a very low island bearing
+S.S.W. by W. from them, in lat. 4&deg; 47' S. near which were
+several sands stretching N.W. from the land, as also three or
+four small islands very full of trees. Here a canoe came to the
+Unity, of the same odd fashion with those formerly described. The
+people also were much like those formerly seen, only blacker, and
+armed with bows and arrows, being the first they had seen among
+the Indians of the South Sea. These people told them, by signs,
+that there was more land to the westwards, where their king
+dwelt, and where there were good refreshments to be had. On this
+information, they sailed on the 22d W. and W. by N. in the lat.
+of 4&deg; 45' S. and saw that day at least twelve or thirteen
+islands close together, lying W.S.W. from them, and reaching S.E.
+and N.W. about half a league, but they left these to larboard.
+The 24th, the wind being S. they saw three low islands to
+larboard, S.W. of their course, one of them very small, the other
+two being each two miles long, all very full of trees, to which
+they gave the name of <i>Green Islands</i>.[126] The shores of
+these islands were rugged and full of cliffs, presenting no place
+for anchoring, wherefore they proceeded on their voyage.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 126: These Green Islands of Schouten are
+laid down in our best modern maps in lat. 4&deg; S. and long.
+205&deg; 20' W. The other two groups mentioned at this place in
+the text and without names, seem to have been the <i>Four
+Islands</i> and the <i>Nine Islands</i> of Carteret, to the S.E.
+of Green Islands.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the 25th, being St John the Baptist's day, they sailed past
+another island, on which were seven or eight hovels, which they
+named St John's Island. [Lat. 3&deg; 40' S. long. 206&deg; 20'
+W.] At this time they saw some very high land to the S.W. which
+they thought to be the western point of New Guinea.[127] They
+reached this coast by noon, and sailed along, sending their boat
+in search of an anchorage, but no bottom could then be found. Two
+or three canoes filled with a barbarous people attacked the boat
+with slings, but were soon driven away by the muskets. These
+people were very black, entirely naked, and spoke a quite
+different language from that of the islanders they had seen
+hitherto. They kept fires burning on the coast all night, and
+some of them came lurking about the ship in their canoes; but
+though the Dutch, on discovering them, did every thing they could
+to conciliate, they would not understand any signs made for
+procuring provisions, but answered all with horrible noises and
+outcries.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 127: This land was discovered afterwards to
+be separate from New Guinea, and is now named New Ireland, having
+another large island interposed, called New
+Britain.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>At night, they anchored in a bay in 40 fathoms on uneven
+ground. About this place the country was high and verdant, and
+afforded a pleasant prospect, being, as they guessed, 1840
+leagues west from the coast of Peru. In the morning of the 26th,
+three canoes came to the ship, quite full of these barbarians,
+being well armed after their manner, with clubs, wooden swords,
+and slings. The Dutch treated them kindly, giving them several
+toys to procure their favour; but they were not to be won by
+kindness, neither could they be taught good manners except by the
+language of the great guns: For they presently assaulted the ship
+with all their force, and continued till ten or twelve of them
+were slain by cannon-shot. They then threw themselves into the
+water, endeavouring to escape by swimming and diving; but they
+were pursued in the water by the boat, when several were knocked
+in the head, and three prisoners taken, besides four of their
+canoes, which were cut up as fuel for the use of the ship. Though
+these savages would not formerly understand any signs, they were
+now more apt, and understood that hogs and bananas were demanded
+in ransom for the prisoners. One wounded man was set at liberty,
+but the Dutch exacted ten hogs for the others. This island
+afforded a sort of birds that are all over bright red. North of
+it lay another island, of which they made no other discovery,
+except its position in regard to this. The Dutch concluded that
+these people were of the <i>Papuas</i> nation, because of their
+short hair, and because they chewed betel mixed with chalk.</p>
+
+<p>In the evening of the 28th, they sailed from hence, and next
+day held a course to the N.W. and N.W. by N. with a shifting wind
+till noon, and then a calm. They had the point of the island in
+view till evening, though they sailed along the coast, which was
+full of bays and turnings, and trended N.W. and N.W. by W. This
+day they saw other three high islands, which lay northwards five
+or six miles from the greater one, being then in the latitude of
+3&deg; 20' S. The 30th in the morning, several canoes of these
+black Papuas came off to the ship, and being allowed to come
+aboard, broke certain staves over the Dutch, in sign of peace.
+Their canoes were more artificially made and ornamented than the
+others, and the people seemed more civilized and more modest, as
+they had the pudenda covered, which the others had not. Their
+hair was rubbed over with chalk, their black frizly locks
+appearing as if powdered. They affected to be poor, and came to
+beg, not bringing any thing to the ship, yet the four islands
+whence they came appeared, to be well stored with cocoas.</p>
+
+<p>On the 1st June, the Dutch came to anchor between the coast of
+New Guinea and an island two miles long. They were soon after
+surrounded by twenty-five canoes, full of the same people who had
+broken staves the day before in token of peace, and who came now
+fully armed in guise of war. They were not long of entering on
+the work they came about. Two of them laid hold of two anchors
+which hung from the bows of the ship, and endeavoured with their
+girdles to tug the ship on shore. The rest lay close to the
+ship's sides, and gave a brisk onset with slings and other
+weapons; but the great guns soon forced them to retire, with
+twelve or thirteen killed, and many more wounded. After this, the
+Dutch sailed peaceably along the coast, with a good gale of wind,
+continuing their course W.N.W. and N.W. by W. The 2d they were in
+lat. 3&deg; 12' S. and saw a low land to larboard, and right
+before them a low island. Continuing W.N.W. with a slight current
+at E.N.E. they sailed gently along. The 3d they saw high land,
+bearing W. about 14 leagues from the other island, and in lat.
+2&deg; 41' S. The 4th, while passing these four island, they
+suddenly came in view of twenty-three other islands, some great,
+some small, some high, and others low, most of which they left to
+starboard, and only two or three to larboard. Some of these were
+a league distant from the others, and some only a cannon-shot.
+Their latitude was in 2&deg; 30' S. a little more or less.</p>
+
+<p>On the 6th in the morning, the weather being variable and even
+sometimes stormy, they had in the morning a very high hill before
+them, bearing S.W. which they thought to have been
+<i>Geeminassi</i> in Banda; but, on a nearer approach, they
+discovered three other hills more like it in the north, some six
+or seven leagues distant, which they were convinced were that
+hill of Banda.[128] Behind these hills lay a large tract of land,
+stretching east and west, of very great extent, and very uneven.
+In the morning of the 7th, they sailed towards these mighty
+hills, some of which they found were volcanoes, for which reason
+they named this <i>Vulcan's Island</i>. It was well inhabited and
+fall of cocoa-nut trees, but had no convenient place for
+anchorage. The inhabitants were naked, and extremely fearful of
+the Dutch, and their language so different from that of all the
+neighbouring people, that none of the blacks could understand
+them. More islands appeared to the N. and N.W. but they proceeded
+to a very low island, bearing N.W. by W. which they reached in
+the evening. The water here was observed to be of several
+colours, green, white, and yellow, perhaps occasioned by the
+mixture of some river, as it was far sweeter than ordinary sea
+water, and was full of leaves and boughs of trees, on some of
+which were birds, and even some crabs.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 128: They still had the north-western end
+of Papua or New Guinea between them and Banda, from which they
+were distant at least twelve degrees of
+longitude.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the 8th, continuing their course W.N.W. having a high
+island on the starboard, and another somewhat lower to larboard,
+they anchored in the afternoon in 70 fathoms on a good sandy
+bottom, about a cannon-shot from the land, at an island in 3&deg;
+40' S. which seemed an unhealthy place, yielding nothing of any
+value except a little ginger. It was inhabited by Papuas or
+blacks, whose ridiculous mode of dress, and their own natural
+deformity, made them appear little short of a kind of monsters.
+Hardly any of them but had something odd and strange, either in
+the bigness or position of their limbs. They had strings of hog's
+teeth hung about their necks; their noses were perforated, in
+which rings were fastened; their hair was frizled, and their
+faces very ugly. Their houses also were extremely singular, being
+mounted on stakes, eight or nine feet above the ground. Before
+noon of the 9th, they anchored in a more convenient bay, in 26
+fathoms, on a bottom of sand mixed with clay. There were two
+villages near the shore, whence some canoes brought off hogs and
+cocoas, but the Indians held them at so dear a rate that the
+Dutch would not buy any of them.</p>
+
+<p>Though they had now sailed so long upon this new land, yet
+were they unable to determine with any certainty if it actually
+were the coast of New Guinea, as their charts neither agreed with
+each other, nor with the coast in view. This coast for the most
+part ran N.W. by W. sometimes more westerly, and at other times
+more northerly. Yet they held on their course W.N.W. along the
+coast, having quiet weather though dull winds, but assisted by a
+stream or current setting along the coast to the westwards.
+Proceeding in this manner, they came into the lat. of 2&deg; 58'
+S. at noon of the 12th. Continuing their course on the 13th and
+14th, the coast in sight was sometimes high and at other times
+low. The 15th, still pursuing the same course, they reached two
+low islands about half a league from the main, about the latitude
+of 2&deg; 54' S. where they had good anchorage in 45 and 46
+fathoms. Seeing the country well stored with cocoas, two boats
+well armed were sent with orders to land and procure some
+cocoa-nuts. But they were forced to retire by the Indians, in
+spite of their muskets, at least sixteen of the Dutch, being
+wounded by arrows and stones thrown from slings.</p>
+
+<p>In the morning of the 16th, they sailed in between the two low
+islands, and anchored in a safe place in nine fathoms. They
+landed that day on the smaller island, where they burnt some huts
+of the natives, and brought away as many cocoa-nuts as gave three
+to each man of the company. The barbarous natives became now more
+tractable; as on the 17th they came to make their peace-offerings
+of cocoas, bananas, ginger, and certain yellow roots [turmeric]
+used instead of saffron. They even trusted the Dutch so far as to
+come on board, when peace was entirely restored, and their hearts
+won by a few nails and beads. They continued bartering on the
+18th, for cocoas and bananas, procuring fifty nuts and two
+bunches of bananas for each man of the company, with a smaller
+quantity of cassava and <i>papade</i>. These cassavas and papades
+are East India commodities, the former being also to be had
+particularly good in the West Indies, and far preferable to what
+they got here. The people make all their bread of this substance,
+baking it in large round cakes. This smaller island, which is the
+more easterly, the natives named <i>Mosa</i>; the other over
+against it they call <i>Jusan</i>, and the farthest off
+<i>Arimea</i>, which, is very high, and about five or six leagues
+from the coast of New Guinea.[129] These places had probably been
+visited before by Europeans, as they had among them some Spanish
+pots and jars. They were not nearly so much surprised at the
+report of the great guns as the others had been, neither were
+they so curious in looking at the ship.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 129: These names are not to be found in our
+modern general maps, though certainly infinitely better for all
+the uses of geography than the absurd appellations so much in use
+among voyagers.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the 21st at noon, sailing along the land as before N.W.
+they were in lat. 1&deg; 13' S. The current drove them to a
+cluster of islands, where they anchored in thirteen fathoms, and
+were detained all day of the 22d by storms of thunder and rain.
+Setting sail in the morning of the 23d, six large canoes overtook
+them, bringing dried fish, cocoas, bananas, tobacco, and a small
+sort of fruit resembling plums. Some Indians also from another
+island brought provisions to barter, and some vessels of China
+porcelain. Like other Savages, they were excessively fond of
+beads and iron; but they were remarkably distinguished from the
+natives in the last islands, by their larger size, and more
+orange-coloured complexions. Their arms were bows and arrows, and
+they wore glass earrings of several colours, by which latter
+circumstance it appeared that they had been previously visited by
+other Europeans, and consequently that this was not to be
+considered as a discovery.</p>
+
+<p>The 24th, steering N.W. and W.N.W. and being in lat. 0&deg;
+30' S. they sailed along a very pleasant island, which they named
+Schouten's Island, after their master,[130] and called its
+western point Cape of Good Hope. The 25th they passed an
+extensive tract of uneven land on their larboard hand, stretching
+from E.S.E. to W.N.W. The 26th they saw three other islands, the
+coast stretching N.W. by W. The 27th they were in lat. 0&deg; 29'
+S. still seeing much land to the south, some of which were very
+high and some low, which they passed, continuing their course to
+the north of west. The 29th they felt the shock of an earthquake,
+which shook the ship to that degree that the men ran terrified
+out of their births, believing the ship had run a-ground, or had
+bilged against some rock. On heaving the lead they found the sea
+unfathomable, and their ship clear from all danger of rocks or
+shoals. The 30th they put into a great bay, out of which they
+could find no opening to the west, and resumed therefore a
+northern course. Here the ship trembled again with loud claps of
+thunder, and was almost set on fire by the lightning, had it not
+been prevented by prodigious rain.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 130: The centre of Schouten Island is in
+lat. 0&deg; 30' S. and long. 223&deg; W. It is nearly 24 leagues
+long from E. to W. and about eight leagues from N. to S. In some
+maps this island is named <i>Mysory</i>, probably the native
+appellation, and it lies off the mouth of a great bay, having
+within it another island of considerable size, called
+<i>Jobie</i>, or Traitor's Island.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 31st, continuing a northern course, they passed to the
+north of the equator, and being encompassed almost all round by
+land, they anchored in twelve fathoms on good ground, near a
+desolate island which lay close by the main land. The 1st of
+August they were in lat. 0&deg; 15' N. The 2d and 3d being calm,
+they were carried by the current W. and W. by N. This day at noon
+their latitude was 0&deg; 35' N. when they saw several whales and
+sea-tortoises, with two islands to the westwards. They now
+reckoned themselves at the western extremity of the land of New
+Guinea, along which they had sailed 280 leagues. Several canoes
+came off to them in the morning of the 5th, bringing Indian
+beans, rice, tobacco, and two beautiful birds of paradise, all
+white and yellow. These Indians spoke the language of Ternate,
+and some of them could speak a little Spanish and Malayan, in
+which last language Clawson the merchant was well skilled. All
+the people in these canoes were finely clothed from the waist
+downwards, some with loose silken robes, and others with
+breeches, and several had silken turbans on their head, being
+Mahometans. All of them had jet black hair, and wore many gold
+and silver rings on their fingers. They bartered their provisions
+with the Dutch for beads and other toys, but seemed more desirous
+of having linen. They appeared so fearful and suspicious of the
+Dutch, that they would not tell the name of their country, which
+however was suspected to be one of the three eastern points of
+Gilolo, and that the people were natives of Tidore, which was
+afterwards found to be the case.</p>
+
+<p>In the morning of the 6th they set sail, holding a northern,
+course, intending to go round the north point of Gilolo. The 7th
+they saw the north point of Morty, or Moraty, N.E. of Gilolo.
+Contending with variable winds and adverse currents it was the
+19th before they could get into the bay of <i>Soppy</i> in
+Gilolo, where they anchored in ten fathoms on sandy ground, about
+a cannon-shot from shore. Here they procured poultry, tortoises,
+sago, and rice, which was a great relief for the company, still
+consisting of eighty-five men in health and vigour. Leaving Soppy
+on the 25th August they came to the desert island of Moro on the
+1st September, and, on closer examination, found it composed of
+several islands close together. They saw here a worm, or serpent,
+as thick as a man's leg and of great length. On the 5th they
+anchored off the coast of Gilolo. At this place some of the
+seamen went ashore unarmed to catch fish, when four Ternatese
+soldiers rushed suddenly out of the wood sword-in-hand while the
+Dutchmen were drawing their net, intending to have slain them;
+but the surgeon called out to them <i>Oran Hollanda</i>, that is,
+<i>Holland men</i>, on which the soldiers instantly stopped,
+throwing water on their heads in token of peace, and approaching
+in a friendly manner, said they had mistaken the Dutchmen for
+Spaniards. At the request of the seamen they went on board,
+where, being well treated, they promised to bring provisions and
+refreshment to the ship, which they afterwards did.</p>
+
+<p>Sailing thence on the 14th they got sight of Ternate and
+Tidore on the 16th, and anchored on the 17th in the evening
+before Malaya in Ternate, in eleven fathoms sandy ground. Here
+captain Schouten and Jaques Le Maire went ashore, and were kindly
+entertained by the general Laurence Real, admiral Stephen
+Verhagen, and Jasper Janson, governor of Amboina. On the 18th
+they sold two of their pinnaces, with most of what had been saved
+out of the unfortunate Horn, receiving for the same 1350 reals,
+with part of which they purchased two lasts of rice, a ton of
+vinegar, a ton of Spanish wine, and three tons of biscuit. On the
+27th they sailed for Bantam, and on the 28th of October anchored
+at Jacatra, now Batavia. John Peterson Koen, president for the
+Dutch East India Company at Bantam, arrived there on the 31st of
+October, and next day sequestered the Unity and her cargo, as
+forfeited to the India company for illegally sailing within the
+boundaries of their charter.</p>
+
+<hr align="center" width="50%">
+<p>In consequence of the seizure of the Unity, captain Schouten
+and Jaques Le Maire, with others of their people, embarked at
+Bantam in the Amsterdam and Zealand on the 14th December, 1616,
+on which they set sail for Holland. On the 31st of that month
+Jaques Le Maire died, chiefly of grief and vexation on account of
+the disastrous end of an enterprise which had been so successful
+till the arrest of the ship and cargo. He was, however,
+exceedingly solicitous about his journal, which he had kept with
+the utmost care during the voyage, and left a recommendation that
+it should be published, that the world might know and judge of
+the usage they had received. The Amsterdam arrived in Zealand on
+the 1st July, 1617, where her consort had arrived the day before.
+Thus was this circumnavigation of the globe completed in two
+years and eighteen days; which, considering the difficulties of
+the course, and other circumstances of the voyage, was a
+wonderfully short period.[131]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 131: In the Collection of Harris this
+voyage is succeeded by a dissertation on the high probability of
+a southern continent existing, and that this supposed continent
+must be another <i>Indies</i>. Both of these fancies being now
+sufficiently overthrown by the investigations of our immortal
+Cook, and other modern navigators, it were useless to encumber
+our pages with such irrelevant reveries.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<h2><a name="chapter4-7" id="chapter4-7">CHAPTER VII.</a></h2>
+
+<p>VOYAGE OF THE NASSAU FLEET ROUND THE WORLD, IN 1623-1626,
+UNDER THE COMMAND OF JAQUES LE HERMITE.[132]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 132: Harris I. 66. Callend. II.
+286.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>INTRODUCTION.</p>
+
+<p>The government of the United Netherlands, considering it
+proper to distress their arch enemy the king of Spain by every
+means in their power, determined upon sending a powerful squadron
+into the South Sea, to capture the ships of his subjects, to
+plunder the coasts of his dominions, and to demolish his
+fortifications. Accordingly, in autumn 1622, a final resolution
+for this purpose was entered into by the States General, with the
+concurrence of their stadtholder, Prince Maurice of Orange, who
+even advanced a considerable sum of money towards it from his own
+funds; and a fleet of no less than eleven ships of war, besides
+smaller vessels, were ordered to be fitted out for the
+expedition, by the several admiralties of the Union and the East
+India Company. This fleet was in condition for putting to sea in
+spring 1623, when the command was intrusted to Jaques Le Hermite,
+an able and accomplished seaman of great experience, who had been
+long in the service of the East India Company, and was now
+appointed admiral of the fleet; Hugo Schapenham being
+vice-admiral. The ships fitted out on this occasion by the
+admiralty of Amsterdam were,--</p>
+
+<p>1. The Amsterdam of 800 tons, admiral, carrying twenty brass
+cannon and twenty-two iron, with 237 men, commanded by Leenders
+Jacobson Stolk, as captain, Peter Wely being supercargo,
+Engelbert Schutte commander of the soldiers on board, Frederick
+van Reneygom fiscal or judge-advocate, John van Walbeck,
+engineer, and Justin van Vogelair engineer extraordinary.</p>
+
+<p>2. The Delft of 800 tons, vice-admiral, having twenty brass
+and twenty iron cannon, with 242 men, commanded by captain
+Cornelius de Witte.</p>
+
+<p>3. The Eagle of 400 tons, captain Meydert Egbertson, of twelve
+brass and sixteen iron cannon, with 144 men.</p>
+
+<p>4. A yacht called the Greyhound, of sixty tons, captain
+Solomon Willelmson, carrying four brass cannons and twenty
+men.</p>
+
+<p>The admiralty of Zealand fitted out only one ship for this
+expedition.</p>
+
+<p>5. The Orange of 700 tons, captain Laurence John Quirynen, and
+carrying likewise the rear-admiral, John William Verschoor. Her
+complement of men was 216.[133]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 133: Her number of guns is not mentioned,
+but she could hardly have less than thirty-six from her
+size--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The admiralty of the Maes furnished the following ships:</p>
+
+<p>6. The Holland of 600 tons and 152 men, carrying ten pieces of
+brass and twenty of iron ordnance. In this ship was Cornelius
+Jacobson, who was counsellor to admiral Le Hermite, but the ship
+was immediately commanded by captain Adrian Troll.</p>
+
+<p>7. The Maurice of 360 tons and 169 men, having twelve brass
+and twenty iron cannon, commanded by captain James Adrianson.</p>
+
+<p>8. The Hope of 260 tons and eighty men, with fourteen iron
+cannon, captain Peter Hermanson Slobbe.</p>
+
+<p>The admiralty of North Holland also provided the following
+ships:</p>
+
+<p>9. The Concord of 600 tons and 170 men, with eighteen brass
+and fourteen iron cannon, captain John Ysbrandtz.</p>
+
+<p>10. The King David of 360 tons and seventy-nine men, with
+sixteen pieces of brass cannon, captain John Thomason.</p>
+
+<p>11. The Griffin of 320 tons, and seventy-eight men, with
+fourteen iron cannon, captain Peter Cornelison Hurdloop.</p>
+
+<p>The whole of this fleet of eleven sail, carrying 294 pieces of
+cannon, had 1637 men, of whom 600 were regular soldiers, divided
+into five companies of 120 men in each. The East India Company
+contributed largely to the expence, but does not appear to have
+equipped any ships on this occasion.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION I.</p>
+
+<p><i>Incidents of the Voyage from Holland to the South
+Sea</i>.</p>
+
+<p>This armament, usually called the Nassau fleet, was by far the
+most considerable that had hitherto been sent against the
+Spaniards in the new world, and none so powerful has since
+navigated along the western coast of America in an hostile
+manner. It sailed on the 29th April, 1622, from Goeree roads, all
+but the Orange, which joined next day.</p>
+
+<p>On the 7th June, while chasing a Barbary corsair, a Christian
+slave, who happened to be at the helm, ran the corsair on board
+the Dutch vice-admiral, and immediately he and other slaves took
+the opportunity of leaping on board to escape from slavery. The
+captain of the corsair, who happened to be a Dutch renegado,
+followed them, and demanded restitution of his slaves; but the
+vice-admiral expostulated so strongly with him on the folly and
+infamy of deserting his country and religion, that he sent for
+every thing belonging to him out of the corsair, and agreed to go
+along with the fleet, to the regret of the Turks, who thus lost
+their captain and seventeen good men.</p>
+
+<p>On the 5th July the fleet anchored in the road of St Vincent,
+which is extremely safe and commodious, where they procured
+refreshments of sea-tortoises, fish, goats, and oranges. The
+islands of St Vincent and St Antonio are the most westerly of the
+Cape Verds, being in from 16&deg; 30' to 18&deg; N. latitude, and
+about two leagues from each other. The bay of St Vincent, in
+which they anchored, is in lat. 16&deg; 56' N. and has a good
+firm sandy bottom, with eighteen, twenty, and twenty-five fathoms
+water. The island of St Vincent is rocky, barren, and
+uncultivated, having very little fresh water, though they found a
+small spring which might have served two or three ships. By
+digging wells they procured plenty of water, but somewhat
+brackish, to which they attributed the bloody flux, which soon
+after began to prevail in the fleet. The goats there, of which
+they caught fifteen or sixteen every day, were very fat and
+excellent eating. The sea-tortoises which they took there were
+from two to three feet long. They come on shore to lay their
+eggs, which they cover with sand, leaving them to be hatched by
+the heat of the sun. Their season of laying eggs is from August
+to February, remaining all the rest of the year in the sea. They
+caught every night great numbers of these animals while ashore to
+lay their eggs, and the sailors found them wholesome and pleasant
+food, eating more like flesh than fish.</p>
+
+<p>This island is altogether uninhabited, but the people of St
+Lucia come here once a year to catch tortoises, for the sake of
+an oil they prepare from them; and to hunt goats, the skins of
+which are sent to Portugal, and their flesh, after being salted
+and dried at St Jago, is exported to Brazil. There are no
+fruit-trees in this island, except a few wild figs in the
+interior; besides which, it produces colocinth, or bitter apple
+which is a very strong purge.[134] This island has a very dry
+climate, except during the rainy season, which begins in August
+and ends in February, but is not very regular.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 134: Cucumis Colocynthis, a plant of the
+cucumber family, producing a fruit about the size of an orange,
+the medullary part of which, when ripe, dried, and freed from the
+seeds, is a very light, white, spongy substance, composed of
+membranous leaves, excessively bitter, nauseous, and
+acrid.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The island of St Antonio is inhabited by about 500 negroes,
+including men, women, and children, who subsist chiefly on goats,
+and also cultivate a small quantity of cotton. On the sea-side
+they have extensive plantations of lemons and oranges, whence
+they gather great quantities every year. These were very readily
+supplied to the Dutch by the negroes in exchange for mercery
+goods, but they saw neither hogs, sheep, nor poultry in the
+island.</p>
+
+<p>Sailing from St Vincent's on the 25th July, they anchored in
+the road of Sierra Leona on the 11th August. Here on the 15th
+some of the crew being on shore, eat freely of certain nuts
+resembling nutmegs, which had a fine taste, but had scarcely got
+on board when one of them dropt down dead, and before he was
+thoroughly cold he was all over purple spots. The rest recovered
+by taking proper medicines. Sierra Leona is a mountain on the
+continent of Africa, standing on the south side of the mouth of
+the river Mitomba, which discharges itself into a great bay of
+the sea. The road in which ships usually anchor is in the lat. of
+8&deg; 20' N. This mountain is very high, and thickly covered
+with trees, by which it may be easily known, as there is no
+mountain of such height any where upon the coast. There grow here
+a prodigious number of trees, producing a small kind of lemons
+called <i>limasses</i>, (limes?) resembling those of Spain in
+shape and taste, and which are very agreeable and wholesome, if
+not eaten to excess. The Dutch fleet arrived here at the season
+when this fruit was in perfection, and having full leave from the
+natives, the people eat them intemperately; by which, and the bad
+air, the bloody flux increased much among them, so that they lost
+forty men between the 11th of August and the 5th September.
+Sierra Leona abounds in palm-trees, and has some ananas, or
+pine-apples, with plenty of wood of all sorts, besides having an
+exceedingly convenient watering-place opposite to the
+anchorage.</p>
+
+<p>They sailed from Sierra Leona on the 4th September, on which
+day the admiral fell sick. On the 29th they were off the island
+of St Thomas, just on the north side of the line, and anchored on
+the 1st of October at Cape Lopo Gonzalves, in lat. 0&deg; 50' S.
+At this place the surgeon of the Maurice was convicted on his own
+confession of having poisoned seven sick men, because they had
+given him much trouble, for which he was beheaded. On the 30th of
+October they anchored in the road of Annobon, where they obtained
+hogs and fowls, and were allowed to take in water, and to gather
+as many oranges as they thought proper. The east end of this
+island, where are the road and village, is in lat. 1&deg; 30' S.
+and long. 6&deg; E. from Greenwich. The island is about six
+leagues in circuit, consisting of high and tolerably good land,
+and is inhabited by about 150 families of negroes, who are
+governed by two or three Portuguese, to whom they are very
+submissive. If any of them happen to be refractory, they are
+immediately sent away to the island of St Thomas, a punishment
+which they greatly dread. The island abounds in ananas, bananas,
+cocoa-nuts, tamarinds, and sugar-canes; but the principal
+inducement for ships touching here is the great plenty of
+oranges, of which the Dutch gathered upwards of 200,000, besides
+what the seamen eat while on shore. These oranges were of great
+size and full of juice, some weighing three quarters of a pound,
+and of an excellent taste and flavour, as if perfumed. They are
+to be had ripe all the year round, but there is one season in
+which they are best and fittest for keeping, which was past
+before the Dutch arrived, and the oranges were then mostly over
+ripe and beginning to rot. The island also produces lemons, and
+has plenty of oxen, cows, goats, and hogs, which the negroes
+bartered for salt. On the S.E. part of the island there is a good
+watering-place, but difficult to find, which is commanded by a
+stone breast-work, whence the negroes might greatly annoy any who
+attempted to water by force. They grow here some cotton, which is
+sent to Portugal. The natives are treacherous, and require to be
+cautiously dealt with.</p>
+
+<p>The fleet left Annobon on the 4th November, and on the 6th
+January, 1624, they were in lat. 44&deg; 40' S. where they saw
+many sea-gulls, and much herbage floating on the water, whence
+they supposed themselves near the continent of South America. On
+the 19th the sea appeared as red as blood, proceeding from an
+infinite quantity of a small species of shrimps. On the 28th they
+lost sight of their bark, in which were eighteen men, three of
+them Portuguese. These people, as they afterwards learnt, having
+in vain endeavoured to rejoin the fleet, determined to return to
+Holland. Being in want of water, they sailed up the Rio de la
+Plata till they came into fresh water, after which they continued
+their voyage, suffering incredible hardships, and the utmost
+extremity of want, till they arrived on the coast of England,
+where they ran their vessel on shore to escape a privateer
+belonging to Dunkirk, and afterward got back to Holland.</p>
+
+<p>The 1st February the fleet came in sight of land, being Cape
+de Pennas.[135] Next day they found themselves at the mouth of
+the straits. This is easily distinguished, as the country on the
+east, called <i>Saten Land</i>, is mountainous, but broken and
+very uneven; while that on the west, called <i>Maurice Land</i>
+by the Dutch, or Terra del Fuego, has several small round hills
+close to the shore. The 6th they had sight of Cape Horn; and on
+the 11th, being in lat. 58&deg; 30' S. they had excessively cold
+weather, which the people were ill able to bear, being on short
+allowance. On the 16th they were in lat. 56&deg; 10' S. Cape Horn
+being then to the east of them, and anchored on the 17th in a
+large bay, which they named <i>Nassau bay</i>.[136] Another bay
+was discovered on the 18th, in which there was good anchorage,
+with great convenience for wooding and watering, and which they
+called Schapenham's bay, after the name of their
+vice-admiral.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 135: This seems to be what is now called
+Cape St Vincent, at the W. side of the entrance into the Straits
+of Le Maire.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 136: The centre of Nassau bay is in lat.
+55&deg; 30' N. long. 68&deg; 20' W. This bay is formed between
+Terra del Fuego on the north, and Hermite's island south by east,
+the south-eastern extreme point of which is Cape Horn. This
+island appears to have been named after admiral Le
+Hermite.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the 23d a storm arose with such violence that nineteen men
+belonging to the Eagle were compelled to remain on shore; and
+next day, when the boats were able to go for them, only two of
+these men were left alive, the savages having come upon them in
+the dark, and knocked seventeen of them on the head with their
+slings and wooden clubs, the poor Dutchmen being all unarmed, and
+not having offered the least injury or insult to the savages.
+Only five of the dead bodies were found on the shore, which were
+strangely mangled, all the rest having been carried away by the
+savages, as it was supposed, to eat them. After this, every boat
+that went ashore carried eight or ten soldiers for their
+security; but none of the savages ever appeared again.</p>
+
+<p>The vice-admiral went on the 25th in the Greyhound to visit
+the coast. On his return he reported to the admiral, that he
+found the Terra del Fuego divided into several islands, and that
+it was by no means necessary to double Cape Horn in order to get
+into the South Sea, as they might pass out from Nassau bay to the
+west into the open sea, leaving Cape Horn on the south. He
+apprehended also, that there were several passages from Nassau
+bay leading into the Straits of Magellan. The greatest part of
+the <i>Terra del Fuego</i> is mountainous, but interspersed with
+many fine vallies and meadows, and watered by numerous streams or
+rivulets, descending from the hills. Between the islands there
+are many good roads, where large fleets may anchor in safety, and
+where there is every desirable convenience for taking in wood,
+water, and ballast. The winds, which rage here more than in any
+other country, and with inexpressible violence, blow constantly
+from the west, for which reason such ships as are bound westerly
+ought to avoid this coast as much as possible, keeping as far
+south as they can, where they are likely to meet with southerly
+winds to facilitate their westerly course.</p>
+
+<p>The inhabitants of the Terra del Fuego are as fair as any
+Europeans, as was concluded by seeing a young child; but the
+grown-up people disguise themselves strangely, painting
+themselves with a red earth after many fanciful devices, some
+having their heads, others their arms, their legs and thighs red,
+and other parts of their bodies white. Many of them have one half
+of their bodies red, from the forehead to the feet, and the other
+side white. They are all strong made and well-proportioned, and
+generally about the same stature with Europeans. Their hair is
+black, which they wear long, thick, and bushy, to make them the
+more frightful. They have good teeth, but very thin, and as sharp
+as the edge of a knife. The men go entirely naked, and the women
+have only a piece of skin about their waists, which is very
+surprising, considering the severity of the climate. Their huts
+are made of trees, in the form of a round tent, having a hole at
+the top to let out the smoke. Within they are sunk two or three
+feet under the surface of the ground, and the earth taken from
+this hollow is thrown upon the outside. Their fishing-tackle is
+very curious, and is furnished with hooks made of stone, nearly
+of the same shape with ours. They are variously armed, some
+having bows and arrows artificially headed with stone; others
+long javelins or spears, headed with bone; some have great wooden
+clubs, some have slings, and most have stone knives, or daggers,
+which are very sharp. They are never seen without their arms, as
+they are always at war among themselves; and it would appear that
+the several tribes paint differently, that they may distinguish
+each other; for the people about the island of <i>Torhaltens</i>,
+and about <i>Schapenham bay</i>, were all painted black, while
+those about <i>Greyhound bay</i> were painted red.</p>
+
+<p>Their canoes are very singular, being formed of bark,
+fortified both on the inside and outside with several pieces of
+small wood, and then covered over by bark, so as to be both tight
+and strong. These canoes are from ten to fourteen, and even
+sixteen feet long, and two feet broad, and will contain seven or
+eight men, who navigate them as swiftly as our boats. In manners,
+these people resemble beasts more than men, for they tear human
+bodies in pieces, and eat the raw and bloody flesh. They have not
+the smallest spark of religion, neither any appearance of polity
+or civilization, being in all respects utterly brutal, insomuch
+that if they have occasion to make water, they let fly upon
+whoever is nearest them. They have no knowledge of our arms, and
+would even lay their hands on the edges of the Dutchmen's swords;
+yet are exceedingly cunning, faithless, and cruel; shewing every
+appearance of friendship at one time, and instantly afterwards
+murdering those with whom they have been familiar. The Dutch
+found it impossible to procure any kind of refreshments from
+them, though such surely were among them, for quantities of
+cow-dung were seen; and their bow-strings were made of ox sinews:
+besides, a soldier who went ashore from the Greyhound yacht,
+while she lay at anchor, reported to the vice-admiral, that he
+had seen a large herd of cattle feeding in a meadow.[137]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 137: This is not at all likely to have been
+true. The cattle, the dung, and the sinews mentioned in the text,
+are more likely to have been of some species of the seal
+tribe--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the 27th of February, 1624, the admiral made a signal for
+sailing, the wind being then N. so that hopes were entertained of
+getting from the bay of Nassau to the west; but a storm came on
+in the evening at W. and blew hard all night. March 3d, they had
+an observation at noon, when they were in lat, 59&deg; 45' S.
+with the wind at N.W. Hitherto it had been the opinion of
+nautical men, that it was easy to get from the Straits of Le
+Maire to Chili, but hardly possible to pass from Chili by that
+strait into the Atlantic, as they imagined that the south wind
+blew constantly in these seas: but they now found the case quite
+otherwise, as the frequent tempests they encountered from W. and
+N.W. rendered it beyond comparison easier to have passed through
+the Straits of Le Maire from the South Sea than from the
+Atlantic.</p>
+
+<p>The wind still continuing strong from the west on the 6th, the
+admiral held a council to consider of a proper rendezvous for the
+fleet, in case of separation, or of being forced to winter, if
+these west winds should still continue to oppose their entry into
+the South Sea. Some proposed the Terra del Fuego, and others the
+Straits of Magellan. But the majority were of opinion, that it
+was best to wait two months for a fair wind, and to use their
+utmost endeavours to get into the South Sea. On the 8th they were
+in 61&deg; S. on the 14th in 58&deg;, and on the 18th, 19th and
+20th they had a fair wind at S.E. with warm weather, so that they
+were now in hopes of having accomplished their purpose. On the
+24th they lost sight of the Maurice and David, the fleet being
+now reduced to seven sail; and the same evening they were in lat.
+47&deg; S. The 25th, having still a fair wind and good weather,
+they reached 45&deg; S. and were then in great hopes of
+overcoming all difficulties. The 28th they got sight of the coast
+of Chili, bearing E.S.E. and in the evening were within a league
+of the shore, which appeared high and mountainous.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION II:</p>
+
+<p><i>Transactions of the Fleet on the Western Coast of
+America</i>.</p>
+
+<p>The admiral was at this time confined to bed, and wished to
+have put into the port of Chiloe; but his instructions did not
+allow of this measure, requiring the performance of some action
+of importance against the Spaniards in Peru. It was therefore
+resolved to proceed for the island of Juan Fernandez, to make the
+best preparations in their power for attacking the Spanish
+galleons in the port of Arica, if found there, and to gain
+possession of that place, after which it was proposed to extend
+their conquests by the aid of the Indians. On the 1st April,
+being then in lat. 38&deg; 10' S. the vice-admiral took to his
+bed, quite worn out with fatigue, so that they expected to lose
+both the admiral and him. On the 4th they had sight of Juan
+Fernandez, in lat. 33&deg; 50' S. and next day came to anchor in
+sixty fathoms in a fine bay. The 6th orders were issued to
+provide all the ships with as many cheveaux-de-frize and
+pallisades as they could. The Griffin joined the fleet in the
+evening, not having been seen since the 2d February. She had been
+in the lat. of 60&deg; S. and had got into the South Sea without
+seeing Cape Horn. The Orange arrived on the 7th, having twice
+seen the southern continent on her passage, once in lat. 50&deg;,
+and the other time in lat. 41&deg; S.[138] The David came in on
+the 7th, bringing advice of the Maurice, both vessels having been
+five or six days beating about the island, but hindered from
+getting in by contrary winds.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 138: No land whatever could be seen in
+these latitudes in the eastern Pacific, so that they must have
+been deceived by fog, banks, or islands of ice.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The larger and more easterly of the two islands of Juan
+Fernandez is in the latitude of 30&deg; 40' S. five degrees west
+from the coast of Chili; this island being called by the
+Spaniards <i>Isla de Tierra</i>, and the smaller or more westerly
+island <i>Isla de Fuera</i>, which is a degree and a half farther
+east.[139]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 139: Isola de Tierra, the eastermost of
+these islands of Juan Fernandez, in lat. 33&deg; 42' S. and long.
+79&deg; 5' E. is about 15 English miles from E. to W. by 5-1/2
+miles in its greatest breadth from N. to S. Besides this and
+Isola de Fuera, mentioned in the text, there is still a third, or
+smallest island, a mile and a half south from the S.W. end of the
+Isola de Tierra, called Isola de Cabras or Conejos, Goat or
+Rabbit island, three English miles from N.W. to S.E. and a mile
+in breadth.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The more easterly and larger island, at which the Nassau fleet
+anchored, is about six leagues in circuit, and is about two
+leagues and a half long, from east to west. The road is on the
+N.E. part of the island, from whence there is a beautiful
+prospect of valleys covered with clover. The ground of this bay
+is in some places rocky, and in others a fine black sand, and it
+affords good anchorage in thirty to thirty-five fathoms. The
+island produces excellent water, and fish are to be had in
+abundance in the bay, and of various kinds. Many thousand seals
+and sea-lions come daily on shore to bask in the sun, of which
+the seamen killed great numbers, both for food and amusement.
+Some of the Dutch fancied that the flesh of these animals tasted
+as if twice cooked, while others thought, after the grease and
+tallow were carefully taken out, that it was as good as mutton.
+There were many goats in the island, but difficult to be taken,
+and neither so fat nor so well tasted as those of St Vincents.
+There were plenty of palm-trees in the interior, and three large
+quince-trees near the bay, the fruit of which was very
+refreshing. They found also plenty of timber for all kinds of
+uses, but none fit for masts. Formerly, ten or twelve Indians
+used to reside here, for the sake of fishing and making oil from
+the seals and sea-lions, but it was now quite uninhabited. Three
+gunners and three soldiers belonging to the vice-admiral, were so
+sick of the voyage, that they asked and obtained leave to remain
+here.</p>
+
+<p>Every thing being in readiness, the fleet departed from
+<i>Isla de Tierra</i> on the 13th April. On the 8th May, being
+near the coast of Peru, they took a Spanish bark, in which,
+besides the captain, there were four Spaniards, and six or seven
+Indians and Negroes. From these, they learnt that the Plate fleet
+had sailed on the 3d of the month from Calao de Lima for Panama,
+consisting of five treasure ships, three rich merchantmen, and
+two men of war. They were also informed that the Spanish admiral
+was still at Calao, his ship being of 800 tons burden, and
+mounting 40 brass cannon; besides which, there were two
+<i>pataches</i> of 14 guns each, and forty or fifty unarmed
+merchant vessels. All these vessels were said to have been hauled
+on shore, and secured by three strong batteries and other works,
+furnished with upwards of fifty pieces of cannon, all ready
+prepared for the reception of the Dutch, of whose motions the
+Spaniards had received early and certain intelligence. The
+viceroy had likewise formed four companies of foot, of eighty men
+each, but the two best companies had gone with the ships to
+Panama; and, having just learnt the approach of the Dutch fleet,
+the viceroy had summoned the whole military force of Peru, so
+that many thousand men must soon be expected at Lima for its
+defence.</p>
+
+<p>After several consultations, the vice-admiral made an attempt
+to land at Calao with the soldiers on the morning of the 10th
+May, but finding it impossible with any chance of success, was
+obliged to return to the fleet. On the 12th about midnight, three
+of the Dutch captains, with twelve armed boats, each provided
+with a small cannon and a considerable quantity of fire-works,
+made an attack on the port, while a false attack was made at the
+same time in another part, to draw off the attention of the
+Spaniards. The twelve boats entered the port, and distributed
+their fire-works plentifully among the Spanish merchant ships, by
+which thirty or forty of them were set on fire and consumed, some
+of them very large. In this hardy enterprise, the Dutch had seven
+men killed, and fifteen wounded, mostly in the vice-admiral's
+boat, which had attempted to board one of the <i>pataches</i> and
+was beaten off. About the dawn of day, nine of the flaming ships
+drifted towards the Dutch fleet, which was therefore obliged to
+weigh and take shelter behind the island of Lima. On the 13th
+this island was taken possession of, and a strong intrenchment
+thrown up for its defence, under cover of which the Dutch laid
+their shallops on shore to careen them.</p>
+
+<p>On the 14th Cornelius Jacobson sailed with a division of the
+fleet, to cruize off La Nasca, Pisco, and other towns to the
+south of Lima. A rich prize was taken on the 23d, coming from
+Guayaquil; and that same day, the rear-admiral was detached with
+two ships and two companies of soldiers to attempt taking
+Guayaquil, but they found it too strongly defended. On the 27th
+an attempt was made to destroy the Spanish admiral's ship in the
+port of Calao, by means of a fire-ship containing 2000 pounds of
+gun-powder, besides fire-works and shells, confined by a brick
+arch six feet thick; but after navigating her very near the
+galleon, a bank was found on the outside of her which they could
+not pass, and they were therefore obliged to retire.</p>
+
+<p>Admiral Jaques Le Hermite, who had been in a declining state
+of health from the time they left Sierra Leona, died on the 2d
+June, and was buried next day in the island of Lima. The Spanish
+viceroy having refused to ransom the prisoners made by the Dutch,
+and the ships being straitened for provisions especially water,
+twenty-one Spaniards were hung up at the mizen yard-arm of the
+Dutch admiral's ship on the 15th June. That same evening,
+Cornelius Jacobson returned with his detachment, having made an
+ineffectual attempt on Pisco, which he found strongly fortified,
+and defended by 2000 men, besides a body of 200 horse which
+scoured the country. In this attempt he had five men killed and
+sixteen wounded, and thirteen deserted to the enemy. At this time
+the scurvy prevailed to a great height in the fleet, so that some
+of the ships had not sufficient men in a sound state to man their
+boats; but one day a Swiss, who was very ill of the scurvy,
+scrambled up to the top of the highest hill in the island of
+Lima,[140] where he found plenty of a kind of herb with which he
+had been well acquainted in his own country, and by eating which
+he soon recovered his health. This becoming public, his example
+was universally followed, by which the best part of the men were
+saved from death, and in a short time recovered their health and
+spirits. On the 5th August, the vice-admiral was installed as
+admiral, the rear-admiral succeeding him as vice-admiral, and
+Cornelius Jacobson was advanced to be rear-admiral.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 140: The island of San Lorenzo, a little to
+the south of Calao, is evidently here meant.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The new vice-admiral soon after returned from his expedition
+to the road of Puna and Guayaquil, where he had burnt two ships
+and captured a third. He had also taken Guayaquil after
+considerable loss, and finding it untenable, and not having boats
+to carry away the booty, he had set it on fire, burning a great
+quantity of rich goods in the warehouses, after which he
+reimbarked his men. The Dutch fleet sailed from the island of
+Lima on the 14th of August, and anchored that same evening in a
+bay behind the Piscadores islands, about twenty-three miles
+north, where they watered. Continuing their course on the 16th,
+they came in sight of the island of Santa Clara, or Amortajado,
+on the 24th, intending once more to visit Guayaquil. The fleet
+anchored on the 25th in the road of the island of Puna, whence
+all the people had fled, both Spanish and Indians, so that no
+intelligence could be procured of the strength and dispositions
+of the enemy. On the 27th, the guns, ballast, and stores of all
+kinds were removed from three of the largest ships, which were
+laid ashore to be careened. On the 28th, news came of the second
+attempt upon Guayaquil having miscarried, through the fault of
+some of the officers, the troops being defeated and obliged to
+reimbark, with the loss of twenty-eight men. On the 1st
+September, the three largest ships being careened, they began to
+careen the rest.</p>
+
+<p>It was resolved in a council of war not to prosecute the
+originally intended expedition to Chili at this time, but to
+proceed for Acapulco, in order to cruize for the Manilla ship;
+and afterwards, if the condition of the fleet permitted, to
+return to the coast of Chili. Accordingly, having set fire to the
+town of Puna, they sailed from thence on the 12th September, and
+on the 20th October had sight of the coast of New Spain. On the
+28th at day-break they were within half a league of an island
+which lies before the port of Acapulco and anchored in the
+evening within sight of the fort, which had been rebuilt the year
+before, on a point running out to sea, in order to protect the
+Manilla ships, which might ride safely at anchor under the cannon
+of that fortress. On the 1st November, a strong detachment of the
+fleet was sent to anchor twenty leagues west from Acapulco, to
+look out for the galleon, the admiral and the Orange remaining
+before the port, and the other ships spread along the coast, that
+they might be sure of intercepting the galleon. On the 29th,
+water becoming scarce, and no appearance of the galleon, it was
+resolved to proceed with all diligence for the East Indies.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION III.</p>
+
+<p><i>Voyage Home from the Western Coast of America</i>.</p>
+
+<p>Proceeding therefore across the Great Pacific Ocean, they saw
+some very low land towards the west on the 15th January, 1625,
+over which the sea broke with great violence, and which they
+conjectured to be the island of Galperico.[141] On the 23d the
+scurvy had made much progress, that there were hardly men enough
+to work the ships. In the evening of the 25th, they were off the
+coast of Guam, one of the Ladrones or Mariane islands, the
+inhabitants coming two leagues out to sea to meet them, with all
+sorts of refreshments, which they exchanged for old iron, and
+next morning 150 canoes came off with fruits and garden stuffs.
+On the 27th a good watering-place was found, where fifty soldiers
+were landed to protect the seamen. In the beginning of February,
+the natives brought them considerable quantities of rice, giving
+70 or 80 pounds weight in exchange for an old hatchet. On the
+5th, by a general muster, 1260 men were found to remain in the
+fleet, including 32 Spanish and Negro prisoners, so that they had
+lost 409 since leaving Holland.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 141: The relation of the voyage is too
+vague even to conjecture what island is here meant, but from the
+direction of the course towards Guam or Guaham it may possibly
+have been that now called Dawson's island, about 600 leagues
+nearly east from Guam.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The island of Guam, Guaham, or Guaci, one of the group named
+by the Spaniards <i>Islas de las Velas, Ladrones</i>, or
+<i>Mariane</i> Islands, is in lat 13&deg; 40' N.[142] The soil is
+tolerably fertile producing vast quantities of cocoas, and the
+natives grow rice in several places. The Dutch procured here
+about 2000 fowls, but the natives would not part with their
+cattle for any price. The people of this island are larger than
+other Indians' strong and well-proportioned, and are mostly
+painted red, the men going entirely naked, and the women having a
+leaf to cover their nakedness. Their arms are <i>assagaies</i>,
+or javelins and slings, both of which they use with great
+dexterity. Their canoes are very convenient, and go before the
+wind at a great rate; neither are these islanders afraid of
+putting to sea even in a storm; as, in case of their vessels
+being overset, they turn them up again immediately, and bale out
+the water. They were also very expert in cheating; for when the
+Dutch came to examine the bags of rice they had bought so cheap,
+they found the insides full of stones and dirt; besides which,
+they stole every thing they could lay hold of. Such persons also
+as land on this island ought to be very cautious, as the Dutch
+had several of their people slain here, through their own
+folly.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 142: Lat. 13&deg; 20' N. long. 143&deg; 20'
+E. from Greenwich.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Proceeding on the voyage, they saw an island on the 14th of
+February, in the latitude of 10&deg; 30' N. which they took to be
+the island of Saavedra.[143] Next day, about nine in the morning,
+they saw another island, not laid down in the charts, in lat.
+9&deg; 45' N.[144] the natives of which came out to them in
+canoes with fruits and other refreshments, but as the ships were
+sailing at a great rate, they were not able to get on board. The
+people seemed much like those of Guam, and the island seemed very
+populous and highly cultivated. It was now resolved to continue
+their course to the island of Gilolo, and thence to Ternate. The
+2d March, they had sight of the high mountain of [illegible], on
+the coast of Moco, at the west end of the great island of
+[illegible] or <i>Gilolo</i>, on the west side of which the
+Molucca islands are situated. They arrived at <i>Malaya</i>, the
+principal place in Ternate, on the 4th in the evening. The 5th,
+or, according to the computation of the inhabitants, the 6th,
+Jacob Le Feare, governor of the Moluccas, came to visit the
+admiral, from <i>Taluco</i>, where he then resided. The fleet
+proceeded on the 4th of April to Amboina, and on the 28th sailed
+for Batavia, where they arrived on the 29th of August. Here the
+fleet was separated, part being sent on an expedition against
+Malacca, and others to other places, so that here the voyage of
+the Nassau fleet may be said to end, without having completed the
+circumnavigation, at least in an unbroken series.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 143: The island of Saavedra is in 10&deg;
+30'N. Not far from this is the isle of [illegible] in Lat.
+10&deg; 10' N. and Long. [illegible] E. from
+Greenwich.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 144: This probably was the isle of
+[illegible], mentioned in the previous note.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<p>After this expedition, there occurs a wide chasm in the
+history of circumnavigations, all that was attempted in this way,
+for many years afterwards, being more the effect of chance than
+of design.--<i>Harris</i>.</p>
+
+<h2><a name="chapter4-8" id="chapter4-8">CHAPTER VIII.</a></h2>
+
+<p>VOYAGE ROUND THE WORLD, IN 1683-1691, BY CAPTAIN JOHN COOKE,
+ACCOMPANIED BY CAPTAIN COWLEY, AND CAPTAIN WILLIAM
+DAMPIER.[145]</p>
+
+<p>INTRODUCTION.</p>
+
+<p>In the Collection of Voyages and Travels by Harris, this
+voyage is made two separate articles, as if two distinct voyages,
+one under the name of Captain Cowley, and the other under that of
+Dampier; though both are avowedly only separate relations of the
+same voyage, which was commanded by Captain Cooke, and ought to
+have gone under his name. On the present occasion both relations
+are retained, for reasons which will appear sufficiently obvious
+in the sequel; but we have placed both in one chapter, because
+only a single circumnavigation, though somewhat branched out by
+the separation of the original adventures. This chapter is
+divided into three sections: the <i>first</i> of which contains
+the narrative of the principal voyage, so far as related by
+Captain Cowley; along with which the observations of Dampier upon
+many of the places, visited during the voyage, are introduced.
+The <i>second</i> continues the adventures of Cowley on his
+return from India to Europe, after separating from his first
+companions. The <i>third</i> resumes the relation of the voyage,
+as written by Dampier, and gives a continuation of the
+enterprise, after the separation of Cowley.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 145: Dampier's Voyage round the World, and
+Cowley's do. both in a Coll. of Voyages in four vols. 8vo,
+published at London in 1729. Also Harris, I. 77. and Callender,
+II. 528.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In the remainder of this introduction, taken from the
+Collection by Harris, an account is given of the origin of this
+voyage, together with a sketch of the previous adventures of
+Dampier, before engaging in this enterprise, in both of which are
+contained some notices of the lawless, yet famous Buccaneers,
+respecting whom a more detailed account is proposed to be
+inserted in a subsequent division of this work. Dampier published
+an account of this voyage, to be found in a Collection of
+Voyages, in four volumes 8vo, printed at London in 1729, for
+James and John Knapton, and which have been used in preparing the
+present relation of this voyage for the press.--E.</p>
+
+<hr align="center" width="50%">
+<p>The adventures of the <i>Buccaneers of America</i>, however
+blameable, will render these men ever famous by their wonderful
+exploits. They usually fitted out small vessels in some of our
+colonies of America, and cruised in these till they were able to
+make prize of some larger ships. As their designs required the
+utmost secrecy, they very often took masters and pilots on board
+under false pretences, and did not explain to them the true
+nature of their expeditions till out to sea, when they were
+absolute masters. This was the case with Captain Cowley on the
+present occasion, a very intelligent man and able navigator, who
+happened to be in Virginia in 1683, and was prevailed upon to go
+as master of a privateer, said to be bound for <i>Petit
+Goave</i>, a French port in the island of St Domingo, where these
+people used to take commissions. In reality, however, their
+purpose was to take what prizes they could, without the formality
+of a commission.</p>
+
+<p>It is proper to state, that this voyage, at least in part, is
+the same with the <i>first</i> voyage of Captain Dampier round
+the world. Before proceeding to the incidents of the voyage, we
+shall give a concise account of the grounds on which it was
+undertaken, and the commanders who were engaged in it; and this
+the rather, that the original journal of Captain Cowley,
+published by Captain Hacke, gives very little information on
+these subjects, probably because Cowley was ashamed of having
+engaged in such an expedition.</p>
+
+<p>Among the Buccaneers who did so much mischief in the Spanish
+West Indies, was one John Cooke, a native of the island of St
+Christophers, a brisk bold man, who so distinguished himself as
+to be promoted to the rank of quarter-master in the ship
+commanded by Captain Yankey. On taking a Spanish prize, which was
+converted into a privateer, Cooke claimed the command of her,
+according to the custom, of the Buccaneers; and being extremely
+popular, soon engaged a sufficient number of men to serve under
+him. The great majority of the Buccaneers at this time being
+French, and dissatisfied to see an Englishman invested with such
+a command, merely by the choice of the crew, without any
+commission, they plundered the English of their ships, goods, and
+arms, and turned them ashore on the island of <i>Avache</i>, on
+the coast of St Domingo, usually called <i>Ash</i> by English
+seamen. On this occasion, an old Buccaneer, named Captain
+<i>Tristian</i>, having more humanity than the rest, carried
+Captain Davis, Captain Cooke, and eight other Englishmen to Petit
+Goave; where, while Captain Tristian and many of his men were
+ashore, these Englishmen made themselves masters of the ship,
+sending all the French in their turn ashore, and sailed to
+Avache, where, by using Captain Tristian's name to the governor,
+they procured all the rest of their countrymen to be sent on
+board.</p>
+
+<p>Being now sufficiently strong to set up for themselves, they
+resolved to make prize of whatever came in their way, and
+accordingly took two French ships, one laden with wine, and the
+other of considerable force, in which they embarked, carrying her
+and their prize goods to Virginia, where they arrived in April
+1683. After selling their wines and other goods, they purchased
+provisions, naval stores, and every thing else that might be
+wanted during a long voyage, and fitted out their prize ship as a
+privateer, naming her the Revenge. According to the narrative of
+Cowley, she carried eight guns and 52 men, while Dampier gives
+her 18 guns and 70 men.[146]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 146: This difference, at least in regard to
+the size and force of the ship, will be found explained in the
+sequel, as they took a larger ship on the coast of Africa, which
+they used during the voyage, and named the Revenge after their
+own ship. The additional number of men mentioned by Dampier is
+not accounted for.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Before proceeding to the narratives of this voyage, it is
+proper to give a concise account of Captain William Dampier,
+extracted from his own works, being an extraordinary character
+and an eminent navigator, whose many discoveries ought to
+recommend his memory to posterity, as a man of infinite industry,
+and of a most laudable public spirit. Captain William Dampier was
+descended of a very respectable family in the county of Somerset,
+where he was born in 1652. During the life of his father and
+mother, he had such education as was thought requisite to fit him
+for trade; but losing his parents while very young, and being of
+a roving disposition, which strongly incited him to the sea,
+those who now had the care of him resolved to comply with his
+humour, and bound him about 1669 to the master of a ship who
+lived at Weymouth, in Dorsetshire. With this master he made a
+voyage to France that year, and in the next went to Newfoundland;
+but was so pinched by the severity of that climate, that on his
+return he went home to his friends, almost tired of the sea. Soon
+after his return, however, hearing of a ship bound for the East
+Indies from London, he went there in 1670, and entered before the
+mast in the John and Martha, in which he made a voyage to
+Bantam.</p>
+
+<p>He returned to England in January, 1672, and retired to the
+house of his brother in Somersetshire, where he remained all the
+ensuing summer. In 1673, he entered on board the Prince Royal,
+commanded by the famous Sir Edward Spragge, and was in two
+engagements that summer against the Dutch. He afterwards returned
+to his brother's house, where he met with one Colonel Hellier,
+who had a large estate in Jamaica, and who persuaded him to go
+over to that island, where he was some time employed in the
+management of that gentleman's plantation. Not liking the life of
+a planter, which he continued somewhat more than a year, he
+engaged among the logwood cutters, and embarked from Jamaica for
+Campeachy, in August 1675, but returned to Jamaica in the end of
+that year. In February 1676, he went again to Campeachy, where he
+acquainted himself thoroughly with the business of logwood
+cutting, in which he proposed to advance his fortune; for which
+purpose he returned to England in 1678. While in Campeachy, he
+became acquainted with some Buccaneers, who gave him an
+inclination for that kind of life, in which he was afterwards
+engaged, but of which in the sequel he became much ashamed.</p>
+
+<p>He returned from England to Jamaica in April 1679, intending
+to become a complete logwood cutter and trader at the bay of
+Campeachy; but changed his mind, and laid out most part of what
+he was worth in purchasing a small estate in Dorsetshire. He then
+agreed with one Hobby to make a trip to the continent, before
+returning to England. Soon after commencing this voyage, coming
+to anchor in Negril bay at the west end of Jamaica, they found
+there Captains Coxon, Sawkins, Sharpe, and other privateers, with
+whom all Mr Hobby's men entered, leaving only Mr Dampier, who
+also at length consented to go with them. This was about the end
+of 1679, and their first expedition was against Portobello. This
+being accomplished, they resolved to cross the isthmus of Darien,
+and to pursue their predatory courses against the Spaniards in
+the South Sea. On the 5th April, 1680, they landed near <i>Golden
+Island</i>, between three and four hundred strong; and carrying
+with them sufficient provisions, and some toys to gratify the
+Indians, through whose country they had to pass, they arrived in
+nine days march at <i>Santa Maria</i>, which they easily took,
+but found neither gold nor provisions, as they expected.</p>
+
+<p>After staying three days at Santa Maria, they embarked in
+canoes and other small craft for the South Sea. They came in
+sight of Panama on the 23d April, and in vain attempted to take
+<i>Puebla Nova</i>, where their commander Captain Sawkins was
+slain. They then withdrew to the isles of <i>Quibo</i>, whence
+they sailed on the 6th June for the coast of Peru; and touching
+at the islands of <i>Gorgonia</i> and <i>Plata</i>, they came in
+the month of October to <i>Ylo</i>, which they took. About
+Christmas of that year they arrived at the island of Juan
+Fernandez, where they deposed Captain Sharpe, who had the chief
+command after the death of Sawkins, and elected Captain Watling
+in his stead. Under his command they made an attempt upon Arica,
+but were repulsed with the loss of twenty-eight men, among whom
+was their new commander Watling. After this they sailed for some
+time without any commander; and, arriving at the island of
+<i>Plata</i>, they split into two factions about the choice of a
+new commander. Before proceeding to the election, it was agreed
+that the majority, together with the new commander, should keep
+the ship, and the minority should content themselves with the
+canoes and other small craft. On the poll, Captain Sharpe was
+restored, and Mr Dampier, who had voted against him, prepared,
+together with his associates, to return over land to the Gulf of
+Mexico.</p>
+
+<p>Accordingly, on the 17th April, 1681, they quitted Captain
+Sharpe, without electing any commander, and resolved to repass
+the Isthmus of Darien, though only forty-seven men. This was one
+of the boldest enterprises ever ventured upon by so small a
+number of men, yet they succeeded without any considerable loss.
+Landing on the continent on the 1st of May, they repassed the
+isthmus in twenty-three days; and on the 24th embarked in a
+French privateer, commanded by Captain Tristian, with whom they
+joined a fleet of nine buccaneers, on board of which were nearly
+600 men. With this great force they were in hopes of doing great
+things against the Spaniards; but, owing to various accidents,
+and especially to disagreement among the commanders, they had
+very little success. Dampier and his companions, who had returned
+over land from the South Sea, made themselves masters of a
+<i>tartan</i>, and, electing Captain Wright to the command, they
+cruised along the Spanish coast with some success, and went to
+the Dutch settlement of Cura&ccedil;oa, where they endeavoured to
+sell a good quantity of sugar they had taken in a Spanish ship.
+Not being able to effect this purpose, they continued their
+voyage to the Tortugas islands, and thence to the Caraccas, where
+they captured three barks, one laden with hides, another with
+European commodities, and the third with earthenware and
+brandy.</p>
+
+<p>With these prizes they sailed to the island of <i>Roca</i>,
+where they shared them, and then resolved to separate, though
+only consisting of sixty men. Twenty of these, among whom was
+Dampier, proceeded with their share of the goods in one of these
+barks to Virginia, where they arrived in July, 1682. After
+continuing there some time, a considerable part of them made a
+voyage to Carolina, whence they returned to Virginia. Having
+spent the best part of their wealth, they were now ready to
+proceed upon any plan that might offer for procuring more. Soon
+after Captain Cooke, of whom some account has been already given,
+came to Virginia with his prize, and published his intention of
+going into the South Sea to cruise against the Spaniards.
+Dampier, who was his old acquaintance, and knew him to be an able
+commander, readily agreed to go with him, and induced most of his
+companions to do the same, which was of much consequence to
+Cooke, as it furnished him with a full third of his crew.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION I.</p>
+
+<p><i>Narrative of the Voyage by Captain Cowley, till he quitted
+the Revenge on the Western Coast of America</i>.[147]</p>
+
+<p>They sailed from Achamack in Virginia on the 23d August, 1683,
+taking their departure from Cape Charles in the Revenge of eight
+guns and fifty-two men, John Cooke commander, and bound for the
+South Sea; but Captain Cowley, who had charge of the navigation
+of the Revenge as master, not being then let into the secret
+object of the enterprise, steered a course for Petit Goave in St
+Domingo, in which he was indulged for the first day, but was then
+told that they were bound in the first place for the coast of
+Guinea. He then steered E.S.E. for the Cape de Verd islands, and
+arrived at <i>Isola de Sal</i>, or the Salt island, in the month
+of September. They here found neither fruits nor water, but great
+plenty of fish, and some goats, but the last were very small. At
+this time the island, which is in the latitude of 16&deg; 50' N.
+and longitude 23&deg; W. from Greenwich, was very oddly
+inhabited, and as strangely governed. Its whole inhabitants
+consisted of four men and a boy, and all the men were dignified
+with titles. One, a mulatto, was governor, two were captains, and
+the fourth lieutenant, the boy being their only subject, servant,
+and soldier. They procured here about twenty bushels of salt, the
+only commodity of the island, which they paid for in old clothes,
+and a small quantity of powder and shot; and in return for three
+or four goats, gave the governor a coat, of which he was in great
+want, and an old hat. The salt in which this island abounds, and
+from which it derives its name, is formed naturally by the heat
+of the sun from the sea-water, which is let into great ponds
+about two English miles in extent.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 147: The original narrative of this voyage,
+written by Captain Cowley, is contained in the fourth volume of
+the Collection of Voyages published in 1729 by James and John
+Knapton, usually denominated Dampier's Voyages, and has been used
+on the present occasion.--E]</blockquote>
+
+<p>This island is about nine leagues from N. to S. and about two
+leagues from E. to W. and has abundance of salt ponds, whence it
+derives its name, but produces no trees, and hardly even any
+grass, some few poor goats feeding scantily upon shrubs near the
+sea. It is frequented by wild fowl, especially a reddish bird
+named <i>Flamingo</i>, shaped like a heron, but much larger,
+which lives in ponds and muddy places, building their nests of
+mud in shallow pools of standing waters. Their nests are raised
+like conical hillocks, two feet above the water, having holes on
+the top, in which they lay their eggs, and hatch them while
+standing on their long legs in the water, covering the nest and
+eggs only with their rumps. The young ones do not acquire their
+true colour, neither can they fly till ten or eleven months old,
+but run very fast. A dozen or more of these birds were killed,
+though very shy, and their flesh was found lean and black, though
+not ill tasted. Their tongues are large, and have near the root a
+piece of fat, which is esteemed a dainty.</p>
+
+<p>From hence they sailed to the island of St Nicholas,
+twenty-two leagues W.S.W. from the island of Salt, and anchored
+on the S.W. side of the island, which is of a triangular form,
+the longest side measuring thirty leagues, and the two others
+twenty leagues each. They here found the governor a white man,
+having three or four people about him, who were decently
+cloathed, and armed with swords and pistols, but the rest of his
+attendants were in a very pitiful condition. They dug some wells
+on shore, and traded for goats, fruits, and wine, which last was
+none of the best. The country near the coast is very indifferent,
+but there are some fine valleys in the interior, pretty well
+inhabited, and abounding in all the necessaries of life.</p>
+
+<p>The principal town of this island is in a valley, fourteen
+miles from the bay in which the Revenge came to anchor, and
+contains about 100 families, the inhabitants being of a swarthy
+complexion. The country on the sea is rocky and barren, but in
+the interior there are several vallies, having plenty of grass,
+and in which vines are cultivated. The wine is of a pale colour,
+and tastes somewhat like Madeira, but is rather thick.</p>
+
+<p>From thence they went to Mayo, another of the Cape de Verd
+islands, forty miles E.S.E. from St Nicholas, and anchored on its
+north side. They wished to have procured some beef and goats at
+this island, but were not permitted to land, because one Captain
+Bond of Bristol had not long before, under the same pretence,
+carried away some of the principal inhabitants. This island is
+small, and its shores are beset with shoals, yet it has a
+considerable trade in salt and cattle. In May, June, July, and
+August, a species of sea-tortoises lay their eggs here, but are
+not nearly so good as those of the West Indies. The inhabitants
+cultivate some potatoes, plantains, and corn, but live very
+poorly, like all the others in the Cape de Verd islands.</p>
+
+<p>After continuing here five or six days, they resolved to go to
+the island of St Jago, in hopes of meeting some ship in the road,
+intending to cut her cable and run away with her. They
+accordingly stood for the east part of that island, where they
+saw from the top-mast head, over a point of land, a ship at
+anchor in the road, which seemed fit for their purpose: but, by
+the time they had got near her, her company clapped a spring upon
+her cable, struck her ports, and run out her lower tier of guns,
+on which Cooke bore away as fast as he could. This was a narrow
+escape, as they afterwards learnt that this ship was a Dutch East
+Indiaman of 50 guns and 400 men.</p>
+
+<p>This is by far the best of the Cape de Verd islands, four or
+five leagues west from Mayo; and, though mountainous, is the best
+peopled, having a very good harbour on its east side, much
+frequented by ships bound from Europe for the East Indies and the
+coast of Guinea, as also by Portuguese ships bound to Brazil,
+which come here to provide themselves with beef, pork, goats,
+fowls, eggs, plantains, and cocoa-nuts, in exchange for shirts,
+drawers, handkerchiefs, hats, waistcoats, breeches, and all sorts
+of linen, which are in great request among the natives, who are
+much addicted to theft. There is here a fort on the top of a
+hill, which commands the harbour. This island has two towns of
+some size, and produces the same sort of wine with St
+Nicholas.</p>
+
+<p>There are two other islands, Fogo and Brava, both small, and
+to the west of St Jago. Fogo is remarkable, as being an entire
+burning mountain, from the top of which issues a fire which may
+be seen a great way off at sea in the night. This island has a
+few inhabitants, who live on the sea-coast at the foot of the
+mountain, and subsist on goats, fowls, plantains, and cocoa-nuts.
+The other islands of this group are St Antonio, St Lucia, St
+Vincent, and Bona Vista.</p>
+
+<p>They sailed thence for the coast of Guinea, and, being near
+Cape Sierra Leona, they fell in with a new-built ship of forty
+guns, well furnished with water, all kinds of provisions, and
+brandy, which they boarded and carried away.[148]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 148: They appear to have named this ship
+the Revenge, and to have destroyed their original
+vessel.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>From thence they went to Sherbro river, also on the coast of
+Guinea, where they trimmed all their empty casks and filled them
+with water, not intending to stop any where again for water till
+their arrival at Juan Fernandez in the South Sea. There was at
+this time an English factory in the Sherbro river, having a
+considerable trade in <i>Cam-wood</i>, which is used in dying
+red; but the adventurers do not appear to have had any
+intercourse with their countrymen at this place. They were well
+received, however, by the negro inhabitants of a considerable
+village on the sea-shore, near the mouth of this river, who
+entertained Cowley and his companions with palm-wine, in a large
+hut in the middle of the town, all the rest of the habitations
+being small low huts. These negroes also brought off considerable
+supplies to the ship, of rice, fowls, honey, and sugar canes,
+which they sold to the buccaneers for goods found in the vessel
+they had seized at Sierra Leona.</p>
+
+<p>Going from thence in the month of December, along the coast of
+Guinea, to the latitude of 12&deg; S. they crossed the Atlantic
+to the opposite coast of Brazil, where they came to soundings on
+a sandy bottom at eighty fathoms deep. Sailing down the coast of
+Brazil, when in lat. 4&deg; S. they observed the sea to be as red
+as blood, occasioned by a prodigious shoal of red shrimps, which
+lay upon the water in great patches for many leagues together.
+They likewise saw vast numbers of seals, and a great many whales.
+Holding on their course to lat. 47&deg; S. they discovered an
+island not known before, which Cowley named <i>Pepy's
+Island</i>,[149] in honour of Samuel Pepys, secretary to the Duke
+of York when Lord High Admiral of England, a great patron of
+seamen. This island has a very good harbour, in which 1000 ships
+might ride at anchor, and is a very commodious place for
+procuring both wood and water. It abounded in sea-fowl, and the
+shore, being either rocks or sand, promised fair for fish.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 149: An island in the southern Atlantic, in
+lat. 46&deg; 34' S. called <i>Isle Grande</i>, is supposed to be
+the discovery of Cowley. According to Dalrymple, it is in long.
+46&deg; 40' W. while the map published along with Cook's Voyages
+places it in long. 35&deg; 40' W. from
+Greenwich.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In January 1684 they bore away for the Straits of Magellan,
+and on the 28th of that month fell in with the <i>Sebaldine</i>
+or Falkland islands, in lat. 51&deg; 25' S. Then steering S.W. by
+W. to the lat. of 53&deg; S. they made the Terra del Fuego.
+Finding great ripplings near the Straits of Le Maire, they
+resolved to go round the east end of States Land, as had been
+done by Captain Sharp in 1681, who first discovered it to be an
+island, naming it <i>Albemarle</i> island. A prodigious storm
+came on upon the 14th February, which lasted between a fortnight
+and three weeks, and drove them into lat. 63&deg; 30' S. This
+storm was attended by such torrents of rain, that they saved
+twenty-three barrels of water, besides dressing their victuals
+all that time in rain water.[150] The weather also was so
+excessively cold, that they could bear to drink three quarts of
+burnt brandy a man in twenty-four hours, without being
+intoxicated.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 150: It was discovered by the great
+navigator Captain Cook, who at one time penetrated to lat.
+71&deg; 10' S. that the solid ice found at sea in high southern
+latitudes affords perfectly fresh water, when the first meltings
+are thrown away.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>When the storm abated, they steered N.E. being then
+considerably to the west of Cape Horn, and got again into warm
+weather. In lat. 40&deg; S. they fell in with an English ship,
+the Nicholas of London, of 26 guns, commanded by Captain John
+Eaton, with whom they joined company. They sailed together to the
+island of Juan Fernandez, where they arrived on the 23d March,
+and anchored in a bay at the south end of the island in
+twenty-five fathoms. Captain Watling, who succeeded Captain
+Sharp, was there in 1680, and named it <i>Queen Catharine's</i>
+island. At his departure, he accidentally left a Moskito Indian,
+who still remained, having a gun, a knife, a small flask of
+powder, and some shot. In this desolate condition, he found it
+equally hard to provide for his subsistence, and to conceal
+himself from the Spaniards, who had notice of his being left
+there, and came several times to take him. He had chosen a
+pleasant valley for his residence, about half a mile from the
+coast, where he had erected a very convenient hut, well lined
+with seal-skins, and had a bed of the same, raised about two feet
+above the ground. By the help of a flint, he had converted his
+knife into a saw, with which he had cut the barrel of his gun to
+pieces, which he fashioned into harpoons, lances, fishing-hooks,
+and a long knife, by heating them in a fire. All this cost him
+much labour, but enabled him to live in sufficient comfort. On
+seeing the ships at sea, he guessed them to be English, and
+immediately dressed two goats, and a large quantity of cabbage,
+to entertain them on landing. He was also much pleased, when they
+landed on the island, to see two of his old acquaintances,
+Captains Cooke and Dampier, who had belonged to the ship by which
+he was left on the island.</p>
+
+<p>The island of Juan Fernandez is in lat. 34&deg; 15' S.
+[33&deg; 42'] about 420 English miles from the coast of Chili.
+The whole island is a pleasant mixture of hills and vallies, the
+sides of the hills partly covered with wood, and partly savannas,
+or places naturally clear of wood, bearing fine grass. Among the
+woods are what are called cabbage-trees, but not so large as in
+other parts of the world. The goats which feed on the west end of
+the island are much fatter and better than those at the east end,
+though the latter has better and greater plenty of grass, with
+abundance of excellent water in the vallies, while the west end
+is a dry plain, the grass scanty and parched, and has hardly any
+wood or fresh water. Though fertile, this island has no
+inhabitants, who might live here in plenty, as the plain is able
+to maintain a great number of cattle, and the sea affords vast
+quantities of seals, sea-lions, snappers, and rock-fish. The
+sea-lions are not much unlike seals, but much larger, being
+twelve or fourteen feet long, and as thick as a large ox. They
+have no hair, and are of a dun colour, with large eyes, their
+teeth being three inches long. One of these animals will yield a
+considerable quantity of oil, which is sweet and answers well for
+frying. They feed on fish, yet their flesh is tolerably good. The
+snapper is a fish having a large head, mouth, and gills, the back
+red, the belly ash-coloured, and its general appearance
+resembling a roach, but much larger, its scales being as broad as
+a shilling. The rock-fish, called <i>baccalao</i> by the
+Spaniards, because resembling the cod, is rounder than the
+former, and of a dark-brown colour, with small scales, and is
+very good food, being found in vast abundance on the coasts of
+Peru and Chili. This island has only two bays fit for anchorage,
+with a rivulet of fresh water in each, and both at the east end,
+and so conveniently situated that they might easily be fortified,
+and defended by a slender force against a powerful army, being
+inaccessible from the west, by reason of the high mountains. Five
+Englishmen, left by Captain Davies, secured themselves here
+against a great number of Spaniards.</p>
+
+<p>After remaining fourteen days at this island, they left it on
+the 8th April, 1684, steering N.N.E. till off the bay of Arica,
+whence they sailed to Cape Blanco, in hopes of meeting the
+Spanish Plate fleet from Panama; but if they had gone into the
+bay of Arica, they must have taken a Spanish ship which lay
+there, having 300 tons of silver on board. In lat. 10&deg; S. on
+the 3d May, they were forced to capture a ship laden with timber,
+much against their inclination, lest they should be known through
+her means to be on the coast. They then sailed to the southern
+island of <i>Lobos</i>, in lat. 70&deg; S. about forty-three
+English miles from the coast of Peru, where they landed their
+sick for refreshment, heeled their ships, and scraped their
+bottoms, to render them fitter for action.</p>
+
+<p>This island is named <i>Lobos del Mar</i>, to distinguish it
+from another which is nearer the continent, and called therefore
+<i>Lobos de la Tierra. Lobos del Mar</i> is properly a double
+island, each a mile in circuit, separated by a small channel
+which will not admit ships of burden. A little way from shore, on
+the north side, there are several scattered rocks in the sea, and
+at the west end of the eastermost isle is a small sandy creek, in
+which ships are secure from the winds, all the rest of the shore
+being rocky cliffs. The whole of both islands is rocky and sandy,
+having neither wood, water, nor land animals; but it has many
+fowls, such as boobies, and above all penguins, about the size of
+a duck, and with similar feet; but their bills are pointed, their
+wings are mere stumps, which serve them as fins when in the
+water, and their bodies are covered with down instead of
+feathers. As they feed on fish, they are but indifferent eating,
+but their eggs are very good. Penguins are found all over the
+South Sea, and at the Cape of Good Hope. The road for ships is
+between the before-mentioned rock and the eastmost island.</p>
+
+<p>They were now very eager to make some capture, as their
+provisions, especially water, were very scanty, so that the
+subsistence of their prisoners, as well as themselves, gave them
+much anxiety. By information of their prisoners, they were also
+convinced that their being in these seas was known to the
+Spaniards, who consequently would keep all their richest ships in
+port. After much consultation, therefore, it was resolved to make
+an attempt on Truxillo, in lat. 8&deg; 4' S. a populous city
+about six miles from the port of <i>Guanehagno</i>, though the
+landing-place was of difficult access, as at that place there was
+a strong probability of making a considerable booty. They sailed
+therefore with this design on the 18th May, their whole number of
+men fit for duty being one hundred and eight. Soon after weighing
+anchor, three ships were descried under sail, which they chased
+and captured, being laden with flour from Guanehagno to Panama.
+In one of them was found a letter from the viceroy of Peru to the
+president of Panama, intimating that there were enemies on the
+coast, and that he had sent these three ships to supply their
+wants. It was also learnt from the prisoners, that the Spaniards
+were erecting a fort near their harbour of Guanehagno, in
+consequence of which the design on Traxillo was abandoned.
+Besides a large loading of flour, the three captured ships had a
+good quantity of fruits and sweetmeats, which made them agreeable
+prizes to the English, who were now very short of provisions; but
+they had landed no less than 800,000 dollars, on hearing that
+there were enemies in these seas.</p>
+
+<p>It was now resolved to carry their prizes to some secure
+place, where the best part of the provisions they had now
+procured might be laid up in safety, for which purpose they
+steered for the <i>Gallapagos</i> or <i>Enchanted
+Islands</i>,[151] which they got sight of on the 31st May, and
+anchored at night on the east side of one of the easternmost of
+these islands, a mile from shore, in sixteen fathoms, on clear
+white hard sand. To this Cowley gave the name of <i>King
+Charles's Island</i>. He likewise named more of them, as the Duke
+of Norfolk's Island immediately under the line, Dessington's,
+Eares, Bindley's, Earl of Abington's, King James's, Duke of
+Albemarles, and others. They afterwards anchored in a very good
+bay being named York Bay. Here they found abundance of excellent
+provisions, particularly guanoes and sea and land tortoises, some
+of the latter weighing two hundred pounds, which is much beyond
+their usual weight. There were also great numbers of birds,
+especially turtle-doves, with plenty of wood and excellent water;
+but none of either of these was in any of the other
+islands.[152]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 151: These islands, so named by the
+Spaniards from being the resort of tortoises, are on both sides
+of the line, from about the Lat. of 2&deg; N. to 1&deg; 50' S,.
+and from about 88&deg; 40' to 95&deg; 20' both W. from
+Greenwich.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 152: Cowley mentions having found here a
+[illegible] thing of its nature of quantity.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>These Gallapagos are a considerable number of large islands,
+situated under and on both sides of the line, and destitute of
+inhabitants. The Spaniards, who first discovered them, describe
+them as extending from the equator N.W. as high as 5&deg; N. The
+adventurers in this voyage saw fourteen or fifteen, some of which
+were seven or eight leagues in length, and three or four leagues
+broad, pretty high yet flat. Four or five of the most easterly
+were barren and rocky, without either trees, herbs, or grass,
+except very near the shore. They produced also a sort of shrub,
+called dildo-tree, about the bigness of a man's leg, and ten or
+twelve feet high, without either fruit or leaves, but covered
+with prickles from top to bottom. The only water in these barren
+isles, was in ponds and holes in the rocks. Some of the isles are
+low and more fertile, producing some of the trees that are known
+in Europe. A few of the westermost isles are larger than the
+rest, being nine or ten leagues long, and six or seven broad,
+producing many trees, especially Mammee figs, and they have also
+some pretty large fresh-water streams, and many rivulets. The air
+is continually refreshed, by the sea-breeze by day and the
+land-winds at night, so that they are not troubled with such
+excessive heats, neither are they so unwholesome as most places
+so near the equator. During the rainy season, in November,
+December, and January, they are infested with violent tempests of
+thunder and lightning; but before and after these months have
+only refreshing showers, and in their summer, which is in May,
+June, July, and August, they are without any rains.</p>
+
+<p>They anchored near several of these islands, and frequently
+found sea tortoises basking in the sun at noon. On a former
+occasion, Captain Davies came to anchor on the west side of these
+islands, where he and his men subsisted on land-tortoises for
+three months, and saved from them sixty jars of oil. He also
+found several good channels on that side, with anchorage between
+the isles, and several rivulets of fresh water, with plenty of
+trees for fuel. The sea also round these islands is well stored
+with good fish of a large size, and abounds in sharks. These
+islands are better stored with guanoes and land-tortoises than
+any other part of the world. The guanoes are very tame, of
+extraordinary size, and very fat. The land-tortoises are likewise
+very fat, and so numerous that several hundred men might subsist
+upon them for a considerable time. They are as pleasant food as a
+pullet, and so large that some of them weighed 150 and even 200
+pounds, being two feet to two feet and a half across the belly;
+whereas in other places they are seldom met with above 30 pounds
+weight. There are several kinds of land-tortoises in the West
+Indies, one of which, called <i>Hackatee</i> by the Spaniards,
+keeps mostly in fresh-water ponds, having long necks, small legs,
+and flat feet, and is usually between ten and fifteen pounds
+weight. A second, and much smaller kind, which they call
+<i>Tenopen</i>,[153] is somewhat rounder, but not unlike in other
+respects, except that their back shells are naturally covered
+with curious carved work. The tortoises in the Gallapagos isles
+resembles the <i>Hackatee</i>, having long necks and small heads,
+but are much larger.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 153: This word in the text is probably a
+misprint for <i>Terrapin</i>, a trivial name for a species of
+land or fresh-water tortoise, found also in the warmer parts of
+North America--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In these islands there are also some green snakes, and great
+numbers of remarkably tame turtle-doves, very fat, and excellent
+eating. There are large channels between some of these islands,
+capable of receiving ships of moderate burden. On the shoals
+there grows great abundance of sea-weed, called
+<i>turtle-grass</i>, owing to which these channels abound in
+<i>green turtles</i> or sea-tortoises. There are several kinds of
+turtles or sea-tortoises, as the <i>Trunk, Loggerhead,
+Hawksbill</i>, and <i>Green</i> turtles. The first is larger than
+the rest, and has a rounder and higher back shell, but is neither
+so wholesome nor so well tasted; and the same may be said of the
+Loggerhead, which feeds on moss from the rocks, and has its name
+from its large head. The Hawksbill, so named from having a long
+small mouth, like the beak of a hawk, is the smallest species,
+and is that which produces the so-much-admired tortoise-shell, of
+which cabinets, boxes, combs, and other things are made in
+Europe, and of this shell each has from three to four pounds,
+though some have less. The flesh of this kind is but indifferent,
+yet better than that of the Loggerheads; though these, which are
+taken between the <i>Sambellos</i> and <i>Portobello</i>, make
+those who eat the flesh purge and vomit excessively, and the same
+is observed of some other fish in the West Indies.</p>
+
+<p>The laying time of the sea-tortoises is about May, June, and
+July, a little sooner or later, and they lay three times each
+season, eighty or ninety eggs each time, which are round and as
+large as an hen's egg, but covered only with a thin white skin,
+having no shell. When a tortoise goes on shore to lay, she is
+usually an hour before she returns, as she always chuses her
+place above high-water mark, where she makes a large hole with
+her fins in the sand, in which she lays her eggs, and then covers
+them two feet deep with the sand she had raked out. Sometimes
+they go on shore the day before, to take a look of the place, and
+are sure to return to the same spot next day. People take the
+tortoises on this occasion, while on shore in the night, turning
+them over on their backs, above high-water mark, and then return
+to fetch them off next morning; but a large Green tortoise will
+give work enough to two stout men to turn her over. The Green
+tortoise gets its name from the colour of the shell, having a
+small round head, and weighs from 200 to 300 pounds. Its flesh is
+accounted the best of any, but there are none of this kind in the
+South Sea. The sea-tortoises found at the Gallapagos being a
+bastard kind of Green tortoises, having thicker shells than those
+of the West Indies, and their flesh not so good. They are also
+much larger, being frequently two or three feet thick, and their
+bellies five feet broad.</p>
+
+<p>They remained twelve or fourteen days at the Gallapagos,
+during which time Captain Cooke lived on shore in a very poor
+state of health. They also landed 1500 bags of flour, with a
+large quantity of sweetmeats and other provisions, on York
+Island, which they might have recourse to on any emergency. From
+one of their prisoners, an Indian of <i>Realejo</i>, they had a
+flattering account of the riches of that place, which he alleged
+might be easily taken, and for which enterprise he offered to
+serve them as a guide. Setting sail therefore from the Gallapagos
+on the 12th June, they shaped their course in lat 4&deg; 40' N.
+with the intention of touching at the <i>Island of Cocos</i>, [in
+lat. 5&deg; 27' N. and long. 87&deg; 27' W. from Greenwich.] This
+island is seven or eight leagues in circuit, but uninhabited, and
+produces a pleasant herb near the sea coast, called
+<i>Geamadael</i> by the Spaniards. It is so environed with steep
+rocks as to be inaccessible, except on the N.E. where ships may
+safely ride in a small bay.</p>
+
+<p>Missing this island, they continued their course towards the
+continent of America, and reached Cape <i>Blanco</i>, or
+<i>Trespuntas</i>, on the coast of Mexico, in lat. 9&deg; 56' N.
+in the beginning of July. This cape gets the name of
+<i>Blanco</i>, or the White Cape, from two high steep taper white
+rocks, like high towers, about half a mile distant. The cape
+itself is about the same height with Beachy-head, on the coast of
+Sussex, being a full broad point jutting out to sea, and
+terminated with steep rocks, while both sides have easy descents
+to the sea from the flat top, which is covered with tall trees,
+and affords a pleasant prospect. On the N.W. side of the cape the
+land runs in to the N.E. for four leagues, making a small bay,
+called <i>Caldera Bay</i>, at the entrance to which, at the N.W.
+side of the cape, a rivulet of fresh water discharges itself into
+the sea through very rich low lands abounding in lofty trees.
+This rich wooded vale extends a mile N.E. beyond the rivulet,
+when a savanna begins, running several leagues into the country,
+here and there beautifully interspersed with groves of trees, and
+covered with excellent long grass. Deeper into the bay, the low
+lands are cloathed with mangroves; but farther into the country
+the land is higher, partly covered with woods, and partly
+consisting of hilly savannas, not so good as the former, and here
+the woods consist of short small trees. From the bottom of this
+bay one may travel to the lake of Nicaragua over hilly savannas,
+a distance of fourteen, or fifteen leagues.[154]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 154: The bay of Caldera in the text is
+evidently the gulf of Nicoya, from the bottom of which the lake
+of Nicaragua is distant about fifty English miles due north. The
+latitude of Cape Blanco in the text, 9&deg; 56' N. is
+considerably erroneous, its true latitude being only 9&deg;
+27'N.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Captain Cooke had been very ill ever since their departure
+from Juan Fernandez, and died as soon as they came within two or
+three leagues of Cape Blanco, which indeed is a frequent incident
+at sea, as people who have been long ill often die on coming in
+sight of land. Coming to anchor a few hours after a league within
+the cape, near the mouth of the before-mentioned rivulet, in 14
+fathoms on clear hard sand, his body was immediately carried on
+shore for interment, under a guard of twelve armed men. While the
+people were digging his grave, they were joined by three Spanish
+Indians, who asked many questions, and were at length seized,
+though one of them afterwards escaped. The other two were carried
+aboard, and confessed that they were sent as spies from Nicoya, a
+small Mulatto town twelve or fourteen leagues from the cape, and
+seated on the banks of a river of the same name,[155] being a
+convenient place for building and refitting ships. The president
+of Panama had sent intelligence to this place of the English
+being in these seas, in consequence of which the inhabitants, who
+mostly subsist by cultivating corn, and by slaughtering great
+numbers of cattle which feed on their extensive savannas, had
+sent their ox hides to the North Sea by way of the lake of
+Nicaragua, as also a certain red wood, called in Jamaica <i>Blood
+wood</i>, or Nicaragua wood, which is used in dying. These
+commodities are exchanged for linen and woollen manufactures, and
+other European goods.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 155: There is no river at Niceya, but it is
+seated on a bay or harbour within the gulf of the same
+name.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Learning from their prisoners that there was a large cattle
+pen at no great distance, where cows and bulls could be had in
+abundance, and being very desirous of having some fresh beef
+which had long been very rare among them, twenty-four of the
+English went ashore in two boats, under the guidance of one of
+the Indians, and landed about a league from the ships, hauling
+their boats upon the dry sand. Their guide conducted them to the
+pen, in a large savanna two miles from the boats, where they
+found abundance of bulls and cows feeding. Some of the English
+were for killing three or four immediately, but the rest insisted
+to wait till morning, and then to kill as many as they needed. On
+this difference of opinion, Dampier and eleven more thought
+proper to return aboard that night, expecting to be followed by
+the rest next day. Hearing nothing of them next day at four p.m.
+ten men were sent in a canoe to look for them; when they found
+their comrades on a small rock half a mile from the shore, up to
+their middles in water, having fled there to escape from forty or
+fifty Spaniards, well armed with guns and lances, who had burnt
+their boat. They had taken shelter on this rock at low water, and
+must have perished in an hour, as it was then flowing tide, if
+they had not been relieved by the canoe, which brought them safe
+on board.</p>
+
+<p>On the 19th July, Edward Davis, quarter-master of the Revenge,
+was elected captain, in the room of Captain Cooke. They sailed
+next day from Cape Blanco towards Realejo, with a moderate breeze
+at N. which brought them in three days over against that port, in
+lat. 12&deg; 26' N. This place is easily discovered from sea, by
+means of a high-peaked burning mountain about ten miles inland,
+called by the Spaniards <i>Volcano vejo</i>, or the old volcano,
+which is so high that it may be seen twenty leagues out at sea,
+besides which there is no other similar mountain on all that
+coast. To make this harbour, the mountain must bear N.E. and
+keeping this coarse will bring a ship directly into the harbour,
+the entrance of which may be seen at three leagues off. This
+harbour is inclosed by a low isle, a mile in length, a quarter of
+a mile broad, and a mile and a half from the main land. It has a
+channel or entrance at each end of the island, that on the east,
+being narrow and having a strong tide, is seldom used, but that
+on the west is much larger and more commodious. In taking this
+entry, however, ships must beware of a certain sandy shoal on the
+N.W. point of the isle, and when past this must keep close to the
+isle, as a sand-bank runs half way over from the continental
+shore. This port is able to contain 200 ships.</p>
+
+<p>About two leagues from the port, the town of Realejo stands in
+a fenny country, full of red mangrove trees, between two arms of
+the sea, the westermost of which reaches up to the town, and the
+eastermost comes near it, but no shipping can get so far up.[156]
+On entering the bay in their canoes, they found the country
+apprized of their approach, and fully prepared for their
+reception, wherefore the enterprise against Realejo was laid
+aside. Pursuant to a consultation between the two commanders,
+Eaton and Davis, they sailed on the 27th July for the gulf of
+Amapalla or Fonseca.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 156: The account in the text appears
+applicable to what is now called <i>El Viejo</i>, or the old
+town, nearly 12 miles from the port, but modern Realejo stands
+almost close to the entrance of the bay or
+harbour.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>This is a large gulf or branch of the sea, running eight or
+ten leagues into the country, and nearly of the same breadth. The
+S.E. extreme point is called Cape <i>Casurina</i>, or
+<i>Casiquina</i>, in lat. 12&deg; 53' N. and long. 87&deg; 36' W.
+and the N.W. point is Cape Candadillo, in lat. 18&deg; 6' N. and
+long. 87&deg; 57' W. Within this bay are several islands, the
+principal of these being named <i>Mangeru</i> and
+<i>Amapaila</i>. Mangera is a high round island, two leagues in
+circuit, inclosed on all sides by rocks, except on its N.E. side,
+where there is a small sandy creek. The soil is black and
+shallow, full of stones, and produces very lofty trees. It has a
+small town or village in the middle inhabited by Indians, and a
+handsome Spanish church. The inhabitants cultivate a small
+quantity of maize and plantains, having also a few cocks and
+hens, but no beasts except dogs and cats. From the creek to the
+town there is a steep rocky path. <i>Amapalla</i> resembles the
+other isle in soil, but is much larger, and has two towns about
+two miles asunder, one on its northern end, and the other on the
+east. The latter is on a plain on the summit of a hill, and has a
+handsome church. The other town is smaller, but has also a fine
+church. In most of the Indian towns under the Spanish dominion,
+the images of the saints in their churches are represented of the
+Indian complexion, and dressed like Indians; while in the towns
+inhabited by Spaniards, the images have the European complexion
+and dress. There are many other islands in the bay, but
+uninhabited.</p>
+
+<p>Captain Davis went into the gulf with two canoes to procure
+some prisoners for intelligence, and coming to Mangera, the
+inhabitants all ran away into the woods, so that only the priest
+and two boys were taken. Captain Davis went thence to the isle of
+Amapalla, where the inhabitants were prevented from retiring into
+the woods by the secretary, who was an enemy to the Spaniards,
+and persuaded them the English were friends; but by the
+misconduct of one of the Buccaneers, all the Indians run away, on
+which Davis made his men fire at them, and the secretary was
+slain. After this the casique of the island was reconciled to the
+English, and afterwards guided them wherever they had occasion to
+go, especially to places on the continent where they could
+procure beef.</p>
+
+<p>A company of English and French Buccaneers landed some time
+afterwards on this island, whence they went over to the
+continent, and marched by land to the <i>Cape River</i>,
+otherwise called <i>Yare</i>, or <i>Vanquez</i> river, which
+falls into the gulf of Mexico, near <i>Cape Gracias a Dios</i>,
+on the Mosquito shore. On reaching that river near its source,
+they constructed bark canoes, in which they descended the stream
+into the gulf of Mexico. They were not, however, the first
+discoverers of this passage, as about thirty years before, some
+English went up that same river to near its source, from the gulf
+of Mexico, and marched thence inland to a town called New
+Segovia, near the head of Bluefield's river.</p>
+
+<p>While in this bay of Amapalla, some difference arose between
+the two captains, Davis who had succeeded to Cooke in command of
+the Revenge, and Eaton of the Nicholas, when they resolved to
+separate: But they first deemed it proper to careen their ships,
+for which this place afforded every convenience, and to take in a
+supply of fresh water. Both ships being in condition for sea,
+Captain Eaton took 400 sacks of flour on board his ship, and
+agreed with Captain Cowley to take the charge of the Nicholas as
+master. From this period therefore, which was in the end of
+September, the voyages of Cowley and Dampier cease to be the
+same, and require to be separately narrated.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION II.</p>
+
+<p><i>Continuation of the Narrative of Cowley, from leaving the
+Revenge, to his Return to England</i>.</p>
+
+<p>On leaving the gulf of Amapalla, the Nicholas steered for Cape
+Francisco, in lat. 0&deg; 50' N. near which they encountered
+dreadful storms, attended by prodigious thunder and lightning.
+From thence they proceeded to the latitude of 7&deg; S. but found
+the country every where alarmed. They went next to Payta, in lat.
+4&deg; 55' S. where they took two ships at anchor, which they set
+on fire, because the Spaniards refused to ransom them. Leaving
+the coast, they went to the island of <i>Gorgona</i>, in lat.
+2&deg; 50' N. about four leagues from the main, which the
+privateers usually called <i>Sharp's Island</i>. This is about
+two leagues long by one league broad, having a good harbour on
+its west side, and affording plenty of wood and water. It is a
+common saying in Spanish South America, that it rains often in
+Chili, seldom in Peru, and always at Gorgona, where they allege
+there never was a day fair to an end. Though this be not strictly
+true, it is certain that this island has rain more or less at all
+seasons, on which account, perhaps, it has always remained
+uninhabited. They sailed from Gorgona W.N.W. till in lat. 30&deg;
+N. when they steered W. by N. to lat. 15&deg; N. till they
+considered themselves beyond danger from the rocks of <i>St
+Bartholomew</i>; after which they returned into the lat. of
+13&deg; N. in which parallel they continued their voyage for the
+East Indies.</p>
+
+<p>They had a regular trade-wind, and a reasonably quick passage
+across the Pacific Ocean, except that their men were mostly ill
+of the scurvy; and on the 14th of March, 1685, being in lat.
+13&deg; 2' N. they came in sight of the island of Guam. By
+Captain Cowley's calculation, this run across the Pacific Ocean
+extended to 7646 miles, from the island of Gorgona to Guam.[157]
+They came next day to anchor in a bay on the west side of the
+island, and sent their boat on shore with a flag of truce. The
+inhabitants of a village at that place set fire to their houses,
+and ran away into the interior, on which the boat's crew cut down
+some cocoa trees to gather the fruit, and on going again on board
+were threatened by a party of the natives, who sallied out from
+some bushes on purpose to attack them. A friendly intercourse was
+however established between the English and the natives, and
+trade took place with them till the 17th, when the natives
+attacked the English suddenly, but were beat off with heavy loss,
+while none of the English were hurt.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 157: Gorgona is in long. 78&deg; 33' Guam
+in 216&deg; 40', both W. from Greenwich. The difference of
+longitude is 138&deg; 07', which gives 9530 statute miles, or
+2762 marine leagues, so that the computation in the text is
+considerably too short.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the 19th the Spanish governor of the island came to a point
+of land not far from the ship, whence he sent his boat on board
+with three copies of the same letter, in Spanish, French, and
+Dutch, desiring to know who they were, whence they came, and
+whither they were bound. Captain Eaton answered in French, saying
+that they had been fitted out by some gentlemen in France to make
+discoveries, and were come in quest of provisions. In reply the
+governor invited Captain Eaton on shore, who landed with a guard
+of twenty men doubly armed, and was politely received. On the
+18th the governor sent ten hogs on board, together with a
+prodigious quantity of potatoes, plantains, oranges, papaws, and
+red pepper, in return for which Captain Eaton sent a diamond ring
+to the governor worth twenty pounds, and gave swords to several
+Spanish gentlemen who came off with the provisions. Next day the
+governor sent to procure some powder, of which he was in want, as
+the natives were in rebellion, and Captain Eaton gave him two
+barrels, for which to the value of 1400 dollars were offered in
+gold and silver, but Eaton refused to accept the money, in
+consequence of which the governor sent him a diamond ring, worth
+fifty pounds. Every day after this the governor sent them some
+kind of provisions, and about the end of March, when about to
+sail, the governor sent them thirty hogs for sea store, with a
+large supply of rice and potatoes.</p>
+
+<p>On one occasion the Indians attacked a party of the English,
+who were on shore to draw the sein, but were beaten off with much
+loss; yet they afterwards endeavoured to prevail on Captain Eaton
+to join them in driving out the Spaniards, which he positively
+refused. On the 1st April, leaving the bay in which they had
+hitherto remained, the Nicholas anchored before the Spanish fort;
+and after several civilities on both sides, set sail in the
+afternoon of the 3d April with a fair wind.</p>
+
+<p>This island of Guam is about fourteen leagues long by six
+broad, and contains several very pleasant vallies, interspersed
+with fine fertile meadows, watered by many rivulets from the
+hills. The soil in these vallies is black and very rich,
+producing plenty of cocoas, potatoes, yams, papaws, plantains,
+<i>monanoes</i>, sour-sops, oranges, and lemons, together with
+some honey. The climate is naturally very hot, yet is wholesome,
+as constantly refreshed by the trade-wind. The Indian natives are
+large made, well proportioned, active and vigorous, some being
+seven feet and a half high, and go mostly naked, both men and
+women. They never bury their dead, but lay them in the sun to
+putrefy. Their only arms are slings and lances, the heads of
+these being made of human bones; and on the decease of any one
+his bones make eight lances, four from his legs and thighs, and
+as many from his arms. These lance heads are formed like a scoop,
+and jagged at the edges like a saw or eel-spear; so that a person
+wounded by them dies, if not cured in seven days.</p>
+
+<p>The great annual ship between Manilla and Acapulco touches
+here for refreshments, and the Spaniards said there were
+sometimes eight ships in one year at this place from the East
+Indies. They said also, that they had built a ship here, in 1684,
+of 160 tons, to trade with Manilla, and pretended to have a
+garrison here of 600 men, most of the Indians being in
+rebellion.</p>
+
+<p>The Nicholas sailed from Guam W. by S. and on computing that
+they were 206 leagues from that island, they changed to due W.
+The 23d, when they reckoned themselves 560 leagues west of Guam,
+they met with a very strong current, resembling the race of
+Portland, and fell in with a cluster of islands in lat. 20&deg;
+30' N. to the north of Lu&ccedil;onia, [the <i>Bashee
+Islands</i>.] They sent their boat ashore on the northermost of
+these islands, in order to get some fish, and to examine the
+island, on which they found vast quantities of nutmegs growing,
+but saw no people, and as night was drawing on they did not
+venture to go any distance from the shore. To this island they
+gave the name of <i>Nutmeg Island</i>, and called the bay in
+which they anchored <i>English Bay</i>. They observed many rocks,
+shoals, and foul ground near the shore, and saw a great many
+goats on the island, but brought off very few.</p>
+
+<p>On the 26th of April they were off Cape Bojadore, the N.W.
+point of Lu&ccedil;onia, and came soon after to Cipe
+<i>Mindato</i>, where they met the S.W. monsoon, on which they
+bore away for Canton in China, where they arrived in safety and
+refitted their ship. They had here an opportunity of making
+themselves as rich as they could desire, but would not embrace
+it; as there came into the port thirteen sail of Tartar vessels,
+laden with Chinese plunder, consisting of the richest productions
+of the East. The men, however, would have nothing to do with any
+thing but gold and silver, and Captain Eaton could not prevail
+upon them to fight for silks, as they alleged that would degrade
+them into pedlars. The Tartars therefore quietly pursued their
+affairs at Canton, unconscious of their danger.</p>
+
+<p>Having repaired the ship, Captain Easton sailed for Manilla,
+intending to wait for a Tartar ship of which they had
+information, bound from that port, and half laden with silver.
+They even got sight of her, and chased her a whole day to no
+purpose, as she was quite clean, and the Nicholas was as foul as
+could well be. They then stood for a small island, to the north
+of Lu&ccedil;onia, to wait for a fair wind to carry them to
+Bantam. Instead of one island, they found several, where they
+procured refreshments.[158] Learning from an Indian that in one
+of these islands there were plenty of beeves, they sent a boat
+thither with thirty men, who took what they wanted by force,
+though the island was well inhabited.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 158: The indications in the text are too
+vague to point out the particular islands at which the Nicholas
+refreshed. Immediately north from Lu&ccedil;onia are the
+Babuvanes Isles, in lat 19&deg; 30', and still farther, the
+Bashee Islands, in 20&deg; 30', both N.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Leaving these islands about the middle of September, 1685,
+they were for three days in great danger on the banks of
+<i>Peragoa</i>, in lat. 10&deg; N. after which they came to a
+convenient bay in an island not far from the northern coast of
+Borneo, where they set up a tent on shore and landed every thing
+from the ship, fortifying themselves with ten small guns, in case
+of being attacked by the natives, and hauled their ship on shore
+to clean her bottom. At first the natives of the island avoided
+all intercourse with the English; but one day the boat of the
+Nicholas came up with a canoe in which was the queen of the
+country with her retinue, who all leaped into the sea to get away
+from the English. They took up these people with much difficulty,
+and entertained them with so much kindness that they became good
+friends during two months which they continued afterwards at this
+island. At this time the Spaniards were at peace with the
+sovereign of Borneo, and carried on an advantageous trade there
+from Manilla; of which circumstance Captain Eaton and his people
+got intimation, and passed themselves for Spaniards during their
+residence.</p>
+
+<p>This great island is plentifully stored with provisions of all
+kinds, and many rich commodities, as diamonds, pepper, camphor,
+&amp;c. and several kinds of fine woods, as specklewood and
+ebony. Cloves also were there to be had at a reasonable price,
+being brought there from the neighbouring islands by stealth. The
+animals of Borneo, as reported by Cowley, are elephants, tigers,
+panthers, leopards, antelopes, and wild swine. The king of Borneo
+being in league with the Spanish governor of the Philippines, the
+English passed themselves here as Spaniards, and were amply
+supplied by the natives during their stay with fish, oranges,
+lemons, mangoes, plantains, and pine-apples.</p>
+
+<p>The Nicholas sailed from this place in December, 1685,
+proceeding to a chain of islands in lat. 4&deg; N. called the
+<i>Naturah</i> islands,[159] whence they went to Timor, where the
+crew became exceedingly mutinous; on which Captain Cowley and
+others resolved to quit the Nicholas, in order to endeavour to
+get a passage home from Batavia. Accordingly, Cowley and one Mr
+Hill, with eighteen more of the men, purchased a large boat, in
+which they meant to have gone to Batavia, but, owing to contrary
+winds, were obliged to put in at Cheribon, another factory
+belonging to the Dutch in Java, where they found they had lost a
+day in their reckoning during their voyage by the west. They here
+learnt the death of Charles II. and that the Dutch had driven the
+English from Bantam, which was then the second place of trade we
+possessed in India. The Dutch were forming other schemes to the
+prejudice of our trade, wherefore Cowley, with Hill and another
+of the Englishmen, resolved to make all the haste they could to
+Batavia, to avoid being involved in the subsisting disputes. They
+were kindly received by the governor of Batavia, who promised
+them a passage to Holland.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 159: The Natuna Islands, in long. 108&deg;
+E. from Greenwich.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Cowley and his remaining companions embarked at Batavia in a
+Dutch ship in March, 1686. They arrived in Table bay at the Cape
+of Good Hope on the 1st June, where they landed next day, and of
+which settlement, as it then existed in 1686, Cowley gives the
+following account:--</p>
+
+<p>"Cape Town does not contain above an hundred houses, which are
+all built low, because exposed to violent gales of wind in the
+months of December, January, and February. The castle is very
+strong, having about eighty large cannon for its defence. There
+is also a very spacious garden, maintained by the Dutch East
+India Company, planted with all kinds of fruit-trees, and many
+excellent herbs, and laid out in numerous pleasant walks. This
+garden is near a mile in length and a furlong wide, being the
+greatest rarity at the Cape, and far exceeding the public garden
+at Batavia. This country had abundance of very good sheep, but
+cattle and fowls are rather scarce. We walked out of town to a
+village inhabited by the <i>Hodmandods</i>, or Hottentots. Their
+houses are round, having the fire-places in the middle, almost
+like the huts of the wild Irish, and the people lay upon the
+ashes, having nothing under them but sheep-skins. The men seemed
+all to be <i>Monorchides</i>, and the whole of these people were
+so nasty that we could hardly endure the stench of their bodies
+and habitations. Their women are singularly conformed, having a
+natural skin apron, and are all so ignorant and brutish that they
+do not hesitate to prostitute themselves publicly for the
+smallest imaginable recompense, of which I was an eye witness.
+Their apparel is a sheep-skin flung over their shoulders, with a
+leather cap on their heads, as full of grease as it can hold.
+Their legs are wound about, from the ankle to the knees, with the
+guts of beasts well greased.</p>
+
+<p>"These people, called <i>Hodmandods</i> by the Dutch, are born
+white, but they make themselves black by smearing their bodies
+all over with soot and grease, so that by frequent repetition
+they become as black as negroes. Their children, when young, are
+of a comely form, but their noses are like those of the negroes.
+When they marry, the woman cuts off one joint of her finger; and,
+if her husband die and she remarry again, she cuts off another
+joint, and so on however often she may marry.</p>
+
+<p>"They are a most filthy race, and will feed upon any thing,
+however foul. When the Hollanders kill a beast, these people get
+the guts, and having squeezed out the excrements, without washing
+or scraping, they lay them upon the coals, and eat them before
+they are well heated through. If even a slave of the Hollanders
+wish to have one of their women, he has only to give her husband
+a piece of tobacco. Yet will they beat their wives if unfaithful
+with one of their own nation, though they care not how they act
+with the men of other nations. They are worshipers of the moon,
+and thousands of them may be seen dancing and singing by the
+sea-side, when they expect to see that luminary; but if it happen
+to be dark weather, so that the moon does not appear, they say
+their god is angry with them. While we were at the Cape, one of
+the <i>Hodmandods</i> drank himself dead in the fort, on which
+the others came and put oil and milk into his mouth, but finding
+he was dead, they began to prepare for his burial in the
+following manner:--Having shaved or scraped his body, arms, and
+legs, with their knives, they dug a great hole, in which they
+placed him on his breech in a sitting posture, heaping stones
+about him to keep him upright. Then came the women, making a most
+horrible noise round the hole which was afterwards filled up with
+earth."</p>
+
+<p>On the 15th June. 1686, Cowley sailed from the Cape, the
+homeward-bound Dutch fleet consisting of three ships, when at the
+same time other three sailed for Bolivia. On the 22d of June they
+passed the line, when Cowley computed that he had sailed quite
+round the globe, having formerly crossed the line nearly at the
+same place, when outward-bound from Virginia in 1683. On the 4th
+August they judged themselves to be within thirty leagues of the
+dangerous shoal called the <i>Abrolhos</i>, laid down in lat.
+15&deg; N. in the map: but Cowley was very doubtful if any such
+shoal exist, having never met with any one who had fallen in with
+it, and he was assured by a pilot, who had made sixteen voyages
+to Brazil, that there was no such sand. The 19th September,
+Cowley saw land which he believed to be Shetland. They were off
+the Maes on the 28th September, and on the 30th Cowley landed at
+Helvoetsluys. He travelled by land to Rotterdam, whence he sailed
+in the Ann for England, and arrived safe in London on the 12th
+October, 1686, after a tedious and troublesome voyage of three
+years and nearly two months.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION III.</p>
+
+<p><i>Sequel of the Voyage, so far as Dampier is concerned, after
+the Separation of the Nicholas from the Revenge.</i>[160]</p>
+
+<p>This is usually denominated Captain William Dampier's
+<i>first</i> Voyage round the World, and is given at large by
+Harris, but on the present occasion has been limited, in this
+section, to the narrative of Dampier after the separation of
+Captain Cowley in the Nicholas; the observations of Dampier in
+the earlier part of the voyage, having been already interwoven in
+the first section of this chapter.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 160: Dampier's Voyages, Lond. 1729, vol. I.
+and II. Harris, II. 84.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>This voyage is peculiarly valuable, by its minute and
+apparently accurate account of the harbours and anchorages on the
+western coast of South America, and has, therefore, been given
+here at considerable length, as it may become of singular utility
+to our trade, in case the navigation to the South Sea may be
+thrown open, which is at present within the exclusive privileges
+of the East India Company, yet entirely unused by that chartered
+body.--E.</p>
+
+<hr align="center" width="50%">
+<p>Captain Eaton in the Nicholas having separated from the
+Revenge, left the Gulf of Amapalla on the 2d September, 1684, as
+formerly mentioned, which place we also left next day, directing
+our course for the coast of Peru. Tornadoes, with thunder,
+lightning, and rain, are very frequent on these coasts from June
+to November, mostly from the S.E. of which we had our share. The
+wind afterwards veered to W. and so continued till we came in
+sight of Cape St Francisco, where we met with fair weather and
+the wind at S.</p>
+
+<p>Cape St Francisco, in lat. 0&deg; 50' N. is a high full point
+of land, covered with lofty trees. In passing from the N. a low
+point may be easily mistaken for the cape, but soon after passing
+this point the cape is seen with three distinct points. The land
+in its neighbourhood is high, and the mountains appear black. The
+20th September we came to anchor in sixteen fathoms near the
+island of <i>Plata</i>, in lat. 1&deg; 15' S. This island is
+about four miles long and a mile and half broad, being of some
+considerable height, and environed with rocky cliffs, except in
+one place at the east end, where the only fresh-water torrent of
+the isle falls down from the rocks into the sea. The top of the
+island is nearly flat, with a sandy soil, which produces three or
+four kinds of low small trees, not known in Europe, and these
+trees are much overgrown with moss. Among these trees the surface
+is covered with pretty good grass, especially in the beginning of
+the year, but there are no land animals to feed upon it, the
+great number of goats that used to be found here formerly being
+all destroyed. Is has, however, a great number of the birds named
+Boobies and Man-of-war birds. Some say that this island got the
+name <i>Isola de Plata</i> from the Spaniards, from the
+circumstance of Sir Francis Drake having carried to this place
+their ship the Cacafoga, richly laden with silver, which they
+name <i>Plata</i>.</p>
+
+<p>The anchorage is on the east side, about the middle of the
+island, close to the shore, within two cables length of the sandy
+bay, in eighteen or twenty fathoms, fast ooze, and smooth water,
+the S.E. point of the island keeping off the force of the south
+wind which usually blows here. In this sandy bay there is good
+landing, and indeed it is the only place which leads into the
+island. A small shoal runs out about a quarter of a mile from the
+east point of the island, on which shoal there is a great
+rippling of the sea when the tide flows. The tide here has a
+strong current, setting to the south with the flood, and to the
+north when it ebbs. At this east point also there are three small
+high rocks, about a cable's length from the shore; and three much
+larger rocks at the N.E. point. All round the isle the water is
+very deep, except at the before-mentioned anchorage. Near the
+shoal there are great numbers of small sea-tortoises, or turtle,
+formerly mentioned as found at the Gallapagos. This island of
+<i>Plata</i> is four or five leagues W.S.W. from Cape <i>San
+Lorenzo</i>.</p>
+
+<p>After remaining one day at this isle, we continued our voyage
+to Cape <i>Santa Helena</i>, in lat. 2&deg; 8' S. This cape
+appears high and flat, resembling an island, covered on the top
+with thistles, and surrounded by low grounds, but without any
+trees. As it jets far out to sea, it forms a good bay on its
+north side, a mile within which is a wretched Indian village on
+the shore, called also Santa Helena; but the ground in its
+neighbourhood, though low, is sandy and barren, producing neither
+trees, grass, corn, nor fruit, except excellent water-melons; and
+the inhabitants are forced to fetch their fresh water from the
+river <i>Calanche</i>, four leagues distant, at the bottom of the
+bay. They live chiefly on fish, and are supplied with maize from
+other parts, in exchange for <i>Algatrane</i>, which is a
+bituminous substance issuing from the earth near this village,
+about five paces above high-water mark. This substance, by means
+of long boiling, becomes hard like pitch, and is employed as such
+by the Spaniards. To leeward of the point, directly opposite the
+village, there is good anchorage, but on the west side the water
+is very deep. Some of our men were sent under night in canoes to
+take the village, in which they succeeded, and made some
+prisoners; but the natives set fire to a small bark in the road,
+alleging the positive orders of the viceroy.</p>
+
+<p>We returned from thence to the island of Plata, where we
+anchored on the 26th September, and sent some of our men that
+evening to <i>Manta</i>, a small Indian village on the continent,
+seven or eight leagues from Plata, and two or three leagues east
+from Cape Lorenzo. Its buildings are mean and scattered, but
+standing on an easy ascent, it has a fine prospect towards the
+sea-side. Having formerly been inhabited by the Spaniards, it has
+a fine church, adorned with carved work; but as the ground in the
+neighbourhood is very dry and sandy, it produces neither corn nor
+roots, and only a few shrubs are to be found. The inhabitants are
+supplied with provisions by sea, this being the first place at
+which ships refresh, when bound from Panama to Lima and other
+parts of Peru. They have an excellent spring of fresh water
+between the village and the sea. Opposite to this village, and a
+mile and a half from the shore, there is a very dangerous rock,
+being always covered by the sea; but about a mile within this
+rock there is safe anchorage, in six, eight, and ten fathoms, on
+hard clear sand; and a mile west from this, a shoal runs a mile
+out to sea. Behind the town, and directly to the south, a good
+way inland, there is a very high mountain rising up into the
+clouds, like a sugar-loaf; which serves as an excellent sea-mark,
+there being no other like it on all this coast. [161]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 161: The great Chimborazo is probably here
+meant, about 135 English miles inland from Manta, and almost due
+east, instead of south, as in the test.--E]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Our men landed about day-break, a mile and a half from the
+village, but the inhabitants took the alarm, and got all away,
+except two old women, from whom we learnt that the viceroy, on
+receiving intelligence of enemies having come across the isthmus
+of Darien into the South Sea, had ordered all their ships to be
+set on fire, all the goats in the isle of Plata to be destroyed,
+and that the inhabitants on the coast should keep no more
+provisions than were necessary for their present use.</p>
+
+<p>We returned to our ship at Plata, where we remained for some
+time unresolved what course to pursue. On the 2d of October, the
+Cygnet of London, Captain Swan, came to anchor in the same road.
+This was a richly-loaded ship, designed for trading on this
+coast, but being disappointed in his hopes of trade, his men had
+forced Captain Swan to take on board a company of buccaneers he
+fell in with at Nicoya, being those we heard of at Manta, who had
+come by land to the South Sea under the command of Captain Peter
+Harris, nephew to the Captain Harris who was slain before Panama.
+As the Cygnet was unfit for service, by reason of her cargo,
+Captain Swan sold most of his goods on credit, and threw the rest
+overboard, reserving only the fine commodities, and some iron for
+ballast. Captains Davis and Swan now joined company; and Harris
+was placed in command of a small bark. Our bark, which had been
+sent to cruise three days before the arrival of the Cygnet, now
+returned with a prize laden with timber, which they had taken in
+the Gulf of Guayaquil. The commander of this prize informed us,
+that it was reported at Guayaquil, that the viceroy was fitting
+out ten frigates to chase us from these seas. This intelligence
+made us wish for Captain Eaton, and we resolved to send out a
+small bark towards Lima, to invite him to rejoin us. We also
+fitted up another small bark for a fire-ship, and set sail for
+the island of <i>Lobos</i> on the 20th October.</p>
+
+<p>Being about six leagues off Payta on the 2d of November, we
+sent 110 men in several canoes to attack that place. <i>Payta</i>
+is a small sea-port town belonging to the Spaniards, in lat.
+5&deg; 15' S. built on a sandy rock near the sea-side, under a
+high hill. Although not containing more than seventy-five or
+eighty low mean houses, like most of the other buildings along
+the coast of Peru, it has two churches. The walls of these houses
+are chiefly built of a kind of bricks, made of earth and straw,
+only dried in the sun. These bricks are three feet long, two
+broad, and a foot and a half thick. In some places, instead of
+roofs, they only lay a few poles across the tops of the walls,
+covered with mats, though in other places they have
+regularly-constructed roofs. The cause of this mean kind of
+building is partly from the want of stones and timber, and partly
+because it never rains on this coast, so that they are only
+solicitious to keep out the sun; and these walls, notwithstanding
+the slight nature of their materials, continue good a long time,
+as they are never injured by rain. The timber used by the better
+sort of people has to be brought by sea from other places. The
+walls of the churches and of the best houses are neatly whitened,
+both within and without, and the beams, posts, and doors are all
+adorned with carved work. Within they are ornamented with good
+pictures, and rich hangings of tapestry or painted calico,
+brought from Spain. The houses of Payta, however, were not of
+this description, though their two churches were large and
+handsome. Close by the sea there was a small fort, armed only
+with muskets, to command the harbour, as also another fort on the
+top of a hill, which commanded both the harbour and lower fort.
+The inhabitants of Payta are obliged to bring their fresh-water
+from Colon, a town two leagues to the N.N.E. where a fresh-water
+river falls into the sea; and have also to procure fowls, hogs,
+plantains, maize, and other provisions from that and other
+places, owing to the barrenness of the soil in its own
+neighbourhood. The dry and barren tract of this western coast of
+America begins at Cape Blanco in the north, and reaches to
+Coquimbo in 30&deg; S. in all of which vast extent of coast I
+never saw or heard of any rain falling, nor of any thing growing
+whatever either in the mountains or vallies, except in such
+places as are constantly watered, in consequence of being on the
+banks of rivers and streams.</p>
+
+<p>The inhabitants of Colon are much given to fishing, for which
+purpose they venture out to sea in <i>bark-logs</i>.[162] These
+are constructed of several round logs of wood, forming a raft,
+but different according to the uses they are intended for, or the
+customs of those that make them. Those meant for fishing consist
+only of three or five logs of wood about eight feet long, the
+middle one longer than the rest, especially forewards, and the
+others gradually shorter, forming a kind of stem or prow to cut
+the waves. The logs are joined to each other's sides by wooden
+pegs and <i>withes</i>, or twisted branches of trees. Such as are
+intended for carrying merchandise are made in the same manner and
+shape, but the raft consists of twenty or thirty great trunks of
+trees, thirty or forty feet long, joined together as before. On
+these another row of shorter trees are laid across, and fastened
+down by wooden pegs. From, this double raft or bottom they raise
+a raft of ten feet high, by means of upright posts, which support
+two layers of thick trees laid across each other, like our piles
+of wood, but not so close as in the bottom of the float; these
+being formed only at the ends and sides, the inner part being
+left hollow. In this hollow, at the height of four feet from the
+floor of the raft, they lay a deck or floor of small poles close
+together, serving as the floor or deck of another room; and above
+this, at the same height, they lay just such another sparred
+deck. The lower room serves for the hold, in which they stow
+ballast, and water casks or jars. The second room serves for the
+seamen and what belongs to them. Above all the goods are stowed,
+as high as they deem fit, but seldom exceeding the height of ten
+feet. Some space is left vacant behind for the steersman, and
+before for the kitchen, especially in long voyages, for in these
+strange vessels they will venture to make voyages of five or six
+hundred leagues.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 162: I suspect this to be a mistaken
+translation of <i>barco-longo</i>, long barks, or rafts rather,
+as the subsequent description indicates.--E]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In navigating these vessels, they use a very large rudder,
+with one mast in the middle of the machine, on which they have a
+large sail, like our west country barges on the river Thames. As
+these machines can only sail before the wind, they are only fit
+for these seas, where the wind blows constantly one way, seldom
+varying above a point or two in the whole voyage from Lima to
+Panama. If, when near Panama, they happen to meet a north-west
+wind, as sometimes happens, they must drive before it till it
+changes, merely using their best endeavours to avoid the shore,
+for they will never sink at sea. Such vessels carry sixty or
+seventy tons of merchandise, as wine, oil, flour, sugar, Quito
+cloth, soap, dressed goats skins, &amp;c. They are navigated by
+three or four men only; who, on their arrival at Panama, sell
+both the goods and vessel at that place, as they cannot go back
+again with them against the trade-wind. The smaller fishing barks
+of this construction are much easier managed. These go out to sea
+at night with the land-wind, and return to the shore in the day
+with the sea-breeze; and such small <i>barco longos</i> are used
+in many parts of America, and in some places in the East Indies.
+On the coast of Coromandel they use only one log, or sometimes
+two, made of light wood, managed by one man, without sail or
+rudder, who steers the log with a paddle, sitting with his legs
+in the water.[163]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 163: On the coast of Coromandel these small
+rafts are named <i>Catamarans</i>, and are employed for carrying
+letters or messages between the shore and the ships, through the
+tremendous surf which continually breaks on that
+coast.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The next town to Payta of any consequence is <i>Piura</i>,
+thirty miles from Payta, seated in a valley on a river of the
+same name, which discharges its waters into the bay of
+<i>Chirapee</i> [or Sechura.] in lat. 5&deg; 32' S. This bay is
+seldom visited by ships of burden, being full of shoals; but the
+harbour of Payta is one of the best on the coast of Peru, being
+sheltered on the S.W. by a point of land, which renders the bay
+smooth and the anchorage safe, in from six to twenty fathoms on
+clear sand. Most ships navigating this coast, whether bound north
+or south, touch at this port for fresh water, which is brought to
+them from <i>Colon</i> at a reasonable rate.</p>
+
+<p>Early in the morning of the 3d November, our men landed about
+four miles south of Payta, where they took some prisoners who
+were set there to watch. Though informed that the governor of
+Piura had come to the defence of Payta with a reinforcement of an
+hundred men, they immediately pushed to the fort on the hill,
+which they took with little resistance, on which the governor and
+all the inhabitants evacuated Payta, but which we found empty of
+money, goods, and provisions. That same evening we brought our
+ships to anchor near the town, in ten fathoms a mile from shore,
+and remained six days in hopes of getting a ransom for the town;
+but seeing we were not likely to have any, we set it on fire, and
+set sail at night with the land-breeze for the island of Lobos.
+The 14th we came in sight of <i>Lobos de Tierra</i>, the inner or
+northern island of Lobos, which is of moderate height, and
+appears at a distance like <i>Lobos del Mare</i>, the southern
+island of the same name, at which other island we arrived on the
+19th. The evening of the 29th we set sail for the bay of
+Guayaquil, which lies between Cape <i>Blanco</i> in lat. 4&deg;
+18', and the point of <i>Chanday</i>, or <i>Carnera</i>, in
+2&deg; 18' both S. In the bottom of this bay is a small isle,
+called <i>Santa Clara</i>, extending E. and W. and having many
+shoals, which make ships that intend for Guayaquil to pass on the
+south side of this island.</p>
+
+<p>From the isles of Santa Clara to <i>Punta arena</i>, the N.W.
+point of the island of Puna, is seven leagues [thirty statute
+miles] N.N.E. Here ships bound for Guayaquil take in pilots, who
+live in a town in Puna of the same name, at its N.E. extremity,
+seven leagues [twenty-five miles] from Punta arena. The island of
+Puna is low, stretching fourteen leagues E. and W. and five
+leagues from N. to S.[164] It has a strong tide running along its
+shores, which are full of little creeks and harbours. The
+interior of this island consists of good pasture land, intermixed
+with some woodlands, producing various kinds of trees to us
+unknown. Among these are abundance of <i>Palmitoes</i>, a tree
+about the thickness of an ordinary ash, and thirty feet high,
+having a straight trunk without branches or leaf, except at the
+very top, which spreads out into many small branches three or
+four feet long. At the extremity of each of these is a single
+leaf, which at first resembles a fan plaited together, and then
+opens out like a large unfolded fan. The houses in the town of
+Puna are built on posts ten or twelve feet high, and are thatched
+with palmito leaves, the inhabitants having to go up to them by
+means of ladders. The best place for anchorage is directly
+opposite the town, in five fathoms, a cable's length from
+shore.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 164: Puna is nearly forty English miles
+from N.E. to S.W. and about sixteen miles from N.W. to
+S.E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>From Puna to Guayaquil is seven leagues, the entrance into the
+river of that name being two miles across, and it afterwards runs
+up into the country with a pretty straight course, the ground on
+both sides being marshy and full of red mangrove trees. About
+four miles below the town of Guayaquil, the river is divided into
+two channels by a small low island, that on the west being
+broadest, though the other is as deep. From the upper end of this
+island to the town is about a league, and the river about the
+same in breadth, in which a ship of large burden may ride safely,
+especially on the side nearest the town. The town of Guayaquil
+stands close to the river, being partly built on an ascent, and
+partly at the foot of a small hill, having a steep descent to the
+river. It is defended by two forts on the low grounds, and a
+third on the hill, and is one of the best ports belonging to the
+Spaniards in the South Sea. It is under the command of a
+governor, and is beautified by several fine churches and other
+good buildings. From this place they export cocoas, hides,
+tallow, sarsaparilla, drugs, and a kind of woollen cloth called
+Quito-cloth. The cocoas grow on both sides of the river above the
+town, having a smaller nut than those of Campeachy.[165]
+Sarsaparilla delights in watery places, near the side of the
+river.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 165: The <i>cacao</i>, or chocolate-nut is
+probably here meant, not the cocoanut.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Quito is a populous place in the interior of the country,
+almost under the line, being in lat. 0&deg; 12' S. and long.
+78&deg; 22' W. from Greenwich. It is inclosed by a ridge of high
+mountains, abounding in gold, being inhabited by a few Spaniards,
+and by many Indians under the Spanish dominion. The rivers or
+streams which descend from the surrounding mountains carry great
+abundance of gold dust in their course into the low grounds,
+especially after violent rains, and this gold is collected out of
+the sand by washing. Quito is reckoned the richest place for gold
+in all Peru,[166] but it is unwholesome, the inhabitants being
+subject to headaches, fevers, diarrhaes, and dysenteries; but
+Guayaquil is greatly more healthy. At Quito is made a
+considerable quantity of coarse woollen cloth, worn only by the
+lower class all over the kingdom of Peru.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 166: Quito was annexed to the empire of
+Peru, not long before the Spanish conquest, but is now in the
+viceroyalty of New Granada.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Leaving our ships at Cape Blanco, we went in a bark and
+several canoes to make an attempt on Guayaquil, but were
+discovered, and returned therefore to our ships, in which we
+sailed for the island of Plata, in lat. 1&deg; 15' S. where we
+arrived on the 16th December. Having provided ourselves with
+water on the opposite coast of the continent, we set sail on the
+23d with a brisk gale at S.S.W. directing our course for a town
+called <i>Lovalia</i>, in the bay of Panama. Next morning we
+passed in sight of Cape <i>Passado</i>, in lat. 0&deg; 28' S.
+being a very high round point, divided in the middle, bare
+towards the sea, but covered on the land side with fruit-trees,
+the land thereabout being hilly and covered with wood. Between
+this and Cape San Francisco there are many small points,
+inclosing as many sandy creeks full of trees of various kinds.
+Meaning to look out for canoes, we were indifferent what river we
+came to, so we endeavoured to make for the river of St Jago, by
+reason of its nearness to the island of <i>Gallo</i>, in which
+there is much gold, and where was good anchorage for our ships.
+We passed Cape St Francisco, whence to the north the land along
+the sea is full of trees of vast height and thickness.</p>
+
+<p>Between this cape and the island of Gallo there are several
+large rivers, all of which we passed in our way to that of St
+Jago, a large navigable river in lat. 2&deg; N.[167] About seven
+leagues before it reaches the sea, this river divides into two
+branches, which inclose an island four leagues in circuit. Both
+branches are very deep, but the S.W. channel is the broadest, and
+the other has sand-banks at its mouth, which cannot be passed at
+low-water. Above the island the river is a league broad, having a
+straight channel and swift current, and is navigable three
+leagues up, but how much farther I know not. It runs through a
+very rich soil, producing all kinds of the tallest trees that are
+usually met with in this country, but especially red and white
+cotton-trees, and cabbage-trees of large size. The <i>white
+cotton-tree</i> grows not unlike an oak, but much bigger and
+taller, having a straight trunk, without branches to the top,
+where it sends out strong branches. The bark is very smooth, the
+leaves of the size of a plum-tree leaf, dark green, oval, smooth,
+and jagged at the ends. These trees are not always biggest near
+the roots, but often swell out to a great size in the middle of
+their trunks. They bear <i>silk-cotton</i>, which falls to the
+ground in November and December, but is not so substantial as
+that of the cotton-shrub, being rather like the down of thistles.
+Hence they do not think it worth being gathered in America; but
+in the East Indies it is used for stuffing pillows. The old
+leaves of this tree fall off in April, and are succeeded by fresh
+leaves in the course of a week. The <i>red cotton-tree</i> is
+somewhat less in size, but in other respects resembles the other,
+except that it produces <i>no cotton</i>. The wood is hard,
+though that of both kinds is somewhat spongy. Both are found in
+fat soils, both in the East and West Indies.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 167: Nearly in the indicated latitude is
+the river of Patia, in the province of Barbacoas. The river St
+Jago of modern maps on this coast is in lat. 1&deg; 18' N. in the
+province of Atacames, or Esmeraldas.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The <i>cabbage-tree</i> is the tallest that is found in these
+woods, some exceeding 120 feet in height. It likewise is without
+boughs or branches to the top, where its branches are the
+thickness of a man's arm, and twelve or fourteen feet long. Two
+feet from the stem come forth many small long leaves of an inch
+broad, so thick and regular on both sides that they cover the
+whole branch. In the midst of these high branches is what is
+called the cabbage, which, when taken out of the outer leaves, is
+a foot in length, and as thick as the small of a man's leg, as
+white as milk, and both sweet and wholesome. Between the cabbages
+and the large branches many small twigs sprout out, two feet long
+and very close together, at the extremities of which grow hard
+round berries, about the size of cherries, which fall once a year
+on the ground, and are excellent food for hogs. The trunk has
+projecting rings half a foot asunder, the bark being thin and
+brittle, the wood hard and black, and the pith white. As the tree
+dies when deprived of its head, which is the cabbage, it is
+usually cut down before gathering the fruit.</p>
+
+<p>As the coast and country of Lima has continual dry weather, so
+this northern part of Peru is seldom without rain, which is
+perhaps one reason why this part of the coast is so little known.
+Besides, in going from Panama to Lima, they seldom pass along the
+coast, but sail to the west as far as the Cobaya Islands, to meet
+the west winds, and thence stand over for Cape St Francisco. In
+returning to Panama, they keep along the coast, but being deeply
+laden, their ships are not fit to enter the rivers, the banks of
+which, and the seacoast, are covered with trees and bushes, and
+are therefore convenient for the natives to lie in ambush. The
+Indians have some plantations of maize and plantains, and also
+breed fowls and hogs. On the 27th December, 1684, we entered the
+river of St Jago [<i>Patia</i>] with four canoes by the lesser
+branch, and met with no inhabitants till six leagues from its
+mouth, where we observed two small huts thatched with palmito
+leaves. We saw at the same time several Indians, with their
+families and household goods, paddling up the river much faster
+than we could row, as they kept near the banks. On the opposite,
+or west side, we saw many other huts, about a league off but did
+not venture to cross the river, as the current was very rapid. In
+the two huts on the east side we only found a few plantains, some
+fowls, and one hog, which seemed to be of the European kind, such
+as the Spaniards brought formerly to America, and chiefly to
+Jamaica, Hispaniola, and Cuba, where, being previously marked,
+they feed in the woods all day, and are recalled to their pens at
+night by the sound of conch shells.</p>
+
+<p>We returned next morning to the mouth of the river, intending
+to proceed to the isle of <i>Gallo</i>, where we had directed the
+ships to meet us. This small uninhabited island, in lat. 3&deg;
+N.[168] is situated in a spacious bay, three leagues from the
+river <i>Tomaco</i>, and four and a half from an Indian village
+of the same name. It is moderately high, and well stored with
+timber, having a good sandy bay at its N.E. end, near which is a
+fine stream of fresh water; and over against the bay there is
+good anchorage in six or seven fathoms. There is only one channel
+by which to approach this island, in which are four fathoms, and
+into which it is necessary to enter with the flood, and to come
+out with the ebb. The river <i>Tomaco</i> is supposed to have its
+origin in the rich mountains of Quito, and takes its name from
+that of a village on its banks.[169] The country on this river is
+well peopled by Indians, among whom are a few Spaniards, who
+traffic for gold with the natives. This river is so shallow at
+the mouth, that it can only be entered by barks. The town of
+<i>Tomaco</i> is small, and situated near the mouth of the river,
+being chiefly occupied by the Spaniards, who trade in this
+neighbourhood. From this place to that branch of the river St
+Jago where we were then at anchor is five leagues.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 168: The lat. of Gallo is only 1&deg; 57'
+N. That assigned in the text would lead to the isle of Gorgona,
+in 2&deg; 54' N. but the description of our author suits much
+better with Gallo.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 169: The island and point of Tomaco are
+placed in modern maps at the mouth of the Mira, off which are
+many islands, in lat. 1&deg; 40'N.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>As the land here is low and full of creeks, we left the river
+on the 21st December, and crossed these small bays in our canoes.
+In our way we saw an Indian hut, whence we took the master and
+all his family, and rowing forwards, we came to Tomaco at
+midnight. We here seized all the inhabitants, among whom was one
+Don Diego de Pinas, a Spanish knight, whose ship was at anchor
+not far off to load with timber, and in which we found thirteen
+jars of good wine, but no other loading. An Indian canoe came to
+us, in which were three natives, who were straight and
+well-limbed, but of low stature, having black hair, long visages,
+small eyes and noses, and dark complexions. Several of our men,
+who had gone seven or eight leagues up the river, returned on the
+31st, bringing with them several ounces of gold, which they had
+found in a Spanish house, whence the inhabitants had fled.</p>
+
+<p>On the 1st January, 1685, while going in our canoes from
+Tomaco to Gallo, we took a packet of letters in a Spanish boat
+bound from Panama to Lima, by which the president of Panama wrote
+to hasten the Plate fleet from Lima, as the armada from Spain had
+arrived in Porto Bello. This intelligence made us change our
+intention of proceeding to Lavelia, instead of which we now
+proposed to make for the <i>Pearl Islands</i>, not far from
+Panama, past which all ships bound from the south for Panama must
+necessarily pass. We accordingly sailed on the 7th, and next day
+took a vessel of ninety tons, laden with flour; and continuing
+our voyage with a gentle wind at S. we anchored on the 9th at the
+island of <i>Gorgona</i>, on its west side, in thirty-eight
+fathoms clean ground, two cables length from shore, in a sandy
+bay, the land round which is very low.</p>
+
+<p><i>Gorgona</i> is in lat. 2&deg; 54' N. twenty-five leagues
+from Gallo, and is remarkable for two high risings or hills
+called the Saddles. This island is two leagues long by one league
+broad, and is about four from the continent, having another small
+isle at its west end. It is full of tall trees, and is watered by
+many rivulets, having no animals except monkies, rabbits, and
+snakes. It is very subject to heavy rains, and the only
+observable difference in the seasons here is, that the rains are
+more moderate in summer. The sea around is so deep that there is
+no anchorage except at the west end, where the tide flows eight
+feet. Muscles and periwinkles are here in great plenty, and the
+monkies open the shells at low water. There are also abundance of
+pearl oysters, fixed to loose rocks by their beards, four, five,
+and six fathoms under water. These resemble our oysters, but are
+somewhat flatter and thinner in the shell, their flesh being
+slimy and not eatable, unless dried beforehand and afterwards
+boiled. Some shells contain twenty or thirty seed pearls, and
+others have one or two pearls of some size, lying at the head of
+the oyster, between the fish and the shell; but the inside of the
+shells have a brighter lustre than even the pearls.</p>
+
+<p>The 13th January we pursued our voyage for <i>Isla del
+Rey</i>, being two men of war, two tenders a fire-ship, and a
+prize vessel. With the trade-wind at S. we sailed along the
+continent, having low land near the sea but seeing high mountains
+up the country. On the 16th we passed Cape <i>Corientes</i>, in
+lat. 5&deg; 32' N. being a high point with four small hillocks on
+the top, and at this place found a current setting to the north.
+The 21st we came in sight of Point <i>Garachina</i>, in lat.
+7&deg; 20' N.[170] The land here being high and rocky, and
+without trees near the shore. Within the point there is plenty of
+oysters and muscles. About twelve leagues from this point are the
+islands called <i>Islas del Rey</i>, or the Pearl Islands.[171]
+Between these and the Point of Garachina there is a small flat
+barren island, called <i>Galleria</i>, near which we came to
+anchor.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 170: Carachina Point is in lat. 8&deg; 10'
+N.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 171: The Isla del Rey is a considerable
+island in the bay of Panama, and the Archipelago de las Perlas
+are a multitude of [illegible] islets N. by W. from that
+island.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The <i>King's</i> or <i>Pearl</i> Islands, are a considerable
+number of low woody isles, seven leagues from the nearest
+continent, and twelve leagues from Panama, stretching fourteen
+leagues from N.W. by N. to S.E. by S. Though named Pearl Islands
+in the maps, I could never see any pearls about them. The
+northermost of these isles, called <i>Pachea</i> or
+<i>Pacheque</i>, which is very small, is eleven or twelve leagues
+from Panama; the most southerly is called St Paul's Island, and
+the rest, though larger, have no names. Some of them are planted
+with bananas, plantains, and rice by negroes belonging to the
+inhabitants of Panama. The channel between these islands and the
+continent is seven or eight leagues broad, of a moderate depth,
+and has good anchorage all the way. These isles lie very close
+together, yet have channels between them fit for boats.</p>
+
+<p>At one end of <i>St Paul's</i> Island, there is a good
+careening place, in a deep channel inclosed by the land, into
+which the entrance is on the north side, where the tide rises ten
+feet. We brought our ships in on the 25th, being spring tide, and
+having first cleaned our barks, we sent them on the 27th to
+cruise towards Panama. The fourth day after, they brought us in a
+prize coming from Lavelia, laden with maize or Indian corn,
+salted beef and fowls. <i>Lavelia</i> is a large town on the bank
+of a river which runs into the north side of the bay of Panama,
+and is seven leagues from the sea; and <i>Nata</i> is another
+town situated in a plain on a branch of the same river.[172]
+These two places supply Panama with beef, hogs, fowls, and maize.
+In the harbour where we careened, we found abundance of oysters,
+muscles, limpits, and clams, which last are a kind of oysters,
+which stick so close to the rocks that they must be opened where
+they grow, by those who would come at their meat. We also found
+here some pigeons and turtle-doves.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 172: From the circumstances in the text
+Lavelia seems to be the town now named San Francisco, near the
+head of the river Salado, which runs into the gulf Parita, on the
+<i>west</i> side of the bay of Panama.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Having well careened our ships by the 14th February, and
+provided a stock of wood and water, we sailed on the 18th, and
+came to anchor in the great channel between the isles and the
+continent, in fifteen fathoms, on soft ooze, and cruised next day
+towards Panama, about which the shore seemed very beautiful,
+interspersed with a variety of hills and many small thickets.
+About a league from the continent there are several small isles,
+partly ornamented with scattered trees, and the <i>King's
+Isles</i> on the opposite side of the channel give a delightful
+prospect, from their various shapes and situations. The 18th we
+went towards Panama, and anchored directly opposite Old Panama,
+once a place of note, but mostly laid in ashes by Sir Henry
+Morgan, and not since rebuilt. New Panama is about four leagues
+from the old town, near the side of a river, being a very
+handsome city, on a spacious bay of the same name, into which
+many long navigable rivers discharge their waters, some of which
+have gold in their sands. The country about Panama affords a
+delightful prospect from the sea, having a great diversity of
+hills, vallies, groves, and plains. The houses are mostly of
+brick, and pretty lofty, some being handsomely built, especially
+that inhabited by the president; the churches, monasteries, and
+other public edifices, making the finest appearance of any place
+I have seen in the Spanish West Indies. It is fortified by a high
+stone wall, mounted by a considerable number of guns, which were
+formerly only on the land side, but have now been added to the
+side next the sea. The city has vast trade, being the staple or
+emporium for all goods to and from Peru and Chili; besides that,
+every three years, when the Spanish <i>armada</i> comes to Porto
+Bello, the <i>Plate fleet</i> comes here with the treasure
+belonging to the king and the merchants, whence it is carried on
+mules by land to Porto Bello, at which time, from the vast
+concourse of people, everything here is enormously dear.</p>
+
+<p>The Spanish armada, which comes every three years to the West
+Indies, arrives first at Carthagena, whence an express is
+dispatched by land to the viceroy at Lima, and two packets are
+also sent by sea, one for Lima, and the other for Mexico, which
+last I suppose goes by way of <i>Vera Cruz</i>. That for Lima
+goes first by land to Panama, and thence by sea to Lima. After
+remaining sixty days at Carthagena, the armada sails to Porto
+Bello, where it only remains thirty days to take in the royal
+treasure brought here from Panama, said to amount to twenty-four
+millions of dollars, besides treasure and goods belonging to the
+merchants. From Porto Bello the armada weighs always on the
+thirtieth day, but the admiral will sometimes stay a week longer
+at the mouth of the river, to oblige the merchants. It then
+returns to Carthagena, where it meets the king's money from that
+part of the country, as also a large Spanish galleon or patache,
+which, on the first arrival of the armada at Carthagena, had been
+dispatched along the coast to collect the royal treasure. The
+armada, after a set stay at Carthagena, sails for the Havannah,
+where a small squadron called the <i>flota</i> meets it from Vera
+Cruz, bringing the riches of Mexico, and the rich goods brought
+by the annual ship from Manilla. When all the ships are joined,
+they sail for Spain through the gulf of Florida.</p>
+
+<p>Porto Bello is a very unhealthy place, on which account the
+merchants of Lima stay there as short time as possible. Panama is
+seated in a much better air, enjoying the sea-breeze every day
+from ten or eleven in the forenoon till eight or nine at night,
+when the land-breeze begins, and blows till next morning.
+Besides, on the land side Panama has an open champaign country,
+and is seldom troubled with fogs; neither is the rainy season,
+which continues from May till November, nearly so excessive as at
+Porto Bello, though severe enough in June, July, and August, in
+which season the merchants of Peru, who are accustomed to a
+constant serene air, without rains or fogs, are obliged to cut
+off their hair, to preserve them from fevers during their
+stay.</p>
+
+<p>The 21st February, near the Perico islands opposite to Panama,
+we took another prize from Lavelia, laden with beeves, hogs,
+fowls, and salt. The 24th we went to the isle of Taboga, six
+leagues south of Panama. This island is three miles long and two
+broad, being very rocky and steep all round, except on the north
+side, where the shore has an easy dope. In the middle of the isle
+the soil is black and rich, where abundance of plantains and
+bananas are produced, and near the sea there are cocoa and
+<i>mammee</i> trees. These are large and straight in their stems,
+without knots, boughs, or branches, and sixty or seventy feet
+high. At the top there are many small branches set close
+together, bearing round fruit about the size of a large quince,
+covered with a grey rind, which is brittle before the fruit is
+ripe, but grows yellow when the fruit comes to maturity, and is
+then easily peeled off. The ripe fruit is also yellow, resembling
+a carrot in its flesh, and both smells and tastes well, having
+two rough flat kernels in the middle, about the size of large
+almonds. The S.W. side of this isle is covered with trees,
+affording abundant fuel, and the N. side has a fine stream of
+good water, which falls from the mountains into the sea. Near
+this there was formerly a pretty town with a handsome church, but
+it has been mostly destroyed by the privateers. There is good
+anchorage opposite this town a mile from the shore, in sixteen to
+eighteen fathoms on soft ooze. At the N.N.W. end is a small town
+called <i>Tabogilla</i>, and on the N.E. of this another small
+town or village without a name.</p>
+
+<p>While at anchor near <i>Tabogilla</i>, we were in great danger
+from a pretended merchant, who brought a bark to us in the night,
+under pretence of being laden with merchandise to trade with us
+privately, but which was in reality a fire-ship fitted out for
+our destruction. But on her approach, some of our men hailed her
+to come to anchor, and even fired upon her, which so terrified
+the men that they got into their canoes, having first set her on
+fire, on which we cut our cables and got out of her way. This
+fire-ship was constructed and managed by one Bond, who formerly
+deserted from us to the Spaniards. While busied next morning in
+recovering our anchors, we discovered a whole fleet of canoes
+full of men, passing between Tabogilla and another isle. These
+proved to be French and English buccaneers, lately come from the
+North Sea across the isthmus of Darien, 200 of them being French
+and 80 English. These last were divides between our two ships,
+under Captains Davis and Swan; and the Frenchmen were put into
+our prize, named the Flower, under the command of Captain Gronet,
+their countryman, in return for which he offered commissions to
+Captains Davis and Swan, from the governor of Petite Goave, as it
+is the custom of the French privateers to carry with them blank
+commissions. Captain Davis accepted one, but Captain Swan had one
+already from the Duke of York.</p>
+
+<p>Learning from these men that Captain Townley was coming across
+the isthmus of Darien with 180 Englishmen, we set sail on the 2d
+March for the gulf of <i>San Miguel</i> to meet Townley. This
+gulf is on the east side of the great Bay of Panama, in lat.
+8&deg; 15' N. long. 79&deg; 10' W. thirty leagues S.E. from
+Panama; from whence the passage lies between Isola del Rey and
+the main. In this gulf many rivers discharge their waters. Its
+southern point is Cape <i>Carachina</i>, in lat. 8&deg; 6' N. and
+the northern, named Cape <i>Gardo</i>, is in lat. 8&deg; 18' N.
+The most noted rivers which discharge themselves into this gulf,
+are named <i>Santa Maria, Sambo</i>, and <i>Congo</i>. This last
+rises far within the country, and after being joined by many
+small streams on both sides of its course, falls into the north
+side of the gulf a league from Cape Gardo. It is deep and
+navigable for several leagues into the country, but not broad,
+and is neglected by the Spaniards owing to its nearness to the
+river of Santa Maria, where they have gold mines. <i>Santa
+Maria</i> is the largest of the rivers in this gulf, being
+navigable for eight or nine leagues, as far as the tide flows,
+above which it divides into several branches fit only for canoes.
+In this river the tide of flood rises eighteen feet. About the
+year 1665, the Spaniards built the town of Santa Maria, near six
+leagues up this river,[173] to be near the gold mines. I have
+been told, that, besides the gold usually procured out of the ore
+and sand, they sometimes find lumps wedged between the fissures
+of rocks as large as hens eggs or larger. One of these was got by
+Mr Harris, who got here 120 pounds weight of gold, and in his
+lump there were several crevices full of earth and dust.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 173: In modern maps the river which seems
+to agree with this description of the Santa Maria, is called
+<i>Tlace</i>, one of the principal branches of which is named
+Chuchunque. The gold mines of Cana and Balsa are placed on some
+of its branches, on which likewise there are several towns, as
+Nisperal, Fichichi, Pungana, Praya, and Balsa.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The Spaniards employ their slaves to dig these mines in the
+dry season; but when the rivers overflow, as the mines cannot be
+then worked, the Indians wash the gold out of the sands that are
+forced down from the mountains, and which gold they sell to the
+Spaniards, who gain as much in that way as they do by their
+mines. During the wet season, the Spaniards retire with their
+slaves to Panama. Near the mouth of the Santa Maria, the
+Spaniards have lately built another town, called
+<i>Scuchadores</i>,[174] in a more airy situation than Santa
+Maria. The land all about the gulf of San Miguel is low and
+fertile, and is covered with great numbers of large trees.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 174: This probably is that named Nisperal
+in modern geography, the appellation in the text being the
+Spanish name, and the other the name given by the
+Indians.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>While crossing the isthmus, Gronet had seen Captain Townley
+and his crew at the town of Santa Maria, busied in making causes
+in which to embark on the South Sea, the town being at that time
+abandoned by the Spaniards; and on the 3d March, when we were
+steering for the gulf of San Miguel, we met Captain Townley and
+his crew in two barks which they had takes, one laden with
+brandy, wine, and sugar, and the other with flour. As he wanted
+room for his men, he distributed the jars among our ships, in
+which the Spaniards transport their brandy, wine, and oil. These
+jars hold seven or eight gallons each. Being now at anchor among
+the King's islands, but our water growing scarce, we sailed for
+Cape Carachina, in hopes of providing ourselves with that
+necessary article, and anchored within that cape, in four fathoms
+on the 22d. We here found the tide to rise nine feet, and the
+flood to set N.N.E. the ebb running S.S.W. The natives brought us
+some refreshments, but as they did not in the least understand
+Spanish, we supposed they had no intercourse with the
+Spaniards.</p>
+
+<p>Finding no water here, we sailed for <i>Porto Pinas</i>, about
+fifty miles to the S. by W. in lat. 7&deg; 33' N. which is so
+named from the vast numbers of pine-trees which grow in its
+neighbourhood. The country here rises by a gentle ascent from the
+sea to a considerable height, and is pretty woody near the shore.
+At the entrance into the harbour there are two small rocks, which
+render the passage narrow, and the harbour within is rather
+small, besides which it is exposed to the S.W. wind. We sent our
+boats into this harbour for water, which they could not procure,
+owing to a heavy sea near the shore; wherefore we again made sail
+for Cape Carachina, where we arrived on the 29th March. On our
+way we took a canoe, in which were four Indians and a Mulatto,
+and as the last was found to have been in the fire-ship sent
+against us, he was hanged.</p>
+
+<p>On the 11th of April we anchored among the King's isles, where
+we met with Captain Harris, who had come with some men by way of
+the river of Santa Maria. The 19th, 250 men were sent in canoes
+to the river <i>Cheapo</i>, to surprise the town of that name.
+The 21st we followed them to the island of <i>Chepillo</i>,
+directly opposite the mouth of the river Chepo, or Cheapo, in the
+bay of Panama, about seven leagues from the city of Panama, and
+one league from the continent. This is a pleasant island, about
+two miles long, and as much in breadth, low on the north side,
+but rising by a gentle ascent to the south. The soil is very
+good, and produces in the low grounds great store of fine fruits,
+as plantains, mammees, sapotas, sapadillos, avogato pears,
+star-apples, and others. Half a mile from shore there is good
+anchorage, opposite to which is a very good spring of fresh-water
+near the sea.</p>
+
+<p>The <i>Sapadillo</i>-tree is altogether like a pear-tree, and
+the fruit resembles a bergamot pear, but somewhat longer. When
+first gathered it is hard and the juice clammy; but after keeping
+a few days it becomes juicy and sweet. It has two or three black
+kernels, resembling pomegranate seeds. The <i>Avogato</i>-tree is
+higher than our pear-trees, having a black smooth bark, and oval
+leaves. The fruit is about the size of a large lemon, green at
+first, but becomes yellow when ripe, having a yellowish pulp as
+soft as butter. After being three or four days gathered, the rind
+comes easily off, and as the fruit is insipid it is commonly
+eaten with sugar and limejuice, being esteemed a great
+provocative by the Spaniards, who have therefore planted them in
+most of their settlements on the Atlantic. It has a stone within
+as large as a horse-plum. The <i>Sapota</i>-tree, or
+<i>Mammee-sapota</i>, is neither so large nor so tall as the wild
+mammae at Taboga, nor is the fruit so large or so round. The rind
+is smooth, and the pulp, which is pleasant and wholesome, is
+quite red, with a rough longish stone. There are also here some
+wild <i>mammee</i>-trees, which grow very tall and straight, and
+are fit for masts, but the fruit is not esteemed. The tree
+producing the <i>star-apples</i> resembles our quince-tree, but
+is much larger, and has abundance of broad oval leaves. The fruit
+is as big as a large apple, and is reckoned very good, but I
+never tasted it.</p>
+
+<p>The river <i>Chepo</i>, or <i>Cheapo</i>, rises in the
+mountains near the north side of the isthmus, being inclosed
+between a northern and southern range, between which it makes its
+way to the S.W. after which it describes nearly a semicircle, and
+runs gently into the sea about seven leagues E. from Panama, in
+lat. 9&deg; 3' N. long. 79&deg; 51' W. Its mouth is very deep,
+and a quarter of a mile broad, but is so obstructed at the
+entrance by sands as only to be navigable by barks. About six
+leagues from the sea stands the city of <i>Cheapo</i>, on the
+<i>left</i> bunk of the river.[175] This place stands in a
+champaign country, affording a very pleasant prospect, as it has
+various hills in the neighbourhood covered with wood, though most
+of the adjacent lands are pasture-grounds to the north of the
+river, but the country south from the river is covered with wood
+for many miles.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 175: In modern maps the town of Chepo is
+placed on the <i>right</i> bank of the river, as descending the
+stream, and only about five miles up the river.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Our men returned from Cheapo on the 24th, having taken that
+town without opposition, but found nothing there worth mention.
+The 25th we were joined by Captain Harris, and arrived at Taboga
+on the 28th, when, finding ourselves nearly a thousand strong, we
+meditated an attack on Panama; but, being informed by our
+prisoners that the Spaniards there had received considerable
+reinforcements from Porto Bello, that design was laid aside. The
+25th May we had intelligence from some prisoners that the Lima
+fleet was daily expected, whereupon we anchored in a narrow
+channel, a mile long and not above seven paces wide, formed by
+two or three small islands on the south side of the island of
+<i>Pacheque</i>. Our fleet now consisted of ten sail, only two of
+which were ships of war, that commanded by Captain Davis having
+36 guns and 156, while Captain Swan's carried 16 guns and 140
+men. The rest were only provided with small arms, and our whole
+force amounted to 960 men. We had also a fire-ship.</p>
+
+<p>Hitherto we had the wind at N.N.E. with fair weather, but on
+the 28th of May the rainy season began. On that day, about 11
+a.m. it began to clear up, and we discovered the Spanish fleet
+three leagues W.N.W. from the island of Pacheque, standing to the
+east, we being then at anchor a league S.E. from that isle,
+between it and the continent. We set sail about three p.m.
+bearing down upon the Spaniards right before the wind, while they
+kept close upon a wind to meet us. Night coming on, we only
+exchanged a few shots at that time. As soon as it began to be
+dark, the Spanish admiral shewed a light at his top, as a signal
+for his fleet to anchor. In half an hour this was taken down; but
+soon after a light appeared as before, which went to leewards,
+which we followed under sail, supposing it to be still the
+admiral; but this was a stratagem of the Spaniards to deceive as,
+being at the top-mast head of one of their barks, and effectually
+succeeded, as we found in the morning they had gained the
+weather-gage of us. They now bore down upon us under full sail,
+so that we were forced to make a running fight all next day,
+almost quite round the bay of Panama, and came at length to
+anchor over against the island of Pacheque. As Captain Townley
+was hard pressed by the Spaniards, he was forced to make a bold
+run through the before-mentioned narrow channel, between Pacheque
+and the three small islands; and Captain Harris was obliged to
+separate from us during the fight. Thus our long-projected design
+vanished into smoke.</p>
+
+<p>According to the report of some prisoners taken afterwards,
+the Spanish fleet consisted of fourteen sail, besides
+<i>periagoes</i>, or large boats of twelve or fourteen oars each,
+and among these there were eight ships of good force, mounting
+from eight to forty-eight guns, with two fire-ships, and computed
+to contain 3000 men. In the morning of the 30th we saw the
+Spanish fleet at anchor, three leagues from us to leeward, and by
+ten a.m. they were under sail with an easy gale from the S.
+making the best of their way to Panama. In this affair we had but
+one man slain, but never knew the loss sustained by the
+Spaniards. Captain Gronet and his Frenchmen never joined us in
+this fight, laying the fault upon his men, wherefore he was
+ordered in a consultation to leave us; after which we resolved to
+sail for the islands of Quibo, or Cobaya, in quest of Captain
+Harris.</p>
+
+<p>We sailed on the 1st June, 1685, with the wind at S.S.W.
+passing between Cape Carachina and <i>Islas del Rey</i>. The 10th
+we came in sight of <i>Moro de Puercos</i>, a high round hill on
+the coast of Lavelia, in lat. 7&deg; 12' N. round which the coast
+makes a turn northwards to the isles of Quibo. On this part of
+the coast there are many rivers and creeks, but not near so large
+as those on the east side of the bay of Panama. Near the sea this
+western coast of the bay is partly hilly and partly low land,
+with many thick woods, but in the interior there are extensive
+savannahs or fruitful plains, well stored with cattle. Some of
+the rivers on this side produce gold, but not in such abundance
+as on the other side; and there are hardly any Spanish
+settlements on this side, except along the rivers leading to
+Lavelia and Nata, which are the only places I know of between
+Panama and <i>Pueblo nova</i>. From Panama there is good
+travelling all over Mexico, through savannahs or plains; but
+towards Peru there is no passage by land beyond the river Chepo,
+by reason of thick woods and many rivers and mountains.</p>
+
+<p>We arrived at the isle of <i>Quibo</i> on the 15th June, where
+we found Captain Harris. This isle is in lat 7&deg; 26' N. and
+long. 82&deg; 13' W. It is near seven leagues long by four broad,
+being all low land, except at its N.E. end, on which side, and
+also to the east, there is excellent water. It abounds in many
+kinds of trees, among which are great numbers of deer and black
+monkeys, the flesh of which is reckoned very wholesome; and it
+has some guanas and snakes. A sand-bank runs out half a mile into
+the sea from the S.E. end of this island, and on its east side, a
+league to the north of this, there is a rock a mile from the
+shore, which is seen above water at last quarter of the ebb. In
+all other places there is safe anchorage a quarter of a mile from
+the shore, in six, eight, ten, and twelve fathoms, on clean sand
+and ooze. The isle of <i>Quicarra</i>, to the south of Quibo, is
+pretty large; and to the north of it is a small isle named
+Ranchina, which produces great plenty of certain trees called
+<i>Palma-Maria</i>. These are straight, tough, and of good
+length, and are consequently fit for masts, the grain of the wood
+having a gradual twist or spiral direction; but, notwithstanding
+the name, they have no resemblance to palms. To the N.E. of Quibo
+are the small islands of <i>Canales</i> and <i>Cantarras</i>, in
+the channels between which there is good anchorage. These islands
+have plenty of wood and water, and appear at a distance as if
+part of the continent; and as the island of Quibo is the most
+considerable, these isles are generally named collectively the
+Quibo islands.</p>
+
+<p>Having failed in our designs at sea, it was agreed to try our
+fortune on land, and the city of Leon, near the coast of
+Nicaragua in Mexico, was pitched upon, as being nearest us. Being
+in want of canoes for landing our men, we cut down trees to make
+as many as we had occasion for, and in the mean time 150 men were
+detached to take <i>Puebla nova</i>, a town on the continent,
+near the Quibo island,[176] in hopes of getting some provisions.
+They easily took that town, but got nothing there except an empty
+bark, and returned to us on the 26th June. Captain Knight came
+back to us on the 5th July, having been farther to the west, but
+meeting with no prize, he had gone south to the bay of Guayaquil,
+where he took two <i>barco-longas</i>, with wine, oil, brandy,
+sugar, soap, and other commodities. Knight learnt from his
+prisoners that certain merchant ships, designed to have
+accompanied the Spanish fleet to Panama, remained behind at
+Payta, which he might easily have taken if he had been provided
+with a stronger force.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 176: The only place in modern geography
+resembling the name, and agreeing with the description in the
+text, is San Pablo on the S. coast of Veragua, in lat. 8&deg; 9'
+N. and long. 83&deg; W. from Greenwich.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Our canoes being all ready, we sailed from Quibo on the 20th
+July towards Realejo, a port a small way to the N.W. of Leon,
+being now 640 men, with eight ships, three tenders, and a
+fire-ship. Coasting along to the N.W. we passed the gulfs of
+Dulce and Nicoya, and the <i>Isla del Cano</i>, the land along
+the coast being low and covered with wood, but almost destitute
+of inhabitants. August 8th, in lat. 11&deg; 20' N. we got sight
+of <i>Volcano viejo</i>, or Old Volcano, the sea-mark for
+Realejo, bearing from us N.E. by N. when we made ready to land
+next day. Accordingly, we sent 520 men on the 9th in thirty-one
+canoes to attack the harbour of Realejo. The weather was fair and
+the wind favourable till two p.m. when a tempest arose, attended
+by thunder and lightning, which almost overwhelmed us in the sea.
+It subsided, however, in half an hoar, as did the agitation of
+the waves; it being observable in these hot climates that the
+waves soon rise and soon fall. It became calm about seven p.m.
+but as we could not get ready to land that night before day,
+being then five leagues from shore, we remained nearly in the
+same place till next evening, that we might not be
+discovered.</p>
+
+<p>About three next morning another tornado had nearly put an end
+to us and our enterprise, but it did not last long, and we
+entered the creek, on the S.E. side of the harbour, leading to
+Realejo in the night, but durst not proceed further till
+day-break. We then rowed deeper into the creek, which is very
+narrow, the land on both sides being very marshy and full of
+mangrove trees, through among which it is impossible to pass, and
+beyond these, where the ground is firm, the Spaniards had cast up
+a small entrenchment. We rowed as fast as we could and landed 470
+men, the remainder, among whom I was, being left to guard the
+canoes.</p>
+
+<p>The city of Leon stands twenty miles up the country in a sandy
+plain, near a peaked burning mountain, called <i>El Rico</i>, or
+the Volcano of Leon, the way to that city from where our people
+landed being through a champaign country covered with long grass.
+Between the landing place and the city were several sugar works,
+and about midway a beautiful river, but fordable. Two miles
+before coming to the city there was an Indian town, whence a
+pleasant sandy road led to the city. The houses in Leon were
+large and built of stone, but low and roofed with tiles, having
+many gardens among them, with a cathedral and three other
+churches. It stands in an extensive sandy plain or savannah,
+which absorbs all the rain, and being entirely free from wood, it
+has free access to the breezes on all sides. These circumstances
+render it a healthy and pleasant place, but not of much commerce,
+all the wealth of its inhabitants consisting in cattle and sugar
+works.</p>
+
+<p>Our people began their march for Leon at eight a.m. the van
+consisting of eighty of the briskest men, being led by Captain
+Townly. He was followed by Captain Swan with 100 men, and Captain
+Davis, assisted by Captain Knight, brought up the rear with 170
+men.[177] Captain Townley, being two miles in advance of the
+rest, and having repulsed a body of seventy horse about four
+miles short of Leon, pushed forwards with his vanguard, and
+entered the city without farther resistance at three p.m. He was
+then opposed by 500 foot and 200 horse, first in a broad street,
+and afterwards in the great market-place; but the horse soon
+galloped off, and were followed by the foot, leaving the city to
+the mercy of our people. Captain Swan reached the city at four
+p.m. Davis about five, and Knight with the remainder at six. The
+Spaniards only killed one of our men, who was very old and had
+loitered behind, refusing to accept quarter, and took another
+named Smith. The governor sent word next day, offering to ransom
+the town; on which our officers demanded 30,000 pieces of eight,
+or Spanish dollars, together with provisions for 1000 men for
+four months, which terms being refused, our people set the city
+on fire on the 14th of August, and rejoined the canoes next
+morning. Smith was exchanged for a gentlewoman, and a gentleman
+who had been made prisoner was released, on promise to deliver
+150 oxen for his ransom at Realejo, the place we intended next to
+attack.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 177: Only 350 men are here accounted for,
+though 470 are said to have marched on this enterprise, leaving a
+difference of 120 men: perhaps these made a separate corps under
+Knight, as he seems to have fallen considerably in the rear of
+Davis.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In the afternoon of the 16th we came to the harbour of Realejo
+in our canoes, our ships having come there to anchor. The creek
+leading to Realejo extends north from the N.W. part of the
+harbour, being nearly two leagues from the island at the mouth of
+the harbour to the town. The first two-thirds of this distance
+the creek is broad, after which it closes into a deep narrow
+channel, lined on both sides by many cocoa-trees. A mile from the
+entrance the creek winds towards the west, and here the Spaniards
+had thrown up an entrenchment, fronting the entrance of the
+creek, and defended by 100 soldiers and twenty guns, having a
+boom of trees thrown across the creek, so that they might easily
+have beaten off 1000 men, but they wanted courage to defend their
+excellent post; for on our firing two guns they all ran away,
+leaving us at liberty to cut the boom. We then landed and marched
+to the town of Realejo, a fine borough about a mile from thence,
+seated in a plain on a small river. It had three churches and an
+hospital, but is seated among fens and marshes, which send forth
+a noisome scent, and render it very unhealthy. The country round
+has many sugar works and cattle pens, and great quantities of
+pitch, tar, and cordage are made by the people. It also abounds
+in melons, pine-apples, guavas, and prickly pears.</p>
+
+<p>The shrub which produces the <i>guava</i> has long small
+boughs, with a white smooth bark, and leaves like our hazel. The
+fruit resembles a pear, with a thin rind, and has many hard
+seeds. It may be safely eaten while green, which is not the case
+with most other fruits in the East or West Indies. Before being
+ripe it is astringent, but is afterwards loosening. When ripe it
+is soft, yellow, and well tasted, and may either be baked like
+pears, or coddled like apples. There are several sorts,
+distinguished by their shape, taste, and colour, some being red
+and others yellow in the pulp. The <i>prickly-pear</i> grows on a
+shrub about five feet high, and is common in many parts of the
+West Indies, thriving best on sandy grounds near the sea. Each
+branch has two or three round fleshy leaves, about the breadth of
+the hand, somewhat like those of the house-leek, edged all round
+with spines or sharp prickles an inch long. At the outer
+extremity of each leaf the fruit is produced, about the size of a
+large plum, small towards the leaf and thicker at the other end,
+where it opens like a medlar. The fruit, which is also covered by
+small prickles, is green at first, but becomes red as it ripens,
+having a red pulp of the consistence of a thick syrup, with small
+black seeds, pleasant and cooling to the taste. I have often
+observed, on eating twenty or more of these at a time, that the
+urine becomes as red as blood, but without producing any evil
+consequence.</p>
+
+<p>We found nothing of value in Realejo, except 500 sacks of
+flour, with some pitch, tar, and cordage. We also received here
+the 150 oxen promised by the gentleman who was released at Leon;
+which, together with sugar, and other cattle we procured in the
+country, were very welcome and useful to us. We remained in
+Realejo from the 17th to the 24th of August, when we re-embarked.
+On the 25th Captains Davis and Swan agreed to separate, the
+former being inclined to return to the coast of Peru, and the
+latter to proceed farther to the north-west; and as I was curious
+to become better acquainted with the north-western parts of
+Mexico, I left Captain Davis and joined Captain Swan. Captain
+Townley joined us with his two barks, but Captains Harris and
+Knight went along with Swan. On the 27th Davis went out of the
+harbour with his ship, but we staid behind for some time, to
+provide ourselves with wood and water. By this time our men began
+to be much afflicted with fevers, which we attributed to the
+remains of a contagious distemper that lately raged at Realejo,
+as the men belonging to Captain Davis were similarly
+infected.</p>
+
+<p>We sailed from Realejo on the 3d September, steering to the
+north-west along the coast, having tornadoes from the N.W.
+accompanied with much thunder and lightning, which obliged us to
+keep out to sea, so that we saw no land till the 14th, when we
+were in lat. 13&deg; 51' N. We then came in sight of the volcano
+of Guatimala. This presents a double peak like two sugar-loaves,
+between which fire and smoke sometimes burst forth, especially
+before bad weather. The city of Guatimala stands near the foot of
+this high mountain, eight leagues from the South Sea, and forty
+or fifty from the gulf of Amatique, at the bottom of the bay of
+Honduras.[178] This city is reputed to be rich, as the country
+around abounds in several commodities peculiar to it, especially
+four noted dyes, indigo, otta or anotto, cochineal, and
+silvestre.[179] Having in vain endeavoured to land on this part
+of the coast, we proceeded to the small isle of <i>Tangola</i>. a
+league from the continent, where we found good anchorage, with
+plenty of wood and water.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 178: This description agrees with the
+situation of St Jago de Guatemala, in lat. 14&deg; 25' N. long.
+31&deg; 18' W., which is about thirty statute miles from the
+South Sea. The modern city of Guatemala, standing nine miles to
+the S.E., is only about sixteen miles from the sea at the head of
+a bay of the same name.--E]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 179: This last is an inferior species of
+cochineal, gathered from the uncultivated opuntia, while the true
+cochineal is carefully attended to in regular plantations. Both
+are the bodies of certain insects gathered by the Indians and
+dried for preservation, constituting the most valuable scarlet
+dye.--E]</blockquote>
+
+<p>A league from thence is the port of <i>Guataico</i>, in lat.
+15&deg; 52' N. long. 36&deg; 20' W. one of the best in Mexico. On
+the east side of the entrance, and about a mile from it, there is
+a small isle near the shore, and on the west side a great hollow
+rock, open at top, through which the waves force a passage with a
+great noise to a great height even in the calmest weather, which
+affords an excellent mark for seamen. This port runs into the
+land about three miles in a N.W. direction, and is about one mile
+broad. The west side affords the securest anchorage, the other
+being exposed to S.W. winds, which are frequent on this coast. We
+landed here to the number of 140 men, of whom I was one, on the
+8th September, and marched about fourteen miles to an Indian
+village, where we found nothing but <i>vanillas</i> drying in the
+sun. The <i>vanilla</i> grows on a small vine, or bindwood shrub,
+which winds about the stems of trees, producing a yellow flower,
+which changes to a pod of four or five inches long, about the the
+size of a tobacco-pipe stem. This is at first green, but becomes
+yellow when ripe, having black seeds. When gathered they are laid
+in the sun, which makes them soft and of a chesnut colour, when
+they are squeezed flat by the Indians. The Spaniards buy this
+commodity at a cheap rate from the Indians, and afterwards
+preserve it in oil.</p>
+
+<p>The 10th we sent four of our canoes to wait for us at the port
+of <i>Angelos</i>, about ten miles W. from Guataico, and on the
+12th we sailed from Guataico. The 23d we landed 100 men at
+Angelos, where they got salt beef, maize, salt, hogs, and poultry
+but could bring little on board, being at a distance from the
+shore. Hearing of a stout ship lately arrived at Acapulco from
+Lima, and as Captain Townley was much in need of a better ship,
+it was agreed to endeavour to cut that ship out of the harbour.
+<i>Acapulco</i> is a town and harbour in lat. 16&deg; 50' N.
+long. 99&deg; 44' W. on the western coast of New Spain, and
+belonging to the city of Mexico, being the only place of commerce
+on this coast, and yet there are only three ships that come to it
+annually. Two of these go every year between this port and
+Manilla in Luconia, one of the Philippines, and the third goes
+once a year to and from Lima in Peru. This last comes to Acapulco
+about Christmas, laden with quicksilver, cacao, and dollars, and
+waits the arrival of the Manilla ships, from which she takes in a
+cargo of spices, calicos, muslins, and other goods of India and
+China, and then returns to Lima. This is only a vessel of
+moderate size; but the two Manilla ships are each of about 1000
+tons burden.</p>
+
+<p>These Manilla ships arrange their voyages in such a way that
+one or the other is always at Manilla. One of them sails from
+Acapulco about the beginning of April; and after sixty days
+passage across the Pacific Ocean, touches at Guam, one of the
+Ladrones, to procure refreshments. She remains here only three
+days, and pursues her voyage for Manilla, where she arrives in
+the mouth of June. The other ship, being ready laden at Manilla
+with India commodities, sets sail soon after for Acapulco. From
+Manilla she steers a course to the latitude of 36&deg; or 40&deg;
+N. before she can fall in with a wind to carry her to America,
+and falls in first with the coast of California, and then is sure
+of a wind to carry her down the coast to Acapulco. After making
+Cape Lucas, the S. point of California, she runs over to Cape
+<i>Corientes</i>, in lat. 20&deg; 26' N. whence she proceeds
+along the coast to <i>Selagua</i>, where the passengers for
+Mexico are landed, and then continues along the coast to
+Acapulco, where she usually arrives about Christmas.</p>
+
+<p>This port of Acapulco is very safe and convenient, and of
+sufficient capacity to contain some hundred ships without danger.
+There is a low island across the entrance, stretching from E. to
+W. about a mile and a half long by a mile in breadth, having a
+deep channel at each end, through either of which ships may enter
+or go out, providing they go in with the sea-breeze, and out with
+the land-wind, which regularly blow at stated times of the day
+and night. The channel at the west end of the isle is narrow, but
+so deep as to have no anchorage, and through this the Manilla
+ship comes in; but the Lima ship takes the other channel. The
+harbour runs eight miles into the land to the north, when it
+closes up and becomes narrow, after which it stretches a mile to
+the west. At the entrance of this channel, and on the N.W. side,
+close to the shore, stands the town of Acapulco, near which is a
+platform or battery with a good number of guns; and on the east
+side of the channel, opposite the town, there is a strong castle,
+having not less than forty pieces of large cannon, and the ships
+usually ride at the bottom of the harbour, under the guns of this
+castle.</p>
+
+<p>Captain Townley went with 140 men in twelve canoes to
+endeavour to cut out the Lima ship; but finding her at anchor
+within 100 yards of both the castle and platform, found it
+impossible to effect his purpose, so that he was obliged to
+return much dissatisfied. We accordingly sailed on the 11th
+November along the coast to the N.W. between Acapulco and
+Petaplan, where we found every where good anchorage two miles
+from shore, but the surf beat with such violence on the coast
+that there was no safe landing. Near the sea the country was low,
+and abounding in trees, especially spreading palm-trees, some of
+which were twenty or thirty feet high in the stem, but of no
+great size. This part of the country was intermixed with many
+small hills, mostly barren, but the vallies seemed fertile. The
+hill of Petaplan, or Petatlan, sends out a round point into the
+sea, called Cape <i>Jequena</i>, in lat. 17&deg; 27' N. which
+appears from sea like an island, and a little farther west there
+is a knot of round hills, having an intervening bay, in which we
+anchored in eleven fathoms. We here landed 170 men, who marched
+fourteen miles into the country, when they reached a wretched
+Indian village, deserted by the inhabitants, so that we only
+found one mulatto-woman and four young children.</p>
+
+<p>Proceeding on the 18th about two leagues farther to the N.W.
+we came to a pretty good harbour named <i>Chequetan</i>, having
+the convenience of a good fresh-wafer river and plenty of wood.
+On the 19th we landed ninety-five men, having the mulatto-woman
+for their guide, at <i>Estapa</i>,[180] a league west from
+Chequetan. The guide now conducted them through a pathless wood
+along a river, and coming to a farm-house in a plain, they found
+a caravan of sixty mules, laden with flour, chocolate, cheese,
+and earthenware, intended for Acapulco, and of which this woman
+had given them intelligence. All this they carried off, except
+the earthenware, and brought aboard in their canoes, together
+with some beeves they killed in the plain. Captain Swan went
+afterwards on shore, and killed other eighteen beeves, without
+any opposition. We found the country woody but fertile, and
+watered by many rivers and rivulets.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 180: Istapha is to the eastward of
+Petatlan, but Chequetan is not delineated in modern maps, neither
+are any rivers noticed for a great way either N.W. or S.E. from
+Petatlan.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Sailing on the 21st to the N.W. the land appeared full of
+rugged hills, with frightful intervening vallies. On the 25th we
+passed a high hill having several peaks, in lat. 18&deg; 8' N.
+near which there is a town named <i>Cupan</i>,[181] but we could
+not find the way to it. The 26th, 200 men were sent to find out
+the way to <i>Colima</i>, said to be a rich place, but after
+rowing twenty leagues along shore they could not find any place
+fit for landing, and saw not the least sign of any inhabitants,
+so that they returned to the ships on the 28th. Soon after we got
+sight of the volcano of Colima, remarkable for its height, six
+leagues from the sea, in lat. 19&deg; 5' N. It shewed two peaks
+or summits, both of which always emit either fire or smoke. The
+valley at the foot of this mountain is said to be fertile and
+delightful, abounding in cacao, corn, and plantains, and is said
+to be ten or twelve leagues wide towards the sea, and to reach
+far into the country. It is watered by a deep river named Colima,
+but which is so obstructed by a sand-bank at its mouth, as not
+even to allow admission to canoes; but there is no landing on
+this part of the coast, owing to the impetuosity of the surf. The
+town of Colima is the chief place of this part of the
+country.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 181: Probably Texupan, in lat. 18&deg; 17'
+N. is here meant.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 29th, 200 men were sent in canoes to attempt to land, and
+if possible to find a road to the town of <i>Selagua</i>, seated,
+as we were told by the Spaniards, at the N.W. end of the vale of
+Colima, but they were unable to land, owing to the violence of
+the waves. We came in sight of the port of <i>Selagua</i> on the
+1st December. This is a bay in lat. 19&deg; 8' N. parted in the
+middle by a rocky point, so that it appears like two havens, in
+either of which there is safe anchorage in ten or twelve fathoms,
+though the western harbour is the best, and has besides the
+advantage of a fresh-water rivulet. We saw a considerable number
+of armed Spaniards on the land, to whom we made a visit next
+morning with 200 men, but they soon fled. In the pursuit our
+people found a broad road, leading through a wooded and rocky
+country, which they followed for four leagues, but found not the
+least appearance of any inhabitants, and therefore turned back.
+On their return they took two straggling mulattoes, who said the
+broad road led to the city of <i>Oarrah</i>,[182] four long days
+journey into the country, and that these men came from that city
+to protect the Manilla ship, which was expected to set her
+passengers ashore at this place. The Spanish maps place a town
+called Selagua hereabouts, but we could not find any appearance
+of it.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 182: Guadalaxara, the latter part of which
+is pronounced <i>achara</i>, is probably here meant. It is 160
+miles inland from the port of Selagua.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>We pursued our voyage on the 6th December towards Cape
+Corientes, in hopes of meeting the Manilla ship. The land on the
+coast was moderately high, sprinkled with many rugged points, and
+full of wood, having several apparently good ports between
+Selagua and Cape Corientes, but we did not touch at any of them.
+Cape Corientes, of which we came in sight on the 11th, in lat.
+20&deg; 28' N. is pretty high, being very steep and rocky towards
+the sea, but flat on the top. I found its longitude from the
+Lizard in England, by our reckoning, 121&deg; 41' W.[183] As the
+Manilla ship is obliged to make this point on her voyage to
+Acapulco, we took up a station here with our four ships in such a
+manner that we judged she could hardly escape us; but as we were
+in want of provisions, fifty or sixty men were sent in a bark
+beyond the cape to endeavour to get some. They returned, however,
+on the 17th, not having been able to double the cape, but left
+forty-six men in four canoes, who intended to attempt to get
+beyond by rowing.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 183: It is only in long. 105&deg; 88' W.
+from Greenwich; that in the text, from computation or dead
+reckoning, being considerably erroneous in
+excess.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 18th December we sailed to the isles of <i>Chametly</i>,
+eighteen leagues to the east of Cape Corientes. These are five
+small low and woody islands, surrounded with rocks, and lying in
+form of a half-moon a mile from the shore, having safe anchorage
+in the intermediate space. These isles are inhabited by fishers,
+who are servants to some of the inhabitants of
+<i>Purification</i>, a considerable town or city fourteen leagues
+up the country.[184] We anchored at these isles on the 20th, and
+here provided ourselves with wood and water, and caught great
+abundance of rock-fish. Next day sixty of our men were sent under
+Captain Townley to surprise an Indian village, seven or eight
+leagues to the N.W.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 184: Villa de la Purificacion is
+considerably to the S.E. of Cape Corientes, but the isles of
+Chametly are omitted in modern maps. Puerto de Navidad, in lat.
+19&deg; 20' N. seems the haven belonging to
+Purificacion.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the 24th the four canoes left by Captain Townley's bark
+returned to the ships. They had got beyond the cape by means of
+rowing to the valley of <i>Valderas</i>, or <i>Val d' Iris</i>,
+the valley of flags, at the bottom of a deep bay, inclosed
+between Cape Corientes on the S.E. and point <i>Pontique</i> on
+the N.W. In this delightful valley they landed thirty-seven men,
+who advanced three miles into the country, and were attacked by
+150 Spaniards, horse and foot. Our men retreated into an
+adjoining wood, whence they kept up a heavy fire on the
+Spaniards, killing their leader and fourteen troopers, besides
+wounding a great many, while four of our men were slain and two
+wounded. Owing to this loss the Spaniards took to flight, and our
+people were enabled to re-embark. This valley is about three
+leagues broad, and is bounded towards the inland country by an
+easy ascent, affording a delightful prospect of extensive
+pastures well stored with cattle, interspersed with pleasant
+groves of guavas, orange-trees, and lime-trees. The sandy bay
+affords a safe landing, and has a fresh-water river, navigable by
+boats, but becomes brackish in the end of the dry season, which
+is in February, March, and April.</p>
+
+<p>We continued cruizing off Cape Corientes till the 1st January,
+1686, when we sailed for the valley of <i>Valderas</i>, proposing
+to provide ourselves with some beef, of which we were in great
+need. At night we anchored in sixty fathoms, a mile from shore.
+On the 7th we landed 240 men, fifty of whom were kept together in
+a body to watch the motions of the Spaniards, while the rest were
+employed in providing cattle. We killed and salted as much beef
+as would serve us for two months, and might have procured a great
+deal more if we had not run out of salt. By this time our hopes
+of meeting the Manilla ship were entirely vanished, as we
+concluded she had got past us to the S.E. while we were employed
+in procuring provisions, which we afterwards learnt had been the
+case, by the information of several prisoners. The loss of this
+rich prize was chiefly owing to Captain Townley, who insisted on
+taking the Lima ship in the harbour of Acapulco, when we ought to
+have provided ourselves with beef and maize, as we might then
+have done, instead of being now forced to procure provisions at
+the critical time of her coming on the coast. We were likewise
+deceived by the hope of falling in with rich towns and mines on
+this coast, not then knowing that all the wealth of this country
+is in the interior. Seeing that we were now entirely disappointed
+in our hopes, we parted company, Captain Townley going back to
+the S.E. while we in Captain Swan's ship went to the west.</p>
+
+<p>The 7th January we passed point Pontique in lat. 20&deg; 38'
+N. ten leagues from Cape Corientes, being the N.W. point of this
+bay of the valley of Valderas. A league beyond this point to the
+W. there are two little isles called the <i>Pontiques</i>, and
+beyond these to the north the shore is rugged for eighteen
+leagues. The 14th we came to anchor in a channel between the
+continent and a small white rocky isle, in lat. 21&deg; 15'. The
+20th we anchored a league short of the isles of <i>Chametly</i>,
+different from those formerly mentioned under the same name,
+being six small isles in lat 28&deg; 11' N. three leagues from
+the continent.[185] One or two of these isles have some sandy
+creeks, and they produce a certain fruit called <i>penguins</i>.
+These are of two sorts, one red and the other yellow. The plant
+producing the latter is as thick in the stem as a man's arm, with
+leaves six inches long and an inch broad, edged with prickles.
+The fruit grows in clusters at the top of the stem, being round
+and as large as an egg, having a thick rind, inclosing a pulp
+full of black seeds, of a delightful taste. The red penguin grows
+directly out of the ground, without any stalk, sometimes sixty or
+seventy in a cluster, no bigger than onions, but the shape of
+nine-pins, the cluster being surrounded with prickly leaves
+eighteen inches or two feet long.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 185: In modern maps these are called the
+isles of <i>Mazatlan</i>, and are placed in lat. 28&deg; 15' N.
+The name given in the text appears taken from a town on this
+coast called Charmela, in lat 22&deg; 50' N. but
+improperly.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Captain Swan went with 100 men in canoes to the north, to find
+out the river <i>Culiacan</i>, supposed to be in lat. 24&deg;
+N.[186] and said to have a fair and rich town of the same name on
+its banks; but after rowing thirty leagues he could not find the
+river, neither was there any safe landing place on the coast.
+Seven leagues N.N.W. from the Chametla or Mazatlan isles, our men
+landed in a small lake or river, having a narrow entrance, called
+<i>Rio de Sal</i> by the Spaniards, in lat. 23&deg; 30' N.[187]
+They here procured some maize at an adjacent farm; and learnt at
+another landing place of an Indian town five leagues distant, to
+which they marched. Coming near the place we were encountered by
+a good number of Spaniards and Indians, who were soon beat off.
+On entering the place we only found two or three wounded Indians,
+who told us the town was named <i>Mazatlan</i>, and that there
+were two rich gold-mines at the distance of five leagues.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 186: The mouth of the river of Cullacan is
+in 24&deg; 45' N. and the town of that name is about eighty-five
+or ninety statute miles up the river, supposed to have been an
+ancient seat of the Mexican nation, before their removal to the
+vale and lake of Mexico.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 187: The Rio Rastla de Panuco, in 23&deg;
+45' N. is certainly here meant.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the 2d February 80 men were landed in the river
+<i>Rosario</i>.[188] We came to a pretty little town of the same
+name, a considerable way up that river, where we were assured by
+some prisoners that the gold-mines were not above two leagues
+from thence; but as we had present occasion for provisions, we
+carried about ninety bushels of maize on board from this place,
+without searching for the mines. As this small supply was
+insufficient for our necessities, we resolved to return to the
+S.E. to the <i>Rio San Jago</i>,[189] where we anchored on the
+11th. This is one of the most considerable rivers on the west
+coast of New Spain. The country having a good appearance, Captain
+Swan sent seventy men to look for a town. After rowing up and
+down for two days, they landed in a corn field, and, while busy
+in gathering maize, they seized an Indian, who told them of a
+town called <i>Santa Pecaque</i>, four leagues farther.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 188: The mouth of this river is in lat.
+28&deg; N. about fifty miles S.E. from Cape Mazatlan, where
+Dampier seems to have been then at anchor among the Mazatlan
+isles.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 189: So called by Dampier from the town of
+St Jago on its banks. Its proper name is the <i>Rio Grande</i>,
+or river of <i>Tololotlan</i>. The mouth of this river forms a
+large bay, in lat 21&deg; 30' N. in which is the considerable
+island of St Blas.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Returning to the ship with this intelligence, Captain Swan
+went with 140 men in eight canoes, and landed five leagues up the
+river, which was there about a pistol shot across with high
+banks. He marched from thence through fertile plains and woods
+for three or four hours, and on approaching St Pecaque the
+Spaniards evacuated the place, so that we entered unopposed. This
+town is situated in a spacious plain on the side of a wood, being
+neatly built, with a market-place in the middle, but not large,
+and has two churches. There are silver-mines five or six leagues
+from this town, the ore from which is carried on mules to
+Compostella to be refined. <i>Compostella</i>, the capital of
+this part of Mexico, is twenty-one leagues from <i>Pecaque</i>,
+being inhabited by seventy families of Spaniards, and by five or
+six hundred mulattoes and Indians. Finding great plenty of maize,
+sugar, salt, and salt fish at this place, Captain Swan divided
+his men into two parts, one of which kept possession of the
+place, while the other half were employed to carry these articles
+to the canoes, which was done turn and turn about, with the
+assistance of some horses. We continued this work for two days;
+but on the 19th Captain Swan learnt from a prisoner that 1000 men
+had marched from St Jago, a rich town three leagues from Pecaque
+on the river, for the purpose of attacking us. On this Captain
+Swan wanted our people to march altogether with what provisions
+we could carry; but they refused to obey him till all the
+provisions should be carried on board, and he was forced to allow
+half of them to go on with fifty-four loaded horses. They had not
+gone a mile from Pecaque when they were attacked by the Spaniards
+from an ambush, and were all slain on the spot. Captain Swan
+marched to their relief, but came too late, finding the whole
+party slain and stripped naked; yet the Spaniards never once
+attempted to engage him, having certainly paid dear for their
+victory.</p>
+
+<p>Returning on board with the rest of his men, and what
+provisions had been carried off, Captain Swan resolved to sail
+for Cape Lucas in California, in hopes of trafficking with the
+Indians there and in the <i>lake</i> or gulf of California. We
+accordingly sailed on the 21st with the wind at N.W. and W.N.W.
+and anchored at the islands of <i>Santa Maria</i>, in eight
+fathoms on clean sand. There are three islands, usually called
+the <i>Three Marias</i>,[190] stretching fourteen leagues from
+S.E. to N.W. of moderate height, stony, barren, and uninhabited,
+in lat 21&deg; 30' N. [long. 106&deg; 15' W.] from which Cape St
+Lucas in California is forty leagues W.N.W. and Cape Corientes
+twenty leagues E.S.E. We anchored off the east end of the middle
+island, which we called Prince George's island. These islands
+produce some cedars, and we found near the sea a green prickly
+plant, with leaves like those of the <i>penguin</i> plant, and
+roots like those of the <i>sempervivum</i>, but much longer, the
+Indians of California subsisting mostly on these roots. We baked
+and eat some of these roots, which tasted like boiled burdock
+roots. I had been long afflicted with dropsy, and was here buried
+in the sand for half an hour, covered up to the neck, which
+brought on a profuse sweat, and I believe with good effect, for I
+began to recover soon after. We careened here; but as there is no
+fresh water to be had at this place in the dry season, we had to
+return to the valley of Valderas, but finding the river brackish
+we sailed three leagues nearer Cape Corientes, and anchored
+beside a small round isle four leagues north of that cape, and
+half a mile from the shore, opposite to a rivulet on the
+continent, where we filled our water casks.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 190: In reality <i>four</i>, the fourth or
+most northwesterly, being named St Juanica.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Being now sufficiently convinced of our mistaken notion of the
+riches of this coast, founded on an erroneous idea that the
+commerce of this country was carried on by sea, whereas it is
+entirely conducted by land on mules, we now resolved to try our
+fortune in the East Indies. With this view we sailed from Cape
+Corientes on the 31st March, and next noon, being thirty leagues
+from the cape, clear of the land-winds, we had the wind at E.N.E.
+in which direction it continued till we were within forty leagues
+of Guam. In all this long passage across the Pacific, nearly in
+the lat. of 13&deg; N. we saw neither fish nor fowl except once,
+when by my reckoning we were 5975 miles west from Cape Corientes
+in Mexico, and then we saw a vast number of <i>boobies</i>,
+supposed to come from some rocks not far off, which are laid down
+in some hydrographical charts, but we saw them not.</p>
+
+<p>May 20th, at four p.m. being in lat. 12&deg; 55' N. and
+steering W. we discovered, to our great joy, the island of Guam,
+eight leagues off, having now only three-days provisions left.
+<i>Guam</i> is one of the Ladrones, in lat. 13&deg; 15' N. and
+long. 216&deg; 50' W. consequently its meridional distance from
+Cape Corientes on the coast of Mexico is 111&deg; 14', or about
+7730 English miles. It is twelve leagues long by four broad,
+extending north and south, and is defended by a small fort
+mounted by six guns, and a garrison of thirty men with a Spanish
+governor, for the convenience of the Manilla ships, which touch
+here for refreshments on their voyage from Acapulco to Manilla.
+The soil is tolerably fertile, producing rice, pine-apples, water
+and musk melons, oranges, limes, cocoa-nuts, and bread-fruit.
+This last grows on a tree as big as our apple-trees, with dark
+green leaves. The fruit is round and as large as a good
+penny-loaf,[191] growing on the boughs like apples. When ripe it
+turns yellow, with a soft and sweet pulp; but the natives pull it
+green, and bake it in an oven till the rind grows black. They
+scrape off the rind, and the inside is soft and white, like the
+crumb of new-baked bread, having neither seed nor stone; but it
+grows harsh if kept twenty-four hours. As this fruit is in season
+for eight months in the year, the natives use no other bread in
+all that time, and they told us there was plenty of it in all the
+other Ladrone islands.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 191: This vague description may now safely
+be changed to the size of a three-penny, or even four-penny
+loaf--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the 31st May we came to anchor near the middle of the west
+side of this isle, a mile from shore, as there is no anchoring on
+its east side on account of the trade-winds, which force the
+waves with great violence against that side. The natives are of a
+copper-colour, strong-limbed, with long black hair, small eyes,
+high noses, thick lips, white teeth, and stern countenances, yet
+were very affable to us. They are very ingenious in building a
+certain kind of boats, called <i>proas</i>, used all over the
+East Indies. These are about twenty-six or twenty-eight feet
+long, and five or six feet high from the keel, which is made of
+the trunk of a tree like a canoe, sharp at both ends. They manage
+these boats with a paddle instead of a rudder, and use a square
+sail, and they sail with incredible swiftness, twenty or even
+twenty-four miles in an hoar. One side of these boats is quite
+flat and upright like a wall from end to end, but the other side
+is rounded and full-bellied like other vessels. Along this side,
+parallel with the boat, at the distance of six or seven feet, a
+log of light wood, a foot and a half wide, and sharp at both
+ends, is fastened by means of two bamboos eight or ten feet long,
+projecting from each end of the main boat, and this log prevents
+the boat from oversetting. The English call this an out-lier, or
+out-rigger, and the Dutch <i>Oytlager</i>. The air of this island
+is accounted exceedingly healthy, except in the wet season
+between June and October. The Indians inhabit small villages on
+the west side of this island near the shore, and have priests
+among them to instruct them in the Christian religion. By means
+of a civil letter from Captain Swan to the Spanish governor,
+accompanied by some presents, we obtained a good supply of hogs,
+cocoa-nuts, rice, biscuits, and other refreshments, together with
+fifty pounds of Manilla tobacco.</p>
+
+<p>Learning from one of the friars that the island of
+<i>Mindanao</i>, inhabited by Mahometans, abounded in provisions,
+we set sail from Guam on the 2d June with a strong E. wind, and
+arrived on the 21st at the Isle of St John, one of the
+<i>Philippines</i>. These are a range of large islands reaching
+from about the latitude of 5&deg; to about 19&deg; N. and from
+long. 120&deg; to 126&deg; 30' E. The principal island of the
+group is <i>Luzon</i>, or Lu&ccedil;onia, in which Magellan was
+slain by a poisoned arrow, and which is now entirely subject to
+the Spaniards. Their capital city of Manilla is in this island,
+being a large town and sea-port, seated at the south-west end,
+opposite to the island of Mindora, and is a place of great
+strength and much trade, especially occasioned by the Acapulco
+ships, which procure here vast quantities of India commodities,
+brought hither by the Chinese and Portuguese, and sometimes also
+by stealth by the English from fort St George or Madras; for the
+Spaniards allow of no regular trade here to the English and
+Dutch, lest they should discover their weakness, and the riches
+of these islands, which abound in gold. To the south of Luzon
+there are twelve or fourteen large islands, besides a great
+number of small isles, all inhabited by, or subject to, the
+Spaniards. But the two most southerly, Mindanao and St John, are
+not subjected by the Spaniards.</p>
+
+<p>The Island of St John, or <i>San Juan</i>, is about the lat.
+of 9&deg; N. on the east side of Mindanao, and about four leagues
+from that island, being about thirty-eight leagues in length from
+N.N.W. to S.S.E. and about twenty-four leagues broad in the
+middle, having a very rich and fertile soil. <i>Mindanao</i>,
+next to Luzon, is the largest of the Philippines, being sixty
+leagues long by forty or fifty leagues broad. Its southern end is
+in lat. 5&deg; 30' N. the N.W. extremity reaching to 9&deg; 40'
+N. The soil is generally fertile, and its stony hills produce
+many kinds of trees, most of which are unknown to Europeans. The
+vallies are supplied with brooks and rivulets, and stored with
+various sorts of ever-green trees, and with rice, water-melons,
+plantains, bananas, guavas, nutmegs, cloves, betel-nuts,
+<i>durians, jacks</i>, or <i>jackas</i>, cocoa-nuts, oranges,
+&amp;c.; but, above all, by a species of tree called <i>libby</i>
+by the natives, which produces sago, and grows in groves several
+miles in length. The poorer people feed on sago instead of bread
+for several months of the year. This tree resembles the
+cabbage-tree, having a strong bark and hard wood, the heart of
+which is full of a white pith, like that of the elder. They cut
+down the tree and split it open, taking out the pith, which they
+stamp or beat well in a mortar, after which, putting it into a
+cloth, and pouring in water, they stir it well, till the water
+carries all the farinaceous substance through the cloth into a
+trough. After the farinaceous matter has settled to the bottom,
+the water is poured off, and the sago is baked into cakes, which
+they use as bread. The sago, which is carried from hence to other
+parts of the East Indies, is dried into small grains, and is used
+with milk of almonds as a remedy against fluxes, being of an
+astringent quality.</p>
+
+<p>The other fruits of this island, being well known or described
+by various authors, need not be here mentioned. The nutmegs here
+are very large and good, but the natives do not care for
+propagating them, being afraid lest the Dutch, who monopolize the
+spice islands, should be induced to pay them a hostile visit.
+This island also produces abundance of animals, both wild and
+tame, as horses, cows, buffaloes, goats, wild hogs, deer,
+monkeys, and others; also guanas, lizards, snakes, scorpions, and
+centipeds. These last are not thicker than a goose-quill, but
+five inches long, and they sting fiercer even than scorpions. Of
+tame fowl, they have only ducks and hens; but have plenty of wild
+birds, as pigeons, parrots, parrakeets, turtle-doves, bats as
+large as our kites, and an infinite number and variety of small
+birds. Their wild hogs feed in the woods in prodigious herds, and
+have thick knobs growing over their eyes. There are mountains in
+the interior of this island, which afford considerable quantities
+of gold. Their chief fish are bonitos, snooks, cavallies, breams,
+and mullets; and they have abundance of sea-tortoises; and the
+island has many harbours, creeks, and rivers.</p>
+
+<p>Considering the situation of this island, so near the Line,
+its climate is by no means excessively hot, especially near the
+sea, where the sea-breeze cools the air by day and the
+land-breeze at night. The wind blows from the east between
+October and May, and then blows from the west till October. The
+west wind produces the wet season, which is heaviest in July and
+August, and, gradually lessening in September, ceases in October,
+when the east wind brings fair weather, which lasts till May. The
+inhabitants of this island, though all resembling each other in
+colour and stature, and all Mahometans, differ considerably in
+language and government. The mountaineers, or <i>Hillanoons</i>,
+who inhabit the interior, and are masters of the gold-mines, are
+also rich in bees-wax, both of which they exchange with the
+<i>Mindanayans</i> on the coast for foreign commodities. The
+<i>Sologus</i> inhabit the N.W. end of the island, and traffic
+with the inhabitants of Manilla and some other adjacent islands,
+but not with the Mindanayans. The <i>Alfoores</i> were formerly
+under the same government with the Mindanayans, but were
+separated from them by falling to the share of the younger
+children of the sultan of Mindanao, who has of late laid claim to
+their allegiance.</p>
+
+<p>The Mindanayans, properly so called, are of low stature, with
+small limbs, little heads, straight bodies, small eyes short
+noses, wide mouths, thin red lips, and sound black teeth, having
+black lank hair, and tawny complexions, but rather brighter than
+other Indians. They are ingenious and nimble, much addicted to
+indolence, obliging to strangers, but implacable when once
+disobliged. They wear turbans on their heads, formed of a cloth
+tied once round, the ends of which hang down, and are ornamented
+with lace or fringe. They also wear breeches, over which they
+have a kind of frocks, but have neither shoes nor stockings. The
+women tie their long black hair in a knot, which hangs down
+behind, being smaller featured than the men, with very small
+feet. Their garments consist of a piece of cloth sewed together
+at both ends, forming a kind of petticoat, with a frock reaching
+a little below the waist. They covet the acquaintance of white
+men, and are very free with them, as far as they have liberty.
+When any strangers arrive at the city of Mindanao, the men come
+aboard and invite them to their houses, where they immediately
+ask if any of them wish to have a <i>pagally</i>, or female
+friend, which they must accept, and return the favour by some
+small present, which is repeated from time to time, in return for
+which they eat, drink, and sleep, in their friend's house.</p>
+
+<p>The capital is named Mindanao, like the island, being on the
+south-west side, two miles from the sea, on the bank of a small
+river, in lat. 7&deg; N. The houses are built on posts, fourteen
+to twenty feet high, consisting only of one floor, but divided in
+many rooms by partitions. The house or palace of the sultan rests
+on 150 great posts, being much higher than any of the others, and
+had great broad stairs leading up to it from the ground. In the
+hall there were twenty pieces of iron cannon upon field
+carriages, and the general and other great men have also some
+cannon in their houses. The floors are generally well covered
+with mats, and they have no chairs, but usually sit cross-legged.
+Their ordinary food is rice, sago, and some small fish; but the
+better people use buffaloe beef, and fowl, with a great deal of
+rice, every one using their fingers, as they have no spoons. The
+inhabitants of the city of Mindanao speak both the Mindanayan and
+Malay languages, and their prayers are in Arabic, in which also
+they retain some Turkish words. Some of the old people of both
+sexes can speak Spanish, as the Spaniards had formerly several
+forts in the island, and had assuredly reduced the whole if they
+had not been afraid of an attack from the Chinese at Manilla, on
+which account they withdrew their troops from Mindanao, when the
+father of the present sultan laid hold of the opportunity to gain
+possession of their forts, and to expel them from the island. At
+present they are most in fear of the Dutch, for which reason they
+have often invited the English to make a settlement among them,
+believing them not so ready to encroach as either of the other
+nations.</p>
+
+<p>The chief trades in this city are goldsmiths, blacksmiths,
+carpenters, and shipwrights, for they build good ships both for
+war and trade. Their chief commodities for export are gold,
+bees-wax, and tobacco; the two first being purchased from the
+mountaineers, and the last grows in all parts of the island in
+great plenty. They exchange these commodities for calicoes,
+muslins, and China silks. The Mindanao tobacco is reckoned as
+good as that of Manilla, and yet ten or twelve pounds of it may
+be bought for a rial, or the eighth part of a dollar. The natives
+are generally afflicted with a dry itchy scurf all over their
+bodies, and by scratching, the skin peels off in small white
+flakes, like the scales of small fish, leaving broad white spots
+all over their bodies; but they did not seem to make any great
+account of this disease, which is not infectious. They are also
+troubled with small-pox; but their most common diseases are
+fevers, agues, fluxes, and violent griping pains in their bowels.
+They have many wives, but I could not learn their marriage
+ceremonies.</p>
+
+<p>They are governed by a sultan, who has no great revenue, yet
+is so absolute that he even commands the private purse of every
+one at his pleasure. The reigning sultan was between fifty and
+sixty years old, and had twenty-nine concubines besides his wife
+or sultana. When he goes abroad he is carried in a couch on the
+shoulders of four men, and is attended by a guard of eight or ten
+men. His brother, named Rajah Laut, a shrewd person of good
+conversation, is both chief minister and general, and both speaks
+and writes Spanish very readily. In war they use swords and
+lances, and every one, from the highest to the lowest, constantly
+wears a <i>criss</i> or dagger, much like a bayonet. They never
+fight any pitched battles, but construct small wooden forts
+defended by guns, whence the adverse parties endeavour to
+surprise each other in small parties, and never give or take
+quarter.</p>
+
+<p>We came first to anchor on the N.E. side of the island, but
+learning from the natives that the city of Mindanao was on the W.
+side, we again set sail and anchored on the 4th July on the S.W.
+side of a very deep bay in fifteen fathoms, the land within the
+bay on the E. side being very high and woody, but watered by
+several rivers. On its W. side, bordering on the sea, there were
+large plains covered with long grass, on which were vast herds of
+deer, of which we killed as many as we thought fit. We remained
+here till the 12th, when we again set sail, and arrived on the
+18th at the entrance of the river of Mindanao, in lat. 7&deg; N.
+and long. 124&deg; 35' E. from Greenwich.[192] We here anchored
+in fifteen fathoms on clean hard sand, two miles from the shore.
+Soon afterwards Rajah Laut came on board, accompanied by one of
+the sultan's sons, and asked in Spanish, Who we were? Being told
+we were English, he asked if we came to settle among them, of
+which they had formerly some promise, and were now in hopes of
+its being effected, to serve to protect them against the Dutch,
+whom they greatly dreaded. Had we properly considered the matter,
+it might have been much for our advantage, Mindanao being
+conveniently situated between the Spice islands and the
+Philippines, and besides the three islands of
+<i>Meangis</i>,[193] only about twenty leagues from hence, abound
+with spice and cloves. We were also well filled for such a
+settlement, having among our company all manner of artificers, as
+carpenters, bricklayers, shoemakers, tailors, and the like, as
+also abundance of tools, arms, cannon, and sufficient ammunition
+to begin with; and, notwithstanding the great distance from
+England, we might easily have had supplies from thence, providing
+ships set out the latter end of August, proceeding round Cape
+Horn, and so directly across the Pacific for Mindanao, or else
+coasting along the western shore of America as far as was
+necessary, and then stretching across to have the advantage of
+the trade-wind. By this way the voyage might be accomplished in
+six or seven months, which would at least require eight or nine
+by the Cape of Good Hope.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 192: In Harris, this longitude is made
+23&deg; 12' W. from the Lizard by some strange error, being
+235&deg; 25' W. from Greenwich.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 193: It does not appear what islands these
+were, unless perhaps the Silibabo islands, about half way between
+Mindanao and the northern end of Gilolo, but considerably farther
+distant than is stated in the text.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Rajah Laut invited Captain Swan ashore, and promised to
+furnish what provisions we wanted, and desired him in the mean
+time to secure our ship within the river, for fear of the
+approaching westerly monsoon, which Captain Swan agreed to after
+some deliberation. The river being narrow, and having not above
+eleven feet water on the bar in spring-tides, we had much ado to
+get our ship a quarter of a mile above its mouth, where we moored
+head and stern in a hole, so that she lay always afloat. The city
+of Mindanao is a mile in length, but not very broad, stretching
+along the right bank of the river as you go up, though there are
+some houses also on the opposite side. The inhabitants frequently
+came aboard of our ship, and invited our men to their houses,
+where they were kindly entertained after their manner with
+tobacco and betel, and such of them as had money, or other
+articles of value, did not want their <i>pagalies</i>, or female
+friends. Captain Swan was entertained daily by Rajah Laut, and
+those of our men who had no money had boiled rice, with scraps of
+fowl and buffalo beef given them. Yet, after all these outward
+shews of friendship, we soon after began to discover that Rajah
+Laut had sinister intentions. The sheathing on our ship's bottom
+being much eaten by worms, we began in November to remove the old
+sheathing, to see whether the main plank remained sound; on
+seeing which, Rajah Laut shook his head, saying he had never seen
+a ship with two bottoms. Besides, he did not perform his promise
+of providing us with beef, pretending he could not get any; and
+he borrowed a considerable sum in gold from Captain Swan, which
+he never repaid.</p>
+
+<p>These circumstances at length induced most of our men to think
+of leaving Mindanao, especially those who had not much money; and
+as our ship was new sheathed and tallowed on the 10th December,
+they began to urge our commander to depart in continuation of our
+voyage. Accordingly, Captain Swan appointed the 13th January,
+1687, for all our company to be on board and ready to sail; but
+many being unwilling to depart so soon, having dispersed about
+the country at the instigation of Rajah Laut, and even Captain
+Swan not being very ready to come aboard, by reason of some
+insubordination among the men, they deposed him from the command,
+and chose Captain Teat in his room. After this we weighed in the
+morning of the 13th January, and sailed out of the river, having
+Captain Swan and forty-four more of the men on shore, besides
+sixteen others we had buried there.</p>
+
+<p>We coasted along the south side of the island to the west, and
+passed next day in sight of <i>Chambungo</i>,[194] another town
+in this island, thirty leagues west from the river of Mindanao,
+and said to have a good harbour. On the 10th February we coasted
+along the west side of the Philippine islands, and while passing
+Panga,[195] a large island inhabited by the Spaniards, we saw
+many fires, which we supposed were intended to give notice of our
+approach, it being rare to see a ship on this coast. The 18th we
+anchored in ten fathoms at the N.W. end of the island of
+<i>Mindora</i>. This is a large island, the middle of which is in
+lat 12&deg; 45' N. its length from N.W. to S.E. being forty
+leagues. While here, a canoe with four Indians came from Manilla,
+who told as that the harbour of Manilla was seldom without twenty
+or thirty vessels, Chinese, Portuguese, and Spaniards, and if we
+had a mind to trade clandestinely, they would deliver letters
+from us to certain merchants there.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 194: Probably Sambuang, at the western
+extremity of Mindanao, in lat. 6&deg; 52' N. long. 122&deg; 20'
+E. from Greenwich.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 195: Pany, or Panai.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>We sailed again on the 21st, and came on the 23d to the S.E.
+end of Lu&ccedil;onia, where we took two Spanish barks from
+<i>Pagassanam</i>,[196] a small town on the N.E. part of this
+island, having goods on board for the Acapulco ship. This great
+island of Lu&ccedil;onia extends in length through six degrees of
+latitude, from 12&deg; 30' to 18&deg; 40' both N. and is
+surrounded by many small isles, especially at its north end,
+Mindora being the chief of these isles, which communicates its
+name to the straits which run between it and the main island of
+Lu&ccedil;onia. The surface of this large island is partly
+composed of large pasture plains, and partly of mountains, the
+latter of which afford some gold; and the plains, or savannahs,
+are stored with buffaloes, bullocks, horses, sheep, goats, and
+hogs. The inhabitants are Indians, who live in little towns,
+under the Spanish jurisdiction, and are instructed in the Romish
+religion by Spanish priests.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 196: Perhaps the gulf on Pangasian is here
+meant, on the E. side of Luzon, in lat. 16&deg; N.]</blockquote>
+
+<p><i>Manilla</i> is the chief city, or rather the only one, in
+the island, seated at the foot of a ridge of high hills, fronting
+the harbour, near the S.W. point of the island, in lat. 14&deg;
+38' N: This city is defended by a strong wall, and is composed of
+well-built spacious houses, covered with pan-tiles, the streets
+being broad and regular, with a large market-place in the middle,
+and has many fair churches and convents. The harbour is large;
+and, besides the two great Acapulco ships, contains abundance of
+small vessels belonging to the place, besides usually thirty or
+forty stout Chinese junks; and the Portuguese also have liberty
+to trade to this place. Many Chinese merchants also reside
+constantly in this city. A league from the city, nearer the sea,
+there is a strong fortress to defend the harbour, where the great
+ships lie at anchor. Most of this account I received from Mr
+Coppinger, our surgeon, who had formerly been thither, sailing
+from the Coromandel coast.</p>
+
+<p>The time of the year being now too far spent for our purpose,
+we resolved to sail for Pulo Condore, a knot of small islands on
+the coast of Cambodia, and to return in May to lie in wait for
+the Acapulco ship. We accordingly made sail from the island of
+Lu&ccedil;onia on the 26th of February; and coming into the lat.
+of 14&deg; N. we steered our course W. for Pulo Condore,[197] and
+in our way got sight of the south end of the <i>Pracel</i>
+shoals, being three small isles, or large spots of sand, just
+above water, only a mile from us. We came in sight of Pulo
+Condore on the 13th March, and anchored next day on the north
+side of that island, in ten fathoms, on clean hard sand, two
+miles from the shore.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 197: This course ought rather to have been
+called W.S.W. as Pulo Condore is lat. 8&deg; 40' N.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Pulo Condore is the chief of a group of isles, and the only
+one of them that is inhabited, in lat. 8&deg; 44' N. long.
+106&deg; 5' E. forty leagues S. by E. from the mouth of the river
+of Cambodia, otherwise called the <i>Japanese</i> river. Two of
+these isles are tolerably high and large, and the rest very
+small. The principal isle, off which we anchored, is five leagues
+long from E. to W. and three leagues broad, but in some places
+not a mile. The other large isle is three miles long from N. to
+S. and between these, at the west end of the largest, there is a
+convenient harbour, the entrance being on the north, where the
+two isles are a mile asunder. On the largest isle there grows a
+tall tree, three or four feet diameter, which the inhabitants cut
+horizontally half through, a foot from the ground, after which
+they cut out the upper part in a slope, till it meets the
+transverse cut, whence a liquor distils into a hollow made in the
+semicircular shelf, or stump, which, after being boiled, becomes
+good tar, and if boiled still more, becomes perfect pitch, both
+of these answering well for marine use. Such a tree produces two
+quarts of this juice daily for a month, after which it dries up,
+but recovers again.</p>
+
+<p>There are mango trees in this island, the fruit of which the
+inhabitants pickle with salt, vinegar, and a little garlic, while
+green. On straight trees of a foot diameter, grapes, both red and
+white, and of a pleasant taste, much like those of Europe, grow
+in clusters about the body of the tree, like the cocoas. This
+isle also abounds in wild nutmeg-trees, which resemble our
+walnut-trees, and the fruit grows among the boughs, in the same
+manner as walnuts. This fruit resembles the true nutmeg, but
+smaller, and has neither smell nor taste. Besides hogs, guanas,
+and lizards, these islands have various birds, as parrots,
+parakeets, turtle-doves, and wild poultry. The sea affords
+limpits, muscles, and tortoises. These isles have many brooks of
+fresh water running into the sea for ten months of the year; and
+they are very conveniently situated for trade with Japan, China,
+Manilla, Tonquin, Cochin-china, and other places.</p>
+
+<p>The inhabitants are originally from Cochin-china, being of a
+middle stature and well shaped, but of much darker colour than
+the natives of Mindanao, having lank black hair, small black
+eyes, and small noses, yet tolerably high, with small mouths,
+thin lips, and white teeth. They are civil, but very poor, their
+only employment being to collect tar, and to prepare a little oil
+from tortoises, both of which they export to Cochin-china. They
+offer their women to strangers for a small matter; a custom
+universal in Pegu, Siam, Cochin-China, Cambadia, Tonquin, and
+India, as also on the coast of Guinea. They are pagans,
+worshipping chiefly the elephant and the horse, besides images of
+birds and fishes, but I saw none resembling the human shape.</p>
+
+<p>Having careened our ship, and laid in a supply of fresh water,
+we sailed from Pulo Condore on the 21st of April, steering W. by
+S. for the bay of Siam, and on the 23d came to the isle of
+<i>Ubi</i>, off the S.W. cape of Cambadia, forty leagues W. of
+Condore. This isle is seven or eight leagues in circuit, and is
+higher land than any of the Condore isles. It has good water on
+the north side, where there is also good anchorage, but the best
+anchorage is on the W. side, opposite a small bay. On the 24th we
+entered the bay of Siam, which is very deep, and went among the
+islands at the bottom of the bay, in one of which we found a
+small village inhabited by fishermen, but no fish, so we turned
+back, and did not return to the isle of <i>Ubi</i> till the 13th,
+and were detained there by storms till the 21st, when we sailed
+for Condore, where we anchored on the 24th. Here five or six of
+our men, going on board a Malay vessel, were stabbed by the crew.
+Having provided our ship with wood and water, we sailed from
+Condore on the 4th June, intending to proceed for Manilla; but,
+by contrary winds, were forced to steer for <i>Pratas</i>, a
+small low island inclosed with rocks, in lat. 21&deg; N. between
+Canton and Manilla; and the east winds continuing, were obliged
+to approach the coast of China, where we anchored on the 25th
+June, at the east end of the island of St John, on the coast of
+Quan-tong, or Canton, in China, in lat. 22&deg; 30' N.[198] They
+have here great plenty of rice, with hogs, buffaloes, goats, and
+some oxen. The inhabitants were Chinese, and were consequently,
+at this time, under the dominion of the Tartars.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 198: This Island of St John is probably
+that named Sancianor, or Tchang-te-huen, in lat. 21&deg; 33' N.
+long. 112&deg; 25' E. to the S.W. of the bay of Canton. The
+latitude in the text would lead deep among the islands of that
+bay, which does not appear to have been the
+case.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In this island we found a small town in marshy ground, the
+houses of which were small, mean, and ill-furnished, but built on
+posts, the inhabitants principally subsisting by the cultivation
+of rice. While we lay here at anchor, a Chinese junk rode beside
+us, which was flat both at the head and stern, having many little
+huts, three feet high, on her deck, thatched with palmito leaves.
+Her cabin was large, having an altar, on which was a lamp
+continually burning. The hold was divided into several
+compartments, the bulkheads between which were so tight, that if
+a leak should spring in any of these divisions, the goods in the
+others would receive no damage. Every merchant has his own room,
+or division, in the hold, in which he stows his own goods,
+sometimes lodging along with them. These junks have only two
+masts, a main and fore, the latter having a square-sail and yard,
+and the former a sail that is narrow aloft, like a sloop's
+main-sail. In fine weather they have also a top-sail, which, in
+foul weather, they lower to the deck, yard and all. The main-mast
+of one of their largest junks is equal in size to that of our
+third-rate men of war, but all of one piece, not built.</p>
+
+<p>Fearing the approach of a storm, and wanting sea-room, we
+weighed on the 3d June, and stood out to sea; but next day we
+were assailed by the most violent tempest at N.E. I ever saw,
+which lasted at intervals for three days, when the weather became
+quite serene. We then refitted our ship, but our men were so
+terrified by the last storm, and dreading the approach of full
+moon, that we resolved to steer for the <i>Pescadores</i>, or
+<i>Fisher Isles</i>, in lat. 23&deg; 40' N. off the western side
+of <i>Tai-ouan</i>, or Formosa. This is a numerous group of
+islands in the Straits of Formosa, having a good harbour between
+the two eastermost; and on the west side of the most easterly
+there is a large town with a fort, in which was a garrison of 300
+Tartars. The houses in this town were low, yet neatly built; and
+on the other island, on the west side of the harbour, there was
+another small town near the sea, inhabited by Chinese. Most of
+the islands in this group have some Chinese inhabitants. We were
+very civilly treated by the Tartar governor, who sent us some
+presents, and among the rest a heifer, the beef of which was
+excellent; but would not allow us to trade, or even to land on
+the isle.</p>
+
+<p>We sailed thence on the 29th July, passing the S.W. end of
+Formosa, a large island reaching from lat. 22&deg; to 25&deg; 18'
+both N. and in long. 121&deg; E. It was formerly well inhabited
+by the Chinese, and frequented by the English; but the Tartars
+have since spoiled the harbour, lest the Chinese should fortify
+themselves there. On the 6th August we came to anchor on the east
+side of the northermost of the <i>Five Islands</i>, or
+<i>Bashees</i>, in fifteen fathoms. These islands are from the
+latitude of 20&deg; 26' to 21&deg; 13' both N. and long. 121&deg;
+50' E. Contrary to our expectations, we found three or four large
+towns on the island at which we anchored. The westmost of these
+islands, which the Dutch among us named <i>Orange</i> isle, is
+the largest, being seven or eight leagues from N. to S. and two
+from E. to W. There are two other large islands to the S. of
+this; the northern of which we named <i>Grafton</i> isle, which
+is four leagues from N. to S. and a league and a half from E. to
+W. The other, and most southerly, we named <i>Monmouth</i> isle,
+being three leagues from N. to S. and one from E. to W. Two other
+isles, lying E. and W. between Monmouth isle and the S. end of
+Orange isle, we called <i>Bashee</i> isle, from a certain liquor
+we drank there, and <i>Goat</i> isle.</p>
+
+<p><i>Orange</i> isle is the largest, but barren, rocky, and
+uninhabited, and has no anchorage on its coasts. <i>Monmouth</i>
+and <i>Grafton</i> isles are both hilly, but well inhabited.
+<i>Goat</i> isle and <i>Bashee</i> isle are flat, the former
+having a town. The hills in all these isles are rocky; but the
+intermediate vallies are fertile in grass, plantains, bananas,
+pine-apples, pompions, sugar-canes, potatoes, and some cotton,
+and are well supplied with brooks of fresh water. They are also
+well stored with goats and hogs, but have hardly any fowls,
+either wild or tame. The natives are short and thick, with round
+faces and thick eye-brows, with hazel-coloured eyes, rather
+small, yet larger than those of the Chinese. Their noses are
+short and low; their mouths and lips middle-sized, with white
+teeth; and their hair is thick, black, and lank, which they cut
+short. Their complexion is of a dark copper colour, and they go
+all bare-headed, having for the most part no clothes, except a
+clout about the middle, though some have jackets of plantain
+leaves, as rough as a bear-skin. The women have a short petticoat
+of coarse calico, reaching a little below the knees, and both
+sexes wear ear-rings of a yellow metal dug from their mountains,
+having the weight and colour of gold, but somewhat paler. Whether
+it be in reality gold or not, I cannot say, but it looked of a
+fine colour at first, which afterwards faded, which made us
+suspect it, and we therefore bought very little. We observed that
+the natives smeared it with a red earth, and then made it red-hot
+in a quick fire, which restored its former colour.</p>
+
+<p>The houses of the natives are small, and hardly five feet
+high, collected into villages on the sides of rocky hills, and
+built in three or four rows, one above the other. These rocky
+precipices are framed by nature into different ledges, or deep
+steps of stairs as it were, on each of which they build a row of
+houses, ascending from one row to another by means of ladders in
+the middle of each row, and when these are removed they are
+inaccessible. They live mostly by fishing, and are very expert in
+building boats, much like our Deal yawls. They have also larger
+vessels, rowed by twelve or fourteen oars, two men to each bank.
+They never kill any goats themselves, but feed on the guts and
+skins, which last they broil after singing off the hair.[199]
+They also make a dish of locusts, which come at certain seasons
+to devour their potatoes; on which occasions they catch these
+insects in nets, and broil or bake them in earthen pans, when
+they are tolerable eating. Their ordinary drink is water; but
+they make also a kind of liquor of the juice of sugar-canes,
+boiled up with black-berries, allowed afterwards to ferment four
+or five days in jars. It then settles and becomes clear, when it
+affords a strong and pleasant liquor, which they call
+<i>bashee</i>, resembling our English beer both in taste and
+colour. I can give no account of their language, as it has no
+affinity either to Chinese or Malay. Their weapons are lances
+headed with iron, and they wear a kind of armour of buffalo-hide
+without sleeves, reaching below their knees, where it is three
+feet wide, and as stiff as a board, but close at the
+shoulders.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 199: This is rather inexplicable, as we
+cannot conceive how they got the guts and skins without killing
+the goats.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>I could not perceive that they had any worship, neither saw I
+any idols among them. They seemed to have no government or
+precedency, except that the children were very respectful to
+their parents. They seem, however, to be regulated by some
+ancient customs, instead of laws, as we saw a young lad buried
+alive, which we supposed was for being guilty of theft. The men
+have each only one wife, and she and her children were very
+obedient to the head of the family. The boys are brought up to
+fishing along with their fathers; and the girls work along with
+their mothers in the plantations in the vallies, where each
+family plants a piece of ground proportional to their numbers.
+They are a civil quiet people, not only among themselves, but in
+their intercourse with strangers; for all the time we were here,
+though they came frequently aboard, exchanging their yellow
+metal, goats, and fruits, for iron, we never saw them differ
+either among themselves or with our men, though occasions of the
+latter were not wanting. They have no coins, neither any weights
+or scales, but give their pieces of yellow metal by guess. During
+our stay here, we provided ourselves with seventy or eighty fat
+hogs, and great plenty of potatoes, for our intended voyage to
+Manilla.</p>
+
+<p>On the 25th September, we were forced out to sea by a violent
+storm, which lasted till the 29th, when we made the best of our
+way back to the Bashees, which we reached on the 1st October.
+This last storm so disheartened our men, that they resolved to
+give up the design of cruising before Manilla; and, by the
+persuasions of Captain Read, who now commanded, and Captain Teat,
+our master, it was determined to sail for Cape Comorin, and
+thence into the Red Sea. As the eastern monsoon was at hand, our
+nearest and best way had been to pass through the Straits of
+Malacca; but Teat persuaded the men to go round by the east side
+of the Philippines, and thence, keeping south of the Spice
+islands, to pass into the Indian ocean by the south of Timor.</p>
+
+<p>We sailed from the Bashees on the 3d October, by the east of
+the Philippines, and on the 15th, being to the south of
+Lu&ccedil;onia, directed our course west for Mindanao. On the
+16th we anchored between two small isles, in lat. 5&deg; 10' N.
+four leagues from the island of Mindanao. While here, we learnt
+from a young prince of one of the isles, that Captain Swan and
+some of his men were still at Mindanao, and in great esteem for
+their services against the Alfoores: but I was since informed,
+that he and his surgeon, when going on board a Dutch ship in the
+road, were overset by the natives and drowned, by order of rajah
+Laut, as we supposed, who had seized all his gold.</p>
+
+<p>We sailed on the 2d November for Celebes, and anchored at its
+N.E. end on the 9th. The 30th, while steering between two shoals,
+in lat. 3&deg; S. ten leagues from Celebes, we saw three
+waterspouts towards evening. A waterspout is a piece of a cloud
+hanging down in a sloping direction, sometimes bending like a
+bow, but never perpendicular. Opposite to its extremity the sea
+begins to foam, and the water is then seen gently moving round in
+a circle, increasing to a rapid whirling motion, rising upwards,
+an hundred paces in circumference at the bottom, but lessening
+gradually upwards to the size of a spout, through which the
+sea-water appears to be conveyed into the cloud, as is manifest
+by its blackness and increase of bulk. After this the cloud,
+which was before immoveable, drives along for half an hour,
+accompanied by the spout. When the sucking is over, and breaks
+off, all the water which was below the spout, or pendulous cloud,
+falls again into the sea with a terrible clashing noise. These
+spouts are, however, more frightful than dangerous.</p>
+
+<p>We had sight of the Isle of Bouton on the 1st December, and
+anchored there on the 5th, where we staid till the 11th,
+procuring eggs, fowls, potatoes, and other provisions from the
+natives, who are Mahometans, and speak the Malay language.
+Continuing our voyage, we saw the N.W. point of Timor on the
+28th, and on the 29th stood S. towards New Holland, which we fell
+in with on the 4th January, 1688, in lat. 16&deg; 50' S. <i>New
+Holland</i> is a vast tract of land, but whether island or
+continent is hitherto unknown.[200] We anchored at a point of
+land, three leagues to the east of which is a deep bay. The land
+was low and sandy, the points only excepted, which were rocky, as
+were some islands in the bay. We found here no fresh water,
+except by digging. There were various trees, and among these the
+tree producing dragon's-blood. We saw no fruit-trees, nor so much
+as the track of any animal, except one footstep of a beast, which
+seemed the size of a large mastiff. There were a few land-birds,
+but none bigger than a black-bird, and scarcely any sea-fowl;
+neither did the sea afford any fish, except tortoises and
+manatees,[201] both of which are in vast plenty.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 200: It is now known to be a vast island,
+stretching from the lat. of 11&deg; 40' to 38&deg; 40', both S.
+and from long. 109&deg; 40' to 154&deg; 50' both E. being 1870
+miles from N. to S. and 2400 miles from E. to W.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 201: The Lamentin, or Trichechus Manatus
+australis of naturalists.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The inhabitants are the most miserable wretches in the
+universe, having no houses or coverings but the heavens, and no
+garments except a piece of the bark of a tree tied round the
+waist. They have no sheep, poultry, or fruits, and subsist
+wretchedly on a few shell-fish, such as cockles, muscles, and
+periwinkles, living without any government or order, and cohabit
+promiscuously like brutes. Their bodies are straight, thin, and
+strong-limbed, having great heads and eye-brows, with round
+foreheads. Their eye-lids are constantly half closed, to keep out
+flies, which are here very numerous and troublesome. They have
+large bottle noses, thick lips, and wide mouth; and both men and
+women, young and old, wanted the two front teeth of the upper
+jaw. They have no beards, and their hair is short and curled like
+the negroes, their complexion being equally black with them.
+Their weapons are a kind of wooden swords or clubs, and long
+straight poles sharpened at one end. Of their language I can only
+say that they speak much in the throat. We landed several times,
+and brought the natives to some degree of familiarity with us, by
+giving them some old clothes, but could never prevail on them to
+assist us in carrying water or any other thing, as they seemed
+quite averse from labour.</p>
+
+<p>We sailed hence on the 12th March, and on the 7th April got
+sight of Sumatra, whence we directed our course for the Nicobar
+islands, which we came in sight of on the 4th May, and anchored
+next day in a small bay at the N. end of the island of Nicobar
+Proper, in lat. 7&deg; 30' N. This island produces plenty of
+cocoa-nuts, and <i>mallories</i>, a fruit as large as the
+bread-fruit of Guam, which the natives boil in covered jars.</p>
+
+<p>Mr Hall, Mr Ambrose, and I, being desirous to leave the unruly
+crew among whom we had sailed so long, were set ashore at this
+island, intending to proceed for Acheen. We accordingly left this
+island on the 5th May, accompanied by four Malays and a
+Portuguese, in a Nicobar canoe, not much bigger than one of the
+London wherries used below bridge. On the 18th we had a violent
+storm, when we expected every moment to be swallowed up by the
+waves; but on the 19th, to our great joy, we saw <i>Pulo Way</i>,
+near the N.W. end of Sumatra, as was supposed, but it turned out
+to be the golden mountain of Sumatra, and at length arrived at
+Acheen in June. In July I went with Captain Weldon to Tonquin,
+and returned to Acheen in April, 1689. In September of that year
+I went to Malacca, and came back about Christmas, 1690. Soon
+after I went to Fort St George or Madras, where I remained five
+months, and came back to Bencoolen, an English factory on the
+west coast of Sumatra.</p>
+
+<p>Before relating my return to England, it may be proper to give
+some account of <i>Jeoly</i>, the painted prince, who afterwards
+died at Oxford. He was purchased along with his mother at
+Mindanao by Mr Moody; and when Mr Moody and I went together to
+Bencoolen, he gave me at parting half the property of this
+painted prince and his mother, leaving them to my care. They were
+born in the island of <i>Meangis</i>, which abounds in gold,
+cloves, and nutmegs, as he afterwards told me. He was curiously
+painted, down the breast, behind, between the shoulders, and most
+of all on the fore part of his thighs, in the nature of
+flower-work. By what I could understand, this painting was done
+by pricking the skin, and rubbing in the gum of a tree called
+<i>damurer</i>, used instead of pitch in some parts of India. He
+told me, that the natives of his country wore gold ear-rings, and
+golden bracelets about their arms and legs; their food being
+potatoes, fowls, and fish. He told me also, that being one day in
+a canoe with his father and mother, they were taken by some
+fishers belonging to Mindanao, who sold them to the interpreter
+of Rajah Laut, with whom he and his mother lived as slaves for
+five years, and were then sold for fifty dollars to Mr Moody.
+Some time afterwards, Mr Moody gave me the entire property of
+both, but the mother soon died, and I had much ado to save the
+son. After my arrival in the Thames, being in want of money, I
+first sold part of my property in Prince Jeoly, and by degrees
+all the rest. He was afterwards carried about and shewn for
+money, and at last died of the small-pox at Oxford.</p>
+
+<p>During my stay at Bencoolen I served as gunner of the fort;
+but when my time was expired, I embarked with my painted prince
+in the Defence, Captain Heath, in order to return to England. We
+sailed on the 25th January, 1691, in company with three other
+ships, and arrived at the Cape of Good Hope in the beginning of
+April. After a stay of six weeks, we set sail on the 13th May for
+St Helena, where we arrived on the 20th June. We left this island
+on the 2d July, and came to anchor in the Downs on the 16th
+September, 1691, after an absence of twelve years and a half from
+my native country.</p>
+
+<h2><a name="chapter4-9" id="chapter4-9">CHAPTER IX.</a></h2>
+
+<p>VOYAGE ROUND THE WORLD, BY WILLIAM FUNNELL, IN
+1703-1706.[202]</p>
+
+<p>INTRODUCTION.</p>
+
+<p>This voyage has usually passed under the name of Captain
+William Dampier; but as he proceeded only to the South Seas, and
+the circumnavigation was entirely completed by Mr William
+Funnell, who sailed originally as his mate, it seemed proper to
+place his name in the title of the voyage, instead of that of
+Captain Dampier, with whom, in this voyage, we have much less to
+do. It is just however to state, that it was on the credit of
+Captain Dampier, and in expectation that he would be able to do
+great things against the Spaniards in the South Sea, that this
+expedition was undertaken. The point aimed at was plunder, rather
+than discovery, yet there was something remarkable done even in
+this way; and the unknown islands met with by Mr Funnell, in his
+passage between the South Sea and India, strongly confirmed the
+reports of former navigators, of large, populous, and
+well-cultivated countries in those parts.[203] The narrative of
+Funnell also is well digested, and may be read with much
+satisfaction, as giving a fair and agreeable account of his
+adventures.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 202: Funnel's narrative in Dampier's
+Voyages, vol. IV. pp. 1.--208. Harris, I. 131. Callender, III.
+66. and III. 145.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 203: All these fancies are now shewn to be
+imaginary.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>This expedition was undertaken at the beginning of the
+Succession war, in the reign of Queen Anne; and high expectations
+were raised from it, of performing great exploits against the
+Spaniards, who had accepted the Duke of Anjou as their king. The
+merchants believed that a very profitable expedition might be
+made into these parts, with a reasonable force, where the
+buccaneers, with small and ill-provided vessels, had performed
+such extraordinary things; and therefore, having obtained the
+best information they could as to the proper manner of
+accomplishing the design, they cheerfully contributed to the
+expences necessary for the purpose. With this view, they at first
+fitted out two ships of 26 guns and 120 men each, which were
+designed for the South Seas. One of these was named the St
+George, commanded by Captain William Dampier, in which Mr William
+Funnell sailed as chief mate. The other was the Fame, commanded
+by Captain John Pulling. Both ships were amply supplied with
+warlike stores, and well victualled for nine months; and had
+commissions from Prince George, the queen's husband,
+lord-high-admiral, to proceed against the French and Spaniards;
+and the officers and crews of both were hired on the principles
+of sharing in the expedition, <i>no purchase no pay</i>.</p>
+
+<p>While they lay in the Downs, some difference arose between the
+two captains, on which Captain Pulling went away with his ship,
+the Fame, intending to cruize among the Canary Islands, and never
+afterwards joined. Before sailing on the originally-proposed
+expedition, Dampier was joined by a small ship, the Cinque-ports
+galley, Captain Charles Pickering, of ninety tons, carrying 16
+guns and 63 men, well victualled and provided for the voyage. The
+original plan of the voyage was to go first up the Rio Plata, as
+high as Buenos Ayres, in order to capture two or three Spanish
+galleons, which Dampier alledged were usually there. If this part
+of the expedition succeeded, so as to get to the value of about
+600,000<i>l</i>. it was to be proceeded in no farther; but if his
+first object failed, they were then to cruize on the coast of
+Peru, to intercept the ships which bring gold from Baldivia to
+Lima. Should this again fail of success, they were to attempt
+some rich towns, as Dampier might direct. After this, they were
+to go to the coast of Mexico, at that time of the year when the
+great galleon usually comes from Manilla to Acapulco, which is
+commonly reported to be worth fourteen millions of dollars.</p>
+
+<p>On their arrival at Madeira, learning that the galleons from
+Buenos Ayres had already arrived in safety at Teneriffe, that
+part of the expedition was laid aside. "How well we pursued the
+latter part of our instructions, the subsequent history of our
+voyage will sufficiently declare; in recording which I have used
+the greatest sincerity, narrating every thing exactly in the
+manner in which it happened, and setting down all that appeared
+worthy of notice, with all truth and plainness: so that I flatter
+myself the whole will be found useful, and that the latter part
+especially will be esteemed new, curious, and interesting, as it
+contains many things not before published or known."[204]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 204: This introduction is from the pen of
+Harris; and the last paragraph, marked by inverted commas, is
+given in the words of Funnell.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>SECTION I.</p>
+
+<p><i>Narrative of the Voyage, till the Separation of Funnell
+from Dampier.</i></p>
+
+<p>We sailed from the Downs on the 30th April, 1703, and anchored
+on the 18th May at Kinsale, in Ireland. We here refitted and
+victualled our ship, and were joined by the Cinque-ports, and
+left Kinsale on the 11th September. We reached Madeira on the
+25th, where we did not come to anchor, but plied off and on for
+our boats, which were sent ashore for necessaries. By a good
+observation, I made this island to be in lat 32&deg; 20' N. and
+long. by my account, 18&deg; 5' W. from London.[205] October 6th,
+we saw Mayo, one of the Cape de Verd islands, in lat. 15&deg; 12'
+N. long. 23&deg; 20' W. off which we plied all night; but the
+surf ran so high that we durst not send our boats ashore for
+salt. We accordingly bore up next day for St Jago, and anchored
+at noon of the 7th in Prior bay [Port Praya] in that island. This
+is one of the most fruitful of the Cape Verd Islands, abounding
+in hogs, poultry, guinea fowl, monkeys, maiz, oranges, lemons,
+dates, water-melons, plantains, bananas, and other fruits, having
+good water, but troublesome to get at, and wood is very dear. The
+inhabitants of this island were formerly Portuguese, banished
+thither for murders, thefts, and other crimes; but are now mostly
+all black, in consequence of these men having issue by their
+female slaves, which were Guinea negroes. Yet they still retain
+the vices of their progenitors, thieving being more common here
+than in any place I ever visited, insomuch that they will take a
+man's hat from his head at noon day and in the midst of company.
+In trading with them, it is necessary not to let them have your
+goods before theirs are delivered, or you are sure to lose them.
+We here watered and refreshed ourselves; and here a disagreement
+took place between Captain Dampier and his first-lieutenant, who
+was turned ashore at midnight, with his chest and servant. At
+four next morning, being the 13th October, we sailed from St
+Jago, not fully resolved where next to touch at.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 205: Lat. 32&deg; 33' N. long. 17&deg; 5'
+W. from Greenwich.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the 22d October we caught four fish; a shark, a dolphin, a
+jelly-fish, and an old-wife. The shark and dolphin are well
+known, and need not be described in this place. The
+<i>Jelly-fish</i> was about fourteen inches long and two inches
+deep, having sharp teeth, a sparkling eye, and long extended
+mouth. It has a prodigiously high fin on its back, of a slimy
+substance, except that its rays, which are thirty-two in number,
+are firm and stiff. It has also one small fin under the throat,
+of the same slimy substance with the large one on its back. The
+greater part of the body is of a silver colour, with numerous
+small dark spots and circular bands, all the rest of its
+substance being a green jelly-like substance, whence the name.
+The <i>Old-wife</i> is about two feet long and nine inches high
+in the back, having a small mouth, a large eye, and a large broad
+fin beginning at the hinder part of the head, and reaching to the
+tail. It has also a large broad fin on each side near the gills,
+and a pretty large one under the belly. The body is deep blue,
+and the fins a very light blue, tipt with yellow. The head has
+many spots, and the body is regularly streaked longways.</p>
+
+<p>We passed the equator on the 2d November, about forty-five
+leagues west from the meridian of St Jago. On the 8th, in lat.
+10&deg; 20' S. we saw three small islands on the coast of Brazil,
+called the islands of St Ann, not above a stone's throw from each
+other, and very full of wood, as is the whole coast of Brazil.
+These islands are about four miles from the main, and are much
+troubled with southerly winds, which blow in gusts, so that ships
+ought here to lay their best anchor to the south, and all little
+enough sometimes for their safety. They produce nothing except
+wood, and are frequented by vast flocks of sea fowl, called
+boobies by our sailors. The <i>booby</i> is about the size of a
+duck, some entirely white and others grey, having feet like a
+duck, and subsist mostly on flying-fishes, which they catch while
+in the air. I have made many a meal on these birds, but it was
+for want of other victuals, for they taste very fishy, and are
+apt to make one sick, if not previously well salted. They are so
+silly, when weary of flying, that they will light upon your hand,
+if held out to them.</p>
+
+<p>We anchored at the island of <i>Le Grand</i>, in lat, 23&deg;
+30' S.[206] on the 24th of November. This is a very woody island,
+on which are several good springs of water. It is about nine
+miles in circuit, and three miles from the main, the woods being
+infested with many savage animals, which make a most hideous
+noise in the night. It produces sugar, rum, and several kinds of
+fruits, but all very dear, on account of supplying the town of St
+Paul with necessaries. <i>St Paul</i> is 300 miles inland from Le
+Grand; but by the vast high mountains which are between, it is
+reckoned a distance of sixty days journey. Near St Paul there is
+said to be a gold mine, which is accounted the richest hitherto
+known. We here wooded, watered, and refitted our ships; and our
+new first-lieutenant, falling out with the captain, went ashore,
+together with eight of our men, and left us. Here also Charles
+Pickering, captain of the Cinque-ports, departed this life, and
+was succeeded in the command by his first-lieutenant, Mr Thomas
+Stradling. At this island there are good fish of various sorts,
+one of which, called the <i>Silver-fish</i>, is about twenty
+inches long, and eight deep, from back to belly, having five
+small fins immediately behind the head, and one large fin from
+the last of these to the tail; one middle-sized fin on each side
+near the gills, and a large fin from the middle of the belly to
+the tail, which last is half-moon shaped. The eyes are large, the
+nostrils wide, and the mouth small. It is a thin fish, and full
+of bones, of a fine transparent white, like silver.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 206: Isla Grande is only in lat 30&deg; N.
+and St Paul's, stated in the text, as 300 miles distant, is
+hardly 200, and is at within twenty-five miles of the coast
+farther south.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Leaving the isle of Le Grand on the 8th December, we passed
+the islands of Sebalt de Weert[207] [<i>Falklands</i>] on the
+29th. In lat. 57&deg; 50' S. we had a terrible storm, in which we
+lost company of our consort, the Cinque-ports, on the 4th
+January, 1704. When in lat 60&deg; 51' S. on the 20th, believing
+we had sufficiently passed Cape Horn, we tacked to the N. and got
+sight of the island of <i>Mocha</i> on the 4th February. This
+island is in lat. 38&deg; 20' S. twenty miles from the coast of
+Chili, and is well inhabited by Indians, who are always at war
+with the Spaniards, and indeed with all white men, because they
+consider them all as Spaniards. It is a high island, four leagues
+long, having many shoals on its west side, which extend a league
+or more out to sea. It is about 112 miles to the northward of
+Baldivia.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 207: Called Sibbil de Ward Islands in the
+narrative of Funnell.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>We saw the island of Juan Fernandez on the 7th February, and
+on the 10th, while passing the great bay, we saw the
+Cinque-ports, which had arrived three days before. We accordingly
+anchored in the great bay, in thirty-five fathoms. At this island
+we wooded, watered, and refitted our ships, giving them a heel to
+clean their sides as low as we could, which took up much time,
+and occasioned both companies to be much on shore. In this island
+there are abundance of cabbage-trees, which are excellent, though
+small. The cabbage-tree, which is a species of palm, has a small
+straight stem, often ninety to one hundred feet long, with many
+knots or joints, about four inches asunder, like a bamboo-cane.
+It has no leaves except at the top, in the midst of which the
+substance called cabbage is contained, which, when boiled, is as
+good as any garden cabbage. The branches of this tree we commonly
+twelve or thirteen feet in length, and at about a foot and a half
+from the tree the leaves begin, which are about four feet long
+and an inch and a half broad, the leaves growing so regularly
+that the whole branch seems one entire leaf. The cabbage, when
+cut out from among the roots of the branches, is usually a foot
+long and six inches diameter, and as white as milk. From the
+bottom of the cabbage there spring out several large bunches of
+berries, like grapes, each bunch being five or six pounds weight.
+The berries are red, and about the size of cherries, each having
+a large stone in the middle, and the pulp tastes like that of
+haws.</p>
+
+<p>The sea-lion is so called, as I suppose, because he roars
+somewhat like a lion, and his head also has some resemblance to
+that animal, having four large teeth in front, all the rest being
+short, thick, and stubbed. Instead of feet and legs, he has four
+fins; the two foremost serving him, when he goes ashore, to raise
+the fore part of the body, and he then draws the hind part after
+him. The two hinder fins are of no use on land, but only when in
+the water. This animal is very fat, for which reason we killed
+several of them, from which we made a ton of oil for our lamps;
+and, while at this island, made use of it also for frying our
+fish. They have short light-coloured hair while young, becoming
+sandy when old. Their food is fish, and they prey altogether in
+the water, but come on land to sleep, when five, six, or more of
+them huddle together like swine, and will often lie still three
+or four days, if not molested. They are much afraid of men, and
+make off as fast as they can into the water. If hard pressed,
+they will turn about, raising their bodies on their fore fins,
+and face you with their mouths wide open, so that we used to clap
+a pistol to their mouth, and fire down their throat. Sometimes
+five or six of us would surround one of these monsters, each
+having a half pike, and so prick him till he died, which commonly
+was the sport of two or three hours.</p>
+
+<p>While we were at this island, a difference took place between
+Captain Stradling and his men, which was at last compromised by
+Captain Dampier. On the 29th February we descried a sail, on
+which all hands hurried on board, and we slipped our cables and
+stood out to sea. The Frenchman, for so he afterwards proved,
+immediately tacked and stood from us, while we followed the chase
+with all sail, and got up with him about eleven at night, but did
+not deem it convenient to engage till day. During the chase our
+pinnace towed under water, and was cut adrift. Captain
+Stradling's boat also got loose, in which were a man and a
+dog.</p>
+
+<p>At sun-rise next morning, 1st March, we began to engage the
+French ship, which was of about 400 tons burden, and thirty guns,
+well manned. We fought her very close, broadside to broadside,
+for seven hours; and then a small gale springing up, she sheered
+off. In this action our consort only fired ten or twelve guns at
+the commencement, when she dropt astern, and never again came up
+during the whole fight, in which we had nine men slain and
+several wounded. We were desirous to have had another trial with
+the Frenchman, knowing it would be of bad consequences to let him
+go, as he would discover our being in these seas to the
+Spaniards; but our captain opposed this, saying, he knew where he
+could get to the value of 500,000<i>l</i>. at any time. So we
+concluded to return to Juan Fernandez, to get our anchors, long
+boats, and several tons of water already casked, together with a
+ton of sea-lion oil, which we had left there. Captain Stradling
+also had left five of his men, who were gone to the west part of
+the island, and knew nothing of our going away after the enemy.
+He had also left all his sails, besides those at the yards, and a
+great many other stores.</p>
+
+<p>We had then the wind at S. directly off Juan Fernandez, so
+that it was difficult to go there; and while beating up we saw
+two sail, to which the Cinque-ports was very near, and they fired
+several shots at her, but she rowed away to us, and reported them
+to be two French ships of about 36 guns each; on which the two
+captains thought it convenient to bear away for the coast of
+Peru, leaving Captain Stradling's five men, with his other
+stores, which he could ill spare, and now we had neither of us
+any boats. We accordingly stood for the coast of Peru on the 6th
+March, and fell in with it on the 11th, in lat. 24&deg; 53'
+S.[208] The land here was very high, having three distinct ranges
+of hills behind each other, that nearest the water the lowest,
+and the farthest off the highest. We coasted along shore to the
+northward, and passed the port of <i>Capaipo</i> on the 14th,
+said to be a very good harbour, fenced from almost all winds. The
+land is here inhabited by Indians, who make good wines; and it is
+said to abound in good meat, corn, and other provisions, and from
+this port they export wine, money, and other goods for Coquimbo.
+We would willingly have gone ashore for refreshments, but could
+not for want of boats.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 208: There must be a material error here,
+as they afterwards, in sailing along the coast <i>to the
+northwards</i>, passed Copaipo, which is in lat. 27&deg; 13' S.
+and they consequently must have fallen in with the coast of
+Chili, improperly named Peru in the text, considerably farther
+south.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Continuing along the coast, which is the highest and most
+mountainous I ever saw, we were surprised, on the 19th of March,
+to see the waves changed to a red colour for seven or eight
+leagues, though on sounding we had no ground at 170 fathoms; but
+on drawing up some of the water, we found the colour owing to a
+vast quantity of fish-spawn, swimming on the surface. We were now
+in lat. 16&deg; 11' S. having passed the three famous ports of
+Arica, Ylo, and Arequipa. The 22d March we were off the harbour
+of Callao de Lima, when we saw two ships steering for that port,
+to which we gave chase, and soon came up with the sternmost,
+which proved to be the ship we had fought with off the island of
+Juan Fernandez. We were very eager to stop her from going in, to
+prevent the Spaniards from having intelligence of us, and
+hindering their merchant ships from putting to sea, and did not
+question our taking her, being all now in health; whereas on the
+former occasion, between twenty and thirty of our men were very
+sick and weak. But Captain Dampier was averse to attack her; and
+while the matter was disputing, both ships got into the port of
+Lima, from whence twenty ships such as ours could not have forced
+them out. This proceeding gave great offence to most of the crew,
+and might have proved of bad consequence, had we not taken two
+very considerable prizes a few days afterwards, one of 150 and
+the other of 200 tons. We took out of these every thing that we
+thought useful, and then dismissed them.</p>
+
+<p>The 5th of April, we began to prepare for the great exploit
+our captain meditated, of landing on the coast and plundering
+some rich city; for which purpose our carpenters were ordered to
+fit up the launches or long boats we had taken from our prizes,
+so as to land our men in safety, and to fit two swivels in each
+launch. On the 11th we took a bark of fifty tons, laden with
+plank and cordage, as if sent on purpose for our present service.
+This was in sight of <i>Gallo</i>, under which island we anchored
+next day with our prize, which we kept to use in the intended
+enterprise. The island of <i>Gallo</i> is in lat. 2&deg; 45' N.
+long. 76&deg; 38' W. from London,[209] and about five leagues
+from the main; being two leagues long and one league broad. When
+approached from the south, it shews three hummocks which seem at
+a distance as three separate islands, the land between being very
+low; but when to the N.W. of the S. end you will see a small
+island, or rock rather, resembling a ship under sail. From this
+island the main land is in sight, being very low near the sea,
+but prodigiously high up the country. We anchored off the N.W.
+part of this island, two cables length from the shore, in
+thirty-five fathoms on hard sand, the N. point bearing N. 1/2 W.
+and the S. point S.W. The watering place goes in with a full gap,
+over which, on the hill, is a plain spot of red earth, bearing
+N.W. 1/2 N. but there are several other good watering places in
+the island. The best anchorage is on the N.E. part at
+<i>Legnetta</i>, where a ship may wood and water quite secure
+from any enemy. The island is very woody, affording large timber,
+which is often shipped hence for Peru. There are here a few wild
+monkeys, with abundance of lizards; among which is one called the
+<i>lion-lizard</i>, about the size of a man's arm, one that I
+measured being three feet eleven inches from the head to the end
+of the tail. It has a kind of large comb on its head, standing up
+like a helmet, as if to defend its head, and when attacked it
+erects this comb, which otherwise lies in a deep groove on the
+head, just fitted for its reception, so that it can hardly be
+seen when down. This animal has very large eyes, and a large
+mouth, in which are a great many small sharp teeth. The skin is
+rough and of a dark colour, full of black, yellow, and bluish
+spots. It runs very swift, yet our dog caught many of them.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 209: Lat. 1&deg; 56' N. long. 78&deg; 50'
+W. from Greenwich.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>After remaining here five days, we began to hoist our anchors
+to set sail, when we discovered a ship standing in for the
+island, which we took. She was a small vessel of fifty tons,
+commanded by a Mestizo, on board of which we found a Guernsey
+man, who had been taken by the Spaniards, while cutting logwood
+in the Bay of Campeachy above two years before, and must have
+continued a prisoner during life if we had not released him. On
+sailing from Gallo, our purpose was to attack the town of Santa
+Maria, not far from this on the continent to the E. expecting
+there to have found a great quantity of gold, brought thither
+from the adjacent mines of the same name. But this design
+miscarried, whether from fear, confusion, or the enemy having
+early intelligence of our motions, which enabled them to cut off
+many of our men. This, however, is certain, that we were quite
+sick of our fruitless attempts on shore by the 1st May, and
+immediately re-embarked. We were now so short of provisions, that
+five boiled green plantains were allotted for six men; but, when
+almost out both of hope and patience, a vessel came and anchored
+close beside us at midnight, which we took without resistance.
+This proved a most valuable prize, being a ship of 150 tons,
+laden with flour, sugar, brandy, wine, about thirty tons
+marmalade of quinces, a considerable quantity of salt, and
+several tons of linen and woollen cloth; so that we had now a
+sufficient supply of provisions even for four or five years. I
+was put aboard of this prize on behalf of Captain Dampier and his
+company, and the master of the Cinque-ports, in behalf of Captain
+Stradling and his crew.</p>
+
+<p>We carried our prize into the Bay of Panama, and anchored
+under the island of Tobago on the 14th of May. Here Captains
+Dampier and Stradling disagreed, and the quarrel proceeded to
+such length, that they could not be reconciled, so that at last
+it was determined to part company, all the men being at liberty
+to go with which captain they pleased, in consequence of which
+five of our men went over to Captain Stradling, and five of his
+men came to us. We were now informed by the prisoners, that there
+were 80,000 dollars on board our prize, which had been taken on
+board at Lima clandestinely, and were concealed at the bottom of
+the hold in the run of the ship. But Captain Dampier would not
+credit this, neither would he wait till we should rummage her to
+the bottom, lest delay might mar his great designs. Having,
+therefore, taken on board a quantity of provisions from the
+prize, she was dismissed; and we set sail in the St George on the
+19th May, leaving the Cinque-ports behind, intending again to
+proceed for the coast of Peru.</p>
+
+<p>We took a vessel of 120 tons on the 7th June, bound from
+Truxillo for Panama, and laden with flour, sugar, brandy, and
+other articles, with some bales of flowered silk. In her we found
+a packet of letters, and the first of these we happened to read
+was from the captain of the ship we had fought off Juan
+Fernandez, and fell in with again going into Callao. It was
+directed to the president of Panama, and stated, "That he had
+fought with two English privateers off Juan Fernandez, the
+smaller having only fired eight or ten guns at him, and then fell
+astern and did not come up again during the fight, as he believed
+for want of wind; while the large ship fought him yard-arm and
+yard-arm for more than six hours, killed a great many of his men,
+and wounded such numbers, that he had landed thirty-two at Lima,
+each of whom had lost a leg, an arm, or an eye, and he had been
+nearly taken, as at parting they had given themselves over for
+lost, not having a sufficient number of men left to defend
+themselves." By other letters, we learnt that the two French
+ships we afterwards saw near Juan Fernandez had picked up a boat
+at sea, in which were an Englishman and a dog; had been in at the
+island of Juan Fernandez, and had taken up our anchors, cables,
+and long-boats, with all Captain Stradling's stores, as also his
+five men and our negro who were left there. We learnt also, that
+the Spaniards had fitted out two men of war against us, one of
+thirty-two, and the other thirty-six brass guns, all twenty-four
+pounders, each having 350 sailors and 150 soldiers, all picked
+men, and had been cruizing for us in the Bay of Guayaquil,
+between point St Helena and Cape Blanco, from the 7th to the
+12th.</p>
+
+<p>We were forced to go under an easy sail, as our prize sailed
+very heavily, wherefore we went into <i>Sardinas</i> Bay, in lat.
+1&deg; 20' N. where we anchored with our prize in ten fathoms,
+about four miles from the shore, for the purpose of rummaging
+her. We durst not go farther in, because of many shoals and
+sand-banks, which were very imperfectly laid down in all our
+charts. The sea-coast is inhabited by Indians, but not in any
+great numbers, and has several small fresh-water rivers. From
+hence, all the way south, till we came to the Bay of
+<i>Atacarnes</i>, in lat. 0&deg; 54' N. the sea-side is composed
+of white cliffs; and there are many shoals as far as <i>Punta de
+la Galera</i>, in lat. 0&deg; 48' N. Six leagues S.W. of Sardinas
+Bay is the great river of St Jago, the mouth of which is about
+three quarters of a mile wide, but has no good anchorage till
+well within. This river is seldom used by ships, being out of the
+way, yet the country here produces abundant provisions of all
+sorts. We careened our ship and rummaged our prize in the Bay of
+Sardinas, and watered at one of the fresh-water rivers, which was
+as white as milk, and both smelt and tasted very strong of musk,
+occasioned by many alligators swimming in it. We shot several of
+these creatures, one of which measured thirty feet in length, and
+was bigger about than a bullock.</p>
+
+<p>The alligator is covered over with great scales from head to
+tail, having very large sharp teeth, and very long claws. It is
+amphibious, living both on land and in the water, and when lying
+on shore is often mistaken at a distance for a great tree fallen
+down. It runs very fast on the land, and is of such strength that
+one of them will take a horse or a cow into the water, and there
+devour it. They will seize on any thing, either on land or in the
+water, and often make great havock among cattle near their
+haunts, which are usually in fresh-water rivers. The Indians are
+not greatly afraid of them, either on land or in the water. In
+the former case, they run in circles, and this unwieldy animal is
+unable to turn his body quickly, so that they easily get away
+from them. The Indians also go into the water to seek them,
+taking in one hand a piece of iron pointed and baited at both
+ends, with two cross pieces a little below the points. Holding
+this iron by the middle, when the alligator rises to bite, which
+he always does with, the head above water, the Indian holds out
+the iron to him which he snaps at, and it fastens in his mouth,
+keeping his jaws open like a gag. The female lays about 100 eggs
+at a time, as large as goose eggs; but quite spherical, and
+having shells as thick almost as those of an ostrich. The flesh
+of the alligator is not fit to be eaten, being very strong and
+musky; and the very water of the rivers they frequent was so
+strong of musk that a draught of it was like to suffocate us, yet
+there are no instances of its being injurious to health.</p>
+
+<p>Being off the Bay of Guayaquil on the 21st June, we saw a
+ship, and came up with her next day, being one of the Spanish men
+of war fitted out to take us, carrying thirty-two guns. We did
+all we could to gain the weather-gage, but carrying away our
+fore-top-mast, were obliged to come to action from the leeward,
+so that she kept a good distance from us, and we could not use
+our small arms. Dividing our crew into two equal parts, one
+managed the guns while the other looked on, and when those at the
+guns were weary, the others took their places, alternately
+refreshing those who were not employed, by which means we fired
+much faster than the enemy, making about 560 discharges, while
+they only made 110 or 115. We thus fought from noon till half
+past six, though at such distance that our shot would hardly
+reach him, while his flew over us. Growing dusk, both ceased
+firing, none of our men being either killed or wounded, and only
+two through carelessness had their hands and faces scorched. We
+lay-to all night, expecting in the morning to renew the fight;
+but he had made sail from us in the night.</p>
+
+<p>We now returned to the Bay of Atacames in search of
+provisions, for which purpose we sent our boat ashore with twenty
+men, who soon returned, saying they had found an Indian village
+of fifty houses, but the inhabitants were all fled and had left
+nothing behind. In the river we found a fine bark of about fifty
+tons, with as much new plank in her as would have built another
+of equal size; and we took another of about ten tons, laden with
+plantains. This we resolved to retain, instead of a long-boat.
+She had two masts and two square-sails, and having fitted her for
+our purpose, we called her the Dragon. The country in the
+neighbourhood of this bay is very pleasant, being well wooded and
+watered. About seven leagues to the N.E. is the Bay of <i>St
+Mattheo</i>, the land about it being very high, and there are
+many shoals about it, running two leagues out to sea. For three
+or four leagues the water is only from four fathoms to six, and
+this bay has white cliffs both to the north and south. In the
+bottom of the bay there are two rivers running into the sea, both
+of which are what the seamen call <i>alligator water</i>, that
+is, white and musky as before described. On each side of these
+rivers there are shoals of sand; and near their mouths are fine
+groves of tall spreading green trees, which are the marks by
+which they may be found, as their mouths are narrow, and not
+discernible at a distance. These rivers are seldom frequented by
+the Spaniards, except for refreshments, for which they are well
+adapted, as all the adjoining country abounds with every kind of
+provisions that this part of the world produces. About two
+leagues up these rivers there are several Indian villages, who
+furnish the Spanish ships which come here with cocoa-nuts,
+plantains, bananas, and other kinds of fruit.</p>
+
+<p>The <i>cocoa-tree</i> is generally from fifty to an hundred
+feet high, and for the most part straight and slender. The leaves
+are four fathoms, or four and a half long, at the very top of the
+tree, and serve excellently for thatching houses. At the bottom
+of the leaves the cocoa nuts grow in clusters of ten, fifteen, or
+twenty, hanging by a small string which is full of joints. Each
+nut, with its outer rind, is larger than a man's head, and within
+this outer rind is a hard woody shell which will hold near a
+quart of liquid. The nut or kernel lines the inside of this
+shell, and within this kernel is about a pint and half of pure
+clear water, very cool, sweet, and pleasant. The kernel also is
+very good and pleasant; but when old, we scrape it all down, and
+soak it in about a quart of fresh water for three or four hours,
+which is then strained, and has both the colour and taste of
+milk, and will even throw up a thick head not unlike cream. This
+milk, when boiled with rice, is accounted very wholesome and
+nourishing by the doctors, and was given to our sick men. When
+the nut is very old, the kernel of itself turns to oil, which is
+often used to fry with, but mostly for burning in lamps. The
+outer end of the nuts may be applied to the purposes of flax, and
+of it the natives make a kind of linen, and it is also
+manufactured into ropes and cables, which are sold in most parts
+of America and the West Indies. The shell of this nut makes very
+pretty drinking cups, and it also burns well, making a fierce hot
+fire. Thus the cocoa-tree affords meat, drink, oil, clothing,
+houses, firing, and rigging for ships.</p>
+
+<p>The <i>plantain-tree</i> is only about thirteen or fourteen
+feet high and four feet round, its leaves being eight or nine
+feet long and two broad, ending in a round point. The fruit grows
+at the bottom of the leaves, on a great stalk, in a pod about
+eight inches long and the size of a black pudding, being of a
+fine yellow colour, often speckled with red. The inside of this
+is white, but the plantain itself is yellow like butter, and as
+soft as a pear. There sometimes grow fifty or sixty of these pods
+on one stalk, and five or six stalks on one tree. They are an
+excellent fruit, and most parts of the East and West Indies
+abound with them. The <i>banana</i> tree is much the same with
+the plantain, but the fruit is only about six inches long, fifty
+or sixty of them growing on one stalk, and is extraordinarily
+mellow, sweet, and good.</p>
+
+<p>We left the bay of Atacames on the 31st July, accompanied by
+our prize the Dragon, and passing the Bay of Panama, came to the
+Bay of Nicoya on the 16th August, in lat 9&deg; 30'N. in which we
+anchored near certain islands near the centre of the bay, called
+Middle Islands, where we careened. While here, Mr Clippington,
+the chief mate, having quarrelled with Captain Dampier, drew over
+twenty-one men to his party, and making himself master of the
+bark, in which was all our ammunition and the best part of our
+provisions, hoisted anchor, and went without the islands, whence
+he sent us word that he would put ashore at an Indian house all
+our powder, shot, and other ammunition, reserving only what was
+necessary for his own use, which he did accordingly, and we sent
+our canoes to fetch it on board.</p>
+
+<p>These islands in the Bay of Nicoya are extremely pleasant and
+fruitful, abounding in all things necessary for life, such as
+birds of various kinds, several sorts of fish, and amphibious
+animals, particularly turtles and guanas. Among the birds is a
+very beautiful one called the <i>Maccaw</i>, having feathers of
+all the colours of the rainbow. It is in shape like a large
+parrot, with a white bill, and black legs and feet. The
+<i>carrion crow</i> is as big as a small turkey, which it
+perfectly resembles in shape and colour; but its flesh smells and
+tastes so strong of muck that it is not eatable. The
+<i>pelican</i> is almost as big as a swan, being mostly white
+with brown tips to the wings, having a long bill with a large
+cross joining the lower part of the bill, and hanging down the
+throat like a bag or satchel of great size, into which it
+receives oysters, cockles, conchs, and other shell-fish, which it
+is unable to break, and retains them there till they open, when
+it throws them out and picks out the meat. They are good food,
+but taste a little fishy. Their feet are broad, and webbed like
+ducks, being water fowl, yet they commonly roost on rocks or
+trees, and always sit with their heads to the wind, varying their
+posture as that changes. They are heavy birds and fly slowly, and
+always when sitting rest their long bills upon their breasts. The
+<i>Guana</i> is an amphibious animal, found both on land and in
+the water. It is about three feet long, some more some less, and
+is very ugly, having large sharp scales, black and green, from
+the fore part of the head to the end of the tail. The mouth is
+furnished with numerous large and sharp teeth, and it has four
+long claws on each foot. They commonly breed in holes about the
+roots of old trees near the water. When stewed with some spice,
+their flesh is very white and eats well, making also good broth;
+but if not extraordinarily well boiled, it is very dangerous
+meat, making men very sick and often occasioning fevers.</p>
+
+<p>There are several kinds of <i>turtles</i>, or sea tortoises,
+but we account the green turtle the best meat. When they want to
+lay their eggs, they go on shore in some sandy bay, where they
+make a hole in the sand with their fins, two feet and a half
+deep, in which one turtle will deposit from eighty to ninety
+eggs, which they cover over with the sand, leaving them to hatch
+by the heat of the sun. They lay in this manner two or three
+times every year, and go immediately off to sea, leaving their
+young when hatched to shift for themselves; which, as soon as
+they get out of the eggs and from the sand, retire to the sea.
+The eggs are round and white, as large as those of a duck, being
+covered with a thin tough skin, but no shell. I have seen of the
+green turtle 200, 350, and even 400 pounds weight. The lean of
+this animal looks like beef, but the fat is as green as grass,
+yet is very wholesome food. The <i>pearl-oyster</i> is much about
+the size of our common oyster, but thick and broad, and hangs to
+the rocks by a long string or beard, like that of a muscle. The
+pearl is found in its thickest part, and some have six or seven
+pearls. The Spaniards often make voyages to this gulf of Nicoya
+and to California in quest of pearls, employing Indian divers,
+who go down in seven or eight fathoms, and bring up eight, ten,
+or twelve oysters at a time, which are opened by other men on
+board. The meat of this oyster is very green and fat, and eats
+tolerably well, boiled or stewed. The <i>great-oyster</i> grows
+to the rocks, not hanging from them by a beard. When opened, one
+part of the meat is of a fine red colour like a cherry, and the
+rest a fine white. I have often eat of this oyster, for want of
+better victuals; and they are so large, that one of them cut in
+pieces and stewed is a sufficient meal for five or six men. The
+<i>muscles</i> here are so large that one will suffice for a meal
+to two men, and they are tolerably good when, stewed with pepper
+and vinegar.</p>
+
+<p>We sailed from the Gulf of Nicoya on the 23d September, and
+were in lat. 13&deg; 7' N. on the 7th October, when we got sight
+of two high mountains, commonly called the Volcanoes of
+Guatimala. That which is to the north of the city is the highest,
+and affords a fine prospect from the sea; and in the year 1534
+threw out a torrent of water, which totally overwhelmed the old
+city of St Jago de Guatimala, and occasioned the building of a
+new city at the distance of thirty-five miles S.E. The other
+mountain is really a volcano, which rages terribly in the rainy
+season, from April to November, sometimes throwing out stones as
+big as a house, and with such prodigious eruptions of flame, that
+one may see to read a letter in a dark night at the distance of
+six miles. This is to the south of Guatimala.</p>
+
+<p>The 9th October we took a bark of eighty tons in ballast, but
+which had a small quantity of provisions, which were very
+acceptable. This bark was commanded by a Spaniard named Christian
+Martin, born in the Canaries, but brought up in London, who had
+formerly been servant to Captain Eaton, and came with him to the
+South Sea in quality of gunner; but, falling out with the men, he
+ran away from them in the island of Gorgonia, where he lay
+concealed for six days till the ship departed. He then cut down
+two trees, which he drew to the water side, and bound together
+with withes, fixed a mast, and made a sail of two shirts which he
+had with him. Then filling a bag with oysters, he put off early
+in the morning from Gorgonia, and got next day in the afternoon
+into the river Bonaventura. He was here ill used by the
+Spaniards, who sent him to Lima, where he was set at liberty. We
+were now sixty-four men and boys, all in good health and spirits,
+and on the 23d November, captured a small bark of sixty tons from
+California laden with plank, but having also several parcels of
+pearls, that had been fished on that coast. December 4th we came
+into the Bay of Nativity, or <i>Puerto Nauidad</i>, in lat.
+19&deg; 22' N. where we took a new ship of about sixty tons,
+laden with ammunition and military stores for the Acapulco ship,
+for which we were now in search, and for the sight of which our
+people longed as earnestly as if there had been no difference
+between seeing and taking her; neither was it long before they
+had their wish in one respect, but not in the other. We took from
+our prize what ammunition was left; for, on perceiving our
+design, the ship's company quitted her, having first thrown
+overboard the best part of her cargo, and left the rest scattered
+about in the utmost confusion.</p>
+
+<p>Being off the volcano of Colima on the morning of the 6th
+December, we descried a sail to which we gave chace, and soon
+came up with her, when she proved to be the great Acapulco ship
+or Manilla galleon, which we had so long wished to fall in with.
+As we were well provided, we gave her a great many broadsides
+before she could get any of her guns cleared for action, as she
+had not suspected us of being an enemy, and was not at all
+prepared for us. Martin, who was still a prisoner on board our
+ship, advised us to lay her aboard immediately, while the
+Spaniards were all in confusion, as we might then easily succeed
+by boarding; but if we gave them time to get out their great
+guns, they would certainly tear us to pieces, and we should lose
+the opportunity of acquiring a prize worth sixteen millions of
+dollars. Thus it accordingly happened; for the time being wasted
+in disputing, between those of us that were for boarding, and
+those of a different opinion, she got out one tier of guns, and
+then proved too hard for us, so that we could not lie along side
+of her to do her any damage. Our five pound shot, which was the
+biggest we had, signified little against such a ship; but when
+any of her eighteen and twenty-four pound shot struck our ship,
+which was much decayed, it drove in a piece of plank of three or
+four feet. Being thus greatly damaged, and having received a shot
+between wind and water in our powder room, by which two feet of
+plank were driven in on each side of our stern, orders were given
+to stand off from the enemy.</p>
+
+<p>Our design being thus disappointed, all our men became much
+discontented, and were for going home, seeing we could do no good
+in these parts, either for ourselves or owners; our ship also
+being ready to fall in pieces of herself, and having provisions
+only for three months at short allowance. Captain Dampier
+requested that we would consent to prolong our cruize for six
+weeks longer; after which he promised to permit us to sail for
+India to some factory, where we might all dispose of ourselves as
+we thought best for our advantage. To this we all agreed, and we
+accordingly cruized along shore to the S.E. in sight of land,
+passing the noted ports of Acapulco, <i>Puerto de los
+Angelos</i>, Guatalco, and several others; when we proposed to
+seek out a proper place in which to water our ships and bark,
+previous to our intended voyage to the East Indies; and, after
+some consideration, the Gulf of Amapalla or Fonseca was fixed
+upon for that purpose.</p>
+
+<p>On the 5th January, 1705, we met with such vast quantities of
+fish, that in half an hour we caught near three score
+<i>albicores</i>, from sixty to ninety pounds weight each,
+besides vast quantities of other fish. The <i>albicore</i> is
+about four or five feet long, weight from 50 to 100 and even 150
+pounds. It has eleven fins on its back, one pretty large, a
+second of middle size, and nine small yellow fins near the tail;
+one large fin on each side near the gills; and one near the
+middle of the belly. This is a very fleshy fish, having hardly
+any bones besides the back bone, and is extraordinary good
+eating. It has prodigious strength, while in the water, and preys
+mostly on flying fish, as do dolphins and bonetoes. On the 6th of
+this month, a new revolution took place in our affairs, as thirty
+of our men agreed to remain along with Captain Dampier in the
+South Sea; but with what view or on what terms, we others, who
+were not in the secret, never knew. Our company, who were not of
+Dampier's party, consisted of thirty-three men; and,
+notwithstanding this new arrangement, we all sailed to the Gulf
+of Amapalla, where we anchored on the 26th January.</p>
+
+<p>That same day, all the remaining provisions were equally
+divided between the two companies by the agent for the owners,
+and we had four pieces of cannon, with a proper proportion of
+small arms and ammunition, assigned for us, for our defence
+during the voyage to India. Our next care was to take in water,
+for which purpose we landed on the island of <i>Conchagua</i>;
+and after some search, we found a large bottom behind the hills,
+in which was a large plantain walk, and a large reservoir of rain
+water, which came from the mountains. This was very inconvenient,
+as we were forced to carry all our water over a high hill, which
+we could hardly climb by ourselves; but there was no alternative,
+and we set to work to cut down the bushes in our way, to make a
+clear path. After this, as the hill was very steep on the land
+side towards the bottom whence we had to fetch water, we cut
+steps in the hill with axes and shovels; and our sail-maker made
+a hose or canvass pipe of ninety fathoms long, which carried the
+water from the top of the hill down to our water cask at its foot
+towards the sea. We then fell to work, each man having a six
+gallon keg, in which the water was carried to the top of the
+hill, where it was emptied into the hose. We were thus employed
+four days, in which time we filled twenty-six tons, which we
+carried on board. The 31st January, we all went to the plantain
+walk, where we cut down as many plantains as we could carry, with
+which we returned on board our ship, meaning to set sail next
+day.</p>
+
+<p>This evening, two of the men who had agreed to remain with
+Captain Dampier, left him and came over to us, so that our number
+was now thirty-five, viz. thirty-four English, and a little negro
+boy we had taken from the Spaniards. While we were employed in
+watering our bark, the men on board the St George were busied in
+refitting that ship as well as they could; the carpenter stopping
+up the shot-holes in the powder-room with tallow and charcoal,
+not daring, as he said, to drive a nail, for fear of making it
+worse. The four great guns, which usually stood between decks,
+were put down into the hold, there being sixteen besides, which
+was more than they now had men to manage, as there only remained
+twenty-eight men and boys with Captain Dampier, who were mostly
+landsmen, a very insignificant force indeed with which to make
+war on a whole nation.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION II.</p>
+
+<p><i>Sequel of the Voyage of William Funnell, after his
+Separation from Captain Dampier</i>.</p>
+
+<p>We left the Gulf of Amapalla on the 1st February, 1705, where
+Captain Dampier remained at anchor in the St George, having a
+fine gale of wind at N.E. While in any of the harbours on the
+coast of Mexico, we were seldom allowed any thing except flour,
+only that we used to go on shore, and found on the rocks plenty
+of concks, oysters, muscles, and other shell-fish, on which we
+made many a hearty meal. Being now bound, as we hoped, for a land
+of plenty, we bore hunger and short commons with great patience,
+of which we had much need, as our allowance was no more than half
+a pound of coarse flour a day to each man, and two ounces of salt
+meat every other day. Our vessel was a small bark of about
+seventy tons with two masts, which we had taken from the
+Spaniards, which was so eaten with worms while in the Gulf of
+Amapalla, that she already began to grow very leaky. To add to
+our distress, we had no carpenter, neither had we a doctor or any
+medicines, if any of us happened to fall sick, and we had no boat
+to aid us if our vessel should fail. The carpenter, doctor, and
+boat being all left with Captain Dampier. Yet, trusting to God's
+providence, who had already delivered us out of so many dangers,
+we proceeded on our voyage to India; and a bolder attempt was
+perhaps never made by such a handful of men in so frail a bark,
+and nothing but our anxious desire to revisit our native country
+could have supported us under all the difficulties and dangers of
+this extensive voyage.</p>
+
+<p>The prospect of our difficulties gave us spirit and resolution
+to provide against them; and in a council, which we held on this
+occasion, we determined on the course we were to pursue, and the
+allowance of provisions during the course. We knew the wind we
+now had was merely a land breeze, and that by running 100 leagues
+out to sea we should fall in with the regular trade-wind, which
+blows always N.E. or E.N.E. our first purpose was, therefore, to
+get into the latitude of 13&deg; N. which is that of Guam, and
+then to bear away before the wind in that parallel. This
+resolution was formed on the 2d February, all which day and most
+of the ensuing night we had fine calm weather, and caught
+abundance of <i>yellow-tails</i>, which swam about the vessel.
+This fish is about four feet long, having twenty fins on its
+back; a middling one behind the head, a large one on the middle
+of the back, and eighteen small ones between that and the tail.
+It has a large fin on each side near the gills, and thirteen
+under the belly, viz. a middling one under the gills, a large one
+near the middle of the belly, which goes in with a dent, and
+eleven small ones between that and the tail, which is yellow and
+half-mooned. This fish has a very great head, with large eyes,
+and is good eating, having no bones except the back-bone. It is
+all white, except the tips of the fins and the tail, which, are
+yellow. These fish were very acceptable to us, as we fed upon
+them for three days, saving our other provisions. On the 3d
+February, five or six turtles came near our bark, two of which we
+caught, which also served to save our scanty store of provisions,
+which otherwise had not sufficed to keep us from starving.</p>
+
+<p>On the evening of the 3d February, having a brisk gale from
+the land at N.E. we took our departure from <i>Mount St
+Miguel</i> in the Gulf of Amapalla, steering S.W. and S.S.W. till
+we were in the lat. of 10&deg; N. when falling in with the
+tradewind, we set our course W.N.W. we then made studding-sails
+to our main and main-top sails, which we hoisted every morning at
+day-break, and hauling down at sun-set, as it commonly blew so
+fresh in the night that we had usually to furl our top-sail; but
+the wind commonly abated at sun-rise. During our whole voyage we
+steadily adhered to the rule of diet we had laid down, the
+slenderness of which may be judged of by the following
+particulars.</p>
+
+<p>From the 3d of February to the end of that month, we fed
+entirely on plantains, making two meals a day, and allowing two
+plantains to each man for a meal. We had then recourse to our
+flour, of which half a pound was allowed daily to each man, and
+two ounces every other day of salt beef or pork; but the meat had
+been so long in salt, that it shrunk one half when boiled,
+wherefore we concluded it was better to eat it raw, which we did
+as long as it lasted. By the beginning of April that began to
+fail, so that we were reduced to flour alone, which was sore
+spoiled, being full of maggots, spiders, and other vermin, so
+that nothing but the extremity of want could have induced us to
+eat it. It was surprising to behold this strange alteration in
+the flour, which only a few days before was white and fine, and
+was now in a manner all alive, the maggots tumbling over each
+other in prodigious numbers. On strict enquiry, these maggots
+seemed to proceed from the eggs of spiders deposited among the
+flour, out of which the maggots were bred, and then fed
+voraciously on the flour. Words can only faintly describe the
+miseries of our situation, which was somewhat alleviated by work,
+and our spirits were buoyed up by the hopes of accomplishing our
+long and difficult voyage. Some occasional assistance we derived
+by now and then catching a dolphin. At other times we saw many
+sea fowl, such as boobies, noddies, and others, which would come
+and perch on some part of our rigging, and happy was he that
+could catch one. In this manner we spent ten weeks, at the end of
+which we were in a very melancholy condition, and nothing but the
+hope of seeing land could possibly keep us from despair.</p>
+
+<p>The 10th of April, we observed the clouds to gather more than
+usual in the horizon, which is a sure indication of land, as it
+is common between the tropics to be foggy over the land, though
+perfectly clear at sea; wherefore we kept an anxious look-out all
+this night, and early in the morning of the 11th, we saw the
+island of <i>Magon</i> W. ten leagues distant. This is a high
+woody island, very plain, and green on the top. When within a
+mile of this island, we lay to, and several fishing boats came to
+us, bringing us fish, yams, eggs, potatoes, and other provisions,
+to our great joy. The men in these boats were very tall and
+large-limbed, of tawny complexions, with long black hair reaching
+to their middles, and were all utterly stark naked, not even
+covering their parts of shame. In exchange for what we had of
+these people we offered them money, which they looked at and
+returned, making signs to give them tobacco, which we did, and
+they seemed much pleased. We also gave them some old shirts,
+which they tore in pieces and wrapped round their heads. We would
+have given each a dram of brandy, but they were afraid of it;
+only one man accepted a glass, which he drank off, but we thought
+he would never have closed his mouth again, he seemed so
+astonished at the heat it left in his mouth and stomach, that I
+believe he thought himself on fire. He lay down and roared like a
+bull near half an hour, when he fell asleep; and we being in
+haste, put him into his boat, making signs to his companions to
+take care of him.</p>
+
+<p>These islanders seemed a very civil people, yet we did not
+venture to allow too many of them to come on board at once. When
+they first came near us, they tied two sticks together in form of
+a cross, which they held up, as we supposed, to signify to us
+that they had some knowledge of Christianity; whereupon we shewed
+them a crucifix, we had taken from the Spaniards, at the sight of
+which they all bowed their bodies, and came on board. This island
+of Magon, as I reckoned, is in lat. 15&deg; N. and we made its
+longitude by computation, 120&deg; 9' W. from <i>St Miguel</i>,
+or 7029 English miles, allowing 58-1/2 miles to the degree of
+longitude in this parallel.[210]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 210: From the sequel, this island of Magon
+appears almost certainly to have been one of the Ladrones,
+perhaps to the N.E. of Guam, now named Rota. Point Candadillo,
+near San Miguel, the N.W. cape of the Gulf of Amapalla, is in
+long. 87&deg; 58' W. and the Ladrones are in long. 216&deg; W.
+from Greenwich, so that the difference, or run across the
+Pacific, is 128&deg; 2', which, at 58-1/2 miles, extend to 7590
+miles, besides the allowance for difference of
+latitude.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On mature deliberation, we resolved to proceed directly from
+this place to New Guinea, without putting in at the island of
+Guam, which was in sight. The weather continued fair, and the
+wind brisk and favourable, till we came into the latitude of
+4&deg; N. when we had a calm for seven days, during which time we
+had no means of relieving our hunger, except by taking large
+draughts of water, and then lying down to sleep. On the 3d May we
+had a fine gale, which continued till the 5th, and then died
+quite away before we got sight of land; but about ten that night
+we were all sensible of a very odoriferous smell, whence we
+concluded that we were near land, on which we examined our
+charts, but found none laid down. Next morning, however, we saw
+land at no great distance. This day also we caught two bonetoes,
+which were most welcome, as they made a hearty meal to our whole
+company. This fish is commonly about three feet long and two in
+circumference, having a very sharp head, with a small mouth, full
+eyes, and a semilunar tail. It is very fleshy, and makes good
+broth. About noon we were in sight of three small islands, all
+low land, but very green and pleasant, especially to us, who had
+been so long of seeing any land. We had this day an observation
+of the sun, by which we found our latitude to be 50' N. and as
+the eastermost of these islands was four leagues S.E. of the
+ship, it must of consequence be in lat. 0&deg; 42' N.[211]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 211: The only islands in modern maps which
+agree with the slight notice in the text, are Frevilla, or St
+David's Isle,, nearly in lat. 1&deg; N. and long. 135&deg; E.
+from Greenwich: Yet it is singular that Funnell should have
+passed through the numerous group of the Carolines without seeing
+any of them.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>As we were fearful of entering upon an unknown coast in the
+dark, we stood off all night, which was well for us, as we found
+ourselves at day-break next morning, 7th May, within a ship's
+length of a great reef of rocks, which extended from one island
+to the other, and thinking to have gone between the islands, we
+had nearly run upon this dangerous ledge. Having a small breeze
+from shore we were fortunately able to stand off, and went to the
+westermost island, because we saw many shoals off the others. The
+rocks we were so near running upon were off the northmost isle,
+which we named the Island of <i>Deceit</i>. On getting near the
+westermost island which was the biggest of the three, forty or
+fifty of their flying proas came off, in which there might be 450
+men, allowing ten to each proa, and we could also see multitudes
+of people on the shore looking at us as we passed. The flying
+proas kept at a distance from us, till we beckoned and made signs
+for them to come near, and at length one came within a ship's
+length, in which were ten men entirely naked, in the midst of
+whom was a grave old man of a pleasant countenance, entirely
+naked like the rest, except that he had a four-cornered cap on
+his head without a crown. By the respect shewn him by all the
+rest in the boat, we judged this man to be a king or prince. On
+their approach, they sung a song which continued near a quarter
+of an hour, and had a very pretty tune. When this was done, they
+came almost close to our vessel, and then sung another song,
+which was begun by the old man, and followed by all the rest in
+the boat. At the end of which, they put themselves in a posture
+of prayer, making many bows and cringes towards us; and then one
+of the men in the boat, who had a very sore leg, held it up to
+us, as if desiring us to cure it, whence we supposed they had
+never seen white men before, and deemed us more than mortals.</p>
+
+<p>After some time, we made signs to let them know we wanted
+victuals and drink, when they shook their heads as if by way of
+denial. Seeing us proceeding towards the island, one of the men
+in the boat blew a horn, on which all the other boats made boldly
+towards us; and thinking they meant to board us, we fired a
+junket over their heads to intimidate them, at the noise of which
+they seemed much surprised and drew back, menacing us at a
+distance with their paddles, and still following. Seeing such
+multitudes on the shore, and finding we could have nothing from
+them but by force, and besides not having anchors and cables on
+which we could depend, or any boat in which to land, we concluded
+that we could do no good here; and on examining our water, which
+was found sufficient for eighteen days, at a quart each man
+daily, we resolved to quit these islands, and trust to Providence
+for guiding us to some more friendly place, where we might supply
+our wants. So we left these islands, naming the westermost the
+Island of <i>Disappointment</i>, because we made certain of
+procuring water here, but could not.</p>
+
+<p>These three islands were all low, flat, and almost even with
+the water, yet full of trees of various sorts, all very green and
+flourishing; and doubtless, if we had possessed a boat, we must
+have found something beneficial to ourselves, perhaps useful to
+our country, as we might also at several other islands which we
+afterwards passed. The inhabitants of most of these islands were
+a very large and strong-boned race of men, having long black lank
+hair reaching to their middles, and were all entirely naked, not
+so much as covering their parts of shame; and I certainly never
+saw such, a parcel of stout-limbed men together in all my life.
+These islands, therefore, are abundantly peopled, though they
+were utterly averse from any communication with us, perhaps from
+a notion that all whites are Spaniards; and yet it is not quite
+clear that even the Spaniards have ever attempted to form a
+settlement at any of these islands.</p>
+
+<p>We left these islands with a fresh breeze at E. steering S.W.
+and continually met with weeds and grass on our way, which made
+us believe we were not far from land, yet we had no ground with
+100 fathoms. Early in the morning of the 9th May, we descried the
+coast of New Guinea, more than eighteen or nineteen leagues
+distant. We now saw the necessity of constructing a boat, with a
+few old boards and such other materials as we had, though not
+quite suitable for the purpose; and though neither strong nor
+handsome, it proved exceeding useful in the sequel. On the 9th we
+had very bad weather, the wind shifting to every point of the
+compass. This part of New Guinea appeared very mountainous,
+black, and rocky, without harbour, bay, or road, in which we
+might anchor in safety. The mountains seemed so bleak and barren,
+and the vallies so deep and narrow, that at first we conceived
+the country to be uninhabited; neither did we afterwards see any
+inhabitants or signs of any. That same day we passed two small
+islands, each about a league in length, which were very low, and
+well clothed with small green trees. At the same time we saw part
+of the great island of Gilolo, at the distance of eight leagues,
+and held our course W.S.W.[212] intending to pass through between
+that island and New Guinea, into the East Indian Sea.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 212: The only way of explaining this part
+of the text, is by supposing Funnel may have mistaken the island
+of Waygoo for a part of New Guinea, and even the N.W. point of
+that island is at least sixty leagues from the S.W. leg or
+peninsula of Gilolo, to which the direction of his course
+certainly points.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>We had very bad weather till the 11th of May, and the night
+being very dark, we missed the common passage, and found
+ourselves among many small islands; and as the wind was at E. we
+resolved to look out for some passage among these islands to the
+south. After infinite difficulty and much danger, we at length
+made our way through a strait, which we named <i>St John's
+Straits</i>, after the name of our bark. At this time we were
+boarded by a large Indian proa, on board of which was a freeman
+of Amboina, whom we acquainted with our great want of victuals,
+having had nothing for a great while to support us except a
+scanty allowance of spoilt flour and water, and so very little of
+that as hardly sufficed to keep us alive. He told us, if we would
+go to the island of <i>Manissa</i>, which was then in sight, he
+would be our pilot, where he had no doubt we might have enough of
+rice for our money to carry us to Batavia. We accordingly
+proceeded for Manissa, passing by the island of <i>Keylan</i>,
+which is small and high, but well inhabited, and clothed with
+many kinds of trees. Its chief produce is rice, and a few cloves;
+and on this island there is a Dutch corporal with six soldiers,
+whose only business is to see all the clove trees cut down and
+destroyed. From thence we proceeded to Manissa, where we arrived
+about midnight, and came to anchor in a small bay at the N.W. end
+of the island, when our Dutch pilot sent two men ashore with a
+letter to the governor, acquainting him of our urgent wants.</p>
+
+<p>Early of the 23d May, a Dutch corporal and two soldiers came
+on board, and read to us a general order from the Dutch
+East-India Company, that if any ships, except their own, came
+there to anchor, they were not to be supplied with any thing
+whatever. We told him that extreme want of provisions had
+constrained us to put in here, and that we should not have
+touched any where before reaching Batavia, if we could possibly
+have subsisted; wherefore we requested he would inform the
+governor of our urgent wants. This he engaged to do, seeing us in
+a very weak condition, and came back about four in the afternoon,
+saying that we could have no provisions here, but might be
+supplied at Amboina. We were forced therefore to leave this
+unfriendly place, and to attempt going to Amboina, if the wind
+would serve. <i>Manissa</i> is about fifteen miles from S.E. to
+N.W. and about eight in breadth, in lat. 3&deg; 25' S. and about
+twenty miles west from the island of <i>Bonou</i>. It is a
+remarkably high island, and pretty well inhabited by Malays, as
+are all the Molucca Islands. It is surrounded by shoals almost on
+every side, and some of these stretch a league and a half from
+the shore, so that it is very dangerous to come near, unless with
+very good charts, or with an experienced pilot. It has several
+good springs of fresh water, and the Dutch have a small fort with
+six guns on its S.W. side. It is governed by a Dutch serjeant,
+having under him three corporals, a master gunner, and twenty
+European soldiers; and produces vast plenty of rice and cloves,
+both of which are sent to Amboina. The inhabitants are mostly
+fishers, and catch such abundance of fish as not only supplies
+themselves, but enables them also to carry a great deal to
+Amboina.</p>
+
+<p>We stood to the S.W. having the wind at S.S.E. and blowing
+fresh, so that we sailed under our courses, and were now much out
+of heart, not expecting to reach Amboina, the S E. monsoon being
+now set in; which was right against us. Almost in despair, we
+continued our course till we were over against the island of
+<i>Bouro</i>, and then the wind veering to the S.S.W. we stood
+away S.E. but finding a strong current setting to leeward, we
+rather lost ground, and seeing no likelihood of getting to
+Amboina, we, by general consent, shared among us all that was
+eatable on board, each man's share being six pounds and three
+quarters of flour, and five pounds of bran, every one resolving
+to use his share as sparingly as possible. On the 25th, the wind
+veered to S.S.E. when we tacked to S.W. and soon weathered the
+island of <i>Amblow</i>. This is a small island of moderate
+height, in lat. 4&deg; 5' S. tolerably furnished with trees, but
+not inhabited. On the 26th, we had a fine fresh gale at S.E. when
+we tacked and stood away N.E. for the island of Amboina.
+Continuing the same course all the 27th, we got sight of Amboina
+early in the morning of the 28th, bearing due N. about six
+leagues distant. We now stood directly for the island, and about
+noon came just off the harbour, a joyful sight to us then, though
+we soon had cause to think it the worst thing that had befallen
+us.</p>
+
+<p>As we entered the harbour of Amboina, we met two Dutch ships
+coming out, laden with cloves and bound for Batavia. The captain
+of one of these came on board our bark, desiring to know whence
+we came and whither we were bound, and required to have a journal
+of our voyage, promising to return it when he again met us at
+Batavia. We gave him the best answers we could to all his
+questions, and the agent of our owners gave him a succinct
+relation of our voyage, which was of happy consequence to us, as
+to that we afterwards owed our preservation as will appear in the
+sequel. We stood into the harbour that night, and next morning,
+which, according to our account, was Tuesday, but with the Dutch
+Wednesday, two Dutch <i>orambies</i>, as they call the vessels
+used at that place, came on board us, each of which was paddled
+by forty men. In these vessels came the fiscal and several Dutch
+gentlemen, with eighty soldiers, who immediately took possession
+of our bark. They also went below and sealed up all our chests,
+after which the two orambies towed us farther into the harbour,
+so that by noon we were up as high as the town of Amboina, where
+they moored our bark in the ordinary anchorage.</p>
+
+<p>We continued on board till the 31st, two days, not knowing how
+they meant to dispose of us; in which time they would not supply
+us with any victuals, though we offered a crown a pound for beef,
+pork, or bread. In the evening of this day they took us all on
+shore, lodging us in two rooms near the Stadt-house, our bark,
+with all our money and goods, being taken from us, except what we
+happened to have about our persons, and soon after our vessel and
+goods were sold by auction. We were fed with bad meat, which our
+stomachs could ill digest, being very weak with having been so
+long on short allowance, and if we desired to have better we had
+to buy it with our own money. Several of us had fortunately some
+money about us, and as long as that lasted we purchased
+provisions from our keeper. For a Spanish dollar, which was worth
+five shillings and a penny, he would only give us five Dutch
+<i>skellings</i>, or the value of about two and six-pence; and
+even for this he gave us no more victuals than we could have
+bought for five-pence, if we had been at liberty to go into the
+town; so that, instead of five shillings for the Spanish dollar,
+we in reality had only five-pence. During my leisure, I had many
+opportunities of enquiring into the condition of Amboina, by
+which I was enabled to draw up a pretty large account of the
+island and its inhabitants, which I flatter myself will be
+acceptable to the public, as the Dutch are careful to prevent any
+accounts of this place from being published.</p>
+
+<p>This <i>island of Amboina</i>, so famous, or rather infamous,
+for the cruelties and injustice formerly committed there by the
+Dutch upon the English, is twelve leagues long from N. to S.
+being high and mountainous, with intermediate vallies, which are
+very fertile, but the hills are in a great measure barren. The
+soil of the vallies is black, and affords salt-petre. The middle
+of the island is in lat. 3&deg; 40' S. The original inhabitants
+of the island are Malays, who are of middle stature and tawny
+complexions. The women are brighter than the men, and have long
+black hair, reaching to the calves of their legs. They have round
+faces, with small mouths, noses, and eyes. Their dress is a linen
+or cotton waistcoat, reaching only below their breasts, and a
+cloth round their waists, four yards long and a yard broad, which
+serves as a petticoat, as the Dutch women only are permitted to
+wear petticoats; neither are any of the men allowed to wear hats,
+except the king or rajah. The natives are numerous, yet the Dutch
+possess the whole sea-coast, and have here a strong castle, built
+of stone, mounted by sixty pieces of cannon, besides several
+small forts in other parts of the island. Near the castle is a
+small town of about 100 houses, of stone, brick, or timber,
+inhabited by the Dutch. None of the houses exceed one storey, as
+the place is subject to earthquakes, which would endanger the
+houses if higher, and even low as they are they often fall. While
+we were there we had a great earthquake for two days, which did
+much mischief as the ground opened in several places, and
+swallowed up several houses with their inhabitants. Several of
+their people were dug out of the ruins, but most of them dead,
+and many others had their legs and arms broken by the fall of the
+houses. Where we were, the ground swelled up like a wave of the
+sea, but no damage was done.</p>
+
+<p>This island is governed by a council of five, consisting of
+the governor, the senior merchant, or <i>ober koop-man</i>, the
+Malay king, the captain of the fort, and the fiscal, which last
+is the judge. There are said to be on the island 350 Dutch
+soldiers, with 120 or 130 Dutch freemen and petty officers, and
+about as many Chinese, who reside here for the benefit of trade,
+though not allowed to participate in the spice trade, which the
+Dutch reserve entirely to themselves. I thus estimate that the
+Dutch are able to muster in this island about 550 fighting men,
+including themselves and the Chinese; for they can count very
+little on the Malays, who would gladly join any other nation
+against them. The Malay women are said to be very loose, and not
+ashamed of having intercourse with men. They are soon ripe, being
+often married at nine years of age, and are said to have children
+by ten or eleven. All who reside near the coast must live under
+the Dutch government, which is very dissolute and tyrannical, and
+they are severely punished for even small faults, being often
+reduced to slavery, and condemned to wear an iron on their legs
+for life. Those dwelling near the coast under the controul of the
+Dutch are a kind of Christians; but those in the interior, among
+the hills, are Mahometans, and are always at war with the Dutch.
+When these hill Malays take any prisoners, they never give
+quarter; but, after detaining their prisoners a few days, without
+meat or drink, they are produced in public, and have their
+breasts ripped open, and their hearts taken out, all the Malays
+present making great rejoicings. The heads of these slaughtered
+prisoners are then embalmed with spice, and those who can shew
+the greatest number of Dutch heads are held in highest honour. In
+retaliation, when the Dutch take any of these hill Malays, they
+load them with irons, and after keeping them some days in prison,
+they cut off their ears and noses, and after being kept some time
+longer in prison, they are publicly racked to death.</p>
+
+<p>When any of the Malays, living under the Dutch government, are
+found guilty of thieving, their ears and noses are cut off, and a
+great iron chain is fastened to their legs, in which condition
+they are made slaves for life. While we were there, about 500
+poor wretches were in this condition, who were kept constantly
+employed, in sawing timber, cutting stones for building, carrying
+burdens, or other work. They are let out of prison at sunrise,
+the men being kept in one prison and the women in another, and
+are kept hard at work till noon, when they return to prison for
+an hour, being allowed for dinner a pint of coarse boiled rice
+for each. They return again to work at one o'clock, and return to
+prison at six in the evening, when they have a similar allowance
+for supper. Soon afterwards they are locked up in their lodgings,
+where they lie on the bare boards, having only a piece of wood
+for a pillow. Sometimes these poor wretches make shift to escape,
+but are used with great severity if again caught. One of the
+female slaves having escaped, and being retaken, cut her own
+throat to avoid the severe punishment awaiting her, when she was
+dragged out by the hair all round the town, and then hung on a
+gibbet by the feet. Such as are in debt, and cannot satisfy their
+creditors, are turned over by their creditors to the Dutch
+company, who send them to work among their slaves, having the
+same allowance of boiled rice with the rest, with two-pence a day
+towards paying their debts; but they seldom get free till carried
+out dead.</p>
+
+<p>Though the poor natives are thus harshly treated, the Dutch
+wink at the faults of their countrymen, who are seldom punished
+for any crime, unless it be for murder, as in any other case they
+get off for a small sum of money, even for a great fault. The
+women slaves belonging to the free Dutch burgesses have all
+reasonable indulgence, but are obliged to find their own clothes
+and provisions, and pay an acknowledgement of about a sixpence
+daily, in default of which they are severely used. If they bring
+the daily tribute, they may whore or steal, and have no questions
+asked, provided no complaint is made against them. The chief
+products of this island are cloves, ginger, pepper, rattans,
+canes, and a few nutmegs.</p>
+
+<p>The clove-tree is rather slender, and is from twelve to thirty
+or even forty feet high, having small branches, with tapering
+leaves about five inches long and two broad, which smell strong
+of cloves, when rubbed between the fingers. The cloves grow out
+at the tips of the branches, ten, twelve, or fourteen in a
+cluster, being white at first, then green, and lastly of a dark
+copper colour, in which state they are ripe and fit for
+gathering. At this period, they spread cloths or sheets on the
+ground round the bottom of the tree to a good distance, and shake
+the tree, when all the ripe cloves fall down. This is repeated
+every six or seven days for four or five times, till all the
+cloves have ripened and are shaken off. The usual time of
+gathering is October and February, those got in October, which is
+the end of their winter, being called <i>winter cloves</i>, and
+are not accounted so strong and good as the others. These are
+commonly preserved in small jars of about a quart each, of which
+great quantities are sent to various parts of the world. Those
+gathered in February are termed summer cloves, being better and
+stronger than the others, as ripening in the best part of the
+summer; whereas the former have not above a month of fair
+weather, all the rest of their winter season, which is our
+summer, being rainy and cloudy, so that the cloves want sun to
+ripen them. It is a common opinion, but extremely erroneous, that
+cloves, nutmegs, and mace grow all on one tree. One clove-tree
+commonly produces sixty, seventy, or eighty pounds of cloves in
+one season; and every sixth year they are sure to have a double
+crop.</p>
+
+<p>There are a vast number of clove-trees on this island, which
+are carefully looked after, and a register of them is kept in the
+books of the company, being all numbered once every year, and
+they are not allowed to increase beyond a certain limited number,
+for fear of lessening the price, all beyond being cut down. All
+these trees belong to the Company, or the free burgesses, every
+burgess having only a fixed number; and if any one is found to
+have more than his allowance, he is severely fined, and all his
+trees forfeited to the company. Besides, the burgesses are bound
+to deliver the whole produce of their trees to the company at
+six-pence the pound. If any freeman or other is convicted of
+having sold or conveyed cloves from the island, to the value of
+ten pounds, his whole property is forfeited to the company, and
+he becomes a slave for life. The inhabitants used formerly to
+cheat the Dutch in the sale of their cloves, in the following
+manner. They hung up their cloves in a large sheet by the four
+corners, and set a large tub of water underneath, which the
+cloves, being of a very hot and dry nature, drew up by degrees,
+and thus made a large addition to their weight. But the Dutch are
+now too cunning for them, as they always try the cloves, by
+giving them a small filip on the head with the forefinger: if
+thoroughly ripe, and no deceit has been used, the head breaks off
+like a piece of thin brittle glass; but if watered, the clove is
+tough, and will sooner bend than break.</p>
+
+<p>The <i>nutmeg-tree</i> is much like the peach, and there are a
+few of these in this island, but they grow mostly on the island
+of Banda, whence two or three ship-loads are exported yearly. The
+fruit of this tree consists of four parts. The first and outer
+rind is like that of a green walnut. The second, which we call
+<i>mace</i>, is dry and thin. The third is a tough thin shell,
+like that of a chesnut; and the fourth is the <i>nutmeg</i>,
+being the kernel included in that shell.</p>
+
+<p>There are said to be some gold-mines in the island of Amboina;
+and a Malay once shewed me some of the ore, which, he said, came
+from these mines: but he said, at the same time, that he would be
+severely punished if the Dutch knew of his having any, as they
+wish, as much as possible, to keep this from the knowledge of all
+other Europeans.</p>
+
+<p>Once every year the Dutch have to send a large force from
+Amboina on the following business, about the 20th of October. On
+this occasion the governor is attended by about seventy-five
+<i>orambies</i>, or boats of the country, some rowed by 100
+paddles, some eighty, fifty, or forty paddles each, and in each
+of which there are two Dutch soldiers. I reckon therefore in this
+fleet 150 to 160 Dutch soldiers, and about 5250 Malays, allowing
+seventy to each <i>oramby</i> on the average. These seventy-five
+<i>orambies</i> are divided into three squadrons. The
+van-division of twenty <i>orambies</i>, is always commanded by a
+member of the council, who carries a yellow flag. The
+rear-squadron consists also of twenty <i>orambies</i>, and is
+commanded by the fiscal, having a red flag. The rest form the
+centre-squadron, and attend the governor, who has a serjeant and
+corporal, with twelve Dutch soldiers, for his body guard, and
+carries a blue flag. The governor is also attended by the Malay
+king and all their princes or chiefs, lest they should rebel in
+his absence. In this order the fleet proceeds to visit and
+victual the eastern, or Banda islands, especially those that
+produce cloves or nutmegs; and at every island it goes to, it is
+joined by additional boats. This cruize generally lasts for six
+weeks, during which they cut down and destroy all the clove and
+nutmeg-trees they can find, except those which are reserved for
+the use of the company. All or most of these islands would
+produce cloves, but they will not suffer them, having enough at
+Amboina alone to supply all Europe. On all of these islands the
+Dutch keep a few soldiers, three, six, nine, or twelve, according
+to their size, whose only business is to see the trees cut down,
+or at least to take care that they do not increase; as they are
+very jealous lest the English or French should serve them as they
+did the English at Amboina. During this annual expedition, the
+governor levies tribute from all the petty kings and chiefs of
+these islands, and commonly returns to Amboina at the end of six
+weeks.</p>
+
+<p>The island of Amboina produces beavers, hogs, and deer,
+besides other animals. Among its birds are crocadores,
+cassawaries, birds of paradise, and others. The <i>crocadore</i>,
+or <i>cockatoo</i>, is of various sizes, some as large as a hen,
+and others no bigger than a pigeon, being all over white, except
+a crest of feathers on the top of their head, which is always
+either yellow or red. This bunch of feather usually lies flat, in
+a dent, or hollow, on the crown of the head, unless when the bird
+is frightened, when it is erected, and opens like a fan. The
+flesh and legs of this bird are very black, and they smell very
+sweet. When they fly up and down the woods, they cry
+<i>crocadore, crocadore</i>, or <i>cockatoo, cockatoo</i>, whence
+their name. The <i>cassowary</i> is as large as a Virginia
+turkey, having a head nearly the same with the turkey, with a
+long stiff bunch of hair on his breast, also like the turkey. His
+legs are almost as thick as a man's wrist, having five great
+claws on each foot. The back is high and round, both it and the
+pinions being covered with long hair instead of feathers. The
+female of this bird lays an egg so large that its shell will hold
+an English pint of fluid, having a thick shell, spotted with
+green and white, and exactly like China-ware. I never tasted the
+eggs of this bird, but its flesh is good eating, resembling that
+of a turkey, but stronger.</p>
+
+<p>The <i>birds of paradise</i> are about the size of pigeons,
+and are never seen here alive, neither is it known whence they
+come. I have seen several of them at Amboina preserved in spice,
+in which state they are sent as rarities to several parts of the
+world. These birds are said to resort, in February and March,
+when the nutmegs are ripe, to Banda and Amboina, where they feed
+on the outer rind of the nutmeg, after which they fall to the
+ground, quite stupified, or as it were dead drunk, when
+innumerable ants gather about them, and eat them up. There are
+here many kinds of fish, but the most remarkable is the
+<i>sea-porcupine</i>, which is about three feet long, and two and
+a half feet round, having large eyes, two fins on the back, and a
+large fin on each side, near the gills. Its body is all beset
+with sharp spines, or quills, like a porcupine, whence its name
+is derived.</p>
+
+<p>All round Amboina the bottom is sand, but the water is so deep
+that there is no anchorage near its shores, except to leeward, or
+on the west side, where a ship may anchor in forty fathoms, close
+to the shore in the harbour. This harbour runs so deep into the
+island as almost to divide it into two, which are joined by so
+narrow a neck of land that the Malays often haul their canoes
+across. On the east side of the entry into the harbour there is a
+small fort of six guns, close to which the depth is twenty
+fathoms. About a league farther up is the usual anchorage for
+ships, close under the guns of the great castle, which has been
+called <i>Victoria</i> ever since the massacre of the English at
+this place. About two miles farther to the N.E. and within the
+harbour, is the place where the English factory formerly stood;
+and near it is the hole into which the English were said to have
+been thrown after the massacre. Few of us who were now here but
+expected the same fate; and some of the inhabitants did not
+scruple to say that our only protection was our journal, which
+had been sent to Batavia by the Dutch ship we met when going into
+the harbour; as by this it would soon be known all over India
+that a part of Captain Dampier's crew had arrived at Aniboina,
+which would cause us to be enquired after.</p>
+
+<p>A little to the eastward of Amboina there are several other
+small islands, the most noted of which are <i>Boangbessay</i> and
+<i>Hinomsa</i>, only a small distance east from Amboina. These
+two islands are moderately high, and not above a third part so
+large as Amboina. They are both well fortified, and produce store
+of cloves. The chief place for nutmegs is the island of
+<i>Banda</i>, which also belongs to the Dutch, being in lat.
+4&deg; 20' S. 28 leagues S.S.E. from Amboina. This island is said
+to have the form of a man's leg and foot, and is well fortified.
+The governor of Amboina is supreme over all the spice islands,
+even to <i>Ternate</i> and <i>Tidore</i>, which are also spice
+islands belonging to the Dutch, and are about forty miles to the
+north of the equator. We were so troubled at Amboina by
+musquitoes, a sort of gnats, that we had every night to put
+ourselves into a bag before we could go to sleep, as otherwise
+these insects bit us so intolerably that we could get no rest.
+Wherever they bit, there commonly rose a red blister, almost as
+broad as a silver penny, which itched so violently that many
+cannot forbear from scratching, so as to cause inflammations that
+sometimes aid in the loss of a limb. During our stay, we were
+allowed to walk in a paved yard about sixty yards square; but
+were not permitted to go into the town, that we might not learn
+their strength, or make any discoveries prejudicial to them.</p>
+
+<p>We remained at Amboina from the 31st of May to the 14th of
+September, 1705, when three of their sloops were ready to sail
+with cloves to Batavia, in which twenty-five of our men were sent
+away to Batavia, ten of us being left behind, who they said were
+to be sent in another vessel, almost ready to sail. On the 27th
+September, a Malay man was brought to the Stadt-house to be tried
+for his life, being accused by his own wife of having murdered
+his slave. The slave had been dead six months, when the wife
+falling out with her husband, she went to the fiscal in the heat
+of her rage and revealed the murder, on which the husband was
+thrown into prison, but it was generally believed that he was
+wrongfully accused by his wife. During his trial the earthquake
+took place, formerly mentioned, which made the court break up,
+fearful the house might fall on their heads. At this time I
+observed that it is an error to suppose that it is always calm
+during an earthquake; for we had a fine fresh gale at S.S.W. both
+days on which the earthquake happened. Next day the court sat
+about eleven o'clock, continuing the trial; and while the wife
+was in her greatest violence in the accusation of her husband,
+the earth shook again with much violence, which obliged the court
+again to break up.</p>
+
+<p>That same day, the 28th September, I and four more of our men
+were sent off for Batavia in a Chinese sloop, the other five men
+being promised to be sent after us in a short time, but we never
+heard of them afterwards. We sailed westwards till we came to the
+island of Lancas, in lat. 5&deg; 27' S. and by my estimation,
+2&deg; 21', or 155 miles W. from Amboina. We then steered W. by
+N. till we made two islands called the <i>Cabeses</i>, whence we
+procured some hundred cocoa nuts. The eastermost island, to which
+we sent our boat, is low and uninhabited, but has been planted
+full of cocoa-nut trees by the Dutch, for the use of their
+vessels going between the spice islands and Batavia, as it is a
+kind of miracle to see any other ship in these parts except those
+belonging to the Dutch. Off this island we met our own bark which
+had brought us from America to Amboina, the Dutch having fitted
+her up with a main-mast and converted her into a very good
+vessel. This island is in lat. 5&deg; 23' S. and nearly W. by N.
+from the island of Lancas, about forty-five miles distant, and
+has a shoal extending about two miles from the shore. To the S.W.
+of this is the other island of <i>Cabeses</i>, a pretty high
+island, on which the Dutch always keep a corporal and two
+soldiers, who go two or three times all over the isle to see that
+no cloves are planted, and if they find any to cut them down and
+burn them, lest any other nation might be able to procure that
+commodity, in which case Amboina would become of little value, as
+cloves are its only valuable product.</p>
+
+<p>We next passed by the S. end of the island of <i>Bouton</i>,
+or <i>Booton</i>, which is pretty large, and in the lat. of
+5&deg; 45' S. We steered W. from thence, between the islands
+<i>Celebes</i> and <i>Zalayer</i> or <i>Salayr</i>. The S.W. leg
+or peninsula of Celebes is very high land. Celebes is composed of
+very high land, very well inhabited, being a very large island,
+extending through seven degrees of latitude. On the west side of
+its southern end the Dutch have a factory named Macasser, where
+they have a fortress of about seventy guns, and a garrison of 600
+or 700 Dutch soldiers. The chief product is rice, with which they
+supply most of their eastern islands from hence. There are said
+to be gold-mines in this island, of which the Dutch are not yet
+masters, as the inhabitants are often at war with them, and have
+hitherto been able to keep them from those parts of the island.
+Between the south end of Celebes and the island of Salayr there
+are three small low islands, and the best channel is through
+between the island next to Salayr, and another small isle to the
+northward. This is called the <i>second</i> passage, the first,
+third, and fourth of these passages being very dangerous, so that
+ships generally avoid them if possible. I would willingly give an
+account of every island I have occasion to mention, but as that
+is not in my power, I must rest satisfied with what I am able to
+say consistent with truth.</p>
+
+<p>The island of <i>Zalayer</i>, or <i>Salayr</i>, is of moderate
+height, inhabited by Malays, and planted all round with
+cocoa-trees, the natives being obliged to send a considerable
+quantity of nuts and oil to the Dutch at Macasser as tribute. We
+steered from hence W. by N. till we had passed a dangerous shoal
+called the Porill, after which we stood to the S.W. and saw in
+the night a small island just in our way, which we were unable to
+weather, and therefore stood off till daylight, when we were to
+the S. of that isle, when we tacked and stood again S.W. and soon
+after saw two other small isles bearing from N. to N.W. For about
+two miles of our course at this time, the sea was so transparent
+that we could plainly discern the bottom, which was never less
+than five or more than six fathoms, yet appeared only two to the
+eye. We passed over this shoal about a league to the S. of these
+two small islands, this being the narrowest part of the shoal,
+for it is five or six leagues in breadth farther to the south;
+yet is it every where without danger, as it has very uniform
+soundings, seldom over or under five or six fathoms. To the north
+of these islands, however, it is very dangerous, being all over
+foul rocky ground, and having in some places not more than four
+or five feet water; it is proper, therefore, always to keep to
+the south of these islands, where the passage is perfectly safe.
+Yet in the Dutch charts, these dangers are laid down to the
+southward, which should have been to the northwards, and they lay
+down the safe shoals to the northward, whereas we now went to the
+southwards, as they always do. The captain of our vessel had a
+chart on board, which shewed these things exactly as I have now
+described, but which I compared with several others, also on
+board, which I found quite different. I asked our captain the
+reason of this, when he told me that all these shoals and
+dangerous places were well known to the Hollanders, but they did
+not wish they should be known by others, but rather that
+strangers might lose their ships among these rocks and shoals, as
+we certainly had done, if we had sailed according to these common
+charts.</p>
+
+<p>We entered the harbour of Batavia on the 21st October, and
+sent immediately on landing to join the rest of our men, who were
+still detained in custody. We were soon afterwards visited by the
+first major, who desired us to transmit to the general, through
+him, an account of the losses we had sustained by our being taken
+prisoners at Amboina, and we should receive compensation for our
+effects, loss of time, and imprisonment. We each accordingly drew
+up accounts of our losses, which we sent by the major to the
+governor, who sent us back word that we should speedily have our
+freedom. On the 27th we were sent for to the fort, where most of
+our money was returned; but we could have no satisfaction for our
+goods, imprisonment, and loss of time, the governor-general
+saying that he had given us all that had been sent to him as ours
+by the governor of Amboina, and that we were now at liberty to go
+where we pleased. As our vessel had been taken from us for the
+use of the Dutch Company, we desired he would be pleased to find
+us some ship for our return home, which he promised; with which
+arrangement we were forced to be satisfied, and took lodgings in
+the city of Batavia, till an opportunity might offer for our
+return to Europe. In the course of seven weeks residence here, I
+made all the observations I could upon this place and its
+inhabitants. I found the city in as good a condition as could be
+wished, and the people seemed to be as prudent and as industrious
+as any I had ever seen: But, as the descriptions already
+published of this place are so exact as to render my observations
+superfluous, I shall content myself with a very short
+description, referring the curious reader to the large accounts
+that have been published by Dutch, French, and English writers,
+but especially the first.</p>
+
+<p>BATAVIA is the chief place belonging to the Hollanders in
+India, and receives all the productions of India, Japan, and
+China. The Malays are the original natives; but besides these and
+the Dutch, who are the masters, it is inhabited by Portuguese,
+Chinese, Persians, and negroes. The town is large and handsome,
+having seven churches, belonging to the Dutch, Portuguese,
+Malays, and Chinese.[213] The town has many spacious houses built
+in the European manner, and is walled and moated all round, the
+ramparts being well provided with cannon. In the middle of the
+city there is a spacious square, in which is the stadt-house,
+where all public matters are transacted. This city is usually
+governed by a member of the States-General of the United
+Netherlands, with the title of Governor-General of India, all
+other governors of the possessions belonging to the Dutch Company
+being subordinate to his authority. The inhabitants are well
+pleased in the governor-general being often changed, as all
+prisoners are released at the installation of a new one, except
+those charged with murder. He has twelve counsellors to assist
+him, who are called the <i>rads</i>, or lords of India, and are
+mostly such as have formerly been governors in other places, as
+in Ceylon, Amboina, Malacca, &amp;c.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 213: This seems to indicate that, of the
+seven <i>churches</i>, some belong to the Dutch Calvinists and
+Portuguese Roman Catholics, while others are Mahometan places of
+worship for the Malays, and idol temples, or <i>pagodas</i>,
+frequented by the Chinese.--E]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The city is divided by many canals, over which there are
+bridges almost at the end of every street, together with booms to
+lay across, that no boats may go in or out after sunset. The
+chief product of the adjoining country is pepper, of which the
+Dutch export great quantities every year; and there are also some
+few diamonds and other precious stones. The chief fruits here are
+plantains, bananas, oranges, lemons, mangostans, and rumbostans.
+The <i>mangostan</i> is about the size of a golden rennet, quite
+round, and resembling a small pomegranate, the outer rind being
+like that of the pomegranate, but of a darker colour, but the
+inside of the rind of a fine red. The fruit lies within the rind,
+commonly in four or five cloves, of a fine white, very soft and
+juicy, within each clove having a small black stone or pip. The
+pulp is very delicious, but the stone is very bitter, and is
+therefore thrown away, after sucking the fruit The
+<i>rumbostan</i> is about the size of a walnut after the green
+outside peel is off, and is nearly of the shape of a walnut,
+having a thick tough outer rind of a deep red colour, full of red
+knobs, within which is a white jelly-like pulp, and within that
+is a large stone. The pulp is very delicate, and never does any
+harm, however much of it a man may eat, providing he swallow the
+stones; but otherwise they are said to produce fevers.</p>
+
+<p>This island of Java, on the north side of which Batavia is
+situated, extends about ten degrees from east to west, or nearly
+700 English miles. The weather is here extremely regular, and the
+inhabitants know how to use it to the best advantage. During the
+eastern monsoon, the land-winds are at S.E. Sometimes more
+southerly; and the sea-winds blow from the N.E. fine pleasant
+gales. This easterly monsoon is accounted the good monsoon, being
+fine clear and fair weather, and begins in April, ending in
+October. The other, or westerly, is called the bad monsoon,
+consisting of blustering rainy weather, accompanied with much
+thunder and lightning, especially in December, January, and
+February. This bad monsoon begins in November and ends in March
+or the beginning of April; during which the land-winds are W.S.W.
+or S.W. and the sea-winds at N.W. and W.N.W.</p>
+
+<p>The anchoring ground all along the north side of Java, from
+Madura to Batavia, is a fine oozy bottom, free from rocks. The
+principal places on this side of the island are Batavia, Bantam,
+Japara, Samarang, Surabon, Taggal, Quale, and Rambang; all of
+which are possessed by the Dutch. These settlements afford
+abundance of rice, with which the Dutch supply all their
+out-factories near Java, and also produce excellent plank for
+ship-building. The principal place for ship-building is
+<i>Rambang</i>, where the free burgesses of Batavia usually go to
+build their small vessels, as sloops and brigs. Ships of five,
+six, and seven hundred tons, often load with timber at Rambang,
+Quale, Japara, and other places; and each ship, after being fully
+laden, takes a great raft or float of the largest timber, which
+she tows along with her to Batavia. Some of these rafts are said
+to be thirty feet square, and draw twenty feet water. There are
+commonly six ships employed in this timber trade, and they
+usually make four voyages yearly in the good monsoon, for in the
+bad they cannot do any thing. Ail this timber is for the most
+part landed on the island of <i>Ormrust</i>, between four and
+five leagues from Batavia, where there are about 200
+ship-carpenters, who are constantly in full employ, and here the
+Dutch careen their ships. This island is well fortified, being,
+to use a sea phrase, all round a bed of guns.</p>
+
+<p>We had notice on the 2d December, 1705, that all of us who
+wished to return to England should immediately go on board the
+homeward-bound Dutch East India fleet, which we did accordingly,
+and sailed next day. This fleet consisted of twelve ships, as
+well provided in all respects as any I had ever seen, and we made
+the voyage in good order. We arrived at the Cape of Good Hope on
+the 3d February, 1706. The Dutch have here a strong fortress, and
+about half a mile from this is a fine town of 150 houses, with a
+small church. The country in the neighbourhood is very high, and
+the mountains are mostly barren, producing only a few shrubs; but
+the country is full of lions, tigers, elephants, and other wild
+beasts, which give great disturbance to the settlers, for which
+reason the government gives a reward of fifty-two guilders for
+killing a lion, equal to four pounds six and eight-pence, and
+twenty-four guilders, or forty shillings, for killing a tiger.
+While we were there, a certain Scotsman killed four lions, three
+tigers, and three wild elephants, for all of which he got the
+rewards. The Dutch make here a great quantity of an excellent
+wine, called Cape wine, which is sold by retail at eight-pence a
+quart.</p>
+
+<p>We sailed from the Cape the 24th of March, excellently
+provided with every thing requisite for the voyage. We were now
+twenty-four sail, having nine English and fifteen Dutch ships. On
+the 17th April we made the island of Ascension, but did not touch
+there even for turtle, although their season of laying, having
+been so well provided with fresh provisions at the Cape that we
+had no occasion for more. On the 19th there happened a great
+earthquake, when the ship seemed for some time as if she run
+along the ground, on which we heaved the lead on both sides, but
+had no ground at 200 fathoms. The whole fleet felt the shock at
+the same time; so that for about ten minutes every ship was
+making signals and firing guns. On the 14th June we saw four sail
+of French privateers, which were waiting for us; but after
+looking at us for some time, and observing the regular order in
+which we sailed, they did not think it adviseable to make any
+attempt against us, and bore away. This shewed the great
+advantage of the regular order observed by the Dutch in sailing,
+in which on this occasion they were imitated by the English ships
+in company.</p>
+
+<p>On the 30th June we were in lat. 62&deg; 40' N. the highest
+north I was ever in, and I could not help noticing the great
+difference in point of cold here and in 60&deg; S. There we had
+continual showers of snow or hail, with bitter cold weather;
+while here the weather was fair, and the cold moderate. In the
+evening of the 3d July we saw the Faro Islands. On the 5th we met
+with eight Dutch men of war, which were cruizing on purpose to
+convoy us safe home, accompanied by four victuallers and three of
+the Company's privateers. On the 15th July we all arrived safely
+in the Texel, and got on the 17th to Amsterdam. After this, I and
+the rest of our company went to see several parts of Holland, and
+we arrived on the 26th August, 1706, in England, after many
+dangers by sea and land, being only 18 of us out of 183. The news
+of our misfortunes reached home before us, and every body was
+solicitous to have an account of our adventures, especially while
+under the power of the Dutch at Amboina. These importunities led
+me to believe that a faithful relation of our voyage would be
+acceptable to the public, and I hope some of the descriptions,
+observations, and discoveries contained in this small performance
+may be found useful, and not altogether destitute of
+entertainment.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION III.</p>
+
+<p><i>Brief Account of Stradling, Clipperton, and Dampier, after
+their respective Separations, till their Returns to
+England.</i></p>
+
+<p>The reader may remember that Captain Dampier, in the St
+George, left <i>Captain Stradling</i> in the Cinque-ports on the
+19th of May, 1704, at King's Island, in the Bay of Panama. The
+force under Captain Stradling was too insignificant to maintain
+him long in the South Sea, for which reason he went to the island
+of Juan Fernandez in search of shelter and refreshments. They
+were in so forlorn a condition at this time, that Alexander
+Selkirk[214] chose rather to remain by himself in that island,
+than to run the hazard of returning to the South Sea in the
+Cinque-ports. In this he shewed great judgment, as the
+Cinque-ports actually foundered on the coast of <i>Barbacora</i>
+(Barbacoas), and only Captain Stradling, with six or seven of his
+men, were saved, and sent prisoners to Lima. Captain Stradling
+was alive there at the time when Woods Rogers came into the South
+Sea, but what became of him afterwards is unknown.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 214: This person, on whose simple
+adventures the romance of Robinson Crusoe was soon afterwards
+founded, will be more particularly mentioned in a subsequent
+chapter of this book.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The next person who left Captain Dampier was his mate, <i>Mr
+Clipperton</i> of whom we shall have occasion to say much in a
+succeeding voyage round the world. Clipperton was certainly a man
+of parts and resolution, and probably would not have deserted
+from Captain Dampier, if he had not thought that his commander
+was resolved to remain in his old crazy ship in the South Sea
+till she foundered. Finding many of the crew of the same opinion,
+he thought proper to leave him at the middle islands, as already
+related, where it was plain to every one that the St George was
+no longer fit for going to sea. Mr Clipperton set sail on the 2d
+September, 1704, having twenty-one men, in a small bark of ten
+tons, with two masts and two square sails, two swivels, two or
+three barrels of powder, and some shot. With this inconsiderable
+force, he ventured into Rio Leon, on the coast of Mexico, where
+he took two Spanish ships riding at anchor. One of these was very
+old and worm-eaten, which he immediately sunk. The other was new,
+and had goods on board to a considerable value, and for her
+Captain Clipperton demanded a ransom of 10,000 dollars, by two of
+his prisoners whom he set on shore. The prisoners spoke so
+handsomely of Clipperton that the governor resolved to treat with
+him, and sent him word that he did not think his offer
+unreasonable, but the owners were entirely ruined, and the town
+so poor that it was impossible to comply with his terms; but if
+4000 dollars would content him, which was all they could raise,
+that sum should be sent aboard, and the governor would rely on
+the honour of Captain Clipperton for the release of the ship.
+Clipperton accepted this proposal, but as his bark was in want of
+provisions and water, he sent word to the governor, that every
+kind of provisions and drink were not to be considered as within
+the capitulation. This was readily agreed to, the money was sent
+on board, and as soon as the provisions were got out of her, the
+ship was honourably restored.</p>
+
+<p>Clipperton went thence to the Bay of Salinas, where his little
+vessel was drawn on shore, and cleaned and effectually refitted,
+after which he resolved in this cockle-shell to sail for the East
+Indies, which he actually did, keeping in the latitude of 18&deg;
+N. and reached the Philippine Islands in fifty-four days. While
+among these islands, a Spanish priest came off to his bark in a
+canoe, and Clipperton detained him till furnished with a supply
+of fresh provisions, and then set him at liberty. His next scheme
+was to sail for the English settlement of Pulo Condore, in lat
+8&deg; 40' N. off the river of Cambadia, and actually came there:
+But finding that the English had been massacred by their Indian
+soldiers on the 3d March, 1705, for which reason no relief or
+safety could be expected there, he bore away for Macao, a port
+belonging to the Portuguese on the coast of China, where he and
+his people separated, every one shifting for himself as well as
+they could. Some went to Benjar,[215] in order to enter into the
+service of the English East India Company, while others went to
+Goa to serve the Portuguese, and some even entered into the
+service of the Great Mogul, being so bare after so long a voyage,
+that any means of providing for themselves were desirable.
+Clipperton returned to England in 1706, and afterwards made
+another voyage round the world in the Success, of which an
+account will be found in its proper place.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 215: This is perhaps an error for Bombay;
+yet it may have been Benjarmassin, on the southern coast of
+Borneo.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>It is not easy to conceive a worse situation than that in
+which Captain Dampier was left at the close of the year 1704,
+when Mr Funnell and his people separated from him, being only
+able to retain twenty-eight of his men, and even these were
+prevailed upon to stay, by representing that it was easy to
+surprise some Spanish village, and that the fewer they were, each
+would have the greater share in the plunder. After some
+consultation, they resolved to attack Puna, a hamlet or village
+of thirty houses and a small church, the inhabitants of which are
+well to pass, and are under the command of a lieutenant. Dampier
+landed here in a dark night, and, surprizing the inhabitants in
+their beds, got possession of the place with very little
+trouble.</p>
+
+<p>After plundering this town, they repaired to the island of
+<i>Lobos de la Mar</i>, and took a small Spanish bark by the way,
+well furnished with provisions. They now resolved to quit their
+own ship, and to endeavour to sail for the East Indies in this
+small bark; and accordingly left the St George at anchor under
+the island of Lobos, after taking every thing valuable out of
+her. They then sailed across the Pacific Ocean to the East
+Indies, and arrived at the Dutch settlements, where their bark
+was seized, and they were turned adrift to shift for themselves
+as they best might. Dampier returned naked to his owners, with a
+melancholy relation of his unfortunate expedition, occasioned
+chiefly by his own strange temper, being so self-sufficient and
+overbearing that few or none of his officers could bear with him;
+and when once disputation gets in among those who have the
+command, success is not to be expected. Even in this distress, he
+was received as an eminent man, notwithstanding his faillings,
+and was introduced to Queen Anne, having the honour to kiss her
+hand, and to give her majesty some account of the dangers he had
+undergone. The merchants were so sensible of his want of conduct,
+that they resolved never to trust him any more with a command;
+and this, with the poverty resulting from his late unlucky
+voyage, obliged him to make the tour of the world once more as
+pilot to the Duke, commanded by Captain Woods Rogers, the
+relation of which voyage forms the subject of next Section.</p>
+
+<h2><a name="chapter4-10" id="chapter4-10">CHAPTER X.</a></h2>
+
+<p>VOYAGE ROUND THE WORLD BY CAPTAIN WOODS ROGERS, AND STEPHEN
+COURTNEY, IN 1708-1711.[216]</p>
+
+<p>INTRODUCTION.</p>
+
+<p>It has been universally allowed by all competent judges, that
+there never was a voyage of this nature so excellently adjusted
+or so well provided in all respects, as the present, or in which
+the accidents that usually happen in privateers were so
+effectually guarded against; owing to the abilities of the
+gentlemen at Bristol, who both charged themselves with the
+expence of fitting out this expedition, and took care of every
+thing relating to its being properly fitted out. Their first care
+was in the choice of proper officers, in which they were very
+fortunate. Captain Woods Rogers, who had the chief command, being
+a bold, active, and indefatigable officer, not too ready to give
+up his opinion to others, and not apt to be flattered by other
+people giving up theirs to him. He had been a great sufferer by
+the French; but his most singular qualities, and which chiefly
+recommended him to the command of this expedition, were a
+peculiar felicity in maintaining authority over his seamen, and a
+wonderful readiness in devising expedients under the most
+difficult circumstances.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 216: A Cruizing Voyage round the World,
+&amp;c. by Captain Woods Rogers, 8vo. London, 1712. Voyage to the
+South Sea, and round the World, &amp;c. by Captain Edward Cooke,
+2 vol. 8vo. London, 1712. Harris, I. 150. Callender, III.
+231.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Captain Stephen Courtney, the second in command, was a
+gentleman of birth, fortune, and amiable character, who had
+contributed considerably to the expence of the voyage, and went
+in the expedition that he might see how it was conducted, and
+either be able to prevent miscarriages, or at least to make a
+faithful report of its incidents. Captain Thomas Dover, the third
+in command, was a proprietor also. He was bred a physician, and
+afterwards made a noise in the world by recommending the use of
+crude mercury. He was a man of rough temper, and could not easily
+agree with those about him, yet his morose disposition hindered
+him from making any party to support him in his ill humours.
+Captain Cooke, fourth in command, was second to Captain Courtney.
+The pilot in the larger ship was Captain William Dampier, who was
+now to proceed for the fourth time into the South Sea, where his
+name and exploits were well known and terrible to the Spaniards.
+The adventurers were also extremely careful in the choice of
+inferior officers, and even as far as possible in procuring the
+best private men that could be found.</p>
+
+<p>In the next place, the proprietors established rules for the
+proper conduct of the voyage, which were digested in the
+following articles of instruction, and signed by a committee of
+proprietors at Bristol, on the 14th July, 1708.</p>
+
+<p>"For the better government and regulating the affairs of the
+present voyage of the ships Duke and Duchess, we do hereby
+appoint and constitute Captain Woods Rogers, Captain Thomas
+Dover, Captain William Dampier, Mr Charlton Vanbrugh, Messrs
+Green, Fry, Charles Pope, Glendall, Bullet, and Wasse, all of
+these officers on board the Duke, to be the council on board that
+ship: We also appoint Captain Stephen Courtney, Captain Edward
+Cooke, Messrs William Stratton, Bathe, John Rogers, White, and
+the master, officers on board the Duchess, to be council on board
+that ship, in case of the ships being separated from each other.
+But, when in company, the whole officers of both ships above
+named, are conjunctly to come on board either ship at the summons
+of Captains Rogers, Dover, and Courtney, or any two of them, and
+to be the council referred to in our general orders, to determine
+all matters and things that may arise or be necessary for the
+general good daring the whole voyage. In case of the death,
+sickness, or desertion of any of the above officers in either
+ship, the rest who are of the council of that ship shall convene
+on board their own ship, and chose another fit person into that
+office and council."</p>
+
+<p>"We farther require and direct, that all attempts, attacks,
+and designs upon the enemy, either by sea or land, shall be first
+consulted and debated, either in the particular council if
+separated, or in the general council if together; and as the
+majority shall conclude how and when to act or do, it shall be
+indispensably and cheerfully put in execution, and without
+unnecessary delay. In case of any discontents, differences, or
+misbehaviours among the officers and men, which may tend to the
+disturbance of good order and government on board, either the men
+or persons may appeal to the captain to have a hearing by a
+council, or the captain shall call a council to have the matter
+heard and decided, and may prefer or displace any man according
+to desert. All decisions and judgments of the council shall be
+finally determined by the majority of voices; and in case of an
+equality, Captain Dover is to have a double voice as president,
+and we do accordingly order and appoint him president of the
+council. All matters transacted in this council shall be
+registered in a book by the clerk appointed for that
+purpose."</p>
+
+<p>It was agreed between the owners and those employed in this
+voyage, that all prizes were to be divided after the following
+rule. Two-third parts of the clear profits were to belong to the
+owners, and one-third to the officers, seamen, and landsmen,
+which last was to be distributed according to the following
+proportions.</p>
+
+<pre>
+          If wholly on Shares.          If part on Shares, and
+                                           part on Wages.[217]
+   A captain, Shares         24
+   Second captain,           20     Wages.              Shares
+   First lieutenant,         16     &pound;3                     8
+   Second lieutenant,        10      2 10                  5
+   Third lieutenant,          8      2                     4
+   Master,                   10      2 10                  5
+   First mate,                6      2                     3
+   Second mate,               4      1 15                  2-1/2
+   Surgeon,                  10      2 10                  5
+   Surgeon's mate,            6      1 10                  3
+   Owner's agent,            10      2 10                  5
+   Pilot,                     8      2 10                  4
+   Carpenter,                 6      2                     3
+   Carpenter's mate,          4      1 10                  2
+   Boatswain,                 6      2                     3
+   Boatswain's mate,          4      1 10                  2
+   Gunner,                    6      2                     3
+   Gunner's mate,             3-1/2  1 10                  1-3/4
+   Cooper,                    5      1 10                  2-1/2
+   Cooper's mate,             3-1/2  1  5                  1-3/4
+   Midshipman,                4      1 10                  2
+
+                             Shares. Wages.               Shares.
+
+   Quarter-master,            3      1 10                 1-1/2
+   Sailors,                   2-1/2  1  8                 1-3/4
+   Land-men,                  1-1/2    14                 0-3/4
+</pre>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 217: The wages were probably monthly,
+though not so explained.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>"We have two relations of this voyage, one by Captain Rogers,
+and the other by Captain Cooke, both in the form of journals. On
+the present occasion I shall chiefly follow that written by
+Captain Woods Rogers, taking occasionally explanatory
+circumstances and descriptions from Captain Cooke: But as they
+agree pretty well in their relations, I do not think it necessary
+to break the thread of the discourse, but shall proceed as near
+as may be in the words of Captain Rogers."--<i>Harris</i>.</p>
+
+<p>Besides using as the ground-work of the present chapter, the
+narrative drawn up by Harris from the publications of Captain
+Woods Rogers and Edward Cooke, we have carefully employed both of
+these original works on the present occasion; yet have not deemed
+it at all necessary or adviseable to retain the minute and
+tedious nautical remarks, and have chiefly attended to such
+interesting circumstances as had not been sufficiently
+illustrated in the preceding chapters of this book.--E.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION I.</p>
+
+<p><i>Narrative of the Voyage, from England to the Island of Juan
+Fernandez</i>.</p>
+
+<p>Our force on this voyage consisted of the Duke of 300 tons,
+carrying thirty guns and 170 men, Captain Woods Rogers commander,
+with Captain Thomas Dover as second captain, and three
+lieutenants; and the Duchess of 270 tons, with twenty-six guns
+and 150 men, commanded by Captain Stephen Courtney, having
+Captain Edward Cooke as second captain, and three lieutenants.
+Both ships had commission from George Prince of Denmark, husband
+to Queen Anne, and Lord High Admiral of England, to cruize on the
+coasts of Peru and Mexico in the South Sea, against the French
+and Spaniards, and to act jointly and separately.</p>
+
+<p>On the 15th June, 1708, we went down to King-road, to fit our
+ships for sea and the better to keep our men on board, where we
+continued till the 1st August, when we weighed anchor and towed
+down about five miles below the Holmes. We made sail at one next
+morning, and got into Cork harbour on the 5th August, where we
+remained till the 27th adjusting all things, taking on board
+additional men provided there for us, and discharging some we had
+brought from Bristol, who were found unfit for the voyage. Our
+complement of men in both ships was now 333, of which above a
+third were foreigners from most nations, several of her majesty's
+subjects we had on board being tinkers, tailors, haymakers,
+pedlars, fiddlers, and the like, with one negro and ten boys; yet
+we hoped to be well manned with this motley crew, when they had
+got their sea-legs and had learnt the use of arms. We had double
+the number of officers usual in privateers, which was meant to
+prevent mutinies, so usual in long voyages, and to secure a
+succession in case of deaths. Our holds were so full of
+provisions, that our cables, and a great deal of our bread and
+some water casks were between decks, and having 183 men in the
+Duke, and 151 in the Duchess, we were obliged to send our sheet,
+cable, and other new store cordage on shore at Cork, to make room
+for our men and provisions, yet were so much crowded and lumbered
+that we could not have engaged an enemy, without throwing much
+provisions and stores overboard.</p>
+
+<p>Having agreed upon signals between our two ships, and
+appointed places of rendezvous in case of separation, and how
+long to wait at each for one another, we took sailing orders from
+the Hastings man of war on the 1st September, the better to keep
+company of her and a fleet bound to the southward and westward.
+We sailed that day, and the next we and our consort stood out
+from the fleet to chase a sail we saw to windward, when we had
+the satisfaction to find that our ship sailed as well as any in
+the fleet, not excepting the man of war, so that we hoped we
+should find our heels, although so deeply laden. We found the
+chase to be a small vessel coming from Baltimore to join the
+fleet. On the 4th, Captain Paul of the Hastings proposed to
+Captain Courtney and me, after he left the fleet, which would be
+soon, to cruise in company a few days off Cape Finister, and
+obligingly supplied us with some scrubbers, iron scrapers for the
+ships bottoms, a speaking-trumpet, and some other things of which
+we were in want, and would not accept any thing in return, as our
+voyage was to be so long, saying he hoped our owners would
+restore the same articles for his ship on his return. That
+evening, calling our crews on deck, we informed them whither we
+were bound, and the objects of our expedition; that if any
+disputes or mutinies had arisen, we might have sent home the
+refractory in the man of war. Only one poor fellow was
+dissatisfied, who was to have been tithing-man that year, and
+feared his wife might have to pay forty shillings for his
+default; but seeing all around him pleased with the hope of
+plunder, he too became easy, and drank as heartily as any one to
+the success of the voyage.</p>
+
+<p>We gave chase to a ship on the 10th September, about six in
+the morning, which we came up with about three in the afternoon,
+when she shewed Swedish colours. On examining the master, we
+found he had come round Scotland and Ireland, and suspected he
+had contraband of war, as some of the men, whom we found drunk,
+told us they had gunpowder and cables on board; wherefore we
+resolved to examine her strictly, putting twelve of our men on
+board, and taking the Swedish master and twelve of his men aboard
+our ships. Next morning, having examined the men and searched the
+ship, we found it difficult to prove her a legal prize, and, not
+willing to lose time in carrying her into a port for farther
+examination, we let her go without embezzlement. She was a
+frigate-built ship, of about 270 tons, and twenty-two guns,
+belonging to Stadt, near Hamburgh. The crew of the Duke mutinied,
+headed by our boatswain and other three inferior officers,
+alleging the Swede was a good prize, and had much contraband
+goods on board, though we could find none: but being supported by
+my officers, well armed, I at length pacified the men, after
+putting ten of the mutineers in irons, and soundly whipping a
+sailor who had excited the rest. This mutiny would not have been
+easily got the better of, but for the number of our officers,
+whom we now found very useful in bringing our crews under good
+discipline, a very difficult matter in privateers, and without
+which it is utterly impossible to succeed in distant and
+important enterprises. We sent home Giles Cash, our boatswain, in
+irons, on board the Crown galley, with letters to our owners,
+justifying our severity; and next morning I discharged our
+prisoners from their irons, on their humble submission, and
+solemn promise of dutiful behaviour in future.</p>
+
+<p>On the 18th, between Fuertaventura and Grand Canary, we chased
+and took a small Spanish ship, bound from Teneriff to
+Fuertaventura, having several men and women passengers, and laden
+with a variety of goods. Next day we bore away for Oratavia
+Roads, where, after much discussion, we sold the vessel for 450
+dollars, retaining all her goods. The 30th September we put into
+the harbour of St Vincent, one of the Cape de Verd islands,
+coming to anchor in ten fathoms within the rock. Seeing several
+men on shore, though the island is not inhabited, Captain Cook
+went in the pinnace, well armed, to see who they were, and found
+them some Portuguese from St Antonio, come to catch turtles or
+sea-tortoises, who told him we could have wood and water at this
+island, which is in lat. 16&deg; 55' N. long. 24&deg; 50' W. from
+Greenwich. It has great plenty of Guinea fowl, with some hogs and
+goats; and we caught abundance of fish in the road. In the woods
+there are great numbers of spiders as large as walnuts, and their
+webs are very troublesome to get through, being very numerous,
+and as strong as ordinary threads.</p>
+
+<p>While here, new disturbances arose among the men, in relation
+to the effects taken in the late prize; as we had here an
+opportunity of purchasing various things, and every one wished to
+have the means of purchasing. To put an end to all these
+heart-burnings, and to fix the people in a resolution of doing
+their duty, we determined to settle this affair by framing such
+articles as might inspire the seamen with courage and constancy,
+and make them as willing to obey as the officers to command,
+without giving our owners any cause of complaint. It cost us some
+trouble to adjust these articles, but they effectually answered
+our purpose, and all our people readily agreed to abide by
+them.</p>
+
+<p>After staying two days here, in which we heeled our ships, and
+got wood and water on board, our boat returned with limes and
+tobacco; but our linguist, who had been sent ashore to procure
+refreshments, did not make his appearance. Soon after there came
+a boat from that part of the island where the governor resides,
+on board of which was the deputy-governor, a negro, who brought
+limes, tobacco, oranges, fowls, potatoes, hogs, bananas,
+musk-melons, watermelons, and brandy, all of which we bought of
+him, paying in prize goods we had taken out of the bark at the
+Canaries, and at a cheap rate; for they are a poor people, and
+are ready to truck for any thing they want at any price, in such
+payments as they can make. Being ready to sail, we called a
+council to consider what was to be done in respect to the absence
+of our linguist, who had promised the deputy-governor to wait for
+him at the water-side, but had broke his word; and therefore, as
+his absence seemed to be entirely his own fault, it was
+unanimously resolved that we ought to leave him behind, rather
+than our two ships should wait for one man, who had disobeyed
+orders. We were the more inclined to this, that others might
+learn, by this example, to comply with their instructions when
+sent ashore, and might come aboard again without delay, after
+completing their business, and not flatter themselves that fair
+words and fine excuses were to atone for breach of duty, to
+humour the fancies of individuals, at the expence of delaying the
+voyage. This was certainly but an indifferent place for our
+linguist to be left in; but he knew the people and the language,
+and might easily get a passage home. We persisted therefore in
+our resolution, and gave orders for sailing as soon as possible,
+that we might not lose the proper season, and be obliged to
+double Cape Horn at a wrong time of the year.</p>
+
+<p>Captain Dampier and others in our ships, who had formerly put
+in at St Jago, another of the Cape Verd islands, said that this
+island of St Vincent, though not so much frequented, is
+preferable to St Jago for outward-bound ships, as its road is
+much better, has better land, and is more convenient for wood and
+water. The island is mountainous and barren, its plainest part
+being over against the sandy bay where we anchored. The wood
+growing upon it is short, and only fit for fuel. We watered at a
+little stream that flows from a spring down the hill, and is good
+fresh-water, the others in that neighbourhood being brackish. It
+was formerly inhabited and had a governor, but is now only
+frequented by the inhabitants of the other islands in the season
+for catching turtle, these islanders being mostly negroes and
+mulattoes, and very poor. The stock of wild goats on this island
+has been mostly destroyed by the inhabitants of St Nicholas and
+St Antonio. The heat at this place was so excessive to us, newly
+from Europe, that several of our men became sick, and were
+blooded. There are a few wild asses; and some of our officers
+wounded one, after a long chase, yet he held out, and tired
+them.</p>
+
+<p>These islands are named from Cape Verd, on the coast of
+Africa, whence they lie about 170 leagues to the west.[218] They
+are ten in number, of which St Jago, St Nicholas, Bonavista, St
+Antonio, Brava, Mayo, and Fuego are inhabited. <i>St Jago</i> is
+much the largest and best, and is the seat of the chief governor.
+Besides sugar and tobacco, this island produces a small quantity
+of indigo, which, with goat-skins and some other articles, are
+sent to Lisbon. The capital is named likewise St Jago, and is the
+see of a bishop. There is another town, named <i>Ribera
+grande</i>, said to consist of 500 houses, which has a good
+harbour. The air of this island is rather unwholesome, and the
+soil is very unequal, the vallies producing some corn and wine.
+The goats are fat and good eating, the females usually producing
+three or four kids at a birth, once in four months. <i>St
+Nicholas</i> is the best peopled next after St Jago. <i>Mayo</i>
+has a great deal of salt, formed by the heat of the sun in pits,
+or ponds, into which the sea-water is let from time to time, and
+might furnish many thousand tons yearly, if there were vent for
+it. The fine <i>Marroquin</i> leather is made from the goat-skins
+brought from these islands.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 218: The difference of longitude between
+the cape and islands is seven degrees W. or 140 marine
+leagues.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>We sailed from St Vincent on the 8th October; and in our
+passage to the coast of Brazil some new disputes arose among the
+men. After various consultations, it was determined that one
+Page, second mate of the Duchess, should be removed into the
+Duke, whence Mr Ballet was to remove into the Duchess. Captain
+Cooke was sent to execute this order, which Page refused to obey,
+but was brought away by force. Being accused of mutiny, he
+requested leave to go to the head before entering on his defence,
+which was permitted, when he jumped overboard, meaning to swim to
+the Duchess, while both captains were absent; but he was brought
+back and punished, which ended this dissension. The 18th November
+we anchored before Isla Grande, on the coast of Brazil, in eleven
+fathoms. While here new quarrels arose, and matters had like to
+have come to a great height in the Duchess, when Captain Courtney
+put eight of the ringleaders in irons, which frightened the rest,
+and probably prevented an attempt to run away with the ship. On
+the 23d two men deserted from the Duchess, but were so frightened
+in the night by tigers, as they supposed, though only monkeys and
+baboons, that they took refuge in the sea, and hallooed with all
+their might till they were fetched on board: yet, on the 25th,
+two Irish landmen stole away into the woods; but both were taken
+next day, and put in irons.</p>
+
+<p>This island is remarkably high land, having a small cliff and
+a tip standing up on one side, in the middle of the highest land,
+easily seen in clear weather; and there is a small island without
+<i>Isla Grande</i> to the southward, rising in three little
+hummocks, the nearest hummock to the great island being the
+smallest. There is also a singularly round white rock on the
+larboard side, nearest Isla Grande, at the entrance between it
+and the main going in. On the starboard-side of this entrance
+there are several islands, and even the main land has much the
+appearance of islands till well in. The best way is, when you
+have opened the coves on the starboard-side going in, which are
+inhabited, to get a pilot to carry you to the watering-cove on
+Isla Grande; otherwise send a boat to the watering-cove, which
+lies round the inner and western point of the island, and is near
+a league in the passage between small islands, but room enough
+and bold. It is the second cove, under the first high mount,
+round behind the first-seen point, after getting in between, the
+two islands. This is the cove at which we watered; and we sounded
+all the passage going in, having seldom less than ten fathoms.
+There are other two very good coves, but we had not time to sound
+them. The town is N.E. from this cove, about three leagues
+distant.</p>
+
+<p><i>Isla Grande</i> is about nine leagues long, consisting of
+high land, as in the main, and all near the water is thickly
+covered with wood. The island abounds with monkeys and other wild
+beasts, and has plenty of good timber for various uses as well as
+fuel, with excellent water; and oranges, lemons, and guavas grow
+wild in the woods. From the town we procured rum, sugar, and
+tobacco, and the last is sold very dear, though not good for
+smoking, being too strong. We got also fowls and hogs, but the
+latter were scarce and dear; likewise maize, or Indian corn,
+bananas, plantains, guavas, lemons, oranges, and pine-apples are
+in great plenty; but they have no bread except <i>cassada</i>,
+which they call <i>faranada pan</i>, or bread of wood. Beef and
+mutton were cheap, but no great quantity to be had. We had fine
+pleasant weather most of the time we were here, but hot like an
+oven, as the sun was quite vertical. The winds we did not much
+observe, as they were little and variable, but commonly between
+the N. and E.</p>
+
+<p>I had Neuhoff's account of Brazil on board, and from all the
+enquiry and observation I could make, I found his description of
+the country, with its animals and productions, to be just. I
+particularly enquired respecting the monster called the
+<i>liboya</i>, or roebuck-serpent, thinking it fabulous; but the
+Portuguese governor assured me that they are sometimes found
+thirty feet long, and as big round as a barrel, being able to
+swallow a roebuck at one morsel, whence it has its name; and he
+told me that one of these enormous serpents had been killed near
+the town, a short time before our arrival. The principal products
+of Brazil are red wood, bearing the name of the country; sugar,
+gold, tobacco, snuff, whale oil, and various kinds of drugs; and
+the Portuguese build their best ships in this country. Brazil has
+now become very populous, and the people take great delight in
+arms, especially about the gold mines, to which people of all
+kinds resort in great numbers, especially negroes and mulattoes.
+Only four years ago [in 1704] these people endeavoured to make
+themselves independent, but have now submitted. Some men of
+repute told me that the gold mines increase fast in
+productiveness, and that the gold is got much easier in them than
+in any other country.</p>
+
+<p>The indigenous Brazilian women are very fruitful, and have
+easy labours, on which occasion they retire into the woods, and
+bring forth alone, and return home after washing themselves and
+their child; the husbands lying a-bed for the first twenty-four
+hours, being treated as if they had endured the pains of
+child-birth. The <i>Tapoyers</i>, who inhabit the inland country
+to the west, are the most barbarous of the natives, being taller
+and stronger than any of the other tribes, and indeed than most
+Europeans. They wear, by way of ornament, little sticks thrust
+through their cheeks and underlips, and are said to be cannibals,
+using poisoned arrows and darts. They live chiefly by hunting and
+fishing, shifting their habitations according to the seasons.
+Their kings, or chiefs, are distinguished by a particular manner
+of shaving their crowns, and by wearing their nails very long.
+Their priests are sorcerers, making the people believe that the
+devils appear to them in the form of certain insects, and they
+perform their diabolical worship in the night, when the women
+make dismal howlings, in which consists their principal devotion.
+They allow polygamy, yet punish adultery with death. When the
+young women are marriageable, but not courted, their mothers
+carry them to the chiefs, who deflower them, and this is deemed a
+great honour. Some of these people were considerably civilized by
+the Dutch, while they possessed a part of Brazil, and did them
+good service under the conduct of their native chiefs.</p>
+
+<p>Leaving Isla Grande on the 30th November, we continued our
+voyage far to the south, where we endured great cold, owing to
+which, a third part of both ships companies fell sick while
+passing round Cape Horn, for which reason we bore away for the
+island of Juan Fernandez, which we had some difficulty to find,
+owing to its being laid down differently in all the charts. Even
+Captain Dampier was much at a loss, though he had been there so
+often, and had as it were a map of the island in his head, which
+exactly agreed with it when we came there. This ought to induce
+sea-officers to prefer their own proper business to amusement,
+since, with all this knowledge, we were forced to make the main
+land of Chili, in order to find this island, and did not strike
+it at the last without considerable difficulty.</p>
+
+<p>We arrived at the island of <i>Juan Fernandez</i> on the 1st
+February 1709, and having a good observation the day before, when
+we found our lat. 34&deg; 10' S.[219] In the afternoon we hoisted
+out our pinnace, in which Captain Dover set off to go on shore,
+though not less than four leagues from the ship. As it grew dark,
+we observed a light on shore, which some were of opinion was from
+our boat, but it was evidently too large for that, and we hung up
+a light to direct our boat, firing our quarter-deck gun, and
+showing lights in our mizen and fore shrouds, that our boat might
+find us, as we had fallen to leeward of the island. Our boat came
+aboard again about two in the morning, having turned back on
+seeing the light ashore when within a league, and we were glad
+they had got off so well, as it now began to blow. We were all
+convinced that the light which we had seen was from the shore,
+and therefore prepared our ships for an engagement, supposing it
+might proceed from some French ships at anchor, which we must
+either fight or want water. All this stir and apprehension, as we
+afterwards found, arose from one poor man, who passed in our
+imaginations for a Spanish garrison, a body of Frenchmen, or a
+crew of pirates, and it is incredible what strange notions some
+of our people entertained about this light; yet it served to show
+their tempers and spirits, and enabled us to guess how our men
+would behave, in case there really were enemies on the
+island.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 219: Juan Fernandez is in lat 33&deg; 40'
+S. long. 79&deg; W. Massa Faera, in the same latitude, is in
+long. 80&deg; 50' W. from Greenwich.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>While under these apprehensions, we stood to the back of the
+island in order to fall in with the southerly wind, till we were
+past the island. We then stood back for it again, and ran close
+aboard the land that begins to form its N.E. side. The flaws came
+heavy off the land, and we were forced to reef our top-sails when
+we opened the middle bay, where we expected to have found our
+enemy, but saw all clear, and no ships either there or in the
+other bay near the N.E. end. These are the only bays in which
+ships can ride that come here for refreshments, the middle one
+being the best. We now conjectured that there had been ships
+here, but that they had gone away on seeing us. About noon of the
+2d February, we sent our yawl on shore, in which was Captain
+Dover, Mr Fry, and six men, all armed; and in the mean time we
+and the Duchess kept turning in, and such heavy squalls came off
+the land that we had to let fly our top-sail sheets, keeping all
+hands to stand by our sails, lest the winds should blow them
+away. These flaws proceed from the land, which is very high in
+the middle of the island; but when they passed by, we had little
+or no wind. As our yawl did not return, we sent the pinnace well
+armed, to see what had occasioned the yawl to stay, being afraid
+there might be a Spanish garrison on the island, who might have
+seized her and our men.</p>
+
+<p>Even the pinnace delays returning, on which we put up a signal
+for her to come back, when she soon came off with abundance of
+cray-fish, bringing also a man cloathed in goat-skins, who seemed
+wilder than the original owners of his apparel. His name was
+<i>Alexander Selkirk</i>, a Scotsman, who had been left here by
+Captain Stradling in the Cinque-ports, and had lived alone on the
+island for four years and four months. Captain Dampier told me he
+had been master of the Cinque-ports, and was the best man in that
+vessel; so I immediately agreed with him to serve as a mate in
+the Duke. During his stay, he had seen several ships pass by, but
+only two came to anchor at the island, which he found to be
+Spaniards, and therefore retired from them, on which they fired
+at him, but he escaped into the woods. Had they been French, he
+would have surrendered to them; but chose rather to run the risk
+of dying alone on the island than fall into the hands of the
+Spaniards, as he suspected they would either put him to death, or
+make him a slave in their mines. The Spaniards had landed before
+he knew what they were, and came so near him that he had much ado
+to escape; for they not only shot at him, but pursued him into
+the woods, where he climbed up a tree, at the foot of which some
+of them made water, and killed several goats just by, yet went
+away without discovering him.</p>
+
+<p>He told us that he was born in Largo, in the county of Fife in
+Scotland, and was bred a sailor from his youth. The reason of his
+being left here was a difference with Captain Stradling; which,
+together with the ship being leaky, made him at first rather
+willing to stay here than to continue in the ship; and when at
+last he was inclined to have gone, the captain would not receive
+him. He had been at the island before to wood and water, when two
+of the men were left upon it for six months, the ship being
+chased away by two French South-Sea ships; but the Cinque-ports
+returned and took them off, at which time he was left. He had
+with him his clothes and bedding, with a firelock and some powder
+and bullets, some tobacco, a knife, a kettle, a bible, with some
+other books, and his mathematical instruments. He diverted
+himself and provided for his sustenance as well as he could; but
+had much ado to bear up against melancholy for the first eight
+months, and was sore distressed at being left alone in such a
+desolate place. He built himself two huts of pimento trees,
+thatched with long grass, and lined with goat-skins, killing
+goats as he needed them with his gun, so long as his powder
+lasted, which was only about a pound at first. When that was all
+spent, he procured fire by rubbing two sticks of pimento wood
+together. He slept in his larger hut, and cooked his victuals in
+the smaller, which was at some distance, and employed himself in
+reading, praying, and singing psalms, so that he said he was a
+better Christian during his solitude than he had ever been
+before, or than, as he was afraid, he should ever be again.</p>
+
+<p>At first he never ate but when constrained by hunger, partly
+from grief; and partly for want of bread and salt. Neither did he
+then go to bed till he could watch no longer, the pimento wood
+serving him both for fire and candle, as it burned very clear,
+and refreshed him by its fragrant smell. He might have had fish
+enough, but would not eat them for want of salt, as they
+occasioned a looseness; except cray-fish, which are as large as
+our lobsters, and are very good. These he sometimes boiled, and
+at other times broiled, as he did his goat's flesh, of which he
+made good broth, for they are not so rank as our goats. Having
+kept an account, he said he had killed 500 goats while on the
+island, besides having caught as many more, which he marked on
+the ear and let them go. When his powder failed, he run down the
+goats by speed of foot; for his mode of living, with continual
+exercise of walking and running, cleared him of all gross
+humours, so that he could run with wonderful swiftness through
+the woods, and up the hills and rocks, as we experienced in
+catching goats for us. We had a bull-dog, which we sent along
+with several of our nimblest runners to help him in catching
+goats, but he outstript our dog and men, caught the goats, and
+brought them to us on his back. On one occasion, his agility in
+pursuing a goat had nearly cost him his life: as, while pursuing
+it with great eagerness, he caught hold of it on the brink of a
+precipice, of which, he was not aware, being concealed by bushes,
+so that he fell with the goat down the precipice to a great
+depth, and was so bruised and stunned by the fall, that he lay
+senseless, as he supposed, for twenty-four hours, and when he
+recovered his senses found the goat dead under him. He was then
+scarcely able to crawl to his hut, about a mile distant, and
+could not stir out again for ten days.</p>
+
+<p>He came at length to relish his meat well enough without bread
+and salt. In the proper season he had plenty of good turnips,
+which had been sowed there by Captain Dampier's men, and had now
+spread over several acres of ground. He had also abundance of
+cabbage, from the cabbage-palms, and seasoned his food with the
+fruit of the pimento, which is the same with Jamaica pepper, and
+has a fine flavour. He found also a species of black pepper,
+called <i>malageta</i>, which was good for expelling wind and
+curing gripes. He soon wore out all his shoes and other clothes,
+by running in the woods; and, being forced to shift without, his
+feet became so hard that he ran about every where without
+inconvenience, and it was some time after he came to us before he
+could wear shoes, as his feet swelled when he first began again
+to wear them. After he had got the better of his melancholy, he
+sometimes amused himself with carving his name on the trees,
+together with the date of his being left there, and the time of
+his solitary residence. At first he was much pestered with cats
+and rats, which had bred there in great numbers from some of each
+species which had got on shore from ships that had wooded and
+watered at the island. The rats gnawed his feet and clothes when
+he was asleep, which obliged him to cherish the cats, by feeding
+them with goats flesh, so that many of them became so tame that
+they used to lie beside him in hundreds, and soon delivered him
+from the rats. He also tamed some kids, and for his diversion
+would at times sing and dance with them and his cats: So that, by
+the favour of Providence and the vigour of his youth, for he was
+now only thirty years of age, he came at length to conquer all
+the inconveniences of his solitude, and to be quite easy in his
+mind.</p>
+
+<p>When his clothes were worn out, he made himself a coat and a
+cap of goat skins, which he stitched together with thongs of the
+same, cut out with his knife, using a nail by way of a needle or
+awl. When his knife was worn out, he made others as well as he
+could of some old hoops that had been left on the shore, which he
+beat out thin between two stones, and grinded to an edge on a
+smooth stone. Having some linen cloth, he sewed himself some
+shirts by means of a nail for a needle, stitching them with
+worsted, which he pulled out on purpose from his old stockings,
+and he had the last of his shirts on when we found him. At his
+first coming on board, he had so much forgotten his language, for
+want of use, that we could scarcely understand him, as he seemed
+to speak his words only by halves. We offered him a dram, which
+he refused, not having drank any thing but water all the time he
+had been on the island, and it was some time before he could
+relish our provisions. He could give us no farther account of the
+productions of the island than has been already, except that
+there were some very good black plums, but hard to come at, as
+the trees which bear them grow on high mountains and steep rocks.
+There are many pimento trees, some of them being sixty feet high
+and two yards round; and we saw cotton trees still higher, and
+near four fathoms round the stems. The climate is excellent, and
+the trees and grass are quite verdant the whole year. The winter
+lasts no longer than June and July, and is not then severe, there
+being then only slight frosts and a little hail, but sometimes
+very great rains. The heat of summer is equally moderate, and
+there is not much thunder or tempestuous weather. He saw no
+venomous, or savage creature on the island, nor any other beasts
+besides goats, bred there from a few brought by Juan Fernandez, a
+Spaniard, who settled there with a few families, till the
+continent of Chili began to submit to the Spaniards when they
+removed to that country as more profitable. This island, however,
+might maintain a good many people, and is capable of being made
+so strong that they could not be easily dislodged.</p>
+
+<p>We got our smith's forge ashore on the 3d February, and set
+our coopers to work to repair our water casks. They made a little
+tent also for me on shore, to enjoy the benefit of the land air.
+The two ships also set up tents for their sick, so that we had
+presently a kind of small town, in which all who were able were
+busily employed. A few men supplied us with excellent fish, in
+such abundance that they could take as many in a few hours as
+would serve 200 men for a meal. There were some sea-fowl in the
+bay, as large as geese, but they eat fishy. The governor, for so
+we called Mr Selkirk, never failed to procure us two or three
+goats every day for our sick men, by which, with the help of
+cabbages and other vegetables, and the wholesome air, our men
+soon recovered from the scurvy, and we found this island
+exceedingly agreeable, the weather being neither too hot nor too
+cold. We spent our time till the 10th in refitting our ships,
+taking wood on board, and laying in a stock of water, that which
+we brought from England, St Vincents, and Isla Grande, being
+spoilt by the badness of our casks. We also boiled up and refined
+eighty gallons of oil of sea-lions, which we used in lamps to
+save candles, and might have prepared several tons, if we had
+been provided with vessels. The sailors sometimes used this oil
+to fry their fish, for want of butter, and found it sufficiently
+agreeable. The men who worked ashore in repairing our rigging,
+eat the young seals, which they preferred to our ship's
+provisions, alleging that it was as good as English lamb. We made
+all the haste we could to get every thing on board, as we learnt
+at the Canaries that five stout French privateers were coming in
+company into the South Sea.</p>
+
+<p>This island of Juan Fernandez is about fifteen English miles
+in length from E. to W. and five miles where broadest, but
+averaging little more than two miles in breadth, and is mostly
+composed of high rugged land. I know of nothing in its
+neighbourhood which may endanger a ship, except what is
+distinctly visible. We anchored in the great bay, [La Baia or
+Cumberland harbour] on the N.E. side, about a mile from the
+bottom of the bay, our best bower being dropt in forty fathoms,
+and the stream anchor carried in with the shore, where it was
+laid in about thirty fathoms. We here had plenty of several sorts
+of fish, as silver-fish, snappers, bonitoes, cavallos, pollocks,
+old wives, and cray-fish of great size. The wind blows here
+generally off the shore, sometimes in heavy squalls, but for the
+most part calm, and where we were moored the water was very
+smooth, owing to the winding of the shore. Mr Selkirk told us it
+had never blown towards the land above four hours, all the time
+he had been there. It is all hills and vallies, and would
+doubtless produce most plants usual in such climates, if manured
+and cultivated, as the soil promises well in most parts, and
+already grows turnips and some other roots, which I suppose were
+formerly sowed. It has plenty of wood and water, and abundance of
+wild goats.</p>
+
+<p>There are such numbers of great sea-lions and other seals of
+various sorts, all having excellent furs, in every bay, that we
+could hardly walk about along shore for them, as they lay about
+in flocks like sheep, their young ones bleating for their dams
+like so many lambs. Some of these sea-lions are as big in the
+body as an English ox, and they roar like lions. They are covered
+with short hair of a light colour, which is still lighter on the
+young ones. I suppose they live partly on fish and partly on
+grass, for they come on shore by means of their fore paws,
+dragging their hind parts after them, and bask themselves in the
+sun in great numbers. They cut near a foot deep of fat, and we
+killed a good many of them for the sake of their oil, which is of
+good quality, but they are difficult to kill. Both sea-lions and
+seals were so numerous on the shore, that we had to drive them
+away before we could land, and they were so numerous as is hardly
+credible, making a most prodigious noise.</p>
+
+<p>There are but few birds. One sort, called <i>pardelas</i> by
+the Spaniards, burrow in the ground like rabbits, and are said to
+be good eating. There are also <i>humming-birds</i>, not much
+larger than bumble bees, their bills no thicker than a pin, their
+legs proportional to their bodies, and their minute feathers of
+most beautiful colours. These are seldom taken or seen but in the
+evenings, when they fly about, and they flew sometimes at night
+into our fire. There is here a sort of cabbage tree, of the
+nature of a palm, producing small cabbages, but very sweet. The
+tree is slender and straight, with circular knobs on the stem
+fourteen inches above each other, and having no leaves except at
+the top. The branches are about twelve feet long, and at about a
+foot and a half from the body of the tree begin to shoot out
+leaves, which are four feet long and an inch broad, and so
+regularly placed that the whole branch seems one entire leaf. The
+cabbage, which grows out from the bottom of the branches, is
+about a foot long and very white; and at the bottom of this there
+grow clusters of berries, weighing five or six pounds, like
+bunches of grapes, as red as cherries and larger than our
+black-heart cherries, each having a large stone in the middle,
+and the pulp eats like our haws. These cabbage trees abound about
+three miles into the woods, the trunk being often eighty or
+ninety feet high, and is always cut down to get the cabbages,
+which are good eating; but most of them grow on the tops of the
+nearest mountains to the great bay.</p>
+
+<p>We found here some Guinea pepper, and some silk cotton trees,
+besides several others with the names of which I am not
+acquainted. Pimento is the best timber, and the most plentiful at
+this side of the island, but it is very apt to split till it is a
+little dried. We cut the longest and cleanest to split for fire
+wood. In the nearest plain, we found abundance of turnip greens,
+and water-cresses in the brooks, which greatly refreshed our men,
+and quickly cured them of the scurvy. Mr Selkirk said the turnips
+formed good roots in our summer months, which are winter at this
+island; but this being autumn, they were all run up to seed, so
+that we had no benefit of them excepting their green leaves and
+shoots. The soil is a loose black earth, and the rocks are very
+rotten, so that it is dangerous to climb the hills for cabbages
+without great care. There are also many holes dug into the ground
+by a sort of birds called <i>puffins</i>, which give way in
+walking, and endanger the breaking or wrenching a limb. Mr
+Selkirk said he had seen snow and ice here in July, the depth of
+the southern winter; but in September, October, and November, the
+spring months, the climate is very pleasant, and there are then
+abundance of excellent herbs, as purslein, parsley, and sithes.
+We found also an herb, not unlike <i>feverfew</i>, which proved
+very useful to our surgeons for fomentations. It has a most
+grateful smell like balm, but stronger and more cordial, and grew
+in plenty near the shore. We gathered many large bundles of it,
+which were dried in the shade, and sent aboard for after-use,
+besides strewing the tents with it fresh gathered every morning,
+which tended much to the recovery of our sick, of whom, though
+numerous when we came here, only two died belonging to the
+Duchess. We found the nights very cold, and the days not near so
+warm as might have been expected in so low a latitude. It hardly
+ever rains, instead of which there fall very heavy dews in the
+night, which serve the purposes of rain, and the air is almost
+perpetually serene.</p>
+
+<p>The 13th February we held a consultation, in which we framed
+several regulations for preserving secrecy, discipline, and
+strict honesty in both vessels: and on the 17th we determined
+that two men from the Duke should serve in the Duchess, and two
+of her men in the Duke, to see that justice was reciprocally done
+by each ship's company to the other. The 28th we tried both
+pinnaces in the water under sail, having a gun fixed in each, and
+every thing else requisite to render them very useful small
+privateers.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION II.</p>
+
+<p><i>Proceedings of the Expedition on the Western Coast of
+America</i>.</p>
+
+<p>In the evening of the 13th March[220] we saw a sail, and the
+Duchess being nearest soon took her. She was a small bark of
+sixteen tons from Payta, bound to Cheripe for flour, having a
+small sum of money on board to make the purchase, being commanded
+by a <i>Mestizo</i>, or one begotten between a Spaniard and an
+Indian, having a crew of eight men, one a Spaniard, another a
+negro, and all the rest Indians. On asking for news, we were
+told, that all the French ships, being seven in number, had left
+the South Sea six months before, and no more were to come there;
+adding, that the Spaniards had such an aversion to them, that
+they had killed many Frenchmen at Callao, the port of Lima, and
+quarrelled with them so frequently that none of them were
+suffered to come ashore there for some time before they
+sailed.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 220: It is quite obvious that they had now
+left Juan Fernandez, but this circumstance and its date are
+omitted by Harris.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>After putting some men aboard the prize, we haled close upon a
+wind for the isle of <i>Lobos</i>, and had we not been informed
+by our prisoners, had endangered our ships by running too far
+within that isle, as there are shoals between the island and the
+main, having a passage for boats only in that direction to get
+into the road which is to leeward of these islands in a sound
+between them. This sound is a mile long and half a mile wide, and
+has from ten to twelve fathoms on good ground. The only entrance
+for ships is to leeward of the islands. We went in with a small
+weather tide, but I could never observe it to flow above three
+feet while we were there. On the eastermost island there is a
+round hummock, behind which is a small cove, very smooth, deep,
+and convenient enough for careening a ship; we here hauled up and
+fitted our prize, which we named the <i>Beginning</i>. The
+highest part of the island of Lobos, as seen from the road, did
+not seem much higher than the top-mast head of a large ship. The
+soil is a hungry white clayish earth, mixed with sand and rocks;
+and there is no fresh water, nor any green thing to be seen on
+either of the islands. They are frequented by many vultures or
+carrion crows, and looked so like turkeys that one of our
+officers was rejoiced at the sight, expecting to fare
+sumptuously, and would not wait till the boat could put him
+ashore, but leapt into the water with his gun, and let fly at a
+parcel of them; but, when he came to take up his game, it stunk
+most abominably, and made us merry at his expence. The other
+birds here are pelicans, penguins, boobies, gulls, and one
+resembling teal, which nestle in holes under ground. Our men got
+great numbers of these birds, which they said were good meat
+after being skinned.</p>
+
+<p>We found abundance of bulrushes and empty jars, which the
+Spanish fishers had left on shore; for all over this western
+coast of America, they use earthen jars instead of casks, for
+containing oil, wine, and all other liquids. There are here
+abundance of sea-lions and seals, the latter being much larger
+than those we saw at Juan Fernandez, but their fur not so fine.
+Our people killed several of these, on purpose to eat their
+livers; but a Spaniard on board died suddenly after eating them,
+and I forbade their use, and we learnt also from our prisoners
+that the old seals are very unwholesome. The wind commonly blows
+here fresh from the south, veering to the east, and coming over
+the land to where we lay, brought with it a most noisome smell
+from the seals on shore, which gave me a violent headach, and
+offended every one else extremely. We found nothing so offensive
+at Juan Fernandez.</p>
+
+<p>Our prisoners told as, that the widow of the late viceroy of
+Peru was soon expected to embark in a Spanish man of war of
+thirty-six guns for Acapulco, with her family and riches; on
+which voyage she would either stop at Payta for refreshments, or
+pass in sight of that place, as is customary. They said also that
+about eight months before, a ship had passed Payta for Acapulco,
+loaded with flour and liquors, and having 200,000 dollars on
+board. Also, that they had left signior Morel at Payta, in a ship
+laden with dry goods, who was expected to sail shortly for Lima;
+and that a stout French-built ship richly laden, and having a
+bishop on board, was shortly expected at Payta. This is the
+common place for refreshments, and is frequented by most ships
+from Lima or other parts to windward, on their way to Panama or
+other ports on the western coast of Mexico. On this information,
+we determined to spend as much time as possible cruising off
+Payta, so as not to discover that we were in these seas lest we
+should thereby hinder our other designs.</p>
+
+<p>In pursuance of this plan, we took a galleon on the 1st April,
+of 500 tons burden, commanded by two brothers, Joseph and Juan
+Morel, laden with dry goods and negroes; and next day we took
+another prize. We now determined to make an attack on the town of
+<i>Guayaquil</i>; and on the 11th April, in a grand consultation,
+this enterprize was fully resolved upon, and a paper of
+instructions was drawn up for the guidance of the officers who
+were to command, so that each might be taught and kept to his
+duty. This enterprize was to be conducted by the three captains,
+Rogers, Courtney, and Dover. Captain Dover was to command the van
+division, consisting of seventy marines; Rogers the centre
+company, of seventy-one men, mostly officers and sailors; and
+Courtney the rear-guard, of seventy-three men; while Captain
+Dampier, with a reserve of twenty-two men, was to bring up some
+pieces of cannon, to be employed if necessary. Our force
+therefore on this occasion consisted of 238 men.[221] Captain
+Cooke was to remain in the Duchess with forty-two men, and
+Captain Fry in the Duke with forty, our entire force being 320
+men, while we had about 266 prisoners in both ships, including
+Indians and Negroes.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 221: The enumeration in the text gives only
+236 men.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Every thing being arranged, we bore in for Cape <i>Blanco</i>
+on the 13th, of which we had sight about noon, bearing E.S.E. ten
+leagues off. On the 15th in the morning we saw a ship near the
+shore, and having little wind, the Duke's boat, commanded by
+Captain Fry, and that of the Duchess by Captain Cooke, rowed
+directly for her, going off in such haste that neither of them
+had the swivel guns commonly used in the boats, neither had they
+their full complement of men, and only ten muskets and four
+pistols, with not much powder and shot, and no water. They rowed
+very hard for six leagues to get up with the ship, and on Mr Fry
+getting near, she hoisted Spanish colours. We could plainly see
+that she was French-built, and therefore concluded that it must
+be the ship we had long looked for, which was to carry the
+bishop. Our ships being almost out of sight, and the chase near
+the coast, making the best of her way to run ashore in a sandy
+bay, we resolved to lay her on board, one of our boats on each
+bow, I[222] being then on her weather quarter, and Captain Fry on
+her lee. It was our intention to pretend that we were friends,
+till we should get out of the way of her stern-chase guns; but
+the Duke's men, conceiving the Spaniards were going to give us a
+volley, poured in their shot. We then laid in our oars, and fell
+to with our small arms. We kept up a constant fire for a long
+time, which was returned by the Spaniards, who killed two of
+Captain Fry's men, and wounded one of his and two of mine. One of
+the dead men was John Rogers, our second lieutenant, and brother
+to Captain Woods Rogers, who had behaved himself gallantly.
+Finding the enterprize too difficult, Captain Fry drew off his
+boat, as I did soon after. Captain Fry then put some of his men
+aboard my boat, giving us some powder and shot, and taking in our
+wounded men, on which he stood away towards our ships, while I
+resolved to keep the chase if possible from running on shore, and
+rather than fail to clap her on board. Seeing our design, the
+enemy edged off to sea, and we after them. Our ships came up
+apace, while we kept close to the Spaniard, sometimes firing at
+him. At length the Duchess got up and fired a shot or two, on
+which she struck, and we immediately boarded. The men begged for
+quarter, and we promised them all civility. This ship was of 270
+tons, commanded by Don Joseph Arizabella, and had come from
+Panama bound for Lima, where she was to have been fitted out as a
+man of war, the captain having his commission on board for that
+purpose. She had seventy negroes on board, with many passengers.
+The loading was bale goods, with some things belonging to the
+bishop, and a considerable quantity of pearls; but the bishop had
+been landed at Point St Helena, whence he was to go by land to
+Guayaquil. Many of the passengers were considerable merchants at
+Lima, and the briskest Spaniards I ever saw. After the capture of
+this ship, Captain Cooke remained on board, sending her captain
+and the rest of the prisoners to the Duke and Duchess.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 222: This particular action is related by
+Harris in the words of Captain Cooke, who commanded the boat from
+the Duchess.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>We now proceeded on our intended expedition against Guayaquil,
+sending the <i>Beginning</i> ahead to <i>Punta arena</i>, or
+Sandy Point, on the island of Puna, to see if there was any force
+to oppose us; but she only found a Spanish bark, quite empty,
+riding close under the point. She had been sent to load salt, but
+her men had abandoned her on seeing us approach. At five in the
+afternoon, our whole force intended for the attack upon
+Guayaquil, being embarked in boats, rowed for that place; and at
+eleven at night we could see a light in the town, on which we
+rowed as easy as we could and in silence, for fear of being
+discovered; till we were within a mile of the place. We then
+heard a sentinel call to another, and after conversing for some
+time, bid him bring fire. Perceiving we were now discovered, we
+rowed to the other side of the river, opposite the town, whence
+we saw a fire lighted up at the place where the centinels had
+talked, and soon after we could see lights all over the town and
+at the water side, heard them ring the alarm bell, fire several
+vollies, and saw a fire lighted on the hill where the beacon was
+kept, all on purpose to give notice to the town and neighbourhood
+that we were come into the river.</p>
+
+<p>Our boats were now moored with grapplings, and so hot a
+dispute took place among some of our officers, that they were
+heard on shore; but as the Spaniards did not understand what they
+said, an English prisoner was brought to the shore to interpret
+what they heard. By the time he came, the dispute was over; but
+this Englishman afterwards joined us, and gave us this account.
+We held a council in the stern sheets of one of our boats, to
+consider whether we should land immediately or wait till
+day-light; and, as the barks were not come up, in which were the
+artillery and half of our men, and as we did not know the ground
+sufficiently to act in the dark, it was agreed to wait till day,
+by which time it was hoped the barks would join. We accordingly
+fell down the river a short way, to meet our barks, hearing
+several musket shots by the way. On the 23d April at day-break,
+we saw one of our barks at anchor within a mile of the town,
+close under the shore, and the other coming up the river with the
+tide of flood. We then rowed up to our bark, which had fired the
+shots we heard in the night at some fishermen passing by, whom
+they took.</p>
+
+<p>All our force being now joined, we proceeded up the river, and
+sent a flag of truce on shore, accompanied by Don Joseph
+Arizabella, the governor of Puna, and another prisoner; and then
+towed up our barks over against the town, where we came to an
+anchor. When Captain Arizabella came with our flag of truce
+before the corregidor or mayor of Guayaquill, he enquired our
+numbers, which the captain magnified, on which the corregidore
+said we were boys, not men. To this the captain answered, he
+would find them men, and brave ones too, for they had fought him
+gallantly in their open boats, although he had slain the brother
+of their commander and others; and therefore advised him to agree
+for the ransom of the town, as even if he had 3000 men he would
+be unable to withstand the English. To this the corregidore
+replied, <i>My horse is ready</i>.</p>
+
+<p>After bringing our barks to anchor, we went up the river after
+some vessels, six of which we secured and brought to anchor
+beside our barks. We also took possession of two new ships of
+about 400 tons burden each. Soon after this, the governor came on
+board one of the prizes, to treat for the ransom of the town and
+ships, but could not then agree, but promised to meet the
+captains again at seven in the evening, but did not keep his
+sword. This evening our boats took some canoes having silver on
+board. On the 24th in the morning, the governor came off again to
+treat, but no agreement could be made; and at four in the
+afternoon we landed all our men in good order, when the Spaniards
+only fired one volley and then fled. Our men pursued them to
+where their cannon were placed, which they soon gained possession
+of, only one gunner, an Irishman, remaining by them till he was
+wounded in four places, of which he soon afterwards died. We
+marched through both towns in a compact body, driving the enemy
+before us, and then placed three guards in the three churches,
+setting fire to five or six houses which stood near to a wood
+into which the Spaniards had fled, that they might not have the
+cover of these houses to annoy our guard, which stood within
+pistol shot. All night they kept firing at our sentinels from the
+woods, yet without doing us any harm. Several parties also of
+horse and foot came out of the wood, as if to attack us, but made
+no attempt. In the mean time, the pinnace belonging to the
+Duchess, in which was Lieutenant Connely and twenty-two men, went
+up the river, landed at every house near its banks, and brought
+away all the plate and other articles of value they could find.
+In this service, they had some skirmishing with the enemy, in
+which one of our men was wounded.</p>
+
+<p>On the 25th the enemy appeared numerous in the woods, whence
+they sometimes came out and skirmished with our guards, in which
+one of our men was wounded. We spent the afternoon in sending off
+provisions from the town to our ships, and in disposing all
+things in readiness in case of being attacked in the night, as
+the enemy appeared numerous about the outskirts. For this reason,
+all the captains concentrated our whole force at the main guard,
+where we had our cannon in readiness. Messengers arrived with a
+flag of truce in the morning of the 26th, to treat for ransoming
+the town, but could not agree; but in the afternoon it was at
+length agreed to pay 30,000 dollars for its ransom, giving three
+hostages, and we were to remain at Puna till they had time to
+raise the sum, as the inhabitants had carried away their money,
+and being so dispersed that it was impossible to collect the
+money while we were there, even the inhabitants of the adjacent
+country having carried off their valuable effects into the
+interior.</p>
+
+<p>In the morning of the 27th, the hostages for the ransom were
+sent on board one of our barks, together with a boatload of
+brandy; and, as agreed upon with the Spaniards, we took down our
+union jack, hoisted a flag of truce, and fired a signal gun, that
+the Spaniards might come freely into the town, and that no
+hostilities should take place on either side during the time we
+had agreed to wait for the money. The purpose of admitting the
+Spanish inhabitants was to prevent the Indians and Negroes from
+robbing; and I am apt to believe they had already robbed as much
+as we had plundered, for we had taken many of them loaded with
+goods, while going our rounds, which they confessed to have
+stolen; and we were afterwards informed, that the inhabitants, in
+their hurry, had given much plate and money to Negroes to carry
+out of town, which they could never hear of afterwards.</p>
+
+<p>The 29th in the morning we took a small Spanish bark, coming
+from Cheripe to Guayaquil, on board of which were 330 bags of
+meal, and 140 arobas or hundred-weights of sugar, with some
+onions, quinces, and pomegranates. This, with the six barks and
+two great ships ransomed with the town of Guayaquil, made 14
+prizes taken in the South Sea. The plunder taken in Guayaquil,
+exclusive of the ransom, was very considerable. We found 230 bags
+of flour, beans, peas, and rice; 15 jars of oil, besides 160 jars
+of other liquor; some cordage, iron ware, and nails; about four
+half jars of powder; about a ton of pitch and tar; 150 bales of
+dry goods; a few packs of indigo, cacao, and arnotto; about a ton
+of loaf-sugar; a considerable parcel of clothes and other
+necessaries, and to the value of about &pound;1200 in plate,
+ear-rings, and other trinkets; besides four pieces of cannon, and
+about 200 useless muskets. We left abundance of goods in the
+town, besides liquors of all sorts, and a variety of naval
+stores, and several warehouses full of cacao. We left also
+several ships on the stocks, and two new ships still unrigged, of
+above 400 tons each, which cost upwards of 80,000 crowns; and we
+also restored four barks, leaving two others to bring down the
+ransom. Thus it appears that the Spaniards had a good bargain;
+but the agreed ransom, though small, was far better for us than
+to burn what we could not carry away. The hostages informed us,
+that during our treaty 80,000 dollars belonging to the king had
+been sent out of the town, besides plate, jewels, and other
+things of the greatest value. Hence it is certain, if we had
+landed at the first, giving them no time at all, that we had been
+much greater gainers, and might have made 200,000 dollars, in
+ready money, plate, and jewels. Yet Guayaquil had not been so
+poor for forty years as now, there having been a great fire about
+a year and half before we took it, in which the best part of the
+town was burnt down, and had occasioned great expence for its
+rebuilding.</p>
+
+<p>As it was, we thought ourselves well off, and great care was
+taken that all concerned in the expedition should be satisfied,
+by which our people were much gratified, and afterwards shewed
+great alacrity in executing our other enterprizes. This is of the
+utmost consequence with privateers; for, if the men have the
+smallest jealousy of being ill treated in this respect, disputes
+arise which do infinitely more mischief than the value of what
+can be got by such sinister practices. Among all the men who
+landed in this enterprize, the only man who drank a cup too much
+was one John Gabriel, a Dutchman, who served in the company
+commanded by Captain Rogers. When we were evacuating the town, he
+was missing, and was supposed to be either taken or slain. But he
+had found some excellent brandy in the house where he was
+quartered, of which he drank so liberally that he fell fast
+asleep on the floor, and was in that condition when we evacuated
+the town. The master of the house returned soon after, and found
+the Dutchman stretched out at full length, and so dead asleep
+that he could hardly distinguish whether he were living. Calling
+in some of his neighbours, and securing the Dutchman's weapons,
+they set him on his feet, and with some difficulty brought him to
+his senses, when he was not a little alarmed at finding himself
+in such company. At length the Spaniard restored his arms, and
+desired him to make all the haste he could after his comrades,
+who were not yet embarked.</p>
+
+<p>On the 2d May, which was the day appointed for payment of the
+ransom, no boat appeared, and we began to be uneasy for our
+money; but at length the boat arrived, and brought us 22,000
+dollars. We received the money, and sent back a message that we
+proposed to sail from Puna next morning, and should carry away
+the hostages, if the rest of the money were not then sent. We
+staid however till the 6th, when Captain Courtney was anxious to
+depart, lest we should be attacked by the French and Spanish
+ships from Lima. I endeavoured in vain to convince him that we
+were in no danger, as they could not by this time have received
+notice at Lima, and have fitted out a force sufficient to attack
+us. We sailed however, and came to anchor in the afternoon a few
+leagues from Point Arena. Next morning, when we were preparing to
+sail, Mr Morel, a gentleman from Puna related to our prisoners,
+and another gentleman from Guayaquil, brought us 3500 dollars, in
+farther payment of our ransom. This put us into such good humour,
+that we discharged all our prisoners except the Morels, the three
+hostages, and three or four more. The gentleman from Guayaquil
+had a gold chain and some other things of value, for which we
+sold him our bark, the <i>Beginning</i>, having no farther use
+for her. We also gave Captain Arizabella three negro women, and
+another to Mr Morel, and returned their wearing apparel to most
+of our prisoners who were now liberated, so that we parted good
+friends.</p>
+
+<p><i>Guayaquil</i> is divided into two parts, called the old and
+new towns, which together contain about 500 houses, and are
+joined by a long wooden bridge for foot passengers, near half a
+mile long. It is situated in low boggy ground, so dirty in winter
+that it is difficult to go from house to house. There is but one
+regular street along the river side, leading to the bridge, and
+from it along the old town. Besides this, there is a handsome
+parade or square in front of the church of St Jago, but that
+church is in ruins. Besides this, there are three other churches,
+St Augustin, St Francis, and St Dominic; before which last is
+another parade, and a half-moon battery fitted for mounting six
+guns, but there were none while we were there. There is also a
+chapel, and there had been a church dedicated to St Ignatius,
+belonging to the jesuits, but it was burnt down in the great
+fire. These were all decently adorned with altars, carved work,
+and pictures, and that dedicated to St Augustin had an organ, but
+all their plate had been carried away by the priests and
+students, who fled into the woods. Some of the houses were of
+brick, particularly about the parades, and the rest of timber or
+split bamboos, and some of them were decently furnished. Some of
+the inhabitants had calashes, but I know not what use they could
+be of, all the neighbourhood being so boggy that there was not
+road for them.</p>
+
+<p>The boggy ground about Guayaquil was full of the largest toads
+I ever saw, some being as big as an English two-penny loaf. The
+town was said to contain 2000 inhabitants of all sorts, including
+Indians, Negroes, and Mulattoes. An Englishman who joined us
+here, told us that, in the preceding December, on occasion of a
+public rejoicing for the birth of the prince of the Asturias,
+which lasted for three weeks, they had mustered 1100 foot and 500
+horse, all armed, which came from the surrounding country,
+besides a much greater number unarmed, the greater part of whom
+must have been Indians. Guayaquil is well situated for trade and
+ship-building, being fourteen leagues from Point Arena and seven
+from Puna, up a large river, into which fall several smaller
+ones, and on which there are many villages and farms. The water
+of this river is fresh for four leagues below the city, and all
+along its banks grow great quantities of mangroves and
+<i>sarsaparillas</i>, and on account of this last the water is
+thought salutary against the lues. But during floods, when it
+brings down many poisonous plants from the mountains, among which
+is the <i>manchinilla</i> apple, it is not reckoned wholesome.
+All birds that eat of this apple are sure to die, and we saw
+hundreds of them dead, floating on the water.</p>
+
+<p>The seasons here are very improperly denominated summer and
+winter. The winter is reckoned from the beginning of December to
+the end of May, in all which season it is sultry, hot, wet, and
+unhealthy. From the end of May to the beginning of December,
+which they call summer, the weather is serene, dry, and healthy,
+and not so violently hot as in what they denominate winter. The
+cacao is ripe and mostly gathered between June and August. Of the
+other fruits of this country, some are ripe and others green
+during the whole course of the year. Guayaquil is the chief city
+of a province of that name in the kingdom of Peru, governed by a
+president with five or six orders of judges, forming a royal
+<i>audiencia</i>, or chief court of judicature, and accountable
+only to the viceroy in military affairs,[223] and every province
+has a government of the same nature. The governors are appointed,
+or more properly purchase their offices, at the court of Old
+Spain, and are for life or good behaviour. If any one die or
+misbehave, the viceroy may name another during his time, which
+ought only to be for five years; but he sometimes gets those of
+his own placing confirmed by an order from Spain, by which means
+he derives a considerable portion of his unknown profits. The
+late viceroy of Peru continued in office fourteen years, several
+intended successors having died on the way. Scarcely does the
+king of Spain live in greater splendour than the viceroy does at
+Lima, where the chief courts of judicature are held, to which
+appeals are brought from all the courts and provinces of this
+extensive kingdom. I was told on good authority that the last
+viceroy, who died about four years ago, left at least eight
+millions of dollars to his widow and family, besides vast sums
+given in charity during his life, and building many churches,
+friaries, and nunneries. He left a better character than any
+viceroy had done for an age past.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 223: This province is now in the kingdom or
+viceroyalty of New Granada, and audiencia of
+Quito.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The province of Guayaquil abounds in excellent timber of
+several kinds, so that it is the chief place in all Peru for
+building and repairing ships, of which there are seldom less than
+seven or eight on the stocks here at one time. Its chief
+commodity is cacao, with which it supplies most parts on the
+South Sea, and we were told it never exported less than 30,000
+<i>carguas</i> yearly, and sometimes double that quantity, a
+<i>cargua</i> being eighty-one pounds weight, which only costs
+here two dollars and a half. They have also a considerable trade
+in salt and salt-fish, from Cape St Helena, which is mostly sent
+to Quito and other places of the inland country. It exports also
+a vast quantity of timber to Truxilo, Chana, Lima, and other
+places, where it is scarce. They export also from hence rice and
+cotton, with some dried or jerked beef. This province has no
+mines of gold or silver, but abounds in all sorts of cattle,
+which are very cheap, especially on the island of Puna, where we
+amply supplied ourselves. Their only grain is maiz, so that all
+their wheat flour is brought from Truxilo, Cherisse, and other
+places to windward, or to the south, as the wind blows here
+always from the south. They procure several kinds of woollen
+cloth, among which, are very strong and good bags, from Quito.
+Their wines, brandy, olives, oil, and sugar, come from Piscola,
+Nasca, and other places to windward. All kinds of European goods
+are brought from Panama, being brought there overland from
+Portobello on the Gulf of Mexico; and the trade of this port is
+so considerable as to employ forty sail every year, besides
+coasters. A market is also held daily on bark logs, or boats,
+every day, on the river before the town, containing every thing
+afforded by the interior country in great plenty.</p>
+
+<p>The other towns in the province are governed by lieutenants,
+or deputies, appointed by the corregidore. Above half of these
+towns border on the same river or its branches, so that their
+inhabitants can all come to the capital in two tides, though some
+are many leagues distant. <i>Porto Vaco</i> was formerly the
+capital. In the whole province, the Spaniards reckon 10,000
+inhabitants, but I believe there are many more, including all the
+mixed races between Spaniards, Indians, and negroes, which they
+divide and subdivide into eleven denominations. Few of the
+prisoners who fell into our hands were healthy or sound, and
+nearly half of the native Spaniards applied to our doctors for
+remedies against the French disease, which is so common here that
+it is reckoned no scandal.</p>
+
+<p>On the 11th May, with a strong gale at S.S.W. we bore away for
+the Gallepagos islands, being in a very sad condition; for we had
+upwards of twenty men ill in the Duke, and near fifty in the
+Duchess, seized with a malignant fever, contracted, as I suppose,
+at Guayaquil, where a contagious disease had reigned a month or
+five weeks before we took it; which swept away ten or twelve
+persons every day, so that all the churches were filled, being
+their usual burying places, and they had to dig a great deep hole
+close by the great church, where I kept guard, and this hole was
+almost filled with putrefying bodies: and our lying so long in
+that church, surrounded by such noisome scents, was enough to
+infect us all. In twenty-four hours more we had fifty men down
+and the Duchess upwards of seventy, and in the next twenty-four
+hours, ten more fell sick in each ship. We discovered land on the
+17th, and on the 18th, at day-break, we were within four leagues
+of two large islands almost joining each other, having passed
+that we first saw during the night. We sent repeatedly ashore
+here in search of water, but could find none, though the people
+went three or four miles up into the country, and they reported
+that the island was nothing but loose rocks like cinders, very
+rotten and heavy, and the earth so parched that it broke into
+holes under their feet. This made me suppose there had been a
+volcano here; and though there is much shrubby ground, with some
+green herbs, there was not the smallest signs of water, neither
+was it possible for any to be contained on such a surface. In
+short, we found these islands completely to disappoint our
+expectations, and by no means to agree with the descriptions of
+former voyagers. We had also the misfortune to lose company of
+one of our barks, in which was Mr Hately, with five of our men,
+two Spanish prisoners, and three negroes.[224]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 224: Mr Hately, being unable to rejoin his
+companions, was forced to land at Cape Passado in lat. 0&deg; 25'
+S. on the coast of Guayaquil, where he and his people were
+barbarously used by a mixed race between the Indians and negroes;
+but were rescued by a priest, and sent to Lima, where he was
+kindly treated.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In a consultation on the 26th May, we resolved to proceed for
+the island of Plata in quest of water, and then to come
+immediately off the coast again, having information of two French
+ships, one of sixty and the other of forty-six guns, together
+with a Spanish man of war, that would soon be sent in search of
+us. It was also our intention to refit our ships there, and not
+to go near the main, our ships being out of order, and our men
+very weak and sickly, several of them having already died. We
+accordingly sailed on the 27th, and in another conversation on
+the 30th, it was agreed to go first to <i>Gorgono</i>, to see if
+there were any English ships there; and afterwards to sail for
+<i>Maugla</i>, Malaga, or <i>Madulinar</i>,[225] where there are
+some Indians at enmity with the Spaniards, who, as the pilots
+informed us, come seldom there, and were not likely to procure
+any intelligence of us from thence. They told us also, if we
+could induce the Indians to trade with us, we might have hogs,
+fowls, plantains, bananas, and other refreshments.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 225: The island of Gorgona is on the coast
+of New Granada, in lat. 2&deg; 54' N. and long. 78&deg; 35'
+W.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>While on our course towards Gorgona, the Duchess took the
+<i>San Thoma de Villa nova</i> of ninety tons, having about forty
+people on board, including eleven negro slaves, and but little
+European goods, except some cloth and iron. Next day we made the
+island of <i>Gorgona</i>,[226] and on the 8th of June our boats
+brought in another prize, a small bark of fifteen tons belonging
+to a creek on the main. She was bound to Guayaquil, having ten
+Spaniards and Indians on board, and some negroes, but had very
+little cargo, except a small quantity of gold dust and a large
+gold chain, together of about 500<i>l</i>. value, which were
+secured aboard the Duchess. In a consultation, held on the 19th
+June, proceeding upon information procured from our prisoners, it
+was resolved to proceed to Malaga, at which there was an
+anchorage, where we proposed to leave our ships, and to row up
+the river for the rich gold mines of Barbacore,
+[<i>Barbaceas</i>][227] called also the mines of St Pean, from a
+village of that name about two tides up the river. At that place
+we proposed to seize canoes, as fitter than our boats for going
+up against the stream, in which, at this season of the year,
+according to the information of an old Spanish pilot, there are
+such strong freshes, that he did not expect we should reach the
+mines in less than twelve days. But having discoursed with
+several of the prisoners, we found the island of Malaga an unsafe
+place for our ships, and besides, they represented the river as
+so narrow, that the Indians would be able to assail us with
+poisoned arrows, and the Spaniards might easily cut off our
+retreat, by felling trees across from bank to bank. On this
+information, we held another consultation, in which it was agreed
+to desist from this enterprize, and we came accordingly back to
+Gorgona, in so very weak a condition that we could hardly have
+defended ourselves, if attacked.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 226: It is somewhat difficult to ascertain
+what island is here meant. There are some islands at the mouth of
+the <i>Rio de Mira</i>, in lat. 1&deg; 38' N. on one of which is
+<i>Punta de Mangles</i>, or Cape Mangles, resembling one of the
+names in the text; but from the context, the island for which
+they were next bound appears to have been that now called <i>Del
+Gallo</i>, in lat. 1&deg; 55' N. not above ten miles south from
+the river they proposed to enter.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 227: Barbacoas is one of the provinces of
+New Granada, having a town of the same name in the <i>Rio
+Telemli</i>, which joins the <i>Rio Patia.</i>--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>We arrived at Gorgona on the 13th June, where we anchored in
+forty fathoms, and resolved to careen our two ships in
+succession, beginning with the Duchess. Our sick men were removed
+into the galleon, and the sick officers to the French-built ship.
+We landed tents for the cooper's and armourer's crews, and
+cleared a place for tents to accommodate the sick on shore. All
+this was performed with so much diligence, that by the 28th both
+ships were careened, caulked, rigged, and restored fit for sea.
+On the 29th, we set up tents ashore for the sick, who were
+already much recovered, though the Spaniards had represented this
+island as unhealthy; yet by walking about on shore they soon
+gathered strength enough to return to their duty. We here fitted
+out the French-built ship, with twenty guns, putting Captain
+Cooke into her, with a crew taken from the other two ships,
+resolving to carry her home with us, and to employ her as a third
+cruizer while in these seas; and this great work employed us from
+the 29th June to the 9th July, calling her the <i>Marquis</i>.
+She had thirty-five men from the Duke and twenty-six from the
+Duchess, making a crew of sixty-one British, to which were added
+twenty negroes.</p>
+
+<p>Our next care was to get rid of our prisoners, who were a
+great burden to us, and we resolved therefore to set them on
+shore, after trying every possible method to engage them in a
+scheme for trading with us. For this purpose I proposed going to
+Panama, to remain six days near that place, till they should
+bring the money we could agree for, as the price of our prize
+goods; and to this the two Morels and Don Antonio agreed,
+provided we would take 60,000 dollars for the whole. I then
+proposed to give them up the galleon and all the goods and
+negroes, if they would give us 120,000 dollars for the whole.
+They told us that trading in these seas with strangers,
+especially the English and Dutch, was so rigidly prohibited, that
+they would have to give more than the original cost in bribes, to
+procure licence to deal with us, and could not therefore assure
+us of payment, unless we agreed to take a low price. Finding it
+therefore not worth while to waste time, and knowing we should
+run much risk in treating with them, we at length resolved to set
+them all ashore, hoping the Morels and Don Antonio would get
+money for us, to prevent us from burning the ships we could not
+conveniently carry away. At parting, I made them sensible that we
+had treated them like generous enemies, and said we would sell
+them good bargains for what money they might be able to bring us
+in ten days, after which we should burn or carry away all that
+was not then disposed of. We accordingly landed seventy-two
+prisoners on the 10th July. On the 16th the Morels came off with
+what money they had been able to procure, and bought some of our
+goods, behaving with much honour, and putting great confidence in
+us. On the 18th, a negro belonging to the Duchess was bitten by a
+small brown speckled snake, and died in twelve hours. There are
+many snakes in this island of Gorgona, and I saw one above three
+yards long, and as thick as my leg. The same morning the Mr
+Morels went off a second time in our bark for money; and this day
+one of the same kind of snakes that killed our negro was found on
+the forecastle of the Duke, having crawled up the cable, as we
+supposed, as they were often seen in the water.</p>
+
+<p>On the 2d of August we were like to have had a mutiny, for the
+steward informed me that he understood many of the men had
+entered into a secret agreement, and he had heard some
+ringleaders boasting that sixty men had already signed the paper,
+but knew not the nature of their design. I immediately convened
+the officers in the cabin, where we armed ourselves, and soon
+secured four of the principal mutineers, putting the fellow who
+wrote the paper in irons. By this time all the people were on
+deck, and we had got their paper from those we had in custody;
+the purport of it being to refuse accepting the intended
+distribution of plunder, and not to move from this place, till
+they had what they termed justice done them. Not knowing how far
+this mutiny might have been concerted with the people of the
+other ships, we agreed to discharge those in confinement, on
+asking pardon, and faithfully promising never to be guilty of the
+like again.</p>
+
+<p>We sailed from Gorgona on the 11th August, and as our ships
+were now rather thinly manned, I engaged thirty-two of our negro
+prisoners to join our company, placing Michael Kendall, a free
+Jamaica negro, who had deserted to us from the Spaniards, as
+their leader, and charging him to exercise them in the use of
+arms. At the same time I supplied them with clothes, desiring
+them to consider themselves now as Englishmen, and no longer
+slaves to the Spaniards. After this we stood over to the bay of
+<i>Jecames</i>, [Atacames,] where the Indians are free; and with
+much ado entered into trade with them, by the help of a priest.
+We sent them three large wooden saints to adorn their church,
+which they took as a great present; and I sent a feathered cap to
+the wife of the chief which was well accepted. We here sold some
+of our prize goods to good account, so that we had provisions
+very cheap. We sailed from hence on the 1st September, intending
+for the Gallapagos, and on the 8th we made one of these
+islands.</p>
+
+<p>Next day we came to anchor in about thirty fathoms; and in the
+evening our boats brought us off a lading of excellent turtle,
+having sent our yawl and several men ashore previously to turn
+over these creatures in the night; but to no purpose, as we
+afterwards found they only came ashore in the day. The island off
+which we lay was high, rocky, and barren, with some low land next
+the sea, but now water was to be found, like those we had seen
+formerly. On the 12th the Duchess, which lay at anchor a good
+distance from us, had got about 150 land and sea-tortoises, but
+not generally so large as ours; while we had 120 turtles, but no
+land-tortoises as yet. The Marquis had the worst luck. On the
+13th, I sent our pinnace to the place where the Duchess got
+land-tortoises, which returned at night with thirty-seven, and
+some salt they had found in a pond; and our yawl brought us
+twenty sea-turtles, so that we were now well provided. Some of
+the largest land-tortoises weighed 100 pounds; and the largest
+sea-turtles were upwards of 400 pounds weight. The land-tortoises
+laid eggs on our deck; and our men brought many of them from the
+land, pure white, and as large as a goose's egg, with a strong
+thick shell, exactly round.</p>
+
+<p>These are the ugliest creatures that can well be imagined, the
+back-shell being not unlike the top of an old hackney-coach, as
+black as jet, and covered with a rough shrivelled skin. The neck
+and legs are long, and as big as a man's wrist, and they have
+club-feet as large as a fist, shaped much like those of an
+elephant, having five knobs, or thick nails, on each fore-foot,
+and only four on the hind-feet. The head is small, with a visage
+like that of a snake; and when first surprised they shrink up
+their head, neck, and legs under their shell. Some of our men
+affirmed that they saw some of these about four feet high, and of
+vast size; and that two men mounted on the back of one of these,
+whom it easily carried at its usual slow pace, not appearing to
+regard their weight. They supposed this one could not weigh less
+than 700 pounds. The Spaniards say that there are no others in
+these seas, except at the Gallapagos, but they are common in
+Brazil.</p>
+
+<p>The 15th, being under sail with a fine breeze, we agreed to
+lay to till midnight. The 16th, seeing many islands and rocks to
+the westwards, we agreed to bear away, not caring to encumber
+ourselves among them during the night; but by six in the evening,
+from the mast-head, we could see so many low rocks, almost
+joining from island to island, that we seemed land-locked for
+more than three parts of the compass, and no way open except the
+S.W. whence we came. We resolved therefore to return that way,
+making short trips all night, and continually sounding, for fear
+of shoals, having from forty to sixty fathoms. The 18th and 19th
+we saw several more islands, one of them very large, which we
+supposed to be near the equator. At noon of the 19th we had an
+observation, making our latitude 2&deg; 2' N. We saw in all at
+least fifty islands, some of which we searched, and others we
+viewed from a distance, but none had the least appearance of
+fresh water.[228] Signior Morel told me that a Spanish man-of-war
+had been to an island in lat. 1&deg; 20' or 30' S. 140 Spanish
+leagues west from the island of <i>Plata</i>, and to which they
+gave the name of <i>Santa Maria del Aguada</i>, a pleasant island
+with a good road, full of wood, and having plenty of water, with
+turtle and sea-tortoises in abundance. This I believe to have
+been the same island in which Davis the buccaneer recruited; and
+all the light he has left by which to find it again, is, that it
+is to the west of the islands he was at with the other
+buccaneers, which must be those we were twice at. We had no
+occasion to look out for this island on the present trip, though
+I believe it might easily have been found without farther
+directions. In these islands there are many kinds of sea-fowl,
+and some land-birds, particularly hawks and turtle-doves, both so
+very tame that we often knocked them down with sticks. I saw no
+kind of beasts, but there are guanas in abundance, and
+land-tortoises almost on every island, besides vast numbers of
+turtles or sea-tortoises. It is very strange how the
+land-tortoises have got here, as there are none on the main, and
+they could not have come of themselves. Some of these islands are
+the haunts of seals, but not in such numbers as at Juan
+Fernandez, neither is their fur so good. A very large one made at
+me three several times, and if I had not happened to have a
+pike-staff headed with iron, he might have killed me. I was on
+the level sand when he came open-mouthed at me from the water, as
+fierce and quick as an angry dog let loose. All the three times
+he made at me, I struck the pike into his breast, which at last
+forced him to retire into the water, snarling with an ugly noise,
+and shewing his long teeth. This animal was as big as a large
+bear.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 228: In Cowley's voyage, formerly given,
+one of these islands, which he calls the Duke of York's Island,
+is said to have abundance of wood and water, but none to be had
+in any of the rest. Perhaps the Duke of York's Island of Cowley,
+and Santa Maria del Aguada of Morel, may be the
+same.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the 1st October we made the main-land of Mexico, which
+Captain Dampier immediately recognized as near the place where he
+had attacked the lesser Manilla ship in the St George. Our men
+began again to fall sick, and two of them dropped down on the
+deck in a kind of scorbutic appoplexy, but recovered on being let
+blood. The 2d we made <i>Cape Corientes</i>, on the coast of
+Mexico, in lat. 20&deg; 25' N. which we knew by our charts.
+Captain Dampier had been here, but it was a long time ago, and he
+did not seem to remember much of the matter; yet when he came to
+land at different places, he very readily recollected them. Our
+purpose now was to look for the islands called <i>Tres
+Marias</i>, to procure some refreshments, but found this somewhat
+difficult, being very uncertain as to their true situation. In
+the afternoon of the 4th, Cape Corientes bore E.N.E. about ten
+leagues, and next morning, being fine clear weather, we
+discovered two islands at the distance of about fourteen leagues,
+one bearing N. by W. and the other N. by E. At noon we had an
+observation, and found our latitude 20&deg; 45' N.</p>
+
+<p>The sight of these islands was very satisfactory, for though
+our men had their fill of land and sea-turtle, which kept them
+from the scurvy, they were but weak, as that is but a faint food,
+except they had enough of bread or flour to eat with it; whereas
+they only had a pound and a quarter of bread or flour to five men
+per day, on purpose to husband our stock till we came to live
+entirely on salt-meat, when we should be under the necessity to
+allow more. On the 6th I sent a pinnace to the eastern island, to
+look if there were any good road, or convenience for wooding and
+watering; but the officer reported that the island had foul
+ground for near half a mile from the shore, with bad anchorage
+and worse landing; and though there was abundance of wood, no
+water was to be had. This was bad news for us, as our water began
+to grow scarce. We now bore up for the middle island, which
+Captain Dampier believed he had been at when he sailed with
+Captain Swan, and on which occasion they found water. On the 8th
+our boat returned from the middle island, they and the boat of
+the Duchess having landed at several places on the S.E. side of
+the island, where was plenty of good water. They saw no signs of
+any people having been there lately, but found a human skull on
+the ground. This was supposed to have belonged to one of two
+Indian chiefs, who were left there by Captain Swan, about
+twenty-three years before, as Dampier told us: for victuals being
+scarce with these buccaneers, they would not carry the poor
+Indians any farther, after they had served their turns, but left
+them to starve on this desolate island. The Marquis and bark
+having separated from us, we kept a light up all night, and made
+a fire on the island, that they might see where to find us at
+anchor; but not seeing them next morning at day-break, I proposed
+to have gone in search of them; but Captain Courtney and the rest
+made light of the matter, believing they might soon come in
+without assistance, which they afterwards did.</p>
+
+<p>The supply of cattle, hogs, and plantains we procured at
+Atacames lasted us to the Gallapagos, and we had fed on turtle
+ever since till the last two days, which was a great refreshment
+to our men, and husbanded our stock of European provisions. On
+the 9th, I sent an officer to view the other side of the island,
+who told me, on his return, it was much better than where we
+were, having several sandy bays, on which he had seen the tracks
+of turtle. On this intelligence I sent the boat back in the
+evening; and it came back next morning with a full load of
+turtle, leaving another load ready turned; and, what was of much
+more consequence, they found good water; whereas that we had
+gotten hitherto purged the men excessively. As we wooded,
+watered, and furnished ourselves with fresh provisions here, and
+as these islands are little known, some account of them may be
+acceptable.</p>
+
+<p>The <i>Tres Marias</i>, or Three Marias, off the western coast
+of Guadalaxara, in the kingdom of Mexico, are in a range
+stretching from S.E. to N.W. of about forty-five English miles in
+length. The largest island is the N.W. which appeared a high
+double land, and above five leagues in length: the middle island
+about three leagues; and the south-eastermost hardly two leagues.
+There also are high lands, full of trees; and near the least
+island there are two or three small broken white islets, one of
+which was so like a ship under sail, that we gave the signal for
+a chase. The S.E. end of the island is in lat. 21&deg; 10' N.
+long. 105&deg; 56' W. and the N.W. point of the N. island is in
+lat. 21&deg; 40' N. long. 106&deg; 26' W. the distance from each
+being about two marine leagues. These islands have abundance of
+parrots of different sorts, with pigeons and other land-birds, of
+which we killed great numbers. There were also many excellent
+hares, but much smaller than ours. We saw likewise abundance of
+guanas, and some racoons, which barked and snarled at us like
+dogs, but were easily beaten off with sticks. The water is more
+worthy of remark than any other thing we saw here, as we only
+found two good springs, which ran in large streams; the others
+being bitter and disagreeable, proceeding, as I suppose, from
+being impregnated by shrubs or roots growing in the water, or
+from some mineral.</p>
+
+<p>The turtle we found here are of a different sort from any I
+had ever seen, though very good. Though it is ordinarily believed
+that there are only three sorts of sea-turtles, yet we have seen
+six or seven sorts at different times, and our people have eaten
+of them all, except the very large <i>whooping</i> or
+<i>loggerhead</i> kind, which are found in great plenty in
+Brazil, some of them above 500 pounds weight. We did not eat of
+these, because at that time our provisions were plentiful. At the
+Gallapagos, both males and females were observed to come on shore
+only in the day time, quite different from what I had heard of
+them at other places; whereas all we caught here were by turning
+them over in the night, when the females come on shore to lay
+their eggs and bury them in the dry sand. One of these whom we
+caught had 800 eggs in her belly, 150 of which were skinned over
+and ready for being extruded at once. Some authors alledge that
+these eggs are six weeks in hatching, which I can hardly credit,
+as the sun makes the sand in which they are deposited excessively
+hot, and they are only covered by a very thin film or skin,
+instead of a shell. In order to ascertain this point, I made some
+of our men ashore watch one carefully, and mark the place and
+time of laying her eggs. In less than twelve hours they found the
+eggs addled, and in about twelve hours more they had young ones
+completely formed and alive. Had we remained some time longer, I
+might have thoroughly satisfied myself and others, respecting the
+quick production of tortoises; for I am apt to credit the report
+of several of our men, who asserted that having found eggs in the
+sand, and looked for them three days afterwards in the same
+place, they then found nothing but films; which shews that the
+young ones are hatched in that time. They assured me also that
+they had seen the young brood run out of the sand every day,
+making directly in great numbers for the sea.</p>
+
+<p>There were few fish about the shores of this island, these
+being of the ordinary sorts usually met with in these seas; but
+the abundance of turtle at this time amply made up for this
+defect. The chief officers fed here deliciously, being scarcely
+ever without hares, turtle-doves, pigeons, and parrots of various
+colours and sizes, many of which had white or red heads, with
+tufts of feathers on their crowns. We found good anchorage at
+this middle island, and gradual soundings from twenty-four to
+four fathoms close by the shore; and between this and the least
+or southern island the depth was about the same as where we were,
+having no shoal between but what was visible, as a rock lay off
+the S.W. point and a shoal off the N.E. point of the same, with
+another at a great distance from that point of the least island,
+but neither were above half a mile from the shore.</p>
+
+<p>Sailing from these islands, we saw land on the 1st November,
+which proved to be the point of California, or that headland
+called Cape St Ducas. It was now necessary to put in execution
+the rules we had formerly laid down for cruizing, as also to
+settle our regulations about plunder. Accordingly, my station was
+to be the outermost in the Duke, the Duchess in the middle, and
+the Marquis nearest the shore; the nearest ship to be at the
+least six leagues, and nine at the most from shore, and the bark
+to ply between ship and ship, carrying advice. By this means we
+could spread out fifteen leagues, and might see any thing that
+passed in the day within twenty leagues of the shore; and to
+prevent any ships passing in the night, we were to ply to
+windward all day, and to drive to leeward all night. On the 5th
+November, the Duchess went nearest shore, and the Marquis took
+the middle station. We were much encouraged by considering that
+in this very place, and about the same time of the year, Sir
+Thomas Candish took the Manilla ship.</p>
+
+<p>On the 16th we sent our bark to look for fresh water on the
+main, and next morning she returned to us, reporting that they
+had seen wild Indians, who paddled to them on bark-logs. These
+Indians were fearful of coming near our people at first, but were
+soon prevailed upon to accept a knife or two and some baize, for
+which they gave in return two bladders of water, two live foxes,
+and a deer skin. Till now, we thought that the Spaniards had
+missionaries among these people, but finding them quite naked,
+with no appearance of any European commodities, nor a single word
+of the Spanish language, we concluded that they were quite
+savage, and we dispatched the bark and a boat a second time, in
+hopes of procuring some refreshments, with some trifles to
+distribute among the natives. On the 19th our men returned,
+having become very familiar with the Californians, who were the
+poorest wretches that could be imagined, and had no manner of
+refreshments whatever to afford us. They brought off some Indian
+knives made of sharks teeth, and a few other curiosities, which I
+preserved to shew what shifts may be made. It was now the 9th of
+December, near a month after the time when the Manilla ships
+generally fall in with this coast, and we were much embarrassed
+by the impossibility of procuring any intelligence respecting
+them. On examining our provisions, we found only bread on board
+for seventy days, even at our present short allowance, and it
+would require not less than fifty days for our run across the
+Pacific to Guam, one of the Ladrones; wherefore we resolved to
+continue our cruize here no longer than other eight days. Being
+in want of water also, it was agreed upon that the Marquis should
+go first into a harbour for that necessary article, while the
+Duke and Duchess continued on the look-out, and then these other
+ships to do the same in succession.</p>
+
+<p>On the 21st December, while bearing up for the port in which
+was the Marquis, the man at the mast-head, about nine in the
+morning, gave notice that he saw a sail besides the Duchess and
+bark, seeming about seven leagues from us. We immediately hoisted
+our ensign, and bore for the strange sail, as did the Duchess;
+and as it fell calm, I sent the pinnace to endeavour to make out
+what she was. All the rest of the day we had very little wind, so
+that we made hardly any way, and as our boat did not return we
+remained in much anxiety, not knowing whether the ship in sight
+were our consort the Marquis, or the Manilla ship. In this
+uncertainty, I sent Mr Fry in our yawl to the Duchess, to
+endeavour to learn what this ship was, and as soon as the yawl
+was gone I hoisted French colours and fired a gun, which the
+stranger answered, and in some measure cleared our doubts. Mr Fry
+soon returned, bringing the joyful news that the ship in sight
+really was the Manilla galleon for which we had waited so long,
+and of which we were now almost in despair of meeting. This
+revived our courage, and every one actively prepared for the
+engagement; all our melancholy reflections on the shortness of
+our provisions for the run to Guam being now dispelled, and
+nothing now occupied our thoughts but of our being masters of the
+mighty treasure supposed to be on board this ship, while every
+moment seemed an hour till we could get up with her. We gave
+orders for the two pinnaces to keep with her all night, shewing
+false fires from time to time, that we might know whereabout they
+and the chase were; and it was agreed, if the Duke and Duchess
+could get up with her together, that we should board her at once.
+Before night we had made a clear ship, and had every thing in
+readiness for action at day-light; and all night long we kept a
+sharp look-out for the boats false fires, which we frequently saw
+and answered.</p>
+
+<p>At day-break of the 22d December, 1709, we saw the chase about
+a league from us on our weather bow, the Duchess being a-head of
+her to leeward about half a league. About six a.m. our boat came
+aboard, having kept very near the chase all night without
+receiving any damage, and told us that the Duchess passed the
+chase in the night, at which time the chase fired two shots at
+her, which were not returned. Having no wind, we got out eight
+sweeps, with which we rowed for near an hour, when there sprung
+up a small breeze. I ordered a large kettle of chocolate to be
+prepared for the ship's company, having no spirituous liquor to
+give them, and then went to prayers; but were disturbed before
+these were finished, by the enemy firing at us. To deter as from
+attempting to board, they had barrels hung at their yard arms,
+which resembled barrels of powder. About eight a.m. we began to
+engage by ourselves, for the Duchess being still at leeward, had
+not been able to get up, as there was very little wind. At first
+the enemy fired at us with their stern-chase guns, which we
+returned with those on our bows, till at length we got close on
+board each other, when we gave her several broadsides, plying our
+small arms very briskly; which last the enemy returned as thick
+for a time, but did not fire their great guns half so fast as we.
+After some time, we shot a little a-head, laying the enemy
+athwart hawse close aboard, and plied her so warmly that she soon
+lowered her colours two-thirds down. By this time the Duchess had
+got up, and fired about five guns with a volley of small arms;
+but as the enemy had submitted she made no return.</p>
+
+<p>We now sent our pinnace on board the prize, and brought away
+the captain and other officers; from whom we learnt that a larger
+ship had come from Manilla along with them, having forty-six
+brass guns and as many swivels, but they had parted company with
+her about three months before, and supposed she had got to
+Acapulco by this time, as she sailed better than this ship. Our
+prize had the following high-sounding name <i>Nostra Senoria de
+la Incarnacion Disenganio</i>, commanded by the Chevalier Jean
+Pichberty, a Frenchman. She had twenty guns and twenty
+pattereroes, with 193 men, of whom nine were killed, ten wounded,
+and several sore scorched with gun-powder. We engaged her three
+glasses, in which time only I and another were wounded. I was
+shot through the left cheek, the bullet carrying away great part
+of my upper jaw and several of my teeth, part of which dropt on
+the deck, where I fell. The other was William Powell, an Irish
+landman, who was slightly wounded in the buttock. After my wound,
+I was forced to write my orders, both to prevent the loss of
+blood, and because speaking gave me great pain. We received
+little damage in our rigging during the engagement, except that a
+shot disabled our mizen-mast. On the 23d, after we had put our
+ship to rights, we stood in for the harbour where the Marquis
+was, distant about four leagues to the N.E. sending our surgeons
+on board the prize to dress her wounded men. We same to anchor in
+the harbour about four p.m. where we received the compliments of
+all on board the Marquis on our sudden and almost unlooked-for
+success, which gave us all much satisfaction. We found that ship
+in good condition and ready to sail, and all on board her in high
+spirits, eager for action. At eight the same evening we held a
+consultation on two important points: <i>first</i>, what we
+should do with our hostages; and, <i>secondly</i>, how we should
+act in regard to the other Manilla ship, which we still thought
+there was a strong probability of our taking, if we could remain
+here a little longer. As the hostages from Guayaquil, and the
+Chevalier Pichberty, brother to the famous Monsieur du Cass,
+appeared to be men of strict honour, we thought it was best to
+make the best terms we possibly could with them, and then set
+them at liberty. We had more difficulty in settling the other
+point in discussion, as to the mode of attacking the other
+Manilla ship. I was desirous of going out along with the Marquis
+on that service; but as some reflections had been cast on the
+Duchess for not engaging our late prize so soon as it was thought
+she might have done, Captain Courtney was absolutely bent on
+going out with his own ship and the Marquis, and having a
+majority in the committee, my proposal was overruled, and we in
+the Duke were reluctantly constrained to remain in harbour. It
+was agreed, however, that we should put ten of our best hands on
+board the Duchess, the better to enable her to engage the great
+Manilla ship, if she were fallen in with; and she and the Marquis
+sailed on Christmas-day. As soon as they were gone, we put part
+of the goods from our bark into the prize, in order to send away
+our prisoners in the bark; and as there were still due 4000
+dollars of the Guayaquil ransom, we agreed to sell them the bark
+and her remaining cargo for 2000 dollars, taking the Chevalier de
+Pichberty's bill for 6000 dollars, payable in London, which he
+readily gave us, together with an acknowledgment under his hand
+that we had given him a good bargain. This matter being settled,
+we had only to look to our own safety while our consorts were out
+on their cruize for the Manilla ship. We posted two centinels on
+a hill, whence they had a clear view of the sea, with
+instructions to give us notice by a signal whenever they saw
+three ships in the offing, that we might have time to secure our
+prisoners, and to get out to the assistance of our consorts, as
+we expected they might have hot work, this other Manilla ship
+being much stronger and better manned than the one we had taken,
+and better provided in all respects.</p>
+
+<p>On the afternoon of the 26th, our sentries made the appointed
+signal of seeing three ships; on which we immediately put all our
+prisoners into the bark, from which we removed her sails, and
+took away all our men, except two lieutenants and twenty-two men,
+whom we left to look after our prize and the prisoners. As the
+prisoners, though 170 in number, were secured in the bark,
+without sails, arms, rudder, or boat, and moored near a mile
+distant from our prize, there were more than sufficient for
+guarding them and giving them provisions and drink during our
+absence. This being arranged, we immediately weighed and stood to
+sea, in order to assist our consorts in attacking the great ship.
+Captain Dover thought proper to go on board the prize, instead of
+one of our lieutenants, whom he sent to me. I was still in a very
+weak condition, my head and throat being very much swelled, so
+that I spoke with great pain, and not loud enough to be heard at
+any distance; insomuch that all the chief officers and our
+surgeons wished me to remain in the prize, but I would not
+consent. We got under sail about seven p.m. and saw lights
+several times in the night, which we supposed to be false fires
+in the boats of our consorts. In the morning of the 27th at
+day-break, we saw three sail to windward, but so far distant that
+it was nine o'clock before we could make out which were our
+consorts and which the chase. At this time we could see the
+Duchess and the chase near together, and the Marquis standing to
+them with all the sail she could carry. We also made all the sail
+we could, but being three or four leagues to leeward, and having
+a very scant wind, we made little way. At noon they bore S.E.
+from us, being still three leagues right to windward. In the
+afternoon we observed the Marquis get up with the chase, and
+engage her pretty briskly; but soon fell to leeward out of cannon
+shot, where she lay a considerable time, which made us conclude
+that she was somehow disabled.</p>
+
+<p>I sent away my pinnace well manned, with orders to dog the
+chase all night, making signals with false fires that she might
+not escape us; but before our boat could get up to them, the
+Marquis made sail again towards the chase, and went to it again
+briskly for more than four glasses. At this time we saw the
+Duchess steer ahead to windward, clear of the enemy, as I
+supposed to stop her leaks or repair her rigging. Meanwhile the
+Marquis kept the enemy in play, till the Duchess again bore down,
+when each fired a broadside or two, and left off because it grew
+dark. They then bore south of us in the Duke, which was right to
+windward, distant about two leagues; and about midnight our boat
+came to us, having made false fires, which we answered. Our
+people had been on board both the Duchess and Marquis, the former
+of which had her foremast much disabled, the ring of an anchor
+shot away, one man killed and several wounded, having also
+received several shots in her upper works and one in her
+powder-room, but all stopt. The Duchess had engaged the enemy by
+herself the night before, which was what we took to be false
+fires, being too distant to hear the guns. At that time they
+could perceive the enemy to be in great disorder, her guns not
+being all mounted, and neither her nettings nor close quarters in
+order; so that, if it had been my good fortune in the Duke to
+have gone with the Duchess, we all believed we might then have
+carried this great ship by boarding; or, if the Duchess had taken
+most of the men out of the Marquis, which did not sail well
+enough to come up to her assistance in time, she alone might have
+taken her by boarding at once, before the Spaniards had
+experienced our strength, and become afterwards so well provided
+as encouraged them to be driving, giving us every opportunity to
+board them if we pleased.</p>
+
+<p>Captain Cooke sent me word that he had nearly fired away all
+his powder and shot, but had escaped well in masts, rigging, and
+men; wherefore I sent him three barrels of powder and a
+proportion of shot; and I also sent Lieutenant Fry to consult
+with our consorts how we might best engage the enemy next
+morning. All this day and the ensuing night the chase made
+signals to us in the Duke, thinking us her consort, which we had
+already taken; and after dark she edged down towards us,
+otherwise I should not have been up with her next day, having
+very little wind and that against us. In the morning of the 28th,
+as soon as it was day, the wind veered at once, on which we put
+our ship about, and the chase fired first upon the Duchess, which
+was nearest her in consequence of the change of wind. The Duchess
+returned the fire briskly; and we in the Duke stood as near as we
+possibly could, firing our guns as we could bring them to bear
+upon the enemy. At this time the Duchess was athwart her hawse,
+firing very fast, and such of her shot as missed the enemy flew
+over us and between our masts, so that we ran the risk of
+receiving more harm from the Duchess than the enemy, if we had
+lain on her quarter and across her stern, which was my intention.
+We therefore took our station close along side, board and board,
+where we kept plying her with round shot only, using neither
+barshot nor grape, as her sides were too thick for these, and no
+men appeared in sight.</p>
+
+<p>She lay driving, as we did also close aboard of her, the enemy
+keeping to their close quarters, so that we never fired our small
+arms unless when we saw a man appear, or a port open, and then we
+fired as quick as possible. We continued thus for four glasses,
+about which time we received a shot in our main-mast which much
+disabled it. Soon after this, the Duchess and we, still both
+firing, came back close under the enemy, and had like to have
+fallen on board of her, so that we could make little use of our
+guns. We then fell astern in our birth alongside, and at this
+time the enemy threw a fire-ball into the Duke from one of her
+tops, which blew up a chest of loaded arms and cartouch-boxes on
+our quarter-deck, and several cartridges in our steerage, by
+which Mr Vanburgh, the agent of our owners, and a Dutchman, were
+very much burnt; and it might have done us much more damage if it
+had not been soon extinguished. After getting clear, the Duchess
+stood in for the shore, where she lay braced to, mending her
+rigging. The Marquis fired several shots, but to little purpose,
+as her guns were small. We continued close aboard for some time
+after the Duchess drew off; till at last we received a second
+shot in our main-mast, not far from the other, which rent it
+miserably; insomuch that the mast settled towards the wound, and
+threatened to come by the board. Our rigging also being much
+shattered, we sheered off and brought to, making a signal to our
+consorts for a consultation; and in the interim got ordinary
+fishes up to support our main-mast as well as we could.</p>
+
+<p>Captains Courtney and Cooke, with other officers, came aboard
+the Duke, in obedience to the signal, when we took the condition
+of our three ships into consideration. Their masts and rigging
+were much damaged, and we had no means of procuring any repairs.
+If we again engaged the enemy, we could not propose to do any
+more than we had done already, which evidently had not done her
+much harm, as we could perceive that few of our shots penetrated
+her sides to any purpose, and our small arms availed still less,
+as not one of their men were to be seen above board. Our
+main-mast was so badly wounded that the least additional injury
+would bring it down, and the fore-mast of the Duchess was in as
+bad a state. The fall of these masts might bring down others, and
+we should then lie perfect butts for the enemy to batter at, and
+his heavy guns might easily sink us. If we should attempt to
+carry her by boarding, we must necessarily run the risk of losing
+many of our men, with little prospect of success, as they had
+above treble our number to oppose us, not having now in all our
+three ships above 120 men fit for boarding, and these weak, as we
+had been long short of provisions. If, therefore, we attempted to
+board and were beaten off, leaving any of our men behind, the
+enemy would learn our strength, or weakness rather, and might go
+to the harbour and retake our prize, in spite of every thing we
+could do to hinder. Our ammunition also was now very short, and
+we had only, enough to engage for a few glasses longer. All these
+circumstances being duly considered, together with the difficulty
+of procuring masts, and the time and provisions we must spend
+before we could get them fitted we resolved to desist from any
+farther attempt upon the enemy, since our battering her signified
+little, and we had not sufficient strength to carry her by
+boarding. We determined therefore to keep her company till night,
+and then to lose her, after which to make the best of our way to
+the harbour where we had left our prize, to secure her.</p>
+
+<p>We had engaged this ship first and last about seven glasses,
+during which we in the Duke had eleven men wounded, three of whom
+were scorched with gun-powder. I was again unfortunately wounded
+by a splinter in my left foot, just before the arms chest was
+blown up on the quarter-deck; and so severely that I had to lie
+on my back in great pain, being unable to stand. Part of my
+heel-bone was struck out, and all the foot just under the ankle
+cut above half through, my wound bleeding very much before it
+could be stopped and dressed, by which I was much weakened. In
+the Duchess above twenty men were killed and wounded, one of the
+slain and three of the wounded belonging to my ship, which had
+been lent when I was left in the harbour. The Marquis had none
+killed or wounded, but two of her men were scorched by
+gun-powder. The enemy was the <i>Vigoniae</i>, a brave and lofty
+new ship, admiral of Manilla, and this her first voyage. She was
+calculated to carry 60 guns, and had above 40 mounted, with as
+many pattereroes, all brass, and, as we were informed, had a
+complement of 450 men, of whom 150 were Europeans, besides
+passengers. We were told also that several of her crew had
+formerly been pirates, who had all their wealth on board, and
+were resolved to defend it to the last extremity. The gunner was
+said to be a very expert man, and had provided extraordinarily
+for defence, which enabled them to make a desperate resistance;
+and they had filled all her sides between the guns with bales of
+soft goods, to secure the men.</p>
+
+<p>During the whole action she kept the Spanish flag flying at
+her mast-head. We could observe that we had shattered her sails
+and rigging very much, and had slain two men in her tops, besides
+bringing down her mizen-yard; but this was all the visible damage
+we had done them, though we certainly placed 500 round shot in
+her hull, which were six-pounders. These large ships are built at
+Manilla of excellent timber, which does not splinter, and their
+sides are much thicker and stronger than those of the ships built
+in Europe. Thus ended our attempt on the biggest Manilla ship,
+which I have heard related in so many ways at home, that I have
+thought it necessary to give a very particular account of the
+action, as I find it set down in my journal. Generally speaking,
+the ships from Manilla are much richer than the prize we had
+taken; for she had waited a long time for the Chinese junks to
+bring silks, which not arriving, she came away with her cargo
+made out by means of abundance of coarse goods. Several of the
+prisoners assured me that a Manilla ship was commonly worth ten
+millions of dollars; so that, if it had not been for the
+accidental non-arrival of the junks from China that season, we
+had gotten an extraordinarily rich prize. After my return to
+Europe, I met a sailor in Holland who had been in the large ship
+when we engaged her, and who communicated to me a reason why we
+could not have taken her at all events. Her gunner kept
+constantly in the powder-room, and declared that he had taken the
+sacrament to blow up the ship if we had boarded her, which
+accordingly made the men exceedingly resolute in her defence. I
+the more readily gave credit to what this man told me, as he gave
+a regular and circumstantial account of the engagement,
+conformable to what I have given from my journal.</p>
+
+<p>It is hardly to be doubted that we might have set this great
+ship on fire, by converting one of our ships into a fireship for
+that purpose: But this was objected to by all our officers,
+because we had goods of value on board all our ships. The enemy
+on this occasion was the better provided for us, having heard at
+Manilla, through our British settlements in India, that two small
+ships had been fitted out at Bristol for an expedition into the
+South Sea, and of which Captain Dampier was pilot. On this
+account it was that they had so many Europeans on board the great
+ship, most of whom had all their wealth along with them, for
+which they would fight to the utmost; and it having been agreed
+to pay no freight on the gun-decks, they had filled up all the
+spaces between the guns with bales of goods, to secure the men.
+The two ships were to have joined at Cape Lucas, expecting to
+meet us off Cape Corientes or Navidad.</p>
+
+<p>We returned again into our port on the coast of California on
+the 1st January, 1710, and being resolved to make as quick
+dispatch as possible for our passage to the East Indies, we
+immediately parted with our prisoners, giving them the bark with
+a sufficiency of water and provisions to carry them to Acapulco.
+We then occupied ourselves to the 7th in refitting and laying in
+a stock of wood and water; and had much satisfaction in finding
+as much bread in our prize as might serve for our long run to
+Guam, with the aid of the scanty remains of our old stock. After
+a long disputatious negotiation, it was settled that Mr Fry and
+Mr Stratton were to take charge of our prize, which we named the
+Bachelor, though under Captain Dover, but they were not to be
+contradicted by him in the business, as his business was to see
+that nothing was done in her contrary to the interest of our
+owners and ships companies, he being in the nature of agent, only
+with the title of chief captain. At the same time, we put on
+board of this ship 35 men from the Duke, 25 from the Duchess, and
+13 from the Marquis, making in all 73 men, which, with 36 Manilla
+Indians, called <i>Las-Cars</i>, and some other prisoners we
+still had remaining, made up her complement to 115 men.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION III</p>
+
+<p><i>Sequel of the Voyage, from California, by Way of the East
+Indies, to England</i>.</p>
+
+<p>WE weighed anchor on the 10th January, 1710, from Porta
+Leguro, on the coast of California, but were becalmed under the
+shore till the afternoon of the 12th, when a breeze sprang up
+which soon carried us out of sight of land. Being very slenderly
+provided, we were forced to allow only a pound and a half of
+flour, and one small piece of beef, to five men in a mess,
+together with three pints of water a man, for twenty-four hours,
+to serve both as drink and for dressing their victuals. We also
+lowered ten of our guns into the hold, to ease our ship. On the
+16th the Bachelor made a signal that she could spare us some
+additional bread, having discovered a considerable store of bread
+and sweet-meats, though very little flesh meat. Accordingly, we
+in the Duke had a thousand weight of bread for our share, the
+Duchess had as much, and the Marquis five hundred weight; and in
+return we sent them two casks of flour, one of English beef; and
+one of pork, as they had only left forty-five days provisions of
+flesh. We now agreed to proceed in a W.S.W. course till we
+reached the latitude of 13&deg; N. and to keep in that parallel
+till we should make the island of Guam, being informed by our
+Spanish pilot that the parallel of 14&deg; was dangerous, by
+reason of certain islands and shoals, on which a Spanish ship had
+been lost some time ago.</p>
+
+<p>On the 11th March we had sight both of <i>Guam</i> and
+<i>Serpana,</i> the former bearing W.S.W. five leagues off, and
+the latter N.N.W. seven leagues. The Spaniards say there is a
+great shoal between these islands, but nearest to Serpana. While
+running along the shore of Guam there came several flying proas
+to look at us, but run past with great swiftness, and none of the
+people would venture on board. The necessity of our stopping at
+this island for a supply of provisions was very great, our sea
+store being almost exhausted, and what remained being in a very
+ordinary condition, especially our bread and flour, of which we
+had not enough for fourteen days, even at the shortest allowance.
+In order to procure provisions readily, we endeavoured to get
+some of the natives on board from the proas, that we might detain
+them as hostages, in case of having to send any of our men to the
+governor. While turning into the harbour under Spanish colours,
+one of the proas came under our stern, in which were two
+Spaniards, who came on board in consequence of being assured that
+we were friends. Soon after we sent a respectful letter to the
+governor, to which we next day received a civil answer, and a
+generous offer of any thing we needed that the island could
+supply. Several of our officers went ashore to wait upon the
+governor on the 16th, and were well received and elegantly
+entertained; making the governor a present of two negro boys
+dressed in rich liveries, twenty yards of scarlet cloth, and six
+pieces of cambric, with which he seemed to be much pleased, and
+promised in return to give us every assistance in his power.</p>
+
+<p>Next day, accordingly, we had a large supply of provisions,
+our share in the Duke being about sixty hogs, ninety-nine fowls,
+twenty-four baskets of maize, fourteen bags of rice, forty-two
+baskets of yams, and 800 cocoa-nuts. We afterwards got some
+bullocks, fourteen to each ship, being small lean cattle, yet
+gladly accepted, to which were afterwards added two cows and two
+calves to each ship; and we made a handsome present to the deputy
+governor, who was very active in getting our provisions
+collected. Leaving Guam, we proposed to go for some way directly
+west, to clear some islands that were in the way, and then to
+steer for the S.E. part of Min-danao, and from thence the nearest
+way to Ternate. In the afternoon of the 14th April we made land,
+which bore from us W.N.W. ten leagues, and which we supposed to
+be the N.E. part of Celebes. This day we saw three water-spouts,
+one of which had like to have fallen on board the Marquis, but
+the Duchess broke it before it reached her by firing two guns. On
+the 18th May, we passed through between the high land of New
+Guinea and the island of Gilolo, and on the 20th we made another
+high island which we took to be Ceram, yet, notwithstanding the
+skill and experience of Captain Dampier, we were at a loss to
+know whether it were Ceram or Bouro. On the 24th, at noon, we
+made our latitude 4&deg; 30' S. and estimated our longitude at
+237&deg; 29' W. from London, and being in the latitude of the
+southern part of Bouro,[229] we imputed our not seeing it to the
+currents setting us to the westwards. We designed to have touched
+at Amboina for refreshments, but the S.E. monsoon was already set
+in, and we were out of hope of being able to reach that place. In
+a consultation on the 25th, we resolved not to spend time in
+searching for Bouro, and also to desist from attempting to go to
+Amboina, and to make the best of our way for the Straits of
+Bouton, where we hoped to get sufficient provisions to carry us
+to Batavia. We got into a fine large bay in Bouton, where we sent
+our pinnace on shore, which brought off some cocoa nuts,
+reporting there were plenty to be had, and that the Malay
+inhabitants seemed friendly.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 229: The south part of Bouro is only in
+lat. 3&deg; 50' S. and about 283&deg; W. from Greenwich, or
+London.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Up this bay we saw several houses and boats, and many of the
+Malay natives walking about on the beach. We here sent our boats
+for provisions and pilots while the ships turned up the bay
+nearer to the town. On sounding frequently we could find no
+ground, but the natives told us of a bank opposite the town on
+which we might anchor. In the meantime abundance of people came
+off to us, bringing wheat, cocoa-nuts, yams, potatoes, papaws,
+hens, and several other kinds of birds, to truck for cloths,
+knives, scissars, and toys. These people were to appearance very
+civil, being Mahometans of middle stature and dark tawny
+complexions, but their women somewhat clearer than the men. The
+men that came off were all naked, except a cloth round their
+middles, but some of the better sort had a sort of loose
+waistcoat, and a piece of linen rolled round their heads, with a
+cap of palm leaves to keep off the scorching rays of the sun.
+Along the shore we saw several weirs for catching fish. In
+turning up, the prize lost ground considerably, as the current
+was strong against us, wherefore the Duchess fired a gun in the
+evening to recall us and the Marquis, and which we ran out and
+drove all night. The names of these two islands forming this bay
+are <i>Cambava</i> and <i>Waushut</i>, being in lat. 5&deg; 13'
+S. and long 238&deg; W. from London.[230] Being much in want of
+water and provisions, we made another effort to get back to this
+bay; and on the 30th, a proa came to us from the king of Bouton,
+having a noble on board without either shoes or stockings, and a
+pilot to carry us up to the town. He brought each commander a
+piece of striped Bouton cloth, a bottle of arrack, some baskets
+of rice, and other articles, as presents from the king; yet the
+first thing he said on coming aboard, was to ask us how we durst
+venture to come here to anchor, without first having leave from
+the great king of Bouton?</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 230: Cambaya, a considerable island to the
+W. of Bouton, is in lat. 5&deg; 20' S. and long. 237&deg; 40' W.
+from Greenwich, nearly in the situation pointed out in the
+text.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>This proa brought us letters from our officers that had been
+sent to wait upon the king, and to endeavour to procure
+provisions, which stated that they had been well received, and
+that the town in which the king resided was large and fortified,
+and had several great guns. We sent back a present to the king by
+his messenger, and five guns were fired by each of our ships at
+his departure, with which he seemed well pleased. We wooded and
+watered at the island of <i>Sampo,</i> and several proas came off
+to us with fowls, maize, pompions, papaws, lemons, Guinea corn,
+and other articles, which they trucked for knives, scissars, old
+clothes, and the like. The people were civil, but sold every
+thing very dear; and as our officers staid longer at the town
+than was intended, we began to suspect they were detained, as the
+Mahometans are very treacherous. We heard from them, however,
+every day; and on the 5th Mr Connely came down, and told us there
+were four lasts of rice coming down from the king, for which it
+had been agreed to pay 600 dollars, and that Mr Vanburgh had been
+detained in security of payment. The rice came next morning, and
+was distributed equally among our four ships, some great men
+coming along with it to receive the money. At this time also we
+in our turn detained a Portuguese who came from the king, till
+our boat should be allowed to return; and after this, provisions
+became more plentiful and cheaper.</p>
+
+<p>The town of <i>Bouton</i> is built on the acclivity of a hill,
+and on the top of the hill is a fort surrounded by an old stone
+wall, on which some guns and pattereroes are placed. The king and
+a considerable number of people dwell in this fort, in which a
+market is held every day for the sale of provisions. The king has
+five wives, besides several concubines, being attended by four
+men carrying great canes with silver heads, who are called
+<i>pury bassas,</i> and who seem to manage all his affairs. His
+majesty goes always bare-footed and bare-legged, being for the
+most part clad like a Dutch skipper, with a sort of green gauze
+covering strewed with spangles over his long black hair; but when
+he appears in state, he wears a long calico gown over his jacket,
+and sits on a chair covered with red cloth. He is always attended
+by a sergeant and six men armed with match-locks; besides three
+others, one of whom wears a head-piece and carries a large drawn
+scymitar, another has a shield, and a third a large fan. Four
+slaves sit at his feet, one holding his betel box, another a
+lighted match, the third his box of tobacco for smoking, and the
+fourth a spitting bason. The petty kings and other great men sit
+on his left hand and before him, every one attended by a slave,
+and they chew betel or tobacco in his presence, sitting
+cross-legged, and when they speak to him they lift their hands
+joined to their foreheads.</p>
+
+<p>The town of Bouton is very populous, and beside it runs a fine
+river, said to come from ten miles up the country. The tide ebbs
+and flows a considerable way up this river, which has a bar at
+its mouth, so that boats cannot go in or come out at low water.
+At least 1500 boats belong to this river, fifty of which are war
+proas, armed with pattereroes, and carrying forty or fifty men
+each. Fifty islands are said to be tributary to this king, who
+sends his proas once a year to gather their stated tribute, which
+consists in slaves, every island giving him ten inhabitants out
+of every hundred. There is one mosque, in Boutan, which is
+supplied with priests from Mocha, the people being Mahometans.
+They are great admirers of music, their houses are built on
+posts, and their current money is Dutch coins and Spanish
+dollars. On the 7th our pinnace returned with Mr Vanburgh and all
+our people, having parted from his majesty on friendly terms, but
+could not procure a pilot. We resolved, however, not to stay any
+longer, but to trust to Providence for our future preservation:
+wherefore we began to unmoor our ships, and dismissed our
+Portuguese linguist.</p>
+
+<p>Next day, the 8th June, we made three islands to the north of
+<i>Salayer.</i> On the 10th our pinnace came up with a small
+vessel, the people on board of which said they were bound for the
+Dutch factory of Macasser on the S.W. coast of Celebes. The
+pinnace brought away the master of this vessel, who engaged to
+pilot us through the Straits of Salayer and all the way to
+Batavia, if we would keep it secret from the Dutch, and he sent
+his vessel to lie in the narrowest part of the passage between
+the islands, till such time as our ships came up. On the 14th we
+passed the island of Madura, and on the 17th we made the high
+land of Cheribon, which bore S.W. from us. This morning we saw a
+great ship right ahead, to which I sent our pinnace for news. She
+was a ship of Batavia of 600 tons and fifty guns, plying to some
+of the Dutch factories for timber. Her people told us that we
+were still thirty Dutch leagues from Batavia, but there was no
+danger by the way, and they even supplied us with a large chart,
+which proved of great use to us. Towards noon we made the land,
+which was very low, but had regular soundings, by which we knew
+how to sail in the night by means of the lead; in the afternoon
+we saw the ships in the road of Batavia, being between thirty and
+forty sail great and small; and at six in the evening we came to
+anchor, in between six and seven fathoms, in the long-desired
+port of Batavia, in lat 6&deg; 10' S. and long. 252&deg; 51' W.
+from London.[231] We had here to alter our account of time,
+having lost almost a day in going round the world so far in a
+western course.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 231: The latitude in the text is
+sufficiently accurate, but the longitude is about a degree short.
+It ought to have been 253&deg; 54' W. from
+Greenwich--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>After coming in sight of Batavia, and more especially after
+some sloops or small vessels had been aboard of us, I found that
+I was quite a stranger to the dispositions and humours of our
+people, though I had sailed so long with them. A few days before
+they were perpetually quarrelling, and a disputed lump of sugar
+was quite sufficient to have occasioned a dispute. But now, there
+was-nothing but hugging and shaking of hands, blessing their good
+stars, and questioning if such a paradise existed on earth; and
+all because they had arrack for eight-pence a gallon, and sugar
+for a penny a pound. Yet next minute they were all by the ears,
+disputing about who should put the ingredients together; for the
+weather was so hot, and the ingredients so excessively cheap,
+that a little labour was now a matter of great importance among
+them.</p>
+
+<p>Soon after our arrival at Batavia we proceeded to refit our
+ships, beginning with the Marquis; but on coming down to her
+bends, we found both these and the stern and stern-port so rotten
+and worm-eaten, that on a survey of carpenters she was found
+incapable of being rendered fit for proceeding round the Cape of
+Good Hope, on which we had to hire a vessel to take in her
+loading. We then applied ourselves to refit the other ships,
+which we did at the island of Horn, not being allowed to do so at
+<i>Onrust</i>, where the Dutch clean and careen all their ships.
+We hove down the Duke and Duchess and Bachelor, the sheathing of
+which ships were very much worm-eaten in several places. In
+heaving down, the Duchess sprung her fore-mast, which we replaced
+by a new one. When the ships were refitted, we returned to
+Batavia road, where we rigged three of them, and sold the
+Marquis, after taking out all her goods and stores, and
+distributing her officers and men into the others. During our
+stay at Batavia, the weather was exceedingly hot, and many of our
+officers and men fell sick, among whom I was one, the prevalent
+disease being the flux, of which the master of the Duke and
+gunner of the Duchess died, and several of our men. A young man
+belonging to the Duchess, having ventured into the sea to swim,
+had both his legs snapped off by a shark, and while endeavouring
+to take him on board, the shark bit off the lower part of his
+belly. We were allowed free access to the town and markets, yet
+found it difficult to procure salt-meat, so that we had to kill
+bullocks for ourselves, and pickled the flesh, taking out all the
+bones. Arrack, rice, and fowls were very cheap, and we bought
+beef for two <i>stivers</i>, or two-pence a pound.</p>
+
+<p>There are various descriptions of this famous city, yet, as
+what I have to say may serve to exhibit a state of things as they
+were when we were there, I flatter myself that the following
+succinct account may neither be found useless nor disagreeable.
+The city of Batavia is situated on the N.W. side of the famous
+island of Java, in lat. 5&deg; 50' S.[232] During the whole year
+the east and west monsoons, or trade-winds, blow along shore;
+besides which it is refreshed by the ordinary land and sea
+breezes, which greatly cool the air, otherwise it would be
+intolerably hot. The summer begins here in May, and continues
+till the end of October, or beginning of November, during all
+which period there is a constant breeze from the east, with a
+clear serene sky. The winter commences in the end of October, or
+beginning of November, with excessive rains, which sometimes
+continue for three or four days without intermission. In December
+the west-wind blows with such violence as to stop all navigation
+on the coast of Java. In February the weather is changeable, with
+frequent sudden thunder-gusts. They begin to sow in March; June
+is the pleasantest month; and in September they gather in their
+rice, and cut the sugar-canes. In October they have abundance of
+fruits and flowers, together with plants and herbs in great
+variety. Around the city there is an extensive fenny plain, which
+has been greatly improved and cultivated by the Dutch; but to the
+east it still remains encumbered by woods and marshes. The city
+of Batavia is of a square form, surrounded by a strong wall, on
+which are twenty-two bastions, and has a river running through it
+into the sea. About the year 1700 there was a great earthquake in
+Java, which overturned some part of the mountains in the interior
+of the island, by which the course of the river was altered; and
+since then the canals in Batavia and the neighbourhood have not
+been nearly so commodious as formerly, nor has the entrance of
+the river been so deep; and for want of a strong current to keep
+it open, the Dutch have been obliged to employ a great machine to
+preserve the navigation of the mouth of the river, so as to admit
+small vessels into the canals which pervade the city. Batavia
+lies in a bay in which there are seventeen or eighteen islands,
+which so effectually protect it from the sea, that though large,
+the road is very safe. The banks of the canals are raced on both
+sides with stone quays, as far as the boom, which is shut up
+every night, and guarded by soldiers. All the streets are in
+straight lines, most of them being, above thirty feet broad on
+both sides, besides the canals, and they are all paved with
+bricks next the houses. All the streets are well-built and fully
+inhabited, fifteen of them having canals for small vessels,
+communicating with the main river, and shut up by booms, at which
+they pay certain tolls for admission; and these canals are
+crossed by fifty-six bridges, mostly of stone. There are numerous
+country-seats around the city, most of them neat and well
+contrived, with handsome fruit and flower gardens, ornamented
+with fountains and statues; and vast quantities of cocoa-nut
+trees planted in numerous groves, every where afford delightful
+shade. Batavia has many fine buildings, particularly the
+Cross-church, which is handsomely built of stone, and very neatly
+fitted up within. There are two or three other churches for the
+Dutch presbyterians, and two for the Portuguese catholics, who
+are a mixed race, besides one church for the Malay protestants.
+In the centre of the city is the town-house, handsomely built of
+brick in form of a square, and two stories high. In this all the
+courts are held, and all matters respecting the civil government
+of the city are determined. There are also hospitals,
+speir-houses, and rasp-houses, as in Amsterdam, with many other
+public buildings, not inferior to those of most European
+cities.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 232: The latitude of Batavia is 6&deg; 15'
+S. and its longitude 106&deg; 7' E. from
+Greenwich.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The Chinese are very numerous, and carry on the greatest trade
+here, farming most of the excise and customs, being allowed to
+live according to their own laws, and to exercise their
+idolatrous worship. They have a chief of their own nation, who
+manages their affairs with the company, by which they are allowed
+great privileges, having even a representative in the council,
+who has a vote when any of their nation is tried for his life.
+These high privileges are only allowed to such of the Chinese as
+are domicilled here, all others being only permitted to remain
+six months in the city, or on the island of Java. The Chinese
+have also a large hospital for their sick and aged, and manage
+its funds so well, that a destitute person of that nation is
+never to be seen on the streets.</p>
+
+<p>The Dutch women have here much greater privileges than in
+Holland, or any where else; as on even slight occasions they can
+procure divorces from their husbands, sharing the estate between
+them. A lawyer at this place told me, that he has known, out of
+fifty-eight causes depending at one time before the
+council-chamber, fifty-two of them for divorces. Great numbers of
+native criminals are chained in pairs, and kept to hard labour
+under a guard, in cleaning the canals and ditches of the city, or
+in other public works. The castle of Batavia is quadrangular,
+having four bastions connected by curtains, all faced with white
+stone, and provided with watch-houses. Here the Dutch
+governor-general of India, and most of the members of the council
+of the Indies reside, the governor's palace being large, and
+well-built of brick. In this palace is the council-chamber, with
+the secretary's office, and chamber of accounts. The garrison
+usually consists of 1000 men; but the soldiers are generally but
+poorly appointed, except the governor's guards, who have large
+privileges, and make a fine appearance.</p>
+
+<p>The governor-general lives in as great splendour as if he were
+a king, being attended by a troop of horse-guards, and a company
+of halberdeers, in uniforms of yellow sattin, richly adorned with
+silver-lace and fringes, which attend his coach when he appears
+abroad. His lady also is attended by guards and a splendid
+retinue. The governor is chosen only for three years, from the
+twenty-four counsellors, called the <i>Radts</i> of India, twelve
+of whom must always reside in Batavia. Their soldiers are well
+trained, and a company is always on duty at each of the gates of
+the city and citadel; and there are between seven and eight
+thousand disciplined Europeans in and about the city, who can be
+assembled in readiness for action on a short warning.</p>
+
+<p>Besides Europeans and Chinese, there are many Malays in
+Batavia, and other strangers from almost every country in, India.
+The Javanese, or ancient natives, are very numerous, and are said
+to be a proud barbarous people. They are of dark complexions,
+with flat faces, thin, short, black hair, large eyebrows, and
+prominent cheeks. The men are strong-limbed, but the women small.
+The men wear a calico wrapper, three or four times folded round
+their bodies; and the women are clothed from their arm-pits to
+their knees. They usually have two or three wives, besides
+concubines; and the Dutch say that they are much addicted to
+lying and stealing. The Javans who inhabit the coast are mostly
+Mahometans; but those living in the interior are still pagans.
+The women are not so tawny as the men, and many of them are
+handsome; but they are generally amorous, and unfaithful to their
+husbands, and are apt to deal in poisoning, which they manage
+with much art.</p>
+
+<p>Batavia is very populous, but not above a sixth part of the
+inhabitants are Dutch. The Chinese here are very numerous; and
+the Dutch acknowledge that they are more industrious and acute
+traders than themselves. They are much, encouraged, because of
+the great trade carried on by them, and the great rents they pay
+for their shops, besides large taxes, and from sixteen to thirty
+per cent. interest for money, which they frequently borrow from
+the Dutch. I was told, that there were about 80,000 Chinese in
+and about Batavia, who pay a capitation-tax of a dollar each per
+month for liberty to wear their hair, which is not permitted in
+their own country ever since the Tartar conquest. There generally
+come here every year from China, fourteen or sixteen large
+flat-bottomed junks, of from three to five hundred tons burden.
+The merchants come along with their goods, which are lodged in
+different partitions in the vessels, as in separate warehouses,
+for each of which they pay a certain price, and not for the
+weight or measure of the cargo, as with us, so that each merchant
+fills up his own division as they please. They come here with the
+easterly monsoon, usually arriving in November or December, and
+go away again for China in the beginning of June. By means of
+these junks the Dutch have all kinds of Chinese commodities
+brought to them, and at a cheaper rate than they could bring them
+in their own vessels.</p>
+
+<p>Batavia is the metropolis of the Dutch trade and settlements
+in India, and is well situated for the spice trade, which they
+have entirely in their own hands. There are seldom less than
+twenty sail of Dutch ships at Batavia, carrying from thirty to
+fifty and sixty guns each. Abraham van Ribeck was
+governor-general when we were there. His predecessor, as I was
+informed, had war with the natives of the island, who had like to
+have ruined the settlement; but, by sowing divisions among the
+native princes, he at length procured peace upon advantageous
+conditions. This is one of the pleasantest cities I ever saw,
+being more populous than Bristol, but not so large. They have
+schools for teaching all necessary education, even for Latin and
+Greek, and have a printing-house. There are many pleasant villas,
+or country seats, about the city; and the adjacent country
+abounds in rice, sugar-plantations, gardens, and orchards, with
+corn and sugar-mills, and mills for making gunpowder. They have
+also begun to plant coffee, which thrives well, so that they will
+shortly be able to load a ship or two; but I was told it is not
+so good as what comes from Arabia.</p>
+
+<p>We sailed from Batavia on the 11th October, 1710, and on the
+19th came to anchor in a bay about a league W. from Java head,
+and remained till the 28th, laying in wood and water. The 15th
+December we made the land of southern Africa, in lat 34&deg; 2'
+S. And on the 18th we anchored in Table Bay in six fathoms, about
+a mile from shore. We remained here till the 5th April, waiting
+to go home with the Dutch fleet, and on that day fell down to
+Penguin Island, whence we sailed on the 5th for Europe. On the
+14th July we spoke a Dane bound for Ireland, who informed us that
+a Dutch fleet of ten sail was cruizing for us off Shetland, which
+squadron we joined next day. On the 28d we got sight of the coast
+of Holland, and about eight p. m. came all safe to anchor in the
+Texel, in six fathoms, about two miles off shore. In the
+afternoon of the 24th I went up to Amsterdam, where I found
+letters from our owners, directing us how to act as to our
+passage from thence home. On the 30th we got some provisions from
+Amsterdam. On the 22d August we weighed from the Texel, but the
+wind being contrary, had to return next morning. We weighed again
+on the 30th, and on the 1st October came to anchor in the Downs,
+and on the 14th of that month got safe to <i>Eriff</i>, where we
+ended our long and fatiguing voyage.</p>
+
+<hr align="center" width="50%">
+<p>It appears, by incidental information in Harris, I. 198, That
+the outfit of this voyage did not exceed &pound;14,000 or
+&pound;15,000, and that its gross profits amounted to
+&pound;170,000, half of which belonged to the owners; so that
+they had &pound;85,000 to divide, or a clear profit of &pound;466
+13s. 4d. <i>per centum,</i> besides the value of the ships and
+stores.--E.</p>
+
+<h2><a name="chapter4-11" id="chapter4-11">CHAPTER XI.</a></h2>
+
+<p>VOYAGE ROUND THE WORLD, BY CAPTAIN JOHN CLIPPERTON, IN
+1719-1722.[233]</p>
+
+<p>INTRODUCTION.</p>
+
+<p>About the beginning of 1718, some English merchants resolved
+to fit out two ships for a cruizing voyage to the South Sea, in
+hopes of having equal success with the expedition under Woods
+Rogers, and provided two fine ships, the Speedwell and Success,
+every way fit for the purpose. But as the war which was expected
+between Great Britain and Spain did not take place so soon as was
+expected, they applied for commissions from the Emperor Charles
+VI. who was then at war with Philip V. King of Spain. Captain
+George Shelvocke, who had served as a lieutenant in the royal
+navy, was accordingly sent with the Speedwell to Ostend, there to
+wait for the imperial commissions, and to receive certain Flemish
+officers and seamen, together with as much wine and brandy as
+might serve both ships during their long voyage, being cheaper
+there than in England. This was in November 1718, and both to
+shew respect to the imperial court, and to have the appearance of
+a German expedition, the names of the ships were changed to the
+Prince Eugene and the Staremberg.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 233: Harris, I. 184.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Having taken on board six Flemish officers and ninety men,
+Captain Shelvocke sailed from Ostend for the Downs, where the
+other ship had waited for him some time. War having begun between
+Great Britain and Spain, and finding that the Flemings and
+Englishmen did not agree, the owners laid aside all thoughts of
+using the imperial commission, and to send back all their Flemish
+officers and men to Flanders, with an allowance of two months
+wages, and procured a commission from George I. restoring the
+original names of their ships. The Speedwell carried twenty-four
+guns and 106 men, and the Success thirty-six guns and 180 men;
+the former commanded by Captain George Shelvocke, who was to have
+had the chief command in the expedition, and the other by Captain
+John Clipperton, who had formerly sailed with Dampier as mate,
+and of whose adventures after his separation from Dampier, an
+account has been already given.</p>
+
+<p>In consequence of some change of circumstances, perhaps owing
+to some improper conduct when in Flanders, the proprietors now
+took the chief command from Shelvocke, and conferred it upon
+Clipperton, a man of a blunt, rough, and free-speaking
+disposition, but of a strict regard to his duty and rigid
+honesty. Though somewhat passionate, he was soon appeased, and
+ever ready to repair any injury he had done when heated with
+anger, and had much justice and humanity in his nature. Under
+Captain Shelvocke in the Speedwell, Simon Hately was appointed
+second captain; he who had formerly lost company with Woods
+Rogers among the Gallapagos islands, and had remained a
+considerable time prisoner among the Spaniards.</p>
+
+<p>The instructions for this voyage from the owners were, that
+they were to proceed in the first place for Plymouth, whence they
+were to sail with the first fair wind for Cape Horn or the
+Straits of Magellan, as was found most convenient for their
+passage into the South Sea. They were then to cruize on the
+coasts of Chili, Peru, and Mexico, and to endeavour, if possible,
+to meet and capture the Manilla ship. To prevent all disputes and
+disorders, they were enjoined to be careful above all things not
+to separate from each other, and to undertake nothing of
+importance without holding a council of officers, stating the
+question to be debated in writing, and drawing up the resolution
+in writing, with the reasons on which they were grounded, which
+were to be signed by all the officers. All these precautions
+proved in a great measure useless, as the expedition wore an
+unfortunate aspect from the very beginning. The ships were forced
+to remain three months at Plymouth, waiting for a wind; in which
+time every thing fell into confusion, and factions were formed,
+in which the crews of both ships were involved, from the captains
+down to the cabin boys. Captain Shelvocke highly resented the
+affront offered him in being deprived of the chief command; and
+Captain Clipperton, knowing the other's resentment, and being a
+boisterous man of strong passions which he could not conceal,
+there was nothing but debates and disputes. Every post carried
+complaints to the proprietors, and brought down instructions,
+reproofs, and exhortations to concord. It had been fortunate for
+the proprietors, if they had removed one or both of the
+commanders; but every one had too much concern to retain his
+friend in post, so that private views proved the cause of public
+ruin.--<i>Harris</i>.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION I.</p>
+
+<p><i>Narrative of the Voyage, from England to Juan
+Fernandez</i>.</p>
+
+<p>Having at length a fair wind, the two ships sailed in company
+from Plymouth on the 13th February, 1719. It singularly happened
+that the Speedwell had still on board the whole stock of wine,
+brandy, and other liquors, designed for the supply of both ships.
+On the 19th at night, there arose a violent storm, and on the
+20th the storm abated about two in the afternoon, when Captain
+Clipperton in the Success made sail, steering S. by E. while
+Captain Shelvocke in the Speedwell bore away N.W. So that they
+never again saw each other, till they afterwards met by mere
+accident in the South Sea.</p>
+
+<p>Being now at sea without his consort, and very indifferently
+provided, Captain Clipperton found himself under the necessity of
+using a discretionary power of dispensing in some respect from
+his instructions; but which freedom he rarely exercised, and then
+with the utmost caution. In all essential points he carefully
+complied with the instructions, constantly consulting with his
+officers, and doing his utmost to prosecute his voyage with
+effect. The first place of rendezvous appointed in case of
+separation was the Canaries, for which he sailed with such
+expedition that he arrived there on the 6th of March. Having
+taken in refreshments there, for which he had much occasion, as
+all his liquors were in the Speedwell, Clipperton cruized on that
+station for ten days, as directed by his instructions, but not
+meeting his consort, he resolved to proceed to the next place
+appointed for that purpose, the Cape de Verd islands.</p>
+
+<p>The Canary Islands, or <i>Islands of Dogs</i>, so named by the
+Spaniards when discovered by them in 1402, because they found
+here a great number of these animals, were known to the ancients
+by the name of the Fortunate Islands, because of their fertility
+and the excellent temperature of their air. They are seven in
+number, Lancerota, Fuerteventura, Grand Canary, Teneriffe,
+Geomero, Hiero or Ferro, and Palma. <i>Grand Canary</i> is far
+distant from the others, and contains 9000 inhabitants, being the
+seat of the bishop, the inquisition, and the royal council which
+governs all the seven islands. In Teneriffe is the famous
+mountain called <i>Terraira,</i> or the Peak of Teneriff,
+supposed to be the highest in the world, and which may be
+distinctly seen at the distance of sixty leagues. There is no
+reaching the top of this mountain except in July and August,
+because covered at all other times with snow, which is never to
+be seen at other places of that island, nor in the other six, at
+any season of the year. It requires three days journey to reach
+the summit of the peak, whence all the Canary islands may be
+seen, though some of them are sixty leagues distant. <i>Hiero</i>
+or <i>Ferro</i> is one of the largest islands in this group, but
+is very barren, and so dry that no fresh water is to be found in
+it, except in some few places by the sea, very troublesome and
+even dangerous to get it from. "But, to remedy this
+inconvenience, Providence as supplied a most extraordinary
+substitute, as there grows almost in every place a sort of tree
+of considerable size, incomparably thick of branches and leaves,
+the latter being long and narrow, always green and lively. This
+tree is always covered by a little cloud hanging over it, which
+wets the leaves as if by a perpetual dew, so that fine clear
+water continually trickles down from them into little pails set
+below to catch it as it falls, and which is in such abundant
+quantity as amply to supply the inhabitants and their
+cattle."[234]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 234: This strange story seems entirely
+fabulous.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>These islands are generally fertile, and abound with all kinds
+of provisions, as cattle, grain, honey, wax, sugar, cheese, and
+skins. The wine of this country is strong and well-flavoured, and
+is exported to most parts of the world; and the Spanish ships
+bound for America usually stop at these islands to lay in a stock
+of provisions. About 100 leagues to the west of these islands,
+mariners are said to have frequently seen an island named <i>St
+Baranura,</i> which they allege is all over green and very
+pleasant, full of trees, and abounding in provisions, as also
+that it is inhabited by Christians; but no person can tell what
+sect or denomination they are of, nor what language they speak.
+The Spanish inhabitants of the Canaries have often attempted to
+go there, but could never find the way; whence some believe that
+it is only an illusion or enchanted island, seen only at certain
+times. Others allege a better reason, saying that it is small and
+almost always concealed by clouds, and that ships are prevented
+from coming near it by the strength of the currents. It is
+certain however, that there is such an island, and at the
+distance from the Canaries already mentioned.[235]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 235: This island of St Baranora, or St
+Brandon, is merely imaginary.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Leaving Gomera on the 15th March, Clipperton came in sight of
+St Vincent, one of the Cape de Verd islands, in the evening of
+the 21st, and came to anchor in the bay next morning. He here
+found a French ship, and the Diamond belonging to Bristol, taking
+in a cargo of asses for Jamaica. Continuing here for ten days, in
+hopes of meeting the Speedwell, but in vain, the crew of the
+Success became much disheartened, so that Clipperton had much
+difficulty in persuading them to persist in the enterprize. The
+<i>Cape de Verd islands,</i> called <i>Salt islands</i> by the
+Dutch, derive their name from Cape de Verd on the coast of
+Africa. The sea which surrounds them is covered by a green herb,
+called <i>Sergalso</i> or cresses by the Portuguese, resembling
+water-cresses, and so thickly that hardly can the water be seen,
+neither can ships make their way through it but with a stiff
+gale. This herb produces berries, resembling white gooseberries,
+but entirely tasteless. No one knows how this herb grows, as
+there is no ground or land about the place where it is found
+floating on the water, neither can it be supposed to come from
+the bottom, as the sea is very deep, and is in many places quite
+unfathomable. This sea-weed begins to be seen in the lat. of
+34&deg; N. where it is so thick that it seems as if islands, but
+is not to be met with in any other part of the ocean.</p>
+
+<p>The <i>Cape de Verd islands</i>, when first discovered by the
+Portuguese in 1572, were all desert and uninhabited, but they now
+inhabit several of them. They are ten in number, St Jago, St
+Lucia, St Vincent, St Antonio, St Nicolas, Ilha Blanca, Ilha de
+Sal, Ilha de Maio, Ilha de Fogo, and Bonavista. They now afford
+plenty of rice, flour, Tartarian wheat, oranges, lemons, citrons,
+bananas, ananas or pine-apples, ignames, batatas, melons,
+cucumbers, pompions, garden and wild figs, and several other
+sorts of fruits. They have vineyards also, which produce ripe
+grapes twice a year; and have abundance of cattle, both great and
+small, but especially goats. The capital city is St Jago, in the
+island of that name, in which resides the governor who commands
+over all these islands under the King of Portugal. It is also the
+residence of an archbishop, whose see extends over all these
+islands, and over all the conquests of the Portuguese on this
+side of the Cape of Good Hope. These islands afford good
+convenience for ships on long voyages procuring a supply of fresh
+water. On the east side of Maio there is a little river, and as
+the island is uninhabited, there is nobody to hinder one from
+taking it: There is also water to be had on St Antonio, where
+also good refreshments may be had, of oranges, lemons, and other
+fruits; and the Portuguese on this island are so few in number,
+that they cannot prevent one from taking what they please.</p>
+
+<p>May the 29th having an observation, Clipperton found his
+latitude to be 52&deg; 15' S. being then off Cape <i>Virgin
+Mary</i>, the northern point at the eastern entrance into the
+straits of Magellan, distant from <i>Fuego</i>, one of the Cape
+de Verd islands, 1580 leagues, the meridional distance being
+36&deg; 4' W.[236] Next day they entered the straits. Proceeding
+onwards to Queen Elizabeth's island, the pinnace was sent off to
+a fresh-water river on the main, which was found frozen up. They
+saw large flocks of geese and ducks at this place, but they were
+very shy. By some accident the surgeon's mate was left ashore at
+this place by the boat, and when brought on board next morning he
+was almost dead with the cold. They remained some time at Queen
+Elizabeth's island, which is dry and mostly barren, yet they
+found plenty of sallad herbs, which were of infinite service, the
+crew being much afflicted by the scurvy. The principal herb was
+<i>smallage</i> of extraordinary size, which they eat raw, or
+boiled in their broth, and of which they brought away a
+considerable quantity of juice in bottles. On the 14th June, the
+empty water casks were sent ashore to be filled, and the
+carpenters went to look out for a proper piece of timber for a
+mizen-mast. They found abundance of wild fowl and shell fish on
+shore, which were most welcome to all the company, as they found
+their appetites to increase, while the necessity compelled the
+enforcement of short allowance. They anchored on the 22d in a
+fine bay, which they named <i>No-bottom Bay</i>, because of its
+great depth of water. The trees here are lofty, and so loaded
+with snow as to be a most astonishing sight. On the 29th there
+came to them a canoe in which were two men, a woman, and a boy.
+These were of middle stature, with dark complexions, broad, round
+faces, and low features, with low foreheads, lank short black
+hair, and no clothing except a piece of skin to cover their
+middles. The most extraordinary circumstance about them, was a
+fine streak round their wrists of an azure colour. They seem to
+be very jealous of their women, as they would on no account
+permit the woman who was along with them to come on board.
+Clipperton ordered them bread and cheese, and a dram of brandy,
+which last they refused to take, but they eat the bread and
+cheese voraciously. They had a fire in the middle of their canoe,
+which was made of the bark of trees sewed together, and they
+brought with them some wild geese and ducks, which they exchanged
+for knives. They had bows and arrows, together with some fishing
+tackle, and went away after two hours stay, making signs that
+they would return.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 236: The meridional distance between these
+two stations is 49&deg; 25' W. Mayo being in long. 28&deg; 15',
+and Cape Virgin Mary in long. 72&deg; 40' both W. from
+Greenwich.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Next day the pinnace went ashore, and returned in the evening
+with the Indian canoe filled with large muscles, which our people
+bought from the Indians, for knives, bread, and other trifles. In
+the beginning of July the weather was very moderate. Clipperton
+found the savages in these straits by no means so mischievous as
+they are usually represented, of which they had two remarkable
+instances: As, on one occasion, one of the crew was on shore two
+nights and a day, and was well used by the natives; and, on
+another occasion, one of the natives being left accidentally all
+night in the ship, the natives came for him next day without
+fear; so that, if well treated, they do not seem to be
+treacherous. In another canoe which came to the ship there were
+several women, each having a necklace of five or six rows of
+small shining shells, very nicely strung, resembling
+mother-of-pearl. All this time the crew was very sickly, scarcely
+a day passing in which one or more did not die, which was
+generally attributed to the want of something comfortable to
+drink in this rigorous climate, all the liquors intended for the
+voyage having been left in the Speedwell. The weather was
+sometimes fair and moderate for two or three days together, but
+was continually varying, and perhaps for two or three days
+following they had continual snow, rain, and sleet, with frequent
+great flows of wind that were intolerably sharp and piercing.
+William Pridham, the master-gunner, died on the 7th July, and was
+buried ashore next day, having a strong, plank with an
+inscription driven into the ground at the head of his grave.</p>
+
+<p>On the 20th July, Captain Mitchell and Lieutenant Davidson
+went in the pinnace, furnished with all necessaries, in order to
+make a discovery of a passage on the southern side of the
+straits, through which a French tartan is said to have gone into
+the South Sea in May, 1713, and to examine if there were any
+anchorage beyond Cape <i>Quad</i>. The pinnace returned on the
+29th, having found the passage, but so narrow that it was deemed
+too hazardous. Their provisions falling short, they were forced
+to return before they had satisfied themselves sufficiently; yet
+they found several good bays for anchoring in, to the N.W. of
+Cape <i>Quad</i>. They got a seal from some Indians, which they
+broiled and eat, and said that it was as good as venison. On the
+1st of August, Captain Mitchell and three other officers went a
+second time to examine to look for the new passage. But, after
+the strictest examination, they could not find that it led into
+the South Sea, but only into an icy bay, and at all events was
+too narrow for their ship. On the return of Captain Mitchell, it
+was resolved to prosecute their way through the straits, which
+they did with much difficulty, getting into the South Sea on the
+18th of August, but in so weak and sickly a condition as to be
+utterly incapable of attempting any enterprize for some time,
+having been long on short allowance of only one piece of beef or
+pork to a mess of six men. In pursuance, therefore, of his
+instructions, Captain Clipperton bore away for the island of Juan
+Fernandez, the third and last appointed place of rendezvous with
+the Speedwell.</p>
+
+<p>The Success accordingly anchored at Juan Fernandez on the 7th
+September, and search was made for any testimony of the Speedwell
+having been there, but to no purpose. Captain Clipperton
+resolved, in compliance with his instructions, to remain here, or
+cruizing in the neighbourhood, for a month; and also had an
+inscription cut on a conspicuous tree fronting the landing-place,
+to the following purport: "<i>Captain John---- W. Magee,
+1719</i>." This William Magee was surgeon of the Success, and
+well known to Captain Shelvocke and all his company; and
+Clipperton omitted his own name in the inscription, because he
+had been formerly in the South Sea, and had been long a prisoner
+among the Spaniards, for which reason he did not wish to give
+them notice of his return into this sea. The sick were all landed
+on the 8th, and every convenience afforded by the island made use
+of to promote their recovery. The weather was very changeable all
+the time of the Success continuing here, with much rain, and some
+hard gales of wind. They took, however, a considerable number of
+goats, which not only served them for present subsistence, but
+enabled them to increase their sea store, as they had an
+opportunity of salting a good many; for some French ships, that
+had been at the island, had left a considerable quantity of salt
+ready made. They likewise cleaned the ship's bottom, and took on
+board a supply of wood and water. It was now evident that the
+Success would have to act singly in these seas, as Clipperton was
+fully of opinion that the Speedwell was lost, or at least gave
+out so among the company, to prevent them from continually
+cursing Shelvocke for running away with their liquors, which some
+of the sick men did with their dying breaths.</p>
+
+<p>The beauty and fertility of this island, compared with the
+dangers and difficulties unavoidable in the South Sea, tempted
+four of the men to remain in the island, and they actually ran
+away into the mountains. As it was very inconvenient to lose so
+many good hands, Captain Clipperton took measures for recovering
+them, but ineffectually. At last, a fortnight after their
+desertion, and only the day before the ship was to leave the
+island, two of them were caught by the goat-hunters and brought
+aboard. They confessed that they had been hard put to it for the
+first five days, being forced to subsist entirely on the
+cabbage-trees, which are here in great plenty; but having
+accidentally found some fire, left by the goat-hunters, it served
+them in good stead, as it enabled them to cook their victuals.
+That same evening they brought on board all the goats-flesh they
+had salted, together with four casks of seal-oil, and every thing
+else they had on shore. A cross was set up on shore, at the foot
+of which a bottle was buried, containing a letter for Captain
+Shelvocke, appointing another place of rendezvous, with certain
+signals by which to know each other if they happened to meet at
+sea.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION II.</p>
+
+<p><i>Proceedings of the Success in the South Seas</i>.</p>
+
+<p>Clipperton left Juan Fernandez on the 7th October, leaving two
+men behind, as successors to Governor Selkirk, but of whose
+adventures we have no mention. He now steered his course to the
+northwards, till in the parallel of Lima, where he proposed to
+commence operations, though in a very indifferent condition,
+having lost thirty men since passing the equator. On the 25th,
+being in the latitude of Lima, they captured a snow of forty
+tons, laden with sand and rubbish for manure, on board of which
+were seven Indians and two negroes, their master having been left
+sick on shore. The only thing she contained worth taking were two
+jars full of eggs, two jars of treacle, and two dollars. Next day
+they captured a ship of 150 tons, laden with timber from
+Guayaquil, in which were two friars, sixteen Indians, and four
+Negroes. On the 30th they took a ship of 400 tons, bound from
+Panama to Lima, which had been taken by Captain Rogers at
+Guayaquil ten years before. She had many passengers on board, and
+a loading of considerable value. Another prize was taken on the
+2d of November, being a vessel of seventy tons, on board of which
+was the Countess of <i>Laguna</i> and several other passengers,
+with a great sum of money, and 400 jars of wine and brandy, which
+was very acceptable. Captain Clipperton desired the countess to
+inform him, whether she thought proper to remain in the prize, or
+to accept of such accommodations as he was able to give her in
+the Success. She chose to continue in the prize, on which he sent
+an officer of marines with a guard, to prevent her from being
+molested, and with strict orders not to allow any person to enter
+her cabin, except her own domestics. He also sent part of the
+wine and brandy on board the other prizes, for the use of his
+seamen who had charge of them.</p>
+
+<p>Although Captain Clipperton had now so many prizes, that above
+a third of his company was detached to take charge of them, he
+was still as eager to take more as if he had commanded a squadron
+of men of war, instead of a single privateer weakly manned. On
+the 12th November, a London-built pink of about 200 tons was
+discovered at some distance, bound from Panama to Lima with a
+cargo of woad, of very little value to Clipperton, yet he added
+this to the number of his prizes. The master of this vessel,
+being a shrewd fellow, soon saw the error Clipperton had fallen
+into, and resolved to turn it to his advantage. Guessing by the
+number of prizes already attending the English ship, that he
+could not spare many men to take possession of his ship, and
+having above a dozen passengers, he directed them to hide
+themselves in the hold, along with a Frenchman who served as
+boatswain, with orders to seize as many of the English as went
+down below, assuring them that he with the ship's company would
+be able to manage the rest. When this ship struck, Clipperton
+sent Lieutenant Sergeantson with eight men to take possession of
+her; who, on coming on board, ordered all he saw on deck into the
+great cabin, at the door of which he placed a sentinel. Thinking
+every thing was now secure, he ordered the topsails to be
+hoisted, in order to stand down towards the Success; after which,
+the men went down into the hold, to see what loading was in the
+ship. On this the concealed passengers sallied out, knocked most
+of them down, and the boatswain came behind Mr Sergeantson, whom
+he knocked down likewise, and then bound all the Englishmen in
+the hold. In the mean time, the crew in the great cabin,
+Spaniards, Indians, and Negroes, secured the sentinel. Having
+thus recovered possession of the ship, the Spanish captain
+resolved on getting ashore at all events, in which design he ran
+his ship among the rocks, where he with his crew and prisoners
+were all in considerable danger. He then ordered all the English
+prisoners to be unbound, and all got safe on shore, after which
+Lieutenant Sergeantson and his men were all sent prisoners to
+Lima.</p>
+
+<p>The viceroy was so much pleased with this hardy action of the
+Spanish shipmaster, that he ordered a new vessel to be built for
+him at Guayaquil, ordering all the traders in Peru to be taxed
+for defraying the expence, as a reward for the service rendered
+on this occasion to the public, and an encouragement for others
+to behave in like manner. On the arrival of the prisoners at
+Lima, they were all strictly examined, when one of them gave a
+full account of every thing he knew, particularly of the two men
+who remained on the island of Juan Fernandez, and of the letter
+left in a bottle for the Speedwell, the consort of the Success.
+On this information, a small vessel was fitted out and sent to
+Juan Fernandez, with orders to fetch away the two men and the
+bottle containing the signals, which was accordingly done.</p>
+
+<p>Perceiving on the 20th November, that the last-taken, prize
+had been recovered by her crew, as on making the signal to tack,
+she was seen to make all possible sail towards the land, Captain
+Clipperton immediately suspected what had happened; and finding
+it impossible to get up with her, he began to consider what was
+best for him to do, to prevent the bad effects which might
+reasonably be expected from her crew getting on shore and
+communicating the alarm. Wherefore, he very prudently determined
+to set all his Spanish prisoners at liberty, as well to save
+provisions, which he could not very well spare, as that their
+good usage from him might be speedily known, in hopes of the same
+being returned to those of his men who had fallen into the hands
+of the Spaniards.</p>
+
+<p>On the 24th we took another prize of about 200 tons, laden
+with timber from Panama to Lima, having on board forty negroes
+and thirty Spaniards, most of the last being passengers. On the
+27th he came to anchor with all his prizes at the island of
+Plata, where he began seriously to reflect how best to turn the
+expedition to the profit of the owners, as well as of himself and
+crew. He knew well that all the coast was now alarmed, and that
+two men-of-war were fitting out on purpose to take him, one of
+fifty and the other of thirty guns. He had no expectations of the
+ships and goods he had taken being ransomed in that pan of the
+world, and believed they would prove of little value if brought
+home; and reflecting on what had formerly been proposed by
+Captain Woods Rogers on a similar occasion, of sending a cargo of
+such prize goods to Brazil, he resolved to try that experiment.
+Accordingly, he fitted out the bark in which he had taken the
+Countess de Laguna, armed her with eight guns, and gave her a
+crew of thirteen Englishmen and ten negroes, with what provisions
+and stores he could spare, calling her the <i>Chickly</i>. Into
+this vessel he put a cargo of European commodities, valued at
+upwards of ten thousand pounds, and on the 27th November, 1719,
+he sailed for Brazil under the command of Captain Mitchell. As
+soon as she was gone, he gave up his other prizes to the
+Spaniards, taking out of them whatever he thought worth keeping,
+and detaining one of the Spanish masters to serve him as pilot,
+with all the negroes; after which he sailed from La Plata to
+resume his cruize on his former station.</p>
+
+<p>The 12th December he took a vessel bound from Cherisse for
+Panama with provisions, which employed the launch and pinnace of
+the Success a whole day in bringing on board the flour and other
+provisions out of the prize. Having got as much flour out of her
+as they could well stow away in the Success, Clipperton ordered
+the main-mast of the prize to be cut away, lest she should
+overset, and then dismissed her. From the people of this prize,
+they learnt that Lieutenant Sergeantson and his men had been
+carried prisoners to Lima. On the 27th they anchored in
+<i>Guanchaco</i> bay, where they found two ships at anchor, which
+had been abandoned by their crews, and every thing taken out of
+them, except some bread and a few jars of water. These ships were
+set on fire. It was now resolved to bear away for the Gallapagos
+islands for refreshments, and accordingly anchored in York road,
+on the north side of the Duke of York's island, on the 9th
+January, 1720, immediately under the equinoctial line. They here
+found good water, scrubbed and cleaned their ship's bottom, and
+after ten days proceeded to the northwards, in order to cruize on
+the coast of Mexico. The circumstance of finding good water at
+this place, sufficiently justifies Captain Cowley from the
+aspersions thrown upon him by later writers, who allege that he
+gave a fanciful and untrue account of these islands, as they had
+not been able to find water or anchorage at such of them as they
+tried.</p>
+
+<p>Having returned to the American coast, they fell in with a
+ship on the 21st of January, which they took after a long chase.
+This proved to be the Prince Eugene, on board of which was the
+Marquis of <i>Villa Roche</i> and all his family, bound from
+Panama, where he had been president, to Lima. This was the very
+ship in which Captain Clipperton had been circumvented and taken
+in his last voyage in these seas,[237] when he had been very
+indifferently used by the marquis, who was now at his mercy, and
+whom he used, notwithstanding, with all civility. On the 8th
+March, a priest who was on board the prize, and the boatswain of
+that ship, desired leave to go on shore at the island of
+<i>Velas</i>,[238] which was granted on condition that they would
+induce the inhabitants to bring some bullocks to the shore, to
+exchange them for such goods as they might think proper to accept
+in payment. This they promised, and on the 16th they returned
+with four bullocks, together with some fowls and fruit as a
+present to the marquis, but said their alcalde, or governor,
+would on no account permit them to trade with the English. They
+also learnt that Captain Mitchell had been ashore at this place,
+and had shot some of their cattle, but on 200 men appearing under
+arms, had been forced to retire. This story seemed the more
+probable, as these people had some linen and other articles of
+clothing belonging to Captain Mitchell's men. Next day some
+letters from the marquis were intercepted, which were by no means
+conformable to the strict honour to which the Spanish nobility
+usually pretend, as they were meant to stir up the inhabitants of
+Velas to surprise the men belonging to Captain Clipperton, and to
+seize his boat when it went ashore for water. Upon this Captain
+Clipperton confined the marquis for some days; yet allowed him
+and his lady to go ashore on the 20th, leaving their only child
+as an hostage; and soon after the prize was restored to her
+captain.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 237: The circumstance here alluded to no
+where appears in the narratives of any of the former
+circumnavigations.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 238: Perhaps Velas point is here meant, in
+lat. 10&deg; 9' N. on the coast of that province of Mexico called
+<i>Corta Rica</i>.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the 14th April, the marquis and his lady came on board,
+accompanied by the alcalde, and an agreement being made for their
+ransom, the lady and child were sent ashore, and the marquis
+remained as sole hostage. In the whole of this transaction,
+Clipperton seems to have been outwitted by the marquis, who
+lately broke his word, and by this the crew of the Success were
+provoked to murmur against their captain for trusting him. On the
+20th of April, the Success anchored in the Gulf of Amapala, or
+Fouseca, in lat. 13&deg; N. and not being able to water there,
+repaired to the <i>Island of Tigers</i>,[239] where they procured
+water with great ease. They went to the island of Gorgona, in
+lat. 2&deg; 53' N. for the same purpose, on the 4th June. On the
+24th of that month they took a prize which had once been in their
+hands before, now laden with timber and cocoa-nuts; and on the
+11th August, anchored with their prize at the island of <i>Lobor
+de la Mar</i>, in lat. 6&deg; 95' S. where they set up tents on
+shore, scrubbed and cleaned their ship's bottom, and took
+whatever seemed of any value out of the prize.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 239: Perhaps the Isla del Cana, in lat.
+8&deg; 46' N. is here meant, or it may have been one of the
+islands in the Gulf of Amapala.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>While here, a plot was entered into by the crew, for seizing
+the captain and officers, whom they proposed to leave on the
+island of Lobos, and then to run away with the ship; but this was
+happily discovered on the 6th September, the two principal
+ringleaders severely punished, and the rest pardoned. On the
+17th, they took a fishing-boat with a considerable quantity of
+well-cured and salt fish. On the 1st November they went into the
+Bay of Conception, on the coast of Chili, in lat. 36&deg; 35' S.
+in chace of a vessel which outsailed them and escaped; whence
+they bore away for Coquimbo, in lat. 29&deg; 50' S. and took a
+ship laden with sugar, tobacco, and cloth, on their passage
+between these two places. On the 6th in the afternoon, on opening
+the harbour of Coquimbo, they saw three men-of-war at anchor with
+their topsails loose, which immediately slipped their cables and
+stood after them. The Success hauled close upon a wind, as the
+prize did likewise, on which the best sailing Spanish man-of-war
+gave chase to the prize, which she soon came up with and took.
+The two other ships crowded all sail after the Success, till
+afternoon, when the biggest carried away her mizen-mast, on which
+she fired a gun and stood in for the shore, which favoured the
+escape of the Success.</p>
+
+<p>In the re-captured prize, they lost their third lieutenant, Mr
+James Milne, with twelve men. The captain of the Spanish
+man-of-war which took him, was the famous Don Blas de Lesso, who
+was governor of Carthagena when that place was attacked by
+Admiral Vernon. At first Don Blas treated Mr Milne very roughly,
+being enraged at having missed taking the English privateer, and
+had only retaken a Spanish prize, and in the first transport of
+his passion struck Mr Milne over the head with the flat of his
+sword. But on coming to himself he sent for Mr Milne, and
+generously asked his pardon, and finding he had been stripped by
+the soldiers, ordered him a new suit of clothes, and kept him
+some time in his own ship. He afterwards procured his liberty at
+Lima, paid his passage to Panama, giving him a jar of wine and
+another of brandy for his sea-store, and put 200 dollars in his
+pocket to carry him to England. This unlucky accident of losing
+the prize revived the ill-humour among the crew of the Success,
+who did not indeed enter into any new plot, but became much
+dejected.</p>
+
+<p>On the 16th they gave chase to another ship, which, after
+exchanging a few shots, bore away and left them. This was a
+fortunate escape, as she was a ship of force commanded by one
+Fitzgerald, which had been fitted out on purpose to take Captain
+Shelvocke; but knowing this not to be the ship he was in search
+of, and doubting her strength, had no great stomach to engage.
+These repeated disappointments, as they broke the spirit of the
+crew, had a very bad effect on Captain Clipperton, who now began
+to take to drinking, which grew at last to such a pitch that he
+was hardly ever quite sober; owing to which unhappy propensity he
+committed many errors in his future proceedings.</p>
+
+<p>It was now determined to proceed to the northward in search of
+plunder, as also to procure a supply of provisions, especially
+flour, having expended all their stock of that article, and being
+now reduced to three pounds of Indian corn for a mess of six men
+per day. Having but indifferent fortune, and being in sight of
+point <i>Helena</i> in lat. 2&deg; 10' S. they resolved to bear
+away for the Gallapagos islands, on the 27th November, having in
+the first place set ashore the prisoners belonging to the vessel
+in which Mr Milne was taken. In their passage to these islands,
+they suspected an error in their log-line, which was found three
+fathoms too short, making an error in their computation on this
+run of about fifty-two miles. On the 4th of December they lost
+their purser, Mr Fairman, and the same day found themselves near
+the Gallapagos, being in lat. 0&deg; 36' N. with a strong current
+running to the S.W. against which they had to contend. On the 6th
+the pinnace was sent to look out for an anchorage at one of the
+islands, but returned without finding any, having seen many
+tortoises on shore. Upon this the pinnace and yawl were sent out
+to bring off some of these animals, and returned with sufficient
+fish to serve the whole company for a day, but had been unable to
+land for turtle, in consequence of a prodigious surf on the
+shore. This island was a mere rock in lat. 0&deg; 9' N. and the
+ground all about it was foul, with soundings from fifty to eighty
+fathoms. Leaving this island, they proceeded to another in the
+S.W. but could find no anchorage. Being unwilling to lose more
+time, they made the best of their way for the island of
+<i>Cocos</i>,[240] where they hoped to procure fish, fowls, and
+cocoa-nuts. On the 7th they saw several islands in the N.E.
+through which they passed, and got clear of them all by the
+9th,[241] but as the people daily fell sick, they grew very
+apprehensive of the dangerous situation they might incur in case
+of missing the island of which they were now in search. On the
+17th they had the satisfaction of seeing the long-wished for
+island in the N.W. at the distance of nine leagues; and on the
+18th, after coming to anchor, all of them went on shore that
+could be spared from the necessary duty of the ship, in order to
+build a hut for the reception of the sick, who were then carried
+on shore and comfortably lodged. They here had plenty of fish,
+fowls, eggs, and cocoa-nuts, with other refreshments. The captain
+here opened the last hogshead of brandy for the use of the
+company, giving every man a dram daily as long as it lasted; and
+on new-year's-day 1721, he allowed a gallon of strong beer to
+every mess. By means of abundant nourishing food and much ease,
+the crew began to recover their health and spirits, and were soon
+able to take on board wood and water, though with considerable
+difficulty, as a very heavy swell set in from the northwards at
+the full and change of the moon, so that they had to wait till
+after the spring-tides were over, before they were able to get
+any thing off.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 240: The island of Cocos, nearly north from
+the Gallapagos, is in lat. 5&deg; 20' N. and long. 87&deg; 53' W.
+from Greenwich.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 241: These were probably some of the most
+northerly of the Gallapagos.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the 17th January, 1721, Captain Clipperton made the
+necessary dispositions for sailing, but it was three days before
+he could get his people on board, and then no less than eleven of
+them were missing, three Englishmen and eight negroes. It is not
+easy to conceive what could have induced the former to hazard
+themselves at this island, so far removed from the continent, and
+so little likely to be frequented by ships, and whence they had
+so very small a chance of ever getting off. It must be attributed
+to their dread of the dangers and fatigues to which they had been
+continually exposed, and to their living almost continually on
+short allowance, whereas they were here sure of plenty of
+provisions, with no other fatigue but the trouble of procuring
+and dressing them. Perhaps they might have received some
+assurance from the marquis, of having a ship sent for them when
+he obtained his liberty, which was at least a hazardous
+contingency; and there is great reason to doubt was never
+performed.</p>
+
+<p>Leaving the island of Cocos on the 20th, they arrived on the
+coast of Mexico on the 25th, when they met with an extraordinary
+adventure. Discovering a sail about seven in the evening, they
+gave chase and sent their pinnace to board, which came up with
+the chase about eleven. On the return of the pinnace, her people
+reported that this was a Spanish ship named the Jesu Maria, but
+now in possession of Captain Shelvocke, who had now only forty of
+his men remaining, all the rest being dead or dispersed. He said
+that he had lost the Speedwell at the island of Juan Fernandez,
+where he staid five months, and built a bark out of the wreck of
+the Speedwell. Putting to sea in this bark, he had coasted along
+Chili and Peru, meeting several ships, but could not take any,
+till at length he captured the Jesu Maria at Pisco near Lima.
+Shelvocke's people differed much in their stories, but it
+appeared that there was no regular command among them; and, as
+used to be the practice in the buccaneers, they had chosen a
+quarter-master, every thing being carried by a majority of votes,
+being all equal, and snared every thing among themselves,
+contrary to the articles of agreement with their owners.</p>
+
+<p>On the 27th, Mr Clipperton sent for the purser of the Jesu
+Maria, who gave but a dark account of their proceedings, only
+that he was not allowed to take any account of the treasure for
+the owners. Captain Shelvocke afterwards came on board the
+Success, accompanied by Mr Dod, his lieutenant of marines, who
+proposed to remain in the Success, having been very ill used by
+the other crew for his attachment to the interest of the owners,
+at least so he said, and was credited by Captain Clipperton and
+his officers. Next day, Shelvocke sent on board the Success six
+chests of pitch and <i>dammer</i>, two barrels of tar, and six
+slabs of copper; and Captain Clipperton gave him
+<i>twenty-four</i> quarter deck guns,[242] some round shot, a
+compass, and a few other necessaries. Shelvocke's people laid out
+a great deal of money with the crew of the Success, in the
+purchase of clothes, shoes, hats, and other necessaries; and
+there remained with them two of Shelvocke's officers, Mr Hendric
+the purser, and Mr Dod the lieutenant of marines.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 242: This must be a gross error, as the
+Success originally carried only <i>twenty-four</i> guns; and
+accordingly, in the subsequent account of the circumnavigation of
+Shelvocke, only two quarter-deck guns are
+mentioned.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Still keeping to the northward on the coast of Mexico, the
+Success afterwards saw the Jesu Maria several times; and at
+length, in the beginning of March, it was resolved to propose a
+conjunct attempt on the Manilla ship on her way to Acapulco.
+Accordingly on the 13th March, in a general consultation by the
+officers of both ships, it was agreed to make the attempt
+jointly, both ships boarding her at once, as the only chance of
+taking her. On the 15th, in another consultation, Captain
+Clipperton and his officers agreed to certain articles, which
+were sent to Captain Shelvocke, proposing, if he and his crew
+would refund all the money they had shared among themselves,
+contrary to the articles agreed upon with the owners, and put the
+whole into a joint stock, thus all their faults should be
+forgiven, both companies uniting, and should then proceed
+together to cruise for the Acapulco ship. This proposal was very
+indifferently received by Shelvocke and his men, who did not care
+to part with what they possessed, and declined to give any answer
+to this proposal. Perceiving, therefore, that nothing good was to
+be expected from their quondam consort, considering also that the
+usual time of the Manilla ship arriving at Acapulco was already
+elapsed, that most of their remaining men were weak and sickly,
+and that they were only victualled for five months at their
+present short allowance, Captain Clipperton and his men thought
+it was now proper for them to proceed for the East Indies without
+loss of time, in order to preserve what little they had got for
+their owners and themselves. It was therefore resolved upon to
+put this plan into immediate execution, without any farther
+consultation with Shelvocke, and to leave the coast of America
+directly. They were now to the S.S.E. of Port Marquis, in lat.
+16&deg;50'N. and accordingly on the 18th March shaped their
+course for crossing the Pacific ocean towards the Ladrone
+islands.</p>
+
+<p>The Manilla ships usually leave the Philippine islands about
+the beginning of July, and arrive at the Ladrones about the
+beginning of September, whence they proceed for Acapulco, where
+they are expected to arrive about the middle of January. They
+generally remain at Acapulco, till towards the latter end of
+April, and then sail for Manilla. This, though the general rule,
+is liable to some alterations, according as the trade-winds set
+in earlier or later. From this account, it is plain that the ship
+they had now proposed to wait for must have been the galleon on
+her passage from Acapulco for Manilla, which always has a
+prodigious quantity of silver on board.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION III.</p>
+
+<p><i>Voyage of the Success from the Coast of Mexico to
+China.</i></p>
+
+<p>The Success performed the voyage from the coast of Mexico to
+the Ladrones in fifty-three days, arriving in sight of the island
+of Serpana on the 10th May, 1721. This island is in lat.
+13&deg;42'N. though usually laid down in the Spanish maps in
+14&deg;.[243] In this passage they lost six of their men, and the
+rest were reduced to so weak and low a state, that the sight of
+this island gave them great joy. They determined however to
+proceed to Guam, as best known to Europeans, and where they were
+most likely to procure provisions; but in their present weakly
+condition it might have been better to have gone to Serpana,
+where the Spaniards have not so great a force as at Guam. They
+anchored in the road at this island on the 13th May, and sent
+their pinnace ashore with a flag of truce to obtain provisions.
+But the people informed them that, without leave of the governor,
+they could not trade with them. Application was therefore made to
+the governor for this purpose, which was favourably received for
+the present; and Mr Godfrey, the owners agent, who had been sent
+up to the governor at Umatta, returned on the 16th to the Success
+in one of the country proas, with a message from the governor,
+intimating, that they should be furnished with provisions, if
+they behaved civilly and paid honestly. The launch arrived soon
+after, bringing on board some cattle, bread, sugar, brandy,
+fruit, and vegetables; and on the 17th the governor sent a
+handsome present of palm-wine, sugar, and brandy, with a large
+quantity of chocolate.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 243: Serpana is probably some small island
+close to Guam, not inserted in general maps. The centre of Guam
+is in 13&deg;30'N.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The <i>Island of Guam</i>, in lat. 13&deg;30'N. long
+145&deg;30'E. from Greenwich, is nearly ten leagues long from N.
+to S. and five leagues from E. to W. It has several villages, the
+most remarkable being Amatta, Atry, Agana, Anigua, Asa, Hugatee,
+and Rigues. The natives are formerly said to have amounted to
+150,000 souls, but at this time did not exceed a tenth of the
+number, of which a few hundreds remained independent in the
+mountains, in spite of every effort to reduce them under the
+Spanish dominion. The natives are strong, active, vigorous, and
+war-like, but are represented as cruel, vindictive, and
+treacherous, though perhaps the Spaniards have exaggerated their
+bad qualities, to extenuate their own tyranny and oppression. The
+Spanish garrison at this island at this time consisted of 300,
+relieved from time to time from Manilla, and the King of Spain is
+said to have allowed 30,000 dollars yearly for the maintenance of
+this port, the only use of which is to give refreshments to the
+annual ship which goes between Manilla and Acapulco.</p>
+
+<p>Having agreed with the governor of Guam for the ransom of the
+Marquis de Villa Roche, that nobleman went ashore on the 18th
+May, accompanied by the agent, the first lieutenant, and the
+doctor; and the Success gave him a salute of five guns at
+parting. For six days after, the launch was continually employed
+in bringing wood, water, and provisions on board, during which
+time the governor requested to be supplied with some arms and
+ammunition in exchange, and accordingly Captain Clipperton sent
+him twelve fuzees, three jars of gunpowder, sixty rounds of shot,
+four pair of pistols, and several cutlasses, swords, and daggers.
+On the 25th a letter was sent on board, demanding the jewels
+belonging to the marquis, some consecrated plate, and two
+negroes, who were Christians; as also requiring to have a
+certificate signed by the captain and officers of the Success,
+that peace had been proclaimed between Britain and Spain; besides
+which, this letter intimated that Mr Godfrey and Mr Pritty were
+detained till all these demands were complied with. In reply,
+Captain Clipperton sent a letter, containing a certificate, that
+he had been informed by the Solidad, the last prize taken on the
+coast of Chili, that peace had been concluded between Britain and
+Spain; but threatning, if the agreed ransom for the marquis, and
+the two gentlemen now detained, were not sent off in twenty-four
+hours, that he would demolish all the houses on shore, burn the
+ship in the harbour, and do all the mischief he could at the
+Philippine Islands.</p>
+
+<p>Soon after, a letter was received from the governor, saying
+that he would pay for the consecrated plate, and desiring to have
+more powder and shot; to which Clipperton made answer that he
+could not spare any more. The yawl went ashore on the 28th for
+more provisions; but the people were told that no more could be
+had, unless they sent more powder and shot. Upon this Clipperton
+weighed anchor, and stood in for the harbour, sending the pinnace
+a-head to sound. The people on shore had raised a battery during
+the sham treaty about the ransom of the marquis, from which they
+fired on the pinnace. The pinnace now returned to Clipperton, and
+reported that the only channel they could find lay within
+pistol-shot of the shore; yet at six in the afternoon Clipperton
+persisted to carry the Success into the harbour, making directly
+for the ship that lay there at anchor. The <i>Spaniards</i>
+carried her into shoal-water,[244] where she was exposed to two
+fires, one from the new battery on land, almost directly over
+head, and the other from the ship. At nine she got foul of the
+rocks, when they had to cut away two of their anchors,
+endeavouring to get her off, all the while the enemy plying them
+warmly with shot and stones from the new battery on the hill, so
+that they suffered severely in the hull and rigging of the ship.
+They also had three men wounded, besides losing the first
+lieutenant, Mr Davidson, an honest man and a good officer. Thus
+the Success had to remain in a miserable situation, exposed
+during the whole night to the continual fire of the enemy; and
+the surface of the water being as smooth as a mill-pond, the ship
+was easily seen in the night, while her unfortunate crew had no
+other mark to fire at but the flashes of the enemy's guns.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 244: This unexplained circumstance probably
+meant, that the Success had at this time <i>Spanish</i> pilots,
+who betrayed her.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In this dangerous emergency, Captain Clipperton being overcome
+with liquor, and quite unable to command, the officers came to
+the resolution of running clear from the enemy as soon as they
+could get the ship afloat, and signed a paper to indemnify Mr
+Cook if he would assume the command. By four in the afternoon of
+the 29th they got the ship afloat, and cut away their small bower
+anchor, but ran aground again in ten minutes. At nine they
+carried out the kedge-anchor, but the hawser broke in heaving.
+They now carried out another hawser, having a lower-deck gun
+fixed to it, as they had now lost all their anchors, and were
+still aground. At two in the morning of the 30th the enemy
+repeatedly called upon them to surrender, or they might expect no
+quarter. At five they carried out the main-top-mast shrowd
+hawser, with another gun, still plying the enemy with their great
+guns and small-arms, though they were able to do little harm;
+while the enemy never missed them, especially directing their
+shot at the boats of the Success, whenever they saw them in
+motion. At eleven in the forenoon of the 30th they carried out
+the remains of their best bower-cable, with two lower-deck guns,
+which they dropped right a-head in five fathoms water. They now
+cleared the hold, ready to start their water to lighten the ship;
+got their upper and lower-deck guns forwards, to bring her by the
+head as she hung abaft on the rocks, and kept two guns constantly
+firing from the stern-ports at the enemy's battery, but could not
+get them to bear. During the last twenty-four hours they had
+fortunately only one man wounded; but the ship was wretchedly
+injured between wind and water, and her rigging torn to
+pieces.</p>
+
+<p>At six in the afternoon of the 30th the ship floated, when
+they cut away their yawl, having been sunk by a shot. They hove
+taught their cable, and then cut it away, together with the two
+hawsers, and sent the pinnace a-head to tow the ship off. Just as
+the ship got afloat, the enemy fired with great briskness from
+their new battery, their shot raking through the Success between
+wind and water, killed one of her men, and wounded two
+others.</p>
+
+<p>The Success had now remained fifty hours as a fair mark for
+the enemy to fire at, during which they lost both their
+bower-anchors and cables, with the stern and kedge-anchors, four
+hawsers, four lower-deck guns, nineteen barrels of powder, two
+men killed and six wounded; and had they not now got off, it was
+believed they must have been sunk before morning. At ten in the
+forenoon of the 31st they hove to, and began to splice their
+rigging, not a rope of which had escaped the shot of the enemy.
+The masts and yards were all sore wounded; and the carpenters had
+to work during the whole night, stopping-the shot-holes in the
+hull. They stowed away most of their guns in the hold, barred up
+the ports, hoisted in the launch and pinnace, and at noon steered
+away west under an easy sail, hoping to save their passage before
+the western monsoon set in; the carpenters being fully occupied
+in fishing the masts and yards, and the rest of the crew in
+mending the rigging. At six in the evening of the 31st May, 1721,
+the body of the island of Guam bore E. seven leagues distant, and
+they then took their departure; being in 15&deg; 20' N. designing
+now for China.</p>
+
+<p>The conduct of Captain Clipperton at Guam was certainly
+exceedingly erroneous. He ought on no account to have permitted
+the marquis to go on shore till he had received the money for his
+ransom, and all the provisions of which he stood in need. The
+marquis had before behaved very ill to him, and had no title to
+any favour; and if he had kept the marquis, the governor of Guam
+would not have had any opportunity of putting his schemes in
+execution. Clipperton committed also an egregious error in
+pretending to attack the town, and the ship in the harbour.
+Though drunkenness is rather an aggravation than an excuse for
+misconduct, yet it is to be considered that Clipperton was a mere
+sailor, who had not the benefit of a liberal education, and that
+he fell into this sad vice from disappointment and despair. On
+all occasions he had shewn a humane and even generous
+disposition, with the most inflexible honesty, and a constant
+regard to the interest of his owners. He is therefore much to be
+pitied, for having fled to the bottle under a load of misfortunes
+too heavy for him to bear.</p>
+
+<p>The voyage upon which they had now to enter was very
+dangerous, the run from Manilla to China being estimated at 400
+leagues; besides that the distance they had now to sail was much
+greater. They had only received a very moderate addition to their
+former scanty stock of provisions; and their vessel had been so
+roughly handled in the late unfortunate affair, that they were
+very apprehensive she would not last out the voyage. On careful
+examination, she was found to be in a very shattered condition,
+having scarcely a whole timber in her upper works, and one of her
+<i>fashion pieces</i> being shot through, which is a principal
+support of the after-part of the ship, they were obliged to strap
+her, to keep her together. As it blew pretty fresh, they durst
+not carry sail, and for nearly a week together had to scud almost
+under bare poles, through variable winds, bad weather, and a
+rough sea. This was a melancholy situation for the people, in
+seas with which they were little acquainted, and sailing by
+charts on which they could not depend. Yet they found the
+accounts and charts of Dampier much superior to those laid down
+by persons of much greater figure, so that without these they had
+hardly been able to have extricated themselves from their
+difficulties. The 24th June they were in sight of the
+<i>Bashee</i> Islands, in lat. 20&deg; 45' N. long. 121&deg; 40'
+E. On the 31st they saw the <i>island-shoals</i> of
+<i>Pralas</i>, in lat. 21&deg; N. long. 116&deg; 20' E. The 1st
+July they fell in with other islands, not laid down in any of
+their charts, which perplexed them sadly, not being able to form
+any certain judgment of their true course. They anchored under
+one of these islands in thirteen fathoms, and sent away one of
+their boats to endeavour to procure intelligence how Macao bore
+from them, that being the port to which they were bound. The
+pinnace returned on the 2d July, bringing a boat in which were
+three Chinese sailors, or fishermen, whom they could not
+understand, and all they could learn from them was, that Canton
+bore from them to the S.W.</p>
+
+<p>On the 3d July, finding they had got too far to leeward of
+Macao, and being unable to procure a pilot, they resolved to sail
+for <i>Amoy</i>, as the only course that was left them, and
+accordingly arrived before that port in the evening of the 5th;
+but being afraid to enter it in the night, they plied off and on
+till daybreak of the 6th. They here noticed great numbers of
+snakes in the sea, brought down by the rivers that empty
+themselves upon that coast. The entrance into the port of
+<i>Amoy</i> is sufficiently conspicuous, in consequence of a high
+mountain, on the top of which is a tower, or pagoda, which may be
+seen at the distance of twenty leagues out to sea, and has a
+small island immediately before the mouth of the bay. The river
+<i>Change-neu</i>[245] discharges itself here into the sea,
+forming a spacious bay about eight leagues in circuit, where
+ships may ride at anchor in great safety, the only difficulty
+being in getting into port, which they happily accomplished in
+the evening of the 6th July, being well pleased to find
+themselves once more in a place where they might hope to procure
+refreshments, and be able to repair their ship; or if that were
+impracticable, whence they might procure a passage home.
+Clipperton was as much rejoiced as the rest; for, having had his
+full share of afflictions and misfortunes at sea, he was happy in
+the prospect of securing a small sum of money for his own use,
+and sending home what belonged to the owners, if the ship were
+really past repairing, as his people reported.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 245: No name resembling <i>Amoy</i> is to
+be found on the coast of China in any of our best maps, and the
+text gives no distinct indication of its situation. The river
+<i>Changeneu</i> of the text, perhaps refers to
+<i>Tchang-tcheou</i>, a city in the province of Fokien, having a
+large bay in lat. 24&deg; 30' N. long. 118&deg; 15' E. and
+<i>Amoy</i> may have been some corruption of the port of
+discharge at the mouth of the river which passes
+Tchang-tcheou.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>They had no sooner anchored in the port than ten custom-house
+officers were placed on board. At Amoy, as in most other ports in
+China, the customs are under the direction of a single mandarin,
+called the Hoppo, or Hoppou. The Chinese are justly reputed the
+craftiest people in the world; and it is their invariable maxim
+to appoint the cunningest man they can find to the office of
+hoppo. It may be added, that the people of Amoy are reputed to be
+less nice in the principles of honour and honesty even than any
+others in China. The first thing demanded by these custom-house
+officers was, what the ship was, and what was her business at
+this port. Clipperton made answer, that the ship belonged to the
+King of Great Britain, and had put in there from stress of
+weather, in order to obtain a supply of provisions and other
+necessaries. The officers now demanded an exact account of the
+number of men and guns, the nature and amount of the cargo, and
+the time they intended to stay, all of which they set down in
+writing, and then departed.</p>
+
+<p>Next morning the men mutinied, and insisted that Clipperton
+should pay them their prize-money immediately, as the Success was
+in no condition to proceed to sea. The man who made this demand
+was one John Dennison; and when Mr Taylor interposed in behalf of
+the captain, one Edward Boreman told him he had better desist,
+unless he had a mind to have a brace of bullets through his head.
+There was now an end of all regularity on board, the authority of
+the captain being completely overthrown. The country people
+supplied the ship with abundance of rice, with some cattle and
+fowls, together with wood and water, for which they were paid. On
+the 12th the officers went ashore to wait upon the hoppo, who had
+a fine palace. He treated them with great civility, giving them
+leave to anchor in the harbour, and to remain there till the
+adverse monsoon was over; but for this he demanded 1700 dollars
+as port-charges, equal to near &pound;400 sterling, and soon
+afterward received that sum in ready money.</p>
+
+<p>It may be remembered that Mr Mitchell went out from. England
+as second captain under Clipperton. On his going to Brazil, he
+was succeeded by Mr Davidson, who was slain in the unfortunate
+affair at Guam; to whom Mr Cook succeeded as second captain. He
+now demanded to receive thirty shares of the prize-money in that
+capacity, in which he was supported by the men, whom he courted
+by a continual compliance with all their humours. Captain
+Clipperton and the rest of the officers, seeing the turn matters
+were likely to take, were very desirous that some allowance
+should be reserved for the officers who were absent, and had been
+taken prisoners, and for Mr Hendrie and Mr Dod, who had joined
+them from the Speedwell: but all their endeavours were fruitless,
+as the men would not listen to any such allowances. While these
+disputes were going on, the men went ashore as they pleased,
+without asking leave; and when the captain endeavoured to correct
+this licence, the whole company stood out, and would not submit
+to controul. After this every thing fell into confusion, and the
+men refused to work till they should receive their prize-money.
+They even applied to the chief mandarin of the place, styled
+<i>Hyhuug</i> by the Chinese, to interpose his authority for
+obliging their captain to comply with their demands. This
+magistrate then summoned Captain Clipperton to appear before him,
+and demanded to know the reason why he refused to give the men
+satisfaction; on which the captain produced the articles, which
+contained expressly that they were not to receive their
+prize-money till their return to London. But Captain Cook, as he
+was now styled, gave quite a different account of this matter to
+the mandarin; on which a guard of soldiers was sent aboard the
+Success, with a peremptory order to Captain Clipperton
+immediately to settle the shares, and to pay them to the men,
+with which he was forced to comply.</p>
+
+<p>This distribution was accordingly made on the 16th September,
+pursuant to the order of the chief mandarin; and as no allowance
+was reserved for those who had been made prisoners, or for the
+representatives of those who had died, or the two gentlemen who
+formerly served in the Speedwell, the prize-money stood thus:</p>
+
+<pre>
+   The share of money and silver plate, dollars     280
+   The share of gold,                               100
+   The share of jewels,                              39
+                                                   -----
+   Total share of a foremast-man,                   419
+</pre>
+
+<p>Which, at 4s. 8d. the dollar, amounted to &pound;97:15:4
+sterling. According to this distribution: The share of the
+captain amounted to &pound;1466, 10s. The second captain had
+&pound;733, 5s. The captain of marines, the lieutenants of the
+ship, and the surgeon, had each &pound;488:16:8. Although Captain
+Cook and his associates were thus able to carry their point, yet
+Captain Clipperton prevailed on the mandarin to set apart one
+half of the cargo for the benefit of the owners; which amounted,
+in money, silver, gold, and jewels, to between six and seven
+thousand pounds. This was afterwards shipped at Macao in a
+Portuguese ship, called the Queen of Angels, commanded by Don
+Francisco de la Vero. This ship was unfortunately burnt at Rio de
+Janeiro, on the coast of Brazil, on the 6th June, 1722; so that
+the owners, after deducting salvage, only received
+&pound;1800.</p>
+
+<p>The people and mandarins at Amoy have so conducted themselves
+for a long time, that, even among their own countrymen, this port
+has the appellation of <i>Hiamuin booz</i>, or Amoy the roguish.
+The fishermen on the coast, when they meet any European ship that
+seems intended for that port, pronounce these words with a very
+significant air; but, for want of understanding the language, or
+perhaps from confidence in their own prudence, this warning is
+seldom attended to. The custom of this port is to disarm every
+ship that enters it, sending two frigates or armed vessels,
+called <i>chan-pans</i>, full of men, to ride close by the
+vessel, to ensure the execution of all orders from the
+<i>hoppo</i> and chief mandarin. Besides the enormous imposition
+under the name of port charges, already mentioned, they have
+other strange methods of getting money. Thus, though the small
+craft of the country are at liberty to carry all sorts of
+provisions on board for sale, yet every one of these must in the
+first place go to one of the <i>chan-pans</i>, and pay there a
+tax or consideration for leave to go to the strange vessel. By
+this means, though provisions are here very plentiful, and ought
+therefore to be cheap, the price is enhanced at least a third.
+The mandarins have also a practice of sending presents of wine,
+provisions, and expensive curiosities, to the captain and other
+officers; of all which, when the ship is ready to sail, they send
+an exact memorial with the prices charged, the last article being
+so much for the clerk drawing up the account; and all this must
+be discharged in money or commodities, before their arms and
+ammunition are returned.</p>
+
+<p>During a stay of ten weeks at this port, they sufficiently
+experienced all the artifices of this covetous and fraudulent
+people, from whom Captain Clipperton had no way to defend
+himself, and was therefore obliged to submit to all their
+demands. Towards the end of September, the season and their
+inclinations concurred to deliver them from this place; for by
+this time, even the common men began to be weary of the people,
+who shewed themselves finished cheats in every thing. On the 25th
+September, their arms and ammunition were restored, and that same
+day the Success weighed from the harbour, going out into the road
+or gulf, in order to proceed for Macao, to have the ship
+surveyed, as the men insisted she was not in a condition for the
+voyage home. Captain Clipperton affirmed the contrary, well
+knowing that the men insisted on this point merely to justify
+their own conduct, and to avoid being punished in England for
+their misbehaviour in China.</p>
+
+<p>They weighed anchor from the Bay of Amoy, in the province of
+<i>Tonkin</i>,[246] on the 30th September, and anchored in the
+road of <i>Macao</i> on the 4th October. This place had been an
+hundred and fifty years in the hands of the Portuguese, and had
+formerly been one of the most considerable places of trade in all
+China, but has now fallen much into decay. The way in which the
+Portuguese became possessed of this place gives a good specimen
+of Chinese generosity. In prosecuting their trade with China from
+India and Malacca, being often overtaken by storms, many of their
+ships had been cast away for want of a harbour, among the islands
+about Macao, on which they requested to have some place of safety
+allowed them in which to winter. The Chinese accordingly gave
+them this rocky island, then inhabited by robbers, whom they
+expelled. At first they were only allowed to build thatched
+cottages; but, by bribing the mandarins, they were permitted in
+the sequel to erect stone houses, and even to build forts. One of
+these, called <i>the Fort of the Bar</i>, is at the mouth of the
+harbour, and terminates at a rock called <i>Appenka</i>, where
+there is a hermitage of the order of St Augustine. There is
+another fort on the top of a hill, called the Fort of the
+Mountain; also another high fort, called <i>Nuestra Senhora de
+Guia</i>. The city of Macao stands on a peninsula, having a
+strong wall built across the isthmus, with a gate in the middle,
+through which the Chinese pass out and in at pleasure, but it is
+death for a Portuguese to pass that way.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 246: This surely is an error for Fo-kien.
+Amoy has been before stated in the text as N.E. from Macao,
+whereas the <i>kingdom</i> of Tonquin is S.W. from that
+port.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Some travellers have reported that the Portuguese were
+sovereigns of Macao, as of other places in India: But they never
+were, and the Chinese are too wise a people to suffer any thing
+of the kind. Macao certainly is as fine a city, and even finer,
+than could be expected, considering its untoward situation: It is
+also regularly and strongly fortified, having upwards of 200
+pieces of brass cannon upon its walls. Yet, with all these, it
+can only defend itself against strangers. The Chinese ever were,
+and ever will be, masters of Macao, and that without firing a gun
+or striking a blow. They have only to shut up that gate and place
+a guard there, and Macao is undone; and this they have actually
+done frequently. Without receiving provisions from the adjacent
+country, the inhabitants of this city cannot subsist for a day;
+and besides, it is so surrounded by populous islands, and the
+Chinese are here so completely masters of the sea, that the
+Portuguese at Macao might be completely starved on the slightest
+difference with the Chinese. The Portuguese have indeed the
+government over their own people within the walls of this city;
+yet Macao is strictly and properly a Chinese city: For there is a
+Chinese governor resident on the spot, together with a hoppo or
+commissioner of the customs; and these Chinese mandarins, with
+all their officers and servants, are maintained at the expence of
+the city, which has also to bear the charges of the Portuguese
+government.[247]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 247: The East India Company found all this
+to be true a few years ago, when its Indian government thought to
+have taken Macao from the Portuguese. Had this account of the
+matter been read and understood, they would not have
+unnecessarily incurred a vast expence, and suffered no small
+disgrace at Canton.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In spite of all this, the Portuguese inhabitants were formerly
+very rich, owing to the great trade they carried on with Japan,
+which is now in a great measure lost. Yet, being so near Canton,
+and allowed to frequent the two annual fairs at that place, and
+to make trading voyages at other times, they still find a way to
+subsist, and that is all, as the prodigious presents they have to
+make on all occasions to the Chinese mandarins, consume the far
+greater part of their profits. Each of their vessels, on going up
+to Canton, has in the first place to pay &pound;100 sterling for
+leave to trade. They are next obliged to make a considerable
+present, for permission to have their goods brought on board by
+the Chinese, to whom they must not only pay ready money for all
+they buy, but have sometimes to advance the price beforehand for
+a year. After all this, they have to make another present for
+leave to depart, at least double the amount of what they formerly
+paid for liberty to trade; and they have to pay heavy duties to
+the emperor for every thing they buy or sell, besides their
+enormous presents to his ministers.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION IV.</p>
+
+<p><i>Residence of Captain Clipperton at Macao, and Returns from
+thence to England.</i></p>
+
+<p>On entering the port of Macao in the Success, Captain
+Clipperton saluted the fortress, which compliment was returned.
+He then went on shore, where he prevailed on the captain of a
+Portuguese ship of war, formerly mentioned, to carry the property
+belonging to his owners to Brazil. At this place, the crew of the
+Success found themselves considerably at a loss, as the
+Portuguese commander declared himself entirely in favour of
+Captain Clipperton. Captain Cook, therefore, and another of the
+officers of the Success, went up to Canton, to consult with Mr
+Winder, supercargo of an English East Indiaman, and son to one of
+the principal owners, as to what should be done with, the
+Success. On their return, the ship was surveyed, condemned, and
+sold for 4000 dollars, which was much less than her worth. This
+was, however, no fault in Captain Clipperton, who, to shew that
+he still adhered to his former opinion, that the ship was fit to
+proceed to England, agreed with the persons who purchased her for
+a passage to Batavia, a convincing proof that he did not believe
+her in any danger of foundering at sea.</p>
+
+<p>The ship being sold, the crew naturally considered themselves
+at liberty to shift for themselves, and to use their best
+endeavours each to save what little remained to him, after their
+unfortunate expedition. All were satisfied that Captain Mitchell,
+with his crew and cargo, had either gone to the bottom or fallen
+into the hands of the Spaniards, so that they had no hopes of any
+farther dividend from that quarter; yet it was some consolation
+that they were so near the English factory at Canton, and as six
+dollars were required for a passage to that place in one of the
+Chinese boats, twenty of them agreed to go there immediately, in
+hopes of getting a passage from thence to England. Mr Taylor, one
+of the mates of the Success, was of the number: But before the
+boat set sail, he had some presentiment of danger, and chose
+rather to lose his money, by waiting for another opportunity. He
+had reason to be satisfied with himself for this conduct; as he
+soon learnt that the boat tad been taken by a pirate, and the
+people stript of all their property. After a short stay at Macao,
+Mr Taylor had an opportunity of going up to Canton in an armed
+boat along with a mandarin, for which he and the rest of the crew
+belonging to the Success, who went along with him, paid twenty
+dollars each. In their passage up, they had satisfactory proof
+that in some cases there may be frugality in expence, as they saw
+a pirate take a boat in sight of that in which was the mandarin.
+This plainly shewed that the government winks at these things,
+perhaps deeming it good policy to raise thereby a considerable
+revenue, partly by presents from the pirates, and partly by sums
+paid by merchants and passengers for protection. From this, and
+many other circumstances which might be adduced, the boasted
+wisdom of the Chinese is nothing more than the science of
+dexterously hiding their robberies from the inspection of the
+law: In which, perhaps, they are as much exceeded by some
+northern nations as in the use of the compass, of which they
+pretend to be the original inventors, and perhaps with justice;
+but both in the management of the compass, and in this political
+trade of pirating, they are equally clumsy.</p>
+
+<p>Mr Taylor and his company arrived at the English factory in
+Canton on the 4th November, where they were well received, and
+promised all assistance for getting home. There were at this time
+ships ready to sail, first for several ports in India and then
+for Europe. The captains of these vessels, on being solicited by
+the gentlemen of the factory to take Captain Clipperton's men on
+board, agreed to carry them for five pounds a man, which they all
+accordingly paid, esteeming it a very great favour. Mr Taylor and
+two or three more embarked in the Maurice, Captain Peacock, then
+riding at Wanapo, [Wampoa,] about three leagues below Canton, the
+place where European ships lie; and the rest of the company were
+distributed among the other ships. They sailed on the 9th, in
+company with the Macclesfield, an English East-Indiaman, and the
+House-of-Austria, belonging to Ostend. Mr Taylor arrived safely
+at Batavia in the month of December; sailed thence by the Cape
+and St Helena, and arrived in London in May 1722. The rest of the
+company returned also, some sooner and some later.</p>
+
+<p>As for Captain Mitchell, who was sent to Brazil with a small
+crew, he was never more heard of, having probably been destroyed
+at the island of Velas, where he went ashore to procure fresh
+provisions. This has generally been considered as the greatest
+blemish in the management of Captain Clipperton, but I confess
+without just cause, in my opinion; as the great stress laid on
+that measure by Captain Rogers, might very well have induced
+Captain Clipperton to try what might be done in this way,
+especially as his owners had very strongly recommended the
+account of Captain Rogers to be his rule and guide. I also think
+the proposal in itself was very reasonable, and such as an
+officer who had the good of the expedition at heart had good
+grounds for trying. It was well known that the prize goods could
+produce little or nothing in the South Sea, as the Spanish
+governors demanded such exorbitant sums for liberty to trade,
+that no advantage could be derived from such a commerce, either
+in buying or selling. He knew also that it was to little purpose
+carrying these goods to Europe; and it was certainly much
+preferable to send them to a place where they might sell to
+advantage, and where the produce might be so invested as to
+procure a considerable profit on the voyage from Brazil to
+London. The vessel in which Captain Mitchell sailed was very fit
+for the purpose, and every way well provided; and having a crew
+of thirteen English and ten negroes, was quite sufficient for the
+navigation.</p>
+
+<p>Captain Clipperton sailed from Macao to Batavia, in his own
+ship the Success, after she was sold; and got a passage to Europe
+in a Dutch ship. He arrived at Galway in Ireland, where he left
+his family, in June, 1722; being then in a very bad state of
+health, partly occasioned by his great fatigues, but chiefly
+through the concern he was under for the loss sustained by his
+owners in this unfortunate enterprize. It may be objected, that
+he ought to have returned from Holland to England, to give his
+owners the best account in his power respecting the events of the
+voyage. But, as he sent home their moiety of the profits in the
+Portugueze ship, which, had it not been destroyed by the way, had
+nearly covered the expence of fitting out the Success, taking in
+the money she sold for; and if we consider the reduced state of
+his health when he went to Galway, where he did not live above a
+week, he may well be excused for this step.</p>
+
+<h2><a name="chapter4-12" id="chapter4-12">CHAPTER XII.</a></h2>
+
+<p>VOYAGE ROUND THE WORLD BY CAPTAIN GEORGE SHELVOCKE, IN
+1719-1722.[248]</p>
+
+<p>INTRODUCTION.</p>
+
+<p>In the introduction to the former voyage, a sufficient account
+has been given of the motives on which the expedition was
+founded, and the original plan of acting under an imperial
+commission; together with motives for changing this plan, and the
+reason of advancing Captain Clipperton to the chief command. In
+the new scheme of the voyage, Captain Shelvocke retained the
+command of the Speedwell, carrying twenty-four guns and 106 men,
+Mr Simon Hately being his second captain, an officer who has a
+good character given of him in the account of the former voyage
+by Captain Rogers. The marines were under the command of Captain
+William Betagh. Captain Shelvocke has himself written an account
+of the expedition, and another was published by Captain Betagh,
+so that the following narrative is composed from both.
+Shelvocke's narrative is, strictly speaking, an apology for his
+own conduct, yet contains abundance of curious particulars,
+written in an entertaining style, and with an agreeable spirit;
+while the other is written with much acrimony, and contains heavy
+charges against Captain Shelvocke, yet contains many curious
+circumstances.--<i>Harris</i>.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 248: Harris, I. 198. Callender, III.
+502.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>This is one of the best written voyages we have hitherto met
+with, yet extends rather to considerable length, considering its
+relative importance. On the present occasion, therefore, it has
+been endeavoured to lop off as many of its redundances as could
+be conveniently done without injury, yet leaving every
+circumstance of any interest or importance. The principal
+omission, or abbreviation rather, on the present occasion, is the
+leaving out several controversial matters, inserted by Harris
+from the account of this voyage by Betagh; which might have
+sufficient interest among contemporaries, a few years after the
+unfortunate issue of this misconducted enterprise, but are now of
+no importance, near a century later.--Ed.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION I.</p>
+
+<p><i>Narrative of the Voyage from England to the South
+Sea.</i></p>
+
+<p>Sailing from Plymouth on the 13th February, 1719, in company
+with the Success, we kept company no longer than to the 19th,
+when, between nine and ten at night, we had a violent storm at
+S.W. which increased so, that by eleven we were under bare poles.
+At midnight a sea struck us on our quarter, which stove in one of
+our dead lights on the quarter and another on our stern, by which
+we shipped a vast quantity of water before we could get them
+again fastened up, and we were a considerable time under great
+apprehension of foundering. On the 20th we could not see the
+Success; and this storm so terrified the greatest part of the
+crew, that seventy of them were resolved to bear away for
+England, alleging that the ship was so very crank she would never
+be able to carry us to the South Sea. But by the resolution of
+the officers they were brought back to their duty.</p>
+
+<p>As the Canaries were the first place of rendezvous, we
+continued our course for these islands, where we arrived on the
+17th March, and cruised there the time appointed by our
+instructions.[249] We next sailed for the Cape de Verde Islands,
+and arrived at Maio on the 14th April.[250] A little before
+arriving here, Turner Stevens[251] the gunner very gravely
+proposed to me and the rest of the officers to cruize in the Red
+Sea; as there could be no harm in robbing the Mahometans, whereas
+the Spaniards were good Christians, and it was a sin to injure
+them. I ordered him immediately into confinement, after which he
+became outrageous, threatening to blow up the ship. Wherefore I
+discharged him at his own request, and left also here on shore my
+chief mate, who had challenged and fought with Mr Brooks, my
+first lieutenant.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 249: Clipperton arrived there on the 5th,
+and sailed thence on the 15th of March.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 250: Clipperton came to St Vincent on the
+24th March, and cruized in that neighbourhood for ten days, so
+that he must have sailed about the 31st, at least a fortnight
+before the arrival of Shelvocke.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 251: Called Charles Turner by
+Betagh.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the 18th, we went to <i>Port Praya</i>, in the island of St
+Jago, but finding nothing here but fair promises, I resolved to
+proceed to the island of St Catharine on the coast of Brazil, in
+lat. 20&deg; 30' S.[252] in hopes of obtaining every thing
+necessary for our passage into the South Sea, as, according to
+the account of it by Frezier, it abounds in all the necessaries
+of life, such especially as are requisite in long voyages. We
+sailed therefore from Port Praya on the 20th of April, and had a
+very bad passage, as we were twenty-one days before we could pass
+the equinoctial. White between the two tradewinds, we had usually
+slight breezes, varying all round the compass, and sometimes
+heavy squalls of wind, with thunder, lightning, and rain. In
+short, the most variable weather that can be conceived, insomuch
+that we were fifty-five days between St Jago and St Catharines.
+On the 4th June we made Cape Frio, bearing W. seven leagues off
+our lat. by observation, 23&deg; 41' S.[253] On the 5th we met
+and spoke a ship, to which I sent Captain Hately to enquire the
+news on the coast, and gave him money to buy tobacco, as the
+Success had our stock on board. She was a Portuguese from Rio de
+Janeiro bound to Pernambuco, and had no tobacco; but Hately had
+laid out my money in unnecessary trifles, alleging they would
+sell for double the money at the next port.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 252: This island is in 27&deg; 10'
+S.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 253: Cape Frio is in 22&deg; 33'
+S.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>[Captain Betagh gives a very different account of this matter,
+asserting that Shelvocke hoisted imperial colours and made the
+Portuguese ship bring to, on which Hately went aboard with a
+boat's crew well armed, and put the Portuguese captain in such a
+fright, that he not only sent all sorts of refreshments on board
+the Speedwell, but a dozen pieces of silk flowered with gold and
+silver, worth about three pounds a yard, several dozens of China
+plates and basons, a Japan cabinet, and three hundred moidores in
+gold; ninety-six of which were afterwards found on Hately, when
+made prisoner by the Spaniards, when he had nearly been put to
+death for piracy on their account.][254]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 254: It is almost unnecessary to point out,
+that this paragraph is an addition by Harris to the narrative of
+Shelvocke, extracted from the journal of
+Betagh.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>We anchored at the island of St Catharine on the 23d June,
+where the carpenter went ashore with a gang to fell trees, and
+saw them into planks. The captain and inhabitants of the island
+came off to us daily with fresh provisions, which saved our
+sea-stores while we lay here. I also bought twenty-one beeves,
+200 salted drom-fish of large size, and 150 bushels of cassado
+meal, called by the Portuguese <i>farina de fao</i>. This is
+about as fine as our oatmeal, and from it a very hearty food is
+prepared with little trouble. I also bought 160 bushels of
+<i>calavances</i>, partly for money at a dollar the bushel, and
+partly in exchange for salt, measure for measure; and likewise
+provided a quantity of tobacco for the crew.</p>
+
+<p>The account given of this island by Frezier is very exact,
+only that he takes no notice of an island between the island of
+<i>Gall</i> and the continent of Brazil, nor of a reef of rocks.
+To arrive at the proper anchoring place at this island of St
+Catharine, it is necessary to proceed in the channel between that
+island and the continent till within or near two small nameless
+islands, over against the northernmost of which is the watering
+place on the island of St Catharine, near the entrance of a
+salt-water creek, opposite to which you may safely anchor in six
+or seven fathoms on fine grey sand. The isle of St Catharine is
+about eight leagues and a half long, but no where exceeds two
+leagues broad; and at one place the channel between it and the
+continent is only a quarter of a mile broad. The island is
+covered all over with impassable woods, except where cleared for
+the plantations. Even the smallest island about it is covered in
+like manner with a great variety of trees, between which the
+ground is entirely covered with thorns and brambles, which hinder
+all access; and the main land of Brazil may be justly termed a
+vast continued wilderness. Sassafras, so much valued in Europe,
+is so common here that we laid in a good quantity for fuel. It
+has great abundance of oranges, both China and Seville, lemons,
+citrons, limes, bananas, cabbage-palms, melons of all sorts, and
+potatoes. It has also very large and good sugar-canes, of which
+they make little use for want of utensils, so that the little
+sugar, molasses and rum they have is very dear. They have very
+little game, though the woods are full of parrots, which are good
+eating. These birds always fly in pairs, though often several
+hundreds in a flock. Maccaos, cockatoes, plovers, and a variety
+of other birds of curious colours and various shapes, are to be
+seen in abundance; particularly one somewhat larger than a
+thrush, having a spur on the joint of each wing. Flamingoes are
+often seen here in great numbers, of a fine scarlet colour, and
+appear very beautiful while flying. This bird is about the size
+of a heron, and not unlike it in shape.</p>
+
+<p>The fishery is here abundant, as fish of several excellent
+sorts are in great plenty, and there is the best convenience
+almost everywhere for hauling the seine. All the creeks and bays
+are well stocked with mullets, large rays, grantors, cavallies,
+and drum-fish, so named from the noise they make when followed
+into shallow water, and there taken. Some of them weigh twenty or
+thirty pounds each, their scales being as large as crown pieces.
+The Portuguese call them <i>moroes</i>. The salt-water creek
+formerly mentioned may be gone up three or four miles, to be near
+the watering-place; and every rock or stone, even the roots of
+the mangrove trees, afford a delicious small green oyster.
+Likewise on the rocks at the sea-side there are <i>sea-eggs</i>,
+which resemble <i>dock-burrs</i>, but usually three or four times
+as large, of a sea-green or purple colour. In the inside they are
+divided into partitions, like oranges, each cell containing a
+yellow substance, which is eaten raw, and exceeds, in my opinion,
+all the shell-fish I ever tasted. They have prawns of
+extraordinary size, and we sometimes caught the <i>sea-horse</i>
+in our nets. On the savannahs of Areziliba, on the continent
+opposite the southern end of St Catharine, they have great
+numbers of black cattle, some of which we had from thence at a
+very reasonable price.</p>
+
+<p>The Portuguese on this island are a parcel of banditti, who
+have taken refuge here from the more strictly governed parts of
+Brazil. Emanuel Mansa, who was captain of the island in the time
+of Frezier, was still their chief. They enjoy the blessings of a
+fertile country and wholesome air, and stand in need of nothing
+from other countries except clothing. They have fire-arms
+sufficient for their use, and have often need of them, being
+greatly infected with tigers; for which reason every house has
+many dogs to destroy these ravenous animals, which yet often make
+great havock. I have been told that a tiger has killed eight or
+ten dogs in a night: But when any make their appearance in the
+day, they seldom escape, as the inhabitants are fond of the
+diversion of hunting them. These animals are so numerous, that it
+is quite common to see the prints of their paws on the sandy
+beach. We could not see any of the fine dwelling-houses mentioned
+by Frezier; neither have they any place that can be called a
+town, nor any kind of fortification, except the woods, which are
+a secure retreat from any enemy that may attack them. I cannot
+say much about the Indians of those parts, as I never saw above
+two or three of them.</p>
+
+<p>On the 2d July we saw a large ship at anchor, under Parrots
+Island, about five miles from where we lay. After securing the
+watering-place, and what we had there ashore, I sent the launch,
+well manned and armed, under a lieutenant, to see what she was.
+The launch returned about noon, reporting that she was the
+<i>Ruby</i>, formerly an English man-of-war, but now one of the
+squadron under Martinet, and commanded by Mons. La Jonqniere. She
+was in, the Spanish service, but most of her officers and crew
+were French, to the number of about 420. Yet they had no
+intention to molest us, having quitted the South Sea on report of
+a rupture between France and Spain. M. La Jonquiere was a man of
+strict honour, and sent me intimation of his good intentions,
+with an invitation to dinner, which I accepted, and was well
+entertained. About this time I heard that Hately had plundered
+the Portuguese ship, formerly mentioned, of 100 moidores, and had
+distributed part of the money among the boat's crew, to engage
+them to secrecy. I examined into this as strictly as possible,
+intending, if found guilty, to have delivered him up to the
+captain of St Catharine's, but I could not get sufficient proof.
+This man also committed so many vile actions in the island of St
+Catharine, that oar people were often in the utmost danger, from
+the resentment of the Portuguese; which bad conduct I could
+neither prevent nor punish, as he had become a great favourite
+with my mutinous crew.</p>
+
+<p>M. La Jonquiere, with several of his officers and passengers,
+came on board the Speedwell to dine with me, on the 6th July.
+While they were on board, Hudson my boatswain raised a mutiny,
+which was easily quelled by the assistance of the French
+gentlemen: But the boatswain was sent home in the French ship. On
+the 15th July, we saw a large ship bearing in for the harbour;
+but on discovering us, she turned out again. This circumstance
+alarmed M. La Jonquiere, suspecting she might be our consort, so
+that he put to sea next morning. The large ship appeared again on
+the 25th under French colours, being the Solomon of St Malo of
+forty guns and 160 men, commanded by M. Dumain Girard, bound for
+Peru and Chili.</p>
+
+<p>At this time great heart-burnings arose in my crew: for,
+having heard that the people on board the Duke and Duchess had
+been indifferently treated in regard to their prize-money when
+they got home, they resolved to secure themselves in time. With
+this view, and by the advice of Matthew Stewart, chief-mate, they
+drew up a paper of articles respecting plunder, and sent me a
+letter insisting on these articles being made the rule of our
+voyage; to which at last I was obliged to agree, rather than
+suffer them to proceed in a piratical manner.</p>
+
+<p>On the 3d August the St Francisco Zavier came into the
+harbour, a Portuguese man of war of forty guns and 300 men, bound
+from Lisbon for Macao in China, commanded by Mons. Riviere, a
+Frenchman. We departed from the island of St Catharine on the 9th
+August. Its northern point being in lat. 27&deg; 20' S. and long.
+50&deg; W. from the Lizard.[255] I kept the lead constantly
+sounding all along the coast of Patagonia, and had regular
+soundings. From the lat. of 40&deg; to 30&deg; 38' both S. we
+frequently saw great shoals of seals and penguins, which were
+always attended by flocks of pintadoes, birds about the size of
+pigeons. The French call these birds <i>damiers</i>, as their
+black and white feathers on their back and wings are disposed
+like the squares of a draught-board. These were also attended by
+albatrosses, the largest of all sea-fowl, some of them extending
+their wings twelve or thirteen feet from tip to tip. While
+passing the mouth of the Rio. Plata, the sea was covered with
+prodigious quantities of large seaweed, which often greatly
+incommoded us and deadened our way. On getting farther south we
+were freed from this inconvenience; after which we saw abundance
+of things floating on the surface of the sea, like white snakes.
+We took some of these up, but could not perceive them to have any
+appearance of life, neither had they the shape of any kind of
+animal, being only a long cylinder of a white jelly-like
+substance, perhaps the spawn of some large fish.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 255: Only 27&deg; S. and 48&deg; 30' W.
+from Greenwich.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>As we advanced to the southward, the appetites of our people
+increased with the cold, which occasioned disputes in the ship.
+Even at my own table, Captain Betagh of the marines insisted on a
+larger allowance in such coarse terms, that I confined him till
+he wrote me a submissive letter, on which I restored him. But
+this squabble constrained me to allow an extraordinary meal to
+the people daily, either of flour or calavances; which reduced
+our stock of provisions, and consumed our wood and water, proving
+afterwards of great inconvenience. Whales, grampuses, and other
+fish of monstrous size, are in such vast numbers on the coast of
+Patagonia, that they were often offensive to us, coming so close
+to us that it seemed impossible to avoid striking them on every
+scud of a sea, and almost stifling us with the stench of their
+breaths, when they blew close to windward. Being ignorant of the
+Greenland fishery, I cannot pretend to say whether that trade
+might not be carried on here; but this I may venture to affirm,
+that the navigation here is safer, and I am apt to believe it has
+a greater chance of being successful.[256]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 256: This southern whale-fishery is now
+carried on to a considerable extent.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the 19th September, about midnight, perceiving the water
+all at once to be discoloured, we sounded, and had 25 fathoms, on
+which we stood out from the land, but did not deepen our water in
+five leagues. This bank must lie very near the entrance into the
+Straits of Magellan. On this bank we saw great numbers of
+blubbers, appearing like the tops of umbrellas, curiously
+streaked with all sorts of colours, being an entirely different
+species from any I had ever seen before. We now steered for the
+Straits of <i>Le Maire</i>, and met with very foggy weather on
+approaching the coast of <i>Terra del Fuego</i>. The fog cleared
+up on the 23d September, when we had sight of stupendous
+mountains on that southern land, entirely covered with snow. The
+nearest point of land was at least eight leagues from us, in the
+S.W. but before we could ascertain our situation the mist
+returned. At four next morning, proceeding under easy sail to the
+S.E. it proved very clear at day-break, and I found we had fallen
+in with the land about five leagues N.W. from the straits of Le
+Maire. We had now a full, but melancholy prospect of the most
+desolate country that can well be conceived, appearing a
+congeries of chains of mountains in succession, one behind the
+other, perpetually cloathed in snow.</p>
+
+<p>Hitherto we had not been sensible of any current, either
+favourable or adverse, after getting to the south of the Rio
+Plata. But this afternoon we were hurried with incredible
+rapidity into the straits of Le Maire; and when we had gained
+about the middle of the passage, the tide slackened. On sounding
+we had twenty-seven fathoms on a rocky bottom. We had a dear view
+of <i>Staten-land</i>, which yields a most uncomfortable prospect
+of a surprising height, quite covered with snow to the very wash
+of the sea, so that it seems more like a white cloud than firm
+land. These straits seemed to answer well to the map of Frezier;
+being about seven leagues through and six wide, and extend almost
+due north and south. Now the return tide rushed upon us with a
+violence equal to that which brought us in, and it was
+astonishing with what rapidity we were driven again to the north,
+though we had a fresh gale at N.W. so that we seemed to advance
+six knots by the log; whence I judged this tide ran not less than
+ten knots. In short, we were carried quite out of the straits to
+the north in about an hour. Upon this shift of tide there arose
+such a short sea, and so lofty at the same time, that we
+alternately dipped our bowsprit and poop-lanterns into the water;
+our ship all the while labouring most violently, and refusing to
+answer the helm. The tide shifted again at midnight, and we shot
+through the straits, steering S. with a brisk gale at N.W.
+without seeing the land distinctly on either side: And, in the
+morning, had a good offing to the southward.</p>
+
+<p>We found it very cold before we got thus far; but now we began
+to feel the utmost extremity of coldness. The bleak western winds
+had of themselves been sufficiently piercing; but these were
+always accompanied by snow or sleet, which beat continually on
+our sails and rigging, cased all our masts, yards, and ropes with
+ice, and rendered our sails almost useless. We had been so much
+accustomed to most severe storms, that we thought the weather
+tolerable when we could carry a reefed main-sail; as we were
+often for two or three days together lying-to under bare poles,
+exposed to the shocks of prodigious waves, more mountainous than
+any I had ever seen. We now sensibly felt the benefit of our
+awning, without which we could scarcely have lived. The wind
+continued to rage without intermission from the westward, by
+which we were driven to the latitude of 61&deg; 30' S. and had
+such continued misty weather, that we were under perpetual
+apprehension of running foul of ice islands: But, thank God, we
+escaped that danger, though under frequent alarms from fog banks
+and other false appearances. Though the days were long, we could
+seldom get sight of the sun, so that we had only one observation
+for the variation in all this passage, which was in lat. 60&deg;
+37' S. 5&deg; W. of the straits of Le Maire, when we found it
+22&deg; 6' E. On the 1st October, as we were furling the
+main-sail, one William Camell, cried out that his hands and
+fingers were so benumbed that he could not hold himself: And,
+before those near could assist him, he fell down and was drowned.
+On the 22d October, our fore-top-mast was carried away, and we
+rigged another next day. Having contrary winds from the time we
+passed the straits of Le Maire, with the most uncomfortable
+weather, we made our way very slowly to the west and northwards,
+the hopes of getting soon into a wanner and better climate
+supporting us under our many miseries.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION II.</p>
+
+<p><i>Proceedings in the South Sea, till Ship-wrecked on the
+Island of Juan Fernandez.</i></p>
+
+<p>At length, on the 14th November at noon, our spirits were
+cheared by seeing the coast of Chili; yet here we found ourselves
+under very great difficulties. Our tedious passage and
+extraordinary consumption of provisions, had so reduced our wood
+and water, and even our food, that it was necessary to repair to
+some place where our wants might be supplied; but it was
+difficult to resolve where that might be done. We first tried
+Narborough island, but finding the road unsafe, sailed for the
+mouth of St Domingo river on the continent, where we had
+twenty-eight fathoms, shoaling as we advanced from eighteen to
+less than five as fast as a man could heave the lead. Finding
+this place too hazardous, we stood out to sea, and were blown
+farther north than we designed. Being greatly at a loss where to
+procure wood and water, one Joseph de la Fontaine, a Frenchman,
+proposed going to the island of Chiloe, assuring us that the
+towns of <i>Chaiao</i> and <i>Calibuco</i>, the former on the
+island and the latter on the continent, were rich places, where
+we could not fail of procuring whatever we wanted. Cliacao was,
+he said, the usual residence of the governor, and at Calibuco was
+a wealthy college of Jesuits, having considerable magazines,
+always well stocked with provisions of all kinds. This person at
+the same time insinuated among the people, that our expedition
+would probably turn out unfortunate, if we passed this place, as
+Captain Clipperton must by this time have alarmed the coast, in
+consequence of which there would be an embargo on all ships
+trading to leeward.</p>
+
+<p>My chief inducement for making an attempt on Chiloe was to
+procure such additional supply of provisions, as might enable us,
+in case the coast were already alarmed, to retire to some
+unfrequented island, to remain till the Spaniards should suppose
+we had abandoned the South Sea; after which we could resume our
+cruize, when they were under no apprehensions of being molested.
+Accordingly, on the 30th November, we entered the channel which
+divides the island of Chiloe from the main land of Chili, and
+stood in for the harbour of Chacao under French colours,
+intending to have attacked the towns of Chacao and Calibuco by
+surprise. Our pilot, however, seemed as much a stranger to the
+navigation here as I was, and as the wind began to blow fresh
+with thick weather, I came to anchor in thirteen fathoms, at ten
+in the morning, between the point of <i>Carelampo</i> and the
+small island of Pedro Nunez. Soon after coming to anchor, the
+tide made outwards with prodigious rapidity, and the wind
+increased greatly, between which the sea became very boisterous,
+all the channel in which we lay appearing one continued breach or
+surf. Our ship consequently made a vast strain on her cable,
+which parted at two in the afternoon, and we could have no hopes
+to recover our anchor, as the buoy had been staved and sunk about
+an hour before we were thus set adrift. I did not think it
+adviseable to risk another anchor, and therefore immediately
+crossed over for the island of Chiloe, in a boisterous gale with
+thick rainy weather, surrounded on all hands with seeming shoals,
+and in a manner bewildered in an unknown navigation. When within
+a mile of Chiloe, we ranged along shore to the southward,[257] in
+hope of discovering the town of Chacao. We passed two commodious
+bays, which had no appearance of any town, and came to a point of
+land marked by a high pyramidal rock. After getting round this
+point, we found ourselves entirely out of the tideway, and quite
+sheltered from all other inconveniences, and came therefore to
+anchor opposite a cross on the north side of the harbour, having
+just sufficient day-light to enable us to get into this place of
+shelter.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 257: The direction was more probably to the
+eastward--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Next morning, I sent the second lieutenant, in the pinnace
+well manned and armed, to look out for the two towns; and sent at
+the same time Mr Hately in the launch, to endeavour to find a
+watering-place. He soon returned, accompanied by an Indian, who
+had shewn him a very convenient place where we could at once
+procure both wood and water, even under the command of our guns
+from the ship, and free from all danger of being surprised. I
+accordingly sent back the launch with casks to be filled, and
+several people to cut wood, all well armed, together with an
+officer of marines and ten men to keep guard. The Indians gave us
+hopes of a sufficient supply of provisions; but came in the
+evening to our people who were on shore, to acquaint them that
+the natives were forbidden to bring any thing to us. As the
+pinnace had not yet returned, this information gave me much
+concern, fearing that the enemy had taken her, and had by that
+means learnt what we were. On the 3d December, about seven in the
+evening, a Spanish officer came to us, in a boat rowed by eight
+Indians, being sent by the governor of Chiloe to enquire what we
+were. Meaning to pass upon him for a French captain well known in
+these seas, I ordered none of my people to appear on deck but
+such as could speak French or Spanish, and hoisted French
+colours. When the officer came on board, I told him my ship was
+the St Rose, homeward-bound, that my name was <i>Janis le
+Breton</i>, and that I entreated the governor to spare me what
+provisions he could conveniently afford, that being my only
+business on the coast. The officer heard me with much civility,
+seeming to give implicit credit to all I said; even staid on
+board all night, and went away next morning, to all appearance
+well satisfied.</p>
+
+<p>On the 5th in the morning, two boats came towards us full of
+armed men; but, after taking a view of us, went to a small island
+in the mouth of the harbour. On the 6th we saw a white flag
+hoisted on shore, to which I sent my launch completely manned and
+armed, but they found no person near the flag, to the shaft of
+which a letter was fastened, and a dozen hams lying close by. The
+letter was from <i>Don Nicholas Salvo</i>, governor of Chiloe,
+intimating strong doubts of our ship being the St Rose,
+complaining of the behaviour of the people in our pinnace, and
+desiring me to leave the coast. I returned an answer in as proper
+terms as I could devise, and next morning had another letter,
+couched in the utmost civility, but absolutely refusing me any
+refreshments, and demanding the restitution of the Indians said
+to have been made prisoners by our pinnace. In fact I knew less
+of our pinnace than he did, and believed that he actually had the
+people in his hands of whom he now complained.</p>
+
+<p>Despairing of ever seeing my people, and still ignorant where
+Chacao was situated, having no chart of the island on which I
+could depend, I determined to change my style of writing to the
+governor, and try what could be done by threatening to use force.
+I therefore wrote, that I was determined to have provisions by
+fair means or foul. Next day I sent my first lieutenant, Mr
+Brooks, with twenty-nine men well armed in the launch, ordering
+him to bring off all the provisions he could find. Shortly after,
+a boat came with a message from the governor, offering to treat
+with me, if I would send an officer to Chacao: But I answered,
+that I would treat no where but on board, and that he was now too
+late, as I had already sent eighty men on shore to take all they
+could find.</p>
+
+<p>In the evening the launch returned, accompanied by a large
+piragua, and both were completely laden with sheep, hogs, fowls,
+barley, and green peas and beans. Soon afterwards, the pinnace
+arrived with all her crew, but so terrified that I did not expect
+them to be again fit for service for one while. The officer told
+me, that he had been forced to fight his way through several
+canoes, filled with armed Indians, from whom he got clear with
+the utmost difficulty, and had been under the necessity of making
+his passage quite round the island, a course of not less than
+seventy leagues.[258] This proceeded only from excess of terror,
+as they only met one boat with unarmed Indians and a Spanish
+sergeant, who came off to them without the least shew of
+violence, as some of them afterwards confessed, but with this
+addition, that there were great numbers of people on shore, who
+they were apprehensive would come off to them. The only excuse
+the officer could allege was, that the tide had hurried him away,
+and he forgot in his fright that he had a grappling in the boat,
+with which he might have anchored till the tide turned.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 258: The circuit of the island of Chiloe by
+sea, could hardly be less than 350 English miles; an arduous
+navigation in an open boat upon an utterly unknown
+coast.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>By this strange mismanagement, I missed a favourable
+opportunity of seizing the town of Chacao, which I might easily
+have done if I had appeared before it within forty-eight hours
+after our arrival, when the governor was totally unprovided for
+resistance. But now, having a whole week allowed for mustering
+the force of the island, he had collected near a thousand armed
+Spaniards, as I learnt from the Indian prisoners in the pinnace.
+I therefore laid aside all thoughts of going to the towns, in the
+hopes of furnishing ourselves from the Indian farms and
+plantations, in which I kept one of our boats constantly
+employed. By the 16th, our decks were full of live cattle,
+together with poultry and hams in abundance, and such quantities
+of wheat, barley, potatoes, and maize, that I was quite
+satisfied. On a moderate computation, we had added four months
+provisions to the stock we brought from England, so that I was
+well pleased with the effects of our stay at Chiloe, and prepared
+to depart. I might certainly have done much more for my own
+credit and the profit of my owners, had if not been for the
+mismanagement of the officer in the pinnace.</p>
+
+<p><i>Chiloe</i> is the first of the Spanish possessions on the
+coast of Chili, reckoning from the south; and, though it produces
+neither gold nor silver, is a fine island, and is considered as
+of great consequence; insomuch that the Spaniards would be under
+great apprehensions when strange ships enter its ports, did they
+not confide in the number of its inhabitants, which is
+extraordinary for this part of the world. The body of this island
+is in lat. 42&deg; 4' S. being about thirty leagues in length
+from N. to S. and not above six or seven leagues from E. to
+W.[259] It is watered by several rivers, and produces many kinds
+of useful trees, yielding an agreeable prospect, by the great
+number of Indian farms and plantations dispersed at small
+distances from each other, on rising grounds among the woods.
+Within this great island there is an archipelago or cluster of
+smaller islands, the number of which is not well known; yet the
+smallest of these is said to be well inhabited, and to abound in
+cattle. Among these islands there are very uncertain and violent
+currents, which are by no means safe. I would recommend all
+strangers to go in at the north end of the great island, giving
+the northern point of the island a good birth, and then to keep
+the island side of the channel on board, running along shore to
+the southward (eastward). Passing two bays, which seem
+commodious, you come to a point, almost contiguous to which is a
+high rock, somewhat like a pyramid; and passing between that rock
+and a small high island near it, you run directly into a harbour
+resembling the mouth of a river, which forms a safe anchorage. In
+going in, take care not to come nearer shore than having the
+depth of five fathoms, as the nearer to the small island the less
+water; wherefore keep the lead going, and be bold with the shore
+towards the north side of the harbour, which has the greatest
+depth, while the south side is shoaly.[260]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 259: Chiloe reaches from lat. 41&deg; 50'
+to 43&deg; 50', both S. and from long. 73&deg; 18' to 74&deg;
+24', both W. extending 135 English miles in extreme length, by 35
+in medium breadth. See vol. V. p. 592, for an account of the
+Archipelago of Chiloe.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 260: Shelvocke seems here to describe the
+harbour leading to the town or village of San
+Carlos.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>My pilot carried me the contrary way to that here directed,
+advising me to keep near the main land of Chili, which I did till
+I got to <i>Carelampo</i> Point, having several small islands to
+the southward of my course, which proved unfortunate for me by
+the loss of my anchor. The soil of Chiloe is very fertile,
+producing all sorts of European fruits and grains, and has fine
+pasture lands, in which great numbers of cattle are grazed,
+particularly sheep. The air is wholesome and temperate; yet I
+suspect the winter may be rigorous, being bounded on the west by
+an immense ocean, without any land to screen it from the cold
+moist vapours brought thither by the tempestuous westerly winds,
+which generally reign in these latitudes, and which must render
+it uncomfortable in the winter months, as the parallels of
+latitude to the south of the equator are much colder than those
+in the same degrees to the northwards.</p>
+
+<p>In this island they have abundance of very handsome
+middle-sized horses, which the natives are said to manage with
+great dexterity. They have also an animal, called <i>guanaco</i>
+or <i>carneso de tierra</i>, that is, sheep of the country, which
+very much resembles a camel, but not nearly so large. They have
+long necks, and I have seen one of them between five and six feet
+high. Their wool or soft hair is very fine. They smell very rank,
+and move with a very slow majestic pace, which hardly any
+violence can make them quicken; yet they are of great service at
+the mines in Peru, where they are employed in carrying the ore
+and other things. Their flesh is very coarse, as we experienced,
+having salted some of them for our future use. Besides these, the
+inhabitants have European sheep and great numbers of hogs, but
+not many black cattle. The island has plenty of fowls, both wild
+and tame. Among the former is a small species of goose, found on
+the banks of the rivers, which are beautifully white, and of an
+excellent taste. The tame poultry are of the same kinds with our
+own.</p>
+
+<p>The natives are almost in all respects the same with those on
+the continent of Chili, of moderate stature, with deep olive
+complexions, and coarse shaggy black hair, some of them having by
+no means disagreeable features. They seem naturally of fierce and
+warlike dispositions; but the oppressions of the Spaniards, and
+the artifices of the jesuits, who are the missionaries in these
+parts, have curbed and broken their spirits. Frezier says, that
+the Indians on the continent, to the southward of this island,
+are called <i>Chonos</i>, who go quite naked; and that there is a
+race of men of extraordinary size in the inland parts of the
+country, called <i>Cacahues</i>,[261] who are in amity with the
+<i>Chonos</i>, and sometimes accompany them to the Spanish
+settlements in Chiloe. Frezier says, that he has been credibly
+informed by eye-witnesses, that some of these were about nine or
+ten feet high. I had sight of two of these Indians, who came from
+the southward of St Domingo river, one of whom was a cacique, who
+did not seem to me to differ in their persons from the ordinary
+natives of Chiloe. They were decently clothed in <i>ponchos,
+monteras</i>, and <i>poulains</i>. The <i>poncho</i> is a sort of
+square carpet, having a slit or hole cut in the middle, wide
+enough to slip over the head, so that it hangs down over the
+shoulders, half before and half behind, under which they
+generally wear a short doublet. On their heads they have a
+<i>montera</i>, or cap nearly like those of our postillions, and
+their legs are covered by the <i>poulains</i>, a kind of knit
+buskins, or hose without feet. In short, their appearance has
+little or none of the savage. Their habitations are firmly built
+of planks, but have no chimneys, so that they are very black and
+sooty within.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 261: See an account of the native tribes,
+inhabiting the southern extremity of South America, vol. V. p.
+401.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>They inclose some of their land for cultivation, by means of
+rails or paling; and although they have plenty of every thing
+necessary to a comfortable subsistence, they have no bread, from
+wanting mills in which to grind and prepare their wheat They use
+a miserable substitute, making a kind of cakes of sea-weeds,
+which from use is much esteemed by them, and was not even
+disliked by some of our men. Besides this, they prepare their
+maize in several manners to answer the purpose of bread, and they
+use potatoes and other roots with the same intention. They
+prepare a liquor called <i>chicha</i> from their Indian corn, in
+imitation of their neighbours on the continent of Chili; but the
+Spaniards endeavor to curb their propensity to the use of this
+liquor, as their drinking bouts have often occasioned seditions
+and revolts. Such of the natives as have no European weapons, use
+pikes, darts, and other arms of the country. Among these is a
+running noose on a long leathern thong, called a <i>lays</i>,
+which they use with surprising dexterity for catching cattle,
+horses, or other animals, even when at full career. From all that
+I could see of the natives of Chiloe, or hear respecting the
+Chilese, they seem to resemble each other in all things, which is
+not wonderful, considering the near neighbourhood of this island
+to the continent of Chili. They use small drums, the heads of
+which are made of goats skins with the hair on, and give a very
+dull sound.</p>
+
+<p>The natives of Chiloe carry on a small woollen manufacture,
+consisting of <i>ponchoes</i> and other articles of clothing,
+formerly mentioned. They also export considerable quantities of
+cedar, both in plank, and wrought up into boxes, chests, desks,
+and the like, with which they supply all Chili and Peru. They
+have no European trade; but the Spaniard who came to me from the
+governor expressed his astonishment that no trading ships ever
+put in there, saying they had plenty of money among them, with a
+safe port, free from the danger of going to the northward among
+the Spanish ships of war; as a great deal of business might be
+done here, before intelligence could be sent as far as Lima, and
+the ships could be fitted out and sent so great a way to
+wind-ward. It is observed of the Chilese, that, differing from
+all other nations ever heard of, they have no notion of a Supreme
+Being, and consequently have no kind of worship; and they are
+such enemies to civil society that they never live together in
+towns and villages, so that their country seems thinly inhabited,
+though very populous, the whole nation being dispersed in farms
+at a good distance, every family having its own plantation, and
+raising its own necessaries.</p>
+
+<p>Though thus scattered, they are not wholly independent, each
+tribe being subject to a chief, called a cacique, whose dwelling
+is conveniently situated among them, for the more speedy
+summoning them together on affairs of importance. This is done by
+the sound of a sort of horn, on hearing which all his vassals
+repair to him without delay. The chief commands them in war, and
+has an absolute power of dispensing justice among his subjects,
+who all consider themselves as his relations, he being as it were
+the head of his family, and his authority hereditary. In all
+these respects the inhabitants of Chiloe resemble their
+neighbours on the continent, excepting that their caciques are
+stript in a great measure of their power and influence, by the
+tyranny of the Spaniards, who keep them under the most servile
+slavery, while the missionaries blind them by a superstitious and
+imperfect conversion to Christianity, of which not one of these
+natives know any thing more than merely that they were baptized;
+all their devotion consisting of mere idolatry of the cross, or
+the images of saints; for the Spanish clergy use no manner of
+pains to enlighten their minds, but probably think it better, by
+keeping them in ignorance, to make them more contented under the
+rigorous government of the Spaniards. Under this delusion, the
+caciques have changed their lawful prerogatives for the vain
+ostentation of being allowed to wear a silver-headed cane, which
+places them on a footing outwardly with a Spanish captain. Yet
+have they sometimes rebelled against their proud oppressors,
+deeming death preferable to slavery, as may be seen in the
+account of Frezier's voyage.</p>
+
+<p>The vessels used in Chiloe are peculiarly constructed, as, for
+want of nails and other articles of iron, the planks of which
+their boats are constructed are sewed together very ingeniously
+with oziers. These boats are all constructed of three pieces
+only, the keel or bottom being one piece, and the sides two
+others; and they are rowed with oars, in the same manner as with
+us, more or fewer according to their size.</p>
+
+<p>Having nothing farther to detain us in Chiloe, I determined
+upon proceeding to the island of Juan Fernandez, as directed in
+my instructions; but my men took it into their heads that great
+things might be done by a short trip to the Bay of Conception, to
+which also they were induced by the Frenchman who persuaded us to
+come to Chiloe. He pretended that there were always five or six
+ships in the road of Conception, besides others daily coming in
+or going out, and that these had often both ways considerable
+sums of money or silver, with other valuable things, on board;
+and, though large ships, they were of little or no force, neither
+were there any fortifications at that place to protect them; so
+that we could not meet any opposition in taking them, even if
+there were twenty sail. He said their, cargoes consisted chiefly
+of corn, wine, brandy, flour, and jerked beef; and that the ships
+bound for Conception always brought money to purchase their
+cargoes; besides that considerable booty might be made for rich
+trading passengers, who carry on a considerable trade over land
+between Conception and Buenos Ayres. He also alleged, that we
+could not fail of having any ships we might take ransomed; and
+that we should certainly make our fortunes, if we could only
+reach Conception before they had notice of our being in these
+seas. This man therefore advised my people to endeavour to
+prevail on me to make the best of my way to Conception, before
+the governor of Chiloe could send our deserter thither; after
+which all the coast would be alarmed, and we should have no
+opportunity of meeting with any thing till the Spaniards had
+imagined we were gone from the South Sea.</p>
+
+<p>In similar cases, all are fond of delivering their sentiments;
+and, as it is impossible to keep a ship's company in so much awe
+in so remote a part as in short voyages, my men did not fail to
+speak their minds somewhat insolently. One William Morphew, who
+had been in these seas several years, took upon him to tell me,
+that it did not signify much if we arrived two or three days
+sooner or later at Juan Fernandez. He said also, that I was a
+stranger here, but the Frenchman and he were well acquainted with
+these seas, and every body hoped I would be advised to go to
+Conception; hoping I would not put a mere punctilious adherence
+to orders in balance against so fair a prospect, or almost
+certainty of success, if we arrived there in time. In short, they
+all assured me that they had the interest of the proprietors in
+view, as much as their own, and that they would perish sooner
+than injure them in any respect. They said at the same time, if I
+had not success in my proceedings nobody could be blamed but
+myself, and entreated me not to let slip this opportunity, in
+which they would stand by me with all fidelity.</p>
+
+<p>On our way to Conception, we made the islands of Mocha and St
+Mary on the 23d December, and arrived that same evening in the
+Bay of Conception, but could not be certain whether there were
+any ships in the road. I immediately gave orders to man and arm
+our boats and sent them up that same night, in order to surprise
+any ships that might be there; and with strict orders, if they
+found them too strong, to endeavour to prevent them from sending
+any thing on shore till I were able to work the ship up to them.
+This I endeavoured to do all night, but to very little purpose;
+for at day-light next morning I could not discern any thing above
+us. Captain Hately returned about noon of the 24th, informing me
+that he had taken a ship of about 150 tons, lately arrived from
+Baldivia, and having only a few cedar plants on board, with no
+person in her but the boatswain, an old negro, and two Indian
+boys. He had left her in the charge of Mr Brooks, my first
+lieutenant, with orders to bring her down the first opportunity;
+and had taken, while on his return, a small vessel, of about
+twenty-five tons, near the island <i>Quiri-quinie</i>, which lies
+in the harbour or bay of Conception, where this small vessel had
+been taking in pears, cherries, and other fruits, to sell at
+Conception. Immediately after taking this small vessel, I could
+perceive with my glass another small boat come in between the
+islands of <i>Quiri-quinie</i> and <i>Talgaguana</i>, passing
+within pistol-shot of my pinnace, and yet Captain Hately did not
+engage her. For this his only excuse, after he came on board,
+was, that he did not mind her; though our boat's crew said she
+was full of men.</p>
+
+<p>On the 26th about noon, Mr Brooks brought down the prize, and
+anchored about half a mile short of us. The boatswain of this
+prize had not been two hours in the Speed-well, till he told us
+of a vessel, laden with wine, brandy, and other valuable things,
+riding at anchor in the Bay of Herradura, about two leagues to
+the north of us, and bound for Chiloe. On receiving this
+information, I ordered Mr Randal, my second lieutenant, with
+twenty five men, to go in the Mercury, which name we gave to the
+captured flour bark, and, accompanied by the Spanish boatswain of
+the other prize, to go in search of the vessel in the Bay of
+Herradura, with positive orders not to land or to make any other
+hazardous attempt. But they returned next evening with the
+following melancholy story.</p>
+
+<p>On getting into the bay, they found the vessel hauled dry
+ashore, when Randal ordered his people to land and bring away
+what they could find in her, while he and three or four more kept
+the bark afloat. The people found the bark empty, but seeing a
+small house hard by, they suspected her cargo might be lodged
+there, and the inferior officer along with them ordered them to
+examine that house. The poor fellows went accordingly, without
+any officer at their head, and without any regard to order, every
+one endeavouring to be foremost. Their career was soon stopped,
+as they had hardly got beyond the top of the bank when they
+discovered the enemy coming furiously towards them. Some of the
+seamen were of opinion they might have retreated at this time in
+safety, if they had not been astonished at the strange manner in
+which they were attacked, by a number of horses galloping up to
+them without riders, which caused them for some time to stand
+amazed, not knowing what way to proceed; but on a little
+reflection they bestirred themselves to make the best of their
+way to the Mercury, in which they all succeeded except five, who
+were made prisoners. Fortunately for them, the Mercury had by
+some accident got aground, or they must all have been cut off, as
+the Spaniards thought fit to retire on getting within musket-shot
+of the Mercury. They now got the bark afloat, but as the water
+was still very low, and they were obliged in going out of the bay
+to keep very near to a point of land, the Spaniards galled them
+from that point, under the shelter of the wood. They soon passed
+this point, having a fair wind, all lying close in the bottom of
+the bark, so that on this occasion only one man was wounded, who
+was shot through the thigh. The Spaniards came down upon them in
+this affair after the following singular manner. They were
+preceded by twenty or more horses abreast, two deep, and linked
+together, behind which extraordinary van-guard came the enemy on
+horseback, lying on the necks of their horses, and driving the
+others before them, never seen to sit up on their saddles, except
+to fire their muskets, or when there was no danger. When they got
+near our people, they threw their <i>lays</i> or running nooses
+to catch them, and accordingly ensnared James Daniel, one of my
+foremast-men, who was a good way into the water, and whom they
+dragged out again at the rate of ten knots. The Spaniards in
+Chili are universally dexterous in the use of this running noose,
+for I have seen a Spaniard bring a man up by the foot as he ran
+along the deck, and they are sure of any thing they fling at, at
+the distance of several fathoms.</p>
+
+<p>These misfortunes and disappointments made my crew extremely
+uneasy, and might have had bad consequences, if we had not been
+agreeably surprised by seeing a large ship coming round the
+northern point of the island of <i>Quiri-quinie</i>.[262] It was
+at this time almost dark, so that her people could not perceive
+what we were, and stood on therefore without fear, so that she
+came towards us, and was taken without resistance. This ship
+proved to be the St Fermin, of about 300 tons, last from
+<i>Cadaco</i>,[263] having only a small cargo, consisting of
+sugar, molasses, rice, coarse French linen, some woollen cloth
+and bays of Quito, a small quantity of chocolate, and about five
+or six thousand dollars in money and wrought plate. I sent Mr
+Hendric, the owners agent, to inspect her cargo, and to order
+every thing of value out of her into the Speedwell, and the
+ship's company sent their agent likewise. They returned in the
+afternoon, bringing all the bales, boxes, chests, portmanteaus,
+and other packages, with a large quantity of sugar, molasses, and
+chocolate, and about seventy hundred weight of good rusk, with
+all her other stores and eatables. Don Francisco Larragan, the
+captain of this ship, begged to be allowed to ransom her, which I
+willingly consented to, and allowed him to go in his own launch
+to Conception to raise the money, accompanied by a merchant, one
+of the prisoners.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 262: A small island in the entrance of the
+Bay of Conception.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 263: Callao, or the port of Lima, is
+perhaps here meant.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In the mean time we were very busy in searching the prize,
+lest any thing might have been concealed; and every one who came
+at any time from the St Fermin was strictly searched by some of
+our people appointed for the purpose, that they might not
+appropriate any thing of value. Our carpenter also was employed
+in making a slight spar-deck over the Mercury, as she might be of
+great use while cruizing along the coast. On the 30th December a
+boat came off to us with a flag of truce from the governor of
+Conception, and an officer, who acquainted us that two of our
+people, taken in the late skirmish, were still alive, but very
+much wounded. He brought also a present of seven jars of very
+good wine, and a letter from Don Gabriel Cano, the governor, in
+which he demanded to see my commission, as also that I should
+send ashore Joseph de la Fontaine, who had been servant to one of
+the mates belonging to Captain La Jonquiere, and some other
+things that I thought unreasonable, engaging to enter into a
+treaty, if I would comply with these requisitions. At length a
+formal treaty was begun, in which I demanded 16,000 dollars for
+the ransom of the St Fermin alone, while they offered only 12,000
+for both the ships and the bark. Finding all his Spanish
+<i>puncto</i> tended only to entrap us, I set fire to the
+Solidad, one of our prizes; and, giving them time to comply with
+my proposals it they would, I set the St Fermin also on fire.</p>
+
+<p>We sailed from the bay of Conception on the 7th January, 1720,
+intending for Juan Fernandez; and on the 8th we observed the sea
+to be entirely of a red colour, occasioned, as the Spaniards say,
+by the spawn of the <i>camarones</i>, or pracous. On the 9th, the
+plunder taken in the St Fermin was sold by the ship's agent at
+the mart, and brought extravagant prices. The account being
+taken, and the shares calculated, the people insisted for an
+immediate distribution, which was made accordingly, and each
+foremast-man had after the rate of ten dollars a share, in money
+and goods. On the 11th we saw the island of Juan Fernandez; and
+at noon it bore from us five leagues W.S.W. the meridional
+distance from Conception being 275 miles[264] W. From that day to
+the 15th, I stood off and on, waiting for my boats which were
+employed in fishing. In this time I sent the Mercury ashore to
+stop her leaks, while the boats caught so many fish, that we
+salted the fill of five puncheons. I could find no marks of
+Captain Clipperton having been here for a long time; but at
+length some of my men saw accidentally the words <i>Magee</i> and
+Captain John cut upon a tree. Magee was the name of Clipperton's
+surgeon, but no directions were left, as agreed upon in his
+instructions to me, so that it was evident he never meant I
+should keep him company, or ever join him again.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 264: The difference of longitude between
+Conception and Juan Fernandez is six degrees of longitude W. and,
+consequently, 360 minutes or marine miles.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Being by this certified of the arrival of Clipperton in the
+South Sea, I directly made the best of my way from Juan
+Fernandez, being in a pretty good condition as to provisions, by
+the additional stock of fish caught here, all our casks being
+filled. On the 21st, while sailing along there with the design of
+looking into <i>Copiapo</i>, I put Mr Dodd, second lieutenant of
+marines, into the Mercury, with a reinforcement of eight men, and
+sent her next evening to cruize close in with the land, while I
+kept with the Speedwell in the offing, to prevent being
+discovered from the land. On this occasion I took care to give
+the officer commanding the Mercury a copy of my commission, with
+all necessary instructions how to proceed, appointing the
+<i>Moro</i>, or head-land of Copiapo, to be our place of meeting.
+The business of the Mercury was to look into the port of Copiapo,
+called <i>Caldera</i>,[265] near which there are some gold-mines,
+and from whence considerable quantities of gold are exported in
+small vessels; and our bark had the advantage of being of that
+country build, so that she could not excite suspicion. Next day I
+hove in sight of the head-land of Copiapo, and lay to the
+southward, that I might not be seen from that port, which is to
+the northward of the <i>Moro de Copiapo</i>. While here, opposite
+a small island which lies athwart the mouth of Copiapo river, I
+sent the pinnace to fish between that isle and the main, and soon
+after saw a vessel crowding all sail towards us. She at first
+seemed too large for the Mercury, yet turned out to be her; when
+the officer told me he had looked into the port, but could see no
+shipping; but he had looked into a wrong place, and having made
+him sensible of his error, I sent him again to the right place,
+which was about six leagues farther north.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 265: The port of Caldera, or English
+harbour, is about twelve or fifteen miles to the N. of Copiapo
+river, having a considerable interposed
+promontory.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Next morning our pinnace returned, bringing only a few
+penguins which she had taken on the island in the bay of Copiapo.
+The Mercury had looked into Caldera, but saw nothing; and instead
+of making use of the land-wind to come off to me, had kept along
+shore in the bottom of the bay till the land-wind came in so
+strong that she was nearly lost on the lee-shore. On the 27th, I
+sent Mr Brooks, my first lieutenant, and Mr Rainor, first
+lieutenant of marines, to relieve Mr Randal and Mr Dodd in the
+Mercury, which I had fitted with a gang of oars, and, upon trial,
+she was found to make way at the rate of three knots, which might
+render her extremely useful in a calm. The 5th February, I
+dispatched Mr Brooks ahead in the Mercury, to see if there were
+any ships in the harbour of Arica, in lat. 18&deg; 26' S. and
+next day, at one p.m. having ranged along shore, by the breakers
+of <i>Pisagua, Camarones</i>, and <i>Victor</i>, I got sight of
+the head-land of Arica, with a ship at anchor on its northern
+side, and saw the Mercury standing out of the bay, by which I
+judged the ship was too warm for her, and therefore made all
+haste to get up to her with the Speedwell. On coming up, we found
+that the ship was already taken, and the Mercury only
+accidentally adrift. This prize was called the Rosario, of 100
+tons, laden with cormorants dung, which they use for manuring the
+land which produces the cod-pepper, or <i>Capsicum</i>, from the
+cultivation of which they make a vast profit in the vale of
+Arica. The only white face in this ship was the pilot, whom I
+sent ashore to see if the owner would ransom his ship, the cargo
+being worth gold to them, but entirely useless to us. Next
+morning I received a letter from Miguel Diaz Gonzale, the owner
+of the ship, insisting pitifully on his poverty and distress,
+having a large family to provide for, and promising to meet me at
+Hilo or Quaco, to treat for a ransom.</p>
+
+<p>We soon after took a small bark of ten tons, laden with
+<i>guana</i>, or cormorants dung, and having also some dried
+fish, which lay within a mile of Arica. By this time all the
+adjacent country was up in arms, and great numbers had come down
+to the coast, well mounted and armed, and seemingly well
+disciplined. To try their courage, I ordered the Mercury and
+launch to draw near the shore, as if we had really intended to
+land, though the landing-place here is altogether impracticable
+for European boats; and I also cannonaded the town briskly. Our
+balls made no execution, yet ploughed up the sand in front of the
+Spanish horse, throwing it all over them: But neither this, nor
+the approach of my small craft, made any impression, for they
+stood firm, and at least shewed the countenance of as good troops
+as could be wished. This much disappointed me, as it shewed my
+men that the Spaniards were far from being cowards, as they had
+been represented. As soon as it was dark, Gonzales came off to
+me, and I agreed to let him have back his ship and six negroes on
+receiving 1500 dollars, reserving right to take any thing out of
+her that might be useful to us; and at ten next night he brought
+me the agreed sum, being the weight of 1300 dollars in ingots of
+virgin silver, called <i>pinnas</i> by the Spaniards, and the
+rest in coined dollars. He also made great enquiry for English
+commodities, for which he offered high prices, complaining that
+the French only supplied them with paltry goods and mere trifles,
+for which they carried off vast sums. He added, that he supposed
+the English merchants were all asleep, or too rich, as they did
+not come near them: And, although their ports were not so open as
+in other parts of the world, they yet know how to manage matters
+tolerably well; and that their governors, being generally
+Europeans, who seldom remained above three years in the country,
+used any means to improve their time, and could easily be gained
+so as to act very obligingly. He said much more as to the
+blindness of the English, in suffering the French pedlars to
+carry on, uninterruptedly, the most considerable branch of
+traffic in the world. Before leaving me, he desired me to carry
+his ship two or three leagues out to sea, and then to turn her
+adrift, on purpose to deceive the governor and the king's
+officers; and, if I would meet him at <i>Hilo</i> (<i>Ilo</i>,)
+about twenty-five leagues to the north-westwards, he would
+purchase from me any coarse goods I had to dispose of, which
+might be done there with all imaginable secrecy. At this time
+also, the master of the small bark came off in a <i>balsa</i>.
+This is an odd sort of an embarkation, consisting of two large
+seal skins, separately blown up, like bladders, and made fast to
+pieces of wood. On this he brought off two jars of brandy and
+forty dollars; which, considering his mean appearance, was as
+much as I could expect. One part of his cargo was valuable, being
+a considerable quantity of excellent dried fish.</p>
+
+<p>The port of <i>Arica</i>, formerly so famous for the great
+quantities of silver shipped from thence, is now much diminished
+in its riches, and appears mostly a heap of ruins, except the
+church of St Mark, and two or three more, which still look
+tolerably well. What helps to give it a very desolate appearance
+is, that the houses near the sea are only covered with mats.
+Being situated on the sea-shore, in an open roadstead, it has no
+fortifications of any kind to defend or command the anchorage,
+the Spaniards thinking it sufficiently secured by the heavy surf,
+and the rocky bottom near the shore, which threaten inevitable
+destruction to any European boats, or other embarkation, except
+what is expressly contrived for the purpose, being the
+<i>balsas</i> already mentioned. To obstruct the landing of an
+enemy, the Spaniards had formerly a fort and entrenchments,
+flanking the storecreeks; but being built of unburnt bricks, it
+is now fallen to ruins. In 1680, when Dampier was here, being
+repulsed before the town, the English landed at the creek of
+<i>Chacota,</i> to the south of the head-land, whence they
+marched over the mountain <i>(Gordo)</i> to plunder Arica.
+Earthquakes also, which are frequent here, have at last ruined
+the town, and Arica is now no more than a little village of about
+150 families, most of them negroes, mulattoes, and Indians, with
+very few whites. On the 26th November, 1605,[266] the sea,
+violently agitated by an earthquake, suddenly overflowed, and
+broke down the greatest part of the town, and the ruins of its
+streets are to be seen at this day. What remains of Arica is not
+now liable to such an accident, being situated on a little rising
+ground at the foot of the head-land. Most of the houses are only
+constructed of a sort of fascines, made of flags or sedges, bound
+together, called <i>totora</i>, set up on end, crossed by canes
+and leather thongs; or are made of canes set on end, having the
+intervals filled with earth. The use of unburnt bricks is
+reserved for churches and the stateliest houses; and as no rain
+ever falls here, they are only covered with mats, so that the
+houses seem all in ruins when seen from the sea. The parish
+church, dedicated to St Mark, is handsome enough. There are also
+three religious houses, one a monastery of seven or eight
+<i>mercenarians</i>, a second is an hospital of the brothers of
+<i>St John of God</i>, and the third a monastery of Franciscans,
+who formerly had a house a short way from town, in the
+pleasantest part of the vale, near the sea.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 266: Perhaps this date ought to have been
+1705.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The vale of Arica is about a league wide next the sea, all
+barren ground except where the old town stood, which is divided
+into small fields of clover, some small plantations of
+sugar-canes, with olive-trees and cotton-trees intermixed, and
+several intervening marshes, full of the sedges of which they
+build their houses. Growing narrower about a league eastward at
+the village of <i>St Michael de Sapa</i>, they begin to cultivate
+the <i>agi</i>, or Guinea pepper, which culture extends over all
+the rest of the vale, in which there are several detached farms
+exclusively devoted to its culture. In that part of the vale,
+which is very narrow, and about six leagues long, they raise
+yearly to the value of above 80,000 crowns. The Spaniards of Peru
+are so much addicted to this spice, that they dress no meat
+without it, although so hot and biting that no one can endure it,
+unless accustomed to its use; and, as it cannot grow in the
+<i>Puna</i>, or mountainous country, many merchants come down
+every year, who carry away all the Guinea pepper that grows in
+the districts of <i>Arica, Sama, Taena, Locumba</i>, and others,
+ten leagues around, from all of which it is reckoned they export
+yearly to the value of 600,000 dollars, though sold cheap. It is
+hard to credit that such vast quantities should go from hence, as
+the country is so parched up, except the vales, that nothing
+green is to be seen. This wonderful fertility is produced by the
+dung of fowls, which is brought from <i>Iquique</i>, and which
+fertilizes the soil in a wonderful manner, making it produce four
+or five hundred for one of all sorts of grain, as wheat, maize,
+and so forth, but particularly of this <i>agi</i>, or Guinea
+pepper, when rightly managed. When the plants are sufficiently
+grown in the seed-bed to be fit for transplanting, they are set
+out in winding lines like the letter S, that the furrows for
+conveying the water may distribute it equally to the roots of the
+plants. They then lay about the root of each plant of Guinea
+pepper as much <i>guana</i>, or bird's dung formerly mentioned,
+as will lie in the hollow of the hand. When in blossom, they add
+a little more; and, lastly, when the pods are completely formed,
+they add a good handful more to each plant, always taking care to
+supply them with water, as it never rains in this country;
+otherwise, the salts contained in the manure, not being
+dissolved, would burn the plants, as has been found by
+experience. It is also for this reason that this manure is laid
+on at different times, as already explained, the necessity of
+which has been found by long use, and by the superior value of
+the crops thus produced.</p>
+
+<p>For the carriage of this <i>guana</i>, or fowl's dung, the
+people at Arica generally use that sort of little camels which
+the Indians of Bern call <i>Llamas</i>, the Chilese,
+<i>Chilihneque</i>, and the Spaniards, <i>Carneros de la
+tierra</i>, or native sheep. The heads of these animals are small
+in proportion to their bodies, and are somewhat in shape between
+the head of a horse and that of a sheep, the upper lips being
+cleft like that of a hare, through which they can spit to the
+distance of ten paces against any one who offends them, and if
+the spittle happens to fall on the face of a person, it causes a
+red itchy spot. Their necks are long, and concavely bent
+downwards, like that of a camel, which animal they greatly
+resemble, except in having no hunch on their backs, and in being
+much smaller. Their ordinary height is from four feet to four and
+a half; and their ordinary burden does not exceed an
+hundred-weight. They walk, holding up their heads with wonderful
+gravity, and at so regular a pace as no beating can quicken. At
+night it is impossible to make them move with their loads, for
+they lie down till these are taken off, and then go to graze.
+Their ordinary food is a sort of grass called <i>yeho</i>,
+somewhat like a small rush, but finer, and has a sharp point,
+with which all the mountains are covered exclusively. They eat
+little, and never drink, so that they are very easily maintained.
+They have cloven feet like sheep, and are used at the mines to
+carry ore to the mills; and, as soon as loaded, they set off
+without any guide to the place where they are usually unloaded.
+They have a sort of spur above the foot, which renders them
+sure-footed among the rocks, as it serves as a kind of hook to
+hold by. Their hair, or wool rather, is long, white, grey, and
+russet, in spots, and fine, but much inferior to that of the
+Vicunna, and has a strong and disagreeable scent.</p>
+
+<p>The <i>Vicunna</i> is shaped much like the Llama, but much
+smaller and lighter, their wool being extraordinarily fine and
+much valued. These animals are often hunted after the following
+manner: Many Indians gather together, and drive them into some
+narrow pass, across which they have previously extended cords
+about four feet from the ground, having bits of wool or cloth
+hanging to them at small distances. This so frightens them that
+they dare not pass, and gather together in a string, when the
+Indians kill them with stones tied to the ends of leather thongs.
+Should any <i>quanacos</i> happen to be among the flock, these
+leap over the cords, and are followed by all the <i>vicunnas</i>.
+These <i>quanacos</i> are larger and more corpulent, and are also
+called <i>viscachas</i>. There is yet another animal of this
+kind, called <i>alpagnes</i>, having wool of extraordinary
+fineness, but their legs are shorter, and their snouts contracted
+in such a manner as to give them some resemblance to the human
+countenance. The Indians make several uses of these creatures,
+some of which carry burdens of about an hundred-weight. Their
+wool serves to make stuffs, cords, and sacks. Their bones are
+used for the construction of weavers utensils; and their dung is
+employed as fuel for dressing meat, and warming their huts.</p>
+
+<p>Before the last war, a small fleet called the <i>armadilla</i>
+used to resort yearly to Arica, partly composed of kings ships,
+and partly those of private persons. By this fleet, European
+commodities were brought from Panama, together with quicksilver
+for the mines of <i>La Paz, Oruro La Plata,</i> or <i>Chuguizaca,
+Potosi</i>, and <i>Lipes</i>; and in return carried to Lima the
+king's fifth of the silver drawn from the mines. Since the
+galleons have ceased going to Porto-Bello, and the French have
+carried on the trade of supplying the coast of the South Sea with
+European commodities, Arica has been the most considerable mart
+of all this coast, and to which the merchants of the five
+above-mentioned rich, towns resort. It is true that the port of
+<i>Cobija</i> is nearer <i>Lipes</i> and <i>Potosi</i>; but being
+situated in a barren and desert country, where nothing can be
+procured for the subsistence of man or beast, the merchants chuse
+rather to go to Arica, though more distant, as they are sure to
+find at that place every thing they need. Besides, they find no
+great difficulty in bringing there their silver privately in a
+mass, and compounding with the corregidores or chief magistrates
+to avoid paying the royal fifth.</p>
+
+<p>On leaving Arica, we sailed for the road of Ilo, about 75
+miles to the N.W. where we arrived that same afternoon, and saw a
+large ship with three small ones at anchor. The great ship
+immediately hoisted French colours, being the <i>Wise Solomon</i>
+of 40 guns, commanded by Mons. Dumain, who was resolved to
+protect the vessels that were beside him, and to oppose my coming
+into the road. As it grew dark before I could get into the road,
+I sent my third lieutenant, Mr La Porte, a Frenchman, to inform
+Mr Dumain who we were: But my officer no sooner got on board than
+he was tumbled out again, the Frenchman calling him a renegado;
+and Mr Dumain sent me word he would sink me if I offered to
+anchor there. La Porte also told me, that to his knowledge the
+French ships often accepted Spanish commissions, when there were
+English cruizers on this coast, having great privileges in trade
+allowed them for this service; and he could plainly see that the
+French ship was double manned, by means of inhabitants from the
+town, who were partly French; and, as he supposed, would come to
+attack me as soon as the wind was off shore. While thus talking,
+the French ship fired several guns at us, as if to shew that they
+were ready, and meant shortly to be with us. At first, this
+bravado heated me not a little, and I had some design of turning
+the Mercury into a fire-ship, by the help of which I might have
+roasted this insolent Frenchman: But, having reflected on the
+situation of affairs at home, and fearing my attacking him might
+be deemed unjustifiable, notwithstanding his unwarranted conduct,
+I thought it best to stand out of the harbour.</p>
+
+<p>On the 12th February, the moiety of the money taken at Arica
+was divided among the company according to their shares. On the
+22d we found ourselves in the heights of <i>Calao,</i> the port
+of Lima; on which I furled all my sails, resolving to get away in
+the night; knowing, if we were discovered from thence, that we
+should certainly be pursued by some Spanish men of war, as there
+are always some in that port. On the 26th, the officers in the
+Mercury desired to be relieved, and I spoke to Captain Hately,
+whose turn it was to take the command of that bark. This
+gentleman had been long a prisoner among the Spaniards in this
+country, which he was well acquainted with, having travelled
+between Payta and Lima by land, on which occasion he had observed
+several rich towns, which made him conceive we might do something
+to purpose, by cruizing along the coast, as far as the island of
+Lobos, in lat. 7&deg; S. I approved of this, as it was probable
+we might meet some of the Panama ships, which always keep well in
+with the land, in order to have the benefit of the land-breezes.
+As the company of the Mercury seemed delighted with this project,
+I augmented their complement, giving them a month's provisions on
+board. I also lent Captain Hately my pinnace, mounted his bark
+with two of our quarter-deck guns, and gave him a copy of my
+commission, although it was very likely we should have frequent
+sight of the Mercury, between our present intended separation,
+and our intended rendezvous at the island of Lobos, not above
+sixty leagues from where we then were.</p>
+
+<p>When every thing was ready for their departure, Captain
+Betagh, whose turn it was to relieve the marine officer in the
+Mercury, being unwilling to go, went among our people with a
+terrified countenance, saying, that he and those with him in the
+Mercury were going to be sacrificed. Hearing this, I addressed my
+ship's company, telling them I could not conceive what this
+pestilent fellow meant by making such an uproar. I appealed to
+them all, if it had not been customary to relieve the officers in
+this manner, ever since we had this vessel in company, and asked
+them if ever they knew me select any man for going upon an
+enterprise, and had not, on the contrary, left it always to their
+own choice to go on any particular service out of the ship. I
+then desired to know who among them were of Betagh's opinion?
+Upon this, they all declared with one voice, that they had never
+entertained any such opinion; but, on the contrary, that I should
+always find them obedient to my commands. In the next place, I
+ordered the Mercury along side, and acquainted her crew with the
+speech Betagh had made in the Speedwell, and desired to know if
+any of them were apprehensive of being sold or sacrificed. At
+this they all set up a loud huzza, and requested they might go on
+the intended cruize in the Mercury. Accordingly Hately and Betagh
+went on board that bark, and put off from us, giving us three
+cheers, and stood right in for the land.</p>
+
+<p>It may be proper to take some notice of the proceedings of the
+Mercury after she left me, as I have been informed from some of
+themselves and some prisoners. The very next day they took a
+small bark laden with rice, chocolate, wheat, flour, and the
+like; and the day following, another. On the 4th day, they took a
+ship of near 200 tons, in which were 150,000 dollars. Flushed
+with this success, Betagh prevailed upon Hately, and most of the
+people in the Mercury, not to rejoin me, saying, they had now
+enough to appear like gentlemen as long as they lived, but it
+would be a mere nothing when the owner's part was taken out, and
+the rest divided into 500 shares. He therefore thought, since
+fortune had been so kind to them, they ought to make the best of
+their way to India, as they had sufficient provisions and all
+other requisites for the voyage, and Captain. Hately was well
+able to conduct them to some port in the East Indies. This plan
+was accordingly resolved on, and they fell to leeward of the
+place of rendezvous. But, weighing with himself the prodigious
+extent of the run, and its many hazards, and well knowing the
+treatment he might expect in India, if his treachery were
+discovered, Captain Hately became irresolute, and could not
+determine what was best to be done, so that he kept hovering on
+the coast. In the mean time, some of his crew went away in his
+boat to surrender themselves to the enemy, rather than be
+concerned in such a piratical undertaking. Betagh and his
+accomplices still kept Hately warm with liquor, and at length
+brought him to the resolution of leaving the South Sea. But they
+had no sooner clapped their helm a-weather for this purpose than
+they saw a sail standing towards them, which proved to be a
+Spanish man of war, which caught them, and spoilt their India
+voyage. The English prisoners were very indifferently used; but
+Betagh, being a Roman Catholic, and of a nation which the
+Spaniards are very fond of,[267] was treated with much respect,
+and was even made an officer.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 267: He seems to have been a Fleming, taken
+on board at Ostend, when the voyage was originally intended to
+have proceeded under an imperial commission.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In the morning of the 29th February, we saw a vessel at anchor
+in the road of <i>Guanchaeo</i>, and anchored alongside of her at
+eleven a.m. She was called the Carmasita, of about 100 tons,
+having only two Indian men and a boy on board, and her only
+loading was a small quantity of timber from Guayaquil. From these
+prisoners, I was informed of a rich ship being in the cove of
+Payta, having put in there to repair some damage she had
+sustained in a gale of wind. On this information I put
+immediately to sea, but in purchasing our anchor, the cable
+parted, and we lost our anchor. Our prize being new and likely to
+sail well, I took her with us, naming her the St David, designing
+to have made her a complete fire-ship as soon as we should be
+rejoined by the Mercury, in which there were materials for that
+purpose. Next day we looked into Cheripe, whence we chased a
+small vessel, which ran on shore to avoid us. Next morning, being
+near Lobos, our appointed rendezvous with the Mercury, I sent
+ashore my second lieutenant, Mr Randal, with two letters in
+separate bottles, directing Captain Hately to follow me to Payta,
+to which port I now made the best of my way, and arrived before
+it on the 18th of March, and sent Mr Randal to look into the
+cove, to bring me an account of what ships were there, that I
+might know what to think of the information we had received from
+our prisoners.</p>
+
+<p>On the 21st, I steered directly in for the cove of Payta,
+which I entered under French colours about four in the afternoon.
+We found only a small ship there, of which Mr Brooks took
+possession in the launch. About seven p.m. we came to anchor
+within three quarters of a mile of the town. The town seemed to
+be moderately large and populous, and there might probably be
+some land-forces for its defence, being the rendezvous of the
+ships which trade between Panama and Caloa; yet, as the taking of
+this place was treated in our instructions as a matter of
+importance, I consulted with my officers as to the best manner of
+making the attempt. Leaving the charge of the ship with the
+master, Mr Coldsea, and a few hands, to look after the negroes we
+had on board, and with orders to bring the ship nearer to the
+town, for the more expeditiously embarking any plunder we might
+make; I landed with forty-six men, well armed, about two in the
+morning of the 22d, and marched directly up to the great church
+without the slightest opposition, for we found the town entirely
+deserted by the inhabitants.</p>
+
+<p>At day-light, we observed large bodies of men on the hills, on
+both sides of the town, which we expected would have come down to
+attack us; but, on marching up towards them, they retired before
+us. Hitherto we had taken no prisoners, except an old Indian and
+a boy, who told us that Captain Clipperton had been here some
+time before, and had set some prisoners ashore, who assured them
+he meant not to do them any injury; but that the inhabitants, not
+thinking fit to trust him, had removed all their valuable effects
+into the mountains, among which were 400,000 dollars belonging to
+the king, which had been a fine prize for Clipperton, who
+certainly would have found no greater difficulty in taking this
+town than I did.</p>
+
+<p>I was constrained suddenly to halt, in consequence of hearing
+a gun fired from the ship, soon after which word was brought me
+that she was ashore. I hurried off as fast as I could, carrying
+with us the union-flag, which I had planted in the church-yard;
+and, as we were re-embarking, the enemy came running down the
+hill, hallooing after us. When I got on board, I found the ship
+entirely afloat, but within her own breadth of the rocks; and, as
+the water was quite smooth, we soon warped her off again. We then
+returned to the town, whence the Spaniards retired as peaceably
+as before. The remainder of the day was employed in shipping off
+what plunder we could find, which consisted of hogs, brown and
+white <i>calavances</i>, beans, Indian corn, wheat, flour, sugar,
+and as many <i>cocoa nuts</i>[268] as we were able to stow away,
+together with pans and other conveniences for preparing it, so
+that we were now amply provided with excellent breakfast meat for
+the rest of our voyage, and were, besides, full of other
+provisions.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 268: Cacao, chocolate-nuts, are almost
+certainly here meant.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>At eight in the morning of the 23d, a messenger came in to
+know what ransom I would take for the town and the ship, for
+which I demanded 10,000 dollars in twenty-four hours. At eight
+next morning, I had a letter from the governor, signifying, that
+as I wrote in French, neither he nor any one about him could
+understand its contents; but if I would write in Latin or
+Spanish, I might depend on a satisfactory answer. In the
+afternoon, I sent for one of our quarter-deck guns on shore,
+which was mounted at our guard, and was fired at sun-set,
+midnight, and break of day. The messenger returned in the morning
+of the 24th, accompanied by the master of the ship we had taken,
+and on hearing of their arrival, I went on shore to know what
+they had to propose. I understood from them that the governor was
+determined not to ransom the town, and did not care what become
+of it, provided the churches were not burnt. Though I never had
+any intention to destroy any place devoted to divine worship, I
+answered that I should have no regard to the churches, or
+anything else, when I set the town on fire; and I told the master
+of the vessel, he might expect to see her in flames immediately,
+if not ransomed without delay. This seemed to make a great
+impression, and he promised to return in three hours with the
+money. I then caused every thing to be taken out of the town that
+could be of any use to us, after which I ordered the town to be
+set on fire in several places; and, as the houses were old and
+dry, it instantly became a bonfire.</p>
+
+<p>In the midst of this conflagration, the people in the
+Speedwell made many signals for me to come on board, and kept
+continually firing towards the mouths of the harbour. As I could
+only guess the meaning of all this, I went on board as soon as
+possible in a canoe, having only three men along with me. Before
+I could reach the ship, I could distinctly see a large ship, with
+a Spanish flag at her fore-topmast-head, and her fore-topsail
+a-back. At this sight, two of my three men were ready to faint,
+and if it had not been for my boatswain, I doubt if I should have
+got on board; and if the Spanish admiral had acted with vigour,
+he might have taken the ship long enough before I got to her. It
+is bare justice to Mr Coldsea to say, that he fired so smartly on
+the Spaniard as to induce him to act with great precaution, which
+had been quite unnecessary if he had known our weakness. His
+caution, however, gave me the opportunity of getting on board:
+and, in the mean time, my officers were so unwilling to leave our
+guard-gun ashore, that they spent a great while in getting it
+into the boat, so that I was afraid the enemy would attack us
+before our people could get on board. The Spaniard was, however,
+in no hurry, thinking, no doubt, that we could not well escape
+him, yet was within pistol-shot of us before the last of our men
+got on board, being about fifty in all. We now cut our cable, but
+our ship fell round the wrong way, so that I had just room enough
+to fall clear of the enemy. Being now close together, the
+formidable appearance of the enemy struck an universal damp on
+the spirits of my people; some of whom, in coming off from the
+shore, were for jumping into the water and swimming on shore,
+which a few actually did.</p>
+
+<p>The enemy was a fine European-built ship, of 50 guns, and the
+disproportion was so great between us, that there seemed no hopes
+of escaping, as we were under his lee. I endeavoured to get into
+shoal water, but he becalmed me with his sails, and confined us
+for the best part of an hour, during which he handled us very
+roughly with his cannon, making very little use of his
+small-arms, never allowing us a moment's ease, but as soon as his
+broadside was ready, he gave his ship the starboard helm,
+bringing as many of his guns to bear as possible, and at the same
+time kept me from the wind. We returned his fire as briskly as we
+could; but, in our precipitate retreat from the town, most of our
+small arms were wetted, so that it was long before they were of
+any use. During this action, there was a strange contusion on
+shore, where the people had flocked down from the hills to
+extinguish the fire in Payta, in which some of them were busily
+employed, while others stood on the shore, spectators of our
+engagement. I was long in despair of getting away from the
+Spaniard, expecting nothing less than to be torn in pieces by his
+superior fire, unless we could have an opportunity of trying our
+heels with him while our masts remained standing. I expected
+every minute that he would board us, and hearing a hallooing
+among them, and seeing their forecastle full of men, I concluded
+that they had come to this resolution; but soon saw that it
+proceeded from our ensign being shot down, on which I made
+another be displayed in the mizen-shrouds, on sight of which they
+lay snug as before, keeping close upon our quarter. Intending at
+length to do our business at once, they clapped their helm hard
+a-starboard, in order to bring their whole broadside to bear, but
+their fire had little effect, and it muzzled themselves, which
+gave us an opportunity to get away from them.</p>
+
+<p>This certainly was a lucky escape, after an engagement of
+three glasses with an enemy so much our superior; for he had 56
+guns and 450 men, while we had only 20 guns mounted and only 73
+men, of whom 11 were negroes and two Indians. He had farther the
+vast advantage over us of being in perfect readiness, while we
+were in the utmost confusion; and in the middle of the
+engagement, a third of my people, instead of fighting, were hard
+at work in preparing for an obstinate resistance; particularly
+the carpenter and his crew, who were busy in making port-holes
+for stern-chase guns, which, as it happened, we made no use of.
+Yet were we not unhurt, as the loss of my boat and anchor were
+irreparable, and may be said to have been the cause of that scene
+of trouble which fell upon us soon after; as we had now only one
+anchor remaining, that lost at Payta being the third, and we had
+not now a boat of any kind. I have since learnt that some of our
+shots in the engagement were well directed, and that we killed
+and wounded several of the enemy.</p>
+
+<p>Having thus got away from the <i>Peregrine</i>, I slipped off
+in the evening with much ado from the Brilliant, her consort, on
+board of which Betagh now was, and even desired to be the first
+to board me. I was now in a very uncomfortable situation, not
+having the smallest hope of meeting with the Success; and I had
+learned at Payta, that the Spaniards had laid on an embargo for
+six months, so that we had nothing to expect in the way of
+prizes; and, having seen our prize taken, we had reason to expect
+that all our designs were discovered by the enemy. Having now
+only one anchor and no boat, it is not to be wondered that I gave
+up all idea of making an attempt on Guayaquil, which I at first
+proposed, having intelligence that there were several ships of
+considerable value in that river, in consequence of the embargo,
+which might have done me some service, if I had been better
+provided. In this situation, it was resolved, in a committee of
+my officers, to return to the southwards, or to windward, as the
+Spaniards must necessarily continue their trade with Chili, in
+spite of their embargo; after which we proposed to water at Juan
+Fernandez, and then to cruize on the coast of Conception,
+Valparaiso, and Coquimbo, for the coasting traders, among whom we
+might supply ourselves with anchors, cables, and boats, and a
+vessel to fit out as a fire-ship. I also proposed, before leaving
+the coast of Chili, to make an attempt on La Serena or Coquimbo.
+After all this, I proposed to proceed for the coast of Mexico,
+and thence to the <i>Tres Marias</i> and California, as the most
+likely means of meeting with the Success; besides which, the
+former of these places might be commodious for salting turtle, to
+serve as sea stores, and the latter for laying in a stock of wood
+and water; after which we might lie in the track of the Manilla
+ship. But if we could not succeed in that attempt, we might then
+satisfy ourselves with cruizing for the Peruvian ships, which
+bring silver to Acapulco for purchasing the Indian and Chinese
+commodities.</p>
+
+<p>My plan being approved, we proceeded to windward, having
+secured our masts and bent a new set of sails on the 26th, after
+which we stood to the southward, expecting to make our passage in
+about five weeks. The carpenters were now set to work to build a
+new boat that we might have the means of watering our ship. On
+the 31st, while working the pumps, the water not only came in in
+greater quantity than usual, but was as black as ink, which made
+me suspect some water had got at our powder; and on going into
+the powder-room, I found the water rushing in like a little
+sluice, which had already spoiled the greatest part of our
+powder, only six barrels remaining uninjured, which I immediately
+had stowed away in the bread-room. It pleased God that we now had
+fair weather, as otherwise we might have had much difficulty to
+keep our ship afloat. We found the leak on the larboard side,
+under the lower cheek of the head, where a shot had lodged and
+afterwards dropt out, leaving room for a stream of water. We
+accordingly brought down our ship by the stern, and secured the
+leak effectually. At this time we had an abundant stock of
+provisions. Each man had a quart of chocolate and three ounces of
+rusk for breakfast; and had fresh meat or fresh fish every day
+for dinner, having plenty of the latter about the ship, so that
+we could almost always make our choice between dolphin and
+albicore.</p>
+
+<p>On the 6th May we made the westermost of the islands of Juan
+Fernandez, otherwise called <i>Mas a Fuero</i>, distant twelve
+leagues N.E. by N. and the day after, our carpenters had
+completed our new boat, which could carry three hogsheads. On the
+12th we saw the great island of Juan Fernandez, bearing E. 1/2 S.
+being in latitude, by observation, 33&deg; 40' S. a joyful sight
+at the time, though so unfortunate to us in the sequel. We plied
+off and on till the 21st, but could not get as much water on
+board daily in that time as supplied our daily expenditure, owing
+to the smallness of our boat, which made it necessary for us to
+anchor in the roads till that purpose was accomplished, in order
+for which I prepared to raft twenty tons of casks on shore. We
+worked in and anchored in forty fathoms, carrying a warp on
+shore, which we fastened to the rocks, of three hawsers and a
+half in length, which both steadied the ship, and enabled us to
+haul our cask-raft ashore and aboard. By this means we were ready
+to go to sea again next morning, having filled all our water
+casks; but had no opportunity of so doing for four days, during
+which we continued to anchor in the same manner.</p>
+
+<p>On the 25th May, a hard gale came upon us from seaward,
+bringing with it a great tumbling swell, by which at length our
+cable parted. This was a dismal accident, as we had no means
+whatever by which to avoid the prospect of immediate destruction.
+But Providence interposed in our behalf: For had we struck only a
+cable's length to the east or west of where we did, we must all
+have inevitably perished. When our ill-fated ship touched the
+rock, we had all to hold fast by some part of the ship or
+rigging, otherwise the violence of her shock in striking must
+have tossed us all into the sea. Our three masts went all away
+together by the board. In short, words are wanting to express the
+wretched condition in which we now were, or our astonishment at
+our unexpected and unfortunate shipwreck.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION III.</p>
+
+<p><i>Residence on the Island of Juan Fernandez.</i></p>
+
+<p>Having all got on shore in the evening, my officers gathered
+around me to bear me company, and to devise measures for
+procuring necessaries out of the wreck; and having lighted a
+fire, wrapped themselves up in what they could get, and slept
+very soundly, notwithstanding the coldness of the weather, and
+our hopeless situation. I would have set the people to work that
+very night, in endeavouring to save what we could from the wreck,
+but they were so dispersed that we could not gather them
+together, and all opportunity was lost of saving any thing,
+except some of our fire-arms. But while the people were employed
+in building tents, and making other preparations for their
+residence on the island, the wreck was entirely destroyed, and
+every thing in her was lost, except one cask of beef and one of
+<i>farina de pao</i>, which were washed on shore. Thus all our
+provisions were gone, and every thing else that might have been
+useful. I had saved 1100 dollars belonging to the owners, which
+happened to be in my chest in the great cabin, all the rest of
+their treasure being in the bottom of the bread-room for
+security, which consequently could not be come at.</p>
+
+<p>I now took some pains to find out a convenient place in which
+to set up my tent, and at length found a commodious spot of
+ground not half a mile from the sea, having a fine stream of
+water on each side, with trees close at hand for firing, and
+building our huts. The people settled around me as well as they
+could, and as the cold season was coming on, some thatched their
+huts, while others covered theirs with the skins of seals and
+sea-lions. Others again satisfied themselves with water-butts, in
+which they slept under cover of trees. Having thus secured
+ourselves from the weather, we used to pass our time in the
+evenings around a great fire before my tent, where my officers
+usually assembled, employing themselves in roasting cray-fish in
+the embers; sometimes bewailing our unhappy fate, and sinking
+into despondency; and at other times feeding ourselves with hopes
+that something might yet be done to set us again afloat. On this
+subject I first consulted with the carpenter, who answered, that
+he could not make bricks without straw, and then walked from me
+in a surly humour. From him I went to the armourer, and asked
+what he could do for us in his way that might contribute to build
+a small vessel. To this he answered, that he hoped he could do
+all the iron work, as he had fortunately saved his bellows from
+the wreck, with four or five <i>spadoes</i> or Spanish swords,
+which would afford him steel, and there could be no want of iron
+along shore; besides, that we should doubtless find many useful
+things when we came to work in good earnest. He desired
+therefore, that I would get some charcoal made for him, while he
+set up his forge.</p>
+
+<p>Upon this encouragement, I called all hands together, and
+explained to them the great probability there was of our being
+able to build a vessel sufficient to transport us from this
+island; but that it would be a laborious task, and must require
+their united best endeavours. To this they all consented, and
+promised to work with great diligence, begging me to give them
+directions how to proceed. I then ordered the men who had axes on
+shore, before the wreck, to cut wood for making charcoal, while
+the rest went down to the wreck to get the boltsprit ashore, of
+which I proposed to make the keel of our intended vessel; and I
+prevailed on the carpenter to go with me, to fix upon the
+properest place for building. The people found a great many
+useful materials about the wreck; and among the rest the topmast,
+which had been washed on shore, and was of the greatest
+importance.</p>
+
+<p>We laid the blocks for building upon on the 8th June, and had
+the boltsprit ready at hand to lay down as the keel; when the
+carpenter turned short round upon me, and swore an oath that he
+would not strike another stroke on the work, for he would be
+slave to nobody, and thought himself now on a footing with
+myself. I was at first angry, but came at length to an agreement
+with him, to give him a four-pistole piece as soon as the stern
+and stern-posts were up, and 100 dollars when the bark was
+finished, and the money to be committed to the keeping of any one
+he chose to name. This being settled, he went to work upon the
+keel, which was to be thirty feet long; the breadth of our bark,
+by the beam, sixteen feet, and her hold seven feet deep. In two
+months we made a tolerable shew, owing in a great measure to the
+ingenuity of Poppleston, our armourer, who never lost a minute in
+working with his hands, or contriving in his head. He made us a
+small double-headed maul, hammers, chisels, and a sort of
+gimblets or wimbles, which performed very well. He even made a
+bullet-mould, and an instrument to bore cartouch-boxes, which he
+made from the trucks of our gun-carriages, covering them with
+seal-skins, and contrived to make them not only convenient, but
+neat. He contrived to execute any iron-work wanted by the
+carpenter, and even finished a large serviceable boat, of which
+we stood much in need.</p>
+
+<p>In the beginning of this great work the people behaved
+themselves very well, half of them working regularly one day, and
+the other half the next, seeming every day to grow easier under
+our misfortunes. They treated me with as much respect as I could
+wish, and even in a body thanked me for the prospect of their
+deliverance; while I never failed to encourage them by telling
+them stories of the great things that had been accomplished by
+the united efforts of men in similar distresses. I always pressed
+them to stick close to the work, that we might get our bark ready
+in time; and told them that we fortunately had three of the best
+ports in Chili within 120 leagues of us. This inspired them with
+life and vigour, and they often declared that they would exert
+their utmost endeavours to finish her with all expedition. At
+last, however, we became a prey to faction, so that it was a
+miracle we ever got off from this place. For, after completing
+the most laborious part of the work, they entirely neglected it;
+and many of my officers, deserting my society, herded with the
+meanest of the ship's company. I was now convinced in a suspicion
+I had long entertained, that some black design was in embryo; for
+when I met any of my officers, and asked what they were about,
+and the reason of their acting so contrary to their duty, by
+diverting the people from their work, some used even to tell me
+they knew not whether they would leave the island or not, when my
+bundle of sticks was ready; that they cared not how matters went,
+for they could shift for themselves as well as the rest. When I
+spoke with the common men, some were surly, and others said they
+would be slaves no longer, but would do as the rest did. In the
+midst of these confusions, I ordered my son to secure my
+commission in some dry place among the woods or rocks,
+remembering how Captain Dampier had been served in these
+seas.</p>
+
+<p>At length, I one afternoon missed all the people, except Mr
+Adamson the surgeon, Mr Hendric the agent, my son, and Mr Dodd,
+lieutenant of marines, which last feigned lunacy, for some reason
+best known to himself. I learnt at night that they had been all
+day assembled at the great tree, in deep consultation, and had
+framed a new set of regulations and articles, by which the owners
+in England were excluded from any share in what we might take for
+the future, divested me of all authority as captain, and
+regulated themselves according to the <i>Jamaica
+discipline</i>.[269] Even the chief officers, among the rest, had
+concurred in electing one Morphew to be their champion and
+speaker, who addressed the assembly to the following purport:
+"That they were now their own masters, and servants to none: and
+as Mr Shelvocke, their former captain, took upon him still to
+command, he ought to be informed, that whoever was now to be
+their commander, must be so through their own courtesy. However,
+that Mr Shelvocke might have the first offer of the command, if
+the majority thought fit, but not otherwise. That Mr Shelvocke
+carried himself too lofty and arbitrarily for the command of a
+privateer, and ought to have continued in men-of-war, where the
+people were obliged to bear all hardships quietly, whether right
+or wrong."</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 269: This expression is not explained, but
+seems to have been, according to the model of the Buccaneers, all
+prizes to be divided among the captors.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Some persons present, who had a regard for me, represented,
+"That they had never seen or known me treat any one unjustly or
+severely; and that however strict I might be, they had no one
+else to depend upon, and that they ought all to consider how many
+difficulties I had already brought them through. That, although
+they were not now in the hands of our enemies, no one could tell
+how soon others might come upon them: and, if they ever looked to
+get back to England, there was no other way but by going round
+the world, for which there was no one capable of undertaking the
+charge except Captain Shelvocke. They ought also to consider his
+commission, and the respect due to him on that account; besides
+the protection that would afford them, should they happen to fall
+into the hands of the Spaniards."</p>
+
+<p>This remonstrance had some effect on the common men, but they
+were diverted from the thoughts of returning to obedience by no
+less a person than my first lieutenant, Mr Brooks, who had made
+Morphew his confidant even on board ship: for having served
+before the mast before he was made my lieutenant, he had
+contracted a liking for forecastle conversation. They were also
+supported and encouraged by Mr Randal, my second lieutenant, who
+was brother-in-law to Brooks, and by others. The first remarkable
+outrage committed by this gang of levellers was to Mr La Porte,
+my third lieutenant, whom Morphew knocked down on the beach,
+while Brooks stood by and witnessed this brutality. This affair
+came soon after to be fully explained; for the men framed a new
+set of articles, putting themselves upon the Jamaica discipline,
+and declaring, as I had been their captain, I might be so still;
+and that they were willing to allow me six shares, as a mark of
+their regard, though I ought only to have four, according to the
+Jamaica articles. Most of the officers were reduced, according to
+the same plan: for instance, Mr La Porte, Mr Dodu, and Mr Hendrie
+were declared midshipmen; and as the superior officers consented
+to this scheme, it could not be prevented from being carried into
+execution. Mr Coldsea the master was the only person who
+preserved a kind of neutrality, neither promoting nor opposing
+their designs. In this distressed emergency, I thought it lawful,
+and even necessary, to submit to their demands, and therefore
+signed their articles, in conjunction with the rest of my
+officers.</p>
+
+<p>I now thought to have got them to work on our bark; but,
+instead of listening to me, they demanded what little money I had
+saved belonging to the owners, with which I was obliged to
+comply, being 750 dollars in virgin silver, a silver dish
+weighing 75 ounces, and 250 dollars in coin. Even after this I
+was treated worse than ever, having only the refuse of the fish
+allowed me, after they had chosen the best, being glad, after a
+hard day's work, to dine upon seal; while Morphew and his
+associates feasted on the best fish the sea afforded. They next
+took the arms out of my custody, of which hitherto I had taken
+great care; because, having only one flint to each musket, and
+very little ammunition, I foresaw that we would be undone if this
+were wasted. I represented all this to them, yet they squandered
+away the small remainder of powder and bullets in killing cats,
+or any thing else they could get to fire at.--This is a concise
+history of our transactions in the island of Juan Fernandez, from
+the 24th May to the 15th August, during which no person could
+suffer more than I did, or have a more uncomfortable
+prospect.</p>
+
+<p>On the 15th of August we were put into great confusion by the
+sight of a large ship, on which, before she crossed the bay, I
+ordered all the fires to be put out, and the negroes and Indians
+to be confined, lest the ship might be becalmed under the land,
+and any of them should attempt to swim off to her, as I conceived
+she might possibly be a man-of-war come to seek us, having
+received advice of our shipwreck; yet I knew, if she discovered
+what we were about, we should soon have the whole force of the
+kingdom of Chili upon us. Our apprehensions were soon over, as
+the ship bore away large, and kept at too great a distance to see
+any thing of us. On this occasion I got most of our people under
+arms, and was glad to see them in some measure obedient to
+command; telling them that I was pleased to see their arms in
+such good order, I was impertinently answered, that this was for
+their own sakes. Before they dispersed, I represented to them the
+necessity of using their best endeavour to get our bark afloat,
+instead of caballing against their captain, which, in the end,
+might be very prejudicial to them all; as, if discovered by the
+Spaniards, we might expect to be all made slaves in the mines. I
+told them we still had a great deal of work to do, and had never
+above ten of the most considerate to labour, and seldom above six
+or seven; while they knew I was always one of the number, to shew
+a good example. But the more I tried to reclaim them, the more
+obstinately they ran into confusion, interrupting every thing
+that tended to do them service.</p>
+
+<p>Next day they divided among themselves on a new scheme, being
+no less than to burn our bark, and to build two large shallops,
+or pinnaces, in lieu of her. Morphew and his friend Brooks were
+the favourers of this new design, aiming doubtless at a
+separation by this means: but as this must be determined by a
+majority, they assembled to debate this matter in front of my
+tent, carrying on their deliberations with much clamour on both
+sides. In order to put them off this ruinous plan, I represented
+to them the impracticability of building the boats, as our tools
+and other materials were already worn out and expended. The
+workmen, and a considerable majority of the rest, sided with me:
+but at night the carpenter sent me word, if I did not pay him the
+money agreed upon at first, I should never see his face again;
+wherefore, although his terms had not been implemented, I was
+obliged to raise the money for him. The most provoking part of
+this proposal about the boats was, that the fellows who chiefly
+promoted it were those who had never done an hour's work since we
+were cast away. Not gaining this point, they openly declared I
+should not be their captain, and that none but Brooks should
+command them, which was probably what that young man aspired to
+from the commencement of the mutiny; and had undoubtedly
+succeeded, had it not been for the people in the boatswain's
+tent, who still refused their consent to my being left on the
+island, though fond of thinking themselves their own masters, and
+of refusing to submit to regular command.</p>
+
+<p>To complete our confusion, there arose a third party, who
+resolved to have nothing to do with the rest, proposing to remain
+on the island. There were twelve of these, who separated from the
+rest, and never made their appearance except at night, when they
+used to come about the tents to steal powder, lead, and axes, and
+any thing else they could lay their hands, on. But in a little
+time I found means to manage them, and took from them all their
+arms, ammunition, axes, and other plunder, and threatened to have
+them treated as enemies, if they came within musket-shot of our
+tents. These divisions so weakened the whole body, that they
+began to listen to me, so that I got most of them into a working
+humour. Even Brooks came to me with a feigned submission,
+desiring to eat with me again, yet in the main did not lessen his
+esteem for Morphew. His dissimulation, however, proved of
+infinite service in contributing to the finishing of our bark,
+which required the united efforts of all our heads and hands.
+For, when we came to plank the bottom, we had very vexatious
+difficulties to encounter, as our only plank consisted in pieces
+from the deck of our wreck, which was so dry and stubborn that
+fire and water had hardly any effect in making it pliable, as it
+rent, split, and flew in pieces like glass; so that I now began
+to fear that all our labour was in vain, and we must quietly wait
+to be taken off by some Spanish ship, and be led quietly to
+prison after all our troubles.</p>
+
+<p>By constant labour, and using a variety of contrivances, we at
+length finished our bark, but in such a manner that I may safely
+assert, a similar bottom never before swam on the sea. Our boat
+also was launched on the 9th September; and our bark being now in
+a fair way of being completed, it remained to consider what
+provisions we could get to support us during our voyage, all our
+stock being one cask of beef, five or six bushels of <i>farina de
+poa</i>, or cassada flour, and four or five live hogs. I made
+several experiments to preserve both fish and seal, but found
+that this could not be done without salt. At length we fell upon
+a contrivance for curing conger eels, by splitting them, taking
+out their backbones, dipping them in sea-water, and then drying
+them in a great smoke; but as no other fish could be cured in a
+similar manner, our fishers were directed to catch as many
+congers as they could. At this time several of our people who had
+not hitherto done any work, began to repent of their folly, as
+they grew weary of living on this island, and now offered their
+services to go a-fishing, making some idle excuses for being so
+long idle, asking my pardon, and promising not to lose a moment
+in future. The new boat was sent to try her fortune, and returned
+at night with a great parcel of various kinds of fish, among
+which were about 200 congers, which was a good beginning, and
+which were divided among the tents to be cured. Our boat was
+carefully hauled on shore every night, and strictly guarded, to
+prevent any of our people from stealing her, and making their
+escape. By her means also, Mr Brooks, our only diver, tried what
+could be recovered from that part of the wreck which had not been
+drifted on shore; but could only weigh one small gun, and two
+pieces of a large church candlestick, belonging to our
+owners.</p>
+
+<p>Our boat was daily employed in fishing, for which purpose the
+armourer supplied hooks; and our men made abundance of lines of
+twisted ribbons, a great quantity of which had been driven on
+shore. Others of the men were employed in making twine stuff for
+rigging, patching up old canvass for sails, and a variety of
+other necessary contrivances to enable us to put to sea; and our
+cooper put our casks in order; and at length we set up our masts,
+which were tolerably well rigged, and our bark made a decent
+figure. My spirits were however much damped, by the extreme
+difficulty of caulking her tight, as her seams were bad, our
+tools wretched, and our artists very indifferent. When this was
+done, so as we could, our bark was put into the water to try her
+fitness, on which there was an outcry of, A sieve! a sieve! Every
+one now seemed melancholy and dispirited, insomuch that I was
+afraid they would use no farther means; but in a little time, by
+incessant labour, we brought her into a tolerable condition.
+Having repaired the ship's pumps, and fitted them to the bark,
+the people exclaimed that this was only a poor dependence; but I
+exhorted them to have patience, and continue their assistance in
+doing every thing that could be thought of for her security. The
+cooper also made a set of buckets, one for every man, to serve to
+bale her, in case of necessity. Next spring-tide, which was on
+the 5th October, 1720, we put her again into the water, naming
+her the <i>Recovery</i>, when she answered tolerably well, when
+we resolved to run the hazard of going to sea in her, and made
+all possible dispatch in getting our things on board. Yet, after
+all, a dozen of our people chose to remain on shore, together
+with as many negroes and Indians.</p>
+
+<p>Our sea-stock, besides the small quantity of beef and cassada
+flour formerly mentioned, consisted of 2300 eels cured in smoke,
+weighing one with another about a pound each, together with about
+sixty gallons of seal-oil, in which to fry them. On our first
+landing, as the weather was then too coarse for fishing, we had
+to live on seals, the entrails of which are tolerable food; but
+the constant and prodigious slaughter we made among them,
+frightened them from our side of the island. Some of the people
+eat cats, which I could not bring myself to, and declared they
+were sweet nourishing food. When the weather allowed us to fish,
+we were delivered from these hardships; but some of our
+mischievous crew set the boat a-drift, so that she was lost:
+after which we contrived wicker boats, covered with sea-lions
+skins, which did well enough near shore, but we durst not venture
+in them out into the bay, and consequently were worse provided
+with fish than we might otherwise have been. We fried our fish in
+seal-oil, and eat it without bread or salt, or any other relish,
+except some wild sorrel. Our habitations were very wretched,
+being only covered by boughs of trees, with the skins of seals
+and sea-lions, which were often torn off in the night, by sudden
+flaws of wind from the mountains.</p>
+
+<p>The island of Juan Fernandez is in lat 33&deg; 40' S. and
+long. 79&deg; W. being at the distance of about 150 marine
+leagues, or 7&deg; 30' from the coast of Chili. It is about
+fifteen English miles long from E. to W. and five miles at the
+broadest, from N to S. entirely composed of mountains and
+valleys, so that there is no walking a quarter of a mile on a
+flat. The anchoring place is on the north side of the island, and
+is distinguished by a little mountain, with a high peak on each
+side. It is not safe to anchor in less than forty fathoms, and
+even there, ships are very much exposed to sharp gales from the
+north, which blow frequently. There cannot well be a more
+unpleasant place to anchor in, as the bay is surrounded by high
+mountains, and is subject to alternate dead calms and sudden
+stormy gusts of wind. This island enjoys a fine wholesome air,
+insomuch that out of seventy of us, who remained here five months
+and eleven days, not one among us had an hour's sickness, though
+we fed upon such foul diet, without bread or salt; so that we had
+no complaints among us, except an incessant craving appetite, and
+the want of our former strength and vigour. As for myself, from
+being corpulent, and almost crippled by the gout, I lost much of
+my flesh, but became one of the strongest and most active men on
+the island, walking much about, working hard, and never in the
+least afflicted with that distemper. The soil is fertile, and
+abounds with many large and beautiful trees, most of them
+aromatic. The names of such as we knew were the <i>Pimento</i>,
+which bears a leaf like a myrtle, but somewhat larger, with a
+blue blossom, the trunks being short and thick, and the heads
+bushy and round, as if trained by art. There is another tree,
+much larger, which I think resembles that which produces the
+jesuit bark. There are plains on the tops of some of the
+mountains, on which are groves of the <i>Indian laurel</i>,
+mentioned by Frezier in his description of Chili. These have a
+straight slender body, from which sprout small irregular branches
+all the way from the root to the top, bearing leaves like the
+laurel, but smaller. <i>Palm-trees</i> are found in most parts of
+the island, growing in smooth joints, like canes, some thirty and
+some forty feet high. Their heads resemble the cocoa-nut tree,
+except that their leaves are of a paler green, and bear large
+bunches of red berries, bigger than sloes, which taste like haws,
+and have stones as large as those of heart-cherries. That which
+we call the <i>palm-cabbage</i> is the very substance of the head
+of the tree; which being cut off and divested of its great
+spreading leaves, and all that is hard and tough, consists of a
+white and tender young shoot or head, having its leaves and
+berries perfectly formed, and ready to replace the old one. When
+in search of these, we were forced to cut down a lofty tree for
+each individual cabbage.</p>
+
+<p>One good property of the woods which cover this island is,
+that they are every where of easy access, as there is no
+undergrowth, except in some of the deepest valleys, where the
+fern grows exceedingly high, and of which there are very large
+trees, with trunks of considerable solidity.[270] Some of the
+English who had been formerly here, had sowed turnips, which have
+spread much, as have also two or three plantations of small
+pompions; but my men never had patience to let any of these come
+to maturity. We found also plenty of water-cresses and wild
+sorrel. Some of the hills are remarkable for a fine red earth,
+which I take to be the same with that of which the inhabitants of
+Chili make their earthenware, which is almost as beautiful as the
+red porcelain of China. The northern part of the island is well
+watered by a great many streams which flow down the narrow
+valleys; and we found the water to keep well at sea, and to be as
+good as any in the world. Down the western peak, contiguous to
+the Table Mountain, there fall two cascades from a perpendicular
+height of not less than 500 feet. These are close together, and
+about 12 feet broad. What with the rapid descent of these
+streams, and the numerous palm-trees growing close beside them,
+adorned with vast clusters of red berries, the prospect is really
+beautiful. We should have had no want of goats, could we have
+conveniently followed them in the mountains. The Spaniards,
+before they settled in Chili, left a breed of goats here, and
+have since endeavoured to destroy them, by leaving a breed of
+dogs, but without effect. Cats are also very numerous, exactly
+resembling our household cats in size and colour; and those of
+our men who eat of them, assured me they found more substantial
+relief from one meal of their flesh, than from four or five of
+seal or fish; and, to their great satisfaction, we had a small
+bitch, which, could catch almost any number they wanted in an
+hour. There are not many sorts of birds; but the sea on the coast
+abounds with a greater variety of fish than almost any place I
+was ever in.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 270: These must have been some species of
+palm, having palmatad leaves resembling ferns.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Seals and sea-lions also abound; called <i>lobos de la mar</i>
+by the Spaniards, from their resemblance to wolves. They have a
+fine iron-grey fur, and when full grown are as big as a large
+mastiff. They are naturally surly, and snarl at the approach of
+any one. Instead of tails, they have two fins behind, with which
+they make shift to get on much faster than the sea-lions, which
+are large unwieldy creatures, and prodigiously full of oil.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION IV.</p>
+
+<p><i>Farther Proceedings in the South Sea, after leaving Juan
+Fernandez.</i></p>
+
+<p>We departed from Juan Fernandez on the evening of the 6th
+October, having nothing to subsist upon except the smoked
+congers, one of which was allowed to each man for twenty-four
+hours; together with one cask of beef, four live hogs, which had
+fed all the time we were ashore on the putrid carcases of seals,
+and three or four bushels of cassada meal. We were upwards of
+forty men, crowded together, and lying on the bundles of eels,
+with no means of keeping ourselves clean, so that all our senses
+were offended as greatly as possible. The only way we had of
+procuring water, was by sucking it from the cask with a
+gun-barrel, used promiscuously by every one. The little unsavoury
+morsels we daily eat, created incessant quarrels, every one
+contending for the frying-pan; and our only convenience for a
+fire, was a tub half filled with earth, which made cooking so
+tedious, that we had the continual noise of frying from morning
+to night. I proposed that we should stand for the Bay of
+Conception, as being the nearest to us; and we were hard put to
+it every day, while the sea-breeze continued; for, not having
+above sixteen inches free board, and our bark tumbling
+prodigiously, the water ran over us perpetually; and having only
+a grating deck, and no tarpaulin to cover it but the top-sail of
+our bark, our pomps were barely sufficient to keep us free.</p>
+
+<p>At four in the morning of the 10th, we fell in with a large
+ship, and I could see by moon-light that she was Europe-built.
+Our case being desperate, we stood towards her, and being rigged
+after the fashion of the South Seas, they did not regard us till
+day-light. Not being then quite up with her, they suspected us by
+the brownness of our canvas, wore ship, hauled close upon the
+wind, fired a gun, and crowded sail away from us, leaving us at a
+great rate. It fell calm two hours after, when we had recourse to
+our oars, and neared her with tolerable speed. In the mean time,
+we overhauled our arms, which we found in bad condition, a third
+of them wanting flints, and we had only three cutlasses, so that
+we were by no means prepared for boarding, which yet was the only
+means we had of taking the ship. We had only one small cannon,
+which we could not mount, and were therefore obliged to fire it
+as it lay along the deck; and we had only two round shot, a few
+chain-bolts, the clapper of the Speedwell's bell, and some bags
+of stones. We came up with her in four hours; but I now saw that
+she had guns and pattereroes, with a considerable number of men,
+whose arms glittered in the sun. The enemy defied us to board
+them, and at the same time gave us a volley of great and small
+shot, which killed our gunner, and almost brought our foremast by
+the board. This unexpected reception staggered many of my people,
+who before seemed most forward, so that they lay on their oars
+for some time, though I urged them to keep their way. Recovering
+again, we rowed quite up to them, and continued to engage till
+all our small shot was expended, which obliged us to fall astern
+to make some slugs, and in this manner we made three attacks
+without success. All night we were busied in making slugs, and
+provided a large quantity before morning, when we came to the
+determined resolution either to carry her by boarding, or to
+submit to her. At day-break, I accordingly ordered twenty men in
+our yawl to lay her athwart hawse, while I proposed to board her
+from the bark; but, just as we were on the point of making the
+attempt, a gale sprung up, and she went away from us. We learnt
+afterwards that she was the <i>Margaretta</i>, having formerly
+been a privateer from St Malo, mounting forty guns. In the
+several skirmishes, we had none killed, except Gilbert Henderson
+our gunner. Three were wounded, Mr Brooks being shot through the
+thigh, Mr Coldsea in the groin, and one of the crew in the small
+of the back. Mr Coldsea lingered in a miserable condition for
+nine or ten months, but at length recovered.</p>
+
+<p>We were now in a worse condition than ever, and the sea being
+too rough for our uncomfortable vessel, I proposed to stand to
+the north to get into fairer weather, but to take Coquimbo in our
+way, to try what might be done there. This was agreed to; but the
+very morning in which we expected to have got into Coquimbo, a
+hard gale of wind sprung up, which lasted four days, during which
+we every hour expected to founder, being obliged to scud under
+bare poles, with our yawl in tow, and having only a very short
+rope for her. This storm so frightened many of our people, that
+they resolved to go ashore at the first place they could find. At
+length, calling to mind the account given by Frezier of the
+island of <i>Iquique</i>, I mentioned the surprisal of that
+place, being but a small lieutenancy, where we might probably get
+some wholesome provisions, and a better vessel. This was
+approved, and the sun again shining, so that we lay dry, we
+acquired fresh vigour, and directed our course for that island.
+Next evening we saw the island, which seemed merely a high white
+rock, at the foot of the high land of <i>Carapucho</i>. Our boat
+set off for the island about sun-set, and had like to have been
+lost among the breakers. At length they heard the barking of
+dogs, and saw the light of some candles; but, aware of the danger
+of landing in the dark, they made fast their boat to a float of
+weeds for want of a grapnel, and waited till day-light. They then
+rowed in between the rocks, and were ignorantly welcomed on shore
+by some Indians. Going to the house of the lieutenant, they broke
+open the door, and rummaged it and the village, finding a booty
+more valuable to us in our present situation than gold or silver.
+This consisted of 60 bushels of wheat flour, 120 of calavanses
+and corn, some jerked beef, mutton, and pork, a thousand weight
+of well-cured fish, four or five days eating of soft bread, and
+five or six jars of Peruvian wine and brandy, besides a good
+number of fowls and some rusk. They had also the good fortune to
+find a boat to bring off their plunder, which otherwise had been
+of little use to us, as our own boat was fully laden with
+men.</p>
+
+<p>In the mean time, we in the bark were carried away by the
+current to the northward, out of sight of the island; and as they
+had not loaded their boats till the height of the day, they had a
+laborious task to row off, being very heavily laden. We were
+under melancholy apprehensions, fearing that our people might
+have remained on shore and deserted us; but towards evening we
+perceived two boats coming fast towards us, as heavily laden as
+they could be with safety. Words cannot express our joy when they
+came aboard. The scene was now changed from famine to plenty. The
+loaves of soft bread were distributed, and the jars of wine
+broached: But I took care they should drink of it moderately,
+allowing each man no more than half a pint a-day. After living a
+day or two on wholesome food, we wondered how our stomachs could
+receive and digest the rank nauseous congers fried in train-oil,
+and could hardly believe we had lived on nothing else for a month
+past. I was assured by my second lieutenant, who commanded the
+boat on this occasion, that the Indians seemed rather pleased at
+our plundering the Spaniards; so natural is it for bad masters to
+find enemies in their servants.</p>
+
+<p>The <i>island of Iquique</i> is in the lat. of 19&deg; 50'
+S.[271] about a mile from the main land, and only about a mile
+and a half in circuit, the channel between it and the coast of
+Peru being full of rocks. It is of moderate height, and the
+surface consists mostly of cormorant's dung, which is so very
+white that places covered with it appear at a distance like chalk
+cliffs. Its smell is very offensive, yet it produces considerable
+gain, as several ships load here with it every year for Arica,
+where it is used as manure for growing capsicums. The only
+inhabitants of this island are negro slaves, who gather this dung
+into large heaps near the shore, ready for boats to take it off.
+The village where the lieutenant resides, and which our people
+plundered, is on the main land close by the sea, and consists of
+about sixty scattered ill-built houses, or huts rather, and a
+small church. There is not the smallest verdure to be seen about
+it, neither does its neighbourhood afford even the smallest
+necessary of life, not even water, which the inhabitants have to
+bring in boats from the <i>Quebrada</i>, or breach of
+<i>Pisagua</i>, ten leagues to the northward; wherefore, being so
+miserable a place, the advantage derived from the <i>guana</i> or
+cormorant's dung seems the only inducement for its being
+inhabited. To be at some distance from the excessively offensive
+stench of the dung, they have built their wretched habitations on
+the main, in a most hideous situation, and still even too near
+the guana, the vapours from which are even there very bad, yet
+not quite so suffocating as on the island. The sea here affords
+abundance of excellent fish, some kinds of which I had never
+before seen; one of them resembling a large silver eel, but much
+thicker in proportion. The inhabitants of this desolate and
+forbidding place cure these fish in a very cleanly manner, and
+export large quantities of them by the vessels which come for the
+guana.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 271: There is no island on the coast of
+Peru in that latitude. Iquique is a town on the main land, about
+thirty miles from the sea. The islands called <i>los
+Patillos</i>, or the Claws, are near the coast, in lat. 20&deg;
+45' S. and probably one of these may have got the name of
+<i>Iquique</i>, as being under the jurisdiction of that town. The
+mountain Carapacha of the text, is probably the hills of Tarapaca
+of our maps.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>We were informed by two Indian prisoners, that the lieutenant
+of Iquique had a boat at Pisagua for water, of which we began to
+be in need, for which reason I sent Mr Randal in search of her.
+He failed in this object, but brought off a few bladders full of
+water, and three or four <i>balsas</i>, very artificially sewed
+and filled with wind, which are used for landing on this
+dangerous coast. On these the rower sits across, using a double
+paddle; and as the wind escapes from the skin bags, he has a
+contrivance for supplying the deficiency. These are the chief
+embarkations used by the fishermen, and are found very
+serviceable for landing on this coast, which has hardly a smooth
+beach from one end of it to the other. We intended to have looked
+into the port of Arica, but heard there was a ship there of
+force, on which we continued our course to the northwards to La
+Nasca. Off that port we met a large ship about two hours before
+day, and though we rowed very hard, it was ten o'clock before we
+got up with her. After a brisk dispute of six or seven hours, we
+were obliged to leave her, in consequence of the sea-breeze
+coming in very strong. She was called the Francisco Palacio, of
+700 tons, 8 guns, and 10 patereroes, with a great number of men,
+and well provided with small arms; but was so deeply laden that,
+in rolling, the water ran over her deck and out at her scuppers;
+indeed she had more the appearance of an ill-contrived floating
+castle, than of a ship, according to the present fashion of
+Europe. Thus we had the misfortune, on this forlorn voyage, to
+meet with the two best equipped and armed private ships at that
+time in the South Sea. In this action we had not above twenty
+fire-arms that were of any use, owing to the improvidence of our
+people at Juan Fernandez; yet were they so impatient of this
+disappointment, that some of them were for immediately
+surrendering to the enemy. To prevent this, I ordered four men
+whom I thought I could trust to take the charge of our two boats;
+but two of these went away with the best boat, and my first
+lieutenant and Morphew plotted to have gone away with the other,
+but were hindered by blowing weather, and so weak was my
+authority that I was forced to dissemble.</p>
+
+<p>Next day we stood into the road of Pisco, where we saw a very
+fine ship, and resolved immediately to board her; and to our
+great satisfaction, the captain and his people met us with their
+hats off, beseeching us to give them quarter. This was a good
+ship, of about 200 tons, called the Jesu Maria, almost laden with
+pitch, tar, copper, and plank, but nothing else. The captain
+offered 16,000 dollars for her ransom, but I could not comply, as
+the Recovery was disabled in her masts in boarding, and also we
+had now a vessel in which we could at least enjoy cleanliness,
+which we had been entire strangers to ever since our departure
+from Juan Fernandez; wherefore we made all dispatch in getting
+every thing out of the bark. The Spanish captain of the Jesu
+Maria informed me, that the Margaretta had arrived some time
+before at Calao, where she had given a full account of her
+rencounter with us; her captain and three men having been killed
+in the action, and a priest with several others wounded. She was
+now ready to put to sea again to cruize for us, with the addition
+of ten guns and fifty men. A frigate of twenty-eight guns, called
+the Flying-fish, was already out with the same intention; and
+advice had been sent respecting us along the coast, both to the
+north and south, with orders to equip what strength there was to
+catch us. All night, the people of Pisco were on the alert,
+continually firing guns, to give us an earnest of what we were to
+expect if we attempted to land, but we had no such intention.</p>
+
+<p>Having cleared our bark next morning, we gave her to the
+Spanish captain of the Jesu Maria; and as soon as the breeze
+sprung up, we weighed and stood to sea. While going out, we met
+our own boat with the two men who had deserted us, and who now
+edged down upon us, imagining we had been Spaniards. The two
+fellows were almost dead, having neither eat nor drank for three
+days, and had just been ashore on a small island near the harbour
+of Pisco, to kill some seals that they might drink their blood.
+Their only excuse for leaving us was, that they had fallen
+asleep, during which the breeze had wafted our bark away from
+them. We had only a transient view of Pisco, which seemed
+pleasantly situated among orchards and vineyards. We proceeded
+along the coast very cautiously, knowing that we were almost in
+the mouths of our enemies, and that the least act of indiscretion
+might throw us into their hands. We ventured, however, to look
+into the roads of Guanchaco, Malabriga, and Cheripe, where we saw
+no shipping, after which we passed through between the island of
+<i>Lobos de Tierra</i> and the continent.</p>
+
+<p>Being near the <i>Saddle</i> of Payta on the 25th November, I
+thought of surprising that place in the night, though our force
+was much diminished since our last attack; but as it grew calm
+while we were endeavouring to get into the harbour, we thought it
+better to delay till morning, as our vessel being Spanish would
+deceive the inhabitants, and prevent them from suspecting us. In
+the morning, being observed from the shore making many short
+trips to gain ground to windward, the Spaniards sent off a large
+boat full of men to assist in bringing in our ship, and to
+enquire the news. Seeing them making towards us, I ordered none
+of our men to appear but such as had dark complexions and wore
+Spanish dresses, standing ready to answer such questions as they
+might ask in hailing, and to give them a rope when they clapped
+us on board. Some of our men also were concealed under our
+gunwales, with their muskets ready to point into the boat, to
+command them to make her fast, and this stratagem succeeded. I
+examined the prisoners as to the condition of the town, which
+they assured me was then extremely poor, having neither money nor
+provisions, and shewed me a small bark on shore, lately sent in
+by Captain Clipperton with some of his prisoners, on the arrival
+of which every thing of value had been removed into the country.
+Yet we held on our way with Spanish colours flying, and came to
+the anchorage.</p>
+
+<p>As soon as we were anchored, I sent Mr Brooks to attack the
+town with twenty-four men, only those who rowed appearing, and
+the rest with their arms lying in the bottom of the boats; so
+that when they landed, they even found the children playing on
+the beach. These took the alarm immediately, and ran away on
+seeing our armed men. In an instant the whole place was in
+confusion, and happy were they who could escape, the town being
+left destitute, and they were too nimble to be overtaken. Our
+party ransacked Payta, but found it as poor as our prisoners
+reported; so that they only found a few bales of coarse cloth,
+about five hundred-weight of dried dog-fish, two or three pedlars
+packs, and an inconsiderable quantity of bread and sweetmeats. We
+had better fortune while at anchor, as we took a vessel in which
+were about fifty jars of Peruvian wine and brandy; her master
+having come by stealth from Calao, where orders had been given,
+that none but ships of force should venture to sea. My people in
+the town were in no haste to re-embark, and when it grew dark,
+some of the Spaniards began to assemble, and learning that there
+were only eighteen English in the town, came down the hills with
+great boldness. At first our people took refuge in the largest
+church, meaning to have defended themselves there; but at length
+they marched out, formed in a line, and kept beating their drum;
+and one of them having fired a musket, the Spaniards hastily
+retreated, and our men embarked without any more alarm.</p>
+
+<p>From Payta we directed our course for the island of Gorgona,
+in the bay of Panama, and in our passage to that place built a
+tank or wooden cistern in our vessel, sufficient to contain ten
+tons of water. In our way we made the island of Plata, Cape St
+Francisco, Gorgonella, or Little Gorgona, and on the 2d of
+December arrived at the island of Gorgona. We had here the
+advantage of being able to fill our watercasks in the boat, the
+water running in small streams from the rocks into the sea, and
+we cut our wood for fuel close to high-water mark; so that in
+less than forty-eight hours we completed our business, and
+hurried away for fear of those vessels which we understood had
+been sent in search of us. Having got out of the track of the
+enemy's ships, we consulted as to the properest manner of
+proceeding, when the majority were for going directly for India.
+Upon this we changed the name of our vessel, from the Jesu Maria
+to the Happy-Return, and used our best endeavours to get off from
+the coast of America. The winds and currents were however
+contrary, and some of our people who were adverse to this plan
+did some secret damage to our tank, so that the greatest part of
+our water leaked out. Owing to this, and our provisions being
+much exhausted by long delays from contrary winds or dead calms,
+we were incapable of attempting so long a run: Wherefore, on
+purpose to procure what we wanted, I proposed making a descent on
+Realejo, on the coast of Mexico, in 11&deg; 50' [12&deg; 28' N.]
+In our way thither, we fell in with Cape Burica, in 8&deg; 20'
+[<i>exactly</i> 8&deg; N.] and then, on second thoughts, I judged
+it might be safer to make an attempt on the island of Quibo, in
+lat. 7&deg; 30' N. where, according to the account given by
+Captain Rogers. I guessed there were inhabitants, who lived
+plentifully on the produce of their island.</p>
+
+<p>On the 31st January, 1721, we entered the channel between the
+islands of <i>Quibo</i> and <i>Quivetta</i>, in lat. 7&deg; 18'
+N. in twenty fathoms water, and anchored opposite a sandy bay,
+which promised to afford convenience for wooding and watering.
+Sending our boat to view the bay, my people reported that there
+was a good close harbour a little to the south, but no signs of
+inhabitants, except three or four huts by the shore, which they
+supposed had formerly been used by pearl-fishers, as there were
+great quantities of mother-of-pearl-shells scattered about these
+huts. On attentive consideration, I resolved not to shut up our
+vessel in a close harbour, for fear of bad consequences, and
+remained therefore at anchor in the open channel. At day-break
+next morning, we saw two large boats under Spanish colours,
+rowing in for Quivetta, which gave me some apprehensions they had
+some intelligence of us, and intended an attack. The mulattoes on
+the coast of Mexico are remarkable for their courage, and have
+sometimes done very bold actions, even in such paltry vessels as
+these we now saw: These, however, steered into a small cove on
+the island of Quivetta, which satisfied us they had no intentions
+to attack us. I now sent Mr Brooks in our yawl to attack them,
+when he found them all ashore, and brought away their piraguas
+with two prisoners, a negro and a mulatto, the rest taking refuge
+in the woods. We took all their provisions, consisting of a small
+quantity of pork, with plantains, some green, some ripe, and some
+dried. Of this last there was a considerable quantity, which, on
+being pounded, made a pleasant-tasted flour, indifferently white,
+and supplied us with bread for a month. The mulatto mortified us
+greatly by telling us that a vessel laden with provisions had
+passed near us in the night, but promised to bring us to a place
+where we might supply ourselves without hazard, provided we were
+not above two or three days about it, wherefore we made all
+possible dispatch in getting in our wood and water.</p>
+
+<p>We weighed from this place on the 16th January, steering for
+<i>Mariato</i>, being the westernmost point of the gulf of St
+Martin. In going out from the channel of Quibo, we were in
+imminent danger of being forced by the current upon two rocks at
+a small distance from each other, off the northern point of
+Quivetta; but having cleared them, we steered through <i>Canal
+bueno</i>, or the good channel, so called from its safety, being
+free from rocks or shoals. Over against the south entrance of
+these straits, at the distance of a league from point Mariato, is
+the island of Cebaco, in my opinion about ten leagues in
+circumference. I ran along the south end of that island, and in
+the evening of the 19th got safe in between it and point Mariato,
+and anchored in six fathoms, over against a green field, being
+the only clear spot thereabout. Our pilot advised us to land
+about three hours before day, when we should be in good time for
+the plantations. Accordingly, I went at two in the morning in our
+own boat, the two lieutenants being in the two piraguas, and left
+my son with a few hands to take care of the ship. Our pilot
+carried us a little way up the river of St Martin, and out of
+that through several branches or narrow creeks, among groves of
+trees, so close that we had not room to row. Not approving of
+this navigation, I kept a watchful eye on our guide, suspecting
+he had no good design in his head. We landed just at day-break,
+in a fine plain, or savannah; and, after a march of three miles,
+came to two farm-houses, whence the inhabitants made their
+escape, except the wife and children belonging to one of them. We
+had the satisfaction of seeing that this place answered the
+description given by our guide, being surrounded by numerous
+flocks of black cattle, with plenty of hogs, and fowls of several
+sorts, together with some dried beef; plantains, and maize; and,
+in the mean time, we had a breakfast of hot cakes and milk.</p>
+
+<p>When it was broad day, I saw our ship close by us, on which I
+asked our guide, why he had brought us so far about? when he said
+there was a river between us and the shore, and he was not sure
+if it were fordable. I therefore sent some to try, who found it
+only knee deep, on which, to avoid carrying our plunder so far by
+land, I ordered our boats to leave the river of St Martin, and to
+row to the beach over against the ship. We had not been long at
+the farmhouse till the master of the family came to us, bringing
+several horses with him, and offering to serve us as far as he
+could. This offer we kindly accepted, and we employed him to
+carry every thing we thought fit to our boats. He then went among
+his black cattle, and brought us as many as we thought we could
+cure, as we had but little salt, and could not afford water to
+keep them alive at sea, so that we killed them as soon as they
+came on board. We preserved them by cutting their flesh into long
+slips, about the thickness of one's finger, and then sprinkled
+them with a small quantity of salt, not using more than four or
+five pounds to the hundred-weight. After lying two or three hours
+in the salt, we hung it up to dry in the sun for two or three
+days, which perfectly cured it, much better than could have been
+done by any quantity of the best salt.</p>
+
+<p>Having thus procured all we proposed at this place, we
+departed from thence nest morning, having our decks full of fowls
+and hogs, among the latter of which was one having its navel on
+its back.[272] The Spaniards say that this animal, although but
+small even at its full growth, is a terrible creature to meet
+wild in the woods. Returning through the <i>Canal bueno</i>, we
+stopt at Quibo to complete our water; and on leaving that island,
+gave the largest piragua to our two prisoners, to enable those
+who were on the island of Quivetta to return home. The wine and
+brandy we had lately taken had the effect of dividing my ship's
+company into two parties, those who were formerly so firmly
+united being now inveterate enemies; insomuch, that in one night
+the ringleaders of both have solicited me to espouse their cause,
+assuring me that the other party had a design on my life, and
+urging me to murder those who were of the opposite faction. It is
+wonderful how this evil was diverted, as I could use no other
+means than calm advice on both sides, and it was utterly out of
+my power to hinder them from getting drunk as often as they
+pleased; in which condition they often fell all to skirmishing
+with each other, and I had more than once my clothes almost torn
+off my back in endeavouring to part them. It was happy this trade
+of drinking did not last long, as, while the liquor lasted, I
+found it was unsafe to lay my head on my pillow, which almost
+wearied me out of my life. Their free access to the liquor
+shortened the term of this miserable folly, by soon expending the
+baneful cause. The necessities of hunger obliged them to act
+jointly and vigorously at Mariato; but they soon relapsed again,
+and were as distracted as ever so long as the liquor lasted. My
+land as well as sea-officers were now obliged to learn to steer,
+and to take their turns at the helm with the seamen, such being
+the pass to which they had brought themselves by sinking my
+authority, that they had lost their own, and were even in a worse
+condition than I; as the crew had, for their own sakes, to have
+recourse to me on all emergencies, obeying me punctually while
+these lasted, and abusing me plentifully when these were
+over.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 272: The Pecary, Tajacu, or Mexican hog,
+the Sus Tajapin of naturalists, is here meant, which is an
+indigenous animal of the warmer parts of America, and is found in
+one of the West India islands. It has no tail, and is
+particularly distinguished by an open glandular orifice on the
+hinder part of the back, which discharges a fetid unctuous
+liquid; and which orifice has been vulgarly mistaken for the
+navel.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the 25th January, we discovered a sail in the morning,
+about two leagues to leeward, to which we gave chase for some
+time; but seeing she was Europe-built, and fearing she might be a
+man of war belonging to the enemy, I hauled on a wind, and in
+half an hour it fell dead calm. We soon after saw a boat rowing
+towards us, which proved the pinnace of our consort the Success,
+commanded by her first lieutenant, Mr Davison. This was a most
+unexpected meeting to us both, Mr Davison being surprised to find
+me in such a condition, and I no less so to find the Success in
+these seas. I gave him an account of our misfortunes, and of all
+that had befallen us during the long interval of our separation,
+and he related all the remarkable incidents that had befallen
+them. A breeze of wind springing up, I bore down upon the
+Success, and went aboard of her; when I gave Captain Clipperton,
+and Mr Godfrey, our agent-general, the whole history of my
+voyage, expecting to have been treated by them as belonging to
+the same interest, but found them unwilling to have any thing to
+do with me, now that my ship was lost. I trusted, however, that
+Captain Clipperton would let me have such necessaries as he could
+spare, on which he said, I should know more of his mind next day.
+Among other discourses, he told me that he was just come from the
+island of <i>Cocos</i>, his people very sickly, and on short
+allowance. I then offered my service to pilot him to Mariato,
+which was not above thirty leagues distant, where he might have
+refreshed his company, and supplied his wants; but he was
+resolved to make the best of his way for the <i>Tres Marias</i>,
+where he said there was plenty of turtle to be had, and so I left
+him for the night.</p>
+
+<p>Next morning, as I was going again on board the Success with
+some of my officers, Captain Clipperton spread all his canvass,
+and crowded away from us. On this I returned to my ship, fired
+several guns, and made signals of distress, which were not
+regarded by him, till his officers exclaimed against his
+barbarity, and at last he brought to. When I had again got up
+with him, I sent Mr Brooks to know the reason of his abrupt
+departure, and to request the supply of several necessaries,
+which I was willing to pay for. On these terms, he spared me two
+of his quarter-deck guns, sixty round shot, some musket-balls and
+flints, a Spanish chart of the coast of Mexico, with part of
+China and India, a half-hour glass and half-minute glass, a
+compass, and about three hundred-weight of salt: But all my
+arguments could not prevail with him to let me have any thing out
+of his medicine-chest for Mr Coldsea, who was still very ill of
+his wound. For what we now had from the Success, we returned some
+bales of coarse broad-cloth, as much pitch and tar as he would
+have, and some pigs of copper: I gave him also a large
+silver-ladle for a dozen <i>spadoen</i>, or Spanish swords. This
+being concluded, I offered my services, assuring him I had a
+pretty good ship, and that our cargo was of some value: To this
+he answered, if my cargo were gold, he had no business with me,
+and I must take care of myself. Mr Hendric, our agent, Mr Rainer,
+and Mr Dodd, our lieutenant of marines, weary of the hard work
+imposed upon them, desired my leave to go on board the Success,
+which I consented to, and Captain Clipperton left us to shift for
+ourselves, being now near the island of Cano.</p>
+
+<p>I was now for returning southwards, to try our fortunes in the
+bay of Panama, but the majority opposed me through fear,
+insisting to go to the Tres Marias, to salt turtle at these
+islands, and then to stretch over for India. We accordingly
+directed our coarse that way, but as the wind near the land
+continued in the west, and the coast of Mexico trended nearly
+N.W. by W. we crept so slowly to windward, that we began to be
+very short of provisions before we got the length of Realijo, on
+which our design of landing there was renewed; but this intention
+was soon frustrated, as we were blown past that place by a
+<i>tequante peque</i>, for so the Spaniards on this coast call a
+violent gale at N.E. As we continued our voyage along shore, we
+again fell in with the Success, then in quest of
+<i>Sonsonate</i>, expecting there to receive the ransom of the
+Marquis of <i>Villa Roche</i> who had been some time a prisoner
+on board. We ranged close under her stern, and asked how Captain
+Clipperton and the rest of the gentlemen did, but received no
+answer, and the Success steered one way, while we went another.
+After this, calms, contrary winds, and unaccountable currents, so
+delayed our proceedings, that were reduced to a very short
+allowance, which we were forced to diminish daily, and had been
+reduced to very great distress, had we not from time to time
+found turtle floating on the surface of the sea, for which we
+kept a good look-out, being able to discover them even at great
+distances, by the sea-birds perching on their backs. On sight of
+these, we were forced often to forego taking advantage of the
+wind; and, besides often losing some of our way in pursuit of
+them, they had still a worse effect, as dressing them occasioned
+a great consumption of our water.</p>
+
+<p>Being now threatened with almost certain perdition if means
+were not fallen upon to avoid a state of absolute famine, I
+proposed that we should attempt to plunder some small town as we
+coasted along shore. At this time <i>Guotalco</i> was the nearest
+port; but, as we were standing in for it, we saw a sail a
+considerable way to leeward, which we considered more proper for
+us to endeavour to capture than to venture on shore, for which
+purpose we bore down upon her, which proved to be the Success.
+When sufficiently near, I made the private signal formerly
+concerted between us, but Captain Clipperton hauled his wind, and
+did not lie by a moment for us to get up with him. We were now so
+for to leeward of Guatalco, that it was in vain to beat up for
+that port, especially on an uncertainty. We were now reduced to a
+small daily allowance of calavances, which not being sufficient
+to keep us alive, we had recourse to the remainder of our smoked
+congers which had been neglected for some months, and had been
+soaking and rotting in the bilge-water, so that they were now as
+disgusting food as could be. Under these calamitous
+circumstances, we again met the Success near port <i>Angels</i>,
+in lat. 15&deg; 50' N. long. 96&deg; 25' W. Having exchanged
+signals, we stood so near each other that a biscuit might have
+been chucked aboard, yet did not exchange a word, as Clipperton
+had ordered his officers and ship's company to take no notice of
+us: Yet was Captain Clipperton so sensible of the difficulties
+and hazards we had to encounter in our design of going for India,
+that he said the child just born would be grey-haired before we
+should arrive there. We were now in a most miserable situation,
+wandering upon an inhospitable coast in want of every thing, and
+all the land we had seen was so wild and open to the sea, that it
+would have been impossible for us to have landed any where, and
+nothing could have urged us to make the attempt but the extreme
+want we were now in.</p>
+
+<p>On the 12th March, being off the port of Acapulco towards
+evening, we saw a ship between us and the shore, which turned out
+to be the Success, when Clipperton not only answered my private
+signal, but also that for speaking with me. After his late
+inhumane behaviour, I would hardly have trusted him, had we not
+been so near Acapulco, where I thought he meant to cruize for the
+Manilla ships, and now wished to have our assistance, wherefore I
+bore down alongside. He now sent his second lieutenant, Captain
+Cooke, with a very obliging letter to me, stating that he was
+cruizing for the homeward-bound Manilla ships, and desired me to
+assist him in the enterprise, with which view he desired me to
+come on board next morning, to consult on the best plan of
+attacking her, and proposed an union of the two companies. I was
+well pleased at this offer, and returned an answer that I should
+be with him early. I then read his letter to my people, who all
+expressed their readiness to join in the enterprise; but, as
+Clipperton had used us so unhandsomely, they desired me to have
+some security for their shares, signed by Clipperton, Godfrey the
+agent, and the rest of the officers in the Success.</p>
+
+<p>I went aboard the Success next morning, accompanied by Brooks
+and Randal, my lieutenants, and was received with much apparent
+civility, all animosities being forgotten, and we seemed now in
+the most perfect harmony. I first told Captain Clipperton and Mr
+Godfrey of the paper expected by my officers and men, entitling
+them to such shares as were allowed by the original articles, to
+which they readily consented, and drew up an instrument fully
+answerable to what my people desired. We then proceeded to our
+consultation, when it was agreed that I should send most of my
+people on board the Success as soon as the Manilla ship appeared,
+leaving only a boat's crew with me to bring me away in case I
+should have an opportunity to use my vessel as a fire-ship, or
+smoker, in case she should prove too hard for the Success. We
+also determined to board her at once, as otherwise we should have
+much the worst of the contest, owing to her superior weight of
+metal, and her better ability to bear a cannonade. Clipperton
+assured me he was certain of the time this ship was to sail from
+Acapulco, being always within a day or two after Passion-week, of
+which time a fortnight was yet to come. Before returning to my
+own ship, I informed Captain Clipperton of our scarcity of water,
+when he told me he had eighty tons, and would spare me as much as
+I wanted, or any thing else his ship afforded. I had now the
+pleasure of enjoying my command as fully as ever, and my whole
+remaining crew, from the highest to the lowest, expressed their
+satisfaction at our present prospects. Morphew, the ringleader of
+all our disorders, fearing my resentment might fall heavily on
+him, contrived to insinuate himself into the favour of the
+captain and officers of the Success, by a submissive deportment,
+and presents, and, in the end, left me on the 14th March, being
+received on board that ship. On the 15th, Mr Rainer came on board
+my ship, to visit his old ship-mates, and staid all night. I
+constantly reminded Clipperton of our want of water, and he as
+often promised to supply us with a large quantity at once.</p>
+
+<p>We thus continued to cruize in good order, and with great
+hopes, till the 27th March, when I had to suffer the most
+prodigious piece of treachery that could be imagined. We used to
+cruize off and on, at a convenient distance from the shore, so as
+not to be discovered from the land, yet so that it was impossible
+for any ship to leave the port of Acapulco without being seen by
+us. As my ship did not sail so well as the Success, Clipperton
+used to shorten sail, particularly at night, and shewed us lights
+on all necessary occasions. Towards evening of that day, he
+stretched about two leagues a-head of us, and I could not see
+that he lowered even a topgallant-sail for us to come up with
+him. I kept standing after him however, till almost a-shore on
+the breakers, when I had to tack and stand out to sea. Next
+morning no ship was to be seen, which reduced us to the most
+terrible apprehensions, considering our sad situation for want of
+water, and our vast distance from any place where we could expect
+to procure any, as we had now no other choice but either to beat
+up 220 leagues to the <i>Tres Marias</i>, or to bear away for the
+gulf of Amapala, at a much greater distance. I was afterwards
+informed, by some of Clipperton's officers, whom I met with in
+China, that he had done this cruel action absolutely against the
+repeated remonstrances of his officers, who abhorred such an act
+of barbarity. I also learnt afterwards, by some Spaniards from
+Manilla, that the Acapulco ship sailed about a week after we
+desisted from cruizing for her. This ship was the <i>Santo
+Christo</i>, carrying upwards of forty brass guns, and was
+exceedingly rich.</p>
+
+<p>In the sad situation we were now reduced to, every thing was
+to be hazarded, and any experiment tried that promised the
+smallest chance of success. We continued our course therefore,
+under terrible inconveniences, distressed for water and
+provisions, and weak in point of number; yet so far from being
+united by our common danger, that our people could not be
+restrained within the bounds of common civility. The winds and
+weather being favourable, we found ourselves before the port of
+<i>Sansonate</i> [273] on the 30th March, about sun-set, when we
+discovered a ship of good size at anchor in the harbour. Being a
+fine moonlight evening, I sent my first lieutenant in the yawl,
+with some of our best hands, to see what she was. Soon afterwards
+we heard some guns fired, and on the return of the lieutenant, he
+reported that she was a stout ship, having at least one tier of
+guns. Little regarding her apparent strength, or our own
+weakness, as we thought our necessities made us a match for her,
+we continued plying in all night, and prepared to engage her. At
+sun-rise the land-breeze blew so fresh from the shore, that we
+worked in but slowly; and in the mean time we received all their
+fire on every board we made, but without returning a single shot.
+Their boat also was employed in bringing off soldiers from the
+shore, to reinforce their ship; and they hung up a jar of about
+ten gallons of powder, with a match, at each main and
+fore-yard-arm, and at the bowsprit end, to let fall on our deck,
+in case we boarded them, which contrivance, if it had taken
+effect, would have made an end of both ships, and all that were
+in them. Seeing them so desperate in their preparations, I could
+not but expect a warm reception; but as our case would not admit
+of delay, at ever so hazardous a rate, we were not to be
+dismayed. About eleven in the forenoon the sea-breeze set in,
+and, to make our small force as available as might be, I ordered
+all our three guns to be placed on that side from which we were
+likely to engage. As the sea-breeze freshened we ran fast towards
+them, during which our small arms were effectually employed to
+break their powder-jars before we should board them, which we did
+without delay, and they submitted after exchanging a few
+shots.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 273: The port of Aeazualte, at the mouth of
+the river Samsonate, in the province of that
+name.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>This ship was named the <i>Sacra Familia</i>, of 300 tons, six
+guns, and seventy men, having a great many small arms, shot, and
+hand-granades. She had arrived some time before from Calao, with
+wine and brandy; but had now nothing on board except fifty jars
+of gunpowder, a small quantity of rusk, and some jerked beef; so
+that she was hardly worth the risk and trouble of capture. But as
+she had the character of sailing better, and was much better
+fitted than our ship, I resolved to exchange ships, and we all
+went aboard the prize, which had been fitted out in warlike
+manner, and commissioned, for the express purpose of taking us,
+if we chanced to fall in her way. To do justice to my people, our
+small arms were handled with much dexterity on this occasion;
+but, having been chiefly directed at the powder-jars, the only
+person killed on board the prize was the boatswain, and one
+person slightly wounded; while on our side no damage was
+sustained. A merchant, made prisoner at this time, seemed
+inclined to purchase the <i>Jesu Maria</i>, which we had quitted;
+and hearing her cargo consisted of pitch, tar, and copper, he
+consented to my demands, and went ashore to raise the sum agreed
+upon. We had so few provisions, that we could not afford to keep
+any prisoners, and therefore dismissed all the whites, Indians,
+and others, except some negroes, whom we detained to assist in
+working the ship: and, that we might lose as little time as
+possible, we set immediately to work, overhauling our sails and
+rigging, that we might get our new ship ready for sea.</p>
+
+<p>While thus employed, I received a letter from the governor of
+the place, which none of us could understand; but learnt by the
+messenger, that it intimated some account of a truce concluded
+between the crowns of Britain and Spain, and that the governor
+requested me to stay five days, that he might satisfy me by
+shewing me the articles of accommodation. I thought this odd,
+telling the Spanish gentleman I had not met with a friendly or
+peaceable reception; asking him why they had thus armed
+themselves in so desperate a manner, and why the governor had not
+rather sent me a flag of truce in the morning before we engaged,
+giving me this intimation? Saying also, if this story were true,
+we ought to have found the alleged intelligence on board the
+prize, as she came from Lima, whence they pretended the news
+came. It was likewise extraordinary, that none of the officers in
+the prize should know any thing of the matter: yet I had so great
+a regard for even the name of peace, that I would wait fifteen
+days, if the governor would supply us with provisions and water,
+otherwise I would not consent to stay twenty-four hours. I sent
+also a short answer to the governor, excusing our imperfect
+knowledge of the Spanish language. In this letter I stated if
+peace were actually concluded between our sovereigns, that I was
+ready to act as he desired, on due proof; and hoped, as we were
+now friends, that he would allow us to have refreshments from his
+port. On receipt of this, the governor expressed great
+satisfaction, and seemed to make no difficulty in complying with
+my request. Our boats went therefore ashore every morning, under
+a flag of truce, and we received for the first four days eight
+small jars of water daily. On the fifth day they reduced us to
+five jars, and during the whole time only one small cow was sent
+us.</p>
+
+<p>On this occasion a boat came off full of men, among whom were
+two priests, who brought with them a paper in Spanish, which they
+called the articles of peace; but so wretchedly written and
+blotted, that we should have been puzzled to read it, had it even
+been in English. I therefore desired the priests to translate it
+into Latin, which they promised to do, and took the paper with
+them. They also told me, that the governor meant to send for some
+Englishmen who lived at Guatimala, if I would continue three days
+longer in the road; to which I answered, that he might take his
+own time. Two days after, on our boat going ashore as usual, the
+governor ordered her and her crew to be seized. I was all day in
+suspence, not imagining the governor would make such a breach of
+the law of nations; but in the evening two of the boat's crew
+came off in an old leaky canoe, bringing a letter from the
+governor, and another from Mr Brooks, my first lieutenant, who
+was one of the prisoners. The governor required me to deliver up
+the <i>Sacra Familia</i>, and that we should all surrender,
+otherwise he would declare us pirates; and Mr Brooks told me he
+believed the governor meant to bully me. The governor proposed
+two ways for conveying us from the Spanish dominions, one of
+which was by Vera Cruz overland, and the other by sea to Lima.
+But I liked neither of these, not chusing a journey of 1300 miles
+at least through a country inhabited by a barbarous people, nor
+yet a voyage to Lima under their guidance. My two men told me,
+that Frederick Mackenzie had let the governor into the secret of
+our necessities, and of my design of procuring water at the
+island of Tigers, in the gulf of Amapala, which he said he would
+take care to prevent, and believed he now had us safe enough,
+knowing our only boat remaining was a small canoe. My two men who
+brought these letters offering their service, and a third
+volunteering to accompany them, to bale out the water from their
+wretched canoe, I sent a letter in French to the governor,
+offering, if I could be assured of a safe conduct for ourselves
+and effects to Panama, and thence by way of Portobello to one of
+the British colonies, we would enter into a farther treaty, which
+he might signify, if he meant to comply, by firing two guns, and
+by sending off my people with the usual supply; otherwise
+necessity would compel us to sail that night. Receiving no reply
+whatever, I weighed before day next morning, and made sail,
+leaving the Jesu Maria behind, a much more valuable ship than the
+one I took away.</p>
+
+<p>On going to sea, we reduced ourselves to a pint of-water in
+the twenty-four hours, and directed our course for the gulf of
+Amapala, about thirty-five leagues S.S.E. [274] meaning to water
+there on the island of Tigers. The loss of my officer and boat's
+crew sensibly diminished the number of white faces among us, and
+so lessened our strength, that we should never have been able to
+manage this great ship, with her heavy cotton sails, but for our
+negro prisoners, who proved to be very good sailors. The loss of
+our boat was a great inconvenience to us; but as I meant only to
+provide water enough to serve us to Panama, where we were
+determined to surrender ourselves, if it were really peace, I
+thought we might contrive to get such a quantity of water as
+might suffice, in two or three days, by means of our canoe. The
+winds being favourable, we reached the gulf in ten days, but we
+could find no water, after an anxious and hazardous search.
+Surrounded on all sides with the most discouraging difficulties,
+we weighed anchor again on the 13th of April, when I brought our
+people to a resolution not to surrender on any account, let the
+consequence be what it might. We had not now forty gallons of
+water in the ship, and no other liquids, when we came to an
+allowance of half a pint each for twenty-four hours, even this
+being too large, considering we could get none nearer than the
+island of Quibo, which was about 160 leagues from the gulf of
+Amapala, and we were forty-three in number, including our
+negroes.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 274: About forty-two marine leagues
+E.S.E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>We accordingly steered for Quibo, having very uncertain winds
+and variable weather, and were thirteen days on this short
+allowance. No one who has not experienced it can conceive our
+sufferings in this sultry climate, by the perpetual extremity of
+thirst, which would not permit us to eat an ounce of victuals in
+a day. We even drank our urine, which moistened our mouths
+indeed, but excited our thirst the more. Some even drank large
+draughts of sea-water, which had like to have killed them. [275]
+On the 25th April we came to the island of <i>Cano</i>, in lat.
+8&deg; 47' N. which, by the verdure, promised to yield us water,
+if our canoe could get on shore. In this hope we came to anchor
+off the north-west side of this island, when it was as much as we
+could do to hand our sails, stop our cable, and execute the other
+necessary labours, so greatly were we reduced. We imagined we
+could see a run of water, yet dreaded the dangerous surf which
+broke all round those parts of the island we could see. Mr Randal
+was sent with some jars, to try what could be done; and as he did
+not appear again when very late at night, I became apprehensive
+he was either lost, or, not finding water on the island, had gone
+in search of it to the continent. At length he came back, with
+his jars filled, and any one may guess our unspeakable joy on
+being thus opportunely delivered from the jaws of death. He did
+not bring above sixty or seventy gallons, and I was at great
+pains to restrain my men from using it immoderately, allowing
+only a quart to be distributed immediately to each man. What made
+me the more strict on this occasion was, that Mr Randal assured
+me we should hardly get any more, the breakers were so very
+dangerous. That very night we chanced to have a shower of rain,
+on which we used every expedient for catching it, in sheets,
+blankets, and sails. During our long thirst we had continually
+wished for rainy weather, and had often good reason to expect it,
+by seeing many louring black clouds, which seemed every minute
+ready to discharge their burdens, yet never did before to any
+purpose. Next day I sent our boatswain to make another essay; but
+after going round the whole island, and wasting the entire day in
+search of a smooth beach, he could not see a single spot where he
+might venture on shore. Thinking we had a sufficient stock to
+carry us to Quibo, we weighed next day; and while ranging near
+the island, we saw a smooth beach, on which I sent our canoe
+again, which brought back nine jars full of water.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 275: It may not be improper to state, that
+in such extremity for want of water, great relief has been
+experienced by remaining immersed for some time in the sea; the
+lymphatics of the skin absorbing water to supply and relieve the
+system very materially.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>We now pursued our course to the S.E. and arrived in a few
+days at Quibo, anchoring at the same place where we had been
+formerly. We pursued our business of wooding and watering at this
+island with tolerable chearfulness, yet without any great hurry;
+chiefly because we were now within eighty leagues of Panama, and
+it was requisite for us to deliberate very seriously on our
+scheme of surrendering to the Spaniards. We considered Panama as
+well calculated for treating on this subject, not being any way
+strong towards the sea; and as we had a good ship, we thought it
+no difficult matter to settle the terms of our surrender, before
+giving ourselves into their hands. We also reckoned on some
+assistance from the factors of the South Sea company, resident
+there, who, in case a peace were actually concluded in Europe,
+might intercede for us, and procure us a passage for Europe. Yet
+as there was something extremely disagreeable in the idea of a
+surrender, especially to such enemies as the Spaniards, we were
+in no great hurry, particularly as we were here somewhat at our
+ease, enjoying many conveniences to which we had long been
+strangers. The free use we made of the excellent fruits growing
+on this island brought the flux among us, which weakened us very
+much, and interrupted our work for some days, yet in the main did
+us little hurt, or rather tended to preserve us from the scurvy.
+We deliberated and consulted as to our future conduct; but our
+views were so discordant, and our minds so distracted, that we
+could come to no resolution, except that of continuing here, in
+hopes of something happening to our advantage.</p>
+
+<p>The island of <i>Quibo</i> or <i>Coibo</i> is almost in the
+same parallel with Panama, [276] being about twenty-four English
+miles from N. to S. and twelve from E. to W. It is of moderate
+height, covered all over with inaccessible woods, always green;
+and, though never inhabited, abounds with papaws and limes, and
+some other fruits I never saw before, which are nearly as good,
+though wholly neglected, as those that are most carefully
+attended to in other islands in similar latitudes, whence it may
+be inferred that the soil is fertile; and, if ever inhabited and
+cleared, it promises to be as productive as the best of our
+West-India islands. The pearl-fishers, not being able to follow
+their occupation during the <i>vandevals</i>, or black stormy
+months, from the beginning of June to the end of November, have a
+few scattered huts in several parts of this island and of
+<i>Quivetta</i>, used by the divers during their season, in which
+they sleep and open their oysters, so that the sandy beach is
+covered with fine mother-of-pearl shells. In wading only to the
+middle, we could reach large pearl oysters with our hands, which
+at first pleased us much; but we found them as tough as leather,
+and quite unpalatable. Having no seyne, I can say little about
+other kinds of fish. We occasionally observed a large kind of
+flat fish, which often sprung a great way out of the water, which
+are said to be very destructive to the divers; for, when these
+return to the surface, unless they take great care, these fish
+wrap themselves round the divers, and hold them fast till
+drowned. To guard against this, the divers always carry a
+sharp-pointed knife, and on seeing any of these fish above them,
+present the point over their heads, and stick it into the fish's
+belly. They are also subject to great danger from alligators,
+which swarm in this part of the sea; and some of us fancied we
+saw one swimming below the surface near Mariato Point, only a few
+leagues from hence. This island has a great variety of birds,
+also great numbers of black monkeys and guanoes, which last
+mostly frequent the streams of fresh water. Some of these guanoes
+are of extraordinary size, being of a grey colour with black
+streaks, those about the head being brown. Quibo is a most
+convenient place for procuring wood and water, as the wood grows
+in abundance within twenty yards of the sea, and there are
+several streams of fresh water crossing the beach.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 276: This is a material error. Panama is in
+lat. 9&deg; N. long. 80&deg; 21' W. while the centre of Quibo is
+in lat. 7&deg; 28' N. and long. 82&deg; 17' W. from
+Greenwich.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Having got clear of this place, and nothing thought of but our
+speedy return to Europe by surrendering at Panama, we met with
+strong adverse currents, together with calms and contrary winds,
+by which we were detained for several days under the mountains of
+<i>Guanachu</i>. [277] On the 15th. May, a small bark bore down
+upon us, mistaking us for Spaniards. She was called the Holy
+Sacrament, and came last from Cheriqui, laden with dried beef,
+pork; and live hogs. Her master was much surprised at first, but
+soon recovered on being told we were bound for Panama, and
+readily offered to pilot us thither, as he was bound for that
+port; and begged us to take his bark in tow, as he could not
+fetch the land, and his hogs were almost dead for want of water,
+while his vessel was ready to sink, being so leaky that his
+people were no longer able to stand to the pumps. I took her in
+tow, sending some of my people to assist in pumping the bark, and
+even spared some water and maize for supplying the hogs. The
+master came on board of my ship, but had heard no news of any
+peace or truce between Britain and Spain.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 277: Perhaps the Sierra de Canataqua are
+here meant, which pervade the country between Montijo Bay and the
+Bay of Panama, ending in Point Mariato, of which they seem to
+have been detained.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>It may seem strange that this opportunity of supplying
+ourselves with provisions made no change in our plans; but every
+one of us was so worn out by a continual want of all necessaries,
+and so disheartened by a perpetual succession of misfortunes,
+that we were tired of the sea, and willing to embrace any
+opportunity of getting ashore, almost at any rate. I was rejoiced
+at this bark having fallen into our hands; because, if we found
+the story of the governor of Sansonate false, we might be
+thoroughly enabled to go to India, with this help. To ascertain
+this, I meant to anchor a great way short of Panama, keeping
+possession of the bark, in case the president might not agree to
+safe and honourable terms, when we still had it in our power to
+redress ourselves, by keeping out of his hands. All this while,
+however, we had not determined who should be the bearer of the
+flag of truce; for my people, after so much treachery among them,
+feared that the messenger might only make terms for himself with
+the governor, and not return again: Wherefore, my son was chosen
+as the fittest person for the purpose, as being sure of his
+return, for my sake.</p>
+
+<p>On the 17th another bark came down upon us, but after coming
+pretty near, sheared off; on which I sent Mr Randal in our canoe,
+to inform them of our design, but they hoisted Spanish colours on
+his approach, and fired at him. Next morning we looked into the
+bay, where we found this bark at anchor, but she renewed her fire
+on our approach. On this, at his own request, I sent the master
+of the Holy Sacrament in a canoe, with four negroes and a flag of
+truce, to inform the people in the other bark of our intentions.
+A gale of wind interrupted this plan, and forced the canoe on
+shore, I dare say without danger to their lives, as they seemed
+to land of choice. On the 19th we saw a sail ahead of us standing
+along shore, on which we let go the bark we had in tow, in which
+were four of our own people and five Spaniards, spreading all the
+sail we could, so that by night we were at a considerable
+distance from the bark. I was for lying-to all night, for the
+bark to come up, but the majority insisted we should crowd sail
+all night, so that by day-break of the 20th we were within less
+than gun-shot of the chase. I immediately hoisted our colours,
+fired a gun to leeward, and sent a man to wave a white flag on
+our poop, in token of truce: But they continually fired at us,
+having their decks full of men, who kept hallooing and abusing us
+with the grossest epithets. Still I made no return, till I came
+close on their quarter, and then sent one of their countrymen to
+our boltsprit-end, to inform them we were bound for Panama, and
+wished to treat with them peaceably: But the only reply they made
+was by continuing their fire, calling us <i>borachos</i> and
+<i>peros Ingleses</i>, drunkards and English dogs; so that at
+length I thought it full time to begin with them. I therefore met
+them with the helm, and soon convinced them of their error,
+giving them so warm a reception that they soon sheered-off. We
+just missed catching hold of them, and as it fell calm, we
+continued to engage her for two or three hours at the distance of
+musket-shot. A breeze at length sprung up, when we neared them,
+and their courage subsided in proportion as we approached. Their
+captain still encouraged them to fight, bravely exposing himself
+in an open manner, till he was at length shot through the body,
+and dropt down dead; on which they immediately called out for
+quarter, and thus ended the dispute.</p>
+
+<p>We now commanded them to hoist out their launch; but they
+answered, that their tackle and rigging were so shattered that
+they could not possibly comply; wherefore I sent Mr Randall and
+two or three more in our canoe, who found all her people most
+submissively asking mercy. Mr Randall sent the most considerable
+of the prisoners on board my ship, who informed me their vessel
+was <i>La Conception de Receva</i>, belonging to Calao, but last
+from Guanchaco, of 200 tons burden, laden with flour, loaves of
+sugar, boxes of marmalade, and jars of preserved peaches, grapes,
+limes, and such like. She mounted six guns, and carried above
+seventy men, being one of the ships that had been fitted out and
+commissioned purposely to take us; so that she was the second of
+these armed merchantmen we had taken. In this engagement, the
+Spanish captain and one negro were killed, and one or two
+slightly wounded; but their masts, sails, and rigging were much
+shattered. On our part, the gunner only was slightly wounded, and
+a small piece was carried out of the side of our main-mast. We
+had now above eighty prisoners of all sorts, and not exceeding
+twenty-six of ourselves. When the Spanish gentlemen came off
+board, they would not give me time to ask the reason of not
+hearkening to our peaceable offers; but immediately laid the
+whole blame on their dead captain, Don Joseph Desorio, who vowed
+he would listen to no terms but his own, and was resolved to take
+us by force. There were several persons of note among our
+prisoners, particularly Don Baltazzar de Abarca, Conde de la
+Rosa, an European nobleman, who had been governor of Pisco on the
+coast of Peru, and was now on his return for Spain; also a
+Captain Morell, who had been formerly taken by Captain Rogers;
+and several others. We treated them all with the utmost civility,
+at which they wondered; because, from prejudice against our
+cruizers, and conviction of their own harsh behaviour towards
+their prisoners, they expected to have been dealt with very
+roughly.</p>
+
+<p>In the situation where we now lay, we were in the track of all
+the ships bound for Panama, not above thirty miles from that
+place, our numbers being very few, and even part of our crew
+sick. For these reasons we were as expeditious as possible in
+examining the contents of our new prize, and removing them into
+our own ship; and, though the far greater part of the work was
+done by our prisoners, it took us full two days. Owing to this,
+and to faint winds and calms, we did not rejoin our bark till the
+22d. As we bore down towards her, and came pretty near, we were
+astonished to see her broach to and fall off again, though all
+her sails were set; and, what amazed us still more, we could not
+see any person on her deck. I sent the boat on board, and the
+officer immediately called out to me, that there was not a man on
+board, but that all her decks and quarters were covered with
+blood. By this melancholy appearance, it seemed evident that the
+Spaniards had overpowered and murdered my four men who were sent
+to assist them, doubtless taking the opportunity of my men being
+asleep: Yet it is probable the murderers lost their own lives;
+for, being four leagues from land, and having no boat, they
+probably jumped into the sea on the re-appearance of our ship,
+thinking to swim to land, and met the death they so justly
+merited.</p>
+
+<p>This tragical affair spoiled the satisfaction we had enjoyed
+for two days past, on account of our prize, and raised an
+universal melancholy among us. On seeing this sudden change, our
+prisoners became much alarmed, looking at each other, as if
+fearful we might revenge on them the fate of our unhappy
+companions: And, on my side, I became alarmed lest their dreadful
+apprehensions might stir them up to some desperate attempt, they
+being eighty in number, while we were not at this time above
+seventeen on board, and when altogether only twenty-five that
+could stand on our legs. I was therefore compelled to appear
+somewhat stern, in ordering all our prisoners into the stern
+gallery, except the nobleman and a few of the chiefs, while we
+kept a strict guard in the great cabin. The Spanish gentlemen
+lamented the murder of our men, and their own hard fate, in
+having been in some measure witnesses, and let fall some
+expressions, by which I perceived they were afraid I meant to
+shew some severities to their people on this occasion. Having a
+good interpreter between us, I assured them I was not of any such
+revengeful disposition, and besides, that the laws of my country
+would restrain me, if I were, as I acted by my king's commission,
+whose orders strictly forbid all acts of inhumanity or oppression
+towards our prisoners; on which assurance they might rest
+satisfied of their safety. In reply to this, they begged me to
+think myself secure, as to themselves and countrymen, now my
+prisoners, declaring on their honour that they would make no
+attempt against us, and that they could never make a sufficient
+return for the generous treatment I had given them.
+Notwithstanding this declaration, I took measures to secure our
+numerous prisoners of the meaner sort; for which purpose, after
+taking out of the Holy Sacrament all her jerked beef that
+remained fit for use, I placed them in that vessel, under the
+command of Espina, former commander of the Conception after the
+death of Desorio.</p>
+
+<p>Next day, being as willing to get rid of them, as they were to
+get back their own ship, I took every thing out of the Conception
+that could be of use to us, sufficient for twelve months
+provisions of bread, flour, sugar, and sweetmeats,[278] both for
+ourselves and the Success, which we expected to meet with at the
+Tres Marias. I took also away her launch and negroes, the latter
+to assist us in working our ship, not having sufficient strength
+to manage her in the long run before us of 175 degrees. I then
+delivered up the Conception to Espina and the rest, after being
+three days in our possession: which was not only an act of
+generosity to our prisoners, but an act of prudence with regard
+to ourselves. The next great point to be managed, was to get our
+people to consent to sail so far north as California, previous to
+our intended voyage to the East Indies, for which we were not in
+so good a condition as we could wish, though much better than
+before, and even than we had any reason to have expected, every
+thing considered. We had a good ship, with fifteen guns and
+sufficient ammunition, together with a reasonable quantity of
+provisions; but we still wanted to complete our wood and water
+for so long a voyage, the procuring of which was necessarily our
+first care. The ship's company were for going to Quibo for this
+purpose, as nearest us, but that place was attended by two
+important inconveniences. The first was the danger of the road,
+as the stormy season was coming on, and we were but indifferently
+provided with ground tackle, which must expose us to many
+dangers. The second was, that Quibo was but at a small distance
+from Panama, and we had reason to fear the Spaniards might send a
+ship of war from thence in search of us; as we had now no hopes
+that peace had taken place, and had consequently laid aside all
+thoughts of surrendering. On these considerations, we plied up to
+the island of Cano, where we soon did our business, having a good
+boat.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 278: Betagh charges Shelvocke on this
+occasion, with the concealment of a considerable treasure, taken
+in the Conception, of which some account will be given at the
+conclusion of the voyage.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On our passage to that island, the sweetmeats of all kinds
+were divided among our messes; and one day a man complained that
+he had got a box of marmalade into which his knife could not
+penetrate, and desired therefore to have it changed. On opening
+it, I found it to contain a cake of virgin silver, moulded on
+purpose to fill the box, weighing 200 dollars; and on examining
+the rest, we found five more of the same kind. These cakes of
+silver, being very porous, were nearly of the some weight with so
+much marmalade, and were evidently contrived for the purpose of
+defrauding the king of Spain of his fifths, which he exacts from
+all silver procured in the mines of Peru. We doubtless left many
+such cakes behind in the Conception, so that this contrivance
+served them both to wrong their king, and to deceive their
+enemies. A similarly vexatious affair occurred in a prize taken
+by the Success, in which there was a considerable quantity of
+<i>pinos</i>, or masses of virgin silver, in the form of bricks,
+artfully plaistered over with clay, and dried in the sun. As the
+Spaniards in Peru never burn their bricks, Clipperton and his
+people took these for real bricks, and threw a great number of
+them overboard as so much rubbish, and did not discover the
+deception until four or five only remained. Every thing taken in
+the Conception, was divided according to the articles settled at
+Juan Fernandez, which gave me only six shares, instead of sixty;
+and the people refused to allow me an hundred pounds, which I had
+laid out of my own money, for necessary supplies at the island of
+St Catharines.</p>
+
+<p>I now found myself under many difficulties as to the course we
+were to pursue, because the company knew well enough that there
+was no necessity of going farther than the lat. of 13&deg; N. for
+going to the East Indies. I had therefore to represent the
+advantage of cleaning and repairing our ship at Porto Segnro, in
+California, and I had much difficulty to persuade them. I at last
+brought them to my purpose, when we sailed from Cano northwards.
+Having inconstant gales and bad weather, we went between seventy
+and eighty leagues out to sea, in hopes of meeting more settled
+weather. When at sixty leagues from the land, the winds still
+continued variable, but at between seventy and eighty, they
+settled at E.N.E. and N.E. at which distance we continued till in
+lat. 20&deg; N. not being sensible of any currents in all that
+distance, and being also entirely out of the way of the frightful
+ripplings and overfalls of water which we used frequently to meet
+with nearer the land. These used often to alarm us when becalmed
+in deep water, hearing a noise as of the fall of water in passing
+through a bridge, a considerable time before it came up to us,
+and which afterwards passed us at a very great rate. All the
+effect this had on the ship, was to make her answer the helm
+wildly, if we had any wind; and when we happened to meet any of
+these moving waters very near the shore, we could not perceive
+that we either gained or lost ground, though we sometimes
+continued in them for a quarter of an hour. I have seen these
+overfalls to come both from the eastward and the westward. By
+getting well out to sea, we not only got clear of these
+inconveniences, but also were out of the way of the
+<i>vandevals</i>, or black season, which had already begun on the
+coast; for at Cano, and in going there, we felt very hard gusts,
+with black rolling water, frequent and violent thunder and
+lightning, and heavy showers of rain.</p>
+
+<p>In this passage we were continually accompanied by vast shoals
+of fish, as dolphins, bonitas, albicores, and angel-fish. These
+last are shaped like salmon, and have scales like them, but have
+tails like dolphins, and nearly resemble them when, in the water,
+appearing in all the beautiful colours displayed by the dolphin.
+Besides, they are the best for eating of any fish that swim near
+the surface. We were continually pestered with flocks of the
+birds called boobies, and their intolerably stinking dung proved
+an indescribable nuisance, in spite of all the pains that could
+be taken to clean our decks, yards, and tops. We reached the
+islands of <i>Tres Marias</i> in the beginning of August, but
+could see no signs of Captain Clipperton having been there. We
+were also disappointed in our expectation of procuring water; as,
+after the strictest search we could make in all the three
+islands, nothing like a spring could be found, though former
+writers mention their having found water in abundance. After
+spending three days in our ineffectual search for water in these
+islands, I thought it best to stand over for the main land of
+California, as well for procuring what was wanting to our ship,
+as in hopes of meeting once more with the Success.</p>
+
+<h2>END OF VOLUME TENTH.</h2>
+
+<hr align="center" width="50%">
+<pre>
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of A General History and Collection of
+Voyages and Travels, Volume X, by Robert Kerr
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK VOYAGES AND TRAVELS, VOLUME X ***
+
+***** This file should be named 13130-8.txt or 13130-8.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/1/3/1/3/13130/
+
+Produced by Robert Connal, Graeme Mackreth and PG Distributed
+Proofreaders. This file was produced from images generously made
+available by the Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions.
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+</pre>
+</body>
+</html>
+
diff --git a/old/13130.txt b/old/13130.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..22fa425
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/13130.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,20277 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of A General History and Collection of Voyages
+and Travels, Volume X, by Robert Kerr
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: A General History and Collection of Voyages and Travels, Volume X
+       Arranged in systematic order:
+       Forming a complete history of the origin and progress of navigation,
+       discovery, and commerce, by sea and land, from the earliest ages to
+       the present time.
+
+Author: Robert Kerr
+
+Release Date: August 7, 2004 [EBook #13130]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK VOYAGES AND TRAVELS, VOLUME X ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Robert Connal, Graeme Mackreth and PG Distributed
+Proofreaders. This file was produced from images generously made
+available by the Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+A GENERAL HISTORY AND COLLECTION of VOYAGES AND TRAVELS,
+
+ARRANGED IN SYSTEMATIC ORDER:
+
+FORMING A COMPLETE HISTORY OF THE ORIGIN AND PROGRESS OF NAVIGATION,
+DISCOVERY, AND COMMERCE, BY SEA AND LAND, FROM THE EARLIEST AGES TO THE
+PRESENT TIME.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+BY
+
+ROBERT KERR, F.R.S. & F.A.S. EDIN.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+ILLUSTRATED BY MAPS AND CHARTS.
+
+VOL. X.
+
+MDCCCXXIV.
+
+
+
+CONTENTS OF VOL. X.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+PART II. BOOK IV. CONTINUED.
+
+CHAP. I--Early Circumnavigations, or Voyages round the World,
+
+Introduction,
+
+CHAP. I.--Voyage of Ferdinand Magellan round the World, in 1519-1522,
+
+SECT. I. Some Account of Magellan, previous to the Commencement of the
+Voyage,
+
+II. Proceedings of the Voyage from Seville to Patagonia, and wintering
+there,
+
+III. Prosecution of the Voyage, till the Death of Magellan,
+
+IV. Continuation of the Voyage to its Conclusion,
+
+CHAP. II. Voyage by Sir Francis Drake round the World, in 1517-1580,
+
+SECT. I. Introduction, and Preparation for the Voyage,
+
+II. Narrative of the Voyage from England to the Straits of Magellan,
+
+III. Incidents of the Voyage, from the Straits of Magellan to New
+Albion,
+
+IV. Continuation of the Voyage, from New Albion to England.
+
+V. Reception of Sir Francis Drake in England, and some Notices of his
+remaining Actions,
+
+SECT. VI First Supplement to the Voyage of Sir Francis Drake; being an
+Account of Part of the foregoing Navigation, by Nuno da Silva,
+
+VII Second Supplement, being the Voyage of Mr John Winter, after parting
+from Sir Francis Drake,
+
+CHAP. III--Voyage of Sir Thomas Candish round the World, in 1586-1588,
+
+Introduction,
+
+SECT. I. Narrative of the Voyage from England to the Pacific,
+
+II. Transactions on the Western Coast of America,
+
+III. Voyage Home to England,
+
+IV. Second Voyage of Sir Thomas Candish, intended for the South Sea, in
+1591
+
+Sec. 1. Incidents in the Voyage, till the Separation of the Ships,
+
+Sec. 2. Disastrous Result of the Voyage to Sir Thomas Candish,
+
+Sec. 3. Continuation of the Voyage of the Desire, Captain Davis, after
+parting from Sir Thomas Candish,
+
+CHAP. IV. Voyage of Oliver Van Noort round the World, in 1538-1601,
+
+Introduction,
+
+SECT. I. Narrative of the Voyage.
+
+II. Voyage of Sebald de Weert, to the South Sea and Straits of Magellan,
+in 1598,
+
+Sec. 1. Incidents of the Voyage from Holland to the Straits of Magellan,
+
+Sec. 2. The Fleet passes through the Straits of Magellan into the South
+Sea, and is forced to return,
+
+Sec. 3. Incidents daring their second Residence in the Straits of Magellan,
+
+Sec. 4. Voyage from the Straits to Holland,
+
+CHAP. V--Voyage of George Spilbergen round the World, in 1614-1617,
+
+SECT. I. Narrative of the Voyage, from Holland to the South Sea,
+
+II. Transactions in the South Sea, along the Western Coast of America,
+
+III. Voyage Home from America, by the East Indies and Cape of Good Hope,
+
+CHAP. VI--Voyage round the World, in 1615-1617, by William Cornelison
+Schouten and Jacques Le Maire, going round Cape Horn,
+
+Introduction,
+
+SECT. I. Journal of the Voyage from the Texel to Cape Horn,
+
+II. Continuation of the Voyage, from Cape Horn to the Island of Java,
+
+CHAP. VII--Voyage of the Nassau Fleet round the World, in 1623-1626,
+under the Command of Jaques Le Hermite,
+
+Introduction,
+
+SECT. I. Incidents of the Voyage from Holland to the South Sea,
+
+II. Transactions of the Fleet on the Western Coast of America,
+
+III. Voyage Home from the Western Coast of America,
+
+CHAP. VIII--Voyage round the World, in 1683-1691, by Captain John Cooke,
+accompanied by Captain Cowley, and Captain William Dampier,
+
+Introduction,
+
+SECT. I. Narrative of the Voyage by Captain Cowley, till he quitted the
+Revenge on the Western Coast of America,
+
+II. Continuation of the Narrative of Captain Cowley, from leaving the
+Revenge, to his Return to England,
+
+III. Sequel of the Voyage, as far as Dampier is concerned, after the
+Separation of the Nicholas from the Revenge,
+
+CHAP. IX--Voyage round the World, by William Funnell, in 1703-1706,
+
+Introduction,
+
+SECT. I. Narrative of the Voyage, till the Separation of Funnell from
+Dampier,
+
+II. Sequel of the Voyage of William Funnell, after his Separation from
+Captain Dampier,
+
+III. Brief Account of Stradling, Clipperton, and Dampier, after their
+respective Separations, till their Returns to England,
+
+CHAP. X--Voyage round the World, by Captain Woods Rogers, and Stephen
+Courtney, in 1708-1711,
+
+Introduction,
+
+SECT. I. Narrative of the Voyage, from England to the Island of Juan
+Fernandez,
+
+II. Proceedings of the Expedition on the Western Coast of America,
+
+III. Sequel of the Voyage, from California, by Way of the East Indies,
+to England,
+
+CHAP. XI--Voyage round the World, by Captain John Clipperton, in
+1719-1722,
+
+Introduction,
+
+SECT. I. Narrative of the Voyage, from England to Juan Fernandez,
+
+II. Proceedings of the Success in the South Seas,
+
+III. Voyage of the Success from the Coast of Mexico to China,
+
+IV. Residence of Captain Clipperton at Macao, and Returns from thence to
+England,
+
+CHAP. XII--Voyage round the World, by Captain George Shelvocke, in
+1719-1722,
+
+Introduction,
+
+SECT. I. Narrative of the Voyage from England to the South Sea,
+
+II. Proceedings in the South Sea, till Shipwrecked on the Island of Juan
+Fernandez,
+
+III. Residence on the Island of Juan Fernandez,
+
+IV. Farther Proceedings in the South Sea, after leaving Juan Fernandez,
+
+A GENERAL HISTORY AND COLLECTION OF VOYAGES AND TRAVELS.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+PART II. (CONTINUED.)
+
+BOOK IV.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+CHAPTER I.
+
+EARLY CIRCUMNAVIGATIONS, OR VOYAGES ROUND THE WORLD.
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+
+In this _fourth_ book of the _second_ part of our arrangement, it is
+proposed to give a history of the principal Circumnavigations, or
+Voyages Round the World, previous to the reign of our present venerable
+sovereign. This book, therefore, comprises a period of 226 years, from
+the year 1519, when Magellan sailed from Spain on the first
+circumnavigation of the globe, till the year 1744, when Commodore Anson
+returned to England from a similar expedition. The more recent
+circumnavigations, which have taken place since the year 1760, chiefly
+under the munificent and enlightened patronage of GEORGE III. or in
+imitation of these, and which have largely contributed to extend, and
+almost to render perfect, the geography and hydrography of the
+terraqueous globe, are intended to form a separate division, in a
+subsequent part of our arrangement.
+
+The accurate knowledge which we now possess of the form and dimensions
+of this globe of earth and water which we inhabit, has been entirely
+owing to the superior skill of the moderns in the mathematical sciences,
+as applicable to the practice of navigation, and to the observation and
+calculation of the motions of the heavenly bodies, for the ascertainment
+of latitudes and longitudes. It would require more space than can be
+conveniently devoted on the present occasion, to give any clear view of
+the geographical knowledge possessed by the ancients, together with a
+history of the progress of that science, from the earliest times,
+neither do the nature and objects of the present Collection of Voyages
+and Travels call for any such deduction, of which an excellent epitome
+will be found in the History of Geography, prefixed to Playfair's System
+of Geography.
+
+The ancients laboured under almost absolute incapacities for making
+extensive voyages or discoveries by sea, proceeding from ignorance of
+the form and dimensions of the earth, and other causes. They were but
+indifferently versed in the practical part of astronomy, without which,
+and those instruments which have been invented almost exclusively by the
+moderns, for measuring the paths, distances, and relative positions of
+the heavenly bodies, it is impossible to launch out with any tolerable
+success or safety on the trackless ocean. They were ignorant also of
+that wonderful property of the magnet or loadstone, which, pointing
+invariably towards the north, enables the modern mariner to know his
+precise course, at all times of the day of night, though clouds and
+thick mists may hide the luminaries of heaven from his observation,
+which were the only means of direction known to the ancients.
+
+Various systems and theories appear to have prevailed among the ancients
+respecting the figure and motion of the earth; some justly enough
+supposing it to be a ball or sphere, suspended in infinite space, while
+others conceived it to be a flat surface, floating upon and surrounded
+by an interminable ocean. The just conceptions of some ancient
+philosophers, respecting the spherical figure of the earth, and its
+diurnal motion around its own axis, were superseded by others of a more
+popular nature, and forgotten for many ages. Lactantius and Augustine,
+two fathers of the catholic church, unfortunately adopted the idea of
+the earth being a flat surface, infinitely extending downwards;
+grounding this false notion upon a mistaken interpretation of the holy
+scriptures, or rather seeking assistance from them in support of their
+own unphilosophical conceptions. So strongly had this false opinion
+taken possession of the minds of men, in our European world, even after
+the revival of learning in the west, that Galileo was imprisoned by the
+holy inquisitors at Rome for asserting the sphericity of the earth, and
+the doctrine of _antipodes_, and had to redeem his liberty and life, by
+writing a refutation of that heretical doctrine, which satisfied the
+inquisitors, yet convinced the world of its truth.
+
+Columbus assuredly grounded his grand discovery of America upon the
+knowledge of the earth being a sphere; and had not the new western world
+intervened, his voyage had probably been the first circumnavigation. In
+modern times, an idea has been advanced that Columbus only retraced the
+steps of some former navigator, having seen certain parts of the grand
+division of the world which he discovered, already delineated on a
+globe. It were improper to enter upon a refutation of this idle calumny
+on the present occasion; yet it is easy to conceive, that the possessor
+of that globe, may have rudely added the reported discoveries of
+Columbus, to the more ancient delineations. At all events, Columbus was
+the first person who conceived the bold idea that it was practicable to
+sail round the globe. From the spherical figure of the earth, then
+universally believed by astronomers and cosmographers, in spite of the
+church, he inferred that the ancient hemisphere or continent then known,
+must of necessity be balanced by an equiponderant and opposite
+continent. And, as the Portuguese had discovered an extensive track by
+sailing to the eastwards, he concluded that the opposite or most
+easterly coast of that country might certainly be attained, and by a
+nearer path, by crossing the Atlantic to the westwards. The result of
+this profound conception, by the discovery of America, has been already
+detailed in the _Second_ Book of this collection; and we now proceed in
+this _Fourth_ Book to detail the various steps of other navigators, in
+prosecution of this grand design of surrounding the globe, in which many
+curious and interesting discoveries have been made, and by which
+geographical knowledge and practical navigation have been brought to
+great degrees of perfection.
+
+Before commencing the narrative appropriated for this division of our
+arrangement, it is proper to give the following complete table of all
+the circumnavigators, within the period assigned to the present portion
+of this collection; with the names of the ports from which they sailed,
+and the dates of their respective voyages, and returns.--Ed.
+
+                   |_Sailed from_|                 |_Returned_.
+    1. Ferdinand,  | Seville,         | Aug. 10, 1519.  | Sept. 8, 1522.
+       Magellan,   | in Spain,        |                 |
+    2. Sir Francis | Plymouth Sound,  | Dec. 30, 1577.  | Sept. 16, 1580.
+       Drake,      |                  |                 |
+    3. Sir Thomas  | Plymouth,        | July 25, 1586.  | Sept. 9, 1588.
+       Candish,    |                  |                 |
+    4. Oliver van  | Goeree,          | Sept. 13, 1598. | Aug. 26, 1601.
+       Noord,      |                  |                 |
+    5. George      | Texel,           | Aug. 8, 1614.   | July 1, 1617.
+       Spilbergeny,|                  |                 |
+    6. Shouten and | Texel,           | June 24, 1615.  | July 1, 1617.
+       LeMair,     |                  |                 |
+    7. Nassau      | Goeree,          | April 29, 1623. | Jan. 21, 1626.
+       fleet,      |                  |                 |
+    8. Cowley,[A]  | Achamack, in     | Aug. 23, 1683.  | Oct. 12, 1686.
+                   | Virginia,        |                 |
+    9. William     | Achamack,        | Aug. 28, 1683.  | Sept. 16, 1691.
+       Dampier,[A] |                  |                 |
+   10. Dampier and | the Downs,       | Aug. 9, 1703.   | Aug. 1706.
+       Funnel,     |                  |                 |
+   ll. Wood Rogers,| Bristol,         | June 15, 1708.  | Oct. 1, 1711.
+      and Courtney,|                  |                 |
+   12. John        | Plymouth,        | Feb. 15, 1719.  | June, 1722.
+       Clapperton, |                  |                 |
+   13. George      | Plymouth,        | Feb. 15, 1719.  | Aug. 1, 1722.
+       Shelvocke   |                  |                 |
+   14. Roggewein,  | Texel,           | July 17, 1721.  | July 11, 1723.
+   15. George      | St Helens,       | Sept. 18, 1740. | June 15, 1744.
+       Anson,      |                  |                 |
+
+[Footnote A: These two are conjoined in Chap. VIII. of this book, for
+reasons which will appear there sufficiently obvious.--E.]
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+CHAPTER I.
+
+VOYAGE OF FERDINAND MAGELLAN ROUND THE WORLD, IN 1519--1522.[1]
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Some Account of Magellan, precious to the Commencement of his Voyage._
+
+
+Owing to the discoveries made under the authority of the sovereign of
+Castile, the Portuguese were excessively jealous of the safety of their
+possessions in the East Indies. At length, after various negociations,
+the authority of the pope was interposed, then considered as supreme
+among the princes of Europe who were in communion with the church of
+Rome. By a bull or papal decree, all countries discovered, or to be
+discovered, in the East, were declared to belong to the crown of
+Portugal, and all that were found in the west were to be the property of
+Spain. Yet this measure rather smothered than extinguished the flames of
+contention; as both courts readily listened to any proposals that tended
+to aggrandise the one at the expence of the other. This spirit of
+contention between the courts of Spain and Portugal, gave occasion to
+several men of enterprise, who happened to be dissatisfied by the delays
+or refusal of either of these courts, in countenancing their projects,
+to apply themselves for employment to the other. Among those who took
+this method of advancing their fortunes, was Ferdinand Magalhaens, now
+generally known by the name of Magellan. He was a gentleman of good
+family in Portugal, who had addicted himself from his youth to maritime
+affairs, and had acquired great skill both in the theory and practice of
+navigation. He seemed formed by nature for the achievement of great
+exploits, having all the qualities requisite to compose the character of
+a truly great man. With a courage which no danger could appal, he
+possessed the utmost calmness of temper and sweetness of disposition, by
+which all who conversed with him were engaged to love and esteem his
+character. He was naturally eloquent, both in illustrating and proving
+the reasonableness of his own opinions, and in converting others from
+their erroneous preconceived notions. Above all, he possessed that
+steady and persevering resolution, which not only enabled him to
+vanquish the greatest difficulties, but gave such appearance of success
+to every thing be promised or undertook, as secured the confidence of
+all who were under his command. As these extraordinary qualities would
+have distinguished him in any station of life, so they were remarkably
+useful in the present enterprise, by which he gained immortal
+reputation, although he lost his life before its completion.
+
+[Footnote 1: Harris' Collection, I. 6. The utmost pains have been taken
+to narrate this expedition in the clearest manner, by comparing all the
+different relations of the Spanish and Portuguese writers. We regret
+much, however, the loss of a large history of this voyage, by P. Martyr,
+which was burnt in the sack of Rome, when taken by the Constable de
+Bourbon.--_Harris_.]
+
+Don Ferdinand Magellan had served with much credit in India, under the
+famous Albuquerque, and thought that he merited some recompence for his
+services; but all his applications were treated with coldness and
+contempt by the great, which was intolerable to a person of his spirit.
+He associated, therefore, with men of like fortunes, whose merits had
+been similarly neglected, and particularly with one Ray Falero, a great
+astronomer, whom the Portuguese represented as a conjuror, retiring
+along with him to the Spanish court, where be made propositions for new
+discoveries to Cardinal Ximenes, who was then prime minister of Spain.
+The Portuguese ambassador used all imaginable pains to counteract these
+designs, and solicited the court to deliver up Magellan and his
+companion as deserters, even representing Magellan as a bold talkative
+person, ready to undertake any thing, yet wanting capacity and courage
+for the performance of his projects. He even made secret proposals to
+Magellan, offering him pardon and great rewards to desist from his
+present purpose, and to return to the service of his own sovereign. All
+these arts were unavailing, as the Spanish ministry, now competent
+judges of these matters, were satisfied of the probability of the
+discoveries proposed by Magellan and his coadjutor Falero, who were both
+received into favour, made knights of the order of St Jago, and had
+their own terms granted to them.
+
+The grounds on which this expedition was founded were as follow. The
+opinion advanced by Columbus, of the possibility of reaching the East
+Indies by sailing to the west, was assumed as certainly well founded,
+though he had not been able to accomplish it; and it was asserted, that
+it could not be attended with any insuperable difficulty to sail from
+the South Sea, then recently discovered, to the Molucca Islands. The
+grand desideratum was to find a passage westwards, from the Atlantic
+Ocean into the new-found South Sea, which they expected might be met
+with through the Rio de la Plata, or by some other opening on that
+eastern coast of South America. Should this succeed, Spain might then
+reap the benefit of both the Indies; since, if this discovery were made
+by way of the _west_, it would then fall expressly within the grant of
+the papal bull to Spain.
+
+In consequence of these proposals, it was agreed that Magellan and the
+other adventurers were to be furnished by the crown of Spain with five
+ships, manned by 234 men, with provisions for two years; and that the
+adventurers should reap a twentieth part of the clear profit, the
+government of any islands they might discover to be vested in them and
+their heirs for ever, with the title of Adelantado. The agreed, fleet of
+five ships was accordingly fitted out for the expedition at Seville,
+consisting of the Trinidada, in which Magellan sailed as admiral, and
+having a Portuguese pilot named Stephen Gomez; the Santa Vittoria,
+commanded by Don Luis de Mendoza; the St Antonio, Don Juan de
+Carthagena; the St Jago, Don Juan Serrano; and the Conception, Don
+Gaspar de Quixada. According to some authors, the number of men in these
+five ships amounted to 237, though by most they are said to have been
+250, among whom were thirty Portuguese, upon whom Magellan chiefly
+depended for naval skill; as he likewise did greatly upon Serrano, who
+had left the service of Portugal in like manner with himself, after
+having served for many years in India, and some time in the Moluccas, of
+which islands they were now going in search.
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_Proceedings of the Voyage from Seville to Patagonia, and wintering
+there_.
+
+Great hopes of success were entertained from this voyage, from the known
+experience of the commanders, although its real object was carefully
+concealed by Magellan, who merely gave out to the other adventurers that
+it was intended for the discovery of new countries, by which they
+believed themselves bound to the certain acquisition of gold. They set
+sail from Seville, in high expectations of acquiring riches, on the 10th
+of August, 1519. The 3d October, the fleet arrived between Cape Verd and
+the islands of that name. After being detained by tedious calms on the
+coast of Guinea for seventy days, they at last got to the south of the
+line, and held on their course to the coast of Brazil, of which they
+came in sight in about the latitude of 23 deg. S. They here procured
+abundant refreshments of fruits, sugar-canes, and several kinds of
+animals.
+
+Proceeding about 2 1/2 degrees farther south, they came into a country
+inhabited by a wild sort of people, of prodigious stature, fierce and
+barbarous, and making a strange roaring noise, more like the bellowing
+of bulls, than human speech. Notwithstanding their prodigious bulk,
+these people were so nimble that none of the Spaniards or Portuguese
+were swift enough to overtake them. At this place there was a fine river
+of fresh water, the mouth of which was fully seventeen leagues wide, in
+which there were seven islands, the largest of which they named the
+island of St Mary, where they procured some _jewels_.[2] Proceeding
+along this coast towards the south, they fell in with two islands so
+abounding in seals and penguins, that they might have laden all their
+five ships with them in a short time. The penguins are a black, heavy,
+unwieldy fowl, extremely fat, covered with a sort of down instead of
+feathers, and having a bill like that of a raven; drawing their entire
+subsistence from the sea, as fish is their only food.
+
+[Footnote 2: These jewels may possibly have been a few pearls. The
+indications in the text are too vague to afford even a guess at the
+situation of the river and its seven islands; only it may be mentioned,
+that the most northern part of the coast of Patagonia is in lat. 38 deg. S.
+and that no river answering the description in the test is to be found
+on all that coast--E.]
+
+They next advanced to about the latitude of 49 deg. 30' S. where they were
+forced to remain for five months, owing to the severity of the weather,
+it being now winter in these southern parts. They here passed their time
+very unpleasantly, and for a long time believed the country to be
+uninhabited, but at length a savage came to visit them. He was a brisk
+jolly fellow, very merrily disposed, and came towards them singing and
+dancing. On coming to the shore of the haven in which the ships had
+taken refuge, he stood there for some time, throwing dust upon his head.
+This being observed, some persons were sent ashore to him in a boat, and
+making similar signs of peace; and he came along with them on board,
+without any appearance of fear or hesitation. The size and stature of
+this person was such as in some measure entitled him to be deemed a
+giant, the head of one of the ordinary-sized Spaniards only reaching to
+his waist, and he was proportionally large made. His body was painted
+all over, having a stag's horn delineated on each cheek, and large
+circles round the eyes. The natural colour of his skin was yellow, and
+his hair was white. His apparel consisted of the skin of a beast,
+clumsily sewed together, covering his whole body and limbs from head to
+foot. The beast of which this was the skin, was as strange as the
+wearer, being neither mule, horse, nor camel, but partaking of all
+three, having the ears of a mule, the tail of a horse, and the body
+shaped like a camel. The arms of this savage consisted of a stout bow,
+having for a string the gut or sinew of that strange beast; and the
+arrows were tipped with sharp stones, instead of iron heads.
+
+The admiral made this man be presented with meat and drink, of which he
+readily partook, and seemed to enjoy himself very comfortably, till
+happening to see himself in a mirror which was given him among other
+toys, he was so frightened that he started back and overturned two of
+the men, and did not easily recover his composure. This giant fared so
+well, that several others came to visit the ships, and one of them
+behaved with so much familiarity and good humour, that the Europeans
+were much pleased with him. This person shewed them one of the beasts in
+the skins of which they were cloathed, from which the foregoing
+description must have been taken.[3] Being desirous to make prisoners of
+some of these giants, Magellan gave orders for this purpose to some of
+his crew. Accordingly, while amusing them with toys, they put iron
+shackles on their legs, which at first they conceived had been fine
+ornaments like the rest, and seemed pleased with their jingling sound,
+till they found themselves hampered and betrayed. They then fell a
+bellowing like bulls, and imploring the aid of _Setebos_ in this
+extremity, whom they must therefore have conceived some good and
+compassionate being, as it is not to be conceived they would crave
+relief from an evil spirit. Yet the voyagers reported strange things, of
+horrible forms and appearances frequently seen among these people, such
+as horned demons with long shaggy hair, throwing out fire before and
+behind: But these seem mere dreams or fables.
+
+[Footnote 3: This must have been a Lama, Paca, or Chilihueque, of the
+camel genus, vulgarly called Peruvian sheep.--E.]
+
+Most of the natives of this country were dressed in the skins of beasts,
+similarly to the one who first visited them. Their hair was short, yet
+tied up by a cotton lace or string. They had no fixed dwellings, but
+used certain moveable huts or tents, constructed of skins similar to
+those in which they were cloathed, which they carry with them from place
+to place, as they roam about the country. What flesh they are able to
+procure, they devour quite raw without any kind of cookery, besides
+which their chief article of food is a sweet root, which they name
+_capar._ The voyagers report that these savages were very jealous of
+their women; yet do not mention having seen any. Their practice of
+physic consists in bleeding and vomiting: The former being performed by
+giving a good chop with some edge tool to the part affected; and the
+latter is excited by thrusting an arrow half a yard down the throat of
+the patient. These people, to whom Magellan gave the name of _Patagons_,
+are so strong, that when one only was attempted to be made prisoner of
+by nine Spaniards, he tired them all; and, though they got him down,
+and even bound his hands, he freed himself from his bonds, and got away,
+in spite of every endeavour to detain him. Besides _capar_, the name of
+a root already mentioned, and which likewise they applied to the bread
+or ship's biscuit given them by the Spaniards, the only words reported
+of their language are _ali_ water, _amel_ black, _cheiche_ red,
+_cherecai_ red cloth; and _Setebos_ and _Cheleule_ are the names of two
+beings to whom they pay religious respect, _Setebos_ being the supreme,
+and _Cheleule_ an inferior deity.
+
+The haven in which they remained there five months, was named by
+Magellan, Port St Julian, of which and the surrounding country they took
+solemn possession for the crown of Spain, erecting a cross as a signal
+of sovereignty. But the principal reason of this long stay was in
+consequence of a mutiny which broke out, not only among the common men,
+but was even joined or fomented rather by some of the captains,
+particularly by Don Luis de Mendoza, on whom Magellan had placed great
+reliance. On this occasion Magellan acted with much spirit; for, having
+reduced the mutineers to obedience, he brought their ringleaders to
+trial for plotting against his life; hanged Don Luis de Mendoza and a
+few others of the most culpable; leaving Don Juan de Carthagena and
+others, who were not so deeply implicated, among the Patagons. The
+weather growing fine, and the people being reduced to obedience,
+Magellan set sail from Port St Julian, and pursued his course to the
+latitude of 51 deg. 40' S. where finding a convenient port, with abundance
+of fuel, water, and fish, he remained for two months longer.
+
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_Prosecution of the Voyage, till the Death of Magellan_.
+
+Again resuming the voyage, they proceeded along the eastern shore of
+Patagonia to the latitude of 52 deg. S. when the entrance into the famous
+straits still known under the name of Magellan were discovered, through
+which the squadron continued its voyage, finding these straits about 110
+leagues in length, from east to west, with varying breadths, in some
+places very wide, and in others not more than half a league across; the
+land on both sides being high, rugged, and uneven, and the mountains
+covered with snow. On reaching the western end of these straits, an open
+passage was found into the great South Sea, which sight gave Magellan
+the most unbounded joy, as having discovered that for which he had gone
+in quest, and that he was now able practicably to demonstrate what he
+had advanced, that it was possible to sail to the East Indies by way of
+the West. To the point of land from which he first saw this
+so-long-desired prospect, he gave the name of _Cape Desiderato._ This
+prospect was not, however, so desirable to some of his followers; for
+here one of his ships stole away, and sailed homewards alone.
+
+Magellan entered the great South Sea on the 28th November, 1620, and
+proceeded through that vast expanse, to which he gave the name of the
+Pacific Ocean, for three months and twenty days, without once having
+sight of land. During a considerable part of this period they suffered
+extreme misery from want of provisions, such as have been seldom heard
+of. All their bread and other provisions were consumed, and they were
+reduced to the necessity of subsisting upon dry skins and leather that
+covered some of the rigging of the ships, which they had to steep for
+some days in salt water, to render it soft enough to be chewed. What
+water remained in the ships was become putrid, and so nauseous that
+necessity alone compelled them to use it. Owing to these impure and
+scanty means of subsistence, their numbers daily diminished, and those
+who remained alive became exceedingly weak, low-spirited, and sickly. In
+some, the gums grew quite over their teeth on both sides; so that they
+were unable to chew the tough leathern viands which formed their only
+food, and they were miserably starved to death. Their only comfort under
+this dreadful state of famine was, that the winds blew them steadily and
+gently along, while the sea remained calm and almost unruffled, whence
+it got the name of Pacific, which it has ever since retained.
+
+In all this length of time, they only saw two uninhabited islands, which
+shewed no signs of affording them any relief Sometimes the needle varied
+extremely, and at other times was so irregular in its motions, as to
+require frequent touches of the loadstone to revive its energy. No
+remarkable star was found near the south pole, by which to ascertain the
+southern ordinal point, or to estimate the latitude. Instead of an
+antarctic polar star, two clusters of small stars were observed, having
+a small space between them, in which were two stars of inconsiderable
+size and lustre, which seemed to be at no great distance from the pole,
+by the smallness of the circle they described in their diurnal course.
+When at the distance of 20 deg. from the south pole, they saw a high island
+to which they gave the name of _Cipangue_; and at 15 deg. another equally
+high, which they named _Sinnodit_.[4] They sailed in one gulf; or
+stretch of sea, at least 4000 leagues, and made their longitude, by
+estimation or reckoning, 120 deg. W. from the place of their original
+departure. By this time they drew near the equinoctial line, and having
+got beyond that into 13 deg. N. latitude, they made for the cape called
+_Cottigare_ by old geographers; but missing it in that old account of
+its latitude, they understood afterwards that it is in the latitude of
+12 deg. N.[5]
+
+[Footnote 4: The text is evidently here erroneous, as Magellan entered
+the Pacific Ocean in lat. 47 deg. S. and there is not the smallest reason to
+suspect he had been forced into the latitudes of 70 deg. and 75 deg. S. Instead
+therefore of the south pole, we ought probably to understand the
+equator. As these two islands were uninhabited, the names given them
+must have been imposed by Magellan or his associates. Cipangue is the
+name given to Japan by Marco Polo, and is of course a singular blunder.
+The other is unintelligible, and the voyage is so vaguely expressed, as
+even to defy conjecture.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 5: This cape Cottigare in the South Sea, in lat. 12 deg. or 13 deg. N.
+is utterly unintelligible, unless it refer to the southern part of Guam,
+Guaham, or Goad, one of the Ladronea, which they soon discovered, and
+which is actually in 13 deg. N.--E.]
+
+On the 6th March, 1521, they fell in with a cluster of islands, being
+then in lat. 12 deg. N. and 146 deg. of west longitude from the place of their
+first setting out.[6] These islands were called by Magellan _Islas de
+los Ladrones_, or the islands of robbers, and are called in modern
+geography the Ladrones or Marian islands. They here went on shore to
+refresh themselves, after all the fatigues and privations of their
+tedious voyage through the Pacific Ocean; but the thievish disposition
+of the islanders would not allow them any quiet repose, as they were
+continually stealing things from the ships, while the sick and worn-out
+mariners were endeavouring to refresh themselves on shore. Resolving
+therefore to deliver themselves from the disturbance of these pilferers,
+they marched a small party of armed men into the interior of one of
+these islands, where they burnt some houses, and slew some of the
+natives. But, though this correction awed them a little for the present,
+it did not mend their thievish disposition; for which reason they
+resolved to seek out some other place, where they might enjoy some
+repose in safety.
+
+[Footnote 6: By the reckoning in the text, the longitude of the Ladrone
+islands, which they now discovered, would be 151 deg. 25' W. from
+Greenwich. But their true longitude is 216 deg. 30' W. Their latitude is
+between 13 deg. and 20 deg. 50' N.--E.]
+
+No order or form of government was observed to subsist among these
+natives of the Ladrones, but every one seemed to live according to his
+own humour or inclination. The men were entirely naked, the hair both of
+their heads and beards being black, that on their heads so long as to
+reach down to their waists. Their natural complexion is olive, and they
+anoint themselves all over with cocoa-nut oil. Their teeth seemed
+coloured artificially black or red, and some of them wore a kind of
+bonnet made of palm leaves. The women are better favoured and more
+modest than the men, and all of them wore some decent coverings made of
+palm leaves. Their hair was black, thick, and so very long as nearly to
+trail on the ground. They seemed careful industrious housewives,
+spending their time at home in fabricating mats and nets of palm leaves,
+while the men were occupied abroad in stealing. Their houses are of
+timber, covered with boards and great leaves, and divided within into
+several apartments. Their beds are of mats laid above each other, and
+they use palm leaves by way of sheets. Their only weapons are clubs, and
+long poles headed with bone. Their food consists of cocoa-nuts, bananas,
+figs, sugar-canes, fowls, and flying-fishes. Their canoes are oddly
+contrived and patched up, yet sail with wonderful rapidity, the sails
+being made of broad leaves sewed together. Instead of a rudder they use
+a large board, with a staff or pole at one end, and in sailing, either
+end of their canoes is indifferently used as head or stern. They paint
+their canoes all over, either red, white, or black, as hits their fancy.
+These people are so taken with any thing that is new, that when the
+Spaniards wounded several of them with their arrows, and even pierced
+some quite through, they would pluck out the arrows from their wounds,
+and stare at them till they died. Yet would they still continue to
+follow after the ships, to gaze upon them as they were going away, so
+that at one time they were closely surrounded by at least two hundred
+canoes filled with natives, admiring those wonderful contrivances.
+
+The 10th of March, the Spaniards landed on the island of _Zamul_, about
+30 leagues from the Ladrones.[7] Next day they landed on _Humuna_, an
+island not inhabited, yet well deserving of being so, where they found
+springs of excellent water, with abundance of fruit-trees, gold, and
+white coral. Magellan named this _the island of good signs_. The natives
+from some of the neighbouring islands, a people of much humanity, came
+here to them shortly after, very fair and of friendly dispositions, who
+seemed well pleased at the arrival of the Spaniards among them, and came
+loaded with presents of fish, and wine made from the cocoa-tree,
+promising speedily to bring other provisions. This tree somewhat
+resembles the date palm, and supplies the natives with bread, oil, wine,
+vinegar, and even physic. The wine being drawn from the tree itself, and
+all the rest from the fruit or nut. To procure the wine, they eat off
+part of a branch, and fasten to the remaining part a large reed or
+hollow cane, into which the liquor drops, being like white-wine in
+colour, and of a grateful tartish taste. When a good quantity of this is
+drawn off, it is put into a vessel, and is their cocoa-wine without
+farther preparation.
+
+[Footnote 7: In this voyage the term Ladrones seems confined to the most
+southern islands of this group, as there are no other islands for a very
+considerable distance in any direction. The entire group stretches about
+6 deg. 10' nearly N. and S. or 125 leagues. In modern geography, Guaham and
+Tinian are the largest islands of the group. Urac, Agrigan, Analajam,
+and Saypan, are the names of some others of the Ladrones. The names in
+the text do not occur in modern maps. Thirty leagues from Guaham, the
+southernmost island, would bring them to Tinian.--E.]
+
+The fruit, which is as large as a man's head, has two rinds or coats.
+The outermost is green, and two fingers thick, entirely composed of
+strings and threads, of which they make all the ropes that are used in
+their canoes. Under this there is another rind, or shell rather, of
+considerable thickness, and very hard. This they burn and pulverize, and
+use it in this state as a remedy for several distempers. The kernel
+adheres all round the inside of this shell, being white, and about the
+thickness of a finger, having a pleasant taste, almost like an almond:
+this, when dried, serves the islanders instead of bread. In the inside
+of this kernel there is a considerable hollow space, containing a
+quantity of pure limpid liquor, of a very cordial and refreshing nature,
+which sometimes congeals into a solid, and then lies like an egg within
+the hollow kernel. When they would make oil, they steep the fruit in
+water till it putrifies, and then boil it over the fire to separate the
+oil, the remaining water becoming vinegar, when exposed some time to the
+sun. Lastly, by mixing the kernel with the liquor lodged within its
+cavity, and straining it through a cloth, they make a very good milk.
+The cocoa-nut tree resembles the date palm, except in not being so
+rugged and knotty. They will continue to thrive for an hundred years, or
+more, and two of them will maintain a family of ten persons in wine
+plentifully, if used by turns, each tree being drawn for seven or eight
+days, and then allowed to rest as long.
+
+According to their promise, the islanders returned with a farther supply
+of provisions, and entered into much familiar cordiality with the
+Spaniards. A number of them having been invited on board the admiral's
+ship, a gun was discharged by way of entertaining them, but put them in
+such terror, that they were ready to leap over board, yet were soon
+reconciled by good usage and presents. The name of their island was
+_Zulvan_, of no great compass; yet considerable for its productions.
+They had in their barks various kinds of spices, as cinnamon, cloves,
+nutmegs, ginger, and mace, with several ornaments made of gold, which
+they carried up and down to sell as merchandise. Although without
+apparel, these people were dressed, or ornamented rather, in a more
+costly manner than Europeans; for they had gold earrings in each ear,
+and various jewels fastened by means of gold to their arms; besides
+which, their daggers, knives, and lances were richly ornamented with the
+same metal.[8] Their only cloathing consisted of a kind of apron, of a
+species of cloth made very ingeniously from the rind of a tree. The most
+considerable men among them were distinguished from the common people by
+a piece of silk ornamented with needle-work, wrapped round their heads.
+These islanders were gross, broad; and well set on their limbs, of an
+olive complexion, having their bodies constantly rubbed over with
+cocoa-nut oil.
+
+[Footnote 8: It is highly probable that the valuable spiceries, gold,
+and jewels, of the text, are mere fables, invented by Pigafetta, to
+enhance the value of his voyage, as such productions are now unknown to
+the Ladrone islands.--E.]
+
+Departing from this place on the 21st March, 1521, and steering between
+west and south-west, they passed among the islands named _Cenalo,
+Huinanghan, Hibussan,_ and _Abarian._[9] The 28th, they came to the isle
+of _Buthuan,_ where they were kindly received by the king and prince,
+who gave them considerable quantities of gold and spices; in return for
+which, Magellan presented the king with two cloth vests, giving knives,
+mirrors, and glass beads to the courtiers. Along with the king and his
+nobles, Magellan sent two persons on shore, one of whom was Antonio
+Pigafetta, the historian of the voyage. On landing, the king and his
+attendants all raised their hands to heaven, and then the two
+Christians, who imitated this ceremony, which was afterwards observed in
+drinking. The king's palace was like a great hay-loft, mounted so high
+upon great posts of timber, that they had to go up by means of ladders,
+and was thatched with palm-leaves. Though not Christians, these
+islanders always made the sign of the cross at their meals, at which
+they sat cross-legged like tailors. At night, instead of candles, they
+burnt a certain gum of a tree, wrapped up in palm-leaves. After
+entertaining them in their respective palaces, the king and prince of
+_Buthuan_ dismissed Pigafetta and his companion with noble presents,
+filled with admiration of their guests, whom they believed to be men
+above the rank of common mortals, being especially astonished at
+Pigafetta's writing, and reading what he had written, which was too
+mysterious for their comprehension.
+
+[Footnote 9: Not one of these islands is known to modern geography; and
+the whole of this voyage is related so loosely and unsatisfactorily,
+that it is impossible to trace its course, except at well-known
+places.--E.]
+
+In this island, by sifting the earth of a certain mine, they procured
+great lumps of gold, some as large as walnuts, and some even as big as
+eggs; all the vessels used by the king at table being made of this
+precious metal.[10] The king of this island was a very comely personage,
+of an olive complexion, with long black hair, his body being perfumed
+with the odoriferous oils of storax and benzoin, and painted with
+various colours. He had gold-rings in his ears, and three rings of that
+metal on each of his fingers. His head was wrapped round by a silken
+veil or turban, and his body was cloathed to the knees in a cotton
+wrapper, wrought with silk and gold. He wore at his side a sword or
+dagger, with a haft of gold, and a scabbard of carved wood. This country
+is so rich, that one of the natives offered a crown of massy gold in
+exchange for six strings of glass beads; but Magellan would not allow
+such bargains, lest the Spaniards might appear too greedy of gold.
+
+[Footnote 10: These stories of gold in such wonderful abundance, are
+obvious falsehoods contrived by Pigafetta, either to excite wonderment,
+or to procure the command of an expedition of discovery; a practice we
+have formerly had occasion to notice in the early Spanish conquests and
+settlements in America.--E.]
+
+The natives were active and sprightly, the common men being quite
+naked, except painting their bodies; but the women are cloathed from the
+waist downwards, and both sexes wore gold ear-rings. They all
+continually chewed _areka_, a fruit like a pear, which they cut in
+quarters, rolling it up in a leaf called _betel_, resembling a bay-leaf,
+alleging that they could not live without this practice. The only
+religious rite observed among them, was looking up to heaven, to which
+they raised their joined hands, and calling on their god _Abba_.
+Magellan caused a banner of the cross, with the crown of thorns and the
+nails, to be exposed and publicly reverenced by all his men in the
+king's presence; desiring the king to have it erected on the top of a
+high mountain in the island, as a token that Christians might expect
+good entertainment in that country, and also as a security for the
+nation; since, if they prayed to it devoutly, it would infallibly
+protect them against lightning and tempests, and other evils. This the
+king promised should be done, knowing no better, and glad to be so
+easily defended from thunderbolts.
+
+Leaving this island, and conducted by the king's pilots, the Spaniards
+came to the isles of _Zeilon, Zubut, Messana,_ and _Caleghan_, of which
+_Zubut_ was the best, and enjoyed the best trade. In _Massana_, they
+found dogs, cats, hogs, poultry, goats, rice, ginger, cocoa-nuts,
+millet, panic, barley, figs, oranges, wax, and plenty of gold. This
+island lies in lat. 9 deg. 40' N. and in long. 162 deg. from their first
+meridian.[11] After remaining here eight days, they sailed to the N.W.
+passing the islands of _Zeilon, Bohol, Canghu, Barbai_, and _Caleghan_;
+in which last islands there are bats as large as eagles, which they
+found to eat, when dressed, like poultry. In this island, among various
+other birds, there was one kind resembling our hens, but having small
+horns, which bury their eggs in the sand, where they are hatched by the
+heat of the sun. _Caleghan_ is about twenty miles W. from _Messana_; and
+_Zubut_, to which they now directed their course, fifty leagues W. from
+_Caleghan_. In this part of the voyage they were accompanied by the king
+of _Messana_, whom Magellan had greatly attached to him by many
+services.
+
+[Footnote 11: This is 16 deg. of longitude beyond the Ladrones, which are in
+216 deg. 30' W. and would consequently give the longitude of Zubut as 232 deg.
+30' W. or 107 deg. 30' E. from Greenwich. Yet from what appears afterwards,
+they seem to have been now among the Philippine islands, the most
+easterly of which are in long. 126 deg. E. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+They entered the port of _Zubut_ on the 7th April, and on coming near
+the city all the great guns were fired, which put the inhabitants into
+great consternation. This, however, was soon quieted, by the arrival of
+a messenger at the city from the ships, who assured the king of _Zubut_
+that this was an ordinary piece of respect to his dignity, whom they had
+come to visit on their way to the Moluccas, hearing of his fame from the
+king of _Messana_. The messenger also desired that the Spaniards might
+be furnished with provisions, in exchange for their commodities. The
+king then observed, that it was customary for all ships that came to his
+port to pay tribute, which custom he expected they would comply with as
+well as others. To this the messenger replied, that the Spanish admiral
+was the servant of so powerful a sovereign, that he could make no such
+acknowledgment to any prince whatever. That the admiral was willing to
+be at peace with him, if he thought proper to accept his friendship: but
+if otherwise, he should soon have his fill of war. A certain Moor, who
+happened to be present, told the king that these people were certainly
+the Portuguese, who had conquered Calicut and Malacca, and advised him
+therefore to beware of provoking them to hostilities; whereupon the king
+referred the matter to his council, promising to give an answer next
+day, and in the meantime sent victuals and wine aboard the ships.
+
+The king of Messana, who was a potent prince, went ashore to confer with
+the king of Zubut, who in the end became almost ready to pay tribute
+instead of demanding it; but Magellan only asked liberty to trade, which
+was readily granted. Magellan persuaded the king and his principal
+people to become Christians, which they did after some religious
+conferences, and were all afterwards baptised. This example spread over
+the whole island, so that in eight days the whole inhabitants became
+Christians, except those of one village of idolaters, who absolutely
+refused. The Spaniards therefore burnt this village, and erected a cross
+on its ruins.[12]
+
+[Footnote 12: This incredible story has been considerably abridged on
+the present occasion, and is too absurd to merit any commentary.--E.]
+
+The people of this island deal justly with each other, having the use of
+weights and measures. Their houses are of timber, raised high in the air
+on posts, so that they ascend to them by ladders. They told us of a
+certain sea-fowl in this country, called _Lughan_, about the size of a
+crow, which the whales sometimes swallow alive, in consequence of which
+their hearts are eaten by this bird; and many whales are killed in this
+manner, the bird being afterwards found alive in the carcase of the
+whale. The Spaniards drove a most advantageous trade at this place,
+receiving from the natives ten pesos of gold, of a ducat and a half
+each, in exchange for fourteen pounds of iron; and procured abundance of
+provisions for mere trifles.
+
+Not far from Zabut is the isle of _Mathan_, the inhabitants of which go
+quite naked, except a slight covering in front, all the males wearing
+gold-rings hanging to the preputium. This island was governed by two
+kings, one of whom refused to pay tribute to the king of Spain, on which
+Magellan determined to reduce him by force of arms. The Indian had an
+army of between six and seven thousand men, armed with bows and arrows,
+darts and javelins, which Magellan attacked with sixty men, armed with
+coats of mail and helmets. The battle was for a long time doubtful, when
+at last Magellan advanced too far among the barbarians, by whom he was
+at first wounded by a poisoned arrow, and afterwards thrust into the
+head by a lance; which at once closed the life and actions of this noble
+commander. About eight or nine of the Christians were slain in this
+engagement, besides many wounded. After this disaster the Spaniards
+ineffectually attempted to redeem the body of their unfortunate admiral;
+and the other king, who had embraced the Christian religion without
+understanding its tenets, abandoned it upon this reverse of fortune to
+the Spaniards, and made peace with his rival, engaging to put all the
+Christians to death. With this view, he invited the Spaniards to a
+banquet, when he made them all be cruelly murdered, only reserving Don
+Juan Serrano alive, in order to procure a supply of artillery and
+ammunition for his ransom. With these conditions the Spaniards would
+have willingly complied, but found so much prevarication and treachery
+in the conduct of the natives, and were so intimidated by the miserable
+fate of their companions, that they put to sea, leaving the unfortunate
+Serrano to his miserable fate.
+
+
+SECTION IV.
+
+_Continuation of the Voyage to its Conclusion_.
+
+A little before the death of Magellan, news were received of the
+Moluccas, the great object of this voyage. Leaving Mathan, they sailed
+for the island of _Bohol_, where they burnt the Conception, one of their
+ships, transferring its men, ammunition, and provisions into the other
+two. Directing their course from thence to the S.W. they came to the
+island of _Paviloghon_, inhabited by negroes. From thence they came to a
+large island named _Chippit_, in lat. 8 deg. N. about 50 leagues W. from
+Zabut, and about 170 deg. of longitude from their first departure.[13] This
+island abounds in rice, ginger, goats, hogs, hens, &c. and the Spaniards
+were kindly received by the king, who, in token of peace, marked his
+body, face, and the tip of his tongue, with blood which he drew from his
+left arm; in which ceremony he was imitated by the Spaniards. Sailing
+about 40 leagues from thence between the W. and S.W. or W.S.W. they came
+to a very large island, named _Caghaian_, thinly inhabited. The
+inhabitants were Mahometans, exiles from Borneo, rich in gold, and using
+poisoned arrows; a common practice in most of these islands. Sailing
+W.N.W. from this island 25 leagues, they came to _Puloan_, a fruitful
+island in lat. 9 deg. 20' N. and 179 deg. 20' of longitude W. from their first
+departure.[14] This island yields much the same productions as Chippit,
+together with large figs, battatos, cocoa-nuts, and sugar-canes; and
+they make a kind of wine of rice, which is very intoxicating, yet better
+than palm-wine. The natives go entirely naked, use poisoned arrows, and
+are greatly addicted to cock-fighting.
+
+[Footnote 13: Bohal is one of the Philippine islands, in lat. 10 deg. N. and
+long. 123 deg. 50' E. from Greenwich. Paviloghon and Chippit must
+accordingly refer to some islands of the same group farther west.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 14: Pulcan, Pulowan, or Paragua, the westermost of the
+Philippines, an island of considerable extent, in lat. 10 deg. N. and long.
+119 deg. E. from Greenwich. From the direction of the voyage, the great
+island of Chaghaian of the text, was probably that now called
+Magindano.--E.]
+
+They came next to the great and rich island of Borneo, in lat. 5 deg. 5' N.
+the chief city containing not less than 25,000 houses. The king was a
+Mahometan of great power, keeping a magnificent court; and was always
+attended by a numerous guard. He sent several presents to the Spanish
+captains, and made two elephants be led out with rich silk trappings, to
+bring the Spanish messengers and presents to his palace. He has ten
+secretaries of state, who write every thing concerning his affairs on
+the bark of trees. His household is managed by women, who are the
+daughters of his principal courtiers. This country affords camphor,
+which is the gum of a tree called _Capar_; as also cinnamon, ginger,
+myrabolans, oranges, lemons, sugar, cucumbers, melons, and other
+fruits, with abundance of beasts and birds, and all other products of
+the equinoctial climate. The natives continually chew betel and areka,
+and drink arrack.
+
+Leaving Borneo, they went to the island of _Cimbubon_, in, lat. 8 deg. 7'
+N.[15] where they remained forty days, caulking and repairing their
+ships, and taking in a supply of fresh water. In the woods of this isle
+they found a tree, the leaves of which, when they fall to the ground,
+move from place to place as if alive. They resemble the leaves of the
+mulberry, having certain fibres produced from their sides resembling
+legs, and suddenly spring away when touched. Pigafetta, the author of
+this relation, kept one of these leaf-animals in a dish for eight
+days.[16] This isle produces ostriches, wild hogs, and crocodiles. They
+caught here a fish having a head like a sow, with two horns, its body
+consisting of one entire bone, and having a substance on its back
+resembling a saddle.
+
+[Footnote 15: Perhaps Balambangan, in 8 deg. 20' N.]
+
+[Footnote 16: Harris observes, that this account is quite incredible:
+Yet it is certainly true that an insect of this description exists,
+though not the leaf of a tree, as erroneously supposed by
+Pigafetta.--E.]
+
+From hence they sailed to certain islands named _Salo Taghima_, which
+produce fine pearls, and from whence the king of Borneo once procured
+two large round pearls, nearly as big as eggs. They came next to a
+harbour in the island of _Sarangani_, reported to yield both pearls and
+gold. At this place they pressed two pilots to conduct them to the
+Moluccas; and passing the islands named _Ceana, Canida, Cabiaia, Camuca,
+Cabalu, Chiari, Lipan_, and _Nuza_, they came to a fair isle in lat 3 deg.
+20' N. named _Sangir_.[17] Passing five other islands, they at last
+espied a cluster of five islands, which they were informed by the pilots
+were the Moluccas. This was on the 6th November, 1521, twenty-seven
+months after their departure from Spain. Trying the depth of the sea in
+the neighbourhood of these islands, they found it no less than fifty-one
+fathoms; though the Portuguese report that this sea is too shallow for
+being navigated, and is besides rendered extremely dangerous by numerous
+rocks and shelves, and by continual darkness; doubtless to deter any
+other nation from attempting to go there.
+
+[Footnote 17: Sangir is in lat. 8 deg. 35' N. and long. 125 deg. 25 E. from
+Greenwich. The other islands enumerated in the text do not occur in
+modern maps.--E.]
+
+They came to anchor in the port of _Tiridore_ [Tidore] on the 8th
+November, this being one of the chief of the Molucca islands. Although
+a Mahometan, the king of this island was so fond of the Spaniards, that
+he invited them to come on shore as into their own country, and to use
+the houses as their own, calling them his brethren and children; even
+changing the name of his island from Tidore to Castile. These Molucca
+islands are five in number, _Ternate, Tidore, Mortir, Makian_, and
+_Batchian_. Ternate is the chief of these islands, and its king once
+ruled over them all; but at this time Mortir and Makian were
+commonwealths, but Batchian was a separate monarchy. The clove-tree is
+very tall, and as big about as the body of a man, having large boughs,
+with leaves resembling those of the bay-tree, and the bark is of an
+olive colour. The cloves grow in large clusters at the extremities of
+the boughs; being at first white, but growing red when they come to
+maturity, and grow black when dried. While green, the flavour of the
+wood, bark, and leaves, is almost as strong as that of the cloves. These
+are gathered twice each year, in June and December, and if not taken in
+time, become very hard. Every man has his own particular trees, on which
+they bestow very little care. They have also in this isle a peculiar
+sort of tree, the bark of which, being steeped in water, may be drawn
+out in small fibres as fine as silk; of which the women make themselves
+a sort of aprons, which are their only cloathing.
+
+Near Tidore is the large island of _Gilolo_, which is divided between
+the Mahometans and idolaters. The two Mahometan kings have themselves
+contributed liberally to the population of the island; one of them
+having 600 children, and the other 650. The pagans are more moderate in
+their conduct in this respect than the Mahometans, and are even less
+superstitious; yet it is said that they worship, for the rest of the
+day, whatever they first see every morning. In this island there grows a
+peculiar sort of reed, as big as a man's leg, which is full of limpid
+wholesome water. On the 12th November, a public warehouse was opened by
+the Spaniards in the town of Tidore, for the sale of their merchandise,
+which were exchanged at the following rates. For ten yards of good red
+cloth, they had one bahar of cloves, containing four cantars or quintals
+and six pounds; the cantar being 100 pounds. For fifteen yards of
+inferior cloth, they had one bahar. Likewise a bahar for 35 drinking
+glasses, or for 17 _cathyls_ of quicksilver. The islanders also brought
+all sorts of provisions daily to the ships, together with excellent
+water from certain hot springs in the mountains where the cloves grow.
+They here received a singular present for the king of Spain, being two
+dead birds about the size of turtle-doves, with small legs and heads
+and long bills, having two or three long party-coloured, feathers at
+each side, instead of wings, all the rest of their plumage being of a
+uniform tawny colour. These birds never fly except when favoured by the
+wind. The Mahometans allege that these birds come from Paradise, and
+therefore call them the birds of God.
+
+Besides cloves, the Molucca islands produce ginger, rice, sago, goats,
+sheep, poultry, popinjays, white and red figs, almonds, pomegranates,
+oranges and lemons, and a kind of honey which is produced by a species
+of fly less than ants. Likewise sugar-canes, cocoa-nuts, melons, gourds,
+and a species of fruit, called _camulical_, which is extremely cold. The
+isle of Tidore is in lat. 0 deg. 45' N. and long. 127 deg. 10' E.[18] and about
+9 deg. 30' W. from the Ladrones,[19] in a direction nearly S.W. Formerly the
+natives of these islands were all heathens, the Moors or Mahometans
+having only had footing there for about fifty years before the arrival
+of the Spaniards. Ternate is the most northerly of these islands, and
+Batchian is almost under the line, being the largest of them all.[20]
+
+[Footnote 18: This is the true position, reckoning the longitude from
+Greenwich. In the original the longitude is said to be 170 deg. W. from the
+first meridian of the voyagers, being Seville in Spain, which would give
+174 deg. E. from Greenwich; no great error, considering the imperfect way in
+which the longitude was then reckoned at sea.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 19: This is a gross error, perhaps of the press, as the
+difference of longitude is 16 deg. 30'.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 20: The northern end of Batchian is in lat. 0 deg. 28', and its
+southern extremity in 0 deg. 40', both south.--E.]
+
+Departing from Tidore, the Spaniards were attended by several kings in
+their canoes to the isle of _Mare_,[21] where this royal company took
+leave of them with much apparent regret. In this isle they left one of
+their ships which was leaky, giving orders to have it repaired, for its
+return to Spain. Being now reduced to forty-six Spaniards and thirteen
+Indians, they directed their course from Mare towards the S.W. passing
+the isles named _Chacotian, Lagoma, Sico, Gioghi, Caphi, Sulacho,
+Lumatola, Tenetum, Bura_ [Bouro?] _Arubon_ [perhaps Amboina?] _Budia,
+Celaruri, Benaia, Ambalao, Bandon_ [perhaps Banda?] _Zorobua, Zolot,
+Moceuamor, Galian_, and _Mullua_, besides many others possessed by
+Mahometans, heathens, and canibals. They stopped fifteen days at
+_Mallua_ to repair their ship, being in 8 deg. N. lat. and 169 deg. long.
+according to their reckoning. This island produces much pepper, both
+long and of the ordinary round kind. The tree on which it grows climbs
+like ivy, and its leaf resembles that of the mulberry. The natives are
+canibals; the men wearing their hair and beards; and their only weapons
+are bows and arrows.
+
+[Footnote 21: Marhee Foul, a small isle between Tidore and Motir.--E.]
+
+Leaving _Mallua_ [Moa?] on the 25th January, 1522, they arrived at
+_Tima_ [Timor?] five leagues to the S.S.W. This island is in lat. 10 deg. S.
+and long. 125 deg. E. where they found ginger, white sanders, various kinds
+of fruits, and plenty of gold and provisions of all kinds. The people of
+the Moluccas, Java, and _Lozen_ [Luzon, or the principal island of the
+Philippines], procure their sanders-wood from hence. The natives are
+idolaters, and have the _lues venerea_ among them, which is a common
+distemper in all the islands of this great archipelago.
+
+Leaving Timor on the 11th February, they got into the great sea called
+_Lantchidol_, steering W.S.W. and leaving the coast of a long string of
+islands on the right hand, and taking care not to sail too near the
+shore, lest the Portuguese of Malacca should chance to discover them;
+wherefore they kept on the outside of Java and Sumatra. That they might
+pass the Cape of Good Hope the more securely, they continued their
+course W.S.W. till they got into the latitude of 42 deg. S. though so sore
+pinched by hunger and sickness, that some were for putting in at
+Mosambique for refreshments; but the majority concluded that the
+Portuguese would prove bad physicians for their distempers, and
+determined therefore to continue the voyage homewards. In this course
+they lost twenty-one of their men, and were at length constrained to put
+in at the island of St Jago, one of the Cape Verds, to throw themselves
+on the mercy of the Portuguese. So, venturing ashore, they opened their
+miserable case to the Portuguese, who at first relieved their
+necessities; but the next time they went on shore, detained all who came
+as prisoners.
+
+Those who still remained in the ship, now reduced to thirteen, having no
+mind to join their companions in captivity, made all the haste they
+could away, and being favoured by the winds, they arrived in the harbour
+of San Lucar, near Seville, on the 7th September, 1522. He who commanded
+this vessel, which had the good fortune to return from this remarkable
+voyage, was Juan Sebastian Cano, a native of Guetaria in Biscay, a
+person of much merit and resolution, who was nobly rewarded by the
+emperor Charles V. To perpetuate the memory of this first voyage round
+the world, the emperor gave him for his coat of arms the terrestrial
+globe, with this motto, _Prima me circumdedisti_. The newly-discovered
+straits at the southern extremity of South America, were at first named
+the _Straits of Vittori_, after the ship which returned; but they soon
+lost that name, to assume another which becomes them much better, in
+honour of their discoverer, and have ever since been denominated the
+_Straits of Magellan_.
+
+This most celebrated voyage took up three years and twenty-seven days,
+having commenced on the 10th August, 1519, and concluded on the 7th
+September, 1522. By its success, the skill and penetration of the great
+Columbus, who, only twenty-seven years before, had first asserted the
+possibility of its performance, were fully established. One circumstance
+was discovered in this voyage, which, although reason have taught us to
+explain, could hardly have been expected _a priori_. On the return of
+the Spaniards to their own country, they found they had lost a day in
+their reckoning, owing to the course they had sailed; whereas had they
+gone by the east, and returned by the west, they would have gained a day
+in their course.
+
+Another circumstance, which served to heighten the reputation of
+Magellan, who deserves the sole honour of this voyage, was the
+difficulty experienced by other able commanders, who endeavoured to
+fellow the course he had pointed out. The first who made the attempt
+were two Genoese ships in 1526, but unsuccessfully. In 1528, Cortes, the
+conqueror of Mexico, sent two ships with 400 men, to endeavour to find
+their way through the straits of Magellan to the Moluccas, but without
+effect. Sebastian Cabot tried the same thing, by order of Emanuel king
+of Portugal, but was unable to succeed.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II.
+
+VOYAGE BY SIR FRANCIS DRAKE ROUND THE WORLD, IN 1577-1580.[22]
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Introduction, and Preparation for the Voyage_.
+
+
+In his Annals of the reign of Queen Elizabeth, the learned Cambden
+informs us, that the father of the celebrated Sir Francis Drake was the
+Rev. Edmund Drake, vicar of Upnore on the river Medway, and says he had
+this information from Sir Francis himself. Yet the industrious John
+Stowe says, that he was the eldest of twelve brethren, the sons of
+Edmund Drake, mariner, at Tavistock in Devonshire, and was born in 1540.
+Perhaps both accounts may be true; and Mr Edmund Drake, though a mariner
+originally, may have had a competent share of learning, and may have
+been admitted to orders on the final establishment of the Reformation.
+
+[Footnote 22: Hakluyt, IV. 232. Harris, I. p. 14. Oxford Coll. II. sect.
+xvi. Callender's Voy. I. 288. The original account of this voyage was
+published at London, in 4to, in 1600, and reprinted in 1618.--E.]
+
+This celebrated naval hero received the Christian name of Francis from
+his godfather the earl of Bedford, but does not appear to have derived
+any great patronage from that nobleman. He was sent young to sea, as an
+apprentice to the master of a small bark, who traded with France and
+Zealand; and his master, a bachelor, taking a great affection for him,
+left him his bark at his death. At eighteen years of age, he was purser
+of a ship on a voyage to the Bay of Biscay, and at twenty made a voyage
+to the coast of Guinea. In all these voyages he distinguished himself by
+extraordinary courage, and by a sagacity beyond his years. In 1565, his
+laudable desire of glory induced him to venture his all in a voyage to
+the West Indies, which had no success. In 1567, he served under his
+kinsman Sir John Hawkins in the bay of Mexico, but was again
+unfortunate, returning from the voyage rich in character and fame, but
+with almost ruined circumstances. These disappointments served only to
+increase his desire of bettering his fortunes at the expence of the
+grand enemy of his country, against whom he made two other voyages into
+these parts; the first in 1570 with two ships, the Dragon and Swan and
+the second in 1571, in the Swan alone, chiefly for information, that he
+might qualify himself for undertaking some enterprize of greater
+importance; which he at length carried into execution with great courage
+and perseverance.
+
+His character for bravery and seamanship being now established, he soon
+found a sufficient number of persons willing to adventure a part of
+their fortunes in a privateering voyage which he proposed. He
+accordingly sailed from Plymouth on the 24th May, 1572, in the Pasco, a
+ship only of seventy tons, having for his consort the Swan of 250 tons,
+commanded by his brother John Drake, with seventy-three men and boys,
+and provisions for a year. Such were the mighty preparations he had made
+for attacking the power of Spain in the West Indies, in which he
+considered himself justified, in order to make reprisals for the losses
+he had formerly sustained from the Spaniards. In this voyage he
+surprised and plundered the famous town of Nombre de Dios; and soon
+afterwards had a distant view of the South Sea from the top of a high
+tree, which inflamed him with the desire of conducting an English ship
+thither, which attempt he had perhaps never thought of but for that
+circumstance.
+
+In this expedition he acquired immense riches for his owners, and
+considerable wealth for himself; and being of an honourable and generous
+disposition, he scorned to avail himself of advantages, which most other
+men would have considered as their right. Of this we have the following
+remarkable instance. Having presented a cutlass to a captain or cacique
+of the free Indians inhabiting the isthmus of Darien, the cacique gave
+him in return four large ingots of gold, which he immediately threw into
+the common stock, saying, "My owners gave me that cutlass, and it is
+just they should receive their share of its produce." His return to
+England from this successful expedition was equally fortunate, as he
+sailed in twenty-three days from Cape Florida to the Scilly islands.
+Arriving at Plymouth on Sunday, the 9th August, 1573, during divine
+service, the news of his return was carried to church, on which few
+persons remained with the preacher, all the congregation running out to
+welcome the adventurous Drake, who had been absent fourteen months and
+sixteen days in this voyage.
+
+The wealth he gained in this expedition he generously expended in the
+service of his country, equipping no less than three frigates at his own
+expence, which he commanded in person, and with which he contributed
+materially to the reduction of the rebellion in Ireland, under the
+supreme command of the earl of Essex. After the death of that nobleman,
+he chose Sir Christopher Hatton for his patron, then vice-chamberlain to
+the queen, and afterwards lord high-chancellor of England. By his
+interest, not without great opposition, captain Drake obtained a
+commission from queen Elizabeth for the voyage of which it is now
+proposed to give an account, and which he had long meditated. Being thus
+provided with the royal authority, his friends contributed largely
+towards the intended expedition, while he applied himself with all
+diligence to get every thing in readiness for the important undertaking;
+having in view to attack the powerful monarchy of Spain, in its richest
+yet most vulnerable possessions on the western coasts of America, with
+what would now be considered a trifling squadron of five small barks.
+
+The ships, as they were then called, fitted out for this bold
+enterprize, were, the Pelican, afterwards named the Hind, of 100 tons,
+admiral-ship of the squadron, under his own immediate command as
+captain-general; the Elizabeth, vice-admiral, of 80 tons, commanded by
+Captain John Winter, who was lieutenant-general of the expedition; the
+Marigold, a bark of 30 tons, Captain John Thomas; the Swan, a fly-boat
+of 50 tons, Captain John Chester; and the Christopher, a pinnace of 15
+tons, Captain Thomas Moon. These ships were manned with 164 able-bodied
+men, including officers, and were provided with an ample supply of
+provisions, ammunition and stores, for so long and dangerous a voyage.
+Captain Drake likewise provided the frames of four pinnaces, which were
+stowed on board in pieces, ready to be set up as occasion might require.
+He is also said to have made provision for ornament and delight,
+carrying with him a band of musicians, together with rich furniture and
+much silverplate, all the vessels for his table, and many of those
+belonging to the cook-room, being of that metal. This magnificence is
+stated by his biographers, to have been intended as a display for the
+honour of his country among foreign nations.
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_Narrative of the Voyage from England to the Straits of Magellan_.
+
+All things being duly prepared. Captain Drake sailed with his squadron
+from Plymouth Sound, about five in the afternoon of the 15th November,
+1577, giving out that he was bound for Alexandria in Egypt, which had
+been made the pretended object of the voyage, to prevent the court of
+Spain from taking measures for its obstruction. In consequence of a
+violent storm, in which some of the ships sustained damage, he was
+forced to put into Falmouth haven, whence he returned to Plymouth.
+Having repaired all defects, he once more set sail on the 13th December
+of the same year. Avoiding as much as possible to come near the land too
+early, he fell in with Cape Cantin, on the Barbary coast, on the 25th,
+and came to the island of Mogadore on the 27th. In the channel of one
+mile broad, between that island and the main, he found a convenient
+harbour, where he caused one of his pinnaces to be built.
+
+While thus engaged, some of the inhabitants came to the shore with a
+flag of truce, on which the admiral sent a boat to enquire what they
+wanted. One of his men remained as a pledge with the natives, two of
+whom came off to the ship. These informed the admiral by signs, that
+they would next day supply the ships with good provisions; in return for
+which proffered civility, the admiral rewarded them with shoes, some
+linen, and two javelins, and sent them again on shore. Next day, they
+came again to the shore, according to promise; on which occasion, an
+Englishman, named Fry, leapt on shore among them from the boat,
+considering them as friends; but they perfidiously made him a prisoner,
+threatening to stab him if he made any resistance. They then mounted him
+on horseback, and carried him into the interior; but he was afterwards
+sent back in safety to England.
+
+The pinnace being finished, they sailed from Mogadore on the 30th
+December, and arrived at Cape Blanco on the 17th January, 1578. On the
+voyage from Mogadore to Cape Blanco, they took three _Canters_, or
+Spanish fishing-boats, and three caravels. Here they found a Portuguese
+caravel at anchor, bound to the Cape Verd islands for salt, in which
+there were only two mariners. They took possession of this ship, and
+carried her into the harbour of Cape Blanco, where they remained four
+days, during which time the admiral trained his men on shore, to prepare
+them for land service on occasion. At this place they took such
+necessaries as they wanted from the fishermen, as also one of their
+barks or canters of 40 tons, leaving behind a small bark of their own,
+called the Benedict. Leaving this place on the 22d January, they were
+told by the master of the Portuguese caravel, which they carried along
+with them, that abundance of dried _cabritos_ or goats might be procured
+at Mayo, one of the Cape Verd islands, which were yearly prepared there
+for the ships belonging to the king of Spain.
+
+They arrived at Mayo on the 27th January, but the inhabitants refused to
+trade with them, being expressly forbidden to have any intercourse with
+foreigners, by orders from their sovereign. Next day, however, the
+admiral sent a company of 72 armed men on shore under the command of Mr
+Winter and Mr Doughty, to take a view of the island, and to see if any
+refreshments could be procured. They marched accordingly to the chief
+place of the island; and, after travelling three days through the
+mountains, they arrived there before day-break on the fourth day. The
+inhabitants were all fled, but this part of the island seemed more
+fertile and better cultivated than any of the rest. They rested here
+some time, banqueting on delicious grapes, which they found in
+perfection at that season of the year, though the depth of winter in
+England. Mayo abounds with goats, wild poultry, and salt; this last
+being formed in great quantities among the rocks, by the heat of the
+sun; so that the natives have only the trouble of gathering it into
+heaps, and sell it to their neighbours, from which they derive great
+profit. They found here cocoa-nut trees, which have no branches or
+leaves but at the top of the tree, where the fruit grows in clusters.
+They then marched farther into the island, where they saw great numbers
+of goats, but could not get any. They might have furnished themselves
+with some dried carcasses of old goats, which the natives laid purposely
+in their way; but not caring for the refuse of the island, they returned
+to the ships.
+
+Leaving Mayo on the 31st of January, they sailed past the island of St
+Jago, whence three pieces of cannon were fired at them, but without
+doing any injury. This is a large fine island, inhabited by the
+Portuguese; but the mountains are said to be still occupied by Moors,
+who fled thither to deliver themselves from slavery, and have fortified
+themselves in places of difficult access. Near this island they saw two
+ships under sail, one of which they took, and it turned out a valuable
+prize, being laden with wine. The admiral detained this ship, which he
+committed to the charge of Mr Doughty, and took the Portuguese pilot,
+named Nuno da Silva into his service, sending the rest away in his
+pinnace, giving them some provisions, a butt of wine, and their apparel.
+That same night they came to the island of _Fuego_, or the burning
+island. It is inhabited by Portuguese, having a volcano on its northern
+side, which is continually throwing out smoke and flames; yet seems to
+be reasonably commodious. On the south of Fuego there is a very sweet
+and pleasant island, called by the Portuguese _Ilha Brava_, the brave or
+fine island. This is cloathed with evergreen trees, and has many streams
+of fresh water which run into the sea, and are easily accessible; but it
+has no convenient road for ships, the sea being every where too deep for
+anchorage. It is alledged that the summit of Fuego is not higher in the
+air, than are the roots of Brava low in the sea.
+
+Leaving these islands, and approaching the line, they were sometimes
+becalmed for a long time together, and at other times vexed with
+tempests. At all times, when the weather would permit, they had plenty
+of dolphins, bonitos and flying-fish; several of the last dropping in
+their flight on the decks, unable to rise again, because their finny
+wings wanted moisture. Taking their departure from the Cape de Verd
+islands, they sailed 54 days without seeing land; and at length, on the
+5th April, 1578, got sight of the coast of Brazil, in lat. 33 deg. S. The
+barbarous people on shore, discovering the ships, began to practice
+their accustomed ceremonies to raise a storm for destroying their ships,
+making great fires, and offering sacrifices to the devil.[23] The 7th
+April they had thunder, lightning, and rain, during which storm they
+lost sight of the Christopher, but found her again on the 11th; and the
+place where all the ships met together, which had been dispersed in
+search of her, was named Cape _Joy_, at which place the ships took in a
+supply of fresh water. The country here was pleasant and fertile, with a
+sweet and temperate climate; but the only inhabitants seen were some
+herds of deer, though some footsteps of men, apparently of great
+stature, were noticed on the ground. Having weighed anchor, and sailed a
+little farther along the coast, they came to a small and safe harbour,
+formed between a rock and the main, the rock breaking the force of the
+sea. On this rock they killed some sea-wolves, a species of seals, which
+they found wholesome food, though not pleasant.
+
+[Footnote 23: This idea is uncharitable and absurd, as the navigators
+could not know any thing of the motives of these fires, and much less
+about the alleged sacrifices. The fires might have been friendly
+signals, inviting them on shore.--E.]
+
+Going next to lat. 36 deg. S. they sailed up the Rio Plata, and came into 53
+and 54 fathoms, fresh water, with which they filled their water casks;
+but finding no convenient harbour, went again to sea on the 27th of
+April. Sailing still onwards, they came to a good bay, having several
+islands, one of which was well stocked with seals and the others with
+sea fowl, so that they had no want of provisions, together with plenty
+of water. The admiral being ashore on one of these islands, the natives
+came about him, dancing and skipping in a friendly manner, and willingly
+bartered any thing they had for toys; but they had the strange custom of
+refusing to accept of any thing, unless first thrown down on the ground.
+They were a comely strong-bodied people, swift of foot, and of lively
+dispositions. The Marigold and Christopher were dispatched in search of
+a convenient harbour, and soon returned with news of having found one,
+into which all the ships removed. Here the seals were so numerous, that
+above 200 were killed in about an hour. The natives came boldly about
+them, while working ashore, having their faces painted, their only
+apparel being a covering of skin with the fur on, wrapped about their
+waists, and a kind of wreaths round their heads. Each man had a bow,
+about an ell long, and only two arrows. They even seemed to have some
+notion of military discipline, as they ranged their men in an orderly
+manner; and they gave sufficient proof of their agility, by stealing the
+admiral's hat from his head, which could not be recovered.[24] While in
+this bay, the admiral took every thing out of the fly-boat that could be
+of any use; she was then laid on shore and burnt, and all her iron work
+saved for future use.
+
+[Footnote 24: Harris observes, that these were of the nation named
+Patagons by Magellan. But no notice is taken of their stature being
+above the ordinary height.--E.]
+
+Sailing from this place, the fleet came to anchor in Port St Julian on
+the 20th June, where they saw the gibbet still standing, on which
+Magellan had formerly executed some of his mutinous company. Here also
+Admiral Drake executed one Captain Doughty, the most suspected action of
+his life. Mr Doughty had been guilty of certain actions, tending towards
+contention or mutiny, and was found guilty partly on his own confession,
+and partly by proof, taken in good order and as near as might be
+according to the forms of the law of England. Having received the
+communion from Mr Fletcher, chaplain of the admiral's ship, in which
+Captain Drake participated along with him; and after embracing Drake,
+and taking leave of all the company, Mr Doughty prayed fervently for the
+welfare of the queen and whole realm, then quietly laid his head on the
+block. The general then made a speech to the whole company assembled,
+exhorting them to unity and obedience, sacredly protesting that he had
+great private affection for Mr Doughty, and had been solely actuated in
+condemning him to an ignominious death, by his care for the welfare of
+the voyage, the satisfaction of her majesty, and the honour of his
+country.
+
+Leaving this place on the 17th August, they fell in with the eastern
+entrance of the Straits of Magellan on the 20th of that month. The 21st
+they entered the straits, which they found very intricate, with various
+crooked turnings; owing to which, having often to shift their course,
+the wind was frequently adverse, making their passage troublesome and
+dangerous, especially in sudden blasts of wind; for, although there were
+several good harbours, the sea was too deep for anchorage, except in
+some narrow creeks or inlets, or between rocks. On both sides of the
+straits, there are vast mountains covered with snow, their tops reaching
+in many places to great heights, having often two or three ranges of
+clouds below their summits. The air in the straits was extremely cold,
+with almost continual frost and snow; yet the trees and plants retained
+a constant verdure, growing and flourishing in spite of the severity of
+the climate. At the south and east parts of the straits there are
+various islands, through between which the sea breaks in, as at the main
+entrance. The breadth of the straits in some places was only a league,
+which was the narrowest, but in most places two, and in some three
+leagues across. The 24th August, they came to an island in the straits,
+where they found vast quantities of penguins, a sort of water fowl, as
+large as a goose, but which does not fly, and of which they killed 3000
+in less than a day.
+
+
+
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_Incidents of the Voyage, from the Straits of Magellan to New Albion._
+
+
+The 6th September, they reached the western extremity of the straits,
+and entered into the great South Sea or Pacific Ocean. On the 7th, the
+fleet encountered a storm, by which they were driven one degree to the
+southwards of the straits, and more than 200 leagues in longitude back
+from that entrance.[25] They were driven even so far as the lat. of 57 deg.
+20' S. where they anchored among the islands, finding good fresh water
+and excellent herbs.[26] Not far from thence, they entered another bay,
+where they found naked people, ranging about the islands in canoes, in
+search of provisions, with whom they had some intercourse by way of
+barter. Continuing their course towards the north, they discovered
+three islands on the 3d October, in one of which there was an incredible
+number of birds. On the 8th October, they lost company of the Elizabeth,
+the vice admiral, commanded by Captain Winter. At his return home, they
+found that Mr Winter had been forced to take refuge from the storm in
+the straits, whence he returned to England, though many of us feared he
+and his people had perished.
+
+[Footnote 25: This is a gross error, probably a misprint for 20 leagues
+of longitude, as the quantity in the text would have driven them far to
+the eastwards of the straits, into the Atlantic, which is impossible,
+the whole of Tierra del Fuego being interposed.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 26: This too is erroneous, as Cape Horn, not then known, is
+only in lat. 55 deg. 58' 30' S.]
+
+Having now got back to the western entrance of the straits, they made
+sail for the coast of Chili, which the general maps represented as
+trending N.W. but which they found to the east of N. so that these
+coasts had not been fully discovered, or very inaccurately represented,
+for the space of 12 degrees at least, either for the purpose to deceive,
+or through ignorance. Proceeding northwards along the coast of Chili,
+they came to the island of Mocha, in 38 deg. 30' S. latitude, on the 29th
+November, where they cast anchor. The admiral went here ashore with ten
+men, and found the island inhabited by a people who had fled from the
+extreme cruelty of the Spaniards, leaving their original habitations on
+the continent, to enjoy their lives and liberties in security. These
+people at first behaved civilly to the admiral and his men, bringing
+them potatoes and two fat sheep, promising also to bring them water, and
+they received some presents in return. Next day, however, when two men
+went ashore with barrels for water, the natives suddenly assailed and
+killed them. The reason of this outrage was, that they mistook the
+English for Spaniards, whom they never spare when they fall into their
+hands.
+
+Continuing their course along the coast of Chili, they met an Indian in
+a canoe, who mistook them for Spaniards, and told them of a great
+Spanish ship at St Jago, laden for Peru. Rewarding him for this
+intelligence, the Indian conducted them to where the ship lay at anchor,
+in the port of Valparaiso, in lat. 33 deg. 40' S.[27] All the men on board
+were only eight Spaniards and three negroes, who, supposing the English
+to have been friends, welcomed them with beat of drum, and invited them
+on board to drink Chili wine. The English immediately boarded and took
+possession; when one of the Spaniards leapt overboard, and swam ashore
+to give notice of the coming of the English. On this intelligence, all
+the inhabitants of the town, being only about nine families, escaped
+into the country. The admiral and his men landed, and rifled the town
+and its chapel, from which they took a silver chalice, two cruets, and
+an altar cloth. They found also in the town a considerable store of
+Chili wine, with many boards of cedar wood, all of which they carried on
+board their ships. Then setting all the prisoners on shore, except
+one named John Griego, born in Greece, who was detained as a pilot, the
+admiral directed his course for Lima, the capital of Peru, under the
+guidance of this new pilot.
+
+[Footnote 27: More correctly, 33 deg. 00' 30" S. and long. 71 deg. 38' 30" W.
+from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+Being now at sea, they examined the booty in their prize, in which they
+found 25,000 pezos of pure gold of Baldivia, amounting to above 37,000
+Spanish ducats. Continuing their course for Lima, they put into the
+harbour of Coquimbo, in lat. 29 deg. 54' S. where the admiral sent fourteen
+men on shore for water. This small company being espied by the
+Spaniards, they collected 300 horse and 200 foot, and slew one of the
+Englishmen, the rest getting back to the ship. From thence they went to
+a port named _Taropaca_ in Peru, in lat 20 deg. 15' S. where landing, a
+Spaniard was found asleep on the shore, having eighteen bars of silver
+lying beside him, worth about 4000 Spanish ducats, which they carried
+away, leaving him to his repose. Going again on shore, not far from
+thence, in search of water, they met a Spaniard and an Indian, driving
+eight Peruvian sheep, laden with fine silver, each sheep having two
+leather bags on his back, in each of which were about fifty pounds
+weight. These they carried on board, finding in the whole of these bags
+800 pounds weight of silver. From thence they went to _Arica_, in lat.
+18 deg. 40' S. in which port they plundered three small barks of fifty-seven
+bars of silver, each bar being in shape and size like a brick-bat, and
+weighing about twenty pounds. Not having sufficient strength, they did
+not assault the town, but put again to sea, where they met another small
+bark, laden with linen, part of which was taken out, and the bark
+dismissed.
+
+They came to Calao, the port of Lima, in lat. 12 deg. 10' S. on the 13th
+February, 1579, where they found twelve ships at anchor, with all their
+sails down, without watch or guard, all their masters and merchants
+being on shore. On examining the contents of these ships, they found a
+chest full of dollars, with great store of silks and linen, and carried
+away all the silver, and part of the other goods to their own ships.
+Here the admiral got notice of a very rich ship, called the Cacafuego,
+which had sailed for Paita, in lat. 5 deg. 10' S. Pursuing her thither, they
+learnt, before arriving at Paita, that she had sailed for Panama. In
+continuing the pursuit to Panama, they took another, which paid them
+well for their trouble; as, besides her ropes and other tackle, she
+yielded eighty pounds weight of gold, together with a large golden
+crucifix, richly adorned with emeralds.
+
+Continuing to pursue the Cacafuego, the admiral promised to give his
+gold chain to the first person who descried the chase, which fell to the
+share of Mr John Drake, who first discovered her, one morning about
+three o'clock. They came up with her about six, gave her three shots,
+which struck down her mizen-mast, and then boarded. They found this ship
+fully as rich as she was reported, having thirteen chests full of
+dollars, eighty pounds weight of gold, a good quantity of jewels, and
+twenty-six tons of silver in bars.[28] Among other rich pieces of plate
+found in this ship, there were two very large gilt silver bowls, which
+belonged to her pilot. On seeing these, the admiral said to the pilot,
+that these were fine bowls, and he must needs have one of them; to which
+the pilot yielded, not knowing how to help himself; but, to make this
+appear less like compulsion, he gave the other to the admiral's steward.
+The place where this rich prize was taken was off Cape San Francisco,
+about 150 leagues from Panama, and in lat. 1 deg. N. [00 deg. 45'.] When the
+people of the prize were allowed to depart, the pilot's boy told the
+admiral, that the English ship ought now to be called the _Cacafuego_,
+not theirs, as it had got all their rich loading, and that their
+unfortunate ship ought now to be called the _Cacaplata_, which jest
+excited much mirth.[29]
+
+[Footnote 28: Without calculating on the jewels, for which there are no
+data, the silver and gold of this prize could hardly fall short of
+250,000_l_--worth more than a million, in effective value, of the present
+day.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 29: This forecastle joke turns on the meaning of the words,
+Cacafuego and Cacaplata, meaning Fartfire and Fartsilver.--_Harris_.]
+
+Having ransacked the Cacafuego of every thing worth taking, she was
+allowed to depart; and continuing their course westwards, they next met
+a ship laden with cotton goods, China dishes, and China silks. Taking
+from the Spanish owner a falcon of massy gold, having a large emerald
+set in his breast, and chasing such other wares as he liked, the admiral
+allowed this ship to continue her voyage, only detaining her pilot for
+his own use. This pilot brought them to the harbour of Guatalca, in the
+town adjacent to which, he said, there were only seventeen Spaniards.
+Going there on shore, they marched directly to the town-house, where
+they found a judge sitting, and ready to pass sentence on a parcel of
+negroes, who were accused of plotting to set the town on fire. But the
+arrival of the admiral changed affairs, for he made both the judge and
+the criminals prisoners, and carried them all aboard the ships. He then
+made the judge write to the citizens, to keep at a distance, and make no
+resistance; after which the town was plundered, but the only thing
+valuable was about a bushel of Spanish dollars, or rials of plate. One
+of the people took a rich Spaniard fleeing out of town, who ransomed
+himself by giving up a gold chain and some jewels. At this place the
+admiral set some of his Spanish prisoners ashore, together with the old
+Portuguese pilot he took at the Cape Verd islands, and departed from
+thence for the island of Cano. While there, he captured a Spanish ship
+bound for the Philippine islands, which he lightened of part of her
+merchandise, and allowed her to proceed. At this place the admiral
+landed every thing out of his own ship, and then laid her on shore,
+where she was repaired and graved; after which they laid in a supply of
+wood and water.
+
+Thinking he had in some measure revenged the public injuries of his
+country upon the Spaniards, as well as his own private losses, the
+admiral began to deliberate about returning home; but was in some
+hesitation as to the course he ought to steer. To return by the Straits
+of Magellan, the only passage yet discovered, he concluded would throw
+himself into the hands of the Spaniards, who would probably there waylay
+him with a greatly superior force, having now only one ship left, which
+was by no means strong, though very rich.[30] He therefore, on maturely
+weighing all circumstances, determined to proceed by way of the
+Moluccas, and following the course of the Portuguese, to get home by the
+Cape of Good Hope. Endeavouring to put this design in execution, but
+being becalmed, he found it necessary to steer more northwardly along
+the coast of America, in order to get a wind; in which view he sailed at
+least 600 leagues, which was all the way he was able to make between the
+16th of April and the 3d June.
+
+[Footnote 30: We have no account of the loss of any of the squadron,
+except that the Elizabeth was lost sight of after passing the Straits of
+Magellan. Perhaps the other vessels had been destroyed, to reinforce the
+crew of the Hind, weakened by the diseases incident to long
+voyages.--E.]
+
+On the 5th June, being in lat. 43 deg. N. they found the air excessively
+cold, and the severity of the weather almost intolerable; for which
+reason they returned along the coast to the southward, till in lat. 38 deg.
+N. where they found a very good bay, which they entered with a
+favourable wind.[31] The English had here a good deal of intercourse
+with the natives, whose huts were scattered along the shores of this
+bay. These people brought presents of leathers and net-work to the
+admiral, who entertained them with so much kindness, that they were
+infinitely pleased. Though the country is very cold, the natives
+contrive to erect their houses in a very ingenious manner to defend
+themselves from the severity of the weather. Surrounding them by a deep
+trench, they raise great pieces of timber on its outer edge, which close
+all in a point at the top, like the spire of a steeple. Their fire is in
+the middle of this conical hut, and they sleep on the ground strewed
+with rushes, around the fire. The men go naked, but the women wear a
+kind of petticoat of bull-rushes, dressed in the manner of hemp, which
+is fastened round their waists, and reaches down to their hips; having
+likewise a deer-skin on their shoulders. The good qualities of these
+women make amends for their ordinary dress and figure, as they are very
+dutiful to their husbands.
+
+[Footnote 31: This bay of Sir Francis Drake, on the western coast of
+North America, is nearly in lat 58 deg. N. as stated in the text, and long.
+122 deg. 15' W. from Greenwich. It is now named by the Spaniards, the Bay of
+San Francisco in California, on the southern side of which they have a
+mission of the same name--E.]
+
+Soon after his arrival, the admiral received a present from the natives
+of feathers and bags of tobacco, which was given in much form by a
+numerous concourse of the Indians. These convened on the top of a hill
+or rising ground, whence one of their number harangued the admiral,
+whose tent was pitched at the bottom of the hill. When this speech was
+ended, they all laid down their weapons on the summit of the hill,
+whence they descended and offered their presents, at the same time
+civilly returning those which the admiral had before given them. All
+this time the native women remained on the top of the hill, where they
+seemed as if possessed, tearing their hair, and howling in a most savage
+manner. This is the ordinary music of their sacrifices, something of
+that nature being then solemnizing. While the women above were thus
+serving the devil, the men below were better employed, in listening
+attentively to divine service, then performing in the admiral's tent
+These circumstances, though trivial in themselves, are important in
+ascertaining the first discovery of California by the English.
+
+News of the arrival of the English having spread about the country, two
+ambassadors came to the admiral, to inform him that the king was coming
+to wait upon him, and desired to have a token of peace, and assurance of
+safe conduct. This being given to their satisfaction, the whole train
+began to move towards the admiral, in good order, and with a graceful
+deportment. In front came a very comely person, bearing the sceptre
+before the king, on which hung two crowns, and two chains of great
+length. The crowns were made of net-work, ingeniously interwoven with
+feathers of many colours, and the chains were made of bones. Next to the
+sceptre-bearer came the king, a very comely personage, shewing an air of
+majesty in all. This deportment, surrounded by a guard of tall
+martial-looking men, all clad in skins. Then followed the common people,
+who, to make the finer appearance, had painted their faces, some black,
+and some of other colours. All of them had their arms full of presents,
+even the children not excepted.
+
+The admiral drew up all his men in line of battle, and stood ready to
+receive them within his fortifications. At some distance from him, the
+whole train of natives made a halt, all preserving the most profound
+silence, except the sceptre-bearer, who made a speech of half an hour.
+He then, from an orator, became a dancing-master, and struck up a song,
+being joined in both by the king, lords, and common people, who came all
+singing and dancing up to the fences which the admiral had thrown up.
+The natives then all sat down; and, after some preliminary compliments,
+the king made a solemn offer of his whole kingdom and its dependencies
+to the admiral, desiring him to assume the sovereignty, and professing
+himself his most loyal subject; and, that this might not seem mere empty
+compliment, he took off his illustrious crown of feathers from his own
+head, with the consent and approbation of all his nobles there present,
+and placing it on the head of the admiral, invested him with all the
+other ensigns of royalty, constituting the admiral, as far as in him
+lay, king of the whole country. The admiral, as her majesty's
+representative, accepted of this new-offered dignity in her name and
+behalf; as from this donation, whether made in jest or earnest, it was
+probable that some real advantage might redound hereafter to the English
+nation in these parts. After this ceremony, the common people dispersed
+themselves about the English encampment, expressing their admiration and
+respect for the English in a most violent and even profane manner, even
+offering sacrifices to them, as in the most profound devotion, till they
+were repressed by force, with strong expressions of abhorrence, and
+directed to pay their adorations to the supreme Creator and Preserver of
+all things, whom only they ought to honour with religious worship.[32]
+
+[Footnote 32: The whole of this story, of a king and his nobles, and the
+investiture of Drake in the sovereignty of California, which he named
+New Albion, is so completely absurd as not to merit serious
+observation.--E.]
+
+After this ceremony, the admiral and some of his people penetrated to
+some distance into the interior country, which they found to be
+extremely full of large fat deer, often seeing about a thousand in one
+herd. There were also such immense numbers of rabbits, that the whole
+country seemed one vast warren. These rabbits were of the size of those
+of Barbary, having heads like our own rabbits in England, with feet like
+those of a mole, and long tails like rats. Under the chin on each side,
+they have a bag or pouch in the skin, into which they store up any food
+they get abroad, which they there preserve for future use. Their flesh
+is much valued by the natives, and their skins are made into robes for
+the king and nobles. This country seemed to promise rich veins of gold
+and silver; as wherever they had occasion to dig, they threw up some of
+the ores of these metals.[33] Partly in honour of England, and partly
+owing to the prospect of white cliffs which this country presented from
+the sea, the admiral named this region New Albion. Before his departure,
+he erected a monument, on which was a large plate, engraven with the
+name, picture, and arms of queen Elizabeth, the title of her majesty to
+the sovereignty of the country, the time of its discovery, and Drake's
+own name. In this country the Spaniards had never had the smallest
+footing, neither had they discovered this coast of America, even for
+several degrees to the southwards of New Albion.
+
+[Footnote 33: This surely is a gross falsehood, as even the Spaniards,
+so much experienced in mines of the precious metals, have found none in
+California, though possessing missions among its rude and scanty
+population in every corner, even in this very spot.--E.]
+
+
+
+
+SECTION IV.
+
+
+_Continuation of the Voyage, from New Albion to England._
+
+
+Sailing from this port of New Albion, [now called by the Spaniards the
+Bay of San Francisco,] they had no sight of land till the 13th October,
+1579, when, in the morning of that day, they fell in with certain
+islands in lat. 8 deg. N.[34] They here met many canoes, laden with
+cocoa-nuts and other fruits. These canoes were very artificially
+hollowed, and were smooth and shining, like polished horn. Their prows
+and sterns were all turned circularly inwards; and on each side there
+lay out two pieces of timber, or out-riggers, a yard and a half long,
+more or less, according the size of the canoes. They were of
+considerable height in the gunwales; and their insides were ornamented
+with white shells. The islanders in these canoes had large holes in the
+lower parts of their ears, which reached down a considerable way, by the
+weight of certain ornaments. Their teeth were as black as jet,
+occasioned by chewing a certain herb with a sort of powder, which they
+always carry with them for that purpose.[35]
+
+[Footnote 34: These probably were some of the Caralines, being in the
+direct route from Port Sir Francis Drake to the Moluccas.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 35: Areka nut and betel leaf, with pounded shell-lime.--E.]
+
+The 18th October they came to other islands, some of which appeared to
+be very populous, and continued their course past the islands of
+_Tagulada, Zelon,_ and _Zewarra._ The first of these produces great
+store of cinnamon; and the inhabitants are in friendship with the
+Portuguese. Without making any stop at these islands, the admiral
+continued his course, and fell in with the Moluccas on the 14th
+November. Intending to steer for Tidore, and coasting along the island
+of Motir, which belongs to the king of Ternate, they met the viceroy of
+that king, who came fearlessly on board the admiral's ship. He advised
+the admiral by no means to prosecute his voyage to Tidore, but to sail
+directly for Ternate, as the king, his master, was a great enemy to the
+Portuguese, and would have no intercourse with him, if at all connected
+with Tidore or the Portuguese. Upon this, the admiral resolved on going
+to Tidore, and came to anchor before the town early next morning.
+
+He immediately sent a messenger to the king, with a present of a velvet
+cloak, and to assure him that his only purpose in coming to his island
+was to trade in a friendly manner. By this time the viceroy had been to
+the king, whom he had disposed to entertain a favourable opinion of the
+English, so that the king returned a very civil and obliging answer,
+assuring the admiral that a friendly intercourse with the English was
+highly pleasing to him, his whole kingdom, and all that it contained,
+being at his service; and that he was ready to lay himself and his
+dominions at the feet of the glorious queen of England, and to
+acknowledge her as his sovereign. In token of all this, he sent his
+signet to the admiral, delivering it with much respect to the messenger,
+who was treated with great pomp and ceremony at court.
+
+Having a mind to visit the admiral on board ship, the king sent before
+hand four large canoes, filled with his most dignified attendants, all
+in white dresses, and having large awnings of perfumed mats borne over
+their heads on a frame of canes or bamboos. They were surrounded by
+servants, all in white; outside of whom were ranks of soldiers, and
+beyond them were many rowers in well-contrived galleries, three of these
+on each side all along the canoes, raised one above the other, each
+gallery containing eighty rowers.[36] These canoes were well furnished
+with warlike implements and all kind of weapons, both offensive and
+defensive, and were filled with soldiers well appointed for war. Bowing
+near the ship in great order, they paid their reverence to the admiral,
+saying that their king had sent them to conduct his ship into a safer
+road than that it now occupied.
+
+[Footnote 36: This surely is a great exaggeration, employing 480 rowers
+to each canoe.--E.]
+
+The king himself came soon afterwards, attended upon by six grave and
+ancient persons. He seemed much delighted with English music, and still
+more with English generosity, which the admiral expressed in large
+presents to him and his attendants. The king promised to come aboard
+again next day, and that same night sent off great store of provisions,
+as rice, poultry, sugar, cloves, a sort of fruit called _Frigo_, and
+_Sago_, which is a meal made out of the tops of trees, melting in the
+mouth like sugar, and tasting like sour curds, but when made into cakes
+will keep fit for eating at the end of ten years. The king did not come
+on board next day, according to promise, but sent his brother to excuse
+him, and: to invite the admiral on shore, while he remained as a pledge
+for his safe return. The admiral declined going ashore himself, but sent
+some gentlemen of his retinue along with the king's brother, detaining
+the viceroy till their return.
+
+They were received on shore by another of the king's brothers with
+several nobles, and conducted in great state to the castle, where there
+was a court of at least a thousand persons, the principal of whom were
+sixty grave counsellors, and four Turkish envoys dressed in scarlet
+robes and turbans, who were there to negociate trade between the Turkish
+empire and Ternate. The king came in under a glorious canopy,
+embroidered with gold, and guarded by twelve men armed with lances. He
+was dressed in a loose robe of cloth of gold, having his legs bare, but
+with leather shoes or slippers on his feet. Several circular ornaments
+of gold were braided among his hair, a large chain of gold hung from his
+neck, and his fingers were adorned with rich jewels. A page stood at the
+right-hand side of his chair of state, blowing cool air upon him with a
+fan, two feet long and a foot broad, curiously embroidered, and enriched
+with sapphires. The English gentlemen were kindly received; and, having
+heard their message, he sent one of his counsellors to conduct them back
+to the ships. The king of Ternate is a prince of great power, having
+seventy islands under his authority, besides Ternate, which is the best
+of the Molucca islands. His religion, and that of all his subjects, is
+Mahometism, in obedience to which they keep the new moons and many
+fasts, during which they mortify the flesh all the day, but make up for
+their abstemiousness by feasting in the night.
+
+Having dispatched all his affairs at Ternate, the admiral left the
+place, and sailed to a small island to the southwards of Celebes, where
+he remained twenty-six days. This island is all covered with wood, the
+trees being of large size, tall, straight, and without boughs, except at
+the top, the leaves resembling our English broom. There were here vast
+numbers of shining flies, no bigger than our common flies in England,
+which, skimming at night among the trees and bushes, made them appear as
+if all on fire. The bats in this island were as large as our ordinary
+poultry, and there was a sort of land cray-fish, which burrowed in the
+ground like rabbits, being so large that one of them was a sufficient
+meal for four persons.
+
+Setting sail from thence, and being unable to proceed westwards on
+account of the wind, the course was altered to the southwards, yet with
+much danger, by reason of the shoals which lie thick among these
+islands. Of this they had most dangerous and almost fatal experience on
+the 9th January, 1580, by running upon a rock, on which they stuck fast
+from eight at night till four in the afternoon of next day. In this
+distress, the ship was lightened by landing three tons of cloves, eight
+pieces of ordnance, and some provisions on the rock; soon after which,
+by the wind chopping round, they happily got off.
+
+On the 18th of February, they fell in with the fruitful island of
+_Baratene_,[37] having in the mean time suffered much from cross winds
+and dangerous shoals. They met with a friendly reception from the people
+of this island, who were handsomely proportioned, and just in all their
+dealings. The men wore no cloathing, except a slight covering round
+their middles, but the women were covered from the waist to the feet,
+having likewise many large heavy bracelets of bone, horn, or brass, on
+their arms, the smallest weighing two ounces, and having eight or ten of
+these on at once. This island affords gold, silver, copper, sulphur,
+nutmegs, ginger, long-pepper, lemons, cocoas, frigo, sago, and other
+commodities, and linen was found to be in much request by the natives,
+as of it they make girdles and rolls for wearing on their heads. Among
+the productions of this island, there was a particular sort of fruit,
+resembling barberries in size, form, and husk, very hard, yet of a
+pleasant taste, and becoming soft and easy of digestion when boiled. In
+short, they met with no place in the whole voyage that yielded greater
+abundance of every comfort than this island, excepting Ternate.
+
+[Footnote 37: No circumstance in the text serves to indicate what island
+is here meant, except that it appears to have been to the eastward of
+Java.--E.]
+
+Leaving Baratene, they sailed to Java Major, where also they were
+courteously and honourably entertained. This island was ruled over by
+six kings, who lived in entire peace and amity with each other, and they
+once had four of them on board at one time, and very often two or three
+together.[38]
+
+[Footnote 38: The names of the kings or princes of Java, when Sir
+Francis Drake was there, were Rajah Donaw, R. Rabacapala, R. Bacabatra,
+R. Tymbanton, R. Mawgbange, and R, Patemara.--_Hakluyt_.]
+
+The Javans are a stout and warlike people, well armed with swords,
+targets, and daggers, all of their own manufacture, and are very curious
+and ingenious, both in the fashion of their weapons, and in giving them
+an excellent temper. They wear turbans on their heads, the upper parts
+of their bodies being naked; but, from the waist downwards, they have a
+pintado, or a silken wrapper, trailing on the ground. They manage their
+women quite differently from the Moluccans; for, while these will hardly
+let them be seen by a stranger, the Javans will very civilly offer a
+female bedfellow to a traveller. Besides being thus civil and hospitable
+to strangers, they are good humoured and sociable among themselves; for
+in every village they have a public-house, where the inhabitants meet
+together, each bringing their shares of provisions, and joining the
+whole in one social feast for the keeping up of good fellowship.
+
+The Javans have a peculiar mode of boiling rice. It is put into an
+earthen pot of a conical form, open at the large end, and perforated all
+over with small holes, which is placed within a larger earthen pot full
+of boiling water. The rice swells and fills the holes of the inner pot,
+so that very little water gets in, and by this mode of boiling the rice
+is brought to a firm consistency, and cakes into a sort of bread, of
+which, with butter or oil, sugar, and spices, they make several very
+pleasant dishes. The lues venerea prevails among the inhabitants of this
+island; but, instead of expelling the poison by salivation, they drive
+it out by perspiration, sitting for this purpose in the sun for some
+hours, by which the pores are opened, giving free vent to the noxious
+particles of the disease.
+
+While in Java, the following words in the native language were taken
+notice of, and are recorded by Hukluyt.
+
+   Sabuck,  silk.             Gula,    black sugar.
+   Sagu,    bread.            Tadon,   a woman.
+   Larnike, drink.            Bebeck,  a duck.
+   Paree,   rice in the husk. Aniange, a deer.
+   Braas,   boiled rice.      Popran,  ointment.
+   Calapa,  cocoa nuts.       Coar,    the head.
+   Cricke,  a dagger.         Endam,   rain.
+   Catcha,  a mirror.         Jonge,   a ship.
+   Arbo,    an ox.            Chay,    the sea.
+   Vados,   a goat.           Sapelo,  ten.
+   Gardunge, a plantain.      Dopolo,    twenty.
+   Hiam,     a hen.           Treda      no.
+   Seuit,    linen.           Lau,       understand you?
+   Doduck,   blue cloth.      Bayer,     go!
+   Totoppo,  a cap.           Adadizano, I will fetch it.
+   Cabo,     gold.            Suda,      enough.
+
+Having news of some great ships being at no great distance, and not
+knowing whether they might prove friends or enemies, the admiral set
+sail from Java, sailing directly for the Cape of Good Hope, which was
+the first land he fell in with; neither did he touch at any, till he
+arrived at Sierra Leona on the coast of Guinea. He passed the cape on
+the 18th June, 1580, and by the facility of the navigation round that
+southern promontory of Africa, found how much the Portuguese had imposed
+upon the world by false representations of its horrors and dangers. He
+arrived at Sierra Leona on the 22d July, where were elephants, and
+abundance of oysters fastened on the twigs of trees, hanging down into
+the water, where they grow and multiply. With these, and lemons, with
+which they were abundantly supplied, his people were much refreshed.
+
+After two days stay at that place, taking in a supply of wood and water,
+and procuring refreshments, they sailed from thence on the 24th July.
+Next day, they were in lat. 25 deg. 30' N. under the tropic of Cancer, fifty
+leagues from land. Being completely supplied with all necessaries, they
+continued their voyage, without stopping any where, and arrived at
+Plymouth on Monday the 26th of September, 1580, having been absent two
+years, nine months, and thirteen days. By their reckoning, the day of
+their arrival was only Sunday the 25th, as in going completely round the
+world in the same course with the sun, that luminary had risen once
+seldomer to them than to those who remained stationary, so that they had
+lost a day in their computation.
+
+SECTION V.
+
+_Reception of Sir Francis Drake in England, and same Notices of his
+remaining Actions_.
+
+The fame of his return from this wonderful voyage round the world soon
+spread over England, and all strove to express their sense of the
+worthiness of Captain Drake, by praises and other testimonies of regard.
+Several collections were made of poems, epigrams, and songs, celebrating
+him and his ship in the highest strains. Yet, in the midst of almost
+universal applause, some endeavoured to censure his conduct, and to
+place this great exploit in a wrong light. These persons alleged, that
+his circumnavigation of the globe served only to amuse the minds of the
+vulgar, while the main purpose of the voyage had been plunder, of which
+they pretended he had acquired sufficient to exempt the nation from
+taxes for seven years. They also set forth, as war had not been
+proclaimed against Spain, that it was dangerous to own such an
+adventurer, lest the nation might be made to pay dearly for his prizes:
+For, as the merchants had great effects in Spain, their goods might
+possibly be seized to make good his depredations.
+
+The Spanish ambassador also assailed him with very warm memorials,
+styling him the Master Thief of the Unknown World. The friends and
+patrons of Drake, finding themselves wounded through his sides, took all
+manner of pains to vindicate his conduct, alleging that he had the
+queen's commission and authority to justify him in making reprisals;
+that by so much wealth as he had brought home the nation would be
+enriched; that the Spaniards had already done us much injury; and, if
+the king of Spain were disposed to seize the effects of our merchants,
+the public ought to receive this treasure as an equivalent; which, were
+it returned, would break the spirit of our brave tars, who otherwise
+were more likely to humble the pride of the Spaniards.
+
+In the mean time, matters remained long in suspense, during which Drake
+must have suffered considerable anxiety, lest, after all his toils
+abroad, he might be deemed a pirate at home. The queen long delayed to
+declare her sentiments, perhaps wishing to see what effects her conduct
+might have with the court of Spain, which was probably withheld from
+precipitating hostilities, by the hope of being able to recover this
+great treasure. To keep up this hope, she artfully consented to part
+with some small sums to Mendoza, the Spanish ambassador. At length,
+matters coming to a crisis, she threw off the veil, and giving notice to
+Captain Drake of her intentions, she visited him on the 4th April, 1581,
+on board his ship, then at Deptford, where she was magnificently
+entertained; and, after dinner, she was graciously pleased to confer the
+honour of knighthood on Captain Drake, telling him that his actions did
+him more honour than the title she had conferred. A prodigious crowd
+attended the queen on this occasion, so that the bridge laid from the
+ship to the shore broke down with their weight, and more than 200
+persons fell into the Thames, yet no one was drowned, or even materially
+hurt. After this public approbation from the sovereign, all ranks of
+people redoubled their congratulations, and henceforward the reputation
+of Sir Francis Drake continually increased, so that he became a kind of
+oracle in maritime affairs, both to the nation and the court.--Here,
+strictly speaking, we ought to conclude our account of this illustrious
+navigator; yet it may not be amiss to give a short sketch of his
+succeeding actions.
+
+The war with Spain still continuing, he went out in 1585, general by sea
+and land, of an expedition to the West Indies, where he took the cities
+of St Jago, St Domingo, and Carthagena, and the fort and town of St
+Augustine; returning from this expedition with great glory and
+advantage, the profits amounting to L60,000, after defraying all
+charges, of which L20,000 were divided among the seamen, and L40,000
+came clear to the undertakers or adventurers. In 1587, he had the
+command of another fleet, with which he sailed to the bay of Cadiz, and
+thence to the Tagus, where he destroyed 10,000 tons of shipping, which
+the king of Spain had collected for the purpose of invading England. He
+likewise brought home the St Philip, a very rich prize, said by the
+writers of these times to have been the first carack ever taken and
+brought home to England.
+
+In the glorious year 1588, by commission from the queen, Sir Francis
+Drake was appointed vice-admiral of the fleet of England, then fitted
+out for opposing the _invincible_ Spanish Armada. In this arduous
+service, on which the independence and existence of England depended, he
+performed even more than his former actions gave reason to expect. In
+the very beginning of the fight, he captured two very large ships of
+war, one commanded by the Spanish vice-admiral Oquendas, and the other
+by Don Pedro de Valdez. This latter officer defended his ship with great
+gallantry for a long time; and at length, on surrendering, and
+delivering his sword to Sir Francis, he addressed him to the following
+effect: "That they had all resolved to have died fighting, if they had
+not fallen into his hands, whose valour and fortune were so great, that
+Mars and Neptune seemed to aid him in all his enterprises." To requite
+these Spanish compliments with solid English kindness, Sir Francis
+lodged Don Valdez in his own cabin, and entertained him at his table.
+Drake's crew were recompensed by the plunder of the Spanish ship, in
+which were found 55,000 ducats in gold, which they joyfully shared. Sir
+Francis performed many other signal services on this memorable occasion
+against the Armada, and particularly distinguished himself by advising
+the employment of fire-ships, which some have alleged he then invented.
+
+He was next year admiral of a great fleet, sent to Portugal for the
+purpose of restoring Don Antonio to the throne of that kingdom. This
+expedition, though it did not succeed in its grand object, occasioned
+considerable damage to Spain, on which it retorted the compliment of an
+invasion, and by which it was rendered unable to repeat another attempt
+of the same nature. On the whole, therefore, Sir Francis spoiled no less
+than three Spanish invasions. In 1595, he went upon another conjunct
+expedition against the Spanish West Indies, in which he performed signal
+services; but aiming at still greater, and being unsuccessful, he died
+in the harbour of Porto Bello, on the 28th of January, 1596, as is said,
+of a broken heart, occasioned by his disappointment. His body, being put
+into a leaden coffin, was committed to the deep, under a general
+discharge of all the artillery of the fleet. In his person, though of
+low stature, Sir Francis Drake was well made, with a fresh and fair
+complexion, having large lively eyes, light-brown hair, and an open
+cheerful countenance. He was naturally eloquent, gracefully expressing
+what he clearly conceived. He was thoroughly versant, not only in the
+practical part of his profession, but in all the sciences connected with
+it, being able to discharge all the offices necessary in a ship as
+occasion required, even that of the surgeon. In his conduct as a naval
+commander he was skilful and valiant, just to his owners, kind to his
+seamen, loyal to his sovereign, and merciful to his enemies after
+victory. His many glorious exploits justly entitle him to high fame; and
+he died, at fifty-five, in the ardent pursuit of glory, in the cause of
+his queen and country.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The fame of this Voyage round the World, with the wealth brought home by
+Sir Francis Drake, and the desire of rivalling him in riches and
+reputation, inspired numbers of young men of all ranks with the
+inclination of trying their fortunes at sea. Men of rank and fortune
+fitted out ships at their own expence, manning them with their
+dependants. Others, in lower situations, hazarded their persons as
+subaltern officers in these ships, or in men-of-war belonging to the
+queen. This spirit grew to such a height, that honest John Stowe informs
+us that there were many youths, from eighteen to twenty years of age,
+towards the close of Queen Elizabeth's reign, who were capable of taking
+charge of any ship, and navigating to most parts of the world.
+
+So alarmed were the Spaniards by the courage and conduct of Sir Francis,
+and his maritime skill, that they ordered that no draughts or discourses
+should be published of their discoveries in America, lest they might
+fall into his hands. What most surprised them was, that he should find
+his way so easily through the Straits of Magellan, which they had
+hitherto been unable to perform. They therefore resolved immediately to
+have these straits completely explored and discovered, by means of ships
+fitted out in Peru. For this purpose, Don Pedro Sarmiento, who was
+thought the best seaman in the Spanish service, was sent from Lima, and
+actually passed from the South Sea into the Atlantic, and thence to
+Spain. He there proposed to plant a colony in the straits, and to
+fortify them in such a manner as might prevent all other nations from
+passing through them. This project was so well relished by Philip II
+that a fleet of twenty-three ships was fitted out, with 3,500 men, under
+the command of Don Diego Floris de Valdez; and Sarmiento, with 500
+veterans, was appointed to form a settlement in the straits.
+
+This fleet was extremely unfortunate, insomuch that it was between two
+and three years before Sarmiento arrived with his people in the straits
+of Magellan. On the north side, and near the eastern entrance, he built
+a town and fort, which he named Nombre de Jesus, and in which he left a
+garrison of 150 men. Fifteen leagues farther on, at the narrowest part
+of the straits, and in lat. 53 deg. 18' S.[39] he established his principal
+settlement, which he named _Ciudad del Rey Felippe_, or the City of King
+Philip. This was a regularly fortified square fortress, having four
+bastions; and is said to have been in all respects one of the
+best-contrived settlements ever made by the Spaniards in America. At
+this place Sarmiento left a garrison of 400 men and thirty women, with
+provisions for eight months, and then returned into the Atlantic. These
+transactions took place in the years 1584, 5, and 6. Sarmiento, after
+several fruitless attempts to succour and relieve his colony, was taken
+by an English vessel, and sent prisoner to London.
+
+[Footnote 39: The Narrows of the Hope are eighteen leagues of Castile,
+or about forty-eight English miles from Cape Virgin, the northern cape
+at the eastern mouth of the straits, in lat. 52 deg. 5' S. long. 69 deg. W. from
+Greenwich.--E.]
+
+The Spanish garrison, having consumed all their provisions, died mostly
+of hunger, perhaps aided by the scurvy, in their new city. Twenty-three
+men quitted it, endeavouring to find their way by land to the Spanish
+settlements, but are supposed to have all perished by the way, as they
+were never more heard of. Sarmiento fell into discredit with the king of
+Spain, for deceiving him as to the breadth of the straits, which he
+asserted did not exceed a mile over; whereas the king was certainly
+informed that they were a league broad, and therefore incapable of being
+shut up by any fortifications. However this may be, even supposing the
+report of Sarmiento true, and that his fortress could have commanded the
+straits, even this could have proved of little or no service to Spain,
+as another passage into the South Sea was discovered soon afterwards,
+without the necessity of going near these straits.
+
+
+SECTION VI.
+
+_First Supplement to the Voyage of Sir Francis Drake; being on Account
+of Part of the foregoing Navigation, by Nuno da Silva_.[40]
+
+Nuna da Silva, born in Oporto, a citizen and inhabitant of Guaia, saith,
+that on the 19th January, 1578, while at anchor with his ship in the
+harbour of St Jago, one of the Cape de Verd islands, he was made
+prisoner by the admiral of six English ships, and detained because
+discovered to be a pilot for the coast of Brazil. Setting sail,
+therefore, with the said admiral from Brava, they held their course for
+the land of Brazil, which they descried on the first April, being in the
+latitude of 30 deg. S. whence they held on their course for the Rio Plata,
+where they provided themselves with fresh water.
+
+[Footnote 40: Hakluyt, IV. 246.--This narrative was written by Nuno da
+Silva, the Portuguese pilot who accompanied Sir Francis Drake from the
+Cape Verd islands to Guatalco on the western coast of New Spain, and was
+sent from the city of Mexico to the viceroy of Portuguese India, in
+1579.--E.]
+
+From thence they proceeded to the latitude of 39 deg. S. where they
+anchored. They here left two of their ships behind them, and continued
+on with four only, that which had formerly belonged to Nuno being one of
+these. They next came into a bay, in lat. 49 deg. S. called _Bahia de las
+Ilhas_, or the Bay of Islands, where Magellan is said to have wintered
+with his ships, when he went to discover the straits which now bear his
+name. They entered this bay on the 20th June, and anchored within
+musket-shot of the shore. They here found Indians cloathed in skins,
+their legs downwards from the knees, and their arms below the elbows,
+being naked. These Indians were a subtle, great, and well-formed race,
+strong, and tall in stature, being armed with bows and arrows. Six of
+the English going here on shore to fetch water, four of the Indians came
+into their boat before they landed, to whom the Englishmen gave bread
+and wine; after eating and drinking of which heartily they went on
+shore, and when at some distance, one of them cried to them, and said,
+_Magallanes! este he minha terra_; that is, Magellan, this is my
+country. Being followed by the sailors, they slew two of them with their
+arrows; one of whom was an Englishman, and the other a Hollander; on
+which the others made their escape to the boat, and put off from the
+shore.
+
+Leaving this place on the 17th of August, they came to the mouth of the
+straits on the 21st or 22d, but did not enter them till the 24th, owing
+to the wind being contrary. The entry into the straits is about a league
+in breadth, both sides being naked flat land. Some Indians were seen on
+the north side, making great fires; but none appeared on the south side
+of the straits. This strait is about 110 leagues long, and a league in
+breadth; and for about half-way through, is straight and without
+turnings; from thence, to about eight or ten leagues from the farther
+end, it has some capes and turnings, at one of which there is a great
+cape or head-land, which seems as if it went down to join the southern
+land; and here the passage is less than a league across, after which it
+again runs straight. Although there are thus some crooks and turnings,
+none of them are of any importance, or any dangerous obstacle. The
+western issue of these straits, about eight or ten leagues before coming
+out, begins to grow broader, and is then all high-land on both sides to
+the end; as likewise all the way, after getting eight leagues in from
+the eastern entrance, the shores along these first eight leagues being
+low. In the entry to the straits, we found the stream to run from the
+South Sea to the North Sea, or Atlantic.
+
+After beginning to sail into the straits, with the wind at E.N.E. they
+passed along without let or hindrance either of wind or weather, and
+because the land on both sides was high, and covered with snow, the
+whole navigation being fair and clear of shoals or rocks, they held
+their course the whole way within musket-shot of the north-side, having
+always nine or ten fathoms water on good ground; so that everywhere
+there was anchorage if need were. The hills on both sides were covered
+with trees, which in some places reached to the edge of the sea, where
+there were plains and flat lands. They saw not any large rivers, but
+some small brooks or streams that issued from rifts or clefts of the
+land. In the country beside the great cape and bending of the strait,
+some Indians were seen on the south side, fishing in their skiffs or
+canoes, being similar to those formerly seen on the north side at the
+entrance into the straits; and these were the only natives seen on the
+south side during the whole passage.
+
+Being out of the straits on the eastern side on the 6th of September,
+they held their course N.W. for three days, and on the third day they
+had a storm at N.E. which drove them W.S.W. for ten or twelve days with
+few sails up; after which, the storm increasing, they took in all their
+sails, and drove under bare poles till the 30th September. Having lost
+sight of one of their ships, of about 100 tons, and the wind growing
+more moderate, they hoisted sail, holding their course N.E. for seven
+days, at the end of which they came in sight of certain islands, for
+which they steered, meaning to have anchored among them, but the weather
+would not permit; and the wind coming N.W. they made sail to the W.S.W.
+Next day they lost sight of another ship, in very foul weather; so that
+the admiral was now left alone, as my ship had been left in the bay
+where they remained some time before entering the straits. With this new
+storm of adverse wind, they had to proceed southwards, till they came
+into the latitude of 57 deg. S. where they entered a bay in an island, and
+anchored in twenty fathoms, about a cannon-shot from the shore. After
+remaining here three or four days, the wind changed to the south, and
+they again made sail to the northwards for two days, when a small
+uninhabited island was descried, where they procured many birds and
+seals.
+
+Next day they again proceeded, holding their course N. and N.N.E. and
+came to the island of Mocha, in 38 deg. 30 S. five or six leagues from the
+main, where they anchored in twelve fathoms, a quarter of a league from
+the shore. This island is small and low land, all full of Indians. Here
+the admiral and twelve Englishmen landed, on purpose to seek fresh water
+and provisions, and bought two sheep in exchange of other things from
+the Indians, together with a little maize, and some roots of which the
+Indians make bread; and being now late, went on board ship for the
+night. Next day the admiral again landed with twelve men armed with
+muskets, and sent two men with vessels to fetch water. Some Indians lay
+in ambush at the watering-place, who suddenly fell upon the two
+Englishmen, and made them prisoners; which being perceived by the
+admiral and those with him, they advanced to rescue their companions,
+but were so sore assailed by stones and arrows, that all or most of them
+were hurt, the admiral receiving two wounds from arrows, one in his face
+and the other on his head; so that they were compelled to retreat to
+their boat, without hurting any of the Indians, who were so bold as even
+to carry away four of their oars.
+
+They sailed from hence along the coast to the northwards, with a
+southern wind, for six days, passing the harbour of St Jago, and put
+into another haven, where they took an Indian, who was fishing in a
+canoe, giving him some linen, knives, and other trifles. Not long after
+there came another Indian to the ship, whose name was Felippe, and who
+spoke Spanish. He gave notice to the English admiral of a certain ship
+being in the harbour of St Jago, which they had overpassed six leagues.
+So, taking this Indian as their guide, they went back to St Jago, where
+they took the said ship, in which were 1770 _botijas_, or Spanish pots,
+full of wine, besides other commodities. They then landed, and took a
+quantity of sacks of meal, and whatever else they could find, taking
+also the ornaments and relics from the church. They departed then from
+thence, taking with them the captured ship, with two of her men, running
+along the coast till they came to the latitude of between 30 deg. and 31 deg. S.
+where they had appointed to meet, in case of separation. They here
+anchored right over against a river, whence they filled six butts of
+fresh water, having twelve armed men on land to defend those who filled
+the casks. While busied in this work, they saw a company of armed men
+coming towards them, half Spaniards and half Indians, being about 250
+horse and as many foot, on which they made all haste to get into their
+boat, escaping with the loss of one man.
+
+They set sail again that same night, going about ten leagues farther
+along the coast, where they took in some more fresh water, but were soon
+obliged to quit this place also, by the appearance of some horsemen.
+Proceeding thirty leagues farther along the coast, still to the
+northwards, they went into a bay or haven, in a desert or uninhabited
+place, but seeing some persons daily on the shore, they did not venture
+to land. At this place, the English put together the pieces of a small
+pinnace, which they had brought ready framed with them from England.
+Having launched this pinnace, the English captain went into her with
+fifteen men, accompanied by John the Greek, who was chief boatswain,
+being master of the ship formerly taken in the harbour of St Jago. At
+this time they went to look for the two vessels they had parted from
+formerly in a storm, and also in hopes of being able to procure fresh
+water; but seeing always persons on shore, they durst not land, and
+returned again to the ship without hearing of their other ships. They
+now took all the ordnance out of their ship, and new dressed and rigged
+her; after which, arming the pinnace with a small piece of ordnance,
+they resumed their course to the northwards.
+
+Having sailed thirteen days, they came to an island about the shot of a
+culverin from the main, where four fishermen told them of fresh water on
+the main; but understanding it was but scanty, and somewhat distant from
+the shore, they continued their course. Next day they espied some
+fishers houses on shore, when the English captain landed and took three
+of the fishers, taking away half of the fish that lay packed on the
+shore. The day following they took a bark laden with fish belonging to
+the Spaniards, in which were four Indians, and bound it by a rope to the
+stem of their ships; but the Indians in the night cut her loose, and
+went away. Next day the English captain went ashore to certain houses,
+where he found 3000 pezos of silver, each being equal to a rial of
+eight, or Spanish dollar; getting also seven Indian sheep, some hens,
+and other articles, all of which he brought on board, and resumed his
+voyage. Two days after, going to the harbour of Arica, they found two
+ships, one of which was laden with goods and Spanish wares, out of which
+they only took 200 botijas, or pots of wine, and from the other
+thirty-seven bars of silver, each weighing ten or twelve pounds. They
+meant also to have landed at this place; but seeing some horsemen coming
+towards them, they desisted.
+
+Next morning they burnt the ship which was laden with Spanish wares, and
+took the other along with them, continuing their course, the captain
+sailing along shore in the pinnace, while the ship kept about a league
+farther out to sea, going in search of a ship of which they had
+intelligence. After sailing in this manner about forty-five leagues,
+they found the ship of which they were in search, at anchor in a haven;
+but having intelligence a few hours before, of an English pirate or
+sea-rover, she had landed 800 bars of silver belonging to the king of
+Spain; but the English durst not go on shore to search for it, as many
+Spaniards and Indians stood there as a well-armed guard. They found
+nothing, therefore, in this ship except three pipes of water. Taking
+this ship out to sea about a league, they hoisted all her sails and let
+her drive, doing the like with the ship they took at Arica, and that
+also they had taken at St Jago, continuing their course with their own
+ship and pinnace.
+
+When about seven leagues from Calao de Lima, they spied three ships, one
+of which they boarded, and took three men out of her, and then continued
+their course for Calao, which haven they entered about two or three
+hours after night-fall, sailing in among the middle of seventeen ships
+which lay there at anchor. Being among these ships, they enquired for
+the ship which had the silver on board; but learning that all the silver
+had been carried on shore, they cut the cables of all the ships and the
+masts of the two largest, and so left them. At this time, there arrived
+a ship from Panama, laden with Spanish wares and merchandise, which
+anchored close by the English ship, while the English captain was
+searching among the other ships for the silver. When the ship of Panama
+was anchored, a boat came off from the shore to examine her, but coming
+in the dark to the English ship, was told by one of the Spanish
+prisoners she was the ship of Michael Angelo from Chili; on which one of
+the Spaniards from the boat came up the side, but coming upon one of her
+cannon, he was afraid and they made off, as the ships in these seas
+carry no guns. The Panama ship hearing of this, cut her cables and put
+to sea; which being perceived by the English, who were close by, they
+followed in their pinnace. On getting up with her, the English called
+out for them to surrender, but the Spaniards killed one of their men by
+a musket-shot, on which the pinnace returned. The English ship then set
+sail and overtook the Spanish ship, when the crew took to their boat and
+escaped on shore, leaving their ship to the English, who took her, and
+continued her course to the northwards.
+
+Next day the English saw a boat under sail making towards them, which
+they suspected to be a spy, and soon afterwards perceived two great
+ships coming to meet them, which they supposed had been sent on purpose
+to fight them. On this they cast loose the Panama ship, in which they
+left John the Greek and two men they had taken the night before in Calao
+harbour; and then made all sail, not once setting eye again upon the two
+great ships, which made direct for the Panama ship. The English
+continued their course to the northwards along the coast; and some days
+afterwards met a frigate or small vessel bound for Lima, laden with
+wares and merchandise of the country, whence the English took a lamp
+and fountain of silver. They enquired of the people in this ship if
+they had met a ship, which they understood was laden with silver; on
+which one pilot said he had not seen any such, while another said he had
+met her about three days before. This frigate was taken by the pinnace,
+in which the English captain sailed close by the shore, the English ship
+keeping about a league and a half from land. On receiving this
+information, the English let the frigate go, and continued their course
+to the northwards.
+
+Two days afterwards, they came to the harbour of Payta, where they found
+a ship laden with Spanish wares, which was boarded and taken by the
+pinnace, without resistance, most of the crew escaping on shore. From
+this ship, the English took the pilot, with all the bread and other
+provisions. About two days after, they boarded a ship belonging to
+Panama, from which they only took a negro. Next day, being the 1st
+February, they met another ship of Panama, laden with fish and other
+victuals, having also forty bars of silver and some gold, but I know not
+how much, which they took, sending the passengers in a boat to the land,
+among whom were two friars. Next day, the English captain hanged a man
+of the Panama ship, for secreting two plates of gold, which were found
+about him, after which that ship was turned adrift.
+
+Towards noon of the 1st March, they descried the ship laden with silver,
+being then about four leagues to seawards of them: and, as the English
+ship sailed somewhat heavily, being too much by the head, they hung a
+quantity of botijas, or Spanish earthen pots which had contained oil,
+and now filled with water, over the stern of their ship, to give her a
+better trim and to improve her sailing. The treasure ship, thinking the
+English vessel had been one of those which usually sail upon that coast,
+made towards her, and when near, the English captain hailed her to
+surrender: As the Spanish captain refused, the English fired some
+cannons, by one of which the Spanish ship's mast was shot over board,
+and her master being wounded by an arrow, she presently yielded.
+Thereupon the English took possession of her, and sailed with her
+directly out to sea all that night, and the next day and night. Being
+entirely out of sight of land, they began to search their prize on the
+third day, removing her cargo into their own ship, being 1300 bars or
+wedges of silver, and fourteen chests of rials of eight, besides some
+gold, but how much of that I know not, only that the passengers said
+there was great store. They told me also, that 300 of the silver bars
+belonged to the king, and all the rest to the merchants. That done, they
+allowed the ship to go away with all her men, putting into her the three
+pilots they had hitherto carried with them.
+
+From thence they sailed onwards for Nicaragua, and descried land about
+the 13th March, being an island named Canno, not very high, about two
+leagues from the main land, where they found a small bay, in which they
+anchored in five fathoms close to the shore, remaining there till the
+20th. On that day a bark passed close to the land, which was captured by
+the English pinnace, being laden with sarsaparilla, and botijas or pots
+of butter and honey, with other things. Throwing all the sarsaparilla
+overboard, the English removed all their cannon into this bark, and then
+laid their own ship on shore to new caulk and trim her bottom. This
+being done, and taking in a supply of wood and water, they held their
+course along shore to the westwards, taking the Spanish bark along with
+them. After two days, they removed the men from her, giving them the
+pinnace. Among these were four sailors, bound for Panama, meaning to go
+thence for China, one of whom had many letters and patents, among which
+were letters from the king of Spain to the governor of the Philippines,
+as also the charts which are used in that voyage.
+
+Continuing their course, the English descried, on the 6th of April, a
+ship about two leagues out to sea, which they took early next morning,
+in which was Don Francisco Xarate. Continuing their course, they came to
+the haven of Guatalco on Monday the 13th April, where they remained at
+anchor till the 26th of that month, on which day they sailed to the
+westwards, putting me, Nuno da Silva, on board a ship then in the said
+harbour of Guatalco.
+
+SECTION VII.
+
+_Second Supplement, being the Voyage of Mr John Winter, after parting
+from Sir Francis Drake_.[41]
+
+We passed Cape Deseado into the South Sea on the 6th September, 1578,
+and run to the N.W. about 70 leagues, when the wind turned directly
+against us, with extremely foul weather, as rain, hail, snow, and thick
+fogs, and so continued for more than three weeks, during which time we
+could bear no sail, and were driven into the latitude of 57 deg. S. On the
+15th September, the moon was eclipsed, beginning to be darkened
+immediately after sun-set, about six in the evening, being then the
+vernal equinox in this southern hemisphere. This eclipse happened in
+England on the 16th before one in the morning, which is about six hours
+difference, agreeing to one quarter of the circumference of the globe,
+from the meridian of England to the west.
+
+[Footnote 41: Hakluyt, IV. 253.--This narrative is said to have been
+written by Edward Cliffe, mariner. Only so much of the narrative is
+given here as relates to the voyage of Winter, after parting from Sir
+Francis Drake. One circumstance only may be mentioned, respecting the
+Patagons.--"These men be of no such stature as the Spaniards report,
+being but of the height of Englishmen; for I have seen men in England
+taller than I could see any of them. Peradventure the Spaniards did not
+think that any Englishmen would have come hither so soon, to have
+disproved them in this and divers others of their notorious lies;
+wherefore they presumed more boldly to abuse the world."--Yet even
+recent voyagers have presumed to _abuse the world_, with reporting that
+the Patagons are of gigantic stature.--E.]
+
+The last of September, being a very foul night, we lost the Marigold, a
+bark of about thirty tons, the Pelican, which was our general's ship,
+and our ship the Elizabeth running to the eastwards, to get to the land.
+Of this we got sight on the 7th October, falling into a very dangerous
+bay, full of rocks; and that same night we lost company of Mr Drake.
+Next day, very difficultly escaping from the dangerous rocks among which
+we were embayed, we got again into the Straits of Magellan, where we
+anchored in an open bay for two days, making great fires on the shore,
+that Mr Drake might find us, if he also came into the straits.
+
+We then went into a sound, where we remained about three weeks, naming
+it _The Port of Health_, as most of our men, having been sick with long
+watching, wet, cold, and bad diet, did wonderfully recover their health
+here in a short space, for which praised be God. We found here muscles
+of very great size, some being twenty inches long, yielding very
+pleasant meat, and many of them full of seed pearls. We came out of this
+harbour on the 1st November, abandoning our voyage by compulsion of Mr.
+Winter, sore against the will of the mariners. Mr. Winter alleged that
+he despaired of having winds to carry him to the coast of Peru, and was
+also in fear that Mr. Drake had perished. So we went back again to the
+eastwards through the straits, to St. George's island, where we laid in
+a quantity of a certain kind of fowl, very plentiful in that island, the
+meat of which is not much unlike that of a fat English goose. They have
+no wings, but only short pinions, which serve them in swimming, being of
+a black colour, mixed with white spots on their bellies and round their
+necks. They walk so upright, that they seem afar like little children;
+and when approached they conceal themselves in holes under ground, not
+very deep, of which the island is full. To take them, we used sticks
+having hooks fastened at one end, with which we pulled them out, while
+other men stood by with cudgels to knock them on the head; for they bit
+so cruelly with their hooked bills, that we could not handle them when
+alive.[42]
+
+[Footnote 42: It is almost unnecessary to remark that these were
+penguins.--E.]
+
+Departing from St. George's island, we passed Cape Virgin[43] on the
+11th November, going out of the straits into the southern Atlantic
+ocean, and directed our course to the N.E. till the last day of that
+month, when we arrived at an island in the mouth of the _Rio de la
+Plata_, or River of Silver. On this island there is an incredible number
+of seals, some of which are sixteen feet long, not fearing the approach
+of men. Most of our men were ashore in this island for fifteen days,
+setting up a pinnace; during which time the seals would often come and
+sleep beside our men, rather resisting them than giving place, unless
+when mortal blows forced them to yield. Having finished our pinnace, we
+went to another island, where we watered, and afterwards departed on the
+1st January, 1579. We went to the northwards till the 20th of that
+month, when we came to an island on the coast of Brazil, near a town
+called St Vincent, inhabited by the Portuguese, which is in lat. 24 deg. S.
+Here we lost our pinnace in foul weather, together with her crew of
+eight men. And here also our ship was in great danger, in consequence of
+a strong current, which almost forced her on shore before we were aware,
+so that we had to drop anchor in the open sea, broke our cable and lost
+our anchor, and had to let fell another, in weighing which afterwards
+our men were sore distressed; for, owing to the heaving of the ship with
+the sea, the capstan ran round with so much violence as to throw the men
+from the bars, dashed out the brains of one man, broke the leg of
+another, and severely hurt several more. At length we hove up our
+anchor, and ran to a place called Tanay. where we rode under the lee of
+an island, whence we had a supply of wood and water.
+
+[Footnote 43: Called Cape Victory by Mr Cliffe.--E.]
+
+While at this place, three Portuguese came aboard in a canoe, desiring
+to know who we were and what we wanted. Our captain made answer, that we
+were Englishmen, and had brought commodities with us for their country,
+if they would trade with us, at which they seemed much surprised, as
+they said they had never before heard of any English ship being in that
+country. So they went ashore, taking one of our men with them to speak
+with the governor of the town, while we detained one of the Portuguese
+as a pledge. Soon after there came another canoe on board, in which was
+one Portuguese, all the rest being naked natives of the country. From
+this man we had two small oxen, a young hog, and several fowls, with
+pome-citrons, lemons, oranges, and other fruits, for which our captain
+gave them linen cloth, combs, knives, and other articles of small value.
+In the mean time, the governor of the town sent word that we should have
+nothing, unless the ship was brought into the harbour, to which our
+captain would not consent, lest they might betray us.
+
+Receiving back our man, and returning the Portuguese pledge, we went
+afterwards to the island of St. Sebastian, where we took fish. At this
+place the Portuguese would have betrayed us, had not a Brasilian slave
+informed us by signs, that they were coming in canoes to take us, as it
+actually fell out: For, next morning, they came on in twelve or fourteen
+canoes, some of these having forty men; but being on our guard they
+retired. That same night, two of our men carried away our boat,
+deserting to the Portuguese. Leaving this place, we had sight of Cape St
+Augustine in lat. 8 deg. S. We afterwards had sight of the isle of Fernando
+Noronha, within three degrees of the equator. We crossed the line on the
+13th of April, and got sight of the north star on the 19th of that
+month.
+
+From the 1st to the 5th of May, we sailed about 100 leagues through the
+_Sea of Weeds_, under the tropic of Cancer. Holding our course from
+thence to the N.E. till we were in lat. 47 deg. N. we changed our course on
+the 22nd May to E.N.E. The 29th of May we had soundings in seventy
+fathoms on white ooze, being then in lat. 51 deg. N. The 30th of May we got
+sight of St Ives on the north coast of Cornwall, and arrived on the 2nd
+of June at Ilfracomb, in Devonshire.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III.
+
+VOYAGE OF SIR THOMAS CANDISH ROUND THE WORLD, IN 1586--1588.[44]
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+
+It was the constant policy, during the reign of queen Elizabeth, to
+encourage, as much as possible, the flame of public spirit in private
+individuals, by shewing the utmost readiness on all occasions to honour
+all who performed any remarkable service to their country, though
+sparing of such marks of favour on other occasions. By this wise
+conduct, and by her frequent public discourses on the glory resulting
+from an active life, she excited many of the young nobility, and
+gentlemen of easy fortunes, to hazard their persons and estates in the
+public service, exciting a desire of fame even among the wealthy, and by
+this means uniting the rich, who desired to purchase honour, and the
+indigent, who sought to procure the means of living, in the same
+pursuits. It thus happened in her reign, that such men were of most use
+to their country, as are scarcely of any utility in other reigns; for,
+merit being then the only recommendation at court, those were most
+forward to expose themselves in generous undertakings, who would at any
+other time have thought themselves excused from such dangers and
+fatigues.
+
+[Footnote 44: Hakluyt, IV. 816. Harris, Col. I. 23. Callender, Voy. I.
+424. The earliest account of this voyage, according to the Bibliotheque
+Universelle des Voyages, I. 113, appears to have been published in Dutch
+at Amsterdam, in folio, in 1598. But must assuredly have been a
+translation from the English.--E.]
+
+Thus the earls of Cumberland and Essex, Sir Richard Greenvile, Sir
+Walter Raleigh, Sir Humphrey Gilbert, Sir Robert Dudley, and, many other
+persons of rank and fortune, employed great sums of money, and exposed
+themselves to the greatest dangers, in expeditions against the
+Spaniards, making discoveries in distant parts of the world, and
+planting colonies, which were the glory of those times. Among these, no
+one distinguished himself more than the gentleman whose voyage forms the
+subject of this chapter: whether we consider the expence he incurred,
+the difficulties he encountered, or the success of his enterprise; all
+of which proceeded from that greatness of mind and ardent desire of
+fame, which taught him to despise danger and to encounter fatigue, at an
+age when most men of fortune think the season of youth a sufficient
+excuse for the indulgence of luxury and ease.
+
+Thomas Candish, or Cavendish, of Trimley, in the county of Suffolk,
+Esquire, was a gentleman of an honourable family and large estate, which
+lay in the neighbourhood of Ipswich, then a place of very considerable
+trade. This circumstance gave him an early inclination for the sea,
+which he gratified as soon as he came of age, by selling part of his
+estate, and employing the money in equipping a stout bark of 120 tons,
+called the Tiger, in which he accompanied Sir Richard Greenvile in his
+voyage to Virginia in 1585. In this expedition he underwent many dangers
+and difficulties, without any profit, but returned safe to Falmouth on
+the 6th October of the same year. This want of success did not
+discourage him from undertaking still greater and more hazardous
+expeditions. Having, in his voyage to Virginia, seen a considerable part
+of the Spanish West Indies, and conversed with some persons who had
+sailed with Sir Francis Drake in, his circumnavigation, he became
+desirous of undertaking a similar voyage, as well for repairing the loss
+he had sustained in this first expedition, as to emulate that great and
+fortunate commander, who was now raised to the highest honours in his
+profession.
+
+Returning home, therefore, he immediately applied himself to make such
+preparations as were necessary for the accomplishment of his new design;
+and either sold or mortgaged his estate, to procure a sufficient sum for
+building and equipping two such ships as he deemed requisite for the
+voyage; using such diligence, that his carpenters were at work upon his
+largest ship within a month, and in six months more his little squadron
+was entirely finished, and completely supplied with every necessary for
+the voyage.
+
+The narrative of this voyage is chiefly taken from that given by Harris,
+compared and corrected from that in the collection of Hakluyt, which is
+said to have been written by Mr. Francis Pretty of Eye, in Suffolk, a
+gentleman who sailed, in the expedition. In Hakluyt, this
+circumnavigation is thus styled:--"The admirable and prosperous voyage
+of the worshipful Mr. Thomas Candish of Trimley, in the county of
+Suffolk, Esquire, into the South Sea, and from thence round about the
+circumference of the whole earth, began in the year of our Lord 1586,
+and finished 1588."
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Narrative of the Voyage from England to the Pacific_.
+
+The larger ship of this little squadron was named the Desire, of 140
+tons burden, and the lesser the Content of 60 tons, to which was added a
+bark of 40 tons, called the Hugh Gallant, all supplied at his own
+expence with two years provisions, and manned with 123 officers and men,
+most of them men of experience, and some of whom had served under Sir
+Francis Drake. For their better encouragement, he entered into a fair
+agreement with them, with respect to the proportions in which all prizes
+should be shared among them. He was likewise careful in providing maps,
+sea charts, and draughts, and all such accounts as could be procured of
+voyages already made into those parts which he intended to visit.
+Likewise, by means of his patron, Lord Hansdon, the lord-chamberlain, he
+procured a commission from Queen Elizabeth.
+
+Having thus completed his preparations, he set out from London on the
+10th July, 1586, for Harwich, where he embarked in the Desire, and
+sailed thence for Plymouth, where he arrived on the 18th, and waited
+there for some of his company till the 21st of that month, when he
+hoisted sail on his intended voyage. On the 25th of that month, one Mr.
+Hope died, of a wound received in a duel, during their stay at Plymouth.
+Next day, they fell in with five ships of Biscay, well manned, coming,
+as they supposed, from the great bank of Newfoundland, which attacked
+the Desire; but Mr. Candish gave them so warm a reception, that they
+were glad to sheer off, and continued their course without giving him
+any farther disturbance. As it grew dark, and he feared losing sight of
+his consorts, Mr. Candish did not continue the chase.
+
+They fell in with the island of Fuertaventura, on the 1st August, whence
+they sailed for Rio del Oro and Cape Blanco, and thence along the coast
+of Guinea, with which navigation Mr Brewer, who sailed in the Desire,
+was well acquainted. The men now began to complain much of the scurvy,
+wherefore it was resolved to put them on shore for their recovery on the
+first opportunity. They made Sierra Leona on the 23d of August, and
+reached its southern side on the 25th, where they had five fathoms at
+the lowest ebb; having had for about fourteen leagues, while running
+into this harbour, from eight to sixteen fathoms. At this place they
+destroyed a negro town, because the inhabitants had killed one of their
+men with a poisoned arrow. Some of the men went four miles up the
+harbour in a boat, on the 3d September, where they caught plenty of
+fish; and going on shore, procured some lemons. They saw also some
+buffaloes, on their return to the ship. The 6th they went out of the
+harbour of Sierra Leona, and staid one tide three leagues from the point
+at its mouth, the tide there flowing S.W.
+
+The 7th they departed for one of the islands which lie about ten leagues
+from the point of Sierra Leona, called the Banana isles,[45] and
+anchored that same day off the principal isle, on which they only found
+a few plantains. At the east end of this island they found a town, but
+no inhabitants, and concluded that the negroes sometimes resort thither,
+by seeing the remains of their provisions. There is no fresh water on
+the south side of this island that they could find; but there is in
+three or four places on its north side. The whole island was one entire
+wood, except a few small cleared spots where some huts stood, and these
+were encompassed by plantain-trees, the fruit of which is an excellent
+food. This place is subject to severe thunder-storms, with much rain, in
+September.
+
+[Footnote 45: Harris erroneously names these the islands of Cape Verd,
+which are at a vast distance from Sierra Leona. The Banana isles are in
+lat. 8 deg. N. and long. 12 deg. 30' W. from Greenwich. In Hakluyt these are
+called the isles of Madrabumba, and are said to be ten leagues from the
+point of Sierra Leona.--E.]
+
+Leaving these islands and the African coast on the 10th September, and
+holding their course W.S.W. obliquely across the Atlantic, they fell in
+with a great mountain in Brazil, on the 31st of October, twenty-four
+leagues from Cape _Frio_. This mountain has a high round top, shewing
+from afar like a little town. On the 1st November, they stood in between
+the island of St Sebastian and the main; where they carried their things
+on shore, and erected a forge, and built a pinnace, repairing also every
+thing that was out of order, in which work they were detained till the
+23d of November. Sailing from this place on the 26th, they fell in with
+the coast of South America again in lat. 47 deg. 20' S. whence they
+proceeded along shore till they came to lat. 48 deg. S. finding a steep
+beach all along. On the 27th of November they came to a harbour, into
+which Candish first entered, giving it the name of Port Desire, from
+that of his ship.[46] Near this harbour they found an island or two well
+stocked with seals, and another in which there were vast numbers of grey
+gulls.[47]
+
+[Footnote 46: As laid down in modern maps, the latitude of Port Desire
+is only 47 deg. 15' S.]
+
+[Footnote 47: Probably penguins.--E.]
+
+This haven of Port Desire was found very favourable for careening and
+graving of ships, as the tide there ebbed and flowed considerably. At
+this place the savages wounded two of the Englishmen with their arrows,
+which were made of canes or reeds, tipt with sharpened flints. These
+savage natives of the country round Port Desire were exceedingly wild
+and rude, and as it would seem of a gigantic race, as the measure of one
+of their foot marks was eighteen inches long.[48] This agrees well with
+the assertion of Magellan, though some pains have been taken to
+represent that as fabulous. Magellan called this country Patagonia, and
+its inhabitants Patagons, meaning to signify that they were five cubits,
+or _seven feet and a half high_. Hence, as the Portuguese are not
+commonly very tall, we need not wonder if they styled them giants. If we
+take the usual proportion of the human foot, as between a fifth and a
+sixth part of the height of the whole body, the account given by
+Magellan agrees very exactly with this fact afforded us by Mr Candish;
+and it will be seen in the sequel, that this is not falsified by any of
+our subsequent navigators. When any of these savages die, he is buried
+in a grave constructed of stones near the sea-side, all his darts being
+fastened about his tomb, and his treasure, consisting of shells, laid
+under his head.
+
+[Footnote 48: Without meaning to impugn the received opinion, that the
+Patagons are beyond the ordinary size of man, it may be permitted to
+say, that the evidence, in the text, the only one here adduced, is
+altogether inconclusive; and the subsequent reflections are evidently
+those of Harris, not of Candish.--E.]
+
+They left Port Desire on the 28th December, and anchored near an island
+three leagues to the southward. The 30th they came to a rock, much like
+the Eddystone at Plymouth, about five leagues off the land, in lat 48 deg.
+30' S. and within a mile of it had soundings in eight fathoms, on rocky
+ground. Continuing their course along shore S.S.W. they found vast
+numbers of seals every where on the coast. January 2d, 1587, they fell
+in with a great white cape in lat. 52 deg. S. and had seven fathoms within a
+league of the cape. Next day they came to another cape, in lat. 52 deg. 45'
+S. whence runs a long beach about a league to the southwards, reaching
+to the opening into the Straits of Magellan.[49] January 6th, they
+entered the straits, which they found in some places five or six leagues
+wide, but in others considerably narrower. The 7th, between the mouth of
+the straits and its narrowest part, they took a Spaniard, who had been
+left there with twenty-three others of that nation, being all that
+remained alive of four hundred, who had been landed three years before
+in these straits. This Spaniard shewed them the hull of a small bark,
+supposed to have been left by Sir Francis Drake.
+
+[Footnote 49: The cape at the north side of the eastern entrance into
+the Straits of Magellan, is named Cape Virgin, and is in lat 52 deg. 28' S.
+The great white cape in lat. 52 deg. S. is not so easily ascertained. Cape
+Blanco, on this coast, is in lat. 47 deg. S. which cannot have any reference
+to the white cape of the text.--E.]
+
+The eastern mouth of the straits is in lat. 52 deg. S. From thence to the
+narrowest part is fourteen leagues W. by N. From thence to Penguin
+Island is ten leagues W.S.W. by S. They anchored at Penguin Island on
+the 8th January, where they killed and salted a great store of seals, to
+serve as sea provisions in case of need. Leaving this place on the 9th,
+they sailed S.S.W. The fortress built in these straits by the Spaniards,
+called _Ciudad del Rey Felippe_, had four bulwarks or bastions, in each
+of which was one large cannon, all of which had been buried, and their
+carriages left standing. The English dug them all up, and carried them
+away. Tins city seemed to have been well contrived, especially in its
+situation in regard to wood and water; but miserable was the life this
+forlorn remnant of Spaniards had endured for the last two years, during
+which they had hardly been able to procure any other food than a scanty
+supply of shell-fish, except when they had the good fortune to surprise
+a deer, coming down from the mountains in search of water.
+
+The object of the Spaniards, in erecting this fortress, was to have
+fortified the straits, so as to have excluded all other nations from any
+passage into the South Sea: but, besides the barrenness of the soil, and
+excessive severity of the climate their most implacable enemies, the
+Indians, frequently assailed them, so that they were reduced to the last
+extremity of distress. All the stores they had brought from Spain were
+expended, and none could be procured in the country, which produced
+nothing but deer, and when hunting these for the preservation of their
+lives, they were sure to be fallen upon by the Indians. At length almost
+all the Spaniards died in their houses, and the stench of the putrefying
+carcasses became so intolerable to the few survivors, that they were
+forced to quit the fortress, and to range along the seacoast living upon
+roots, leaves, and sea weeds, or any animals they could occasionally
+fall in with. In this miserable extremity they had determined to attempt
+exploring their way to the Rio Plata, and were already on their way,
+when this Spaniard was taken by the English.
+
+Mr Candish named the haven where the fortress stood _Port Famine_, owing
+to the utter want of all necessaries. It is in lat. 53 deg. S. Leaving this
+place on the 14th, they ran five leagues S.W. to Cape Froward, in the
+southernmost part of the straits, in lat. 54 deg. S. Sailing five leagues W.
+by N. from this cape, they put into a bay, called Muscle Cove, from the
+great quantities of muscles found there. Leaving that place on the 21st,
+and sailing N. by W. ten leagues, they came to a fair bay, which Candish
+named Elizabeth Bay. Leaving that place on the 22d, they found a good
+river two leagues farther on, up which a boat was towed for three miles.
+The country about this river was pleasant and level, but all the other
+land on both sides of the straits was rugged, mountainous, and rocky,
+inhabited by a strong and well-made, but very brutish kind of savages,
+who are said to have eaten many of the Spaniards, and seemed much
+disposed to have feasted also on English flesh; but they failed in their
+attempts to circumvent them. Discovering a plot laid by these savages to
+entrap him and his men, Candish gave them a volley of musquetry, which
+slew several of them, and the rest ran away.
+
+Leaving this river, they sailed two leagues farther, to an inlet named
+St Jerome's channel; whence, proceeding three or four leagues W. they
+came to a cape to the northward, whence the course to the western
+entrance of the straits is N.W. and N.W. by W. for about thirty-four
+leagues; so that the entire length of these straits is ninety leagues.
+This western entrance is in lat. 52 deg. 40' S. nearly under the same
+parallel with the eastern mouth. In consequence of storms and excessive
+rains, they were forced to remain in a harbour near this western mouth
+of the straits till the 23d of February. By the excessive rains, pouring
+down with extreme fury in torrents from the mountains, they were brought
+into extreme danger; and were also much distressed for want of food, as
+the excessive severity of the weather hardly permitted their landing,
+to range the country in search of a supply In their passage through
+these straits, it was observed that there were harbours on both shores,
+at every mile or two, tolerably safe and convenient for small ships.
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_Transactions on the Western Coast of America_.
+
+The weather moderating, they entered into the great South Sea, or
+Pacific Ocean, on the 24th February, 1587, observing on the south side
+of the entrance a very high cape, with an adjoining low point; while, at
+the northern side of the entrance there were four or five islands, six
+leagues from the main land, having much broken and sunken ground among
+and around them. In the night of the 1st March, there arose a great
+storm, in which they lost sight of the Hugh Gallant, being then in lat.
+49 deg. S. and forty-five leagues from the land. This storm lasted three or
+four days, in which time the Hugh sprung a leak, and was tossed about in
+this unknown sea, devoid of all help, being every moment ready to sink.
+By great exertions, however, she was kept afloat; and on the 15th, in
+the morning, she got in between the island of St Mary and the main,
+where she again met the admiral and the Content, which two ships had
+secured themselves during two days of the storm, at the island of Mocha,
+in lat. 38 deg. S'.[50]
+
+[Footnote 50: Mocha is in lat. 38 deg. 20', and the isles of St Mary in 37 deg.,
+both S.]
+
+At this place some of the company went ashore well armed, and were met
+by the Indians, who gave them a warm reception with their bows and
+arrows. These Indians were of the district in Chili called Araucania, a
+country rich in gold, and consequently very tempting to the avaricious
+Spaniards, which accordingly they had repeatedly invaded, but to no
+purpose, as the natives always defended themselves so valiantly, that
+their enemies could never subdue them. On the present occasion,
+mistaking the English for Spaniards, these brave and desperate Araucans
+gave Candish a hostile welcome. After this skirmish, Candish went with
+his ships under the lee of the west side of St Mary's island, where he
+found good anchorage in six fathoms. This island, in lat. 37 deg. S. abounds
+in hogs, poultry, and various kinds of fruit; but the inhabitants are
+held under such absolute slavery by the Spaniards, that they dare not
+kill a hog, or even a hen, for their own use; and although the Spaniards
+have made them converts to Christianity, they use them more like dogs
+than men or Christians.
+
+The admiral went ashore on the 16th March, with seventy or eighty men
+well armed, and was met by two Indian chiefs, who conducted him to a
+chapel, round which were several store-houses, well filled with wheat
+and barley, as clean and fair as any in England. He accordingly provided
+his ships with a sufficient store of grain from this place, and laid in
+besides an ample supply of hogs, hens, potatoes, dried dog-fish, and
+maize or Guinea wheat. The admiral invited the two principal Indians to
+an entertainment on board; and the wine having sharpened their wit, to
+perceive that the admiral and his men were not Spaniards, as they had
+hitherto supposed them, they began to talk very freely about the gold
+mines, saying that the English might procure gold to their full content,
+by going into the country of the Araucans. But not fully understanding
+them, as the information was mostly given by signs, the admiral did not
+prosecute this proposed adventure, but proceeded on his voyage.
+
+Leaving the island of St Mary on the 18th in the morning, they sailed
+all that day N.N.E. ten leagues. The 19th they steered in with the land,
+E.N.E. and anchored under an island in the Bay of Conception, in lat.
+36 deg. 36' S. The 30th they came into the Bay of Quintero, in lat. 32 deg. 45'
+S. and next day a party of fifty or sixty men, well armed, marched seven
+or eight miles into the country. In their march, they saw vast herds of
+wild cattle, with horses, dogs, hares, rabbits, partridges, and other
+birds, with many fine rivers, well stocked with wild fowl. Having
+travelled as far as they conveniently could for the mountains, and
+having rested and refreshed on the banks of a pleasant river, they
+returned in good order to the ships at night, without meeting any
+remarkable adventure; although a party of 200 horse had been abroad all
+that day in search of them, upon information of some Spaniards who had
+seen them the preceding day, but durst not venture to attack them,
+keeping always at a distance on the hills. They had at this time a short
+conference with three Spanish horsemen, through the medium of the poor
+half-starved Spaniard they took on board in the Straits of Magellan;
+but, in spite of his many oaths and protestations never to forsake
+Candish, he took the opportunity to mount on horseback behind one of his
+countrymen, and got off.
+
+Next day, the 1st April, some of the English being on shore filling
+their water-casks, the Spaniards became bolder, and watching an
+opportunity when the sailors were hard at work, poured down with their
+200 horse from the hills, slew some of them, and made a few prisoners.
+But this glorious victory was soon snatched from their hands by the
+arrival of a reinforcement of fifteen English, who rescued the
+prisoners, killed twenty-four of the Spaniards, and drove the rest back
+to the mountains. After this, they continued in the road till the 5th,
+and watered there in spite of the Spaniards. On the 5th they weighed
+anchor, and went to a small island about a league from the bay, which is
+full of penguins and other sea fowl, of which they provided themselves
+with what store they wanted; after which they sailed N. and N. by W. in
+order to prosecute their voyage.
+
+The 15th April they came to _Moro Moreno_, in lat. 23 deg. 30' S. under the
+tropic of Capricorn, where there is an excellent harbour, made by means
+of an island, having an entrance for ships at either end. The admiral
+went ashore here with thirty men, and was met by the Indians, who
+brought them water and wood on their backs. These are a simple sort of
+people, living in a wild and savage manner, in great dread of the
+Spaniards. They brought the admiral and his company to their houses,
+about two miles from the harbour. These were only constructed of a few
+rafters laid across upon forked sticks stuck in the ground, having a few
+boughs laid over them by way of a roof. Their beds were the skins of
+wild beasts laid on the ground; and their food little else than raw
+stinking fish. When any of them dies, he is buried with all his arms and
+goods, as bows and arrows, and even his canoe is laid in the earth along
+with him. Their canoes, if such they may be called, consist of two skin
+bags, like large bladders, blown up with quills at one end, and fastened
+together by the sinews of some wild beast; yet in these they think
+nothing of venturing to sea, loading them even with great quantities of
+fish, part of which they have to give in tribute to the Spaniards, the
+rest being kept to stink for their own eating.
+
+On the 3d May, they came into a bay on which were three small towns,
+Paracca, Chincha, and Pisco, which latter is in lat. 13 deg. 20' S.[51] They
+landed here, and took some provisions, as wine, bread, poultry and figs,
+from the houses, but could not get ashore at the best of these towns,
+owing to the sea running too high. By this time; they had made two
+valuable prizes, laden with sugar, melasses, maiz, cordovan leather,
+_montego de porco_, packs of painted calicoes, Indian coats, marmalade,
+hens, and other articles, which would have yielded L20,000, if there had
+been any opportunity for selling their cargoes. That not being the case,
+they took out as much as could be conveniently stowed in their own
+ships, burning their two prizes with the rest of their contents.
+
+[Footnote 51: Pisco, the principal of these towns, is in lat. 16 deg. 43'
+S.]
+
+The 26th May, they came into the road Payta, in lat. 5 deg. 4' S. the town
+being very neat and clean, and containing about 200 houses. Landing here
+with sixty or seventy men, Candish had a skirmish with the inhabitants,
+whom he beat out of the town, forcing them to take refuge in the hills,
+whence they continued to fire at the English, but would not venture a
+fair battle on the plain ground. Having possessed themselves of the
+town, the English marched after the enemy on the hill, and put them
+completely to the rout, seizing all their baggage, which they brought
+back with them to the town. They here found all sort of household stuff,
+together with warehouses well filled with various kinds of goods, and
+twenty-five pound weight of silver in pieces of eight. After taking away
+what plunder they found convenient, they set fire to the town, which was
+burnt to the ground, and destroyed likewise a bark at anchor in the
+roads; after which they set sail for Puna.
+
+They arrived at Puna, in lat. 3 deg. 10' S. on the 25th of May, when they
+found a ship of 250 tons at anchor in the harbour. After sinking her,
+they went ashore. The lord of this island, styled the Cacique of Puna,
+was an Indian by birth, but having married a Spanish woman, he became a
+Christian, and made all his subjects follow his example. He had a
+sumptuous and well-contrived palace near the shore, with curious gardens
+adjoining, and fair prospects, both to the water and up the country. All
+the inhabitants of this island were kept continually employed in
+fabricating cables, such abundance of which are made here by the Indian
+subjects of this cacique; that most of the ships navigating the South
+Sea are supplied from hence. This island is nearly as large as the isle
+of Wight in England, being about forty English miles from S.W. to N.E.
+and sixteen in the opposite direction. It enjoys a great share in the
+blessings of nature; for, although it has no mines of gold or silver, it
+affords every thing in abundance that is necessary to the comforts of
+life. The pastures are excellent, and are well stored with horses, oxen,
+sheep, and goats, yielding abundance of milk; it has also plenty of
+poultry, turkeys, ducks of a large size, and pigeons. The cacique has
+several orchards, yielding a great variety of fine fruits, as oranges,
+lemons, figs, pomegranates, pumpkins, melons, and many others; with a
+variety of odoriferous plants, as rosemary, thyme, and the like. One of
+these gardens or orchards was planted with the bombast cotton tree,
+which grows in pods, in each of which there are seven or eight seeds.
+
+The 29th of May, Candish went to an island near Puna, into which the
+cacique had conveyed all the valuable furniture of his palace, with
+other things of value. These stores were all discovered, and plundered
+of every thing thought worth carrying on board the ships, and the rest
+destroyed. The church also of Puna, which stood near the palace, was
+burnt down, and its five bells carried to the ships. On the 2d June, the
+English were attacked by 100 Spaniards, who killed or took prisoners
+twelve of their men, losing forty-six of their own in the encounter.
+Candish landed again that same day with seventy English, and had another
+battle with the Spaniards, who were joined by 200 Indians armed with
+bows and arrows. The English were victorious, after which they made
+great havock of the fields and orchards, burnt four ships on the stocks,
+and left the town of 300 houses a heap of rubbish. Besides this
+principal town, there were two others on the island of 200 houses each,
+so that Puna was the best settled island on all this coast.
+
+Setting sail from Puna on the 5th June, they sailed to Rio Dolce, where
+they watered. They passed the equinoctial on the 12th, continuing their
+course northwards all the rest of that month. The 1st July, they had
+sight of New Spain, being four leagues from the land in 10 deg. N. The 9th
+they took a new ship of 120 tons, in which was one Michael Sancius, a
+native of Provence, a very skilful coasting pilot for these seas, whom
+Candish retained as his pilot, and from whom he got the first hint of
+the great ship Anna Maria, which he afterwards took on her voyage from
+the Philippine islands. Taking all the men, and every thing of any value
+from the ship of Sancius, they set her on fire. The 26th they came to
+anchor in the mouth of the river Capalico, and the same night went in
+the pinnace with thirty men to Guatalco, two leagues from that river, in
+15 deg. 70' N. and burnt both the town and custom-house, which was a large
+handsome building, in which there were laid up 600 bags of indigo, and
+400 bags of cacao, every bag of the former being worth forty crowns, and
+each of the latter worth ten. These cacaos serve among the people of
+these parts both as food and money, being somewhat like almonds, yet not
+quite so pleasant, and pass in trade by way of small change, 150 of them
+being equal in value to a rial of plate.
+
+They set sail from Capalico on the 28th, the sea running so high that
+they could not fill their water casks, and came to Guatalco that same
+night. Next day Candish went ashore with thirty men, marching two miles
+into the woods, where he took a _mestizo_ belonging to the custom-house
+of that town, having with him a considerable quantity of goods, both
+which and their master were carried to the ships. The 24th August,
+Candish went with thirty men in the pinnace to the haven of _Puerto de
+Navidad_ in lat. 19 deg. 24' N. where Sancius had informed him there would
+be a prize; but, before their arrival, she had gone twelve leagues
+farther to fish for pearls. They here made prisoner of a mulatto, who
+had been sent to give notice of the English, all along the coast of New
+Gallicia, and got possession of all his letters. They likewise burnt the
+town, and two ships of 200 tons here building, after which they returned
+to the ships.
+
+They came on the 26th into the bay of St Jago, where they watered at a
+good river, which yielded them plenty of fish, and where they found some
+pearls. This bay is in lat. 19 deg. 18' N. Leaving this bay on the 2d
+September, they came next day into the bay of Malacca, a league westward
+from port Navidad, and a good place for ships to ride in. That day,
+Candish went ashore with about thirty men, to an Indian town named
+Acatlan, about two leagues from the road.[52] This town or village
+consisted of twenty or thirty houses and a church, which they
+demolished, and then returned at night to the ships. Leaving this bay on
+the 4th, they came on the 8th to the road of Chacalla, eighteen leagues
+from Cape Corientes. On the 9th, Candish sent a party of forty men,
+guided by Sancius, which, after marching through woods and deserts,
+lighted upon a few families, some of which were Indians, and others
+Spanish and Portuguese, all of whom were brought to the ships. The women
+were ordered to fetch plantains, lemons, oranges, and other fruits, in
+reward for which all their husbands were set free, except a Spaniard
+named Sembrano, and Diego, a Portuguese.
+
+[Footnote 52: Guatlan is the name of a bay on this coast, and which is
+probably corrupted in the text to Acatlan.--E.]
+
+On the 12th they arrived at the island of St Andrew, which is very full
+of wood, and where they found plenty of fowls and seals, together with a
+sort of serpents, or lizards rather, called _Iguanos_, having four feet
+and a long sharp tail, which they found good eating. Leaving this isle,
+they came to the road of Mazatlan on the 24th, lying under the tropic of
+Cancer. The river here is large within, but much obstructed by a bar at
+its mouth. The bay abounds with fish, and there are abundance of good
+fruits up the country. Departing from this bay on the 27th, they came to
+an island, a league north from Mazatlan,[53] where they heeled their
+ships, and rebuilt their pinnace. On this isle, they found fresh water,
+by digging two or three feet into the sand, otherwise they must have
+gone back twenty or thirty leagues for water, being advised by one
+Flores, a Spanish prisoner, to dig in the sands, where no water or sign
+of any could be perceived. Having amply supplied the ships with water,
+they remained at this island till the 9th October, and then sailed from
+Cape San Lucar, the S.W. point of California, in lat. 22 deg. 50' N. which
+they fell in with on the 14th, observing that it much resembled the
+Needles at the Isle of Wight, which had been before noticed by Sir
+Francis Drake. Within this cape, there is a large bay, called by the
+Spaniards _Aguada Segura_,[54] into which falls a fine fresh-water
+river, the banks of which are usually inhabited by many Indians in the
+summer. They went into this bay, where they again watered, and remained
+waiting for the Accapulco ship till the 4th November, the wind
+continuing all that time to hang westerly.
+
+[Footnote 53: In our best modern maps no such island is to be found; but
+about the same distance to the S. is a cluster of small isles.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 54: Probably that now called the bay of St Barnaby, about
+twenty miles E.N.E. from Cape San Lucar.--E.]
+
+The 4th November, putting to sea, the Desire and Content beat to and fro
+to windward off the head land of California; and that very morning one
+of the men in the admiral, going aloft to the topmast, espied a ship
+bearing in from seaward for the cape. Putting every thing in readiness
+for action, Candish gave chase, and coming up with her in the afternoon,
+gave her a broadside and a volley of small arms. This ship was the Santa
+Anna of 700 tons burden, belonging to the king of Spain, and commanded
+by the admiral of the South Sea. Candish instantly boarded, finding the
+Spaniards in a good posture of defence, and was repulsed with the loss
+of two men slain and four or five wounded. He then renewed the action
+with his cannon and musquetry, raking the St Ann, and killing or
+wounding great numbers, as she was full of men. The Spaniards long
+defended themselves manfully; but the ship being sore wounded, so that
+the water poured in a-main, they at last hung out a flag of truce,
+praying for quarter, and offering to surrender. This was immediately
+agreed to by Candish, who ordered them to lower their sails, and to send
+their chief officers to his ship. They accordingly hoisted out their
+boat, in which came the captain, the pilot, and one of the chief
+merchants, who surrendered themselves, and gave an account of the value
+of their ship, in which were 122,000 pezos in gold, with prodigious
+quantities of rich silks, satins, damasks, and divers kinds of
+merchandise, such as musk, and all manner of provisions, almost as
+acceptable to the English as riches, having been long at sea.
+
+The prize thus gloriously obtained, Candish returned to _Aguada_, or
+_Puerto Seguro_, on the 6th November, where he landed all the Spaniards,
+to the number of 150 persons, men and women, giving them plenty of wine
+and victuals, with the sails of their ship and some planks, to build
+huts or tents for them to dwell in. The owners of the prize being thus
+disposed of, the next thing was to share the booty; which ungracious
+work of distribution soon involved Candish in all the troubles of a
+mutiny, every one being eager for gold, yet no one satisfied with his
+share. This disturbance was most violent in the Content; but all was
+soon appeased and compromised by the candid and generous behaviour of
+Candish. The 17th of November, being the coronation day of queen
+Elizabeth, was celebrated by discharges of ordnance, and vollies of
+small shot, and at night by fireworks. Of the prisoners taken in the
+Spanish ship, Candish reserved two Japanese boys, three natives of the
+island of Luzon or Manilla, a Portuguese who had been in China and
+Japan, and a Spanish pilot, who was thoroughly versant in the navigation
+between New Spain and the Philippine islands. Accapulco is the haven
+whence they fit out for the Philippines, and the Ladrones are their
+stated places of refreshment on this voyage.
+
+Having dismissed the Spanish captain with a noble present, and
+sufficient provision for his defence against the Indians, and removed
+everything from the prize which his ships could contain, Candish set the
+Santa Anna on fire on the 19th November, having still 500 tons of her
+goods remaining, and saw her burnt to the water's edge.
+
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_Voyage Home to England_.
+
+This great business, for which they had so long waited, being now
+accomplished, they set sail cheerfully on their return for England. The
+Content staid some short time behind the Desire, which went on before,
+expecting she would soon follow, but she never rejoined company.
+Pursuing the voyage, therefore, in the Desire, Candish directed his
+course for the Ladrones across the Pacific Ocean, these islands being
+nearly 1800 leagues distant from this harbour of _Aguada Segura_ in
+California. This passage took forty-five days, from the 19th November,
+1587, to the 3d January, 1588. On this day, early in the morning, they
+had sight of Guam, one of the Ladrones, in lat. 13 deg. 40' N. and long.
+143 deg. 30' E. Sailing with a gentle gale before the wind, they came within
+two leagues of the island, where they saw sixty or seventy canoes full
+of savages, who brought cocoas, plantains, potatoes, and fresh fish, to
+exchange for some of their commodities. They gave them in return some
+pieces of old iron, which they hung upon small cords and fishing lines,
+and so lowered down to the canoes, getting back, in the same manner,
+what the savages offered in exchange. In the course of this traffic the
+savages crowded so much about the ship, that two of their canoes were
+broken; yet none of the savages were drowned, as they were almost as
+familiar with the water as if they had been fishes. The savages
+continued following the ship, and would not quit her company till
+several shots were fired at them; though 'tis ten to one if any of them
+were killed, as they are so very nimble, throwing themselves immediately
+into the water, and diving beyond the reach of danger on the slightest
+warning.
+
+These islanders were large handsome men, extraordinarily fat, and of a
+tawny colour, mostly having very long hair, some wearing it tied up in
+large knots on the crown of their heads, like certain wooden images at
+the heads of their canoes. Their canoes were very artificially made,
+considering that they use no edge-tools in their construction; and are
+about seven or eight yards in length, by half a yard only in breadth,
+their heads and stems being both alike, and having rafts made of canes
+or reeds on their starboard sides, being also supplied both with masts
+and sails. These latter are made of sedges, and are either square or
+triangular. These canoes have this property, that they will sail almost
+as well against the wind as before it.
+
+On the 19th January, at day-break, Candish fell in with a head-land of
+the Philippine islands, called _Cabo del Espiritu Santo_. The island
+itself [Samar] is of considerable size, consisting of high land in the
+middle, and depressed in its east and west extremities; the latter of
+which runs a great way out to sea. It is in lat. 30 deg. N. being distant
+110 leagues from Guam and about 60 leagues from Manilla, the chief of
+the Philippines.[55] Samar is a woody island, and its inhabitants are
+mostly heathens. Candish spent eleven days in sailing from Guam to this
+place, having had some foul weather, and scarcely carrying any sail for
+two or three nights. Manilla, at this time, was an unwalled town of no
+great strength, yet containing vast riches in gold and valuable
+commodities, and inhabited by six or seven hundred Spaniards. It has a
+constant annual correspondence with Accapulco in New Spain; besides
+which twenty or thirty vessels come thither yearly from China, for
+conducting its trade with the _Sangueloes_: These are Chinese merchants,
+very sharp and sensible men in every thing relating to trade, extremely
+ingenious in all kinds of mechanical contrivances, and the most expert
+embroiderers on silk and satin of any in the world. They will execute
+any form of beast, fowl, or fish, in gold, silver, or silk, having all
+the just proportions and colours in every part, and giving all the life
+and beauty to their work, as if done by the best painter, or even as
+nature has bestowed on the originals. The trade of these men with
+Manilla must be very profitable, as they bring great quantities of gold
+there, and exchange it against silver, weight for weight.[56]
+
+[Footnote 55: The latitude of Cape Espiritu Santo, as given in the test,
+is grossly erroneous, being only 12 deg. 35' N. and its long. 125 deg. 30' E.
+from Greenwich. The difference of longitude from Guam, Guaham, or
+Guaci, the most southerly of the Ladrones, is 17 deg. 45' nearly east, and
+consequently 355 marine leagues. This island is divided from Luzon, or
+Luconia, the principal island of the Philippines, by the narrow straits
+of San Bernardino; and Cape Espiritu Santo is about 100 leagues, in a
+straight line, from the city of Manilla, which lies to the N.W. Cape
+Espiritu Santo is at the N.W. extremity of the island of Samar.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 56: This surely is an egregious error, as such acute merchants
+as the Chinese are here represented, and actually are, could never be so
+foolish as to give gold for silver, weight for weight. Before the
+present scarcity of bullion, the ordinary European price of exchange,
+was fourteen for one; and perhaps the then price in China might be
+lower, as twelve, eleven, or ten; but equality is quite
+inconceivable.--E.]
+
+The same day on which he fell in with Cape Espiritu Santo, 14th of
+January, 1588, Candish entered in the evening into the straits of San
+Bernardino, between Samar or Cambaia, and the island of Luzon. The 15th
+he fell in with the island of _Capul_, passing a very narrow strait
+between that island and another, in which the current of the tide was
+considerable. In this passage, a ledge of rocks lay off the point of
+Capul, but was passed without danger. Within the point was a fair bay,
+with a good harbour, having anchorage in four fathoms, within a cable's
+length of the shore. Coming to anchor here about ten in the morning, the
+Desire was immediately boarded by a canoe, in which was one of the seven
+chiefs of the island. Passing themselves for Spaniards, the English
+traded with these people for cocoa-nuts and potatoes, giving a yard of
+linen for four cocoa-nuts, and as much for about a quart of potatoes,
+which they found sweet and excellent food, either boiled or roasted.
+
+The cacique or chief who came on board had his skin curiously streaked
+or painted [tatooed], full of strange devices all over his body. Candish
+kept him on board, desiring him to send his servants, who paddled his
+canoe, to bring the other six chiefs to the ship. They came accordingly,
+attended by a great train of the natives, bringing vast quantities of
+hogs and hens, and a full market of cocoa-nuts and potatoes; so that the
+English were occupied the whole day in purchasing, giving eight rials of
+plate for a hog, and one for a hen. At this place, a justly-merited
+punishment was inflicted on a Spanish pilot, taken in the Santa Anna,
+who had plotted to betray them to the Spaniards, and for which he was
+hanged. Candish remained here for nine days, all the time receiving
+ample supplies of fresh victuals, good water, and wood for fuel. The
+islanders are all pagans, who are said to worship the devil, and to
+converse with him. They are of a tawny complexion, and go almost naked;
+the men wearing a small square piece of cloth in front, woven from
+plantain-leaves, and another behind, which is brought up between their
+legs, both being fastened to a girdle round their waists. They are all
+circumcised, and have also a strange custom, hardly practised any where
+else but in Pegu, having a nail of tin in a perforation through the
+glans, which nail is split at one end and rivetted; but which can be
+taken out as they have occasion, and put in again. This is said to have
+been contrived, on the humble petition of the women, to prevent
+perpetrating an unnatural crime, to which they were much addicted.
+
+On the 23d of January, Candish summoned all the caciques of this island,
+and an hundred more, who had paid him tribute, and then revealed to them
+all, when assembled, that he and his men were Englishmen, and the
+greatest enemies the Spaniards had in the world. At the same time he
+generously restored them, in money, the value of all the tribute they
+had paid to him, in hogs, cocoa-nuts, potatoes, and the like. This
+unexpected generosity astonished the whole assembly, who applauded his
+bounty, and offered to join him with all the forces of their respective
+districts, if he would go to war with the Spaniards. They seemed much
+pleased with finding that Candish and his people were English, and
+thankful for the kindness with which they had been treated. On taking
+leave, they rowed round the ship awhile in their canoes, as if in
+compliment to the English; and Candish caused a gun to be fired at their
+departure.
+
+Setting sail on the 24th, Candish ran along the coast of Luzon, steering
+N.W. between that island and _Masbate_. In the islands thereabout, the
+Spaniards were observed to keep a strict watch, making great fires, and
+discharging their pieces all night, having been much alarmed by the
+arrival of the English. The island of _Panama_ is in many places plain
+and level, affording many large, tall, and straight trees, fit for
+masts, and has several mines of very fine gold, which are possessed by
+the natives. To the south of this is the island of the Negroes, which is
+very large, almost as big as England, and is in lat. 9 deg. N.[57] It
+appeared to consist mostly of low land, and to be very fertile.
+
+[Footnote 57: Negro island reaches from lat. 9 deg. 15' to 11 deg. 45' N. and is
+consequently two and a half degrees from N. to S. about 174 English
+miles, but does not any where exceed thirty miles from E. to W.--E.]
+
+At six in the morning of the 29th of January, they began to pass through
+the straits between Panama and Negro islands, and, after proceeding
+sixteen leagues, they found a fair opening in these straits, trending
+S.W. by S. About this time, being rejoined by their boat, which had been
+sent before them in the morning, Candish sent a Spanish prisoner on
+shore, with a message to his captain, who commanded a ship which lay at
+Panama the night before, desiring him to provide an abundant supply of
+gold against the return of the Desire, as he meant to pay him a visit at
+Manilla, and as that was a long voyage, it merited good entertainment.
+He said farther, that he would have come now, to weigh some of his
+Spanish gold in English scales, if he had possessed a larger boat for
+landing his men on the island.
+
+Proceeding on the voyage, they saw Batochina on the 8th of February, an
+island near Gilolo, in the lat. of 1 deg. N. The 14th of that month they
+fell in with eleven or twelve small flat low islands, almost level with
+the sea, in lat. 3 deg. 10' S. near the Moluccas. March 1st, having passed
+the straits between Java Major and Java Minor, they anchored under the
+S.W. part of Java Major, where they saw some people fishing in a bay
+under the island. The admiral sent a boat to them, in which was a negro
+who could speak the _Moresco_[58] language, which is much used in Java.
+But, being frightened at the approach of the boat, they all got on shore
+and ran away into the woods. One of them, however, came back to the
+shore, on being called to by the negro, and directed where to find fresh
+water; besides which, he undertook to carry a message to the king of
+that part of the island from the admiral, certifying that he had come to
+purchase victuals, or any commodities the country afforded. In
+consequence of this message, nine or ten canoes belonging to the king
+came off, on the 12th March, loaded with all sorts of provisions as deep
+as they could swim; bringing oxen, hogs, hens, geese, eggs, sugar,
+cocoa-nuts, plantains, oranges, lemons, wine, and arrack.
+
+[Footnote 58: Probably the Malay is here meant, and called Moresco or
+Moors, an ordinary term for Mahometans.--E.]
+
+At the same time two Portuguese came off to visit Candish, and to
+enquire about their king, Don Antonio, then residing in England. These
+persons gave him a full account of the manners and customs of the people
+of this island. The king of this part was held in prodigious awe by his
+subjects, over whom he exercised absolute power, insomuch that no man
+was permitted to make a bargain without his leave, on pain of death. He
+had an hundred wives, and his son fifty; who may possibly be happy
+enough while he lives; but when he dies, and his body is burnt, and the
+ashes collected into an urn, the tragedy of his wives begins five days
+afterwards. They are then all conducted to an appointed place, where the
+favourite wife throws a ball from her hand, and where it stops marks the
+place of their deaths. Being come there, and turning their faces to the
+east, they all draw their daggers and stab themselves to the heart;
+after which they smear themselves with their own blood, and thus die.
+
+The men of this island are excellent soldiers, being hardy, valiant, and
+desperate to the last degree, sticking at nothing commanded by their
+king, however dangerous; and, should he even command them to plunge a
+dagger into their own breast, or to leap from a precipice, or into a den
+of wild beasts, they instantly obey: For the displeasure of their
+sovereign is as certain death as the point of a sword, or the fangs of a
+beast of prey. Their complexion is tawny, like the other natives of
+India, and they go entirely naked; but their women are of a fairer hue,
+and are more modestly cloathed than the men.
+
+After this relation of the Portuguese, having satisfied the Javans for
+the provisions they had supplied, and received a promise of good
+entertainment to the English when they might return to their island,
+Candish took leave of them, making a present to their king of three
+large cannon. Next day, being the 16th of March, he made sail for the
+Cape of Good Hope, spending all the rest of that month, all April, and a
+part of May, in traversing the vast ocean between the island of Java and
+the southern extremity of Africa, making many observations on the
+appearances of the stars, the weather, winds, tides, currents,
+soundings, and bearings and positions of lands.
+
+On the 11th of May, land was espied bearing N. and N. by W. and towards
+noon more land was seen bearing W. which was believed to be the Cape of
+Good Hope, being then about forty or fifty leagues from that southern
+promontory of Africa.[59] The wind being scanty, they stood off to the
+southwards till midnight; and, the wind being then fair, stood their
+course directly west. On the 12th and 13th they were becalmed, with a
+thick and hazy atmosphere. The weather cleared upon the 14th, when they
+again saw land, which proved to be Cape _Falso_, forty or fifty leagues
+short, or to the eastwards of the Cape of Good Hope.[60] This Cape
+Falso is easily known, having three hills directly over it, the highest
+in the middle, and only a little distance from each other; the ground
+being much lower by the sea-side. Besides which, the Cape of Good Hope
+bears W. by S. from this cape. They discovered the Cape of Good Hope on
+the 16th of May, observing the head-land to be considerably high, having
+two hummocks at the westerly point, a little off the main, and three
+others a little farther into the sea, yet low-land still between these
+and the sea. By the Portuguese the Cape of Good Hope is said to be 2000
+leagues from Java; but by their reckoning they made it only 1850
+leagues, which took them just nine weeks in the run.
+
+[Footnote 59: Either this is a gross error, or it means that their
+reckoning still made that distance from the Cape, as nothing nearly
+approaching to such a distance can possibly be seen.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 60: Captain Falso is only ten leagues E. from the Cape of Good
+Hope; but perhaps Cape Aguillas may be meant in the text, which is about
+thirty-five leagues E.S.E. from the Cape.--E.]
+
+By break of day on the 8th June, they were within seven or eight leagues
+of St Helena, of which island they had merely a glimpse that day, as,
+having little or no wind, they had to stand off and on all night. Next
+day, having a tolerably good wind, they stood in with the shore, sending
+the boat before, and came to anchor in a good bay, under the N.W. side
+of the island, in twelve fathoms, only two or three cables length from
+the shore. This island lies in the middle of the Atlantic Ocean, almost
+at equal distances from the main land of Africa and that of Brazil, in
+Lat. 15 deg. 43' S. between five and six hundred leagues from the Cape of
+Good Hope.
+
+Candish went here on shore, and entered the church, to which there was a
+fair causeway; having a _frame between two bowls_, and a cross of
+freestone adjoining. Within it was hung with painted cloth, on which
+were represented the Blessed Virgin, the story of the Crucifixion, and
+other holy legends, hung round the altar. The valley in which this
+church stands is extremely pleasant, and so full of fruit-trees and
+excellent plants, that it seemed like a very fair and well-cultivated
+garden, having long rows of lemon, orange, citron, pomegranate, date,
+and fig-trees, delighting the eye with blossoms, green fruit, and ripe,
+all at once. These trees seemed nicely trimmed, and there were many
+delightful walks under the shelter of their boughs, which were
+pleasant, cool, and shady. At some distance there rises a fine clear
+spring, which diffuses itself in many fine rivulets, all through this
+valley, watering all its parts, and refreshing every plant and tree. In
+the whole of this great garden there is hardly any unoccupied space; as,
+where nature may have left any part empty, there art has supplied the
+deficiency, so as to fill the whole space to advantage. This island also
+affords great abundance of partridges and pheasants, both being larger
+than ours in England. There are also turkeys, both black and white, with
+red heads, about as large as those in England, and their eggs much the
+same, only altogether white. There is also plenty of _cabritos_, or wild
+goats, as big as asses, and having manes like horses, and their beards
+reaching down to the ground. These are so numerous, that their herds or
+flocks are sometimes a whole mile in length. It contains also vast herds
+of wild-swine, which keep chiefly in the mountains, as do likewise the
+wild-goats. These swine are very fat, but so excessively wild that they
+are never to be got at by a man, unless when asleep, or rolling
+themselves in the mire.
+
+Having taken in all necessaries that this place produced, Candish set
+sail for England on the 20th of June, standing N.W. by W. It is
+observable, that the wind at St Helena is generally off the shore. On
+Friday, the 23d of August, he steered E. and E. by S. for the
+northernmost of the Azores; and on the 29th, after midnight, he got
+sight of the islands of Flores and Corvo, in lat. 39 deg. 30' N. whence he
+shaped his course N.E. He met a Flemish vessel on the 3d September,
+bound from Lisbon, from which he had the joyful news of the total defeat
+of the Spanish Armada. On the 9th September, after receiving a farewell
+from the wind in a violent storm, which carried away most of his sails,
+Candish arrived at the long-desired haven of Plymouth.
+
+There had not hitherto been any voyage of so much consequence, or
+attended by such uninterrupted success as this: As plainly appears from
+the length of time occupied by that of Magellan, which extended to three
+years and a month; that of Sir Francis Drake extending to upwards of two
+years and ten months; while this voyage by Candish was less than two
+years and two months. We need not wonder, therefore, that a young
+gentleman like Mr Candish, who was entirely devoted to a desire of
+acquiring glory and renown, should contrive some extraordinary manner of
+displaying his good fortune. Some accounts accordingly inform us, that
+he brought his ship into Plymouth harbour under a suit of silken sails,
+which, if true, may be thus explained. We have already mentioned, from
+his own narrative, that he encountered a violent storm, just before his
+arrival, which tore all his sails to pieces. In this distress, he would
+probably use those he had taken in the South Sea, made of what is called
+silk-grass, having a strong gloss and beautiful colour, which might
+easily deceive the eyes of the vulgar, and pass upon them for sails made
+of silk. This much is certain, however, that though he might be vain and
+expensive in such matters, yet all came fairly out of his own pocket;
+and those who had sailed with him, from the prospect of raising their
+fortunes, had not the least reason to complain, as he made a fair and
+full distribution of the prizes, by which he gained universal credit and
+esteem.
+
+To shew his duty and diligence, as well as to discharge respectfully the
+obligations he owed his patron, Lord Hunsdon, the near relation of Queen
+Elizabeth, and then lord-chamberlain, he wrote the following letter to
+him on the very day of his arrival at Plymouth.
+
+_To the Right Honourable the Lord Hunsdon, &c._
+
+_Right Honourable_,
+
+As your favour heretofore hath been most greatly extended towards me, so
+I humbly desire a continuance thereof; and though there be no means in
+me to deserve the same, yet the uttermost of my services shall not be
+wanting, whensoever it shall please your honour to dispose thereof. I am
+humbly to desire your honour to make known unto her majesty the desire I
+have had to do her majesty service in the performance of this voyage;
+and, as it hath pleased God to give her the victory over part of her
+enemies, so I trust, ere long, to see her overthrow them all. For the
+places of their wealth, whereby they have maintained and made their
+wars, are now perfectly discovered; and, if it please her majesty, with
+a small power she may take and spoil them all.
+
+It hath pleased the Almighty to suffer me to circumcompass all the whole
+globe of the world, entering in at the Straits of Magellan, and
+returning by the Cape of Buena Esperanca. In which voyage I have either
+discovered, or brought certain intelligence of, all the rich places of
+the world that ever were known or discovered by any Christian. I
+navigated along the coasts of Chili, Peru, and Nueva Espanna, where I
+made great spoils. I burnt and sunk nineteen sail of ships, great and
+small. All the villages and towns that ever I landed at, I burnt and
+spoiled; and, had I not been discovered upon the coast, I had taken a
+great quantity of treasure. The matter of most profit unto me was a
+great ship of the king's, which I took at California, which ship came
+from the Philippines, being one of the richest for merchandize that ever
+passed these seas, as the royal register, accounts, and merchants did
+shew; for it amounted in value to ***** in Mexico to be sold: which
+goods, for that my ships were not able to contain the least part of
+them, I was enforced to set on fire.
+
+From the Cape of California, being the uppermost part of all New Spain,
+I navigated to the Philippine islands, hard upon the coast of China, of
+which country I have brought such intelligence as hath not been heard in
+these parts; the stateliness and riches of which country I fear to make
+report of; lest I should not be credited: for, if I had not known
+sufficiently the incomparable wealth of that country, I should have been
+as incredulous thereof as others will be that have not had the like
+experience.
+
+I sailed along the islands of the Moluccas, where among some of the
+heathen people I was well intreated, and where our people may have trade
+as freely as the Portuguese, if they will themselves. From thence, I
+passed by the Cape of Buena Esperanca; and found out, by the way
+homeward, the island of St Helena, where the Portuguese used to refresh
+themselves; and, from that island, God hath suffered me to return into
+England. All which services, together with myself, I humbly prostrate at
+her majesty's feet, desiring the Almighty long to continue her reign
+among us; for at this day she is the most famous and most victorious
+prince that liveth in the world.
+
+Thus, humbly desiring pardon for my tediousness, I leave your lordship
+to the tuition of the Almighty.
+
+   _Your honour's most humble to command,
+   Thomas Candish_.
+
+   Plymouth, this 9th
+   of September, 1588.
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+There are many circumstances in this voyage, besides the wonderful
+facility with which it was accomplished, that deserve to be considered.
+As, for instance, the adventuring to pass a second time into the South
+Sea, after it was not only known that the Spaniards were excessively
+alarmed by the passage of Sir Francis Drake, but also that they had
+received succours from Spain, and had actually fortified themselves
+strongly in the South Sea. Also the nice search made by Candish, and the
+exact description he has given us of the Straits of Magellan, are very
+noble proofs of his skill and industry, and of his desire that posterity
+might reap the fruits of his labours. The attack of the Accapulco ship,
+likewise, considering the small force he had along with him, was a noble
+instance of true English bravery, which was justly rewarded by the queen
+with the honour of knighthood.
+
+His account of the Philippines, and his description of several islands
+in the East Indies, are very clear and curious, and must at that time
+have been very useful; but particularly his map and description of
+China, which gave great lights in those days. We may add to all this,
+the great care he took in the instruction of his seamen, many of whom
+afterwards distinguished themselves by navigating vessels in the same
+stupendous course, and thereby filling all the known world with the fame
+and reputation of English seamen. It is not therefore surprising that we
+find the best judges, both of our own and other nations, bestowing very
+high praise on this worthy gentleman, who, in the whole conduct of his
+voyage, shewed the courage and discretion of a great commander, with all
+the skill and diligence of an able seaman; of both which eminent
+characters he has left the strongest testimonies in his accurate account
+of this circumnavigation.
+
+The wealth brought home by Sir Thomas Candish from this successful
+voyage must have been considerable; an old writer says it was sufficient
+to have purchased _a fair earldom_, a general and vague expression,
+having no determinate meaning. Whatever may have been the amount of the
+sum, which he acquired with so much hazard and so great honour, he
+certainly did not make such prudent use of his good fortune as might
+have been expected; for in the space of three years the best part of it
+was spent, and he determined to lay out the remainder upon a second
+expedition. We need the less wonder at this, if we consider what the
+writers of those days tell us, of his great generosity, and the
+prodigious expence he was at in procuring and maintaining such persons
+as he thought might be useful to him in his future naval expeditions, on
+which subject his mind was continually bent. Such things require the
+revenues of a prince; and as he looked upon this voyage round the world
+as an introduction only to his future undertakings, we may easily
+conceive that, what the world considered extravagance, might appear to
+him mere necessary disbursements, which, instead of lessening, he
+proposed should have laid the foundations of a more extensive fortune.
+All circumstances duly considered, this was neither a rash nor
+improbable supposition; since there were many examples in the glorious
+reign of Queen Elizabeth, of very large fortunes acquired by the same
+method in which he proposed to have increased his estate. Besides, it
+clearly appears, by his will, that he not only did not die in debt, but
+left very considerable effects behind him, notwithstanding his heavy
+expences, and the many misfortunes of his second expedition, of which it
+is proper to subjoin a brief account.--_Harris_.
+
+In the Collection of Hakluyt, vol. IV. p. 341-355, is a long enumeration
+of nautical remarks, of the latitudes, soundings, distances of places,
+bearings of lands, variations of the compass, time spent in sailing
+between the several places enumerated, time of remaining at any of
+these, observations of winds, &c. &c. &c. written by Mr Thomas Fuller of
+Ipswich, who was master of the Desire in this voyage round the world;
+but which are too tedious and uninteresting for insertion.--E.
+
+
+SECTION IV.
+
+_Second Voyage of Sir Thomas Candish, intended for the South Sea, in
+1591_.[61]
+
+Though not a circumnavigation, owing to various misfortunes, it appears
+proper to insert this narrative, giving an account of the unfortunate
+end of the renowned Candish, by way of appendix to his circumnavigation.
+From the happy success of his former voyage, and the superior strength
+with which he undertook the second, in which, after ranging the Spanish
+coast of the South Sea, he proposed to have visited the Philippine
+islands and China, he certainly had every reason to have expected, that
+the profits of this new enterprise would have fully compensated for its
+expences, and have enabled him to spend the remainder of his days in
+honourable ease and affluence.
+
+[Footnote 61: Hakluyt, IV. 361.--This narrative, as we learn from
+Hakluyt, was written by Mr John Lane, or Jane, a person of good
+observation, who was employed in this and many other voyages.--E.]
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The ships fitted out on this occasion, entirely at his own expence, were
+the galleon named the Leicester, in which Sir Thomas Candish embarked
+himself as admiral, or general of the expedition; the Roebuck
+vice-admiral, commanded by Mr Cocke; the Desire rear-admiral, of which
+Mr John Davis was captain;[62] the Dainty, a bark belonging to Mr Adrian
+Gilbert, of which Mr Randolph Cotton had the command; and a pinnace
+named the Black.
+
+[Footnote 62: The author of this narrative informs us that he sailed on
+this voyage along with Mr Davis.--E.]
+
+Sec. 1. _Incidents in the Voyage, till the Separation of the Ships_.
+
+With this squadron we sailed from Plymouth on the 26th of August, 1591.
+The 29th November, we fell in with the bay of St Salvador on the coast
+of Brazil, twelve leagues to the N. of Cabo Frio, where we were becalmed
+till the 2d December, when we captured a small bark, bound for the Rio
+Plata, laden with sugar, haberdashery wares, and negroes. The master of
+this bark brought us to an isle, called Placencia or _Ilha Grande_,
+thirty Portuguese leagues W. from Cabo Frio, where we arrived on the 5th
+December, and rifled six or seven houses inhabited by Portuguese. The
+11th we departed from this place, and arrived on the 14th at the island
+of St Sebastian; whence Mr Cocke and Mr Davis immediately departed, with
+the Desire and the Black pinnace, on purpose to attack the town of
+Santos.
+
+We anchored at the bar of Santos in the evening of the 15th, and went
+immediately in our boats to the town. Next morning about nine o'clock,
+we reached Santos, and being discovered, we immediately landed, being
+only twenty-four of us, our long-boat being still far astern. By this
+promptitude, we took all the people of the town prisoners in the church,
+being at mass, and detained them there all day. The great object of Sir
+Thomas Candish in assaulting this town was to supply our wants,
+expecting to have got every thing of which we stood in need, when once
+in possession: But such was the negligence of Mr Cocke, who commanded on
+this occasion, that the Indians were allowed to carry every thing out
+of the town in open view, and no one hindered them; and next day, our
+prisoners were all set free, only four poor old men being kept as
+pledges to supply our wants. By this mismanagement, the town of Santos,
+which could easily have supplied a fleet the double of ours with all
+kinds of necessaries, was in three days left to us entirely naked,
+without people, and without provisions. Sir Thomas Candish came up eight
+or ten days afterwards, and remained till the 22d January, 1592,
+endeavouring by treaty to procure what we were once possessed of, but to
+little purpose; and we were then forced to depart, through want of
+provisions, glad to procure a few baskets of cassavi meal, going away
+worse provided than we had come there. We accordingly left Santos on the
+22d January, and burnt the town of St Vincent to the ground.
+
+We set sail on the 24th, shaping our course for the Straits of Magellan.
+On the 7th February we had a violent storm, and on the 8th, our fleet
+was separated by the fury of the tempest. Consulting with the master of
+our ship, our captain concluded to go for Port Desire, in the latitude
+of 48 deg. S. hoping that Sir Thomas would go there likewise, as he had
+found great relief there in his former voyage. Our captain had not been
+able to get directions, what course to take in such a contingency as had
+now occurred, though he had earnestly proposed such a measure. In our
+way, we fortunately fell in with the Roebuck, which had been in extreme
+danger, and had lost her boat. We arrived together at Port Desire on the
+6th March. The Black pinnace came in there also on the 16th; but the
+Dainty came not, having gone back for England, leaving their captain, Mr
+Randolph Cotton, aboard the Roebuck, with nothing but the clothes he
+wore. He now came aboard our ship, being in great habits of friendship
+with Captain Davis.
+
+On the 18th Sir Thomas brought the galleon into the roads, and came
+himself into the harbour in a boat he had got built at sea, for his
+long-boat and light-horseman were both lost during the storm, together
+with a pinnace he had set up at Santos. Being on board our ship, the
+Desire, Sir Thomas informed our captain of all his extremities, and
+complained severely of his company, and particularly of several
+gentlemen in his ship, proposing to go no more on board his own ship,
+but to proceed for the rest of the voyage in the Desire. We were all
+grieved to hear such hard speeches of our good friends; but having
+spoken with the gentlemen in the Leicester, we found them faithful,
+honest, and resolute in their proceedings, although it pleased our
+general to conceive of them otherwise.
+
+The 20th March we departed from Port Desire, Sir Thomas being in the
+Desire with us. The 8th of April we fell in with the Straits of
+Magellan, having sustained many furious storms between Port Desire and
+the straits. The 14th we passed the first straits, and got through the
+second, ten leagues beyond the first, on the 16th. We doubled Cape
+Froward on the 18th, which cape is in 53 deg. 30' S. The 21st we were forced
+by a furious storm to take shelter in a small cove with our ships, four
+leagues beyond the cape, and on the southern shore of the straits, where
+we remained till the 15th of May; in which time we endured much
+distress, by excessive storms, with perpetual snow, and many of our men
+died of cold and famine, not having wherewithal to cover their bodies
+nor to fill their bellies, but living on muscles, sea-weeds, and water,
+with an occasional supply of meal from the ships stores.[63] All the
+sick men in the galleon were most uncharitably put on shore into the
+woods, exposed to the snow, the air, and the cold, which men in health
+could hardly have endured, where they ended their days in the utmost
+misery, Sir Thomas remaining all this time in the Desire.
+
+[Footnote 63: It would appear that this expedition had been very
+improvidently undertaken, with a very inadequate supply of provisions,
+and, as will afterwards appear, of naval stores, trusting perhaps to
+obtain supplies from the enemy, as had been attempted in vain at Santos.
+Either delayed by these views, or from ignorance, the passage through
+the straits was attempted at a very improper season, three months after
+the antarctic mid-summer and during the autumnal equinoctial gales.
+November, December, and January are the summer months, and best fitted
+for these high southern latitudes.--E.]
+
+Seeing these great extremities of cold and snow, and doubting a
+disastrous end to the enterprize, Sir Thomas asked our captain's
+opinion, being a person of great experience in the utmost parts of the
+north, to which he had made three voyages of discovery in the employ of
+the London merchants. Captain Davis said, that he did not expect the
+snow to be of long continuance, for which he gave sufficient reasons
+from his former experience, and hoped therefore that this might not
+greatly prejudice or hinder the completion of the enterprize. Yet Sir
+Thomas called all the company together, telling them that he proposed to
+depart from the straits upon some other voyage, either proceeding for
+the Cape of Good Hope, or back again to Brazil. The company answered,
+that they desired rather to wait God's favour for a wind, if he so
+pleased, and to submit to any hardships, rather than abandon the
+intended voyage, considering that they had been here only for a short
+time, and were now only forty leagues from the South Sea; yet, though
+grieved to return, they were ready to perform whatever he pleased to
+command. So he concluded to leave the straits, and make sail for the
+Cape of Good Hope.
+
+When Sir Thomas Candish returned on board the Desire, from talking with
+the company, Captain Davis requested he would consider the extremity of
+our estate and condition, the slenderness of his provision, and the
+weakness of his men, being in no case for undertaking that new
+enterprise; as, if the other ships were as ill appointed as the Desire,
+it would be impossible to perform his new design, having no more sails
+then were then bent, no victuals, no ground tackle, no cordage save what
+was already in use; and, of seventy-five persons in the Desire, the
+master only had knowledge enough for managing the ship, and there were
+only fourteen sailors besides, all the rest being gentlemen,
+serving-men, or tradesmen. Captain Davis laid these persuasions before
+both the general and Mr Cocke; and in fine, in consequence of a
+petition, delivered in writing by all the chief persons of the whole
+company, the general determined to depart from the Straits of Magellan,
+and to return again for Santos in Brazil.
+
+Accordingly, we set sail on the 15th of May, the general being now on
+board the galleon, his own ship. The 18th we were free of the straits;
+but on passing Cape Froward, we had the misfortune to have our boat sunk
+at our stern in the night, by which she was split and sore injured, and
+lost all her oars. The 20th of May, being athwart Port Desire, the
+general altered his course during the night, as we suppose, by which we
+lost him. In the evening he stood close by the wind to leewards, having
+the wind at N.N.E. and we stood the same course, the wind not altering
+during the night, and next day we could not see him. We were then
+persuaded that the general was gone for Port Desire in quest of relief
+or that he had sustained some mischance at sea, and was gone there to
+seek a remedy. Our captain then called all hands together, the general's
+men among the rest, asking their opinion what was to be done, when every
+one said he thought the general was gone to Port Desire.
+
+Our master, who was the general's man, and careful for his master's
+service, and also a person of good judgment in sea affairs, represented
+to the company how dangerous it was for us to go to Port Desire,
+especially if we should there miss the general; as we had now no boat
+wherewith to land, neither any anchors or cables which he could trust to
+in such rapid streams. Yet as we all concluded that it was most probable
+the general had gone there, we shaped our course for Port Desire, and on
+our way met the Black pinnace by chance, which had also parted company
+from the general, being in a miserable plight. So we both proceeded for
+Port Desire, where we arrived on the 26th of May.
+
+
+Sec. 2. _Disastrous result of the Voyage to Sir Thomas Candish_.[64]
+
+Various accounts of the disappointments and misfortunes of Sir Thomas
+Candish, in this disastrous voyage, are still preserved, but the most
+copious is contained in his own narrative, addressed to Sir Tristram
+Gorges, whom he constituted sole executor of his will. In this, Sir
+Thomas attributes his miscarriage to the cowardice and defection of one
+of his officers, in the following terms:--"The running away of the
+villain Davis was the death of me, and the decay of the whole action,
+and his treachery in deserting me the ruin of all."
+
+[Footnote 64: This portion of the voyage is taken from the supplement in
+the Collection of Harris, to the circumnavigation of Sir Thomas
+Candish.--E.]
+
+In this letter he complained also of mutinies, and that, by adverse
+winds at S W. and W.S.W. he had been driven 400 leagues from the shore,
+and from the latitude of 50 deg. to that of 40 deg. both S. He says also, that
+he was surprised by winter in the straits, and sore vexed by storms,
+having such frosts and snows in May as he had never before
+witnessed,[65] so that forty of his men died, and seventy more of them
+sickened, in the course of seven or eight days. Davis, as he says,
+deserted him in the Desire, in lat. 47 deg. S. The Roebuck continued along
+with him to lat. 36 deg. S. In consequence of transgressing his directions,
+Captain Barker was slain on land with twenty-five men, and the boat
+lost; and soon afterwards other twenty-five men met with a similar fate.
+Ten others were forsaken at Spiritu Santo, by the cowardice of the
+master of the Roebuck, who stole away, having six months provisions on
+board for 120 men, and only forty-seven men in his ship. Another mutiny
+happened at St Sebastians by the treachery of an Irishman, when Mr
+Knivet and other six persons were left on shore.
+
+[Footnote 65: Sir Thomas Candish seems not to have been aware, that the
+month of May, in these high antarctic or southern latitudes, was
+precisely analogous with November in the high latitudes of the north,
+and therefore utterly unfit for navigation.--E.]
+
+Intending again to have attempted passing through the straits, he was
+tossed up and down in the tempestuous seas of the Southern Atlantic, and
+came even at one time within two leagues of St Helena, but was unable to
+reach that island. In his last letter, he declares that, rather than
+return to England after so many disasters, he would willingly have gone
+ashore in an island placed in lat. 8 deg. in the charts. In this letter, he
+states himself to be then scarcely able to hold a pen; and we learn that
+he soon afterwards died of grief. The Leicester, in which Candish
+sailed, came home, as did the Desire. The Black pinnace was lost; but
+the fates of the Roebuck and the Dainty are no where mentioned.
+
+The miscarriage of this voyage was certainly prejudicial to the rising
+trade and spirit of naval adventure in England. The ruin of Sir Thomas
+Candish threw a damp on such undertakings among the English gentlemen;
+and, on the return of these ships, several able and experienced seamen
+were turned adrift, to gain their livings as they best might. These
+thorough-bred seamen went to other countries; and, as knowledge is a
+portable commodity, they made the best market they could of their
+nautical experience in Holland and elsewhere. Among these was one Mr
+Mellish, who had been a favourite of Sir Thomas Candish, and the
+companion of all his voyages. This person offered his services to the
+East India Company of Holland, then in its infancy; and, his proposals
+being accepted, he was employed as pilot in the circumnavigation of
+Oliver van Noort, which falls next in order to be related.
+
+
+Sec. 3. _Continuation of the Voyage of the Desire, Captain Davis, after
+parting from Sir Thomas Candish_.
+
+Not finding our general at Port Desire, as we had expected, and being
+very slenderly provided, without sails, boat, oars, nails, cordage, and
+other necessary stores, and very short of victuals, we were reduced to a
+very unpleasant situation, not knowing how to proceed. Leaving
+ourselves, however, to the providence of the Almighty, we entered the
+harbour, and, by the good favour of God, we found a quiet and safe road,
+which we knew not of before. Having moored our ship, by the help of the
+boat belonging to the Black pinnace, we landed on the southern shore of
+the bay, where we found a standing pool, which might contain some ten
+tons of fresh water, by which we were greatly relieved and comforted.
+From this pool we took more than forty tons of water, yet left it as
+full as at first. At our former visit to this harbour, we were at this
+very place and found no water, wherefore we persuaded ourselves that the
+Almighty had sent this pool for our relief. We found here such
+remarkably low ebbs as we had never before seen, by means of which we
+procured muscles in great plenty. Providence also sent such great
+abundance of smelts about our ship, that all the people were able to
+take as many as they could eat, with hooks made of crooked pins. By
+these means we husbanded the ship's provisions, and did not spend any of
+them during our abode at this place.
+
+Considering what was best to be done in our present circumstances, that
+we might find our general, and as it was obvious we could not refit our
+ship for sea in less than a month, our captain and master concluded to
+take the pinnace and go in search of the general, leaving the ship and a
+considerable part of the men till the return of the general, who had
+vowed he would return again to the straits. Hearing of this
+determination, two pestilent fellows, named Charles Parker and Edward
+Smith, secretly represented to the men, that the captain and master
+meant to leave them to be devoured by cannibals, and had no intention to
+come back; on which the whole company secretly agreed to murder the
+captain, master, and all those who were thought their friends, among
+whom I was included. This conspiracy was fortunately known to our
+boatswain, who revealed it to the master, and he to the captain. To
+appease this mutiny the captain found it necessary to desist from his
+intentions, and it was concluded not to depart, but to wait at Port
+Desire for the return of the general. After this the whole company, with
+one consent, made a written testimonial of the circumstances by which we
+had lost company of the general, and the indispensable necessity of
+returning home.
+
+In this testimony or protest, dated Port Desire, 2d June, 1592, it is
+represented, that the shrouds of the ship are all rotten, the ropes all
+so decayed that they could not be trusted; the sails reduced to one
+shift all worn, of which the topsails were utterly unable to abide any
+stress of weather; the ship unprovided with pitch, tar, or nails for
+repairs of any kind, and no means of supplying these wants; the
+provisions reduced to five hogsheads of salt pork, and such quantity of
+meal as admitted only an allowance of three ounces for a man each day,
+and no drink remaining except water. This instrument is signed by John
+Davis and Randolph Cotton, the captains of the Desire and Black pinnace,
+and thirty-eight more, but the name John Jane, or Lane, does not appear
+among them.
+
+After this, they proceeded to refit the ship with all expedition, for
+which purpose they built a smith's forge, making charcoal for its
+supply, and made nails, bolts, and spikes. Others of the crew were
+employed in making ropes from a piece of cable; and others again in all
+the necessary repairs of the ship, sails, and rigging; while those not
+fit for such offices, gathered muscles and caught smelts for the whole
+company. Three leagues from Port Desire there is an island, having four
+small isles about it, on which there are great abundance of seals, and
+where likewise penguins resort in vast numbers at the breeding season.
+To this island it was resolved to dispatch the Black pinnace
+occasionally, to fetch seals for us to eat, when smelts and muscles
+failed, for we could get no muscles at neap-tides, and only when the ebb
+was very low.
+
+In this miserable and forlorn condition we remained till the 6th of
+August, 1592, still keeping watch on the hills to look out for our
+general, suffering extreme anguish and vexation. Our hope of the
+general's return becoming very cold, our captain and master were
+persuaded that he might have gone directly for the straits; wherefore it
+was concluded to go there and wait his coming, as there we could not
+possibly miss seeing him if he came. This being agreed to by the whole
+company, we set sail from Port Desire on the 6th August, and went to
+Penguin island, where we salted twenty hogsheads of seals, which was as
+much as our salt could do. We departed from Penguin island towards night
+of the 7th August, intending for the straits. The 14th we were driven
+among certain islands, never before discovered, fifty leagues or better
+from the shore, east-northerly from the straits.[66] Fortunately the
+wind shifted to the east, or we must have inevitably perished among
+these islands, and we were enabled to shape our course for the straits.
+
+[Footnote 66: These are doubtless the Falkland Islands, or Malouines,
+but to which no name seems to have been affixed on this occasion.--E.]
+
+We fell in with the cape [Virgin] on the 18th of August, in a very thick
+fog, and that same night came to anchor ten leagues within the straits'
+mouth. The 19th we passed the first and second narrows, doubled Cape
+Froward on the 21st, and anchored on the 22d in a cove, or small bay,
+which we named _Savage Cove_, because we here found savages.
+Notwithstanding the excessive coldness of this place, yet do these
+people go entirely naked, living in the woods like satyrs, painted and
+disguised in a strange manner, and fled from us like so many wild deer.
+They were very strong and agile, and threw stones at us, of three or
+four pounds weight, from an incredible distance. We departed from this
+cove on the 24th in the morning, and came that same day into the N.W.
+reach of the straits, which is its last or most western reach. On the
+25th we anchored in a good cove, within fourteen leagues of the South
+Sea, where we proposed to await the return of our general, as the strait
+at this place is only three miles broad, and he could not possibly pass
+unseen.
+
+After we had remained here a fortnight, in the depth of winter, our
+victuals fast consuming, and our salted seals stinking most vilely, our
+men fell sick and died pitifully, through famine and cold, as most of
+them had not clothes sufficient to defend them from the extreme rigour
+of winter. In this heavy distress, our captain and master thought it
+best to depart from the straits into the South Sea, and to proceed for
+the island of Santa Maria in lat. 37 deg. S. on the coast of Chili, which is
+situated in a temperate climate, where we might find relief, and could
+wait for our general, who must necessarily pass by that island. We
+accordingly set sail on the 13th September, and came in sight of the
+South Sea. The 14th we were driven back into the straits, and got into a
+cove three leagues from the South Sea. We again stood out, and being
+eight or ten leagues free of the land, the wind rose furiously at W.N.W.
+and we were again forced to return into the straits, not daring to trust
+to our sails in any stress of weather. We again got into the cove,
+three leagues from the eastern mouth of the straits, where we had such
+violent weather that one of our two remaining cables broke, and we were
+almost in despair of saving our lives. Yet it pleased God to allay the
+fury of the storm, and we unreeved our sheets, tacks, halyards, and
+other ropes, and made fast our ship to the trees on shore, close by the
+rocks. We laboured hard to recover our anchor again, which we could not
+possibly effect, being, as we supposed, entirely covered over in the
+ooze.
+
+We were now reduced to one anchor, which had only one whole fluke; and
+had only one old cable, already spliced in two places, and a piece of
+another old cable. In this extremity of trouble it pleased God that the
+wind came fair on the 1st October, on which we loosed our land fastnings
+with all expedition, weighed our anchor, and towed off into the channel;
+for we had repaired our boat when in Port Desire, and got five oars from
+the Black pinnace. On weighing our anchor we found the cable sore
+broken, holding only by one strand, which was a most merciful
+preservation. We now reeved our ropes and rigged our ship the best we
+could, every man working as if to save our lives in the utmost
+extremity. Our company was now much divided in opinion as to how we
+should proceed for the best; some desiring to return to Port Desire, to
+be there set on shore, and endeavour to travel by land to some of the
+Spanish settlements, while others adhered to the captain and master: But
+at length, by the persuasion of the master, who promised that they would
+find wheat, pork, and roots in abundance at the island of St Mary,
+besides the chance of intercepting some ships on the coasts of Chili and
+Peru, while nothing but a cruel death by famine could be looked for in
+attempting to return by the Atlantic, they were prevailed upon to
+proceed.
+
+So, on the 2d of October, 1592, we again made sail into the South Sea,
+and got free from the land. This night the wind again began to blow very
+strong at west, and increased with such violence that we were in great
+doubt what measures to pursue. We durst not put into the straits for
+lack of ground tackle, neither durst we carry sail, the tempest being
+very furious, and our sails very bad. In this extremity the pinnace bore
+up to us, informing she had received many heavy seas, and that her ropes
+were continually failing, so that they knew not what to do; but, unable
+to afford her any relief; we stood on our course in view of a lee shore,
+continually dreading a ruinous end of us all. The 4th October the storm
+increased to an extreme violence; when the pinnace, being to windward,
+suddenly _struck a hull_, when we thought she had sustained some violent
+shock of a sea, or had sprung a leak, or that her sails had failed,
+because she did not follow us. But we durst not _hull_ in this
+unmerciful storm, sometimes _trying_ under our main-course, sometimes
+with a _haddock_ of our sail; for our ship was very _leeward_, and
+laboured hard in the sea. This night we lost sight of the pinnace, and
+never saw her again.
+
+The 5th October, our foresail split, on which our master brought the
+mizen-sail to the foremast to make the ship work, and we mended our
+foresail with our spritsail. The storm still continued to rage with the
+most extreme fury, with hail, snow, rain, and wind, such and so mighty
+that it could not possibly in nature be worse; the seas running so
+lofty, and with a continual breach, that we many times were in doubt
+whether our ship did sink or swim. The 10th, the weather dark, the storm
+as furious as ever, most of the men having given over labour from
+fatigue and in despair, and being near the lee-shore by the reckoning
+both of the captain and master, we gave ourselves up for lost, past all
+remedy. While in this extremity of distress, the sun suddenly shone out
+clear, by which the captain and master were enabled to ascertain the
+latitude, and thereby knew what course to steer, so as to recover the
+straits. Next day, the 11th October, we saw Cape Deseado, being the
+southern point of the entrance into the straits, for the northern point
+is a dangerous assemblage of rocks, shoals, and islands. The cape was
+now two leagues to leeward, and the master was even in doubt whether we
+might be able to steer clear of it; but there was no remedy, as we must
+either succeed or be irretrievably lost.
+
+Our master, being a man of spirit, made quick dispatch, and steered for
+the straits. Our sails had not been half an hour abroad for this purpose
+when the foot-rope of the fore-sail broke, so nothing held save the
+oilet-holes. The sea continually broke over our poop, and dashed with
+such violence against our sails, that we every moment looked to have
+them torn to pieces, or that the ship would overset. To our utter
+discomfort also, we perceived that she fell still more and more to
+leeward, so that we could not clear the cape. We were now within half a
+mile of the cape, and so near shore that the counter surge of the sea so
+rebounded against the side of our ship, that the horrors of our
+situation were undescribably awful. While in this utmost extremity, the
+wind and the sea raging beyond measure, and momentarily expecting to be
+driven upon the rocks, our master veered away some of the main-sheet:
+Whether owing to this, or by some counter current, or by the wonderful
+interposition of God, our ship quickened her way and shot past the rock,
+where we all thought she must have perished. Between this and the cape
+there was a small bay, so that we were now somewhat farther from the
+shore; but on coming to the cape, we again looked for nothing but
+instant death; yet God, the father of mercy, delivered us, and we
+doubled the cape little more than the length of our ship. When past the
+cape, we took in all our sails, and, being between the high lands, the
+wind _blowing trade_, or steadily in the direction of the straits, we
+spooned before the sea under bare poles, three men being unable to
+manage the helm, and in six hours we were driven twenty-five leagues
+within the straits.
+
+In this time we freed our ship from water, and when we had rested a
+while, our men became unable to move, their sinews being stiff, and
+their flesh as if dead. Many of them were so covered and eaten with
+lice, that there lay clusters of them in their flesh as large as peas,
+yea, some as big as beans. In this state of misery we were constrained
+to put into a cove to refresh our men, where we moored to the trees as
+we had done before, our only anchor being to seaward. We here continued
+till the 20th of October; and being unable to continue longer, through
+the extremity of famine, we again put off into the channel on the 22d,
+the weather being then reasonably calm. Before night the wind blew hard
+at W.N.W. The storm waxed so violent that our men could scarcely stand
+to their labour; and the straits being full of turnings and windings, we
+had to trust entirely to the discretion of the captain and master to
+guide the ship during the darkness of the night, when we could see no
+shore, and the straits were in some places scarcely three miles broad.
+When we first passed these straits, our captain made so excellent a
+draught of them, as I am confident cannot in any sort be made more
+correct. Which draught he and the master so carefully considered, that
+they had every turning, creek, and head-land so perfectly in their
+memory, as enabled them, even in the deepest darkness of the night,
+undoubtingly to convey the ship through that crooked channel.
+
+The 25th October we came to an island in the straits, named Penguine
+Isle, where the boat was sent ashore to seek relief, as it abounded
+with birds, and the weather was calm; so we came to anchor near the
+island, in seven fathoms. While the boat was ashore, where we got
+abundance of penguins, there rose a sudden storm, by which our ship was
+driven over a breach, and our boat sunk at the shore. Captain Cotton and
+the lieutenant, who were both on shore, leapt into the boat, and freed
+it of water, throwing away the birds, and with great difficulty got back
+to the ship. All this time the ship was driving upon the lee-shore; and
+when we got on board, we helped to weigh the anchor and make sail. Thus,
+in a severe storm, we got clear of the straits on the 27th October; and
+on the 30th we got to that Penguin Island which is three leagues from
+Port Desire, where we purposed to seek relief. Immediately on coming to
+this isle, our boat was sent ashore, and returned laden with birds and
+eggs, the men reporting that the penguins were so thick on the isle,
+that even ships might be laden with them, as they could not step without
+treading on these birds; at which news we greatly rejoiced.
+
+Then the captain appointed Charles Parker and Edmund Smith, with twenty
+others, to go on shore, and remain on the island, on purpose to kill and
+dry these penguins: promising to send others when the ship was safe in
+harbour, not only for expedition, but to save the small store of
+victuals that remained in the ship. But Parker and Smith, with the rest
+of their faction, remembering that this was the place where they
+intended formerly to have slain the captain and master, thought it was
+meant here to leave them on shore out of revenge, and refused to land.
+After some altercation, these men were allowed to proceed in the ship,
+and ten others were left in the island. The last day of October we
+entered the harbour of Port Desire. The master, having at our being
+there before taken notice of every creek in the river, ran our ship
+aground in a very convenient place on the sandy ooze, laying our anchor
+out to seawards, and mooring her with the running ropes to stakes on
+shore, in which situation the ship remained till our departure.
+
+The 3d November our boat was sent off for Penguin Island, with wood and
+water, and as many men as she could carry; but, being deep laden, she
+durst not proceed, and returned again the same night. Then Parker,
+Smith, Townsend, Purpet, and five others, desired that they might go by
+land, and that the boat might fetch them from the shore opposite the
+isle, being scarcely a mile across. The captain bid them do as they
+thought best, only advised them to carry weapons, as they might meet
+with savages; so they accordingly carried calivers, swords, and targets,
+departing by land on the 6th November, while the boat went by sea. But
+these nine men were never more heard of. On the 11th, when most of our
+men were at the island, only the captain, master, and five more
+remaining in the ship, there came a great multitude of savages to the
+shore beside the ship, throwing dust into the air, leaping and running
+about like so many beasts, having vizards on their faces like dogs, or
+else their faces actually resembled dogs. We greatly feared they would
+have set the ship on fire, for they would suddenly make fire, at which
+we were greatly astonished. They came to windward of the ship, and set
+the bushes on fire, so that we were enveloped in a very stinking smoke;
+but coming within shot of us, we fired at them, and hitting one on the
+thigh, they all fled instantly away, and we never heard or saw them
+more. Hence we judged that these savages had slain our nine men, who
+were the ringleaders of those who would formerly have murdered our
+captain and master, with the rest of their friends; so that God
+evidently drew just judgment upon them, and we supplicated his divine
+Majesty to be merciful to us.
+
+While we lay in this harbour, our captain and master went one day in the
+boat to see how far the river could be penetrated, that if need enforced
+us, it might be known how far we might proceed by water. They found that
+this river was only navigable by the boat for twenty miles. On their
+return, the boat was sent to Penguin Island, by which we learnt that the
+penguins dried to our entire satisfaction, and were in infinite numbers.
+This penguin is shaped like a bird, having stumps only in place of
+wings, by which it swims under water as swiftly as any fish. They live
+upon smelts, which are found in vast abundance on this coast. In eating,
+these penguins seem neither fish nor flesh. They lay large eggs; and the
+bird is about as large as two ducks. All the time we remained at Port
+Desire, we fared well on penguins and their eggs, young seals, young
+gulls, and other birds of which I know not the names, all of which we
+had in vast abundance. In this place also we found plenty of an herb
+called scurvy-grass, which we eat fried in seal-oil along with eggs,
+which so purified the blood, that it entirely removed all kind of
+swellings, of which many had died, and restored us all to as perfect
+health as when we first left England.
+
+We remained in this harbour till the 22d of December, 1592, in which
+time we had dried 20,000 penguins. In this time also the captain, with
+the master and I, made some salt, by filling some holes in the rocks
+with sea-water, which in six days was changed to salt by evaporation, it
+being now Midsummer in this southern hemisphere. Thus did God feed us in
+the desert, even as with manna from heaven. The 22d December we departed
+from Port Desire for Penguin island, where, with great difficulty, we
+got 14,000 of the dried birds on board, during which we had nearly lost
+our captain; and had not our master been very expert in the set of the
+tides, which ran in many cross directions, we had lost our ship.
+
+We now shaped our course for Brazil, under a regulated allowance of
+provisions, so that our victuals might last six months, in which time we
+hoped we might get back to England, though our sails were very bad. This
+allowance was, two ounces and a half of meal for each man, two days only
+in the week, or five ounces for a week; three days a week, three
+spoonfulls of oil were allowed to each man; two days a week, a pint of
+peas among four men; and every day five dried penguins among four men,
+with six quarts of water each day to four men. With this allowance,
+praised be God, we lived, though weak and feeble.
+
+The 30th January, 1593, we arrived at the isle of Placencia, or Ilha
+Grande, in Brazil, the first place at which we touched when outwards
+bound. The ship laying off at sea, the captain went aland in the boat
+with twenty-four men, being the whole night before he could reach the
+shore. He landed next day at sun-rise, hoping to catch the Portuguese in
+their houses, and by that means to procure a supply of casava meal; but
+on coming to the houses, we found them all burnt to the ground, so that
+we thought no one had remained on the island. The captain then went to
+the gardens, whence he brought a quantity of fruits and roots for the
+company, and returned on board. He then brought the ship into a fine
+creek, where she was moored to the trees on each side, at a place where
+we had plenty of fresh water. Our case being very desperate, we
+presently set to work to trim and repair our water-casks, the coopers
+making new hoops; while others laboured to repair the sails, keeping
+always a guard on shore, and every man having always his weapons ready
+at hand. The 3d February, thirty men well armed went to the gardens,
+three miles from where the ship lay, to dig cassavi-roots, to serve our
+company instead of bread. This was again repeated on the 5th. They
+laboured in quietness all the morning; and about ten o'clock, the heat
+being extreme, they came to a rock near the side of the wood, where they
+boiled cassavi-roots for dinner. After dinner, some went to sleep, and
+others to bathe in the sea, no one keeping watch, not a match lighted,
+nor even a piece charged. While in this unprovided state, and out of
+sight from the ship, there came suddenly upon them a multitude of
+Portuguese and Indians, who slew them all to the number of thirteen, two
+only escaping, one of these very sore hurt, and the other not touched,
+from whom we learnt the circumstances of this sad massacre.
+
+We manned the boat with all speed, and went ashore, if happily we might
+succour our men; but we found them all slain, and laid naked in a row,
+with their faces upwards, and a cross set up beside them. We saw also
+two large pinnaces coming from Rio de Janeiro, full of men, who, as we
+supposed, were intended to take us. We were now much reduced, as of
+seventy-six persons we had on board when we left England, there were now
+only twenty-seven of us remaining, thirty-two having died formerly, and
+thirteen being slain in this place. Between those formerly slain by the
+savages at Port Desire, and those now in the island of Placencia by the
+Portuguese, all those who had conspired to murder our captain and master
+were now cut off, the gunner only excepted. Our casks were so greatly
+decayed, that we could not take in a sufficient supply of water, and
+what we had was exceedingly bad. Having lost several muskets on shore,
+which had belonged to our slain men, with good store of powder and shot,
+we expected to be beaten from our decks by means of our own weapons, by
+the Portuguese on the island, joined by those coming from Janeiro: and
+as we were moored to the trees, for want of cables and anchors, we were
+in dread of having our mooring ropes cut. In this miserable state we
+knew not what measures to pursue. To depart with only eight tons of bad
+water, and in bad casks, were to run the risk of starving at sea, and to
+remain seemed inevitable ruin. These were severe alternatives; but in
+our perplexity we preferred trusting to the hand of God than to the
+mercy of our enemies, and concluded to depart. Wherefore, on the 6th
+February, we unmoored and removed our ship into the channel, putting all
+our ordnance and small arms in readiness in case of an assault, and
+having a small gale of wind, we put to sea in deep distress.
+
+Thus bemoaning our sad estate, and recounting our past misfortunes, we
+came to Cape Frio; being much crossed for three weeks by contrary winds,
+and our water running short, we were reduced to the utmost distress and
+perplexity. Some of the people were desirous of going into Bahia, and
+submitting to the Portuguese, rather than die of thirst; but our captain
+persuaded them against this measure. In this extremity, it pleased God
+to send us such abundant rain, that we were enabled to supply ourselves
+with water. On getting into the hot climate near the line, our dried
+penguins began to corrupt, and there bred in them many loathsome worms,
+an inch in length. These worms increased with astonishing rapidity,
+devouring our victuals so fast that we now seemed doomed to die of
+famine, as before of thirst We were even in danger of being eaten up by
+these worms, which devoured every thing except iron. They so gnawed the
+timbers of our ship, that we feared they would eat holes through her
+sides. We used every possible contrivance to destroy these noisome
+vermin, but they seemed only to increase so much the more, so that at
+last they would eat our flesh, and bite us like mosquitoes when we were
+asleep.
+
+In this woeful plight, after we had passed the equator towards the
+north, our men began to fall sick of a most terrible disease, such as, I
+believe, was never before heard of. It began with a swelling in their
+ankles, which in two days rose up as high as their breasts, so that they
+could not breathe. It then fell into the scrotum, which, with the penis,
+swelled in a most grievous manner, so that they could neither stand,
+walk, nor lie; and many of them became frantic with grief and distress.
+Our captain, with extreme distress of mind, was in so miserable a
+condition, that he wished to die; yet, while scarcely able to speak for
+sorrow, he continued to exhort us all to patience and reliance on God,
+desiring us to accept our chastisement like dutiful and thankful
+children. In this state of misery and wretchedness, several died raving
+mad, and others in a most loathsome state, or in dreadful pain and
+agony. None in the ship remained in perfect health, except the captain
+and one boy; the master also, though oppressed with extreme labour and
+anxiety, bore up with spirit, so that his disease did not overcome him.
+
+At length all our men died except sixteen, five only of whom were able
+to move. These were, the captain, who was in good health, the master
+indifferent, Captain Cotton and myself swollen and short-winded, yet
+better than the other sick men, and the boy in good health. Upon us five
+the whole labour of the ship rested. The captain and master, as happened
+to be necessary, took in and left out the topsails. The master by
+himself attended to the sprit-sail, and all of us the capstan, being
+utterly unable to work sheets and tacks. Our misery and weakness were so
+extreme, that we were utterly unable to take in or set a sail; so that
+our top-sails and sprit-sail were at length torn in pieces by the
+weather. The captain and master had to take their turns at the helm,
+where they were inexpressibly grieved and distressed by the continual
+and sad lamentations of our few remaining sick men.
+
+Thus lost wanderers on the ocean, unable to help ourselves, it pleased
+God, on the 11th of June, 1593, that we arrived at Beerhaven in Ireland,
+and ran the ship there on shore. The Irish helped us to take in our
+sails, and to moor the ship so as to float her off next tide; for which
+slender aid it cost the captain ten pounds, before he could get the ship
+into a state of safety. Thus, without men, sails, victuals, or other
+means, God alone guided us into Ireland. Here the captain left the
+master and three or four more of the company to keep the ship; and
+within five days after our arrival, he and some others got a passage in
+a fishing-boat to Padstow in Cornwall. For the merciful preservation of
+this our small remnant, and our restoration to our country, be all
+honour and glory to God, now and for ever.--_Amen_.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV.
+
+VOYAGE OF OLIVER VAN NOORT ROUND THE WORLD IN 1598--1601.[67]
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+
+The inhabitants of the United Provinces of the Netherlands, after their
+separation from the Spanish monarchy, found themselves extremely at a
+loss for means to supply the expences of the long and vigorous war in
+which they were engaged for the defence of their liberties. This gave
+them the more uneasiness, as their great enemy, Philip II. carried on
+the war against them, more by the length of his purse than the force of
+his arms, and because the riches, of the Spanish monarchy were derived
+from sources of commerce and colonization that were prohibited to them,
+even if they had submitted themselves to the yoke of Spain. The sense,
+therefore, of these difficulties, joined to the vast advantages they
+were likely to reap by overcoming them, induced the government and
+people of Holland to prosecute the advancement of trade in general with
+the greatest vigour, and particularly to establish a commercial
+intercourse with the East and West Indies, the great sources of wealth
+to their tyrannical oppressor and enemy, from whom they had revolted.
+
+[Footnote 67: Harris, I. 31.--Two editions of this voyage were published
+in Dutch, both in folio; one at Rotterdam without date; and the other at
+Amsterdam in 1602. _Bib, Univer. des Voyages_, I. 115.]
+
+Among other inducements to this course of proceeding, they were not a
+little encouraged by the progress made by their neighbours, the English;
+seeing that even private persons, and with a small force, had been able
+to disquiet the Spaniards exceedingly; and had at the same time acquired
+great riches to themselves. Another cause of attempting expeditions like
+the present, was their having failed in their first scheme of finding a
+new passage to the East Indies, than that with which the Spaniards and
+Portuguese were acquainted, which they had often and unsuccessfully
+endeavoured to explore by the north-east, with great hazard and expence.
+Their first voyages to the East Indies proving more fortunate even than
+they themselves had expected, they were tempted to proceed farther, and
+to distress their enemies likewise in the South Sea, which hitherto had
+only been done by the English.
+
+The distressed states of Holland, however, were not hitherto so
+powerful at sea as to attempt acting offensively against the king of
+Spain on that element; but contented themselves with giving power and
+authority to any of their subjects who were inclined to venture upon
+expeditions of this nature, at their own risk and expence, so as at the
+same time to join their own private advantage with the public good, by
+fitting out squadrons for these distant and hazardous voyages. This
+policy, though arising in some measure from necessity, was conducted
+with such wisdom and address, that the king of Spain soon found himself
+more distressed by the armaments of the Dutch merchants, than by all the
+forces of the United States. This is a plain proof; that the surest way
+to render any government powerful, is to interest the people in general
+in its support: For this raises such spirit among them, and is followed
+by such unexpected consequences, as no art or force can withstand.
+
+In the beginning of the year 1598, some eminent merchants in the united
+provinces, among whom were Peter van Bueren, Hugo Gerritz, and John
+Bennick, formed a design of sending some stout ships through the Straits
+of Magellan into the South Sea, to cruise against the Spaniards; to
+which design they were chiefly instigated by the reports of many English
+seamen, who had served in these parts, under Drake, Candish, and
+Hawkins, and other experienced officers. The purpose of the present
+expedition, was to cruise upon the coasts belonging to the Spaniards,
+and to force the enemy of peace to bear the expences of those wars in
+which he obliged other people unwillingly to engage. They also proposed
+by it to gain nautical experience, if it should be found practicable to
+continue the voyage by the Philippines, and so round by the Cape of Good
+Hope, circumnavigating the globe.
+
+As the success of this important enterprise greatly depended upon the
+choice of a _general_, for so in those days the Dutch, and most other
+nations, denominated the commander in chief, whether by sea or land, the
+adventurers took great care to provide themselves with a person of
+established character, both in regard to conduct and courage. The person
+chosen on this occasion was Oliver van Noort, a native of Utrecht, in
+the flower of his age, and who had a strong passion to acquire glory. To
+him they communicated their scheme, which he readily embraced; and their
+terms being speedily adjusted, they proceeded to fit out two stout
+vessels one named the Maurice, and the other the Henry Frederick,
+together with two yachts, railed the Concord and the Hope, the whole
+being manned by 248 persons of all ranks and conditions.
+
+Of this small fleet, Oliver van Noort was appointed admiral, and sailed
+in the Maurice; James Claas van Ulpenda was captain of the Henry
+Frederick, with the title of vice-admiral, Captain Peter van Lint
+commanded the Concord, and John Huidecoope was captain of the Hope.
+These were all men of experience in sea affairs, and capable of
+maintaining their authority on all occasions, and were all interested in
+the success of the voyage, by means of shares in the outfit; a proper
+precaution then, and ever since usual among the Dutch in all such cases,
+to prevent their expeditions from suffering by private views, or want of
+hearty concurrence in their officers: which, among other nations, is
+often the cause of failure, and for which this method is, perhaps, the
+only cure.
+
+All things being in readiness, and crews provided for all the vessels,
+the proprietors presented a petition to the Board of Admiralty of
+Rotterdam, upon which all who were concerned were summoned to compeer:
+and, on the 28th June, 1598, the rules and regulations for the
+government of all concerned in this expedition, having been previously
+drawn up by the company of adventurers, revised by the admiralty and
+approved of by the Stadtholder, Prince Maurice, were publicly read over
+to them, and every man sworn to obey them. These sailing orders are
+called Artykelbreefs by the Dutch, and are never suffered to be put in
+force, till they have received this kind of sanction from the state,
+when they become the law of the voyage, to which all concerned are
+subject, and must undergo the penalties contained in them, for breach of
+any of the articles. This circumstance is worthy of remark and imitation
+by other nations, and is a strong proof of the care paid by that
+republic to the commercial welfare of its citizens.
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Narrative of the Voyage_.
+
+On the 13th of September, 1598, the Maurice and Concord sailed from the
+port of Gocree; and, being joined by the Henry Frederick and Hope, from
+Amsterdam, the whole fleet proceeded for Plymouth, where their English
+pilot, Mr Mellish, who had been the companion of Sir Thomas Candish in
+his navigations, was to take in his apparel and other necessaries. They
+sailed from Plymouth on the 21th September, the wind then blowing a
+fresh gale at N.E. Next morning, being out of the channel, they
+perceived that the boat belonging to the vice-admiral was missing, in
+which were six men, which gave them considerable uneasiness, insomuch
+that they had some intention of returning to Plymouth in search of them.
+They met, however, with an English privateer, which soon made them alter
+their intentions; by assuring them that their men had run away with the
+boat, and could not be recovered, on which they resolved to proceed on
+their voyage. At this time considerable jealousies sprung up, respecting
+the capacity and conduct of the vice-admiral, which were soon increased
+by his losing his other boat and one man, and which could not be
+recovered by all their care. This carelessness occasioned much murmuring
+and discontent among the seamen, which the vice-admiral daily increased
+by his haughty behaviour, and by his contempt for advice, which no man
+needed more than he.
+
+The 4th October, they met a small fleet of English, Dutch, and French
+ships, returning from Barbary, from whom they had accounts of a terrible
+pestilence then raging in that country, which had swept away 250,000
+persons in a very short space of time. The 6th, they came between the
+islands of Teneriff and Grand Canary, and on the 3d November, they came
+in sight of the coast of Guinea. December 4th they were off Cape Palma,
+in lat. 3 deg. 30' N.[68] and on the 10th came in sight of Princes Island,
+in lat. 1 deg. N.[69] Sending their boats ashore to this island, carrying a
+flag of truce, they were met on the shore by a negro, bearing a similar
+flag, from whom they demanded a supply of provisions, which was accorded
+on fair and friendly terms; but, while settling the terms, they were
+suddenly surprised by a party from an ambush, which cut off several of
+them, one of whom was Mr Mellish, their English pilot. The Portuguese
+pursued them to their boats, which they briskly attached, killing the
+admiral's brother, and had nearly captured the whole party. In revenge
+of this outrage, it was determined in a council of war to attack the
+castle; but finding this enterprize too hazardous, they contented
+themselves with burning all the sugar ingenios. After this exploit,
+having provided themselves with fresh water, they set sail on the 17th.
+
+[Footnote 68: Cape Formosa is probably here meant, which is in 4 deg. 18'
+N.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 69: The latitude of Princes Island is 1 deg. 40' N.--E.]
+
+They reached Cape Goncalves on the 25th, where the wind usually blows
+from the land all night, and from the sea all day. Here they found two
+Dutch ships, which informed them of the loss of Captain Sleerhagen and
+most of his company at Princes Island; as also of the voyage of Peter
+Verhagen, who had entered the river of Congo, and had afterwards buried
+thirty-eight of his company at Cape Goncalves, whence he had gone some
+time before their arrival to Annobon.
+
+January 1st, 1589, they passed the island of Annobon, in lat. 2 deg. S. [1 deg.
+30' S.] and on the 28th of that month had the sun in their zenith. The
+5th of March they reached Cape St Thomas on the coast of Brazil, in lat.
+22 deg. S. [21 deg. 15']. The 6th they passed Cape Fair, and came that evening
+to Cape Frio, and on the 9th reached Rio de Janeiro. After some loss of
+time, and having several of their men cut off by their grand enemy the
+Portuguese, they went to the island of St Sebastian, in lat. 24 deg. S.
+where the comforts of a good harbour, plenty of fresh water, and an
+abundant supply of wood gave them much satisfaction; but no fruits were
+to be had at that season.
+
+They encountered a heavy storm on the 14th of March, by which the
+vice-admiral and the Hope were separated from the admiral, but they met
+again on the 17th. The scurvy now began to make rapid progress among the
+company; which, together with the approach of the antarctic winter,
+determined them to put in at St Helena. Missing that island, they next
+endeavoured to fall in with the island of Ascension, or some other
+island where they might procure refreshments; but their hard fortune
+brought them to a very barren and desolate island in the lat. of 20 deg. 30'
+S.[70] where they could procure no refreshments, except a few fowls
+called _Malle Mewen,_[71] which they knocked down with clubs.
+
+[Footnote 70: The island of Trinidad is nearly in the indicated
+latitude.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 71: These were probably young unfledged sea-gulls, called in
+provincial English _Malls, Maws_, and _Mews,_ not unlike the Dutch names
+in the text; where perhaps we ought to read Malle _or_ Mewen.--E.]
+
+Soon leaving this inhospitable place, they put to sea again, and on the
+1st of June, while endeavouring to reach Ascension, they got back to the
+coast of Brazil. Not being suffered to land any where on the continent,
+they sailed to the isle of Santa Clara, an island of about a mile round,
+and as much from the continent, in lat. 21 deg. 15' S. This island afforded
+little else beyond herbs, but they found here a sour fruit resembling
+plums, which cured all their sick men in fifteen days. They sailed from
+thence for Port Desire, in lat 47 deg. 40' S. on the 16th June, and reached
+that place on the 20th September, after enduring much bad weather. They
+procured abundance of penguins and fish, at an island three miles south
+from Port Desire; killing to the number of 50,000 penguins, which are
+nearly as large as geese, and procured a vast quantity of their eggs, by
+which their people were greatly refreshed, and the sick restored. Going
+up the river on the 5th October, and landing in the country, they found
+animals resembling stags, together with buffaloes, and ostriches in
+great numbers, and even found some of the nests of these birds, in which
+were as far as nineteen eggs. The 20th, the admiral went ashore to view
+the country, leaving orders with those who were left in charge of the
+boats, not to leave them a moment on any account: But they, having a
+mind also to see the country, ventured upon a short ramble, when they
+fell into an ambush of the savages, who slew three of their number, and
+wounded the fourth. These savages were very tall portly men, painted,
+and armed with short bows, and arrows headed with stone.
+
+Leaving Port Desire on the 29th September, they reached Cape Virgin at
+the entrance into the Straits of Magellan on the 24th November. The land
+here is low and plain, and from the whiteness of the coast somewhat
+resembles the chalk cliffs of England in the channel. In many attempts
+to enter the straits, they were beaten back by tempests of wind,
+accompanied by rain, hail, and snow. They lost their anchors, and broke
+their cables, and sickness, together with contention, which is worse
+than any disease, were added to their other calamities. All these so
+retarded the progress of the voyage, that it was near fifteen months
+after leaving Holland before they could make their way into the straits.
+They observed the land to trend from Cape Virgin to the S.W. and the
+mouth of the straits to be fourteen miles distant from that cape, and
+half a mile wide.[72] On the 25th November, they saw some men on two
+islands near Cape Nassau, who shook their weapons at the Hollanders, as
+in defiance. The Dutch landed, and pursued the savages into a cave,
+which they bravely defended to the last man, and were all slain on the
+spot. Going now into this dark cave, the Dutch found the women and
+children of the slain savages, when the mothers, expecting present death
+to themselves and their infants, covered their little ones with their
+own bodies, as if determined to receive the first stab. But the Dutch
+did them no other injury, except taking away four boys and two girls,
+whom they carried on ship board.
+
+[Footnote 72: These must necessarily be Dutch miles, 15 to the degree,
+each equal to nearly 4.66 English miles. By the mouth of the straits in
+the text, must be understood what is called the Narrows of the
+Hope.--E.]
+
+From one of these boys, after he had learnt the Dutch language, they had
+the following intelligence. The larger of the two islands was named
+_Castemme_ by the natives, and the tribe inhabiting it _Enoo_. The
+smaller island was called _Talche_. Both were frequented by great
+numbers of penguins, the flesh of which served the natives as food, and
+their skins for cloathing. Their only habitations were caves. The
+neighbouring continent abounded in ostriches, which they also used as
+food. The natives of these dreary regions were distinguished into
+tribes, each having their respective residences. The _Kemenetes_ dwelt
+in _Kaesay;_ the _Kennekin_ in _Karamay_; the _Karaiks_ in _Morina_: All
+these are of the ordinary size, but broad-breasted, and painted all
+over; the men tying up their pudenda in a string, and the women covering
+their parts of shame with the skins of a penguin; the men wearing their
+hair long, while that of the women was kept very short; and both sexes
+going naked, except cloaks made of penguin skins, reaching only to the
+waist. There was also a fourth tribe, called _Tirimenen_, dwelling in
+_Coin_, who were of a gigantic stature, being ten or twelve feet
+high,[73] and continually at war with the other tribes.
+
+[Footnote 73: This absurdity might be pardoned in the ignorant savage
+boy, who knew neither numerals nor measures; but in the grave reporters
+it is truly ridiculous, and yet the lie has been renewed almost down to
+the close of the eighteenth century.--E.]
+
+The 28th November, the navigators went over to the continent, or north
+side of the straits, seeing some whales at a distance, and observed a
+pleasant river, about which were some beautiful trees with many parrots.
+Owing to this fine prospect, they called the mouth of this river _Summer
+Bay_. The 29th they made sail for _Port Famine_, where the land trends
+so far to the south, that the main land of Patagonia and the islands of
+Terra del Fuego seemed, when seen afar off, to join together. They found
+here no remains of the late city of King Philip, except a heap of
+stones. The straits are here four miles wide, having hills of vast
+height on both sides, perpetually covered with snow. At Port Famine they
+cut down wood to build a boat, and found the bark of the trees to be hot
+and biting like pepper.[74] Not finding good water at this place, and
+indeed doubting if it were Port Famine, they proceeded onwards, and
+found a good river two miles farther west on the 1st December. Next day
+they doubled Cape Froward, with some danger, on account of bad anchorage
+and contrary winds.
+
+[Footnote 74: The Wintera aromatica, the bark of which is called
+Winter's bark, said to have been first discovered by Captain Winter in
+1567, on the coast of Terra Magellanica. The sailors employed this bark
+as a spice, and found it salutary in the scurvy.--E.]
+
+Passing four miles beyond this cape, they anchored in a large bay, where
+was a plant resembling sneezwort, which they found serviceable in the
+scurvy; also another plant, which rendered those who eat of it
+distracted for a time. They here fell in with two ships belonging to the
+fleet under Verhagen, which had been driven back out of the South Sea,
+one of which was commanded by Sebaldt de Weert, who told them he had
+been five months in the straits, and had only thirty-eight remaining
+out of 110 men, and not being able to bear up against the storms in the
+South Sea, had been forced to put in here, while the rest of the fleet
+under Verhagen held on their course.[75] These ships wished to have
+joined the expedition under Van Noort, but were forced to remain in the
+straits for want of provisions, which the others could not spare. They
+afterwards got back to Holland on the 13th July, 1600.
+
+[Footnote 75: The voyage of Verhagen, or so much of it rather as relates
+to the adventures of Sebaldt de Weert, follows the present voyage of Van
+Noort in the Collection by Harris, vol. I. pp. 37-44; and is, therefore,
+retained in the same situation on the present occasion.--E.]
+
+Van Noort and his ships left this bay on the 2d January, 1600, directing
+their course for Maurice bay, which they found to extend far to the
+eastwards, and to receive several rivers, the mouths of which were
+filled with vast quantities of ice, which seemed never to melt. It was
+now near midsummer of this southern clime, and the ice was so thick that
+they could not find its bottom with a line of ten fathoms. The land here
+seemed a congeries of broken islands, yet appearing like one continued
+mass, owing to the height of the mountains. They were here much
+distressed by hunger and continual rains, and two of their men were
+slain by the savages, while gathering muscles, which formed their chief
+subsistence. After weathering many storms in _Meniste_ bay, and having
+several encounters with the savages, they set sail on the 17th, and were
+driven into Penguin bay, or Goose bay, three miles from Meniste bay, and
+receiving its name from the vast multitude of penguins found there. At
+this place, James Claas van Ulpenda, the vice-admiral, was arraigned
+before a council of war, for various breaches of the articles sworn to
+before proceeding on the voyage. Having a fair trial, and sufficient
+time allowed him for his defence, he was condemned to be turned ashore
+in the straits, with a small supply of provisions, and allowed to shift
+for himself among the wild beasts and more savage inhabitants, which
+sentence was accordingly executed, so that he doubtless soon fell a prey
+either to hunger or the natives, who are implacable enemies to all
+strangers.
+
+They entered another bay on the 1st February, which they called Popish
+bay, probably owing to some cross erected on its shore, and in which
+they were exposed to much danger. On the 27th, they saw at a distance a
+huge mountain of ice in Penguin bay. The 28th they passed Cape Deseado,
+or Desire, into the South Sea, bidding adieu to the many dismal
+prospects of the Straits of Magellan. Their company, originally 248 men,
+was now reduced to 147, but was soon still farther lessened by losing
+company of the Henry Frederick, which never rejoined. Waiting for that
+ship in vain till the 12th March, they sailed to the island of Mocha on
+the coast of Chili, in lat. 38 deg. 22' S. and six miles [twenty English]
+from the continent. This island is remarkable by a high mountain in the
+middle, which is cloven at the top, and whence a water-course descends
+into the vale land at its foot. They here bartered knives and hatchets
+with the natives for sheep, poultry, maize, _bartulas_,[76] and other
+fruits. The town consisted of about fifty straw huts, where the Dutch
+were regaled with a sour kind of drink, called _cici_, made of maiz
+steeped in water, which is the favourite drink of the Chilese at their
+feasts. Polygamy is much practised among these people, who buy as many
+wives as they can afford to maintain; so that a man who has many
+daughters, especially if they be handsome, is accounted rich. If one man
+kill another, he is judged by the relations of the deceased, as they
+have no laws or magistrates among them, so that the murderer may
+sometimes buy off his punishment by giving a drinking-bout of _cici_.
+Their cloathing is manufactured from the wool of a large kind of sheep,
+which animal they also employ to carry burdens. They would not sell any
+of these, but parted freely with another kind, not very different.
+
+[Footnote 76: This probably means battatas or potatoes, a native
+production of Chili.--E.]
+
+From thence they went to the island of St Mary, in lat. 37 deg. S. eighteen
+miles [ninety-five English] from Mocha, where they fell in with a
+Spanish ship carrying lard and meal from Conception to Valdivia in
+Araucania, which they chased and took. The pilot of this ship informed
+them that they would not be able to return to the island of St Mary,
+owing to the south wind, and that two Spanish ships of war were waiting
+for them at Arica. Upon this information they resolved to sail for
+Valparaiso, and by that means quite lost all chance of being rejoined by
+the Henry Frederick, which might otherwise have got up with them.
+Besides, they concluded that the missing ship had failed to find St
+Mary's isle, owing to its being wrong placed in the map of Plancius, in
+lat. 38 deg. S. which error they themselves had fallen into, had they not
+been set right by the observations of Mr Mellish. They were farther
+confirmed in the resolution of not returning to the island of St Mary,
+by hearing of the misfortune which had there befallen Simon de Cordes,
+who was there butchered with twenty-three of his men, after being
+invited on shore in a friendly manner by the Indians, owing to the
+treachery of the Spaniards endeavouring to get possession of his two
+ships, and sending intelligence to Lima and all about the country of the
+arrival of the Dutch in these seas, with a list of their ships, and the
+names of all their commanders. For these reasons they proceeded to
+Valparaiso, where they took two ships and killed some Indians, but all
+the Spaniards escaped on shore. Valparaiso is in lat. 35 deg. 5' S. And
+about eighteen miles inland, [100 English miles] is the town of St Jago,
+abounding in red wine and sheep. They kill these animals merely for the
+sake of their tallow, with which alone they load many vessels. Here they
+received letters from the captain of the Flying Hart, one of the
+squadron under Verhagen, who had been treacherously captured by the
+Spaniards; owing, as he alleged, to the wrong placement of the island of
+St Mary in the map, by which he had been misled.
+
+At Valparaiso they intercepted some letters giving an account of the
+wars in Chili between the Spaniards and the Indians, who it seems were
+in rebellion, had sacked the town of Valdivia, putting vast numbers of
+Spaniards to the sword, and carrying off many captives. They burnt the
+houses and churches, knocking off the heads of the popish images,
+crying, "Down go the gods of the Spaniards." They then crammed the
+mouths of these images with gold, bidding them satisfy themselves with
+that, for the sake of which their votaries had committed so many
+barbarous massacres of their nation. They afterwards laid close siege to
+the city of Imperial, and had almost starved the Spanish garrison into a
+surrender. The valiant Indians who undertook this enterprise were about
+5000, of whom 5000 were cavalry, 100 were armed with muskets, and 70 had
+corslets, all of which were plunder they had taken from the Spaniards.
+They so mortally hate the Spaniards, that they rip up the breasts of all
+they overcome, tearing out their hearts with their teeth, and they
+delight to drink their favourite liquor from a cup made of a Spaniard's
+skull.
+
+These Indians [the Araucans] are for the most part very stout, and
+skilful soldiers, and commit the management of all their military
+affairs to the direction of one supreme general, whose orders are
+implicitly obeyed. Their method of election to this high dignity is very
+singular; for he who carries a certain log of wood on his shoulders the
+longest, and with the smallest appearance of weariness, is saluted
+general by the army. In this trial several carried the log four, five,
+and six hours; but at length one carried it twenty-four hours on end,
+and this person was now general. The whole of Chili, from St Jago to
+Valdivia, is one of the most fertile and most delightful countries in
+the world. It abounds in all kinds of cattle and fruit, has many rich
+gold mines, and its climate is so sweet and salubrious as to exclude the
+use of medicine, being health and life in itself.
+
+They entered the bay of Guasco[77] on the 1st April, where they remained
+till the 7th. The 11th they came into a large bay, named _Moro Gorch_,
+in lat. 18 deg. 30' S. ten miles from which is _Moro Moreno_, from which the
+shore runs to Arica, and all this coast, up to the hill of St Francis,
+is very much subject to south winds, though the adjoining seas have the
+winds variable and uncertain. On the 20th the whole air was darkened by
+an _Arenal_ which is a cloud of dust, and so thick that one cannot see a
+stone's throw. These are raised by the wind from the adjoining shore,
+and are very common in these parts. The 25th they were within view of
+the famous city of Lima in Peru. At this time they learnt the value of
+the treasure of which the Spaniards had deprived them, in the ships they
+took on the coast of Chili. Nicholas Peterson, the captain of one of
+these prizes, acquainted Van Noort that he had been informed by a negro
+of a great quantity of gold having been on board the ship, as he
+believed to the amount of three tons, having helped to carry a great
+part of it on board. On this information the admiral closely examined
+the Spanish pilot, who at first denied all knowledge of any gold; but
+another negro having corroborated the information, with some farther
+circumstances, the pilot at last owned that they had on board fifty-two
+chests, each containing four arobas of gold, and besides these 500 bars
+of the same metal, weighing from eight to ten and twelve pounds each;
+all of which, together with what private stock belonged to any of the
+company, the captain had ordered to be thrown overboard in the night,
+when first chased, amounting in the whole to about 10,200 pounds weight
+of gold; and, from its fineness, worth about two million pieces of
+eight, or Spanish silver dollars. Upon this the admiral ordered the ship
+and all the prisoners to be searched, but there was only found a single
+pound of gold dust, tied up in a rag, in the breeches pocket of the
+Spanish pilot. The prisoners owned that all this gold was brought from
+the island of St Mary, from mines discovered only three years before;
+and that there were not more than three or four Spaniards on that
+island, and about 200 Indians, only armed with bows and arrows.
+
+[Footnote 77: Perhaps Huasco in lat. 28 deg. 27' S. or it may possibly have
+been Guacho, in 25 deg. 50' S.--E.]
+
+The 5th September they came in sight of the Ladrones, and came on the
+16th to Guam, one of these an island of about twenty Dutch miles in
+extent, and yielding fish, cocoa-nuts, bananas, and sugar canes, all of
+which the natives brought to the ships in a great number of canoes.
+Sometimes they met 200 of these canoes at one time, with four or five
+men in each, bawling out _hiero, hiero,_ meaning iron; and often in
+their eagerness they run their canoes against the ships, overturning
+them and losing all their commodities. These islanders were a sly subtle
+people, and honest with good looking after; for otherwise, they would
+sell a basket of cocoa-nut shells covered over with a small quantity of
+rice, as if full of rice. They would also snatch a sword from its
+scabbard, and plunge instantly into the water, where they dived like so
+many ducks; and the women were as roguish as the men, stealing as
+impudently, and diving as expertly to carry off their prizes.
+
+The 17th of September they sailed for the Philippines; and on the 20th
+they met with ice, though then only in the latitude of 3 deg. N.[78] On the
+16th October they came to Bayla bay, in a very fertile land, at which
+place they procured abundance of all kinds of necessaries for their
+ships, by pretending to be Spaniards. The Spaniards, who are lords here,
+make the Indians pay an annual capitation tax, to the value of ten
+single rials for every one above twenty years of age. The natives of
+these islands are mostly naked, having their skins marked with figures
+so deeply impressed, [_tatooed_] that they never wear out. Being
+discovered to be Dutch, but not till they had gained their ends, they
+sailed for the Straits of Manilla, all the coasts near which appeared
+waste, barren, and rocky. Here a sudden squall of wind from the S.E.
+carried away some of their masts and sails, being more furious than any
+they had hitherto experienced during the voyage. The 23d some of the
+people went ashore, where they eat palmitoes and drank water so
+greedily, that they were afterwards seized with the dysentery. The 24th
+they entered the straits, sailing past an island in the middle, and came
+in the evening past the island of Capul, seven miles within the straits,
+near which they found whirlpools, where the sea was of an unfathomable
+depth, so far as they could discover.
+
+[Footnote 78: This surely is an error for 18 deg., Guam being in lat. 18 deg.
+20' N. yet even here, the fact of meeting ice so far within the tropic
+is sufficiently singular.--E.]
+
+They now crowded sail for Manilla, which is eighty miles from Capul, but
+wanted both a good wind to carry them, and good maps and a skilful pilot
+to direct them to that place. The 7th November they took a junk from
+China, laden with provisions for Manilla. The master of this junk told
+them there were then at Manilla two great ships, that come every year
+from New Spain, and a Dutch ship also which had been brought from
+Malacca. He said also that the town of Manilla was walled round, having
+two forts for protecting the ships, as there was a vast trade to that
+place from China, not less than 400 junks coming every year from
+Chincheo, with silk and other valuable commodities, between Easter and
+December. There were also two ships expected shortly from Japan, laden
+with iron and other metals, and provisions. The 15th they took two
+barks, laden with hens and hogs, being part of the tribute to the
+Spaniards, but became food to the Dutch, who gave them a few bolts of
+linen in return.
+
+They passed the islands of _Bankingle_ and _Mindoro_, right over against
+which is the island of _Lou-bou_. at the distance of two miles, and
+between both is another small island, beside which there is a safe
+passage for ships. The island of Luzon is larger than England and
+Scotland,[79] and has a numerous cluster of small islands round about
+it; yet is more beholden to trade for its riches, than to the goodness
+of its soil. While at anchor, in 15 deg. N. waiting for the ships said to be
+coming from Japan, Van Noort took one of them on the 1st December, being
+a vessel of fifty tons, which had been twenty-five days on her voyage.
+Her form was very strange, her forepart being like a chimney, and her
+furniture corresponding to her shape; as her sails were made of reeds,
+her anchors of wood, and her cables of straw. Her Japanese mariners had
+their heads all close shaven, except one tuft left long behind, which is
+the general custom of that country. The 9th, they took two barks, one
+laden with cocoa wine and arrack, and the other with hens and rice.
+
+[Footnote 79: Luzon is certainly a large island, but by no means such as
+represented in the text.--E.]
+
+The 14th of December they met the two Spanish ships returning from
+Manilla to New Spain, on which a very sharp engagement took place.
+Overpowered by numbers, the Dutch in the ship of Van Noort were reduced
+to the utmost extremity, being at one time boarded by the Spaniards, and
+almost utterly conquered; when Van Noort, seeing all was lost without a
+most resolute exertion, threatened to blow up his ship, unless his men
+fought better and beat off the Spaniards. On this, the Dutch crew fought
+with such desperate resolution, that they cleared their own ship, and
+boarded the Spanish admiral, which at last they sunk outright. In this
+action the Dutch admiral had five men slain, and twenty-six wounded, the
+whole company being now reduced to thirty-five men. But several hundreds
+of the Spaniards perished, partly slain in the fight, and partly drowned
+or knocked in the head after the battle was over. But the Dutch lost
+their pinnace, which was taken by the Spanish vice-admiral; and this was
+not wonderful, considering that she had only twenty-five men to fight
+against five hundred Spaniards and Indians.
+
+After this action, Van Noort made sail for the island of Borneo, the
+chief town of which island is in lat. 5 deg. N. while Manilla, the capital
+of Lucon, is in lat. 15 deg. N. On the way to Borneo, they passed the island
+of _Bolutam_, [Palawan or Paragua,] which is 180 miles in length from
+N.E. to S.W. They came to Borneo on the 26th December, putting into a
+great bay, three miles in compass, where there was good anchorage, and
+abundance of fish in a neighbouring river, and the fishermen always
+ready to barter their fish for linen. Van Noort sent a message to the
+king, desiring leave to trade; but suspecting them to be Spaniards, he
+would come to no terms till his officers had examined them with the
+utmost attention, after which they had trade for pepper with a people
+called _Pattannees_, of Chinese origin. Both these and the native
+Borneans were fond of Chinese cotton cloth, but the linen from Holland
+was a mere drug, and quite unsaleable. In the mean time, the Borneans
+laid a plot to surprise the ship; for which purpose, on the 1st January,
+1601, they came with at least an hundred praws full of men, pretending
+to have brought presents from the king, and would have come on board the
+ship; but the Dutch, suspecting their treachery, commanded them to keep
+at a distance from the ship, or they would be obliged to make them do so
+with their shot, on which the Borneans desisted.
+
+Borneo is the largest of all the islands in the East-Indies; and its
+capital, of the same name, contains about 300 houses, but is built in a
+dirty marshy soil, or rather in the water, so that the inhabitants have
+to go from one house to another in their praws. The inhabitants all go
+constantly armed, from the noble down to the fisherman; and even the
+women are of so martial a disposition, that on receiving an affront,
+they instantly revenge it, either with a dagger or a javelin. This a
+Dutchman had nearly proved to his cost; for having offended one of these
+viragoes, she set upon him with a javelin, and had surely dispatched
+him, if she had not been prevented by main force. They are Mahometans,
+and so very superstitious, that they would rather die than eat of
+swine's flesh, nor will they keep any of these animals about them. The
+better sort have a cotton garment from the waist down, with a turban on
+their heads; but the common people go entirely naked. They continually
+chew betel and areka, which is also a common practice in many other
+parts of India.
+
+On the 4th January, four Borneans came to the ship, intending to have
+cut the cables, that she might drive on shore and become their prey; but
+the Dutch fortunately discovered them, and drove them away with shot,
+when they left their praw behind, which the Dutch took, to serve instead
+of their own boat, which they had lost at the Philippines. Seeing no
+hope of any profitable trade at this place, they now left it, intending
+for Bantam, not much pleased either with the country or the people. The
+day after leaving Borneo, they met a junk from Japan bound for Manilla,
+which informed them of a great Dutch ship being forced by tempests into
+Japan, all her company having died by sickness and famine except
+fourteen. They came first to _Bongo_, in lat. 34 deg. 40' N. [Bungo in about
+lat. 33 deg. N.] whence the emperor of Japan ordered them to remove to
+_Atonza_, in lat. 36 deg. 30' N. [Osaka in lat. 34' 55' N.] They alleged
+that they were allowed to trade, and to build a new ship, with liberty
+to dispose of themselves afterwards as they pleased. From this account,
+it was not doubted that this was the admiral of Verhagen's fleet;[80]
+and dismissing the Japanese vessel, they passed the line a third time,
+and proceeded for Bantam, in no little fear and danger, for want of an
+experienced pilot and good charts.
+
+[Footnote 80: This was the ship in which William Adams sailed as pilot,
+as related on a former occasion, being the Hope, commanded by James
+Mahu, one of five ships from Rotterdam. We have already had occasion to
+meet with two of these in the Straits of Magellan.--E.]
+
+The 16th they took a junk belonging to Jor or Johor, in which they
+procured an experienced and skilful pilot, who came in good time to
+save them from shipwreck, which they had otherwise most probably
+suffered in these dangerous seas, so thick set with shoals and islands
+on every side, with which they were entirely unacquainted; and besides,
+they were now reduced to one anchor, and one solitary cable almost worn
+out. The 28th they came to Jortan in the island of Java, where they had
+news of several Dutch ships being at Bantam. The city of Jortan consists
+of about 1000 houses built of timber, and its king commands over a
+considerable portion of that end of the island, and had lately conquered
+_Balambuan_, a small island S.E. from Jortan. The people in these parts
+are said to be Mahometans; yet, as pagods are still in use, they seem to
+retain some mixture of the old Indian superstitions, or at least some
+remnant of paganism is tolerated among the common people. Their chief
+priest at this time was an old man, said to be an hundred and twenty
+years of age, who had a large household of wives, who fed the old man
+with their milk.
+
+Sailing past Jortan, they saw a large Portuguese ship of 600 tons,
+sticking fast among the shoals. She was bound for Amboina, on purpose to
+have engrossed all the trade of that place; at least such was the report
+of the Portuguese; but Van Noort strongly suspected she had been sent
+out to cruize for the purpose of intercepting him. He was, therefore,
+the less concerned for her misfortune, and the less careful in assisting
+her crew, originally of between six and seven hundred men, many of whom
+were still on board, and in great danger of perishing. The 5th of
+February, they passed the straits between _Balambuan_ and _Bally_,
+leaving Java on the N.E.[81] On the 11th, finding themselves in lat 13 deg.
+S. they directed their course for the Cape of Good Hope. On the 18th,
+having the sun vertical at noon, their latitude was 11 deg. 20' S. and here
+a calm began which lasted eleven days. The 11th March they were in lat.
+24 deg. 45' S. and in 28 deg. 10' S. on the 24th.
+
+[Footnote 81: This is an obvious error, as the Straits of Bally are at
+the _east_ end of Java, which they must consequently have left on the
+N.W. of their course.--E.]
+
+The 19th of April, having been considerably retarded by cross winds and
+calms, they were under the necessity to lessen their allowance of water.
+At night of the 24th they observed light, as of a fire, on land, about
+four miles to the N.W. although they reckoned themselves 200 miles from
+the cape, and were not aware of having approached any other land. The
+25th, being calm weather, they were enabled to mend their sails, and at
+night another fire was observed; and in the morning of the 26th they saw
+land. The 3d May they saw land between the east and north, about six
+miles off, resembling the end of an island, by which they reckoned
+themselves near the cape, and now shaped their course for the island of
+St Helena, where they arrived on the 26th. They here refreshed
+themselves with fish and some flesh, and laid in a supply of wood and
+water; but found goats and fowls hard to be got, and could not procure
+any oranges.
+
+Leaving St Helena on the 30th May, they crossed the line for the fourth
+time on the 14th of June; and on the 16th met a fleet of six Dutch
+ships, under Admiral Heemskirk, bound for India. These had fought with
+thirteen Spanish ships near the island of Sal, and had lost their
+pinnace and vice-admiral; the former having been taken by the Spaniards,
+and the latter having parted company. The 8th July they were in lat. 27 deg.
+N. when they fell in with considerable quantities of the sea-weed called
+_saragossa_. By the 13th they were in lat. 32 deg. 30' N. after which they
+had a calm of fifteen days, the sea being all covered with weeds. The
+22d they had to go upon short allowance of bread, and that too much worm
+eaten. August 1st, being in lat. 40 deg. N. they passed the island of
+Flores, forty-five miles to the westward, by their estimation. They met
+three ships belonging to Embden on the 18th, from whom they procured
+bread and flesh, in exchange for rice and pepper; and from whom they
+learnt that they were so near England, that they might expect to see the
+Lizard next day. About noon of the 26th August, 1601, they arrived in
+safety before the city of Rotterdam, where they were received with the
+utmost joy, on their return from so long and perilous a voyage, which
+had occupied three years, bating eighteen days.
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_Voyage of Sebald de Weert, to the South Sea and Straits of Magellan, in
+1598_.[82]
+
+"Though not a circumnavigation, it seems necessary to give an account of
+this voyage of Sebald de Weert, by way of supplement to that of Oliver
+de Noort; because De Weert was fitted out with the intention of sailing
+by the Straits of Magellan to India, and because it is difficult to find
+so good a description of these famous straits as he has given. De Weert
+was one of the best seamen in Holland, and lived to distinguish himself
+afterwards by many more successful enterprises; and I persuade myself
+the reader will be pleased to see the firmness of an able commander,
+struggling against a long series of misfortunes. This has always been
+esteemed one of the best written, and most curious of all the Dutch
+voyages, and is therefore given at large."[83]--_Harris_.
+
+[Footnote 82: Harris, I. 36.]
+
+[Footnote 83: So far Harris; but on the present occasion several trivial
+and minute circumstances are omitted or abbreviated.--E.]
+
+Sec. 1. _Incidents of the Voyage from Holland to the Straits of Magellan_.
+
+The fleet fitted out for this expedition consisted of the Hope of 500
+tons, with 130 men, commanded by James Mahu, admiral; the Love or
+Charity of 300 tons, and 110 men, commanded by Simon de Cordes,
+vice-admiral; the Faith of 320 tons, and 100 men, of which Gerard van
+Beuningen was captain; the Fidelity of 220 tons, with 86 men, captain
+Jurian Buckholt; and a yacht of 150 tons and 112 men, called the Merry
+Messenger, captain Sebald de Weert. These five ships were well provided
+with all manner of provisions, cannon, small arms, ammunition, money,
+merchandise, and stores necessary for a long voyage; and the pilot on
+whose knowledge and experience they chiefly depended, was an Englishman
+named William Adams,[84] besides whom there were three other Englishmen
+on board the admiral.
+
+[Footnote 84: Of the adventures of this person in Japan, we have
+formerly had occasion to give an account in vol. VIII. p. 64, of this
+Collection, preceded by a brief abstract of the voyages of Schald de
+Weert.--E.]
+
+The fleet sailed from the road of Goeree in the Maese on the 27th June,
+1598; but, owing to contrary winds, had to remain at anchor in the Downs
+on the coast of England, till the 15th July. The wind being then fair,
+they set sail on that day, and on the 19th were on the coast of Barbary.
+Towards the end of August, they arrived in the harbour of St Jago, one
+of the Cape de Verd islands, where they remained till the 10th
+September, although the climate was very unhealthy, and the pilots,
+particularly Mr Adams, remonstrated against continuing there; by which
+the officers were so much offended, that they resolved never more to
+call the pilots to council, which seems to have been the source of all
+their subsequent misfortunes, and of that restless spirit of mutiny and
+discontent, which possessed the seamen in this fleet.
+
+In the afternoon of the 11th September, they were off the desert island
+of Brava, and the bottom being rocky, so that they could not anchor,
+they stood off and on all night, and coasting along next morning they
+found some fresh water, which was hard to be got, as the ships could not
+come to anchor, on account of a bad bottom. The boats, however, of
+Captains Beuniugen and Buckholt, went ashore with empty casks, which
+they filled and brought on board, though then night and the ships under
+way. Captain de Ween went ashore in a small sandy bay, and looking about
+for fresh water, he saw some Portuguese and negroes coming towards him,
+who told him the French and English ships used to get fresh water near
+that place, but remained always under sail. They said also, that no
+refreshments were to be had at this island, but these might be had in
+the island of Fuego. After the departure of the islanders, de Weert
+discovered four or five ruinous small huts, the door of one being walled
+up, which he found full of maize. On this discovery, he remained there
+with three men, lest the Portuguese might carry off the maize in the
+night, and sent some others in the boat to give notice to the admiral of
+this discovery. Fortunately a small vessel belonging to the bishop of St
+Thomas, taken by the Dutch at Praya, arrived in the bay, to which de
+Weert removed all the maize. He also took two female sea tortoises, in
+which were above 600 eggs, of which they made many good meals. The
+Portuguese and negroes, finding the Dutch busied in carrying away their
+maize, came down the mountain, making a great noise; but de Weert,
+having two fusils, fired at them and made them retire.
+
+On the return of de Weert, he found the admiral very sick, and a council
+assembled in the Hope. He in the first place advised them to remain no
+longer at the Cape Verd islands, and then resigned his command to the
+vice-admiral, de Cordes. On advising with the other captains, and
+learning the quantity of water in each ship, de Cordes gave orders that
+such as had most should give part to the others, and that the allowance
+of provisions and water should be diminished, and as fresh water was not
+to be expected for three or four months, they were directed to gather
+rain-water when that could be had. The greatest part of the men in the
+admiral's ship being sick, two or three of them were removed into each
+of the other ships, in exchange for sound men. The fleet sailed from
+Brava on the 15th September, and on the 22d a signal was made from the
+admiral for the other captains. They found the admiral, James Mahu,
+beyond hope of recovery; and that night he and his supercargo, Daniel
+Restan, both died. He was of a mild and gentle disposition, honest,
+careful, diligent, and very kind to the seamen, and was much lamented by
+the whole fleet. Opening the letters of the directors of the expedition,
+which were directed to be opened in such a case, de Cordes was appointed
+admiral, and Benningen vice-admiral; Sebald de Weert being promoted to
+the command of the Faith, and Dirke Gernitsz China to that of the yacht.
+These alterations did not please the seamen, who were attached to their
+former commanders.
+
+By the 4th October, the scurvy raged much among the seamen, especially
+in the Hope, on which de Cordes ordered a day of prayer to be observed
+in the fleet, to implore the mercy of God and a happy voyage. They were
+then in the lat. of 1 deg. 45' S. At length the scurvy increased so much in
+the Hope, that the admiral had not men enough to work his ship, and it
+was resolved to steer for some island where fresh provisions might be
+procured. They steered accordingly for Annobon, where they hoped to get
+fresh meat and oranges. Towards night, the admiral, who sailed in the
+van, fired a gun as a signal of seeing land, though all the pilots then
+thought the land at the distance of 100 leagues. They accordingly
+approached the land, and anchored on the coast of _Manicongo_, in lat.
+3 deg. S.[85] They here lost company of the small ship belonging to St
+Thomas, in which were eleven sound men, and some thought she had
+deserted, while others thought she had run aground: But they afterwards
+found she had gone to Cape Lope Gonzalves, where the men quitted her,
+going aboard the ship of Baltazar Musheron, which was bound to America.
+
+[Footnote 85: The latitude in the text falls near Point Palmas, on the
+coast of Yumba, in what is called the Kingdom of Congo. Mayumba bay,
+perhaps the Manicongo of the text, is in lat. 4 deg. 30' S.]
+
+After several ineffectual attempts to procure refreshments for their
+men on the coast of Africa and the island of Annobon, they put to sea on
+the 3d January, 1599, from that island, with the intention of sailing
+direct for the Straits of Magellan. The 22d they passed the shelves and
+rocks on the coast of Brazil, called the _Abrolhos_. The 9th March, one
+of the seamen in the vice-admiral's ship was hanged, for repeatedly
+breaking open the cupboard belonging to the cook, and stealing bread.
+About this time, the sick beginning to recover, got such good appetites
+that their allowance was not sufficient. The 12th, being near the Rio
+Plata, the sea appeared as red as blood, and some of the water being
+drawn up was found full of small red worms, that leaped out of it like
+fleas.
+
+Sec. 2. _The Fleet passes through the Straits of Magellan into the South
+Sea, and is forced to return_.
+
+The 6th of April, the fleet got into the Straits of Magellan, and
+towards evening cast anchor under the smaller of the two Penguin isles,
+fourteen leagues within the mouth of the straits. They here saw vast
+numbers of those birds called _plongeons_ or divers, because they dive
+into the water to catch fish. They killed there ten or fourteen of them
+with sticks, and might have killed as many as would have served the
+whole fleet, but would not lose the opportunity of a fair wind. The 9th
+they proceeded through the straits; and next day the admiral sent fifty
+men on shore, to look for inhabitants or cattle, but after travelling
+three leagues along shore, they found nothing. They arrived in a fine
+bay on the 15th, twenty-one leagues from the mouth of the straits,
+called _Muscle bay_ by the English, because of the great quantities of
+muscles found there, and here they provided themselves abundantly with
+fresh water and wood. The 17th they sailed between two rocky shores, so
+close and so high that they hardly thought to have got through. The
+mountains on both sides were covered with snow. On the 18th, they cast
+anchor in a bay on the north side of the straits, in lat. 54 deg. S. called
+_Great bay_, having good anchorage on fine sand. In this bay there are
+three small islands, the least of which is farthest east.
+
+In these parts, there grow great quantities of trees, resembling bay
+trees, but somewhat higher, the bark of which is very bitter, and has a
+hot taste like pepper.[86] They here found abundance of muscles, some of
+which were a span long, and when boiled, the fish of three of them
+weighed a pound. The wind being contrary, they lay here at anchor till
+the 23d of August,[87] without taking the sails from the yards, to be
+ready to sail on a change of wind. In the mean while they suffered much
+from cold, in so much that they lost above an hundred men, among whom
+was Captain Buckholt, who was succeeded by Baltazar de Cordes. Storms
+were so frequent and violent during this time, that the ships could not
+ride quietly at anchor, and the seamen were forced to be continually at
+work to keep them right. They were also forced to go often on shore, in
+rain, snow, and hail, to get in fresh water, wood, muscles, and such
+other food as they could find, by which they were greatly fatigued. The
+scarcity of victuals was so great, and the climate so severe, that they
+were almost starved with hunger and cold, and their appetites so
+insatiable, that they devoured roots or any thing else they could find,
+raw and uncooked. Most of the seamen had no watch-coats or other warm
+cloathing, to enable them to support the fatigue of watching and their
+daily labour, having made no provision of such things, as they believed
+themselves bound to warm climes. To remedy this evil, the general
+ordered cloth to be distributed among them.
+
+[Footnote 86: In Harris these are erroneously called _Pimento_, but they
+must have been the _Wintera aromatica_. The Pimento, or _Myrtus
+Pimenta_, is a native of the warm regions of America and the West India
+islands, producing Pimento, All-spice, or Jamaica pepper.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 87: This date, here anticipated, refers to the day when they
+afterwards set sail.--E.]
+
+It was found that many of the seamen, when at their meals, were in use
+to sell their victuals to others at high prices, and afterwards
+satisfied their hunger with raw muscles and green herbs, which
+occasioned them to fall into dropsies and other lingering sickness, of
+which several died: For this reason, the captains and other officers
+were ordered to be present at all their meals, to see and oblige them to
+eat their allowances.
+
+The 7th May the vice-admiral was sent, with two boats, to an island
+opposite Great bay, to catch sea-dogs.[88] He found there seven small
+boats or canoes, with savages on board, who were of a reddish colour
+with long hair, and, as well as he could observe, seemed _ten or eleven
+feet high_. On seeing the Dutch boats, the savages went on shore and
+threw many stones at the Dutch, so that they did not venture to land.
+The savages then took courage, and came towards them in their canoes;
+and coming within musket-shot, the vice-admiral made his men give them a
+general discharge, by which four or five of the savages were slain, and
+the rest so frightened that they escaped again on shore. They then
+pulled up some trees, which appeared afar off to be a span thick; but
+the vice-admiral chose to let them alone, and returned to the ships. The
+26th of May, as some seamen were on shore, looking for muscles, roots,
+and herbs, and were dispersed, expecting no danger, a number of savages
+fell upon them suddenly, killed three of them, whom they tore in pieces,
+and wounded two, who were rescued by the admiral. All these savages were
+naked, except one, who had the skin of a sea-dog or seal about his
+shoulders. They were armed with wooden javelins, which they threw with
+great strength and dexterity. The points of these javelins were like
+cramp-irons, tied to the shafts with the guts of sea-dogs, and would run
+so deep into the flesh, that it was almost impossible to get them out.
+
+[Footnote 88: Seals are probably here meant.--E.]
+
+While the fleet lay in this bay, the admiral ordered his long-boat to be
+put upon the stocks, to be enlarged and altered into a pinnace, which
+was named the Postillion, and the command of her was given to the second
+pilot of the Hope. Having no provisions for making broth, Captain de
+Weert landed on the 27th July, in order to catch seals; and while he was
+ashore, so great a storm arose that he was obliged to remain two days
+and two nights, before he could get back to his ship, and caught
+nothing. After enduring great hardships in this _Green bay_,[89] and
+which the Dutch named the Bay of de Cordes, they set sail on the 23d of
+August, having the wind at N.E. but next day the weather became so calm,
+that they were obliged to put into a great bay on the south side of the
+straits. Here, to perpetuate the memory of so dangerous and
+extraordinary a voyage into these straits, to which no nation had
+hitherto sent so many or such large ships, the general instituted a new
+order of knighthood, of which he made his six principal officers
+knights. They bound themselves by oath, never to do or consent to any
+thing contrary to their honour or reputation, whatever might be the
+dangers or extremities to which they were exposed, even death itself;
+nor to do or suffer to be done any thing prejudicial to the interests of
+their country, or of the voyage in which they were now engaged. They
+also solemnly promised, freely to expose their lives against all the
+enemies of their nation, and to use their utmost endeavours to conquer
+those dominions whence the king of Spain procured so much gold and
+silver, by which he was enabled to carry on the war against their
+country. This ceremony was performed ashore on the eastern coast of the
+straits, in as orderly a manner as the place and occasion would permit,
+and the order was named of _The Lion set free_, in allusion to the
+Belgic lion, the cognizance of their country, which they professed to
+use all their endeavours to free from the Spanish yoke. After this
+ceremony, a tablet was erected on the top of a high pillar, on which the
+names of the new-made knights were inscribed, and the bay was named the
+_Bay of Knights_.
+
+[Footnote 89: This seems the same formerly named Great bay.--E.]
+
+Leaving this bay on the 28th of August, they put into another bay a
+league farther on, where they were again becalmed. The admiral at this
+time gave orders to Captain de Weert to go back in his boat to the Bay
+of Knights, to remove the tablet to a more convenient situation. When
+about to double the point of the bay on this errand, de Weert saw eighty
+savages sitting on the shore, having eight or nine canoes beside them;
+and, as soon as the savages saw the boat, they set up a dismal noise,
+inviting the Dutch to land, by means of signs. But, having only a small
+number of men, de Weert turned back towards the ships; on which the
+savages ran across the woods along shore, always hallowing, and making
+signs for the Dutch to land. When the general was informed of this
+adventure, he dispatched three boats well armed on shore, but the
+savages were not to be seen, though they had left their marks behind
+them, having dug up the interred body of a Dutchman, and left his body
+on the ground, barbarously disfigured. On going to the knights tablet,
+the Dutch also found it had been broken by the savages.
+
+Early in the night of the 3d September, they got out from the Straits of
+Magellan into the South Sea, with a fair wind, and continued their
+voyage to the W.N.W. with the wind at N.E. till the 7th, having all that
+time fine weather. This day, however, the sea began to swell and rise so
+high, that the vice-admiral had to lie to and hoist his boat on board,
+which was likewise done by the Fidelity. While de Weert was sailing
+directly in the wake of the admiral, who led the fleet, an accident
+happened on board the yacht, which had the wind of the Fidelity, which
+obliged both the Faith and the Fidelity, the former being de Weert's
+ship, to furl their sails, and lie to for assisting the yacht. The
+admiral continued his course, thinking that the other ships continued to
+follow him, and that the fog prevented them from being seen by the
+watch. The vice-admiral also was obliged to furl his sails shortly
+after, the fog being so thick as to prevent them from seeing each other,
+though very near.
+
+On the 8th the two yachts lost sight of the ships, but these three kept
+company all that day; and next day the whole fleet rejoined to their
+great joy. After joining, Derick Geritz sent the Postillion to the
+admiral, to request the assistance of his carpenters; but they were
+sick, and those from the Faith and Fidelity went on board the yacht.
+This proved afterwards a serious loss to these ships, as they never got
+their carpenters back. The wind shifted all of a sudden, and the sea
+became so rough and stormy that the yacht had to furl her sails, as was
+done by the vice-admiral, who was ahead of the Faith, and by the
+Fidelity. In the ensuing night the yacht and vice-admiral made sail
+again, without advertising the other two ships by signal, so that they
+continued to lie to. When day broke next morning, Captains Baltazar de
+Cordes and Sebalt de Weert, of the Fidelity and Faith, were extremely
+troubled at not seeing any of the other ships. De Weert, who was now the
+senior captain, was also much troubled by the unprovided state of his
+ship, having no master, only two old pilots, and a very small number of
+seamen, mostly sick and weak through the cold and damp weather, though
+they kept a fire burning night and day.
+
+The N.E. wind became so violent on the 16th September, that the two
+ships were every moment in danger of sinking. The gallery of the Faith
+was rent open above an inch, and the sea broke so violently over the
+Fidelity, that her men were almost constantly up to their knees in
+water. She likewise sprung a leak, owing to which they were forced to
+keep her pumps constantly going day and night, yet could hardly keep her
+afloat. At last, after much search, the leak was found and stopt. In
+this deplorable situation these two ships remained for twenty-four
+hours, _spooning_ under bare poles. The seamen also became much
+dissatisfied, though allowed two ounces of dried fish a day to each man,
+with a reasonable quantity of biscuit. But they were much discontented
+with this scanty allowance, having been used in the straits to fill
+themselves with muscles, of which they could not now brook the want, so
+that the captains had much ado to pacify them.
+
+In the night of the 26th September they fell in with the land to the
+north of the straits by mistake, thinking themselves to have been twenty
+leagues from the land; and in the morning the Faith was in great danger,
+as the wind drifted her towards the coast, on which were two rocks,
+which they avoided with the utmost difficulty. The Fidelity, which was a
+considerable way in front, had discovered the rocks in time, and had
+easily given them a wide birth. They were only three leagues from the
+straits when they fell in with the land; and as the westerly wind now
+blew so hard that they were unable to bear up against it, the two
+captains now resolved to regain the straits, and to wait there in some
+safe road or bay for a fair wind, when they did not doubt of rejoining
+the other ships, as it had been agreed to wait at the island of St. Mary
+on the coast of Chili for two months, in case of separation. About
+evening, therefore, of the 27th September, they arrived at the southern
+point of the straits' mouth, and were drifted by the current six or
+seven leagues within the straits, where they anchored in a very good
+road.
+
+Sec. 3. _Incidents during their second Residence in the Straits of
+Magellan_.
+
+From the 27th to the 30th of September they had tolerably good weather,
+but the wind then began to blow so furiously from the S.W. that they
+were forced to drop three anchors a-piece to keep them from being driven
+on shore. As the summer of these antarctic regions was now approaching,
+they were in hopes of fair weather; yet during two months that they
+remained in the straits, they scarcely had a fair day in which to dry
+their sails. For twenty days that they remained in this bay, to which
+they gave the name of the _Bay of Trouble_, they endured incredible
+hardships, being forced to go on shore daily in search of a few birds,
+which, with muscles and snails found upon the rocks, formed their sorry
+subsistence. Being unable to subsist any longer in that bay, they set
+sail on the 18th October, and found a better bay about a league farther
+within the straits. The 22d they were nearly destroyed by a violent
+storm, but the weather became calm next day. The constant employment of
+the seamen was to go on shore in search of muscles for their sustenance
+at low water, and when the tide was in to fetch wood and fresh water, so
+that they had no time to dry themselves, though they kept up a good fire
+continually. In short, during the whole nine months spent in these
+straits, now and formerly, they scarcely had an opportunity once to dry
+their sails, so frequent were the returns of rain and storms. The men
+also were exposed to wet, cold, and high winds, which kept them
+continually uncomfortable, and always at work. The seamen now began to
+murmur, alleging there would not be enough of biscuit for their return
+to Holland, if they remained here any longer. Having notice of this, de
+Weert went into the bread-room, as if to examine their store; and, on
+coming out, he declared, with a cheerful countenance, there was enough
+of biscuit and other provisions for eight months, though in fact there
+was not more than sufficient for four.
+
+At length, on the 2d December, the wind changed to the N.E. and they
+immediately weighed anchor, but could not get out into the South Sea,
+owing to whirlwinds rising from between the high hills and the bottom of
+the bay. The Faith was driven at one time so near the shore that a
+person might have stepped ashore from her gallery, and had certainly
+been lost if the wind had not abated. Next day, the storm being over,
+the two ships got out of Close bay, as they called it, with the ebb, but
+they never afterwards anchored together, and that day they cast anchor
+at the distance of a league from each other. The 8th of December they
+had a more violent storm than ever, which lasted two days, and during
+which the waves rose sometimes higher than the masts. The storm abating
+on the 10th, de Weert went in his boat, intending to go aboard the
+Fidelity; but on doubling the point which lay between them, was
+overwhelmed with grief to see no ship, nor any signs of shipwreck, so
+that he thought she had foundered. Going next day farther towards a
+gulf, he was rejoiced to see a mast behind a low point, where he found
+the Fidelity, with which ship he had to leave his small boat to assist
+in fishing for her anchors and cables, which she had lost in the late
+storm. He then took his leave, returning to his own ship, little
+dreaming he had taken his last farewell of Captain de Cordes.
+
+The 10th, going ashore in the boat for victuals as usual, and having
+doubled a point, they saw three canoes with savages, who went
+immediately on shore, and scrambled up the mountains like monkeys. The
+Dutch examined the canoes, in which were only a few young divers, some
+wooden grapnels, skins of beasts, and other things of no value. Going on
+shore to see if the savages had left any thing, they found a woman and
+two children, who endeavoured to run away, but was taken and carried on
+board, shewing few signs of fear or concern. She was of a middle size
+and reddish colour, with a big belly, a fierce countenance, and her
+hair close cut as if shaven, whereas the men wear their hair long. She
+had a string of snail-shells about her neck by way of ornament, and a
+seal's skin on her shoulders, tied round her neck with a string of gut.
+The rest of her body was quite naked, and her breasts hung down like the
+udders of a cow. Her mouth was very wide, her legs crooked, and her
+heels very long.
+
+This female savage would not eat any of their boiled or roasted meats,
+so they gave her one of the birds they had found in the canoes. Having
+pluckt off the long feathers, she opened it with a muscle shell, cutting
+in the first place behind the right wing, and then above the stomach.
+After that, drawing out the guts, she laid the liver a short time on the
+fire, and eat it almost raw. She then cleaned the gizzard, which she eat
+quite raw, as she did the body of the bird. Her children eat in the same
+manner, one being a girl of four years of age, and the other a boy, who,
+though only six months old, had most of his teeth, and could walk
+alone.[90] The woman looked grave and serious at her meal, though the
+seamen laughed heartily at her strange figure, and unusual mode of
+feeding. She afterwards sat down on her heels like an ape; and she slept
+all gathered up in a heap, with her infant between her arms, having her
+breast in his mouth. After keeping her two days on board, de Weert set
+her on shore, giving her a gown and cap, with necklace and bracelets of
+glass beads. He gave her also a small mirror, a knife, a nail, an awl,
+and a few other toys of small value, with which she seemed much pleased.
+He cloathed the boy also, and decorated him with glass beads of all
+colours; but carried the girl to Holland, where she died. The mother
+seemed much concerned at parting with her daughter, yet went into the
+boat without resistance or noise. She was carried to the shore, a league
+west from the ship, to a place which she pointed out, where the seamen
+found a fire and some utensils, which made the seamen believe that the
+savages had run away on seeing the boat.
+
+[Footnote 90: They had no means to ascertain his age, and must have
+concluded him only six months old from his small size; but from his
+teeth and walking alone, he was more likely to have been two years old,
+and his diminutive size was probably occasioned by the miseries of the
+climate, and wretchedness of every kind to which these outcasts of
+nature are subjected.--E.]
+
+When the boat returned, a new storm arose, during which the waves often
+overtopped the masts, and tossed the ship so violently that they
+momentarily expected she would have been overset or split in pieces;
+but, by the blessing of God, she got out of this bay, to which they gave
+the name of _Unfortunate Bay_. Next day they cast anchor towards evening
+in the channel of the straits, but finding the anchor had no buoy
+attached, and the weather being too violent to allow of supplying one,
+they had again to weigh, and put before the wind, and at length got into
+the bay of Cordes, fourteen or fifteen leagues farther eastwards, near
+the middle of the straits. In this passage they kept as near as possible
+to the south side of the channel, that they might be seen by the
+Fidelity, and even fired a gun off the mouth of a bay in which they
+supposed she lay, as a signal, to which they imagined that they heard
+another gun in answer from their consort, and continued their course in
+the full belief of being followed by the Fidelity. In this passage the
+strength of the wind drove them so fast, that they had to fasten their
+boat astern with two strong hawsers to preserve her, and to diminish the
+velocity of their course; but the heavy rolling waves broke both
+hawsers, and they lost their boat, by which they were reduced to great
+difficulty, having now no means of getting on shore in search of
+provisions.
+
+Next day, being the 16th December, they saw a boat making towards them
+from the westwards, which occasioned various conjectures; but at length
+turned out to belong to the fleet of Van Noort. This unexpected meeting
+gave great joy to the seamen, and the men in this boat were received
+with much respect by de Weert. They were all in perfect health and
+vigour; and, among other things respecting their voyage, told of having
+caught above 2000 birds at the great Penguin Island. This intelligence
+made the sailors in the Faith extremely anxious to get there, and
+several of them were bold enough to tell Captain de Weert, that it was
+necessary they should go there, where they might as well wait for a fair
+wind as in any other place, and besides, that it was only a league out
+of their way. But de Weert declared he would on no account part company
+from Van Noort. This general came in person next day to visit de Weert;
+and the day following, being the 18th December, the whole fleet joined
+him. The wind changing to S.W. on the 22d, they all set sail; and after
+proceeding two or three hours, de Weert requested the loan of a boat
+from general Van Noort, with three or four men, that he might go before
+to direct Captain de Cordes to get ready to sail with the fleet; but he
+could not find the Fidelity.
+
+The Faith was now grown very foul, and unable consequently to keep up
+with the fleet; for which reason, being off the Bay of Knights, where
+she met the ebb current, she was forced to go in there. The 23d she was
+again opposed by adverse currents in a narrow channel, and unable to
+follow the other ships. The 24th they tried again, but were unable to
+get round a point, behind which the fleet of Van Noort lay at anchor;
+and finding it impossible to double that point with the present wind, de
+Weert resolved to wait till it changed, that he might not fatigue his
+men by persisting in vain attempts. But, although the wind was contrary,
+Van Noort proceeded farther on, in search of a more secure anchorage, by
+which de Weert lost sight of the fleet, though not far off, in
+consequence of an intervening high point of land.
+
+Despairing of being able to rejoin the fleet of Van Noort, and finding
+it impossible to subsist his men without a boat, de Weert ordered the
+pieces of one which were in the hold to be taken out, that they might be
+put together. This was on the 25th December; but having the wind at
+north next day, he attempted to get next day into a small bay, a league
+farther on than the Bay of Knights, in which the boat might be more
+conveniently built: but the violence of the wind forced him back into
+the Bay of Cordes, five leagues farther to the east. Here, on the 26th
+and 27th, they endured so great a storm, that the seamen began to murmur
+again, as having been a whole fortnight without procuring any muscles,
+having nothing to subsist upon in all that time but a scanty allowance
+of biscuit and oil. Seeing their insolence, de Weert called them into
+the cabin, giving them good words, and even desired their advice as to
+what was best to be done in this difficult conjuncture. Some were of
+opinion, that they should proceed to Rio de la Plata in the boat,
+abandoning their ship, and give themselves up to the Spaniards. Others
+were for going to St Helena in quest of provisions. The pilot, John
+Outgetz, was for going to Guinea or the Gold Coast of Africa, where he
+was known, having made five voyages there. None of these opinions
+pleased de Weert, who told them, that he could not come to any
+determination without the consent of Captain de Cordes.
+
+In the mean time, the boat being now ready, de Weert went ashore in her
+on the 1st January, 1600, to get her properly caulked. In the afternoon,
+having doubled the southerly point, two boats were seen, which belonged
+to Van Noort, who had put back to the Bay of Knights in search of the
+Faith. Next day, Van Noort returned back, promising to make search for
+the Fidelity. De Weert also sent his boat, with his ensign and one of
+his pilots, on the same search, and gave them a letter for Van Noort,
+requesting a supply of biscuit sufficient for two months. The boat came
+back on the 5th with the general's answer, saying, That he was not sure
+of having enough of biscuit for his own men, neither knew he how long he
+might be at sea, and therefore could not spare any. This answer
+afflicted de Weert; and having now no hopes of being again rejoined by
+de Cordes, he resolved to proceed for Penguin Island, to lay in a large
+store of these birds, and then to follow the fleet of Van Noort, if the
+wind proved fair. Before sailing, he wrote a letter for de Cordes, which
+he left buried at the foot of a tree, and nailed a board to the tree, on
+which was painted, _Look at the bottom of this tree_.
+
+On the 11th January, 1600, de Weert made sail for Penguin Islands, and
+next day came to anchor under the smaller of these islands, where he
+immediately landed with thirty-eight men in tolerable health, leaving
+the pilots and other seamen on board. Leaving three men to keep the
+boat, the rest fell to killing birds, of which there were a prodigious
+quantity in the island. In the mean time the wind grew nigh and the sea
+very stormy, by which the boat was thrown so high upon the rocks, and so
+filled with water, that the boat-keepers were unable to get her off, or
+to heave out the water, and so much tossed by the surges that they
+expected every minute to have her stove to pieces. In this extremity the
+seamen were almost in despair. Without the boat it was impossible for
+them to return on board. They had no carpenters, no tools, and no wood,
+with which to repair their boat, as there was no wood whatever on the
+island. They were all wet, as they had waded into the water as high as
+their shoulders to draw the boat from the rocks, and they were starving
+with cold. Fortunately, at low water, the boat being aground, they
+recovered an axe and some tools, with a few nails, which revived their
+hopes of being able to get back to the ship. But as it was impossible to
+get the boat drawn ashore before night for repairs, they were obliged to
+pass the night on shore in the open air, where they made a fire of some
+broken planks from the boat, and eat some birds half-roasted, without
+bread, and with so little water that they could not quench their thirst.
+
+As soon as day appeared on the 13th, every one went cheerfully to work,
+in repairing that side of the boat which was most injured, which was
+quite refitted before night. Next day the other side was repaired; and
+having loaded her with 450 penguins, they went aboard on the evening of
+the 14th, having been three days on shore. While they were catching
+penguins on the 12th, they found a savage woman, who had hid herself in
+one of the holes. At the time when Van Noort landed here, there was a
+band of savages on the island, by whom two of his men were slain; in
+revenge of which Van Noort had destroyed them all but this woman, who
+was then wounded, and who now shewed her wounds to the seamen. She was
+tall and well-made; her hair cut quite close to her head, and her face
+painted, having a kind of cloak on her body, made of the skins of beasts
+and birds, neatly sewed together, and reaching down to her knees,
+besides which she had a skin apron; so that the savages on the north
+side of these straits appear to be more modest in their apparel than
+those on the south side. By the dead body of one of these savages, who
+had been slain by Van Noort, it appeared that the men wore their hair
+very long; besides which his head was ornamented with fine feathers, and
+he had others round his body. They use bows and arrows, the arrows being
+very neatly pointed with hard flints. De Weert gave this woman a knife,
+who informed him by signs, that he would find a greater plenty of birds
+in the larger island. They left her where she was, though she requested,
+by signs, to be transported to the continent. They now went to the
+larger island, in order to get a larger supply of birds.
+
+The old penguins weigh from twelve to sixteen pounds, and the young ones
+from eight to twelve. They are black on the back, with white bellies,
+and some have a white ring round their necks, so that they are almost
+half white half black. Their skin is much like that of a seal, and as
+thick as the skin of a wild boar. The bill is as long as that of a
+raven, but not so crooked; the neck short and thick, and the body as
+long as that of a goose, but not so thick. Instead of wings, they have
+only two fins or pinions, covered with feathers, which hang down as they
+walk upright, and by means of which they swim with great strength. They
+have black feet, like those of a goose, and they walk upright, with
+their fins or pinions hanging down like the arms of a man, so that when
+seen at a distance they look like so many pigmies. They seldom come
+ashore except in the breeding season, and then they nestle together,
+three or four in one hole, which they dig in the downs as deep as those
+of rabbits, and the ground is so full of them, that one is liable almost
+at every step to sink into them up to the knees. They feed entirely on
+fish, yet their flesh has not that rank fishy taste which is so common
+in sea-fowl, but is extraordinarily well tasted. _Penguin_, the name of
+this bird, is not derived from the Latin _pinguedo_, fatness, as the
+Dutch author of this voyage would have it, and therefore spells the word
+_pinguin_. Neither is the conjecture of the French editor of this voyage
+better founded, who supposes they were so called by the English from a
+Welsh word signifying _white-head_; and from which it has been argued
+that these savages are descended from a colony of Britons, supposed to
+have settled in America, about the year 1170, under Madoc, prince of
+North Wales. The truth is, the name of penguin was given to these birds
+by the savages.
+
+The ship reached the greater Penguin Island on the 15th January, that
+island being a league from the small one; and here they found such
+abundance of these birds, that many ships might have been amply supplied
+by them instead of one, for they procured above 900 of them in less than
+two hours. Next day, while busy in salting the penguins, a heavy storm
+came on from the N.W. by which the ship was driven out of sight of the
+island, and to so great a distance that de Weert lost hopes of getting
+back to it again; on which he reduced the men to an allowance of four
+ounces of biscuit daily. They got back however on the 17th; but, when
+going to land, a fresh storm came on with such violence, that they
+resolved to weigh anchor and get out of the straits: but the sea was so
+rough that they durst not attempt this, lest the capstan should fly
+round. At last the anchor lost its hold; and to save the ship from being
+cast away, they had to cut the cable and make sail, being in great
+sorrow for the loss of their anchor, as they now had one only remaining.
+
+
+
+Sec. 4. _Voyage from the Straits to Holland_.
+
+This sad accident constrained de Weert to quit the straits, which he did
+on the 21st January, having a S.W. wind, chopping sometimes round to
+E.N.E. having now spent nine months in those seas, in a dangerous and
+dismal condition. In the afternoon of that day, having got into the main
+sea, they allowed their boat to go adrift, being rendered quite
+unserviceable by the late storms. The 24th in the morning, they found
+three small islands to windward, not marked in any maps, which they
+named the _Sebaldine Islands_. These are in lat. 50 deg. 40' S. sixty
+leagues from the continent,[91] and contained abundance of penguins; but
+they could not catch any, having no boat. On the 1st February, a seaman
+was condemned to be hanged, for having stolen a bottle of wine and a bag
+of rice from the hold; and, when just about to be turned off, he was
+pardoned at the intercession of the crew, on condition that they should
+not again beg the life of any one found guilty of stealing provisions.
+In the evening of the 3d the same person was found drunk, and
+consequently must have again stolen wine, and was convicted of having
+stolen both wine and victuals, for which he was now hanged, and his body
+thrown into the sea.
+
+[Footnote 91: In vol. VIII. p. 68, note 3, these Sebaldines have been
+already noticed as the north-westermost of the Falklands.--E.]
+
+They passed the line on the 15th March; and their wine being now reduced
+to one pipe, that was reserved for the use of the sick, and no more was
+allowed to the crew. The 28th they saw Cape Monte on the coast of
+Guinea, when the captain was much displeased with the pilots, for having
+steered a different course from what he had directed. The seamen also
+were discontented with the captain, who would not land, because he had
+no boat, and only one anchor: but, being satisfied that he had biscuit
+enough for four months, at a quarter of a pound daily to each man, and
+two ounces of rice, he made the ship's head be turned to seawards. In
+the night of the 1st April, they discovered some fire at a distance,
+thinking it were a ship; but when day broke, it was known to have been
+on the shore, towards which they had been insensibly driven by the
+current. By this time their whole stock of penguins was expended, and
+they must have been reduced to a very small allowance of biscuit and
+rice for their whole sustenance, but during five weeks that they
+steered along the coast of Africa, making very little progress in
+consequence of calms, they caught abundance of many kinds of fish, both
+large and small. Being uncertain how long they might remain on the
+coast, and fearing the want of provisions, de Weert ordered a small boat
+to be built by the pilot, who had been bred a ship-carpenter. This boat
+was finished in twelve days; but they had no need of her, for the wind
+became fair on the 24th April, and they made sail in the direction of
+the Acores.
+
+The 3d May was held as a day of thanksgiving and prayer; and on the 21st
+they passed the tropic of Cancer, catching every where such abundance of
+fish, that, besides supplying their immediate wants, they salted and
+dried a considerable store. On getting near the Acores, they found no
+more fish, and had to use those they had dried and salted; and by this
+food many distempers were produced among them, particularly the scurvy.
+The men became as it were parched within, and so thirsty that they could
+not be satisfied with drink; and their bodies were covered all over with
+red spots, like a leprosy. The 7th, the captain was informed that some
+of the men had stolen biscuit; but he durst not punish the guilty, as
+they were the only vigorous and healthy men in the ship, and nothing
+could be done without them.
+
+The ship got into the English Channel on the 6th July, when the captain
+landed at Dover to purchase an anchor and cable; but not being able to
+procure any, he sailed again that night. On the 13th, while off the
+mouth of the Maese, waiting the tide, and having a pilot on board, the
+wind came suddenly contrary, and forced him into the channel of Goeree,
+where a seaman died, being the sixty-ninth who died during the voyage.
+The thirty-six who remained alive gave thanks to God, who had preserved
+them through so many dangers, and had vouchsafed to bring them home.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V.
+
+VOYAGE OF GEORGE SPILBERGEN ROUND THE WORLD, IN 1614--1617.[92]
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Narrative of the Voyage, from Holland to the South Sea_.
+
+
+As the directors of the Dutch East-India Company were still anxious to
+make trial of the route to India by the Straits of Magellan, they
+appointed George Spilberg, or Spilbergen, to make this attempt in 1614,
+as admiral of six ships, the Great Sun, the Full Moon, the Huntsman, and
+a yacht called the Sea-mew, all belonging to Amsterdam, with the Eolus
+of Zealand, and the Morning-star belonging to Rotterdam. Spilbergen was
+a person of established reputation for knowledge and experience, and was
+allowed to chuse most of his officers. The ships were all equipped in
+the best possible manner, and were ready a little after Midsummer; but
+as the admiral was of opinion that they would arrive in the Straits of
+Magellan at an improper season, if they sailed so early, the directors
+thought proper to postpone the commencement of the voyage till the month
+of August.
+
+[Footnote 92: Harris, I. 44. Callender, II. 191.]
+
+The fleet sailed accordingly from the Texel on the 8th of August, 1614,
+with a strong gale at S.E. Without any remarkable accident, except
+several severe storms, they reached the latitude of Madeira on the 3d
+October. Proceeding thence by the Canaries, they lost sight of these
+islands on the 10th, and came in view of Brava and Fogo, two of the Cape
+de Verd islands, on the 23d. Having happily passed the _Abrolhos_,
+dangerous shoals running far out to sea, on the 9th December, they
+discovered the coast of Brazil on the 12th of that month. On the 19th
+they were off the bay of Rio de Janeiro; and on the morning of the 20th
+they anchored in the road of _Ilas Grandes_, between two large fine
+islands covered with trees, in thirteen fathoms water. Next day they
+anchored at another island, about half a league distant, where they
+caught good store of fish, besides many crocodiles or alligators, each
+about the length of a man. They anchored behind another island on the
+23d, where they found two small huts, and a heap of human bones on a
+rock. Here they set up tents on shore for their sick, which were all
+landed that night, under the protection of three distinct guards of
+soldiers, lest they might be attacked by the Portuguese, who were at no
+great distance.
+
+The 28th, the boats were sent for wood and fresh water to a river about
+two leagues from where the ships lay, and about noon next day brought
+off as much as they could carry. They went back for a farther supply,
+and were obliged to remain on shore all night, as their boats got
+aground with the ebb-tide. On getting to the ships on the 29th, they
+reported, that they had heard a confused sound of voices, as of many
+people, in the woods. The 30th, three boats were sent again to the
+watering-place, with nine or ten soldiers to protect the seamen when on
+shore. Shortly after, being out of sight of the fleet, several
+cannon-shot were heard from the Huntsman, which had been stationed to
+command the watering-place, on which the admiral sent three armed boats
+to see what was the matter. On coming to the Huntsman, they were told
+that five canoes, full of well-armed Portuguese and Mestees, had
+attacked the three boats, and slain all their men. The Dutch armed boats
+pursued the canoes, of which they soon came in sight; but on following
+them round a point, saw two stout frigates or armed barks riding at
+anchor, to which the canoes retired for protection, and the boats had to
+return to the admiral with the dismal news of the fate of their
+companions.
+
+A conspiracy was discovered on the 1st January, 1615, of certain persons
+who proposed to have run away with one of the ships, and for which two
+men were executed, several others being put in irons, and distributed
+among the other ships of the fleet. Before leaving this place, orders
+were given, if any ship lost company of the rest, that her commander was
+to set up a conspicuous mark in the haven of de Cordes, or some other
+usual landing place in the straits; and, after waiting a certain fixed
+time, was to proceed for the isle of Mocha on the coast of Chili, as the
+place of rendezvous. Having no fit provisions for the sick, they
+resolved also to remove from the Islas Grandes to the isle of St
+Vincent. Here they were delayed by the Portuguese, who appear to have
+captured some of their men; for, having taken a bark with eighteen
+Portuguese on the 26th January, the Portuguese of St Vincent refused to
+give a smaller number of Hollanders in exchange for these, though also
+offered many fair manuscripts, pictures, plate, and other things
+belonging to the jesuits, which had been taken in the prize.
+
+They departed from St Vincent in the beginning of February, having first
+burnt their prize and some buildings on shore, and furnished themselves
+amply with oranges and pomecitrons. In lat. 52 deg. 6' S. they were
+distressed by a severe storm on the 7th March, which continued several
+days, and separated the ships. On the 21st a mutiny broke out, for which
+several of the most notoriously guilty were capitally punished. They
+entered the straits on the 28th, but were forced out again, by adverse
+winds and currents. They entered again on the 2d of April, and saw a man
+of gigantic stature climbing a high hill on the southern shore of the
+straits, called _Terra del Fuego_, or the land of fire. They went ashore
+on the 7th, when they saw two ostriches, and found a large river of
+fresh water, beside which grew many shrubs producing sweet
+black-berries. Being in lat. 54 deg. S. the mountains were all covered with
+snow, yet they found pleasant woods, in which were many parrots. To one
+inlet or bay they gave the name of _Pepper haven_, because the bark of a
+tree found there had a biting taste like pepper.
+
+On the 16th of April they had some friendly intercourse with a party of
+savages, to whom they gave various trifling articles in exchange for
+pearls. But on the 1st May, some of the people were surprised by the
+natives while on shore, and two of them slain. On the 6th of May they
+got into the South Sea, not without terror, having no anchorage that
+day, and being in much danger from many shoals and islands at the mouth
+of the straits, between the northern and sourthern shore.
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_Transactions in the South Sea, along the Western Coast of America_.
+
+They were welcomed into the great South Sea by a terrible storm, and
+were fearful of being cast away on certain islands a little without the
+straits, which, from their likeness to the islands of Scilly, they named
+the _Sorlings_. On the 21st they had sight of the coast of Chili and the
+isle of Mocha. This island is low and broad on the north, and is full of
+rocks on the south. The 26th endeavours were made to enter into traffic
+with the natives of this island. The chief and his son dined on board
+the admiral, seemingly rejoiced to see such large and well-armed ships
+sent against the Spaniards, and all the native Chilese were delighted to
+see the soldiers mustered and exercised. The Dutch here procured great
+plenty of sheep, in exchange for hatchets and ornaments of coral and
+such like toys, getting two sheep for one hatchet. But the natives
+brought every thing to the boats, and would not suffer any of the Dutch
+to go near their houses, being very jealous of their wives, even more so
+than Spaniards. These sheep resembled camels, having long legs and
+necks, hare lips, hunches on their backs, and are used as beasts of
+draught and burden.
+
+They left Mocha on the 27th of May, and next day came to the coast not
+far from the island of St Mary, where the land was much broken and very
+rocky. The 29th they cast anchor at the island of St Mary, whence a
+Spaniard came on board, having a pledge left for him ashore. This man
+invited the admiral and others to dine on shore; but one of the boats
+observed a body of soldiers marching to the place at which they were to
+have dined; on which appearance of treachery, the Spanish messenger was
+made prisoner. The Dutch landed next day in force, on which the
+Spaniards set their church on fire and fled; having four of their men
+slain, while two of the Dutch were wounded. They here found much
+poultry, and took 500 sheep, with other spoil. Learning at this place of
+three Spanish ships fitted out in April expressly against them, the
+admiral of which carried forty brass guns, and the whole manned by 1000
+Spaniards, Spilbergen resolved to go in search of them at Conception and
+Valparaiso, and afterwards on the coast of Arica. A farther squadron, of
+similar force, was also said to be in preparation at _Calao de Lima_. In
+consequence of this intelligence, the Dutch gunners were ordered to have
+every thing in readiness for battle, rules of military discipline were
+established, and each ship and every person received distinct orders for
+conducting the expected battle, in which it was resolved to conquer or
+die.
+
+Sailing from the island of St Mary on the 1st June, 1615, they passed
+not far from the town of _Aurora_,[93] where the Spaniards kept a
+garrison of 500 men, which were continually disquieted by the
+unconquered natives of Chili. On the 3d they came to the island of
+_Quinquirina_, within which is the town of Conception, inhabited by many
+Indians and about 200 Spaniards. The 12th they entered the safe and
+commodious road of Valparaiso, in which was a Spanish ship, but which
+was set on fire by its own mariners, who escaped on shore. The 13th at
+noon, they were in lat. 32 deg. 15' S.[94] and in the afternoon came into
+the fair and secure harbour of Quintero. Here they took in wood and
+water, and caught abundance of fish. But they found the inhabitants
+every where aware of them, and prepared to receive them, so that nothing
+of any importance could be effected. They came next to _Arica_ in lat.
+12 deg. 40' S.[95] to which place the silver is brought from the mines of
+Potosi, whence it is shipped for Panama. Finding no ships there, they
+proceeded along the coast, and took a small ship on the 16th, in which
+was some treasure, but it was mostly embezzled by the sailors.
+
+[Footnote 93: Arauco, a fortress on the northern frontier of the
+independent country of Araucania, but somewhat inland, not far to the
+N.E. of the island of St Mary.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 94: Quintero is in lat. 32 deg. 44' S.]
+
+[Footnote 95: This is a great error, as Arica is in lat 18 deg. 28' S.]
+
+They soon after had sight of eight ships, which the master of the prize
+said were the royal fleet sent out in search of the Hollanders, contrary
+to the opinion of the council of Peru; but Dou Rodrigo de Mendoza, the
+Spanish admiral, a kinsman to the viceroy, insisted on putting to sea,
+alleging that two even of his ships could take all England, and much
+more those _hens_ of Holland, who must be spent and wasted by so long a
+voyage, and would assuredly yield at first sight. On this, the viceroy
+gave him leave to depart, with orders to bring all the Hollanders in
+chains. Mendoza then swore that he would never return till the
+Hollanders were all taken or slain, and set sail from Calao, the haven
+of Lima, on the 11th July. The flag ship was the Jesu Maria, of
+twenty-four brass guns and 460 men, which was said to have cost the king
+158,000 ducats. The vice-admiral was the Santa Anna, of 300 men,
+commanded by Captain Alvarez de Piger, who had before taken an English
+ship in the South Sea, and this ship cost 150,000 ducats, being the
+handsomest that had ever been seen in Peru. The other ships were the
+Carmelite and St Jago of eight brass cannon and 200 men each; the Rosary
+of four guns and 150 men; the St Francis having seventy musketeers, and
+twenty sailors, but no ordnance; the St Andrew of eighty musketeers,
+twenty-five sailors, and no cannon; and an eighth, the name and strength
+of which is not mentioned.
+
+The adverse fleets drew near on the evening of the 17th July, when the
+Spanish vice-admiral sent a message to his admiral, advising to postpone
+battle till next morning. Mendoza was, however, too impatient to follow
+this advice, and set upon the Great Sun, in which was Admiral
+Spilbergen, about ten that night, when they exchanged broadsides. The St
+Francis being next to the Jesu Maria, attacked the Dutch admiral; but
+being beaten off, fell upon the yacht, and by her was sent to the
+bottom. At this instant, the yacht was attacked by the Spanish admiral,
+and had soon shared the fate of her former antagonist, but was succoured
+by two boats full of men, one from the Dutch admiral, and the other from
+the vice-admiral; on this occasion, the Dutch admiral's boat was
+unfortunately mistaken by the Huntsman, and sent to the bottom by a
+cannon-shot, and all her men drowned except one.
+
+Next morning, five of the Spanish ships sent word to their admiral that
+they meant to do their best to escape: But the Dutch admiral and
+vice-admiral set upon the Spanish admiral and vice-admiral, and an
+obstinate engagement ensued, in which the Eolus, another of the Dutch
+ships, also partook. The two Spanish ships were lashed together, for
+mutual support. At length, all the men forsook the vice-admiral, going
+on board the admiral's ship, in which they afterwards confessed they
+found only fifty men alive. Being reduced to great distress, the Spanish
+seamen several times hung out a white flag, in token of surrender, which
+was as often hauled down by the officers and other gentlemen, who chose
+rather to die than yield.
+
+After some time, being sore pressed by the Hollanders, the men belonging
+to the Spanish vice-admiral returned to their own ship, and renewed the
+fight; on which occasion the Dutch vice-admiral was in imminent danger
+of being taken, as the Spaniards boarded her, but were all repelled or
+slain. Being no longer able to continue the fight, the Spanish admiral
+fled under cover of the night, and escaped the pursuit of Spilbergen;
+but her leaks were so many and great that she went to the bottom, as did
+likewise another of the Spanish ships called the Santa Maria.[96] The
+Dutch vice-admiral and the Eolus bestirred themselves so briskly, that
+the Spanish vice-admiral hung out a white flag, on which the Dutch
+vice-admiral sent two boats to bring the Spanish commander on board, but
+he refused going that night, unless the Dutch vice-admiral came to fetch
+him, or sent a captain to remain in pledge for him. At this time ten or
+twelve of the men belonging to the Eolus remained on board, contrary to
+orders, wishing to have a first hand in the plunder. These men assisted
+the Spaniards in their efforts to prevent the ship from sinking: But all
+their labour being in vain, they shewed many lights, and cried out aloud
+for help, which was too late of being sent, and they went to the bottom.
+Next morning the Dutch sent out four boats, which found thirty Spaniards
+floating on pieces of the wreck, and crying out for mercy; which was
+shewn by the Dutch to some of the chiefs, but the rest were left to the
+mercy of the sea, several of them being even knocked on the head by the
+Dutch, contrary to orders from their officers. Before this ship went
+down her commander expired of his wounds. In this engagement forty
+Dutchmen were wounded and sixteen slain, on board the admiral,
+vice-admiral, and Eolus; and in the rest eighteen were wounded and four
+slain.
+
+[Footnote 96: There is no such name in the list of the Spanish fleet, so
+that we may suppose this to have been the one formerly mentioned without
+a name.--E.]
+
+The Dutch now made sail for Calao de Lima, but were becalmed. The 20th
+they passed by the island [St Lorenzo], and saw fourteen ships in the
+haven, but could not get near for shoals. They went, therefore, to the
+road of Calao in search of the Spanish admiral, but learned afterwards
+at Payta that his ship had sunk. The Spaniards fired upon them from the
+shore, and a ball of thirty-six pounds weight had nearly sunk the
+Huntsman. They saw also on shore a considerable army, commanded by the
+viceroy in person, consisting of eight troops of horse and 4000 foot.
+Going beyond reach of shot from the shore, the Dutch cast anchor off the
+mouth of the haven, where they remained till the 25th of July, expecting
+to capture some Spanish ships, but all that appeared made their escape
+by superior sailing, except one bark laden with salt and eighty jars of
+molasses.
+
+In regard that they were now on an enemy's coast, where they had no
+opportunity of repairing their losses, orders were issued by Spilbergen
+to act with great caution, in case of falling in with the fleet of
+Panama, and especially to take care not to separate from each other,
+which had much endangered them in the late fight. It was also ordered,
+if any Spanish ship should yield, that the Dutch captains and chief
+officers should on no account leave their own ships, but should order
+the enemy to come aboard them in their own boats. They sailed from Calao
+on the 27th of July, and came to the road of _Huarmey_ in lat. 10 deg. S. on
+the 28th. This is a pleasant place, with a large port, near which is a
+lake. The Dutch landed here, but the inhabitants fled, leaving little
+plunder, except poultry, hogs, oranges, and meal, which they brought on
+board. They dismissed some of their Spanish prisoners on the 3d August,
+on which day they passed between the main and the island of _Lobos_, so
+called from being frequented by seals, or sea wolves.[97] The 8th they
+cast anchor near Payta, in about the latitude of 5 deg. S. The 9th they
+landed 300 men, but re-embarked after some skirmishing, as they found
+the city too strongly defended. On this occasion they took a Peruvian
+bark, strangely rigged, having six stout natives on board, who had been
+out fishing for two months, and had a cargo of excellent dried fish,
+which was distributed through the fleet.
+
+[Footnote 97: There are three islands or groups of that name off the
+coast of Peru. The southern Lobos is in lat. 7 deg. S. near fifty miles from
+the nearest land; the middle, or inner Lobos, in lat. 6 deg. 22' S. is only
+about nine miles from the coast of Peru; and the northern Lobos is in
+lat. 5 deg. 8' S. almost close to the shore. It is probably the middle or
+inner Lobos that is meant in the text.--E.]
+
+The 10th of August three of the Dutch ships battered the town of Payta,
+and afterwards sent a party of armed men on shore, who found the
+inhabitants had fled to the mountains with all their valuables. The
+Dutch sent five of the Peruvian captives on shore to endeavour to
+procure fruit, and to learn with more certainty what had become of the
+Spanish admiral. On their return they brought word that the Spanish
+admiral had gone to the bottom, six only of her crew escaping. They
+brought letters also from the lady of Don Gasper Calderon, the
+commandant of Payta, who had fled to the town of St Michael, thirty
+miles from Payta; who, in commiseration of the captives, sent many
+citrons and other provisions to the Dutch ships. Towards the sea the
+town of Payta is strongly fortified, and almost impregnable. It is a
+place of some importance, having two churches, a monastery, and many
+good buildings; and has an excellent harbour, to which many ships resort
+from Panama, whence their cargoes are transmitted by land to Lima, to
+avoid the dangers of the wind and the seas at that place. While at the
+island of Lobos, the Dutch took two birds of enormous size, not unlike
+an eagle in beak, wings, and talons; their necks being covered with down
+resembling wool, and their heads having combs like those of a cock. They
+were two ells in height, and their wings, when displayed, measured three
+ells in breadth.[98]
+
+[Footnote 98: Probably the Condour, or Vultur Gryphus of naturalists,
+which is of vast size, sometimes measuring sixteen feet between the tips
+of the wings when extended.
+
+At this place we have omitted a vague rambling account of the kingdoms
+of Peru and Chili, as in 1616, which could have conveyed no useful
+information, farther than that Don Juan de Mendoza, Marquis des Montes
+Claros, was then viceroy of Peru.--E.]
+
+The Dutch set sail from Payta on the 21st of August, and anchored on the
+23d in the road off the mouth of the Rio Tumbez, in lat. 3 deg. 20' S. They
+here agreed to return to the isle of Coques, in lat. 5 deg. S.[99] that they
+might endeavour to procure refreshments. But they were so distressed by
+storms of wind, with rain and excessive thunder, that they in vain
+endeavoured to get to that island till the 13th September, and in the mean
+time became very sickly. Proceeding therefore towards the north they came
+in sight of New Spain on the 20th September, in lat. 13 deg. 30' N. when the
+weather became again very tempestuous. After much bad weather they came in
+sight of a pleasant land on the 1st October, but were unable to land.
+Beating off and on till the 11th of that month, they then entered the
+harbour of Accapulco, within shot of the castle, and hung out a flag of
+truce. Two Spaniards came on board, with whom they agreed to exchange
+their prisoners for sheep, fruits, and other provisions, which was
+accordingly performed. On the 15th Melchior Hernando, nephew to the
+viceroy of New Spain, came on board, to take a view of the fleet which
+had vanquished that of his king, and was kindly entertained by the
+Dutch admiral. The castle of Accapulco was found to be well fortified,
+and had seventy pieces of brass cannon mounted on its ramparts; and the
+Dutch were here informed that their intended arrival had been known eight
+months before.
+
+[Footnote 99: This is probably the northern Lobos, in lat 5 deg. 8' S.
+formerly mentioned in a note.--E.]
+
+They set sail from Accapulco on the 18th of October, and soon afterwards
+took a bark bound for the pearl fishery, which they manned and took into
+their service as a tender. On the 1st November they anchored before the
+port of _Selagua_, in lat. 19 deg. 8' N. At this place they were informed of
+a river abounding in a variety of excellent fish, and having extensive
+meadows on its banks well stocked with cattle, together with citrons and
+other fruits in great plenty, all of which they much wanted; but the
+company they sent to endeavour to procure these conveniences returned
+empty handed, after a smart engagement with the Spaniards. They sailed
+thence on the 11th November for the port of Nativity, in lat. 20 deg. 40' N.
+where they furnished themselves with necessaries, and from whence they
+set sail on the 20th.
+
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_Voyage Home from America, by the East Indies and Cape of Good Hope_.
+
+The 26th November, 1615, being in lat. 20 deg. 26' N. they determined on
+shaping their course for the Ladrones across the great Pacific Ocean. On
+the 3d December, to their great astonishment, they saw two islands at a
+great distance, and next day a vast rock in lat. 19 deg. N. fifty leagues
+from the continent of America.[100] The 5th they saw another new island,
+having five hills, that at first appeared like so many distinct islands.
+The new year 1616 was ushered in with distempers that proved fatal to
+many of the sailors. On the 3d of January they came in sight of the
+Ladrones, where they landed and procured refreshments. Setting sail from
+thence on the 26th January, they arrived at the Philippine islands on
+the 9th February, but the Indians refused to trade with them, because
+enemies of the Spaniards, though some among them, for that very reason,
+would willingly have transferred all the trade and riches of the country
+to them. In _Capul_, where they arrived on the 11th, the people gave
+them fat hogs and poultry in exchange for mere trifles. Having thus
+procured abundant refreshments, they set sail on the 16th, passing
+through the straits towards the bay of Manilla.
+
+[Footnote 100: The three Marias are nearly in the indicated latitude,
+but are only about thirty leagues from the western coast of N.
+America.--E.]
+
+They anchored in these straits on the 19th, where they saw a curious
+fabric erected on the top of trees, looking at a distance like a palace,
+but they could not imagine what it was. The 24th they passed the high
+and flaming hill of _Albaca_, and came in sight of the other end of the
+straits [of St Bernardino] on the 28th, when they anchored before the
+island, of _Mirabelles_, remarkable for two rocks which tower to a vast
+height in the air. Behind this island is the city of Manilla, and here
+the pilots wait for the ships from China, to pilot them safe to the
+city, as the passage is very dangerous. On the 5th of March they took
+several barks, which were going to collect the tribute paid by the
+adjacent places to the city of Manilla. They had now intelligence of a
+fleet of twelve ships and four gallies, manned by 2000 Spaniards besides
+Indians, Chinese, and Japanese, sent from Manilla to drive the Dutch
+from the Moluccas, and to reduce these islands under the dominion of
+Spain. On this news they discharged all their prisoners, and resolved to
+go in pursuit of the Manilla fleet.
+
+The 11th March they got into a labyrinth of islands, whence they knew
+not how to get out, but their Spanish pilot carried them safe through
+next day. The 14th they anchored all night before the island of _Paney_,
+by reason of the shoals; and on the 18th they sailed close past the
+island of Mindanao. The 19th they came again close to the shore, and
+brought provisions from the islanders at a cheap rate. They reached Cape
+_Cudera_ on the 20th, where the Spaniards usually water on their voyages
+to the Moluccas. Till the 23d, having a perfect calm, they made no
+progress except with the tide; and when between _Mindanao_ and _Tagano_
+they were stopt by an adverse current. The people here professed great
+enmity against the Spaniards, and offered to assist the Dutch with fifty
+of their vessels against that nation. The 27th they passed the island of
+_Sanguin_, and came on the 29th to Ternate, in which island the Dutch
+possessed the town of _Macia_, where they were made most welcome by
+their countrymen. They observed that the straits of _Booton_ was full of
+shoals, without which the water was deep. On the east there is good
+fresh water, and two leagues to the west lies a very rocky shoal. On the
+8th of April, Cornelius de Vicaneze went for Banda, where the soldiers
+were landed, after being long on board ship.
+
+Being detained in the Moluccas and at Bantam in the service of the Dutch
+East India Company till the 14th December, 1616, admiral Spilbergen then
+sailed from Bantam for Holland, in the Amsterdam of 1400 tons, having
+also under his command the Zealand of 1200 tons, leaving the ships with
+which he had hitherto sailed in India. On the 1st January, 1617, the
+Zealand parted company, and on the 24th of that month the Amsterdam
+anchored at the island of Mauritius. They doubled the Cape of Good Hope
+on the 6th March, and arrived at St Helena on 30th of that month, where
+they found the Zealand. Leaving that island on the 6th April, they
+passed the line on the 24th of that month, and arrived safe in Holland
+on the 1st July, 1617, having been absent two years, ten months, and
+twenty-four days; nearly nine months of which time were spent in India,
+without prosecuting the direct purpose of their circumnavigation.
+
+The directors of the Dutch East India company bestowed the highest
+commendations on Spilbergen for his prudence and good conduct in this
+voyage, which contributed both to the advantage of the company, his own
+reputation, and the glory of his country. The Dutch company may be said
+to have dated their grandeur from the day of his return, both in respect
+to reputation, power, and riches; the former resulting from his
+successful circumnavigation of the globe, and the others from their
+conquests in the Moluccas, in which he not only assisted, but likewise
+brought home the first intelligence. On his return to Holland,
+Spilbergen confirmed the report of Magellan respecting a gigantic people
+inhabiting the straits, named _Patagons_. He said that he had gone
+several times on shore, and had examined several graves of the natives,
+and saw several savages at different times in their canoes, all of whom
+were of the ordinary size; or rather under. But one day he observed a
+man on shore, who first climbed one hill and then another, to look at
+the ships, and at last came to the sea-side for that purpose, and this
+man was allowed by all who saw him to be even taller than those spoken
+of by Magellan. This is likewise confirmed by the accounts given to Van
+Noort and De Weert, by a boy they took from the savages; who said there
+were only two tribes of these giants, all the other savages being of the
+ordinary size.[101]
+
+[Footnote 101: Without pretending to give any opinion on this subject,
+it may be remarked, that the account from the savage boy is worthy of
+little credit, as a kind of nursery tale, and given by one who certainly
+could hardly have sufficient language to express himself. The solitary
+giant seen looking at the ships from a distance, may have been of the
+ordinary size, magnified to the eye in looking through a hazy
+atmosphere.--E.]
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI.
+
+VOYAGE ROUND THE WORLD, IN 1615-1617, BY WILLIAM CORNELISON SCHOUTEN AND
+JACQUES LE MAIRE, GOING ROUND CAPE HORN.[102]
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+
+The States General of the United Provinces having granted an exclusive
+privilege to the Dutch East India Company, prohibiting all their
+subjects, except that company, from trading to the eastwards beyond the
+Cape of Good Hope, or westwards through the Straits of Magellan, in any
+of the countries within these limits, whether known or unknown, and
+under very heavy penalties; this prohibition gave great dissatisfaction
+to many rich merchants, who were desirous of fitting out ships and
+making discoveries at their own cost, and thought it hard that their
+government should thus, contrary to the laws of Nature, shut up those
+passages which Providence had left free. Among the number of these
+discontented merchants was one Isaac Le Maire, a rich merchant of
+Amsterdam, then residing at Egmont, who was well acquainted with
+business, and had an earnest desire to employ a portion of the wealth he
+had acquired in trade in acquiring fame as a discoverer. With this view
+he applied to William Cornelison Schouten of Horn, a man in easy
+circumstances, deservedly famous for his great skill in maritime
+affairs, and his extensive knowledge of trade in the Indies, having been
+thrice there in the different characters of supercargo, pilot, and
+master.
+
+[Footnote 102: Harris, I.51. Callender, II. 217.
+
+It is proper to remark, that in this and several of the subsequent
+circumnavigations, considerable freedom has been taken in abbreviating
+numerous trivial circumstances already noticed by former voyagers: But
+whereever the navigators treat on new topics of discovery, or other
+subjects of any importance, the narratives are given at full length. Had
+not this liberty of lopping redundancies been taken, this division of
+our collection must have extended to a very inconvenient length, without
+any corresponding advantage.--E.]
+
+The main question proposed to him by Le Maire was, Whether he thought it
+possible to find a passage into the South Sea, otherwise than by the
+Straits of Magellan; and if so, whether it were not likely that the
+countries to the south of that passage might afford as rich commodities
+as either the East or the West Indies? Schouten was of opinion that such
+a passage might be found, and gave several reasons as to the probable
+riches of these countries.[103] After many conferences, they came to the
+determination of attempting this discovery, under a persuasion that the
+States did not intend, by their exclusive charter to the East India
+Company, to preclude their subjects from discovering countries in the
+south by a new route, different from either of those described in the
+charter.
+
+[Footnote 103: The idea of rich countries is here surely wrong stated,
+as none such could possibly be conceived to the south of the Straits of
+Magellan. The expected rich countries must have been to the westwards of
+these straits, and in the tropical regions far to the north, in the hope
+of not trenching upon the exclusive trade to the East Indies.--E.]
+
+In consequence of this determination, it was agreed that Le Maire
+should advance half of the necessary funds for the expence of the
+proposed voyage, while Schouten and his friends were to advance the
+other moiety. Accordingly Le Maire advanced his part of the funds; and
+Schouten, with the assistance of Peter Clementson, burgomaster of Horn,
+Jan Janson Molenwert, one of the schepens or aldermen of that city, Jan
+Clementson Keis, a senator of that city, and Cornelius Segetson, a
+merchant, produced the rest. These matters being adjusted, in spring
+1615, the company proposed to equip two vessels, a larger and a less, to
+sail from Horn at the proper season. That all parties might be
+satisfied, it was agreed that William Cornelison Schouten, in
+consideration of his age and experience, should command the larger ship,
+with the entire direction of the navigation during the voyage; and that
+Jaques le Maire, the eldest son of Isaac, should be supercargo. Every
+thing was got ready in two months for the prosecution of the enterprise,
+and a sufficient number of men engaged as mariners: but, as secrecy was
+indispensable, they were articled to go wherever the masters and
+supercargoes should require; and, in consideration of such unusual
+conditions, their wages were considerably advanced beyond the ordinary
+terms.
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Journal of the Voyage from the Texel to Cape Horn_.
+
+The larger of the two vessels prepared for this voyage was the Unity, of
+360 tons, carrying nineteen cannon and twelve swivels; having on board
+two pinnaces, one for sailing and another for rowing, a launch for
+landing men, and a small boat, with all other necessaries for so long a
+voyage. Of this vessel William Cornelison Schouten was master and pilot,
+and Jaques le Maire supercargo. The lesser vessel was named the Horn, of
+110 tons, carrying eight cannons and four swivels, of which Jan
+Cornelison Schouten was master, and Aris Clawson supercargo. The crew of
+the Unity consisted of sixty-five men, and that of the Horn of
+twenty-two only. The Unity sailed on the 25th of May for the Texel,
+where the Horn also arrived on the 3d June.
+
+The proper season being now arrived, in their judgment, they sailed from
+the Texel on the 14th of June, and anchored in the Downs on the 17th,
+when William Schouten went ashore at Dover to hire an experienced
+English gunner. This being effected, they again set sail the same
+evening; and meeting a severe storm in the night between the 21st and
+22d, they took shelter under the Isle of Wight. Sailing thence on the
+25th, they arrived at Plymouth on the 27th, where they hired a carpenter
+named Muydenblick. Sailing finally from Plymouth on the 28th June, with
+the wind at N.E. and fair weather, they proceeded on their voyage.
+
+Distinct rules were now established in regard to the allowance of
+provisions at sea, so that the men might have no reason to complain, and
+the officers might be satisfied of having enough for the voyage. The
+rate fixed upon was, a cann of beer for each man daily; four pounds of
+biscuit, with half a pound of butter and half a pound of suet weekly;
+and five large Dutch cheeses for each man, to serve during the whole
+voyage. All this was besides the ordinary allowance of salt meat and
+stock-fish. Due orders were likewise issued for regulating the conduct
+of the men and officers. Particularly on all occasions of landing men in
+a warlike posture, one of the masters was always to command: and in such
+ports as they might touch at for trade, the supercargo was to go on
+shore, and to have the exclusive management of all commercial dealings.
+It was also enjoined, that every officer should be exceedingly strict in
+the execution of his duty, but without subjecting the men to any
+unnecessary hardships, or interfering with each other in their several
+departments. The officers were also warned against holding any
+conversation with the men, in regard to the objects of the voyage, all
+conjectures respecting which were declared fruitless, the secret being
+solely known to the first captain and supercargo. It was also declared,
+that every embezzlement of stores, merchandises, or provisions, should
+be severely punished; and, in case of being reduced upon short
+allowance, any such offence was to be punished with death. The two
+supercargoes were appointed to keep distinct journals of all
+proceedings, for the information of the company of adventurers, that it
+might appear how far every man had done his duty, and in what manner the
+purposes of the voyage had been answered.
+
+On the 11th July they had sight of Madeira, and on the 13th they passed
+through between Teneriff and Grand Canary, with a stiff breeze at N.N.E.
+and a swift current. The 15th they passed the tropic of Cancer; and the
+20th in the morning fell in with the north side of Cape de Verd.
+Procuring here a supply of water, by leave of the Moorish alcaide or
+governor, for which they had to pay _eight states_ of iron, they left
+the cape on the 1st August, and came in sight of the high land of Sierra
+Leona on the 21st of that month, as also of the island of _Madre bomba_,
+which lies off the south point of Sierra Leona, and north from the
+shallows of the island of St Ann. This land of Sierra Leona is the
+highest of all that lie between Cape Verd and the coast of Guinea, and
+is therefore easily known.
+
+On the 30th of August, they cast anchor in eight fathoms water on a fine
+sandy bottom, near the shore, and opposite a village or town of the
+negroes, in the road of Sierra Leona. This village consisted only of
+eight or nine poor thatched huts. The Moorish inhabitants were willing
+to come on board to trade, only demanding a pledge to be left on shore
+for their security, because a French ship had recently carried off two
+of the natives perfidiously. Aris Clawson, the junior merchant or
+supercargo, went accordingly on shore, where he drove a small trade for
+lemons and bananas, in exchange for glass beads. In the mean time some
+of the natives came off to the ships, bringing with them an interpreter
+who spoke many languages. They here very conveniently furnished
+themselves with fresh water, which poured down in great abundance from a
+very high hill, so that they had only to place their casks under the
+waterfall. There were here whole woods of lemon-trees, and lemons were
+so cheap that they might have had a thousand for a few beads, and ten
+thousand for a few common knives; so that they easily procured as many
+as they wished, and each man had 150 for sea store. The 3d September
+they found a vast shoal of fish, resembling a shoemaker's knife.
+
+They left Sierra Leona on the 4th September; and on the 5th October,
+being in lat 4 deg. 27' S. they were astonished by receiving a violent
+stroke on the bottom of one of the ships, though no rock appeared to be
+in the way. While forming conjectures on the occasion of this shock, the
+sea all about the ship began to change colour, appearing as if some
+great fountain of blood had opened into it. This sudden alteration of
+the water seemed not less wonderful than the striking of the ship; but
+the cause of both was not discovered till after their arrival in Port
+Desire, when the ship was laid on shore to clean her bottom, when they
+found a large horn, of a substance resembling ivory, sticking fast in
+the bottom. It was entirely firm and solid, without any internal cavity,
+and had pierced through three very stout planks, grazing one of the ribs
+of the ship, and stuck at least a foot deep in the wood, leaving about
+as much on the outside, up to the place where it broke off.[104]
+
+[Footnote 104: This must have been a Narvai, or Narwhal, the Monodon
+Monoceros, Licorne, or Unicornu Marinum, of naturalists, called likewise
+the Unicorn Fish, or Sea Unicorn.--E.]
+
+On the 25th of October, when no person knew whereabouts they were except
+Schouten, the company was informed that the design of the voyage was to
+endeavour to discover a new southern passage into the South Sea; and the
+people appeared well pleased, expecting to discover some new golden
+country to make amends for all their trouble and danger. The 26th they
+were in lat. 6 deg. 25' S. and continued their course mostly to the south
+all the rest of that month, till they were in lat 10 deg. 30' S. The 1st
+September they had the sun at noon to the north; and in the afternoon
+of the 3d they had sight of the isle of Ascension, in 20 deg. S. otherwise
+called the island of Martin Vaz, where the compass was observed to vary
+12 deg. to the east of north. The 21st, in lat. 38 deg. S. the compass varied
+17 deg. in the same eastern direction. The 6th December, they got sight of
+the mainland of South America, appearing rather flat, and of a white
+colour, and quickly after fell in with the north head-land of Port
+Desire, anchoring that night in ten fathoms water with the ebb-tide,
+within a league and a half of the shore. Next day, resuming their course
+southwards, they came into Port Desire at noon, in lat. 47 deg. 40' S. They
+had very deep water at the entrance, where they did not observe any of
+the cliffs which were described by Van Noort, as left by him to the
+northward on sailing into this haven, all the cliffs they saw being on
+the south side of the entrance, which therefore might be those mentioned
+by Van Noort, and misplaced in his narrative by mistake.
+
+In consequence of this error, they overpassed Port Desire to the south,
+so as to miss the right channel, and came into a crooked channel, where
+they had four and a half fathoms water at full sea, and only fourteen
+feet at low water. By this means the Unity got fast aground by the
+stern, and had infallibly been lost, if a brisk gale had blown from the
+N.E. But as the wind blew west from the land, she got off again without
+damage. Here they found vast quantities of eggs upon the cliffs; and the
+bay afforded them great abundance of muscles, and smelts sixteen inches
+long, for which reason they called it _Smelt Bay_. From this place they
+sent a pinnace to the Penguin Islands, which brought back 150 of these
+birds, and two sea lions.
+
+Leaving Smelt Bay on the 8th December, they made sail for Port Desire, a
+boat going before to sound the depth of the channel, which was twelve
+and thirteen fathoms, so that they sailed in boldly, having a fair wind
+at N.E. After going in little more than a league, the wind began to veer
+about, and they cast anchor in twenty fathoms; but the ground,
+consisting entirely of slippery stones, and the wind now blowing strong
+at N.W. they drifted to the south shore, where both ships had nearly
+been wrecked. The Unity lay with her side to the cliffs, yet still kept
+afloat, and gradually slid down towards the deep water as the tide fell.
+But the Horn stuck fast aground, so that at last her keel was above a
+fathom out of the water, and a man might have walked under it at low
+water. For some time, the N.W. wind blowing hard on one side, kept her
+from falling over; but, that dying away, she at length fell over on her
+bends, when she was given over for lost; but next flood, coming on with
+calm weather, righted her again. Having escaped this imminent danger,
+both ships went farther up the river on the 9th, and came to King's
+Island, which they found full of black sea-mews, and almost entirely
+covered with their eggs; so that a man without moving from one spot
+might reach fifty or sixty nests with his hands, having three or four
+eggs in each. They here accordingly were amply provided with eggs, and
+laid in several thousands of them for sea store.
+
+The 11th the boats were sent down the river in search of fresh water, on
+the south side, but found it all brackish and unpleasant. They saw
+ostriches here, and a sort of beasts like harts, having wonderfully long
+necks, and extremely wild. Upon the high hills, they found great heaps
+of stones, under which some monstrous carcass had been buried, some of
+the bones being ten or eleven feet long, which, if having belonged to
+rational creatures, must have been the bones of giants.[105] They here
+had plenty of good fish and fowls, but no water could be found for some
+days.
+
+[Footnote 105: Giants indeed; for thigh bones of ten or eleven feet
+long, and these are the longest in the human body, would argue men of
+_thirty-one feet high_!--E.]
+
+On the 17th December, the Unity was laid ashore on King's island, in
+order to clean her bottom, and next day the Horn was hauled on shore for
+the same purpose, but providentially at the distance of about 200 yards
+from her consort: For, on the 19th, while burning a fire of dry reeds
+under the Horn, which was necessary for the object in view, the flame
+caught hold of the ship, and they were forced to see her burn without
+being able to do any thing to extinguish the fire, as they were at least
+fifty feet from the water side. They launched the Unity at high water on
+the 20th, and next day carried on board all the iron-work, anchors,
+cannon, and whatever else they had been able to save belonging to the
+Horn.
+
+On the 25th some holes full of fresh water were found, which was white
+and muddy, yet well tasted, and of which a great quantity was carried
+on board, in small casks on the men's shoulders. At this place, they
+found great numbers of sea lions, the young of which are good to eat.
+This creature is nearly as big as a small horse, their heads resembling
+lions, and the males having long manes on their necks of tough coarse
+hair; but the females have no manes, and are only half as large as the
+males. They are a bold and fierce animal, and only to be destroyed by
+musket shot.
+
+January 18th, 1616, they departed from Port Desire: and on the 18th,
+being in lat. 51 deg. S they saw the Sebaldine [or Faulkland] islands, as
+laid down by de Weert. The 20th, being in lat. 53 deg. S. and by estimation
+twenty leagues to the South of the Straits of Magellan, they observed a
+strong current running to the S.W. The 22d the wind was uncertain, and
+shifting, and the water had a white appearance, as if they had been
+within the land; and holding on their course, S. by W. they saw land
+that same day, bearing from them W. and W.S.W. and quickly afterwards
+saw other land to the south. Then attempting, by an E.S.E. course, to
+get beyond the land, they were constrained to take in their topsails, by
+the wind blowing hard at north. In the forenoon of the 24th they saw
+land to starboard, at the distance of a league, stretching out to the
+east and south, having very high hills all covered with snow. They then
+saw other land bearing east from the former, which likewise was high and
+rugged. According to estimation, these two lands lay about eight leagues
+asunder, and they guessed there might be a good passage between them,
+because of a brisk current which ran to the southward in the direction
+of that opening. At noon they made their latitude 54 deg. 46',[106] and
+stood towards the before-mentioned opening, but were delayed by a calm.
+At this place they saw a prodigious multitude of penguins, and such
+numbers of whales that they had to proceed with much caution, being
+afraid they might injure their ship by running against them.
+
+[Footnote 106: They were here obviously approaching the Straits of Le
+Maire, discovered on the present occasion, the northern opening of which
+is in lat. 54 deg. 40' S. the southern in 55 deg. S. and the longitude 65 deg. 15'
+W. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+In the forenoon of the 25th they got close in with the eastern land, and
+upon its north side, which stretched E.S.E. as far as the eye could
+carry. This they named _States Land_, and to that which lay westward of
+the opening they gave the name of _Maurice Land_.[107] The land on both
+sides seemed entirely bare of trees and shrubs, but had abundance of
+good roads and sandy bays, with great store of fish, porpoises,
+penguins and other birds. Having a north wind at their entrance into
+this passage, they directed their course S.S.W. and going at a brisk
+rate, they were at noon in lat. 55 deg. 36' S. and then held a S.W. course
+with a brisk gale. The land on the south side of the passage or Straits
+of _Le Maire_, and west side, to which they gave the name of _Maurice
+Land_, [being the east side of the Terra del Fuego] appeared to run
+W.S.W. and S.W. as far as they could see, and was all a very rugged,
+uneven, and rocky coast. In the evening, having the wind at S.W. they
+steered S. meeting with prodigious large waves, rolling along before the
+wind; and, from the depth of the water to leeward, which appeared by
+very evident signs, they were fully convinced that they had the great
+South Sea open before them, into which they had now almost made their
+way by a new passage of their own discovering.
+
+[Footnote 107: The former of these names is still retained, but not the
+latter; the land on the west of the Straits of Le Maire being Terra del
+Fuego; and the cape at the N.W. of the straits mouths is now called Cape
+St Vincent, while the S.W. point is named Cape St Diego.--E.]
+
+At this place the _sea-mews_ were larger than swans, their wings when
+extended measuring six feet from tip to tip. These often alighted on the
+ship, and were so tame as to allow themselves to be taken by hand,
+without even attempting to escape. The 26th at noon they made their
+latitude 57 deg. S. where they were assailed by a brisk storm at W.S.W. the
+sea running very high, and of a blue colour. They still held their
+course to the southwards, but changed at night to the N.W. in which
+direction they saw very high land. At noon of the 27th they were in 56 deg.
+51' S. the weather being very cold, with hail and rain, and the wind at
+W. and W. by S. The 28th they had great billows rolling from the west,
+and were at noon in 56 deg. 48' S. The 29th having the wind at N.E. they
+steered S.W. and came in sight of two islands W.S.W. of their course,
+beset all round with cliffs. They got to these islands at noon, giving
+the name of _Barnevelt's Islands_, and found their latitude to be 57 deg.
+S.[108] "Being unable to sail _above_ them, they held their course to
+the north; and taking a N.W. course in the evening from Barnevelt's
+islands, they saw land N.W. and N.N.W. from them, being the lofty
+mountainous land covered with snow, which lies to the south of the
+straits of Magellan, [called Terra del Fuego,] and which ends in a sharp
+point, to which they gave the name of _Cape Horn_, which is in lat. 57 deg.
+48' S."[109]
+
+[Footnote 108: Only 56 deg., so that by some inaccuracy of instruments or
+calculation, the observations of the latitude, in this voyage, seem all
+considerably too high.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 109: The course in the text within inverted commas, from
+Barnevelt's islands to Cape Horn, is evidently erroneously stated. It
+ought to have run thus. "Being unable to pass to the north of these
+islands, they held their course S.W. seeing land on the N.W. and N.N.W.
+of their course, which ended in a sharp point, which they named _Cape
+Horn_."--Cape Horn is in lat. 56 deg. 15' S. and long. 67 deg. 45' W. from
+Greenwich.--E.]
+
+They now held their course westwards, being assisted by a strong current
+in that direction; yet had the wind from the north, and had heavy
+billows meeting them from the west. The 30th, the current and billows as
+before, they were fully assured of having the way open into the South
+Sea, and this day at noon they made their latitude 57 deg. 34' S. The 31st
+sailing west, with the wind at north, their latitude at noon was 58 deg. S.
+But the wind changing to W. and W.S.W. they passed Cape Horn, losing
+sight of land altogether, still meeting huge billows rolling from the
+west with a blue sea, which made them believe they were in the main
+South Sea. February 1st, they had a storm at S.W. and sailed N.W. and
+W.N.W. The 2d, having the wind at W. they sailed southwards, and came
+into the lat. of 57 deg. 58' S. The 3d they made their latitude 59 deg. 25' S.
+with a strong wind at W. but saw no signs of any land to the South.
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_Continuation of the Voyage, from Cape Horn to the Island of Java._
+
+Altering their course to the northwards, they plainly discerned the
+western mouth of the Straits of Magellan, bearing east from them, on the
+12th February; and being now quite sure of their new and happy
+discovery, they returned thanks to the Almighty for their good fortune
+over a cup of wine, which was handed three times round the company. To
+this new-found passage or straits, leading from the Atlantic into the
+Pacific, they gave the name of the _Straits of Le Maire_, though that
+honour ought justly to have been given to _Schouten,_ by whose excellent
+conduct these straits were discovered.
+
+By the 27th of February they were in lat. 40 deg. S. with fair weather,
+continuing their course to the north; but on the 28th, they determined
+to sail for the island of Juan Fernandez, to give some rest and
+refreshment to their sickly and wearied company. That day their latitude
+at noon was 35 deg. 53' S. In the evening they shortened sail, fearing to
+fall in with the land in the night. Next day, being the 1st of March,
+they saw the islands of Juan Fernandez to the N.N.E. and got up to them
+at noon, being in the lat. of 35 deg. 53' S.[110] The smaller of these
+islands is that to the westwards, [Masafuero,] which is very barren and
+rocky. The greater [Juan Fernandez,] to the eastwards, though also very
+high and mountainous, is yet fruitful and well shaded with trees. This
+island affords plenty of hogs and goats; and there is such excellent
+fishing all round, that the Spaniards come hither for that purpose, and
+transport vast quantities of fish from hence to Peru.
+
+[Footnote 110: The latitude of Juan Fernandez is only 33 deg. 42' S. The two
+islands mentioned in the text under this name, are Juan Fernandez and
+Masafuero; the former in long. 77 deg. 80', the latter in 79 deg. 40', both W.
+from Greenwich. Or perhaps, the second island may be the Small Goat's or
+Rabbit Island, off its S.W. end, called _Isola de Cabras_, or _de
+Conejos_.--E.]
+
+The road or haven of Juan Fernandez, [named la Baia, or Cumberland
+Harbour,] is at the east end of the island; but they shaped their course
+to the west end, where they could find no place in which to anchor. The
+boat being sent in search of an anchorage, brought an account of a
+beautiful valley, full of trees and thickets, and refreshed by streams
+of water running down from the hills, with a variety of animals feeding
+in this pleasant spot. The boat brought also great store of fish on
+board, being mostly lobsters and crabs, and reported having seen many
+sea wolves. Finding the island inaccessible, they took a considerable
+quantity of fish, and procured a supply of fresh water, after which they
+determined to pursue their voyage.
+
+The 11th March they passed the tropic of Capricorn to the north, the
+wind in general being E.S.E. and they held their course N.N.W. till the
+15th, when being in lat. 18 deg. S. they changed their course to W. The 3d
+April they were in 15 deg. 12' S. being then much afflicted with the flux,
+and that day they saw a small low island which they got up to at noon.
+Finding no bottom, they could not come to anchor, but sent some men
+ashore in the boat. They found nothing here fit for refreshment, except
+some herbs which tasted like scurvy grass, and saw some dogs which
+could neither bark nor snarl, and for which reason they named it Dog
+Island. It is in lat. 15 deg. 12', and they judged it to be 925 leagues west
+from the coast of Peru.[111] The interior of this island is so low, that
+it seemed mostly overflowed at high water, its outskirt being a sort of
+dike or mound, overgrown with trees, between which the salt water
+penetrates in several places.
+
+[Footnote 111: Dog Island is in lat. 15 deg. 18' S. and long. 137 deg. W. about
+1200 marine leagues west from the coast of Peru under the same parallel.
+By the description in the text it seems one of those which are usually
+termed _lagoon_ islands--E.]
+
+The 14th, sailing W. and W. by N. they saw a large low island in the
+afternoon, reaching a considerable way N.E. and S.W. At sun-set, being
+about a league from this island, a canoe came to meet them, in which
+were some naked Indians of a reddish colour, having long black hair.
+They made signs to the Dutch to go on shore, and spoke to them in a
+language which was not understood; neither did the Indians understand
+them, though spoken to in Spanish, Moluccan, and Javan. Getting near the
+coast, no bottom could be found, though only a musket-shot from land.
+They now sailed S.S.W. along the island, making ten leagues during the
+night, and continued along the shore on the 15th, many naked people
+continually inviting them to land. At length a canoe came off, but the
+natives would not venture into the ship, yet came to the boat, where the
+Dutch gave them beads, knives, and other trifles; but they found them
+thievishly disposed, much like the natives of the Ladrones, and were so
+fond of iron, that they stole the nails from the cabin windows, and the
+bolts from the doors. Their skins were all pictured over with snakes,
+dragons, and such like reptiles, and they were entirely naked, except a
+piece of mat before them. A boat was sent ashore well armed, and
+immediately on landing, about thirty of the natives rushed from a wood,
+armed with clubs, slings, and long staves or spears, and would have
+seized the boat and taken away the arms from the soldiers; but on
+receiving a discharge of musquetry they run off. Not being able to
+anchor here, they called this the _Island without ground_. It is low,
+and mostly composed of white sandy ground, on which are many trees,
+which were supposed to be cocoas and palmitos. It is not broad, but of
+considerable length, being in lat. 15 deg. S. and about 100 leagues from Dog
+Island.[112]
+
+[Footnote 112: Sondre-ground, or Without-ground, is in lat. 15 deg. 12' S.
+and 143 deg. 25' W. long.--E.]
+
+Finding nothing could be done here, they held on their course to the
+west, and on the 16th came to another island, about fifteen leagues
+north from the former. This seemed all drowned land, yet its skirts were
+well clothed with trees. Here also they found no ground, and it yielded
+nothing but a few herbs, with some crabs and other shell-fish, which
+they found good eating. It afforded them also good fresh water, which
+they found in a pit not far from the shore. The pottage or soup, which
+they made of certain herbs gathered here, proved serviceable to those
+who were afflicted with the flux. They called this _Water Island_,[113]
+because it supplied them with fresh water.
+
+[Footnote 113: Water-land is in lat. 15 deg. S. and 146 deg. W. long.--E.]
+
+Sailing from this island westwards, they came on the 18th to another
+island 20 leagues distant from the last, and extending a considerable
+way N.W. and S.E. Dispatching the boat in search of anchorage, a bottom
+was found near a point of land, in 25 and 40 fathoms, about a
+musket-shot from the shore, where also was a gentle stream of fresh
+water. This news induced them to send back the boat with some casks for
+water: But after using much pains to get on shore, and searching in the
+wood to find a spring, they were frightened away by seeing a savage. On
+getting back to their boat, five or six more of the savages came to the
+shore, but on seeing the Dutch put off they soon retired into the woods.
+Although they thus got rid of the savages, they encountered other
+adversaries of a formidable nature; for they were followed from the
+woods by innumerable myriads of black flies, so that they came on board
+absolutely covered with them from head to foot, and the plague of flies
+began to rage in the ship in a most intolerable manner. This persecution
+lasted three or four days, on which account they called this _Fly
+Island_,[114] and by the help of a good breeze of wind, they left it as
+fast as they could.
+
+[Footnote 114: The next island W. or rather S.W. from Water-land, and
+nearly at the distance in the text, is now called Palliser's
+island.--E.]
+
+Continuing their course westwards from the 19th of April to the 9th of
+May, when they were in lat. 15 deg. 20' S. and estimated their distance from
+Peru 1510 leagues to the west, they perceived a bark coming towards
+them, on which they fired a gun or two to make them strike. But those
+who were in her, either not understanding the language of cannon, or
+unwilling to obey, made off as fast as they could; on which the Dutch
+sent their boat with ten musqueteers to intercept them. Some of the
+savages in the bark leapt overboard, and the rest surrendered without
+resistance, on which the Dutch used them kindly, dressing those that
+were wounded, and saving the lives of some who had leapt into the sea.
+Besides the men, there were eight women and several children, being in
+all twenty-three, remaining in the bark. They were a cleanly neat kind
+of people, of a reddish colour, and entirely naked except the parts of
+shame. The men wore their long black curled hair, but that of the women
+was cut short.
+
+The bark was of a singular figure and construction, consisting of two
+canoes fastened together, in the midst of each of which were two planks
+of red wood to keep out the water, and several others went across from
+one canoe to the other, being made fast and close above, and projected
+over a good way on each side. At the end of one of the canoes, on the
+starboard side, there stood a mast, having a fork at its upper end,
+where the yard lay; the sail being of mats, and the ropes of that kind
+of stuff of which fig-frails are made in Spain. Their only furniture
+consisted of a few fishing-hooks, the upper part of which was of stone,
+and the other of bone, tortoise-shell, or mother-of-pearl. They had no
+water on board, instead of which they satisfied themselves with the
+liquor of a few cocoa-nuts; in default of which they drank sea-water,
+which even the children did heartily. The Dutch sent them all again on
+board their vessel, where the women welcomed their husbands with joyful
+embraces, after which they made away to the south-east.[115]
+
+[Footnote 115: This double canoe seems to have belonged to the Society
+islands, and was perhaps bound towards Otaheite, by the course which it
+followed on getting rid of the Dutch.--E.]
+
+The 10th of May, Schouten continued his course W.S.W. and that day saw
+some very high land to larboard, S.E. by S. about eight leagues off. The
+11th they came to a very high island, and about two leagues south from
+this to one much lower; and the same day sailed over a bank where they
+had fourteen fathoms on a stoney bottom, about two leagues from the
+land, and being past this bank could find no bottom. At this time
+another bark, or double canoe like the former, came up to them, having a
+small loose single canoe in her, to put out upon occasion. She sailed so
+fast that few Dutch ships could have outstripped her. She was steered
+behind by two oars, one in each canoe, and when they have a mind to
+tack they use oars forwards. Sending their boat to sound at one of these
+islands, ground was found a cannon-shot from the shore, in twelve,
+fourteen, and fifteen fathoms, but shelvy. The savages in the bark made
+signs as if directing them to the other island, but they anchored at the
+former in twenty-five fathoms on a sandy bottom, a cannon-shot from
+shore.
+
+This island, in lat. 16 deg. 10' S. is one entire mountain, looking like one
+of the Molucca islands, and all covered with cocoa-nut trees, for which
+reason they named it Cocoa island.[116] The other island is much lower
+than this, but longer, and stretches east and west. While at anchor off
+Cocoa island there came three _ships_,[117] and nine or ten canoes about
+them, having three or four men in each. Some of these holding out white
+flags in token of peace, the Dutch did so likewise. The canoes were flat
+before and sharp behind, hewed each out of one piece of a red kind of
+wood, and sailed very swiftly. On coming near the Unity, some of the
+savages leapt into the sea and swam to the ship, having their hands full
+of cocoa-nuts and _ubes-roots,_[118] which they bartered for nails and
+beads, giving four or five cocoa-nuts for a nail or a small string of
+beads, so that the Dutch that day procured 180 cocoa-nuts. This traffic
+brought so many of the natives on board, that the Dutch could hardly
+stir about the ship.
+
+[Footnote 116: Cocas, or Boscawen island, is in 16 deg. 32' S. and long.
+169 deg. 35' W. The other island mentioned in the text, Traitors, or Keppel
+island, is a few leagues S.S.W. from Cocos.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 117: These ships must have been large double canoes.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 118: These _ubes_-roots were perhaps the same that are called
+_eddoes_ by modern navigators among the South Sea islands.--E.]
+
+The boat was now sent to the other island to see for a more convenient
+place in which to anchor; but she was presently beset by a vast number
+of canoes filled with a mad sort of people, armed with clubs, who
+boarded the boat and attacked the Dutchmen. On firing their muskets, the
+savages laughed at them for making so much noise and doing so little
+hurt; but, on the next discharge, one of them being shot through the
+breast, they learnt to pay more respect to the muskets, and to keep
+their due distance for the future. The savages were lusty,
+well-proportioned men, and most expert swimmers, but naked and thievish,
+and very fantastical in the fashion of their hair, some having it
+short, others long, some curled, and others plaited or folded up in
+various forms.
+
+On the 12th the savages came again in their canoes, laden with cocoas,
+bananas, _ubes-roots_, hogs, and fresh water, contending violently who
+should get first on board. Those who were behind, being unable to get
+over the throng of canoes and men before them, leapt into the sea, and
+diving under the canoes, swam to the ship with bunches of cocoas in
+their mouths, and climbed up the side like so many rats, and in such
+swarms that the Dutch had to keep them off with cudgels. The Dutch
+bartered with them that day for so many cocoas, as to produce twelve for
+each of their men, being eighty-five in number. The natives wondered
+much at the size and strength of the Dutch ship; and some of them even
+dived under her bottom, knocking it with stones, as if to try how strong
+it was. The king of these savages sent a black hog on board as a
+present, charging the messenger to take no reward. Shortly after he came
+in person, in a large ship of their fashion, attended by thirty-five
+single canoes; and when at a small distance from the ship, he and all
+his people began to bawl out as loud as they could, being their manner
+of welcoming strangers. The Dutch received him with drums and trumpets,
+which pleased him much; and he and his attendants shewed their sense of
+this honourable reception by bowing and clapping their hands. The king
+gave them a present after his fashion, which they requited with an old
+hatchet, some rusty nails and glass beads, and a piece of linen, with
+all which he seemed much pleased. This king was not distinguished from
+his subjects by any external mark of dignity, but merely by the
+reverence they shewed him, as he was equally naked with all the rest;
+but he could not be prevailed on to come on board the Unity.
+
+At noon on the 13th, the Dutch ship was surrounded by twenty-three large
+double canoes, or ships of their fashion, and forty-five single canoes,
+in all of which there could not be less than seven or eight hundred men.
+At first they pretended to come for the purpose of trade, making signs
+of friendship, and endeavouring to prevail upon the Dutch to remove
+their ship to the other island, where they would be better accommodated.
+Yet, in spite of all these fair pretences, the Dutch suspected that some
+mischief was intended by the savages, who now began to environ the ship
+all around, and then, with a great outcry, made a sudden attack. The
+king's ship was the foremost in the action, and rushed with such
+violence against the Unity, that the heads of the two canoes composing
+it were both dashed to pieces. The rest came on as well as they could,
+throwing repeated showers of great stones on board; but the Dutch,
+having been on their guard, so galled them with musquetry, and with
+three great guns loaded with musket-balls and nails, that all the
+savages were fain to quit their canoes, and seek for safety in the
+water. Being thus put to the rout, they dispersed as quickly as
+possible. These treacherous savages were inhabitants of the lower, or
+more southerly, of the two islands, which therefore the Dutch named
+_Traitor's Island_.
+
+Schouten sailed from Cocoa Island that same day, holding a course to the
+W. and W. by S. and came on the 14th to another island, about thirty
+leagues from Cocoa Island, to which he gave the name of _Hope
+Island_,[119] because expecting there to meet with refreshments. Finding
+no ground for anchorage, the boat was sent to sound along shore, and
+found a stony bottom about a musket-shot from the shore, in some places
+having forty, and in others twenty and thirty fathoms, and then no
+bottom at all next throw of the lead. Some ten or twelve canoes came off
+to the ship, bartering a small quantity of flying fishes for beads, the
+articles being reciprocally exchanged by means of a rope let down from
+the stern of the ship. From this peddling traffic the Indians soon after
+withdrew, and endeavoured to board and carry away the boat which was
+employed in sounding; but met with such a reception from guns, pikes,
+and cutlasses, that after two of them were slain, they were glad to
+hurry away as fast as they could. This island was mostly composed of
+black cliffs, which were green on the top, and seemed well stocked with
+cocoa-trees. There were several houses seen along the sea side; and in
+one place was a large village close beside a strand, or landing-place.
+As there was no convenient anchorage at this place, the ground being
+extremely rough, Schouten proceeded on his voyage to the S.W. meaning to
+pursue the originally intended discovery of a southern continent.
+
+[Footnote 119: Hope Island is in lat. 16 deg. 32' S. and in 177 deg. 25' W.
+longitude.--E.]
+
+The 18th May, being in lat. 16 deg. 5' S. and the west wind becoming very
+unsteady, they began to consult as to the farther prosecution of their
+voyage. Schouten represented that they were now at least 1600 leagues
+westward from the coast of Peru, without having made the expected
+discovery of a southern land, of which there was now no great
+probability of success, having already sailed much farther west than
+they at first intended. He said also, if they persisted in following
+their present course, they would assuredly come to the southern side of
+New Guinea; and if they were unable to find a passage through that
+country, to the west or north, they would inevitably be lost, since it
+would be impossible for them to get back again, by reason of the east
+winds which continually reign in these seas. For these reasons, and
+others which he urged, he proposed, that they should now alter their
+course to the northwards, so as to fall in with the north side of New
+Guinea.[120] This proposal was embraced by all the company, and it was
+immediately determined to change the course to N.N.W. Accordingly,
+holding their course in that new direction, they saw two islands at noon
+of the 19th, about eight leagues from them, N.E. by E. and seeming to be
+a cannon-shot distant from each other.[121] Upon this they steered N.E.
+with fair weather and a scanty wind, meaning to approach this island,
+but could only get within a league of it on the 21st, when they were
+visited by two canoes, the people in which began immediately to threaten
+them with loud cries, and at the same time seemed preparing to dart
+their _assagays_ or spears: but, on a discharge from the ship, they made
+off in haste, leaving two of their companions behind them who were
+slain, and a shirt they had stolen from the ship. Next day other natives
+came to the ship on friendly and peaceable terms, bringing cocoa-nuts,
+ubes-roots, and roasted hogs, which they bartered for knives, beads, and
+nails.
+
+[Footnote 120: It is almost needless to mention, that if Schouten had
+continued his course in the former parallel of between 15 deg. and 16 deg. S. he
+must have fallen in with the group of islands now called the New
+Hebrides, and afterward with the northern part of New South Wales.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 121: This was only one island, in lat. 15 deg. S. and long. 180 deg.
+10' W. which they named Horn Island.--E.]
+
+The natives of this island were all as expert swimmers and divers as
+those in Traitor's Island, and as well versed in cheating and stealing,
+which they never failed to do when an opportunity offered. Their houses
+stood all along the shore, being thatched with leaves, and having each a
+kind of penthouse to shed off the rain. They were mostly ten or twelve
+feet high, and twenty-five feet in compass, their only furniture within
+being a bed of dry leaves, a fishing-rod or two, and a great club, even
+the house of their king being no better provided than the rest. At this
+island the Dutch found good convenience for watering; and on the 26th
+they sent three of their principal people on shore as hostages, or
+pledges, of friendship with the islanders, retaining six of them aboard
+in the same capacity. The Dutch pledges were treated on shore with great
+respect by the king, who presented them with four hogs; and gave strict
+orders that none of his people should give the smallest disturbance to
+the boat while watering. The natives stood in great awe of their king,
+and were very fearful of having any of their crimes made known to him.
+One of them having stolen a cutlass, and complaint being made to one of
+the king's officers, the thief was pursued and soundly drubbed, besides
+being forced to make restitution; on which occasion the officer
+signified, that it was well for the culprit that the king knew not of
+his crime, otherwise his life would certainly have been forfeited.
+
+These islanders were extremely frightened at the report of a gun, which
+would set them all running like so many madmen. Yet on one occasion the
+king desired to hear one of the great guns let off, and being set for
+that purpose under a canopy, with all his courtiers about him, in great
+state, the gun was no sooner fired than he ran off into the woods as
+fast as possible, followed by his attendants, and no persuasions of the
+Dutch could stop them. The 25th and 26th the Dutch went ashore to
+endeavour to procure hogs, but were unable to get any, as the islanders
+had now only a few left, and would only part with cocoas, bananas, and
+ubes-roots; yet the king continued his wonted kindness and respect, and
+he and his lieutenant took the crowns from their own heads, and set them
+on the heads of two of the company. These crowns were composed of the
+white, red, and green feathers of parrots and doves. The doves of this
+island are white on the back, and black every where else except the
+breast; and each of the king's counsellors has one of these birds
+sitting beside him on a stick.
+
+The ship being completely supplied with fresh water on the 28th,
+Schouten and Le Maire went ashore with the trumpets, with which music
+the king was highly gratified. He told them of his wars with the
+inhabitants of the other island, and shewed several caves and thickets
+where they were in use to place ambuscades. It plainly appeared that he
+was fearful of the Dutch having some design of seizing his country, as
+he would fain have engaged them to go to war with the other island, and
+even offered to give them ten hogs and a good quantity of cocoas, if
+they would be gone from his island in two days. Yet he made them a visit
+aboard, praying when he entered the ship, and praying also at every
+cabin he entered. He used always to pray likewise every time the Dutch
+came ashore to visit him. His subjects also shewed great submission to
+the Dutch, kissing their feet, and laying them on their own necks, with
+all the marks of awe and fear they could express.
+
+The 30th of May was a day of great ceremony, in consequence of the king
+of the _other island_[122] coming to visit the king of this. This king
+was accompanied by a train of 300 naked Indians, having bunches of green
+herbs stuck about their waists, of which herb they make their drink. To
+make sure of a welcome, this king brought with him a present of sixteen
+hogs. When the two kings came in sight of each other, they began to bow
+and to mutter certain prayers; on meeting they both fell prostrate on
+the ground, and after several strange gestures, they got up and walked
+to two seats provided for them, where they uttered a few more prayers,
+bowing reverently to each other, and at length sat down under the same
+canopy. After this, by way of doing honour to the stranger king, a
+messenger was sent aboard, requesting to send the drums and trumpets
+ashore, which was done accordingly, and they played a march to the great
+entertainment of the two kings. After this a solemn banquet was
+prepared, for which they began to make ready their liquor, and in the
+following strange and abominable manner. A number of Indians came into
+the presence of the two kings and their attendants, bringing a good
+quantity of _cana_, the herb of which they make their drink, each of
+whom took a large mouthful thereof, and having chewed it a while, put it
+from their mouths into a large wooden trough, and poured water on the
+chewed herb. After stirring it some time, they squeezed out all the
+liquor, which they presented in cups to the two kings.[123] They also
+offered of it to the Dutch, who were ready to vomit at the nastiness of
+its preparation.
+
+[Footnote 122: No _other island_ is to be found in modern maps near Horn
+Island, the nearest being the Feejee Islands, a numerous group, about
+thirty leagues S.S.W. It is therefore probable that Horn Island may have
+consisted of two peninsulas, united by a low narrow neck, appearing to
+Schouten as two distinct islands.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 123: In the Society Islands, as related by modern navigators,
+an intoxicating liquor is prepared nearly in a similar manner, by
+chewing the _ava_, or pepper-root.--E.]
+
+The eating part of this entertainment consisted of ubes-roots roasted,
+and hogs nicely dressed in the following manner: Having ripped open
+their bellies and taken out the entrails, they singed off the hair, and
+put hot stones into their bellies, by which, without farther cleaning or
+dressing, they were made fit for the royal feast.[124] They presented
+two hogs dressed in this manner to the Dutch, with all the form and
+ceremony used to their kings, laying them first on their heads, then
+kneeling with much humility, they left them at their feet. They gave the
+Dutch also eleven living hogs; for which they got in return a present of
+knives, old nails, and glass beads, with which they were well pleased.
+The natives of this island were of a dark yellow colour, so tall, large,
+strong, and well-proportioned, that the tallest of the Dutch could only
+be compared with the smallest among them. Some wore their hair curled,
+frizzled, or tied up in knots, while others had it standing bolt upright
+on their heads, like hog's-bristles, a quarter of an ell high. The king
+and some of his chief men had long locks of hair, hanging down below
+their hips, bound with a few knots. The women were all very ugly
+figures, short and ill-shaped, their breasts hanging down to their
+bellies like empty satchels, and their hair close cropped. Both sexes
+were entirely naked, except a slight covering in front. They seemed
+altogether void of any devotion, and free from care, living on what the
+earth spontaneously produces, without any art, industry, or cultivation.
+They neither sow nor reap, neither buy nor sell, neither do any thing
+for a living, but leave all to nature, and must starve if that fail them
+at any time. They seem also to have as little regard for the dictates of
+decency and modesty, as for those of civil policy and prudence; for they
+will use their women openly in the largest assembly, even in presence of
+their king, whom, in other respects, they so greatly reverence. To this
+island the Dutch gave the name of Horn Island, from the town in Holland
+whence they fitted out; and named the haven in which they anchored
+_Unity Bay_, after their ship. This bay, resembling a natural dock, is
+on the south side of the island, in the latitude of 14 deg. 16' S.[125]
+
+[Footnote 124: Modern voyagers describe this mode of dressing more
+minutely. A pit is dug in the earth, which is lined with heated stones,
+on which the hog is placed, having hot stones in its belly, and is
+covered with other hot stones, when the pit is covered up like a grave.
+After remaining a sufficient time in this situation, the _barbacued hog_
+is said to be nicely dressed.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 125: The latitude and longitude of Horn Island have been given
+in a former note, but its most extreme south point may reach to 15 deg. 16'
+S.--E.]
+
+Leaving Horn Island on the 1st of June, they saw no other land till the
+21st, when they made towards a very low island bearing S.S.W. by W. from
+them, in lat. 4 deg. 47' S. near which were several sands stretching N.W.
+from the land, as also three or four small islands very full of trees.
+Here a canoe came to the Unity, of the same odd fashion with those
+formerly described. The people also were much like those formerly seen,
+only blacker, and armed with bows and arrows, being the first they had
+seen among the Indians of the South Sea. These people told them, by
+signs, that there was more land to the westwards, where their king
+dwelt, and where there were good refreshments to be had. On this
+information, they sailed on the 22d W. and W. by N. in the lat. of 4 deg.
+45' S. and saw that day at least twelve or thirteen islands close
+together, lying W.S.W. from them, and reaching S.E. and N.W. about half
+a league, but they left these to larboard. The 24th, the wind being S.
+they saw three low islands to larboard, S.W. of their course, one of
+them very small, the other two being each two miles long, all very full
+of trees, to which they gave the name of _Green Islands_.[126] The
+shores of these islands were rugged and full of cliffs, presenting no
+place for anchoring, wherefore they proceeded on their voyage.
+
+[Footnote 126: These Green Islands of Schouten are laid down in our best
+modern maps in lat. 4 deg. S. and long. 205 deg. 20' W. The other two groups
+mentioned at this place in the text and without names, seem to have been
+the _Four Islands_ and the _Nine Islands_ of Carteret, to the S.E. of
+Green Islands.--E.]
+
+On the 25th, being St John the Baptist's day, they sailed past another
+island, on which were seven or eight hovels, which they named St John's
+Island. [Lat. 3 deg. 40' S. long. 206 deg. 20' W.] At this time they saw some
+very high land to the S.W. which they thought to be the western point of
+New Guinea.[127] They reached this coast by noon, and sailed along,
+sending their boat in search of an anchorage, but no bottom could then
+be found. Two or three canoes filled with a barbarous people attacked
+the boat with slings, but were soon driven away by the muskets. These
+people were very black, entirely naked, and spoke a quite different
+language from that of the islanders they had seen hitherto. They kept
+fires burning on the coast all night, and some of them came lurking
+about the ship in their canoes; but though the Dutch, on discovering
+them, did every thing they could to conciliate, they would not
+understand any signs made for procuring provisions, but answered all
+with horrible noises and outcries.
+
+[Footnote 127: This land was discovered afterwards to be separate from
+New Guinea, and is now named New Ireland, having another large island
+interposed, called New Britain.--E.]
+
+At night, they anchored in a bay in 40 fathoms on uneven ground. About
+this place the country was high and verdant, and afforded a pleasant
+prospect, being, as they guessed, 1840 leagues west from the coast of
+Peru. In the morning of the 26th, three canoes came to the ship, quite
+full of these barbarians, being well armed after their manner, with
+clubs, wooden swords, and slings. The Dutch treated them kindly, giving
+them several toys to procure their favour; but they were not to be won
+by kindness, neither could they be taught good manners except by the
+language of the great guns: For they presently assaulted the ship with
+all their force, and continued till ten or twelve of them were slain by
+cannon-shot. They then threw themselves into the water, endeavouring to
+escape by swimming and diving; but they were pursued in the water by the
+boat, when several were knocked in the head, and three prisoners taken,
+besides four of their canoes, which were cut up as fuel for the use of
+the ship. Though these savages would not formerly understand any signs,
+they were now more apt, and understood that hogs and bananas were
+demanded in ransom for the prisoners. One wounded man was set at
+liberty, but the Dutch exacted ten hogs for the others. This island
+afforded a sort of birds that are all over bright red. North of it lay
+another island, of which they made no other discovery, except its
+position in regard to this. The Dutch concluded that these people were
+of the _Papuas_ nation, because of their short hair, and because they
+chewed betel mixed with chalk.
+
+In the evening of the 28th, they sailed from hence, and next day held a
+course to the N.W. and N.W. by N. with a shifting wind till noon, and
+then a calm. They had the point of the island in view till evening,
+though they sailed along the coast, which was full of bays and turnings,
+and trended N.W. and N.W. by W. This day they saw other three high
+islands, which lay northwards five or six miles from the greater one,
+being then in the latitude of 3 deg. 20' S. The 30th in the morning, several
+canoes of these black Papuas came off to the ship, and being allowed to
+come aboard, broke certain staves over the Dutch, in sign of peace.
+Their canoes were more artificially made and ornamented than the others,
+and the people seemed more civilized and more modest, as they had the
+pudenda covered, which the others had not. Their hair was rubbed over
+with chalk, their black frizly locks appearing as if powdered. They
+affected to be poor, and came to beg, not bringing any thing to the
+ship, yet the four islands whence they came appeared, to be well stored
+with cocoas.
+
+On the 1st June, the Dutch came to anchor between the coast of New
+Guinea and an island two miles long. They were soon after surrounded by
+twenty-five canoes, full of the same people who had broken staves the
+day before in token of peace, and who came now fully armed in guise of
+war. They were not long of entering on the work they came about. Two of
+them laid hold of two anchors which hung from the bows of the ship, and
+endeavoured with their girdles to tug the ship on shore. The rest lay
+close to the ship's sides, and gave a brisk onset with slings and other
+weapons; but the great guns soon forced them to retire, with twelve or
+thirteen killed, and many more wounded. After this, the Dutch sailed
+peaceably along the coast, with a good gale of wind, continuing their
+course W.N.W. and N.W. by W. The 2d they were in lat. 3 deg. 12' S. and saw
+a low land to larboard, and right before them a low island. Continuing
+W.N.W. with a slight current at E.N.E. they sailed gently along. The 3d
+they saw high land, bearing W. about 14 leagues from the other island,
+and in lat. 2 deg. 41' S. The 4th, while passing these four island, they
+suddenly came in view of twenty-three other islands, some great, some
+small, some high, and others low, most of which they left to starboard,
+and only two or three to larboard. Some of these were a league distant
+from the others, and some only a cannon-shot. Their latitude was in 2 deg.
+30' S. a little more or less.
+
+On the 6th in the morning, the weather being variable and even sometimes
+stormy, they had in the morning a very high hill before them, bearing
+S.W. which they thought to have been _Geeminassi_ in Banda; but, on a
+nearer approach, they discovered three other hills more like it in the
+north, some six or seven leagues distant, which they were convinced were
+that hill of Banda.[128] Behind these hills lay a large tract of land,
+stretching east and west, of very great extent, and very uneven. In the
+morning of the 7th, they sailed towards these mighty hills, some of
+which they found were volcanoes, for which reason they named this
+_Vulcan's Island_. It was well inhabited and fall of cocoa-nut trees,
+but had no convenient place for anchorage. The inhabitants were naked,
+and extremely fearful of the Dutch, and their language so different from
+that of all the neighbouring people, that none of the blacks could
+understand them. More islands appeared to the N. and N.W. but they
+proceeded to a very low island, bearing N.W. by W. which they reached in
+the evening. The water here was observed to be of several colours,
+green, white, and yellow, perhaps occasioned by the mixture of some
+river, as it was far sweeter than ordinary sea water, and was full of
+leaves and boughs of trees, on some of which were birds, and even some
+crabs.
+
+[Footnote 128: They still had the north-western end of Papua or New
+Guinea between them and Banda, from which they were distant at least
+twelve degrees of longitude.--E.]
+
+On the 8th, continuing their course W.N.W. having a high island on the
+starboard, and another somewhat lower to larboard, they anchored in the
+afternoon in 70 fathoms on a good sandy bottom, about a cannon-shot from
+the land, at an island in 3 deg. 40' S. which seemed an unhealthy place,
+yielding nothing of any value except a little ginger. It was inhabited
+by Papuas or blacks, whose ridiculous mode of dress, and their own
+natural deformity, made them appear little short of a kind of monsters.
+Hardly any of them but had something odd and strange, either in the
+bigness or position of their limbs. They had strings of hog's teeth hung
+about their necks; their noses were perforated, in which rings were
+fastened; their hair was frizled, and their faces very ugly. Their
+houses also were extremely singular, being mounted on stakes, eight or
+nine feet above the ground. Before noon of the 9th, they anchored in a
+more convenient bay, in 26 fathoms, on a bottom of sand mixed with clay.
+There were two villages near the shore, whence some canoes brought off
+hogs and cocoas, but the Indians held them at so dear a rate that the
+Dutch would not buy any of them.
+
+Though they had now sailed so long upon this new land, yet were they
+unable to determine with any certainty if it actually were the coast of
+New Guinea, as their charts neither agreed with each other, nor with the
+coast in view. This coast for the most part ran N.W. by W. sometimes
+more westerly, and at other times more northerly. Yet they held on their
+course W.N.W. along the coast, having quiet weather though dull winds,
+but assisted by a stream or current setting along the coast to the
+westwards. Proceeding in this manner, they came into the lat. of 2 deg. 58'
+S. at noon of the 12th. Continuing their course on the 13th and 14th,
+the coast in sight was sometimes high and at other times low. The 15th,
+still pursuing the same course, they reached two low islands about half
+a league from the main, about the latitude of 2 deg. 54' S. where they had
+good anchorage in 45 and 46 fathoms. Seeing the country well stored with
+cocoas, two boats well armed were sent with orders to land and procure
+some cocoa-nuts. But they were forced to retire by the Indians, in spite
+of their muskets, at least sixteen of the Dutch, being wounded by arrows
+and stones thrown from slings.
+
+In the morning of the 16th, they sailed in between the two low islands,
+and anchored in a safe place in nine fathoms. They landed that day on
+the smaller island, where they burnt some huts of the natives, and
+brought away as many cocoa-nuts as gave three to each man of the
+company. The barbarous natives became now more tractable; as on the 17th
+they came to make their peace-offerings of cocoas, bananas, ginger, and
+certain yellow roots [turmeric] used instead of saffron. They even
+trusted the Dutch so far as to come on board, when peace was entirely
+restored, and their hearts won by a few nails and beads. They continued
+bartering on the 18th, for cocoas and bananas, procuring fifty nuts and
+two bunches of bananas for each man of the company, with a smaller
+quantity of cassava and _papade_. These cassavas and papades are East
+India commodities, the former being also to be had particularly good in
+the West Indies, and far preferable to what they got here. The people
+make all their bread of this substance, baking it in large round cakes.
+This smaller island, which is the more easterly, the natives named
+_Mosa_; the other over against it they call _Jusan_, and the farthest
+off _Arimea_, which, is very high, and about five or six leagues from
+the coast of New Guinea.[129] These places had probably been visited
+before by Europeans, as they had among them some Spanish pots and jars.
+They were not nearly so much surprised at the report of the great guns
+as the others had been, neither were they so curious in looking at the
+ship.
+
+[Footnote 129: These names are not to be found in our modern general
+maps, though certainly infinitely better for all the uses of geography
+than the absurd appellations so much in use among voyagers.--E.]
+
+On the 21st at noon, sailing along the land as before N.W. they were in
+lat. 1 deg. 13' S. The current drove them to a cluster of islands, where
+they anchored in thirteen fathoms, and were detained all day of the 22d
+by storms of thunder and rain. Setting sail in the morning of the 23d,
+six large canoes overtook them, bringing dried fish, cocoas, bananas,
+tobacco, and a small sort of fruit resembling plums. Some Indians also
+from another island brought provisions to barter, and some vessels of
+China porcelain. Like other Savages, they were excessively fond of beads
+and iron; but they were remarkably distinguished from the natives in the
+last islands, by their larger size, and more orange-coloured
+complexions. Their arms were bows and arrows, and they wore glass
+earrings of several colours, by which latter circumstance it appeared
+that they had been previously visited by other Europeans, and
+consequently that this was not to be considered as a discovery.
+
+The 24th, steering N.W. and W.N.W. and being in lat. 0 deg. 30' S. they
+sailed along a very pleasant island, which they named Schouten's Island,
+after their master,[130] and called its western point Cape of Good Hope.
+The 25th they passed an extensive tract of uneven land on their larboard
+hand, stretching from E.S.E. to W.N.W. The 26th they saw three other
+islands, the coast stretching N.W. by W. The 27th they were in lat. 0 deg.
+29' S. still seeing much land to the south, some of which were very high
+and some low, which they passed, continuing their course to the north of
+west. The 29th they felt the shock of an earthquake, which shook the
+ship to that degree that the men ran terrified out of their births,
+believing the ship had run a-ground, or had bilged against some rock. On
+heaving the lead they found the sea unfathomable, and their ship clear
+from all danger of rocks or shoals. The 30th they put into a great bay,
+out of which they could find no opening to the west, and resumed
+therefore a northern course. Here the ship trembled again with loud
+claps of thunder, and was almost set on fire by the lightning, had it
+not been prevented by prodigious rain.
+
+[Footnote 130: The centre of Schouten Island is in lat. 0 deg. 30' S. and
+long. 223 deg. W. It is nearly 24 leagues long from E. to W. and about eight
+leagues from N. to S. In some maps this island is named _Mysory_,
+probably the native appellation, and it lies off the mouth of a great
+bay, having within it another island of considerable size, called
+_Jobie_, or Traitor's Island.--E.]
+
+The 31st, continuing a northern course, they passed to the north of the
+equator, and being encompassed almost all round by land, they anchored
+in twelve fathoms on good ground, near a desolate island which lay close
+by the main land. The 1st of August they were in lat. 0 deg. 15' N. The 2d
+and 3d being calm, they were carried by the current W. and W. by N. This
+day at noon their latitude was 0 deg. 35' N. when they saw several whales
+and sea-tortoises, with two islands to the westwards. They now reckoned
+themselves at the western extremity of the land of New Guinea, along
+which they had sailed 280 leagues. Several canoes came off to them in
+the morning of the 5th, bringing Indian beans, rice, tobacco, and two
+beautiful birds of paradise, all white and yellow. These Indians spoke
+the language of Ternate, and some of them could speak a little Spanish
+and Malayan, in which last language Clawson the merchant was well
+skilled. All the people in these canoes were finely clothed from the
+waist downwards, some with loose silken robes, and others with breeches,
+and several had silken turbans on their head, being Mahometans. All of
+them had jet black hair, and wore many gold and silver rings on their
+fingers. They bartered their provisions with the Dutch for beads and
+other toys, but seemed more desirous of having linen. They appeared so
+fearful and suspicious of the Dutch, that they would not tell the name
+of their country, which however was suspected to be one of the three
+eastern points of Gilolo, and that the people were natives of Tidore,
+which was afterwards found to be the case.
+
+In the morning of the 6th they set sail, holding a northern, course,
+intending to go round the north point of Gilolo. The 7th they saw the
+north point of Morty, or Moraty, N.E. of Gilolo. Contending with
+variable winds and adverse currents it was the 19th before they could
+get into the bay of _Soppy_ in Gilolo, where they anchored in ten
+fathoms on sandy ground, about a cannon-shot from shore. Here they
+procured poultry, tortoises, sago, and rice, which was a great relief
+for the company, still consisting of eighty-five men in health and
+vigour. Leaving Soppy on the 25th August they came to the desert island
+of Moro on the 1st September, and, on closer examination, found it
+composed of several islands close together. They saw here a worm, or
+serpent, as thick as a man's leg and of great length. On the 5th they
+anchored off the coast of Gilolo. At this place some of the seamen went
+ashore unarmed to catch fish, when four Ternatese soldiers rushed
+suddenly out of the wood sword-in-hand while the Dutchmen were drawing
+their net, intending to have slain them; but the surgeon called out to
+them _Oran Hollanda_, that is, _Holland men_, on which the soldiers
+instantly stopped, throwing water on their heads in token of peace, and
+approaching in a friendly manner, said they had mistaken the Dutchmen
+for Spaniards. At the request of the seamen they went on board, where,
+being well treated, they promised to bring provisions and refreshment to
+the ship, which they afterwards did.
+
+Sailing thence on the 14th they got sight of Ternate and Tidore on the
+16th, and anchored on the 17th in the evening before Malaya in Ternate,
+in eleven fathoms sandy ground. Here captain Schouten and Jaques Le
+Maire went ashore, and were kindly entertained by the general Laurence
+Real, admiral Stephen Verhagen, and Jasper Janson, governor of Amboina.
+On the 18th they sold two of their pinnaces, with most of what had been
+saved out of the unfortunate Horn, receiving for the same 1350 reals,
+with part of which they purchased two lasts of rice, a ton of vinegar, a
+ton of Spanish wine, and three tons of biscuit. On the 27th they sailed
+for Bantam, and on the 28th of October anchored at Jacatra, now Batavia.
+John Peterson Koen, president for the Dutch East India Company at
+Bantam, arrived there on the 31st of October, and next day sequestered
+the Unity and her cargo, as forfeited to the India company for illegally
+sailing within the boundaries of their charter.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+In consequence of the seizure of the Unity, captain Schouten and Jaques
+Le Maire, with others of their people, embarked at Bantam in the
+Amsterdam and Zealand on the 14th December, 1616, on which they set sail
+for Holland. On the 31st of that month Jaques Le Maire died, chiefly of
+grief and vexation on account of the disastrous end of an enterprise
+which had been so successful till the arrest of the ship and cargo. He
+was, however, exceedingly solicitous about his journal, which he had
+kept with the utmost care during the voyage, and left a recommendation
+that it should be published, that the world might know and judge of the
+usage they had received. The Amsterdam arrived in Zealand on the 1st
+July, 1617, where her consort had arrived the day before. Thus was this
+circumnavigation of the globe completed in two years and eighteen days;
+which, considering the difficulties of the course, and other
+circumstances of the voyage, was a wonderfully short period.[131]
+
+[Footnote 131: In the Collection of Harris this voyage is succeeded by a
+dissertation on the high probability of a southern continent existing,
+and that this supposed continent must be another _Indies_. Both of these
+fancies being now sufficiently overthrown by the investigations of our
+immortal Cook, and other modern navigators, it were useless to encumber
+our pages with such irrelevant reveries.--E.]
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII.
+
+VOYAGE OF THE NASSAU FLEET ROUND THE WORLD, IN 1623-1626, UNDER THE
+COMMAND OF JAQUES LE HERMITE.[132]
+
+[Footnote 132: Harris I. 66. Callend. II. 286.]
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+
+The government of the United Netherlands, considering it proper to
+distress their arch enemy the king of Spain by every means in their
+power, determined upon sending a powerful squadron into the South Sea,
+to capture the ships of his subjects, to plunder the coasts of his
+dominions, and to demolish his fortifications. Accordingly, in autumn
+1622, a final resolution for this purpose was entered into by the States
+General, with the concurrence of their stadtholder, Prince Maurice of
+Orange, who even advanced a considerable sum of money towards it from
+his own funds; and a fleet of no less than eleven ships of war, besides
+smaller vessels, were ordered to be fitted out for the expedition, by
+the several admiralties of the Union and the East India Company. This
+fleet was in condition for putting to sea in spring 1623, when the
+command was intrusted to Jaques Le Hermite, an able and accomplished
+seaman of great experience, who had been long in the service of the East
+India Company, and was now appointed admiral of the fleet; Hugo
+Schapenham being vice-admiral. The ships fitted out on this occasion by
+the admiralty of Amsterdam were,--
+
+1. The Amsterdam of 800 tons, admiral, carrying twenty brass cannon and
+twenty-two iron, with 237 men, commanded by Leenders Jacobson Stolk, as
+captain, Peter Wely being supercargo, Engelbert Schutte commander of the
+soldiers on board, Frederick van Reneygom fiscal or judge-advocate, John
+van Walbeck, engineer, and Justin van Vogelair engineer extraordinary.
+
+2. The Delft of 800 tons, vice-admiral, having twenty brass and twenty
+iron cannon, with 242 men, commanded by captain Cornelius de Witte.
+
+3. The Eagle of 400 tons, captain Meydert Egbertson, of twelve brass and
+sixteen iron cannon, with 144 men.
+
+4. A yacht called the Greyhound, of sixty tons, captain Solomon
+Willelmson, carrying four brass cannons and twenty men.
+
+The admiralty of Zealand fitted out only one ship for this expedition.
+
+5. The Orange of 700 tons, captain Laurence John Quirynen, and carrying
+likewise the rear-admiral, John William Verschoor. Her complement of men
+was 216.[133]
+
+[Footnote 133: Her number of guns is not mentioned, but she could hardly
+have less than thirty-six from her size--E.]
+
+The admiralty of the Maes furnished the following ships:
+
+6. The Holland of 600 tons and 152 men, carrying ten pieces of brass and
+twenty of iron ordnance. In this ship was Cornelius Jacobson, who was
+counsellor to admiral Le Hermite, but the ship was immediately commanded
+by captain Adrian Troll.
+
+7. The Maurice of 360 tons and 169 men, having twelve brass and twenty
+iron cannon, commanded by captain James Adrianson.
+
+8. The Hope of 260 tons and eighty men, with fourteen iron cannon,
+captain Peter Hermanson Slobbe.
+
+The admiralty of North Holland also provided the following ships:
+
+9. The Concord of 600 tons and 170 men, with eighteen brass and fourteen
+iron cannon, captain John Ysbrandtz.
+
+10. The King David of 360 tons and seventy-nine men, with sixteen pieces
+of brass cannon, captain John Thomason.
+
+11. The Griffin of 320 tons, and seventy-eight men, with fourteen iron
+cannon, captain Peter Cornelison Hurdloop.
+
+The whole of this fleet of eleven sail, carrying 294 pieces of cannon,
+had 1637 men, of whom 600 were regular soldiers, divided into five
+companies of 120 men in each. The East India Company contributed largely
+to the expence, but does not appear to have equipped any ships on this
+occasion.
+
+
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Incidents of the Voyage from Holland to the South Sea_.
+
+This armament, usually called the Nassau fleet, was by far the most
+considerable that had hitherto been sent against the Spaniards in the
+new world, and none so powerful has since navigated along the western
+coast of America in an hostile manner. It sailed on the 29th April,
+1622, from Goeree roads, all but the Orange, which joined next day.
+
+On the 7th June, while chasing a Barbary corsair, a Christian slave, who
+happened to be at the helm, ran the corsair on board the Dutch
+vice-admiral, and immediately he and other slaves took the opportunity
+of leaping on board to escape from slavery. The captain of the corsair,
+who happened to be a Dutch renegado, followed them, and demanded
+restitution of his slaves; but the vice-admiral expostulated so strongly
+with him on the folly and infamy of deserting his country and religion,
+that he sent for every thing belonging to him out of the corsair, and
+agreed to go along with the fleet, to the regret of the Turks, who thus
+lost their captain and seventeen good men.
+
+On the 5th July the fleet anchored in the road of St Vincent, which is
+extremely safe and commodious, where they procured refreshments of
+sea-tortoises, fish, goats, and oranges. The islands of St Vincent and
+St Antonio are the most westerly of the Cape Verds, being in from 16 deg.
+30' to 18 deg. N. latitude, and about two leagues from each other. The bay
+of St Vincent, in which they anchored, is in lat. 16 deg. 56' N. and has a
+good firm sandy bottom, with eighteen, twenty, and twenty-five fathoms
+water. The island of St Vincent is rocky, barren, and uncultivated,
+having very little fresh water, though they found a small spring which
+might have served two or three ships. By digging wells they procured
+plenty of water, but somewhat brackish, to which they attributed the
+bloody flux, which soon after began to prevail in the fleet. The goats
+there, of which they caught fifteen or sixteen every day, were very fat
+and excellent eating. The sea-tortoises which they took there were from
+two to three feet long. They come on shore to lay their eggs, which they
+cover with sand, leaving them to be hatched by the heat of the sun.
+Their season of laying eggs is from August to February, remaining all
+the rest of the year in the sea. They caught every night great numbers
+of these animals while ashore to lay their eggs, and the sailors found
+them wholesome and pleasant food, eating more like flesh than fish.
+
+This island is altogether uninhabited, but the people of St Lucia come
+here once a year to catch tortoises, for the sake of an oil they prepare
+from them; and to hunt goats, the skins of which are sent to Portugal,
+and their flesh, after being salted and dried at St Jago, is exported to
+Brazil. There are no fruit-trees in this island, except a few wild figs
+in the interior; besides which, it produces colocinth, or bitter apple
+which is a very strong purge.[134] This island has a very dry climate,
+except during the rainy season, which begins in August and ends in
+February, but is not very regular.
+
+[Footnote 134: Cucumis Colocynthis, a plant of the cucumber family,
+producing a fruit about the size of an orange, the medullary part of
+which, when ripe, dried, and freed from the seeds, is a very light,
+white, spongy substance, composed of membranous leaves, excessively
+bitter, nauseous, and acrid.]
+
+The island of St Antonio is inhabited by about 500 negroes, including
+men, women, and children, who subsist chiefly on goats, and also
+cultivate a small quantity of cotton. On the sea-side they have
+extensive plantations of lemons and oranges, whence they gather great
+quantities every year. These were very readily supplied to the Dutch by
+the negroes in exchange for mercery goods, but they saw neither hogs,
+sheep, nor poultry in the island.
+
+Sailing from St Vincent's on the 25th July, they anchored in the road of
+Sierra Leona on the 11th August. Here on the 15th some of the crew being
+on shore, eat freely of certain nuts resembling nutmegs, which had a
+fine taste, but had scarcely got on board when one of them dropt down
+dead, and before he was thoroughly cold he was all over purple spots.
+The rest recovered by taking proper medicines. Sierra Leona is a
+mountain on the continent of Africa, standing on the south side of the
+mouth of the river Mitomba, which discharges itself into a great bay of
+the sea. The road in which ships usually anchor is in the lat. of 8 deg. 20'
+N. This mountain is very high, and thickly covered with trees, by which
+it may be easily known, as there is no mountain of such height any where
+upon the coast. There grow here a prodigious number of trees, producing
+a small kind of lemons called _limasses_, (limes?) resembling those of
+Spain in shape and taste, and which are very agreeable and wholesome, if
+not eaten to excess. The Dutch fleet arrived here at the season when
+this fruit was in perfection, and having full leave from the natives,
+the people eat them intemperately; by which, and the bad air, the bloody
+flux increased much among them, so that they lost forty men between the
+11th of August and the 5th September. Sierra Leona abounds in
+palm-trees, and has some ananas, or pine-apples, with plenty of wood of
+all sorts, besides having an exceedingly convenient watering-place
+opposite to the anchorage.
+
+They sailed from Sierra Leona on the 4th September, on which day the
+admiral fell sick. On the 29th they were off the island of St Thomas,
+just on the north side of the line, and anchored on the 1st of October
+at Cape Lopo Gonzalves, in lat. 0 deg. 50' S. At this place the surgeon of
+the Maurice was convicted on his own confession of having poisoned seven
+sick men, because they had given him much trouble, for which he was
+beheaded. On the 30th of October they anchored in the road of Annobon,
+where they obtained hogs and fowls, and were allowed to take in water,
+and to gather as many oranges as they thought proper. The east end of
+this island, where are the road and village, is in lat. 1 deg. 30' S. and
+long. 6 deg. E. from Greenwich. The island is about six leagues in circuit,
+consisting of high and tolerably good land, and is inhabited by about
+150 families of negroes, who are governed by two or three Portuguese, to
+whom they are very submissive. If any of them happen to be refractory,
+they are immediately sent away to the island of St Thomas, a punishment
+which they greatly dread. The island abounds in ananas, bananas,
+cocoa-nuts, tamarinds, and sugar-canes; but the principal inducement for
+ships touching here is the great plenty of oranges, of which the Dutch
+gathered upwards of 200,000, besides what the seamen eat while on shore.
+These oranges were of great size and full of juice, some weighing three
+quarters of a pound, and of an excellent taste and flavour, as if
+perfumed. They are to be had ripe all the year round, but there is one
+season in which they are best and fittest for keeping, which was past
+before the Dutch arrived, and the oranges were then mostly over ripe and
+beginning to rot. The island also produces lemons, and has plenty of
+oxen, cows, goats, and hogs, which the negroes bartered for salt. On the
+S.E. part of the island there is a good watering-place, but difficult to
+find, which is commanded by a stone breast-work, whence the negroes
+might greatly annoy any who attempted to water by force. They grow here
+some cotton, which is sent to Portugal. The natives are treacherous, and
+require to be cautiously dealt with.
+
+The fleet left Annobon on the 4th November, and on the 6th January,
+1624, they were in lat. 44 deg. 40' S. where they saw many sea-gulls, and
+much herbage floating on the water, whence they supposed themselves near
+the continent of South America. On the 19th the sea appeared as red as
+blood, proceeding from an infinite quantity of a small species of
+shrimps. On the 28th they lost sight of their bark, in which were
+eighteen men, three of them Portuguese. These people, as they afterwards
+learnt, having in vain endeavoured to rejoin the fleet, determined to
+return to Holland. Being in want of water, they sailed up the Rio de la
+Plata till they came into fresh water, after which they continued their
+voyage, suffering incredible hardships, and the utmost extremity of
+want, till they arrived on the coast of England, where they ran their
+vessel on shore to escape a privateer belonging to Dunkirk, and
+afterward got back to Holland.
+
+The 1st February the fleet came in sight of land, being Cape de
+Pennas.[135] Next day they found themselves at the mouth of the straits.
+This is easily distinguished, as the country on the east, called _Saten
+Land_, is mountainous, but broken and very uneven; while that on the
+west, called _Maurice Land_ by the Dutch, or Terra del Fuego, has
+several small round hills close to the shore. The 6th they had sight of
+Cape Horn; and on the 11th, being in lat. 58 deg. 30' S. they had
+excessively cold weather, which the people were ill able to bear, being
+on short allowance. On the 16th they were in lat. 56 deg. 10' S. Cape Horn
+being then to the east of them, and anchored on the 17th in a large bay,
+which they named _Nassau bay_.[136] Another bay was discovered on the
+18th, in which there was good anchorage, with great convenience for
+wooding and watering, and which they called Schapenham's bay, after the
+name of their vice-admiral.
+
+[Footnote 135: This seems to be what is now called Cape St Vincent, at
+the W. side of the entrance into the Straits of Le Maire.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 136: The centre of Nassau bay is in lat. 55 deg. 30' N. long. 68 deg.
+20' W. This bay is formed between Terra del Fuego on the north, and
+Hermite's island south by east, the south-eastern extreme point of which
+is Cape Horn. This island appears to have been named after admiral Le
+Hermite.--E.]
+
+On the 23d a storm arose with such violence that nineteen men belonging
+to the Eagle were compelled to remain on shore; and next day, when the
+boats were able to go for them, only two of these men were left alive,
+the savages having come upon them in the dark, and knocked seventeen of
+them on the head with their slings and wooden clubs, the poor Dutchmen
+being all unarmed, and not having offered the least injury or insult to
+the savages. Only five of the dead bodies were found on the shore, which
+were strangely mangled, all the rest having been carried away by the
+savages, as it was supposed, to eat them. After this, every boat that
+went ashore carried eight or ten soldiers for their security; but none
+of the savages ever appeared again.
+
+The vice-admiral went on the 25th in the Greyhound to visit the coast.
+On his return he reported to the admiral, that he found the Terra del
+Fuego divided into several islands, and that it was by no means
+necessary to double Cape Horn in order to get into the South Sea, as
+they might pass out from Nassau bay to the west into the open sea,
+leaving Cape Horn on the south. He apprehended also, that there were
+several passages from Nassau bay leading into the Straits of Magellan.
+The greatest part of the _Terra del Fuego_ is mountainous, but
+interspersed with many fine vallies and meadows, and watered by numerous
+streams or rivulets, descending from the hills. Between the islands
+there are many good roads, where large fleets may anchor in safety, and
+where there is every desirable convenience for taking in wood, water,
+and ballast. The winds, which rage here more than in any other country,
+and with inexpressible violence, blow constantly from the west, for
+which reason such ships as are bound westerly ought to avoid this coast
+as much as possible, keeping as far south as they can, where they are
+likely to meet with southerly winds to facilitate their westerly course.
+
+The inhabitants of the Terra del Fuego are as fair as any Europeans, as
+was concluded by seeing a young child; but the grown-up people disguise
+themselves strangely, painting themselves with a red earth after many
+fanciful devices, some having their heads, others their arms, their legs
+and thighs red, and other parts of their bodies white. Many of them have
+one half of their bodies red, from the forehead to the feet, and the
+other side white. They are all strong made and well-proportioned, and
+generally about the same stature with Europeans. Their hair is black,
+which they wear long, thick, and bushy, to make them the more frightful.
+They have good teeth, but very thin, and as sharp as the edge of a
+knife. The men go entirely naked, and the women have only a piece of
+skin about their waists, which is very surprising, considering the
+severity of the climate. Their huts are made of trees, in the form of a
+round tent, having a hole at the top to let out the smoke. Within they
+are sunk two or three feet under the surface of the ground, and the
+earth taken from this hollow is thrown upon the outside. Their
+fishing-tackle is very curious, and is furnished with hooks made of
+stone, nearly of the same shape with ours. They are variously armed,
+some having bows and arrows artificially headed with stone; others long
+javelins or spears, headed with bone; some have great wooden clubs, some
+have slings, and most have stone knives, or daggers, which are very
+sharp. They are never seen without their arms, as they are always at war
+among themselves; and it would appear that the several tribes paint
+differently, that they may distinguish each other; for the people about
+the island of _Torhaltens_, and about _Schapenham bay_, were all painted
+black, while those about _Greyhound bay_ were painted red.
+
+Their canoes are very singular, being formed of bark, fortified both on
+the inside and outside with several pieces of small wood, and then
+covered over by bark, so as to be both tight and strong. These canoes
+are from ten to fourteen, and even sixteen feet long, and two feet
+broad, and will contain seven or eight men, who navigate them as swiftly
+as our boats. In manners, these people resemble beasts more than men,
+for they tear human bodies in pieces, and eat the raw and bloody flesh.
+They have not the smallest spark of religion, neither any appearance of
+polity or civilization, being in all respects utterly brutal, insomuch
+that if they have occasion to make water, they let fly upon whoever is
+nearest them. They have no knowledge of our arms, and would even lay
+their hands on the edges of the Dutchmen's swords; yet are exceedingly
+cunning, faithless, and cruel; shewing every appearance of friendship at
+one time, and instantly afterwards murdering those with whom they have
+been familiar. The Dutch found it impossible to procure any kind of
+refreshments from them, though such surely were among them, for
+quantities of cow-dung were seen; and their bow-strings were made of ox
+sinews: besides, a soldier who went ashore from the Greyhound yacht,
+while she lay at anchor, reported to the vice-admiral, that he had seen
+a large herd of cattle feeding in a meadow.[137]
+
+[Footnote 137: This is not at all likely to have been true. The cattle,
+the dung, and the sinews mentioned in the text, are more likely to have
+been of some species of the seal tribe--E.]
+
+On the 27th of February, 1624, the admiral made a signal for sailing,
+the wind being then N. so that hopes were entertained of getting from
+the bay of Nassau to the west; but a storm came on in the evening at W.
+and blew hard all night. March 3d, they had an observation at noon, when
+they were in lat, 59 deg. 45' S. with the wind at N.W. Hitherto it had been
+the opinion of nautical men, that it was easy to get from the Straits of
+Le Maire to Chili, but hardly possible to pass from Chili by that strait
+into the Atlantic, as they imagined that the south wind blew constantly
+in these seas: but they now found the case quite otherwise, as the
+frequent tempests they encountered from W. and N.W. rendered it beyond
+comparison easier to have passed through the Straits of Le Maire from
+the South Sea than from the Atlantic.
+
+The wind still continuing strong from the west on the 6th, the admiral
+held a council to consider of a proper rendezvous for the fleet, in case
+of separation, or of being forced to winter, if these west winds should
+still continue to oppose their entry into the South Sea. Some proposed
+the Terra del Fuego, and others the Straits of Magellan. But the
+majority were of opinion, that it was best to wait two months for a fair
+wind, and to use their utmost endeavours to get into the South Sea. On
+the 8th they were in 61 deg. S. on the 14th in 58 deg., and on the 18th, 19th
+and 20th they had a fair wind at S.E. with warm weather, so that they
+were now in hopes of having accomplished their purpose. On the 24th they
+lost sight of the Maurice and David, the fleet being now reduced to
+seven sail; and the same evening they were in lat. 47 deg. S. The 25th,
+having still a fair wind and good weather, they reached 45 deg. S. and were
+then in great hopes of overcoming all difficulties. The 28th they got
+sight of the coast of Chili, bearing E.S.E. and in the evening were
+within a league of the shore, which appeared high and mountainous.
+
+
+
+
+
+SECTION II:
+
+_Transactions of the Fleet on the Western Coast of America_.
+
+The admiral was at this time confined to bed, and wished to have put
+into the port of Chiloe; but his instructions did not allow of this
+measure, requiring the performance of some action of importance against
+the Spaniards in Peru. It was therefore resolved to proceed for the
+island of Juan Fernandez, to make the best preparations in their power
+for attacking the Spanish galleons in the port of Arica, if found there,
+and to gain possession of that place, after which it was proposed to
+extend their conquests by the aid of the Indians. On the 1st April,
+being then in lat. 38 deg. 10' S. the vice-admiral took to his bed, quite
+worn out with fatigue, so that they expected to lose both the admiral
+and him. On the 4th they had sight of Juan Fernandez, in lat. 33 deg. 50' S.
+and next day came to anchor in sixty fathoms in a fine bay. The 6th
+orders were issued to provide all the ships with as many
+cheveaux-de-frize and pallisades as they could. The Griffin joined the
+fleet in the evening, not having been seen since the 2d February. She
+had been in the lat. of 60 deg. S. and had got into the South Sea without
+seeing Cape Horn. The Orange arrived on the 7th, having twice seen the
+southern continent on her passage, once in lat. 50 deg., and the other time
+in lat. 41 deg. S.[138] The David came in on the 7th, bringing advice of the
+Maurice, both vessels having been five or six days beating about the
+island, but hindered from getting in by contrary winds.
+
+[Footnote 138: No land whatever could be seen in these latitudes in the
+eastern Pacific, so that they must have been deceived by fog, banks, or
+islands of ice.--E.]
+
+The larger and more easterly of the two islands of Juan Fernandez is in
+the latitude of 30 deg. 40' S. five degrees west from the coast of Chili;
+this island being called by the Spaniards _Isla de Tierra_, and the
+smaller or more westerly island _Isla de Fuera_, which is a degree and
+a half farther east.[139]
+
+[Footnote 139: Isola de Tierra, the eastermost of these islands of Juan
+Fernandez, in lat. 33 deg. 42' S. and long. 79 deg. 5' E. is about 15 English
+miles from E. to W. by 5-1/2 miles in its greatest breadth from N. to S.
+Besides this and Isola de Fuera, mentioned in the text, there is still a
+third, or smallest island, a mile and a half south from the S.W. end of
+the Isola de Tierra, called Isola de Cabras or Conejos, Goat or Rabbit
+island, three English miles from N.W. to S.E. and a mile in
+breadth.--E.]
+
+The more easterly and larger island, at which the Nassau fleet anchored,
+is about six leagues in circuit, and is about two leagues and a half
+long, from east to west. The road is on the N.E. part of the island,
+from whence there is a beautiful prospect of valleys covered with
+clover. The ground of this bay is in some places rocky, and in others a
+fine black sand, and it affords good anchorage in thirty to thirty-five
+fathoms. The island produces excellent water, and fish are to be had in
+abundance in the bay, and of various kinds. Many thousand seals and
+sea-lions come daily on shore to bask in the sun, of which the seamen
+killed great numbers, both for food and amusement. Some of the Dutch
+fancied that the flesh of these animals tasted as if twice cooked, while
+others thought, after the grease and tallow were carefully taken out,
+that it was as good as mutton. There were many goats in the island, but
+difficult to be taken, and neither so fat nor so well tasted as those of
+St Vincents. There were plenty of palm-trees in the interior, and three
+large quince-trees near the bay, the fruit of which was very refreshing.
+They found also plenty of timber for all kinds of uses, but none fit for
+masts. Formerly, ten or twelve Indians used to reside here, for the sake
+of fishing and making oil from the seals and sea-lions, but it was now
+quite uninhabited. Three gunners and three soldiers belonging to the
+vice-admiral, were so sick of the voyage, that they asked and obtained
+leave to remain here.
+
+Every thing being in readiness, the fleet departed from _Isla de Tierra_
+on the 13th April. On the 8th May, being near the coast of Peru, they
+took a Spanish bark, in which, besides the captain, there were four
+Spaniards, and six or seven Indians and Negroes. From these, they learnt
+that the Plate fleet had sailed on the 3d of the month from Calao de
+Lima for Panama, consisting of five treasure ships, three rich
+merchantmen, and two men of war. They were also informed that the
+Spanish admiral was still at Calao, his ship being of 800 tons burden,
+and mounting 40 brass cannon; besides which, there were two _pataches_
+of 14 guns each, and forty or fifty unarmed merchant vessels. All these
+vessels were said to have been hauled on shore, and secured by three
+strong batteries and other works, furnished with upwards of fifty pieces
+of cannon, all ready prepared for the reception of the Dutch, of whose
+motions the Spaniards had received early and certain intelligence. The
+viceroy had likewise formed four companies of foot, of eighty men each,
+but the two best companies had gone with the ships to Panama; and,
+having just learnt the approach of the Dutch fleet, the viceroy had
+summoned the whole military force of Peru, so that many thousand men
+must soon be expected at Lima for its defence.
+
+After several consultations, the vice-admiral made an attempt to land at
+Calao with the soldiers on the morning of the 10th May, but finding it
+impossible with any chance of success, was obliged to return to the
+fleet. On the 12th about midnight, three of the Dutch captains, with
+twelve armed boats, each provided with a small cannon and a considerable
+quantity of fire-works, made an attack on the port, while a false attack
+was made at the same time in another part, to draw off the attention of
+the Spaniards. The twelve boats entered the port, and distributed their
+fire-works plentifully among the Spanish merchant ships, by which thirty
+or forty of them were set on fire and consumed, some of them very large.
+In this hardy enterprise, the Dutch had seven men killed, and fifteen
+wounded, mostly in the vice-admiral's boat, which had attempted to board
+one of the _pataches_ and was beaten off. About the dawn of day, nine of
+the flaming ships drifted towards the Dutch fleet, which was therefore
+obliged to weigh and take shelter behind the island of Lima. On the 13th
+this island was taken possession of, and a strong intrenchment thrown up
+for its defence, under cover of which the Dutch laid their shallops on
+shore to careen them.
+
+On the 14th Cornelius Jacobson sailed with a division of the fleet, to
+cruize off La Nasca, Pisco, and other towns to the south of Lima. A rich
+prize was taken on the 23d, coming from Guayaquil; and that same day,
+the rear-admiral was detached with two ships and two companies of
+soldiers to attempt taking Guayaquil, but they found it too strongly
+defended. On the 27th an attempt was made to destroy the Spanish
+admiral's ship in the port of Calao, by means of a fire-ship containing
+2000 pounds of gun-powder, besides fire-works and shells, confined by a
+brick arch six feet thick; but after navigating her very near the
+galleon, a bank was found on the outside of her which they could not
+pass, and they were therefore obliged to retire.
+
+Admiral Jaques Le Hermite, who had been in a declining state of health
+from the time they left Sierra Leona, died on the 2d June, and was
+buried next day in the island of Lima. The Spanish viceroy having
+refused to ransom the prisoners made by the Dutch, and the ships being
+straitened for provisions especially water, twenty-one Spaniards were
+hung up at the mizen yard-arm of the Dutch admiral's ship on the 15th
+June. That same evening, Cornelius Jacobson returned with his
+detachment, having made an ineffectual attempt on Pisco, which he found
+strongly fortified, and defended by 2000 men, besides a body of 200
+horse which scoured the country. In this attempt he had five men killed
+and sixteen wounded, and thirteen deserted to the enemy. At this time
+the scurvy prevailed to a great height in the fleet, so that some of the
+ships had not sufficient men in a sound state to man their boats; but
+one day a Swiss, who was very ill of the scurvy, scrambled up to the top
+of the highest hill in the island of Lima,[140] where he found plenty of
+a kind of herb with which he had been well acquainted in his own
+country, and by eating which he soon recovered his health. This becoming
+public, his example was universally followed, by which the best part of
+the men were saved from death, and in a short time recovered their
+health and spirits. On the 5th August, the vice-admiral was installed as
+admiral, the rear-admiral succeeding him as vice-admiral, and Cornelius
+Jacobson was advanced to be rear-admiral.
+
+[Footnote 140: The island of San Lorenzo, a little to the south of
+Calao, is evidently here meant.--E.]
+
+The new vice-admiral soon after returned from his expedition to the road
+of Puna and Guayaquil, where he had burnt two ships and captured a
+third. He had also taken Guayaquil after considerable loss, and finding
+it untenable, and not having boats to carry away the booty, he had set
+it on fire, burning a great quantity of rich goods in the warehouses,
+after which he reimbarked his men. The Dutch fleet sailed from the
+island of Lima on the 14th of August, and anchored that same evening in
+a bay behind the Piscadores islands, about twenty-three miles north,
+where they watered. Continuing their course on the 16th, they came in
+sight of the island of Santa Clara, or Amortajado, on the 24th,
+intending once more to visit Guayaquil. The fleet anchored on the 25th
+in the road of the island of Puna, whence all the people had fled, both
+Spanish and Indians, so that no intelligence could be procured of the
+strength and dispositions of the enemy. On the 27th, the guns, ballast,
+and stores of all kinds were removed from three of the largest ships,
+which were laid ashore to be careened. On the 28th, news came of the
+second attempt upon Guayaquil having miscarried, through the fault of
+some of the officers, the troops being defeated and obliged to reimbark,
+with the loss of twenty-eight men. On the 1st September, the three
+largest ships being careened, they began to careen the rest.
+
+It was resolved in a council of war not to prosecute the originally
+intended expedition to Chili at this time, but to proceed for Acapulco,
+in order to cruize for the Manilla ship; and afterwards, if the
+condition of the fleet permitted, to return to the coast of Chili.
+Accordingly, having set fire to the town of Puna, they sailed from
+thence on the 12th September, and on the 20th October had sight of the
+coast of New Spain. On the 28th at day-break they were within half a
+league of an island which lies before the port of Acapulco and anchored
+in the evening within sight of the fort, which had been rebuilt the year
+before, on a point running out to sea, in order to protect the Manilla
+ships, which might ride safely at anchor under the cannon of that
+fortress. On the 1st November, a strong detachment of the fleet was sent
+to anchor twenty leagues west from Acapulco, to look out for the
+galleon, the admiral and the Orange remaining before the port, and the
+other ships spread along the coast, that they might be sure of
+intercepting the galleon. On the 29th, water becoming scarce, and no
+appearance of the galleon, it was resolved to proceed with all diligence
+for the East Indies.
+
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_Voyage Home from the Western Coast of America_.
+
+Proceeding therefore across the Great Pacific Ocean, they saw some very
+low land towards the west on the 15th January, 1625, over which the sea
+broke with great violence, and which they conjectured to be the island
+of Galperico.[141] On the 23d the scurvy had made much progress, that
+there were hardly men enough to work the ships. In the evening of the
+25th, they were off the coast of Guam, one of the Ladrones or Mariane
+islands, the inhabitants coming two leagues out to sea to meet them,
+with all sorts of refreshments, which they exchanged for old iron, and
+next morning 150 canoes came off with fruits and garden stuffs. On the
+27th a good watering-place was found, where fifty soldiers were landed
+to protect the seamen. In the beginning of February, the natives brought
+them considerable quantities of rice, giving 70 or 80 pounds weight in
+exchange for an old hatchet. On the 5th, by a general muster, 1260 men
+were found to remain in the fleet, including 32 Spanish and Negro
+prisoners, so that they had lost 409 since leaving Holland.
+
+[Footnote 141: The relation of the voyage is too vague even to
+conjecture what island is here meant, but from the direction of the
+course towards Guam or Guaham it may possibly have been that now called
+Dawson's island, about 600 leagues nearly east from Guam.--E.]
+
+The island of Guam, Guaham, or Guaci, one of the group named by the
+Spaniards _Islas de las Velas, Ladrones_, or _Mariane_ Islands, is in
+lat 13 deg. 40' N.[142] The soil is tolerably fertile producing vast
+quantities of cocoas, and the natives grow rice in several places. The
+Dutch procured here about 2000 fowls, but the natives would not part
+with their cattle for any price. The people of this island are larger
+than other Indians' strong and well-proportioned, and are mostly painted
+red, the men going entirely naked, and the women having a leaf to cover
+their nakedness. Their arms are _assagaies_, or javelins and slings,
+both of which they use with great dexterity. Their canoes are very
+convenient, and go before the wind at a great rate; neither are these
+islanders afraid of putting to sea even in a storm; as, in case of their
+vessels being overset, they turn them up again immediately, and bale out
+the water. They were also very expert in cheating; for when the Dutch
+came to examine the bags of rice they had bought so cheap, they found
+the insides full of stones and dirt; besides which, they stole every
+thing they could lay hold of. Such persons also as land on this island
+ought to be very cautious, as the Dutch had several of their people
+slain here, through their own folly.
+
+[Footnote 142: Lat. 13 deg. 20' N. long. 143 deg. 20' E. from Greenwich.]
+
+Proceeding on the voyage, they saw an island on the 14th of February, in
+the latitude of 10 deg. 30' N. which they took to be the island of
+Saavedra.[143] Next day, about nine in the morning, they saw another
+island, not laid down in the charts, in lat. 9 deg. 45' N.[144] the natives
+of which came out to them in canoes with fruits and other refreshments,
+but as the ships were sailing at a great rate, they were not able to get
+on board. The people seemed much like those of Guam, and the island
+seemed very populous and highly cultivated. It was now resolved to
+continue their course to the island of Gilolo, and thence to Ternate.
+The 2d March, they had sight of the high mountain of [illegible], on the
+coast of Moco, at the west end of the great island of [illegible] or
+_Gilolo_, on the west side of which the Molucca islands are situated.
+They arrived at _Malaya_, the principal place in Ternate, on the 4th in
+the evening. The 5th, or, according to the computation of the
+inhabitants, the 6th, Jacob Le Feare, governor of the Moluccas, came to
+visit the admiral, from _Taluco_, where he then resided. The fleet
+proceeded on the 4th of April to Amboina, and on the 28th sailed for
+Batavia, where they arrived on the 29th of August. Here the fleet was
+separated, part being sent on an expedition against Malacca, and others
+to other places, so that here the voyage of the Nassau fleet may be said
+to end, without having completed the circumnavigation, at least in an
+unbroken series.
+
+[Footnote 143: The island of Saavedra is in 10 deg. 30'N. Not far from this
+is the isle of [illegible] in Lat. 10 deg. 10' N. and Long. [illegible] E.
+from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 144: This probably was the isle of [illegible], mentioned in
+the previous note.--E.]
+
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+After this expedition, there occurs a wide chasm in the history of
+circumnavigations, all that was attempted in this way, for many years
+afterwards, being more the effect of chance than of design.--_Harris_.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII.
+
+VOYAGE ROUND THE WORLD, IN 1683-1691, BY CAPTAIN JOHN COOKE, ACCOMPANIED
+BY CAPTAIN COWLEY, AND CAPTAIN WILLIAM DAMPIER.[145]
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+
+In the Collection of Voyages and Travels by Harris, this voyage is made
+two separate articles, as if two distinct voyages, one under the name of
+Captain Cowley, and the other under that of Dampier; though both are
+avowedly only separate relations of the same voyage, which was commanded
+by Captain Cooke, and ought to have gone under his name. On the present
+occasion both relations are retained, for reasons which will appear
+sufficiently obvious in the sequel; but we have placed both in one
+chapter, because only a single circumnavigation, though somewhat
+branched out by the separation of the original adventures. This chapter
+is divided into three sections: the _first_ of which contains the
+narrative of the principal voyage, so far as related by Captain Cowley;
+along with which the observations of Dampier upon many of the places,
+visited during the voyage, are introduced. The _second_ continues the
+adventures of Cowley on his return from India to Europe, after
+separating from his first companions. The _third_ resumes the relation
+of the voyage, as written by Dampier, and gives a continuation of the
+enterprise, after the separation of Cowley.
+
+[Footnote 145: Dampier's Voyage round the World, and Cowley's do. both
+in a Coll. of Voyages in four vols. 8vo, published at London in 1729.
+Also Harris, I. 77. and Callender, II. 528.]
+
+In the remainder of this introduction, taken from the Collection by
+Harris, an account is given of the origin of this voyage, together with
+a sketch of the previous adventures of Dampier, before engaging in this
+enterprise, in both of which are contained some notices of the lawless,
+yet famous Buccaneers, respecting whom a more detailed account is
+proposed to be inserted in a subsequent division of this work. Dampier
+published an account of this voyage, to be found in a Collection of
+Voyages, in four volumes 8vo, printed at London in 1729, for James and
+John Knapton, and which have been used in preparing the present relation
+of this voyage for the press.--E.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The adventures of the _Buccaneers of America_, however blameable, will
+render these men ever famous by their wonderful exploits. They usually
+fitted out small vessels in some of our colonies of America, and cruised
+in these till they were able to make prize of some larger ships. As
+their designs required the utmost secrecy, they very often took masters
+and pilots on board under false pretences, and did not explain to them
+the true nature of their expeditions till out to sea, when they were
+absolute masters. This was the case with Captain Cowley on the present
+occasion, a very intelligent man and able navigator, who happened to be
+in Virginia in 1683, and was prevailed upon to go as master of a
+privateer, said to be bound for _Petit Goave_, a French port in the
+island of St Domingo, where these people used to take commissions. In
+reality, however, their purpose was to take what prizes they could,
+without the formality of a commission.
+
+It is proper to state, that this voyage, at least in part, is the same
+with the _first_ voyage of Captain Dampier round the world. Before
+proceeding to the incidents of the voyage, we shall give a concise
+account of the grounds on which it was undertaken, and the commanders
+who were engaged in it; and this the rather, that the original journal
+of Captain Cowley, published by Captain Hacke, gives very little
+information on these subjects, probably because Cowley was ashamed of
+having engaged in such an expedition.
+
+Among the Buccaneers who did so much mischief in the Spanish West
+Indies, was one John Cooke, a native of the island of St Christophers, a
+brisk bold man, who so distinguished himself as to be promoted to the
+rank of quarter-master in the ship commanded by Captain Yankey. On
+taking a Spanish prize, which was converted into a privateer, Cooke
+claimed the command of her, according to the custom, of the Buccaneers;
+and being extremely popular, soon engaged a sufficient number of men to
+serve under him. The great majority of the Buccaneers at this time being
+French, and dissatisfied to see an Englishman invested with such a
+command, merely by the choice of the crew, without any commission, they
+plundered the English of their ships, goods, and arms, and turned them
+ashore on the island of _Avache_, on the coast of St Domingo, usually
+called _Ash_ by English seamen. On this occasion, an old Buccaneer,
+named Captain _Tristian_, having more humanity than the rest, carried
+Captain Davis, Captain Cooke, and eight other Englishmen to Petit Goave;
+where, while Captain Tristian and many of his men were ashore, these
+Englishmen made themselves masters of the ship, sending all the French
+in their turn ashore, and sailed to Avache, where, by using Captain
+Tristian's name to the governor, they procured all the rest of their
+countrymen to be sent on board.
+
+Being now sufficiently strong to set up for themselves, they resolved to
+make prize of whatever came in their way, and accordingly took two
+French ships, one laden with wine, and the other of considerable force,
+in which they embarked, carrying her and their prize goods to Virginia,
+where they arrived in April 1683. After selling their wines and other
+goods, they purchased provisions, naval stores, and every thing else
+that might be wanted during a long voyage, and fitted out their prize
+ship as a privateer, naming her the Revenge. According to the narrative
+of Cowley, she carried eight guns and 52 men, while Dampier gives her 18
+guns and 70 men.[146]
+
+[Footnote 146: This difference, at least in regard to the size and force
+of the ship, will be found explained in the sequel, as they took a
+larger ship on the coast of Africa, which they used during the voyage,
+and named the Revenge after their own ship. The additional number of men
+mentioned by Dampier is not accounted for.--E.]
+
+Before proceeding to the narratives of this voyage, it is proper to give
+a concise account of Captain William Dampier, extracted from his own
+works, being an extraordinary character and an eminent navigator, whose
+many discoveries ought to recommend his memory to posterity, as a man of
+infinite industry, and of a most laudable public spirit. Captain William
+Dampier was descended of a very respectable family in the county of
+Somerset, where he was born in 1652. During the life of his father and
+mother, he had such education as was thought requisite to fit him for
+trade; but losing his parents while very young, and being of a roving
+disposition, which strongly incited him to the sea, those who now had
+the care of him resolved to comply with his humour, and bound him about
+1669 to the master of a ship who lived at Weymouth, in Dorsetshire. With
+this master he made a voyage to France that year, and in the next went
+to Newfoundland; but was so pinched by the severity of that climate,
+that on his return he went home to his friends, almost tired of the sea.
+Soon after his return, however, hearing of a ship bound for the East
+Indies from London, he went there in 1670, and entered before the mast
+in the John and Martha, in which he made a voyage to Bantam.
+
+He returned to England in January, 1672, and retired to the house of his
+brother in Somersetshire, where he remained all the ensuing summer. In
+1673, he entered on board the Prince Royal, commanded by the famous Sir
+Edward Spragge, and was in two engagements that summer against the
+Dutch. He afterwards returned to his brother's house, where he met with
+one Colonel Hellier, who had a large estate in Jamaica, and who
+persuaded him to go over to that island, where he was some time employed
+in the management of that gentleman's plantation. Not liking the life of
+a planter, which he continued somewhat more than a year, he engaged
+among the logwood cutters, and embarked from Jamaica for Campeachy, in
+August 1675, but returned to Jamaica in the end of that year. In
+February 1676, he went again to Campeachy, where he acquainted himself
+thoroughly with the business of logwood cutting, in which he proposed to
+advance his fortune; for which purpose he returned to England in 1678.
+While in Campeachy, he became acquainted with some Buccaneers, who gave
+him an inclination for that kind of life, in which he was afterwards
+engaged, but of which in the sequel he became much ashamed.
+
+He returned from England to Jamaica in April 1679, intending to become a
+complete logwood cutter and trader at the bay of Campeachy; but changed
+his mind, and laid out most part of what he was worth in purchasing a
+small estate in Dorsetshire. He then agreed with one Hobby to make a
+trip to the continent, before returning to England. Soon after
+commencing this voyage, coming to anchor in Negril bay at the west end
+of Jamaica, they found there Captains Coxon, Sawkins, Sharpe, and other
+privateers, with whom all Mr Hobby's men entered, leaving only Mr
+Dampier, who also at length consented to go with them. This was about
+the end of 1679, and their first expedition was against Portobello. This
+being accomplished, they resolved to cross the isthmus of Darien, and to
+pursue their predatory courses against the Spaniards in the South Sea.
+On the 5th April, 1680, they landed near _Golden Island_, between three
+and four hundred strong; and carrying with them sufficient provisions,
+and some toys to gratify the Indians, through whose country they had to
+pass, they arrived in nine days march at _Santa Maria_, which they
+easily took, but found neither gold nor provisions, as they expected.
+
+After staying three days at Santa Maria, they embarked in canoes and
+other small craft for the South Sea. They came in sight of Panama on the
+23d April, and in vain attempted to take _Puebla Nova_, where their
+commander Captain Sawkins was slain. They then withdrew to the isles of
+_Quibo_, whence they sailed on the 6th June for the coast of Peru; and
+touching at the islands of _Gorgonia_ and _Plata_, they came in the
+month of October to _Ylo_, which they took. About Christmas of that year
+they arrived at the island of Juan Fernandez, where they deposed Captain
+Sharpe, who had the chief command after the death of Sawkins, and
+elected Captain Watling in his stead. Under his command they made an
+attempt upon Arica, but were repulsed with the loss of twenty-eight men,
+among whom was their new commander Watling. After this they sailed for
+some time without any commander; and, arriving at the island of _Plata_,
+they split into two factions about the choice of a new commander. Before
+proceeding to the election, it was agreed that the majority, together
+with the new commander, should keep the ship, and the minority should
+content themselves with the canoes and other small craft. On the poll,
+Captain Sharpe was restored, and Mr Dampier, who had voted against him,
+prepared, together with his associates, to return over land to the Gulf
+of Mexico.
+
+Accordingly, on the 17th April, 1681, they quitted Captain Sharpe,
+without electing any commander, and resolved to repass the Isthmus of
+Darien, though only forty-seven men. This was one of the boldest
+enterprises ever ventured upon by so small a number of men, yet they
+succeeded without any considerable loss. Landing on the continent on the
+1st of May, they repassed the isthmus in twenty-three days; and on the
+24th embarked in a French privateer, commanded by Captain Tristian, with
+whom they joined a fleet of nine buccaneers, on board of which were
+nearly 600 men. With this great force they were in hopes of doing great
+things against the Spaniards; but, owing to various accidents, and
+especially to disagreement among the commanders, they had very little
+success. Dampier and his companions, who had returned over land from the
+South Sea, made themselves masters of a _tartan_, and, electing Captain
+Wright to the command, they cruised along the Spanish coast with some
+success, and went to the Dutch settlement of Curacoa, where they
+endeavoured to sell a good quantity of sugar they had taken in a Spanish
+ship. Not being able to effect this purpose, they continued their voyage
+to the Tortugas islands, and thence to the Caraccas, where they captured
+three barks, one laden with hides, another with European commodities,
+and the third with earthenware and brandy.
+
+With these prizes they sailed to the island of _Roca_, where they shared
+them, and then resolved to separate, though only consisting of sixty
+men. Twenty of these, among whom was Dampier, proceeded with their share
+of the goods in one of these barks to Virginia, where they arrived in
+July, 1682. After continuing there some time, a considerable part of
+them made a voyage to Carolina, whence they returned to Virginia. Having
+spent the best part of their wealth, they were now ready to proceed upon
+any plan that might offer for procuring more. Soon after Captain Cooke,
+of whom some account has been already given, came to Virginia with his
+prize, and published his intention of going into the South Sea to cruise
+against the Spaniards. Dampier, who was his old acquaintance, and knew
+him to be an able commander, readily agreed to go with him, and induced
+most of his companions to do the same, which was of much consequence to
+Cooke, as it furnished him with a full third of his crew.
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Narrative of the Voyage by Captain Cowley, till he quitted the Revenge
+on the Western Coast of America_.[147]
+
+They sailed from Achamack in Virginia on the 23d August, 1683, taking
+their departure from Cape Charles in the Revenge of eight guns and
+fifty-two men, John Cooke commander, and bound for the South Sea; but
+Captain Cowley, who had charge of the navigation of the Revenge as
+master, not being then let into the secret object of the enterprise,
+steered a course for Petit Goave in St Domingo, in which he was indulged
+for the first day, but was then told that they were bound in the first
+place for the coast of Guinea. He then steered E.S.E. for the Cape de
+Verd islands, and arrived at _Isola de Sal_, or the Salt island, in the
+month of September. They here found neither fruits nor water, but great
+plenty of fish, and some goats, but the last were very small. At this
+time the island, which is in the latitude of 16 deg. 50' N. and longitude
+23 deg. W. from Greenwich, was very oddly inhabited, and as strangely
+governed. Its whole inhabitants consisted of four men and a boy, and all
+the men were dignified with titles. One, a mulatto, was governor, two
+were captains, and the fourth lieutenant, the boy being their only
+subject, servant, and soldier. They procured here about twenty bushels
+of salt, the only commodity of the island, which they paid for in old
+clothes, and a small quantity of powder and shot; and in return for
+three or four goats, gave the governor a coat, of which he was in great
+want, and an old hat. The salt in which this island abounds, and from
+which it derives its name, is formed naturally by the heat of the sun
+from the sea-water, which is let into great ponds about two English
+miles in extent.
+
+[Footnote 147: The original narrative of this voyage, written by Captain
+Cowley, is contained in the fourth volume of the Collection of Voyages
+published in 1729 by James and John Knapton, usually denominated
+Dampier's Voyages, and has been used on the present occasion.--E]
+
+This island is about nine leagues from N. to S. and about two leagues
+from E. to W. and has abundance of salt ponds, whence it derives its
+name, but produces no trees, and hardly even any grass, some few poor
+goats feeding scantily upon shrubs near the sea. It is frequented by
+wild fowl, especially a reddish bird named _Flamingo_, shaped like a
+heron, but much larger, which lives in ponds and muddy places, building
+their nests of mud in shallow pools of standing waters. Their nests are
+raised like conical hillocks, two feet above the water, having holes on
+the top, in which they lay their eggs, and hatch them while standing on
+their long legs in the water, covering the nest and eggs only with their
+rumps. The young ones do not acquire their true colour, neither can they
+fly till ten or eleven months old, but run very fast. A dozen or more of
+these birds were killed, though very shy, and their flesh was found lean
+and black, though not ill tasted. Their tongues are large, and have near
+the root a piece of fat, which is esteemed a dainty.
+
+From hence they sailed to the island of St Nicholas, twenty-two leagues
+W.S.W. from the island of Salt, and anchored on the S.W. side of the
+island, which is of a triangular form, the longest side measuring thirty
+leagues, and the two others twenty leagues each. They here found the
+governor a white man, having three or four people about him, who were
+decently cloathed, and armed with swords and pistols, but the rest of
+his attendants were in a very pitiful condition. They dug some wells on
+shore, and traded for goats, fruits, and wine, which last was none of
+the best. The country near the coast is very indifferent, but there are
+some fine valleys in the interior, pretty well inhabited, and abounding
+in all the necessaries of life.
+
+The principal town of this island is in a valley, fourteen miles from
+the bay in which the Revenge came to anchor, and contains about 100
+families, the inhabitants being of a swarthy complexion. The country on
+the sea is rocky and barren, but in the interior there are several
+vallies, having plenty of grass, and in which vines are cultivated. The
+wine is of a pale colour, and tastes somewhat like Madeira, but is
+rather thick.
+
+From thence they went to Mayo, another of the Cape de Verd islands,
+forty miles E.S.E. from St Nicholas, and anchored on its north side.
+They wished to have procured some beef and goats at this island, but
+were not permitted to land, because one Captain Bond of Bristol had not
+long before, under the same pretence, carried away some of the principal
+inhabitants. This island is small, and its shores are beset with shoals,
+yet it has a considerable trade in salt and cattle. In May, June, July,
+and August, a species of sea-tortoises lay their eggs here, but are not
+nearly so good as those of the West Indies. The inhabitants cultivate
+some potatoes, plantains, and corn, but live very poorly, like all the
+others in the Cape de Verd islands.
+
+After continuing here five or six days, they resolved to go to the
+island of St Jago, in hopes of meeting some ship in the road, intending
+to cut her cable and run away with her. They accordingly stood for the
+east part of that island, where they saw from the top-mast head, over a
+point of land, a ship at anchor in the road, which seemed fit for their
+purpose: but, by the time they had got near her, her company clapped a
+spring upon her cable, struck her ports, and run out her lower tier of
+guns, on which Cooke bore away as fast as he could. This was a narrow
+escape, as they afterwards learnt that this ship was a Dutch East
+Indiaman of 50 guns and 400 men.
+
+This is by far the best of the Cape de Verd islands, four or five
+leagues west from Mayo; and, though mountainous, is the best peopled,
+having a very good harbour on its east side, much frequented by ships
+bound from Europe for the East Indies and the coast of Guinea, as also
+by Portuguese ships bound to Brazil, which come here to provide
+themselves with beef, pork, goats, fowls, eggs, plantains, and
+cocoa-nuts, in exchange for shirts, drawers, handkerchiefs, hats,
+waistcoats, breeches, and all sorts of linen, which are in great request
+among the natives, who are much addicted to theft. There is here a fort
+on the top of a hill, which commands the harbour. This island has two
+towns of some size, and produces the same sort of wine with St Nicholas.
+
+There are two other islands, Fogo and Brava, both small, and to the west
+of St Jago. Fogo is remarkable, as being an entire burning mountain,
+from the top of which issues a fire which may be seen a great way off at
+sea in the night. This island has a few inhabitants, who live on the
+sea-coast at the foot of the mountain, and subsist on goats, fowls,
+plantains, and cocoa-nuts. The other islands of this group are St
+Antonio, St Lucia, St Vincent, and Bona Vista.
+
+They sailed thence for the coast of Guinea, and, being near Cape Sierra
+Leona, they fell in with a new-built ship of forty guns, well furnished
+with water, all kinds of provisions, and brandy, which they boarded and
+carried away.[148]
+
+[Footnote 148: They appear to have named this ship the Revenge, and to
+have destroyed their original vessel.--E.]
+
+From thence they went to Sherbro river, also on the coast of Guinea,
+where they trimmed all their empty casks and filled them with water, not
+intending to stop any where again for water till their arrival at Juan
+Fernandez in the South Sea. There was at this time an English factory in
+the Sherbro river, having a considerable trade in _Cam-wood_, which is
+used in dying red; but the adventurers do not appear to have had any
+intercourse with their countrymen at this place. They were well
+received, however, by the negro inhabitants of a considerable village
+on the sea-shore, near the mouth of this river, who entertained Cowley
+and his companions with palm-wine, in a large hut in the middle of the
+town, all the rest of the habitations being small low huts. These
+negroes also brought off considerable supplies to the ship, of rice,
+fowls, honey, and sugar canes, which they sold to the buccaneers for
+goods found in the vessel they had seized at Sierra Leona.
+
+Going from thence in the month of December, along the coast of Guinea,
+to the latitude of 12 deg. S. they crossed the Atlantic to the opposite
+coast of Brazil, where they came to soundings on a sandy bottom at
+eighty fathoms deep. Sailing down the coast of Brazil, when in lat. 4 deg.
+S. they observed the sea to be as red as blood, occasioned by a
+prodigious shoal of red shrimps, which lay upon the water in great
+patches for many leagues together. They likewise saw vast numbers of
+seals, and a great many whales. Holding on their course to lat. 47 deg. S.
+they discovered an island not known before, which Cowley named _Pepy's
+Island_,[149] in honour of Samuel Pepys, secretary to the Duke of York
+when Lord High Admiral of England, a great patron of seamen. This island
+has a very good harbour, in which 1000 ships might ride at anchor, and
+is a very commodious place for procuring both wood and water. It
+abounded in sea-fowl, and the shore, being either rocks or sand,
+promised fair for fish.
+
+[Footnote 149: An island in the southern Atlantic, in lat. 46 deg. 34' S.
+called _Isle Grande_, is supposed to be the discovery of Cowley.
+According to Dalrymple, it is in long. 46 deg. 40' W. while the map
+published along with Cook's Voyages places it in long. 35 deg. 40' W. from
+Greenwich.--E.]
+
+In January 1684 they bore away for the Straits of Magellan, and on the
+28th of that month fell in with the _Sebaldine_ or Falkland islands, in
+lat. 51 deg. 25' S. Then steering S.W. by W. to the lat. of 53 deg. S. they made
+the Terra del Fuego. Finding great ripplings near the Straits of Le
+Maire, they resolved to go round the east end of States Land, as had
+been done by Captain Sharp in 1681, who first discovered it to be an
+island, naming it _Albemarle_ island. A prodigious storm came on upon
+the 14th February, which lasted between a fortnight and three weeks, and
+drove them into lat. 63 deg. 30' S. This storm was attended by such torrents
+of rain, that they saved twenty-three barrels of water, besides dressing
+their victuals all that time in rain water.[150] The weather also was so
+excessively cold, that they could bear to drink three quarts of burnt
+brandy a man in twenty-four hours, without being intoxicated.
+
+[Footnote 150: It was discovered by the great navigator Captain Cook,
+who at one time penetrated to lat. 71 deg. 10' S. that the solid ice found
+at sea in high southern latitudes affords perfectly fresh water, when
+the first meltings are thrown away.--E.]
+
+When the storm abated, they steered N.E. being then considerably to the
+west of Cape Horn, and got again into warm weather. In lat. 40 deg. S. they
+fell in with an English ship, the Nicholas of London, of 26 guns,
+commanded by Captain John Eaton, with whom they joined company. They
+sailed together to the island of Juan Fernandez, where they arrived on
+the 23d March, and anchored in a bay at the south end of the island in
+twenty-five fathoms. Captain Watling, who succeeded Captain Sharp, was
+there in 1680, and named it _Queen Catharine's_ island. At his
+departure, he accidentally left a Moskito Indian, who still remained,
+having a gun, a knife, a small flask of powder, and some shot. In this
+desolate condition, he found it equally hard to provide for his
+subsistence, and to conceal himself from the Spaniards, who had notice
+of his being left there, and came several times to take him. He had
+chosen a pleasant valley for his residence, about half a mile from the
+coast, where he had erected a very convenient hut, well lined with
+seal-skins, and had a bed of the same, raised about two feet above the
+ground. By the help of a flint, he had converted his knife into a saw,
+with which he had cut the barrel of his gun to pieces, which he
+fashioned into harpoons, lances, fishing-hooks, and a long knife, by
+heating them in a fire. All this cost him much labour, but enabled him
+to live in sufficient comfort. On seeing the ships at sea, he guessed
+them to be English, and immediately dressed two goats, and a large
+quantity of cabbage, to entertain them on landing. He was also much
+pleased, when they landed on the island, to see two of his old
+acquaintances, Captains Cooke and Dampier, who had belonged to the ship
+by which he was left on the island.
+
+The island of Juan Fernandez is in lat. 34 deg. 15' S. [33 deg. 42'] about 420
+English miles from the coast of Chili. The whole island is a pleasant
+mixture of hills and vallies, the sides of the hills partly covered with
+wood, and partly savannas, or places naturally clear of wood, bearing
+fine grass. Among the woods are what are called cabbage-trees, but not
+so large as in other parts of the world. The goats which feed on the
+west end of the island are much fatter and better than those at the east
+end, though the latter has better and greater plenty of grass, with
+abundance of excellent water in the vallies, while the west end is a dry
+plain, the grass scanty and parched, and has hardly any wood or fresh
+water. Though fertile, this island has no inhabitants, who might live
+here in plenty, as the plain is able to maintain a great number of
+cattle, and the sea affords vast quantities of seals, sea-lions,
+snappers, and rock-fish. The sea-lions are not much unlike seals, but
+much larger, being twelve or fourteen feet long, and as thick as a large
+ox. They have no hair, and are of a dun colour, with large eyes, their
+teeth being three inches long. One of these animals will yield a
+considerable quantity of oil, which is sweet and answers well for
+frying. They feed on fish, yet their flesh is tolerably good. The
+snapper is a fish having a large head, mouth, and gills, the back red,
+the belly ash-coloured, and its general appearance resembling a roach,
+but much larger, its scales being as broad as a shilling. The rock-fish,
+called _baccalao_ by the Spaniards, because resembling the cod, is
+rounder than the former, and of a dark-brown colour, with small scales,
+and is very good food, being found in vast abundance on the coasts of
+Peru and Chili. This island has only two bays fit for anchorage, with a
+rivulet of fresh water in each, and both at the east end, and so
+conveniently situated that they might easily be fortified, and defended
+by a slender force against a powerful army, being inaccessible from the
+west, by reason of the high mountains. Five Englishmen, left by Captain
+Davies, secured themselves here against a great number of Spaniards.
+
+After remaining fourteen days at this island, they left it on the 8th
+April, 1684, steering N.N.E. till off the bay of Arica, whence they
+sailed to Cape Blanco, in hopes of meeting the Spanish Plate fleet from
+Panama; but if they had gone into the bay of Arica, they must have taken
+a Spanish ship which lay there, having 300 tons of silver on board. In
+lat. 10 deg. S. on the 3d May, they were forced to capture a ship laden with
+timber, much against their inclination, lest they should be known
+through her means to be on the coast. They then sailed to the southern
+island of _Lobos_, in lat. 70 deg. S. about forty-three English miles from
+the coast of Peru, where they landed their sick for refreshment, heeled
+their ships, and scraped their bottoms, to render them fitter for
+action.
+
+This island is named _Lobos del Mar_, to distinguish it from another
+which is nearer the continent, and called therefore _Lobos de la Tierra.
+Lobos del Mar_ is properly a double island, each a mile in circuit,
+separated by a small channel which will not admit ships of burden. A
+little way from shore, on the north side, there are several scattered
+rocks in the sea, and at the west end of the eastermost isle is a small
+sandy creek, in which ships are secure from the winds, all the rest of
+the shore being rocky cliffs. The whole of both islands is rocky and
+sandy, having neither wood, water, nor land animals; but it has many
+fowls, such as boobies, and above all penguins, about the size of a
+duck, and with similar feet; but their bills are pointed, their wings
+are mere stumps, which serve them as fins when in the water, and their
+bodies are covered with down instead of feathers. As they feed on fish,
+they are but indifferent eating, but their eggs are very good. Penguins
+are found all over the South Sea, and at the Cape of Good Hope. The road
+for ships is between the before-mentioned rock and the eastmost island.
+
+They were now very eager to make some capture, as their provisions,
+especially water, were very scanty, so that the subsistence of their
+prisoners, as well as themselves, gave them much anxiety. By information
+of their prisoners, they were also convinced that their being in these
+seas was known to the Spaniards, who consequently would keep all their
+richest ships in port. After much consultation, therefore, it was
+resolved to make an attempt on Truxillo, in lat. 8 deg. 4' S. a populous
+city about six miles from the port of _Guanehagno_, though the
+landing-place was of difficult access, as at that place there was a
+strong probability of making a considerable booty. They sailed therefore
+with this design on the 18th May, their whole number of men fit for duty
+being one hundred and eight. Soon after weighing anchor, three ships
+were descried under sail, which they chased and captured, being laden
+with flour from Guanehagno to Panama. In one of them was found a letter
+from the viceroy of Peru to the president of Panama, intimating that
+there were enemies on the coast, and that he had sent these three ships
+to supply their wants. It was also learnt from the prisoners, that the
+Spaniards were erecting a fort near their harbour of Guanehagno, in
+consequence of which the design on Traxillo was abandoned. Besides a
+large loading of flour, the three captured ships had a good quantity of
+fruits and sweetmeats, which made them agreeable prizes to the English,
+who were now very short of provisions; but they had landed no less than
+800,000 dollars, on hearing that there were enemies in these seas.
+
+It was now resolved to carry their prizes to some secure place, where
+the best part of the provisions they had now procured might be laid up
+in safety, for which purpose they steered for the _Gallapagos_ or
+_Enchanted Islands_,[151] which they got sight of on the 31st May, and
+anchored at night on the east side of one of the easternmost of these
+islands, a mile from shore, in sixteen fathoms, on clear white hard
+sand. To this Cowley gave the name of _King Charles's Island_. He
+likewise named more of them, as the Duke of Norfolk's Island immediately
+under the line, Dessington's, Eares, Bindley's, Earl of Abington's, King
+James's, Duke of Albemarles, and others. They afterwards anchored in a
+very good bay being named York Bay. Here they found abundance of
+excellent provisions, particularly guanoes and sea and land tortoises,
+some of the latter weighing two hundred pounds, which is much beyond
+their usual weight. There were also great numbers of birds, especially
+turtle-doves, with plenty of wood and excellent water; but none of
+either of these was in any of the other islands.[152]
+
+[Footnote 151: These islands, so named by the Spaniards from being the
+resort of tortoises, are on both sides of the line, from about the Lat.
+of 2 deg. N. to 1 deg. 50' S,. and from about 88 deg. 40' to 95 deg. 20' both W. from
+Greenwich.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 152: Cowley mentions having found here a [illegible] thing of
+its nature of quantity.--E.]
+
+These Gallapagos are a considerable number of large islands, situated
+under and on both sides of the line, and destitute of inhabitants. The
+Spaniards, who first discovered them, describe them as extending from
+the equator N.W. as high as 5 deg. N. The adventurers in this voyage saw
+fourteen or fifteen, some of which were seven or eight leagues in
+length, and three or four leagues broad, pretty high yet flat. Four or
+five of the most easterly were barren and rocky, without either trees,
+herbs, or grass, except very near the shore. They produced also a sort
+of shrub, called dildo-tree, about the bigness of a man's leg, and ten
+or twelve feet high, without either fruit or leaves, but covered with
+prickles from top to bottom. The only water in these barren isles, was
+in ponds and holes in the rocks. Some of the isles are low and more
+fertile, producing some of the trees that are known in Europe. A few of
+the westermost isles are larger than the rest, being nine or ten leagues
+long, and six or seven broad, producing many trees, especially Mammee
+figs, and they have also some pretty large fresh-water streams, and many
+rivulets. The air is continually refreshed, by the sea-breeze by day and
+the land-winds at night, so that they are not troubled with such
+excessive heats, neither are they so unwholesome as most places so near
+the equator. During the rainy season, in November, December, and
+January, they are infested with violent tempests of thunder and
+lightning; but before and after these months have only refreshing
+showers, and in their summer, which is in May, June, July, and August,
+they are without any rains.
+
+They anchored near several of these islands, and frequently found sea
+tortoises basking in the sun at noon. On a former occasion, Captain
+Davies came to anchor on the west side of these islands, where he and
+his men subsisted on land-tortoises for three months, and saved from
+them sixty jars of oil. He also found several good channels on that
+side, with anchorage between the isles, and several rivulets of fresh
+water, with plenty of trees for fuel. The sea also round these islands
+is well stored with good fish of a large size, and abounds in sharks.
+These islands are better stored with guanoes and land-tortoises than any
+other part of the world. The guanoes are very tame, of extraordinary
+size, and very fat. The land-tortoises are likewise very fat, and so
+numerous that several hundred men might subsist upon them for a
+considerable time. They are as pleasant food as a pullet, and so large
+that some of them weighed 150 and even 200 pounds, being two feet to two
+feet and a half across the belly; whereas in other places they are
+seldom met with above 30 pounds weight. There are several kinds of
+land-tortoises in the West Indies, one of which, called _Hackatee_ by
+the Spaniards, keeps mostly in fresh-water ponds, having long necks,
+small legs, and flat feet, and is usually between ten and fifteen pounds
+weight. A second, and much smaller kind, which they call _Tenopen_,[153]
+is somewhat rounder, but not unlike in other respects, except that their
+back shells are naturally covered with curious carved work. The
+tortoises in the Gallapagos isles resembles the _Hackatee_, having long
+necks and small heads, but are much larger.
+
+[Footnote 153: This word in the text is probably a misprint for
+_Terrapin_, a trivial name for a species of land or fresh-water
+tortoise, found also in the warmer parts of North America--E.]
+
+In these islands there are also some green snakes, and great numbers of
+remarkably tame turtle-doves, very fat, and excellent eating. There are
+large channels between some of these islands, capable of receiving ships
+of moderate burden. On the shoals there grows great abundance of
+sea-weed, called _turtle-grass_, owing to which these channels abound in
+_green turtles_ or sea-tortoises. There are several kinds of turtles or
+sea-tortoises, as the _Trunk, Loggerhead, Hawksbill_, and _Green_
+turtles. The first is larger than the rest, and has a rounder and higher
+back shell, but is neither so wholesome nor so well tasted; and the same
+may be said of the Loggerhead, which feeds on moss from the rocks, and
+has its name from its large head. The Hawksbill, so named from having a
+long small mouth, like the beak of a hawk, is the smallest species, and
+is that which produces the so-much-admired tortoise-shell, of which
+cabinets, boxes, combs, and other things are made in Europe, and of this
+shell each has from three to four pounds, though some have less. The
+flesh of this kind is but indifferent, yet better than that of the
+Loggerheads; though these, which are taken between the _Sambellos_ and
+_Portobello_, make those who eat the flesh purge and vomit excessively,
+and the same is observed of some other fish in the West Indies.
+
+The laying time of the sea-tortoises is about May, June, and July, a
+little sooner or later, and they lay three times each season, eighty or
+ninety eggs each time, which are round and as large as an hen's egg, but
+covered only with a thin white skin, having no shell. When a tortoise
+goes on shore to lay, she is usually an hour before she returns, as she
+always chuses her place above high-water mark, where she makes a large
+hole with her fins in the sand, in which she lays her eggs, and then
+covers them two feet deep with the sand she had raked out. Sometimes
+they go on shore the day before, to take a look of the place, and are
+sure to return to the same spot next day. People take the tortoises on
+this occasion, while on shore in the night, turning them over on their
+backs, above high-water mark, and then return to fetch them off next
+morning; but a large Green tortoise will give work enough to two stout
+men to turn her over. The Green tortoise gets its name from the colour
+of the shell, having a small round head, and weighs from 200 to 300
+pounds. Its flesh is accounted the best of any, but there are none of
+this kind in the South Sea. The sea-tortoises found at the Gallapagos
+being a bastard kind of Green tortoises, having thicker shells than
+those of the West Indies, and their flesh not so good. They are also
+much larger, being frequently two or three feet thick, and their bellies
+five feet broad.
+
+They remained twelve or fourteen days at the Gallapagos, during which
+time Captain Cooke lived on shore in a very poor state of health. They
+also landed 1500 bags of flour, with a large quantity of sweetmeats and
+other provisions, on York Island, which they might have recourse to on
+any emergency. From one of their prisoners, an Indian of _Realejo_, they
+had a flattering account of the riches of that place, which he alleged
+might be easily taken, and for which enterprise he offered to serve them
+as a guide. Setting sail therefore from the Gallapagos on the 12th June,
+they shaped their course in lat 4 deg. 40' N. with the intention of touching
+at the _Island of Cocos_, [in lat. 5 deg. 27' N. and long. 87 deg. 27' W. from
+Greenwich.] This island is seven or eight leagues in circuit, but
+uninhabited, and produces a pleasant herb near the sea coast, called
+_Geamadael_ by the Spaniards. It is so environed with steep rocks as to
+be inaccessible, except on the N.E. where ships may safely ride in a
+small bay.
+
+Missing this island, they continued their course towards the continent
+of America, and reached Cape _Blanco_, or _Trespuntas_, on the coast of
+Mexico, in lat. 9 deg. 56' N. in the beginning of July. This cape gets the
+name of _Blanco_, or the White Cape, from two high steep taper white
+rocks, like high towers, about half a mile distant. The cape itself is
+about the same height with Beachy-head, on the coast of Sussex, being a
+full broad point jutting out to sea, and terminated with steep rocks,
+while both sides have easy descents to the sea from the flat top, which
+is covered with tall trees, and affords a pleasant prospect. On the N.W.
+side of the cape the land runs in to the N.E. for four leagues, making a
+small bay, called _Caldera Bay_, at the entrance to which, at the N.W.
+side of the cape, a rivulet of fresh water discharges itself into the
+sea through very rich low lands abounding in lofty trees. This rich
+wooded vale extends a mile N.E. beyond the rivulet, when a savanna
+begins, running several leagues into the country, here and there
+beautifully interspersed with groves of trees, and covered with
+excellent long grass. Deeper into the bay, the low lands are cloathed
+with mangroves; but farther into the country the land is higher, partly
+covered with woods, and partly consisting of hilly savannas, not so good
+as the former, and here the woods consist of short small trees. From the
+bottom of this bay one may travel to the lake of Nicaragua over hilly
+savannas, a distance of fourteen, or fifteen leagues.[154]
+
+[Footnote 154: The bay of Caldera in the text is evidently the gulf of
+Nicoya, from the bottom of which the lake of Nicaragua is distant about
+fifty English miles due north. The latitude of Cape Blanco in the text,
+9 deg. 56' N. is considerably erroneous, its true latitude being only 9 deg. 27'
+N.]
+
+Captain Cooke had been very ill ever since their departure from Juan
+Fernandez, and died as soon as they came within two or three leagues of
+Cape Blanco, which indeed is a frequent incident at sea, as people who
+have been long ill often die on coming in sight of land. Coming to
+anchor a few hours after a league within the cape, near the mouth of the
+before-mentioned rivulet, in 14 fathoms on clear hard sand, his body was
+immediately carried on shore for interment, under a guard of twelve
+armed men. While the people were digging his grave, they were joined by
+three Spanish Indians, who asked many questions, and were at length
+seized, though one of them afterwards escaped. The other two were
+carried aboard, and confessed that they were sent as spies from Nicoya,
+a small Mulatto town twelve or fourteen leagues from the cape, and
+seated on the banks of a river of the same name,[155] being a convenient
+place for building and refitting ships. The president of Panama had sent
+intelligence to this place of the English being in these seas, in
+consequence of which the inhabitants, who mostly subsist by cultivating
+corn, and by slaughtering great numbers of cattle which feed on their
+extensive savannas, had sent their ox hides to the North Sea by way of
+the lake of Nicaragua, as also a certain red wood, called in Jamaica
+_Blood wood_, or Nicaragua wood, which is used in dying. These
+commodities are exchanged for linen and woollen manufactures, and other
+European goods.
+
+[Footnote 155: There is no river at Niceya, but it is seated on a bay or
+harbour within the gulf of the same name.--E.]
+
+Learning from their prisoners that there was a large cattle pen at no
+great distance, where cows and bulls could be had in abundance, and
+being very desirous of having some fresh beef which had long been very
+rare among them, twenty-four of the English went ashore in two boats,
+under the guidance of one of the Indians, and landed about a league from
+the ships, hauling their boats upon the dry sand. Their guide conducted
+them to the pen, in a large savanna two miles from the boats, where they
+found abundance of bulls and cows feeding. Some of the English were for
+killing three or four immediately, but the rest insisted to wait till
+morning, and then to kill as many as they needed. On this difference of
+opinion, Dampier and eleven more thought proper to return aboard that
+night, expecting to be followed by the rest next day. Hearing nothing of
+them next day at four p.m. ten men were sent in a canoe to look for
+them; when they found their comrades on a small rock half a mile from
+the shore, up to their middles in water, having fled there to escape
+from forty or fifty Spaniards, well armed with guns and lances, who had
+burnt their boat. They had taken shelter on this rock at low water, and
+must have perished in an hour, as it was then flowing tide, if they had
+not been relieved by the canoe, which brought them safe on board.
+
+On the 19th July, Edward Davis, quarter-master of the Revenge, was
+elected captain, in the room of Captain Cooke. They sailed next day from
+Cape Blanco towards Realejo, with a moderate breeze at N. which brought
+them in three days over against that port, in lat. 12 deg. 26' N. This place
+is easily discovered from sea, by means of a high-peaked burning
+mountain about ten miles inland, called by the Spaniards _Volcano vejo_,
+or the old volcano, which is so high that it may be seen twenty leagues
+out at sea, besides which there is no other similar mountain on all that
+coast. To make this harbour, the mountain must bear N.E. and keeping this
+coarse will bring a ship directly into the harbour, the entrance of
+which may be seen at three leagues off. This harbour is inclosed by a
+low isle, a mile in length, a quarter of a mile broad, and a mile and a
+half from the main land. It has a channel or entrance at each end of the
+island, that on the east, being narrow and having a strong tide, is
+seldom used, but that on the west is much larger and more commodious. In
+taking this entry, however, ships must beware of a certain sandy shoal
+on the N.W. point of the isle, and when past this must keep close to the
+isle, as a sand-bank runs half way over from the continental shore. This
+port is able to contain 200 ships.
+
+About two leagues from the port, the town of Realejo stands in a fenny
+country, full of red mangrove trees, between two arms of the sea, the
+westermost of which reaches up to the town, and the eastermost comes
+near it, but no shipping can get so far up.[156] On entering the bay in
+their canoes, they found the country apprized of their approach, and
+fully prepared for their reception, wherefore the enterprise against
+Realejo was laid aside. Pursuant to a consultation between the two
+commanders, Eaton and Davis, they sailed on the 27th July for the gulf
+of Amapalla or Fonseca.
+
+[Footnote 156: The account in the text appears applicable to what is now
+called _El Viejo_, or the old town, nearly 12 miles from the port, but
+modern Realejo stands almost close to the entrance of the bay or
+harbour.--E.]
+
+This is a large gulf or branch of the sea, running eight or ten leagues
+into the country, and nearly of the same breadth. The S.E. extreme point
+is called Cape _Casurina_, or _Casiquina_, in lat. 12 deg. 53' N. and long.
+87 deg. 36' W. and the N.W. point is Cape Candadillo, in lat. 18 deg. 6' N. and
+long. 87 deg. 57' W. Within this bay are several islands, the principal of
+these being named _Mangeru_ and _Amapaila_. Mangera is a high round
+island, two leagues in circuit, inclosed on all sides by rocks, except
+on its N.E. side, where there is a small sandy creek. The soil is black
+and shallow, full of stones, and produces very lofty trees. It has a
+small town or village in the middle inhabited by Indians, and a handsome
+Spanish church. The inhabitants cultivate a small quantity of maize and
+plantains, having also a few cocks and hens, but no beasts except dogs
+and cats. From the creek to the town there is a steep rocky path.
+_Amapalla_ resembles the other isle in soil, but is much larger, and has
+two towns about two miles asunder, one on its northern end, and the
+other on the east. The latter is on a plain on the summit of a hill, and
+has a handsome church. The other town is smaller, but has also a fine
+church. In most of the Indian towns under the Spanish dominion, the
+images of the saints in their churches are represented of the Indian
+complexion, and dressed like Indians; while in the towns inhabited by
+Spaniards, the images have the European complexion and dress. There are
+many other islands in the bay, but uninhabited.
+
+Captain Davis went into the gulf with two canoes to procure some
+prisoners for intelligence, and coming to Mangera, the inhabitants all
+ran away into the woods, so that only the priest and two boys were
+taken. Captain Davis went thence to the isle of Amapalla, where the
+inhabitants were prevented from retiring into the woods by the
+secretary, who was an enemy to the Spaniards, and persuaded them the
+English were friends; but by the misconduct of one of the Buccaneers,
+all the Indians run away, on which Davis made his men fire at them, and
+the secretary was slain. After this the casique of the island was
+reconciled to the English, and afterwards guided them wherever they had
+occasion to go, especially to places on the continent where they could
+procure beef.
+
+A company of English and French Buccaneers landed some time afterwards
+on this island, whence they went over to the continent, and marched by
+land to the _Cape River_, otherwise called _Yare_, or _Vanquez_ river,
+which falls into the gulf of Mexico, near _Cape Gracias a Dios_, on the
+Mosquito shore. On reaching that river near its source, they constructed
+bark canoes, in which they descended the stream into the gulf of Mexico.
+They were not, however, the first discoverers of this passage, as about
+thirty years before, some English went up that same river to near its
+source, from the gulf of Mexico, and marched thence inland to a town
+called New Segovia, near the head of Bluefield's river.
+
+While in this bay of Amapalla, some difference arose between the two
+captains, Davis who had succeeded to Cooke in command of the Revenge,
+and Eaton of the Nicholas, when they resolved to separate: But they
+first deemed it proper to careen their ships, for which this place
+afforded every convenience, and to take in a supply of fresh water. Both
+ships being in condition for sea, Captain Eaton took 400 sacks of flour
+on board his ship, and agreed with Captain Cowley to take the charge of
+the Nicholas as master. From this period therefore, which was in the end
+of September, the voyages of Cowley and Dampier cease to be the same,
+and require to be separately narrated.
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_Continuation of the Narrative of Cowley, from leaving the Revenge, to
+his Return to England_.
+
+On leaving the gulf of Amapalla, the Nicholas steered for Cape
+Francisco, in lat. 0 deg. 50' N. near which they encountered dreadful
+storms, attended by prodigious thunder and lightning. From thence they
+proceeded to the latitude of 7 deg. S. but found the country every where
+alarmed. They went next to Payta, in lat. 4 deg. 55' S. where they took two
+ships at anchor, which they set on fire, because the Spaniards refused
+to ransom them. Leaving the coast, they went to the island of _Gorgona_,
+in lat. 2 deg. 50' N. about four leagues from the main, which the privateers
+usually called _Sharp's Island_. This is about two leagues long by one
+league broad, having a good harbour on its west side, and affording
+plenty of wood and water. It is a common saying in Spanish South
+America, that it rains often in Chili, seldom in Peru, and always at
+Gorgona, where they allege there never was a day fair to an end. Though
+this be not strictly true, it is certain that this island has rain more
+or less at all seasons, on which account, perhaps, it has always
+remained uninhabited. They sailed from Gorgona W.N.W. till in lat. 30 deg.
+N. when they steered W. by N. to lat. 15 deg. N. till they considered
+themselves beyond danger from the rocks of _St Bartholomew_; after which
+they returned into the lat. of 13 deg. N. in which parallel they continued
+their voyage for the East Indies.
+
+They had a regular trade-wind, and a reasonably quick passage across the
+Pacific Ocean, except that their men were mostly ill of the scurvy; and
+on the 14th of March, 1685, being in lat. 13 deg. 2' N. they came in sight
+of the island of Guam. By Captain Cowley's calculation, this run across
+the Pacific Ocean extended to 7646 miles, from the island of Gorgona to
+Guam.[157] They came next day to anchor in a bay on the west side of the
+island, and sent their boat on shore with a flag of truce. The
+inhabitants of a village at that place set fire to their houses, and ran
+away into the interior, on which the boat's crew cut down some cocoa
+trees to gather the fruit, and on going again on board were threatened
+by a party of the natives, who sallied out from some bushes on purpose
+to attack them. A friendly intercourse was however established between
+the English and the natives, and trade took place with them till the
+17th, when the natives attacked the English suddenly, but were beat off
+with heavy loss, while none of the English were hurt.
+
+[Footnote 157: Gorgona is in long. 78 deg. 33' Guam in 216 deg. 40', both W.
+from Greenwich. The difference of longitude is 138 deg. 07', which gives
+9530 statute miles, or 2762 marine leagues, so that the computation in
+the text is considerably too short.--E.]
+
+On the 19th the Spanish governor of the island came to a point of land
+not far from the ship, whence he sent his boat on board with three
+copies of the same letter, in Spanish, French, and Dutch, desiring to
+know who they were, whence they came, and whither they were bound.
+Captain Eaton answered in French, saying that they had been fitted out
+by some gentlemen in France to make discoveries, and were come in quest
+of provisions. In reply the governor invited Captain Eaton on shore, who
+landed with a guard of twenty men doubly armed, and was politely
+received. On the 18th the governor sent ten hogs on board, together with
+a prodigious quantity of potatoes, plantains, oranges, papaws, and red
+pepper, in return for which Captain Eaton sent a diamond ring to the
+governor worth twenty pounds, and gave swords to several Spanish
+gentlemen who came off with the provisions. Next day the governor sent
+to procure some powder, of which he was in want, as the natives were in
+rebellion, and Captain Eaton gave him two barrels, for which to the
+value of 1400 dollars were offered in gold and silver, but Eaton refused
+to accept the money, in consequence of which the governor sent him a
+diamond ring, worth fifty pounds. Every day after this the governor sent
+them some kind of provisions, and about the end of March, when about to
+sail, the governor sent them thirty hogs for sea store, with a large
+supply of rice and potatoes.
+
+On one occasion the Indians attacked a party of the English, who were on
+shore to draw the sein, but were beaten off with much loss; yet they
+afterwards endeavoured to prevail on Captain Eaton to join them in
+driving out the Spaniards, which he positively refused. On the 1st
+April, leaving the bay in which they had hitherto remained, the Nicholas
+anchored before the Spanish fort; and after several civilities on both
+sides, set sail in the afternoon of the 3d April with a fair wind.
+
+This island of Guam is about fourteen leagues long by six broad, and
+contains several very pleasant vallies, interspersed with fine fertile
+meadows, watered by many rivulets from the hills. The soil in these
+vallies is black and very rich, producing plenty of cocoas, potatoes,
+yams, papaws, plantains, _monanoes_, sour-sops, oranges, and lemons,
+together with some honey. The climate is naturally very hot, yet is
+wholesome, as constantly refreshed by the trade-wind. The Indian
+natives are large made, well proportioned, active and vigorous, some
+being seven feet and a half high, and go mostly naked, both men and
+women. They never bury their dead, but lay them in the sun to putrefy.
+Their only arms are slings and lances, the heads of these being made of
+human bones; and on the decease of any one his bones make eight lances,
+four from his legs and thighs, and as many from his arms. These lance
+heads are formed like a scoop, and jagged at the edges like a saw or
+eel-spear; so that a person wounded by them dies, if not cured in seven
+days.
+
+The great annual ship between Manilla and Acapulco touches here for
+refreshments, and the Spaniards said there were sometimes eight ships in
+one year at this place from the East Indies. They said also, that they
+had built a ship here, in 1684, of 160 tons, to trade with Manilla, and
+pretended to have a garrison here of 600 men, most of the Indians being
+in rebellion.
+
+The Nicholas sailed from Guam W. by S. and on computing that they were
+206 leagues from that island, they changed to due W. The 23d, when they
+reckoned themselves 560 leagues west of Guam, they met with a very
+strong current, resembling the race of Portland, and fell in with a
+cluster of islands in lat. 20 deg. 30' N. to the north of Luconia, [the
+_Bashee Islands_.] They sent their boat ashore on the northermost of
+these islands, in order to get some fish, and to examine the island, on
+which they found vast quantities of nutmegs growing, but saw no people,
+and as night was drawing on they did not venture to go any distance from
+the shore. To this island they gave the name of _Nutmeg Island_, and
+called the bay in which they anchored _English Bay_. They observed many
+rocks, shoals, and foul ground near the shore, and saw a great many
+goats on the island, but brought off very few.
+
+On the 26th of April they were off Cape Bojadore, the N.W. point of
+Luconia, and came soon after to Cipe _Mindato_, where they met the S.W.
+monsoon, on which they bore away for Canton in China, where they arrived
+in safety and refitted their ship. They had here an opportunity of
+making themselves as rich as they could desire, but would not embrace
+it; as there came into the port thirteen sail of Tartar vessels, laden
+with Chinese plunder, consisting of the richest productions of the East.
+The men, however, would have nothing to do with any thing but gold and
+silver, and Captain Eaton could not prevail upon them to fight for
+silks, as they alleged that would degrade them into pedlars. The Tartars
+therefore quietly pursued their affairs at Canton, unconscious of their
+danger.
+
+Having repaired the ship, Captain Easton sailed for Manilla, intending
+to wait for a Tartar ship of which they had information, bound from that
+port, and half laden with silver. They even got sight of her, and chased
+her a whole day to no purpose, as she was quite clean, and the Nicholas
+was as foul as could well be. They then stood for a small island, to the
+north of Luconia, to wait for a fair wind to carry them to Bantam.
+Instead of one island, they found several, where they procured
+refreshments.[158] Learning from an Indian that in one of these islands
+there were plenty of beeves, they sent a boat thither with thirty men,
+who took what they wanted by force, though the island was well
+inhabited.
+
+[Footnote 158: The indications in the text are too vague to point out
+the particular islands at which the Nicholas refreshed. Immediately
+north from Luconia are the Babuvanes Isles, in lat 19 deg. 30', and still
+farther, the Bashee Islands, in 20 deg. 30', both N.]
+
+Leaving these islands about the middle of September, 1685, they were for
+three days in great danger on the banks of _Peragoa_, in lat. 10 deg. N.
+after which they came to a convenient bay in an island not far from the
+northern coast of Borneo, where they set up a tent on shore and landed
+every thing from the ship, fortifying themselves with ten small guns, in
+case of being attacked by the natives, and hauled their ship on shore to
+clean her bottom. At first the natives of the island avoided all
+intercourse with the English; but one day the boat of the Nicholas came
+up with a canoe in which was the queen of the country with her retinue,
+who all leaped into the sea to get away from the English. They took up
+these people with much difficulty, and entertained them with so much
+kindness that they became good friends during two months which they
+continued afterwards at this island. At this time the Spaniards were at
+peace with the sovereign of Borneo, and carried on an advantageous trade
+there from Manilla; of which circumstance Captain Eaton and his people
+got intimation, and passed themselves for Spaniards during their
+residence.
+
+This great island is plentifully stored with provisions of all kinds,
+and many rich commodities, as diamonds, pepper, camphor, &c. and several
+kinds of fine woods, as specklewood and ebony. Cloves also were there to
+be had at a reasonable price, being brought there from the neighbouring
+islands by stealth. The animals of Borneo, as reported by Cowley, are
+elephants, tigers, panthers, leopards, antelopes, and wild swine. The
+king of Borneo being in league with the Spanish governor of the
+Philippines, the English passed themselves here as Spaniards, and were
+amply supplied by the natives during their stay with fish, oranges,
+lemons, mangoes, plantains, and pine-apples.
+
+The Nicholas sailed from this place in December, 1685, proceeding to a
+chain of islands in lat. 4 deg. N. called the _Naturah_ islands,[159] whence
+they went to Timor, where the crew became exceedingly mutinous; on which
+Captain Cowley and others resolved to quit the Nicholas, in order to
+endeavour to get a passage home from Batavia. Accordingly, Cowley and
+one Mr Hill, with eighteen more of the men, purchased a large boat, in
+which they meant to have gone to Batavia, but, owing to contrary winds,
+were obliged to put in at Cheribon, another factory belonging to the
+Dutch in Java, where they found they had lost a day in their reckoning
+during their voyage by the west. They here learnt the death of Charles
+II. and that the Dutch had driven the English from Bantam, which was
+then the second place of trade we possessed in India. The Dutch were
+forming other schemes to the prejudice of our trade, wherefore Cowley,
+with Hill and another of the Englishmen, resolved to make all the haste
+they could to Batavia, to avoid being involved in the subsisting
+disputes. They were kindly received by the governor of Batavia, who
+promised them a passage to Holland.
+
+[Footnote 159: The Natuna Islands, in long. 108 deg. E. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+Cowley and his remaining companions embarked at Batavia in a Dutch ship
+in March, 1686. They arrived in Table bay at the Cape of Good Hope on
+the 1st June, where they landed next day, and of which settlement, as it
+then existed in 1686, Cowley gives the following account:--
+
+"Cape Town does not contain above an hundred houses, which are all built
+low, because exposed to violent gales of wind in the months of December,
+January, and February. The castle is very strong, having about eighty
+large cannon for its defence. There is also a very spacious garden,
+maintained by the Dutch East India Company, planted with all kinds of
+fruit-trees, and many excellent herbs, and laid out in numerous pleasant
+walks. This garden is near a mile in length and a furlong wide, being
+the greatest rarity at the Cape, and far exceeding the public garden at
+Batavia. This country had abundance of very good sheep, but cattle and
+fowls are rather scarce. We walked out of town to a village inhabited by
+the _Hodmandods_, or Hottentots. Their houses are round, having the
+fire-places in the middle, almost like the huts of the wild Irish, and
+the people lay upon the ashes, having nothing under them but
+sheep-skins. The men seemed all to be _Monorchides_, and the whole of
+these people were so nasty that we could hardly endure the stench of
+their bodies and habitations. Their women are singularly conformed,
+having a natural skin apron, and are all so ignorant and brutish that
+they do not hesitate to prostitute themselves publicly for the smallest
+imaginable recompense, of which I was an eye witness. Their apparel is a
+sheep-skin flung over their shoulders, with a leather cap on their
+heads, as full of grease as it can hold. Their legs are wound about,
+from the ankle to the knees, with the guts of beasts well greased.
+
+"These people, called _Hodmandods_ by the Dutch, are born white, but
+they make themselves black by smearing their bodies all over with soot
+and grease, so that by frequent repetition they become as black as
+negroes. Their children, when young, are of a comely form, but their
+noses are like those of the negroes. When they marry, the woman cuts off
+one joint of her finger; and, if her husband die and she remarry again,
+she cuts off another joint, and so on however often she may marry.
+
+"They are a most filthy race, and will feed upon any thing, however
+foul. When the Hollanders kill a beast, these people get the guts, and
+having squeezed out the excrements, without washing or scraping, they
+lay them upon the coals, and eat them before they are well heated
+through. If even a slave of the Hollanders wish to have one of their
+women, he has only to give her husband a piece of tobacco. Yet will they
+beat their wives if unfaithful with one of their own nation, though they
+care not how they act with the men of other nations. They are worshipers
+of the moon, and thousands of them may be seen dancing and singing by
+the sea-side, when they expect to see that luminary; but if it happen
+to be dark weather, so that the moon does not appear, they say their god
+is angry with them. While we were at the Cape, one of the _Hodmandods_
+drank himself dead in the fort, on which the others came and put oil and
+milk into his mouth, but finding he was dead, they began to prepare for
+his burial in the following manner:--Having shaved or scraped his body,
+arms, and legs, with their knives, they dug a great hole, in which they
+placed him on his breech in a sitting posture, heaping stones about him
+to keep him upright. Then came the women, making a most horrible noise
+round the hole which was afterwards filled up with earth."
+
+On the 15th June. 1686, Cowley sailed from the Cape, the homeward-bound
+Dutch fleet consisting of three ships, when at the same time other three
+sailed for Bolivia. On the 22d of June they passed the line, when Cowley
+computed that he had sailed quite round the globe, having formerly
+crossed the line nearly at the same place, when outward-bound from
+Virginia in 1683. On the 4th August they judged themselves to be within
+thirty leagues of the dangerous shoal called the _Abrolhos_, laid down
+in lat. 15 deg. N. in the map: but Cowley was very doubtful if any such
+shoal exist, having never met with any one who had fallen in with it,
+and he was assured by a pilot, who had made sixteen voyages to Brazil,
+that there was no such sand. The 19th September, Cowley saw land which
+he believed to be Shetland. They were off the Maes on the 28th
+September, and on the 30th Cowley landed at Helvoetsluys. He travelled
+by land to Rotterdam, whence he sailed in the Ann for England, and
+arrived safe in London on the 12th October, 1686, after a tedious and
+troublesome voyage of three years and nearly two months.
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_Sequel of the Voyage, so far as Dampier is concerned, after the
+Separation of the Nicholas from the Revenge._[160]
+
+This is usually denominated Captain William Dampier's _first_ Voyage
+round the World, and is given at large by Harris, but on the present
+occasion has been limited, in this section, to the narrative of Dampier
+after the separation of Captain Cowley in the Nicholas; the observations
+of Dampier in the earlier part of the voyage, having been already
+interwoven in the first section of this chapter.
+
+[Footnote 160: Dampier's Voyages, Lond. 1729, vol. I. and II. Harris,
+II. 84.]
+
+This voyage is peculiarly valuable, by its minute and apparently
+accurate account of the harbours and anchorages on the western coast of
+South America, and has, therefore, been given here at considerable
+length, as it may become of singular utility to our trade, in case the
+navigation to the South Sea may be thrown open, which is at present
+within the exclusive privileges of the East India Company, yet entirely
+unused by that chartered body.--E.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Captain Eaton in the Nicholas having separated from the Revenge, left
+the Gulf of Amapalla on the 2d September, 1684, as formerly mentioned,
+which place we also left next day, directing our course for the coast of
+Peru. Tornadoes, with thunder, lightning, and rain, are very frequent on
+these coasts from June to November, mostly from the S.E. of which we had
+our share. The wind afterwards veered to W. and so continued till we
+came in sight of Cape St Francisco, where we met with fair weather and
+the wind at S.
+
+Cape St Francisco, in lat. 0 deg. 50' N. is a high full point of land,
+covered with lofty trees. In passing from the N. a low point may be
+easily mistaken for the cape, but soon after passing this point the cape
+is seen with three distinct points. The land in its neighbourhood is
+high, and the mountains appear black. The 20th September we came to
+anchor in sixteen fathoms near the island of _Plata_, in lat. 1 deg. 15' S.
+This island is about four miles long and a mile and half broad, being of
+some considerable height, and environed with rocky cliffs, except in one
+place at the east end, where the only fresh-water torrent of the isle
+falls down from the rocks into the sea. The top of the island is nearly
+flat, with a sandy soil, which produces three or four kinds of low small
+trees, not known in Europe, and these trees are much overgrown with
+moss. Among these trees the surface is covered with pretty good grass,
+especially in the beginning of the year, but there are no land animals
+to feed upon it, the great number of goats that used to be found here
+formerly being all destroyed. Is has, however, a great number of the
+birds named Boobies and Man-of-war birds. Some say that this island got
+the name _Isola de Plata_ from the Spaniards, from the circumstance of
+Sir Francis Drake having carried to this place their ship the Cacafoga,
+richly laden with silver, which they name _Plata_.
+
+The anchorage is on the east side, about the middle of the island, close
+to the shore, within two cables length of the sandy bay, in eighteen or
+twenty fathoms, fast ooze, and smooth water, the S.E. point of the
+island keeping off the force of the south wind which usually blows here.
+In this sandy bay there is good landing, and indeed it is the only place
+which leads into the island. A small shoal runs out about a quarter of a
+mile from the east point of the island, on which shoal there is a great
+rippling of the sea when the tide flows. The tide here has a strong
+current, setting to the south with the flood, and to the north when it
+ebbs. At this east point also there are three small high rocks, about a
+cable's length from the shore; and three much larger rocks at the N.E.
+point. All round the isle the water is very deep, except at the
+before-mentioned anchorage. Near the shoal there are great numbers of
+small sea-tortoises, or turtle, formerly mentioned as found at the
+Gallapagos. This island of _Plata_ is four or five leagues W.S.W. from
+Cape _San Lorenzo_.
+
+After remaining one day at this isle, we continued our voyage to Cape
+_Santa Helena_, in lat. 2 deg. 8' S. This cape appears high and flat,
+resembling an island, covered on the top with thistles, and surrounded
+by low grounds, but without any trees. As it jets far out to sea, it
+forms a good bay on its north side, a mile within which is a wretched
+Indian village on the shore, called also Santa Helena; but the ground in
+its neighbourhood, though low, is sandy and barren, producing neither
+trees, grass, corn, nor fruit, except excellent water-melons; and the
+inhabitants are forced to fetch their fresh water from the river
+_Calanche_, four leagues distant, at the bottom of the bay. They live
+chiefly on fish, and are supplied with maize from other parts, in
+exchange for _Algatrane_, which is a bituminous substance issuing from
+the earth near this village, about five paces above high-water mark.
+This substance, by means of long boiling, becomes hard like pitch, and
+is employed as such by the Spaniards. To leeward of the point, directly
+opposite the village, there is good anchorage, but on the west side the
+water is very deep. Some of our men were sent under night in canoes to
+take the village, in which they succeeded, and made some prisoners; but
+the natives set fire to a small bark in the road, alleging the positive
+orders of the viceroy.
+
+We returned from thence to the island of Plata, where we anchored on the
+26th September, and sent some of our men that evening to _Manta_, a
+small Indian village on the continent, seven or eight leagues from
+Plata, and two or three leagues east from Cape Lorenzo. Its buildings
+are mean and scattered, but standing on an easy ascent, it has a fine
+prospect towards the sea-side. Having formerly been inhabited by the
+Spaniards, it has a fine church, adorned with carved work; but as the
+ground in the neighbourhood is very dry and sandy, it produces neither
+corn nor roots, and only a few shrubs are to be found. The inhabitants
+are supplied with provisions by sea, this being the first place at which
+ships refresh, when bound from Panama to Lima and other parts of Peru.
+They have an excellent spring of fresh water between the village and the
+sea. Opposite to this village, and a mile and a half from the shore,
+there is a very dangerous rock, being always covered by the sea; but
+about a mile within this rock there is safe anchorage, in six, eight,
+and ten fathoms, on hard clear sand; and a mile west from this, a shoal
+runs a mile out to sea. Behind the town, and directly to the south, a
+good way inland, there is a very high mountain rising up into the
+clouds, like a sugar-loaf; which serves as an excellent sea-mark, there
+being no other like it on all this coast. [161]
+
+[Footnote 161: The great Chimborazo is probably here meant, about 135
+English miles inland from Manta, and almost due east, instead of south,
+as in the test.--E]
+
+Our men landed about day-break, a mile and a half from the village, but
+the inhabitants took the alarm, and got all away, except two old women,
+from whom we learnt that the viceroy, on receiving intelligence of
+enemies having come across the isthmus of Darien into the South Sea, had
+ordered all their ships to be set on fire, all the goats in the isle of
+Plata to be destroyed, and that the inhabitants on the coast should keep
+no more provisions than were necessary for their present use.
+
+We returned to our ship at Plata, where we remained for some time
+unresolved what course to pursue. On the 2d of October, the Cygnet of
+London, Captain Swan, came to anchor in the same road. This was a
+richly-loaded ship, designed for trading on this coast, but being
+disappointed in his hopes of trade, his men had forced Captain Swan to
+take on board a company of buccaneers he fell in with at Nicoya, being
+those we heard of at Manta, who had come by land to the South Sea under
+the command of Captain Peter Harris, nephew to the Captain Harris who
+was slain before Panama. As the Cygnet was unfit for service, by reason
+of her cargo, Captain Swan sold most of his goods on credit, and threw
+the rest overboard, reserving only the fine commodities, and some iron
+for ballast. Captains Davis and Swan now joined company; and Harris was
+placed in command of a small bark. Our bark, which had been sent to
+cruise three days before the arrival of the Cygnet, now returned with a
+prize laden with timber, which they had taken in the Gulf of Guayaquil.
+The commander of this prize informed us, that it was reported at
+Guayaquil, that the viceroy was fitting out ten frigates to chase us
+from these seas. This intelligence made us wish for Captain Eaton, and
+we resolved to send out a small bark towards Lima, to invite him to
+rejoin us. We also fitted up another small bark for a fire-ship, and set
+sail for the island of _Lobos_ on the 20th October.
+
+Being about six leagues off Payta on the 2d of November, we sent 110 men
+in several canoes to attack that place. _Payta_ is a small sea-port town
+belonging to the Spaniards, in lat. 5 deg. 15' S. built on a sandy rock near
+the sea-side, under a high hill. Although not containing more than
+seventy-five or eighty low mean houses, like most of the other buildings
+along the coast of Peru, it has two churches. The walls of these houses
+are chiefly built of a kind of bricks, made of earth and straw, only
+dried in the sun. These bricks are three feet long, two broad, and a
+foot and a half thick. In some places, instead of roofs, they only lay a
+few poles across the tops of the walls, covered with mats, though in
+other places they have regularly-constructed roofs. The cause of this
+mean kind of building is partly from the want of stones and timber, and
+partly because it never rains on this coast, so that they are only
+solicitious to keep out the sun; and these walls, notwithstanding the
+slight nature of their materials, continue good a long time, as they are
+never injured by rain. The timber used by the better sort of people has
+to be brought by sea from other places. The walls of the churches and of
+the best houses are neatly whitened, both within and without, and the
+beams, posts, and doors are all adorned with carved work. Within they
+are ornamented with good pictures, and rich hangings of tapestry or
+painted calico, brought from Spain. The houses of Payta, however, were
+not of this description, though their two churches were large and
+handsome. Close by the sea there was a small fort, armed only with
+muskets, to command the harbour, as also another fort on the top of a
+hill, which commanded both the harbour and lower fort. The inhabitants
+of Payta are obliged to bring their fresh-water from Colon, a town two
+leagues to the N.N.E. where a fresh-water river falls into the sea; and
+have also to procure fowls, hogs, plantains, maize, and other provisions
+from that and other places, owing to the barrenness of the soil in its
+own neighbourhood. The dry and barren tract of this western coast of
+America begins at Cape Blanco in the north, and reaches to Coquimbo in
+30 deg. S. in all of which vast extent of coast I never saw or heard of any
+rain falling, nor of any thing growing whatever either in the mountains
+or vallies, except in such places as are constantly watered, in
+consequence of being on the banks of rivers and streams.
+
+The inhabitants of Colon are much given to fishing, for which purpose
+they venture out to sea in _bark-logs_.[162] These are constructed of
+several round logs of wood, forming a raft, but different according to
+the uses they are intended for, or the customs of those that make them.
+Those meant for fishing consist only of three or five logs of wood about
+eight feet long, the middle one longer than the rest, especially
+forewards, and the others gradually shorter, forming a kind of stem or
+prow to cut the waves. The logs are joined to each other's sides by
+wooden pegs and _withes_, or twisted branches of trees. Such as are
+intended for carrying merchandise are made in the same manner and shape,
+but the raft consists of twenty or thirty great trunks of trees, thirty
+or forty feet long, joined together as before. On these another row of
+shorter trees are laid across, and fastened down by wooden pegs. From,
+this double raft or bottom they raise a raft of ten feet high, by means
+of upright posts, which support two layers of thick trees laid across
+each other, like our piles of wood, but not so close as in the bottom of
+the float; these being formed only at the ends and sides, the inner part
+being left hollow. In this hollow, at the height of four feet from the
+floor of the raft, they lay a deck or floor of small poles close
+together, serving as the floor or deck of another room; and above this,
+at the same height, they lay just such another sparred deck. The lower
+room serves for the hold, in which they stow ballast, and water casks or
+jars. The second room serves for the seamen and what belongs to them.
+Above all the goods are stowed, as high as they deem fit, but seldom
+exceeding the height of ten feet. Some space is left vacant behind for
+the steersman, and before for the kitchen, especially in long voyages,
+for in these strange vessels they will venture to make voyages of five
+or six hundred leagues.
+
+[Footnote 162: I suspect this to be a mistaken translation of
+_barco-longo_, long barks, or rafts rather, as the subsequent
+description indicates.--E]
+
+In navigating these vessels, they use a very large rudder, with one mast
+in the middle of the machine, on which they have a large sail, like our
+west country barges on the river Thames. As these machines can only sail
+before the wind, they are only fit for these seas, where the wind blows
+constantly one way, seldom varying above a point or two in the whole
+voyage from Lima to Panama. If, when near Panama, they happen to meet a
+north-west wind, as sometimes happens, they must drive before it till it
+changes, merely using their best endeavours to avoid the shore, for they
+will never sink at sea. Such vessels carry sixty or seventy tons of
+merchandise, as wine, oil, flour, sugar, Quito cloth, soap, dressed
+goats skins, &c. They are navigated by three or four men only; who, on
+their arrival at Panama, sell both the goods and vessel at that place,
+as they cannot go back again with them against the trade-wind. The
+smaller fishing barks of this construction are much easier managed.
+These go out to sea at night with the land-wind, and return to the shore
+in the day with the sea-breeze; and such small _barco longos_ are used
+in many parts of America, and in some places in the East Indies. On the
+coast of Coromandel they use only one log, or sometimes two, made of
+light wood, managed by one man, without sail or rudder, who steers the
+log with a paddle, sitting with his legs in the water.[163]
+
+[Footnote 163: On the coast of Coromandel these small rafts are named
+_Catamarans_, and are employed for carrying letters or messages between
+the shore and the ships, through the tremendous surf which continually
+breaks on that coast.--E.]
+
+The next town to Payta of any consequence is _Piura_, thirty miles from
+Payta, seated in a valley on a river of the same name, which discharges
+its waters into the bay of _Chirapee_ [or Sechura.] in lat. 5 deg. 32' S.
+This bay is seldom visited by ships of burden, being full of shoals; but
+the harbour of Payta is one of the best on the coast of Peru, being
+sheltered on the S.W. by a point of land, which renders the bay smooth
+and the anchorage safe, in from six to twenty fathoms on clear sand.
+Most ships navigating this coast, whether bound north or south, touch at
+this port for fresh water, which is brought to them from _Colon_ at a
+reasonable rate.
+
+Early in the morning of the 3d November, our men landed about four
+miles south of Payta, where they took some prisoners who were set there
+to watch. Though informed that the governor of Piura had come to the
+defence of Payta with a reinforcement of an hundred men, they
+immediately pushed to the fort on the hill, which they took with little
+resistance, on which the governor and all the inhabitants evacuated
+Payta, but which we found empty of money, goods, and provisions. That
+same evening we brought our ships to anchor near the town, in ten
+fathoms a mile from shore, and remained six days in hopes of getting a
+ransom for the town; but seeing we were not likely to have any, we set
+it on fire, and set sail at night with the land-breeze for the island of
+Lobos. The 14th we came in sight of _Lobos de Tierra_, the inner or
+northern island of Lobos, which is of moderate height, and appears at a
+distance like _Lobos del Mare_, the southern island of the same name, at
+which other island we arrived on the 19th. The evening of the 29th we
+set sail for the bay of Guayaquil, which lies between Cape _Blanco_ in
+lat. 4 deg. 18', and the point of _Chanday_, or _Carnera_, in 2 deg. 18' both S.
+In the bottom of this bay is a small isle, called _Santa Clara_,
+extending E. and W. and having many shoals, which make ships that intend
+for Guayaquil to pass on the south side of this island.
+
+From the isles of Santa Clara to _Punta arena_, the N.W. point of the
+island of Puna, is seven leagues [thirty statute miles] N.N.E. Here
+ships bound for Guayaquil take in pilots, who live in a town in Puna of
+the same name, at its N.E. extremity, seven leagues [twenty-five miles]
+from Punta arena. The island of Puna is low, stretching fourteen leagues
+E. and W. and five leagues from N. to S.[164] It has a strong tide
+running along its shores, which are full of little creeks and harbours.
+The interior of this island consists of good pasture land, intermixed
+with some woodlands, producing various kinds of trees to us unknown.
+Among these are abundance of _Palmitoes_, a tree about the thickness of
+an ordinary ash, and thirty feet high, having a straight trunk without
+branches or leaf, except at the very top, which spreads out into many
+small branches three or four feet long. At the extremity of each of
+these is a single leaf, which at first resembles a fan plaited together,
+and then opens out like a large unfolded fan. The houses in the town of
+Puna are built on posts ten or twelve feet high, and are thatched with
+palmito leaves, the inhabitants having to go up to them by means of
+ladders. The best place for anchorage is directly opposite the town, in
+five fathoms, a cable's length from shore.
+
+[Footnote 164: Puna is nearly forty English miles from N.E. to S.W. and
+about sixteen miles from N.W. to S.E.]
+
+From Puna to Guayaquil is seven leagues, the entrance into the river of
+that name being two miles across, and it afterwards runs up into the
+country with a pretty straight course, the ground on both sides being
+marshy and full of red mangrove trees. About four miles below the town
+of Guayaquil, the river is divided into two channels by a small low
+island, that on the west being broadest, though the other is as deep.
+From the upper end of this island to the town is about a league, and the
+river about the same in breadth, in which a ship of large burden may
+ride safely, especially on the side nearest the town. The town of
+Guayaquil stands close to the river, being partly built on an ascent,
+and partly at the foot of a small hill, having a steep descent to the
+river. It is defended by two forts on the low grounds, and a third on
+the hill, and is one of the best ports belonging to the Spaniards in the
+South Sea. It is under the command of a governor, and is beautified by
+several fine churches and other good buildings. From this place they
+export cocoas, hides, tallow, sarsaparilla, drugs, and a kind of woollen
+cloth called Quito-cloth. The cocoas grow on both sides of the river
+above the town, having a smaller nut than those of Campeachy.[165]
+Sarsaparilla delights in watery places, near the side of the river.
+
+[Footnote 165: The _cacao_, or chocolate-nut is probably here meant, not
+the cocoanut.--E.]
+
+Quito is a populous place in the interior of the country, almost under
+the line, being in lat. 0 deg. 12' S. and long. 78 deg. 22' W. from Greenwich.
+It is inclosed by a ridge of high mountains, abounding in gold, being
+inhabited by a few Spaniards, and by many Indians under the Spanish
+dominion. The rivers or streams which descend from the surrounding
+mountains carry great abundance of gold dust in their course into the
+low grounds, especially after violent rains, and this gold is collected
+out of the sand by washing. Quito is reckoned the richest place for gold
+in all Peru,[166] but it is unwholesome, the inhabitants being subject
+to headaches, fevers, diarrhaes, and dysenteries; but Guayaquil is
+greatly more healthy. At Quito is made a considerable quantity of
+coarse woollen cloth, worn only by the lower class all over the kingdom
+of Peru.
+
+[Footnote 166: Quito was annexed to the empire of Peru, not long before
+the Spanish conquest, but is now in the viceroyalty of New Granada.--E.]
+
+Leaving our ships at Cape Blanco, we went in a bark and several canoes
+to make an attempt on Guayaquil, but were discovered, and returned
+therefore to our ships, in which we sailed for the island of Plata, in
+lat. 1 deg. 15' S. where we arrived on the 16th December. Having provided
+ourselves with water on the opposite coast of the continent, we set sail
+on the 23d with a brisk gale at S.S.W. directing our course for a town
+called _Lovalia_, in the bay of Panama. Next morning we passed in sight
+of Cape _Passado_, in lat. 0 deg. 28' S. being a very high round point,
+divided in the middle, bare towards the sea, but covered on the land
+side with fruit-trees, the land thereabout being hilly and covered with
+wood. Between this and Cape San Francisco there are many small points,
+inclosing as many sandy creeks full of trees of various kinds. Meaning
+to look out for canoes, we were indifferent what river we came to, so we
+endeavoured to make for the river of St Jago, by reason of its nearness
+to the island of _Gallo_, in which there is much gold, and where was
+good anchorage for our ships. We passed Cape St Francisco, whence to the
+north the land along the sea is full of trees of vast height and
+thickness.
+
+Between this cape and the island of Gallo there are several large
+rivers, all of which we passed in our way to that of St Jago, a large
+navigable river in lat. 2 deg. N.[167] About seven leagues before it reaches
+the sea, this river divides into two branches, which inclose an island
+four leagues in circuit. Both branches are very deep, but the S.W.
+channel is the broadest, and the other has sand-banks at its mouth,
+which cannot be passed at low-water. Above the island the river is a
+league broad, having a straight channel and swift current, and is
+navigable three leagues up, but how much farther I know not. It runs
+through a very rich soil, producing all kinds of the tallest trees that
+are usually met with in this country, but especially red and white
+cotton-trees, and cabbage-trees of large size. The _white cotton-tree_
+grows not unlike an oak, but much bigger and taller, having a straight
+trunk, without branches to the top, where it sends out strong branches.
+The bark is very smooth, the leaves of the size of a plum-tree leaf,
+dark green, oval, smooth, and jagged at the ends. These trees are not
+always biggest near the roots, but often swell out to a great size in
+the middle of their trunks. They bear _silk-cotton_, which falls to the
+ground in November and December, but is not so substantial as that of
+the cotton-shrub, being rather like the down of thistles. Hence they do
+not think it worth being gathered in America; but in the East Indies it
+is used for stuffing pillows. The old leaves of this tree fall off in
+April, and are succeeded by fresh leaves in the course of a week. The
+_red cotton-tree_ is somewhat less in size, but in other respects
+resembles the other, except that it produces _no cotton_. The wood is
+hard, though that of both kinds is somewhat spongy. Both are found in
+fat soils, both in the East and West Indies.
+
+[Footnote 167: Nearly in the indicated latitude is the river of Patia,
+in the province of Barbacoas. The river St Jago of modern maps on this
+coast is in lat. 1 deg. 18' N. in the province of Atacames, or
+Esmeraldas.--E.]
+
+The _cabbage-tree_ is the tallest that is found in these woods, some
+exceeding 120 feet in height. It likewise is without boughs or branches
+to the top, where its branches are the thickness of a man's arm, and
+twelve or fourteen feet long. Two feet from the stem come forth many
+small long leaves of an inch broad, so thick and regular on both sides
+that they cover the whole branch. In the midst of these high branches is
+what is called the cabbage, which, when taken out of the outer leaves,
+is a foot in length, and as thick as the small of a man's leg, as white
+as milk, and both sweet and wholesome. Between the cabbages and the
+large branches many small twigs sprout out, two feet long and very close
+together, at the extremities of which grow hard round berries, about the
+size of cherries, which fall once a year on the ground, and are
+excellent food for hogs. The trunk has projecting rings half a foot
+asunder, the bark being thin and brittle, the wood hard and black, and
+the pith white. As the tree dies when deprived of its head, which is the
+cabbage, it is usually cut down before gathering the fruit.
+
+As the coast and country of Lima has continual dry weather, so this
+northern part of Peru is seldom without rain, which is perhaps one
+reason why this part of the coast is so little known. Besides, in going
+from Panama to Lima, they seldom pass along the coast, but sail to the
+west as far as the Cobaya Islands, to meet the west winds, and thence
+stand over for Cape St Francisco. In returning to Panama, they keep
+along the coast, but being deeply laden, their ships are not fit to
+enter the rivers, the banks of which, and the seacoast, are covered with
+trees and bushes, and are therefore convenient for the natives to lie in
+ambush. The Indians have some plantations of maize and plantains, and
+also breed fowls and hogs. On the 27th December, 1684, we entered the
+river of St Jago [_Patia_] with four canoes by the lesser branch, and
+met with no inhabitants till six leagues from its mouth, where we
+observed two small huts thatched with palmito leaves. We saw at the same
+time several Indians, with their families and household goods, paddling
+up the river much faster than we could row, as they kept near the banks.
+On the opposite, or west side, we saw many other huts, about a league
+off but did not venture to cross the river, as the current was very
+rapid. In the two huts on the east side we only found a few plantains,
+some fowls, and one hog, which seemed to be of the European kind, such
+as the Spaniards brought formerly to America, and chiefly to Jamaica,
+Hispaniola, and Cuba, where, being previously marked, they feed in the
+woods all day, and are recalled to their pens at night by the sound of
+conch shells.
+
+We returned next morning to the mouth of the river, intending to proceed
+to the isle of _Gallo_, where we had directed the ships to meet us. This
+small uninhabited island, in lat. 3 deg. N.[168] is situated in a spacious
+bay, three leagues from the river _Tomaco_, and four and a half from an
+Indian village of the same name. It is moderately high, and well stored
+with timber, having a good sandy bay at its N.E. end, near which is a
+fine stream of fresh water; and over against the bay there is good
+anchorage in six or seven fathoms. There is only one channel by which to
+approach this island, in which are four fathoms, and into which it is
+necessary to enter with the flood, and to come out with the ebb. The
+river _Tomaco_ is supposed to have its origin in the rich mountains of
+Quito, and takes its name from that of a village on its banks.[169] The
+country on this river is well peopled by Indians, among whom are a few
+Spaniards, who traffic for gold with the natives. This river is so
+shallow at the mouth, that it can only be entered by barks. The town of
+_Tomaco_ is small, and situated near the mouth of the river, being
+chiefly occupied by the Spaniards, who trade in this neighbourhood. From
+this place to that branch of the river St Jago where we were then at
+anchor is five leagues.
+
+[Footnote 168: The lat. of Gallo is only 1 deg. 57' N. That assigned in the
+text would lead to the isle of Gorgona, in 2 deg. 54' N. but the description
+of our author suits much better with Gallo.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 169: The island and point of Tomaco are placed in modern maps
+at the mouth of the Mira, off which are many islands, in lat. 1 deg. 40'N.]
+
+As the land here is low and full of creeks, we left the river on the
+21st December, and crossed these small bays in our canoes. In our way we
+saw an Indian hut, whence we took the master and all his family, and
+rowing forwards, we came to Tomaco at midnight. We here seized all the
+inhabitants, among whom was one Don Diego de Pinas, a Spanish knight,
+whose ship was at anchor not far off to load with timber, and in which
+we found thirteen jars of good wine, but no other loading. An Indian
+canoe came to us, in which were three natives, who were straight and
+well-limbed, but of low stature, having black hair, long visages, small
+eyes and noses, and dark complexions. Several of our men, who had gone
+seven or eight leagues up the river, returned on the 31st, bringing with
+them several ounces of gold, which they had found in a Spanish house,
+whence the inhabitants had fled.
+
+On the 1st January, 1685, while going in our canoes from Tomaco to
+Gallo, we took a packet of letters in a Spanish boat bound from Panama
+to Lima, by which the president of Panama wrote to hasten the Plate
+fleet from Lima, as the armada from Spain had arrived in Porto Bello.
+This intelligence made us change our intention of proceeding to Lavelia,
+instead of which we now proposed to make for the _Pearl Islands_, not
+far from Panama, past which all ships bound from the south for Panama
+must necessarily pass. We accordingly sailed on the 7th, and next day
+took a vessel of ninety tons, laden with flour; and continuing our
+voyage with a gentle wind at S. we anchored on the 9th at the island of
+_Gorgona_, on its west side, in thirty-eight fathoms clean ground, two
+cables length from shore, in a sandy bay, the land round which is very
+low.
+
+_Gorgona_ is in lat. 2 deg. 54' N. twenty-five leagues from Gallo, and is
+remarkable for two high risings or hills called the Saddles. This island
+is two leagues long by one league broad, and is about four from the
+continent, having another small isle at its west end. It is full of tall
+trees, and is watered by many rivulets, having no animals except
+monkies, rabbits, and snakes. It is very subject to heavy rains, and the
+only observable difference in the seasons here is, that the rains are
+more moderate in summer. The sea around is so deep that there is no
+anchorage except at the west end, where the tide flows eight feet.
+Muscles and periwinkles are here in great plenty, and the monkies open
+the shells at low water. There are also abundance of pearl oysters,
+fixed to loose rocks by their beards, four, five, and six fathoms under
+water. These resemble our oysters, but are somewhat flatter and thinner
+in the shell, their flesh being slimy and not eatable, unless dried
+beforehand and afterwards boiled. Some shells contain twenty or thirty
+seed pearls, and others have one or two pearls of some size, lying at
+the head of the oyster, between the fish and the shell; but the inside
+of the shells have a brighter lustre than even the pearls.
+
+The 13th January we pursued our voyage for _Isla del Rey_, being two men
+of war, two tenders a fire-ship, and a prize vessel. With the trade-wind
+at S. we sailed along the continent, having low land near the sea but
+seeing high mountains up the country. On the 16th we passed Cape
+_Corientes_, in lat. 5 deg. 32' N. being a high point with four small
+hillocks on the top, and at this place found a current setting to the
+north. The 21st we came in sight of Point _Garachina_, in lat. 7 deg. 20'
+N.[170] The land here being high and rocky, and without trees near the
+shore. Within the point there is plenty of oysters and muscles. About
+twelve leagues from this point are the islands called _Islas del Rey_,
+or the Pearl Islands.[171] Between these and the Point of Garachina
+there is a small flat barren island, called _Galleria_, near which we
+came to anchor.
+
+[Footnote 170: Carachina Point is in lat. 8 deg. 10' N.]
+
+[Footnote 171: The Isla del Rey is a considerable island in the bay of
+Panama, and the Archipelago de las Perlas are a multitude of [illegible]
+islets N. by W. from that island.--E.]
+
+The _King's_ or _Pearl_ Islands, are a considerable number of low woody
+isles, seven leagues from the nearest continent, and twelve leagues from
+Panama, stretching fourteen leagues from N.W. by N. to S.E. by S. Though
+named Pearl Islands in the maps, I could never see any pearls about
+them. The northermost of these isles, called _Pachea_ or _Pacheque_,
+which is very small, is eleven or twelve leagues from Panama; the most
+southerly is called St Paul's Island, and the rest, though larger, have
+no names. Some of them are planted with bananas, plantains, and rice by
+negroes belonging to the inhabitants of Panama. The channel between
+these islands and the continent is seven or eight leagues broad, of a
+moderate depth, and has good anchorage all the way. These isles lie very
+close together, yet have channels between them fit for boats.
+
+At one end of _St Paul's_ Island, there is a good careening place, in a
+deep channel inclosed by the land, into which the entrance is on the
+north side, where the tide rises ten feet. We brought our ships in on
+the 25th, being spring tide, and having first cleaned our barks, we sent
+them on the 27th to cruise towards Panama. The fourth day after, they
+brought us in a prize coming from Lavelia, laden with maize or Indian
+corn, salted beef and fowls. _Lavelia_ is a large town on the bank of a
+river which runs into the north side of the bay of Panama, and is seven
+leagues from the sea; and _Nata_ is another town situated in a plain on
+a branch of the same river.[172] These two places supply Panama with
+beef, hogs, fowls, and maize. In the harbour where we careened, we found
+abundance of oysters, muscles, limpits, and clams, which last are a kind
+of oysters, which stick so close to the rocks that they must be opened
+where they grow, by those who would come at their meat. We also found
+here some pigeons and turtle-doves.
+
+[Footnote 172: From the circumstances in the text Lavelia seems to be
+the town now named San Francisco, near the head of the river Salado,
+which runs into the gulf Parita, on the _west_ side of the bay of
+Panama.--E.]
+
+Having well careened our ships by the 14th February, and provided a
+stock of wood and water, we sailed on the 18th, and came to anchor in
+the great channel between the isles and the continent, in fifteen
+fathoms, on soft ooze, and cruised next day towards Panama, about which
+the shore seemed very beautiful, interspersed with a variety of hills
+and many small thickets. About a league from the continent there are
+several small isles, partly ornamented with scattered trees, and the
+_King's Isles_ on the opposite side of the channel give a delightful
+prospect, from their various shapes and situations. The 18th we went
+towards Panama, and anchored directly opposite Old Panama, once a place
+of note, but mostly laid in ashes by Sir Henry Morgan, and not since
+rebuilt. New Panama is about four leagues from the old town, near the
+side of a river, being a very handsome city, on a spacious bay of the
+same name, into which many long navigable rivers discharge their waters,
+some of which have gold in their sands. The country about Panama affords
+a delightful prospect from the sea, having a great diversity of hills,
+vallies, groves, and plains. The houses are mostly of brick, and pretty
+lofty, some being handsomely built, especially that inhabited by the
+president; the churches, monasteries, and other public edifices, making
+the finest appearance of any place I have seen in the Spanish West
+Indies. It is fortified by a high stone wall, mounted by a considerable
+number of guns, which were formerly only on the land side, but have now
+been added to the side next the sea. The city has vast trade, being the
+staple or emporium for all goods to and from Peru and Chili; besides
+that, every three years, when the Spanish _armada_ comes to Porto Bello,
+the _Plate fleet_ comes here with the treasure belonging to the king and
+the merchants, whence it is carried on mules by land to Porto Bello, at
+which time, from the vast concourse of people, everything here is
+enormously dear.
+
+The Spanish armada, which comes every three years to the West Indies,
+arrives first at Carthagena, whence an express is dispatched by land to
+the viceroy at Lima, and two packets are also sent by sea, one for Lima,
+and the other for Mexico, which last I suppose goes by way of _Vera
+Cruz_. That for Lima goes first by land to Panama, and thence by sea to
+Lima. After remaining sixty days at Carthagena, the armada sails to
+Porto Bello, where it only remains thirty days to take in the royal
+treasure brought here from Panama, said to amount to twenty-four
+millions of dollars, besides treasure and goods belonging to the
+merchants. From Porto Bello the armada weighs always on the thirtieth
+day, but the admiral will sometimes stay a week longer at the mouth of
+the river, to oblige the merchants. It then returns to Carthagena, where
+it meets the king's money from that part of the country, as also a large
+Spanish galleon or patache, which, on the first arrival of the armada at
+Carthagena, had been dispatched along the coast to collect the royal
+treasure. The armada, after a set stay at Carthagena, sails for the
+Havannah, where a small squadron called the _flota_ meets it from Vera
+Cruz, bringing the riches of Mexico, and the rich goods brought by the
+annual ship from Manilla. When all the ships are joined, they sail for
+Spain through the gulf of Florida.
+
+Porto Bello is a very unhealthy place, on which account the merchants of
+Lima stay there as short time as possible. Panama is seated in a much
+better air, enjoying the sea-breeze every day from ten or eleven in the
+forenoon till eight or nine at night, when the land-breeze begins, and
+blows till next morning. Besides, on the land side Panama has an open
+champaign country, and is seldom troubled with fogs; neither is the
+rainy season, which continues from May till November, nearly so
+excessive as at Porto Bello, though severe enough in June, July, and
+August, in which season the merchants of Peru, who are accustomed to a
+constant serene air, without rains or fogs, are obliged to cut off their
+hair, to preserve them from fevers during their stay.
+
+The 21st February, near the Perico islands opposite to Panama, we took
+another prize from Lavelia, laden with beeves, hogs, fowls, and salt.
+The 24th we went to the isle of Taboga, six leagues south of Panama.
+This island is three miles long and two broad, being very rocky and
+steep all round, except on the north side, where the shore has an easy
+dope. In the middle of the isle the soil is black and rich, where
+abundance of plantains and bananas are produced, and near the sea there
+are cocoa and _mammee_ trees. These are large and straight in their
+stems, without knots, boughs, or branches, and sixty or seventy feet
+high. At the top there are many small branches set close together,
+bearing round fruit about the size of a large quince, covered with a
+grey rind, which is brittle before the fruit is ripe, but grows yellow
+when the fruit comes to maturity, and is then easily peeled off. The
+ripe fruit is also yellow, resembling a carrot in its flesh, and both
+smells and tastes well, having two rough flat kernels in the middle,
+about the size of large almonds. The S.W. side of this isle is covered
+with trees, affording abundant fuel, and the N. side has a fine stream
+of good water, which falls from the mountains into the sea. Near this
+there was formerly a pretty town with a handsome church, but it has been
+mostly destroyed by the privateers. There is good anchorage opposite
+this town a mile from the shore, in sixteen to eighteen fathoms on soft
+ooze. At the N.N.W. end is a small town called _Tabogilla_, and on the
+N.E. of this another small town or village without a name.
+
+While at anchor near _Tabogilla_, we were in great danger from a
+pretended merchant, who brought a bark to us in the night, under
+pretence of being laden with merchandise to trade with us privately, but
+which was in reality a fire-ship fitted out for our destruction. But on
+her approach, some of our men hailed her to come to anchor, and even
+fired upon her, which so terrified the men that they got into their
+canoes, having first set her on fire, on which we cut our cables and got
+out of her way. This fire-ship was constructed and managed by one Bond,
+who formerly deserted from us to the Spaniards. While busied next
+morning in recovering our anchors, we discovered a whole fleet of canoes
+full of men, passing between Tabogilla and another isle. These proved to
+be French and English buccaneers, lately come from the North Sea across
+the isthmus of Darien, 200 of them being French and 80 English. These
+last were divides between our two ships, under Captains Davis and Swan;
+and the Frenchmen were put into our prize, named the Flower, under the
+command of Captain Gronet, their countryman, in return for which he
+offered commissions to Captains Davis and Swan, from the governor of
+Petite Goave, as it is the custom of the French privateers to carry with
+them blank commissions. Captain Davis accepted one, but Captain Swan had
+one already from the Duke of York.
+
+Learning from these men that Captain Townley was coming across the
+isthmus of Darien with 180 Englishmen, we set sail on the 2d March for
+the gulf of _San Miguel_ to meet Townley. This gulf is on the east side
+of the great Bay of Panama, in lat. 8 deg. 15' N. long. 79 deg. 10' W. thirty
+leagues S.E. from Panama; from whence the passage lies between Isola del
+Rey and the main. In this gulf many rivers discharge their waters. Its
+southern point is Cape _Carachina_, in lat. 8 deg. 6' N. and the northern,
+named Cape _Gardo_, is in lat. 8 deg. 18' N. The most noted rivers which
+discharge themselves into this gulf, are named _Santa Maria, Sambo_, and
+_Congo_. This last rises far within the country, and after being joined
+by many small streams on both sides of its course, falls into the north
+side of the gulf a league from Cape Gardo. It is deep and navigable for
+several leagues into the country, but not broad, and is neglected by the
+Spaniards owing to its nearness to the river of Santa Maria, where they
+have gold mines. _Santa Maria_ is the largest of the rivers in this
+gulf, being navigable for eight or nine leagues, as far as the tide
+flows, above which it divides into several branches fit only for canoes.
+In this river the tide of flood rises eighteen feet. About the year
+1665, the Spaniards built the town of Santa Maria, near six leagues up
+this river,[173] to be near the gold mines. I have been told, that,
+besides the gold usually procured out of the ore and sand, they
+sometimes find lumps wedged between the fissures of rocks as large as
+hens eggs or larger. One of these was got by Mr Harris, who got here 120
+pounds weight of gold, and in his lump there were several crevices full
+of earth and dust.
+
+[Footnote 173: In modern maps the river which seems to agree with this
+description of the Santa Maria, is called _Tlace_, one of the principal
+branches of which is named Chuchunque. The gold mines of Cana and Balsa
+are placed on some of its branches, on which likewise there are several
+towns, as Nisperal, Fichichi, Pungana, Praya, and Balsa.--E.]
+
+The Spaniards employ their slaves to dig these mines in the dry season;
+but when the rivers overflow, as the mines cannot be then worked, the
+Indians wash the gold out of the sands that are forced down from the
+mountains, and which gold they sell to the Spaniards, who gain as much
+in that way as they do by their mines. During the wet season, the
+Spaniards retire with their slaves to Panama. Near the mouth of the
+Santa Maria, the Spaniards have lately built another town, called
+_Scuchadores_,[174] in a more airy situation than Santa Maria. The land
+all about the gulf of San Miguel is low and fertile, and is covered with
+great numbers of large trees.
+
+[Footnote 174: This probably is that named Nisperal in modern geography,
+the appellation in the text being the Spanish name, and the other the
+name given by the Indians.--E.]
+
+While crossing the isthmus, Gronet had seen Captain Townley and his crew
+at the town of Santa Maria, busied in making causes in which to embark
+on the South Sea, the town being at that time abandoned by the
+Spaniards; and on the 3d March, when we were steering for the gulf of
+San Miguel, we met Captain Townley and his crew in two barks which they
+had takes, one laden with brandy, wine, and sugar, and the other with
+flour. As he wanted room for his men, he distributed the jars among our
+ships, in which the Spaniards transport their brandy, wine, and oil.
+These jars hold seven or eight gallons each. Being now at anchor among
+the King's islands, but our water growing scarce, we sailed for Cape
+Carachina, in hopes of providing ourselves with that necessary article,
+and anchored within that cape, in four fathoms on the 22d. We here found
+the tide to rise nine feet, and the flood to set N.N.E. the ebb running
+S.S.W. The natives brought us some refreshments, but as they did not in
+the least understand Spanish, we supposed they had no intercourse with
+the Spaniards.
+
+Finding no water here, we sailed for _Porto Pinas_, about fifty miles to
+the S. by W. in lat. 7 deg. 33' N. which is so named from the vast numbers
+of pine-trees which grow in its neighbourhood. The country here rises by
+a gentle ascent from the sea to a considerable height, and is pretty
+woody near the shore. At the entrance into the harbour there are two
+small rocks, which render the passage narrow, and the harbour within is
+rather small, besides which it is exposed to the S.W. wind. We sent our
+boats into this harbour for water, which they could not procure, owing
+to a heavy sea near the shore; wherefore we again made sail for Cape
+Carachina, where we arrived on the 29th March. On our way we took a
+canoe, in which were four Indians and a Mulatto, and as the last was
+found to have been in the fire-ship sent against us, he was hanged.
+
+On the 11th of April we anchored among the King's isles, where we met
+with Captain Harris, who had come with some men by way of the river of
+Santa Maria. The 19th, 250 men were sent in canoes to the river
+_Cheapo_, to surprise the town of that name. The 21st we followed them
+to the island of _Chepillo_, directly opposite the mouth of the river
+Chepo, or Cheapo, in the bay of Panama, about seven leagues from the
+city of Panama, and one league from the continent. This is a pleasant
+island, about two miles long, and as much in breadth, low on the north
+side, but rising by a gentle ascent to the south. The soil is very good,
+and produces in the low grounds great store of fine fruits, as
+plantains, mammees, sapotas, sapadillos, avogato pears, star-apples, and
+others. Half a mile from shore there is good anchorage, opposite to
+which is a very good spring of fresh-water near the sea.
+
+The _Sapadillo_-tree is altogether like a pear-tree, and the fruit
+resembles a bergamot pear, but somewhat longer. When first gathered it
+is hard and the juice clammy; but after keeping a few days it becomes
+juicy and sweet. It has two or three black kernels, resembling
+pomegranate seeds. The _Avogato_-tree is higher than our pear-trees,
+having a black smooth bark, and oval leaves. The fruit is about the size
+of a large lemon, green at first, but becomes yellow when ripe, having a
+yellowish pulp as soft as butter. After being three or four days
+gathered, the rind comes easily off, and as the fruit is insipid it is
+commonly eaten with sugar and limejuice, being esteemed a great
+provocative by the Spaniards, who have therefore planted them in most of
+their settlements on the Atlantic. It has a stone within as large as a
+horse-plum. The _Sapota_-tree, or _Mammee-sapota_, is neither so large
+nor so tall as the wild mammae at Taboga, nor is the fruit so large or
+so round. The rind is smooth, and the pulp, which is pleasant and
+wholesome, is quite red, with a rough longish stone. There are also here
+some wild _mammee_-trees, which grow very tall and straight, and are fit
+for masts, but the fruit is not esteemed. The tree producing the
+_star-apples_ resembles our quince-tree, but is much larger, and has
+abundance of broad oval leaves. The fruit is as big as a large apple,
+and is reckoned very good, but I never tasted it.
+
+The river _Chepo_, or _Cheapo_, rises in the mountains near the north
+side of the isthmus, being inclosed between a northern and southern
+range, between which it makes its way to the S.W. after which it
+describes nearly a semicircle, and runs gently into the sea about seven
+leagues E. from Panama, in lat. 9 deg. 3' N. long. 79 deg. 51' W. Its mouth is
+very deep, and a quarter of a mile broad, but is so obstructed at the
+entrance by sands as only to be navigable by barks. About six leagues
+from the sea stands the city of _Cheapo_, on the _left_ bunk of the
+river.[175] This place stands in a champaign country, affording a very
+pleasant prospect, as it has various hills in the neighbourhood covered
+with wood, though most of the adjacent lands are pasture-grounds to the
+north of the river, but the country south from the river is covered with
+wood for many miles.
+
+[Footnote 175: In modern maps the town of Chepo is placed on the _right_
+bank of the river, as descending the stream, and only about five miles
+up the river.--E.]
+
+Our men returned from Cheapo on the 24th, having taken that town without
+opposition, but found nothing there worth mention. The 25th we were
+joined by Captain Harris, and arrived at Taboga on the 28th, when,
+finding ourselves nearly a thousand strong, we meditated an attack on
+Panama; but, being informed by our prisoners that the Spaniards there
+had received considerable reinforcements from Porto Bello, that design
+was laid aside. The 25th May we had intelligence from some prisoners
+that the Lima fleet was daily expected, whereupon we anchored in a
+narrow channel, a mile long and not above seven paces wide, formed by
+two or three small islands on the south side of the island of
+_Pacheque_. Our fleet now consisted of ten sail, only two of which were
+ships of war, that commanded by Captain Davis having 36 guns and 156,
+while Captain Swan's carried 16 guns and 140 men. The rest were only
+provided with small arms, and our whole force amounted to 960 men. We
+had also a fire-ship.
+
+Hitherto we had the wind at N.N.E. with fair weather, but on the 28th of
+May the rainy season began. On that day, about 11 a.m. it began to clear
+up, and we discovered the Spanish fleet three leagues W.N.W. from the
+island of Pacheque, standing to the east, we being then at anchor a
+league S.E. from that isle, between it and the continent. We set sail
+about three p.m. bearing down upon the Spaniards right before the wind,
+while they kept close upon a wind to meet us. Night coming on, we only
+exchanged a few shots at that time. As soon as it began to be dark, the
+Spanish admiral shewed a light at his top, as a signal for his fleet to
+anchor. In half an hour this was taken down; but soon after a light
+appeared as before, which went to leewards, which we followed under
+sail, supposing it to be still the admiral; but this was a stratagem of
+the Spaniards to deceive as, being at the top-mast head of one of their
+barks, and effectually succeeded, as we found in the morning they had
+gained the weather-gage of us. They now bore down upon us under full
+sail, so that we were forced to make a running fight all next day,
+almost quite round the bay of Panama, and came at length to anchor over
+against the island of Pacheque. As Captain Townley was hard pressed by
+the Spaniards, he was forced to make a bold run through the
+before-mentioned narrow channel, between Pacheque and the three small
+islands; and Captain Harris was obliged to separate from us during the
+fight. Thus our long-projected design vanished into smoke.
+
+According to the report of some prisoners taken afterwards, the Spanish
+fleet consisted of fourteen sail, besides _periagoes_, or large boats of
+twelve or fourteen oars each, and among these there were eight ships of
+good force, mounting from eight to forty-eight guns, with two
+fire-ships, and computed to contain 3000 men. In the morning of the 30th
+we saw the Spanish fleet at anchor, three leagues from us to leeward,
+and by ten a.m. they were under sail with an easy gale from the S.
+making the best of their way to Panama. In this affair we had but one
+man slain, but never knew the loss sustained by the Spaniards. Captain
+Gronet and his Frenchmen never joined us in this fight, laying the fault
+upon his men, wherefore he was ordered in a consultation to leave us;
+after which we resolved to sail for the islands of Quibo, or Cobaya, in
+quest of Captain Harris.
+
+We sailed on the 1st June, 1685, with the wind at S.S.W. passing between
+Cape Carachina and _Islas del Rey_. The 10th we came in sight of _Moro
+de Puercos_, a high round hill on the coast of Lavelia, in lat. 7 deg. 12'
+N. round which the coast makes a turn northwards to the isles of Quibo.
+On this part of the coast there are many rivers and creeks, but not near
+so large as those on the east side of the bay of Panama. Near the sea
+this western coast of the bay is partly hilly and partly low land, with
+many thick woods, but in the interior there are extensive savannahs or
+fruitful plains, well stored with cattle. Some of the rivers on this
+side produce gold, but not in such abundance as on the other side; and
+there are hardly any Spanish settlements on this side, except along the
+rivers leading to Lavelia and Nata, which are the only places I know of
+between Panama and _Pueblo nova_. From Panama there is good travelling
+all over Mexico, through savannahs or plains; but towards Peru there is
+no passage by land beyond the river Chepo, by reason of thick woods and
+many rivers and mountains.
+
+We arrived at the isle of _Quibo_ on the 15th June, where we found
+Captain Harris. This isle is in lat 7 deg. 26' N. and long. 82 deg. 13' W. It is
+near seven leagues long by four broad, being all low land, except at its
+N.E. end, on which side, and also to the east, there is excellent water.
+It abounds in many kinds of trees, among which are great numbers of deer
+and black monkeys, the flesh of which is reckoned very wholesome; and it
+has some guanas and snakes. A sand-bank runs out half a mile into the
+sea from the S.E. end of this island, and on its east side, a league to
+the north of this, there is a rock a mile from the shore, which is seen
+above water at last quarter of the ebb. In all other places there is
+safe anchorage a quarter of a mile from the shore, in six, eight, ten,
+and twelve fathoms, on clean sand and ooze. The isle of _Quicarra_, to
+the south of Quibo, is pretty large; and to the north of it is a small
+isle named Ranchina, which produces great plenty of certain trees called
+_Palma-Maria_. These are straight, tough, and of good length, and are
+consequently fit for masts, the grain of the wood having a gradual twist
+or spiral direction; but, notwithstanding the name, they have no
+resemblance to palms. To the N.E. of Quibo are the small islands of
+_Canales_ and _Cantarras_, in the channels between which there is good
+anchorage. These islands have plenty of wood and water, and appear at a
+distance as if part of the continent; and as the island of Quibo is the
+most considerable, these isles are generally named collectively the
+Quibo islands.
+
+Having failed in our designs at sea, it was agreed to try our fortune on
+land, and the city of Leon, near the coast of Nicaragua in Mexico, was
+pitched upon, as being nearest us. Being in want of canoes for landing
+our men, we cut down trees to make as many as we had occasion for, and
+in the mean time 150 men were detached to take _Puebla nova_, a town on
+the continent, near the Quibo island,[176] in hopes of getting some
+provisions. They easily took that town, but got nothing there except an
+empty bark, and returned to us on the 26th June. Captain Knight came
+back to us on the 5th July, having been farther to the west, but meeting
+with no prize, he had gone south to the bay of Guayaquil, where he took
+two _barco-longas_, with wine, oil, brandy, sugar, soap, and other
+commodities. Knight learnt from his prisoners that certain merchant
+ships, designed to have accompanied the Spanish fleet to Panama,
+remained behind at Payta, which he might easily have taken if he had
+been provided with a stronger force.
+
+[Footnote 176: The only place in modern geography resembling the name,
+and agreeing with the description in the text, is San Pablo on the S.
+coast of Veragua, in lat. 8 deg. 9' N. and long. 83 deg. W. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+Our canoes being all ready, we sailed from Quibo on the 20th July
+towards Realejo, a port a small way to the N.W. of Leon, being now 640
+men, with eight ships, three tenders, and a fire-ship. Coasting along to
+the N.W. we passed the gulfs of Dulce and Nicoya, and the _Isla del
+Cano_, the land along the coast being low and covered with wood, but
+almost destitute of inhabitants. August 8th, in lat. 11 deg. 20' N. we got
+sight of _Volcano viejo_, or Old Volcano, the sea-mark for Realejo,
+bearing from us N.E. by N. when we made ready to land next day.
+Accordingly, we sent 520 men on the 9th in thirty-one canoes to attack
+the harbour of Realejo. The weather was fair and the wind favourable
+till two p.m. when a tempest arose, attended by thunder and lightning,
+which almost overwhelmed us in the sea. It subsided, however, in half an
+hoar, as did the agitation of the waves; it being observable in these
+hot climates that the waves soon rise and soon fall. It became calm
+about seven p.m. but as we could not get ready to land that night before
+day, being then five leagues from shore, we remained nearly in the same
+place till next evening, that we might not be discovered.
+
+About three next morning another tornado had nearly put an end to us and
+our enterprise, but it did not last long, and we entered the creek, on
+the S.E. side of the harbour, leading to Realejo in the night, but durst
+not proceed further till day-break. We then rowed deeper into the creek,
+which is very narrow, the land on both sides being very marshy and full
+of mangrove trees, through among which it is impossible to pass, and
+beyond these, where the ground is firm, the Spaniards had cast up a
+small entrenchment. We rowed as fast as we could and landed 470 men, the
+remainder, among whom I was, being left to guard the canoes.
+
+The city of Leon stands twenty miles up the country in a sandy plain,
+near a peaked burning mountain, called _El Rico_, or the Volcano of
+Leon, the way to that city from where our people landed being through a
+champaign country covered with long grass. Between the landing place and
+the city were several sugar works, and about midway a beautiful river,
+but fordable. Two miles before coming to the city there was an Indian
+town, whence a pleasant sandy road led to the city. The houses in Leon
+were large and built of stone, but low and roofed with tiles, having
+many gardens among them, with a cathedral and three other churches. It
+stands in an extensive sandy plain or savannah, which absorbs all the
+rain, and being entirely free from wood, it has free access to the
+breezes on all sides. These circumstances render it a healthy and
+pleasant place, but not of much commerce, all the wealth of its
+inhabitants consisting in cattle and sugar works.
+
+Our people began their march for Leon at eight a.m. the van consisting
+of eighty of the briskest men, being led by Captain Townly. He was
+followed by Captain Swan with 100 men, and Captain Davis, assisted by
+Captain Knight, brought up the rear with 170 men.[177] Captain Townley,
+being two miles in advance of the rest, and having repulsed a body of
+seventy horse about four miles short of Leon, pushed forwards with his
+vanguard, and entered the city without farther resistance at three p.m.
+He was then opposed by 500 foot and 200 horse, first in a broad street,
+and afterwards in the great market-place; but the horse soon galloped
+off, and were followed by the foot, leaving the city to the mercy of our
+people. Captain Swan reached the city at four p.m. Davis about five, and
+Knight with the remainder at six. The Spaniards only killed one of our
+men, who was very old and had loitered behind, refusing to accept
+quarter, and took another named Smith. The governor sent word next day,
+offering to ransom the town; on which our officers demanded 30,000
+pieces of eight, or Spanish dollars, together with provisions for 1000
+men for four months, which terms being refused, our people set the city
+on fire on the 14th of August, and rejoined the canoes next morning.
+Smith was exchanged for a gentlewoman, and a gentleman who had been made
+prisoner was released, on promise to deliver 150 oxen for his ransom at
+Realejo, the place we intended next to attack.
+
+[Footnote 177: Only 350 men are here accounted for, though 470 are said
+to have marched on this enterprise, leaving a difference of 120 men:
+perhaps these made a separate corps under Knight, as he seems to have
+fallen considerably in the rear of Davis.--E.]
+
+In the afternoon of the 16th we came to the harbour of Realejo in our
+canoes, our ships having come there to anchor. The creek leading to
+Realejo extends north from the N.W. part of the harbour, being nearly
+two leagues from the island at the mouth of the harbour to the town. The
+first two-thirds of this distance the creek is broad, after which it
+closes into a deep narrow channel, lined on both sides by many
+cocoa-trees. A mile from the entrance the creek winds towards the west,
+and here the Spaniards had thrown up an entrenchment, fronting the
+entrance of the creek, and defended by 100 soldiers and twenty guns,
+having a boom of trees thrown across the creek, so that they might
+easily have beaten off 1000 men, but they wanted courage to defend their
+excellent post; for on our firing two guns they all ran away, leaving us
+at liberty to cut the boom. We then landed and marched to the town of
+Realejo, a fine borough about a mile from thence, seated in a plain on a
+small river. It had three churches and an hospital, but is seated among
+fens and marshes, which send forth a noisome scent, and render it very
+unhealthy. The country round has many sugar works and cattle pens, and
+great quantities of pitch, tar, and cordage are made by the people. It
+also abounds in melons, pine-apples, guavas, and prickly pears.
+
+The shrub which produces the _guava_ has long small boughs, with a white
+smooth bark, and leaves like our hazel. The fruit resembles a pear, with
+a thin rind, and has many hard seeds. It may be safely eaten while
+green, which is not the case with most other fruits in the East or West
+Indies. Before being ripe it is astringent, but is afterwards loosening.
+When ripe it is soft, yellow, and well tasted, and may either be baked
+like pears, or coddled like apples. There are several sorts,
+distinguished by their shape, taste, and colour, some being red and
+others yellow in the pulp. The _prickly-pear_ grows on a shrub about
+five feet high, and is common in many parts of the West Indies, thriving
+best on sandy grounds near the sea. Each branch has two or three round
+fleshy leaves, about the breadth of the hand, somewhat like those of the
+house-leek, edged all round with spines or sharp prickles an inch long.
+At the outer extremity of each leaf the fruit is produced, about the
+size of a large plum, small towards the leaf and thicker at the other
+end, where it opens like a medlar. The fruit, which is also covered by
+small prickles, is green at first, but becomes red as it ripens, having
+a red pulp of the consistence of a thick syrup, with small black seeds,
+pleasant and cooling to the taste. I have often observed, on eating
+twenty or more of these at a time, that the urine becomes as red as
+blood, but without producing any evil consequence.
+
+We found nothing of value in Realejo, except 500 sacks of flour, with
+some pitch, tar, and cordage. We also received here the 150 oxen
+promised by the gentleman who was released at Leon; which, together with
+sugar, and other cattle we procured in the country, were very welcome
+and useful to us. We remained in Realejo from the 17th to the 24th of
+August, when we re-embarked. On the 25th Captains Davis and Swan agreed
+to separate, the former being inclined to return to the coast of Peru,
+and the latter to proceed farther to the north-west; and as I was
+curious to become better acquainted with the north-western parts of
+Mexico, I left Captain Davis and joined Captain Swan. Captain Townley
+joined us with his two barks, but Captains Harris and Knight went along
+with Swan. On the 27th Davis went out of the harbour with his ship, but
+we staid behind for some time, to provide ourselves with wood and water.
+By this time our men began to be much afflicted with fevers, which we
+attributed to the remains of a contagious distemper that lately raged at
+Realejo, as the men belonging to Captain Davis were similarly infected.
+
+We sailed from Realejo on the 3d September, steering to the north-west
+along the coast, having tornadoes from the N.W. accompanied with much
+thunder and lightning, which obliged us to keep out to sea, so that we
+saw no land till the 14th, when we were in lat. 13 deg. 51' N. We then came
+in sight of the volcano of Guatimala. This presents a double peak like
+two sugar-loaves, between which fire and smoke sometimes burst forth,
+especially before bad weather. The city of Guatimala stands near the
+foot of this high mountain, eight leagues from the South Sea, and forty
+or fifty from the gulf of Amatique, at the bottom of the bay of
+Honduras.[178] This city is reputed to be rich, as the country around
+abounds in several commodities peculiar to it, especially four noted
+dyes, indigo, otta or anotto, cochineal, and silvestre.[179] Having in
+vain endeavoured to land on this part of the coast, we proceeded to the
+small isle of _Tangola_. a league from the continent, where we found
+good anchorage, with plenty of wood and water.
+
+[Footnote 178: This description agrees with the situation of St Jago de
+Guatemala, in lat. 14 deg. 25' N. long. 31 deg. 18' W., which is about thirty
+statute miles from the South Sea. The modern city of Guatemala, standing
+nine miles to the S.E., is only about sixteen miles from the sea at the
+head of a bay of the same name.--E]
+
+[Footnote 179: This last is an inferior species of cochineal, gathered
+from the uncultivated opuntia, while the true cochineal is carefully
+attended to in regular plantations. Both are the bodies of certain
+insects gathered by the Indians and dried for preservation, constituting
+the most valuable scarlet dye.--E]
+
+A league from thence is the port of _Guataico_, in lat. 15 deg. 52' N. long.
+36 deg. 20' W. one of the best in Mexico. On the east side of the entrance,
+and about a mile from it, there is a small isle near the shore, and on
+the west side a great hollow rock, open at top, through which the waves
+force a passage with a great noise to a great height even in the calmest
+weather, which affords an excellent mark for seamen. This port runs into
+the land about three miles in a N.W. direction, and is about one mile
+broad. The west side affords the securest anchorage, the other being
+exposed to S.W. winds, which are frequent on this coast. We landed here
+to the number of 140 men, of whom I was one, on the 8th September, and
+marched about fourteen miles to an Indian village, where we found
+nothing but _vanillas_ drying in the sun. The _vanilla_ grows on a small
+vine, or bindwood shrub, which winds about the stems of trees, producing
+a yellow flower, which changes to a pod of four or five inches long,
+about the the size of a tobacco-pipe stem. This is at first green, but
+becomes yellow when ripe, having black seeds. When gathered they are
+laid in the sun, which makes them soft and of a chesnut colour, when
+they are squeezed flat by the Indians. The Spaniards buy this commodity
+at a cheap rate from the Indians, and afterwards preserve it in oil.
+
+The 10th we sent four of our canoes to wait for us at the port of
+_Angelos_, about ten miles W. from Guataico, and on the 12th we sailed
+from Guataico. The 23d we landed 100 men at Angelos, where they got salt
+beef, maize, salt, hogs, and poultry but could bring little on board,
+being at a distance from the shore. Hearing of a stout ship lately
+arrived at Acapulco from Lima, and as Captain Townley was much in need
+of a better ship, it was agreed to endeavour to cut that ship out of the
+harbour. _Acapulco_ is a town and harbour in lat. 16 deg. 50' N. long. 99 deg.
+44' W. on the western coast of New Spain, and belonging to the city of
+Mexico, being the only place of commerce on this coast, and yet there
+are only three ships that come to it annually. Two of these go every
+year between this port and Manilla in Luconia, one of the Philippines,
+and the third goes once a year to and from Lima in Peru. This last comes
+to Acapulco about Christmas, laden with quicksilver, cacao, and dollars,
+and waits the arrival of the Manilla ships, from which she takes in a
+cargo of spices, calicos, muslins, and other goods of India and China,
+and then returns to Lima. This is only a vessel of moderate size; but
+the two Manilla ships are each of about 1000 tons burden.
+
+These Manilla ships arrange their voyages in such a way that one or the
+other is always at Manilla. One of them sails from Acapulco about the
+beginning of April; and after sixty days passage across the Pacific
+Ocean, touches at Guam, one of the Ladrones, to procure refreshments.
+She remains here only three days, and pursues her voyage for Manilla,
+where she arrives in the mouth of June. The other ship, being ready
+laden at Manilla with India commodities, sets sail soon after for
+Acapulco. From Manilla she steers a course to the latitude of 36 deg. or 40 deg.
+N. before she can fall in with a wind to carry her to America, and falls
+in first with the coast of California, and then is sure of a wind to
+carry her down the coast to Acapulco. After making Cape Lucas, the S.
+point of California, she runs over to Cape _Corientes_, in lat. 20 deg. 26'
+N. whence she proceeds along the coast to _Selagua_, where the
+passengers for Mexico are landed, and then continues along the coast to
+Acapulco, where she usually arrives about Christmas.
+
+This port of Acapulco is very safe and convenient, and of sufficient
+capacity to contain some hundred ships without danger. There is a low
+island across the entrance, stretching from E. to W. about a mile and a
+half long by a mile in breadth, having a deep channel at each end,
+through either of which ships may enter or go out, providing they go in
+with the sea-breeze, and out with the land-wind, which regularly blow at
+stated times of the day and night. The channel at the west end of the
+isle is narrow, but so deep as to have no anchorage, and through this
+the Manilla ship comes in; but the Lima ship takes the other channel.
+The harbour runs eight miles into the land to the north, when it closes
+up and becomes narrow, after which it stretches a mile to the west. At
+the entrance of this channel, and on the N.W. side, close to the shore,
+stands the town of Acapulco, near which is a platform or battery with a
+good number of guns; and on the east side of the channel, opposite the
+town, there is a strong castle, having not less than forty pieces of
+large cannon, and the ships usually ride at the bottom of the harbour,
+under the guns of this castle.
+
+Captain Townley went with 140 men in twelve canoes to endeavour to cut
+out the Lima ship; but finding her at anchor within 100 yards of both
+the castle and platform, found it impossible to effect his purpose, so
+that he was obliged to return much dissatisfied. We accordingly sailed
+on the 11th November along the coast to the N.W. between Acapulco and
+Petaplan, where we found every where good anchorage two miles from
+shore, but the surf beat with such violence on the coast that there was
+no safe landing. Near the sea the country was low, and abounding in
+trees, especially spreading palm-trees, some of which were twenty or
+thirty feet high in the stem, but of no great size. This part of the
+country was intermixed with many small hills, mostly barren, but the
+vallies seemed fertile. The hill of Petaplan, or Petatlan, sends out a
+round point into the sea, called Cape _Jequena_, in lat. 17 deg. 27' N.
+which appears from sea like an island, and a little farther west there
+is a knot of round hills, having an intervening bay, in which we
+anchored in eleven fathoms. We here landed 170 men, who marched fourteen
+miles into the country, when they reached a wretched Indian village,
+deserted by the inhabitants, so that we only found one mulatto-woman and
+four young children.
+
+Proceeding on the 18th about two leagues farther to the N.W. we came to
+a pretty good harbour named _Chequetan_, having the convenience of a
+good fresh-wafer river and plenty of wood. On the 19th we landed
+ninety-five men, having the mulatto-woman for their guide, at
+_Estapa_,[180] a league west from Chequetan. The guide now conducted
+them through a pathless wood along a river, and coming to a farm-house
+in a plain, they found a caravan of sixty mules, laden with flour,
+chocolate, cheese, and earthenware, intended for Acapulco, and of which
+this woman had given them intelligence. All this they carried off,
+except the earthenware, and brought aboard in their canoes, together
+with some beeves they killed in the plain. Captain Swan went afterwards
+on shore, and killed other eighteen beeves, without any opposition. We
+found the country woody but fertile, and watered by many rivers and
+rivulets.
+
+[Footnote 180: Istapha is to the eastward of Petatlan, but Chequetan is
+not delineated in modern maps, neither are any rivers noticed for a
+great way either N.W. or S.E. from Petatlan.--E.]
+
+Sailing on the 21st to the N.W. the land appeared full of rugged hills,
+with frightful intervening vallies. On the 25th we passed a high hill
+having several peaks, in lat. 18 deg. 8' N. near which there is a town named
+_Cupan_,[181] but we could not find the way to it. The 26th, 200 men
+were sent to find out the way to _Colima_, said to be a rich place, but
+after rowing twenty leagues along shore they could not find any place
+fit for landing, and saw not the least sign of any inhabitants, so that
+they returned to the ships on the 28th. Soon after we got sight of the
+volcano of Colima, remarkable for its height, six leagues from the sea,
+in lat. 19 deg. 5' N. It shewed two peaks or summits, both of which always
+emit either fire or smoke. The valley at the foot of this mountain is
+said to be fertile and delightful, abounding in cacao, corn, and
+plantains, and is said to be ten or twelve leagues wide towards the sea,
+and to reach far into the country. It is watered by a deep river named
+Colima, but which is so obstructed by a sand-bank at its mouth, as not
+even to allow admission to canoes; but there is no landing on this part
+of the coast, owing to the impetuosity of the surf. The town of Colima
+is the chief place of this part of the country.
+
+[Footnote 181: Probably Texupan, in lat. 18 deg. 17' N. is here meant.--E.]
+
+The 29th, 200 men were sent in canoes to attempt to land, and if
+possible to find a road to the town of _Selagua_, seated, as we were
+told by the Spaniards, at the N.W. end of the vale of Colima, but they
+were unable to land, owing to the violence of the waves. We came in
+sight of the port of _Selagua_ on the 1st December. This is a bay in
+lat. 19 deg. 8' N. parted in the middle by a rocky point, so that it appears
+like two havens, in either of which there is safe anchorage in ten or
+twelve fathoms, though the western harbour is the best, and has besides
+the advantage of a fresh-water rivulet. We saw a considerable number of
+armed Spaniards on the land, to whom we made a visit next morning with
+200 men, but they soon fled. In the pursuit our people found a broad
+road, leading through a wooded and rocky country, which they followed
+for four leagues, but found not the least appearance of any
+inhabitants, and therefore turned back. On their return they took two
+straggling mulattoes, who said the broad road led to the city of
+_Oarrah_,[182] four long days journey into the country, and that these
+men came from that city to protect the Manilla ship, which was expected
+to set her passengers ashore at this place. The Spanish maps place a
+town called Selagua hereabouts, but we could not find any appearance of
+it.
+
+[Footnote 182: Guadalaxara, the latter part of which is pronounced
+_achara_, is probably here meant. It is 160 miles inland from the port
+of Selagua.--E.]
+
+We pursued our voyage on the 6th December towards Cape Corientes, in
+hopes of meeting the Manilla ship. The land on the coast was moderately
+high, sprinkled with many rugged points, and full of wood, having
+several apparently good ports between Selagua and Cape Corientes, but we
+did not touch at any of them. Cape Corientes, of which we came in sight
+on the 11th, in lat. 20 deg. 28' N. is pretty high, being very steep and
+rocky towards the sea, but flat on the top. I found its longitude from
+the Lizard in England, by our reckoning, 121 deg. 41' W.[183] As the Manilla
+ship is obliged to make this point on her voyage to Acapulco, we took up
+a station here with our four ships in such a manner that we judged she
+could hardly escape us; but as we were in want of provisions, fifty or
+sixty men were sent in a bark beyond the cape to endeavour to get some.
+They returned, however, on the 17th, not having been able to double the
+cape, but left forty-six men in four canoes, who intended to attempt to
+get beyond by rowing.
+
+[Footnote 183: It is only in long. 105 deg. 88' W. from Greenwich; that in
+the text, from computation or dead reckoning, being considerably
+erroneous in excess.--E.]
+
+The 18th December we sailed to the isles of _Chametly_, eighteen leagues
+to the east of Cape Corientes. These are five small low and woody
+islands, surrounded with rocks, and lying in form of a half-moon a mile
+from the shore, having safe anchorage in the intermediate space. These
+isles are inhabited by fishers, who are servants to some of the
+inhabitants of _Purification_, a considerable town or city fourteen
+leagues up the country.[184] We anchored at these isles on the 20th, and
+here provided ourselves with wood and water, and caught great abundance
+of rock-fish. Next day sixty of our men were sent under Captain Townley
+to surprise an Indian village, seven or eight leagues to the N.W.
+
+[Footnote 184: Villa de la Purificacion is considerably to the S.E. of
+Cape Corientes, but the isles of Chametly are omitted in modern maps.
+Puerto de Navidad, in lat. 19 deg. 20' N. seems the haven belonging to
+Purificacion.--E.]
+
+On the 24th the four canoes left by Captain Townley's bark returned to
+the ships. They had got beyond the cape by means of rowing to the valley
+of _Valderas_, or _Val d' Iris_, the valley of flags, at the bottom of a
+deep bay, inclosed between Cape Corientes on the S.E. and point
+_Pontique_ on the N.W. In this delightful valley they landed
+thirty-seven men, who advanced three miles into the country, and were
+attacked by 150 Spaniards, horse and foot. Our men retreated into an
+adjoining wood, whence they kept up a heavy fire on the Spaniards,
+killing their leader and fourteen troopers, besides wounding a great
+many, while four of our men were slain and two wounded. Owing to this
+loss the Spaniards took to flight, and our people were enabled to
+re-embark. This valley is about three leagues broad, and is bounded
+towards the inland country by an easy ascent, affording a delightful
+prospect of extensive pastures well stored with cattle, interspersed
+with pleasant groves of guavas, orange-trees, and lime-trees. The sandy
+bay affords a safe landing, and has a fresh-water river, navigable by
+boats, but becomes brackish in the end of the dry season, which is in
+February, March, and April.
+
+We continued cruizing off Cape Corientes till the 1st January, 1686,
+when we sailed for the valley of _Valderas_, proposing to provide
+ourselves with some beef, of which we were in great need. At night we
+anchored in sixty fathoms, a mile from shore. On the 7th we landed 240
+men, fifty of whom were kept together in a body to watch the motions of
+the Spaniards, while the rest were employed in providing cattle. We
+killed and salted as much beef as would serve us for two months, and
+might have procured a great deal more if we had not run out of salt. By
+this time our hopes of meeting the Manilla ship were entirely vanished,
+as we concluded she had got past us to the S.E. while we were employed
+in procuring provisions, which we afterwards learnt had been the case,
+by the information of several prisoners. The loss of this rich prize was
+chiefly owing to Captain Townley, who insisted on taking the Lima ship
+in the harbour of Acapulco, when we ought to have provided ourselves
+with beef and maize, as we might then have done, instead of being now
+forced to procure provisions at the critical time of her coming on the
+coast. We were likewise deceived by the hope of falling in with rich
+towns and mines on this coast, not then knowing that all the wealth of
+this country is in the interior. Seeing that we were now entirely
+disappointed in our hopes, we parted company, Captain Townley going back
+to the S.E. while we in Captain Swan's ship went to the west.
+
+The 7th January we passed point Pontique in lat. 20 deg. 38' N. ten leagues
+from Cape Corientes, being the N.W. point of this bay of the valley of
+Valderas. A league beyond this point to the W. there are two little
+isles called the _Pontiques_, and beyond these to the north the shore is
+rugged for eighteen leagues. The 14th we came to anchor in a channel
+between the continent and a small white rocky isle, in lat. 21 deg. 15'. The
+20th we anchored a league short of the isles of _Chametly_, different
+from those formerly mentioned under the same name, being six small isles
+in lat 28 deg. 11' N. three leagues from the continent.[185] One or two of
+these isles have some sandy creeks, and they produce a certain fruit
+called _penguins_. These are of two sorts, one red and the other yellow.
+The plant producing the latter is as thick in the stem as a man's arm,
+with leaves six inches long and an inch broad, edged with prickles. The
+fruit grows in clusters at the top of the stem, being round and as large
+as an egg, having a thick rind, inclosing a pulp full of black seeds, of
+a delightful taste. The red penguin grows directly out of the ground,
+without any stalk, sometimes sixty or seventy in a cluster, no bigger
+than onions, but the shape of nine-pins, the cluster being surrounded
+with prickly leaves eighteen inches or two feet long.
+
+[Footnote 185: In modern maps these are called the isles of _Mazatlan_,
+and are placed in lat. 28 deg. 15' N. The name given in the text appears
+taken from a town on this coast called Charmela, in lat 22 deg. 50' N. but
+improperly.--E.]
+
+Captain Swan went with 100 men in canoes to the north, to find out the
+river _Culiacan_, supposed to be in lat. 24 deg. N.[186] and said to have a
+fair and rich town of the same name on its banks; but after rowing
+thirty leagues he could not find the river, neither was there any safe
+landing place on the coast. Seven leagues N.N.W. from the Chametla or
+Mazatlan isles, our men landed in a small lake or river, having a narrow
+entrance, called _Rio de Sal_ by the Spaniards, in lat. 23 deg. 30' N.[187]
+They here procured some maize at an adjacent farm; and learnt at another
+landing place of an Indian town five leagues distant, to which they
+marched. Coming near the place we were encountered by a good number of
+Spaniards and Indians, who were soon beat off. On entering the place we
+only found two or three wounded Indians, who told us the town was named
+_Mazatlan_, and that there were two rich gold-mines at the distance of
+five leagues.
+
+[Footnote 186: The mouth of the river of Cullacan is in 24 deg. 45' N. and
+the town of that name is about eighty-five or ninety statute miles up
+the river, supposed to have been an ancient seat of the Mexican nation,
+before their removal to the vale and lake of Mexico.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 187: The Rio Rastla de Panuco, in 23 deg. 45' N. is certainly here
+meant.--E.]
+
+On the 2d February 80 men were landed in the river _Rosario_.[188] We
+came to a pretty little town of the same name, a considerable way up
+that river, where we were assured by some prisoners that the gold-mines
+were not above two leagues from thence; but as we had present occasion
+for provisions, we carried about ninety bushels of maize on board from
+this place, without searching for the mines. As this small supply was
+insufficient for our necessities, we resolved to return to the S.E. to
+the _Rio San Jago_,[189] where we anchored on the 11th. This is one of
+the most considerable rivers on the west coast of New Spain. The country
+having a good appearance, Captain Swan sent seventy men to look for a
+town. After rowing up and down for two days, they landed in a corn
+field, and, while busy in gathering maize, they seized an Indian, who
+told them of a town called _Santa Pecaque_, four leagues farther.
+
+[Footnote 188: The mouth of this river is in lat. 28 deg. N. about fifty
+miles S.E. from Cape Mazatlan, where Dampier seems to have been then at
+anchor among the Mazatlan isles.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 189: So called by Dampier from the town of St Jago on its
+banks. Its proper name is the _Rio Grande_, or river of _Tololotlan_.
+The mouth of this river forms a large bay, in lat 21 deg. 30' N. in which is
+the considerable island of St Blas.--E.]
+
+Returning to the ship with this intelligence, Captain Swan went with 140
+men in eight canoes, and landed five leagues up the river, which was
+there about a pistol shot across with high banks. He marched from thence
+through fertile plains and woods for three or four hours, and on
+approaching St Pecaque the Spaniards evacuated the place, so that we
+entered unopposed. This town is situated in a spacious plain on the side
+of a wood, being neatly built, with a market-place in the middle, but
+not large, and has two churches. There are silver-mines five or six
+leagues from this town, the ore from which is carried on mules to
+Compostella to be refined. _Compostella_, the capital of this part of
+Mexico, is twenty-one leagues from _Pecaque_, being inhabited by seventy
+families of Spaniards, and by five or six hundred mulattoes and Indians.
+Finding great plenty of maize, sugar, salt, and salt fish at this place,
+Captain Swan divided his men into two parts, one of which kept
+possession of the place, while the other half were employed to carry
+these articles to the canoes, which was done turn and turn about, with
+the assistance of some horses. We continued this work for two days; but
+on the 19th Captain Swan learnt from a prisoner that 1000 men had
+marched from St Jago, a rich town three leagues from Pecaque on the
+river, for the purpose of attacking us. On this Captain Swan wanted our
+people to march altogether with what provisions we could carry; but they
+refused to obey him till all the provisions should be carried on board,
+and he was forced to allow half of them to go on with fifty-four loaded
+horses. They had not gone a mile from Pecaque when they were attacked by
+the Spaniards from an ambush, and were all slain on the spot. Captain
+Swan marched to their relief, but came too late, finding the whole party
+slain and stripped naked; yet the Spaniards never once attempted to
+engage him, having certainly paid dear for their victory.
+
+Returning on board with the rest of his men, and what provisions had
+been carried off, Captain Swan resolved to sail for Cape Lucas in
+California, in hopes of trafficking with the Indians there and in the
+_lake_ or gulf of California. We accordingly sailed on the 21st with the
+wind at N.W. and W.N.W. and anchored at the islands of _Santa Maria_, in
+eight fathoms on clean sand. There are three islands, usually called the
+_Three Marias_,[190] stretching fourteen leagues from S.E. to N.W. of
+moderate height, stony, barren, and uninhabited, in lat 21 deg. 30' N.
+[long. 106 deg. 15' W.] from which Cape St Lucas in California is forty
+leagues W.N.W. and Cape Corientes twenty leagues E.S.E. We anchored off
+the east end of the middle island, which we called Prince George's
+island. These islands produce some cedars, and we found near the sea a
+green prickly plant, with leaves like those of the _penguin_ plant, and
+roots like those of the _sempervivum_, but much longer, the Indians of
+California subsisting mostly on these roots. We baked and eat some of
+these roots, which tasted like boiled burdock roots. I had been long
+afflicted with dropsy, and was here buried in the sand for half an hour,
+covered up to the neck, which brought on a profuse sweat, and I believe
+with good effect, for I began to recover soon after. We careened here;
+but as there is no fresh water to be had at this place in the dry
+season, we had to return to the valley of Valderas, but finding the
+river brackish we sailed three leagues nearer Cape Corientes, and
+anchored beside a small round isle four leagues north of that cape, and
+half a mile from the shore, opposite to a rivulet on the continent,
+where we filled our water casks.
+
+[Footnote 190: In reality _four_, the fourth or most northwesterly,
+being named St Juanica.--E.]
+
+Being now sufficiently convinced of our mistaken notion of the riches of
+this coast, founded on an erroneous idea that the commerce of this
+country was carried on by sea, whereas it is entirely conducted by land
+on mules, we now resolved to try our fortune in the East Indies. With
+this view we sailed from Cape Corientes on the 31st March, and next
+noon, being thirty leagues from the cape, clear of the land-winds, we
+had the wind at E.N.E. in which direction it continued till we were
+within forty leagues of Guam. In all this long passage across the
+Pacific, nearly in the lat. of 13 deg. N. we saw neither fish nor fowl
+except once, when by my reckoning we were 5975 miles west from Cape
+Corientes in Mexico, and then we saw a vast number of _boobies_,
+supposed to come from some rocks not far off, which are laid down in
+some hydrographical charts, but we saw them not.
+
+May 20th, at four p.m. being in lat. 12 deg. 55' N. and steering W. we
+discovered, to our great joy, the island of Guam, eight leagues off,
+having now only three-days provisions left. _Guam_ is one of the
+Ladrones, in lat. 13 deg. 15' N. and long. 216 deg. 50' W. consequently its
+meridional distance from Cape Corientes on the coast of Mexico is 111 deg.
+14', or about 7730 English miles. It is twelve leagues long by four
+broad, extending north and south, and is defended by a small fort
+mounted by six guns, and a garrison of thirty men with a Spanish
+governor, for the convenience of the Manilla ships, which touch here for
+refreshments on their voyage from Acapulco to Manilla. The soil is
+tolerably fertile, producing rice, pine-apples, water and musk melons,
+oranges, limes, cocoa-nuts, and bread-fruit. This last grows on a tree
+as big as our apple-trees, with dark green leaves. The fruit is round
+and as large as a good penny-loaf,[191] growing on the boughs like
+apples. When ripe it turns yellow, with a soft and sweet pulp; but the
+natives pull it green, and bake it in an oven till the rind grows black.
+They scrape off the rind, and the inside is soft and white, like the
+crumb of new-baked bread, having neither seed nor stone; but it grows
+harsh if kept twenty-four hours. As this fruit is in season for eight
+months in the year, the natives use no other bread in all that time,
+and they told us there was plenty of it in all the other Ladrone
+islands.
+
+[Footnote 191: This vague description may now safely be changed to the
+size of a three-penny, or even four-penny loaf--E.]
+
+On the 31st May we came to anchor near the middle of the west side of
+this isle, a mile from shore, as there is no anchoring on its east side
+on account of the trade-winds, which force the waves with great violence
+against that side. The natives are of a copper-colour, strong-limbed,
+with long black hair, small eyes, high noses, thick lips, white teeth,
+and stern countenances, yet were very affable to us. They are very
+ingenious in building a certain kind of boats, called _proas_, used all
+over the East Indies. These are about twenty-six or twenty-eight feet
+long, and five or six feet high from the keel, which is made of the
+trunk of a tree like a canoe, sharp at both ends. They manage these
+boats with a paddle instead of a rudder, and use a square sail, and they
+sail with incredible swiftness, twenty or even twenty-four miles in an
+hoar. One side of these boats is quite flat and upright like a wall from
+end to end, but the other side is rounded and full-bellied like other
+vessels. Along this side, parallel with the boat, at the distance of six
+or seven feet, a log of light wood, a foot and a half wide, and sharp at
+both ends, is fastened by means of two bamboos eight or ten feet long,
+projecting from each end of the main boat, and this log prevents the
+boat from oversetting. The English call this an out-lier, or out-rigger,
+and the Dutch _Oytlager_. The air of this island is accounted
+exceedingly healthy, except in the wet season between June and October.
+The Indians inhabit small villages on the west side of this island near
+the shore, and have priests among them to instruct them in the Christian
+religion. By means of a civil letter from Captain Swan to the Spanish
+governor, accompanied by some presents, we obtained a good supply of
+hogs, cocoa-nuts, rice, biscuits, and other refreshments, together with
+fifty pounds of Manilla tobacco.
+
+Learning from one of the friars that the island of _Mindanao_, inhabited
+by Mahometans, abounded in provisions, we set sail from Guam on the 2d
+June with a strong E. wind, and arrived on the 21st at the Isle of St
+John, one of the _Philippines_. These are a range of large islands
+reaching from about the latitude of 5 deg. to about 19 deg. N. and from long.
+120 deg. to 126 deg. 30' E. The principal island of the group is _Luzon_, or
+Luconia, in which Magellan was slain by a poisoned arrow, and which is
+now entirely subject to the Spaniards. Their capital city of Manilla is
+in this island, being a large town and sea-port, seated at the
+south-west end, opposite to the island of Mindora, and is a place of
+great strength and much trade, especially occasioned by the Acapulco
+ships, which procure here vast quantities of India commodities, brought
+hither by the Chinese and Portuguese, and sometimes also by stealth by
+the English from fort St George or Madras; for the Spaniards allow of no
+regular trade here to the English and Dutch, lest they should discover
+their weakness, and the riches of these islands, which abound in gold.
+To the south of Luzon there are twelve or fourteen large islands,
+besides a great number of small isles, all inhabited by, or subject to,
+the Spaniards. But the two most southerly, Mindanao and St John, are not
+subjected by the Spaniards.
+
+The Island of St John, or _San Juan_, is about the lat. of 9 deg. N. on the
+east side of Mindanao, and about four leagues from that island, being
+about thirty-eight leagues in length from N.N.W. to S.S.E. and about
+twenty-four leagues broad in the middle, having a very rich and fertile
+soil. _Mindanao_, next to Luzon, is the largest of the Philippines,
+being sixty leagues long by forty or fifty leagues broad. Its southern
+end is in lat. 5 deg. 30' N. the N.W. extremity reaching to 9 deg. 40' N. The
+soil is generally fertile, and its stony hills produce many kinds of
+trees, most of which are unknown to Europeans. The vallies are supplied
+with brooks and rivulets, and stored with various sorts of ever-green
+trees, and with rice, water-melons, plantains, bananas, guavas, nutmegs,
+cloves, betel-nuts, _durians, jacks_, or _jackas_, cocoa-nuts, oranges,
+&c.; but, above all, by a species of tree called _libby_ by the natives,
+which produces sago, and grows in groves several miles in length. The
+poorer people feed on sago instead of bread for several months of the
+year. This tree resembles the cabbage-tree, having a strong bark and
+hard wood, the heart of which is full of a white pith, like that of the
+elder. They cut down the tree and split it open, taking out the pith,
+which they stamp or beat well in a mortar, after which, putting it into
+a cloth, and pouring in water, they stir it well, till the water carries
+all the farinaceous substance through the cloth into a trough. After the
+farinaceous matter has settled to the bottom, the water is poured off,
+and the sago is baked into cakes, which they use as bread. The sago,
+which is carried from hence to other parts of the East Indies, is dried
+into small grains, and is used with milk of almonds as a remedy against
+fluxes, being of an astringent quality.
+
+The other fruits of this island, being well known or described by
+various authors, need not be here mentioned. The nutmegs here are very
+large and good, but the natives do not care for propagating them, being
+afraid lest the Dutch, who monopolize the spice islands, should be
+induced to pay them a hostile visit. This island also produces abundance
+of animals, both wild and tame, as horses, cows, buffaloes, goats, wild
+hogs, deer, monkeys, and others; also guanas, lizards, snakes,
+scorpions, and centipeds. These last are not thicker than a goose-quill,
+but five inches long, and they sting fiercer even than scorpions. Of
+tame fowl, they have only ducks and hens; but have plenty of wild birds,
+as pigeons, parrots, parrakeets, turtle-doves, bats as large as our
+kites, and an infinite number and variety of small birds. Their wild
+hogs feed in the woods in prodigious herds, and have thick knobs growing
+over their eyes. There are mountains in the interior of this island,
+which afford considerable quantities of gold. Their chief fish are
+bonitos, snooks, cavallies, breams, and mullets; and they have abundance
+of sea-tortoises; and the island has many harbours, creeks, and rivers.
+
+Considering the situation of this island, so near the Line, its climate
+is by no means excessively hot, especially near the sea, where the
+sea-breeze cools the air by day and the land-breeze at night. The wind
+blows from the east between October and May, and then blows from the
+west till October. The west wind produces the wet season, which is
+heaviest in July and August, and, gradually lessening in September,
+ceases in October, when the east wind brings fair weather, which lasts
+till May. The inhabitants of this island, though all resembling each
+other in colour and stature, and all Mahometans, differ considerably in
+language and government. The mountaineers, or _Hillanoons_, who inhabit
+the interior, and are masters of the gold-mines, are also rich in
+bees-wax, both of which they exchange with the _Mindanayans_ on the
+coast for foreign commodities. The _Sologus_ inhabit the N.W. end of the
+island, and traffic with the inhabitants of Manilla and some other
+adjacent islands, but not with the Mindanayans. The _Alfoores_ were
+formerly under the same government with the Mindanayans, but were
+separated from them by falling to the share of the younger children of
+the sultan of Mindanao, who has of late laid claim to their allegiance.
+
+The Mindanayans, properly so called, are of low stature, with small
+limbs, little heads, straight bodies, small eyes short noses, wide
+mouths, thin red lips, and sound black teeth, having black lank hair,
+and tawny complexions, but rather brighter than other Indians. They are
+ingenious and nimble, much addicted to indolence, obliging to strangers,
+but implacable when once disobliged. They wear turbans on their heads,
+formed of a cloth tied once round, the ends of which hang down, and are
+ornamented with lace or fringe. They also wear breeches, over which
+they have a kind of frocks, but have neither shoes nor stockings. The
+women tie their long black hair in a knot, which hangs down behind,
+being smaller featured than the men, with very small feet. Their
+garments consist of a piece of cloth sewed together at both ends,
+forming a kind of petticoat, with a frock reaching a little below the
+waist. They covet the acquaintance of white men, and are very free with
+them, as far as they have liberty. When any strangers arrive at the city
+of Mindanao, the men come aboard and invite them to their houses, where
+they immediately ask if any of them wish to have a _pagally_, or female
+friend, which they must accept, and return the favour by some small
+present, which is repeated from time to time, in return for which they
+eat, drink, and sleep, in their friend's house.
+
+The capital is named Mindanao, like the island, being on the south-west
+side, two miles from the sea, on the bank of a small river, in lat. 7 deg.
+N. The houses are built on posts, fourteen to twenty feet high,
+consisting only of one floor, but divided in many rooms by partitions.
+The house or palace of the sultan rests on 150 great posts, being much
+higher than any of the others, and had great broad stairs leading up to
+it from the ground. In the hall there were twenty pieces of iron cannon
+upon field carriages, and the general and other great men have also some
+cannon in their houses. The floors are generally well covered with mats,
+and they have no chairs, but usually sit cross-legged. Their ordinary
+food is rice, sago, and some small fish; but the better people use
+buffaloe beef, and fowl, with a great deal of rice, every one using
+their fingers, as they have no spoons. The inhabitants of the city of
+Mindanao speak both the Mindanayan and Malay languages, and their
+prayers are in Arabic, in which also they retain some Turkish words.
+Some of the old people of both sexes can speak Spanish, as the Spaniards
+had formerly several forts in the island, and had assuredly reduced the
+whole if they had not been afraid of an attack from the Chinese at
+Manilla, on which account they withdrew their troops from Mindanao, when
+the father of the present sultan laid hold of the opportunity to gain
+possession of their forts, and to expel them from the island. At present
+they are most in fear of the Dutch, for which reason they have often
+invited the English to make a settlement among them, believing them not
+so ready to encroach as either of the other nations.
+
+The chief trades in this city are goldsmiths, blacksmiths, carpenters,
+and shipwrights, for they build good ships both for war and trade. Their
+chief commodities for export are gold, bees-wax, and tobacco; the two
+first being purchased from the mountaineers, and the last grows in all
+parts of the island in great plenty. They exchange these commodities for
+calicoes, muslins, and China silks. The Mindanao tobacco is reckoned as
+good as that of Manilla, and yet ten or twelve pounds of it may be
+bought for a rial, or the eighth part of a dollar. The natives are
+generally afflicted with a dry itchy scurf all over their bodies, and by
+scratching, the skin peels off in small white flakes, like the scales of
+small fish, leaving broad white spots all over their bodies; but they
+did not seem to make any great account of this disease, which is not
+infectious. They are also troubled with small-pox; but their most common
+diseases are fevers, agues, fluxes, and violent griping pains in their
+bowels. They have many wives, but I could not learn their marriage
+ceremonies.
+
+They are governed by a sultan, who has no great revenue, yet is so
+absolute that he even commands the private purse of every one at his
+pleasure. The reigning sultan was between fifty and sixty years old, and
+had twenty-nine concubines besides his wife or sultana. When he goes
+abroad he is carried in a couch on the shoulders of four men, and is
+attended by a guard of eight or ten men. His brother, named Rajah Laut,
+a shrewd person of good conversation, is both chief minister and
+general, and both speaks and writes Spanish very readily. In war they
+use swords and lances, and every one, from the highest to the lowest,
+constantly wears a _criss_ or dagger, much like a bayonet. They never
+fight any pitched battles, but construct small wooden forts defended by
+guns, whence the adverse parties endeavour to surprise each other in
+small parties, and never give or take quarter.
+
+We came first to anchor on the N.E. side of the island, but learning
+from the natives that the city of Mindanao was on the W. side, we again
+set sail and anchored on the 4th July on the S.W. side of a very deep
+bay in fifteen fathoms, the land within the bay on the E. side being
+very high and woody, but watered by several rivers. On its W. side,
+bordering on the sea, there were large plains covered with long grass,
+on which were vast herds of deer, of which we killed as many as we
+thought fit. We remained here till the 12th, when we again set sail, and
+arrived on the 18th at the entrance of the river of Mindanao, in lat. 7 deg.
+N. and long. 124 deg. 35' E. from Greenwich.[192] We here anchored in
+fifteen fathoms on clean hard sand, two miles from the shore. Soon
+afterwards Rajah Laut came on board, accompanied by one of the sultan's
+sons, and asked in Spanish, Who we were? Being told we were English, he
+asked if we came to settle among them, of which they had formerly some
+promise, and were now in hopes of its being effected, to serve to
+protect them against the Dutch, whom they greatly dreaded. Had we
+properly considered the matter, it might have been much for our
+advantage, Mindanao being conveniently situated between the Spice
+islands and the Philippines, and besides the three islands of
+_Meangis_,[193] only about twenty leagues from hence, abound with spice
+and cloves. We were also well filled for such a settlement, having among
+our company all manner of artificers, as carpenters, bricklayers,
+shoemakers, tailors, and the like, as also abundance of tools, arms,
+cannon, and sufficient ammunition to begin with; and, notwithstanding
+the great distance from England, we might easily have had supplies from
+thence, providing ships set out the latter end of August, proceeding
+round Cape Horn, and so directly across the Pacific for Mindanao, or
+else coasting along the western shore of America as far as was
+necessary, and then stretching across to have the advantage of the
+trade-wind. By this way the voyage might be accomplished in six or seven
+months, which would at least require eight or nine by the Cape of Good
+Hope.
+
+[Footnote 192: In Harris, this longitude is made 23 deg. 12' W. from the
+Lizard by some strange error, being 235 deg. 25' W. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 193: It does not appear what islands these were, unless
+perhaps the Silibabo islands, about half way between Mindanao and the
+northern end of Gilolo, but considerably farther distant than is stated
+in the text.--E.]
+
+Rajah Laut invited Captain Swan ashore, and promised to furnish what
+provisions we wanted, and desired him in the mean time to secure our
+ship within the river, for fear of the approaching westerly monsoon,
+which Captain Swan agreed to after some deliberation. The river being
+narrow, and having not above eleven feet water on the bar in
+spring-tides, we had much ado to get our ship a quarter of a mile above
+its mouth, where we moored head and stern in a hole, so that she lay
+always afloat. The city of Mindanao is a mile in length, but not very
+broad, stretching along the right bank of the river as you go up, though
+there are some houses also on the opposite side. The inhabitants
+frequently came aboard of our ship, and invited our men to their
+houses, where they were kindly entertained after their manner with
+tobacco and betel, and such of them as had money, or other articles of
+value, did not want their _pagalies_, or female friends. Captain Swan
+was entertained daily by Rajah Laut, and those of our men who had no
+money had boiled rice, with scraps of fowl and buffalo beef given them.
+Yet, after all these outward shews of friendship, we soon after began to
+discover that Rajah Laut had sinister intentions. The sheathing on our
+ship's bottom being much eaten by worms, we began in November to remove
+the old sheathing, to see whether the main plank remained sound; on
+seeing which, Rajah Laut shook his head, saying he had never seen a ship
+with two bottoms. Besides, he did not perform his promise of providing
+us with beef, pretending he could not get any; and he borrowed a
+considerable sum in gold from Captain Swan, which he never repaid.
+
+These circumstances at length induced most of our men to think of
+leaving Mindanao, especially those who had not much money; and as our
+ship was new sheathed and tallowed on the 10th December, they began to
+urge our commander to depart in continuation of our voyage. Accordingly,
+Captain Swan appointed the 13th January, 1687, for all our company to be
+on board and ready to sail; but many being unwilling to depart so soon,
+having dispersed about the country at the instigation of Rajah Laut, and
+even Captain Swan not being very ready to come aboard, by reason of some
+insubordination among the men, they deposed him from the command, and
+chose Captain Teat in his room. After this we weighed in the morning of
+the 13th January, and sailed out of the river, having Captain Swan and
+forty-four more of the men on shore, besides sixteen others we had
+buried there.
+
+We coasted along the south side of the island to the west, and passed
+next day in sight of _Chambungo_,[194] another town in this island,
+thirty leagues west from the river of Mindanao, and said to have a good
+harbour. On the 10th February we coasted along the west side of the
+Philippine islands, and while passing Panga,[195] a large island
+inhabited by the Spaniards, we saw many fires, which we supposed were
+intended to give notice of our approach, it being rare to see a ship on
+this coast. The 18th we anchored in ten fathoms at the N.W. end of the
+island of _Mindora_. This is a large island, the middle of which is in
+lat 12 deg. 45' N. its length from N.W. to S.E. being forty leagues. While
+here, a canoe with four Indians came from Manilla, who told as that the
+harbour of Manilla was seldom without twenty or thirty vessels, Chinese,
+Portuguese, and Spaniards, and if we had a mind to trade clandestinely,
+they would deliver letters from us to certain merchants there.
+
+[Footnote 194: Probably Sambuang, at the western extremity of Mindanao,
+in lat. 6 deg. 52' N. long. 122 deg. 20' E. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 195: Pany, or Panai.--E.]
+
+We sailed again on the 21st, and came on the 23d to the S.E. end of
+Luconia, where we took two Spanish barks from _Pagassanam_,[196] a small
+town on the N.E. part of this island, having goods on board for the
+Acapulco ship. This great island of Luconia extends in length through
+six degrees of latitude, from 12 deg. 30' to 18 deg. 40' both N. and is
+surrounded by many small isles, especially at its north end, Mindora
+being the chief of these isles, which communicates its name to the
+straits which run between it and the main island of Luconia. The surface
+of this large island is partly composed of large pasture plains, and
+partly of mountains, the latter of which afford some gold; and the
+plains, or savannahs, are stored with buffaloes, bullocks, horses,
+sheep, goats, and hogs. The inhabitants are Indians, who live in little
+towns, under the Spanish jurisdiction, and are instructed in the Romish
+religion by Spanish priests.
+
+[Footnote 196: Perhaps the gulf on Pangasian is here meant, on the E.
+side of Luzon, in lat. 16 deg. N.]
+
+_Manilla_ is the chief city, or rather the only one, in the island,
+seated at the foot of a ridge of high hills, fronting the harbour, near
+the S.W. point of the island, in lat. 14 deg. 38' N: This city is defended
+by a strong wall, and is composed of well-built spacious houses, covered
+with pan-tiles, the streets being broad and regular, with a large
+market-place in the middle, and has many fair churches and convents. The
+harbour is large; and, besides the two great Acapulco ships, contains
+abundance of small vessels belonging to the place, besides usually
+thirty or forty stout Chinese junks; and the Portuguese also have
+liberty to trade to this place. Many Chinese merchants also reside
+constantly in this city. A league from the city, nearer the sea, there
+is a strong fortress to defend the harbour, where the great ships lie at
+anchor. Most of this account I received from Mr Coppinger, our surgeon,
+who had formerly been thither, sailing from the Coromandel coast.
+
+The time of the year being now too far spent for our purpose, we
+resolved to sail for Pulo Condore, a knot of small islands on the coast
+of Cambodia, and to return in May to lie in wait for the Acapulco ship.
+We accordingly made sail from the island of Luconia on the 26th of
+February; and coming into the lat. of 14 deg. N. we steered our course W.
+for Pulo Condore,[197] and in our way got sight of the south end of the
+_Pracel_ shoals, being three small isles, or large spots of sand, just
+above water, only a mile from us. We came in sight of Pulo Condore on
+the 13th March, and anchored next day on the north side of that island,
+in ten fathoms, on clean hard sand, two miles from the shore.
+
+[Footnote 197: This course ought rather to have been called W.S.W. as
+Pulo Condore is lat. 8 deg. 40' N.]
+
+Pulo Condore is the chief of a group of isles, and the only one of them
+that is inhabited, in lat. 8 deg. 44' N. long. 106 deg. 5' E. forty leagues S.
+by E. from the mouth of the river of Cambodia, otherwise called the
+_Japanese_ river. Two of these isles are tolerably high and large, and
+the rest very small. The principal isle, off which we anchored, is five
+leagues long from E. to W. and three leagues broad, but in some places
+not a mile. The other large isle is three miles long from N. to S. and
+between these, at the west end of the largest, there is a convenient
+harbour, the entrance being on the north, where the two isles are a mile
+asunder. On the largest isle there grows a tall tree, three or four feet
+diameter, which the inhabitants cut horizontally half through, a foot
+from the ground, after which they cut out the upper part in a slope,
+till it meets the transverse cut, whence a liquor distils into a hollow
+made in the semicircular shelf, or stump, which, after being boiled,
+becomes good tar, and if boiled still more, becomes perfect pitch, both
+of these answering well for marine use. Such a tree produces two quarts
+of this juice daily for a month, after which it dries up, but recovers
+again.
+
+There are mango trees in this island, the fruit of which the
+inhabitants pickle with salt, vinegar, and a little garlic, while green.
+On straight trees of a foot diameter, grapes, both red and white, and of
+a pleasant taste, much like those of Europe, grow in clusters about the
+body of the tree, like the cocoas. This isle also abounds in wild
+nutmeg-trees, which resemble our walnut-trees, and the fruit grows among
+the boughs, in the same manner as walnuts. This fruit resembles the true
+nutmeg, but smaller, and has neither smell nor taste. Besides hogs,
+guanas, and lizards, these islands have various birds, as parrots,
+parakeets, turtle-doves, and wild poultry. The sea affords limpits,
+muscles, and tortoises. These isles have many brooks of fresh water
+running into the sea for ten months of the year; and they are very
+conveniently situated for trade with Japan, China, Manilla, Tonquin,
+Cochin-china, and other places.
+
+The inhabitants are originally from Cochin-china, being of a middle
+stature and well shaped, but of much darker colour than the natives of
+Mindanao, having lank black hair, small black eyes, and small noses, yet
+tolerably high, with small mouths, thin lips, and white teeth. They are
+civil, but very poor, their only employment being to collect tar, and to
+prepare a little oil from tortoises, both of which they export to
+Cochin-china. They offer their women to strangers for a small matter; a
+custom universal in Pegu, Siam, Cochin-China, Cambadia, Tonquin, and
+India, as also on the coast of Guinea. They are pagans, worshipping
+chiefly the elephant and the horse, besides images of birds and fishes,
+but I saw none resembling the human shape.
+
+Having careened our ship, and laid in a supply of fresh water, we sailed
+from Pulo Condore on the 21st of April, steering W. by S. for the bay of
+Siam, and on the 23d came to the isle of _Ubi_, off the S.W. cape of
+Cambadia, forty leagues W. of Condore. This isle is seven or eight
+leagues in circuit, and is higher land than any of the Condore isles. It
+has good water on the north side, where there is also good anchorage,
+but the best anchorage is on the W. side, opposite a small bay. On the
+24th we entered the bay of Siam, which is very deep, and went among the
+islands at the bottom of the bay, in one of which we found a small
+village inhabited by fishermen, but no fish, so we turned back, and did
+not return to the isle of _Ubi_ till the 13th, and were detained there
+by storms till the 21st, when we sailed for Condore, where we anchored
+on the 24th. Here five or six of our men, going on board a Malay
+vessel, were stabbed by the crew. Having provided our ship with wood and
+water, we sailed from Condore on the 4th June, intending to proceed for
+Manilla; but, by contrary winds, were forced to steer for _Pratas_, a
+small low island inclosed with rocks, in lat. 21 deg. N. between Canton and
+Manilla; and the east winds continuing, were obliged to approach the
+coast of China, where we anchored on the 25th June, at the east end of
+the island of St John, on the coast of Quan-tong, or Canton, in China,
+in lat. 22 deg. 30' N.[198] They have here great plenty of rice, with hogs,
+buffaloes, goats, and some oxen. The inhabitants were Chinese, and were
+consequently, at this time, under the dominion of the Tartars.
+
+[Footnote 198: This Island of St John is probably that named Sancianor,
+or Tchang-te-huen, in lat. 21 deg. 33' N. long. 112 deg. 25' E. to the S.W. of
+the bay of Canton. The latitude in the text would lead deep among the
+islands of that bay, which does not appear to have been the case.--E.]
+
+In this island we found a small town in marshy ground, the houses of
+which were small, mean, and ill-furnished, but built on posts, the
+inhabitants principally subsisting by the cultivation of rice. While we
+lay here at anchor, a Chinese junk rode beside us, which was flat both
+at the head and stern, having many little huts, three feet high, on her
+deck, thatched with palmito leaves. Her cabin was large, having an
+altar, on which was a lamp continually burning. The hold was divided
+into several compartments, the bulkheads between which were so tight,
+that if a leak should spring in any of these divisions, the goods in the
+others would receive no damage. Every merchant has his own room, or
+division, in the hold, in which he stows his own goods, sometimes
+lodging along with them. These junks have only two masts, a main and
+fore, the latter having a square-sail and yard, and the former a sail
+that is narrow aloft, like a sloop's main-sail. In fine weather they
+have also a top-sail, which, in foul weather, they lower to the deck,
+yard and all. The main-mast of one of their largest junks is equal in
+size to that of our third-rate men of war, but all of one piece, not
+built.
+
+Fearing the approach of a storm, and wanting sea-room, we weighed on the
+3d June, and stood out to sea; but next day we were assailed by the most
+violent tempest at N.E. I ever saw, which lasted at intervals for three
+days, when the weather became quite serene. We then refitted our ship,
+but our men were so terrified by the last storm, and dreading the
+approach of full moon, that we resolved to steer for the _Pescadores_,
+or _Fisher Isles_, in lat. 23 deg. 40' N. off the western side of
+_Tai-ouan_, or Formosa. This is a numerous group of islands in the
+Straits of Formosa, having a good harbour between the two eastermost;
+and on the west side of the most easterly there is a large town with a
+fort, in which was a garrison of 300 Tartars. The houses in this town
+were low, yet neatly built; and on the other island, on the west side of
+the harbour, there was another small town near the sea, inhabited by
+Chinese. Most of the islands in this group have some Chinese
+inhabitants. We were very civilly treated by the Tartar governor, who
+sent us some presents, and among the rest a heifer, the beef of which
+was excellent; but would not allow us to trade, or even to land on the
+isle.
+
+We sailed thence on the 29th July, passing the S.W. end of Formosa, a
+large island reaching from lat. 22 deg. to 25 deg. 18' both N. and in long. 121 deg.
+E. It was formerly well inhabited by the Chinese, and frequented by the
+English; but the Tartars have since spoiled the harbour, lest the
+Chinese should fortify themselves there. On the 6th August we came to
+anchor on the east side of the northermost of the _Five Islands_, or
+_Bashees_, in fifteen fathoms. These islands are from the latitude of
+20 deg. 26' to 21 deg. 13' both N. and long. 121 deg. 50' E. Contrary to our
+expectations, we found three or four large towns on the island at which
+we anchored. The westmost of these islands, which the Dutch among us
+named _Orange_ isle, is the largest, being seven or eight leagues from
+N. to S. and two from E. to W. There are two other large islands to the
+S. of this; the northern of which we named _Grafton_ isle, which is four
+leagues from N. to S. and a league and a half from E. to W. The other,
+and most southerly, we named _Monmouth_ isle, being three leagues from
+N. to S. and one from E. to W. Two other isles, lying E. and W. between
+Monmouth isle and the S. end of Orange isle, we called _Bashee_ isle,
+from a certain liquor we drank there, and _Goat_ isle.
+
+_Orange_ isle is the largest, but barren, rocky, and uninhabited, and
+has no anchorage on its coasts. _Monmouth_ and _Grafton_ isles are both
+hilly, but well inhabited. _Goat_ isle and _Bashee_ isle are flat, the
+former having a town. The hills in all these isles are rocky; but the
+intermediate vallies are fertile in grass, plantains, bananas,
+pine-apples, pompions, sugar-canes, potatoes, and some cotton, and are
+well supplied with brooks of fresh water. They are also well stored
+with goats and hogs, but have hardly any fowls, either wild or tame. The
+natives are short and thick, with round faces and thick eye-brows, with
+hazel-coloured eyes, rather small, yet larger than those of the Chinese.
+Their noses are short and low; their mouths and lips middle-sized, with
+white teeth; and their hair is thick, black, and lank, which they cut
+short. Their complexion is of a dark copper colour, and they go all
+bare-headed, having for the most part no clothes, except a clout about
+the middle, though some have jackets of plantain leaves, as rough as a
+bear-skin. The women have a short petticoat of coarse calico, reaching a
+little below the knees, and both sexes wear ear-rings of a yellow metal
+dug from their mountains, having the weight and colour of gold, but
+somewhat paler. Whether it be in reality gold or not, I cannot say, but
+it looked of a fine colour at first, which afterwards faded, which made
+us suspect it, and we therefore bought very little. We observed that the
+natives smeared it with a red earth, and then made it red-hot in a quick
+fire, which restored its former colour.
+
+The houses of the natives are small, and hardly five feet high,
+collected into villages on the sides of rocky hills, and built in three
+or four rows, one above the other. These rocky precipices are framed by
+nature into different ledges, or deep steps of stairs as it were, on
+each of which they build a row of houses, ascending from one row to
+another by means of ladders in the middle of each row, and when these
+are removed they are inaccessible. They live mostly by fishing, and are
+very expert in building boats, much like our Deal yawls. They have also
+larger vessels, rowed by twelve or fourteen oars, two men to each bank.
+They never kill any goats themselves, but feed on the guts and skins,
+which last they broil after singing off the hair.[199] They also make a
+dish of locusts, which come at certain seasons to devour their potatoes;
+on which occasions they catch these insects in nets, and broil or bake
+them in earthen pans, when they are tolerable eating. Their ordinary
+drink is water; but they make also a kind of liquor of the juice of
+sugar-canes, boiled up with black-berries, allowed afterwards to ferment
+four or five days in jars. It then settles and becomes clear, when it
+affords a strong and pleasant liquor, which they call _bashee_,
+resembling our English beer both in taste and colour. I can give no
+account of their language, as it has no affinity either to Chinese or
+Malay. Their weapons are lances headed with iron, and they wear a kind
+of armour of buffalo-hide without sleeves, reaching below their knees,
+where it is three feet wide, and as stiff as a board, but close at the
+shoulders.
+
+[Footnote 199: This is rather inexplicable, as we cannot conceive how
+they got the guts and skins without killing the goats.--E.]
+
+I could not perceive that they had any worship, neither saw I any idols
+among them. They seemed to have no government or precedency, except that
+the children were very respectful to their parents. They seem, however,
+to be regulated by some ancient customs, instead of laws, as we saw a
+young lad buried alive, which we supposed was for being guilty of theft.
+The men have each only one wife, and she and her children were very
+obedient to the head of the family. The boys are brought up to fishing
+along with their fathers; and the girls work along with their mothers in
+the plantations in the vallies, where each family plants a piece of
+ground proportional to their numbers. They are a civil quiet people, not
+only among themselves, but in their intercourse with strangers; for all
+the time we were here, though they came frequently aboard, exchanging
+their yellow metal, goats, and fruits, for iron, we never saw them
+differ either among themselves or with our men, though occasions of the
+latter were not wanting. They have no coins, neither any weights or
+scales, but give their pieces of yellow metal by guess. During our stay
+here, we provided ourselves with seventy or eighty fat hogs, and great
+plenty of potatoes, for our intended voyage to Manilla.
+
+On the 25th September, we were forced out to sea by a violent storm,
+which lasted till the 29th, when we made the best of our way back to the
+Bashees, which we reached on the 1st October. This last storm so
+disheartened our men, that they resolved to give up the design of
+cruising before Manilla; and, by the persuasions of Captain Read, who
+now commanded, and Captain Teat, our master, it was determined to sail
+for Cape Comorin, and thence into the Red Sea. As the eastern monsoon
+was at hand, our nearest and best way had been to pass through the
+Straits of Malacca; but Teat persuaded the men to go round by the east
+side of the Philippines, and thence, keeping south of the Spice islands,
+to pass into the Indian ocean by the south of Timor.
+
+We sailed from the Bashees on the 3d October, by the east of the
+Philippines, and on the 15th, being to the south of Luconia, directed
+our course west for Mindanao. On the 16th we anchored between two small
+isles, in lat. 5 deg. 10' N. four leagues from the island of Mindanao. While
+here, we learnt from a young prince of one of the isles, that Captain
+Swan and some of his men were still at Mindanao, and in great esteem for
+their services against the Alfoores: but I was since informed, that he
+and his surgeon, when going on board a Dutch ship in the road, were
+overset by the natives and drowned, by order of rajah Laut, as we
+supposed, who had seized all his gold.
+
+We sailed on the 2d November for Celebes, and anchored at its N.E. end
+on the 9th. The 30th, while steering between two shoals, in lat. 3 deg. S.
+ten leagues from Celebes, we saw three waterspouts towards evening. A
+waterspout is a piece of a cloud hanging down in a sloping direction,
+sometimes bending like a bow, but never perpendicular. Opposite to its
+extremity the sea begins to foam, and the water is then seen gently
+moving round in a circle, increasing to a rapid whirling motion, rising
+upwards, an hundred paces in circumference at the bottom, but lessening
+gradually upwards to the size of a spout, through which the sea-water
+appears to be conveyed into the cloud, as is manifest by its blackness
+and increase of bulk. After this the cloud, which was before immoveable,
+drives along for half an hour, accompanied by the spout. When the
+sucking is over, and breaks off, all the water which was below the
+spout, or pendulous cloud, falls again into the sea with a terrible
+clashing noise. These spouts are, however, more frightful than
+dangerous.
+
+We had sight of the Isle of Bouton on the 1st December, and anchored
+there on the 5th, where we staid till the 11th, procuring eggs, fowls,
+potatoes, and other provisions from the natives, who are Mahometans, and
+speak the Malay language. Continuing our voyage, we saw the N.W. point
+of Timor on the 28th, and on the 29th stood S. towards New Holland,
+which we fell in with on the 4th January, 1688, in lat. 16 deg. 50' S. _New
+Holland_ is a vast tract of land, but whether island or continent is
+hitherto unknown.[200] We anchored at a point of land, three leagues to
+the east of which is a deep bay. The land was low and sandy, the points
+only excepted, which were rocky, as were some islands in the bay. We
+found here no fresh water, except by digging. There were various trees,
+and among these the tree producing dragon's-blood. We saw no
+fruit-trees, nor so much as the track of any animal, except one footstep
+of a beast, which seemed the size of a large mastiff. There were a few
+land-birds, but none bigger than a black-bird, and scarcely any
+sea-fowl; neither did the sea afford any fish, except tortoises and
+manatees,[201] both of which are in vast plenty.
+
+[Footnote 200: It is now known to be a vast island, stretching from the
+lat. of 11 deg. 40' to 38 deg. 40', both S. and from long. 109 deg. 40' to 154 deg. 50'
+both E. being 1870 miles from N. to S. and 2400 miles from E. to W.]
+
+[Footnote 201: The Lamentin, or Trichechus Manatus australis of
+naturalists.--E.]
+
+The inhabitants are the most miserable wretches in the universe, having
+no houses or coverings but the heavens, and no garments except a piece
+of the bark of a tree tied round the waist. They have no sheep, poultry,
+or fruits, and subsist wretchedly on a few shell-fish, such as cockles,
+muscles, and periwinkles, living without any government or order, and
+cohabit promiscuously like brutes. Their bodies are straight, thin, and
+strong-limbed, having great heads and eye-brows, with round foreheads.
+Their eye-lids are constantly half closed, to keep out flies, which are
+here very numerous and troublesome. They have large bottle noses, thick
+lips, and wide mouth; and both men and women, young and old, wanted the
+two front teeth of the upper jaw. They have no beards, and their hair is
+short and curled like the negroes, their complexion being equally black
+with them. Their weapons are a kind of wooden swords or clubs, and long
+straight poles sharpened at one end. Of their language I can only say
+that they speak much in the throat. We landed several times, and brought
+the natives to some degree of familiarity with us, by giving them some
+old clothes, but could never prevail on them to assist us in carrying
+water or any other thing, as they seemed quite averse from labour.
+
+We sailed hence on the 12th March, and on the 7th April got sight of
+Sumatra, whence we directed our course for the Nicobar islands, which we
+came in sight of on the 4th May, and anchored next day in a small bay at
+the N. end of the island of Nicobar Proper, in lat. 7 deg. 30' N. This
+island produces plenty of cocoa-nuts, and _mallories_, a fruit as large
+as the bread-fruit of Guam, which the natives boil in covered jars.
+
+Mr Hall, Mr Ambrose, and I, being desirous to leave the unruly crew
+among whom we had sailed so long, were set ashore at this island,
+intending to proceed for Acheen. We accordingly left this island on the
+5th May, accompanied by four Malays and a Portuguese, in a Nicobar
+canoe, not much bigger than one of the London wherries used below
+bridge. On the 18th we had a violent storm, when we expected every
+moment to be swallowed up by the waves; but on the 19th, to our great
+joy, we saw _Pulo Way_, near the N.W. end of Sumatra, as was supposed,
+but it turned out to be the golden mountain of Sumatra, and at length
+arrived at Acheen in June. In July I went with Captain Weldon to
+Tonquin, and returned to Acheen in April, 1689. In September of that
+year I went to Malacca, and came back about Christmas, 1690. Soon after
+I went to Fort St George or Madras, where I remained five months, and
+came back to Bencoolen, an English factory on the west coast of Sumatra.
+
+Before relating my return to England, it may be proper to give some
+account of _Jeoly_, the painted prince, who afterwards died at Oxford.
+He was purchased along with his mother at Mindanao by Mr Moody; and when
+Mr Moody and I went together to Bencoolen, he gave me at parting half
+the property of this painted prince and his mother, leaving them to my
+care. They were born in the island of _Meangis_, which abounds in gold,
+cloves, and nutmegs, as he afterwards told me. He was curiously painted,
+down the breast, behind, between the shoulders, and most of all on the
+fore part of his thighs, in the nature of flower-work. By what I could
+understand, this painting was done by pricking the skin, and rubbing in
+the gum of a tree called _damurer_, used instead of pitch in some parts
+of India. He told me, that the natives of his country wore gold
+ear-rings, and golden bracelets about their arms and legs; their food
+being potatoes, fowls, and fish. He told me also, that being one day in
+a canoe with his father and mother, they were taken by some fishers
+belonging to Mindanao, who sold them to the interpreter of Rajah Laut,
+with whom he and his mother lived as slaves for five years, and were
+then sold for fifty dollars to Mr Moody. Some time afterwards, Mr Moody
+gave me the entire property of both, but the mother soon died, and I had
+much ado to save the son. After my arrival in the Thames, being in want
+of money, I first sold part of my property in Prince Jeoly, and by
+degrees all the rest. He was afterwards carried about and shewn for
+money, and at last died of the small-pox at Oxford.
+
+During my stay at Bencoolen I served as gunner of the fort; but when my
+time was expired, I embarked with my painted prince in the Defence,
+Captain Heath, in order to return to England. We sailed on the 25th
+January, 1691, in company with three other ships, and arrived at the
+Cape of Good Hope in the beginning of April. After a stay of six weeks,
+we set sail on the 13th May for St Helena, where we arrived on the 20th
+June. We left this island on the 2d July, and came to anchor in the
+Downs on the 16th September, 1691, after an absence of twelve years and
+a half from my native country.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX.
+
+VOYAGE ROUND THE WORLD, BY WILLIAM FUNNELL, IN 1703-1706.[202]
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+
+This voyage has usually passed under the name of Captain William
+Dampier; but as he proceeded only to the South Seas, and the
+circumnavigation was entirely completed by Mr William Funnell, who
+sailed originally as his mate, it seemed proper to place his name in the
+title of the voyage, instead of that of Captain Dampier, with whom, in
+this voyage, we have much less to do. It is just however to state, that
+it was on the credit of Captain Dampier, and in expectation that he
+would be able to do great things against the Spaniards in the South Sea,
+that this expedition was undertaken. The point aimed at was plunder,
+rather than discovery, yet there was something remarkable done even in
+this way; and the unknown islands met with by Mr Funnell, in his passage
+between the South Sea and India, strongly confirmed the reports of
+former navigators, of large, populous, and well-cultivated countries in
+those parts.[203] The narrative of Funnell also is well digested, and
+may be read with much satisfaction, as giving a fair and agreeable
+account of his adventures.
+
+[Footnote 202: Funnel's narrative in Dampier's Voyages, vol. IV. pp.
+1.--208. Harris, I. 131. Callender, III. 66. and III. 145.]
+
+[Footnote 203: All these fancies are now shewn to be imaginary.--E.]
+
+This expedition was undertaken at the beginning of the Succession war,
+in the reign of Queen Anne; and high expectations were raised from it,
+of performing great exploits against the Spaniards, who had accepted the
+Duke of Anjou as their king. The merchants believed that a very
+profitable expedition might be made into these parts, with a reasonable
+force, where the buccaneers, with small and ill-provided vessels, had
+performed such extraordinary things; and therefore, having obtained the
+best information they could as to the proper manner of accomplishing the
+design, they cheerfully contributed to the expences necessary for the
+purpose. With this view, they at first fitted out two ships of 26 guns
+and 120 men each, which were designed for the South Seas. One of these
+was named the St George, commanded by Captain William Dampier, in which
+Mr William Funnell sailed as chief mate. The other was the Fame,
+commanded by Captain John Pulling. Both ships were amply supplied with
+warlike stores, and well victualled for nine months; and had commissions
+from Prince George, the queen's husband, lord-high-admiral, to proceed
+against the French and Spaniards; and the officers and crews of both
+were hired on the principles of sharing in the expedition, _no purchase
+no pay_.
+
+While they lay in the Downs, some difference arose between the two
+captains, on which Captain Pulling went away with his ship, the Fame,
+intending to cruize among the Canary Islands, and never afterwards
+joined. Before sailing on the originally-proposed expedition, Dampier
+was joined by a small ship, the Cinque-ports galley, Captain Charles
+Pickering, of ninety tons, carrying 16 guns and 63 men, well victualled
+and provided for the voyage. The original plan of the voyage was to go
+first up the Rio Plata, as high as Buenos Ayres, in order to capture two
+or three Spanish galleons, which Dampier alledged were usually there. If
+this part of the expedition succeeded, so as to get to the value of
+about 600,000_l_. it was to be proceeded in no farther; but if his first
+object failed, they were then to cruize on the coast of Peru, to
+intercept the ships which bring gold from Baldivia to Lima. Should this
+again fail of success, they were to attempt some rich towns, as Dampier
+might direct. After this, they were to go to the coast of Mexico, at
+that time of the year when the great galleon usually comes from Manilla
+to Acapulco, which is commonly reported to be worth fourteen millions of
+dollars.
+
+On their arrival at Madeira, learning that the galleons from Buenos
+Ayres had already arrived in safety at Teneriffe, that part of the
+expedition was laid aside. "How well we pursued the latter part of our
+instructions, the subsequent history of our voyage will sufficiently
+declare; in recording which I have used the greatest sincerity,
+narrating every thing exactly in the manner in which it happened, and
+setting down all that appeared worthy of notice, with all truth and
+plainness: so that I flatter myself the whole will be found useful, and
+that the latter part especially will be esteemed new, curious, and
+interesting, as it contains many things not before published or
+known."[204]
+
+[Footnote 204: This introduction is from the pen of Harris; and the last
+paragraph, marked by inverted commas, is given in the words of
+Funnell.--E.]
+
+
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Narrative of the Voyage, till the Separation of Funnell from Dampier._
+
+
+We sailed from the Downs on the 30th April, 1703, and anchored on the
+18th May at Kinsale, in Ireland. We here refitted and victualled our
+ship, and were joined by the Cinque-ports, and left Kinsale on the 11th
+September. We reached Madeira on the 25th, where we did not come to
+anchor, but plied off and on for our boats, which were sent ashore for
+necessaries. By a good observation, I made this island to be in lat 32 deg.
+20' N. and long. by my account, 18 deg. 5' W. from London.[205] October 6th,
+we saw Mayo, one of the Cape de Verd islands, in lat. 15 deg. 12' N. long.
+23 deg. 20' W. off which we plied all night; but the surf ran so high that
+we durst not send our boats ashore for salt. We accordingly bore up next
+day for St Jago, and anchored at noon of the 7th in Prior bay [Port
+Praya] in that island. This is one of the most fruitful of the Cape Verd
+Islands, abounding in hogs, poultry, guinea fowl, monkeys, maiz,
+oranges, lemons, dates, water-melons, plantains, bananas, and other
+fruits, having good water, but troublesome to get at, and wood is very
+dear. The inhabitants of this island were formerly Portuguese, banished
+thither for murders, thefts, and other crimes; but are now mostly all
+black, in consequence of these men having issue by their female slaves,
+which were Guinea negroes. Yet they still retain the vices of their
+progenitors, thieving being more common here than in any place I ever
+visited, insomuch that they will take a man's hat from his head at noon
+day and in the midst of company. In trading with them, it is necessary
+not to let them have your goods before theirs are delivered, or you are
+sure to lose them. We here watered and refreshed ourselves; and here a
+disagreement took place between Captain Dampier and his
+first-lieutenant, who was turned ashore at midnight, with his chest and
+servant. At four next morning, being the 13th October, we sailed from St
+Jago, not fully resolved where next to touch at.
+
+[Footnote 205: Lat. 32 deg. 33' N. long. 17 deg. 5' W. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+On the 22d October we caught four fish; a shark, a dolphin, a
+jelly-fish, and an old-wife. The shark and dolphin are well known, and
+need not be described in this place. The _Jelly-fish_ was about fourteen
+inches long and two inches deep, having sharp teeth, a sparkling eye,
+and long extended mouth. It has a prodigiously high fin on its back, of
+a slimy substance, except that its rays, which are thirty-two in number,
+are firm and stiff. It has also one small fin under the throat, of the
+same slimy substance with the large one on its back. The greater part of
+the body is of a silver colour, with numerous small dark spots and
+circular bands, all the rest of its substance being a green jelly-like
+substance, whence the name. The _Old-wife_ is about two feet long and
+nine inches high in the back, having a small mouth, a large eye, and a
+large broad fin beginning at the hinder part of the head, and reaching
+to the tail. It has also a large broad fin on each side near the gills,
+and a pretty large one under the belly. The body is deep blue, and the
+fins a very light blue, tipt with yellow. The head has many spots, and
+the body is regularly streaked longways.
+
+We passed the equator on the 2d November, about forty-five leagues west
+from the meridian of St Jago. On the 8th, in lat. 10 deg. 20' S. we saw
+three small islands on the coast of Brazil, called the islands of St
+Ann, not above a stone's throw from each other, and very full of wood,
+as is the whole coast of Brazil. These islands are about four miles from
+the main, and are much troubled with southerly winds, which blow in
+gusts, so that ships ought here to lay their best anchor to the south,
+and all little enough sometimes for their safety. They produce nothing
+except wood, and are frequented by vast flocks of sea fowl, called
+boobies by our sailors. The _booby_ is about the size of a duck, some
+entirely white and others grey, having feet like a duck, and subsist
+mostly on flying-fishes, which they catch while in the air. I have made
+many a meal on these birds, but it was for want of other victuals, for
+they taste very fishy, and are apt to make one sick, if not previously
+well salted. They are so silly, when weary of flying, that they will
+light upon your hand, if held out to them.
+
+We anchored at the island of _Le Grand_, in lat, 23 deg. 30' S.[206] on the
+24th of November. This is a very woody island, on which are several good
+springs of water. It is about nine miles in circuit, and three miles
+from the main, the woods being infested with many savage animals, which
+make a most hideous noise in the night. It produces sugar, rum, and
+several kinds of fruits, but all very dear, on account of supplying the
+town of St Paul with necessaries. _St Paul_ is 300 miles inland from Le
+Grand; but by the vast high mountains which are between, it is reckoned
+a distance of sixty days journey. Near St Paul there is said to be a
+gold mine, which is accounted the richest hitherto known. We here
+wooded, watered, and refitted our ships; and our new first-lieutenant,
+falling out with the captain, went ashore, together with eight of our
+men, and left us. Here also Charles Pickering, captain of the
+Cinque-ports, departed this life, and was succeeded in the command by
+his first-lieutenant, Mr Thomas Stradling. At this island there are good
+fish of various sorts, one of which, called the _Silver-fish_, is about
+twenty inches long, and eight deep, from back to belly, having five
+small fins immediately behind the head, and one large fin from the last
+of these to the tail; one middle-sized fin on each side near the gills,
+and a large fin from the middle of the belly to the tail, which last is
+half-moon shaped. The eyes are large, the nostrils wide, and the mouth
+small. It is a thin fish, and full of bones, of a fine transparent
+white, like silver.
+
+[Footnote 206: Isla Grande is only in lat 30 deg. N. and St Paul's, stated
+in the text, as 300 miles distant, is hardly 200, and is at within
+twenty-five miles of the coast farther south.--E.]
+
+Leaving the isle of Le Grand on the 8th December, we passed the islands
+of Sebalt de Weert[207] [_Falklands_] on the 29th. In lat. 57 deg. 50' S. we
+had a terrible storm, in which we lost company of our consort, the
+Cinque-ports, on the 4th January, 1704. When in lat 60 deg. 51' S. on the
+20th, believing we had sufficiently passed Cape Horn, we tacked to the
+N. and got sight of the island of _Mocha_ on the 4th February. This
+island is in lat. 38 deg. 20' S. twenty miles from the coast of Chili, and
+is well inhabited by Indians, who are always at war with the Spaniards,
+and indeed with all white men, because they consider them all as
+Spaniards. It is a high island, four leagues long, having many shoals
+on its west side, which extend a league or more out to sea. It is about
+112 miles to the northward of Baldivia.
+
+[Footnote 207: Called Sibbil de Ward Islands in the narrative of
+Funnell.--E.]
+
+We saw the island of Juan Fernandez on the 7th February, and on the
+10th, while passing the great bay, we saw the Cinque-ports, which had
+arrived three days before. We accordingly anchored in the great bay, in
+thirty-five fathoms. At this island we wooded, watered, and refitted our
+ships, giving them a heel to clean their sides as low as we could, which
+took up much time, and occasioned both companies to be much on shore. In
+this island there are abundance of cabbage-trees, which are excellent,
+though small. The cabbage-tree, which is a species of palm, has a small
+straight stem, often ninety to one hundred feet long, with many knots or
+joints, about four inches asunder, like a bamboo-cane. It has no leaves
+except at the top, in the midst of which the substance called cabbage is
+contained, which, when boiled, is as good as any garden cabbage. The
+branches of this tree we commonly twelve or thirteen feet in length, and
+at about a foot and a half from the tree the leaves begin, which are
+about four feet long and an inch and a half broad, the leaves growing so
+regularly that the whole branch seems one entire leaf. The cabbage, when
+cut out from among the roots of the branches, is usually a foot long and
+six inches diameter, and as white as milk. From the bottom of the
+cabbage there spring out several large bunches of berries, like grapes,
+each bunch being five or six pounds weight. The berries are red, and
+about the size of cherries, each having a large stone in the middle, and
+the pulp tastes like that of haws.
+
+The sea-lion is so called, as I suppose, because he roars somewhat like
+a lion, and his head also has some resemblance to that animal, having
+four large teeth in front, all the rest being short, thick, and stubbed.
+Instead of feet and legs, he has four fins; the two foremost serving
+him, when he goes ashore, to raise the fore part of the body, and he
+then draws the hind part after him. The two hinder fins are of no use on
+land, but only when in the water. This animal is very fat, for which
+reason we killed several of them, from which we made a ton of oil for
+our lamps; and, while at this island, made use of it also for frying our
+fish. They have short light-coloured hair while young, becoming sandy
+when old. Their food is fish, and they prey altogether in the water, but
+come on land to sleep, when five, six, or more of them huddle together
+like swine, and will often lie still three or four days, if not
+molested. They are much afraid of men, and make off as fast as they can
+into the water. If hard pressed, they will turn about, raising their
+bodies on their fore fins, and face you with their mouths wide open, so
+that we used to clap a pistol to their mouth, and fire down their
+throat. Sometimes five or six of us would surround one of these
+monsters, each having a half pike, and so prick him till he died, which
+commonly was the sport of two or three hours.
+
+While we were at this island, a difference took place between Captain
+Stradling and his men, which was at last compromised by Captain Dampier.
+On the 29th February we descried a sail, on which all hands hurried on
+board, and we slipped our cables and stood out to sea. The Frenchman,
+for so he afterwards proved, immediately tacked and stood from us, while
+we followed the chase with all sail, and got up with him about eleven at
+night, but did not deem it convenient to engage till day. During the
+chase our pinnace towed under water, and was cut adrift. Captain
+Stradling's boat also got loose, in which were a man and a dog.
+
+At sun-rise next morning, 1st March, we began to engage the French ship,
+which was of about 400 tons burden, and thirty guns, well manned. We
+fought her very close, broadside to broadside, for seven hours; and then
+a small gale springing up, she sheered off. In this action our consort
+only fired ten or twelve guns at the commencement, when she dropt
+astern, and never again came up during the whole fight, in which we had
+nine men slain and several wounded. We were desirous to have had another
+trial with the Frenchman, knowing it would be of bad consequences to let
+him go, as he would discover our being in these seas to the Spaniards;
+but our captain opposed this, saying, he knew where he could get to the
+value of 500,000_l_. at any time. So we concluded to return to Juan
+Fernandez, to get our anchors, long boats, and several tons of water
+already casked, together with a ton of sea-lion oil, which we had left
+there. Captain Stradling also had left five of his men, who were gone to
+the west part of the island, and knew nothing of our going away after
+the enemy. He had also left all his sails, besides those at the yards,
+and a great many other stores.
+
+We had then the wind at S. directly off Juan Fernandez, so that it was
+difficult to go there; and while beating up we saw two sail, to which
+the Cinque-ports was very near, and they fired several shots at her, but
+she rowed away to us, and reported them to be two French ships of about
+36 guns each; on which the two captains thought it convenient to bear
+away for the coast of Peru, leaving Captain Stradling's five men, with
+his other stores, which he could ill spare, and now we had neither of us
+any boats. We accordingly stood for the coast of Peru on the 6th March,
+and fell in with it on the 11th, in lat. 24 deg. 53' S.[208] The land here
+was very high, having three distinct ranges of hills behind each other,
+that nearest the water the lowest, and the farthest off the highest. We
+coasted along shore to the northward, and passed the port of _Capaipo_
+on the 14th, said to be a very good harbour, fenced from almost all
+winds. The land is here inhabited by Indians, who make good wines; and
+it is said to abound in good meat, corn, and other provisions, and from
+this port they export wine, money, and other goods for Coquimbo. We
+would willingly have gone ashore for refreshments, but could not for
+want of boats.
+
+[Footnote 208: There must be a material error here, as they afterwards,
+in sailing along the coast _to the northwards_, passed Copaipo, which is
+in lat. 27 deg. 13' S. and they consequently must have fallen in with the
+coast of Chili, improperly named Peru in the text, considerably farther
+south.--E.]
+
+Continuing along the coast, which is the highest and most mountainous I
+ever saw, we were surprised, on the 19th of March, to see the waves
+changed to a red colour for seven or eight leagues, though on sounding
+we had no ground at 170 fathoms; but on drawing up some of the water, we
+found the colour owing to a vast quantity of fish-spawn, swimming on the
+surface. We were now in lat. 16 deg. 11' S. having passed the three famous
+ports of Arica, Ylo, and Arequipa. The 22d March we were off the
+harbour of Callao de Lima, when we saw two ships steering for that port,
+to which we gave chase, and soon came up with the sternmost, which
+proved to be the ship we had fought with off the island of Juan
+Fernandez. We were very eager to stop her from going in, to prevent the
+Spaniards from having intelligence of us, and hindering their merchant
+ships from putting to sea, and did not question our taking her, being
+all now in health; whereas on the former occasion, between twenty and
+thirty of our men were very sick and weak. But Captain Dampier was
+averse to attack her; and while the matter was disputing, both ships got
+into the port of Lima, from whence twenty ships such as ours could not
+have forced them out. This proceeding gave great offence to most of the
+crew, and might have proved of bad consequence, had we not taken two
+very considerable prizes a few days afterwards, one of 150 and the other
+of 200 tons. We took out of these every thing that we thought useful,
+and then dismissed them.
+
+The 5th of April, we began to prepare for the great exploit our captain
+meditated, of landing on the coast and plundering some rich city; for
+which purpose our carpenters were ordered to fit up the launches or long
+boats we had taken from our prizes, so as to land our men in safety, and
+to fit two swivels in each launch. On the 11th we took a bark of fifty
+tons, laden with plank and cordage, as if sent on purpose for our
+present service. This was in sight of _Gallo_, under which island we
+anchored next day with our prize, which we kept to use in the intended
+enterprise. The island of _Gallo_ is in lat. 2 deg. 45' N. long. 76 deg. 38' W.
+from London,[209] and about five leagues from the main; being two
+leagues long and one league broad. When approached from the south, it
+shews three hummocks which seem at a distance as three separate islands,
+the land between being very low; but when to the N.W. of the S. end you
+will see a small island, or rock rather, resembling a ship under sail.
+From this island the main land is in sight, being very low near the sea,
+but prodigiously high up the country. We anchored off the N.W. part of
+this island, two cables length from the shore, in thirty-five fathoms on
+hard sand, the N. point bearing N. 1/2 W. and the S. point S.W. The
+watering place goes in with a full gap, over which, on the hill, is a
+plain spot of red earth, bearing N.W. 1/2 N. but there are several other
+good watering places in the island. The best anchorage is on the N.E.
+part at _Legnetta_, where a ship may wood and water quite secure from
+any enemy. The island is very woody, affording large timber, which is
+often shipped hence for Peru. There are here a few wild monkeys, with
+abundance of lizards; among which is one called the _lion-lizard_, about
+the size of a man's arm, one that I measured being three feet eleven
+inches from the head to the end of the tail. It has a kind of large comb
+on its head, standing up like a helmet, as if to defend its head, and
+when attacked it erects this comb, which otherwise lies in a deep groove
+on the head, just fitted for its reception, so that it can hardly be
+seen when down. This animal has very large eyes, and a large mouth, in
+which are a great many small sharp teeth. The skin is rough and of a
+dark colour, full of black, yellow, and bluish spots. It runs very
+swift, yet our dog caught many of them.
+
+[Footnote 209: Lat. 1 deg. 56' N. long. 78 deg. 50' W. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+After remaining here five days, we began to hoist our anchors to set
+sail, when we discovered a ship standing in for the island, which we
+took. She was a small vessel of fifty tons, commanded by a Mestizo, on
+board of which we found a Guernsey man, who had been taken by the
+Spaniards, while cutting logwood in the Bay of Campeachy above two years
+before, and must have continued a prisoner during life if we had not
+released him. On sailing from Gallo, our purpose was to attack the town
+of Santa Maria, not far from this on the continent to the E. expecting
+there to have found a great quantity of gold, brought thither from the
+adjacent mines of the same name. But this design miscarried, whether
+from fear, confusion, or the enemy having early intelligence of our
+motions, which enabled them to cut off many of our men. This, however,
+is certain, that we were quite sick of our fruitless attempts on shore
+by the 1st May, and immediately re-embarked. We were now so short of
+provisions, that five boiled green plantains were allotted for six men;
+but, when almost out both of hope and patience, a vessel came and
+anchored close beside us at midnight, which we took without resistance.
+This proved a most valuable prize, being a ship of 150 tons, laden with
+flour, sugar, brandy, wine, about thirty tons marmalade of quinces, a
+considerable quantity of salt, and several tons of linen and woollen
+cloth; so that we had now a sufficient supply of provisions even for
+four or five years. I was put aboard of this prize on behalf of Captain
+Dampier and his company, and the master of the Cinque-ports, in behalf
+of Captain Stradling and his crew.
+
+We carried our prize into the Bay of Panama, and anchored under the
+island of Tobago on the 14th of May. Here Captains Dampier and Stradling
+disagreed, and the quarrel proceeded to such length, that they could not
+be reconciled, so that at last it was determined to part company, all
+the men being at liberty to go with which captain they pleased, in
+consequence of which five of our men went over to Captain Stradling, and
+five of his men came to us. We were now informed by the prisoners, that
+there were 80,000 dollars on board our prize, which had been taken on
+board at Lima clandestinely, and were concealed at the bottom of the
+hold in the run of the ship. But Captain Dampier would not credit this,
+neither would he wait till we should rummage her to the bottom, lest
+delay might mar his great designs. Having, therefore, taken on board a
+quantity of provisions from the prize, she was dismissed; and we set
+sail in the St George on the 19th May, leaving the Cinque-ports behind,
+intending again to proceed for the coast of Peru.
+
+We took a vessel of 120 tons on the 7th June, bound from Truxillo for
+Panama, and laden with flour, sugar, brandy, and other articles, with
+some bales of flowered silk. In her we found a packet of letters, and
+the first of these we happened to read was from the captain of the ship
+we had fought off Juan Fernandez, and fell in with again going into
+Callao. It was directed to the president of Panama, and stated, "That he
+had fought with two English privateers off Juan Fernandez, the smaller
+having only fired eight or ten guns at him, and then fell astern and did
+not come up again during the fight, as he believed for want of wind;
+while the large ship fought him yard-arm and yard-arm for more than six
+hours, killed a great many of his men, and wounded such numbers, that he
+had landed thirty-two at Lima, each of whom had lost a leg, an arm, or
+an eye, and he had been nearly taken, as at parting they had given
+themselves over for lost, not having a sufficient number of men left to
+defend themselves." By other letters, we learnt that the two French
+ships we afterwards saw near Juan Fernandez had picked up a boat at sea,
+in which were an Englishman and a dog; had been in at the island of Juan
+Fernandez, and had taken up our anchors, cables, and long-boats, with
+all Captain Stradling's stores, as also his five men and our negro who
+were left there. We learnt also, that the Spaniards had fitted out two
+men of war against us, one of thirty-two, and the other thirty-six brass
+guns, all twenty-four pounders, each having 350 sailors and 150
+soldiers, all picked men, and had been cruizing for us in the Bay of
+Guayaquil, between point St Helena and Cape Blanco, from the 7th to the
+12th.
+
+We were forced to go under an easy sail, as our prize sailed very
+heavily, wherefore we went into _Sardinas_ Bay, in lat. 1 deg. 20' N. where
+we anchored with our prize in ten fathoms, about four miles from the
+shore, for the purpose of rummaging her. We durst not go farther in,
+because of many shoals and sand-banks, which were very imperfectly laid
+down in all our charts. The sea-coast is inhabited by Indians, but not
+in any great numbers, and has several small fresh-water rivers. From
+hence, all the way south, till we came to the Bay of _Atacarnes_, in
+lat. 0 deg. 54' N. the sea-side is composed of white cliffs; and there are
+many shoals as far as _Punta de la Galera_, in lat. 0 deg. 48' N. Six
+leagues S.W. of Sardinas Bay is the great river of St Jago, the mouth of
+which is about three quarters of a mile wide, but has no good anchorage
+till well within. This river is seldom used by ships, being out of the
+way, yet the country here produces abundant provisions of all sorts. We
+careened our ship and rummaged our prize in the Bay of Sardinas, and
+watered at one of the fresh-water rivers, which was as white as milk,
+and both smelt and tasted very strong of musk, occasioned by many
+alligators swimming in it. We shot several of these creatures, one of
+which measured thirty feet in length, and was bigger about than a
+bullock.
+
+The alligator is covered over with great scales from head to tail,
+having very large sharp teeth, and very long claws. It is amphibious,
+living both on land and in the water, and when lying on shore is often
+mistaken at a distance for a great tree fallen down. It runs very fast
+on the land, and is of such strength that one of them will take a horse
+or a cow into the water, and there devour it. They will seize on any
+thing, either on land or in the water, and often make great havock among
+cattle near their haunts, which are usually in fresh-water rivers. The
+Indians are not greatly afraid of them, either on land or in the water.
+In the former case, they run in circles, and this unwieldy animal is
+unable to turn his body quickly, so that they easily get away from them.
+The Indians also go into the water to seek them, taking in one hand a
+piece of iron pointed and baited at both ends, with two cross pieces a
+little below the points. Holding this iron by the middle, when the
+alligator rises to bite, which he always does with, the head above
+water, the Indian holds out the iron to him which he snaps at, and it
+fastens in his mouth, keeping his jaws open like a gag. The female lays
+about 100 eggs at a time, as large as goose eggs; but quite spherical,
+and having shells as thick almost as those of an ostrich. The flesh of
+the alligator is not fit to be eaten, being very strong and musky; and
+the very water of the rivers they frequent was so strong of musk that a
+draught of it was like to suffocate us, yet there are no instances of
+its being injurious to health.
+
+Being off the Bay of Guayaquil on the 21st June, we saw a ship, and came
+up with her next day, being one of the Spanish men of war fitted out to
+take us, carrying thirty-two guns. We did all we could to gain the
+weather-gage, but carrying away our fore-top-mast, were obliged to come
+to action from the leeward, so that she kept a good distance from us,
+and we could not use our small arms. Dividing our crew into two equal
+parts, one managed the guns while the other looked on, and when those at
+the guns were weary, the others took their places, alternately
+refreshing those who were not employed, by which means we fired much
+faster than the enemy, making about 560 discharges, while they only made
+110 or 115. We thus fought from noon till half past six, though at such
+distance that our shot would hardly reach him, while his flew over us.
+Growing dusk, both ceased firing, none of our men being either killed or
+wounded, and only two through carelessness had their hands and faces
+scorched. We lay-to all night, expecting in the morning to renew the
+fight; but he had made sail from us in the night.
+
+We now returned to the Bay of Atacames in search of provisions, for
+which purpose we sent our boat ashore with twenty men, who soon
+returned, saying they had found an Indian village of fifty houses, but
+the inhabitants were all fled and had left nothing behind. In the river
+we found a fine bark of about fifty tons, with as much new plank in her
+as would have built another of equal size; and we took another of about
+ten tons, laden with plantains. This we resolved to retain, instead of a
+long-boat. She had two masts and two square-sails, and having fitted her
+for our purpose, we called her the Dragon. The country in the
+neighbourhood of this bay is very pleasant, being well wooded and
+watered. About seven leagues to the N.E. is the Bay of _St Mattheo_, the
+land about it being very high, and there are many shoals about it,
+running two leagues out to sea. For three or four leagues the water is
+only from four fathoms to six, and this bay has white cliffs both to the
+north and south. In the bottom of the bay there are two rivers running
+into the sea, both of which are what the seamen call _alligator water_,
+that is, white and musky as before described. On each side of these
+rivers there are shoals of sand; and near their mouths are fine groves
+of tall spreading green trees, which are the marks by which they may be
+found, as their mouths are narrow, and not discernible at a distance.
+These rivers are seldom frequented by the Spaniards, except for
+refreshments, for which they are well adapted, as all the adjoining
+country abounds with every kind of provisions that this part of the
+world produces. About two leagues up these rivers there are several
+Indian villages, who furnish the Spanish ships which come here with
+cocoa-nuts, plantains, bananas, and other kinds of fruit.
+
+The _cocoa-tree_ is generally from fifty to an hundred feet high, and
+for the most part straight and slender. The leaves are four fathoms, or
+four and a half long, at the very top of the tree, and serve excellently
+for thatching houses. At the bottom of the leaves the cocoa nuts grow in
+clusters of ten, fifteen, or twenty, hanging by a small string which is
+full of joints. Each nut, with its outer rind, is larger than a man's
+head, and within this outer rind is a hard woody shell which will hold
+near a quart of liquid. The nut or kernel lines the inside of this
+shell, and within this kernel is about a pint and half of pure clear
+water, very cool, sweet, and pleasant. The kernel also is very good and
+pleasant; but when old, we scrape it all down, and soak it in about a
+quart of fresh water for three or four hours, which is then strained,
+and has both the colour and taste of milk, and will even throw up a
+thick head not unlike cream. This milk, when boiled with rice, is
+accounted very wholesome and nourishing by the doctors, and was given to
+our sick men. When the nut is very old, the kernel of itself turns to
+oil, which is often used to fry with, but mostly for burning in lamps.
+The outer end of the nuts may be applied to the purposes of flax, and of
+it the natives make a kind of linen, and it is also manufactured into
+ropes and cables, which are sold in most parts of America and the West
+Indies. The shell of this nut makes very pretty drinking cups, and it
+also burns well, making a fierce hot fire. Thus the cocoa-tree affords
+meat, drink, oil, clothing, houses, firing, and rigging for ships.
+
+The _plantain-tree_ is only about thirteen or fourteen feet high and
+four feet round, its leaves being eight or nine feet long and two broad,
+ending in a round point. The fruit grows at the bottom of the leaves, on
+a great stalk, in a pod about eight inches long and the size of a black
+pudding, being of a fine yellow colour, often speckled with red. The
+inside of this is white, but the plantain itself is yellow like butter,
+and as soft as a pear. There sometimes grow fifty or sixty of these pods
+on one stalk, and five or six stalks on one tree. They are an excellent
+fruit, and most parts of the East and West Indies abound with them. The
+_banana_ tree is much the same with the plantain, but the fruit is only
+about six inches long, fifty or sixty of them growing on one stalk, and
+is extraordinarily mellow, sweet, and good.
+
+We left the bay of Atacames on the 31st July, accompanied by our prize
+the Dragon, and passing the Bay of Panama, came to the Bay of Nicoya on
+the 16th August, in lat 9 deg. 30'N. in which we anchored near certain
+islands near the centre of the bay, called Middle Islands, where we
+careened. While here, Mr Clippington, the chief mate, having quarrelled
+with Captain Dampier, drew over twenty-one men to his party, and making
+himself master of the bark, in which was all our ammunition and the best
+part of our provisions, hoisted anchor, and went without the islands,
+whence he sent us word that he would put ashore at an Indian house all
+our powder, shot, and other ammunition, reserving only what was
+necessary for his own use, which he did accordingly, and we sent our
+canoes to fetch it on board.
+
+These islands in the Bay of Nicoya are extremely pleasant and fruitful,
+abounding in all things necessary for life, such as birds of various
+kinds, several sorts of fish, and amphibious animals, particularly
+turtles and guanas. Among the birds is a very beautiful one called the
+_Maccaw_, having feathers of all the colours of the rainbow. It is in
+shape like a large parrot, with a white bill, and black legs and feet.
+The _carrion crow_ is as big as a small turkey, which it perfectly
+resembles in shape and colour; but its flesh smells and tastes so strong
+of muck that it is not eatable. The _pelican_ is almost as big as a
+swan, being mostly white with brown tips to the wings, having a long
+bill with a large cross joining the lower part of the bill, and hanging
+down the throat like a bag or satchel of great size, into which it
+receives oysters, cockles, conchs, and other shell-fish, which it is
+unable to break, and retains them there till they open, when it throws
+them out and picks out the meat. They are good food, but taste a little
+fishy. Their feet are broad, and webbed like ducks, being water fowl,
+yet they commonly roost on rocks or trees, and always sit with their
+heads to the wind, varying their posture as that changes. They are heavy
+birds and fly slowly, and always when sitting rest their long bills
+upon their breasts. The _Guana_ is an amphibious animal, found both on
+land and in the water. It is about three feet long, some more some less,
+and is very ugly, having large sharp scales, black and green, from the
+fore part of the head to the end of the tail. The mouth is furnished
+with numerous large and sharp teeth, and it has four long claws on each
+foot. They commonly breed in holes about the roots of old trees near the
+water. When stewed with some spice, their flesh is very white and eats
+well, making also good broth; but if not extraordinarily well boiled, it
+is very dangerous meat, making men very sick and often occasioning
+fevers.
+
+There are several kinds of _turtles_, or sea tortoises, but we account
+the green turtle the best meat. When they want to lay their eggs, they
+go on shore in some sandy bay, where they make a hole in the sand with
+their fins, two feet and a half deep, in which one turtle will deposit
+from eighty to ninety eggs, which they cover over with the sand, leaving
+them to hatch by the heat of the sun. They lay in this manner two or
+three times every year, and go immediately off to sea, leaving their
+young when hatched to shift for themselves; which, as soon as they get
+out of the eggs and from the sand, retire to the sea. The eggs are round
+and white, as large as those of a duck, being covered with a thin tough
+skin, but no shell. I have seen of the green turtle 200, 350, and even
+400 pounds weight. The lean of this animal looks like beef, but the fat
+is as green as grass, yet is very wholesome food. The _pearl-oyster_ is
+much about the size of our common oyster, but thick and broad, and hangs
+to the rocks by a long string or beard, like that of a muscle. The pearl
+is found in its thickest part, and some have six or seven pearls. The
+Spaniards often make voyages to this gulf of Nicoya and to California in
+quest of pearls, employing Indian divers, who go down in seven or eight
+fathoms, and bring up eight, ten, or twelve oysters at a time, which are
+opened by other men on board. The meat of this oyster is very green and
+fat, and eats tolerably well, boiled or stewed. The _great-oyster_ grows
+to the rocks, not hanging from them by a beard. When opened, one part of
+the meat is of a fine red colour like a cherry, and the rest a fine
+white. I have often eat of this oyster, for want of better victuals; and
+they are so large, that one of them cut in pieces and stewed is a
+sufficient meal for five or six men. The _muscles_ here are so large
+that one will suffice for a meal to two men, and they are tolerably good
+when, stewed with pepper and vinegar.
+
+We sailed from the Gulf of Nicoya on the 23d September, and were in lat.
+13 deg. 7' N. on the 7th October, when we got sight of two high mountains,
+commonly called the Volcanoes of Guatimala. That which is to the north
+of the city is the highest, and affords a fine prospect from the sea;
+and in the year 1534 threw out a torrent of water, which totally
+overwhelmed the old city of St Jago de Guatimala, and occasioned the
+building of a new city at the distance of thirty-five miles S.E. The
+other mountain is really a volcano, which rages terribly in the rainy
+season, from April to November, sometimes throwing out stones as big as
+a house, and with such prodigious eruptions of flame, that one may see
+to read a letter in a dark night at the distance of six miles. This is
+to the south of Guatimala.
+
+The 9th October we took a bark of eighty tons in ballast, but which had
+a small quantity of provisions, which were very acceptable. This bark
+was commanded by a Spaniard named Christian Martin, born in the
+Canaries, but brought up in London, who had formerly been servant to
+Captain Eaton, and came with him to the South Sea in quality of gunner;
+but, falling out with the men, he ran away from them in the island of
+Gorgonia, where he lay concealed for six days till the ship departed. He
+then cut down two trees, which he drew to the water side, and bound
+together with withes, fixed a mast, and made a sail of two shirts which
+he had with him. Then filling a bag with oysters, he put off early in
+the morning from Gorgonia, and got next day in the afternoon into the
+river Bonaventura. He was here ill used by the Spaniards, who sent him
+to Lima, where he was set at liberty. We were now sixty-four men and
+boys, all in good health and spirits, and on the 23d November, captured
+a small bark of sixty tons from California laden with plank, but having
+also several parcels of pearls, that had been fished on that coast.
+December 4th we came into the Bay of Nativity, or _Puerto Nauidad_, in
+lat. 19 deg. 22' N. where we took a new ship of about sixty tons, laden with
+ammunition and military stores for the Acapulco ship, for which we were
+now in search, and for the sight of which our people longed as earnestly
+as if there had been no difference between seeing and taking her;
+neither was it long before they had their wish in one respect, but not
+in the other. We took from our prize what ammunition was left; for, on
+perceiving our design, the ship's company quitted her, having first
+thrown overboard the best part of her cargo, and left the rest scattered
+about in the utmost confusion.
+
+Being off the volcano of Colima on the morning of the 6th December, we
+descried a sail to which we gave chace, and soon came up with her, when
+she proved to be the great Acapulco ship or Manilla galleon, which we
+had so long wished to fall in with. As we were well provided, we gave
+her a great many broadsides before she could get any of her guns cleared
+for action, as she had not suspected us of being an enemy, and was not
+at all prepared for us. Martin, who was still a prisoner on board our
+ship, advised us to lay her aboard immediately, while the Spaniards were
+all in confusion, as we might then easily succeed by boarding; but if we
+gave them time to get out their great guns, they would certainly tear us
+to pieces, and we should lose the opportunity of acquiring a prize worth
+sixteen millions of dollars. Thus it accordingly happened; for the time
+being wasted in disputing, between those of us that were for boarding,
+and those of a different opinion, she got out one tier of guns, and then
+proved too hard for us, so that we could not lie along side of her to do
+her any damage. Our five pound shot, which was the biggest we had,
+signified little against such a ship; but when any of her eighteen and
+twenty-four pound shot struck our ship, which was much decayed, it drove
+in a piece of plank of three or four feet. Being thus greatly damaged,
+and having received a shot between wind and water in our powder room, by
+which two feet of plank were driven in on each side of our stern, orders
+were given to stand off from the enemy.
+
+Our design being thus disappointed, all our men became much
+discontented, and were for going home, seeing we could do no good in
+these parts, either for ourselves or owners; our ship also being ready
+to fall in pieces of herself, and having provisions only for three
+months at short allowance. Captain Dampier requested that we would
+consent to prolong our cruize for six weeks longer; after which he
+promised to permit us to sail for India to some factory, where we might
+all dispose of ourselves as we thought best for our advantage. To this
+we all agreed, and we accordingly cruized along shore to the S.E. in
+sight of land, passing the noted ports of Acapulco,_Puerto de los
+Angelos_, Guatalco, and several others; when we proposed to seek out a
+proper place in which to water our ships and bark, previous to our
+intended voyage to the East Indies; and, after some consideration, the
+Gulf of Amapalla or Fonseca was fixed upon for that purpose.
+
+On the 5th January, 1705, we met with such vast quantities of fish, that
+in half an hour we caught near three score _albicores_, from sixty to
+ninety pounds weight each, besides vast quantities of other fish. The
+_albicore_ is about four or five feet long, weight from 50 to 100 and
+even 150 pounds. It has eleven fins on its back, one pretty large, a
+second of middle size, and nine small yellow fins near the tail; one
+large fin on each side near the gills; and one near the middle of the
+belly. This is a very fleshy fish, having hardly any bones besides the
+back bone, and is extraordinary good eating. It has prodigious strength,
+while in the water, and preys mostly on flying fish, as do dolphins and
+bonetoes. On the 6th of this month, a new revolution took place in our
+affairs, as thirty of our men agreed to remain along with Captain
+Dampier in the South Sea; but with what view or on what terms, we
+others, who were not in the secret, never knew. Our company, who were
+not of Dampier's party, consisted of thirty-three men; and,
+notwithstanding this new arrangement, we all sailed to the Gulf of
+Amapalla, where we anchored on the 26th January.
+
+That same day, all the remaining provisions were equally divided between
+the two companies by the agent for the owners, and we had four pieces of
+cannon, with a proper proportion of small arms and ammunition, assigned
+for us, for our defence during the voyage to India. Our next care was to
+take in water, for which purpose we landed on the island of _Conchagua_;
+and after some search, we found a large bottom behind the hills, in
+which was a large plantain walk, and a large reservoir of rain water,
+which came from the mountains. This was very inconvenient, as we were
+forced to carry all our water over a high hill, which we could hardly
+climb by ourselves; but there was no alternative, and we set to work to
+cut down the bushes in our way, to make a clear path. After this, as the
+hill was very steep on the land side towards the bottom whence we had to
+fetch water, we cut steps in the hill with axes and shovels; and our
+sail-maker made a hose or canvass pipe of ninety fathoms long, which
+carried the water from the top of the hill down to our water cask at its
+foot towards the sea. We then fell to work, each man having a six gallon
+keg, in which the water was carried to the top of the hill, where it was
+emptied into the hose. We were thus employed four days, in which time
+we filled twenty-six tons, which we carried on board. The 31st January,
+we all went to the plantain walk, where we cut down as many plantains as
+we could carry, with which we returned on board our ship, meaning to set
+sail next day.
+
+This evening, two of the men who had agreed to remain with Captain
+Dampier, left him and came over to us, so that our number was now
+thirty-five, viz. thirty-four English, and a little negro boy we had
+taken from the Spaniards. While we were employed in watering our bark,
+the men on board the St George were busied in refitting that ship as
+well as they could; the carpenter stopping up the shot-holes in the
+powder-room with tallow and charcoal, not daring, as he said, to drive a
+nail, for fear of making it worse. The four great guns, which usually
+stood between decks, were put down into the hold, there being sixteen
+besides, which was more than they now had men to manage, as there only
+remained twenty-eight men and boys with Captain Dampier, who were mostly
+landsmen, a very insignificant force indeed with which to make war on a
+whole nation.
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_Sequel of the Voyage of William Funnell, after his Separation from
+Captain Dampier_.
+
+We left the Gulf of Amapalla on the 1st February, 1705, where Captain
+Dampier remained at anchor in the St George, having a fine gale of wind
+at N.E. While in any of the harbours on the coast of Mexico, we were
+seldom allowed any thing except flour, only that we used to go on shore,
+and found on the rocks plenty of concks, oysters, muscles, and other
+shell-fish, on which we made many a hearty meal. Being now bound, as we
+hoped, for a land of plenty, we bore hunger and short commons with great
+patience, of which we had much need, as our allowance was no more than
+half a pound of coarse flour a day to each man, and two ounces of salt
+meat every other day. Our vessel was a small bark of about seventy tons
+with two masts, which we had taken from the Spaniards, which was so
+eaten with worms while in the Gulf of Amapalla, that she already began
+to grow very leaky. To add to our distress, we had no carpenter, neither
+had we a doctor or any medicines, if any of us happened to fall sick,
+and we had no boat to aid us if our vessel should fail. The carpenter,
+doctor, and boat being all left with Captain Dampier. Yet, trusting to
+God's providence, who had already delivered us out of so many dangers,
+we proceeded on our voyage to India; and a bolder attempt was perhaps
+never made by such a handful of men in so frail a bark, and nothing but
+our anxious desire to revisit our native country could have supported us
+under all the difficulties and dangers of this extensive voyage.
+
+The prospect of our difficulties gave us spirit and resolution to
+provide against them; and in a council, which we held on this occasion,
+we determined on the course we were to pursue, and the allowance of
+provisions during the course. We knew the wind we now had was merely a
+land breeze, and that by running 100 leagues out to sea we should fall
+in with the regular trade-wind, which blows always N.E. or E.N.E. our
+first purpose was, therefore, to get into the latitude of 13 deg. N. which
+is that of Guam, and then to bear away before the wind in that parallel.
+This resolution was formed on the 2d February, all which day and most of
+the ensuing night we had fine calm weather, and caught abundance of
+_yellow-tails_, which swam about the vessel. This fish is about four
+feet long, having twenty fins on its back; a middling one behind the
+head, a large one on the middle of the back, and eighteen small ones
+between that and the tail. It has a large fin on each side near the
+gills, and thirteen under the belly, viz. a middling one under the
+gills, a large one near the middle of the belly, which goes in with a
+dent, and eleven small ones between that and the tail, which is yellow
+and half-mooned. This fish has a very great head, with large eyes, and
+is good eating, having no bones except the back-bone. It is all white,
+except the tips of the fins and the tail, which, are yellow. These fish
+were very acceptable to us, as we fed upon them for three days, saving
+our other provisions. On the 3d February, five or six turtles came near
+our bark, two of which we caught, which also served to save our scanty
+store of provisions, which otherwise had not sufficed to keep us from
+starving.
+
+On the evening of the 3d February, having a brisk gale from the land at
+N.E. we took our departure from _Mount St Miguel_ in the Gulf of
+Amapalla, steering S.W. and S.S.W. till we were in the lat. of 10 deg. N.
+when falling in with the tradewind, we set our course W.N.W. we then
+made studding-sails to our main and main-top sails, which we hoisted
+every morning at day-break, and hauling down at sun-set, as it commonly
+blew so fresh in the night that we had usually to furl our top-sail; but
+the wind commonly abated at sun-rise. During our whole voyage we
+steadily adhered to the rule of diet we had laid down, the slenderness
+of which may be judged of by the following particulars.
+
+From the 3d of February to the end of that month, we fed entirely on
+plantains, making two meals a day, and allowing two plantains to each
+man for a meal. We had then recourse to our flour, of which half a pound
+was allowed daily to each man, and two ounces every other day of salt
+beef or pork; but the meat had been so long in salt, that it shrunk one
+half when boiled, wherefore we concluded it was better to eat it raw,
+which we did as long as it lasted. By the beginning of April that began
+to fail, so that we were reduced to flour alone, which was sore spoiled,
+being full of maggots, spiders, and other vermin, so that nothing but
+the extremity of want could have induced us to eat it. It was surprising
+to behold this strange alteration in the flour, which only a few days
+before was white and fine, and was now in a manner all alive, the
+maggots tumbling over each other in prodigious numbers. On strict
+enquiry, these maggots seemed to proceed from the eggs of spiders
+deposited among the flour, out of which the maggots were bred, and then
+fed voraciously on the flour. Words can only faintly describe the
+miseries of our situation, which was somewhat alleviated by work, and
+our spirits were buoyed up by the hopes of accomplishing our long and
+difficult voyage. Some occasional assistance we derived by now and then
+catching a dolphin. At other times we saw many sea fowl, such as
+boobies, noddies, and others, which would come and perch on some part of
+our rigging, and happy was he that could catch one. In this manner we
+spent ten weeks, at the end of which we were in a very melancholy
+condition, and nothing but the hope of seeing land could possibly keep
+us from despair.
+
+The 10th of April, we observed the clouds to gather more than usual in
+the horizon, which is a sure indication of land, as it is common between
+the tropics to be foggy over the land, though perfectly clear at sea;
+wherefore we kept an anxious look-out all this night, and early in the
+morning of the 11th, we saw the island of _Magon_ W. ten leagues
+distant. This is a high woody island, very plain, and green on the top.
+When within a mile of this island, we lay to, and several fishing boats
+came to us, bringing us fish, yams, eggs, potatoes, and other
+provisions, to our great joy. The men in these boats were very tall and
+large-limbed, of tawny complexions, with long black hair reaching to
+their middles, and were all utterly stark naked, not even covering their
+parts of shame. In exchange for what we had of these people we offered
+them money, which they looked at and returned, making signs to give them
+tobacco, which we did, and they seemed much pleased. We also gave them
+some old shirts, which they tore in pieces and wrapped round their
+heads. We would have given each a dram of brandy, but they were afraid
+of it; only one man accepted a glass, which he drank off, but we thought
+he would never have closed his mouth again, he seemed so astonished at
+the heat it left in his mouth and stomach, that I believe he thought
+himself on fire. He lay down and roared like a bull near half an hour,
+when he fell asleep; and we being in haste, put him into his boat,
+making signs to his companions to take care of him.
+
+These islanders seemed a very civil people, yet we did not venture to
+allow too many of them to come on board at once. When they first came
+near us, they tied two sticks together in form of a cross, which they
+held up, as we supposed, to signify to us that they had some knowledge
+of Christianity; whereupon we shewed them a crucifix, we had taken from
+the Spaniards, at the sight of which they all bowed their bodies, and
+came on board. This island of Magon, as I reckoned, is in lat. 15 deg. N.
+and we made its longitude by computation, 120 deg. 9' W. from _St Miguel_,
+or 7029 English miles, allowing 58-1/2 miles to the degree of longitude
+in this parallel.[210]
+
+[Footnote 210: From the sequel, this island of Magon appears almost
+certainly to have been one of the Ladrones, perhaps to the N.E. of Guam,
+now named Rota. Point Candadillo, near San Miguel, the N.W. cape of the
+Gulf of Amapalla, is in long. 87 deg. 58' W. and the Ladrones are in long.
+216 deg. W. from Greenwich, so that the difference, or run across the
+Pacific, is 128 deg. 2', which, at 58-1/2 miles, extend to 7590 miles,
+besides the allowance for difference of latitude.--E.]
+
+On mature deliberation, we resolved to proceed directly from this place
+to New Guinea, without putting in at the island of Guam, which was in
+sight. The weather continued fair, and the wind brisk and favourable,
+till we came into the latitude of 4 deg. N. when we had a calm for seven
+days, during which time we had no means of relieving our hunger, except
+by taking large draughts of water, and then lying down to sleep. On the
+3d May we had a fine gale, which continued till the 5th, and then died
+quite away before we got sight of land; but about ten that night we were
+all sensible of a very odoriferous smell, whence we concluded that we
+were near land, on which we examined our charts, but found none laid
+down. Next morning, however, we saw land at no great distance. This day
+also we caught two bonetoes, which were most welcome, as they made a
+hearty meal to our whole company. This fish is commonly about three feet
+long and two in circumference, having a very sharp head, with a small
+mouth, full eyes, and a semilunar tail. It is very fleshy, and makes
+good broth. About noon we were in sight of three small islands, all low
+land, but very green and pleasant, especially to us, who had been so
+long of seeing any land. We had this day an observation of the sun, by
+which we found our latitude to be 50' N. and as the eastermost of these
+islands was four leagues S.E. of the ship, it must of consequence be in
+lat. 0 deg. 42' N.[211]
+
+[Footnote 211: The only islands in modern maps which agree with the
+slight notice in the text, are Frevilla, or St David's Isle,, nearly in
+lat. 1 deg. N. and long. 135 deg. E. from Greenwich: Yet it is singular that
+Funnell should have passed through the numerous group of the Carolines
+without seeing any of them.--E.]
+
+As we were fearful of entering upon an unknown coast in the dark, we
+stood off all night, which was well for us, as we found ourselves at
+day-break next morning, 7th May, within a ship's length of a great reef
+of rocks, which extended from one island to the other, and thinking to
+have gone between the islands, we had nearly run upon this dangerous
+ledge. Having a small breeze from shore we were fortunately able to
+stand off, and went to the westermost island, because we saw many shoals
+off the others. The rocks we were so near running upon were off the
+northmost isle, which we named the Island of _Deceit_. On getting near
+the westermost island which was the biggest of the three, forty or fifty
+of their flying proas came off, in which there might be 450 men,
+allowing ten to each proa, and we could also see multitudes of people on
+the shore looking at us as we passed. The flying proas kept at a
+distance from us, till we beckoned and made signs for them to come near,
+and at length one came within a ship's length, in which were ten men
+entirely naked, in the midst of whom was a grave old man of a pleasant
+countenance, entirely naked like the rest, except that he had a
+four-cornered cap on his head without a crown. By the respect shewn him
+by all the rest in the boat, we judged this man to be a king or prince.
+On their approach, they sung a song which continued near a quarter of an
+hour, and had a very pretty tune. When this was done, they came almost
+close to our vessel, and then sung another song, which was begun by the
+old man, and followed by all the rest in the boat. At the end of which,
+they put themselves in a posture of prayer, making many bows and cringes
+towards us; and then one of the men in the boat, who had a very sore
+leg, held it up to us, as if desiring us to cure it, whence we supposed
+they had never seen white men before, and deemed us more than mortals.
+
+After some time, we made signs to let them know we wanted victuals and
+drink, when they shook their heads as if by way of denial. Seeing us
+proceeding towards the island, one of the men in the boat blew a horn,
+on which all the other boats made boldly towards us; and thinking they
+meant to board us, we fired a junket over their heads to intimidate
+them, at the noise of which they seemed much surprised and drew back,
+menacing us at a distance with their paddles, and still following.
+Seeing such multitudes on the shore, and finding we could have nothing
+from them but by force, and besides not having anchors and cables on
+which we could depend, or any boat in which to land, we concluded that
+we could do no good here; and on examining our water, which was found
+sufficient for eighteen days, at a quart each man daily, we resolved to
+quit these islands, and trust to Providence for guiding us to some more
+friendly place, where we might supply our wants. So we left these
+islands, naming the westermost the Island of _Disappointment_, because
+we made certain of procuring water here, but could not.
+
+These three islands were all low, flat, and almost even with the water,
+yet full of trees of various sorts, all very green and flourishing; and
+doubtless, if we had possessed a boat, we must have found something
+beneficial to ourselves, perhaps useful to our country, as we might also
+at several other islands which we afterwards passed. The inhabitants of
+most of these islands were a very large and strong-boned race of men,
+having long black lank hair reaching to their middles, and were all
+entirely naked, not so much as covering their parts of shame; and I
+certainly never saw such, a parcel of stout-limbed men together in all
+my life. These islands, therefore, are abundantly peopled, though they
+were utterly averse from any communication with us, perhaps from a
+notion that all whites are Spaniards; and yet it is not quite clear that
+even the Spaniards have ever attempted to form a settlement at any of
+these islands.
+
+We left these islands with a fresh breeze at E. steering S.W. and
+continually met with weeds and grass on our way, which made us believe
+we were not far from land, yet we had no ground with 100 fathoms. Early
+in the morning of the 9th May, we descried the coast of New Guinea, more
+than eighteen or nineteen leagues distant. We now saw the necessity of
+constructing a boat, with a few old boards and such other materials as
+we had, though not quite suitable for the purpose; and though neither
+strong nor handsome, it proved exceeding useful in the sequel. On the
+9th we had very bad weather, the wind shifting to every point of the
+compass. This part of New Guinea appeared very mountainous, black, and
+rocky, without harbour, bay, or road, in which we might anchor in
+safety. The mountains seemed so bleak and barren, and the vallies so
+deep and narrow, that at first we conceived the country to be
+uninhabited; neither did we afterwards see any inhabitants or signs of
+any. That same day we passed two small islands, each about a league in
+length, which were very low, and well clothed with small green trees. At
+the same time we saw part of the great island of Gilolo, at the distance
+of eight leagues, and held our course W.S.W.[212] intending to pass
+through between that island and New Guinea, into the East Indian Sea.
+
+[Footnote 212: The only way of explaining this part of the text, is by
+supposing Funnel may have mistaken the island of Waygoo for a part of
+New Guinea, and even the N.W. point of that island is at least sixty
+leagues from the S.W. leg or peninsula of Gilolo, to which the direction
+of his course certainly points.--E.]
+
+We had very bad weather till the 11th of May, and the night being very
+dark, we missed the common passage, and found ourselves among many
+small islands; and as the wind was at E. we resolved to look out for
+some passage among these islands to the south. After infinite difficulty
+and much danger, we at length made our way through a strait, which we
+named _St John's Straits_, after the name of our bark. At this time we
+were boarded by a large Indian proa, on board of which was a freeman of
+Amboina, whom we acquainted with our great want of victuals, having had
+nothing for a great while to support us except a scanty allowance of
+spoilt flour and water, and so very little of that as hardly sufficed to
+keep us alive. He told us, if we would go to the island of _Manissa_,
+which was then in sight, he would be our pilot, where he had no doubt we
+might have enough of rice for our money to carry us to Batavia. We
+accordingly proceeded for Manissa, passing by the island of _Keylan_,
+which is small and high, but well inhabited, and clothed with many kinds
+of trees. Its chief produce is rice, and a few cloves; and on this
+island there is a Dutch corporal with six soldiers, whose only business
+is to see all the clove trees cut down and destroyed. From thence we
+proceeded to Manissa, where we arrived about midnight, and came to
+anchor in a small bay at the N.W. end of the island, when our Dutch
+pilot sent two men ashore with a letter to the governor, acquainting him
+of our urgent wants.
+
+Early of the 23d May, a Dutch corporal and two soldiers came on board,
+and read to us a general order from the Dutch East-India Company, that
+if any ships, except their own, came there to anchor, they were not to
+be supplied with any thing whatever. We told him that extreme want of
+provisions had constrained us to put in here, and that we should not
+have touched any where before reaching Batavia, if we could possibly
+have subsisted; wherefore we requested he would inform the governor of
+our urgent wants. This he engaged to do, seeing us in a very weak
+condition, and came back about four in the afternoon, saying that we
+could have no provisions here, but might be supplied at Amboina. We were
+forced therefore to leave this unfriendly place, and to attempt going to
+Amboina, if the wind would serve. _Manissa_ is about fifteen miles from
+S.E. to N.W. and about eight in breadth, in lat. 3 deg. 25' S. and about
+twenty miles west from the island of _Bonou_. It is a remarkably high
+island, and pretty well inhabited by Malays, as are all the Molucca
+Islands. It is surrounded by shoals almost on every side, and some of
+these stretch a league and a half from the shore, so that it is very
+dangerous to come near, unless with very good charts, or with an
+experienced pilot. It has several good springs of fresh water, and the
+Dutch have a small fort with six guns on its S.W. side. It is governed
+by a Dutch serjeant, having under him three corporals, a master gunner,
+and twenty European soldiers; and produces vast plenty of rice and
+cloves, both of which are sent to Amboina. The inhabitants are mostly
+fishers, and catch such abundance of fish as not only supplies
+themselves, but enables them also to carry a great deal to Amboina.
+
+We stood to the S.W. having the wind at S.S.E. and blowing fresh, so
+that we sailed under our courses, and were now much out of heart, not
+expecting to reach Amboina, the S E. monsoon being now set in; which was
+right against us. Almost in despair, we continued our course till we
+were over against the island of _Bouro_, and then the wind veering to
+the S.S.W. we stood away S.E. but finding a strong current setting to
+leeward, we rather lost ground, and seeing no likelihood of getting to
+Amboina, we, by general consent, shared among us all that was eatable on
+board, each man's share being six pounds and three quarters of flour,
+and five pounds of bran, every one resolving to use his share as
+sparingly as possible. On the 25th, the wind veered to S.S.E. when we
+tacked to S.W. and soon weathered the island of _Amblow_. This is a
+small island of moderate height, in lat. 4 deg. 5' S. tolerably furnished
+with trees, but not inhabited. On the 26th, we had a fine fresh gale at
+S.E. when we tacked and stood away N.E. for the island of Amboina.
+Continuing the same course all the 27th, we got sight of Amboina early
+in the morning of the 28th, bearing due N. about six leagues distant. We
+now stood directly for the island, and about noon came just off the
+harbour, a joyful sight to us then, though we soon had cause to think it
+the worst thing that had befallen us.
+
+As we entered the harbour of Amboina, we met two Dutch ships coming out,
+laden with cloves and bound for Batavia. The captain of one of these
+came on board our bark, desiring to know whence we came and whither we
+were bound, and required to have a journal of our voyage, promising to
+return it when he again met us at Batavia. We gave him the best answers
+we could to all his questions, and the agent of our owners gave him a
+succinct relation of our voyage, which was of happy consequence to us,
+as to that we afterwards owed our preservation as will appear in the
+sequel. We stood into the harbour that night, and next morning, which,
+according to our account, was Tuesday, but with the Dutch Wednesday, two
+Dutch _orambies_, as they call the vessels used at that place, came on
+board us, each of which was paddled by forty men. In these vessels came
+the fiscal and several Dutch gentlemen, with eighty soldiers, who
+immediately took possession of our bark. They also went below and sealed
+up all our chests, after which the two orambies towed us farther into
+the harbour, so that by noon we were up as high as the town of Amboina,
+where they moored our bark in the ordinary anchorage.
+
+We continued on board till the 31st, two days, not knowing how they
+meant to dispose of us; in which time they would not supply us with any
+victuals, though we offered a crown a pound for beef, pork, or bread. In
+the evening of this day they took us all on shore, lodging us in two
+rooms near the Stadt-house, our bark, with all our money and goods,
+being taken from us, except what we happened to have about our persons,
+and soon after our vessel and goods were sold by auction. We were fed
+with bad meat, which our stomachs could ill digest, being very weak with
+having been so long on short allowance, and if we desired to have better
+we had to buy it with our own money. Several of us had fortunately some
+money about us, and as long as that lasted we purchased provisions from
+our keeper. For a Spanish dollar, which was worth five shillings and a
+penny, he would only give us five Dutch _skellings_, or the value of
+about two and six-pence; and even for this he gave us no more victuals
+than we could have bought for five-pence, if we had been at liberty to
+go into the town; so that, instead of five shillings for the Spanish
+dollar, we in reality had only five-pence. During my leisure, I had many
+opportunities of enquiring into the condition of Amboina, by which I was
+enabled to draw up a pretty large account of the island and its
+inhabitants, which I flatter myself will be acceptable to the public, as
+the Dutch are careful to prevent any accounts of this place from being
+published.
+
+This _island of Amboina_, so famous, or rather infamous, for the
+cruelties and injustice formerly committed there by the Dutch upon the
+English, is twelve leagues long from N. to S. being high and
+mountainous, with intermediate vallies, which are very fertile, but the
+hills are in a great measure barren. The soil of the vallies is black,
+and affords salt-petre. The middle of the island is in lat. 3 deg. 40' S.
+The original inhabitants of the island are Malays, who are of middle
+stature and tawny complexions. The women are brighter than the men, and
+have long black hair, reaching to the calves of their legs. They have
+round faces, with small mouths, noses, and eyes. Their dress is a linen
+or cotton waistcoat, reaching only below their breasts, and a cloth
+round their waists, four yards long and a yard broad, which serves as a
+petticoat, as the Dutch women only are permitted to wear petticoats;
+neither are any of the men allowed to wear hats, except the king or
+rajah. The natives are numerous, yet the Dutch possess the whole
+sea-coast, and have here a strong castle, built of stone, mounted by
+sixty pieces of cannon, besides several small forts in other parts of
+the island. Near the castle is a small town of about 100 houses, of
+stone, brick, or timber, inhabited by the Dutch. None of the houses
+exceed one storey, as the place is subject to earthquakes, which would
+endanger the houses if higher, and even low as they are they often fall.
+While we were there we had a great earthquake for two days, which did
+much mischief as the ground opened in several places, and swallowed up
+several houses with their inhabitants. Several of their people were dug
+out of the ruins, but most of them dead, and many others had their legs
+and arms broken by the fall of the houses. Where we were, the ground
+swelled up like a wave of the sea, but no damage was done.
+
+This island is governed by a council of five, consisting of the
+governor, the senior merchant, or _ober koop-man_, the Malay king, the
+captain of the fort, and the fiscal, which last is the judge. There are
+said to be on the island 350 Dutch soldiers, with 120 or 130 Dutch
+freemen and petty officers, and about as many Chinese, who reside here
+for the benefit of trade, though not allowed to participate in the spice
+trade, which the Dutch reserve entirely to themselves. I thus estimate
+that the Dutch are able to muster in this island about 550 fighting men,
+including themselves and the Chinese; for they can count very little on
+the Malays, who would gladly join any other nation against them. The
+Malay women are said to be very loose, and not ashamed of having
+intercourse with men. They are soon ripe, being often married at nine
+years of age, and are said to have children by ten or eleven. All who
+reside near the coast must live under the Dutch government, which is
+very dissolute and tyrannical, and they are severely punished for even
+small faults, being often reduced to slavery, and condemned to wear an
+iron on their legs for life. Those dwelling near the coast under the
+controul of the Dutch are a kind of Christians; but those in the
+interior, among the hills, are Mahometans, and are always at war with
+the Dutch. When these hill Malays take any prisoners, they never give
+quarter; but, after detaining their prisoners a few days, without meat
+or drink, they are produced in public, and have their breasts ripped
+open, and their hearts taken out, all the Malays present making great
+rejoicings. The heads of these slaughtered prisoners are then embalmed
+with spice, and those who can shew the greatest number of Dutch heads
+are held in highest honour. In retaliation, when the Dutch take any of
+these hill Malays, they load them with irons, and after keeping them
+some days in prison, they cut off their ears and noses, and after being
+kept some time longer in prison, they are publicly racked to death.
+
+When any of the Malays, living under the Dutch government, are found
+guilty of thieving, their ears and noses are cut off, and a great iron
+chain is fastened to their legs, in which condition they are made slaves
+for life. While we were there, about 500 poor wretches were in this
+condition, who were kept constantly employed, in sawing timber, cutting
+stones for building, carrying burdens, or other work. They are let out
+of prison at sunrise, the men being kept in one prison and the women in
+another, and are kept hard at work till noon, when they return to prison
+for an hour, being allowed for dinner a pint of coarse boiled rice for
+each. They return again to work at one o'clock, and return to prison at
+six in the evening, when they have a similar allowance for supper. Soon
+afterwards they are locked up in their lodgings, where they lie on the
+bare boards, having only a piece of wood for a pillow. Sometimes these
+poor wretches make shift to escape, but are used with great severity if
+again caught. One of the female slaves having escaped, and being
+retaken, cut her own throat to avoid the severe punishment awaiting her,
+when she was dragged out by the hair all round the town, and then hung
+on a gibbet by the feet. Such as are in debt, and cannot satisfy their
+creditors, are turned over by their creditors to the Dutch company, who
+send them to work among their slaves, having the same allowance of
+boiled rice with the rest, with two-pence a day towards paying their
+debts; but they seldom get free till carried out dead.
+
+Though the poor natives are thus harshly treated, the Dutch wink at the
+faults of their countrymen, who are seldom punished for any crime,
+unless it be for murder, as in any other case they get off for a small
+sum of money, even for a great fault. The women slaves belonging to the
+free Dutch burgesses have all reasonable indulgence, but are obliged to
+find their own clothes and provisions, and pay an acknowledgement of
+about a sixpence daily, in default of which they are severely used. If
+they bring the daily tribute, they may whore or steal, and have no
+questions asked, provided no complaint is made against them. The chief
+products of this island are cloves, ginger, pepper, rattans, canes, and
+a few nutmegs.
+
+The clove-tree is rather slender, and is from twelve to thirty or even
+forty feet high, having small branches, with tapering leaves about five
+inches long and two broad, which smell strong of cloves, when rubbed
+between the fingers. The cloves grow out at the tips of the branches,
+ten, twelve, or fourteen in a cluster, being white at first, then green,
+and lastly of a dark copper colour, in which state they are ripe and fit
+for gathering. At this period, they spread cloths or sheets on the
+ground round the bottom of the tree to a good distance, and shake the
+tree, when all the ripe cloves fall down. This is repeated every six or
+seven days for four or five times, till all the cloves have ripened and
+are shaken off. The usual time of gathering is October and February,
+those got in October, which is the end of their winter, being called
+_winter cloves_, and are not accounted so strong and good as the others.
+These are commonly preserved in small jars of about a quart each, of
+which great quantities are sent to various parts of the world. Those
+gathered in February are termed summer cloves, being better and stronger
+than the others, as ripening in the best part of the summer; whereas the
+former have not above a month of fair weather, all the rest of their
+winter season, which is our summer, being rainy and cloudy, so that the
+cloves want sun to ripen them. It is a common opinion, but extremely
+erroneous, that cloves, nutmegs, and mace grow all on one tree. One
+clove-tree commonly produces sixty, seventy, or eighty pounds of cloves
+in one season; and every sixth year they are sure to have a double crop.
+
+There are a vast number of clove-trees on this island, which are
+carefully looked after, and a register of them is kept in the books of
+the company, being all numbered once every year, and they are not
+allowed to increase beyond a certain limited number, for fear of
+lessening the price, all beyond being cut down. All these trees belong
+to the Company, or the free burgesses, every burgess having only a fixed
+number; and if any one is found to have more than his allowance, he is
+severely fined, and all his trees forfeited to the company. Besides, the
+burgesses are bound to deliver the whole produce of their trees to the
+company at six-pence the pound. If any freeman or other is convicted of
+having sold or conveyed cloves from the island, to the value of ten
+pounds, his whole property is forfeited to the company, and he becomes a
+slave for life. The inhabitants used formerly to cheat the Dutch in the
+sale of their cloves, in the following manner. They hung up their cloves
+in a large sheet by the four corners, and set a large tub of water
+underneath, which the cloves, being of a very hot and dry nature, drew
+up by degrees, and thus made a large addition to their weight. But the
+Dutch are now too cunning for them, as they always try the cloves, by
+giving them a small filip on the head with the forefinger: if thoroughly
+ripe, and no deceit has been used, the head breaks off like a piece of
+thin brittle glass; but if watered, the clove is tough, and will sooner
+bend than break.
+
+The _nutmeg-tree_ is much like the peach, and there are a few of these
+in this island, but they grow mostly on the island of Banda, whence two
+or three ship-loads are exported yearly. The fruit of this tree consists
+of four parts. The first and outer rind is like that of a green walnut.
+The second, which we call _mace_, is dry and thin. The third is a tough
+thin shell, like that of a chesnut; and the fourth is the _nutmeg_,
+being the kernel included in that shell.
+
+There are said to be some gold-mines in the island of Amboina; and a
+Malay once shewed me some of the ore, which, he said, came from these
+mines: but he said, at the same time, that he would be severely punished
+if the Dutch knew of his having any, as they wish, as much as possible,
+to keep this from the knowledge of all other Europeans.
+
+Once every year the Dutch have to send a large force from Amboina on the
+following business, about the 20th of October. On this occasion the
+governor is attended by about seventy-five _orambies_, or boats of the
+country, some rowed by 100 paddles, some eighty, fifty, or forty paddles
+each, and in each of which there are two Dutch soldiers. I reckon
+therefore in this fleet 150 to 160 Dutch soldiers, and about 5250
+Malays, allowing seventy to each _oramby_ on the average. These
+seventy-five _orambies_ are divided into three squadrons. The
+van-division of twenty _orambies_, is always commanded by a member of
+the council, who carries a yellow flag. The rear-squadron consists also
+of twenty _orambies_, and is commanded by the fiscal, having a red flag.
+The rest form the centre-squadron, and attend the governor, who has a
+serjeant and corporal, with twelve Dutch soldiers, for his body guard,
+and carries a blue flag. The governor is also attended by the Malay king
+and all their princes or chiefs, lest they should rebel in his absence.
+In this order the fleet proceeds to visit and victual the eastern, or
+Banda islands, especially those that produce cloves or nutmegs; and at
+every island it goes to, it is joined by additional boats. This cruize
+generally lasts for six weeks, during which they cut down and destroy
+all the clove and nutmeg-trees they can find, except those which are
+reserved for the use of the company. All or most of these islands would
+produce cloves, but they will not suffer them, having enough at Amboina
+alone to supply all Europe. On all of these islands the Dutch keep a few
+soldiers, three, six, nine, or twelve, according to their size, whose
+only business is to see the trees cut down, or at least to take care
+that they do not increase; as they are very jealous lest the English or
+French should serve them as they did the English at Amboina. During this
+annual expedition, the governor levies tribute from all the petty kings
+and chiefs of these islands, and commonly returns to Amboina at the end
+of six weeks.
+
+The island of Amboina produces beavers, hogs, and deer, besides other
+animals. Among its birds are crocadores, cassawaries, birds of paradise,
+and others. The _crocadore_, or _cockatoo_, is of various sizes, some as
+large as a hen, and others no bigger than a pigeon, being all over
+white, except a crest of feathers on the top of their head, which is
+always either yellow or red. This bunch of feather usually lies flat, in
+a dent, or hollow, on the crown of the head, unless when the bird is
+frightened, when it is erected, and opens like a fan. The flesh and legs
+of this bird are very black, and they smell very sweet. When they fly up
+and down the woods, they cry _crocadore, crocadore_, or _cockatoo,
+cockatoo_, whence their name. The _cassowary_ is as large as a Virginia
+turkey, having a head nearly the same with the turkey, with a long stiff
+bunch of hair on his breast, also like the turkey. His legs are almost
+as thick as a man's wrist, having five great claws on each foot. The
+back is high and round, both it and the pinions being covered with long
+hair instead of feathers. The female of this bird lays an egg so large
+that its shell will hold an English pint of fluid, having a thick shell,
+spotted with green and white, and exactly like China-ware. I never
+tasted the eggs of this bird, but its flesh is good eating, resembling
+that of a turkey, but stronger.
+
+The _birds of paradise_ are about the size of pigeons, and are never
+seen here alive, neither is it known whence they come. I have seen
+several of them at Amboina preserved in spice, in which state they are
+sent as rarities to several parts of the world. These birds are said to
+resort, in February and March, when the nutmegs are ripe, to Banda and
+Amboina, where they feed on the outer rind of the nutmeg, after which
+they fall to the ground, quite stupified, or as it were dead drunk, when
+innumerable ants gather about them, and eat them up. There are here many
+kinds of fish, but the most remarkable is the _sea-porcupine_, which is
+about three feet long, and two and a half feet round, having large eyes,
+two fins on the back, and a large fin on each side, near the gills. Its
+body is all beset with sharp spines, or quills, like a porcupine, whence
+its name is derived.
+
+All round Amboina the bottom is sand, but the water is so deep that
+there is no anchorage near its shores, except to leeward, or on the west
+side, where a ship may anchor in forty fathoms, close to the shore in
+the harbour. This harbour runs so deep into the island as almost to
+divide it into two, which are joined by so narrow a neck of land that
+the Malays often haul their canoes across. On the east side of the entry
+into the harbour there is a small fort of six guns, close to which the
+depth is twenty fathoms. About a league farther up is the usual
+anchorage for ships, close under the guns of the great castle, which has
+been called _Victoria_ ever since the massacre of the English at this
+place. About two miles farther to the N.E. and within the harbour, is
+the place where the English factory formerly stood; and near it is the
+hole into which the English were said to have been thrown after the
+massacre. Few of us who were now here but expected the same fate; and
+some of the inhabitants did not scruple to say that our only protection
+was our journal, which had been sent to Batavia by the Dutch ship we met
+when going into the harbour; as by this it would soon be known all over
+India that a part of Captain Dampier's crew had arrived at Aniboina,
+which would cause us to be enquired after.
+
+A little to the eastward of Amboina there are several other small
+islands, the most noted of which are _Boangbessay_ and _Hinomsa_, only a
+small distance east from Amboina. These two islands are moderately high,
+and not above a third part so large as Amboina. They are both well
+fortified, and produce store of cloves. The chief place for nutmegs is
+the island of _Banda_, which also belongs to the Dutch, being in lat. 4 deg.
+20' S. 28 leagues S.S.E. from Amboina. This island is said to have the
+form of a man's leg and foot, and is well fortified. The governor of
+Amboina is supreme over all the spice islands, even to _Ternate_ and
+_Tidore_, which are also spice islands belonging to the Dutch, and are
+about forty miles to the north of the equator. We were so troubled at
+Amboina by musquitoes, a sort of gnats, that we had every night to put
+ourselves into a bag before we could go to sleep, as otherwise these
+insects bit us so intolerably that we could get no rest. Wherever they
+bit, there commonly rose a red blister, almost as broad as a silver
+penny, which itched so violently that many cannot forbear from
+scratching, so as to cause inflammations that sometimes aid in the loss
+of a limb. During our stay, we were allowed to walk in a paved yard
+about sixty yards square; but were not permitted to go into the town,
+that we might not learn their strength, or make any discoveries
+prejudicial to them.
+
+We remained at Amboina from the 31st of May to the 14th of September,
+1705, when three of their sloops were ready to sail with cloves to
+Batavia, in which twenty-five of our men were sent away to Batavia, ten
+of us being left behind, who they said were to be sent in another
+vessel, almost ready to sail. On the 27th September, a Malay man was
+brought to the Stadt-house to be tried for his life, being accused by
+his own wife of having murdered his slave. The slave had been dead six
+months, when the wife falling out with her husband, she went to the
+fiscal in the heat of her rage and revealed the murder, on which the
+husband was thrown into prison, but it was generally believed that he
+was wrongfully accused by his wife. During his trial the earthquake took
+place, formerly mentioned, which made the court break up, fearful the
+house might fall on their heads. At this time I observed that it is an
+error to suppose that it is always calm during an earthquake; for we had
+a fine fresh gale at S.S.W. both days on which the earthquake happened.
+Next day the court sat about eleven o'clock, continuing the trial; and
+while the wife was in her greatest violence in the accusation of her
+husband, the earth shook again with much violence, which obliged the
+court again to break up.
+
+That same day, the 28th September, I and four more of our men were sent
+off for Batavia in a Chinese sloop, the other five men being promised to
+be sent after us in a short time, but we never heard of them afterwards.
+We sailed westwards till we came to the island of Lancas, in lat. 5 deg. 27'
+S. and by my estimation, 2 deg. 21', or 155 miles W. from Amboina. We then
+steered W. by N. till we made two islands called the _Cabeses_, whence
+we procured some hundred cocoa nuts. The eastermost island, to which we
+sent our boat, is low and uninhabited, but has been planted full of
+cocoa-nut trees by the Dutch, for the use of their vessels going between
+the spice islands and Batavia, as it is a kind of miracle to see any
+other ship in these parts except those belonging to the Dutch. Off this
+island we met our own bark which had brought us from America to Amboina,
+the Dutch having fitted her up with a main-mast and converted her into a
+very good vessel. This island is in lat. 5 deg. 23' S. and nearly W. by N.
+from the island of Lancas, about forty-five miles distant, and has a
+shoal extending about two miles from the shore. To the S.W. of this is
+the other island of _Cabeses_, a pretty high island, on which the Dutch
+always keep a corporal and two soldiers, who go two or three times all
+over the isle to see that no cloves are planted, and if they find any to
+cut them down and burn them, lest any other nation might be able to
+procure that commodity, in which case Amboina would become of little
+value, as cloves are its only valuable product.
+
+We next passed by the S. end of the island of _Bouton_, or _Booton_,
+which is pretty large, and in the lat. of 5 deg. 45' S. We steered W. from
+thence, between the islands _Celebes_ and _Zalayer_ or _Salayr_. The
+S.W. leg or peninsula of Celebes is very high land. Celebes is composed
+of very high land, very well inhabited, being a very large island,
+extending through seven degrees of latitude. On the west side of its
+southern end the Dutch have a factory named Macasser, where they have a
+fortress of about seventy guns, and a garrison of 600 or 700 Dutch
+soldiers. The chief product is rice, with which they supply most of
+their eastern islands from hence. There are said to be gold-mines in
+this island, of which the Dutch are not yet masters, as the inhabitants
+are often at war with them, and have hitherto been able to keep them
+from those parts of the island. Between the south end of Celebes and the
+island of Salayr there are three small low islands, and the best channel
+is through between the island next to Salayr, and another small isle to
+the northward. This is called the _second_ passage, the first, third,
+and fourth of these passages being very dangerous, so that ships
+generally avoid them if possible. I would willingly give an account of
+every island I have occasion to mention, but as that is not in my power,
+I must rest satisfied with what I am able to say consistent with truth.
+
+The island of _Zalayer_, or _Salayr_, is of moderate height, inhabited
+by Malays, and planted all round with cocoa-trees, the natives being
+obliged to send a considerable quantity of nuts and oil to the Dutch at
+Macasser as tribute. We steered from hence W. by N. till we had passed a
+dangerous shoal called the Porill, after which we stood to the S.W. and
+saw in the night a small island just in our way, which we were unable to
+weather, and therefore stood off till daylight, when we were to the S.
+of that isle, when we tacked and stood again S.W. and soon after saw two
+other small isles bearing from N. to N.W. For about two miles of our
+course at this time, the sea was so transparent that we could plainly
+discern the bottom, which was never less than five or more than six
+fathoms, yet appeared only two to the eye. We passed over this shoal
+about a league to the S. of these two small islands, this being the
+narrowest part of the shoal, for it is five or six leagues in breadth
+farther to the south; yet is it every where without danger, as it has
+very uniform soundings, seldom over or under five or six fathoms. To the
+north of these islands, however, it is very dangerous, being all over
+foul rocky ground, and having in some places not more than four or five
+feet water; it is proper, therefore, always to keep to the south of
+these islands, where the passage is perfectly safe. Yet in the Dutch
+charts, these dangers are laid down to the southward, which should have
+been to the northwards, and they lay down the safe shoals to the
+northward, whereas we now went to the southwards, as they always do.
+The captain of our vessel had a chart on board, which shewed these
+things exactly as I have now described, but which I compared with
+several others, also on board, which I found quite different. I asked
+our captain the reason of this, when he told me that all these shoals
+and dangerous places were well known to the Hollanders, but they did not
+wish they should be known by others, but rather that strangers might
+lose their ships among these rocks and shoals, as we certainly had done,
+if we had sailed according to these common charts.
+
+We entered the harbour of Batavia on the 21st October, and sent
+immediately on landing to join the rest of our men, who were still
+detained in custody. We were soon afterwards visited by the first major,
+who desired us to transmit to the general, through him, an account of
+the losses we had sustained by our being taken prisoners at Amboina, and
+we should receive compensation for our effects, loss of time, and
+imprisonment. We each accordingly drew up accounts of our losses, which
+we sent by the major to the governor, who sent us back word that we
+should speedily have our freedom. On the 27th we were sent for to the
+fort, where most of our money was returned; but we could have no
+satisfaction for our goods, imprisonment, and loss of time, the
+governor-general saying that he had given us all that had been sent to
+him as ours by the governor of Amboina, and that we were now at liberty
+to go where we pleased. As our vessel had been taken from us for the use
+of the Dutch Company, we desired he would be pleased to find us some
+ship for our return home, which he promised; with which arrangement we
+were forced to be satisfied, and took lodgings in the city of Batavia,
+till an opportunity might offer for our return to Europe. In the course
+of seven weeks residence here, I made all the observations I could upon
+this place and its inhabitants. I found the city in as good a condition
+as could be wished, and the people seemed to be as prudent and as
+industrious as any I had ever seen: But, as the descriptions already
+published of this place are so exact as to render my observations
+superfluous, I shall content myself with a very short description,
+referring the curious reader to the large accounts that have been
+published by Dutch, French, and English writers, but especially the
+first.
+
+BATAVIA is the chief place belonging to the Hollanders in India, and
+receives all the productions of India, Japan, and China. The Malays are
+the original natives; but besides these and the Dutch, who are the
+masters, it is inhabited by Portuguese, Chinese, Persians, and negroes.
+The town is large and handsome, having seven churches, belonging to the
+Dutch, Portuguese, Malays, and Chinese.[213] The town has many spacious
+houses built in the European manner, and is walled and moated all round,
+the ramparts being well provided with cannon. In the middle of the city
+there is a spacious square, in which is the stadt-house, where all
+public matters are transacted. This city is usually governed by a member
+of the States-General of the United Netherlands, with the title of
+Governor-General of India, all other governors of the possessions
+belonging to the Dutch Company being subordinate to his authority. The
+inhabitants are well pleased in the governor-general being often
+changed, as all prisoners are released at the installation of a new one,
+except those charged with murder. He has twelve counsellors to assist
+him, who are called the _rads_, or lords of India, and are mostly such
+as have formerly been governors in other places, as in Ceylon, Amboina,
+Malacca, &c.
+
+[Footnote 213: This seems to indicate that, of the seven _churches_,
+some belong to the Dutch Calvinists and Portuguese Roman Catholics,
+while others are Mahometan places of worship for the Malays, and idol
+temples, or _pagodas_, frequented by the Chinese.--E]
+
+The city is divided by many canals, over which there are bridges almost
+at the end of every street, together with booms to lay across, that no
+boats may go in or out after sunset. The chief product of the adjoining
+country is pepper, of which the Dutch export great quantities every
+year; and there are also some few diamonds and other precious stones.
+The chief fruits here are plantains, bananas, oranges, lemons,
+mangostans, and rumbostans. The _mangostan_ is about the size of a
+golden rennet, quite round, and resembling a small pomegranate, the
+outer rind being like that of the pomegranate, but of a darker colour,
+but the inside of the rind of a fine red. The fruit lies within the
+rind, commonly in four or five cloves, of a fine white, very soft and
+juicy, within each clove having a small black stone or pip. The pulp is
+very delicious, but the stone is very bitter, and is therefore thrown
+away, after sucking the fruit The _rumbostan_ is about the size of a
+walnut after the green outside peel is off, and is nearly of the shape
+of a walnut, having a thick tough outer rind of a deep red colour, full
+of red knobs, within which is a white jelly-like pulp, and within that
+is a large stone. The pulp is very delicate, and never does any harm,
+however much of it a man may eat, providing he swallow the stones; but
+otherwise they are said to produce fevers.
+
+This island of Java, on the north side of which Batavia is situated,
+extends about ten degrees from east to west, or nearly 700 English
+miles. The weather is here extremely regular, and the inhabitants know
+how to use it to the best advantage. During the eastern monsoon, the
+land-winds are at S.E. Sometimes more southerly; and the sea-winds blow
+from the N.E. fine pleasant gales. This easterly monsoon is accounted
+the good monsoon, being fine clear and fair weather, and begins in
+April, ending in October. The other, or westerly, is called the bad
+monsoon, consisting of blustering rainy weather, accompanied with much
+thunder and lightning, especially in December, January, and February.
+This bad monsoon begins in November and ends in March or the beginning
+of April; during which the land-winds are W.S.W. or S.W. and the
+sea-winds at N.W. and W.N.W.
+
+The anchoring ground all along the north side of Java, from Madura to
+Batavia, is a fine oozy bottom, free from rocks. The principal places on
+this side of the island are Batavia, Bantam, Japara, Samarang, Surabon,
+Taggal, Quale, and Rambang; all of which are possessed by the Dutch.
+These settlements afford abundance of rice, with which the Dutch supply
+all their out-factories near Java, and also produce excellent plank for
+ship-building. The principal place for ship-building is _Rambang_, where
+the free burgesses of Batavia usually go to build their small vessels,
+as sloops and brigs. Ships of five, six, and seven hundred tons, often
+load with timber at Rambang, Quale, Japara, and other places; and each
+ship, after being fully laden, takes a great raft or float of the
+largest timber, which she tows along with her to Batavia. Some of these
+rafts are said to be thirty feet square, and draw twenty feet water.
+There are commonly six ships employed in this timber trade, and they
+usually make four voyages yearly in the good monsoon, for in the bad
+they cannot do any thing. Ail this timber is for the most part landed on
+the island of _Ormrust_, between four and five leagues from Batavia,
+where there are about 200 ship-carpenters, who are constantly in full
+employ, and here the Dutch careen their ships. This island is well
+fortified, being, to use a sea phrase, all round a bed of guns.
+
+We had notice on the 2d December, 1705, that all of us who wished to
+return to England should immediately go on board the homeward-bound
+Dutch East India fleet, which we did accordingly, and sailed next day.
+This fleet consisted of twelve ships, as well provided in all respects
+as any I had ever seen, and we made the voyage in good order. We arrived
+at the Cape of Good Hope on the 3d February, 1706. The Dutch have here a
+strong fortress, and about half a mile from this is a fine town of 150
+houses, with a small church. The country in the neighbourhood is very
+high, and the mountains are mostly barren, producing only a few shrubs;
+but the country is full of lions, tigers, elephants, and other wild
+beasts, which give great disturbance to the settlers, for which reason
+the government gives a reward of fifty-two guilders for killing a lion,
+equal to four pounds six and eight-pence, and twenty-four guilders, or
+forty shillings, for killing a tiger. While we were there, a certain
+Scotsman killed four lions, three tigers, and three wild elephants, for
+all of which he got the rewards. The Dutch make here a great quantity of
+an excellent wine, called Cape wine, which is sold by retail at
+eight-pence a quart.
+
+We sailed from the Cape the 24th of March, excellently provided with
+every thing requisite for the voyage. We were now twenty-four sail,
+having nine English and fifteen Dutch ships. On the 17th April we made
+the island of Ascension, but did not touch there even for turtle,
+although their season of laying, having been so well provided with fresh
+provisions at the Cape that we had no occasion for more. On the 19th
+there happened a great earthquake, when the ship seemed for some time as
+if she run along the ground, on which we heaved the lead on both sides,
+but had no ground at 200 fathoms. The whole fleet felt the shock at the
+same time; so that for about ten minutes every ship was making signals
+and firing guns. On the 14th June we saw four sail of French privateers,
+which were waiting for us; but after looking at us for some time, and
+observing the regular order in which we sailed, they did not think it
+adviseable to make any attempt against us, and bore away. This shewed
+the great advantage of the regular order observed by the Dutch in
+sailing, in which on this occasion they were imitated by the English
+ships in company.
+
+On the 30th June we were in lat. 62 deg. 40' N. the highest north I was ever
+in, and I could not help noticing the great difference in point of cold
+here and in 60 deg. S. There we had continual showers of snow or hail, with
+bitter cold weather; while here the weather was fair, and the cold
+moderate. In the evening of the 3d July we saw the Faro Islands. On the
+5th we met with eight Dutch men of war, which were cruizing on purpose
+to convoy us safe home, accompanied by four victuallers and three of the
+Company's privateers. On the 15th July we all arrived safely in the
+Texel, and got on the 17th to Amsterdam. After this, I and the rest of
+our company went to see several parts of Holland, and we arrived on the
+26th August, 1706, in England, after many dangers by sea and land, being
+only 18 of us out of 183. The news of our misfortunes reached home
+before us, and every body was solicitous to have an account of our
+adventures, especially while under the power of the Dutch at Amboina.
+These importunities led me to believe that a faithful relation of our
+voyage would be acceptable to the public, and I hope some of the
+descriptions, observations, and discoveries contained in this small
+performance may be found useful, and not altogether destitute of
+entertainment.
+
+
+
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_Brief Account of Stradling, Clipperton, and Dampier, after their
+respective Separations, till their Returns to England._
+
+The reader may remember that Captain Dampier, in the St George, left
+_Captain Stradling_ in the Cinque-ports on the 19th of May, 1704, at
+King's Island, in the Bay of Panama. The force under Captain Stradling
+was too insignificant to maintain him long in the South Sea, for which
+reason he went to the island of Juan Fernandez in search of shelter and
+refreshments. They were in so forlorn a condition at this time, that
+Alexander Selkirk[214] chose rather to remain by himself in that island,
+than to run the hazard of returning to the South Sea in the
+Cinque-ports. In this he shewed great judgment, as the Cinque-ports
+actually foundered on the coast of _Barbacora_ (Barbacoas), and only
+Captain Stradling, with six or seven of his men, were saved, and sent
+prisoners to Lima. Captain Stradling was alive there at the time when
+Woods Rogers came into the South Sea, but what became of him afterwards
+is unknown.
+
+[Footnote 214: This person, on whose simple adventures the romance of
+Robinson Crusoe was soon afterwards founded, will be more particularly
+mentioned in a subsequent chapter of this book.--E.]
+
+The next person who left Captain Dampier was his mate, _Mr Clipperton_
+of whom we shall have occasion to say much in a succeeding voyage round
+the world. Clipperton was certainly a man of parts and resolution, and
+probably would not have deserted from Captain Dampier, if he had not
+thought that his commander was resolved to remain in his old crazy ship
+in the South Sea till she foundered. Finding many of the crew of the
+same opinion, he thought proper to leave him at the middle islands, as
+already related, where it was plain to every one that the St George was
+no longer fit for going to sea. Mr Clipperton set sail on the 2d
+September, 1704, having twenty-one men, in a small bark of ten tons,
+with two masts and two square sails, two swivels, two or three barrels
+of powder, and some shot. With this inconsiderable force, he ventured
+into Rio Leon, on the coast of Mexico, where he took two Spanish ships
+riding at anchor. One of these was very old and worm-eaten, which he
+immediately sunk. The other was new, and had goods on board to a
+considerable value, and for her Captain Clipperton demanded a ransom of
+10,000 dollars, by two of his prisoners whom he set on shore. The
+prisoners spoke so handsomely of Clipperton that the governor resolved
+to treat with him, and sent him word that he did not think his offer
+unreasonable, but the owners were entirely ruined, and the town so poor
+that it was impossible to comply with his terms; but if 4000 dollars
+would content him, which was all they could raise, that sum should be
+sent aboard, and the governor would rely on the honour of Captain
+Clipperton for the release of the ship. Clipperton accepted this
+proposal, but as his bark was in want of provisions and water, he sent
+word to the governor, that every kind of provisions and drink were not
+to be considered as within the capitulation. This was readily agreed to,
+the money was sent on board, and as soon as the provisions were got out
+of her, the ship was honourably restored.
+
+Clipperton went thence to the Bay of Salinas, where his little vessel
+was drawn on shore, and cleaned and effectually refitted, after which he
+resolved in this cockle-shell to sail for the East Indies, which he
+actually did, keeping in the latitude of 18 deg. N. and reached the
+Philippine Islands in fifty-four days. While among these islands, a
+Spanish priest came off to his bark in a canoe, and Clipperton detained
+him till furnished with a supply of fresh provisions, and then set him
+at liberty. His next scheme was to sail for the English settlement of
+Pulo Condore, in lat 8 deg. 40' N. off the river of Cambadia, and actually
+came there: But finding that the English had been massacred by their
+Indian soldiers on the 3d March, 1705, for which reason no relief or
+safety could be expected there, he bore away for Macao, a port belonging
+to the Portuguese on the coast of China, where he and his people
+separated, every one shifting for himself as well as they could. Some
+went to Benjar,[215] in order to enter into the service of the English
+East India Company, while others went to Goa to serve the Portuguese,
+and some even entered into the service of the Great Mogul, being so bare
+after so long a voyage, that any means of providing for themselves were
+desirable. Clipperton returned to England in 1706, and afterwards made
+another voyage round the world in the Success, of which an account will
+be found in its proper place.
+
+[Footnote 215: This is perhaps an error for Bombay; yet it may have been
+Benjarmassin, on the southern coast of Borneo.--E.]
+
+It is not easy to conceive a worse situation than that in which Captain
+Dampier was left at the close of the year 1704, when Mr Funnell and his
+people separated from him, being only able to retain twenty-eight of his
+men, and even these were prevailed upon to stay, by representing that it
+was easy to surprise some Spanish village, and that the fewer they were,
+each would have the greater share in the plunder. After some
+consultation, they resolved to attack Puna, a hamlet or village of
+thirty houses and a small church, the inhabitants of which are well to
+pass, and are under the command of a lieutenant. Dampier landed here in
+a dark night, and, surprizing the inhabitants in their beds, got
+possession of the place with very little trouble.
+
+After plundering this town, they repaired to the island of _Lobos de la
+Mar_, and took a small Spanish bark by the way, well furnished with
+provisions. They now resolved to quit their own ship, and to endeavour
+to sail for the East Indies in this small bark; and accordingly left the
+St George at anchor under the island of Lobos, after taking every thing
+valuable out of her. They then sailed across the Pacific Ocean to the
+East Indies, and arrived at the Dutch settlements, where their bark was
+seized, and they were turned adrift to shift for themselves as they best
+might. Dampier returned naked to his owners, with a melancholy relation
+of his unfortunate expedition, occasioned chiefly by his own strange
+temper, being so self-sufficient and overbearing that few or none of his
+officers could bear with him; and when once disputation gets in among
+those who have the command, success is not to be expected. Even in this
+distress, he was received as an eminent man, notwithstanding his
+faillings, and was introduced to Queen Anne, having the honour to kiss
+her hand, and to give her majesty some account of the dangers he had
+undergone. The merchants were so sensible of his want of conduct, that
+they resolved never to trust him any more with a command; and this, with
+the poverty resulting from his late unlucky voyage, obliged him to make
+the tour of the world once more as pilot to the Duke, commanded by
+Captain Woods Rogers, the relation of which voyage forms the subject of
+next Section.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X.
+
+VOYAGE ROUND THE WORLD BY CAPTAIN WOODS ROGERS, AND STEPHEN COURTNEY, IN
+1708-1711.[216]
+
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+It has been universally allowed by all competent judges, that there
+never was a voyage of this nature so excellently adjusted or so well
+provided in all respects, as the present, or in which the accidents that
+usually happen in privateers were so effectually guarded against; owing
+to the abilities of the gentlemen at Bristol, who both charged
+themselves with the expence of fitting out this expedition, and took
+care of every thing relating to its being properly fitted out. Their
+first care was in the choice of proper officers, in which they were very
+fortunate. Captain Woods Rogers, who had the chief command, being a
+bold, active, and indefatigable officer, not too ready to give up his
+opinion to others, and not apt to be flattered by other people giving up
+theirs to him. He had been a great sufferer by the French; but his most
+singular qualities, and which chiefly recommended him to the command of
+this expedition, were a peculiar felicity in maintaining authority over
+his seamen, and a wonderful readiness in devising expedients under the
+most difficult circumstances.
+
+[Footnote 216: A Cruizing Voyage round the World, &c. by Captain Woods
+Rogers, 8vo. London, 1712. Voyage to the South Sea, and round the World,
+&c. by Captain Edward Cooke, 2 vol. 8vo. London, 1712. Harris, I. 150.
+Callender, III. 231.]
+
+Captain Stephen Courtney, the second in command, was a gentleman of
+birth, fortune, and amiable character, who had contributed considerably
+to the expence of the voyage, and went in the expedition that he might
+see how it was conducted, and either be able to prevent miscarriages, or
+at least to make a faithful report of its incidents. Captain Thomas
+Dover, the third in command, was a proprietor also. He was bred a
+physician, and afterwards made a noise in the world by recommending the
+use of crude mercury. He was a man of rough temper, and could not easily
+agree with those about him, yet his morose disposition hindered him from
+making any party to support him in his ill humours. Captain Cooke,
+fourth in command, was second to Captain Courtney. The pilot in the
+larger ship was Captain William Dampier, who was now to proceed for the
+fourth time into the South Sea, where his name and exploits were well
+known and terrible to the Spaniards. The adventurers were also extremely
+careful in the choice of inferior officers, and even as far as possible
+in procuring the best private men that could be found.
+
+In the next place, the proprietors established rules for the proper
+conduct of the voyage, which were digested in the following articles of
+instruction, and signed by a committee of proprietors at Bristol, on the
+14th July, 1708.
+
+"For the better government and regulating the affairs of the present
+voyage of the ships Duke and Duchess, we do hereby appoint and
+constitute Captain Woods Rogers, Captain Thomas Dover, Captain William
+Dampier, Mr Charlton Vanbrugh, Messrs Green, Fry, Charles Pope,
+Glendall, Bullet, and Wasse, all of these officers on board the Duke,
+to be the council on board that ship: We also appoint Captain Stephen
+Courtney, Captain Edward Cooke, Messrs William Stratton, Bathe, John
+Rogers, White, and the master, officers on board the Duchess, to be
+council on board that ship, in case of the ships being separated from
+each other. But, when in company, the whole officers of both ships above
+named, are conjunctly to come on board either ship at the summons of
+Captains Rogers, Dover, and Courtney, or any two of them, and to be the
+council referred to in our general orders, to determine all matters and
+things that may arise or be necessary for the general good daring the
+whole voyage. In case of the death, sickness, or desertion of any of the
+above officers in either ship, the rest who are of the council of that
+ship shall convene on board their own ship, and chose another fit person
+into that office and council."
+
+"We farther require and direct, that all attempts, attacks, and designs
+upon the enemy, either by sea or land, shall be first consulted and
+debated, either in the particular council if separated, or in the
+general council if together; and as the majority shall conclude how and
+when to act or do, it shall be indispensably and cheerfully put in
+execution, and without unnecessary delay. In case of any discontents,
+differences, or misbehaviours among the officers and men, which may tend
+to the disturbance of good order and government on board, either the men
+or persons may appeal to the captain to have a hearing by a council, or
+the captain shall call a council to have the matter heard and decided,
+and may prefer or displace any man according to desert. All decisions
+and judgments of the council shall be finally determined by the majority
+of voices; and in case of an equality, Captain Dover is to have a double
+voice as president, and we do accordingly order and appoint him
+president of the council. All matters transacted in this council shall
+be registered in a book by the clerk appointed for that purpose."
+
+It was agreed between the owners and those employed in this voyage, that
+all prizes were to be divided after the following rule. Two-third parts
+of the clear profits were to belong to the owners, and one-third to the
+officers, seamen, and landsmen, which last was to be distributed
+according to the following proportions.
+
+     _If wholly on Shares_.          _If part on Shares, and
+                                           part on Wages_.[217]
+   A captain, _Shares_  24
+   Second captain,           20  _Wages_.        _Shares_
+   First lieutenant,         16     L3                     8
+   Second lieutenant,        10      2 10                  5
+   Third lieutenant,          8      2                     4
+   Master,                   10      2 10                  5
+   First mate,                6      2                     3
+   Second mate,               4      1 15                  2-1/2
+   Surgeon,                  10      2 10                  5
+   Surgeon's mate,            6      1 10                  3
+   Owner's agent,            10      2 10                  5
+   Pilot,                     8      2 10                  4
+   Carpenter,                 6      2                     3
+   Carpenter's mate,          4      1 10                  2
+   Boatswain,                 6      2                     3
+   Boatswain's mate,          4      1 10                  2
+   Gunner,                    6      2                     3
+   Gunner's mate,             3-1/2  1 10                  1-3/4
+   Cooper,                    5      1 10                  2-1/2
+   Cooper's mate,             3-1/2  1  5                  1-3/4
+   Midshipman,                4      1 10                  2
+                             _Shares_. _Wages_. _Shares_.
+
+   Quarter-master,            3      1 10                 1-1/2
+   Sailors,                   2-1/2  1 8                  1-3/4
+   Land-men,                  1-1/2    14                 0-3/4
+
+
+[Footnote 217: The wages were probably monthly, though not so
+explained.--E.]
+
+"We have two relations of this voyage, one by Captain Rogers, and the
+other by Captain Cooke, both in the form of journals. On the present
+occasion I shall chiefly follow that written by Captain Woods Rogers,
+taking occasionally explanatory circumstances and descriptions from
+Captain Cooke: But as they agree pretty well in their relations, I do
+not think it necessary to break the thread of the discourse, but shall
+proceed as near as may be in the words of Captain Rogers."--_Harris_.
+
+Besides using as the ground-work of the present chapter, the narrative
+drawn up by Harris from the publications of Captain Woods Rogers and
+Edward Cooke, we have carefully employed both of these original works on
+the present occasion; yet have not deemed it at all necessary or
+adviseable to retain the minute and tedious nautical remarks, and have
+chiefly attended to such interesting circumstances as had not been
+sufficiently illustrated in the preceding chapters of this book.--E.
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Narrative of the Voyage, from England to the Island of Juan Fernandez_.
+
+Our force on this voyage consisted of the Duke of 300 tons, carrying
+thirty guns and 170 men, Captain Woods Rogers commander, with Captain
+Thomas Dover as second captain, and three lieutenants; and the Duchess
+of 270 tons, with twenty-six guns and 150 men, commanded by Captain
+Stephen Courtney, having Captain Edward Cooke as second captain, and
+three lieutenants. Both ships had commission from George Prince of
+Denmark, husband to Queen Anne, and Lord High Admiral of England, to
+cruize on the coasts of Peru and Mexico in the South Sea, against the
+French and Spaniards, and to act jointly and separately.
+
+On the 15th June, 1708, we went down to King-road, to fit our ships for
+sea and the better to keep our men on board, where we continued till the
+1st August, when we weighed anchor and towed down about five miles below
+the Holmes. We made sail at one next morning, and got into Cork harbour
+on the 5th August, where we remained till the 27th adjusting all things,
+taking on board additional men provided there for us, and discharging
+some we had brought from Bristol, who were found unfit for the voyage.
+Our complement of men in both ships was now 333, of which above a third
+were foreigners from most nations, several of her majesty's subjects we
+had on board being tinkers, tailors, haymakers, pedlars, fiddlers, and
+the like, with one negro and ten boys; yet we hoped to be well manned
+with this motley crew, when they had got their sea-legs and had learnt
+the use of arms. We had double the number of officers usual in
+privateers, which was meant to prevent mutinies, so usual in long
+voyages, and to secure a succession in case of deaths. Our holds were
+so full of provisions, that our cables, and a great deal of our bread
+and some water casks were between decks, and having 183 men in the Duke,
+and 151 in the Duchess, we were obliged to send our sheet, cable, and
+other new store cordage on shore at Cork, to make room for our men and
+provisions, yet were so much crowded and lumbered that we could not have
+engaged an enemy, without throwing much provisions and stores overboard.
+
+Having agreed upon signals between our two ships, and appointed places
+of rendezvous in case of separation, and how long to wait at each for
+one another, we took sailing orders from the Hastings man of war on the
+1st September, the better to keep company of her and a fleet bound to
+the southward and westward. We sailed that day, and the next we and our
+consort stood out from the fleet to chase a sail we saw to windward,
+when we had the satisfaction to find that our ship sailed as well as any
+in the fleet, not excepting the man of war, so that we hoped we should
+find our heels, although so deeply laden. We found the chase to be a
+small vessel coming from Baltimore to join the fleet. On the 4th,
+Captain Paul of the Hastings proposed to Captain Courtney and me, after
+he left the fleet, which would be soon, to cruise in company a few days
+off Cape Finister, and obligingly supplied us with some scrubbers, iron
+scrapers for the ships bottoms, a speaking-trumpet, and some other
+things of which we were in want, and would not accept any thing in
+return, as our voyage was to be so long, saying he hoped our owners
+would restore the same articles for his ship on his return. That
+evening, calling our crews on deck, we informed them whither we were
+bound, and the objects of our expedition; that if any disputes or
+mutinies had arisen, we might have sent home the refractory in the man
+of war. Only one poor fellow was dissatisfied, who was to have been
+tithing-man that year, and feared his wife might have to pay forty
+shillings for his default; but seeing all around him pleased with the
+hope of plunder, he too became easy, and drank as heartily as any one to
+the success of the voyage.
+
+We gave chase to a ship on the 10th September, about six in the morning,
+which we came up with about three in the afternoon, when she shewed
+Swedish colours. On examining the master, we found he had come round
+Scotland and Ireland, and suspected he had contraband of war, as some of
+the men, whom we found drunk, told us they had gunpowder and cables on
+board; wherefore we resolved to examine her strictly, putting twelve of
+our men on board, and taking the Swedish master and twelve of his men
+aboard our ships. Next morning, having examined the men and searched the
+ship, we found it difficult to prove her a legal prize, and, not willing
+to lose time in carrying her into a port for farther examination, we let
+her go without embezzlement. She was a frigate-built ship, of about 270
+tons, and twenty-two guns, belonging to Stadt, near Hamburgh. The crew
+of the Duke mutinied, headed by our boatswain and other three inferior
+officers, alleging the Swede was a good prize, and had much contraband
+goods on board, though we could find none: but being supported by my
+officers, well armed, I at length pacified the men, after putting ten of
+the mutineers in irons, and soundly whipping a sailor who had excited
+the rest. This mutiny would not have been easily got the better of, but
+for the number of our officers, whom we now found very useful in
+bringing our crews under good discipline, a very difficult matter in
+privateers, and without which it is utterly impossible to succeed in
+distant and important enterprises. We sent home Giles Cash, our
+boatswain, in irons, on board the Crown galley, with letters to our
+owners, justifying our severity; and next morning I discharged our
+prisoners from their irons, on their humble submission, and solemn
+promise of dutiful behaviour in future.
+
+On the 18th, between Fuertaventura and Grand Canary, we chased and took
+a small Spanish ship, bound from Teneriff to Fuertaventura, having
+several men and women passengers, and laden with a variety of goods.
+Next day we bore away for Oratavia Roads, where, after much discussion,
+we sold the vessel for 450 dollars, retaining all her goods. The 30th
+September we put into the harbour of St Vincent, one of the Cape de Verd
+islands, coming to anchor in ten fathoms within the rock. Seeing several
+men on shore, though the island is not inhabited, Captain Cook went in
+the pinnace, well armed, to see who they were, and found them some
+Portuguese from St Antonio, come to catch turtles or sea-tortoises, who
+told him we could have wood and water at this island, which is in lat.
+16 deg. 55' N. long. 24 deg. 50' W. from Greenwich. It has great plenty of
+Guinea fowl, with some hogs and goats; and we caught abundance of fish
+in the road. In the woods there are great numbers of spiders as large as
+walnuts, and their webs are very troublesome to get through, being very
+numerous, and as strong as ordinary threads.
+
+While here, new disturbances arose among the men, in relation to the
+effects taken in the late prize; as we had here an opportunity of
+purchasing various things, and every one wished to have the means of
+purchasing. To put an end to all these heart-burnings, and to fix the
+people in a resolution of doing their duty, we determined to settle this
+affair by framing such articles as might inspire the seamen with courage
+and constancy, and make them as willing to obey as the officers to
+command, without giving our owners any cause of complaint. It cost us
+some trouble to adjust these articles, but they effectually answered our
+purpose, and all our people readily agreed to abide by them.
+
+After staying two days here, in which we heeled our ships, and got wood
+and water on board, our boat returned with limes and tobacco; but our
+linguist, who had been sent ashore to procure refreshments, did not make
+his appearance. Soon after there came a boat from that part of the
+island where the governor resides, on board of which was the
+deputy-governor, a negro, who brought limes, tobacco, oranges, fowls,
+potatoes, hogs, bananas, musk-melons, watermelons, and brandy, all of
+which we bought of him, paying in prize goods we had taken out of the
+bark at the Canaries, and at a cheap rate; for they are a poor people,
+and are ready to truck for any thing they want at any price, in such
+payments as they can make. Being ready to sail, we called a council to
+consider what was to be done in respect to the absence of our linguist,
+who had promised the deputy-governor to wait for him at the water-side,
+but had broke his word; and therefore, as his absence seemed to be
+entirely his own fault, it was unanimously resolved that we ought to
+leave him behind, rather than our two ships should wait for one man,
+who had disobeyed orders. We were the more inclined to this, that others
+might learn, by this example, to comply with their instructions when
+sent ashore, and might come aboard again without delay, after completing
+their business, and not flatter themselves that fair words and fine
+excuses were to atone for breach of duty, to humour the fancies of
+individuals, at the expence of delaying the voyage. This was certainly
+but an indifferent place for our linguist to be left in; but he knew the
+people and the language, and might easily get a passage home. We
+persisted therefore in our resolution, and gave orders for sailing as
+soon as possible, that we might not lose the proper season, and be
+obliged to double Cape Horn at a wrong time of the year.
+
+Captain Dampier and others in our ships, who had formerly put in at St
+Jago, another of the Cape Verd islands, said that this island of St
+Vincent, though not so much frequented, is preferable to St Jago for
+outward-bound ships, as its road is much better, has better land, and is
+more convenient for wood and water. The island is mountainous and
+barren, its plainest part being over against the sandy bay where we
+anchored. The wood growing upon it is short, and only fit for fuel. We
+watered at a little stream that flows from a spring down the hill, and
+is good fresh-water, the others in that neighbourhood being brackish. It
+was formerly inhabited and had a governor, but is now only frequented by
+the inhabitants of the other islands in the season for catching turtle,
+these islanders being mostly negroes and mulattoes, and very poor. The
+stock of wild goats on this island has been mostly destroyed by the
+inhabitants of St Nicholas and St Antonio. The heat at this place was so
+excessive to us, newly from Europe, that several of our men became sick,
+and were blooded. There are a few wild asses; and some of our officers
+wounded one, after a long chase, yet he held out, and tired them.
+
+These islands are named from Cape Verd, on the coast of Africa, whence
+they lie about 170 leagues to the west.[218] They are ten in number, of
+which St Jago, St Nicholas, Bonavista, St Antonio, Brava, Mayo, and
+Fuego are inhabited. _St Jago_ is much the largest and best, and is the
+seat of the chief governor. Besides sugar and tobacco, this island
+produces a small quantity of indigo, which, with goat-skins and some
+other articles, are sent to Lisbon. The capital is named likewise St
+Jago, and is the see of a bishop. There is another town, named _Ribera
+grande_, said to consist of 500 houses, which has a good harbour. The
+air of this island is rather unwholesome, and the soil is very unequal,
+the vallies producing some corn and wine. The goats are fat and good
+eating, the females usually producing three or four kids at a birth,
+once in four months. _St Nicholas_ is the best peopled next after St
+Jago. _Mayo_ has a great deal of salt, formed by the heat of the sun in
+pits, or ponds, into which the sea-water is let from time to time, and
+might furnish many thousand tons yearly, if there were vent for it. The
+fine _Marroquin_ leather is made from the goat-skins brought from these
+islands.
+
+[Footnote 218: The difference of longitude between the cape and islands
+is seven degrees W. or 140 marine leagues.--E.]
+
+We sailed from St Vincent on the 8th October; and in our passage to the
+coast of Brazil some new disputes arose among the men. After various
+consultations, it was determined that one Page, second mate of the
+Duchess, should be removed into the Duke, whence Mr Ballet was to remove
+into the Duchess. Captain Cooke was sent to execute this order, which
+Page refused to obey, but was brought away by force. Being accused of
+mutiny, he requested leave to go to the head before entering on his
+defence, which was permitted, when he jumped overboard, meaning to swim
+to the Duchess, while both captains were absent; but he was brought back
+and punished, which ended this dissension. The 18th November we anchored
+before Isla Grande, on the coast of Brazil, in eleven fathoms. While
+here new quarrels arose, and matters had like to have come to a great
+height in the Duchess, when Captain Courtney put eight of the
+ringleaders in irons, which frightened the rest, and probably prevented
+an attempt to run away with the ship. On the 23d two men deserted from
+the Duchess, but were so frightened in the night by tigers, as they
+supposed, though only monkeys and baboons, that they took refuge in the
+sea, and hallooed with all their might till they were fetched on board:
+yet, on the 25th, two Irish landmen stole away into the woods; but both
+were taken next day, and put in irons.
+
+This island is remarkably high land, having a small cliff and a tip
+standing up on one side, in the middle of the highest land, easily seen
+in clear weather; and there is a small island without _Isla Grande_ to
+the southward, rising in three little hummocks, the nearest hummock to
+the great island being the smallest. There is also a singularly round
+white rock on the larboard side, nearest Isla Grande, at the entrance
+between it and the main going in. On the starboard-side of this entrance
+there are several islands, and even the main land has much the
+appearance of islands till well in. The best way is, when you have
+opened the coves on the starboard-side going in, which are inhabited, to
+get a pilot to carry you to the watering-cove on Isla Grande; otherwise
+send a boat to the watering-cove, which lies round the inner and western
+point of the island, and is near a league in the passage between small
+islands, but room enough and bold. It is the second cove, under the
+first high mount, round behind the first-seen point, after getting in
+between, the two islands. This is the cove at which we watered; and we
+sounded all the passage going in, having seldom less than ten fathoms.
+There are other two very good coves, but we had not time to sound them.
+The town is N.E. from this cove, about three leagues distant.
+
+_Isla Grande_ is about nine leagues long, consisting of high land, as in
+the main, and all near the water is thickly covered with wood. The
+island abounds with monkeys and other wild beasts, and has plenty of
+good timber for various uses as well as fuel, with excellent water; and
+oranges, lemons, and guavas grow wild in the woods. From the town we
+procured rum, sugar, and tobacco, and the last is sold very dear, though
+not good for smoking, being too strong. We got also fowls and hogs, but
+the latter were scarce and dear; likewise maize, or Indian corn,
+bananas, plantains, guavas, lemons, oranges, and pine-apples are in
+great plenty; but they have no bread except _cassada_, which they call
+_faranada pan_, or bread of wood. Beef and mutton were cheap, but no
+great quantity to be had. We had fine pleasant weather most of the time
+we were here, but hot like an oven, as the sun was quite vertical. The
+winds we did not much observe, as they were little and variable, but
+commonly between the N. and E.
+
+I had Neuhoff's account of Brazil on board, and from all the enquiry and
+observation I could make, I found his description of the country, with
+its animals and productions, to be just. I particularly enquired
+respecting the monster called the _liboya_, or roebuck-serpent, thinking
+it fabulous; but the Portuguese governor assured me that they are
+sometimes found thirty feet long, and as big round as a barrel, being
+able to swallow a roebuck at one morsel, whence it has its name; and he
+told me that one of these enormous serpents had been killed near the
+town, a short time before our arrival. The principal products of Brazil
+are red wood, bearing the name of the country; sugar, gold, tobacco,
+snuff, whale oil, and various kinds of drugs; and the Portuguese build
+their best ships in this country. Brazil has now become very populous,
+and the people take great delight in arms, especially about the gold
+mines, to which people of all kinds resort in great numbers, especially
+negroes and mulattoes. Only four years ago [in 1704] these people
+endeavoured to make themselves independent, but have now submitted. Some
+men of repute told me that the gold mines increase fast in
+productiveness, and that the gold is got much easier in them than in any
+other country.
+
+The indigenous Brazilian women are very fruitful, and have easy labours,
+on which occasion they retire into the woods, and bring forth alone, and
+return home after washing themselves and their child; the husbands lying
+a-bed for the first twenty-four hours, being treated as if they had
+endured the pains of child-birth. The _Tapoyers_, who inhabit the inland
+country to the west, are the most barbarous of the natives, being taller
+and stronger than any of the other tribes, and indeed than most
+Europeans. They wear, by way of ornament, little sticks thrust through
+their cheeks and underlips, and are said to be cannibals, using poisoned
+arrows and darts. They live chiefly by hunting and fishing, shifting
+their habitations according to the seasons. Their kings, or chiefs, are
+distinguished by a particular manner of shaving their crowns, and by
+wearing their nails very long. Their priests are sorcerers, making the
+people believe that the devils appear to them in the form of certain
+insects, and they perform their diabolical worship in the night, when
+the women make dismal howlings, in which consists their principal
+devotion. They allow polygamy, yet punish adultery with death. When the
+young women are marriageable, but not courted, their mothers carry them
+to the chiefs, who deflower them, and this is deemed a great honour.
+Some of these people were considerably civilized by the Dutch, while
+they possessed a part of Brazil, and did them good service under the
+conduct of their native chiefs.
+
+Leaving Isla Grande on the 30th November, we continued our voyage far to
+the south, where we endured great cold, owing to which, a third part of
+both ships companies fell sick while passing round Cape Horn, for which
+reason we bore away for the island of Juan Fernandez, which we had some
+difficulty to find, owing to its being laid down differently in all the
+charts. Even Captain Dampier was much at a loss, though he had been
+there so often, and had as it were a map of the island in his head,
+which exactly agreed with it when we came there. This ought to induce
+sea-officers to prefer their own proper business to amusement, since,
+with all this knowledge, we were forced to make the main land of Chili,
+in order to find this island, and did not strike it at the last without
+considerable difficulty.
+
+We arrived at the island of _Juan Fernandez_ on the 1st February 1709,
+and having a good observation the day before, when we found our lat. 34 deg.
+10' S.[219] In the afternoon we hoisted out our pinnace, in which
+Captain Dover set off to go on shore, though not less than four leagues
+from the ship. As it grew dark, we observed a light on shore, which some
+were of opinion was from our boat, but it was evidently too large for
+that, and we hung up a light to direct our boat, firing our quarter-deck
+gun, and showing lights in our mizen and fore shrouds, that our boat
+might find us, as we had fallen to leeward of the island. Our boat came
+aboard again about two in the morning, having turned back on seeing the
+light ashore when within a league, and we were glad they had got off so
+well, as it now began to blow. We were all convinced that the light
+which we had seen was from the shore, and therefore prepared our ships
+for an engagement, supposing it might proceed from some French ships at
+anchor, which we must either fight or want water. All this stir and
+apprehension, as we afterwards found, arose from one poor man, who
+passed in our imaginations for a Spanish garrison, a body of Frenchmen,
+or a crew of pirates, and it is incredible what strange notions some of
+our people entertained about this light; yet it served to show their
+tempers and spirits, and enabled us to guess how our men would behave,
+in case there really were enemies on the island.
+
+[Footnote 219: Juan Fernandez is in lat 33 deg. 40' S. long. 79 deg. W. Massa
+Faera, in the same latitude, is in long. 80 deg. 50' W. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+While under these apprehensions, we stood to the back of the island in
+order to fall in with the southerly wind, till we were past the island.
+We then stood back for it again, and ran close aboard the land that
+begins to form its N.E. side. The flaws came heavy off the land, and we
+were forced to reef our top-sails when we opened the middle bay, where
+we expected to have found our enemy, but saw all clear, and no ships
+either there or in the other bay near the N.E. end. These are the only
+bays in which ships can ride that come here for refreshments, the middle
+one being the best. We now conjectured that there had been ships here,
+but that they had gone away on seeing us. About noon of the 2d February,
+we sent our yawl on shore, in which was Captain Dover, Mr Fry, and six
+men, all armed; and in the mean time we and the Duchess kept turning in,
+and such heavy squalls came off the land that we had to let fly our
+top-sail sheets, keeping all hands to stand by our sails, lest the winds
+should blow them away. These flaws proceed from the land, which is very
+high in the middle of the island; but when they passed by, we had little
+or no wind. As our yawl did not return, we sent the pinnace well armed,
+to see what had occasioned the yawl to stay, being afraid there might be
+a Spanish garrison on the island, who might have seized her and our men.
+
+Even the pinnace delays returning, on which we put up a signal for her
+to come back, when she soon came off with abundance of cray-fish,
+bringing also a man cloathed in goat-skins, who seemed wilder than the
+original owners of his apparel. His name was _Alexander Selkirk_, a
+Scotsman, who had been left here by Captain Stradling in the
+Cinque-ports, and had lived alone on the island for four years and four
+months. Captain Dampier told me he had been master of the Cinque-ports,
+and was the best man in that vessel; so I immediately agreed with him to
+serve as a mate in the Duke. During his stay, he had seen several ships
+pass by, but only two came to anchor at the island, which he found to be
+Spaniards, and therefore retired from them, on which they fired at him,
+but he escaped into the woods. Had they been French, he would have
+surrendered to them; but chose rather to run the risk of dying alone on
+the island than fall into the hands of the Spaniards, as he suspected
+they would either put him to death, or make him a slave in their mines.
+The Spaniards had landed before he knew what they were, and came so near
+him that he had much ado to escape; for they not only shot at him, but
+pursued him into the woods, where he climbed up a tree, at the foot of
+which some of them made water, and killed several goats just by, yet
+went away without discovering him.
+
+He told us that he was born in Largo, in the county of Fife in Scotland,
+and was bred a sailor from his youth. The reason of his being left here
+was a difference with Captain Stradling; which, together with the ship
+being leaky, made him at first rather willing to stay here than to
+continue in the ship; and when at last he was inclined to have gone, the
+captain would not receive him. He had been at the island before to wood
+and water, when two of the men were left upon it for six months, the
+ship being chased away by two French South-Sea ships; but the
+Cinque-ports returned and took them off, at which time he was left. He
+had with him his clothes and bedding, with a firelock and some powder
+and bullets, some tobacco, a knife, a kettle, a bible, with some other
+books, and his mathematical instruments. He diverted himself and
+provided for his sustenance as well as he could; but had much ado to
+bear up against melancholy for the first eight months, and was sore
+distressed at being left alone in such a desolate place. He built
+himself two huts of pimento trees, thatched with long grass, and lined
+with goat-skins, killing goats as he needed them with his gun, so long
+as his powder lasted, which was only about a pound at first. When that
+was all spent, he procured fire by rubbing two sticks of pimento wood
+together. He slept in his larger hut, and cooked his victuals in the
+smaller, which was at some distance, and employed himself in reading,
+praying, and singing psalms, so that he said he was a better Christian
+during his solitude than he had ever been before, or than, as he was
+afraid, he should ever be again.
+
+At first he never ate but when constrained by hunger, partly from grief;
+and partly for want of bread and salt. Neither did he then go to bed
+till he could watch no longer, the pimento wood serving him both for
+fire and candle, as it burned very clear, and refreshed him by its
+fragrant smell. He might have had fish enough, but would not eat them
+for want of salt, as they occasioned a looseness; except cray-fish,
+which are as large as our lobsters, and are very good. These he
+sometimes boiled, and at other times broiled, as he did his goat's
+flesh, of which he made good broth, for they are not so rank as our
+goats. Having kept an account, he said he had killed 500 goats while on
+the island, besides having caught as many more, which he marked on the
+ear and let them go. When his powder failed, he run down the goats by
+speed of foot; for his mode of living, with continual exercise of
+walking and running, cleared him of all gross humours, so that he could
+run with wonderful swiftness through the woods, and up the hills and
+rocks, as we experienced in catching goats for us. We had a bull-dog,
+which we sent along with several of our nimblest runners to help him in
+catching goats, but he outstript our dog and men, caught the goats, and
+brought them to us on his back. On one occasion, his agility in pursuing
+a goat had nearly cost him his life: as, while pursuing it with great
+eagerness, he caught hold of it on the brink of a precipice, of which,
+he was not aware, being concealed by bushes, so that he fell with the
+goat down the precipice to a great depth, and was so bruised and stunned
+by the fall, that he lay senseless, as he supposed, for twenty-four
+hours, and when he recovered his senses found the goat dead under him.
+He was then scarcely able to crawl to his hut, about a mile distant, and
+could not stir out again for ten days.
+
+He came at length to relish his meat well enough without bread and salt.
+In the proper season he had plenty of good turnips, which had been sowed
+there by Captain Dampier's men, and had now spread over several acres of
+ground. He had also abundance of cabbage, from the cabbage-palms, and
+seasoned his food with the fruit of the pimento, which is the same with
+Jamaica pepper, and has a fine flavour. He found also a species of black
+pepper, called _malageta_, which was good for expelling wind and curing
+gripes. He soon wore out all his shoes and other clothes, by running in
+the woods; and, being forced to shift without, his feet became so hard
+that he ran about every where without inconvenience, and it was some
+time after he came to us before he could wear shoes, as his feet swelled
+when he first began again to wear them. After he had got the better of
+his melancholy, he sometimes amused himself with carving his name on the
+trees, together with the date of his being left there, and the time of
+his solitary residence. At first he was much pestered with cats and
+rats, which had bred there in great numbers from some of each species
+which had got on shore from ships that had wooded and watered at the
+island. The rats gnawed his feet and clothes when he was asleep, which
+obliged him to cherish the cats, by feeding them with goats flesh, so
+that many of them became so tame that they used to lie beside him in
+hundreds, and soon delivered him from the rats. He also tamed some kids,
+and for his diversion would at times sing and dance with them and his
+cats: So that, by the favour of Providence and the vigour of his youth,
+for he was now only thirty years of age, he came at length to conquer
+all the inconveniences of his solitude, and to be quite easy in his
+mind.
+
+When his clothes were worn out, he made himself a coat and a cap of goat
+skins, which he stitched together with thongs of the same, cut out with
+his knife, using a nail by way of a needle or awl. When his knife was
+worn out, he made others as well as he could of some old hoops that had
+been left on the shore, which he beat out thin between two stones, and
+grinded to an edge on a smooth stone. Having some linen cloth, he sewed
+himself some shirts by means of a nail for a needle, stitching them with
+worsted, which he pulled out on purpose from his old stockings, and he
+had the last of his shirts on when we found him. At his first coming on
+board, he had so much forgotten his language, for want of use, that we
+could scarcely understand him, as he seemed to speak his words only by
+halves. We offered him a dram, which he refused, not having drank any
+thing but water all the time he had been on the island, and it was some
+time before he could relish our provisions. He could give us no farther
+account of the productions of the island than has been already, except
+that there were some very good black plums, but hard to come at, as the
+trees which bear them grow on high mountains and steep rocks. There are
+many pimento trees, some of them being sixty feet high and two yards
+round; and we saw cotton trees still higher, and near four fathoms round
+the stems. The climate is excellent, and the trees and grass are quite
+verdant the whole year. The winter lasts no longer than June and July,
+and is not then severe, there being then only slight frosts and a little
+hail, but sometimes very great rains. The heat of summer is equally
+moderate, and there is not much thunder or tempestuous weather. He saw
+no venomous, or savage creature on the island, nor any other beasts
+besides goats, bred there from a few brought by Juan Fernandez, a
+Spaniard, who settled there with a few families, till the continent of
+Chili began to submit to the Spaniards when they removed to that country
+as more profitable. This island, however, might maintain a good many
+people, and is capable of being made so strong that they could not be
+easily dislodged.
+
+We got our smith's forge ashore on the 3d February, and set our coopers
+to work to repair our water casks. They made a little tent also for me
+on shore, to enjoy the benefit of the land air. The two ships also set
+up tents for their sick, so that we had presently a kind of small town,
+in which all who were able were busily employed. A few men supplied us
+with excellent fish, in such abundance that they could take as many in a
+few hours as would serve 200 men for a meal. There were some sea-fowl in
+the bay, as large as geese, but they eat fishy. The governor, for so we
+called Mr Selkirk, never failed to procure us two or three goats every
+day for our sick men, by which, with the help of cabbages and other
+vegetables, and the wholesome air, our men soon recovered from the
+scurvy, and we found this island exceedingly agreeable, the weather
+being neither too hot nor too cold. We spent our time till the 10th in
+refitting our ships, taking wood on board, and laying in a stock of
+water, that which we brought from England, St Vincents, and Isla Grande,
+being spoilt by the badness of our casks. We also boiled up and refined
+eighty gallons of oil of sea-lions, which we used in lamps to save
+candles, and might have prepared several tons, if we had been provided
+with vessels. The sailors sometimes used this oil to fry their fish, for
+want of butter, and found it sufficiently agreeable. The men who worked
+ashore in repairing our rigging, eat the young seals, which they
+preferred to our ship's provisions, alleging that it was as good as
+English lamb. We made all the haste we could to get every thing on
+board, as we learnt at the Canaries that five stout French privateers
+were coming in company into the South Sea.
+
+This island of Juan Fernandez is about fifteen English miles in length
+from E. to W. and five miles where broadest, but averaging little more
+than two miles in breadth, and is mostly composed of high rugged land. I
+know of nothing in its neighbourhood which may endanger a ship, except
+what is distinctly visible. We anchored in the great bay, [La Baia or
+Cumberland harbour] on the N.E. side, about a mile from the bottom of
+the bay, our best bower being dropt in forty fathoms, and the stream
+anchor carried in with the shore, where it was laid in about thirty
+fathoms. We here had plenty of several sorts of fish, as silver-fish,
+snappers, bonitoes, cavallos, pollocks, old wives, and cray-fish of
+great size. The wind blows here generally off the shore, sometimes in
+heavy squalls, but for the most part calm, and where we were moored the
+water was very smooth, owing to the winding of the shore. Mr Selkirk
+told us it had never blown towards the land above four hours, all the
+time he had been there. It is all hills and vallies, and would doubtless
+produce most plants usual in such climates, if manured and cultivated,
+as the soil promises well in most parts, and already grows turnips and
+some other roots, which I suppose were formerly sowed. It has plenty of
+wood and water, and abundance of wild goats.
+
+There are such numbers of great sea-lions and other seals of various
+sorts, all having excellent furs, in every bay, that we could hardly
+walk about along shore for them, as they lay about in flocks like sheep,
+their young ones bleating for their dams like so many lambs. Some of
+these sea-lions are as big in the body as an English ox, and they roar
+like lions. They are covered with short hair of a light colour, which is
+still lighter on the young ones. I suppose they live partly on fish and
+partly on grass, for they come on shore by means of their fore paws,
+dragging their hind parts after them, and bask themselves in the sun in
+great numbers. They cut near a foot deep of fat, and we killed a good
+many of them for the sake of their oil, which is of good quality, but
+they are difficult to kill. Both sea-lions and seals were so numerous on
+the shore, that we had to drive them away before we could land, and they
+were so numerous as is hardly credible, making a most prodigious noise.
+
+There are but few birds. One sort, called _pardelas_ by the Spaniards,
+burrow in the ground like rabbits, and are said to be good eating. There
+are also _humming-birds_, not much larger than bumble bees, their bills
+no thicker than a pin, their legs proportional to their bodies, and
+their minute feathers of most beautiful colours. These are seldom taken
+or seen but in the evenings, when they fly about, and they flew
+sometimes at night into our fire. There is here a sort of cabbage tree,
+of the nature of a palm, producing small cabbages, but very sweet. The
+tree is slender and straight, with circular knobs on the stem fourteen
+inches above each other, and having no leaves except at the top. The
+branches are about twelve feet long, and at about a foot and a half from
+the body of the tree begin to shoot out leaves, which are four feet long
+and an inch broad, and so regularly placed that the whole branch seems
+one entire leaf. The cabbage, which grows out from the bottom of the
+branches, is about a foot long and very white; and at the bottom of this
+there grow clusters of berries, weighing five or six pounds, like
+bunches of grapes, as red as cherries and larger than our black-heart
+cherries, each having a large stone in the middle, and the pulp eats
+like our haws. These cabbage trees abound about three miles into the
+woods, the trunk being often eighty or ninety feet high, and is always
+cut down to get the cabbages, which are good eating; but most of them
+grow on the tops of the nearest mountains to the great bay.
+
+We found here some Guinea pepper, and some silk cotton trees, besides
+several others with the names of which I am not acquainted. Pimento is
+the best timber, and the most plentiful at this side of the island, but
+it is very apt to split till it is a little dried. We cut the longest
+and cleanest to split for fire wood. In the nearest plain, we found
+abundance of turnip greens, and water-cresses in the brooks, which
+greatly refreshed our men, and quickly cured them of the scurvy. Mr
+Selkirk said the turnips formed good roots in our summer months, which
+are winter at this island; but this being autumn, they were all run up
+to seed, so that we had no benefit of them excepting their green leaves
+and shoots. The soil is a loose black earth, and the rocks are very
+rotten, so that it is dangerous to climb the hills for cabbages without
+great care. There are also many holes dug into the ground by a sort of
+birds called _puffins_, which give way in walking, and endanger the
+breaking or wrenching a limb. Mr Selkirk said he had seen snow and ice
+here in July, the depth of the southern winter; but in September,
+October, and November, the spring months, the climate is very pleasant,
+and there are then abundance of excellent herbs, as purslein, parsley,
+and sithes. We found also an herb, not unlike _feverfew_, which proved
+very useful to our surgeons for fomentations. It has a most grateful
+smell like balm, but stronger and more cordial, and grew in plenty near
+the shore. We gathered many large bundles of it, which were dried in the
+shade, and sent aboard for after-use, besides strewing the tents with it
+fresh gathered every morning, which tended much to the recovery of our
+sick, of whom, though numerous when we came here, only two died
+belonging to the Duchess. We found the nights very cold, and the days
+not near so warm as might have been expected in so low a latitude. It
+hardly ever rains, instead of which there fall very heavy dews in the
+night, which serve the purposes of rain, and the air is almost
+perpetually serene.
+
+The 13th February we held a consultation, in which we framed several
+regulations for preserving secrecy, discipline, and strict honesty in
+both vessels: and on the 17th we determined that two men from the Duke
+should serve in the Duchess, and two of her men in the Duke, to see that
+justice was reciprocally done by each ship's company to the other. The
+28th we tried both pinnaces in the water under sail, having a gun fixed
+in each, and every thing else requisite to render them very useful small
+privateers.
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_Proceedings of the Expedition on the Western Coast of America_.
+
+In the evening of the 13th March[220] we saw a sail, and the Duchess
+being nearest soon took her. She was a small bark of sixteen tons from
+Payta, bound to Cheripe for flour, having a small sum of money on board
+to make the purchase, being commanded by a _Mestizo_, or one begotten
+between a Spaniard and an Indian, having a crew of eight men, one a
+Spaniard, another a negro, and all the rest Indians. On asking for news,
+we were told, that all the French ships, being seven in number, had left
+the South Sea six months before, and no more were to come there; adding,
+that the Spaniards had such an aversion to them, that they had killed
+many Frenchmen at Callao, the port of Lima, and quarrelled with them so
+frequently that none of them were suffered to come ashore there for some
+time before they sailed.
+
+[Footnote 220: It is quite obvious that they had now left Juan
+Fernandez, but this circumstance and its date are omitted by
+Harris.--E.]
+
+After putting some men aboard the prize, we haled close upon a wind for
+the isle of _Lobos_, and had we not been informed by our prisoners, had
+endangered our ships by running too far within that isle, as there are
+shoals between the island and the main, having a passage for boats only
+in that direction to get into the road which is to leeward of these
+islands in a sound between them. This sound is a mile long and half a
+mile wide, and has from ten to twelve fathoms on good ground. The only
+entrance for ships is to leeward of the islands. We went in with a small
+weather tide, but I could never observe it to flow above three feet
+while we were there. On the eastermost island there is a round hummock,
+behind which is a small cove, very smooth, deep, and convenient enough
+for careening a ship; we here hauled up and fitted our prize, which we
+named the _Beginning_. The highest part of the island of Lobos, as seen
+from the road, did not seem much higher than the top-mast head of a
+large ship. The soil is a hungry white clayish earth, mixed with sand
+and rocks; and there is no fresh water, nor any green thing to be seen
+on either of the islands. They are frequented by many vultures or
+carrion crows, and looked so like turkeys that one of our officers was
+rejoiced at the sight, expecting to fare sumptuously, and would not wait
+till the boat could put him ashore, but leapt into the water with his
+gun, and let fly at a parcel of them; but, when he came to take up his
+game, it stunk most abominably, and made us merry at his expence. The
+other birds here are pelicans, penguins, boobies, gulls, and one
+resembling teal, which nestle in holes under ground. Our men got great
+numbers of these birds, which they said were good meat after being
+skinned.
+
+We found abundance of bulrushes and empty jars, which the Spanish
+fishers had left on shore; for all over this western coast of America,
+they use earthen jars instead of casks, for containing oil, wine, and
+all other liquids. There are here abundance of sea-lions and seals, the
+latter being much larger than those we saw at Juan Fernandez, but their
+fur not so fine. Our people killed several of these, on purpose to eat
+their livers; but a Spaniard on board died suddenly after eating them,
+and I forbade their use, and we learnt also from our prisoners that the
+old seals are very unwholesome. The wind commonly blows here fresh from
+the south, veering to the east, and coming over the land to where we
+lay, brought with it a most noisome smell from the seals on shore, which
+gave me a violent headach, and offended every one else extremely. We
+found nothing so offensive at Juan Fernandez.
+
+Our prisoners told as, that the widow of the late viceroy of Peru was
+soon expected to embark in a Spanish man of war of thirty-six guns for
+Acapulco, with her family and riches; on which voyage she would either
+stop at Payta for refreshments, or pass in sight of that place, as is
+customary. They said also that about eight months before, a ship had
+passed Payta for Acapulco, loaded with flour and liquors, and having
+200,000 dollars on board. Also, that they had left signior Morel at
+Payta, in a ship laden with dry goods, who was expected to sail shortly
+for Lima; and that a stout French-built ship richly laden, and having a
+bishop on board, was shortly expected at Payta. This is the common place
+for refreshments, and is frequented by most ships from Lima or other
+parts to windward, on their way to Panama or other ports on the western
+coast of Mexico. On this information, we determined to spend as much
+time as possible cruising off Payta, so as not to discover that we were
+in these seas lest we should thereby hinder our other designs.
+
+In pursuance of this plan, we took a galleon on the 1st April, of 500
+tons burden, commanded by two brothers, Joseph and Juan Morel, laden
+with dry goods and negroes; and next day we took another prize. We now
+determined to make an attack on the town of _Guayaquil_; and on the 11th
+April, in a grand consultation, this enterprize was fully resolved upon,
+and a paper of instructions was drawn up for the guidance of the
+officers who were to command, so that each might be taught and kept to
+his duty. This enterprize was to be conducted by the three captains,
+Rogers, Courtney, and Dover. Captain Dover was to command the van
+division, consisting of seventy marines; Rogers the centre company, of
+seventy-one men, mostly officers and sailors; and Courtney the
+rear-guard, of seventy-three men; while Captain Dampier, with a reserve
+of twenty-two men, was to bring up some pieces of cannon, to be employed
+if necessary. Our force therefore on this occasion consisted of 238
+men.[221] Captain Cooke was to remain in the Duchess with forty-two men,
+and Captain Fry in the Duke with forty, our entire force being 320 men,
+while we had about 266 prisoners in both ships, including Indians and
+Negroes.
+
+[Footnote 221: The enumeration in the text gives only 236 men.--E.]
+
+Every thing being arranged, we bore in for Cape _Blanco_ on the 13th, of
+which we had sight about noon, bearing E.S.E. ten leagues off. On the
+15th in the morning we saw a ship near the shore, and having little
+wind, the Duke's boat, commanded by Captain Fry, and that of the Duchess
+by Captain Cooke, rowed directly for her, going off in such haste that
+neither of them had the swivel guns commonly used in the boats, neither
+had they their full complement of men, and only ten muskets and four
+pistols, with not much powder and shot, and no water. They rowed very
+hard for six leagues to get up with the ship, and on Mr Fry getting
+near, she hoisted Spanish colours. We could plainly see that she was
+French-built, and therefore concluded that it must be the ship we had
+long looked for, which was to carry the bishop. Our ships being almost
+out of sight, and the chase near the coast, making the best of her way
+to run ashore in a sandy bay, we resolved to lay her on board, one of
+our boats on each bow, I[222] being then on her weather quarter, and
+Captain Fry on her lee. It was our intention to pretend that we were
+friends, till we should get out of the way of her stern-chase guns; but
+the Duke's men, conceiving the Spaniards were going to give us a
+volley, poured in their shot. We then laid in our oars, and fell to with
+our small arms. We kept up a constant fire for a long time, which was
+returned by the Spaniards, who killed two of Captain Fry's men, and
+wounded one of his and two of mine. One of the dead men was John Rogers,
+our second lieutenant, and brother to Captain Woods Rogers, who had
+behaved himself gallantly. Finding the enterprize too difficult, Captain
+Fry drew off his boat, as I did soon after. Captain Fry then put some of
+his men aboard my boat, giving us some powder and shot, and taking in
+our wounded men, on which he stood away towards our ships, while I
+resolved to keep the chase if possible from running on shore, and rather
+than fail to clap her on board. Seeing our design, the enemy edged off
+to sea, and we after them. Our ships came up apace, while we kept close
+to the Spaniard, sometimes firing at him. At length the Duchess got up
+and fired a shot or two, on which she struck, and we immediately
+boarded. The men begged for quarter, and we promised them all civility.
+This ship was of 270 tons, commanded by Don Joseph Arizabella, and had
+come from Panama bound for Lima, where she was to have been fitted out
+as a man of war, the captain having his commission on board for that
+purpose. She had seventy negroes on board, with many passengers. The
+loading was bale goods, with some things belonging to the bishop, and a
+considerable quantity of pearls; but the bishop had been landed at Point
+St Helena, whence he was to go by land to Guayaquil. Many of the
+passengers were considerable merchants at Lima, and the briskest
+Spaniards I ever saw. After the capture of this ship, Captain Cooke
+remained on board, sending her captain and the rest of the prisoners to
+the Duke and Duchess.
+
+[Footnote 222: This particular action is related by Harris in the words
+of Captain Cooke, who commanded the boat from the Duchess.--E.]
+
+We now proceeded on our intended expedition against Guayaquil, sending
+the _Beginning_ ahead to _Punta arena_, or Sandy Point, on the island of
+Puna, to see if there was any force to oppose us; but she only found a
+Spanish bark, quite empty, riding close under the point. She had been
+sent to load salt, but her men had abandoned her on seeing us approach.
+At five in the afternoon, our whole force intended for the attack upon
+Guayaquil, being embarked in boats, rowed for that place; and at eleven
+at night we could see a light in the town, on which we rowed as easy as
+we could and in silence, for fear of being discovered; till we were
+within a mile of the place. We then heard a sentinel call to another,
+and after conversing for some time, bid him bring fire. Perceiving we
+were now discovered, we rowed to the other side of the river, opposite
+the town, whence we saw a fire lighted up at the place where the
+centinels had talked, and soon after we could see lights all over the
+town and at the water side, heard them ring the alarm bell, fire several
+vollies, and saw a fire lighted on the hill where the beacon was kept,
+all on purpose to give notice to the town and neighbourhood that we were
+come into the river.
+
+Our boats were now moored with grapplings, and so hot a dispute took
+place among some of our officers, that they were heard on shore; but as
+the Spaniards did not understand what they said, an English prisoner was
+brought to the shore to interpret what they heard. By the time he came,
+the dispute was over; but this Englishman afterwards joined us, and gave
+us this account. We held a council in the stern sheets of one of our
+boats, to consider whether we should land immediately or wait till
+day-light; and, as the barks were not come up, in which were the
+artillery and half of our men, and as we did not know the ground
+sufficiently to act in the dark, it was agreed to wait till day, by
+which time it was hoped the barks would join. We accordingly fell down
+the river a short way, to meet our barks, hearing several musket shots
+by the way. On the 23d April at day-break, we saw one of our barks at
+anchor within a mile of the town, close under the shore, and the other
+coming up the river with the tide of flood. We then rowed up to our
+bark, which had fired the shots we heard in the night at some fishermen
+passing by, whom they took.
+
+All our force being now joined, we proceeded up the river, and sent a
+flag of truce on shore, accompanied by Don Joseph Arizabella, the
+governor of Puna, and another prisoner; and then towed up our barks over
+against the town, where we came to an anchor. When Captain Arizabella
+came with our flag of truce before the corregidor or mayor of
+Guayaquill, he enquired our numbers, which the captain magnified, on
+which the corregidore said we were boys, not men. To this the captain
+answered, he would find them men, and brave ones too, for they had
+fought him gallantly in their open boats, although he had slain the
+brother of their commander and others; and therefore advised him to
+agree for the ransom of the town, as even if he had 3000 men he would be
+unable to withstand the English. To this the corregidore replied, _My
+horse is ready_.
+
+After bringing our barks to anchor, we went up the river after some
+vessels, six of which we secured and brought to anchor beside our barks.
+We also took possession of two new ships of about 400 tons burden each.
+Soon after this, the governor came on board one of the prizes, to treat
+for the ransom of the town and ships, but could not then agree, but
+promised to meet the captains again at seven in the evening, but did not
+keep his sword. This evening our boats took some canoes having silver on
+board. On the 24th in the morning, the governor came off again to treat,
+but no agreement could be made; and at four in the afternoon we landed
+all our men in good order, when the Spaniards only fired one volley and
+then fled. Our men pursued them to where their cannon were placed, which
+they soon gained possession of, only one gunner, an Irishman, remaining
+by them till he was wounded in four places, of which he soon afterwards
+died. We marched through both towns in a compact body, driving the enemy
+before us, and then placed three guards in the three churches, setting
+fire to five or six houses which stood near to a wood into which the
+Spaniards had fled, that they might not have the cover of these houses
+to annoy our guard, which stood within pistol shot. All night they kept
+firing at our sentinels from the woods, yet without doing us any harm.
+Several parties also of horse and foot came out of the wood, as if to
+attack us, but made no attempt. In the mean time, the pinnace belonging
+to the Duchess, in which was Lieutenant Connely and twenty-two men, went
+up the river, landed at every house near its banks, and brought away all
+the plate and other articles of value they could find. In this service,
+they had some skirmishing with the enemy, in which one of our men was
+wounded.
+
+On the 25th the enemy appeared numerous in the woods, whence they
+sometimes came out and skirmished with our guards, in which one of our
+men was wounded. We spent the afternoon in sending off provisions from
+the town to our ships, and in disposing all things in readiness in case
+of being attacked in the night, as the enemy appeared numerous about
+the outskirts. For this reason, all the captains concentrated our whole
+force at the main guard, where we had our cannon in readiness.
+Messengers arrived with a flag of truce in the morning of the 26th, to
+treat for ransoming the town, but could not agree; but in the afternoon
+it was at length agreed to pay 30,000 dollars for its ransom, giving
+three hostages, and we were to remain at Puna till they had time to
+raise the sum, as the inhabitants had carried away their money, and
+being so dispersed that it was impossible to collect the money while we
+were there, even the inhabitants of the adjacent country having carried
+off their valuable effects into the interior.
+
+In the morning of the 27th, the hostages for the ransom were sent on
+board one of our barks, together with a boatload of brandy; and, as
+agreed upon with the Spaniards, we took down our union jack, hoisted a
+flag of truce, and fired a signal gun, that the Spaniards might come
+freely into the town, and that no hostilities should take place on
+either side during the time we had agreed to wait for the money. The
+purpose of admitting the Spanish inhabitants was to prevent the Indians
+and Negroes from robbing; and I am apt to believe they had already
+robbed as much as we had plundered, for we had taken many of them loaded
+with goods, while going our rounds, which they confessed to have stolen;
+and we were afterwards informed, that the inhabitants, in their hurry,
+had given much plate and money to Negroes to carry out of town, which
+they could never hear of afterwards.
+
+The 29th in the morning we took a small Spanish bark, coming from
+Cheripe to Guayaquil, on board of which were 330 bags of meal, and 140
+arobas or hundred-weights of sugar, with some onions, quinces, and
+pomegranates. This, with the six barks and two great ships ransomed with
+the town of Guayaquil, made 14 prizes taken in the South Sea. The
+plunder taken in Guayaquil, exclusive of the ransom, was very
+considerable. We found 230 bags of flour, beans, peas, and rice; 15 jars
+of oil, besides 160 jars of other liquor; some cordage, iron ware, and
+nails; about four half jars of powder; about a ton of pitch and tar; 150
+bales of dry goods; a few packs of indigo, cacao, and arnotto; about a
+ton of loaf-sugar; a considerable parcel of clothes and other
+necessaries, and to the value of about L1200 in plate, ear-rings, and
+other trinkets; besides four pieces of cannon, and about 200 useless
+muskets. We left abundance of goods in the town, besides liquors of all
+sorts, and a variety of naval stores, and several warehouses full of
+cacao. We left also several ships on the stocks, and two new ships still
+unrigged, of above 400 tons each, which cost upwards of 80,000 crowns;
+and we also restored four barks, leaving two others to bring down the
+ransom. Thus it appears that the Spaniards had a good bargain; but the
+agreed ransom, though small, was far better for us than to burn what we
+could not carry away. The hostages informed us, that during our treaty
+80,000 dollars belonging to the king had been sent out of the town,
+besides plate, jewels, and other things of the greatest value. Hence it
+is certain, if we had landed at the first, giving them no time at all,
+that we had been much greater gainers, and might have made 200,000
+dollars, in ready money, plate, and jewels. Yet Guayaquil had not been
+so poor for forty years as now, there having been a great fire about a
+year and half before we took it, in which the best part of the town was
+burnt down, and had occasioned great expence for its rebuilding.
+
+As it was, we thought ourselves well off, and great care was taken that
+all concerned in the expedition should be satisfied, by which our people
+were much gratified, and afterwards shewed great alacrity in executing
+our other enterprizes. This is of the utmost consequence with
+privateers; for, if the men have the smallest jealousy of being ill
+treated in this respect, disputes arise which do infinitely more
+mischief than the value of what can be got by such sinister practices.
+Among all the men who landed in this enterprize, the only man who drank
+a cup too much was one John Gabriel, a Dutchman, who served in the
+company commanded by Captain Rogers. When we were evacuating the town,
+he was missing, and was supposed to be either taken or slain. But he had
+found some excellent brandy in the house where he was quartered, of
+which he drank so liberally that he fell fast asleep on the floor, and
+was in that condition when we evacuated the town. The master of the
+house returned soon after, and found the Dutchman stretched out at full
+length, and so dead asleep that he could hardly distinguish whether he
+were living. Calling in some of his neighbours, and securing the
+Dutchman's weapons, they set him on his feet, and with some difficulty
+brought him to his senses, when he was not a little alarmed at finding
+himself in such company. At length the Spaniard restored his arms, and
+desired him to make all the haste he could after his comrades, who were
+not yet embarked.
+
+On the 2d May, which was the day appointed for payment of the ransom, no
+boat appeared, and we began to be uneasy for our money; but at length
+the boat arrived, and brought us 22,000 dollars. We received the money,
+and sent back a message that we proposed to sail from Puna next morning,
+and should carry away the hostages, if the rest of the money were not
+then sent. We staid however till the 6th, when Captain Courtney was
+anxious to depart, lest we should be attacked by the French and Spanish
+ships from Lima. I endeavoured in vain to convince him that we were in
+no danger, as they could not by this time have received notice at Lima,
+and have fitted out a force sufficient to attack us. We sailed however,
+and came to anchor in the afternoon a few leagues from Point Arena. Next
+morning, when we were preparing to sail, Mr Morel, a gentleman from Puna
+related to our prisoners, and another gentleman from Guayaquil, brought
+us 3500 dollars, in farther payment of our ransom. This put us into such
+good humour, that we discharged all our prisoners except the Morels, the
+three hostages, and three or four more. The gentleman from Guayaquil had
+a gold chain and some other things of value, for which we sold him our
+bark, the _Beginning_, having no farther use for her. We also gave
+Captain Arizabella three negro women, and another to Mr Morel, and
+returned their wearing apparel to most of our prisoners who were now
+liberated, so that we parted good friends.
+
+_Guayaquil_ is divided into two parts, called the old and new towns,
+which together contain about 500 houses, and are joined by a long wooden
+bridge for foot passengers, near half a mile long. It is situated in low
+boggy ground, so dirty in winter that it is difficult to go from house
+to house. There is but one regular street along the river side, leading
+to the bridge, and from it along the old town. Besides this, there is a
+handsome parade or square in front of the church of St Jago, but that
+church is in ruins. Besides this, there are three other churches, St
+Augustin, St Francis, and St Dominic; before which last is another
+parade, and a half-moon battery fitted for mounting six guns, but there
+were none while we were there. There is also a chapel, and there had
+been a church dedicated to St Ignatius, belonging to the jesuits, but it
+was burnt down in the great fire. These were all decently adorned with
+altars, carved work, and pictures, and that dedicated to St Augustin had
+an organ, but all their plate had been carried away by the priests and
+students, who fled into the woods. Some of the houses were of brick,
+particularly about the parades, and the rest of timber or split bamboos,
+and some of them were decently furnished. Some of the inhabitants had
+calashes, but I know not what use they could be of, all the
+neighbourhood being so boggy that there was not road for them.
+
+The boggy ground about Guayaquil was full of the largest toads I ever
+saw, some being as big as an English two-penny loaf. The town was said
+to contain 2000 inhabitants of all sorts, including Indians, Negroes,
+and Mulattoes. An Englishman who joined us here, told us that, in the
+preceding December, on occasion of a public rejoicing for the birth of
+the prince of the Asturias, which lasted for three weeks, they had
+mustered 1100 foot and 500 horse, all armed, which came from the
+surrounding country, besides a much greater number unarmed, the greater
+part of whom must have been Indians. Guayaquil is well situated for
+trade and ship-building, being fourteen leagues from Point Arena and
+seven from Puna, up a large river, into which fall several smaller ones,
+and on which there are many villages and farms. The water of this river
+is fresh for four leagues below the city, and all along its banks grow
+great quantities of mangroves and _sarsaparillas_, and on account of
+this last the water is thought salutary against the lues. But during
+floods, when it brings down many poisonous plants from the mountains,
+among which is the _manchinilla_ apple, it is not reckoned wholesome.
+All birds that eat of this apple are sure to die, and we saw hundreds of
+them dead, floating on the water.
+
+The seasons here are very improperly denominated summer and winter. The
+winter is reckoned from the beginning of December to the end of May, in
+all which season it is sultry, hot, wet, and unhealthy. From the end of
+May to the beginning of December, which they call summer, the weather is
+serene, dry, and healthy, and not so violently hot as in what they
+denominate winter. The cacao is ripe and mostly gathered between June
+and August. Of the other fruits of this country, some are ripe and
+others green during the whole course of the year. Guayaquil is the chief
+city of a province of that name in the kingdom of Peru, governed by a
+president with five or six orders of judges, forming a royal
+_audiencia_, or chief court of judicature, and accountable only to the
+viceroy in military affairs,[223] and every province has a government of
+the same nature. The governors are appointed, or more properly purchase
+their offices, at the court of Old Spain, and are for life or good
+behaviour. If any one die or misbehave, the viceroy may name another
+during his time, which ought only to be for five years; but he sometimes
+gets those of his own placing confirmed by an order from Spain, by which
+means he derives a considerable portion of his unknown profits. The late
+viceroy of Peru continued in office fourteen years, several intended
+successors having died on the way. Scarcely does the king of Spain live
+in greater splendour than the viceroy does at Lima, where the chief
+courts of judicature are held, to which appeals are brought from all the
+courts and provinces of this extensive kingdom. I was told on good
+authority that the last viceroy, who died about four years ago, left at
+least eight millions of dollars to his widow and family, besides vast
+sums given in charity during his life, and building many churches,
+friaries, and nunneries. He left a better character than any viceroy had
+done for an age past.
+
+[Footnote 223: This province is now in the kingdom or viceroyalty of New
+Granada, and audiencia of Quito.--E.]
+
+The province of Guayaquil abounds in excellent timber of several kinds,
+so that it is the chief place in all Peru for building and repairing
+ships, of which there are seldom less than seven or eight on the stocks
+here at one time. Its chief commodity is cacao, with which it supplies
+most parts on the South Sea, and we were told it never exported less
+than 30,000 _carguas_ yearly, and sometimes double that quantity, a
+_cargua_ being eighty-one pounds weight, which only costs here two
+dollars and a half. They have also a considerable trade in salt and
+salt-fish, from Cape St Helena, which is mostly sent to Quito and other
+places of the inland country. It exports also a vast quantity of timber
+to Truxilo, Chana, Lima, and other places, where it is scarce. They
+export also from hence rice and cotton, with some dried or jerked beef.
+This province has no mines of gold or silver, but abounds in all sorts
+of cattle, which are very cheap, especially on the island of Puna, where
+we amply supplied ourselves. Their only grain is maiz, so that all their
+wheat flour is brought from Truxilo, Cherisse, and other places to
+windward, or to the south, as the wind blows here always from the south.
+They procure several kinds of woollen cloth, among which, are very
+strong and good bags, from Quito. Their wines, brandy, olives, oil, and
+sugar, come from Piscola, Nasca, and other places to windward. All kinds
+of European goods are brought from Panama, being brought there overland
+from Portobello on the Gulf of Mexico; and the trade of this port is so
+considerable as to employ forty sail every year, besides coasters. A
+market is also held daily on bark logs, or boats, every day, on the
+river before the town, containing every thing afforded by the interior
+country in great plenty.
+
+The other towns in the province are governed by lieutenants, or
+deputies, appointed by the corregidore. Above half of these towns border
+on the same river or its branches, so that their inhabitants can all
+come to the capital in two tides, though some are many leagues distant.
+_Porto Vaco_ was formerly the capital. In the whole province, the
+Spaniards reckon 10,000 inhabitants, but I believe there are many more,
+including all the mixed races between Spaniards, Indians, and negroes,
+which they divide and subdivide into eleven denominations. Few of the
+prisoners who fell into our hands were healthy or sound, and nearly half
+of the native Spaniards applied to our doctors for remedies against the
+French disease, which is so common here that it is reckoned no scandal.
+
+On the 11th May, with a strong gale at S.S.W. we bore away for the
+Gallepagos islands, being in a very sad condition; for we had upwards of
+twenty men ill in the Duke, and near fifty in the Duchess, seized with a
+malignant fever, contracted, as I suppose, at Guayaquil, where a
+contagious disease had reigned a month or five weeks before we took it;
+which swept away ten or twelve persons every day, so that all the
+churches were filled, being their usual burying places, and they had to
+dig a great deep hole close by the great church, where I kept guard, and
+this hole was almost filled with putrefying bodies: and our lying so
+long in that church, surrounded by such noisome scents, was enough to
+infect us all. In twenty-four hours more we had fifty men down and the
+Duchess upwards of seventy, and in the next twenty-four hours, ten more
+fell sick in each ship. We discovered land on the 17th, and on the 18th,
+at day-break, we were within four leagues of two large islands almost
+joining each other, having passed that we first saw during the night. We
+sent repeatedly ashore here in search of water, but could find none,
+though the people went three or four miles up into the country, and
+they reported that the island was nothing but loose rocks like cinders,
+very rotten and heavy, and the earth so parched that it broke into holes
+under their feet. This made me suppose there had been a volcano here;
+and though there is much shrubby ground, with some green herbs, there
+was not the smallest signs of water, neither was it possible for any to
+be contained on such a surface. In short, we found these islands
+completely to disappoint our expectations, and by no means to agree with
+the descriptions of former voyagers. We had also the misfortune to lose
+company of one of our barks, in which was Mr Hately, with five of our
+men, two Spanish prisoners, and three negroes.[224]
+
+[Footnote 224: Mr Hately, being unable to rejoin his companions, was
+forced to land at Cape Passado in lat. 0 deg. 25' S. on the coast of
+Guayaquil, where he and his people were barbarously used by a mixed race
+between the Indians and negroes; but were rescued by a priest, and sent
+to Lima, where he was kindly treated.--E.]
+
+In a consultation on the 26th May, we resolved to proceed for the island
+of Plata in quest of water, and then to come immediately off the coast
+again, having information of two French ships, one of sixty and the
+other of forty-six guns, together with a Spanish man of war, that would
+soon be sent in search of us. It was also our intention to refit our
+ships there, and not to go near the main, our ships being out of order,
+and our men very weak and sickly, several of them having already died.
+We accordingly sailed on the 27th, and in another conversation on the
+30th, it was agreed to go first to _Gorgono_, to see if there were any
+English ships there; and afterwards to sail for _Maugla_, Malaga, or
+_Madulinar_,[225] where there are some Indians at enmity with the
+Spaniards, who, as the pilots informed us, come seldom there, and were
+not likely to procure any intelligence of us from thence. They told us
+also, if we could induce the Indians to trade with us, we might have
+hogs, fowls, plantains, bananas, and other refreshments.
+
+[Footnote 225: The island of Gorgona is on the coast of New Granada, in
+lat. 2 deg. 54' N. and long. 78 deg. 35' W.]
+
+While on our course towards Gorgona, the Duchess took the _San Thoma de
+Villa nova_ of ninety tons, having about forty people on board,
+including eleven negro slaves, and but little European goods, except
+some cloth and iron. Next day we made the island of _Gorgona_,[226] and
+on the 8th of June our boats brought in another prize, a small bark of
+fifteen tons belonging to a creek on the main. She was bound to
+Guayaquil, having ten Spaniards and Indians on board, and some negroes,
+but had very little cargo, except a small quantity of gold dust and a
+large gold chain, together of about 500_l_. value, which were secured
+aboard the Duchess. In a consultation, held on the 19th June, proceeding
+upon information procured from our prisoners, it was resolved to proceed
+to Malaga, at which there was an anchorage, where we proposed to leave
+our ships, and to row up the river for the rich gold mines of Barbacore,
+[_Barbaceas_][227] called also the mines of St Pean, from a village of
+that name about two tides up the river. At that place we proposed to
+seize canoes, as fitter than our boats for going up against the stream,
+in which, at this season of the year, according to the information of an
+old Spanish pilot, there are such strong freshes, that he did not expect
+we should reach the mines in less than twelve days. But having
+discoursed with several of the prisoners, we found the island of Malaga
+an unsafe place for our ships, and besides, they represented the river
+as so narrow, that the Indians would be able to assail us with poisoned
+arrows, and the Spaniards might easily cut off our retreat, by felling
+trees across from bank to bank. On this information, we held another
+consultation, in which it was agreed to desist from this enterprize, and
+we came accordingly back to Gorgona, in so very weak a condition that we
+could hardly have defended ourselves, if attacked.
+
+[Footnote 226: It is somewhat difficult to ascertain what island is here
+meant. There are some islands at the mouth of the _Rio de Mira_, in lat.
+1 deg. 38' N. on one of which is _Punta de Mangles_, or Cape Mangles,
+resembling one of the names in the text; but from the context, the
+island for which they were next bound appears to have been that now
+called _Del Gallo_, in lat. 1 deg. 55' N. not above ten miles south from the
+river they proposed to enter.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 227: Barbacoas is one of the provinces of New Granada, having
+a town of the same name in the _Rio Telemli_, which joins the _Rio
+Patia.--E.]
+
+We arrived at Gorgona on the 13th June, where we anchored in forty
+fathoms, and resolved to careen our two ships in succession, beginning
+with the Duchess. Our sick men were removed into the galleon, and the
+sick officers to the French-built ship. We landed tents for the
+cooper's and armourer's crews, and cleared a place for tents to
+accommodate the sick on shore. All this was performed with so much
+diligence, that by the 28th both ships were careened, caulked, rigged,
+and restored fit for sea. On the 29th, we set up tents ashore for the
+sick, who were already much recovered, though the Spaniards had
+represented this island as unhealthy; yet by walking about on shore they
+soon gathered strength enough to return to their duty. We here fitted
+out the French-built ship, with twenty guns, putting Captain Cooke into
+her, with a crew taken from the other two ships, resolving to carry her
+home with us, and to employ her as a third cruizer while in these seas;
+and this great work employed us from the 29th June to the 9th July,
+calling her the _Marquis_. She had thirty-five men from the Duke and
+twenty-six from the Duchess, making a crew of sixty-one British, to
+which were added twenty negroes.
+
+Our next care was to get rid of our prisoners, who were a great burden
+to us, and we resolved therefore to set them on shore, after trying
+every possible method to engage them in a scheme for trading with us.
+For this purpose I proposed going to Panama, to remain six days near
+that place, till they should bring the money we could agree for, as the
+price of our prize goods; and to this the two Morels and Don Antonio
+agreed, provided we would take 60,000 dollars for the whole. I then
+proposed to give them up the galleon and all the goods and negroes, if
+they would give us 120,000 dollars for the whole. They told us that
+trading in these seas with strangers, especially the English and Dutch,
+was so rigidly prohibited, that they would have to give more than the
+original cost in bribes, to procure licence to deal with us, and could
+not therefore assure us of payment, unless we agreed to take a low
+price. Finding it therefore not worth while to waste time, and knowing
+we should run much risk in treating with them, we at length resolved to
+set them all ashore, hoping the Morels and Don Antonio would get money
+for us, to prevent us from burning the ships we could not conveniently
+carry away. At parting, I made them sensible that we had treated them
+like generous enemies, and said we would sell them good bargains for
+what money they might be able to bring us in ten days, after which we
+should burn or carry away all that was not then disposed of. We
+accordingly landed seventy-two prisoners on the 10th July. On the 16th
+the Morels came off with what money they had been able to procure, and
+bought some of our goods, behaving with much honour, and putting great
+confidence in us. On the 18th, a negro belonging to the Duchess was
+bitten by a small brown speckled snake, and died in twelve hours. There
+are many snakes in this island of Gorgona, and I saw one above three
+yards long, and as thick as my leg. The same morning the Mr Morels went
+off a second time in our bark for money; and this day one of the same
+kind of snakes that killed our negro was found on the forecastle of the
+Duke, having crawled up the cable, as we supposed, as they were often
+seen in the water.
+
+On the 2d of August we were like to have had a mutiny, for the steward
+informed me that he understood many of the men had entered into a secret
+agreement, and he had heard some ringleaders boasting that sixty men had
+already signed the paper, but knew not the nature of their design. I
+immediately convened the officers in the cabin, where we armed
+ourselves, and soon secured four of the principal mutineers, putting the
+fellow who wrote the paper in irons. By this time all the people were on
+deck, and we had got their paper from those we had in custody; the
+purport of it being to refuse accepting the intended distribution of
+plunder, and not to move from this place, till they had what they termed
+justice done them. Not knowing how far this mutiny might have been
+concerted with the people of the other ships, we agreed to discharge
+those in confinement, on asking pardon, and faithfully promising never
+to be guilty of the like again.
+
+We sailed from Gorgona on the 11th August, and as our ships were now
+rather thinly manned, I engaged thirty-two of our negro prisoners to
+join our company, placing Michael Kendall, a free Jamaica negro, who had
+deserted to us from the Spaniards, as their leader, and charging him to
+exercise them in the use of arms. At the same time I supplied them with
+clothes, desiring them to consider themselves now as Englishmen, and no
+longer slaves to the Spaniards. After this we stood over to the bay of
+_Jecames_, [Atacames,] where the Indians are free; and with much ado
+entered into trade with them, by the help of a priest. We sent them
+three large wooden saints to adorn their church, which they took as a
+great present; and I sent a feathered cap to the wife of the chief which
+was well accepted. We here sold some of our prize goods to good account,
+so that we had provisions very cheap. We sailed from hence on the 1st
+September, intending for the Gallapagos, and on the 8th we made one of
+these islands.
+
+Next day we came to anchor in about thirty fathoms; and in the evening
+our boats brought us off a lading of excellent turtle, having sent our
+yawl and several men ashore previously to turn over these creatures in
+the night; but to no purpose, as we afterwards found they only came
+ashore in the day. The island off which we lay was high, rocky, and
+barren, with some low land next the sea, but now water was to be found,
+like those we had seen formerly. On the 12th the Duchess, which lay at
+anchor a good distance from us, had got about 150 land and
+sea-tortoises, but not generally so large as ours; while we had 120
+turtles, but no land-tortoises as yet. The Marquis had the worst luck.
+On the 13th, I sent our pinnace to the place where the Duchess got
+land-tortoises, which returned at night with thirty-seven, and some salt
+they had found in a pond; and our yawl brought us twenty sea-turtles, so
+that we were now well provided. Some of the largest land-tortoises
+weighed 100 pounds; and the largest sea-turtles were upwards of 400
+pounds weight. The land-tortoises laid eggs on our deck; and our men
+brought many of them from the land, pure white, and as large as a
+goose's egg, with a strong thick shell, exactly round.
+
+These are the ugliest creatures that can well be imagined, the
+back-shell being not unlike the top of an old hackney-coach, as black as
+jet, and covered with a rough shrivelled skin. The neck and legs are
+long, and as big as a man's wrist, and they have club-feet as large as a
+fist, shaped much like those of an elephant, having five knobs, or thick
+nails, on each fore-foot, and only four on the hind-feet. The head is
+small, with a visage like that of a snake; and when first surprised they
+shrink up their head, neck, and legs under their shell. Some of our men
+affirmed that they saw some of these about four feet high, and of vast
+size; and that two men mounted on the back of one of these, whom it
+easily carried at its usual slow pace, not appearing to regard their
+weight. They supposed this one could not weigh less than 700 pounds. The
+Spaniards say that there are no others in these seas, except at the
+Gallapagos, but they are common in Brazil.
+
+The 15th, being under sail with a fine breeze, we agreed to lay to till
+midnight. The 16th, seeing many islands and rocks to the westwards, we
+agreed to bear away, not caring to encumber ourselves among them during
+the night; but by six in the evening, from the mast-head, we could see
+so many low rocks, almost joining from island to island, that we seemed
+land-locked for more than three parts of the compass, and no way open
+except the S.W. whence we came. We resolved therefore to return that
+way, making short trips all night, and continually sounding, for fear of
+shoals, having from forty to sixty fathoms. The 18th and 19th we saw
+several more islands, one of them very large, which we supposed to be
+near the equator. At noon of the 19th we had an observation, making our
+latitude 2 deg. 2' N. We saw in all at least fifty islands, some of which we
+searched, and others we viewed from a distance, but none had the least
+appearance of fresh water.[228] Signior Morel told me that a Spanish
+man-of-war had been to an island in lat. 1 deg. 20' or 30' S. 140 Spanish
+leagues west from the island of _Plata_, and to which they gave the name
+of _Santa Maria del Aguada_, a pleasant island with a good road, full of
+wood, and having plenty of water, with turtle and sea-tortoises in
+abundance. This I believe to have been the same island in which Davis
+the buccaneer recruited; and all the light he has left by which to find
+it again, is, that it is to the west of the islands he was at with the
+other buccaneers, which must be those we were twice at. We had no
+occasion to look out for this island on the present trip, though I
+believe it might easily have been found without farther directions. In
+these islands there are many kinds of sea-fowl, and some land-birds,
+particularly hawks and turtle-doves, both so very tame that we often
+knocked them down with sticks. I saw no kind of beasts, but there are
+guanas in abundance, and land-tortoises almost on every island, besides
+vast numbers of turtles or sea-tortoises. It is very strange how the
+land-tortoises have got here, as there are none on the main, and they
+could not have come of themselves. Some of these islands are the haunts
+of seals, but not in such numbers as at Juan Fernandez, neither is their
+fur so good. A very large one made at me three several times, and if I
+had not happened to have a pike-staff headed with iron, he might have
+killed me. I was on the level sand when he came open-mouthed at me from
+the water, as fierce and quick as an angry dog let loose. All the three
+times he made at me, I struck the pike into his breast, which at last
+forced him to retire into the water, snarling with an ugly noise, and
+shewing his long teeth. This animal was as big as a large bear.
+
+[Footnote 228: In Cowley's voyage, formerly given, one of these
+islands, which he calls the Duke of York's Island, is said to have
+abundance of wood and water, but none to be had in any of the rest.
+Perhaps the Duke of York's Island of Cowley, and Santa Maria del Aguada
+of Morel, may be the same.--E.]
+
+On the 1st October we made the main-land of Mexico, which Captain
+Dampier immediately recognized as near the place where he had attacked
+the lesser Manilla ship in the St George. Our men began again to fall
+sick, and two of them dropped down on the deck in a kind of scorbutic
+appoplexy, but recovered on being let blood. The 2d we made _Cape
+Corientes_, on the coast of Mexico, in lat. 20 deg. 25' N. which we knew by
+our charts. Captain Dampier had been here, but it was a long time ago,
+and he did not seem to remember much of the matter; yet when he came to
+land at different places, he very readily recollected them. Our purpose
+now was to look for the islands called _Tres Marias_, to procure some
+refreshments, but found this somewhat difficult, being very uncertain as
+to their true situation. In the afternoon of the 4th, Cape Corientes
+bore E.N.E. about ten leagues, and next morning, being fine clear
+weather, we discovered two islands at the distance of about fourteen
+leagues, one bearing N. by W. and the other N. by E. At noon we had an
+observation, and found our latitude 20 deg. 45' N.
+
+The sight of these islands was very satisfactory, for though our men had
+their fill of land and sea-turtle, which kept them from the scurvy, they
+were but weak, as that is but a faint food, except they had enough of
+bread or flour to eat with it; whereas they only had a pound and a
+quarter of bread or flour to five men per day, on purpose to husband our
+stock till we came to live entirely on salt-meat, when we should be
+under the necessity to allow more. On the 6th I sent a pinnace to the
+eastern island, to look if there were any good road, or convenience for
+wooding and watering; but the officer reported that the island had foul
+ground for near half a mile from the shore, with bad anchorage and worse
+landing; and though there was abundance of wood, no water was to be had.
+This was bad news for us, as our water began to grow scarce. We now bore
+up for the middle island, which Captain Dampier believed he had been at
+when he sailed with Captain Swan, and on which occasion they found
+water. On the 8th our boat returned from the middle island, they and the
+boat of the Duchess having landed at several places on the S.E. side of
+the island, where was plenty of good water. They saw no signs of any
+people having been there lately, but found a human skull on the ground.
+This was supposed to have belonged to one of two Indian chiefs, who were
+left there by Captain Swan, about twenty-three years before, as Dampier
+told us: for victuals being scarce with these buccaneers, they would not
+carry the poor Indians any farther, after they had served their turns,
+but left them to starve on this desolate island. The Marquis and bark
+having separated from us, we kept a light up all night, and made a fire
+on the island, that they might see where to find us at anchor; but not
+seeing them next morning at day-break, I proposed to have gone in search
+of them; but Captain Courtney and the rest made light of the matter,
+believing they might soon come in without assistance, which they
+afterwards did.
+
+The supply of cattle, hogs, and plantains we procured at Atacames lasted
+us to the Gallapagos, and we had fed on turtle ever since till the last
+two days, which was a great refreshment to our men, and husbanded our
+stock of European provisions. On the 9th, I sent an officer to view the
+other side of the island, who told me, on his return, it was much better
+than where we were, having several sandy bays, on which he had seen the
+tracks of turtle. On this intelligence I sent the boat back in the
+evening; and it came back next morning with a full load of turtle,
+leaving another load ready turned; and, what was of much more
+consequence, they found good water; whereas that we had gotten hitherto
+purged the men excessively. As we wooded, watered, and furnished
+ourselves with fresh provisions here, and as these islands are little
+known, some account of them may be acceptable.
+
+The _Tres Marias_, or Three Marias, off the western coast of
+Guadalaxara, in the kingdom of Mexico, are in a range stretching from
+S.E. to N.W. of about forty-five English miles in length. The largest
+island is the N.W. which appeared a high double land, and above five
+leagues in length: the middle island about three leagues; and the
+south-eastermost hardly two leagues. There also are high lands, full of
+trees; and near the least island there are two or three small broken
+white islets, one of which was so like a ship under sail, that we gave
+the signal for a chase. The S.E. end of the island is in lat. 21 deg. 10' N.
+long. 105 deg. 56' W. and the N.W. point of the N. island is in lat. 21 deg. 40'
+N. long. 106 deg. 26' W. the distance from each being about two marine
+leagues. These islands have abundance of parrots of different sorts,
+with pigeons and other land-birds, of which we killed great numbers.
+There were also many excellent hares, but much smaller than ours. We saw
+likewise abundance of guanas, and some racoons, which barked and snarled
+at us like dogs, but were easily beaten off with sticks. The water is
+more worthy of remark than any other thing we saw here, as we only found
+two good springs, which ran in large streams; the others being bitter
+and disagreeable, proceeding, as I suppose, from being impregnated by
+shrubs or roots growing in the water, or from some mineral.
+
+The turtle we found here are of a different sort from any I had ever
+seen, though very good. Though it is ordinarily believed that there are
+only three sorts of sea-turtles, yet we have seen six or seven sorts at
+different times, and our people have eaten of them all, except the very
+large _whooping_ or _loggerhead_ kind, which are found in great plenty
+in Brazil, some of them above 500 pounds weight. We did not eat of
+these, because at that time our provisions were plentiful. At the
+Gallapagos, both males and females were observed to come on shore only
+in the day time, quite different from what I had heard of them at other
+places; whereas all we caught here were by turning them over in the
+night, when the females come on shore to lay their eggs and bury them in
+the dry sand. One of these whom we caught had 800 eggs in her belly, 150
+of which were skinned over and ready for being extruded at once. Some
+authors alledge that these eggs are six weeks in hatching, which I can
+hardly credit, as the sun makes the sand in which they are deposited
+excessively hot, and they are only covered by a very thin film or skin,
+instead of a shell. In order to ascertain this point, I made some of our
+men ashore watch one carefully, and mark the place and time of laying
+her eggs. In less than twelve hours they found the eggs addled, and in
+about twelve hours more they had young ones completely formed and alive.
+Had we remained some time longer, I might have thoroughly satisfied
+myself and others, respecting the quick production of tortoises; for I
+am apt to credit the report of several of our men, who asserted that
+having found eggs in the sand, and looked for them three days afterwards
+in the same place, they then found nothing but films; which shews that
+the young ones are hatched in that time. They assured me also that they
+had seen the young brood run out of the sand every day, making directly
+in great numbers for the sea.
+
+There were few fish about the shores of this island, these being of the
+ordinary sorts usually met with in these seas; but the abundance of
+turtle at this time amply made up for this defect. The chief officers
+fed here deliciously, being scarcely ever without hares, turtle-doves,
+pigeons, and parrots of various colours and sizes, many of which had
+white or red heads, with tufts of feathers on their crowns. We found
+good anchorage at this middle island, and gradual soundings from
+twenty-four to four fathoms close by the shore; and between this and the
+least or southern island the depth was about the same as where we were,
+having no shoal between but what was visible, as a rock lay off the S.W.
+point and a shoal off the N.E. point of the same, with another at a
+great distance from that point of the least island, but neither were
+above half a mile from the shore.
+
+Sailing from these islands, we saw land on the 1st November, which
+proved to be the point of California, or that headland called Cape St
+Ducas. It was now necessary to put in execution the rules we had
+formerly laid down for cruizing, as also to settle our regulations about
+plunder. Accordingly, my station was to be the outermost in the Duke,
+the Duchess in the middle, and the Marquis nearest the shore; the
+nearest ship to be at the least six leagues, and nine at the most from
+shore, and the bark to ply between ship and ship, carrying advice. By
+this means we could spread out fifteen leagues, and might see any thing
+that passed in the day within twenty leagues of the shore; and to
+prevent any ships passing in the night, we were to ply to windward all
+day, and to drive to leeward all night. On the 5th November, the Duchess
+went nearest shore, and the Marquis took the middle station. We were
+much encouraged by considering that in this very place, and about the
+same time of the year, Sir Thomas Candish took the Manilla ship.
+
+On the 16th we sent our bark to look for fresh water on the main, and
+next morning she returned to us, reporting that they had seen wild
+Indians, who paddled to them on bark-logs. These Indians were fearful of
+coming near our people at first, but were soon prevailed upon to accept
+a knife or two and some baize, for which they gave in return two
+bladders of water, two live foxes, and a deer skin. Till now, we thought
+that the Spaniards had missionaries among these people, but finding them
+quite naked, with no appearance of any European commodities, nor a
+single word of the Spanish language, we concluded that they were quite
+savage, and we dispatched the bark and a boat a second time, in hopes of
+procuring some refreshments, with some trifles to distribute among the
+natives. On the 19th our men returned, having become very familiar with
+the Californians, who were the poorest wretches that could be imagined,
+and had no manner of refreshments whatever to afford us. They brought
+off some Indian knives made of sharks teeth, and a few other
+curiosities, which I preserved to shew what shifts may be made. It was
+now the 9th of December, near a month after the time when the Manilla
+ships generally fall in with this coast, and we were much embarrassed by
+the impossibility of procuring any intelligence respecting them. On
+examining our provisions, we found only bread on board for seventy days,
+even at our present short allowance, and it would require not less than
+fifty days for our run across the Pacific to Guam, one of the Ladrones;
+wherefore we resolved to continue our cruize here no longer than other
+eight days. Being in want of water also, it was agreed upon that the
+Marquis should go first into a harbour for that necessary article, while
+the Duke and Duchess continued on the look-out, and then these other
+ships to do the same in succession.
+
+On the 21st December, while bearing up for the port in which was the
+Marquis, the man at the mast-head, about nine in the morning, gave
+notice that he saw a sail besides the Duchess and bark, seeming about
+seven leagues from us. We immediately hoisted our ensign, and bore for
+the strange sail, as did the Duchess; and as it fell calm, I sent the
+pinnace to endeavour to make out what she was. All the rest of the day
+we had very little wind, so that we made hardly any way, and as our boat
+did not return we remained in much anxiety, not knowing whether the ship
+in sight were our consort the Marquis, or the Manilla ship. In this
+uncertainty, I sent Mr Fry in our yawl to the Duchess, to endeavour to
+learn what this ship was, and as soon as the yawl was gone I hoisted
+French colours and fired a gun, which the stranger answered, and in some
+measure cleared our doubts. Mr Fry soon returned, bringing the joyful
+news that the ship in sight really was the Manilla galleon for which we
+had waited so long, and of which we were now almost in despair of
+meeting. This revived our courage, and every one actively prepared for
+the engagement; all our melancholy reflections on the shortness of our
+provisions for the run to Guam being now dispelled, and nothing now
+occupied our thoughts but of our being masters of the mighty treasure
+supposed to be on board this ship, while every moment seemed an hour
+till we could get up with her. We gave orders for the two pinnaces to
+keep with her all night, shewing false fires from time to time, that we
+might know whereabout they and the chase were; and it was agreed, if
+the Duke and Duchess could get up with her together, that we should
+board her at once. Before night we had made a clear ship, and had every
+thing in readiness for action at day-light; and all night long we kept a
+sharp look-out for the boats false fires, which we frequently saw and
+answered.
+
+At day-break of the 22d December, 1709, we saw the chase about a league
+from us on our weather bow, the Duchess being a-head of her to leeward
+about half a league. About six a.m. our boat came aboard, having kept
+very near the chase all night without receiving any damage, and told us
+that the Duchess passed the chase in the night, at which time the chase
+fired two shots at her, which were not returned. Having no wind, we got
+out eight sweeps, with which we rowed for near an hour, when there
+sprung up a small breeze. I ordered a large kettle of chocolate to be
+prepared for the ship's company, having no spirituous liquor to give
+them, and then went to prayers; but were disturbed before these were
+finished, by the enemy firing at us. To deter as from attempting to
+board, they had barrels hung at their yard arms, which resembled barrels
+of powder. About eight a.m. we began to engage by ourselves, for the
+Duchess being still at leeward, had not been able to get up, as there
+was very little wind. At first the enemy fired at us with their
+stern-chase guns, which we returned with those on our bows, till at
+length we got close on board each other, when we gave her several
+broadsides, plying our small arms very briskly; which last the enemy
+returned as thick for a time, but did not fire their great guns half so
+fast as we. After some time, we shot a little a-head, laying the enemy
+athwart hawse close aboard, and plied her so warmly that she soon
+lowered her colours two-thirds down. By this time the Duchess had got
+up, and fired about five guns with a volley of small arms; but as the
+enemy had submitted she made no return.
+
+We now sent our pinnace on board the prize, and brought away the captain
+and other officers; from whom we learnt that a larger ship had come from
+Manilla along with them, having forty-six brass guns and as many
+swivels, but they had parted company with her about three months before,
+and supposed she had got to Acapulco by this time, as she sailed better
+than this ship. Our prize had the following high-sounding name _Nostra
+Senoria de la Incarnacion Disenganio_, commanded by the Chevalier Jean
+Pichberty, a Frenchman. She had twenty guns and twenty pattereroes, with
+193 men, of whom nine were killed, ten wounded, and several sore
+scorched with gun-powder. We engaged her three glasses, in which time
+only I and another were wounded. I was shot through the left cheek, the
+bullet carrying away great part of my upper jaw and several of my teeth,
+part of which dropt on the deck, where I fell. The other was William
+Powell, an Irish landman, who was slightly wounded in the buttock. After
+my wound, I was forced to write my orders, both to prevent the loss of
+blood, and because speaking gave me great pain. We received little
+damage in our rigging during the engagement, except that a shot disabled
+our mizen-mast. On the 23d, after we had put our ship to rights, we
+stood in for the harbour where the Marquis was, distant about four
+leagues to the N.E. sending our surgeons on board the prize to dress her
+wounded men. We same to anchor in the harbour about four p.m. where we
+received the compliments of all on board the Marquis on our sudden and
+almost unlooked-for success, which gave us all much satisfaction. We
+found that ship in good condition and ready to sail, and all on board
+her in high spirits, eager for action. At eight the same evening we held
+a consultation on two important points: _first_, what we should do with
+our hostages; and, _secondly_, how we should act in regard to the other
+Manilla ship, which we still thought there was a strong probability of
+our taking, if we could remain here a little longer. As the hostages
+from Guayaquil, and the Chevalier Pichberty, brother to the famous
+Monsieur du Cass, appeared to be men of strict honour, we thought it was
+best to make the best terms we possibly could with them, and then set
+them at liberty. We had more difficulty in settling the other point in
+discussion, as to the mode of attacking the other Manilla ship. I was
+desirous of going out along with the Marquis on that service; but as
+some reflections had been cast on the Duchess for not engaging our late
+prize so soon as it was thought she might have done, Captain Courtney
+was absolutely bent on going out with his own ship and the Marquis, and
+having a majority in the committee, my proposal was overruled, and we in
+the Duke were reluctantly constrained to remain in harbour. It was
+agreed, however, that we should put ten of our best hands on board the
+Duchess, the better to enable her to engage the great Manilla ship, if
+she were fallen in with; and she and the Marquis sailed on
+Christmas-day. As soon as they were gone, we put part of the goods from
+our bark into the prize, in order to send away our prisoners in the
+bark; and as there were still due 4000 dollars of the Guayaquil ransom,
+we agreed to sell them the bark and her remaining cargo for 2000
+dollars, taking the Chevalier de Pichberty's bill for 6000 dollars,
+payable in London, which he readily gave us, together with an
+acknowledgment under his hand that we had given him a good bargain. This
+matter being settled, we had only to look to our own safety while our
+consorts were out on their cruize for the Manilla ship. We posted two
+centinels on a hill, whence they had a clear view of the sea, with
+instructions to give us notice by a signal whenever they saw three ships
+in the offing, that we might have time to secure our prisoners, and to
+get out to the assistance of our consorts, as we expected they might
+have hot work, this other Manilla ship being much stronger and better
+manned than the one we had taken, and better provided in all respects.
+
+On the afternoon of the 26th, our sentries made the appointed signal of
+seeing three ships; on which we immediately put all our prisoners into
+the bark, from which we removed her sails, and took away all our men,
+except two lieutenants and twenty-two men, whom we left to look after
+our prize and the prisoners. As the prisoners, though 170 in number,
+were secured in the bark, without sails, arms, rudder, or boat, and
+moored near a mile distant from our prize, there were more than
+sufficient for guarding them and giving them provisions and drink during
+our absence. This being arranged, we immediately weighed and stood to
+sea, in order to assist our consorts in attacking the great ship.
+Captain Dover thought proper to go on board the prize, instead of one of
+our lieutenants, whom he sent to me. I was still in a very weak
+condition, my head and throat being very much swelled, so that I spoke
+with great pain, and not loud enough to be heard at any distance;
+insomuch that all the chief officers and our surgeons wished me to
+remain in the prize, but I would not consent. We got under sail about
+seven p.m. and saw lights several times in the night, which we supposed
+to be false fires in the boats of our consorts. In the morning of the
+27th at day-break, we saw three sail to windward, but so far distant
+that it was nine o'clock before we could make out which were our
+consorts and which the chase. At this time we could see the Duchess and
+the chase near together, and the Marquis standing to them with all the
+sail she could carry. We also made all the sail we could, but being
+three or four leagues to leeward, and having a very scant wind, we made
+little way. At noon they bore S.E. from us, being still three leagues
+right to windward. In the afternoon we observed the Marquis get up with
+the chase, and engage her pretty briskly; but soon fell to leeward out
+of cannon shot, where she lay a considerable time, which made us
+conclude that she was somehow disabled.
+
+I sent away my pinnace well manned, with orders to dog the chase all
+night, making signals with false fires that she might not escape us; but
+before our boat could get up to them, the Marquis made sail again
+towards the chase, and went to it again briskly for more than four
+glasses. At this time we saw the Duchess steer ahead to windward, clear
+of the enemy, as I supposed to stop her leaks or repair her rigging.
+Meanwhile the Marquis kept the enemy in play, till the Duchess again
+bore down, when each fired a broadside or two, and left off because it
+grew dark. They then bore south of us in the Duke, which was right to
+windward, distant about two leagues; and about midnight our boat came to
+us, having made false fires, which we answered. Our people had been on
+board both the Duchess and Marquis, the former of which had her foremast
+much disabled, the ring of an anchor shot away, one man killed and
+several wounded, having also received several shots in her upper works
+and one in her powder-room, but all stopt. The Duchess had engaged the
+enemy by herself the night before, which was what we took to be false
+fires, being too distant to hear the guns. At that time they could
+perceive the enemy to be in great disorder, her guns not being all
+mounted, and neither her nettings nor close quarters in order; so that,
+if it had been my good fortune in the Duke to have gone with the
+Duchess, we all believed we might then have carried this great ship by
+boarding; or, if the Duchess had taken most of the men out of the
+Marquis, which did not sail well enough to come up to her assistance in
+time, she alone might have taken her by boarding at once, before the
+Spaniards had experienced our strength, and become afterwards so well
+provided as encouraged them to be driving, giving us every opportunity
+to board them if we pleased.
+
+Captain Cooke sent me word that he had nearly fired away all his powder
+and shot, but had escaped well in masts, rigging, and men; wherefore I
+sent him three barrels of powder and a proportion of shot; and I also
+sent Lieutenant Fry to consult with our consorts how we might best
+engage the enemy next morning. All this day and the ensuing night the
+chase made signals to us in the Duke, thinking us her consort, which we
+had already taken; and after dark she edged down towards us, otherwise I
+should not have been up with her next day, having very little wind and
+that against us. In the morning of the 28th, as soon as it was day, the
+wind veered at once, on which we put our ship about, and the chase fired
+first upon the Duchess, which was nearest her in consequence of the
+change of wind. The Duchess returned the fire briskly; and we in the
+Duke stood as near as we possibly could, firing our guns as we could
+bring them to bear upon the enemy. At this time the Duchess was athwart
+her hawse, firing very fast, and such of her shot as missed the enemy
+flew over us and between our masts, so that we ran the risk of receiving
+more harm from the Duchess than the enemy, if we had lain on her quarter
+and across her stern, which was my intention. We therefore took our
+station close along side, board and board, where we kept plying her with
+round shot only, using neither barshot nor grape, as her sides were too
+thick for these, and no men appeared in sight.
+
+She lay driving, as we did also close aboard of her, the enemy keeping
+to their close quarters, so that we never fired our small arms unless
+when we saw a man appear, or a port open, and then we fired as quick as
+possible. We continued thus for four glasses, about which time we
+received a shot in our main-mast which much disabled it. Soon after
+this, the Duchess and we, still both firing, came back close under the
+enemy, and had like to have fallen on board of her, so that we could
+make little use of our guns. We then fell astern in our birth alongside,
+and at this time the enemy threw a fire-ball into the Duke from one of
+her tops, which blew up a chest of loaded arms and cartouch-boxes on our
+quarter-deck, and several cartridges in our steerage, by which Mr
+Vanburgh, the agent of our owners, and a Dutchman, were very much burnt;
+and it might have done us much more damage if it had not been soon
+extinguished. After getting clear, the Duchess stood in for the shore,
+where she lay braced to, mending her rigging. The Marquis fired several
+shots, but to little purpose, as her guns were small. We continued close
+aboard for some time after the Duchess drew off; till at last we
+received a second shot in our main-mast, not far from the other, which
+rent it miserably; insomuch that the mast settled towards the wound, and
+threatened to come by the board. Our rigging also being much shattered,
+we sheered off and brought to, making a signal to our consorts for a
+consultation; and in the interim got ordinary fishes up to support our
+main-mast as well as we could.
+
+Captains Courtney and Cooke, with other officers, came aboard the Duke,
+in obedience to the signal, when we took the condition of our three
+ships into consideration. Their masts and rigging were much damaged, and
+we had no means of procuring any repairs. If we again engaged the enemy,
+we could not propose to do any more than we had done already, which
+evidently had not done her much harm, as we could perceive that few of
+our shots penetrated her sides to any purpose, and our small arms
+availed still less, as not one of their men were to be seen above board.
+Our main-mast was so badly wounded that the least additional injury
+would bring it down, and the fore-mast of the Duchess was in as bad a
+state. The fall of these masts might bring down others, and we should
+then lie perfect butts for the enemy to batter at, and his heavy guns
+might easily sink us. If we should attempt to carry her by boarding, we
+must necessarily run the risk of losing many of our men, with little
+prospect of success, as they had above treble our number to oppose us,
+not having now in all our three ships above 120 men fit for boarding,
+and these weak, as we had been long short of provisions. If, therefore,
+we attempted to board and were beaten off, leaving any of our men
+behind, the enemy would learn our strength, or weakness rather, and
+might go to the harbour and retake our prize, in spite of every thing we
+could do to hinder. Our ammunition also was now very short, and we had
+only, enough to engage for a few glasses longer. All these circumstances
+being duly considered, together with the difficulty of procuring masts,
+and the time and provisions we must spend before we could get them
+fitted we resolved to desist from any farther attempt upon the enemy,
+since our battering her signified little, and we had not sufficient
+strength to carry her by boarding. We determined therefore to keep her
+company till night, and then to lose her, after which to make the best
+of our way to the harbour where we had left our prize, to secure her.
+
+We had engaged this ship first and last about seven glasses, during
+which we in the Duke had eleven men wounded, three of whom were scorched
+with gun-powder. I was again unfortunately wounded by a splinter in my
+left foot, just before the arms chest was blown up on the quarter-deck;
+and so severely that I had to lie on my back in great pain, being unable
+to stand. Part of my heel-bone was struck out, and all the foot just
+under the ankle cut above half through, my wound bleeding very much
+before it could be stopped and dressed, by which I was much weakened. In
+the Duchess above twenty men were killed and wounded, one of the slain
+and three of the wounded belonging to my ship, which had been lent when
+I was left in the harbour. The Marquis had none killed or wounded, but
+two of her men were scorched by gun-powder. The enemy was the
+_Vigoniae_, a brave and lofty new ship, admiral of Manilla, and this her
+first voyage. She was calculated to carry 60 guns, and had above 40
+mounted, with as many pattereroes, all brass, and, as we were informed,
+had a complement of 450 men, of whom 150 were Europeans, besides
+passengers. We were told also that several of her crew had formerly been
+pirates, who had all their wealth on board, and were resolved to defend
+it to the last extremity. The gunner was said to be a very expert man,
+and had provided extraordinarily for defence, which enabled them to make
+a desperate resistance; and they had filled all her sides between the
+guns with bales of soft goods, to secure the men.
+
+During the whole action she kept the Spanish flag flying at her
+mast-head. We could observe that we had shattered her sails and rigging
+very much, and had slain two men in her tops, besides bringing down her
+mizen-yard; but this was all the visible damage we had done them, though
+we certainly placed 500 round shot in her hull, which were six-pounders.
+These large ships are built at Manilla of excellent timber, which does
+not splinter, and their sides are much thicker and stronger than those
+of the ships built in Europe. Thus ended our attempt on the biggest
+Manilla ship, which I have heard related in so many ways at home, that I
+have thought it necessary to give a very particular account of the
+action, as I find it set down in my journal. Generally speaking, the
+ships from Manilla are much richer than the prize we had taken; for she
+had waited a long time for the Chinese junks to bring silks, which not
+arriving, she came away with her cargo made out by means of abundance of
+coarse goods. Several of the prisoners assured me that a Manilla ship
+was commonly worth ten millions of dollars; so that, if it had not been
+for the accidental non-arrival of the junks from China that season, we
+had gotten an extraordinarily rich prize. After my return to Europe, I
+met a sailor in Holland who had been in the large ship when we engaged
+her, and who communicated to me a reason why we could not have taken her
+at all events. Her gunner kept constantly in the powder-room, and
+declared that he had taken the sacrament to blow up the ship if we had
+boarded her, which accordingly made the men exceedingly resolute in her
+defence. I the more readily gave credit to what this man told me, as he
+gave a regular and circumstantial account of the engagement, conformable
+to what I have given from my journal.
+
+It is hardly to be doubted that we might have set this great ship on
+fire, by converting one of our ships into a fireship for that purpose:
+But this was objected to by all our officers, because we had goods of
+value on board all our ships. The enemy on this occasion was the better
+provided for us, having heard at Manilla, through our British
+settlements in India, that two small ships had been fitted out at
+Bristol for an expedition into the South Sea, and of which Captain
+Dampier was pilot. On this account it was that they had so many
+Europeans on board the great ship, most of whom had all their wealth
+along with them, for which they would fight to the utmost; and it having
+been agreed to pay no freight on the gun-decks, they had filled up all
+the spaces between the guns with bales of goods, to secure the men. The
+two ships were to have joined at Cape Lucas, expecting to meet us off
+Cape Corientes or Navidad.
+
+We returned again into our port on the coast of California on the 1st
+January, 1710, and being resolved to make as quick dispatch as possible
+for our passage to the East Indies, we immediately parted with our
+prisoners, giving them the bark with a sufficiency of water and
+provisions to carry them to Acapulco. We then occupied ourselves to the
+7th in refitting and laying in a stock of wood and water; and had much
+satisfaction in finding as much bread in our prize as might serve for
+our long run to Guam, with the aid of the scanty remains of our old
+stock. After a long disputatious negotiation, it was settled that Mr Fry
+and Mr Stratton were to take charge of our prize, which we named the
+Bachelor, though under Captain Dover, but they were not to be
+contradicted by him in the business, as his business was to see that
+nothing was done in her contrary to the interest of our owners and ships
+companies, he being in the nature of agent, only with the title of chief
+captain. At the same time, we put on board of this ship 35 men from the
+Duke, 25 from the Duchess, and 13 from the Marquis, making in all 73
+men, which, with 36 Manilla Indians, called _Las-Cars_, and some other
+prisoners we still had remaining, made up her complement to 115 men.
+
+SECTION III
+
+_Sequel of the Voyage, from California, by Way of the East Indies, to
+England_.
+
+
+WE weighed anchor on the 10th January, 1710, from Porta Leguro, on the
+coast of California, but were becalmed under the shore till the
+afternoon of the 12th, when a breeze sprang up which soon carried us out
+of sight of land. Being very slenderly provided, we were forced to allow
+only a pound and a half of flour, and one small piece of beef, to five
+men in a mess, together with three pints of water a man, for twenty-four
+hours, to serve both as drink and for dressing their victuals. We also
+lowered ten of our guns into the hold, to ease our ship. On the 16th the
+Bachelor made a signal that she could spare us some additional bread,
+having discovered a considerable store of bread and sweet-meats, though
+very little flesh meat. Accordingly, we in the Duke had a thousand
+weight of bread for our share, the Duchess had as much, and the Marquis
+five hundred weight; and in return we sent them two casks of flour, one
+of English beef; and one of pork, as they had only left forty-five days
+provisions of flesh. We now agreed to proceed in a W.S.W. course till we
+reached the latitude of 13 deg. N. and to keep in that parallel till we
+should make the island of Guam, being informed by our Spanish pilot that
+the parallel of 14 deg. was dangerous, by reason of certain islands and
+shoals, on which a Spanish ship had been lost some time ago.
+
+On the 11th March we had sight both of _Guam_ and _Serpana,_ the former
+bearing W.S.W. five leagues off, and the latter N.N.W. seven leagues.
+The Spaniards say there is a great shoal between these islands, but
+nearest to Serpana. While running along the shore of Guam there came
+several flying proas to look at us, but run past with great swiftness,
+and none of the people would venture on board. The necessity of our
+stopping at this island for a supply of provisions was very great, our
+sea store being almost exhausted, and what remained being in a very
+ordinary condition, especially our bread and flour, of which we had not
+enough for fourteen days, even at the shortest allowance. In order to
+procure provisions readily, we endeavoured to get some of the natives on
+board from the proas, that we might detain them as hostages, in case of
+having to send any of our men to the governor. While turning into the
+harbour under Spanish colours, one of the proas came under our stern, in
+which were two Spaniards, who came on board in consequence of being
+assured that we were friends. Soon after we sent a respectful letter to
+the governor, to which we next day received a civil answer, and a
+generous offer of any thing we needed that the island could supply.
+Several of our officers went ashore to wait upon the governor on the
+16th, and were well received and elegantly entertained; making the
+governor a present of two negro boys dressed in rich liveries, twenty
+yards of scarlet cloth, and six pieces of cambric, with which he seemed
+to be much pleased, and promised in return to give us every assistance
+in his power.
+
+Next day, accordingly, we had a large supply of provisions, our share in
+the Duke being about sixty hogs, ninety-nine fowls, twenty-four baskets
+of maize, fourteen bags of rice, forty-two baskets of yams, and 800
+cocoa-nuts. We afterwards got some bullocks, fourteen to each ship,
+being small lean cattle, yet gladly accepted, to which were afterwards
+added two cows and two calves to each ship; and we made a handsome
+present to the deputy governor, who was very active in getting our
+provisions collected. Leaving Guam, we proposed to go for some way
+directly west, to clear some islands that were in the way, and then to
+steer for the S.E. part of Min-danao, and from thence the nearest way to
+Ternate. In the afternoon of the 14th April we made land, which bore
+from us W.N.W. ten leagues, and which we supposed to be the N.E. part of
+Celebes. This day we saw three water-spouts, one of which had like to
+have fallen on board the Marquis, but the Duchess broke it before it
+reached her by firing two guns. On the 18th May, we passed through
+between the high land of New Guinea and the island of Gilolo, and on the
+20th we made another high island which we took to be Ceram, yet,
+notwithstanding the skill and experience of Captain Dampier, we were at
+a loss to know whether it were Ceram or Bouro. On the 24th, at noon, we
+made our latitude 4 deg. 30' S. and estimated our longitude at 237 deg. 29' W.
+from London, and being in the latitude of the southern part of
+Bouro,[229] we imputed our not seeing it to the currents setting us to
+the westwards. We designed to have touched at Amboina for refreshments,
+but the S.E. monsoon was already set in, and we were out of hope of
+being able to reach that place. In a consultation on the 25th, we
+resolved not to spend time in searching for Bouro, and also to desist
+from attempting to go to Amboina, and to make the best of our way for
+the Straits of Bouton, where we hoped to get sufficient provisions to
+carry us to Batavia. We got into a fine large bay in Bouton, where we
+sent our pinnace on shore, which brought off some cocoa nuts, reporting
+there were plenty to be had, and that the Malay inhabitants seemed
+friendly.
+
+[Footnote 229: The south part of Bouro is only in lat. 3 deg. 50' S. and
+about 283 deg. W. from Greenwich, or London.--E.]
+
+Up this bay we saw several houses and boats, and many of the Malay
+natives walking about on the beach. We here sent our boats for
+provisions and pilots while the ships turned up the bay nearer to the
+town. On sounding frequently we could find no ground, but the natives
+told us of a bank opposite the town on which we might anchor. In the
+meantime abundance of people came off to us, bringing wheat, cocoa-nuts,
+yams, potatoes, papaws, hens, and several other kinds of birds, to truck
+for cloths, knives, scissars, and toys. These people were to appearance
+very civil, being Mahometans of middle stature and dark tawny
+complexions, but their women somewhat clearer than the men. The men that
+came off were all naked, except a cloth round their middles, but some of
+the better sort had a sort of loose waistcoat, and a piece of linen
+rolled round their heads, with a cap of palm leaves to keep off the
+scorching rays of the sun. Along the shore we saw several weirs for
+catching fish. In turning up, the prize lost ground considerably, as the
+current was strong against us, wherefore the Duchess fired a gun in the
+evening to recall us and the Marquis, and which we ran out and drove all
+night. The names of these two islands forming this bay are _Cambava_ and
+_Waushut_, being in lat. 5 deg. 13' S. and long 238 deg. W. from London.[230]
+Being much in want of water and provisions, we made another effort to
+get back to this bay; and on the 30th, a proa came to us from the king
+of Bouton, having a noble on board without either shoes or stockings,
+and a pilot to carry us up to the town. He brought each commander a
+piece of striped Bouton cloth, a bottle of arrack, some baskets of rice,
+and other articles, as presents from the king; yet the first thing he
+said on coming aboard, was to ask us how we durst venture to come here
+to anchor, without first having leave from the great king of Bouton?
+
+[Footnote 230: Cambaya, a considerable island to the W. of Bouton, is in
+lat. 5 deg. 20' S. and long. 237 deg. 40' W. from Greenwich, nearly in the
+situation pointed out in the text.--E.]
+
+This proa brought us letters from our officers that had been sent to
+wait upon the king, and to endeavour to procure provisions, which stated
+that they had been well received, and that the town in which the king
+resided was large and fortified, and had several great guns. We sent
+back a present to the king by his messenger, and five guns were fired by
+each of our ships at his departure, with which he seemed well pleased.
+We wooded and watered at the island of _Sampo,_ and several proas came
+off to us with fowls, maize, pompions, papaws, lemons, Guinea corn, and
+other articles, which they trucked for knives, scissars, old clothes,
+and the like. The people were civil, but sold every thing very dear; and
+as our officers staid longer at the town than was intended, we began to
+suspect they were detained, as the Mahometans are very treacherous. We
+heard from them, however, every day; and on the 5th Mr Connely came
+down, and told us there were four lasts of rice coming down from the
+king, for which it had been agreed to pay 600 dollars, and that Mr
+Vanburgh had been detained in security of payment. The rice came next
+morning, and was distributed equally among our four ships, some great
+men coming along with it to receive the money. At this time also we in
+our turn detained a Portuguese who came from the king, till our boat
+should be allowed to return; and after this, provisions became more
+plentiful and cheaper.
+
+The town of _Bouton_ is built on the acclivity of a hill, and on the top
+of the hill is a fort surrounded by an old stone wall, on which some
+guns and pattereroes are placed. The king and a considerable number of
+people dwell in this fort, in which a market is held every day for the
+sale of provisions. The king has five wives, besides several concubines,
+being attended by four men carrying great canes with silver heads, who
+are called _pury bassas,_ and who seem to manage all his affairs. His
+majesty goes always bare-footed and bare-legged, being for the most part
+clad like a Dutch skipper, with a sort of green gauze covering strewed
+with spangles over his long black hair; but when he appears in state, he
+wears a long calico gown over his jacket, and sits on a chair covered
+with red cloth. He is always attended by a sergeant and six men armed
+with match-locks; besides three others, one of whom wears a head-piece
+and carries a large drawn scymitar, another has a shield, and a third a
+large fan. Four slaves sit at his feet, one holding his betel box,
+another a lighted match, the third his box of tobacco for smoking, and
+the fourth a spitting bason. The petty kings and other great men sit on
+his left hand and before him, every one attended by a slave, and they
+chew betel or tobacco in his presence, sitting cross-legged, and when
+they speak to him they lift their hands joined to their foreheads.
+
+The town of Bouton is very populous, and beside it runs a fine river,
+said to come from ten miles up the country. The tide ebbs and flows a
+considerable way up this river, which has a bar at its mouth, so that
+boats cannot go in or come out at low water. At least 1500 boats belong
+to this river, fifty of which are war proas, armed with pattereroes, and
+carrying forty or fifty men each. Fifty islands are said to be tributary
+to this king, who sends his proas once a year to gather their stated
+tribute, which consists in slaves, every island giving him ten
+inhabitants out of every hundred. There is one mosque, in Boutan, which
+is supplied with priests from Mocha, the people being Mahometans. They
+are great admirers of music, their houses are built on posts, and their
+current money is Dutch coins and Spanish dollars. On the 7th our pinnace
+returned with Mr Vanburgh and all our people, having parted from his
+majesty on friendly terms, but could not procure a pilot. We resolved,
+however, not to stay any longer, but to trust to Providence for our
+future preservation: wherefore we began to unmoor our ships, and
+dismissed our Portuguese linguist.
+
+Next day, the 8th June, we made three islands to the north of
+_Salayer._ On the 10th our pinnace came up with a small vessel, the
+people on board of which said they were bound for the Dutch factory of
+Macasser on the S.W. coast of Celebes. The pinnace brought away the
+master of this vessel, who engaged to pilot us through the Straits of
+Salayer and all the way to Batavia, if we would keep it secret from the
+Dutch, and he sent his vessel to lie in the narrowest part of the
+passage between the islands, till such time as our ships came up. On the
+14th we passed the island of Madura, and on the 17th we made the high
+land of Cheribon, which bore S.W. from us. This morning we saw a great
+ship right ahead, to which I sent our pinnace for news. She was a ship
+of Batavia of 600 tons and fifty guns, plying to some of the Dutch
+factories for timber. Her people told us that we were still thirty Dutch
+leagues from Batavia, but there was no danger by the way, and they even
+supplied us with a large chart, which proved of great use to us. Towards
+noon we made the land, which was very low, but had regular soundings, by
+which we knew how to sail in the night by means of the lead; in the
+afternoon we saw the ships in the road of Batavia, being between thirty
+and forty sail great and small; and at six in the evening we came to
+anchor, in between six and seven fathoms, in the long-desired port of
+Batavia, in lat 6 deg. 10' S. and long. 252 deg. 51' W. from London.[231] We had
+here to alter our account of time, having lost almost a day in going
+round the world so far in a western course.
+
+[Footnote 231: The latitude in the text is sufficiently accurate, but
+the longitude is about a degree short. It ought to have been 253 deg. 54' W.
+from Greenwich--E.]
+
+After coming in sight of Batavia, and more especially after some sloops
+or small vessels had been aboard of us, I found that I was quite a
+stranger to the dispositions and humours of our people, though I had
+sailed so long with them. A few days before they were perpetually
+quarrelling, and a disputed lump of sugar was quite sufficient to have
+occasioned a dispute. But now, there was-nothing but hugging and shaking
+of hands, blessing their good stars, and questioning if such a paradise
+existed on earth; and all because they had arrack for eight-pence a
+gallon, and sugar for a penny a pound. Yet next minute they were all by
+the ears, disputing about who should put the ingredients together; for
+the weather was so hot, and the ingredients so excessively cheap, that
+a little labour was now a matter of great importance among them.
+
+Soon after our arrival at Batavia we proceeded to refit our ships,
+beginning with the Marquis; but on coming down to her bends, we found
+both these and the stern and stern-port so rotten and worm-eaten, that
+on a survey of carpenters she was found incapable of being rendered fit
+for proceeding round the Cape of Good Hope, on which we had to hire a
+vessel to take in her loading. We then applied ourselves to refit the
+other ships, which we did at the island of Horn, not being allowed to do
+so at _Onrust_, where the Dutch clean and careen all their ships. We
+hove down the Duke and Duchess and Bachelor, the sheathing of which
+ships were very much worm-eaten in several places. In heaving down, the
+Duchess sprung her fore-mast, which we replaced by a new one. When the
+ships were refitted, we returned to Batavia road, where we rigged three
+of them, and sold the Marquis, after taking out all her goods and
+stores, and distributing her officers and men into the others. During
+our stay at Batavia, the weather was exceedingly hot, and many of our
+officers and men fell sick, among whom I was one, the prevalent disease
+being the flux, of which the master of the Duke and gunner of the
+Duchess died, and several of our men. A young man belonging to the
+Duchess, having ventured into the sea to swim, had both his legs snapped
+off by a shark, and while endeavouring to take him on board, the shark
+bit off the lower part of his belly. We were allowed free access to the
+town and markets, yet found it difficult to procure salt-meat, so that
+we had to kill bullocks for ourselves, and pickled the flesh, taking out
+all the bones. Arrack, rice, and fowls were very cheap, and we bought
+beef for two _stivers_, or two-pence a pound.
+
+There are various descriptions of this famous city, yet, as what I have
+to say may serve to exhibit a state of things as they were when we were
+there, I flatter myself that the following succinct account may neither
+be found useless nor disagreeable. The city of Batavia is situated on
+the N.W. side of the famous island of Java, in lat. 5 deg. 50' S.[232]
+During the whole year the east and west monsoons, or trade-winds, blow
+along shore; besides which it is refreshed by the ordinary land and sea
+breezes, which greatly cool the air, otherwise it would be intolerably
+hot. The summer begins here in May, and continues till the end of
+October, or beginning of November, during all which period there is a
+constant breeze from the east, with a clear serene sky. The winter
+commences in the end of October, or beginning of November, with
+excessive rains, which sometimes continue for three or four days without
+intermission. In December the west-wind blows with such violence as to
+stop all navigation on the coast of Java. In February the weather is
+changeable, with frequent sudden thunder-gusts. They begin to sow in
+March; June is the pleasantest month; and in September they gather in
+their rice, and cut the sugar-canes. In October they have abundance of
+fruits and flowers, together with plants and herbs in great variety.
+Around the city there is an extensive fenny plain, which has been
+greatly improved and cultivated by the Dutch; but to the east it still
+remains encumbered by woods and marshes. The city of Batavia is of a
+square form, surrounded by a strong wall, on which are twenty-two
+bastions, and has a river running through it into the sea. About the
+year 1700 there was a great earthquake in Java, which overturned some
+part of the mountains in the interior of the island, by which the course
+of the river was altered; and since then the canals in Batavia and the
+neighbourhood have not been nearly so commodious as formerly, nor has
+the entrance of the river been so deep; and for want of a strong current
+to keep it open, the Dutch have been obliged to employ a great machine
+to preserve the navigation of the mouth of the river, so as to admit
+small vessels into the canals which pervade the city. Batavia lies in a
+bay in which there are seventeen or eighteen islands, which so
+effectually protect it from the sea, that though large, the road is very
+safe. The banks of the canals are raced on both sides with stone quays,
+as far as the boom, which is shut up every night, and guarded by
+soldiers. All the streets are in straight lines, most of them being,
+above thirty feet broad on both sides, besides the canals, and they are
+all paved with bricks next the houses. All the streets are well-built
+and fully inhabited, fifteen of them having canals for small vessels,
+communicating with the main river, and shut up by booms, at which they
+pay certain tolls for admission; and these canals are crossed by
+fifty-six bridges, mostly of stone. There are numerous country-seats
+around the city, most of them neat and well contrived, with handsome
+fruit and flower gardens, ornamented with fountains and statues; and
+vast quantities of cocoa-nut trees planted in numerous groves, every
+where afford delightful shade. Batavia has many fine buildings,
+particularly the Cross-church, which is handsomely built of stone, and
+very neatly fitted up within. There are two or three other churches for
+the Dutch presbyterians, and two for the Portuguese catholics, who are a
+mixed race, besides one church for the Malay protestants. In the centre
+of the city is the town-house, handsomely built of brick in form of a
+square, and two stories high. In this all the courts are held, and all
+matters respecting the civil government of the city are determined.
+There are also hospitals, speir-houses, and rasp-houses, as in
+Amsterdam, with many other public buildings, not inferior to those of
+most European cities.
+
+[Footnote 232: The latitude of Batavia is 6 deg. 15' S. and its longitude
+106 deg. 7' E. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+The Chinese are very numerous, and carry on the greatest trade here,
+farming most of the excise and customs, being allowed to live according
+to their own laws, and to exercise their idolatrous worship. They have a
+chief of their own nation, who manages their affairs with the company,
+by which they are allowed great privileges, having even a representative
+in the council, who has a vote when any of their nation is tried for his
+life. These high privileges are only allowed to such of the Chinese as
+are domicilled here, all others being only permitted to remain six
+months in the city, or on the island of Java. The Chinese have also a
+large hospital for their sick and aged, and manage its funds so well,
+that a destitute person of that nation is never to be seen on the
+streets.
+
+The Dutch women have here much greater privileges than in Holland, or
+any where else; as on even slight occasions they can procure divorces
+from their husbands, sharing the estate between them. A lawyer at this
+place told me, that he has known, out of fifty-eight causes depending at
+one time before the council-chamber, fifty-two of them for divorces.
+Great numbers of native criminals are chained in pairs, and kept to hard
+labour under a guard, in cleaning the canals and ditches of the city, or
+in other public works. The castle of Batavia is quadrangular, having
+four bastions connected by curtains, all faced with white stone, and
+provided with watch-houses. Here the Dutch governor-general of India,
+and most of the members of the council of the Indies reside, the
+governor's palace being large, and well-built of brick. In this palace
+is the council-chamber, with the secretary's office, and chamber of
+accounts. The garrison usually consists of 1000 men; but the soldiers
+are generally but poorly appointed, except the governor's guards, who
+have large privileges, and make a fine appearance.
+
+The governor-general lives in as great splendour as if he were a king,
+being attended by a troop of horse-guards, and a company of halberdeers,
+in uniforms of yellow sattin, richly adorned with silver-lace and
+fringes, which attend his coach when he appears abroad. His lady also is
+attended by guards and a splendid retinue. The governor is chosen only
+for three years, from the twenty-four counsellors, called the _Radts_ of
+India, twelve of whom must always reside in Batavia. Their soldiers are
+well trained, and a company is always on duty at each of the gates of
+the city and citadel; and there are between seven and eight thousand
+disciplined Europeans in and about the city, who can be assembled in
+readiness for action on a short warning.
+
+Besides Europeans and Chinese, there are many Malays in Batavia, and
+other strangers from almost every country in, India. The Javanese, or
+ancient natives, are very numerous, and are said to be a proud barbarous
+people. They are of dark complexions, with flat faces, thin, short,
+black hair, large eyebrows, and prominent cheeks. The men are
+strong-limbed, but the women small. The men wear a calico wrapper, three
+or four times folded round their bodies; and the women are clothed from
+their arm-pits to their knees. They usually have two or three wives,
+besides concubines; and the Dutch say that they are much addicted to
+lying and stealing. The Javans who inhabit the coast are mostly
+Mahometans; but those living in the interior are still pagans. The women
+are not so tawny as the men, and many of them are handsome; but they are
+generally amorous, and unfaithful to their husbands, and are apt to deal
+in poisoning, which they manage with much art.
+
+Batavia is very populous, but not above a sixth part of the inhabitants
+are Dutch. The Chinese here are very numerous; and the Dutch acknowledge
+that they are more industrious and acute traders than themselves. They
+are much, encouraged, because of the great trade carried on by them, and
+the great rents they pay for their shops, besides large taxes, and from
+sixteen to thirty per cent. interest for money, which they frequently
+borrow from the Dutch. I was told, that there were about 80,000 Chinese
+in and about Batavia, who pay a capitation-tax of a dollar each per
+month for liberty to wear their hair, which is not permitted in their
+own country ever since the Tartar conquest. There generally come here
+every year from China, fourteen or sixteen large flat-bottomed junks, of
+from three to five hundred tons burden. The merchants come along with
+their goods, which are lodged in different partitions in the vessels, as
+in separate warehouses, for each of which they pay a certain price, and
+not for the weight or measure of the cargo, as with us, so that each
+merchant fills up his own division as they please. They come here with
+the easterly monsoon, usually arriving in November or December, and go
+away again for China in the beginning of June. By means of these junks
+the Dutch have all kinds of Chinese commodities brought to them, and at
+a cheaper rate than they could bring them in their own vessels.
+
+Batavia is the metropolis of the Dutch trade and settlements in India,
+and is well situated for the spice trade, which they have entirely in
+their own hands. There are seldom less than twenty sail of Dutch ships
+at Batavia, carrying from thirty to fifty and sixty guns each. Abraham
+van Ribeck was governor-general when we were there. His predecessor, as
+I was informed, had war with the natives of the island, who had like to
+have ruined the settlement; but, by sowing divisions among the native
+princes, he at length procured peace upon advantageous conditions. This
+is one of the pleasantest cities I ever saw, being more populous than
+Bristol, but not so large. They have schools for teaching all necessary
+education, even for Latin and Greek, and have a printing-house. There
+are many pleasant villas, or country seats, about the city; and the
+adjacent country abounds in rice, sugar-plantations, gardens, and
+orchards, with corn and sugar-mills, and mills for making gunpowder.
+They have also begun to plant coffee, which thrives well, so that they
+will shortly be able to load a ship or two; but I was told it is not so
+good as what comes from Arabia.
+
+We sailed from Batavia on the 11th October, 1710, and on the 19th came
+to anchor in a bay about a league W. from Java head, and remained till
+the 28th, laying in wood and water. The 15th December we made the land
+of southern Africa, in lat 34 deg. 2' S. And on the 18th we anchored in
+Table Bay in six fathoms, about a mile from shore. We remained here
+till the 5th April, waiting to go home with the Dutch fleet, and on that
+day fell down to Penguin Island, whence we sailed on the 5th for Europe.
+On the 14th July we spoke a Dane bound for Ireland, who informed us that
+a Dutch fleet of ten sail was cruizing for us off Shetland, which
+squadron we joined next day. On the 28d we got sight of the coast of
+Holland, and about eight p. m. came all safe to anchor in the Texel, in
+six fathoms, about two miles off shore. In the afternoon of the 24th I
+went up to Amsterdam, where I found letters from our owners, directing
+us how to act as to our passage from thence home. On the 30th we got
+some provisions from Amsterdam. On the 22d August we weighed from the
+Texel, but the wind being contrary, had to return next morning. We
+weighed again on the 30th, and on the 1st October came to anchor in the
+Downs, and on the 14th of that month got safe to _Eriff_, where we ended
+our long and fatiguing voyage.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+It appears, by incidental information in Harris, I. 198, That the outfit
+of this voyage did not exceed L14,000 or L15,000, and that its gross
+profits amounted to L170,000, half of which belonged to the owners; so
+that they had L85,000 to divide, or a clear profit of L466 13s. 4d. _per
+centum,_ besides the value of the ships and stores.--E.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI.
+
+VOYAGE ROUND THE WORLD, BY CAPTAIN JOHN CLIPPERTON, IN 1719-1722.[233]
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+
+About the beginning of 1718, some English merchants resolved to fit out
+two ships for a cruizing voyage to the South Sea, in hopes of having
+equal success with the expedition under Woods Rogers, and provided two
+fine ships, the Speedwell and Success, every way fit for the purpose.
+But as the war which was expected between Great Britain and Spain did
+not take place so soon as was expected, they applied for commissions
+from the Emperor Charles VI. who was then at war with Philip V. King of
+Spain. Captain George Shelvocke, who had served as a lieutenant in the
+royal navy, was accordingly sent with the Speedwell to Ostend, there to
+wait for the imperial commissions, and to receive certain Flemish
+officers and seamen, together with as much wine and brandy as might
+serve both ships during their long voyage, being cheaper there than in
+England. This was in November 1718, and both to shew respect to the
+imperial court, and to have the appearance of a German expedition, the
+names of the ships were changed to the Prince Eugene and the Staremberg.
+
+[Footnote 233: Harris, I. 184.]
+
+Having taken on board six Flemish officers and ninety men, Captain
+Shelvocke sailed from Ostend for the Downs, where the other ship had
+waited for him some time. War having begun between Great Britain and
+Spain, and finding that the Flemings and Englishmen did not agree, the
+owners laid aside all thoughts of using the imperial commission, and to
+send back all their Flemish officers and men to Flanders, with an
+allowance of two months wages, and procured a commission from George I.
+restoring the original names of their ships. The Speedwell carried
+twenty-four guns and 106 men, and the Success thirty-six guns and 180
+men; the former commanded by Captain George Shelvocke, who was to have
+had the chief command in the expedition, and the other by Captain John
+Clipperton, who had formerly sailed with Dampier as mate, and of whose
+adventures after his separation from Dampier, an account has been
+already given.
+
+In consequence of some change of circumstances, perhaps owing to some
+improper conduct when in Flanders, the proprietors now took the chief
+command from Shelvocke, and conferred it upon Clipperton, a man of a
+blunt, rough, and free-speaking disposition, but of a strict regard to
+his duty and rigid honesty. Though somewhat passionate, he was soon
+appeased, and ever ready to repair any injury he had done when heated
+with anger, and had much justice and humanity in his nature. Under
+Captain Shelvocke in the Speedwell, Simon Hately was appointed second
+captain; he who had formerly lost company with Woods Rogers among the
+Gallapagos islands, and had remained a considerable time prisoner among
+the Spaniards.
+
+The instructions for this voyage from the owners were, that they were to
+proceed in the first place for Plymouth, whence they were to sail with
+the first fair wind for Cape Horn or the Straits of Magellan, as was
+found most convenient for their passage into the South Sea. They were
+then to cruize on the coasts of Chili, Peru, and Mexico, and to
+endeavour, if possible, to meet and capture the Manilla ship. To prevent
+all disputes and disorders, they were enjoined to be careful above all
+things not to separate from each other, and to undertake nothing of
+importance without holding a council of officers, stating the question
+to be debated in writing, and drawing up the resolution in writing, with
+the reasons on which they were grounded, which were to be signed by all
+the officers. All these precautions proved in a great measure useless,
+as the expedition wore an unfortunate aspect from the very beginning.
+The ships were forced to remain three months at Plymouth, waiting for a
+wind; in which time every thing fell into confusion, and factions were
+formed, in which the crews of both ships were involved, from the
+captains down to the cabin boys. Captain Shelvocke highly resented the
+affront offered him in being deprived of the chief command; and Captain
+Clipperton, knowing the other's resentment, and being a boisterous man
+of strong passions which he could not conceal, there was nothing but
+debates and disputes. Every post carried complaints to the proprietors,
+and brought down instructions, reproofs, and exhortations to concord. It
+had been fortunate for the proprietors, if they had removed one or both
+of the commanders; but every one had too much concern to retain his
+friend in post, so that private views proved the cause of public
+ruin.--_Harris_.
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Narrative of the Voyage, from England to Juan Fernandez_.
+
+Having at length a fair wind, the two ships sailed in company from
+Plymouth on the 13th February, 1719. It singularly happened that the
+Speedwell had still on board the whole stock of wine, brandy, and other
+liquors, designed for the supply of both ships. On the 19th at night,
+there arose a violent storm, and on the 20th the storm abated about two
+in the afternoon, when Captain Clipperton in the Success made sail,
+steering S. by E. while Captain Shelvocke in the Speedwell bore away
+N.W. So that they never again saw each other, till they afterwards met
+by mere accident in the South Sea.
+
+Being now at sea without his consort, and very indifferently provided,
+Captain Clipperton found himself under the necessity of using a
+discretionary power of dispensing in some respect from his instructions;
+but which freedom he rarely exercised, and then with the utmost caution.
+In all essential points he carefully complied with the instructions,
+constantly consulting with his officers, and doing his utmost to
+prosecute his voyage with effect. The first place of rendezvous
+appointed in case of separation was the Canaries, for which he sailed
+with such expedition that he arrived there on the 6th of March. Having
+taken in refreshments there, for which he had much occasion, as all his
+liquors were in the Speedwell, Clipperton cruized on that station for
+ten days, as directed by his instructions, but not meeting his consort,
+he resolved to proceed to the next place appointed for that purpose, the
+Cape de Verd islands.
+
+The Canary Islands, or _Islands of Dogs_, so named by the Spaniards when
+discovered by them in 1402, because they found here a great number of
+these animals, were known to the ancients by the name of the Fortunate
+Islands, because of their fertility and the excellent temperature of
+their air. They are seven in number, Lancerota, Fuerteventura, Grand
+Canary, Teneriffe, Geomero, Hiero or Ferro, and Palma. _Grand Canary_ is
+far distant from the others, and contains 9000 inhabitants, being the
+seat of the bishop, the inquisition, and the royal council which governs
+all the seven islands. In Teneriffe is the famous mountain called
+_Terraira,_ or the Peak of Teneriff, supposed to be the highest in the
+world, and which may be distinctly seen at the distance of sixty
+leagues. There is no reaching the top of this mountain except in July
+and August, because covered at all other times with snow, which is never
+to be seen at other places of that island, nor in the other six, at any
+season of the year. It requires three days journey to reach the summit
+of the peak, whence all the Canary islands may be seen, though some of
+them are sixty leagues distant. _Hiero_ or _Ferro_ is one of the largest
+islands in this group, but is very barren, and so dry that no fresh
+water is to be found in it, except in some few places by the sea, very
+troublesome and even dangerous to get it from. "But, to remedy this
+inconvenience, Providence as supplied a most extraordinary substitute,
+as there grows almost in every place a sort of tree of considerable
+size, incomparably thick of branches and leaves, the latter being long
+and narrow, always green and lively. This tree is always covered by a
+little cloud hanging over it, which wets the leaves as if by a perpetual
+dew, so that fine clear water continually trickles down from them into
+little pails set below to catch it as it falls, and which is in such
+abundant quantity as amply to supply the inhabitants and their
+cattle."[234]
+
+[Footnote 234: This strange story seems entirely fabulous.--E.]
+
+These islands are generally fertile, and abound with all kinds of
+provisions, as cattle, grain, honey, wax, sugar, cheese, and skins. The
+wine of this country is strong and well-flavoured, and is exported to
+most parts of the world; and the Spanish ships bound for America usually
+stop at these islands to lay in a stock of provisions. About 100 leagues
+to the west of these islands, mariners are said to have frequently seen
+an island named _St Baranura,_ which they allege is all over green and
+very pleasant, full of trees, and abounding in provisions, as also that
+it is inhabited by Christians; but no person can tell what sect or
+denomination they are of, nor what language they speak. The Spanish
+inhabitants of the Canaries have often attempted to go there, but could
+never find the way; whence some believe that it is only an illusion or
+enchanted island, seen only at certain times. Others allege a better
+reason, saying that it is small and almost always concealed by clouds,
+and that ships are prevented from coming near it by the strength of the
+currents. It is certain however, that there is such an island, and at
+the distance from the Canaries already mentioned.[235]
+
+[Footnote 235: This island of St Baranora, or St Brandon, is merely
+imaginary.--E.]
+
+Leaving Gomera on the 15th March, Clipperton came in sight of St
+Vincent, one of the Cape de Verd islands, in the evening of the 21st,
+and came to anchor in the bay next morning. He here found a French ship,
+and the Diamond belonging to Bristol, taking in a cargo of asses for
+Jamaica. Continuing here for ten days, in hopes of meeting the
+Speedwell, but in vain, the crew of the Success became much
+disheartened, so that Clipperton had much difficulty in persuading them
+to persist in the enterprize. The _Cape de Verd islands,_ called _Salt
+islands_ by the Dutch, derive their name from Cape de Verd on the coast
+of Africa. The sea which surrounds them is covered by a green herb,
+called _Sergalso_ or cresses by the Portuguese, resembling
+water-cresses, and so thickly that hardly can the water be seen, neither
+can ships make their way through it but with a stiff gale. This herb
+produces berries, resembling white gooseberries, but entirely tasteless.
+No one knows how this herb grows, as there is no ground or land about
+the place where it is found floating on the water, neither can it be
+supposed to come from the bottom, as the sea is very deep, and is in
+many places quite unfathomable. This sea-weed begins to be seen in the
+lat. of 34 deg. N. where it is so thick that it seems as if islands, but is
+not to be met with in any other part of the ocean.
+
+The _Cape de Verd islands_, when first discovered by the Portuguese in
+1572, were all desert and uninhabited, but they now inhabit several of
+them. They are ten in number, St Jago, St Lucia, St Vincent, St Antonio,
+St Nicolas, Ilha Blanca, Ilha de Sal, Ilha de Maio, Ilha de Fogo, and
+Bonavista. They now afford plenty of rice, flour, Tartarian wheat,
+oranges, lemons, citrons, bananas, ananas or pine-apples, ignames,
+batatas, melons, cucumbers, pompions, garden and wild figs, and several
+other sorts of fruits. They have vineyards also, which produce ripe
+grapes twice a year; and have abundance of cattle, both great and small,
+but especially goats. The capital city is St Jago, in the island of that
+name, in which resides the governor who commands over all these islands
+under the King of Portugal. It is also the residence of an archbishop,
+whose see extends over all these islands, and over all the conquests of
+the Portuguese on this side of the Cape of Good Hope. These islands
+afford good convenience for ships on long voyages procuring a supply of
+fresh water. On the east side of Maio there is a little river, and as
+the island is uninhabited, there is nobody to hinder one from taking it:
+There is also water to be had on St Antonio, where also good
+refreshments may be had, of oranges, lemons, and other fruits; and the
+Portuguese on this island are so few in number, that they cannot prevent
+one from taking what they please.
+
+May the 29th having an observation, Clipperton found his latitude to be
+52 deg. 15' S. being then off Cape _Virgin Mary_, the northern point at the
+eastern entrance into the straits of Magellan, distant from _Fuego_, one
+of the Cape de Verd islands, 1580 leagues, the meridional distance being
+36 deg. 4' W.[236] Next day they entered the straits. Proceeding onwards to
+Queen Elizabeth's island, the pinnace was sent off to a fresh-water
+river on the main, which was found frozen up. They saw large flocks of
+geese and ducks at this place, but they were very shy. By some accident
+the surgeon's mate was left ashore at this place by the boat, and when
+brought on board next morning he was almost dead with the cold. They
+remained some time at Queen Elizabeth's island, which is dry and mostly
+barren, yet they found plenty of sallad herbs, which were of infinite
+service, the crew being much afflicted by the scurvy. The principal herb
+was _smallage_ of extraordinary size, which they eat raw, or boiled in
+their broth, and of which they brought away a considerable quantity of
+juice in bottles. On the 14th June, the empty water casks were sent
+ashore to be filled, and the carpenters went to look out for a proper
+piece of timber for a mizen-mast. They found abundance of wild fowl and
+shell fish on shore, which were most welcome to all the company, as they
+found their appetites to increase, while the necessity compelled the
+enforcement of short allowance. They anchored on the 22d in a fine bay,
+which they named _No-bottom Bay_, because of its great depth of water.
+The trees here are lofty, and so loaded with snow as to be a most
+astonishing sight. On the 29th there came to them a canoe in which were
+two men, a woman, and a boy. These were of middle stature, with dark
+complexions, broad, round faces, and low features, with low foreheads,
+lank short black hair, and no clothing except a piece of skin to cover
+their middles. The most extraordinary circumstance about them, was a
+fine streak round their wrists of an azure colour. They seem to be very
+jealous of their women, as they would on no account permit the woman who
+was along with them to come on board. Clipperton ordered them bread and
+cheese, and a dram of brandy, which last they refused to take, but they
+eat the bread and cheese voraciously. They had a fire in the middle of
+their canoe, which was made of the bark of trees sewed together, and
+they brought with them some wild geese and ducks, which they exchanged
+for knives. They had bows and arrows, together with some fishing tackle,
+and went away after two hours stay, making signs that they would return.
+
+
+[Footnote 236: The meridional distance between these two stations is 49 deg.
+25' W. Mayo being in long. 28 deg. 15', and Cape Virgin Mary in long. 72 deg.
+40' both W. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+Next day the pinnace went ashore, and returned in the evening with the
+Indian canoe filled with large muscles, which our people bought from the
+Indians, for knives, bread, and other trifles. In the beginning of July
+the weather was very moderate. Clipperton found the savages in these
+straits by no means so mischievous as they are usually represented, of
+which they had two remarkable instances: As, on one occasion, one of the
+crew was on shore two nights and a day, and was well used by the
+natives; and, on another occasion, one of the natives being left
+accidentally all night in the ship, the natives came for him next day
+without fear; so that, if well treated, they do not seem to be
+treacherous. In another canoe which came to the ship there were several
+women, each having a necklace of five or six rows of small shining
+shells, very nicely strung, resembling mother-of-pearl. All this time
+the crew was very sickly, scarcely a day passing in which one or more
+did not die, which was generally attributed to the want of something
+comfortable to drink in this rigorous climate, all the liquors intended
+for the voyage having been left in the Speedwell. The weather was
+sometimes fair and moderate for two or three days together, but was
+continually varying, and perhaps for two or three days following they
+had continual snow, rain, and sleet, with frequent great flows of wind
+that were intolerably sharp and piercing. William Pridham, the
+master-gunner, died on the 7th July, and was buried ashore next day,
+having a strong, plank with an inscription driven into the ground at the
+head of his grave.
+
+On the 20th July, Captain Mitchell and Lieutenant Davidson went in the
+pinnace, furnished with all necessaries, in order to make a discovery of
+a passage on the southern side of the straits, through which a French
+tartan is said to have gone into the South Sea in May, 1713, and to
+examine if there were any anchorage beyond Cape _Quad_. The pinnace
+returned on the 29th, having found the passage, but so narrow that it
+was deemed too hazardous. Their provisions falling short, they were
+forced to return before they had satisfied themselves sufficiently; yet
+they found several good bays for anchoring in, to the N.W. of Cape
+_Quad_. They got a seal from some Indians, which they broiled and eat,
+and said that it was as good as venison. On the 1st of August, Captain
+Mitchell and three other officers went a second time to examine to look
+for the new passage. But, after the strictest examination, they could
+not find that it led into the South Sea, but only into an icy bay, and
+at all events was too narrow for their ship. On the return of Captain
+Mitchell, it was resolved to prosecute their way through the straits,
+which they did with much difficulty, getting into the South Sea on the
+18th of August, but in so weak and sickly a condition as to be utterly
+incapable of attempting any enterprize for some time, having been long
+on short allowance of only one piece of beef or pork to a mess of six
+men. In pursuance, therefore, of his instructions, Captain Clipperton
+bore away for the island of Juan Fernandez, the third and last appointed
+place of rendezvous with the Speedwell.
+
+The Success accordingly anchored at Juan Fernandez on the 7th September,
+and search was made for any testimony of the Speedwell having been
+there, but to no purpose. Captain Clipperton resolved, in compliance
+with his instructions, to remain here, or cruizing in the neighbourhood,
+for a month; and also had an inscription cut on a conspicuous tree
+fronting the landing-place, to the following purport: "_Captain John----
+W. Magee, 1719_." This William Magee was surgeon of the Success, and
+well known to Captain Shelvocke and all his company; and Clipperton
+omitted his own name in the inscription, because he had been formerly in
+the South Sea, and had been long a prisoner among the Spaniards, for
+which reason he did not wish to give them notice of his return into this
+sea. The sick were all landed on the 8th, and every convenience afforded
+by the island made use of to promote their recovery. The weather was
+very changeable all the time of the Success continuing here, with much
+rain, and some hard gales of wind. They took, however, a considerable
+number of goats, which not only served them for present subsistence, but
+enabled them to increase their sea store, as they had an opportunity of
+salting a good many; for some French ships, that had been at the island,
+had left a considerable quantity of salt ready made. They likewise
+cleaned the ship's bottom, and took on board a supply of wood and water.
+It was now evident that the Success would have to act singly in these
+seas, as Clipperton was fully of opinion that the Speedwell was lost, or
+at least gave out so among the company, to prevent them from continually
+cursing Shelvocke for running away with their liquors, which some of the
+sick men did with their dying breaths.
+
+The beauty and fertility of this island, compared with the dangers and
+difficulties unavoidable in the South Sea, tempted four of the men to
+remain in the island, and they actually ran away into the mountains. As
+it was very inconvenient to lose so many good hands, Captain Clipperton
+took measures for recovering them, but ineffectually. At last, a
+fortnight after their desertion, and only the day before the ship was to
+leave the island, two of them were caught by the goat-hunters and
+brought aboard. They confessed that they had been hard put to it for the
+first five days, being forced to subsist entirely on the cabbage-trees,
+which are here in great plenty; but having accidentally found some fire,
+left by the goat-hunters, it served them in good stead, as it enabled
+them to cook their victuals. That same evening they brought on board
+all the goats-flesh they had salted, together with four casks of
+seal-oil, and every thing else they had on shore. A cross was set up on
+shore, at the foot of which a bottle was buried, containing a letter for
+Captain Shelvocke, appointing another place of rendezvous, with certain
+signals by which to know each other if they happened to meet at sea.
+
+SECTION II.
+
+
+_Proceedings of the Success in the South Seas_.
+
+
+Clipperton left Juan Fernandez on the 7th October, leaving two men
+behind, as successors to Governor Selkirk, but of whose adventures we
+have no mention. He now steered his course to the northwards, till in
+the parallel of Lima, where he proposed to commence operations, though
+in a very indifferent condition, having lost thirty men since passing
+the equator. On the 25th, being in the latitude of Lima, they captured a
+snow of forty tons, laden with sand and rubbish for manure, on board of
+which were seven Indians and two negroes, their master having been left
+sick on shore. The only thing she contained worth taking were two jars
+full of eggs, two jars of treacle, and two dollars. Next day they
+captured a ship of 150 tons, laden with timber from Guayaquil, in which
+were two friars, sixteen Indians, and four Negroes. On the 30th they
+took a ship of 400 tons, bound from Panama to Lima, which had been taken
+by Captain Rogers at Guayaquil ten years before. She had many passengers
+on board, and a loading of considerable value. Another prize was taken
+on the 2d of November, being a vessel of seventy tons, on board of which
+was the Countess of _Laguna_ and several other passengers, with a great
+sum of money, and 400 jars of wine and brandy, which was very
+acceptable. Captain Clipperton desired the countess to inform him,
+whether she thought proper to remain in the prize, or to accept of such
+accommodations as he was able to give her in the Success. She chose to
+continue in the prize, on which he sent an officer of marines with a
+guard, to prevent her from being molested, and with strict orders not to
+allow any person to enter her cabin, except her own domestics. He also
+sent part of the wine and brandy on board the other prizes, for the use
+of his seamen who had charge of them.
+
+Although Captain Clipperton had now so many prizes, that above a third
+of his company was detached to take charge of them, he was still as
+eager to take more as if he had commanded a squadron of men of war,
+instead of a single privateer weakly manned. On the 12th November, a
+London-built pink of about 200 tons was discovered at some distance,
+bound from Panama to Lima with a cargo of woad, of very little value to
+Clipperton, yet he added this to the number of his prizes. The master of
+this vessel, being a shrewd fellow, soon saw the error Clipperton had
+fallen into, and resolved to turn it to his advantage. Guessing by the
+number of prizes already attending the English ship, that he could not
+spare many men to take possession of his ship, and having above a dozen
+passengers, he directed them to hide themselves in the hold, along with
+a Frenchman who served as boatswain, with orders to seize as many of the
+English as went down below, assuring them that he with the ship's
+company would be able to manage the rest. When this ship struck,
+Clipperton sent Lieutenant Sergeantson with eight men to take possession
+of her; who, on coming on board, ordered all he saw on deck into the
+great cabin, at the door of which he placed a sentinel. Thinking every
+thing was now secure, he ordered the topsails to be hoisted, in order to
+stand down towards the Success; after which, the men went down into the
+hold, to see what loading was in the ship. On this the concealed
+passengers sallied out, knocked most of them down, and the boatswain
+came behind Mr Sergeantson, whom he knocked down likewise, and then
+bound all the Englishmen in the hold. In the mean time, the crew in the
+great cabin, Spaniards, Indians, and Negroes, secured the sentinel.
+Having thus recovered possession of the ship, the Spanish captain
+resolved on getting ashore at all events, in which design he ran his
+ship among the rocks, where he with his crew and prisoners were all in
+considerable danger. He then ordered all the English prisoners to be
+unbound, and all got safe on shore, after which Lieutenant Sergeantson
+and his men were all sent prisoners to Lima.
+
+The viceroy was so much pleased with this hardy action of the Spanish
+shipmaster, that he ordered a new vessel to be built for him at
+Guayaquil, ordering all the traders in Peru to be taxed for defraying
+the expence, as a reward for the service rendered on this occasion to
+the public, and an encouragement for others to behave in like manner. On
+the arrival of the prisoners at Lima, they were all strictly examined,
+when one of them gave a full account of every thing he knew,
+particularly of the two men who remained on the island of Juan
+Fernandez, and of the letter left in a bottle for the Speedwell, the
+consort of the Success. On this information, a small vessel was fitted
+out and sent to Juan Fernandez, with orders to fetch away the two men
+and the bottle containing the signals, which was accordingly done.
+
+Perceiving on the 20th November, that the last-taken, prize had been
+recovered by her crew, as on making the signal to tack, she was seen to
+make all possible sail towards the land, Captain Clipperton immediately
+suspected what had happened; and finding it impossible to get up with
+her, he began to consider what was best for him to do, to prevent the
+bad effects which might reasonably be expected from her crew getting on
+shore and communicating the alarm. Wherefore, he very prudently
+determined to set all his Spanish prisoners at liberty, as well to save
+provisions, which he could not very well spare, as that their good usage
+from him might be speedily known, in hopes of the same being returned to
+those of his men who had fallen into the hands of the Spaniards.
+
+On the 24th we took another prize of about 200 tons, laden with timber
+from Panama to Lima, having on board forty negroes and thirty Spaniards,
+most of the last being passengers. On the 27th he came to anchor with
+all his prizes at the island of Plata, where he began seriously to
+reflect how best to turn the expedition to the profit of the owners, as
+well as of himself and crew. He knew well that all the coast was now
+alarmed, and that two men-of-war were fitting out on purpose to take
+him, one of fifty and the other of thirty guns. He had no expectations
+of the ships and goods he had taken being ransomed in that pan of the
+world, and believed they would prove of little value if brought home;
+and reflecting on what had formerly been proposed by Captain Woods
+Rogers on a similar occasion, of sending a cargo of such prize goods to
+Brazil, he resolved to try that experiment. Accordingly, he fitted out
+the bark in which he had taken the Countess de Laguna, armed her with
+eight guns, and gave her a crew of thirteen Englishmen and ten negroes,
+with what provisions and stores he could spare, calling her the
+_Chickly_. Into this vessel he put a cargo of European commodities,
+valued at upwards of ten thousand pounds, and on the 27th November,
+1719, he sailed for Brazil under the command of Captain Mitchell. As
+soon as she was gone, he gave up his other prizes to the Spaniards,
+taking out of them whatever he thought worth keeping, and detaining one
+of the Spanish masters to serve him as pilot, with all the negroes;
+after which he sailed from La Plata to resume his cruize on his former
+station.
+
+The 12th December he took a vessel bound from Cherisse for Panama with
+provisions, which employed the launch and pinnace of the Success a whole
+day in bringing on board the flour and other provisions out of the
+prize. Having got as much flour out of her as they could well stow away
+in the Success, Clipperton ordered the main-mast of the prize to be cut
+away, lest she should overset, and then dismissed her. From the people
+of this prize, they learnt that Lieutenant Sergeantson and his men had
+been carried prisoners to Lima. On the 27th they anchored in _Guanchaco_
+bay, where they found two ships at anchor, which had been abandoned by
+their crews, and every thing taken out of them, except some bread and a
+few jars of water. These ships were set on fire. It was now resolved to
+bear away for the Gallapagos islands for refreshments, and accordingly
+anchored in York road, on the north side of the Duke of York's island,
+on the 9th January, 1720, immediately under the equinoctial line. They
+here found good water, scrubbed and cleaned their ship's bottom, and
+after ten days proceeded to the northwards, in order to cruize on the
+coast of Mexico. The circumstance of finding good water at this place,
+sufficiently justifies Captain Cowley from the aspersions thrown upon
+him by later writers, who allege that he gave a fanciful and untrue
+account of these islands, as they had not been able to find water or
+anchorage at such of them as they tried.
+
+Having returned to the American coast, they fell in with a ship on the
+21st of January, which they took after a long chase. This proved to be
+the Prince Eugene, on board of which was the Marquis of _Villa Roche_
+and all his family, bound from Panama, where he had been president, to
+Lima. This was the very ship in which Captain Clipperton had been
+circumvented and taken in his last voyage in these seas,[237] when he
+had been very indifferently used by the marquis, who was now at his
+mercy, and whom he used, notwithstanding, with all civility. On the 8th
+March, a priest who was on board the prize, and the boatswain of that
+ship, desired leave to go on shore at the island of _Velas_,[238] which
+was granted on condition that they would induce the inhabitants to bring
+some bullocks to the shore, to exchange them for such goods as they
+might think proper to accept in payment. This they promised, and on the
+16th they returned with four bullocks, together with some fowls and
+fruit as a present to the marquis, but said their alcalde, or governor,
+would on no account permit them to trade with the English. They also
+learnt that Captain Mitchell had been ashore at this place, and had shot
+some of their cattle, but on 200 men appearing under arms, had been
+forced to retire. This story seemed the more probable, as these people
+had some linen and other articles of clothing belonging to Captain
+Mitchell's men. Next day some letters from the marquis were intercepted,
+which were by no means conformable to the strict honour to which the
+Spanish nobility usually pretend, as they were meant to stir up the
+inhabitants of Velas to surprise the men belonging to Captain
+Clipperton, and to seize his boat when it went ashore for water. Upon
+this Captain Clipperton confined the marquis for some days; yet allowed
+him and his lady to go ashore on the 20th, leaving their only child as
+an hostage; and soon after the prize was restored to her captain.
+
+[Footnote 237: The circumstance here alluded to no where appears in the
+narratives of any of the former circumnavigations.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 238: Perhaps Velas point is here meant, in lat. 10 deg. 9' N. on
+the coast of that province of Mexico called _Corta Rica_.--E.]
+
+On the 14th April, the marquis and his lady came on board, accompanied
+by the alcalde, and an agreement being made for their ransom, the lady
+and child were sent ashore, and the marquis remained as sole hostage. In
+the whole of this transaction, Clipperton seems to have been outwitted
+by the marquis, who lately broke his word, and by this the crew of the
+Success were provoked to murmur against their captain for trusting him.
+On the 20th of April, the Success anchored in the Gulf of Amapala, or
+Fouseca, in lat. 13 deg. N. and not being able to water there, repaired to
+the _Island of Tigers_,[239] where they procured water with great ease.
+They went to the island of Gorgona, in lat. 2 deg. 53' N. for the same
+purpose, on the 4th June. On the 24th of that month they took a prize
+which had once been in their hands before, now laden with timber and
+cocoa-nuts; and on the 11th August, anchored with their prize at the
+island of _Lobor de la Mar_, in lat. 6 deg. 95' S. where they set up tents
+on shore, scrubbed and cleaned their ship's bottom, and took whatever
+seemed of any value out of the prize.
+
+[Footnote 239: Perhaps the Isla del Cana, in lat. 8 deg. 46' N. is here
+meant, or it may have been one of the islands in the Gulf of
+Amapala.--E.]
+
+While here, a plot was entered into by the crew, for seizing the captain
+and officers, whom they proposed to leave on the island of Lobos, and
+then to run away with the ship; but this was happily discovered on the
+6th September, the two principal ringleaders severely punished, and the
+rest pardoned. On the 17th, they took a fishing-boat with a considerable
+quantity of well-cured and salt fish. On the 1st November they went into
+the Bay of Conception, on the coast of Chili, in lat. 36 deg. 35' S. in
+chace of a vessel which outsailed them and escaped; whence they bore
+away for Coquimbo, in lat. 29 deg. 50' S. and took a ship laden with sugar,
+tobacco, and cloth, on their passage between these two places. On the
+6th in the afternoon, on opening the harbour of Coquimbo, they saw three
+men-of-war at anchor with their topsails loose, which immediately
+slipped their cables and stood after them. The Success hauled close upon
+a wind, as the prize did likewise, on which the best sailing Spanish
+man-of-war gave chase to the prize, which she soon came up with and
+took. The two other ships crowded all sail after the Success, till
+afternoon, when the biggest carried away her mizen-mast, on which she
+fired a gun and stood in for the shore, which favoured the escape of the
+Success.
+
+In the re-captured prize, they lost their third lieutenant, Mr James
+Milne, with twelve men. The captain of the Spanish man-of-war which took
+him, was the famous Don Blas de Lesso, who was governor of Carthagena
+when that place was attacked by Admiral Vernon. At first Don Blas
+treated Mr Milne very roughly, being enraged at having missed taking the
+English privateer, and had only retaken a Spanish prize, and in the
+first transport of his passion struck Mr Milne over the head with the
+flat of his sword. But on coming to himself he sent for Mr Milne, and
+generously asked his pardon, and finding he had been stripped by the
+soldiers, ordered him a new suit of clothes, and kept him some time in
+his own ship. He afterwards procured his liberty at Lima, paid his
+passage to Panama, giving him a jar of wine and another of brandy for
+his sea-store, and put 200 dollars in his pocket to carry him to
+England. This unlucky accident of losing the prize revived the
+ill-humour among the crew of the Success, who did not indeed enter into
+any new plot, but became much dejected.
+
+On the 16th they gave chase to another ship, which, after exchanging a
+few shots, bore away and left them. This was a fortunate escape, as she
+was a ship of force commanded by one Fitzgerald, which had been fitted
+out on purpose to take Captain Shelvocke; but knowing this not to be the
+ship he was in search of, and doubting her strength, had no great
+stomach to engage. These repeated disappointments, as they broke the
+spirit of the crew, had a very bad effect on Captain Clipperton, who now
+began to take to drinking, which grew at last to such a pitch that he
+was hardly ever quite sober; owing to which unhappy propensity he
+committed many errors in his future proceedings.
+
+It was now determined to proceed to the northward in search of plunder,
+as also to procure a supply of provisions, especially flour, having
+expended all their stock of that article, and being now reduced to three
+pounds of Indian corn for a mess of six men per day. Having but
+indifferent fortune, and being in sight of point _Helena_ in lat. 2 deg. 10'
+S. they resolved to bear away for the Gallapagos islands, on the 27th
+November, having in the first place set ashore the prisoners belonging
+to the vessel in which Mr Milne was taken. In their passage to these
+islands, they suspected an error in their log-line, which was found
+three fathoms too short, making an error in their computation on this
+run of about fifty-two miles. On the 4th of December they lost their
+purser, Mr Fairman, and the same day found themselves near the
+Gallapagos, being in lat. 0 deg. 36' N. with a strong current running to the
+S.W. against which they had to contend. On the 6th the pinnace was sent
+to look out for an anchorage at one of the islands, but returned without
+finding any, having seen many tortoises on shore. Upon this the pinnace
+and yawl were sent out to bring off some of these animals, and returned
+with sufficient fish to serve the whole company for a day, but had been
+unable to land for turtle, in consequence of a prodigious surf on the
+shore. This island was a mere rock in lat. 0 deg. 9' N. and the ground all
+about it was foul, with soundings from fifty to eighty fathoms. Leaving
+this island, they proceeded to another in the S.W. but could find no
+anchorage. Being unwilling to lose more time, they made the best of
+their way for the island of _Cocos_,[240] where they hoped to procure
+fish, fowls, and cocoa-nuts. On the 7th they saw several islands in the
+N.E. through which they passed, and got clear of them all by the
+9th,[241] but as the people daily fell sick, they grew very apprehensive
+of the dangerous situation they might incur in case of missing the
+island of which they were now in search. On the 17th they had the
+satisfaction of seeing the long-wished for island in the N.W. at the
+distance of nine leagues; and on the 18th, after coming to anchor, all
+of them went on shore that could be spared from the necessary duty of
+the ship, in order to build a hut for the reception of the sick, who
+were then carried on shore and comfortably lodged. They here had plenty
+of fish, fowls, eggs, and cocoa-nuts, with other refreshments. The
+captain here opened the last hogshead of brandy for the use of the
+company, giving every man a dram daily as long as it lasted; and on
+new-year's-day 1721, he allowed a gallon of strong beer to every mess.
+By means of abundant nourishing food and much ease, the crew began to
+recover their health and spirits, and were soon able to take on board
+wood and water, though with considerable difficulty, as a very heavy
+swell set in from the northwards at the full and change of the moon, so
+that they had to wait till after the spring-tides were over, before they
+were able to get any thing off.
+
+[Footnote 240: The island of Cocos, nearly north from the Gallapagos, is
+in lat. 5 deg. 20' N. and long. 87 deg. 53' W. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 241: These were probably some of the most northerly of the
+Gallapagos.--E.]
+
+On the 17th January, 1721, Captain Clipperton made the necessary
+dispositions for sailing, but it was three days before he could get his
+people on board, and then no less than eleven of them were missing,
+three Englishmen and eight negroes. It is not easy to conceive what
+could have induced the former to hazard themselves at this island, so
+far removed from the continent, and so little likely to be frequented by
+ships, and whence they had so very small a chance of ever getting off.
+It must be attributed to their dread of the dangers and fatigues to
+which they had been continually exposed, and to their living almost
+continually on short allowance, whereas they were here sure of plenty of
+provisions, with no other fatigue but the trouble of procuring and
+dressing them. Perhaps they might have received some assurance from the
+marquis, of having a ship sent for them when he obtained his liberty,
+which was at least a hazardous contingency; and there is great reason
+to doubt was never performed.
+
+Leaving the island of Cocos on the 20th, they arrived on the coast of
+Mexico on the 25th, when they met with an extraordinary adventure.
+Discovering a sail about seven in the evening, they gave chase and sent
+their pinnace to board, which came up with the chase about eleven. On
+the return of the pinnace, her people reported that this was a Spanish
+ship named the Jesu Maria, but now in possession of Captain Shelvocke,
+who had now only forty of his men remaining, all the rest being dead or
+dispersed. He said that he had lost the Speedwell at the island of Juan
+Fernandez, where he staid five months, and built a bark out of the wreck
+of the Speedwell. Putting to sea in this bark, he had coasted along
+Chili and Peru, meeting several ships, but could not take any, till at
+length he captured the Jesu Maria at Pisco near Lima. Shelvocke's people
+differed much in their stories, but it appeared that there was no
+regular command among them; and, as used to be the practice in the
+buccaneers, they had chosen a quarter-master, every thing being carried
+by a majority of votes, being all equal, and snared every thing among
+themselves, contrary to the articles of agreement with their owners.
+
+On the 27th, Mr Clipperton sent for the purser of the Jesu Maria, who
+gave but a dark account of their proceedings, only that he was not
+allowed to take any account of the treasure for the owners. Captain
+Shelvocke afterwards came on board the Success, accompanied by Mr Dod,
+his lieutenant of marines, who proposed to remain in the Success, having
+been very ill used by the other crew for his attachment to the interest
+of the owners, at least so he said, and was credited by Captain
+Clipperton and his officers. Next day, Shelvocke sent on board the
+Success six chests of pitch and _dammer_, two barrels of tar, and six
+slabs of copper; and Captain Clipperton gave him _twenty-four_ quarter
+deck guns,[242] some round shot, a compass, and a few other necessaries.
+Shelvocke's people laid out a great deal of money with the crew of the
+Success, in the purchase of clothes, shoes, hats, and other necessaries;
+and there remained with them two of Shelvocke's officers, Mr Hendric the
+purser, and Mr Dod the lieutenant of marines.
+
+[Footnote 242: This must be a gross error, as the Success originally
+carried only _twenty-four_ guns; and accordingly, in the subsequent
+account of the circumnavigation of Shelvocke, only two quarter-deck guns
+are mentioned.--E.]
+
+Still keeping to the northward on the coast of Mexico, the Success
+afterwards saw the Jesu Maria several times; and at length, in the
+beginning of March, it was resolved to propose a conjunct attempt on the
+Manilla ship on her way to Acapulco. Accordingly on the 13th March, in a
+general consultation by the officers of both ships, it was agreed to
+make the attempt jointly, both ships boarding her at once, as the only
+chance of taking her. On the 15th, in another consultation, Captain
+Clipperton and his officers agreed to certain articles, which were sent
+to Captain Shelvocke, proposing, if he and his crew would refund all the
+money they had shared among themselves, contrary to the articles agreed
+upon with the owners, and put the whole into a joint stock, thus all
+their faults should be forgiven, both companies uniting, and should then
+proceed together to cruise for the Acapulco ship. This proposal was very
+indifferently received by Shelvocke and his men, who did not care to
+part with what they possessed, and declined to give any answer to this
+proposal. Perceiving, therefore, that nothing good was to be expected
+from their quondam consort, considering also that the usual time of the
+Manilla ship arriving at Acapulco was already elapsed, that most of
+their remaining men were weak and sickly, and that they were only
+victualled for five months at their present short allowance, Captain
+Clipperton and his men thought it was now proper for them to proceed for
+the East Indies without loss of time, in order to preserve what little
+they had got for their owners and themselves. It was therefore resolved
+upon to put this plan into immediate execution, without any farther
+consultation with Shelvocke, and to leave the coast of America directly.
+They were now to the S.S.E. of Port Marquis, in lat. 16 deg.50'N. and
+accordingly on the 18th March shaped their course for crossing the
+Pacific ocean towards the Ladrone islands.
+
+The Manilla ships usually leave the Philippine islands about the
+beginning of July, and arrive at the Ladrones about the beginning of
+September, whence they proceed for Acapulco, where they are expected to
+arrive about the middle of January. They generally remain at Acapulco,
+till towards the latter end of April, and then sail for Manilla. This,
+though the general rule, is liable to some alterations, according as the
+trade-winds set in earlier or later. From this account, it is plain
+that the ship they had now proposed to wait for must have been the
+galleon on her passage from Acapulco for Manilla, which always has a
+prodigious quantity of silver on board.
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_Voyage of the Success from the Coast of Mexico to China._
+
+The Success performed the voyage from the coast of Mexico to the
+Ladrones in fifty-three days, arriving in sight of the island of Serpana
+on the 10th May, 1721. This island is in lat. 13 deg.42'N. though usually
+laid down in the Spanish maps in 14 deg..[243] In this passage they lost six
+of their men, and the rest were reduced to so weak and low a state, that
+the sight of this island gave them great joy. They determined however to
+proceed to Guam, as best known to Europeans, and where they were most
+likely to procure provisions; but in their present weakly condition it
+might have been better to have gone to Serpana, where the Spaniards have
+not so great a force as at Guam. They anchored in the road at this
+island on the 13th May, and sent their pinnace ashore with a flag of
+truce to obtain provisions. But the people informed them that, without
+leave of the governor, they could not trade with them. Application was
+therefore made to the governor for this purpose, which was favourably
+received for the present; and Mr Godfrey, the owners agent, who had been
+sent up to the governor at Umatta, returned on the 16th to the Success
+in one of the country proas, with a message from the governor,
+intimating, that they should be furnished with provisions, if they
+behaved civilly and paid honestly. The launch arrived soon after,
+bringing on board some cattle, bread, sugar, brandy, fruit, and
+vegetables; and on the 17th the governor sent a handsome present of
+palm-wine, sugar, and brandy, with a large quantity of chocolate.
+
+[Footnote 243: Serpana is probably some small island close to Guam, not
+inserted in general maps. The centre of Guam is in 13 deg.30'N.]
+
+The _Island of Guam_, in lat. 13 deg.30'N. long 145 deg.30'E. from Greenwich, is
+nearly ten leagues long from N. to S. and five leagues from E. to W. It
+has several villages, the most remarkable being Amatta, Atry, Agana,
+Anigua, Asa, Hugatee, and Rigues. The natives are formerly said to have
+amounted to 150,000 souls, but at this time did not exceed a tenth of
+the number, of which a few hundreds remained independent in the
+mountains, in spite of every effort to reduce them under the Spanish
+dominion. The natives are strong, active, vigorous, and war-like, but
+are represented as cruel, vindictive, and treacherous, though perhaps
+the Spaniards have exaggerated their bad qualities, to extenuate their
+own tyranny and oppression. The Spanish garrison at this island at this
+time consisted of 300, relieved from time to time from Manilla, and the
+King of Spain is said to have allowed 30,000 dollars yearly for the
+maintenance of this port, the only use of which is to give refreshments
+to the annual ship which goes between Manilla and Acapulco.
+
+Having agreed with the governor of Guam for the ransom of the Marquis de
+Villa Roche, that nobleman went ashore on the 18th May, accompanied by
+the agent, the first lieutenant, and the doctor; and the Success gave
+him a salute of five guns at parting. For six days after, the launch was
+continually employed in bringing wood, water, and provisions on board,
+during which time the governor requested to be supplied with some arms
+and ammunition in exchange, and accordingly Captain Clipperton sent him
+twelve fuzees, three jars of gunpowder, sixty rounds of shot, four pair
+of pistols, and several cutlasses, swords, and daggers. On the 25th a
+letter was sent on board, demanding the jewels belonging to the marquis,
+some consecrated plate, and two negroes, who were Christians; as also
+requiring to have a certificate signed by the captain and officers of
+the Success, that peace had been proclaimed between Britain and Spain;
+besides which, this letter intimated that Mr Godfrey and Mr Pritty were
+detained till all these demands were complied with. In reply, Captain
+Clipperton sent a letter, containing a certificate, that he had been
+informed by the Solidad, the last prize taken on the coast of Chili,
+that peace had been concluded between Britain and Spain; but threatning,
+if the agreed ransom for the marquis, and the two gentlemen now
+detained, were not sent off in twenty-four hours, that he would demolish
+all the houses on shore, burn the ship in the harbour, and do all the
+mischief he could at the Philippine Islands.
+
+Soon after, a letter was received from the governor, saying that he
+would pay for the consecrated plate, and desiring to have more powder
+and shot; to which Clipperton made answer that he could not spare any
+more. The yawl went ashore on the 28th for more provisions; but the
+people were told that no more could be had, unless they sent more powder
+and shot. Upon this Clipperton weighed anchor, and stood in for the
+harbour, sending the pinnace a-head to sound. The people on shore had
+raised a battery during the sham treaty about the ransom of the marquis,
+from which they fired on the pinnace. The pinnace now returned to
+Clipperton, and reported that the only channel they could find lay
+within pistol-shot of the shore; yet at six in the afternoon Clipperton
+persisted to carry the Success into the harbour, making directly for the
+ship that lay there at anchor. The _Spaniards_ carried her into
+shoal-water,[244] where she was exposed to two fires, one from the new
+battery on land, almost directly over head, and the other from the ship.
+At nine she got foul of the rocks, when they had to cut away two of
+their anchors, endeavouring to get her off, all the while the enemy
+plying them warmly with shot and stones from the new battery on the
+hill, so that they suffered severely in the hull and rigging of the
+ship. They also had three men wounded, besides losing the first
+lieutenant, Mr Davidson, an honest man and a good officer. Thus the
+Success had to remain in a miserable situation, exposed during the whole
+night to the continual fire of the enemy; and the surface of the water
+being as smooth as a mill-pond, the ship was easily seen in the night,
+while her unfortunate crew had no other mark to fire at but the flashes
+of the enemy's guns.
+
+[Footnote 244: This unexplained circumstance probably meant, that the
+Success had at this time _Spanish_ pilots, who betrayed her.--E.]
+
+In this dangerous emergency, Captain Clipperton being overcome with
+liquor, and quite unable to command, the officers came to the resolution
+of running clear from the enemy as soon as they could get the ship
+afloat, and signed a paper to indemnify Mr Cook if he would assume the
+command. By four in the afternoon of the 29th they got the ship afloat,
+and cut away their small bower anchor, but ran aground again in ten
+minutes. At nine they carried out the kedge-anchor, but the hawser broke
+in heaving. They now carried out another hawser, having a lower-deck gun
+fixed to it, as they had now lost all their anchors, and were still
+aground. At two in the morning of the 30th the enemy repeatedly called
+upon them to surrender, or they might expect no quarter. At five they
+carried out the main-top-mast shrowd hawser, with another gun, still
+plying the enemy with their great guns and small-arms, though they were
+able to do little harm; while the enemy never missed them, especially
+directing their shot at the boats of the Success, whenever they saw them
+in motion. At eleven in the forenoon of the 30th they carried out the
+remains of their best bower-cable, with two lower-deck guns, which they
+dropped right a-head in five fathoms water. They now cleared the hold,
+ready to start their water to lighten the ship; got their upper and
+lower-deck guns forwards, to bring her by the head as she hung abaft on
+the rocks, and kept two guns constantly firing from the stern-ports at
+the enemy's battery, but could not get them to bear. During the last
+twenty-four hours they had fortunately only one man wounded; but the
+ship was wretchedly injured between wind and water, and her rigging torn
+to pieces.
+
+At six in the afternoon of the 30th the ship floated, when they cut away
+their yawl, having been sunk by a shot. They hove taught their cable,
+and then cut it away, together with the two hawsers, and sent the
+pinnace a-head to tow the ship off. Just as the ship got afloat, the
+enemy fired with great briskness from their new battery, their shot
+raking through the Success between wind and water, killed one of her
+men, and wounded two others.
+
+The Success had now remained fifty hours as a fair mark for the enemy to
+fire at, during which they lost both their bower-anchors and cables,
+with the stern and kedge-anchors, four hawsers, four lower-deck guns,
+nineteen barrels of powder, two men killed and six wounded; and had they
+not now got off, it was believed they must have been sunk before
+morning. At ten in the forenoon of the 31st they hove to, and began to
+splice their rigging, not a rope of which had escaped the shot of the
+enemy. The masts and yards were all sore wounded; and the carpenters had
+to work during the whole night, stopping-the shot-holes in the hull.
+They stowed away most of their guns in the hold, barred up the ports,
+hoisted in the launch and pinnace, and at noon steered away west under
+an easy sail, hoping to save their passage before the western monsoon
+set in; the carpenters being fully occupied in fishing the masts and
+yards, and the rest of the crew in mending the rigging. At six in the
+evening of the 31st May, 1721, the body of the island of Guam bore E.
+seven leagues distant, and they then took their departure; being in 15 deg.
+20' N. designing now for China.
+
+The conduct of Captain Clipperton at Guam was certainly exceedingly
+erroneous. He ought on no account to have permitted the marquis to go on
+shore till he had received the money for his ransom, and all the
+provisions of which he stood in need. The marquis had before behaved
+very ill to him, and had no title to any favour; and if he had kept the
+marquis, the governor of Guam would not have had any opportunity of
+putting his schemes in execution. Clipperton committed also an egregious
+error in pretending to attack the town, and the ship in the harbour.
+Though drunkenness is rather an aggravation than an excuse for
+misconduct, yet it is to be considered that Clipperton was a mere
+sailor, who had not the benefit of a liberal education, and that he fell
+into this sad vice from disappointment and despair. On all occasions he
+had shewn a humane and even generous disposition, with the most
+inflexible honesty, and a constant regard to the interest of his owners.
+He is therefore much to be pitied, for having fled to the bottle under a
+load of misfortunes too heavy for him to bear.
+
+The voyage upon which they had now to enter was very dangerous, the run
+from Manilla to China being estimated at 400 leagues; besides that the
+distance they had now to sail was much greater. They had only received a
+very moderate addition to their former scanty stock of provisions; and
+their vessel had been so roughly handled in the late unfortunate affair,
+that they were very apprehensive she would not last out the voyage. On
+careful examination, she was found to be in a very shattered condition,
+having scarcely a whole timber in her upper works, and one of her
+_fashion pieces_ being shot through, which is a principal support of the
+after-part of the ship, they were obliged to strap her, to keep her
+together. As it blew pretty fresh, they durst not carry sail, and for
+nearly a week together had to scud almost under bare poles, through
+variable winds, bad weather, and a rough sea. This was a melancholy
+situation for the people, in seas with which they were little
+acquainted, and sailing by charts on which they could not depend. Yet
+they found the accounts and charts of Dampier much superior to those
+laid down by persons of much greater figure, so that without these they
+had hardly been able to have extricated themselves from their
+difficulties. The 24th June they were in sight of the _Bashee_ Islands,
+in lat. 20 deg. 45' N. long. 121 deg. 40' E. On the 31st they saw the
+_island-shoals_ of _Pralas_, in lat. 21 deg. N. long. 116 deg. 20' E. The 1st
+July they fell in with other islands, not laid down in any of their
+charts, which perplexed them sadly, not being able to form any certain
+judgment of their true course. They anchored under one of these islands
+in thirteen fathoms, and sent away one of their boats to endeavour to
+procure intelligence how Macao bore from them, that being the port to
+which they were bound. The pinnace returned on the 2d July, bringing a
+boat in which were three Chinese sailors, or fishermen, whom they could
+not understand, and all they could learn from them was, that Canton bore
+from them to the S.W.
+
+On the 3d July, finding they had got too far to leeward of Macao, and
+being unable to procure a pilot, they resolved to sail for _Amoy_, as
+the only course that was left them, and accordingly arrived before that
+port in the evening of the 5th; but being afraid to enter it in the
+night, they plied off and on till daybreak of the 6th. They here noticed
+great numbers of snakes in the sea, brought down by the rivers that
+empty themselves upon that coast. The entrance into the port of _Amoy_
+is sufficiently conspicuous, in consequence of a high mountain, on the
+top of which is a tower, or pagoda, which may be seen at the distance of
+twenty leagues out to sea, and has a small island immediately before the
+mouth of the bay. The river _Change-neu_[245] discharges itself here
+into the sea, forming a spacious bay about eight leagues in circuit,
+where ships may ride at anchor in great safety, the only difficulty
+being in getting into port, which they happily accomplished in the
+evening of the 6th July, being well pleased to find themselves once more
+in a place where they might hope to procure refreshments, and be able to
+repair their ship; or if that were impracticable, whence they might
+procure a passage home. Clipperton was as much rejoiced as the rest;
+for, having had his full share of afflictions and misfortunes at sea, he
+was happy in the prospect of securing a small sum of money for his own
+use, and sending home what belonged to the owners, if the ship were
+really past repairing, as his people reported.
+
+[Footnote 245: No name resembling _Amoy_ is to be found on the coast of
+China in any of our best maps, and the text gives no distinct indication
+of its situation. The river _Changeneu_ of the text, perhaps refers to
+_Tchang-tcheou_, a city in the province of Fokien, having a large bay in
+lat. 24 deg. 30' N. long. 118 deg. 15' E. and _Amoy_ may have been some
+corruption of the port of discharge at the mouth of the river which
+passes Tchang-tcheou.--E.]
+
+They had no sooner anchored in the port than ten custom-house officers
+were placed on board. At Amoy, as in most other ports in China, the
+customs are under the direction of a single mandarin, called the Hoppo,
+or Hoppou. The Chinese are justly reputed the craftiest people in the
+world; and it is their invariable maxim to appoint the cunningest man
+they can find to the office of hoppo. It may be added, that the people
+of Amoy are reputed to be less nice in the principles of honour and
+honesty even than any others in China. The first thing demanded by these
+custom-house officers was, what the ship was, and what was her business
+at this port. Clipperton made answer, that the ship belonged to the King
+of Great Britain, and had put in there from stress of weather, in order
+to obtain a supply of provisions and other necessaries. The officers now
+demanded an exact account of the number of men and guns, the nature and
+amount of the cargo, and the time they intended to stay, all of which
+they set down in writing, and then departed.
+
+Next morning the men mutinied, and insisted that Clipperton should pay
+them their prize-money immediately, as the Success was in no condition
+to proceed to sea. The man who made this demand was one John Dennison;
+and when Mr Taylor interposed in behalf of the captain, one Edward
+Boreman told him he had better desist, unless he had a mind to have a
+brace of bullets through his head. There was now an end of all
+regularity on board, the authority of the captain being completely
+overthrown. The country people supplied the ship with abundance of rice,
+with some cattle and fowls, together with wood and water, for which they
+were paid. On the 12th the officers went ashore to wait upon the hoppo,
+who had a fine palace. He treated them with great civility, giving them
+leave to anchor in the harbour, and to remain there till the adverse
+monsoon was over; but for this he demanded 1700 dollars as port-charges,
+equal to near L400 sterling, and soon afterward received that sum in
+ready money.
+
+It may be remembered that Mr Mitchell went out from. England as second
+captain under Clipperton. On his going to Brazil, he was succeeded by Mr
+Davidson, who was slain in the unfortunate affair at Guam; to whom Mr
+Cook succeeded as second captain. He now demanded to receive thirty
+shares of the prize-money in that capacity, in which he was supported by
+the men, whom he courted by a continual compliance with all their
+humours. Captain Clipperton and the rest of the officers, seeing the
+turn matters were likely to take, were very desirous that some allowance
+should be reserved for the officers who were absent, and had been taken
+prisoners, and for Mr Hendrie and Mr Dod, who had joined them from the
+Speedwell: but all their endeavours were fruitless, as the men would not
+listen to any such allowances. While these disputes were going on, the
+men went ashore as they pleased, without asking leave; and when the
+captain endeavoured to correct this licence, the whole company stood
+out, and would not submit to controul. After this every thing fell into
+confusion, and the men refused to work till they should receive their
+prize-money. They even applied to the chief mandarin of the place,
+styled _Hyhuug_ by the Chinese, to interpose his authority for obliging
+their captain to comply with their demands. This magistrate then
+summoned Captain Clipperton to appear before him, and demanded to know
+the reason why he refused to give the men satisfaction; on which the
+captain produced the articles, which contained expressly that they were
+not to receive their prize-money till their return to London. But
+Captain Cook, as he was now styled, gave quite a different account of
+this matter to the mandarin; on which a guard of soldiers was sent
+aboard the Success, with a peremptory order to Captain Clipperton
+immediately to settle the shares, and to pay them to the men, with which
+he was forced to comply.
+
+This distribution was accordingly made on the 16th September, pursuant
+to the order of the chief mandarin; and as no allowance was reserved for
+those who had been made prisoners, or for the representatives of those
+who had died, or the two gentlemen who formerly served in the Speedwell,
+the prize-money stood thus:
+
+   The share of money and silver plate, dollars     280
+   The share of gold,                               100
+   The share of jewels,                              39
+                                                   -----
+   Total share of a foremast-man,                   419
+
+Which, at 4s. 8d. the dollar, amounted to L97:15:4 sterling. According
+to this distribution: The share of the captain amounted to L1466, 10s.
+The second captain had L733, 5s. The captain of marines, the lieutenants
+of the ship, and the surgeon, had each L488:16:8. Although Captain Cook
+and his associates were thus able to carry their point, yet Captain
+Clipperton prevailed on the mandarin to set apart one half of the cargo
+for the benefit of the owners; which amounted, in money, silver, gold,
+and jewels, to between six and seven thousand pounds. This was
+afterwards shipped at Macao in a Portuguese ship, called the Queen of
+Angels, commanded by Don Francisco de la Vero. This ship was
+unfortunately burnt at Rio de Janeiro, on the coast of Brazil, on the
+6th June, 1722; so that the owners, after deducting salvage, only
+received L1800.
+
+The people and mandarins at Amoy have so conducted themselves for a long
+time, that, even among their own countrymen, this port has the
+appellation of _Hiamuin booz_, or Amoy the roguish. The fishermen on the
+coast, when they meet any European ship that seems intended for that
+port, pronounce these words with a very significant air; but, for want
+of understanding the language, or perhaps from confidence in their own
+prudence, this warning is seldom attended to. The custom of this port is
+to disarm every ship that enters it, sending two frigates or armed
+vessels, called _chan-pans_, full of men, to ride close by the vessel,
+to ensure the execution of all orders from the _hoppo_ and chief
+mandarin. Besides the enormous imposition under the name of port
+charges, already mentioned, they have other strange methods of getting
+money. Thus, though the small craft of the country are at liberty to
+carry all sorts of provisions on board for sale, yet every one of these
+must in the first place go to one of the _chan-pans_, and pay there a
+tax or consideration for leave to go to the strange vessel. By this
+means, though provisions are here very plentiful, and ought therefore to
+be cheap, the price is enhanced at least a third. The mandarins have
+also a practice of sending presents of wine, provisions, and expensive
+curiosities, to the captain and other officers; of all which, when the
+ship is ready to sail, they send an exact memorial with the prices
+charged, the last article being so much for the clerk drawing up the
+account; and all this must be discharged in money or commodities, before
+their arms and ammunition are returned.
+
+During a stay of ten weeks at this port, they sufficiently experienced
+all the artifices of this covetous and fraudulent people, from whom
+Captain Clipperton had no way to defend himself, and was therefore
+obliged to submit to all their demands. Towards the end of September,
+the season and their inclinations concurred to deliver them from this
+place; for by this time, even the common men began to be weary of the
+people, who shewed themselves finished cheats in every thing. On the
+25th September, their arms and ammunition were restored, and that same
+day the Success weighed from the harbour, going out into the road or
+gulf, in order to proceed for Macao, to have the ship surveyed, as the
+men insisted she was not in a condition for the voyage home. Captain
+Clipperton affirmed the contrary, well knowing that the men insisted on
+this point merely to justify their own conduct, and to avoid being
+punished in England for their misbehaviour in China.
+
+They weighed anchor from the Bay of Amoy, in the province of
+_Tonkin_,[246] on the 30th September, and anchored in the road of
+_Macao_ on the 4th October. This place had been an hundred and fifty
+years in the hands of the Portuguese, and had formerly been one of the
+most considerable places of trade in all China, but has now fallen much
+into decay. The way in which the Portuguese became possessed of this
+place gives a good specimen of Chinese generosity. In prosecuting their
+trade with China from India and Malacca, being often overtaken by
+storms, many of their ships had been cast away for want of a harbour,
+among the islands about Macao, on which they requested to have some
+place of safety allowed them in which to winter. The Chinese accordingly
+gave them this rocky island, then inhabited by robbers, whom they
+expelled. At first they were only allowed to build thatched cottages;
+but, by bribing the mandarins, they were permitted in the sequel to
+erect stone houses, and even to build forts. One of these, called _the
+Fort of the Bar_, is at the mouth of the harbour, and terminates at a
+rock called _Appenka_, where there is a hermitage of the order of St
+Augustine. There is another fort on the top of a hill, called the Fort
+of the Mountain; also another high fort, called _Nuestra Senhora de
+Guia_. The city of Macao stands on a peninsula, having a strong wall
+built across the isthmus, with a gate in the middle, through which the
+Chinese pass out and in at pleasure, but it is death for a Portuguese to
+pass that way.
+
+[Footnote 246: This surely is an error for Fo-kien. Amoy has been before
+stated in the text as N.E. from Macao, whereas the _kingdom_ of Tonquin
+is S.W. from that port.--E.]
+
+Some travellers have reported that the Portuguese were sovereigns of
+Macao, as of other places in India: But they never were, and the Chinese
+are too wise a people to suffer any thing of the kind. Macao certainly
+is as fine a city, and even finer, than could be expected, considering
+its untoward situation: It is also regularly and strongly fortified,
+having upwards of 200 pieces of brass cannon upon its walls. Yet, with
+all these, it can only defend itself against strangers. The Chinese ever
+were, and ever will be, masters of Macao, and that without firing a gun
+or striking a blow. They have only to shut up that gate and place a
+guard there, and Macao is undone; and this they have actually done
+frequently. Without receiving provisions from the adjacent country, the
+inhabitants of this city cannot subsist for a day; and besides, it is so
+surrounded by populous islands, and the Chinese are here so completely
+masters of the sea, that the Portuguese at Macao might be completely
+starved on the slightest difference with the Chinese. The Portuguese
+have indeed the government over their own people within the walls of
+this city; yet Macao is strictly and properly a Chinese city: For there
+is a Chinese governor resident on the spot, together with a hoppo or
+commissioner of the customs; and these Chinese mandarins, with all their
+officers and servants, are maintained at the expence of the city, which
+has also to bear the charges of the Portuguese government.[247]
+
+[Footnote 247: The East India Company found all this to be true a few
+years ago, when its Indian government thought to have taken Macao from
+the Portuguese. Had this account of the matter been read and understood,
+they would not have unnecessarily incurred a vast expence, and suffered
+no small disgrace at Canton.--E.]
+
+In spite of all this, the Portuguese inhabitants were formerly very
+rich, owing to the great trade they carried on with Japan, which is now
+in a great measure lost. Yet, being so near Canton, and allowed to
+frequent the two annual fairs at that place, and to make trading voyages
+at other times, they still find a way to subsist, and that is all, as
+the prodigious presents they have to make on all occasions to the
+Chinese mandarins, consume the far greater part of their profits. Each
+of their vessels, on going up to Canton, has in the first place to pay
+L100 sterling for leave to trade. They are next obliged to make a
+considerable present, for permission to have their goods brought on
+board by the Chinese, to whom they must not only pay ready money for all
+they buy, but have sometimes to advance the price beforehand for a year.
+After all this, they have to make another present for leave to depart,
+at least double the amount of what they formerly paid for liberty to
+trade; and they have to pay heavy duties to the emperor for every thing
+they buy or sell, besides their enormous presents to his ministers.
+
+
+
+
+SECTION IV.
+
+_Residence of Captain Clipperton at Macao, and Returns from thence to
+England._
+
+
+On entering the port of Macao in the Success, Captain Clipperton saluted
+the fortress, which compliment was returned. He then went on shore,
+where he prevailed on the captain of a Portuguese ship of war, formerly
+mentioned, to carry the property belonging to his owners to Brazil. At
+this place, the crew of the Success found themselves considerably at a
+loss, as the Portuguese commander declared himself entirely in favour of
+Captain Clipperton. Captain Cook, therefore, and another of the officers
+of the Success, went up to Canton, to consult with Mr Winder, supercargo
+of an English East Indiaman, and son to one of the principal owners, as
+to what should be done with, the Success. On their return, the ship was
+surveyed, condemned, and sold for 4000 dollars, which was much less than
+her worth. This was, however, no fault in Captain Clipperton, who, to
+shew that he still adhered to his former opinion, that the ship was fit
+to proceed to England, agreed with the persons who purchased her for a
+passage to Batavia, a convincing proof that he did not believe her in
+any danger of foundering at sea.
+
+The ship being sold, the crew naturally considered themselves at liberty
+to shift for themselves, and to use their best endeavours each to save
+what little remained to him, after their unfortunate expedition. All
+were satisfied that Captain Mitchell, with his crew and cargo, had
+either gone to the bottom or fallen into the hands of the Spaniards, so
+that they had no hopes of any farther dividend from that quarter; yet it
+was some consolation that they were so near the English factory at
+Canton, and as six dollars were required for a passage to that place in
+one of the Chinese boats, twenty of them agreed to go there immediately,
+in hopes of getting a passage from thence to England. Mr Taylor, one of
+the mates of the Success, was of the number: But before the boat set
+sail, he had some presentiment of danger, and chose rather to lose his
+money, by waiting for another opportunity. He had reason to be satisfied
+with himself for this conduct; as he soon learnt that the boat tad been
+taken by a pirate, and the people stript of all their property. After a
+short stay at Macao, Mr Taylor had an opportunity of going up to Canton
+in an armed boat along with a mandarin, for which he and the rest of the
+crew belonging to the Success, who went along with him, paid twenty
+dollars each. In their passage up, they had satisfactory proof that in
+some cases there may be frugality in expence, as they saw a pirate take
+a boat in sight of that in which was the mandarin. This plainly shewed
+that the government winks at these things, perhaps deeming it good
+policy to raise thereby a considerable revenue, partly by presents from
+the pirates, and partly by sums paid by merchants and passengers for
+protection. From this, and many other circumstances which might be
+adduced, the boasted wisdom of the Chinese is nothing more than the
+science of dexterously hiding their robberies from the inspection of the
+law: In which, perhaps, they are as much exceeded by some northern
+nations as in the use of the compass, of which they pretend to be the
+original inventors, and perhaps with justice; but both in the management
+of the compass, and in this political trade of pirating, they are
+equally clumsy.
+
+Mr Taylor and his company arrived at the English factory in Canton on
+the 4th November, where they were well received, and promised all
+assistance for getting home. There were at this time ships ready to
+sail, first for several ports in India and then for Europe. The captains
+of these vessels, on being solicited by the gentlemen of the factory to
+take Captain Clipperton's men on board, agreed to carry them for five
+pounds a man, which they all accordingly paid, esteeming it a very great
+favour. Mr Taylor and two or three more embarked in the Maurice, Captain
+Peacock, then riding at Wanapo, [Wampoa,] about three leagues below
+Canton, the place where European ships lie; and the rest of the company
+were distributed among the other ships. They sailed on the 9th, in
+company with the Macclesfield, an English East-Indiaman, and the
+House-of-Austria, belonging to Ostend. Mr Taylor arrived safely at
+Batavia in the month of December; sailed thence by the Cape and St
+Helena, and arrived in London in May 1722. The rest of the company
+returned also, some sooner and some later.
+
+As for Captain Mitchell, who was sent to Brazil with a small crew, he
+was never more heard of, having probably been destroyed at the island
+of Velas, where he went ashore to procure fresh provisions. This has
+generally been considered as the greatest blemish in the management of
+Captain Clipperton, but I confess without just cause, in my opinion; as
+the great stress laid on that measure by Captain Rogers, might very well
+have induced Captain Clipperton to try what might be done in this way,
+especially as his owners had very strongly recommended the account of
+Captain Rogers to be his rule and guide. I also think the proposal in
+itself was very reasonable, and such as an officer who had the good of
+the expedition at heart had good grounds for trying. It was well known
+that the prize goods could produce little or nothing in the South Sea,
+as the Spanish governors demanded such exorbitant sums for liberty to
+trade, that no advantage could be derived from such a commerce, either
+in buying or selling. He knew also that it was to little purpose
+carrying these goods to Europe; and it was certainly much preferable to
+send them to a place where they might sell to advantage, and where the
+produce might be so invested as to procure a considerable profit on the
+voyage from Brazil to London. The vessel in which Captain Mitchell
+sailed was very fit for the purpose, and every way well provided; and
+having a crew of thirteen English and ten negroes, was quite sufficient
+for the navigation.
+
+Captain Clipperton sailed from Macao to Batavia, in his own ship the
+Success, after she was sold; and got a passage to Europe in a Dutch
+ship. He arrived at Galway in Ireland, where he left his family, in
+June, 1722; being then in a very bad state of health, partly occasioned
+by his great fatigues, but chiefly through the concern he was under for
+the loss sustained by his owners in this unfortunate enterprize. It may
+be objected, that he ought to have returned from Holland to England, to
+give his owners the best account in his power respecting the events of
+the voyage. But, as he sent home their moiety of the profits in the
+Portugueze ship, which, had it not been destroyed by the way, had nearly
+covered the expence of fitting out the Success, taking in the money she
+sold for; and if we consider the reduced state of his health when he
+went to Galway, where he did not live above a week, he may well be
+excused for this step.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII.
+
+VOYAGE ROUND THE WORLD BY CAPTAIN GEORGE SHELVOCKE, IN 1719-1722.[248]
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+
+In the introduction to the former voyage, a sufficient account has been
+given of the motives on which the expedition was founded, and the
+original plan of acting under an imperial commission; together with
+motives for changing this plan, and the reason of advancing Captain
+Clipperton to the chief command. In the new scheme of the voyage,
+Captain Shelvocke retained the command of the Speedwell, carrying
+twenty-four guns and 106 men, Mr Simon Hately being his second captain,
+an officer who has a good character given of him in the account of the
+former voyage by Captain Rogers. The marines were under the command of
+Captain William Betagh. Captain Shelvocke has himself written an account
+of the expedition, and another was published by Captain Betagh, so that
+the following narrative is composed from both. Shelvocke's narrative is,
+strictly speaking, an apology for his own conduct, yet contains
+abundance of curious particulars, written in an entertaining style, and
+with an agreeable spirit; while the other is written with much acrimony,
+and contains heavy charges against Captain Shelvocke, yet contains many
+curious circumstances.--_Harris_.
+
+[Footnote 248: Harris, I. 198. Callender, III. 502.]
+
+This is one of the best written voyages we have hitherto met with, yet
+extends rather to considerable length, considering its relative
+importance. On the present occasion, therefore, it has been endeavoured
+to lop off as many of its redundances as could be conveniently done
+without injury, yet leaving every circumstance of any interest or
+importance. The principal omission, or abbreviation rather, on the
+present occasion, is the leaving out several controversial matters,
+inserted by Harris from the account of this voyage by Betagh; which
+might have sufficient interest among contemporaries, a few years after
+the unfortunate issue of this misconducted enterprise, but are now of no
+importance, near a century later.--Ed.
+
+
+
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Narrative of the Voyage from England to the South Sea._
+
+
+Sailing from Plymouth on the 13th February, 1719, in company with the
+Success, we kept company no longer than to the 19th, when, between nine
+and ten at night, we had a violent storm at S.W. which increased so,
+that by eleven we were under bare poles. At midnight a sea struck us on
+our quarter, which stove in one of our dead lights on the quarter and
+another on our stern, by which we shipped a vast quantity of water
+before we could get them again fastened up, and we were a considerable
+time under great apprehension of foundering. On the 20th we could not
+see the Success; and this storm so terrified the greatest part of the
+crew, that seventy of them were resolved to bear away for England,
+alleging that the ship was so very crank she would never be able to
+carry us to the South Sea. But by the resolution of the officers they
+were brought back to their duty.
+
+As the Canaries were the first place of rendezvous, we continued our
+course for these islands, where we arrived on the 17th March, and
+cruised there the time appointed by our instructions.[249] We next
+sailed for the Cape de Verde Islands, and arrived at Maio on the 14th
+April.[250] A little before arriving here, Turner Stevens[251] the
+gunner very gravely proposed to me and the rest of the officers to
+cruize in the Red Sea; as there could be no harm in robbing the
+Mahometans, whereas the Spaniards were good Christians, and it was a sin
+to injure them. I ordered him immediately into confinement, after which
+he became outrageous, threatening to blow up the ship. Wherefore I
+discharged him at his own request, and left also here on shore my chief
+mate, who had challenged and fought with Mr Brooks, my first lieutenant.
+
+[Footnote 249: Clipperton arrived there on the 5th, and sailed thence on
+the 15th of March.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 250: Clipperton came to St Vincent on the 24th March, and
+cruized in that neighbourhood for ten days, so that he must have sailed
+about the 31st, at least a fortnight before the arrival of
+Shelvocke.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 251: Called Charles Turner by Betagh.--E.]
+
+On the 18th, we went to _Port Praya_, in the island of St Jago, but
+finding nothing here but fair promises, I resolved to proceed to the
+island of St Catharine on the coast of Brazil, in lat. 20 deg. 30' S.[252]
+in hopes of obtaining every thing necessary for our passage into the
+South Sea, as, according to the account of it by Frezier, it abounds in
+all the necessaries of life, such especially as are requisite in long
+voyages. We sailed therefore from Port Praya on the 20th of April, and
+had a very bad passage, as we were twenty-one days before we could pass
+the equinoctial. White between the two tradewinds, we had usually slight
+breezes, varying all round the compass, and sometimes heavy squalls of
+wind, with thunder, lightning, and rain. In short, the most variable
+weather that can be conceived, insomuch that we were fifty-five days
+between St Jago and St Catharines. On the 4th June we made Cape Frio,
+bearing W. seven leagues off our lat. by observation, 23 deg. 41' S.[253] On
+the 5th we met and spoke a ship, to which I sent Captain Hately to
+enquire the news on the coast, and gave him money to buy tobacco, as the
+Success had our stock on board. She was a Portuguese from Rio de Janeiro
+bound to Pernambuco, and had no tobacco; but Hately had laid out my
+money in unnecessary trifles, alleging they would sell for double the
+money at the next port.
+
+[Footnote 252: This island is in 27 deg. 10' S.]
+
+[Footnote 253: Cape Frio is in 22 deg. 33' S.]
+
+[Captain Betagh gives a very different account of this matter, asserting
+that Shelvocke hoisted imperial colours and made the Portuguese ship
+bring to, on which Hately went aboard with a boat's crew well armed, and
+put the Portuguese captain in such a fright, that he not only sent all
+sorts of refreshments on board the Speedwell, but a dozen pieces of silk
+flowered with gold and silver, worth about three pounds a yard, several
+dozens of China plates and basons, a Japan cabinet, and three hundred
+moidores in gold; ninety-six of which were afterwards found on Hately,
+when made prisoner by the Spaniards, when he had nearly been put to
+death for piracy on their account.][254]
+
+[Footnote 254: It is almost unnecessary to point out, that this
+paragraph is an addition by Harris to the narrative of Shelvocke,
+extracted from the journal of Betagh.--E.]
+
+We anchored at the island of St Catharine on the 23d June, where the
+carpenter went ashore with a gang to fell trees, and saw them into
+planks. The captain and inhabitants of the island came off to us daily
+with fresh provisions, which saved our sea-stores while we lay here. I
+also bought twenty-one beeves, 200 salted drom-fish of large size, and
+150 bushels of cassado meal, called by the Portuguese _farina de fao_.
+This is about as fine as our oatmeal, and from it a very hearty food is
+prepared with little trouble. I also bought 160 bushels of _calavances_,
+partly for money at a dollar the bushel, and partly in exchange for
+salt, measure for measure; and likewise provided a quantity of tobacco
+for the crew.
+
+The account given of this island by Frezier is very exact, only that he
+takes no notice of an island between the island of _Gall_ and the
+continent of Brazil, nor of a reef of rocks. To arrive at the proper
+anchoring place at this island of St Catharine, it is necessary to
+proceed in the channel between that island and the continent till within
+or near two small nameless islands, over against the northernmost of
+which is the watering place on the island of St Catharine, near the
+entrance of a salt-water creek, opposite to which you may safely anchor
+in six or seven fathoms on fine grey sand. The isle of St Catharine is
+about eight leagues and a half long, but no where exceeds two leagues
+broad; and at one place the channel between it and the continent is only
+a quarter of a mile broad. The island is covered all over with
+impassable woods, except where cleared for the plantations. Even the
+smallest island about it is covered in like manner with a great variety
+of trees, between which the ground is entirely covered with thorns and
+brambles, which hinder all access; and the main land of Brazil may be
+justly termed a vast continued wilderness. Sassafras, so much valued in
+Europe, is so common here that we laid in a good quantity for fuel. It
+has great abundance of oranges, both China and Seville, lemons, citrons,
+limes, bananas, cabbage-palms, melons of all sorts, and potatoes. It has
+also very large and good sugar-canes, of which they make little use for
+want of utensils, so that the little sugar, molasses and rum they have
+is very dear. They have very little game, though the woods are full of
+parrots, which are good eating. These birds always fly in pairs, though
+often several hundreds in a flock. Maccaos, cockatoes, plovers, and a
+variety of other birds of curious colours and various shapes, are to be
+seen in abundance; particularly one somewhat larger than a thrush,
+having a spur on the joint of each wing. Flamingoes are often seen here
+in great numbers, of a fine scarlet colour, and appear very beautiful
+while flying. This bird is about the size of a heron, and not unlike it
+in shape.
+
+The fishery is here abundant, as fish of several excellent sorts are in
+great plenty, and there is the best convenience almost everywhere for
+hauling the seine. All the creeks and bays are well stocked with
+mullets, large rays, grantors, cavallies, and drum-fish, so named from
+the noise they make when followed into shallow water, and there taken.
+Some of them weigh twenty or thirty pounds each, their scales being as
+large as crown pieces. The Portuguese call them _moroes_. The salt-water
+creek formerly mentioned may be gone up three or four miles, to be near
+the watering-place; and every rock or stone, even the roots of the
+mangrove trees, afford a delicious small green oyster. Likewise on the
+rocks at the sea-side there are _sea-eggs_, which resemble _dock-burrs_,
+but usually three or four times as large, of a sea-green or purple
+colour. In the inside they are divided into partitions, like oranges,
+each cell containing a yellow substance, which is eaten raw, and
+exceeds, in my opinion, all the shell-fish I ever tasted. They have
+prawns of extraordinary size, and we sometimes caught the _sea-horse_ in
+our nets. On the savannahs of Areziliba, on the continent opposite the
+southern end of St Catharine, they have great numbers of black cattle,
+some of which we had from thence at a very reasonable price.
+
+The Portuguese on this island are a parcel of banditti, who have taken
+refuge here from the more strictly governed parts of Brazil. Emanuel
+Mansa, who was captain of the island in the time of Frezier, was still
+their chief. They enjoy the blessings of a fertile country and wholesome
+air, and stand in need of nothing from other countries except clothing.
+They have fire-arms sufficient for their use, and have often need of
+them, being greatly infected with tigers; for which reason every house
+has many dogs to destroy these ravenous animals, which yet often make
+great havock. I have been told that a tiger has killed eight or ten dogs
+in a night: But when any make their appearance in the day, they seldom
+escape, as the inhabitants are fond of the diversion of hunting them.
+These animals are so numerous, that it is quite common to see the prints
+of their paws on the sandy beach. We could not see any of the fine
+dwelling-houses mentioned by Frezier; neither have they any place that
+can be called a town, nor any kind of fortification, except the woods,
+which are a secure retreat from any enemy that may attack them. I cannot
+say much about the Indians of those parts, as I never saw above two or
+three of them.
+
+On the 2d July we saw a large ship at anchor, under Parrots Island,
+about five miles from where we lay. After securing the watering-place,
+and what we had there ashore, I sent the launch, well manned and armed,
+under a lieutenant, to see what she was. The launch returned about noon,
+reporting that she was the _Ruby_, formerly an English man-of-war, but
+now one of the squadron under Martinet, and commanded by Mons. La
+Jonqniere. She was in, the Spanish service, but most of her officers and
+crew were French, to the number of about 420. Yet they had no intention
+to molest us, having quitted the South Sea on report of a rupture
+between France and Spain. M. La Jonquiere was a man of strict honour,
+and sent me intimation of his good intentions, with an invitation to
+dinner, which I accepted, and was well entertained. About this time I
+heard that Hately had plundered the Portuguese ship, formerly mentioned,
+of 100 moidores, and had distributed part of the money among the boat's
+crew, to engage them to secrecy. I examined into this as strictly as
+possible, intending, if found guilty, to have delivered him up to the
+captain of St Catharine's, but I could not get sufficient proof. This
+man also committed so many vile actions in the island of St Catharine,
+that oar people were often in the utmost danger, from the resentment of
+the Portuguese; which bad conduct I could neither prevent nor punish, as
+he had become a great favourite with my mutinous crew.
+
+M. La Jonquiere, with several of his officers and passengers, came on
+board the Speedwell to dine with me, on the 6th July. While they were on
+board, Hudson my boatswain raised a mutiny, which was easily quelled by
+the assistance of the French gentlemen: But the boatswain was sent home
+in the French ship. On the 15th July, we saw a large ship bearing in
+for the harbour; but on discovering us, she turned out again. This
+circumstance alarmed M. La Jonquiere, suspecting she might be our
+consort, so that he put to sea next morning. The large ship appeared
+again on the 25th under French colours, being the Solomon of St Malo of
+forty guns and 160 men, commanded by M. Dumain Girard, bound for Peru
+and Chili.
+
+At this time great heart-burnings arose in my crew: for, having heard
+that the people on board the Duke and Duchess had been indifferently
+treated in regard to their prize-money when they got home, they resolved
+to secure themselves in time. With this view, and by the advice of
+Matthew Stewart, chief-mate, they drew up a paper of articles respecting
+plunder, and sent me a letter insisting on these articles being made the
+rule of our voyage; to which at last I was obliged to agree, rather than
+suffer them to proceed in a piratical manner.
+
+On the 3d August the St Francisco Zavier came into the harbour, a
+Portuguese man of war of forty guns and 300 men, bound from Lisbon for
+Macao in China, commanded by Mons. Riviere, a Frenchman. We departed
+from the island of St Catharine on the 9th August. Its northern point
+being in lat. 27 deg. 20' S. and long. 50 deg. W. from the Lizard.[255] I kept
+the lead constantly sounding all along the coast of Patagonia, and had
+regular soundings. From the lat. of 40 deg. to 30 deg. 38' both S. we frequently
+saw great shoals of seals and penguins, which were always attended by
+flocks of pintadoes, birds about the size of pigeons. The French call
+these birds _damiers_, as their black and white feathers on their back
+and wings are disposed like the squares of a draught-board. These were
+also attended by albatrosses, the largest of all sea-fowl, some of them
+extending their wings twelve or thirteen feet from tip to tip. While
+passing the mouth of the Rio. Plata, the sea was covered with prodigious
+quantities of large seaweed, which often greatly incommoded us and
+deadened our way. On getting farther south we were freed from this
+inconvenience; after which we saw abundance of things floating on the
+surface of the sea, like white snakes. We took some of these up, but
+could not perceive them to have any appearance of life, neither had they
+the shape of any kind of animal, being only a long cylinder of a white
+jelly-like substance, perhaps the spawn of some large fish.
+
+[Footnote 255: Only 27 deg. S. and 48 deg. 30' W. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+As we advanced to the southward, the appetites of our people increased
+with the cold, which occasioned disputes in the ship. Even at my own
+table, Captain Betagh of the marines insisted on a larger allowance in
+such coarse terms, that I confined him till he wrote me a submissive
+letter, on which I restored him. But this squabble constrained me to
+allow an extraordinary meal to the people daily, either of flour or
+calavances; which reduced our stock of provisions, and consumed our
+wood and water, proving afterwards of great inconvenience. Whales,
+grampuses, and other fish of monstrous size, are in such vast numbers on
+the coast of Patagonia, that they were often offensive to us, coming so
+close to us that it seemed impossible to avoid striking them on every
+scud of a sea, and almost stifling us with the stench of their breaths,
+when they blew close to windward. Being ignorant of the Greenland
+fishery, I cannot pretend to say whether that trade might not be carried
+on here; but this I may venture to affirm, that the navigation here is
+safer, and I am apt to believe it has a greater chance of being
+successful.[256]
+
+[Footnote 256: This southern whale-fishery is now carried on to a
+considerable extent.--E.]
+
+On the 19th September, about midnight, perceiving the water all at once
+to be discoloured, we sounded, and had 25 fathoms, on which we stood out
+from the land, but did not deepen our water in five leagues. This bank
+must lie very near the entrance into the Straits of Magellan. On this
+bank we saw great numbers of blubbers, appearing like the tops of
+umbrellas, curiously streaked with all sorts of colours, being an
+entirely different species from any I had ever seen before. We now
+steered for the Straits of _Le Maire_, and met with very foggy weather
+on approaching the coast of _Terra del Fuego_. The fog cleared up on the
+23d September, when we had sight of stupendous mountains on that
+southern land, entirely covered with snow. The nearest point of land was
+at least eight leagues from us, in the S.W. but before we could
+ascertain our situation the mist returned. At four next morning,
+proceeding under easy sail to the S.E. it proved very clear at
+day-break, and I found we had fallen in with the land about five leagues
+N.W. from the straits of Le Maire. We had now a full, but melancholy
+prospect of the most desolate country that can well be conceived,
+appearing a congeries of chains of mountains in succession, one behind
+the other, perpetually cloathed in snow.
+
+Hitherto we had not been sensible of any current, either favourable or
+adverse, after getting to the south of the Rio Plata. But this afternoon
+we were hurried with incredible rapidity into the straits of Le Maire;
+and when we had gained about the middle of the passage, the tide
+slackened. On sounding we had twenty-seven fathoms on a rocky bottom. We
+had a dear view of _Staten-land_, which yields a most uncomfortable
+prospect of a surprising height, quite covered with snow to the very
+wash of the sea, so that it seems more like a white cloud than firm
+land. These straits seemed to answer well to the map of Frezier; being
+about seven leagues through and six wide, and extend almost due north
+and south. Now the return tide rushed upon us with a violence equal to
+that which brought us in, and it was astonishing with what rapidity we
+were driven again to the north, though we had a fresh gale at N.W. so
+that we seemed to advance six knots by the log; whence I judged this
+tide ran not less than ten knots. In short, we were carried quite out of
+the straits to the north in about an hour. Upon this shift of tide there
+arose such a short sea, and so lofty at the same time, that we
+alternately dipped our bowsprit and poop-lanterns into the water; our
+ship all the while labouring most violently, and refusing to answer the
+helm. The tide shifted again at midnight, and we shot through the
+straits, steering S. with a brisk gale at N.W. without seeing the land
+distinctly on either side: And, in the morning, had a good offing to the
+southward.
+
+We found it very cold before we got thus far; but now we began to feel
+the utmost extremity of coldness. The bleak western winds had of
+themselves been sufficiently piercing; but these were always accompanied
+by snow or sleet, which beat continually on our sails and rigging, cased
+all our masts, yards, and ropes with ice, and rendered our sails almost
+useless. We had been so much accustomed to most severe storms, that we
+thought the weather tolerable when we could carry a reefed main-sail; as
+we were often for two or three days together lying-to under bare poles,
+exposed to the shocks of prodigious waves, more mountainous than any I
+had ever seen. We now sensibly felt the benefit of our awning, without
+which we could scarcely have lived. The wind continued to rage without
+intermission from the westward, by which we were driven to the latitude
+of 61 deg. 30' S. and had such continued misty weather, that we were under
+perpetual apprehension of running foul of ice islands: But, thank God,
+we escaped that danger, though under frequent alarms from fog banks and
+other false appearances. Though the days were long, we could seldom get
+sight of the sun, so that we had only one observation for the variation
+in all this passage, which was in lat. 60 deg. 37' S. 5 deg. W. of the straits
+of Le Maire, when we found it 22 deg. 6' E. On the 1st October, as we were
+furling the main-sail, one William Camell, cried out that his hands and
+fingers were so benumbed that he could not hold himself: And, before
+those near could assist him, he fell down and was drowned. On the 22d
+October, our fore-top-mast was carried away, and we rigged another next
+day. Having contrary winds from the time we passed the straits of Le
+Maire, with the most uncomfortable weather, we made our way very slowly
+to the west and northwards, the hopes of getting soon into a wanner and
+better climate supporting us under our many miseries.
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_Proceedings in the South Sea, till Ship-wrecked on the Island of Juan
+Fernandez._
+
+At length, on the 14th November at noon, our spirits were cheared by
+seeing the coast of Chili; yet here we found ourselves under very great
+difficulties. Our tedious passage and extraordinary consumption of
+provisions, had so reduced our wood and water, and even our food, that
+it was necessary to repair to some place where our wants might be
+supplied; but it was difficult to resolve where that might be done. We
+first tried Narborough island, but finding the road unsafe, sailed for
+the mouth of St Domingo river on the continent, where we had
+twenty-eight fathoms, shoaling as we advanced from eighteen to less than
+five as fast as a man could heave the lead. Finding this place too
+hazardous, we stood out to sea, and were blown farther north than we
+designed. Being greatly at a loss where to procure wood and water, one
+Joseph de la Fontaine, a Frenchman, proposed going to the island of
+Chiloe, assuring us that the towns of _Chaiao_ and _Calibuco_, the
+former on the island and the latter on the continent, were rich places,
+where we could not fail of procuring whatever we wanted. Cliacao was, he
+said, the usual residence of the governor, and at Calibuco was a wealthy
+college of Jesuits, having considerable magazines, always well stocked
+with provisions of all kinds. This person at the same time insinuated
+among the people, that our expedition would probably turn out
+unfortunate, if we passed this place, as Captain Clipperton must by this
+time have alarmed the coast, in consequence of which there would be an
+embargo on all ships trading to leeward.
+
+My chief inducement for making an attempt on Chiloe was to procure such
+additional supply of provisions, as might enable us, in case the coast
+were already alarmed, to retire to some unfrequented island, to remain
+till the Spaniards should suppose we had abandoned the South Sea; after
+which we could resume our cruize, when they were under no apprehensions
+of being molested. Accordingly, on the 30th November, we entered the
+channel which divides the island of Chiloe from the main land of Chili,
+and stood in for the harbour of Chacao under French colours, intending
+to have attacked the towns of Chacao and Calibuco by surprise. Our
+pilot, however, seemed as much a stranger to the navigation here as I
+was, and as the wind began to blow fresh with thick weather, I came to
+anchor in thirteen fathoms, at ten in the morning, between the point of
+_Carelampo_ and the small island of Pedro Nunez. Soon after coming to
+anchor, the tide made outwards with prodigious rapidity, and the wind
+increased greatly, between which the sea became very boisterous, all the
+channel in which we lay appearing one continued breach or surf. Our ship
+consequently made a vast strain on her cable, which parted at two in the
+afternoon, and we could have no hopes to recover our anchor, as the buoy
+had been staved and sunk about an hour before we were thus set adrift. I
+did not think it adviseable to risk another anchor, and therefore
+immediately crossed over for the island of Chiloe, in a boisterous gale
+with thick rainy weather, surrounded on all hands with seeming shoals,
+and in a manner bewildered in an unknown navigation. When within a mile
+of Chiloe, we ranged along shore to the southward,[257] in hope of
+discovering the town of Chacao. We passed two commodious bays, which had
+no appearance of any town, and came to a point of land marked by a high
+pyramidal rock. After getting round this point, we found ourselves
+entirely out of the tideway, and quite sheltered from all other
+inconveniences, and came therefore to anchor opposite a cross on the
+north side of the harbour, having just sufficient day-light to enable us
+to get into this place of shelter.
+
+[Footnote 257: The direction was more probably to the eastward--E.]
+
+Next morning, I sent the second lieutenant, in the pinnace well manned
+and armed, to look out for the two towns; and sent at the same time Mr
+Hately in the launch, to endeavour to find a watering-place. He soon
+returned, accompanied by an Indian, who had shewn him a very convenient
+place where we could at once procure both wood and water, even under the
+command of our guns from the ship, and free from all danger of being
+surprised. I accordingly sent back the launch with casks to be filled,
+and several people to cut wood, all well armed, together with an
+officer of marines and ten men to keep guard. The Indians gave us hopes
+of a sufficient supply of provisions; but came in the evening to our
+people who were on shore, to acquaint them that the natives were
+forbidden to bring any thing to us. As the pinnace had not yet returned,
+this information gave me much concern, fearing that the enemy had taken
+her, and had by that means learnt what we were. On the 3d December,
+about seven in the evening, a Spanish officer came to us, in a boat
+rowed by eight Indians, being sent by the governor of Chiloe to enquire
+what we were. Meaning to pass upon him for a French captain well known
+in these seas, I ordered none of my people to appear on deck but such as
+could speak French or Spanish, and hoisted French colours. When the
+officer came on board, I told him my ship was the St Rose,
+homeward-bound, that my name was _Janis le Breton_, and that I entreated
+the governor to spare me what provisions he could conveniently afford,
+that being my only business on the coast. The officer heard me with much
+civility, seeming to give implicit credit to all I said; even staid on
+board all night, and went away next morning, to all appearance well
+satisfied.
+
+On the 5th in the morning, two boats came towards us full of armed men;
+but, after taking a view of us, went to a small island in the mouth of
+the harbour. On the 6th we saw a white flag hoisted on shore, to which I
+sent my launch completely manned and armed, but they found no person
+near the flag, to the shaft of which a letter was fastened, and a dozen
+hams lying close by. The letter was from _Don Nicholas Salvo_, governor
+of Chiloe, intimating strong doubts of our ship being the St Rose,
+complaining of the behaviour of the people in our pinnace, and desiring
+me to leave the coast. I returned an answer in as proper terms as I
+could devise, and next morning had another letter, couched in the utmost
+civility, but absolutely refusing me any refreshments, and demanding the
+restitution of the Indians said to have been made prisoners by our
+pinnace. In fact I knew less of our pinnace than he did, and believed
+that he actually had the people in his hands of whom he now complained.
+
+Despairing of ever seeing my people, and still ignorant where Chacao was
+situated, having no chart of the island on which I could depend, I
+determined to change my style of writing to the governor, and try what
+could be done by threatening to use force. I therefore wrote, that I
+was determined to have provisions by fair means or foul. Next day I sent
+my first lieutenant, Mr Brooks, with twenty-nine men well armed in the
+launch, ordering him to bring off all the provisions he could find.
+Shortly after, a boat came with a message from the governor, offering to
+treat with me, if I would send an officer to Chacao: But I answered,
+that I would treat no where but on board, and that he was now too late,
+as I had already sent eighty men on shore to take all they could find.
+
+In the evening the launch returned, accompanied by a large piragua, and
+both were completely laden with sheep, hogs, fowls, barley, and green
+peas and beans. Soon afterwards, the pinnace arrived with all her crew,
+but so terrified that I did not expect them to be again fit for service
+for one while. The officer told me, that he had been forced to fight his
+way through several canoes, filled with armed Indians, from whom he got
+clear with the utmost difficulty, and had been under the necessity of
+making his passage quite round the island, a course of not less than
+seventy leagues.[258] This proceeded only from excess of terror, as they
+only met one boat with unarmed Indians and a Spanish sergeant, who came
+off to them without the least shew of violence, as some of them
+afterwards confessed, but with this addition, that there were great
+numbers of people on shore, who they were apprehensive would come off to
+them. The only excuse the officer could allege was, that the tide had
+hurried him away, and he forgot in his fright that he had a grappling in
+the boat, with which he might have anchored till the tide turned.
+
+[Footnote 258: The circuit of the island of Chiloe by sea, could hardly
+be less than 350 English miles; an arduous navigation in an open boat
+upon an utterly unknown coast.--E.]
+
+By this strange mismanagement, I missed a favourable opportunity of
+seizing the town of Chacao, which I might easily have done if I had
+appeared before it within forty-eight hours after our arrival, when the
+governor was totally unprovided for resistance. But now, having a whole
+week allowed for mustering the force of the island, he had collected
+near a thousand armed Spaniards, as I learnt from the Indian prisoners
+in the pinnace. I therefore laid aside all thoughts of going to the
+towns, in the hopes of furnishing ourselves from the Indian farms and
+plantations, in which I kept one of our boats constantly employed. By
+the 16th, our decks were full of live cattle, together with poultry and
+hams in abundance, and such quantities of wheat, barley, potatoes, and
+maize, that I was quite satisfied. On a moderate computation, we had
+added four months provisions to the stock we brought from England, so
+that I was well pleased with the effects of our stay at Chiloe, and
+prepared to depart. I might certainly have done much more for my own
+credit and the profit of my owners, had if not been for the
+mismanagement of the officer in the pinnace.
+
+_Chiloe_ is the first of the Spanish possessions on the coast of Chili,
+reckoning from the south; and, though it produces neither gold nor
+silver, is a fine island, and is considered as of great consequence;
+insomuch that the Spaniards would be under great apprehensions when
+strange ships enter its ports, did they not confide in the number of its
+inhabitants, which is extraordinary for this part of the world. The body
+of this island is in lat. 42 deg. 4' S. being about thirty leagues in length
+from N. to S. and not above six or seven leagues from E. to W.[259] It
+is watered by several rivers, and produces many kinds of useful trees,
+yielding an agreeable prospect, by the great number of Indian farms and
+plantations dispersed at small distances from each other, on rising
+grounds among the woods. Within this great island there is an
+archipelago or cluster of smaller islands, the number of which is not
+well known; yet the smallest of these is said to be well inhabited, and
+to abound in cattle. Among these islands there are very uncertain and
+violent currents, which are by no means safe. I would recommend all
+strangers to go in at the north end of the great island, giving the
+northern point of the island a good birth, and then to keep the island
+side of the channel on board, running along shore to the southward
+(eastward). Passing two bays, which seem commodious, you come to a
+point, almost contiguous to which is a high rock, somewhat like a
+pyramid; and passing between that rock and a small high island near it,
+you run directly into a harbour resembling the mouth of a river, which
+forms a safe anchorage. In going in, take care not to come nearer shore
+than having the depth of five fathoms, as the nearer to the small island
+the less water; wherefore keep the lead going, and be bold with the
+shore towards the north side of the harbour, which has the greatest
+depth, while the south side is shoaly.[260]
+
+[Footnote 259: Chiloe reaches from lat. 41 deg. 50' to 43 deg. 50', both S. and
+from long. 73 deg. 18' to 74 deg. 24', both W. extending 135 English miles in
+extreme length, by 35 in medium breadth. See vol. V. p. 592, for an
+account of the Archipelago of Chiloe.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 260: Shelvocke seems here to describe the harbour leading to
+the town or village of San Carlos.--E.]
+
+My pilot carried me the contrary way to that here directed, advising me
+to keep near the main land of Chili, which I did till I got to
+_Carelampo_ Point, having several small islands to the southward of my
+course, which proved unfortunate for me by the loss of my anchor. The
+soil of Chiloe is very fertile, producing all sorts of European fruits
+and grains, and has fine pasture lands, in which great numbers of cattle
+are grazed, particularly sheep. The air is wholesome and temperate; yet
+I suspect the winter may be rigorous, being bounded on the west by an
+immense ocean, without any land to screen it from the cold moist vapours
+brought thither by the tempestuous westerly winds, which generally reign
+in these latitudes, and which must render it uncomfortable in the winter
+months, as the parallels of latitude to the south of the equator are
+much colder than those in the same degrees to the northwards.
+
+In this island they have abundance of very handsome middle-sized horses,
+which the natives are said to manage with great dexterity. They have
+also an animal, called _guanaco_ or _carneso de tierra_, that is, sheep
+of the country, which very much resembles a camel, but not nearly so
+large. They have long necks, and I have seen one of them between five
+and six feet high. Their wool or soft hair is very fine. They smell very
+rank, and move with a very slow majestic pace, which hardly any violence
+can make them quicken; yet they are of great service at the mines in
+Peru, where they are employed in carrying the ore and other things.
+Their flesh is very coarse, as we experienced, having salted some of
+them for our future use. Besides these, the inhabitants have European
+sheep and great numbers of hogs, but not many black cattle. The island
+has plenty of fowls, both wild and tame. Among the former is a small
+species of goose, found on the banks of the rivers, which are
+beautifully white, and of an excellent taste. The tame poultry are of
+the same kinds with our own.
+
+The natives are almost in all respects the same with those on the
+continent of Chili, of moderate stature, with deep olive complexions,
+and coarse shaggy black hair, some of them having by no means
+disagreeable features. They seem naturally of fierce and warlike
+dispositions; but the oppressions of the Spaniards, and the artifices of
+the jesuits, who are the missionaries in these parts, have curbed and
+broken their spirits. Frezier says, that the Indians on the continent,
+to the southward of this island, are called _Chonos_, who go quite
+naked; and that there is a race of men of extraordinary size in the
+inland parts of the country, called _Cacahues_,[261] who are in amity
+with the _Chonos_, and sometimes accompany them to the Spanish
+settlements in Chiloe. Frezier says, that he has been credibly informed
+by eye-witnesses, that some of these were about nine or ten feet high. I
+had sight of two of these Indians, who came from the southward of St
+Domingo river, one of whom was a cacique, who did not seem to me to
+differ in their persons from the ordinary natives of Chiloe. They were
+decently clothed in _ponchos, monteras_, and _poulains_. The _poncho_ is
+a sort of square carpet, having a slit or hole cut in the middle, wide
+enough to slip over the head, so that it hangs down over the shoulders,
+half before and half behind, under which they generally wear a short
+doublet. On their heads they have a _montera_, or cap nearly like those
+of our postillions, and their legs are covered by the _poulains_, a kind
+of knit buskins, or hose without feet. In short, their appearance has
+little or none of the savage. Their habitations are firmly built of
+planks, but have no chimneys, so that they are very black and sooty
+within.
+
+[Footnote 261: See an account of the native tribes, inhabiting the
+southern extremity of South America, vol. V. p. 401.]
+
+They inclose some of their land for cultivation, by means of rails or
+paling; and although they have plenty of every thing necessary to a
+comfortable subsistence, they have no bread, from wanting mills in which
+to grind and prepare their wheat They use a miserable substitute, making
+a kind of cakes of sea-weeds, which from use is much esteemed by them,
+and was not even disliked by some of our men. Besides this, they prepare
+their maize in several manners to answer the purpose of bread, and they
+use potatoes and other roots with the same intention. They prepare a
+liquor called _chicha_ from their Indian corn, in imitation of their
+neighbours on the continent of Chili; but the Spaniards endeavor to curb
+their propensity to the use of this liquor, as their drinking bouts have
+often occasioned seditions and revolts. Such of the natives as have no
+European weapons, use pikes, darts, and other arms of the country. Among
+these is a running noose on a long leathern thong, called a _lays_,
+which they use with surprising dexterity for catching cattle, horses, or
+other animals, even when at full career. From all that I could see of
+the natives of Chiloe, or hear respecting the Chilese, they seem to
+resemble each other in all things, which is not wonderful, considering
+the near neighbourhood of this island to the continent of Chili. They
+use small drums, the heads of which are made of goats skins with the
+hair on, and give a very dull sound.
+
+The natives of Chiloe carry on a small woollen manufacture, consisting
+of _ponchoes_ and other articles of clothing, formerly mentioned. They
+also export considerable quantities of cedar, both in plank, and wrought
+up into boxes, chests, desks, and the like, with which they supply all
+Chili and Peru. They have no European trade; but the Spaniard who came
+to me from the governor expressed his astonishment that no trading ships
+ever put in there, saying they had plenty of money among them, with a
+safe port, free from the danger of going to the northward among the
+Spanish ships of war; as a great deal of business might be done here,
+before intelligence could be sent as far as Lima, and the ships could be
+fitted out and sent so great a way to wind-ward. It is observed of the
+Chilese, that, differing from all other nations ever heard of, they have
+no notion of a Supreme Being, and consequently have no kind of worship;
+and they are such enemies to civil society that they never live together
+in towns and villages, so that their country seems thinly inhabited,
+though very populous, the whole nation being dispersed in farms at a
+good distance, every family having its own plantation, and raising its
+own necessaries.
+
+Though thus scattered, they are not wholly independent, each tribe being
+subject to a chief, called a cacique, whose dwelling is conveniently
+situated among them, for the more speedy summoning them together on
+affairs of importance. This is done by the sound of a sort of horn, on
+hearing which all his vassals repair to him without delay. The chief
+commands them in war, and has an absolute power of dispensing justice
+among his subjects, who all consider themselves as his relations, he
+being as it were the head of his family, and his authority hereditary.
+In all these respects the inhabitants of Chiloe resemble their
+neighbours on the continent, excepting that their caciques are stript
+in a great measure of their power and influence, by the tyranny of the
+Spaniards, who keep them under the most servile slavery, while the
+missionaries blind them by a superstitious and imperfect conversion to
+Christianity, of which not one of these natives know any thing more than
+merely that they were baptized; all their devotion consisting of mere
+idolatry of the cross, or the images of saints; for the Spanish clergy
+use no manner of pains to enlighten their minds, but probably think it
+better, by keeping them in ignorance, to make them more contented under
+the rigorous government of the Spaniards. Under this delusion, the
+caciques have changed their lawful prerogatives for the vain ostentation
+of being allowed to wear a silver-headed cane, which places them on a
+footing outwardly with a Spanish captain. Yet have they sometimes
+rebelled against their proud oppressors, deeming death preferable to
+slavery, as may be seen in the account of Frezier's voyage.
+
+The vessels used in Chiloe are peculiarly constructed, as, for want of
+nails and other articles of iron, the planks of which their boats are
+constructed are sewed together very ingeniously with oziers. These boats
+are all constructed of three pieces only, the keel or bottom being one
+piece, and the sides two others; and they are rowed with oars, in the
+same manner as with us, more or fewer according to their size.
+
+Having nothing farther to detain us in Chiloe, I determined upon
+proceeding to the island of Juan Fernandez, as directed in my
+instructions; but my men took it into their heads that great things
+might be done by a short trip to the Bay of Conception, to which also
+they were induced by the Frenchman who persuaded us to come to Chiloe.
+He pretended that there were always five or six ships in the road of
+Conception, besides others daily coming in or going out, and that these
+had often both ways considerable sums of money or silver, with other
+valuable things, on board; and, though large ships, they were of little
+or no force, neither were there any fortifications at that place to
+protect them; so that we could not meet any opposition in taking them,
+even if there were twenty sail. He said their, cargoes consisted chiefly
+of corn, wine, brandy, flour, and jerked beef; and that the ships bound
+for Conception always brought money to purchase their cargoes; besides
+that considerable booty might be made for rich trading passengers, who
+carry on a considerable trade over land between Conception and Buenos
+Ayres. He also alleged, that we could not fail of having any ships we
+might take ransomed; and that we should certainly make our fortunes, if
+we could only reach Conception before they had notice of our being in
+these seas. This man therefore advised my people to endeavour to prevail
+on me to make the best of my way to Conception, before the governor of
+Chiloe could send our deserter thither; after which all the coast would
+be alarmed, and we should have no opportunity of meeting with any thing
+till the Spaniards had imagined we were gone from the South Sea.
+
+In similar cases, all are fond of delivering their sentiments; and, as
+it is impossible to keep a ship's company in so much awe in so remote a
+part as in short voyages, my men did not fail to speak their minds
+somewhat insolently. One William Morphew, who had been in these seas
+several years, took upon him to tell me, that it did not signify much if
+we arrived two or three days sooner or later at Juan Fernandez. He said
+also, that I was a stranger here, but the Frenchman and he were well
+acquainted with these seas, and every body hoped I would be advised to
+go to Conception; hoping I would not put a mere punctilious adherence to
+orders in balance against so fair a prospect, or almost certainty of
+success, if we arrived there in time. In short, they all assured me that
+they had the interest of the proprietors in view, as much as their own,
+and that they would perish sooner than injure them in any respect. They
+said at the same time, if I had not success in my proceedings nobody
+could be blamed but myself, and entreated me not to let slip this
+opportunity, in which they would stand by me with all fidelity.
+
+On our way to Conception, we made the islands of Mocha and St Mary on
+the 23d December, and arrived that same evening in the Bay of
+Conception, but could not be certain whether there were any ships in the
+road. I immediately gave orders to man and arm our boats and sent them
+up that same night, in order to surprise any ships that might be there;
+and with strict orders, if they found them too strong, to endeavour to
+prevent them from sending any thing on shore till I were able to work
+the ship up to them. This I endeavoured to do all night, but to very
+little purpose; for at day-light next morning I could not discern any
+thing above us. Captain Hately returned about noon of the 24th,
+informing me that he had taken a ship of about 150 tons, lately arrived
+from Baldivia, and having only a few cedar plants on board, with no
+person in her but the boatswain, an old negro, and two Indian boys. He
+had left her in the charge of Mr Brooks, my first lieutenant, with
+orders to bring her down the first opportunity; and had taken, while on
+his return, a small vessel, of about twenty-five tons, near the island
+_Quiri-quinie_, which lies in the harbour or bay of Conception, where
+this small vessel had been taking in pears, cherries, and other fruits,
+to sell at Conception. Immediately after taking this small vessel, I
+could perceive with my glass another small boat come in between the
+islands of _Quiri-quinie_ and _Talgaguana_, passing within pistol-shot
+of my pinnace, and yet Captain Hately did not engage her. For this his
+only excuse, after he came on board, was, that he did not mind her;
+though our boat's crew said she was full of men.
+
+On the 26th about noon, Mr Brooks brought down the prize, and anchored
+about half a mile short of us. The boatswain of this prize had not been
+two hours in the Speed-well, till he told us of a vessel, laden with
+wine, brandy, and other valuable things, riding at anchor in the Bay of
+Herradura, about two leagues to the north of us, and bound for Chiloe.
+On receiving this information, I ordered Mr Randal, my second
+lieutenant, with twenty five men, to go in the Mercury, which name we
+gave to the captured flour bark, and, accompanied by the Spanish
+boatswain of the other prize, to go in search of the vessel in the Bay
+of Herradura, with positive orders not to land or to make any other
+hazardous attempt. But they returned next evening with the following
+melancholy story.
+
+On getting into the bay, they found the vessel hauled dry ashore, when
+Randal ordered his people to land and bring away what they could find in
+her, while he and three or four more kept the bark afloat. The people
+found the bark empty, but seeing a small house hard by, they suspected
+her cargo might be lodged there, and the inferior officer along with
+them ordered them to examine that house. The poor fellows went
+accordingly, without any officer at their head, and without any regard
+to order, every one endeavouring to be foremost. Their career was soon
+stopped, as they had hardly got beyond the top of the bank when they
+discovered the enemy coming furiously towards them. Some of the seamen
+were of opinion they might have retreated at this time in safety, if
+they had not been astonished at the strange manner in which they were
+attacked, by a number of horses galloping up to them without riders,
+which caused them for some time to stand amazed, not knowing what way to
+proceed; but on a little reflection they bestirred themselves to make
+the best of their way to the Mercury, in which they all succeeded except
+five, who were made prisoners. Fortunately for them, the Mercury had by
+some accident got aground, or they must all have been cut off, as the
+Spaniards thought fit to retire on getting within musket-shot of the
+Mercury. They now got the bark afloat, but as the water was still very
+low, and they were obliged in going out of the bay to keep very near to
+a point of land, the Spaniards galled them from that point, under the
+shelter of the wood. They soon passed this point, having a fair wind,
+all lying close in the bottom of the bark, so that on this occasion only
+one man was wounded, who was shot through the thigh. The Spaniards came
+down upon them in this affair after the following singular manner. They
+were preceded by twenty or more horses abreast, two deep, and linked
+together, behind which extraordinary van-guard came the enemy on
+horseback, lying on the necks of their horses, and driving the others
+before them, never seen to sit up on their saddles, except to fire their
+muskets, or when there was no danger. When they got near our people,
+they threw their _lays_ or running nooses to catch them, and accordingly
+ensnared James Daniel, one of my foremast-men, who was a good way into
+the water, and whom they dragged out again at the rate of ten knots. The
+Spaniards in Chili are universally dexterous in the use of this running
+noose, for I have seen a Spaniard bring a man up by the foot as he ran
+along the deck, and they are sure of any thing they fling at, at the
+distance of several fathoms.
+
+These misfortunes and disappointments made my crew extremely uneasy, and
+might have had bad consequences, if we had not been agreeably surprised
+by seeing a large ship coming round the northern point of the island of
+_Quiri-quinie_.[262] It was at this time almost dark, so that her people
+could not perceive what we were, and stood on therefore without fear, so
+that she came towards us, and was taken without resistance. This ship
+proved to be the St Fermin, of about 300 tons, last from _Cadaco_,[263]
+having only a small cargo, consisting of sugar, molasses, rice, coarse
+French linen, some woollen cloth and bays of Quito, a small quantity of
+chocolate, and about five or six thousand dollars in money and wrought
+plate. I sent Mr Hendric, the owners agent, to inspect her cargo, and to
+order every thing of value out of her into the Speedwell, and the ship's
+company sent their agent likewise. They returned in the afternoon,
+bringing all the bales, boxes, chests, portmanteaus, and other packages,
+with a large quantity of sugar, molasses, and chocolate, and about
+seventy hundred weight of good rusk, with all her other stores and
+eatables. Don Francisco Larragan, the captain of this ship, begged to be
+allowed to ransom her, which I willingly consented to, and allowed him
+to go in his own launch to Conception to raise the money, accompanied by
+a merchant, one of the prisoners.
+
+[Footnote 262: A small island in the entrance of the Bay of
+Conception.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 263: Callao, or the port of Lima, is perhaps here meant.--E.]
+
+In the mean time we were very busy in searching the prize, lest any
+thing might have been concealed; and every one who came at any time from
+the St Fermin was strictly searched by some of our people appointed for
+the purpose, that they might not appropriate any thing of value. Our
+carpenter also was employed in making a slight spar-deck over the
+Mercury, as she might be of great use while cruizing along the coast. On
+the 30th December a boat came off to us with a flag of truce from the
+governor of Conception, and an officer, who acquainted us that two of
+our people, taken in the late skirmish, were still alive, but very much
+wounded. He brought also a present of seven jars of very good wine, and
+a letter from Don Gabriel Cano, the governor, in which he demanded to
+see my commission, as also that I should send ashore Joseph de la
+Fontaine, who had been servant to one of the mates belonging to Captain
+La Jonquiere, and some other things that I thought unreasonable,
+engaging to enter into a treaty, if I would comply with these
+requisitions. At length a formal treaty was begun, in which I demanded
+16,000 dollars for the ransom of the St Fermin alone, while they offered
+only 12,000 for both the ships and the bark. Finding all his Spanish
+_puncto_ tended only to entrap us, I set fire to the Solidad, one of our
+prizes; and, giving them time to comply with my proposals it they would,
+I set the St Fermin also on fire.
+
+We sailed from the bay of Conception on the 7th January, 1720, intending
+for Juan Fernandez; and on the 8th we observed the sea to be entirely of
+a red colour, occasioned, as the Spaniards say, by the spawn of the
+_camarones_, or pracous. On the 9th, the plunder taken in the St Fermin
+was sold by the ship's agent at the mart, and brought extravagant
+prices. The account being taken, and the shares calculated, the people
+insisted for an immediate distribution, which was made accordingly, and
+each foremast-man had after the rate of ten dollars a share, in money
+and goods. On the 11th we saw the island of Juan Fernandez; and at noon
+it bore from us five leagues W.S.W. the meridional distance from
+Conception being 275 miles[264] W. From that day to the 15th, I stood
+off and on, waiting for my boats which were employed in fishing. In this
+time I sent the Mercury ashore to stop her leaks, while the boats caught
+so many fish, that we salted the fill of five puncheons. I could find no
+marks of Captain Clipperton having been here for a long time; but at
+length some of my men saw accidentally the words _Magee_ and Captain
+John cut upon a tree. Magee was the name of Clipperton's surgeon, but no
+directions were left, as agreed upon in his instructions to me, so that
+it was evident he never meant I should keep him company, or ever join
+him again.
+
+[Footnote 264: The difference of longitude between Conception and Juan
+Fernandez is six degrees of longitude W. and, consequently, 360 minutes
+or marine miles.--E.]
+
+Being by this certified of the arrival of Clipperton in the South Sea, I
+directly made the best of my way from Juan Fernandez, being in a pretty
+good condition as to provisions, by the additional stock of fish caught
+here, all our casks being filled. On the 21st, while sailing along there
+with the design of looking into _Copiapo_, I put Mr Dodd, second
+lieutenant of marines, into the Mercury, with a reinforcement of eight
+men, and sent her next evening to cruize close in with the land, while I
+kept with the Speedwell in the offing, to prevent being discovered from
+the land. On this occasion I took care to give the officer commanding
+the Mercury a copy of my commission, with all necessary instructions how
+to proceed, appointing the _Moro_, or head-land of Copiapo, to be our
+place of meeting. The business of the Mercury was to look into the port
+of Copiapo, called _Caldera_,[265] near which there are some gold-mines,
+and from whence considerable quantities of gold are exported in small
+vessels; and our bark had the advantage of being of that country build,
+so that she could not excite suspicion. Next day I hove in sight of the
+head-land of Copiapo, and lay to the southward, that I might not be seen
+from that port, which is to the northward of the _Moro de Copiapo_.
+While here, opposite a small island which lies athwart the mouth of
+Copiapo river, I sent the pinnace to fish between that isle and the
+main, and soon after saw a vessel crowding all sail towards us. She at
+first seemed too large for the Mercury, yet turned out to be her; when
+the officer told me he had looked into the port, but could see no
+shipping; but he had looked into a wrong place, and having made him
+sensible of his error, I sent him again to the right place, which was
+about six leagues farther north.
+
+[Footnote 265: The port of Caldera, or English harbour, is about twelve
+or fifteen miles to the N. of Copiapo river, having a considerable
+interposed promontory.--E.]
+
+Next morning our pinnace returned, bringing only a few penguins which
+she had taken on the island in the bay of Copiapo. The Mercury had
+looked into Caldera, but saw nothing; and instead of making use of the
+land-wind to come off to me, had kept along shore in the bottom of the
+bay till the land-wind came in so strong that she was nearly lost on the
+lee-shore. On the 27th, I sent Mr Brooks, my first lieutenant, and Mr
+Rainor, first lieutenant of marines, to relieve Mr Randal and Mr Dodd in
+the Mercury, which I had fitted with a gang of oars, and, upon trial,
+she was found to make way at the rate of three knots, which might render
+her extremely useful in a calm. The 5th February, I dispatched Mr Brooks
+ahead in the Mercury, to see if there were any ships in the harbour of
+Arica, in lat. 18 deg. 26' S. and next day, at one p.m. having ranged along
+shore, by the breakers of _Pisagua, Camarones_, and _Victor_, I got
+sight of the head-land of Arica, with a ship at anchor on its northern
+side, and saw the Mercury standing out of the bay, by which I judged the
+ship was too warm for her, and therefore made all haste to get up to her
+with the Speedwell. On coming up, we found that the ship was already
+taken, and the Mercury only accidentally adrift. This prize was called
+the Rosario, of 100 tons, laden with cormorants dung, which they use for
+manuring the land which produces the cod-pepper, or _Capsicum_, from the
+cultivation of which they make a vast profit in the vale of Arica. The
+only white face in this ship was the pilot, whom I sent ashore to see if
+the owner would ransom his ship, the cargo being worth gold to them, but
+entirely useless to us. Next morning I received a letter from Miguel
+Diaz Gonzale, the owner of the ship, insisting pitifully on his poverty
+and distress, having a large family to provide for, and promising to
+meet me at Hilo or Quaco, to treat for a ransom.
+
+We soon after took a small bark of ten tons, laden with _guana_, or
+cormorants dung, and having also some dried fish, which lay within a
+mile of Arica. By this time all the adjacent country was up in arms, and
+great numbers had come down to the coast, well mounted and armed, and
+seemingly well disciplined. To try their courage, I ordered the Mercury
+and launch to draw near the shore, as if we had really intended to land,
+though the landing-place here is altogether impracticable for European
+boats; and I also cannonaded the town briskly. Our balls made no
+execution, yet ploughed up the sand in front of the Spanish horse,
+throwing it all over them: But neither this, nor the approach of my
+small craft, made any impression, for they stood firm, and at least
+shewed the countenance of as good troops as could be wished. This much
+disappointed me, as it shewed my men that the Spaniards were far from
+being cowards, as they had been represented. As soon as it was dark,
+Gonzales came off to me, and I agreed to let him have back his ship and
+six negroes on receiving 1500 dollars, reserving right to take any thing
+out of her that might be useful to us; and at ten next night he brought
+me the agreed sum, being the weight of 1300 dollars in ingots of virgin
+silver, called _pinnas_ by the Spaniards, and the rest in coined
+dollars. He also made great enquiry for English commodities, for which
+he offered high prices, complaining that the French only supplied them
+with paltry goods and mere trifles, for which they carried off vast
+sums. He added, that he supposed the English merchants were all asleep,
+or too rich, as they did not come near them: And, although their ports
+were not so open as in other parts of the world, they yet know how to
+manage matters tolerably well; and that their governors, being generally
+Europeans, who seldom remained above three years in the country, used
+any means to improve their time, and could easily be gained so as to act
+very obligingly. He said much more as to the blindness of the English,
+in suffering the French pedlars to carry on, uninterruptedly, the most
+considerable branch of traffic in the world. Before leaving me, he
+desired me to carry his ship two or three leagues out to sea, and then
+to turn her adrift, on purpose to deceive the governor and the king's
+officers; and, if I would meet him at _Hilo_ (_Ilo_,) about twenty-five
+leagues to the north-westwards, he would purchase from me any coarse
+goods I had to dispose of, which might be done there with all imaginable
+secrecy. At this time also, the master of the small bark came off in a
+_balsa_. This is an odd sort of an embarkation, consisting of two large
+seal skins, separately blown up, like bladders, and made fast to pieces
+of wood. On this he brought off two jars of brandy and forty dollars;
+which, considering his mean appearance, was as much as I could expect.
+One part of his cargo was valuable, being a considerable quantity of
+excellent dried fish.
+
+The port of _Arica_, formerly so famous for the great quantities of
+silver shipped from thence, is now much diminished in its riches, and
+appears mostly a heap of ruins, except the church of St Mark, and two or
+three more, which still look tolerably well. What helps to give it a
+very desolate appearance is, that the houses near the sea are only
+covered with mats. Being situated on the sea-shore, in an open
+roadstead, it has no fortifications of any kind to defend or command the
+anchorage, the Spaniards thinking it sufficiently secured by the heavy
+surf, and the rocky bottom near the shore, which threaten inevitable
+destruction to any European boats, or other embarkation, except what is
+expressly contrived for the purpose, being the _balsas_ already
+mentioned. To obstruct the landing of an enemy, the Spaniards had
+formerly a fort and entrenchments, flanking the storecreeks; but being
+built of unburnt bricks, it is now fallen to ruins. In 1680, when
+Dampier was here, being repulsed before the town, the English landed at
+the creek of _Chacota,_ to the south of the head-land, whence they
+marched over the mountain _(Gordo)_ to plunder Arica. Earthquakes also,
+which are frequent here, have at last ruined the town, and Arica is now
+no more than a little village of about 150 families, most of them
+negroes, mulattoes, and Indians, with very few whites. On the 26th
+November, 1605,[266] the sea, violently agitated by an earthquake,
+suddenly overflowed, and broke down the greatest part of the town, and
+the ruins of its streets are to be seen at this day. What remains of
+Arica is not now liable to such an accident, being situated on a little
+rising ground at the foot of the head-land. Most of the houses are only
+constructed of a sort of fascines, made of flags or sedges, bound
+together, called _totora_, set up on end, crossed by canes and leather
+thongs; or are made of canes set on end, having the intervals filled
+with earth. The use of unburnt bricks is reserved for churches and the
+stateliest houses; and as no rain ever falls here, they are only covered
+with mats, so that the houses seem all in ruins when seen from the sea.
+The parish church, dedicated to St Mark, is handsome enough. There are
+also three religious houses, one a monastery of seven or eight
+_mercenarians_, a second is an hospital of the brothers of _St John of
+God_, and the third a monastery of Franciscans, who formerly had a house
+a short way from town, in the pleasantest part of the vale, near the
+sea.
+
+[Footnote 266: Perhaps this date ought to have been 1705.--E.]
+
+The vale of Arica is about a league wide next the sea, all barren ground
+except where the old town stood, which is divided into small fields of
+clover, some small plantations of sugar-canes, with olive-trees and
+cotton-trees intermixed, and several intervening marshes, full of the
+sedges of which they build their houses. Growing narrower about a league
+eastward at the village of _St Michael de Sapa_, they begin to cultivate
+the _agi_, or Guinea pepper, which culture extends over all the rest of
+the vale, in which there are several detached farms exclusively devoted
+to its culture. In that part of the vale, which is very narrow, and
+about six leagues long, they raise yearly to the value of above 80,000
+crowns. The Spaniards of Peru are so much addicted to this spice, that
+they dress no meat without it, although so hot and biting that no one
+can endure it, unless accustomed to its use; and, as it cannot grow in
+the _Puna_, or mountainous country, many merchants come down every year,
+who carry away all the Guinea pepper that grows in the districts of
+_Arica, Sama, Taena, Locumba_, and others, ten leagues around, from all
+of which it is reckoned they export yearly to the value of 600,000
+dollars, though sold cheap. It is hard to credit that such vast
+quantities should go from hence, as the country is so parched up, except
+the vales, that nothing green is to be seen. This wonderful fertility is
+produced by the dung of fowls, which is brought from _Iquique_, and
+which fertilizes the soil in a wonderful manner, making it produce four
+or five hundred for one of all sorts of grain, as wheat, maize, and so
+forth, but particularly of this _agi_, or Guinea pepper, when rightly
+managed. When the plants are sufficiently grown in the seed-bed to be
+fit for transplanting, they are set out in winding lines like the letter
+S, that the furrows for conveying the water may distribute it equally to
+the roots of the plants. They then lay about the root of each plant of
+Guinea pepper as much _guana_, or bird's dung formerly mentioned, as
+will lie in the hollow of the hand. When in blossom, they add a little
+more; and, lastly, when the pods are completely formed, they add a good
+handful more to each plant, always taking care to supply them with
+water, as it never rains in this country; otherwise, the salts contained
+in the manure, not being dissolved, would burn the plants, as has been
+found by experience. It is also for this reason that this manure is laid
+on at different times, as already explained, the necessity of which has
+been found by long use, and by the superior value of the crops thus
+produced.
+
+For the carriage of this _guana_, or fowl's dung, the people at Arica
+generally use that sort of little camels which the Indians of Bern call
+_Llamas_, the Chilese, _Chilihneque_, and the Spaniards, _Carneros de la
+tierra_, or native sheep. The heads of these animals are small in
+proportion to their bodies, and are somewhat in shape between the head
+of a horse and that of a sheep, the upper lips being cleft like that of
+a hare, through which they can spit to the distance of ten paces against
+any one who offends them, and if the spittle happens to fall on the face
+of a person, it causes a red itchy spot. Their necks are long, and
+concavely bent downwards, like that of a camel, which animal they
+greatly resemble, except in having no hunch on their backs, and in being
+much smaller. Their ordinary height is from four feet to four and a
+half; and their ordinary burden does not exceed an hundred-weight. They
+walk, holding up their heads with wonderful gravity, and at so regular a
+pace as no beating can quicken. At night it is impossible to make them
+move with their loads, for they lie down till these are taken off, and
+then go to graze. Their ordinary food is a sort of grass called _yeho_,
+somewhat like a small rush, but finer, and has a sharp point, with which
+all the mountains are covered exclusively. They eat little, and never
+drink, so that they are very easily maintained. They have cloven feet
+like sheep, and are used at the mines to carry ore to the mills; and, as
+soon as loaded, they set off without any guide to the place where they
+are usually unloaded. They have a sort of spur above the foot, which
+renders them sure-footed among the rocks, as it serves as a kind of hook
+to hold by. Their hair, or wool rather, is long, white, grey, and
+russet, in spots, and fine, but much inferior to that of the Vicunna,
+and has a strong and disagreeable scent.
+
+The _Vicunna_ is shaped much like the Llama, but much smaller and
+lighter, their wool being extraordinarily fine and much valued. These
+animals are often hunted after the following manner: Many Indians gather
+together, and drive them into some narrow pass, across which they have
+previously extended cords about four feet from the ground, having bits
+of wool or cloth hanging to them at small distances. This so frightens
+them that they dare not pass, and gather together in a string, when the
+Indians kill them with stones tied to the ends of leather thongs. Should
+any _quanacos_ happen to be among the flock, these leap over the cords,
+and are followed by all the _vicunnas_. These _quanacos_ are larger and
+more corpulent, and are also called _viscachas_. There is yet another
+animal of this kind, called _alpagnes_, having wool of extraordinary
+fineness, but their legs are shorter, and their snouts contracted in
+such a manner as to give them some resemblance to the human countenance.
+The Indians make several uses of these creatures, some of which carry
+burdens of about an hundred-weight. Their wool serves to make stuffs,
+cords, and sacks. Their bones are used for the construction of weavers
+utensils; and their dung is employed as fuel for dressing meat, and
+warming their huts.
+
+Before the last war, a small fleet called the _armadilla_ used to resort
+yearly to Arica, partly composed of kings ships, and partly those of
+private persons. By this fleet, European commodities were brought from
+Panama, together with quicksilver for the mines of _La Paz, Oruro La
+Plata,_ or _Chuguizaca, Potosi_, and _Lipes_; and in return carried to
+Lima the king's fifth of the silver drawn from the mines. Since the
+galleons have ceased going to Porto-Bello, and the French have carried
+on the trade of supplying the coast of the South Sea with European
+commodities, Arica has been the most considerable mart of all this
+coast, and to which the merchants of the five above-mentioned rich,
+towns resort. It is true that the port of _Cobija_ is nearer _Lipes_ and
+_Potosi_; but being situated in a barren and desert country, where
+nothing can be procured for the subsistence of man or beast, the
+merchants chuse rather to go to Arica, though more distant, as they are
+sure to find at that place every thing they need. Besides, they find no
+great difficulty in bringing there their silver privately in a mass, and
+compounding with the corregidores or chief magistrates to avoid paying
+the royal fifth.
+
+On leaving Arica, we sailed for the road of Ilo, about 75 miles to the
+N.W. where we arrived that same afternoon, and saw a large ship with
+three small ones at anchor. The great ship immediately hoisted French
+colours, being the _Wise Solomon_ of 40 guns, commanded by Mons.
+Dumain, who was resolved to protect the vessels that were beside him,
+and to oppose my coming into the road. As it grew dark before I could
+get into the road, I sent my third lieutenant, Mr La Porte, a Frenchman,
+to inform Mr Dumain who we were: But my officer no sooner got on board
+than he was tumbled out again, the Frenchman calling him a renegado; and
+Mr Dumain sent me word he would sink me if I offered to anchor there. La
+Porte also told me, that to his knowledge the French ships often
+accepted Spanish commissions, when there were English cruizers on this
+coast, having great privileges in trade allowed them for this service;
+and he could plainly see that the French ship was double manned, by
+means of inhabitants from the town, who were partly French; and, as he
+supposed, would come to attack me as soon as the wind was off shore.
+While thus talking, the French ship fired several guns at us, as if to
+shew that they were ready, and meant shortly to be with us. At first,
+this bravado heated me not a little, and I had some design of turning
+the Mercury into a fire-ship, by the help of which I might have roasted
+this insolent Frenchman: But, having reflected on the situation of
+affairs at home, and fearing my attacking him might be deemed
+unjustifiable, notwithstanding his unwarranted conduct, I thought it
+best to stand out of the harbour.
+
+On the 12th February, the moiety of the money taken at Arica was divided
+among the company according to their shares. On the 22d we found
+ourselves in the heights of _Calao,_ the port of Lima; on which I furled
+all my sails, resolving to get away in the night; knowing, if we were
+discovered from thence, that we should certainly be pursued by some
+Spanish men of war, as there are always some in that port. On the 26th,
+the officers in the Mercury desired to be relieved, and I spoke to
+Captain Hately, whose turn it was to take the command of that bark. This
+gentleman had been long a prisoner among the Spaniards in this country,
+which he was well acquainted with, having travelled between Payta and
+Lima by land, on which occasion he had observed several rich towns,
+which made him conceive we might do something to purpose, by cruizing
+along the coast, as far as the island of Lobos, in lat. 7 deg. S. I approved
+of this, as it was probable we might meet some of the Panama ships,
+which always keep well in with the land, in order to have the benefit of
+the land-breezes. As the company of the Mercury seemed delighted with
+this project, I augmented their complement, giving them a month's
+provisions on board. I also lent Captain Hately my pinnace, mounted his
+bark with two of our quarter-deck guns, and gave him a copy of my
+commission, although it was very likely we should have frequent sight of
+the Mercury, between our present intended separation, and our intended
+rendezvous at the island of Lobos, not above sixty leagues from where we
+then were.
+
+When every thing was ready for their departure, Captain Betagh, whose
+turn it was to relieve the marine officer in the Mercury, being
+unwilling to go, went among our people with a terrified countenance,
+saying, that he and those with him in the Mercury were going to be
+sacrificed. Hearing this, I addressed my ship's company, telling them I
+could not conceive what this pestilent fellow meant by making such an
+uproar. I appealed to them all, if it had not been customary to relieve
+the officers in this manner, ever since we had this vessel in company,
+and asked them if ever they knew me select any man for going upon an
+enterprise, and had not, on the contrary, left it always to their own
+choice to go on any particular service out of the ship. I then desired
+to know who among them were of Betagh's opinion? Upon this, they all
+declared with one voice, that they had never entertained any such
+opinion; but, on the contrary, that I should always find them obedient
+to my commands. In the next place, I ordered the Mercury along side, and
+acquainted her crew with the speech Betagh had made in the Speedwell,
+and desired to know if any of them were apprehensive of being sold or
+sacrificed. At this they all set up a loud huzza, and requested they
+might go on the intended cruize in the Mercury. Accordingly Hately and
+Betagh went on board that bark, and put off from us, giving us three
+cheers, and stood right in for the land.
+
+It may be proper to take some notice of the proceedings of the Mercury
+after she left me, as I have been informed from some of themselves and
+some prisoners. The very next day they took a small bark laden with
+rice, chocolate, wheat, flour, and the like; and the day following,
+another. On the 4th day, they took a ship of near 200 tons, in which
+were 150,000 dollars. Flushed with this success, Betagh prevailed upon
+Hately, and most of the people in the Mercury, not to rejoin me, saying,
+they had now enough to appear like gentlemen as long as they lived, but
+it would be a mere nothing when the owner's part was taken out, and the
+rest divided into 500 shares. He therefore thought, since fortune had
+been so kind to them, they ought to make the best of their way to India,
+as they had sufficient provisions and all other requisites for the
+voyage, and Captain. Hately was well able to conduct them to some port
+in the East Indies. This plan was accordingly resolved on, and they fell
+to leeward of the place of rendezvous. But, weighing with himself the
+prodigious extent of the run, and its many hazards, and well knowing the
+treatment he might expect in India, if his treachery were discovered,
+Captain Hately became irresolute, and could not determine what was best
+to be done, so that he kept hovering on the coast. In the mean time,
+some of his crew went away in his boat to surrender themselves to the
+enemy, rather than be concerned in such a piratical undertaking. Betagh
+and his accomplices still kept Hately warm with liquor, and at length
+brought him to the resolution of leaving the South Sea. But they had no
+sooner clapped their helm a-weather for this purpose than they saw a
+sail standing towards them, which proved to be a Spanish man of war,
+which caught them, and spoilt their India voyage. The English prisoners
+were very indifferently used; but Betagh, being a Roman Catholic, and of
+a nation which the Spaniards are very fond of,[267] was treated with
+much respect, and was even made an officer.
+
+[Footnote 267: He seems to have been a Fleming, taken on board at
+Ostend, when the voyage was originally intended to have proceeded under
+an imperial commission.--E.]
+
+In the morning of the 29th February, we saw a vessel at anchor in the
+road of _Guanchaeo_, and anchored alongside of her at eleven a.m. She
+was called the Carmasita, of about 100 tons, having only two Indian men
+and a boy on board, and her only loading was a small quantity of timber
+from Guayaquil. From these prisoners, I was informed of a rich ship
+being in the cove of Payta, having put in there to repair some damage
+she had sustained in a gale of wind. On this information I put
+immediately to sea, but in purchasing our anchor, the cable parted, and
+we lost our anchor. Our prize being new and likely to sail well, I took
+her with us, naming her the St David, designing to have made her a
+complete fire-ship as soon as we should be rejoined by the Mercury, in
+which there were materials for that purpose. Next day we looked into
+Cheripe, whence we chased a small vessel, which ran on shore to avoid
+us. Next morning, being near Lobos, our appointed rendezvous with the
+Mercury, I sent ashore my second lieutenant, Mr Randal, with two letters
+in separate bottles, directing Captain Hately to follow me to Payta, to
+which port I now made the best of my way, and arrived before it on the
+18th of March, and sent Mr Randal to look into the cove, to bring me an
+account of what ships were there, that I might know what to think of the
+information we had received from our prisoners.
+
+On the 21st, I steered directly in for the cove of Payta, which I
+entered under French colours about four in the afternoon. We found only
+a small ship there, of which Mr Brooks took possession in the launch.
+About seven p.m. we came to anchor within three quarters of a mile of
+the town. The town seemed to be moderately large and populous, and there
+might probably be some land-forces for its defence, being the rendezvous
+of the ships which trade between Panama and Caloa; yet, as the taking of
+this place was treated in our instructions as a matter of importance, I
+consulted with my officers as to the best manner of making the attempt.
+Leaving the charge of the ship with the master, Mr Coldsea, and a few
+hands, to look after the negroes we had on board, and with orders to
+bring the ship nearer to the town, for the more expeditiously embarking
+any plunder we might make; I landed with forty-six men, well armed,
+about two in the morning of the 22d, and marched directly up to the
+great church without the slightest opposition, for we found the town
+entirely deserted by the inhabitants.
+
+At day-light, we observed large bodies of men on the hills, on both
+sides of the town, which we expected would have come down to attack us;
+but, on marching up towards them, they retired before us. Hitherto we
+had taken no prisoners, except an old Indian and a boy, who told us that
+Captain Clipperton had been here some time before, and had set some
+prisoners ashore, who assured them he meant not to do them any injury;
+but that the inhabitants, not thinking fit to trust him, had removed all
+their valuable effects into the mountains, among which were 400,000
+dollars belonging to the king, which had been a fine prize for
+Clipperton, who certainly would have found no greater difficulty in
+taking this town than I did.
+
+I was constrained suddenly to halt, in consequence of hearing a gun
+fired from the ship, soon after which word was brought me that she was
+ashore. I hurried off as fast as I could, carrying with us the
+union-flag, which I had planted in the church-yard; and, as we were
+re-embarking, the enemy came running down the hill, hallooing after us.
+When I got on board, I found the ship entirely afloat, but within her
+own breadth of the rocks; and, as the water was quite smooth, we soon
+warped her off again. We then returned to the town, whence the Spaniards
+retired as peaceably as before. The remainder of the day was employed in
+shipping off what plunder we could find, which consisted of hogs, brown
+and white _calavances_, beans, Indian corn, wheat, flour, sugar, and as
+many _cocoa nuts_[268] as we were able to stow away, together with pans
+and other conveniences for preparing it, so that we were now amply
+provided with excellent breakfast meat for the rest of our voyage, and
+were, besides, full of other provisions.
+
+[Footnote 268: Cacao, chocolate-nuts, are almost certainly here
+meant.--E.]
+
+At eight in the morning of the 23d, a messenger came in to know what
+ransom I would take for the town and the ship, for which I demanded
+10,000 dollars in twenty-four hours. At eight next morning, I had a
+letter from the governor, signifying, that as I wrote in French, neither
+he nor any one about him could understand its contents; but if I would
+write in Latin or Spanish, I might depend on a satisfactory answer. In
+the afternoon, I sent for one of our quarter-deck guns on shore, which
+was mounted at our guard, and was fired at sun-set, midnight, and break
+of day. The messenger returned in the morning of the 24th, accompanied
+by the master of the ship we had taken, and on hearing of their arrival,
+I went on shore to know what they had to propose. I understood from them
+that the governor was determined not to ransom the town, and did not
+care what become of it, provided the churches were not burnt. Though I
+never had any intention to destroy any place devoted to divine worship,
+I answered that I should have no regard to the churches, or anything
+else, when I set the town on fire; and I told the master of the vessel,
+he might expect to see her in flames immediately, if not ransomed
+without delay. This seemed to make a great impression, and he promised
+to return in three hours with the money. I then caused every thing to
+be taken out of the town that could be of any use to us, after which I
+ordered the town to be set on fire in several places; and, as the houses
+were old and dry, it instantly became a bonfire.
+
+In the midst of this conflagration, the people in the Speedwell made
+many signals for me to come on board, and kept continually firing
+towards the mouths of the harbour. As I could only guess the meaning of
+all this, I went on board as soon as possible in a canoe, having only
+three men along with me. Before I could reach the ship, I could
+distinctly see a large ship, with a Spanish flag at her
+fore-topmast-head, and her fore-topsail a-back. At this sight, two of my
+three men were ready to faint, and if it had not been for my boatswain,
+I doubt if I should have got on board; and if the Spanish admiral had
+acted with vigour, he might have taken the ship long enough before I got
+to her. It is bare justice to Mr Coldsea to say, that he fired so
+smartly on the Spaniard as to induce him to act with great precaution,
+which had been quite unnecessary if he had known our weakness. His
+caution, however, gave me the opportunity of getting on board: and, in
+the mean time, my officers were so unwilling to leave our guard-gun
+ashore, that they spent a great while in getting it into the boat, so
+that I was afraid the enemy would attack us before our people could get
+on board. The Spaniard was, however, in no hurry, thinking, no doubt,
+that we could not well escape him, yet was within pistol-shot of us
+before the last of our men got on board, being about fifty in all. We
+now cut our cable, but our ship fell round the wrong way, so that I had
+just room enough to fall clear of the enemy. Being now close together,
+the formidable appearance of the enemy struck an universal damp on the
+spirits of my people; some of whom, in coming off from the shore, were
+for jumping into the water and swimming on shore, which a few actually
+did.
+
+The enemy was a fine European-built ship, of 50 guns, and the
+disproportion was so great between us, that there seemed no hopes of
+escaping, as we were under his lee. I endeavoured to get into shoal
+water, but he becalmed me with his sails, and confined us for the best
+part of an hour, during which he handled us very roughly with his
+cannon, making very little use of his small-arms, never allowing us a
+moment's ease, but as soon as his broadside was ready, he gave his ship
+the starboard helm, bringing as many of his guns to bear as possible,
+and at the same time kept me from the wind. We returned his fire as
+briskly as we could; but, in our precipitate retreat from the town, most
+of our small arms were wetted, so that it was long before they were of
+any use. During this action, there was a strange contusion on shore,
+where the people had flocked down from the hills to extinguish the fire
+in Payta, in which some of them were busily employed, while others stood
+on the shore, spectators of our engagement. I was long in despair of
+getting away from the Spaniard, expecting nothing less than to be torn
+in pieces by his superior fire, unless we could have an opportunity of
+trying our heels with him while our masts remained standing. I expected
+every minute that he would board us, and hearing a hallooing among them,
+and seeing their forecastle full of men, I concluded that they had come
+to this resolution; but soon saw that it proceeded from our ensign being
+shot down, on which I made another be displayed in the mizen-shrouds, on
+sight of which they lay snug as before, keeping close upon our quarter.
+Intending at length to do our business at once, they clapped their helm
+hard a-starboard, in order to bring their whole broadside to bear, but
+their fire had little effect, and it muzzled themselves, which gave us
+an opportunity to get away from them.
+
+This certainly was a lucky escape, after an engagement of three glasses
+with an enemy so much our superior; for he had 56 guns and 450 men,
+while we had only 20 guns mounted and only 73 men, of whom 11 were
+negroes and two Indians. He had farther the vast advantage over us of
+being in perfect readiness, while we were in the utmost confusion; and
+in the middle of the engagement, a third of my people, instead of
+fighting, were hard at work in preparing for an obstinate resistance;
+particularly the carpenter and his crew, who were busy in making
+port-holes for stern-chase guns, which, as it happened, we made no use
+of. Yet were we not unhurt, as the loss of my boat and anchor were
+irreparable, and may be said to have been the cause of that scene of
+trouble which fell upon us soon after; as we had now only one anchor
+remaining, that lost at Payta being the third, and we had not now a boat
+of any kind. I have since learnt that some of our shots in the
+engagement were well directed, and that we killed and wounded several of
+the enemy.
+
+Having thus got away from the _Peregrine_, I slipped off in the evening
+with much ado from the Brilliant, her consort, on board of which Betagh
+now was, and even desired to be the first to board me. I was now in a
+very uncomfortable situation, not having the smallest hope of meeting
+with the Success; and I had learned at Payta, that the Spaniards had
+laid on an embargo for six months, so that we had nothing to expect in
+the way of prizes; and, having seen our prize taken, we had reason to
+expect that all our designs were discovered by the enemy. Having now
+only one anchor and no boat, it is not to be wondered that I gave up all
+idea of making an attempt on Guayaquil, which I at first proposed,
+having intelligence that there were several ships of considerable value
+in that river, in consequence of the embargo, which might have done me
+some service, if I had been better provided. In this situation, it was
+resolved, in a committee of my officers, to return to the southwards, or
+to windward, as the Spaniards must necessarily continue their trade with
+Chili, in spite of their embargo; after which we proposed to water at
+Juan Fernandez, and then to cruize on the coast of Conception,
+Valparaiso, and Coquimbo, for the coasting traders, among whom we might
+supply ourselves with anchors, cables, and boats, and a vessel to fit
+out as a fire-ship. I also proposed, before leaving the coast of Chili,
+to make an attempt on La Serena or Coquimbo. After all this, I proposed
+to proceed for the coast of Mexico, and thence to the _Tres Marias_ and
+California, as the most likely means of meeting with the Success;
+besides which, the former of these places might be commodious for
+salting turtle, to serve as sea stores, and the latter for laying in a
+stock of wood and water; after which we might lie in the track of the
+Manilla ship. But if we could not succeed in that attempt, we might then
+satisfy ourselves with cruizing for the Peruvian ships, which bring
+silver to Acapulco for purchasing the Indian and Chinese commodities.
+
+My plan being approved, we proceeded to windward, having secured our
+masts and bent a new set of sails on the 26th, after which we stood to
+the southward, expecting to make our passage in about five weeks. The
+carpenters were now set to work to build a new boat that we might have
+the means of watering our ship. On the 31st, while working the pumps,
+the water not only came in in greater quantity than usual, but was as
+black as ink, which made me suspect some water had got at our powder;
+and on going into the powder-room, I found the water rushing in like a
+little sluice, which had already spoiled the greatest part of our
+powder, only six barrels remaining uninjured, which I immediately had
+stowed away in the bread-room. It pleased God that we now had fair
+weather, as otherwise we might have had much difficulty to keep our ship
+afloat. We found the leak on the larboard side, under the lower cheek of
+the head, where a shot had lodged and afterwards dropt out, leaving room
+for a stream of water. We accordingly brought down our ship by the
+stern, and secured the leak effectually. At this time we had an abundant
+stock of provisions. Each man had a quart of chocolate and three ounces
+of rusk for breakfast; and had fresh meat or fresh fish every day for
+dinner, having plenty of the latter about the ship, so that we could
+almost always make our choice between dolphin and albicore.
+
+On the 6th May we made the westermost of the islands of Juan Fernandez,
+otherwise called _Mas a Fuero_, distant twelve leagues N.E. by N. and
+the day after, our carpenters had completed our new boat, which could
+carry three hogsheads. On the 12th we saw the great island of Juan
+Fernandez, bearing E. 1/2 S. being in latitude, by observation, 33 deg. 40'
+S. a joyful sight at the time, though so unfortunate to us in the
+sequel. We plied off and on till the 21st, but could not get as much
+water on board daily in that time as supplied our daily expenditure,
+owing to the smallness of our boat, which made it necessary for us to
+anchor in the roads till that purpose was accomplished, in order for
+which I prepared to raft twenty tons of casks on shore. We worked in and
+anchored in forty fathoms, carrying a warp on shore, which we fastened
+to the rocks, of three hawsers and a half in length, which both steadied
+the ship, and enabled us to haul our cask-raft ashore and aboard. By
+this means we were ready to go to sea again next morning, having filled
+all our water casks; but had no opportunity of so doing for four days,
+during which we continued to anchor in the same manner.
+
+On the 25th May, a hard gale came upon us from seaward, bringing with it
+a great tumbling swell, by which at length our cable parted. This was a
+dismal accident, as we had no means whatever by which to avoid the
+prospect of immediate destruction. But Providence interposed in our
+behalf: For had we struck only a cable's length to the east or west of
+where we did, we must all have inevitably perished. When our ill-fated
+ship touched the rock, we had all to hold fast by some part of the ship
+or rigging, otherwise the violence of her shock in striking must have
+tossed us all into the sea. Our three masts went all away together by
+the board. In short, words are wanting to express the wretched condition
+in which we now were, or our astonishment at our unexpected and
+unfortunate shipwreck.
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_Residence on the Island of Juan Fernandez._
+
+
+Having all got on shore in the evening, my officers gathered around me
+to bear me company, and to devise measures for procuring necessaries out
+of the wreck; and having lighted a fire, wrapped themselves up in what
+they could get, and slept very soundly, notwithstanding the coldness of
+the weather, and our hopeless situation. I would have set the people to
+work that very night, in endeavouring to save what we could from the
+wreck, but they were so dispersed that we could not gather them
+together, and all opportunity was lost of saving any thing, except some
+of our fire-arms. But while the people were employed in building tents,
+and making other preparations for their residence on the island, the
+wreck was entirely destroyed, and every thing in her was lost, except
+one cask of beef and one of _farina de pao_, which were washed on shore.
+Thus all our provisions were gone, and every thing else that might have
+been useful. I had saved 1100 dollars belonging to the owners, which
+happened to be in my chest in the great cabin, all the rest of their
+treasure being in the bottom of the bread-room for security, which
+consequently could not be come at.
+
+I now took some pains to find out a convenient place in which to set up
+my tent, and at length found a commodious spot of ground not half a mile
+from the sea, having a fine stream of water on each side, with trees
+close at hand for firing, and building our huts. The people settled
+around me as well as they could, and as the cold season was coming on,
+some thatched their huts, while others covered theirs with the skins of
+seals and sea-lions. Others again satisfied themselves with water-butts,
+in which they slept under cover of trees. Having thus secured ourselves
+from the weather, we used to pass our time in the evenings around a
+great fire before my tent, where my officers usually assembled,
+employing themselves in roasting cray-fish in the embers; sometimes
+bewailing our unhappy fate, and sinking into despondency; and at other
+times feeding ourselves with hopes that something might yet be done to
+set us again afloat. On this subject I first consulted with the
+carpenter, who answered, that he could not make bricks without straw,
+and then walked from me in a surly humour. From him I went to the
+armourer, and asked what he could do for us in his way that might
+contribute to build a small vessel. To this he answered, that he hoped
+he could do all the iron work, as he had fortunately saved his bellows
+from the wreck, with four or five _spadoes_ or Spanish swords, which
+would afford him steel, and there could be no want of iron along shore;
+besides, that we should doubtless find many useful things when we came
+to work in good earnest. He desired therefore, that I would get some
+charcoal made for him, while he set up his forge.
+
+Upon this encouragement, I called all hands together, and explained to
+them the great probability there was of our being able to build a vessel
+sufficient to transport us from this island; but that it would be a
+laborious task, and must require their united best endeavours. To this
+they all consented, and promised to work with great diligence, begging
+me to give them directions how to proceed. I then ordered the men who
+had axes on shore, before the wreck, to cut wood for making charcoal,
+while the rest went down to the wreck to get the boltsprit ashore, of
+which I proposed to make the keel of our intended vessel; and I
+prevailed on the carpenter to go with me, to fix upon the properest
+place for building. The people found a great many useful materials about
+the wreck; and among the rest the topmast, which had been washed on
+shore, and was of the greatest importance.
+
+We laid the blocks for building upon on the 8th June, and had the
+boltsprit ready at hand to lay down as the keel; when the carpenter
+turned short round upon me, and swore an oath that he would not strike
+another stroke on the work, for he would be slave to nobody, and thought
+himself now on a footing with myself. I was at first angry, but came at
+length to an agreement with him, to give him a four-pistole piece as
+soon as the stern and stern-posts were up, and 100 dollars when the bark
+was finished, and the money to be committed to the keeping of any one he
+chose to name. This being settled, he went to work upon the keel, which
+was to be thirty feet long; the breadth of our bark, by the beam,
+sixteen feet, and her hold seven feet deep. In two months we made a
+tolerable shew, owing in a great measure to the ingenuity of Poppleston,
+our armourer, who never lost a minute in working with his hands, or
+contriving in his head. He made us a small double-headed maul, hammers,
+chisels, and a sort of gimblets or wimbles, which performed very well.
+He even made a bullet-mould, and an instrument to bore cartouch-boxes,
+which he made from the trucks of our gun-carriages, covering them with
+seal-skins, and contrived to make them not only convenient, but neat. He
+contrived to execute any iron-work wanted by the carpenter, and even
+finished a large serviceable boat, of which we stood much in need.
+
+In the beginning of this great work the people behaved themselves very
+well, half of them working regularly one day, and the other half the
+next, seeming every day to grow easier under our misfortunes. They
+treated me with as much respect as I could wish, and even in a body
+thanked me for the prospect of their deliverance; while I never failed
+to encourage them by telling them stories of the great things that had
+been accomplished by the united efforts of men in similar distresses. I
+always pressed them to stick close to the work, that we might get our
+bark ready in time; and told them that we fortunately had three of the
+best ports in Chili within 120 leagues of us. This inspired them with
+life and vigour, and they often declared that they would exert their
+utmost endeavours to finish her with all expedition. At last, however,
+we became a prey to faction, so that it was a miracle we ever got off
+from this place. For, after completing the most laborious part of the
+work, they entirely neglected it; and many of my officers, deserting my
+society, herded with the meanest of the ship's company. I was now
+convinced in a suspicion I had long entertained, that some black design
+was in embryo; for when I met any of my officers, and asked what they
+were about, and the reason of their acting so contrary to their duty, by
+diverting the people from their work, some used even to tell me they
+knew not whether they would leave the island or not, when my bundle of
+sticks was ready; that they cared not how matters went, for they could
+shift for themselves as well as the rest. When I spoke with the common
+men, some were surly, and others said they would be slaves no longer,
+but would do as the rest did. In the midst of these confusions, I
+ordered my son to secure my commission in some dry place among the woods
+or rocks, remembering how Captain Dampier had been served in these
+seas.
+
+At length, I one afternoon missed all the people, except Mr Adamson the
+surgeon, Mr Hendric the agent, my son, and Mr Dodd, lieutenant of
+marines, which last feigned lunacy, for some reason best known to
+himself. I learnt at night that they had been all day assembled at the
+great tree, in deep consultation, and had framed a new set of
+regulations and articles, by which the owners in England were excluded
+from any share in what we might take for the future, divested me of all
+authority as captain, and regulated themselves according to the _Jamaica
+discipline_.[269] Even the chief officers, among the rest, had concurred
+in electing one Morphew to be their champion and speaker, who addressed
+the assembly to the following purport: "That they were now their own
+masters, and servants to none: and as Mr Shelvocke, their former
+captain, took upon him still to command, he ought to be informed, that
+whoever was now to be their commander, must be so through their own
+courtesy. However, that Mr Shelvocke might have the first offer of the
+command, if the majority thought fit, but not otherwise. That Mr
+Shelvocke carried himself too lofty and arbitrarily for the command of a
+privateer, and ought to have continued in men-of-war, where the people
+were obliged to bear all hardships quietly, whether right or wrong."
+
+[Footnote 269: This expression is not explained, but seems to have been,
+according to the model of the Buccaneers, all prizes to be divided among
+the captors.--E.]
+
+Some persons present, who had a regard for me, represented, "That they
+had never seen or known me treat any one unjustly or severely; and that
+however strict I might be, they had no one else to depend upon, and that
+they ought all to consider how many difficulties I had already brought
+them through. That, although they were not now in the hands of our
+enemies, no one could tell how soon others might come upon them: and, if
+they ever looked to get back to England, there was no other way but by
+going round the world, for which there was no one capable of undertaking
+the charge except Captain Shelvocke. They ought also to consider his
+commission, and the respect due to him on that account; besides the
+protection that would afford them, should they happen to fall into the
+hands of the Spaniards."
+
+This remonstrance had some effect on the common men, but they were
+diverted from the thoughts of returning to obedience by no less a
+person than my first lieutenant, Mr Brooks, who had made Morphew his
+confidant even on board ship: for having served before the mast before
+he was made my lieutenant, he had contracted a liking for forecastle
+conversation. They were also supported and encouraged by Mr Randal, my
+second lieutenant, who was brother-in-law to Brooks, and by others. The
+first remarkable outrage committed by this gang of levellers was to Mr
+La Porte, my third lieutenant, whom Morphew knocked down on the beach,
+while Brooks stood by and witnessed this brutality. This affair came
+soon after to be fully explained; for the men framed a new set of
+articles, putting themselves upon the Jamaica discipline, and declaring,
+as I had been their captain, I might be so still; and that they were
+willing to allow me six shares, as a mark of their regard, though I
+ought only to have four, according to the Jamaica articles. Most of the
+officers were reduced, according to the same plan: for instance, Mr La
+Porte, Mr Dodu, and Mr Hendrie were declared midshipmen; and as the
+superior officers consented to this scheme, it could not be prevented
+from being carried into execution. Mr Coldsea the master was the only
+person who preserved a kind of neutrality, neither promoting nor
+opposing their designs. In this distressed emergency, I thought it
+lawful, and even necessary, to submit to their demands, and therefore
+signed their articles, in conjunction with the rest of my officers.
+
+I now thought to have got them to work on our bark; but, instead of
+listening to me, they demanded what little money I had saved belonging
+to the owners, with which I was obliged to comply, being 750 dollars in
+virgin silver, a silver dish weighing 75 ounces, and 250 dollars in
+coin. Even after this I was treated worse than ever, having only the
+refuse of the fish allowed me, after they had chosen the best, being
+glad, after a hard day's work, to dine upon seal; while Morphew and his
+associates feasted on the best fish the sea afforded. They next took the
+arms out of my custody, of which hitherto I had taken great care;
+because, having only one flint to each musket, and very little
+ammunition, I foresaw that we would be undone if this were wasted. I
+represented all this to them, yet they squandered away the small
+remainder of powder and bullets in killing cats, or any thing else they
+could get to fire at.--This is a concise history of our transactions in
+the island of Juan Fernandez, from the 24th May to the 15th August,
+during which no person could suffer more than I did, or have a more
+uncomfortable prospect.
+
+On the 15th of August we were put into great confusion by the sight of a
+large ship, on which, before she crossed the bay, I ordered all the
+fires to be put out, and the negroes and Indians to be confined, lest
+the ship might be becalmed under the land, and any of them should
+attempt to swim off to her, as I conceived she might possibly be a
+man-of-war come to seek us, having received advice of our shipwreck; yet
+I knew, if she discovered what we were about, we should soon have the
+whole force of the kingdom of Chili upon us. Our apprehensions were soon
+over, as the ship bore away large, and kept at too great a distance to
+see any thing of us. On this occasion I got most of our people under
+arms, and was glad to see them in some measure obedient to command;
+telling them that I was pleased to see their arms in such good order, I
+was impertinently answered, that this was for their own sakes. Before
+they dispersed, I represented to them the necessity of using their best
+endeavour to get our bark afloat, instead of caballing against their
+captain, which, in the end, might be very prejudicial to them all; as,
+if discovered by the Spaniards, we might expect to be all made slaves in
+the mines. I told them we still had a great deal of work to do, and had
+never above ten of the most considerate to labour, and seldom above six
+or seven; while they knew I was always one of the number, to shew a good
+example. But the more I tried to reclaim them, the more obstinately they
+ran into confusion, interrupting every thing that tended to do them
+service.
+
+Next day they divided among themselves on a new scheme, being no less
+than to burn our bark, and to build two large shallops, or pinnaces, in
+lieu of her. Morphew and his friend Brooks were the favourers of this
+new design, aiming doubtless at a separation by this means: but as this
+must be determined by a majority, they assembled to debate this matter
+in front of my tent, carrying on their deliberations with much clamour
+on both sides. In order to put them off this ruinous plan, I represented
+to them the impracticability of building the boats, as our tools and
+other materials were already worn out and expended. The workmen, and a
+considerable majority of the rest, sided with me: but at night the
+carpenter sent me word, if I did not pay him the money agreed upon at
+first, I should never see his face again; wherefore, although his terms
+had not been implemented, I was obliged to raise the money for him. The
+most provoking part of this proposal about the boats was, that the
+fellows who chiefly promoted it were those who had never done an hour's
+work since we were cast away. Not gaining this point, they openly
+declared I should not be their captain, and that none but Brooks should
+command them, which was probably what that young man aspired to from the
+commencement of the mutiny; and had undoubtedly succeeded, had it not
+been for the people in the boatswain's tent, who still refused their
+consent to my being left on the island, though fond of thinking
+themselves their own masters, and of refusing to submit to regular
+command.
+
+To complete our confusion, there arose a third party, who resolved to
+have nothing to do with the rest, proposing to remain on the island.
+There were twelve of these, who separated from the rest, and never made
+their appearance except at night, when they used to come about the tents
+to steal powder, lead, and axes, and any thing else they could lay their
+hands, on. But in a little time I found means to manage them, and took
+from them all their arms, ammunition, axes, and other plunder, and
+threatened to have them treated as enemies, if they came within
+musket-shot of our tents. These divisions so weakened the whole body,
+that they began to listen to me, so that I got most of them into a
+working humour. Even Brooks came to me with a feigned submission,
+desiring to eat with me again, yet in the main did not lessen his esteem
+for Morphew. His dissimulation, however, proved of infinite service in
+contributing to the finishing of our bark, which required the united
+efforts of all our heads and hands. For, when we came to plank the
+bottom, we had very vexatious difficulties to encounter, as our only
+plank consisted in pieces from the deck of our wreck, which was so dry
+and stubborn that fire and water had hardly any effect in making it
+pliable, as it rent, split, and flew in pieces like glass; so that I now
+began to fear that all our labour was in vain, and we must quietly wait
+to be taken off by some Spanish ship, and be led quietly to prison after
+all our troubles.
+
+By constant labour, and using a variety of contrivances, we at length
+finished our bark, but in such a manner that I may safely assert, a
+similar bottom never before swam on the sea. Our boat also was launched
+on the 9th September; and our bark being now in a fair way of being
+completed, it remained to consider what provisions we could get to
+support us during our voyage, all our stock being one cask of beef, five
+or six bushels of _farina de poa_, or cassada flour, and four or five
+live hogs. I made several experiments to preserve both fish and seal,
+but found that this could not be done without salt. At length we fell
+upon a contrivance for curing conger eels, by splitting them, taking out
+their backbones, dipping them in sea-water, and then drying them in a
+great smoke; but as no other fish could be cured in a similar manner,
+our fishers were directed to catch as many congers as they could. At
+this time several of our people who had not hitherto done any work,
+began to repent of their folly, as they grew weary of living on this
+island, and now offered their services to go a-fishing, making some idle
+excuses for being so long idle, asking my pardon, and promising not to
+lose a moment in future. The new boat was sent to try her fortune, and
+returned at night with a great parcel of various kinds of fish, among
+which were about 200 congers, which was a good beginning, and which were
+divided among the tents to be cured. Our boat was carefully hauled on
+shore every night, and strictly guarded, to prevent any of our people
+from stealing her, and making their escape. By her means also, Mr
+Brooks, our only diver, tried what could be recovered from that part of
+the wreck which had not been drifted on shore; but could only weigh one
+small gun, and two pieces of a large church candlestick, belonging to
+our owners.
+
+Our boat was daily employed in fishing, for which purpose the armourer
+supplied hooks; and our men made abundance of lines of twisted ribbons,
+a great quantity of which had been driven on shore. Others of the men
+were employed in making twine stuff for rigging, patching up old canvass
+for sails, and a variety of other necessary contrivances to enable us to
+put to sea; and our cooper put our casks in order; and at length we set
+up our masts, which were tolerably well rigged, and our bark made a
+decent figure. My spirits were however much damped, by the extreme
+difficulty of caulking her tight, as her seams were bad, our tools
+wretched, and our artists very indifferent. When this was done, so as we
+could, our bark was put into the water to try her fitness, on which
+there was an outcry of, A sieve! a sieve! Every one now seemed
+melancholy and dispirited, insomuch that I was afraid they would use no
+farther means; but in a little time, by incessant labour, we brought her
+into a tolerable condition. Having repaired the ship's pumps, and fitted
+them to the bark, the people exclaimed that this was only a poor
+dependence; but I exhorted them to have patience, and continue their
+assistance in doing every thing that could be thought of for her
+security. The cooper also made a set of buckets, one for every man, to
+serve to bale her, in case of necessity. Next spring-tide, which was on
+the 5th October, 1720, we put her again into the water, naming her the
+_Recovery_, when she answered tolerably well, when we resolved to run
+the hazard of going to sea in her, and made all possible dispatch in
+getting our things on board. Yet, after all, a dozen of our people chose
+to remain on shore, together with as many negroes and Indians.
+
+Our sea-stock, besides the small quantity of beef and cassada flour
+formerly mentioned, consisted of 2300 eels cured in smoke, weighing one
+with another about a pound each, together with about sixty gallons of
+seal-oil, in which to fry them. On our first landing, as the weather was
+then too coarse for fishing, we had to live on seals, the entrails of
+which are tolerable food; but the constant and prodigious slaughter we
+made among them, frightened them from our side of the island. Some of
+the people eat cats, which I could not bring myself to, and declared
+they were sweet nourishing food. When the weather allowed us to fish, we
+were delivered from these hardships; but some of our mischievous crew
+set the boat a-drift, so that she was lost: after which we contrived
+wicker boats, covered with sea-lions skins, which did well enough near
+shore, but we durst not venture in them out into the bay, and
+consequently were worse provided with fish than we might otherwise have
+been. We fried our fish in seal-oil, and eat it without bread or salt,
+or any other relish, except some wild sorrel. Our habitations were very
+wretched, being only covered by boughs of trees, with the skins of seals
+and sea-lions, which were often torn off in the night, by sudden flaws
+of wind from the mountains.
+
+The island of Juan Fernandez is in lat 33 deg. 40' S. and long. 79 deg. W. being
+at the distance of about 150 marine leagues, or 7 deg. 30' from the coast
+of Chili. It is about fifteen English miles long from E. to W. and five
+miles at the broadest, from N to S. entirely composed of mountains and
+valleys, so that there is no walking a quarter of a mile on a flat. The
+anchoring place is on the north side of the island, and is distinguished
+by a little mountain, with a high peak on each side. It is not safe to
+anchor in less than forty fathoms, and even there, ships are very much
+exposed to sharp gales from the north, which blow frequently. There
+cannot well be a more unpleasant place to anchor in, as the bay is
+surrounded by high mountains, and is subject to alternate dead calms and
+sudden stormy gusts of wind. This island enjoys a fine wholesome air,
+insomuch that out of seventy of us, who remained here five months and
+eleven days, not one among us had an hour's sickness, though we fed upon
+such foul diet, without bread or salt; so that we had no complaints
+among us, except an incessant craving appetite, and the want of our
+former strength and vigour. As for myself, from being corpulent, and
+almost crippled by the gout, I lost much of my flesh, but became one of
+the strongest and most active men on the island, walking much about,
+working hard, and never in the least afflicted with that distemper. The
+soil is fertile, and abounds with many large and beautiful trees, most
+of them aromatic. The names of such as we knew were the _Pimento_, which
+bears a leaf like a myrtle, but somewhat larger, with a blue blossom,
+the trunks being short and thick, and the heads bushy and round, as if
+trained by art. There is another tree, much larger, which I think
+resembles that which produces the jesuit bark. There are plains on the
+tops of some of the mountains, on which are groves of the _Indian
+laurel_, mentioned by Frezier in his description of Chili. These have a
+straight slender body, from which sprout small irregular branches all
+the way from the root to the top, bearing leaves like the laurel, but
+smaller. _Palm-trees_ are found in most parts of the island, growing in
+smooth joints, like canes, some thirty and some forty feet high. Their
+heads resemble the cocoa-nut tree, except that their leaves are of a
+paler green, and bear large bunches of red berries, bigger than sloes,
+which taste like haws, and have stones as large as those of
+heart-cherries. That which we call the _palm-cabbage_ is the very
+substance of the head of the tree; which being cut off and divested of
+its great spreading leaves, and all that is hard and tough, consists of
+a white and tender young shoot or head, having its leaves and berries
+perfectly formed, and ready to replace the old one. When in search of
+these, we were forced to cut down a lofty tree for each individual
+cabbage.
+
+One good property of the woods which cover this island is, that they are
+every where of easy access, as there is no undergrowth, except in some
+of the deepest valleys, where the fern grows exceedingly high, and of
+which there are very large trees, with trunks of considerable
+solidity.[270] Some of the English who had been formerly here, had sowed
+turnips, which have spread much, as have also two or three plantations
+of small pompions; but my men never had patience to let any of these
+come to maturity. We found also plenty of water-cresses and wild sorrel.
+Some of the hills are remarkable for a fine red earth, which I take to
+be the same with that of which the inhabitants of Chili make their
+earthenware, which is almost as beautiful as the red porcelain of China.
+The northern part of the island is well watered by a great many streams
+which flow down the narrow valleys; and we found the water to keep well
+at sea, and to be as good as any in the world. Down the western peak,
+contiguous to the Table Mountain, there fall two cascades from a
+perpendicular height of not less than 500 feet. These are close
+together, and about 12 feet broad. What with the rapid descent of these
+streams, and the numerous palm-trees growing close beside them, adorned
+with vast clusters of red berries, the prospect is really beautiful. We
+should have had no want of goats, could we have conveniently followed
+them in the mountains. The Spaniards, before they settled in Chili, left
+a breed of goats here, and have since endeavoured to destroy them, by
+leaving a breed of dogs, but without effect. Cats are also very
+numerous, exactly resembling our household cats in size and colour; and
+those of our men who eat of them, assured me they found more substantial
+relief from one meal of their flesh, than from four or five of seal or
+fish; and, to their great satisfaction, we had a small bitch, which,
+could catch almost any number they wanted in an hour. There are not many
+sorts of birds; but the sea on the coast abounds with a greater variety
+of fish than almost any place I was ever in.
+
+[Footnote 270: These must have been some species of palm, having
+palmatad leaves resembling ferns.--E.]
+
+Seals and sea-lions also abound; called _lobos de la mar_ by the
+Spaniards, from their resemblance to wolves. They have a fine iron-grey
+fur, and when full grown are as big as a large mastiff. They are
+naturally surly, and snarl at the approach of any one. Instead of tails,
+they have two fins behind, with which they make shift to get on much
+faster than the sea-lions, which are large unwieldy creatures, and
+prodigiously full of oil.
+
+
+
+
+SECTION IV.
+
+_Farther Proceedings in the South Sea, after leaving Juan Fernandez._
+
+
+We departed from Juan Fernandez on the evening of the 6th October,
+having nothing to subsist upon except the smoked congers, one of which
+was allowed to each man for twenty-four hours; together with one cask of
+beef, four live hogs, which had fed all the time we were ashore on the
+putrid carcases of seals, and three or four bushels of cassada meal. We
+were upwards of forty men, crowded together, and lying on the bundles of
+eels, with no means of keeping ourselves clean, so that all our senses
+were offended as greatly as possible. The only way we had of procuring
+water, was by sucking it from the cask with a gun-barrel, used
+promiscuously by every one. The little unsavoury morsels we daily eat,
+created incessant quarrels, every one contending for the frying-pan; and
+our only convenience for a fire, was a tub half filled with earth, which
+made cooking so tedious, that we had the continual noise of frying from
+morning to night. I proposed that we should stand for the Bay of
+Conception, as being the nearest to us; and we were hard put to it every
+day, while the sea-breeze continued; for, not having above sixteen
+inches free board, and our bark tumbling prodigiously, the water ran
+over us perpetually; and having only a grating deck, and no tarpaulin to
+cover it but the top-sail of our bark, our pomps were barely sufficient
+to keep us free.
+
+At four in the morning of the 10th, we fell in with a large ship, and I
+could see by moon-light that she was Europe-built. Our case being
+desperate, we stood towards her, and being rigged after the fashion of
+the South Seas, they did not regard us till day-light. Not being then
+quite up with her, they suspected us by the brownness of our canvas,
+wore ship, hauled close upon the wind, fired a gun, and crowded sail
+away from us, leaving us at a great rate. It fell calm two hours after,
+when we had recourse to our oars, and neared her with tolerable speed.
+In the mean time, we overhauled our arms, which we found in bad
+condition, a third of them wanting flints, and we had only three
+cutlasses, so that we were by no means prepared for boarding, which yet
+was the only means we had of taking the ship. We had only one small
+cannon, which we could not mount, and were therefore obliged to fire it
+as it lay along the deck; and we had only two round shot, a few
+chain-bolts, the clapper of the Speedwell's bell, and some bags of
+stones. We came up with her in four hours; but I now saw that she had
+guns and pattereroes, with a considerable number of men, whose arms
+glittered in the sun. The enemy defied us to board them, and at the same
+time gave us a volley of great and small shot, which killed our gunner,
+and almost brought our foremast by the board. This unexpected reception
+staggered many of my people, who before seemed most forward, so that
+they lay on their oars for some time, though I urged them to keep their
+way. Recovering again, we rowed quite up to them, and continued to
+engage till all our small shot was expended, which obliged us to fall
+astern to make some slugs, and in this manner we made three attacks
+without success. All night we were busied in making slugs, and provided
+a large quantity before morning, when we came to the determined
+resolution either to carry her by boarding, or to submit to her. At
+day-break, I accordingly ordered twenty men in our yawl to lay her
+athwart hawse, while I proposed to board her from the bark; but, just as
+we were on the point of making the attempt, a gale sprung up, and she
+went away from us. We learnt afterwards that she was the _Margaretta_,
+having formerly been a privateer from St Malo, mounting forty guns. In
+the several skirmishes, we had none killed, except Gilbert Henderson our
+gunner. Three were wounded, Mr Brooks being shot through the thigh, Mr
+Coldsea in the groin, and one of the crew in the small of the back. Mr
+Coldsea lingered in a miserable condition for nine or ten months, but at
+length recovered.
+
+We were now in a worse condition than ever, and the sea being too rough
+for our uncomfortable vessel, I proposed to stand to the north to get
+into fairer weather, but to take Coquimbo in our way, to try what might
+be done there. This was agreed to; but the very morning in which we
+expected to have got into Coquimbo, a hard gale of wind sprung up, which
+lasted four days, during which we every hour expected to founder, being
+obliged to scud under bare poles, with our yawl in tow, and having only
+a very short rope for her. This storm so frightened many of our people,
+that they resolved to go ashore at the first place they could find. At
+length, calling to mind the account given by Frezier of the island of
+_Iquique_, I mentioned the surprisal of that place, being but a small
+lieutenancy, where we might probably get some wholesome provisions, and
+a better vessel. This was approved, and the sun again shining, so that
+we lay dry, we acquired fresh vigour, and directed our course for that
+island. Next evening we saw the island, which seemed merely a high white
+rock, at the foot of the high land of _Carapucho_. Our boat set off for
+the island about sun-set, and had like to have been lost among the
+breakers. At length they heard the barking of dogs, and saw the light of
+some candles; but, aware of the danger of landing in the dark, they made
+fast their boat to a float of weeds for want of a grapnel, and waited
+till day-light. They then rowed in between the rocks, and were
+ignorantly welcomed on shore by some Indians. Going to the house of the
+lieutenant, they broke open the door, and rummaged it and the village,
+finding a booty more valuable to us in our present situation than gold
+or silver. This consisted of 60 bushels of wheat flour, 120 of
+calavanses and corn, some jerked beef, mutton, and pork, a thousand
+weight of well-cured fish, four or five days eating of soft bread, and
+five or six jars of Peruvian wine and brandy, besides a good number of
+fowls and some rusk. They had also the good fortune to find a boat to
+bring off their plunder, which otherwise had been of little use to us,
+as our own boat was fully laden with men.
+
+In the mean time, we in the bark were carried away by the current to the
+northward, out of sight of the island; and as they had not loaded their
+boats till the height of the day, they had a laborious task to row off,
+being very heavily laden. We were under melancholy apprehensions,
+fearing that our people might have remained on shore and deserted us;
+but towards evening we perceived two boats coming fast towards us, as
+heavily laden as they could be with safety. Words cannot express our joy
+when they came aboard. The scene was now changed from famine to plenty.
+The loaves of soft bread were distributed, and the jars of wine
+broached: But I took care they should drink of it moderately, allowing
+each man no more than half a pint a-day. After living a day or two on
+wholesome food, we wondered how our stomachs could receive and digest
+the rank nauseous congers fried in train-oil, and could hardly believe
+we had lived on nothing else for a month past. I was assured by my
+second lieutenant, who commanded the boat on this occasion, that the
+Indians seemed rather pleased at our plundering the Spaniards; so
+natural is it for bad masters to find enemies in their servants.
+
+The _island of Iquique_ is in the lat. of 19 deg. 50' S.[271] about a mile
+from the main land, and only about a mile and a half in circuit, the
+channel between it and the coast of Peru being full of rocks. It is of
+moderate height, and the surface consists mostly of cormorant's dung,
+which is so very white that places covered with it appear at a distance
+like chalk cliffs. Its smell is very offensive, yet it produces
+considerable gain, as several ships load here with it every year for
+Arica, where it is used as manure for growing capsicums. The only
+inhabitants of this island are negro slaves, who gather this dung into
+large heaps near the shore, ready for boats to take it off. The village
+where the lieutenant resides, and which our people plundered, is on the
+main land close by the sea, and consists of about sixty scattered
+ill-built houses, or huts rather, and a small church. There is not the
+smallest verdure to be seen about it, neither does its neighbourhood
+afford even the smallest necessary of life, not even water, which the
+inhabitants have to bring in boats from the _Quebrada_, or breach of
+_Pisagua_, ten leagues to the northward; wherefore, being so miserable a
+place, the advantage derived from the _guana_ or cormorant's dung seems
+the only inducement for its being inhabited. To be at some distance from
+the excessively offensive stench of the dung, they have built their
+wretched habitations on the main, in a most hideous situation, and still
+even too near the guana, the vapours from which are even there very bad,
+yet not quite so suffocating as on the island. The sea here affords
+abundance of excellent fish, some kinds of which I had never before
+seen; one of them resembling a large silver eel, but much thicker in
+proportion. The inhabitants of this desolate and forbidding place cure
+these fish in a very cleanly manner, and export large quantities of
+them by the vessels which come for the guana.
+
+[Footnote 271: There is no island on the coast of Peru in that latitude.
+Iquique is a town on the main land, about thirty miles from the sea. The
+islands called _los Patillos_, or the Claws, are near the coast, in lat.
+20 deg. 45' S. and probably one of these may have got the name of _Iquique_,
+as being under the jurisdiction of that town. The mountain Carapacha of
+the text, is probably the hills of Tarapaca of our maps.--E.]
+
+We were informed by two Indian prisoners, that the lieutenant of Iquique
+had a boat at Pisagua for water, of which we began to be in need, for
+which reason I sent Mr Randal in search of her. He failed in this
+object, but brought off a few bladders full of water, and three or four
+_balsas_, very artificially sewed and filled with wind, which are used
+for landing on this dangerous coast. On these the rower sits across,
+using a double paddle; and as the wind escapes from the skin bags, he
+has a contrivance for supplying the deficiency. These are the chief
+embarkations used by the fishermen, and are found very serviceable for
+landing on this coast, which has hardly a smooth beach from one end of
+it to the other. We intended to have looked into the port of Arica, but
+heard there was a ship there of force, on which we continued our course
+to the northwards to La Nasca. Off that port we met a large ship about
+two hours before day, and though we rowed very hard, it was ten o'clock
+before we got up with her. After a brisk dispute of six or seven hours,
+we were obliged to leave her, in consequence of the sea-breeze coming in
+very strong. She was called the Francisco Palacio, of 700 tons, 8 guns,
+and 10 patereroes, with a great number of men, and well provided with
+small arms; but was so deeply laden that, in rolling, the water ran over
+her deck and out at her scuppers; indeed she had more the appearance of
+an ill-contrived floating castle, than of a ship, according to the
+present fashion of Europe. Thus we had the misfortune, on this forlorn
+voyage, to meet with the two best equipped and armed private ships at
+that time in the South Sea. In this action we had not above twenty
+fire-arms that were of any use, owing to the improvidence of our people
+at Juan Fernandez; yet were they so impatient of this disappointment,
+that some of them were for immediately surrendering to the enemy. To
+prevent this, I ordered four men whom I thought I could trust to take
+the charge of our two boats; but two of these went away with the best
+boat, and my first lieutenant and Morphew plotted to have gone away with
+the other, but were hindered by blowing weather, and so weak was my
+authority that I was forced to dissemble.
+
+Next day we stood into the road of Pisco, where we saw a very fine ship,
+and resolved immediately to board her; and to our great satisfaction,
+the captain and his people met us with their hats off, beseeching us to
+give them quarter. This was a good ship, of about 200 tons, called the
+Jesu Maria, almost laden with pitch, tar, copper, and plank, but nothing
+else. The captain offered 16,000 dollars for her ransom, but I could not
+comply, as the Recovery was disabled in her masts in boarding, and also
+we had now a vessel in which we could at least enjoy cleanliness, which
+we had been entire strangers to ever since our departure from Juan
+Fernandez; wherefore we made all dispatch in getting every thing out of
+the bark. The Spanish captain of the Jesu Maria informed me, that the
+Margaretta had arrived some time before at Calao, where she had given a
+full account of her rencounter with us; her captain and three men having
+been killed in the action, and a priest with several others wounded. She
+was now ready to put to sea again to cruize for us, with the addition of
+ten guns and fifty men. A frigate of twenty-eight guns, called the
+Flying-fish, was already out with the same intention; and advice had
+been sent respecting us along the coast, both to the north and south,
+with orders to equip what strength there was to catch us. All night, the
+people of Pisco were on the alert, continually firing guns, to give us
+an earnest of what we were to expect if we attempted to land, but we had
+no such intention.
+
+Having cleared our bark next morning, we gave her to the Spanish captain
+of the Jesu Maria; and as soon as the breeze sprung up, we weighed and
+stood to sea. While going out, we met our own boat with the two men who
+had deserted us, and who now edged down upon us, imagining we had been
+Spaniards. The two fellows were almost dead, having neither eat nor
+drank for three days, and had just been ashore on a small island near
+the harbour of Pisco, to kill some seals that they might drink their
+blood. Their only excuse for leaving us was, that they had fallen
+asleep, during which the breeze had wafted our bark away from them. We
+had only a transient view of Pisco, which seemed pleasantly situated
+among orchards and vineyards. We proceeded along the coast very
+cautiously, knowing that we were almost in the mouths of our enemies,
+and that the least act of indiscretion might throw us into their hands.
+We ventured, however, to look into the roads of Guanchaco, Malabriga,
+and Cheripe, where we saw no shipping, after which we passed through
+between the island of _Lobos de Tierra_ and the continent.
+
+Being near the _Saddle_ of Payta on the 25th November, I thought of
+surprising that place in the night, though our force was much diminished
+since our last attack; but as it grew calm while we were endeavouring to
+get into the harbour, we thought it better to delay till morning, as our
+vessel being Spanish would deceive the inhabitants, and prevent them
+from suspecting us. In the morning, being observed from the shore making
+many short trips to gain ground to windward, the Spaniards sent off a
+large boat full of men to assist in bringing in our ship, and to enquire
+the news. Seeing them making towards us, I ordered none of our men to
+appear but such as had dark complexions and wore Spanish dresses,
+standing ready to answer such questions as they might ask in hailing,
+and to give them a rope when they clapped us on board. Some of our men
+also were concealed under our gunwales, with their muskets ready to
+point into the boat, to command them to make her fast, and this
+stratagem succeeded. I examined the prisoners as to the condition of the
+town, which they assured me was then extremely poor, having neither
+money nor provisions, and shewed me a small bark on shore, lately sent
+in by Captain Clipperton with some of his prisoners, on the arrival of
+which every thing of value had been removed into the country. Yet we
+held on our way with Spanish colours flying, and came to the anchorage.
+
+As soon as we were anchored, I sent Mr Brooks to attack the town with
+twenty-four men, only those who rowed appearing, and the rest with their
+arms lying in the bottom of the boats; so that when they landed, they
+even found the children playing on the beach. These took the alarm
+immediately, and ran away on seeing our armed men. In an instant the
+whole place was in confusion, and happy were they who could escape, the
+town being left destitute, and they were too nimble to be overtaken. Our
+party ransacked Payta, but found it as poor as our prisoners reported;
+so that they only found a few bales of coarse cloth, about five
+hundred-weight of dried dog-fish, two or three pedlars packs, and an
+inconsiderable quantity of bread and sweetmeats. We had better fortune
+while at anchor, as we took a vessel in which were about fifty jars of
+Peruvian wine and brandy; her master having come by stealth from Calao,
+where orders had been given, that none but ships of force should venture
+to sea. My people in the town were in no haste to re-embark, and when it
+grew dark, some of the Spaniards began to assemble, and learning that
+there were only eighteen English in the town, came down the hills with
+great boldness. At first our people took refuge in the largest church,
+meaning to have defended themselves there; but at length they marched
+out, formed in a line, and kept beating their drum; and one of them
+having fired a musket, the Spaniards hastily retreated, and our men
+embarked without any more alarm.
+
+From Payta we directed our course for the island of Gorgona, in the bay
+of Panama, and in our passage to that place built a tank or wooden
+cistern in our vessel, sufficient to contain ten tons of water. In our
+way we made the island of Plata, Cape St Francisco, Gorgonella, or
+Little Gorgona, and on the 2d of December arrived at the island of
+Gorgona. We had here the advantage of being able to fill our watercasks
+in the boat, the water running in small streams from the rocks into the
+sea, and we cut our wood for fuel close to high-water mark; so that in
+less than forty-eight hours we completed our business, and hurried away
+for fear of those vessels which we understood had been sent in search of
+us. Having got out of the track of the enemy's ships, we consulted as to
+the properest manner of proceeding, when the majority were for going
+directly for India. Upon this we changed the name of our vessel, from
+the Jesu Maria to the Happy-Return, and used our best endeavours to get
+off from the coast of America. The winds and currents were however
+contrary, and some of our people who were adverse to this plan did some
+secret damage to our tank, so that the greatest part of our water leaked
+out. Owing to this, and our provisions being much exhausted by long
+delays from contrary winds or dead calms, we were incapable of
+attempting so long a run: Wherefore, on purpose to procure what we
+wanted, I proposed making a descent on Realejo, on the coast of Mexico,
+in 11 deg. 50' [12 deg. 28' N.] In our way thither, we fell in with Cape Burica,
+in 8 deg. 20' [_exactly_ 8 deg. N.] and then, on second thoughts, I judged it
+might be safer to make an attempt on the island of Quibo, in lat. 7 deg.
+30' N. where, according to the account given by Captain Rogers. I
+guessed there were inhabitants, who lived plentifully on the produce of
+their island.
+
+On the 31st January, 1721, we entered the channel between the islands of
+_Quibo_ and _Quivetta_, in lat. 7 deg. 18' N. in twenty fathoms water, and
+anchored opposite a sandy bay, which promised to afford convenience for
+wooding and watering. Sending our boat to view the bay, my people
+reported that there was a good close harbour a little to the south, but
+no signs of inhabitants, except three or four huts by the shore, which
+they supposed had formerly been used by pearl-fishers, as there were
+great quantities of mother-of-pearl-shells scattered about these huts.
+On attentive consideration, I resolved not to shut up our vessel in a
+close harbour, for fear of bad consequences, and remained therefore at
+anchor in the open channel. At day-break next morning, we saw two large
+boats under Spanish colours, rowing in for Quivetta, which gave me some
+apprehensions they had some intelligence of us, and intended an attack.
+The mulattoes on the coast of Mexico are remarkable for their courage,
+and have sometimes done very bold actions, even in such paltry vessels
+as these we now saw: These, however, steered into a small cove on the
+island of Quivetta, which satisfied us they had no intentions to attack
+us. I now sent Mr Brooks in our yawl to attack them, when he found them
+all ashore, and brought away their piraguas with two prisoners, a negro
+and a mulatto, the rest taking refuge in the woods. We took all their
+provisions, consisting of a small quantity of pork, with plantains, some
+green, some ripe, and some dried. Of this last there was a considerable
+quantity, which, on being pounded, made a pleasant-tasted flour,
+indifferently white, and supplied us with bread for a month. The mulatto
+mortified us greatly by telling us that a vessel laden with provisions
+had passed near us in the night, but promised to bring us to a place
+where we might supply ourselves without hazard, provided we were not
+above two or three days about it, wherefore we made all possible
+dispatch in getting in our wood and water.
+
+We weighed from this place on the 16th January, steering for _Mariato_,
+being the westernmost point of the gulf of St Martin. In going out from
+the channel of Quibo, we were in imminent danger of being forced by the
+current upon two rocks at a small distance from each other, off the
+northern point of Quivetta; but having cleared them, we steered through
+_Canal bueno_, or the good channel, so called from its safety, being
+free from rocks or shoals. Over against the south entrance of these
+straits, at the distance of a league from point Mariato, is the island
+of Cebaco, in my opinion about ten leagues in circumference. I ran along
+the south end of that island, and in the evening of the 19th got safe in
+between it and point Mariato, and anchored in six fathoms, over against
+a green field, being the only clear spot thereabout. Our pilot advised
+us to land about three hours before day, when we should be in good time
+for the plantations. Accordingly, I went at two in the morning in our
+own boat, the two lieutenants being in the two piraguas, and left my son
+with a few hands to take care of the ship. Our pilot carried us a little
+way up the river of St Martin, and out of that through several branches
+or narrow creeks, among groves of trees, so close that we had not room
+to row. Not approving of this navigation, I kept a watchful eye on our
+guide, suspecting he had no good design in his head. We landed just at
+day-break, in a fine plain, or savannah; and, after a march of three
+miles, came to two farm-houses, whence the inhabitants made their
+escape, except the wife and children belonging to one of them. We had
+the satisfaction of seeing that this place answered the description
+given by our guide, being surrounded by numerous flocks of black cattle,
+with plenty of hogs, and fowls of several sorts, together with some
+dried beef; plantains, and maize; and, in the mean time, we had a
+breakfast of hot cakes and milk.
+
+When it was broad day, I saw our ship close by us, on which I asked our
+guide, why he had brought us so far about? when he said there was a
+river between us and the shore, and he was not sure if it were fordable.
+I therefore sent some to try, who found it only knee deep, on which, to
+avoid carrying our plunder so far by land, I ordered our boats to leave
+the river of St Martin, and to row to the beach over against the ship.
+We had not been long at the farmhouse till the master of the family came
+to us, bringing several horses with him, and offering to serve us as far
+as he could. This offer we kindly accepted, and we employed him to carry
+every thing we thought fit to our boats. He then went among his black
+cattle, and brought us as many as we thought we could cure, as we had
+but little salt, and could not afford water to keep them alive at sea,
+so that we killed them as soon as they came on board. We preserved them
+by cutting their flesh into long slips, about the thickness of one's
+finger, and then sprinkled them with a small quantity of salt, not using
+more than four or five pounds to the hundred-weight. After lying two or
+three hours in the salt, we hung it up to dry in the sun for two or
+three days, which perfectly cured it, much better than could have been
+done by any quantity of the best salt.
+
+Having thus procured all we proposed at this place, we departed from
+thence nest morning, having our decks full of fowls and hogs, among the
+latter of which was one having its navel on its back.[272] The Spaniards
+say that this animal, although but small even at its full growth, is a
+terrible creature to meet wild in the woods. Returning through the
+_Canal bueno_, we stopt at Quibo to complete our water; and on leaving
+that island, gave the largest piragua to our two prisoners, to enable
+those who were on the island of Quivetta to return home. The wine and
+brandy we had lately taken had the effect of dividing my ship's company
+into two parties, those who were formerly so firmly united being now
+inveterate enemies; insomuch, that in one night the ringleaders of both
+have solicited me to espouse their cause, assuring me that the other
+party had a design on my life, and urging me to murder those who were of
+the opposite faction. It is wonderful how this evil was diverted, as I
+could use no other means than calm advice on both sides, and it was
+utterly out of my power to hinder them from getting drunk as often as
+they pleased; in which condition they often fell all to skirmishing with
+each other, and I had more than once my clothes almost torn off my back
+in endeavouring to part them. It was happy this trade of drinking did
+not last long, as, while the liquor lasted, I found it was unsafe to lay
+my head on my pillow, which almost wearied me out of my life. Their free
+access to the liquor shortened the term of this miserable folly, by soon
+expending the baneful cause. The necessities of hunger obliged them to
+act jointly and vigorously at Mariato; but they soon relapsed again, and
+were as distracted as ever so long as the liquor lasted. My land as well
+as sea-officers were now obliged to learn to steer, and to take their
+turns at the helm with the seamen, such being the pass to which they had
+brought themselves by sinking my authority, that they had lost their
+own, and were even in a worse condition than I; as the crew had, for
+their own sakes, to have recourse to me on all emergencies, obeying me
+punctually while these lasted, and abusing me plentifully when these
+were over.
+
+[Footnote 272: The Pecary, Tajacu, or Mexican hog, the Sus Tajapin of
+naturalists, is here meant, which is an indigenous animal of the warmer
+parts of America, and is found in one of the West India islands. It has
+no tail, and is particularly distinguished by an open glandular orifice
+on the hinder part of the back, which discharges a fetid unctuous
+liquid; and which orifice has been vulgarly mistaken for the navel.--E.]
+
+On the 25th January, we discovered a sail in the morning, about two
+leagues to leeward, to which we gave chase for some time; but seeing she
+was Europe-built, and fearing she might be a man of war belonging to the
+enemy, I hauled on a wind, and in half an hour it fell dead calm. We
+soon after saw a boat rowing towards us, which proved the pinnace of our
+consort the Success, commanded by her first lieutenant, Mr Davison. This
+was a most unexpected meeting to us both, Mr Davison being surprised to
+find me in such a condition, and I no less so to find the Success in
+these seas. I gave him an account of our misfortunes, and of all that
+had befallen us during the long interval of our separation, and he
+related all the remarkable incidents that had befallen them. A breeze of
+wind springing up, I bore down upon the Success, and went aboard of her;
+when I gave Captain Clipperton, and Mr Godfrey, our agent-general, the
+whole history of my voyage, expecting to have been treated by them as
+belonging to the same interest, but found them unwilling to have any
+thing to do with me, now that my ship was lost. I trusted, however, that
+Captain Clipperton would let me have such necessaries as he could spare,
+on which he said, I should know more of his mind next day. Among other
+discourses, he told me that he was just come from the island of _Cocos_,
+his people very sickly, and on short allowance. I then offered my
+service to pilot him to Mariato, which was not above thirty leagues
+distant, where he might have refreshed his company, and supplied his
+wants; but he was resolved to make the best of his way for the _Tres
+Marias_, where he said there was plenty of turtle to be had, and so I
+left him for the night.
+
+Next morning, as I was going again on board the Success with some of my
+officers, Captain Clipperton spread all his canvass, and crowded away
+from us. On this I returned to my ship, fired several guns, and made
+signals of distress, which were not regarded by him, till his officers
+exclaimed against his barbarity, and at last he brought to. When I had
+again got up with him, I sent Mr Brooks to know the reason of his
+abrupt departure, and to request the supply of several necessaries,
+which I was willing to pay for. On these terms, he spared me two of his
+quarter-deck guns, sixty round shot, some musket-balls and flints, a
+Spanish chart of the coast of Mexico, with part of China and India, a
+half-hour glass and half-minute glass, a compass, and about three
+hundred-weight of salt: But all my arguments could not prevail with him
+to let me have any thing out of his medicine-chest for Mr Coldsea, who
+was still very ill of his wound. For what we now had from the Success,
+we returned some bales of coarse broad-cloth, as much pitch and tar as
+he would have, and some pigs of copper: I gave him also a large
+silver-ladle for a dozen _spadoen_, or Spanish swords. This being
+concluded, I offered my services, assuring him I had a pretty good ship,
+and that our cargo was of some value: To this he answered, if my cargo
+were gold, he had no business with me, and I must take care of myself.
+Mr Hendric, our agent, Mr Rainer, and Mr Dodd, our lieutenant of
+marines, weary of the hard work imposed upon them, desired my leave to
+go on board the Success, which I consented to, and Captain Clipperton
+left us to shift for ourselves, being now near the island of Cano.
+
+I was now for returning southwards, to try our fortunes in the bay of
+Panama, but the majority opposed me through fear, insisting to go to the
+Tres Marias, to salt turtle at these islands, and then to stretch over
+for India. We accordingly directed our coarse that way, but as the wind
+near the land continued in the west, and the coast of Mexico trended
+nearly N.W. by W. we crept so slowly to windward, that we began to be
+very short of provisions before we got the length of Realijo, on which
+our design of landing there was renewed; but this intention was soon
+frustrated, as we were blown past that place by a _tequante peque_, for
+so the Spaniards on this coast call a violent gale at N.E. As we
+continued our voyage along shore, we again fell in with the Success,
+then in quest of _Sonsonate_, expecting there to receive the ransom of
+the Marquis of _Villa Roche_ who had been some time a prisoner on board.
+We ranged close under her stern, and asked how Captain Clipperton and
+the rest of the gentlemen did, but received no answer, and the Success
+steered one way, while we went another. After this, calms, contrary
+winds, and unaccountable currents, so delayed our proceedings, that were
+reduced to a very short allowance, which we were forced to diminish
+daily, and had been reduced to very great distress, had we not from time
+to time found turtle floating on the surface of the sea, for which we
+kept a good look-out, being able to discover them even at great
+distances, by the sea-birds perching on their backs. On sight of these,
+we were forced often to forego taking advantage of the wind; and,
+besides often losing some of our way in pursuit of them, they had still
+a worse effect, as dressing them occasioned a great consumption of our
+water.
+
+Being now threatened with almost certain perdition if means were not
+fallen upon to avoid a state of absolute famine, I proposed that we
+should attempt to plunder some small town as we coasted along shore. At
+this time _Guotalco_ was the nearest port; but, as we were standing in
+for it, we saw a sail a considerable way to leeward, which we considered
+more proper for us to endeavour to capture than to venture on shore, for
+which purpose we bore down upon her, which proved to be the Success.
+When sufficiently near, I made the private signal formerly concerted
+between us, but Captain Clipperton hauled his wind, and did not lie by a
+moment for us to get up with him. We were now so for to leeward of
+Guatalco, that it was in vain to beat up for that port, especially on an
+uncertainty. We were now reduced to a small daily allowance of
+calavances, which not being sufficient to keep us alive, we had recourse
+to the remainder of our smoked congers which had been neglected for some
+months, and had been soaking and rotting in the bilge-water, so that
+they were now as disgusting food as could be. Under these calamitous
+circumstances, we again met the Success near port _Angels_, in lat. 15 deg.
+50' N. long. 96 deg. 25' W. Having exchanged signals, we stood so near each
+other that a biscuit might have been chucked aboard, yet did not
+exchange a word, as Clipperton had ordered his officers and ship's
+company to take no notice of us: Yet was Captain Clipperton so sensible
+of the difficulties and hazards we had to encounter in our design of
+going for India, that he said the child just born would be grey-haired
+before we should arrive there. We were now in a most miserable
+situation, wandering upon an inhospitable coast in want of every thing,
+and all the land we had seen was so wild and open to the sea, that it
+would have been impossible for us to have landed any where, and nothing
+could have urged us to make the attempt but the extreme want we were now
+in.
+
+On the 12th March, being off the port of Acapulco towards evening, we
+saw a ship between us and the shore, which turned out to be the Success,
+when Clipperton not only answered my private signal, but also that for
+speaking with me. After his late inhumane behaviour, I would hardly have
+trusted him, had we not been so near Acapulco, where I thought he meant
+to cruize for the Manilla ships, and now wished to have our assistance,
+wherefore I bore down alongside. He now sent his second lieutenant,
+Captain Cooke, with a very obliging letter to me, stating that he was
+cruizing for the homeward-bound Manilla ships, and desired me to assist
+him in the enterprise, with which view he desired me to come on board
+next morning, to consult on the best plan of attacking her, and proposed
+an union of the two companies. I was well pleased at this offer, and
+returned an answer that I should be with him early. I then read his
+letter to my people, who all expressed their readiness to join in the
+enterprise; but, as Clipperton had used us so unhandsomely, they desired
+me to have some security for their shares, signed by Clipperton, Godfrey
+the agent, and the rest of the officers in the Success.
+
+I went aboard the Success next morning, accompanied by Brooks and
+Randal, my lieutenants, and was received with much apparent civility,
+all animosities being forgotten, and we seemed now in the most perfect
+harmony. I first told Captain Clipperton and Mr Godfrey of the paper
+expected by my officers and men, entitling them to such shares as were
+allowed by the original articles, to which they readily consented, and
+drew up an instrument fully answerable to what my people desired. We
+then proceeded to our consultation, when it was agreed that I should
+send most of my people on board the Success as soon as the Manilla ship
+appeared, leaving only a boat's crew with me to bring me away in case I
+should have an opportunity to use my vessel as a fire-ship, or smoker,
+in case she should prove too hard for the Success. We also determined to
+board her at once, as otherwise we should have much the worst of the
+contest, owing to her superior weight of metal, and her better ability
+to bear a cannonade. Clipperton assured me he was certain of the time
+this ship was to sail from Acapulco, being always within a day or two
+after Passion-week, of which time a fortnight was yet to come. Before
+returning to my own ship, I informed Captain Clipperton of our scarcity
+of water, when he told me he had eighty tons, and would spare me as much
+as I wanted, or any thing else his ship afforded. I had now the
+pleasure of enjoying my command as fully as ever, and my whole remaining
+crew, from the highest to the lowest, expressed their satisfaction at
+our present prospects. Morphew, the ringleader of all our disorders,
+fearing my resentment might fall heavily on him, contrived to insinuate
+himself into the favour of the captain and officers of the Success, by a
+submissive deportment, and presents, and, in the end, left me on the
+14th March, being received on board that ship. On the 15th, Mr Rainer
+came on board my ship, to visit his old ship-mates, and staid all night.
+I constantly reminded Clipperton of our want of water, and he as often
+promised to supply us with a large quantity at once.
+
+We thus continued to cruize in good order, and with great hopes, till
+the 27th March, when I had to suffer the most prodigious piece of
+treachery that could be imagined. We used to cruize off and on, at a
+convenient distance from the shore, so as not to be discovered from the
+land, yet so that it was impossible for any ship to leave the port of
+Acapulco without being seen by us. As my ship did not sail so well as
+the Success, Clipperton used to shorten sail, particularly at night, and
+shewed us lights on all necessary occasions. Towards evening of that
+day, he stretched about two leagues a-head of us, and I could not see
+that he lowered even a topgallant-sail for us to come up with him. I
+kept standing after him however, till almost a-shore on the breakers,
+when I had to tack and stand out to sea. Next morning no ship was to be
+seen, which reduced us to the most terrible apprehensions, considering
+our sad situation for want of water, and our vast distance from any
+place where we could expect to procure any, as we had now no other
+choice but either to beat up 220 leagues to the _Tres Marias_, or to
+bear away for the gulf of Amapala, at a much greater distance. I was
+afterwards informed, by some of Clipperton's officers, whom I met with
+in China, that he had done this cruel action absolutely against the
+repeated remonstrances of his officers, who abhorred such an act of
+barbarity. I also learnt afterwards, by some Spaniards from Manilla,
+that the Acapulco ship sailed about a week after we desisted from
+cruizing for her. This ship was the _Santo Christo_, carrying upwards of
+forty brass guns, and was exceedingly rich.
+
+In the sad situation we were now reduced to, every thing was to be
+hazarded, and any experiment tried that promised the smallest chance of
+success. We continued our course therefore, under terrible
+inconveniences, distressed for water and provisions, and weak in point
+of number; yet so far from being united by our common danger, that our
+people could not be restrained within the bounds of common civility. The
+winds and weather being favourable, we found ourselves before the port
+of _Sansonate_ [273] on the 30th March, about sun-set, when we
+discovered a ship of good size at anchor in the harbour. Being a fine
+moonlight evening, I sent my first lieutenant in the yawl, with some of
+our best hands, to see what she was. Soon afterwards we heard some guns
+fired, and on the return of the lieutenant, he reported that she was a
+stout ship, having at least one tier of guns. Little regarding her
+apparent strength, or our own weakness, as we thought our necessities
+made us a match for her, we continued plying in all night, and prepared
+to engage her. At sun-rise the land-breeze blew so fresh from the shore,
+that we worked in but slowly; and in the mean time we received all their
+fire on every board we made, but without returning a single shot. Their
+boat also was employed in bringing off soldiers from the shore, to
+reinforce their ship; and they hung up a jar of about ten gallons of
+powder, with a match, at each main and fore-yard-arm, and at the
+bowsprit end, to let fall on our deck, in case we boarded them, which
+contrivance, if it had taken effect, would have made an end of both
+ships, and all that were in them. Seeing them so desperate in their
+preparations, I could not but expect a warm reception; but as our case
+would not admit of delay, at ever so hazardous a rate, we were not to be
+dismayed. About eleven in the forenoon the sea-breeze set in, and, to
+make our small force as available as might be, I ordered all our three
+guns to be placed on that side from which we were likely to engage. As
+the sea-breeze freshened we ran fast towards them, during which our
+small arms were effectually employed to break their powder-jars before
+we should board them, which we did without delay, and they submitted
+after exchanging a few shots.
+
+[Footnote 273: The port of Aeazualte, at the mouth of the river
+Samsonate, in the province of that name.--E.]
+
+This ship was named the _Sacra Familia_, of 300 tons, six guns, and
+seventy men, having a great many small arms, shot, and hand-granades.
+She had arrived some time before from Calao, with wine and brandy; but
+had now nothing on board except fifty jars of gunpowder, a small
+quantity of rusk, and some jerked beef; so that she was hardly worth the
+risk and trouble of capture. But as she had the character of sailing
+better, and was much better fitted than our ship, I resolved to exchange
+ships, and we all went aboard the prize, which had been fitted out in
+warlike manner, and commissioned, for the express purpose of taking us,
+if we chanced to fall in her way. To do justice to my people, our small
+arms were handled with much dexterity on this occasion; but, having been
+chiefly directed at the powder-jars, the only person killed on board the
+prize was the boatswain, and one person slightly wounded; while on our
+side no damage was sustained. A merchant, made prisoner at this time,
+seemed inclined to purchase the _Jesu Maria_, which we had quitted; and
+hearing her cargo consisted of pitch, tar, and copper, he consented to
+my demands, and went ashore to raise the sum agreed upon. We had so few
+provisions, that we could not afford to keep any prisoners, and
+therefore dismissed all the whites, Indians, and others, except some
+negroes, whom we detained to assist in working the ship: and, that we
+might lose as little time as possible, we set immediately to work,
+overhauling our sails and rigging, that we might get our new ship ready
+for sea.
+
+While thus employed, I received a letter from the governor of the place,
+which none of us could understand; but learnt by the messenger, that it
+intimated some account of a truce concluded between the crowns of
+Britain and Spain, and that the governor requested me to stay five days,
+that he might satisfy me by shewing me the articles of accommodation. I
+thought this odd, telling the Spanish gentleman I had not met with a
+friendly or peaceable reception; asking him why they had thus armed
+themselves in so desperate a manner, and why the governor had not rather
+sent me a flag of truce in the morning before we engaged, giving me this
+intimation? Saying also, if this story were true, we ought to have found
+the alleged intelligence on board the prize, as she came from Lima,
+whence they pretended the news came. It was likewise extraordinary, that
+none of the officers in the prize should know any thing of the matter:
+yet I had so great a regard for even the name of peace, that I would
+wait fifteen days, if the governor would supply us with provisions and
+water, otherwise I would not consent to stay twenty-four hours. I sent
+also a short answer to the governor, excusing our imperfect knowledge of
+the Spanish language. In this letter I stated if peace were actually
+concluded between our sovereigns, that I was ready to act as he desired,
+on due proof; and hoped, as we were now friends, that he would allow us
+to have refreshments from his port. On receipt of this, the governor
+expressed great satisfaction, and seemed to make no difficulty in
+complying with my request. Our boats went therefore ashore every
+morning, under a flag of truce, and we received for the first four days
+eight small jars of water daily. On the fifth day they reduced us to
+five jars, and during the whole time only one small cow was sent us.
+
+On this occasion a boat came off full of men, among whom were two
+priests, who brought with them a paper in Spanish, which they called the
+articles of peace; but so wretchedly written and blotted, that we should
+have been puzzled to read it, had it even been in English. I therefore
+desired the priests to translate it into Latin, which they promised to
+do, and took the paper with them. They also told me, that the governor
+meant to send for some Englishmen who lived at Guatimala, if I would
+continue three days longer in the road; to which I answered, that he
+might take his own time. Two days after, on our boat going ashore as
+usual, the governor ordered her and her crew to be seized. I was all day
+in suspence, not imagining the governor would make such a breach of the
+law of nations; but in the evening two of the boat's crew came off in an
+old leaky canoe, bringing a letter from the governor, and another from
+Mr Brooks, my first lieutenant, who was one of the prisoners. The
+governor required me to deliver up the _Sacra Familia_, and that we
+should all surrender, otherwise he would declare us pirates; and Mr
+Brooks told me he believed the governor meant to bully me. The governor
+proposed two ways for conveying us from the Spanish dominions, one of
+which was by Vera Cruz overland, and the other by sea to Lima. But I
+liked neither of these, not chusing a journey of 1300 miles at least
+through a country inhabited by a barbarous people, nor yet a voyage to
+Lima under their guidance. My two men told me, that Frederick Mackenzie
+had let the governor into the secret of our necessities, and of my
+design of procuring water at the island of Tigers, in the gulf of
+Amapala, which he said he would take care to prevent, and believed he
+now had us safe enough, knowing our only boat remaining was a small
+canoe. My two men who brought these letters offering their service, and
+a third volunteering to accompany them, to bale out the water from their
+wretched canoe, I sent a letter in French to the governor, offering, if
+I could be assured of a safe conduct for ourselves and effects to
+Panama, and thence by way of Portobello to one of the British colonies,
+we would enter into a farther treaty, which he might signify, if he
+meant to comply, by firing two guns, and by sending off my people with
+the usual supply; otherwise necessity would compel us to sail that
+night. Receiving no reply whatever, I weighed before day next morning,
+and made sail, leaving the Jesu Maria behind, a much more valuable ship
+than the one I took away.
+
+On going to sea, we reduced ourselves to a pint of-water in the
+twenty-four hours, and directed our course for the gulf of Amapala,
+about thirty-five leagues S.S.E. [274] meaning to water there on the
+island of Tigers. The loss of my officer and boat's crew sensibly
+diminished the number of white faces among us, and so lessened our
+strength, that we should never have been able to manage this great ship,
+with her heavy cotton sails, but for our negro prisoners, who proved to
+be very good sailors. The loss of our boat was a great inconvenience to
+us; but as I meant only to provide water enough to serve us to Panama,
+where we were determined to surrender ourselves, if it were really
+peace, I thought we might contrive to get such a quantity of water as
+might suffice, in two or three days, by means of our canoe. The winds
+being favourable, we reached the gulf in ten days, but we could find no
+water, after an anxious and hazardous search. Surrounded on all sides
+with the most discouraging difficulties, we weighed anchor again on the
+13th of April, when I brought our people to a resolution not to
+surrender on any account, let the consequence be what it might. We had
+not now forty gallons of water in the ship, and no other liquids, when
+we came to an allowance of half a pint each for twenty-four hours, even
+this being too large, considering we could get none nearer than the
+island of Quibo, which was about 160 leagues from the gulf of Amapala,
+and we were forty-three in number, including our negroes.
+
+[Footnote 274: About forty-two marine leagues E.S.E.]
+
+We accordingly steered for Quibo, having very uncertain winds and
+variable weather, and were thirteen days on this short allowance. No one
+who has not experienced it can conceive our sufferings in this sultry
+climate, by the perpetual extremity of thirst, which would not permit us
+to eat an ounce of victuals in a day. We even drank our urine, which
+moistened our mouths indeed, but excited our thirst the more. Some even
+drank large draughts of sea-water, which had like to have killed them.
+[275] On the 25th April we came to the island of _Cano_, in lat. 8 deg. 47'
+N. which, by the verdure, promised to yield us water, if our canoe could
+get on shore. In this hope we came to anchor off the north-west side of
+this island, when it was as much as we could do to hand our sails, stop
+our cable, and execute the other necessary labours, so greatly were we
+reduced. We imagined we could see a run of water, yet dreaded the
+dangerous surf which broke all round those parts of the island we could
+see. Mr Randal was sent with some jars, to try what could be done; and
+as he did not appear again when very late at night, I became
+apprehensive he was either lost, or, not finding water on the island,
+had gone in search of it to the continent. At length he came back, with
+his jars filled, and any one may guess our unspeakable joy on being thus
+opportunely delivered from the jaws of death. He did not bring above
+sixty or seventy gallons, and I was at great pains to restrain my men
+from using it immoderately, allowing only a quart to be distributed
+immediately to each man. What made me the more strict on this occasion
+was, that Mr Randal assured me we should hardly get any more, the
+breakers were so very dangerous. That very night we chanced to have a
+shower of rain, on which we used every expedient for catching it, in
+sheets, blankets, and sails. During our long thirst we had continually
+wished for rainy weather, and had often good reason to expect it, by
+seeing many louring black clouds, which seemed every minute ready to
+discharge their burdens, yet never did before to any purpose. Next day I
+sent our boatswain to make another essay; but after going round the
+whole island, and wasting the entire day in search of a smooth beach, he
+could not see a single spot where he might venture on shore. Thinking we
+had a sufficient stock to carry us to Quibo, we weighed next day; and
+while ranging near the island, we saw a smooth beach, on which I sent
+our canoe again, which brought back nine jars full of water.
+
+[Footnote 275: It may not be improper to state, that in such extremity
+for want of water, great relief has been experienced by remaining
+immersed for some time in the sea; the lymphatics of the skin absorbing
+water to supply and relieve the system very materially.--E.]
+
+We now pursued our course to the S.E. and arrived in a few days at
+Quibo, anchoring at the same place where we had been formerly. We
+pursued our business of wooding and watering at this island with
+tolerable chearfulness, yet without any great hurry; chiefly because we
+were now within eighty leagues of Panama, and it was requisite for us to
+deliberate very seriously on our scheme of surrendering to the
+Spaniards. We considered Panama as well calculated for treating on this
+subject, not being any way strong towards the sea; and as we had a good
+ship, we thought it no difficult matter to settle the terms of our
+surrender, before giving ourselves into their hands. We also reckoned on
+some assistance from the factors of the South Sea company, resident
+there, who, in case a peace were actually concluded in Europe, might
+intercede for us, and procure us a passage for Europe. Yet as there was
+something extremely disagreeable in the idea of a surrender, especially
+to such enemies as the Spaniards, we were in no great hurry,
+particularly as we were here somewhat at our ease, enjoying many
+conveniences to which we had long been strangers. The free use we made
+of the excellent fruits growing on this island brought the flux among
+us, which weakened us very much, and interrupted our work for some days,
+yet in the main did us little hurt, or rather tended to preserve us from
+the scurvy. We deliberated and consulted as to our future conduct; but
+our views were so discordant, and our minds so distracted, that we could
+come to no resolution, except that of continuing here, in hopes of
+something happening to our advantage.
+
+The island of _Quibo_ or _Coibo_ is almost in the same parallel with
+Panama, [276] being about twenty-four English miles from N. to S. and
+twelve from E. to W. It is of moderate height, covered all over with
+inaccessible woods, always green; and, though never inhabited, abounds
+with papaws and limes, and some other fruits I never saw before, which
+are nearly as good, though wholly neglected, as those that are most
+carefully attended to in other islands in similar latitudes, whence it
+may be inferred that the soil is fertile; and, if ever inhabited and
+cleared, it promises to be as productive as the best of our West-India
+islands. The pearl-fishers, not being able to follow their occupation
+during the _vandevals_, or black stormy months, from the beginning of
+June to the end of November, have a few scattered huts in several parts
+of this island and of _Quivetta_, used by the divers during their
+season, in which they sleep and open their oysters, so that the sandy
+beach is covered with fine mother-of-pearl shells. In wading only to the
+middle, we could reach large pearl oysters with our hands, which at
+first pleased us much; but we found them as tough as leather, and quite
+unpalatable. Having no seyne, I can say little about other kinds of
+fish. We occasionally observed a large kind of flat fish, which often
+sprung a great way out of the water, which are said to be very
+destructive to the divers; for, when these return to the surface, unless
+they take great care, these fish wrap themselves round the divers, and
+hold them fast till drowned. To guard against this, the divers always
+carry a sharp-pointed knife, and on seeing any of these fish above them,
+present the point over their heads, and stick it into the fish's belly.
+They are also subject to great danger from alligators, which swarm in
+this part of the sea; and some of us fancied we saw one swimming below
+the surface near Mariato Point, only a few leagues from hence. This
+island has a great variety of birds, also great numbers of black monkeys
+and guanoes, which last mostly frequent the streams of fresh water. Some
+of these guanoes are of extraordinary size, being of a grey colour with
+black streaks, those about the head being brown. Quibo is a most
+convenient place for procuring wood and water, as the wood grows in
+abundance within twenty yards of the sea, and there are several streams
+of fresh water crossing the beach.
+
+[Footnote 276: This is a material error. Panama is in lat. 9 deg. N. long.
+80 deg. 21' W. while the centre of Quibo is in lat. 7 deg. 28' N. and long. 82 deg.
+17' W. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+Having got clear of this place, and nothing thought of but our speedy
+return to Europe by surrendering at Panama, we met with strong adverse
+currents, together with calms and contrary winds, by which we were
+detained for several days under the mountains of _Guanachu_. [277] On
+the 15th. May, a small bark bore down upon us, mistaking us for
+Spaniards. She was called the Holy Sacrament, and came last from
+Cheriqui, laden with dried beef, pork; and live hogs. Her master was
+much surprised at first, but soon recovered on being told we were bound
+for Panama, and readily offered to pilot us thither, as he was bound for
+that port; and begged us to take his bark in tow, as he could not fetch
+the land, and his hogs were almost dead for want of water, while his
+vessel was ready to sink, being so leaky that his people were no longer
+able to stand to the pumps. I took her in tow, sending some of my people
+to assist in pumping the bark, and even spared some water and maize for
+supplying the hogs. The master came on board of my ship, but had heard
+no news of any peace or truce between Britain and Spain.
+
+[Footnote 277: Perhaps the Sierra de Canataqua are here meant, which
+pervade the country between Montijo Bay and the Bay of Panama, ending in
+Point Mariato, of which they seem to have been detained.--E.]
+
+It may seem strange that this opportunity of supplying ourselves with
+provisions made no change in our plans; but every one of us was so worn
+out by a continual want of all necessaries, and so disheartened by a
+perpetual succession of misfortunes, that we were tired of the sea, and
+willing to embrace any opportunity of getting ashore, almost at any
+rate. I was rejoiced at this bark having fallen into our hands; because,
+if we found the story of the governor of Sansonate false, we might be
+thoroughly enabled to go to India, with this help. To ascertain this, I
+meant to anchor a great way short of Panama, keeping possession of the
+bark, in case the president might not agree to safe and honourable
+terms, when we still had it in our power to redress ourselves, by
+keeping out of his hands. All this while, however, we had not determined
+who should be the bearer of the flag of truce; for my people, after so
+much treachery among them, feared that the messenger might only make
+terms for himself with the governor, and not return again: Wherefore, my
+son was chosen as the fittest person for the purpose, as being sure of
+his return, for my sake.
+
+On the 17th another bark came down upon us, but after coming pretty
+near, sheared off; on which I sent Mr Randal in our canoe, to inform
+them of our design, but they hoisted Spanish colours on his approach,
+and fired at him. Next morning we looked into the bay, where we found
+this bark at anchor, but she renewed her fire on our approach. On this,
+at his own request, I sent the master of the Holy Sacrament in a canoe,
+with four negroes and a flag of truce, to inform the people in the other
+bark of our intentions. A gale of wind interrupted this plan, and forced
+the canoe on shore, I dare say without danger to their lives, as they
+seemed to land of choice. On the 19th we saw a sail ahead of us
+standing along shore, on which we let go the bark we had in tow, in
+which were four of our own people and five Spaniards, spreading all the
+sail we could, so that by night we were at a considerable distance from
+the bark. I was for lying-to all night, for the bark to come up, but the
+majority insisted we should crowd sail all night, so that by day-break
+of the 20th we were within less than gun-shot of the chase. I
+immediately hoisted our colours, fired a gun to leeward, and sent a man
+to wave a white flag on our poop, in token of truce: But they
+continually fired at us, having their decks full of men, who kept
+hallooing and abusing us with the grossest epithets. Still I made no
+return, till I came close on their quarter, and then sent one of their
+countrymen to our boltsprit-end, to inform them we were bound for
+Panama, and wished to treat with them peaceably: But the only reply they
+made was by continuing their fire, calling us _borachos_ and _peros
+Ingleses_, drunkards and English dogs; so that at length I thought it
+full time to begin with them. I therefore met them with the helm, and
+soon convinced them of their error, giving them so warm a reception that
+they soon sheered-off. We just missed catching hold of them, and as it
+fell calm, we continued to engage her for two or three hours at the
+distance of musket-shot. A breeze at length sprung up, when we neared
+them, and their courage subsided in proportion as we approached. Their
+captain still encouraged them to fight, bravely exposing himself in an
+open manner, till he was at length shot through the body, and dropt down
+dead; on which they immediately called out for quarter, and thus ended
+the dispute.
+
+We now commanded them to hoist out their launch; but they answered, that
+their tackle and rigging were so shattered that they could not possibly
+comply; wherefore I sent Mr Randall and two or three more in our canoe,
+who found all her people most submissively asking mercy. Mr Randall sent
+the most considerable of the prisoners on board my ship, who informed me
+their vessel was _La Conception de Receva_, belonging to Calao, but last
+from Guanchaco, of 200 tons burden, laden with flour, loaves of sugar,
+boxes of marmalade, and jars of preserved peaches, grapes, limes, and
+such like. She mounted six guns, and carried above seventy men, being
+one of the ships that had been fitted out and commissioned purposely to
+take us; so that she was the second of these armed merchantmen we had
+taken. In this engagement, the Spanish captain and one negro were
+killed, and one or two slightly wounded; but their masts, sails, and
+rigging were much shattered. On our part, the gunner only was slightly
+wounded, and a small piece was carried out of the side of our main-mast.
+We had now above eighty prisoners of all sorts, and not exceeding
+twenty-six of ourselves. When the Spanish gentlemen came off board, they
+would not give me time to ask the reason of not hearkening to our
+peaceable offers; but immediately laid the whole blame on their dead
+captain, Don Joseph Desorio, who vowed he would listen to no terms but
+his own, and was resolved to take us by force. There were several
+persons of note among our prisoners, particularly Don Baltazzar de
+Abarca, Conde de la Rosa, an European nobleman, who had been governor of
+Pisco on the coast of Peru, and was now on his return for Spain; also a
+Captain Morell, who had been formerly taken by Captain Rogers; and
+several others. We treated them all with the utmost civility, at which
+they wondered; because, from prejudice against our cruizers, and
+conviction of their own harsh behaviour towards their prisoners, they
+expected to have been dealt with very roughly.
+
+In the situation where we now lay, we were in the track of all the ships
+bound for Panama, not above thirty miles from that place, our numbers
+being very few, and even part of our crew sick. For these reasons we
+were as expeditious as possible in examining the contents of our new
+prize, and removing them into our own ship; and, though the far greater
+part of the work was done by our prisoners, it took us full two days.
+Owing to this, and to faint winds and calms, we did not rejoin our bark
+till the 22d. As we bore down towards her, and came pretty near, we were
+astonished to see her broach to and fall off again, though all her sails
+were set; and, what amazed us still more, we could not see any person on
+her deck. I sent the boat on board, and the officer immediately called
+out to me, that there was not a man on board, but that all her decks and
+quarters were covered with blood. By this melancholy appearance, it
+seemed evident that the Spaniards had overpowered and murdered my four
+men who were sent to assist them, doubtless taking the opportunity of my
+men being asleep: Yet it is probable the murderers lost their own lives;
+for, being four leagues from land, and having no boat, they probably
+jumped into the sea on the re-appearance of our ship, thinking to swim
+to land, and met the death they so justly merited.
+
+This tragical affair spoiled the satisfaction we had enjoyed for two
+days past, on account of our prize, and raised an universal melancholy
+among us. On seeing this sudden change, our prisoners became much
+alarmed, looking at each other, as if fearful we might revenge on them
+the fate of our unhappy companions: And, on my side, I became alarmed
+lest their dreadful apprehensions might stir them up to some desperate
+attempt, they being eighty in number, while we were not at this time
+above seventeen on board, and when altogether only twenty-five that
+could stand on our legs. I was therefore compelled to appear somewhat
+stern, in ordering all our prisoners into the stern gallery, except the
+nobleman and a few of the chiefs, while we kept a strict guard in the
+great cabin. The Spanish gentlemen lamented the murder of our men, and
+their own hard fate, in having been in some measure witnesses, and let
+fall some expressions, by which I perceived they were afraid I meant to
+shew some severities to their people on this occasion. Having a good
+interpreter between us, I assured them I was not of any such revengeful
+disposition, and besides, that the laws of my country would restrain me,
+if I were, as I acted by my king's commission, whose orders strictly
+forbid all acts of inhumanity or oppression towards our prisoners; on
+which assurance they might rest satisfied of their safety. In reply to
+this, they begged me to think myself secure, as to themselves and
+countrymen, now my prisoners, declaring on their honour that they would
+make no attempt against us, and that they could never make a sufficient
+return for the generous treatment I had given them. Notwithstanding this
+declaration, I took measures to secure our numerous prisoners of the
+meaner sort; for which purpose, after taking out of the Holy Sacrament
+all her jerked beef that remained fit for use, I placed them in that
+vessel, under the command of Espina, former commander of the Conception
+after the death of Desorio.
+
+Next day, being as willing to get rid of them, as they were to get back
+their own ship, I took every thing out of the Conception that could be
+of use to us, sufficient for twelve months provisions of bread, flour,
+sugar, and sweetmeats,[278] both for ourselves and the Success, which we
+expected to meet with at the Tres Marias. I took also away her launch
+and negroes, the latter to assist us in working our ship, not having
+sufficient strength to manage her in the long run before us of 175
+degrees. I then delivered up the Conception to Espina and the rest,
+after being three days in our possession: which was not only an act of
+generosity to our prisoners, but an act of prudence with regard to
+ourselves. The next great point to be managed, was to get our people to
+consent to sail so far north as California, previous to our intended
+voyage to the East Indies, for which we were not in so good a condition
+as we could wish, though much better than before, and even than we had
+any reason to have expected, every thing considered. We had a good ship,
+with fifteen guns and sufficient ammunition, together with a reasonable
+quantity of provisions; but we still wanted to complete our wood and
+water for so long a voyage, the procuring of which was necessarily our
+first care. The ship's company were for going to Quibo for this purpose,
+as nearest us, but that place was attended by two important
+inconveniences. The first was the danger of the road, as the stormy
+season was coming on, and we were but indifferently provided with ground
+tackle, which must expose us to many dangers. The second was, that Quibo
+was but at a small distance from Panama, and we had reason to fear the
+Spaniards might send a ship of war from thence in search of us; as we
+had now no hopes that peace had taken place, and had consequently laid
+aside all thoughts of surrendering. On these considerations, we plied up
+to the island of Cano, where we soon did our business, having a good
+boat.
+
+[Footnote 278: Betagh charges Shelvocke on this occasion, with the
+concealment of a considerable treasure, taken in the Conception, of
+which some account will be given at the conclusion of the voyage.--E.]
+
+On our passage to that island, the sweetmeats of all kinds were divided
+among our messes; and one day a man complained that he had got a box of
+marmalade into which his knife could not penetrate, and desired
+therefore to have it changed. On opening it, I found it to contain a
+cake of virgin silver, moulded on purpose to fill the box, weighing 200
+dollars; and on examining the rest, we found five more of the same kind.
+These cakes of silver, being very porous, were nearly of the some weight
+with so much marmalade, and were evidently contrived for the purpose of
+defrauding the king of Spain of his fifths, which he exacts from all
+silver procured in the mines of Peru. We doubtless left many such cakes
+behind in the Conception, so that this contrivance served them both to
+wrong their king, and to deceive their enemies. A similarly vexatious
+affair occurred in a prize taken by the Success, in which there was a
+considerable quantity of _pinos_, or masses of virgin silver, in the
+form of bricks, artfully plaistered over with clay, and dried in the
+sun. As the Spaniards in Peru never burn their bricks, Clipperton and
+his people took these for real bricks, and threw a great number of them
+overboard as so much rubbish, and did not discover the deception until
+four or five only remained. Every thing taken in the Conception, was
+divided according to the articles settled at Juan Fernandez, which gave
+me only six shares, instead of sixty; and the people refused to allow me
+an hundred pounds, which I had laid out of my own money, for necessary
+supplies at the island of St Catharines.
+
+I now found myself under many difficulties as to the course we were to
+pursue, because the company knew well enough that there was no necessity
+of going farther than the lat. of 13 deg. N. for going to the East Indies. I
+had therefore to represent the advantage of cleaning and repairing our
+ship at Porto Segnro, in California, and I had much difficulty to
+persuade them. I at last brought them to my purpose, when we sailed from
+Cano northwards. Having inconstant gales and bad weather, we went
+between seventy and eighty leagues out to sea, in hopes of meeting more
+settled weather. When at sixty leagues from the land, the winds still
+continued variable, but at between seventy and eighty, they settled at
+E.N.E. and N.E. at which distance we continued till in lat. 20 deg. N. not
+being sensible of any currents in all that distance, and being also
+entirely out of the way of the frightful ripplings and overfalls of
+water which we used frequently to meet with nearer the land. These used
+often to alarm us when becalmed in deep water, hearing a noise as of the
+fall of water in passing through a bridge, a considerable time before it
+came up to us, and which afterwards passed us at a very great rate. All
+the effect this had on the ship, was to make her answer the helm wildly,
+if we had any wind; and when we happened to meet any of these moving
+waters very near the shore, we could not perceive that we either gained
+or lost ground, though we sometimes continued in them for a quarter of
+an hour. I have seen these overfalls to come both from the eastward and
+the westward. By getting well out to sea, we not only got clear of these
+inconveniences, but also were out of the way of the _vandevals_, or
+black season, which had already begun on the coast; for at Cano, and in
+going there, we felt very hard gusts, with black rolling water, frequent
+and violent thunder and lightning, and heavy showers of rain.
+
+In this passage we were continually accompanied by vast shoals of fish,
+as dolphins, bonitas, albicores, and angel-fish. These last are shaped
+like salmon, and have scales like them, but have tails like dolphins,
+and nearly resemble them when, in the water, appearing in all the
+beautiful colours displayed by the dolphin. Besides, they are the best
+for eating of any fish that swim near the surface. We were continually
+pestered with flocks of the birds called boobies, and their intolerably
+stinking dung proved an indescribable nuisance, in spite of all the
+pains that could be taken to clean our decks, yards, and tops. We
+reached the islands of _Tres Marias_ in the beginning of August, but
+could see no signs of Captain Clipperton having been there. We were also
+disappointed in our expectation of procuring water; as, after the
+strictest search we could make in all the three islands, nothing like a
+spring could be found, though former writers mention their having found
+water in abundance. After spending three days in our ineffectual search
+for water in these islands, I thought it best to stand over for the main
+land of California, as well for procuring what was wanting to our ship,
+as in hopes of meeting once more with the Success.
+
+
+END OF VOLUME TENTH.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of A General History and Collection of
+Voyages and Travels, Volume X, by Robert Kerr
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK VOYAGES AND TRAVELS, VOLUME X ***
+
+***** This file should be named 13130.txt or 13130.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/1/3/1/3/13130/
+
+Produced by Robert Connal, Graeme Mackreth and PG Distributed
+Proofreaders. This file was produced from images generously made
+available by the Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions.
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
diff --git a/old/13130.zip b/old/13130.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..12d68cd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/13130.zip